Honda Accord L4!03!07 Repair

2003 Honda Accord LX
2003-07 DTC INDEX Accord 4-Cylinder
2003-07 DTC INDEX
Accord 4-Cylinder
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION DTCS (A00217103)
NOTE: Retrieval of some diagnostic codes may require the use of special OEM
tester or flash method using instrument cluster indicator. For
procedures/testing of codes not shown below, refer to appropriate system
article.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) LIST

DTC Description
DTC P0705 Short in Transmission Range Switch Circuit
(Multiple Shift-position Input)
DTC P0706 Open in Transmission Range Switch Circuit
DTC P0711 Problem in ATF Temperature Sensor Circuit
DTC P0712 Short in ATF Temperature Sensor Circuit
DTC P0713 Open in ATF Temperature Sensor Circuit
DTC P0716 Problem in Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor
Circuit
Circuit (No Signal Input)
DTC P0718 Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Intermittent
Failure
DTC P0721 Problem in Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed
Sensor Circuit
Sensor Circuit (No Signal Input)
DTC P0723 Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor
Intermittent Failure
DTC P0731 Problem in 1st Clutch and 1st Clutch Hydraulic
Circuit
DTC P0732 Problem in 2nd Clutch and 2nd Clutch Hydraulic
Circuit
DTC P0733 Problem in 3rd Clutch and 3rd Clutch Hydraulic
Circuit
DTC P0734 Problem in 4th Clutch and 4th Clutch Hydraulic
Circuit
Circuit.
DTC P0741 Torque Converter Clutch Hydraulic Circuit Stuck
OFF
DTC P0747 A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A
Stuck ON
DTC P0752 Shift Solenoid Valve A Stuck ON
DTC P0756 Shift Solenoid Valve B Stuck OFF
111
2 августа 2011 г. 14:36:02
14:35:56 Page 1 © 2006 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
DTC P0757 Shift Solenoid Valve B Stuck ON

DTC P0761 Shift Solenoid Valve C Stuck OFF
DTC P0771 Shift Solenoid Valve E Stuck OFF
DTC P0776 A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B
Stuck OFF
Stuck ON
DTC P0780 Shift Control System
DTC P0796 A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C
Stuck OFF
Stuck ON
DTC P0812 Open in Transmission Range Switch ATP RVS
Switch Circuit
DTC P0842 Short in 2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure
Switch Circuit, or 2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid
Pressure Switch Stuck ON
DTC P0843 Open in 2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure
Pressure Switch Stuck OFF
DTC P0847 Short in 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure
Switch Circuit, or 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid
DTC P0848 Open in 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure
DTC P0962 Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid
Valve A Circuit
Valve A
Valve B Circuit
Valve B
Valve C Circuit
Valve C
DTC P0973 Short in Shift Solenoid Valve A Circuit
DTC P0974 Open in Shift Solenoid Valve A Circuit
DTC P0976 Short in Shift Solenoid Valve B Circuit
DTC P0977 Open in Shift Solenoid Valve B Circuit
DTC P0979 Short in Shift Solenoid Valve C Circuit
DTC P0980 Open in Shift Solenoid Valve C Circuit
DTC P0982 Short in Shift Solenoid Valve D Circuit
DTC P0983 Open in Shift Solenoid Valve D Circuit
DTC P0985 Short in Shift Solenoid Valve E Circuit
111
2 августа 2011 г. 14:35:56 Page 2 © 2006 Mitchell Repair Information Company, LLC.
DTC P0986 Open in Shift Solenoid Valve E Circuit

DTC P1730 Problem in Shift Control System:
CATALYTIC CONVERTER DTCS (A00217096)

CATALYTIC CONVERTER DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) LIST
DTC Description
DTC P0420 Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold
(2003-2004 models)
(2005-2006 models)
CLIMATE CONTROL DTCS (A00217130)

CLIMATE CONTROL DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) LIST
DTC Description
DTC B1225 or DTC indicator A An Open in the In-car Temperature Sensor Circuit
DTC B1226 or DTC indicator B A Short in the In-car Temperature Sensor Circuit
DTC B1227 or DTC indicator C An Open in the Outside Air Temperature Sensor
Circuit
DTC B1228 or DTC indicator D A Short in the Outside Air Temperature Sensor
Circuit
DTC B1229 or DTC indicator E An Open in the Sunlight Sensor Circuit
DTC B1230 or DTC indicator F A Short in the Sunlight Sensor Circuit
DTC B1231 or DTC indicator G An Open in the Evaporator Temperature Sensor
Circuit
DTC B1232 or DTC indicator H A Short in the Evaporator Temperature Sensor
Circuit
DTC B1233 or DTC indicator I An Open in the Driver's Air Mix Control Motor
Circuit
DTC B1234 or DTC indicator J A Short in the Driver's Air Mix Control Motor
Circuit
DTC B1235 or DTC indicator K A Problem in the Driver's Air Mix Control
Linkage, Door, or Motor
DTC B1239 or DTC indicator L An Open or Short in the Mode Control Motor
Circuit
DTC B1240 or DTC indicator M A Problem in the Mode Control Linkage, Doors,
or Motor
DTC B1241 or DTC indicator N A Problem in the Blower Motor Circuit
DTC B1236 or DTC indicator O An Open in the Passenger's Air Mix Control
Motor Circuit
DTC B1237 or DTC indicator P A Short in the Passenger's Air Mix Control Motor
111
Circuit
DTC B1238 or DTC indicator Q A Problem in the Passenger's Air Mix Control
DTC B1202 Climate Control Unit Internal Error
DTC B1205 Climate Control Unit Lost Communication with
the Gauge Control Module (VSP/NE message)
the Gauge Control Module (ECT message)
the Gauge Control Module (ILLUMI message)
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL DTCS (A00217091)

ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) LIST
DTC Description
DTC P0122 TP Sensor A Circuit Low Voltage (2006-07 model)
DTC P0123 TP Sensor A Circuit High Voltage (2006-07 model)
DTC P0222 TP Sensor B Circuit Low Voltage (2006-07 model)
DTC P0223 TP Sensor B Circuit High Voltage (2006-07 model)
DTC P1683 Throttle Valve Default Position Spring Performance
Problem (2006-07 model)
DTC P1684 Throttle Valve Return Spring Performance Problem (2006-
07 model)
DTC P2101 Throttle Actuator System Malfunction (2006-07 model)
DTC P2108 Throttle Actuator Control Module Problem (2006-07 model)
DTC P2118 Throttle Actuator Current Range/Performance Problem
(2006-07 model)
DTC P2122 APP Sensor A (TP Sensor D) Circuit Low Voltage (2006-07
model)
DTC P2123 APP Sensor A (TP Sensor D) Circuit High Voltage (2006-07
model)
DTC P2127 APP Sensor B (TP Sensor E) Circuit Low Voltage (2006-07
model)
DTC P2128 APP Sensor B (TP Sensor E) Circuit High Voltage (2006-07
model)
DTC P2135 TP Sensor A/B Incorrect Voltage Correlation (2006-07
model)
DTC P2138 APP Sensor A/B (TP Sensor D/E) Incorrect Voltage
Correlation (2006-07 model)
DTC P2176 Throttle Actuator Control System Idle Position Not Learned
(2006-07 model)
DTC P2552 Throttle Actuator Control Module Relay Malfunction (2006-
07 model)
DTC U0107 Lost Communication With Throttle Actuator Control
Module (2006-07 model)
111
EGR DTCS (A00217097)

EGR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) LIST
DTC Description
DTC P0401 EGR Insufficient Flow
DTC P0404 EGR Valve Circuit Range/Performance Problem
DTC P0406 EGR Valve Position Sensor Circuit High Voltage
DTC P2413 EGR System Malfunction
EVAP DTCS (A00217099)

EVAP DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) LIST
DTC Description
DTC P0442 EVAP System Small Leak Detected (2003-2004
models)
DTC P0455 EVAP System Large Leak Detected (2005-2006
models)
DTC P0456 EVAP System Very Small Leak Detected
DTC P0443 EVAP Canister Purge Valve Circuit Malfunction
DTC P0451 FTP Sensor Range/Performance Problem
DTC P0452 FTP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (2003-2004
models)
models)
DTC P0453 FTP Sensor Circuit High Voltage
DTC P0457 EVAP System Leak Detected/Fuel Cap Loose or
Missing
DTC P0496 EVAP System High Purge Flow
DTC P0497 EVAP System Low Purge Flow
DTC P0498 EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve Circuit Low
Voltage
DTC P0499 EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve Circuit High
Voltage
DTC P2422 EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve; Stuck Close
Malfunction
EXTERIOR LIGHTS DTCS (A00217149)

EXTERIOR LIGHTS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) LIST
DTC Description
DTC B1075 Headlight Signal Error
DTC B1078 Daytime Running Lights Signal Error (Canada)
DTC B1079 Daytime Running Lights Malfunction (USA) ('06-
07 models)
DTC B1275 Headlight Switch OFF Position Circuit
111
Malfunction
DTC B1276 Headlight Switch Parking (SMALL) Position
Circuit Malfunction;
DTC B1277 Headlight Switch AUTO Position Circuit
Malfunction;
DTC B1278 Headlight Switch ON Position Circuit Malfunction
DTC B1279 Headlight Switch DIMMER Position Circuit
Malfunction
DTC B1280 Turn Signal Switch Circuit Malfunction
FUEL SUPPLY DTCS (A00217094)

FUEL SUPPLY DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) LIST
DTC Description
DTC P0461 Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit)
Range/Performance Problem (2005-2006 models)
DTC P0462 Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit Low
Voltage (2005-2006 models)
DTC P0463 Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit High
GAUGES DTCS (A00217158)

GAUGES DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) LIST
DTC Description
DTC B1152 Gauge Control Module EEPROM Error
DTC B1155 Gauge Control Module Lost Communication with
the Combination Switch Control Unit (Headlight
Switch Message)
the Combination Switch Control Unit (Wiper
Switch Message)
Multiplex Integrated Control Unit (MICU)
Relay Module
DTC B1159 Gauge Control Module Lost Communication
(Door Switch Message) with the Multiplex
Integrated Control Unit (MICU)
the Door Multiplex Control Unit (Door Lock
Switch Message)
DTC B1175 Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Signals Input Error
DTC B1177 Abnormal Battery Voltage (7.5 V)
IDLE CONTROL DTCS (A00217093)

111
IDLE CONTROL DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) LIST

DTC Description
DTC P0506 Idle Control System RPM Lower Than Expected
('03-05 models)
('06-07 model)
DTC P0507 Idle Control System RPM Higher Than Expected
('03-05 models)
('06-07 models)
DTC P0511 IAC Valve Circuit Malfunction ('03-05 models)
KEYLESS/POWER DOOR LOCKS/SECURITY DTCS (A00217147)

KEYLESS/POWER DOOR LOCKS/SECURITY DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) LIST
DTC Description
DTC B1026: Passenger's Door Lock Switch Passenger's Door Lock Switch Signal Error
Signal Error
DTC B1027: Trunk Key Cylinder Switch Trunk Key Cylinder Switch Signal Error
Signal Error
DTC B1127: Driver's Door Key Cylinder Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch Signal Error
Switch Signal Error
DTC B1128: Driver's Door Lock Switch Signal Driver's Door Lock Switch Signal Error
Error
DTC B1129: Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch Signal Error
Signal Error
MULTIPLEX INTERGRATED CONTROL DTCS (A00217145)

MULTIPLEX INTERGRATED CONTROL DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) LIST
DTC Description
DTC B1000 Communication Bus Line Error
DTC B1050, B1100, B1150, B1200, B1250 Communication Bus Line Error
DTC B1001, B1002 Multiplex Integrated Control Unit (MICU)
Internal Error
DTC B1005 MICU Lost Communication with Relay Control
Module
DTC B1006 MICU Lost Communication with Door Multiplex
Control Unit (Door Lock Switch Message)
DTC B1007 MICU Lost Communication with the Combination
Switch Control Unit (Headlight Switch Message)
DTC B1008 MICU Lost Communication (A/T Message) with
the Gauge Control Module
Switch Control Unit (Wiper/Washer Switch
Message)
DTC B1010 MICU Lost Communication (Panic Message) with
111
the Door Multiplex Control Unit

DTC B1102 Door Multiplex Control Unit Internal Error
DTC B1178 F-CAN Communication Line Error;
ECM/PCM (Engine Messages)
the PCM (A/T Messages)
DTC B1080 Power Supply Circuit (IG1 line) Input Error for
Relay Control Module and MICU
DTC B1251 Combination Switch Control Unit Internal Error
DTC B1255 Combination Switch Control Unit Lost
Communication With MICU
PCV DTCS (A00217098)

PCV DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) LIST
DTC Description
DTC P2279 Intake Air System Leak Detected (2003-2004
except SULEV, LX-P models)
PGM-FI DTCS (A00217090)

PGM-FI DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) LIST
DTC Description
DTC P0101 MAF sensor Range/Performance Problem (2003-2004
SULEV, LX-P models and 2005-2007 models)
DTC P0102 MAF Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (2003-2004 SULEV, LX-
P models and 2005-2007 models)
DTC P0103 MAF Sensor Circuit High Voltage (2003-2004 SULEV, LX-
DTC P0107 MAP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (2003-2004 models)
DTC P0108 MAP Sensor Circuit High Voltage
DTC P0111 IAT Sensor Circuit Range/Performance Problem (2005-2007
models)
DTC P0112 IAT Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (2003-2004 except
SULEV, LX-P models)
DTC P0112 IAT Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (2003-2004 SULEV, LX-P
models and 2005-2007 models)
DTC P0113 IAT Sensor Circuit High Voltage (2003-2004 except
SULEV, LX-P models)
DTC P0113 IAT Sensor Circuit High Voltage (2003-2004 SULEV, LX-P
DTC P0116 ECT Sensor Circuit Range/Performance Problem (2003-
2004 models)
DTC P0116 ECT Sensor 1 Range/Performance Problem (2005-2007
111
models)
DTC P0117 ECT Sensor/ECT Sensor 1 Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P0118 ECT Sensor/ECT Sensor 1 Circuit High Voltage
DTC P0122 TP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (2003-2004 models)
DTC P0122 TP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (2005 model)
DTC P0123 TP Sensor Circuit High Voltage (2003-2005 models)
DTC P0125 ECT Sensor Malfunction/Slow Response (2003-2004
models)
DTC P0125 ECT Sensor 1 Malfunction/Slow Response (2005-2007
models)
DTC P0128 Cooling System Malfunction (2003-2004 models)
DTC P0133 A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Response Malfunction (2003-2004
models)
models)
DTC P0134 A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Heater System Malfunction
DTC P0135 A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Heater Circuit Malfunction
DTC P0137 Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) Circuit Low Voltage (2003-
2004 models)
DTC P0137 Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) Circuit Low Voltage (2005-
2007 models)
DTC P0138 Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) Circuit High Voltage (2003-
2004 models)
2007 models)
DTC P0139 Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) Slow Response (2003-2004
models)
models)
DTC P0141 Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) Heater Circuit Malfunction
DTC P0171 Fuel System Too Lean
DTC P0172 Fuel System Too Rich
DTC P0300 Random Misfire and Any Combination of the Following
DTC P0301 No. 1 Cylinder Misfire Detected
DTC P0325 Knock Sensor Circuit Malfunction
DTC P0335 CKP Sensor No Signal
DTC P0339 CKP Sensor Intermittent Interruption
111
DTC P0365 CMP Sensor B No Signal

DTC P0369 CMP Sensor B Intermittent Interruption
DTC P0562 Charging System Low Voltage (2005-2007 models)
DTC P0563 ECM/PCM Power Source Circuit Unexpected Voltage
DTC P050A Cold Start Idle Air Control System Performance (2007
model)
DTC P050B Cold Start Ignition Timing Performance (2007 model)
DTC P0602 ECM/PCM Programming Error (2005-2007 models)
DTC P0603 ECM/PCM Internal Control Module Keep Alive Memory
(KAM) Error
DTC P0606 ECM/PCM Processer Malfunction
DTC P0630 VIN Not Programmed or Mismatch (2005-2007 models)
DTC P0685 ECM/PCM Power Control Circuit/Internal Circuit
Malfunction
DTC P0700 A/T Control System Malfunction
DTC P0720 Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Circuit
Malfunction
DTC P1109 BARO Sensor Circuit Out of Range High (2005-2007
models)
DTC P1116 ECT Sensor 1 Performance Problem (2005-2007 models)
DTC P1121 TP Sensor Signal Lower Than Expected (2003-2005 models)
DTC P1122 TP Sensor Signal Higher Than Expected (2003-2005
models)
DTC P1128 MAP Sensor Signal Lower Than Expected
DTC P1129 MAP Sensor Signal Higher Than Expected
DTC P1157 A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) AFS Line High Voltage
DTC P1172 A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Circuit Out of Range High (2005-
2007 models)
DTC P1297 ELD Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P1298 ELD Circuit High Voltage
DTC P1549 Charging System High Voltage (2005-2007 models)
DTC P16BB Alternator B Terminal Circuit Low Voltage (2005-2007
models)
DTC P16BC Alternator FR Terminal Circuit/IGP Circuit Low Voltage
(2005-2007 models)
models)
DTC P2184 ECT Sensor 2 Circuit Low Voltage (2005-2007 models)
DTC P2185 ECT Sensor 2 Circuit High Voltage (2005-2007 models)
DTC P2195 A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Signal Stuck Lean
DTC P2227 BARO Sensor Range/Performance Problem
DTC P2228 BARO Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P2229 BARO Sensor Circuit High Voltage
DTC P2238 A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) AFS+ Line Low Voltage
DTC P2252 A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) AFS- Line Low Voltage
111
DTC P2270 Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2); Circuit Signal Stuck Lean;
(2005-2007 models)
DTC P2271 Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2); Circuit Signal Stuck Rich;
(2005-2007 models)
DTC P2610 ECM/PCM Ignition Off Internal; Timer Performance
Problem; (2005-2007 models)
DTC P2A00 A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Range/Performance Problem
DTC U0073 F-CAN Malfunction (Bus-Off) (2003-2004 models)
DTC U0155 F-CAN Malfunction (Gauge; Control Module-ECM/PCM)
(2003-2005 models)
DTC U1102 F-CAN Malfunction (Bus-Off) (2005 model)
DTC U0073 F-CAN Malfunction (Bus-off); (2003-2004 models)
DTC U0155 F-CAN Malfunction (gauge control module-ECM/PCM);
(2003-2005 models)
DTC U1102 F-CAN Malfunction (Bus-Off); (2005 model)
DTC U0155 F-CAN Malfunction (Gauge Control Module-ECM/PCM);
(2006 model)
DTC U1102 F-CAN Malfunction (Bus-off); (2006 model)
(2006 model)
POWER WINDOWS DTCS (A00217156)

POWER WINDOWS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) LIST
DTC Description
DTC B1125 Driver's Power Window Motor A Pulse Error
DTC B1126 Driver's Power Window Motor B Pulse Error
DTC B1140 Driver's Power Window Position Detect Circuit
Error
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX DTCS (A00217138)

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) LIST
DTC Description
DTC B1055 Relay Control Module lost communication with
MICU
MICU
MICU (door switch message)
Door Multiplex Control Unit (door lock switch
message)
Door Multiplex Control Unit (panic message)
111

Gauge Control Module (VSP/NE message)
Gauge Control Module (A/T message)
Combination Switch Control Unit (headlight
switch message)
Combination Switch Control Unit (wiper switch
message)
VTEC/VTC DTCS (A00217092)

VTEC/VTC DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) LIST
DTC Description
DTC P0010 VTC Oil Control Solenoid Valve Malfunction
DTC P0011 VTC System Malfunction
DTC P0340 CMP Sensor A No Signal
DTC P0341 CMP Sensor and CKP Sensor Incorrect Phase Detected
DTC P0344 CMP Sensor A Intermittent Interruption
DTC P1009 VTC Advance Malfunction
DTC P2646 Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch (VTEC Oil Pressure Switch) Circuit
Low Voltage
High Voltage
DTC P2648 Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid (VTEC Solenoid Valve) Circuit
Low Voltage
High Voltage
WIPERS/WASHERS DTCS (A00217157)

WIPERS/WASHERS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) LIST
DTC Description
DTC B1076 Windshield Wiper Signal Error
DTC B1077 Windshield Wiper (As) Signal Error
DTC B1281 Windshield Wiper Switch MIST Position Circuit
Malfunction
DTC B1282 Windshield Wiper Switch INT (AUTO) Position
DTC B1283 Windshield Wiper Switch LOW Position Circuit
Malfunction;
DTC B1284 Windshield Wiper Switch HIGH Position Circuit
Malfunction
111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Openers - Accord
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT
Openers - Accord
COMPONENT LOCATION INDEX
Fig. 1: Locating Openers Components

Courtesy of AMERICAN HONDA MOTOR CO., INC.
HOOD OPENER CABLE REPLACEMENT
NOTE:  Put on gloves to protect your hands.

 Take care not to scratch the body and related parts.
1. Remove these items:

 Front bumper, 2-door (see 2-DOOR )
 Front grille, 4-door (see 4-DOOR )
 Inner fender (see FRONT INNER FENDER REPLACEMENT )
 Kick panel, 2-door (see 2-DOOR - DOOR SILL AREA ), 4-door (see 4-DOOR - FRONT
DOOR SILL AREA )
2. Remove the bolts (A) then remove the radiator upper brackets (B).
111
2 августа 2011 г. 14:39:27
Fig. 2: Removing Radiator Upper Brackets

3. Disconnect the hood opener cable (C) from the hood latch (D) (see HOOD LATCH
REPLACEMENT ).
4. Move the radiator (E) as necessary. Using a clip remover, detach the clips (F), and remove the
grommet (G) from the body, then remove the hood opener cable from the vehicle. Take care not to
bend the cable.
5. Install the cable in the reverse order of removal, and check the clip is damaged or stress-whitened, and
if necessary, replace it with new one.
TRUNK LID OPENER CABLE/FUEL FILL DOOR OPENER CABLE

REPLACEMENT
2-DOOR
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see COMPONENT
LOCATION INDEX ) and the precautions and procedures (see PRECAUTIONS AND PROCEDURES )
before performing repairs or service.

1. Remove these items from the left side of the vehicle:

111
 Door sill trim (see TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION - DOOR AREA )

 Side trim panel (see TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION - REAR SIDE AREA )
 Trunk rear trim panel (see TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION - TRUNK AREA )
 Trunk side trim panel, left side (see TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION - TRUNK
AREA )
2. Pull the carpet back as necessary.
3. Detach the clip (A) with a clip remover, and release the opener cable (B) from the clip (C).
111
Fig. 3: Detaching Clip & Releasing Opener Cable

4. Release the fuel fill door/trunk lid opener cable (A) from the clip (B). Remove the fuel fill door latch
(C) by turning it 90°, and detach the opener cable junction box (D) from the body.
111
Fig. 4: Releasing Fuel Fill Door/Trunk Lid Opener Cable From Clip
5. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable from the trunk lid latch (E) (see TRUNK LID LATCH
REPLACEMENT ).
6. Release the fuel fill door opener cable/trunk lid opener cable from the clips (G).
111
7. Remove the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable from the vehicle. Take care not to bend or
kink the cable.
8. Install the opener cable in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Route the opener cable (A) beside the floor wire harness clips (B) correctly.
 Align the marks (C) on the cable with the cable clips (D) as shown below.
 Check if the clip is damaged or stress-whitened, and if necessary, replace it with new one.
Fig. 5: Identifying Align Marks On Cable With Cable Clips (1 Of 2)

111
Fig. 6: Identifying Align Marks On Cable With Cable Clips (2 Of 2)

4-DOOR
111

1. Remove these items form the left side of the vehicle:

 Front door sill trim (see 4-DOOR - FRONT DOOR SILL AREA )
 Rear door sill trim (see 4-DOOR - REAR DOOR SILL AREA )
 B-pillar lower trim, without side curtain airbags (see 4-DOOR-B-PILLAR - WITHOUT
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('03-04 MODELS) ), with side curtain airbags (see 4-DOOR-C-
PILLAR - WITH SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('04-06 MODELS) )
 Left rear seat side bolster (see 4-DOOR )
 Trunk rear trim panel (see 4-DOOR ('03-05 MODELS) )
 Trunk side trim panel, left side (see 4-DOOR ('03-05 MODELS) )
2. Pull back the carpet as necessary.

3. Release the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable (A) from the clip (B). Remove the cushion
tape (C).
111
Fig. 7: Removing Cushion Tape

4. Remove the fuel fill door latch (A) by turning it 90°, and detach the opener cable junction box (B)
from the body.
111
Fig. 8: Removing Fuel Fill Door Latch (Without Power Trunk Lid Latch)
111
Fig. 9: Removing Fuel Fill Door Latch (With Power Trunk Lid Latch)
5. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable (C) from the trunk lid latch (D) (see TRUNK LID LATCH
REPLACEMENT ).
6. Using a clip remover, detach clip (E). Release the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable from the
clips (F, G).
7. Remove the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable from the vehicle. Take care not to bend or
kink the cable.
8. Install the opener cable in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
111
 Align the marks (A) on the opener cable (B) with the cable clips (C) as shown below.
 Check the clip is damage or stress-whitening, and if necessary, replace it with new one.
Fig. 10: Installing Opener Cable

HOOD LATCH REPLACEMENT

111

 Front bumper, 2-door (see 2-DOOR )
 Front grille, 4-door (see 4-DOOR )
2. Remove the cover (A) from the hood latch (B).
Fig. 11: Removing Cover From Hood Latch

3. If equipped, disconnect the hood latch switch connector (A).
111
Fig. 12: Disconnecting Hood Latch Switch Connector

4. Remove the bolts, then remove the hood latch (A) from the body.
111
Fig. 13: Removing Hood Latch From Body

5. Disconnect the hood opener cable (B) from the hood latch. Take care not to bend the cable.
6. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Apply multipurpose grease to each location indicated by the arrows shown in Fig. 14.
 Make sure the hood opener cable is connected properly and hood latch switch connector is
plugged in properly (for some models).
 Adjust the hood latch alignment (see step 3 in ADJUSTMENT ).
 Make sure the hood opens properly and locks securely.
111
Fig. 14: Applying Multipurpose Grease

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the kick panel, 2-door (see 2-DOOR - DOOR SILL AREA ), 4-door (see 4-DOOR -
FRONT DOOR SILL AREA ).
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the hood release handle (A).
111
Fig. 15: Removing Hood Release Handle

3. Disconnect the hood opener cable (B) from the hood release handle. Take care not to bend the cable.
4. Install the hood release handle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Make sure the hood opener cable is connected properly.
 Make sure the hood opens properly.
111
TRUNK LID OPENER/FUEL FILL DOOR OPENER REPLACEMENT

Special Tools Required
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014
NOTE: Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when
prying components.
1. Using a trim tool, detach the hooks (A) by prying the front side cap (B), then remove it from the front
door sill trim (C), and if equipped, remove the opener lock cylinder (D).
111
Fig. 16: Detaching Hooks Prying Front Side Cap

2. Remove the bolt (E).

3. Remove the front door sill trim, 2-door (see 2-DOOR - DOOR SILL AREA ), 4-door (see 4-DOOR
111
- FRONT DOOR SILL AREA ).

4. Remove the screw, then remove the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener (A) from the front door sill
trim (B).
Fig. 17: Removing Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener From Front Door Sill Trim
5. Install the opener in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Make sure the opener cable is connected properly.
111
 Make sure the trunk lid and fuel fill door open properly and lock securely.
TRUNK LID LATCH REPLACEMENT

1. 4-door: Disconnect the cylinder rod from the lock cylinder (see TRUNK LID LOCK CYLINDER
REPLACEMENT ).
2. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable (A) and trunk lid latch switch connector (B). If equipped with a
power trunk lid latch, detach the trunk lid latch switch connector from the trunk lid. Take care not to
bend the opener cable.
Fig. 18: Disconnecting Trunk Lid Opener Cable (With Power Trunk Lid Latch)
111
Fig. 19: Disconnecting Trunk Lid Opener Cable (Without Power Trunk Lid Latch)
3. Remove the bolts from the trunk lid latch (C).

4. Pull the trunk lid latch (A) out, and on 4-door, disconnect the cylinder rod (B) from the trunk lid latch.
Take care not to bend the cylinder rod.
111
Fig. 20: Pulling Trunk Lid Latch Out

 Make sure the connector is plugged in properly and the opener cable is connected properly.
 Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and locks securely.
TRUNK LID LOCK CYLINDER REPLACEMENT

4-DOOR
1. Disconnect the cylinder rod (A), and if equipped, disconnect the cylinder switch connector (B).
111
Fig. 21: Disconnecting Cylinder Rod & Cylinder Switch Connector

2. Remove the bolt securing the lock cylinder (A). Then turn the trunk lid lock cylinder clockwise, and
remove it.
111
Fig. 22: Removing Lock Cylinder

3. Install the lock cylinder in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Make sure the cylinder switch connector is plugged in properly (if equipped) and the cylinder
rod is connected properly.
111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Multiplex Integrated Control System - Accord
Multiplex Integrated Control System - Accord
Fig. 1: Identifying Multiplex Integrated Control System Components (1 Of 2)

111
2 августа 2011 г. 14:40:25
Fig. 2: Identifying Multiplex Integrated Control System Components (2 Of 2)

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
BODY CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (B-CAN) AND FAST CONTROLLER AREA
NETWORK (F-CAN)
Fast controller Area Network (F-CAN) and Body Controller Area Network (B-CAN) share information
between multiple Electronic Control Units (ECUs). B-CAN communication moves at a slower speed for
convenience related items, and for other functions. F-CAN information moves at a faster speed for "real
time" functions such as fuel and emissions data. To allow both systems to share information, the Gauge
Control Module translates information from B-CAN to F-CAN and from F-CAN to B-CAN.
The ECUs on the B-CAN and F-CAN transmit and receive information in the form of structured messages
that may be received by several different ECUs on the network at one time. These message are transmitted
and received across a communication circuit that consists of a single wire that is shared by all the ECUs on
the circuit. Since messages on the F-CAN network are typically of higher importance, a second wire is used
for communication circuit integrity monitoring. A backup circuit is also added to the headlight and wiper
circuits on the B-CAN network in the event of a network wire or ECU failure that would effect the operation
of the system.
111
Fig. 3: B-CAN And F-CAN System Description

Messages are transmitted by an ECU (that monitors an input) over the communication circuit. ECUs that use
the message (information related to that input) are the receivers. For example, the Combination Switch
Control Unit monitors the wiper switch. When the wiper switch is placed in the low speed position, the
Combination Switch Control Unit transmits that message on the communication circuit. The Relay Control
Module receives the message and turns on the wipers by providing a ground for the relay.
111
Fig. 4: Multiplex Integrated Control System Communication Circuit

"CONNECTED" ECUS
Several ECUs are connected to each of the two networks. The Gauge Control Module is part of both
networks since it is the "Gateway" between them. Below is a list of ECUs and the network they are
connected to.
CONNECTED ECU
B-CAN ECUs F-CAN ECUs
Gauge Control Module Gauge Control Module
Relay Control Module ECM/PCM
Multiple Integrated Control Unit (MICU) Navigation Control Unit
Door Multiplex Control Unit ABS
Combination Switch Control Unit
111
Climate Control Unit

Optional Security (LX Model option)
Optional Unit (B-CAN option
Fig. 5: Connected ECU Flow Chart

NETWORK "LOSS OF COMMUNICATION" ERROR CHECKING
The B-CAN and F-CAN systems send messages to each other to check the integrity of the network
communication circuit. They do this by sending a specific digital message out after an event. For example,
turning the ignition switch to ON. After the switch to ON, all the ECUs on the communication circuit expect
to receive a message from other specific units within a specified amount of time. If the message is not
received, the ECU will transmit a DTC reporting that the control units did not communicate.
Example of communication circuit test
Normal circuit
1. Ignition switch turned ON.

2. The door multiplex control unit transmits a door switch signal.
3. The multiplex integrated control unit (MICU), relay control module and gauge control module receive
the door lock switch signal.
4. Communication circuit test is passed.
Since the door lock switch message was received by all the ECUs expecting to receive a signal, the
communication circuit between those units is OK. There are multiple signal sent and received by each
ECU during this time to insure that the communication circuit is intact.
Failed circuit
5. Ignition switch is turned ON.

111
6. The door multiplex control unit transmits a door switch signal.

7. The multiplex integrated control unit (MICU), relay control module and gauge control module expect
to receive the door lock switch signal, but since there is a break in the communication circuits, it is not
received.
8. Each ECU that expects to receive the door lock switch signal from the door multiplex control unit will
transmit DTCs for the signal that it did not receive.
Fig. 6: Example Of Communication Circuit Test

Since there is a break in the communication circuit, the door lock switch signal could not be received by the
gauge control module, multiplex integrated control unit (MICU) or the relay control module. Each of these
units will set "loss of communication" error codes for the signal(s) they did not receive. There may be
multiple communication DTCs if the unit that has become disconnected from the network would normally
transmit multiple messages during the communication line test. For example, the door multiplex control unit
sends keyless panic signal and door lock switch signal during the communication circuit test.
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES
There are three DTC types used by the CAN networks.
DIAGNOSTIC CHART
The ECUs run internal checks. If one finds that
there is an internal ECU problem, it will set an
internal error DTC.
Internal error DTCs
Confirm that the battery and charging system are
OK. If so, this indicates that the ECU needs to be
replaced.
Loss of communication DTCs (and Bus-off DTCs)

Loss of communication DTCs are set when there is a problem with the
communication between ECUs. This could be in
the connections, the wiring, or the ECU (as called
111
out in the DTC Troubleshooting index).

The ECUs can run diagnostics on some input
circuits to determine if that circuits is functioning
Signal error DTCs properly (no opens or shorts). If a circuit falls the
diagnostic test, a DTC will set (NOTE: Not all
input circuits are tested for errors).
Troubleshooting the CAN circuit related problems
Using the HDS (Preferred method)
1. Go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A to check for "Connected units" and DTCs (see
TROUBLESHOOTING - B-CAN SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS TEST MODE A ).
2. If no DTCs are retrieved, go to B-CAN SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS TEST MODE C or B-CAN
SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS TEST MODE D.
Without the HDS
(Should be used only if HDS is unavailable)
3. Check for communication circuit problems using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 (see
TROUBLESHOOTING - B-CAN SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS TEST MODE 1 AND TEST MODE 2
(WITHOUT THE HDS) ).
4. Check for DTCs while in Mode 1 (see TROUBLESHOOTING - B-CAN SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
TEST MODE 1 AND TEST MODE 2 (WITHOUT THE HDS) ).
5. Sort, and then troubleshoot the DTCs in the order below. Refer to the DTC TROUBLESHOOTING
INDEX for DTC descriptions.
1st. Internal error and voltage failure DTCs
2nd. Loss of communication DTCs
3rd. Signal error DTCs
6. If no DTCs are retrieved, use B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 2 to check all inputs related to
failure (see TROUBLESHOOTING - B-CAN SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS TEST MODE 1 AND
TEST MODE 2 (WITHOUT THE HDS) ).
Loss of Communication DTC cross-reference chart
When an ECU is unable to communicate with the other ECUs on the circuit, the other units will set
loss of communication DTCs. Use this chart to find the control unit that is not communicating.
7. Find the Transmitting Unit that is in the same row as all of the loss of communication DTCs retrieved.
8. Perform the input test for the transmitting unit.
DIAGNOSTIC CHART
Receiving Unit/Loss of Communication DTC
Door
Relay Multiplex Gauge Combination Climate
Transmitting Control Control Control Switch Control
Unit Message MICU Module unit Module Control Unit Unit
111
MICU Alarm B1056

MICU B1055 (1) B1157 B1255
Door Switch B1057 (1) B1159
Relay Control Relay B1005 B1158
Module Control
Module
Door Panic B1010 B1059
Multiplex Door Lock B1006 B1058 B1160
Control unit Switch
Gauge Control VSP/NE B1060 B1205
Module A/T B1008 B1061
ENGTEMP B1206
ILLUMI B1207
Combination Headlight B1007 B1062 B1155
Switch Switch
Control Unit Wiper B1009 B1063 B1156
Switch
PCM Engine B1168
A/T B1169
(1) Receiving unit does not set a loss of communication DTC.
B-CAN SYSTEM SWITCH DEVICE INDEX
COMBINATION SWITCH CONTROL UNIT

Input signal Output signal/device
Dimmer switch, Lighting switch, Passing switch,
Turn signal switch, Wiper/washer switch, None
Intermittent dwell time controller.
RELAY CONTROL MODULE

Input signal Output signal/Device
A/C pressure switch, Climate control switch, Day Daytime running lights control (Canada),
time running lights control (Canada), Hood Headlight, Parking light, Horn, Windshield washer
switch, Horn switch, Windshield wiper motor. motor, Windshield wiper motor.
DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT

Input signal Output signal
Driver's door key cylinder switch (lock/unlock),
Driver's door lock knob switch (lock/unlock),
Driver's door lock switch. Driver's power window Driver's power window motor, Passenger's power
switches (up, down, auto up, auto down), window switches, Power window relay control.
Passenger's power window switches (up, down),
Driver's power window motor pulser.
MULTIPLEX INTEGRATED CONTROL UNIT

111
Audio-HVAC display module security ground,

Brake pedal position switch, Door switches,
Door lock actuators, Hazard warning lights,
Ignition key cylinder switch, Park pin switch
Interior lights, Ignition key light, Key interlock
(A/T), Passenger's door lock knob switches
solenoid, Turn signal lights, Moonroof relay,
(unlock), Passenger's door lock switch, Power
Trunk lid opener solenoid, Door courtesy lights,
window motor, Seat belt switch (unbuckled),
Daytime running lights.
Transmission range switch (P, R position), Trunk
latch switch.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

Dash lights brightness controller, Daytime
running lights signal (Canada), Engine oil
Dash lights, Fuel gauge, Gauge lights, Indicator,
pressure switch signal, Washer fluid level switch
LEDs, Speedometer, Tachometer, ECT gauge,
signal (Canada), Parking brake switch, Brake
Warning buzzer, Odometer/Outside temperature
fluid level switch, fuel level sensor, Select/Reset
display.
switch, Cruise control combination switch (set,
cancel, resume, master).
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT

Evaporator temperature sensor, In-car
temperature sensor, Outside air temperature Air mix control motors (Driver's/Passenger's),
sensor, Sunlight sensor Air mix motor position Blower motor transistor, Mode control motor, Rear
(Driver's and Passenger's), Mode motor position, defogger relay, A/C Request, Recirculation motor.
Blower motor control feedback.
TROUBLESHOOTING - B-CAN SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS TEST MODE A
NOTE:  Check for engine DTCs (U-codes) with the HDS. If any U-codes are
detected, find and repair the cause of code(s) before continuing with
the diagnosis test.
 Perform this diagnosis first if the symptom is related to the B-CAN
system.
 Always cycle the ignition switch within 3 seconds when prompted in
the DTC troubleshooting procedures.
1. Make sure the system is related to B-CAN.

 Gauge control module
 Exterior lights
 Turn signals
 Entry light control
 Interior lights
 Safety indicators
 Rear window defogger
 Horns (security and panic)
111
 Chimes (key, seatbelt and lights ON)

 Power windows (key-off timer)
 Moonroof timer (EX, EXL)
 Wiper/washer
 Security*1
 Keyless entry
 Power door locks
 Climate control (EX, EXL)
 Key interlock
 Dash light brightness
*1: EX, EXL, LX-V6, Canada LX '06-07 model Canada SE
Is the symptom related to the B-CAN system?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO - Go to the system troubleshooting for the system with the symptom.
2. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the data link connector (DLC) 16P connector.
3. From BODY ELECTRICAL MENU, select connected units UNIT INFORMATION, and then select
CONNECTED UNIT.
 MICU
 Door multiplex control unit
 Combination switch control unit
 Relay control module
 Climate control unit (EXL, EX-V6)
NOTE:  If the unit is communicating with the scan tool, DETECT will be
displayed.
 If the unit is not communicating, "NOT AVAILABLE" will be
displayed.
Are all control units communicating with the HDS?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - If any of them are not communicating, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode B. If
all units are not communicating, or only the MICU is communicating, go to DTC B1000
troubleshooting (see DTC TROUBLESHOOTING ).
4. Select the system that has the problem from the BODY ELECTRICAL DTCs MENU, then select
DTCs.
Are any DTCs indicated?
YES - Go to step 5.
111
NO - If the problem is related to one the following items, go to B-CAN SYSTEM

DIAGNOSIS TEST MODE C.
 Exterior lights
 Turn signals
 Entry light control
 Interior lights
 Rear window defogger (climate control)
 Horns (security and panic)
 Power windows (key-off timer)
 Moonroof timer (EX, EXL)
 Wiper/washer
 Power door locks
NOTE: If the problem is related to one of the following items, go to the

troubleshooting for that individual system.
Gauge control module


 Safety indicators
 Chimes (key, seat belt and lights ON)
 Security (EX, EXL)
 Keyless entry
 Climate control (EX, EXL)
 Key interlock
 Dash light brightness
 Audio System
 Navigation
5. Record all DTCs and sort them by DTC type using the DTC troubleshooting Index.
6. Troubleshoot the DTC(s) in the following order:
 Battery voltage DTCs.
 Internal error DTCs.
 Loss of communicator DTCs. Begin troubleshooting with the lowest number first (Example: if
DTC B1006 and B1058 are retrieved, begin by troubleshooting B1006).
 Signal error DTCs.
TROUBLESHOOTING - B-CAN SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS TEST MODE B
NOTE:  Perform this diagnosis if any of the control units are not
communicating (Not Available displayed in the HDS.) as found by the B-
CAN system Diagnosis Test Mode A.
111
1. Using the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS), select the system that has the symptom from the BODY
ELECTRICAL MENU.
2. Select DTCs, and then check for loss of communication DTCs (use the DTC Troubleshooting Index to
find the DTC type).
Are loss of communication DTCs indicated?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Replace the MICU.
3. Perform the input test for the unit not communicating with the HDS.
COMMUNICATING UNIT
Unit not communicating
MICU (see MICU INPUT TEST )
Door multiplex control unit (see DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT INPUT TEST )
Gauge control module (see GAUGE CONTROL MODULE INPUT TEST ('03-05 models) or '06-
07 model ('06-07 models))
Relay control module (see RELAY CONTROL MODULE INPUT TEST )
Climate control unit (see CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS )
Combination switch control unit (see COMBINATION SWITCH CONTROL UNIT INPUT
TEST )
TROUBLESHOOTING - B-CAN SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS TEST MODE C
NOTE:  Perform this diagnosis if a component that is controlled by the B-CAN

system does not stop or does not turn off.
 If the component does not turn ON, go to B-CAN SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
TEST MODE D.
 See the B-CAN system unit input/output index for a list of input and
output devices and the control units that monitor the input and controls
the output devices (see B-CAN System Switch Device Index ).
1. Check for DTCs by selecting the TEST MODE MENU from the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS).
YES - Go to B-CAN SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS TEST MODE A.

NO - Go to step 2.
2. Turn OFF the switch that controls the malfunctioning component.
3. Select DATA LIST from the TEST MODE MENU, and check the input of the switch that controls the
component.
Does the tester indicate the switch is OFF?
111
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Go to step 6.
4. In the DATA LIST of, check the output signal of the malfunctioning component.
Is the output signal OFF?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Replace the control unit that controls the device that will not turn OFF (see B-CAN
System Switch Device Index ).
5. Check the relay if applicable, then check for a short in the wire between the relay and the component,
relay and control unit or the component and control unit.
Are the relay and the wire harness OK?
YES - Replace the control unit that controls the component that will not turn OFF.
NO - Replace the relay or repair the wire harness.
6. Check the switch, then check for a short in the wire between the switch and the control unit that
monitors the switch.
Is the switch and wire harness OK?
YES - Replace the control unit that monitors the switch.

NO - Replace the switch or repair the wire harness.
TROUBLESHOOTING - B-CAN SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS TEST MODE D
NOTE:  Perform this diagnosis a component that is controlled by the B-CAN

system does not run or does not come on.
 If the component does not turn off or does not stop, go to B-CAN
SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS TEST MODE C.
 See the B-CAN system unit input/output index for a list of input and
output devices and the control units that monitor the input and controls
the output devices (see B-CAN System Switch Device Index ).
1. Check the fuse of the malfunctioning output device.
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO - Replace the fuse and recheck.
2. Check for DTCs by selecting the TEST MODE MENU from the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS).
Are any DTCs indicated ?
111
YES - Go to B-CAN SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS TEST MODE A.

NO - Go to step 3.
3. Turn ON the switch that controls the malfunctioning component.
4. Select DATA LIST from the TEST MODE MENU, and check output signal for the malfunctioning
component.
Is there an output signal?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Go to step 9.
5. Check the relay and ground, then check for an open or a short in the circuit for the malfunctioning
component.
Are the relay and circuit OK?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Replace the relay or repair the wire circuit.
6. Perform the function test for the malfunctioning component.
Does the output device pass the function test?
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Replace the component.
7. With the malfunctioning output device connected, connect a voltmeter between the malfunctioning
output device and body ground on the wire that the control unit uses to control the output device
circuit.
8. Select MISC. TEST from the TEST MODE MENU, and do the forced operation test of the
malfunctioning component.
Is there a change in voltage (12 V to 0 V or 0 V to 12 V)?
YES - Replace the component.

NO - Replace the control unit that controls the malfunctioning component.
9. Select DATA LIST from the TEST MODE MENU, and make sure the switch signal input for the
malfunctioning system indicates a change when operated.
Does the switch input indicated ON when the switch is ON?
YES - Replace the control unit that controls the malfunctioning component.
NO - Go to step 10.
10. Check the switch and its ground (if applicable), then check for an open or a short in the wire between
the switch and the control unit that monitors it.
Is the switch and the wire harness OK?
YES - Replace the control unit that monitors the switch.
111
NO - Replace the switch or repair the wire harness.
TROUBLESHOOTING - B-CAN SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS TEST MODE 1 AND

TEST MODE 2 (WITHOUT THE HDS)
1. Check the No. 7 (10 A) fuse and No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK ?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO - Find and repair the cause of the blown fuse.
2. Remove the left kick panel (see TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION - DOOR AREA ).
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
4. Connect the MPCS Service connector (A) to the MCIC socket (B) in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
111
Fig. 7: Connecting MPCS Service Connector To MCIC Socket

5. Wait 5 seconds, then watch the ceiling light.

6. If there is a DTC, the ceiling light and ignition switch light will blink, pause, then repeat the DTC as
long as the ignition switch ON (II).
Is there a repeating DTC?

111
YES - Count the blinks, then go to step 7.

NO - Go to step 8.
7. About 1 second after you go into self-diagnosis Mode 1, the ceiling light will indicate the DTC, and
repeat it every 3 seconds. If there is more than one DTC, the system will indicate them in ascending
order, beginning from the DTC with the lowest numerical value. Troubleshoot the DTCs as indicated
below:
 DTC 2, 3, 4 and 5 simultaneously: Check for an open in the BLU wire between multiplex
integrated control unit D11 and relay module 17, BRN/RED wire between multiplex integrated
control unit J4 and door multiplex control unit No. 16, LT GRN wire between multiplex
integrated control unit X27 and combination switch control unit No. 4, BRN/YEL wire between
multiplex integrated control unit N28 and gauge control module terminal No. 25. If the wire is
OK, substitute a known-good under-dash fuse/relay box (multiplex integrated control unit),
under-hood fuse/relay box, power window master switch, wiper/washer switch and gauge one at
a time, in that order, and recheck for the DTCs after each substitution.
 DTC 1 only: Go to MICU input test (see MICU INPUT TEST ).
 DTC 2 only (no other DTCs present): Go to the relay module input test. If all inputs are OK,
substitute a known-good relay module and then a MICU, one at a time, and then check for
DTCs. If a DTC recurs after a substitution, replace that unit.
 DTC 3 only (no other DTCs present): Go to the door multiplex control unit input test. If all
inputs are OK, substitute a known-good door multiplex control unit and then a MICU, one at a
time, and then check for DTCs. If a DTC recurs after a substitution, replace that unit.
 DTC 4 only (no other DTCs present): Go to the combination switch control unit input test. If all
inputs are OK, substitute a known-good wiper/washer switch and then a MICU, one at a time,
and then check for DTCs. If a DTC recurs after a substitution, replace that unit.
 DTC 5 only (no other DTCs present): Go to the GAUGE CONTROL MODULE INPUT
TEST. If all inputs are OK, substitute a known-good gauge control module and then a MICU,
one at a time, and then check for DTCs. If a DTC recurs after a substitution, replace that unit.
DIAGNOSTIC CHART
DTC Cause
1 The MICU cannot receive signals from the bus
communication line.
2 The MICU cannot receive signals from the relay
module communication line.
3 The MICU cannot receive signals from the
power window communication line.
4 The MICU cannot receive signal from the
combination switch communication line.
5 The MICU cannot receive signals from the
gauge control module.
8. Check for B-CAN DTCs indicated by the gauge control module while still in Test Mode 1 (see
TROUBLESHOOTING - B-CAN SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS TEST MODE 1 AND TEST MODE 2
(WITHOUT THE HDS) ).
YES - Go to step 9.
111
NO - Go to step 11.
9. Record all DTCs and sort them by type using the DTC Troubleshooting Index.
10. Troubleshoot the DTCs in the following order:
 Battery voltage DTCs
 Internal error DTCs
 Loss of communication DTCs (begin with the lowest number first; for example, if B1006 and
B1059 are retrieved, troubleshoot B1006 first)
 Signal error DTCs
11. Remove the MPCS service connector from the under-dash fuse/relay box socket for 5---10 seconds,
then re-insert it.
NOTE: If the MPCS connector is disconnected for too short or too long of a
time, or the ignition switch is turned OFF, the system will return to Test
Mode 2.
12. In the list of circuits that can be checked in Test Mode 2. Operate the switch that is most closely
related to the problem. If the circuit is OK, the ceiling light will blink once. If the circuit is faulty,
there will be no indication.
MICU ITEM CHART

Item
Driver's door switch (OPEN)
Front passenger's door switch (OPEN)
Left rear door switch (OPEN)
Right rear door switch (OPEN)
Trunk latch switch (OPEN)
Front passenger's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)(1)
Left rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Right rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)(1)
Audio-HVAC display module security ground (disconnected)
Driver's seat belt switch (unbuckled)
Brake pedal position switch (ON; brake pedal pressed)
Passenger's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
(1) The front passenger's and right rear door lock knob switches must be in the locked position when
beginning the test.

Item
Windshield wiper switch (AUTO STOP/PARK)
Hood switch (open)
A/C pressure switch/thermal protector (A/C ON)
COMBINATION SWITCH CONTROL UNIT

Item
111
Turn signal switch (LEFT)

Turn signal switch (RIGHT)
Combination light switch (ON; each position)
Dimmer switch (ON)
Passing switch (ON)
Windshield wiper switch (ON)
Intermittent wiper dwell timer
Windshield washer switch (ON)
POWER WINDOW MASTER SWITCH (DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT)

Item
Power window master switch (Driver's Window UP)
Power window master switch (Driver's Window DOWN)
Power window master switch (Driver's Window AUTO UP)
Power window master switch (Driver's Window AUTO DOWN)
Power window master switch (Front Passenger's Window UP)
Power window master switch (Front Passenger's Window DOWN)
Power window master switch (Left Rear Window UP)
Power window master switch (Left Rear Window DOWN)
Power window master switch (Right Rear Window UP)
Power window master switch (Right Rear Window DOWN)
Driver's door key cylinder switch(1) (LOCK)
Driver's door key cylinder switch(1) (UNLOCK)
Driver's door lock switch (LOCK)
Driver's door lock switch (UNLOCK)
Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK)
Driver's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
(1) A second key is necessary to check the key cylinder inputs. Be sure to rotate the key cylinder
switch two times to each position (lock and lock, unlock and unlock) to ensure the door lock
knob switch is in the appropriate position.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

Item
Parking brake switch (ON; parking brake applied)
Cruise control SET/RESUME/CANCEL switch (ON; switch pressed)
Transmission range switch (P, R, N, D)
Washer fluid level switch (Canada)
Brake fluid level switch (fluid removed)
Does the ceiling light indicate proper switch operation?
YES - Go to function and input test for the system related to the failure.
NO - Repair the open, short, or replace the faulty switch.
111
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE DTC DISPLAY

While in Test Mode 1, the DTCs which have been detected and stored individually by various B-CAN
(Body-controller Area Network) units, will be shown one by one on the odometer display (A) when the
communication between the Multiplex Integrated Control Unit (MICU) and the gauge control module is
normal. To scroll through the DTCs, press the RESET knob on the gauge control module.
Fig. 8: Identifying Gauge Control Module DTC Display

The unit that has stored the code can be identified by the number shown on the trip meter display (B).

MICU 10
Relay Control Module 11
Door Multiplex Control Unit 30
Gauge Control Module 50
111
Climate Control Module 51

Combination Switch Control Unit 70
HOW TO CLEAR THE DTC
While in Test Mode 1, press and hold down the RESET knob for more than 10 seconds.
DTC TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX

DTC Description ECU DTC type Refer To
Communication (see DTC B1000:
Loss of
B1000 circuit error (BUS MICU Communication Bus
Communication
Off) Line Error )
(see DTC B1001,
B1002: Multiplex
MICU Internal
B1001 MICU Internal Error Integrated Control
Error
Unit (MICU) Internal
Error )
(see DTC B1001,
B1002: Multiplex
MICU Internal
B1002 MICU Internal Error Integrated Control
Error
Unit (MICU) Internal
Error )
(see DTC B1005:
MICU lost
MICU Lost
communication with Loss of
B1005 MICU Communication with
Relay Control Communication
Relay Control
Module
Module )
(see DTC B1006:
MICU lost
MICU Lost
communication with
Communication with
Door Multiplex Loss of
B1006 MICU Door Multiplex
Control Unit (door Communication
Control Unit (Door
lock switch
Lock Switch
message)
Message) )
(see DTC B1007:
MICU lost
MICU Lost
communication with
Communication with
Combination Switch Loss of
B1007 MICU the Combination
Control Unit Communication
Switch Control Unit
(headlight switch
(Headlight Switch
message)
Message) )
(see DTC B1008:
MICU lost
MICU Lost
communication with
Loss of Communication (A/T
B1008 Gauge Control MICU
Communication Message) with the
Module (A/T
Gauge Control
message)
Module )
111
(see DTC B1009:

MICU lost
MICU Lost
communication with
Communication with
Combination Switch Loss of
B1009 MICU the Combination
Control Module Communication
Switch Control Unit
(wiper switch
(Wiper/Washer Switch
message)
Message) )
(see DTC B1010:
MICU lost
MICU Lost
communication with
Loss of Communication (Panic
B1010 Door Multiplex MICU
Communication Message) with the
Control Unit (panic
Door Multiplex
message)
Control Unit )
(see DTC B1026:
Passenger's door PASSENGER'S
B1026 lock switch MICU Signal Error DOOR LOCK
malfunction SWITCH SIGNAL
ERROR )
(see DTC B1027:
Trunk key cylinder TRUNK KEY
B1027 MICU Signal Error
switch malfunction CYLINDER SWITCH
SIGNAL ERROR )
(see DTC B1050,
Communication B1100, B1150, B1200,
Relay Control Loss of
B1050 circuit error (BUS B1250:
Module Communication
Off) Communication Bus
Line Error )
(see B1055: RELAY
Relay Control
CONTROL MODULE
Module lost Relay Control Loss of
B1055 LOST
communication with Module Communication
COMMUNICATION
MICU
WITH MICU )
( see B1056: RELAY
Relay Control
CONTROL MODULE
Module Lost Relay Control Loss of
B1056 LOST
Communication Module Communication
COMMUNICATION
With MICU
WITH MICU
(see B1057: RELAY
Relay Control
CONTROL MODULE
Module Lost
Relay Control Loss of LOST
B1057 Communication
Module Communication COMMUNICATION
With MICU (Door
WITH MICU (DOOR
Switch Message)
SWITCH MESSAGE)
( see B1058: RELAY
Relay Control CONTROL MODULE
Module Lost Relay Control Loss of LOST
B1058 Communication COMMUNICATION
With Door WITH DOOR
Multiplex Control MULTIPLEX
Unit (Door Lock CONTROL UNIT
111
Switch Message) (DOOR LOCK

SWITCH MESSAGE)
(see B1059: RELAY
Relay Control
CONTROL MODULE
Module Lost
LOST
Communication
Relay Control Loss of COMMUNICATION
B1059 With Door
Module Communication WITH DOOR
Multiplex Control
MULTIPLEX
Unit (Panic
CONTROL UNIT
Message)
(PANIC MESSAGE)
(see B1060: RELAY
Relay Control
CONTROL MODULE
Module Lost
LOST
Communication Relay Control Loss of
B1060 COMMUNICATION
With Gauge Control Module Communication
WITH GAUGE
Module (VSP/NE
CONTROL MODULE
Message)
(VSP/NE MESSAGE)
(see B1061: RELAY
Relay Control
CONTROL MODULE
Module Lost
LOST
Communication Relay Control Loss of
B1061 COMMUNICATION
With Gauge Control Module Communication
WITH GAUGE
Module (A/T
CONTROL MODULE
Message)
(A/T MESSAGE)
(see B1062: RELAY
Module Lost LOST
Communication COMMUNICATION
B1062 With Combination WITH
Switch Control Unit COMBINATION
(Headlight Switch SWITCH CONTROL
Message) UNIT (HEADLIGHT
SWITCH MESSAGE)
(see B1063: RELAY
Module Lost LOST
Communication COMMUNICATION
B1063 With Combination WITH
Switch Control Unit COMBINATION
(Wiper Switch SWITCH CONTROL
Message) UNIT (WIPER
SWITCH MESSAGE)
(see DTC B1075:
Headlight switch Relay Control
B1075 Signal Error HEADLIGHT
malfunction Module
SIGNAL ERROR )
(see DTC B1076:
Windshield wiper Relay Control WINDSHIELD
B1076 Signal Error
signal error Module WIPER SIGNAL
ERROR )
(see DTC B1077:
111
WINDSHIELD
Wiper switch (As) Relay Control
B1077 Signal Error WIPER (AS) SIGNAL
malfunction Module
ERROR )
(see DTC
Daytime running B1078:DAYTIME
Relay Control
B1078 lights malfunction Signal Error RUNNING LIGHTS
Module
(Canada) MALFUNCTION
(CANADA) )
(see DTC
B1079:DAYTIME
Daytime running
Relay Control RUNNING LIGHTS
B1079 lights malfunction Signal Error
Module MALFUNCTION
(USA)
(USA) ('06-07
MODEL )
Power supply circuit (see DTC B1080:
(IG1 line) input Power Supply Circuit
Relay Control
B1080 error for Relay Signal Error (IG1 line) Input Error
Module
Control Module and for Relay Control
MICU Module and MICU )
(see DTC B1050,
Door Multiplex Loss of
Control Unit Communication
Off) COMMUNICATION
BUS LINE ERROR )
(see DTC B1102:
Door Multiplex
Door Multiplex DOOR MULTIPLEX
B1102 Control Unit Internal Error
Control Unit CONTROL UNIT
Internal Error
INTERNAL ERROR )
(see DTC B1125:
Driver's power
Door Multiplex DRIVER'S POWER
B1125 window motor A Signal Error
Control Unit WINDOW MOTOR A
pulse malfunction
PULSE ERROR )
(see DTC B1126:
Driver's power
Door Multiplex DRIVER'S POWER
B1126 window motor B Signal Error
Control Unit WINDOW MOTOR B
pulse malfunction
PULSE ERROR )
(see DTC B1127:
Driver's door lock DRIVER'S DOOR
Door Multiplex
B1127 key cylinder switch Signal Error LOCK KEY
Control Unit
malfunction CYLINDER SWITCH
SIGNAL ERROR )
(see DTC B1128:
Driver's door lock Door Multiplex DRIVER'S DOOR
B1128 Signal Error
switch malfunction Control Unit LOCK SWITCH
SIGNAL ERROR )
(see DTC B1129:

Driver's door knob Door Multiplex
B1129 Signal Error DRIVER'S DOOR
switch malfunction Control Unit
LOCK KNOB
SWITCH SIGNAL
111
ERROR )
(see DTC B1140:
Driver's power
DRIVER'S POWER
window position Door Multiplex
B1140 Signal Error WINDOW POSITION
detect circuit Control Unit
DETECT CIRCUIT
malfunction
ERROR )
(see DTC B1050,
Gauge Control Loss of
Off) COMMUNICATION
BUS LINE ERROR )
(see DTC B1152:
Gauge Control
Gauge Control GAUGE CONTROL
B1152 Module Internal Internal Error
Module MODULE EEPROM
Error
ERROR )
(see DTC B1155:
GAUGE CONTROL
Gauge Control
MODULE LOST
Module lost
COMMUNICATION
communication with
Gauge Control Loss of WITH
B1155 Combination Switch
Module Communication COMBINATION
Control Module
SWITCH CONTROL
(headlight switch
UNIT (HEADLIGHT
message)
SWITCH
MESSAGE) )
(see DTC B1156:
GAUGE CONTROL
Gauge Control
MODULE LOST
Module lost
COMMUNICATION
communication with
Gauge Control Loss of WITH THE
B1156 Combination Switch
Module Communication COMBINATION
Control Module
SWITCH CONTROL
(wiper switch
UNIT (WIPER
message)
SWITCH
MESSAGE) )
(see DTC B1157:
GAUGE CONTROL
Gauge Control MODULE LOST
Module lost Gauge Control Loss of COMMUNICATION
B1157
communication with Module Communication WITH MULTIPLEX
MICU INTEGRATED
CONTROL UNIT
(MICU) )
(see DTC B1158:
Gauge Control
GAUGE CONTROL
Module lost
Gauge Control Loss of MODULE LOST
B1158 communication with
Relay Control
WITH RELAY
Module
MODULE )
(see DTC B1159:
111
GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE LOST
Gauge Control COMMUNICATION
Module lost WITH MULTIPLEX
B1159 communication with INTEGRATED
MICU (door switch CONTROL UNIT
message) (MICU) (DOOR
SWITCH
MESSAGE) )
(see DTC B1160:
GAUGE CONTROL
Gauge Control
MODULE LOST
Module lost
COMMUNICATION
communication with
Gauge Control Loss of WITH THE DOOR
B1160 Door Multiplex
Module Communication MULTIPLEX
Control Unit (door
CONTROL UNIT
lock switch
(DOOR LOCK
message)
SWITCH
MESSAGE) )
Gauge Control
(see DTC B1168: F-
Module lost
Gauge Control Loss of CAN
ECM/PCM (engine
LINE ERROR; )
messages)
(see DTC B1169:
Gauge Control
GAUGE CONTROL
Module lost
Gauge Control Loss of MODULE LOST
PCM (A/T
WITH THE PCM (A/T
messages)
MESSAGES) )
(see DTC B1175:
Fuel gauge sending FUEL GAUGE
Gauge Control
B1175 unit signal Signal Error SENDING UNIT
Module
malfunction SIGNALS INPUT
ERROR )
(see DTC B1177:
Abnormal battery Gauge Control ABNORMAL
B1177 Signal Error
voltage (7.5 V) Module BATTERY
VOLTAGE (7.5 V) )
F-CAN (see DTC B1178: F-
B1178 communication CAN Communication
circuit error Line Error )
(see DTC B1050,
Climate Control Loss of
Unit Communication
Off) COMMUNICATION
BUS LINE ERROR )
Climate Control Climate Control (see DTC B1202:
B1202 Internal Error CLIMATE
Unit Internal Error Unit
CONTROL UNIT
111
INTERNAL ERROR )
(see DTC B1205:
Climate Control CLIMATE
Unit lost CONTROL UNIT
communication with Climate Control Loss of LOST
B1205
Gauge Control Unit Communication COMMUNICATION
Module (VSP/NE WITH THE GAUGE
message) CONTROL MODULE
(VSP/NE MESSAGE) )
(see DTC B1206:
Climate Control CLIMATE
Unit lost CONTROL UNIT
communication with Climate Control Loss of LOST
B1206
Gauge Control Unit Communication COMMUNICATION
Module (ECT WITH THE GAUGE
message) CONTROL MODULE
(ECT MESSAGE) )
(see DTC B1207:
CLIMATE
Climate Control
CONTROL UNIT
Unit lost
LOST
communication with Climate Control Loss of
B1207 COMMUNICATION
Gauge Control Unit Communication
WITH THE GAUGE
Module (ILLUMI
CONTROL MODULE
message)
(ILLUMI
MESSAGE) )
(see DTC B1225 OR
DTC INDICATOR A:
Open in the in-car
Climate Control AN OPEN IN THE IN-
B1225 temperature sensor Signal Error
Unit CAR
circuit
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR CIRCUIT )
(see DTC B1226 OR
DTC INDICATOR B:
Short in the in-car
Climate Control A SHORT IN THE IN-
B1226 temperature sensor Signal Error
Unit CAR
circuit
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR CIRCUIT )
(see DTC B1227 OR
DTC INDICATOR C:
Open in the outside
Climate Control AN OPEN IN THE
B1227 air temperature Signal Error
Unit OUTSIDE AIR
sensor circuit
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR CIRCUIT )
(see DTC B1228 OR
DTC INDICATOR D:
Short in the outside
Climate Control A SHORT IN THE
B1228 air temperature Signal Error
Unit OUTSIDE AIR
sensor circuit
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR CIRCUIT )
111
(see DTC B1229 OR

DTC INDICATOR E:
Open in the sunlight Climate Control
B1229 Signal Error AN OPEN IN THE
sensor circuit Unit
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
CIRCUIT )
(see DTC B1230 OR
DTC INDICATOR F:
Short in the sunlight Climate Control
B1230 Signal Error A SHORT IN THE
sensor circuit Unit
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
CIRCUIT )
(see DTC B1231 OR
Open in the DTC INDICATOR G:
evaporator Climate Control AN OPEN IN THE
B1231 Signal Error
temperature sensor Unit EVAPORATOR
circuit TEMPERATURE
SENSOR CIRCUIT )
(see DTC B1232 OR
Short in the DTC INDICATOR H:
evaporator Climate Control A SHORT IN THE
B1232 Signal Error
temperature sensor Unit EVAPORATOR
circuit TEMPERATURE
SENSOR CIRCUIT )
(see DTC B1233 OR
DTC INDICATOR I:
Open in the driver's
B1233 air mix control Signal Error
Unit DRIVER'S AIR MIX
motor circuit
CONTROL MOTOR
CIRCUIT )
(see DTC B1234 OR
DTC INDICATOR J:
Short in the driver's
Climate Control A SHORT IN THE
B1234 air mix control Signal Error
Unit DRIVER'S AIR MIX
motor circuit
CONTROL MOTOR
CIRCUIT )
(see DTC B1235 OR
DTC INDICATOR K:
Problem in the
A PROBLEM IN THE
driver's air mix Climate Control
B1235 Signal Error DRIVER'S AIR MIX
control linkage, Unit
CONTROL
door, or motor
LINKAGE, DOOR OR
MOTOR )
(see DTC B1236 OR
DTC INDICATOR O:
Open in the
B1236 passenger's air mix Signal Error
Unit PASSENGER'S AIR
control motor circuit
MIX CONTROL
MOTOR CIRCUIT )
(see DTC B1237 OR
DTC INDICATOR P:
Short in the Climate Control A SHORT IN THE
111
passenger's air mix Unit PASSENGER'S AIR

B1237 control motor circuit Signal Error MIX CONTROL
MOTOR CIRCUIT )
(see DTC B1238 OR
DTC INDICATOR Q:
Problem in the
A PROBLEM IN THE
passenger's air mix Climate Control
B1238 Signal Error PASSENGER'S AIR
control linkage, Unit
MIX CONTROL
door, or motor
LINKAGE, DOOR OR
MOTOR )
(see DTC B1239 OR
DTC INDICATOR L:
Open or short in the
Climate Control AN OPEN OR SHORT
B1239 mode control motor Signal Error
Unit IN THE MODE
circuit
CONTROL MOTOR
CIRCUIT )
(see DTC B1240 OR
Problem in the DTC INDICATOR M:
mode control Climate Control A PROBLEM IN THE
B1240 Signal Error
linkage, doors, or Unit MODE CONTROL
motor LINKAGE, DOORS
OR MOTOR )
(see DTC B1241 OR
DTC INDICATOR N:
Problem in the Climate Control
B1241 Signal Error A PROBLEM IN THE
blower motor circuit Unit
BLOWER MOTOR
CIRCUIT )
(see DTC B1050,
Communication Combination B1100, B1150, B1200,
Loss of
B1250 circuit error (BUS Switch Control B1250:
Communication
Off) Unit COMMUNICATION
BUS LINE ERROR )
(see DTC B1251:
Combination Switch Combination COMBINATION
B1251 Control Unit Switch Control Internal Error SWITCH CONTROL
internal error Unit UNIT INTERNAL
ERROR )
(see DTC B1255:
Combination Switch COMBINATION
Combination
Control Unit lost Loss of SWITCH CONTROL
B1255 Switch Control
communication with Communication UNIT LOST
Unit
MICU COMMUNICATION
WITH MICU )
(see DTC B1275:
Headlight switch Combination HEADLIGHT
B1275 OFF position circuit Switch Control Signal Error SWITCH OFF
malfunction Unit POSITION CIRCUIT
MALFUNCTION )
(see DTC B1276:
HEADLIGHT
111
SWITCH PARKING
Headlight switch Combination
(SMALL) POSITION
B1276 SMALL position Switch Control Signal Error
CIRCUIT
circuit malfunction Unit
MALFUNCTION )
(see DTC B1277:
B1277 AUTO position Switch Control Signal Error SWITCH AUTO
circuit malfunction Unit POSITION CIRCUIT
MALFUNCTION )
(see DTC B1278:
B1278 ON position circuit Switch Control Signal Error SWITCH ON
malfunction Unit POSITION CIRCUIT
MALFUNCTION )
(see DTC B1279:
Combination HEADLIGHT
Dimmer switch
B1279 Switch Control Signal Error SWITCH DIMMER
circuit malfunction
Unit POSITION CIRCUIT
MALFUNCTION )
(see DTC B1280:
Combination
Turn signal switch TURN SIGNAL
B1280 Switch Control Signal Error
circuit malfunction SWITCH CIRCUIT
Unit
MALFUNCTION )
(see DTC B1281:
Windshield wiper WINDSHIELD
Combination
switch MIST WIPER SWITCH
position circuit MIST POSITION
Unit
malfunction CIRCUIT
MALFUNCTION )
(see DTC B1282:
Combination
switch INT (AUTO) WIPER SWITCH INT
position circuit (AUTO) POSITION
Unit
malfunction CIRCUIT
MALFUNCTION )
(see DTC B1283:
Combination
switch LOW WIPER SWITCH
position circuit LOW POSITION
Unit
malfunction CIRCUIT
MALFUNCTION )
(see DTC B1284:
Combination
switch HIGH WIPER SWITCH
position circuit HIGH POSITION
Unit
malfunction CIRCUIT
MALFUNCTION )
DESCRIPTION
111
HDS INPUTS AND COMMANDS
Input
HDS INPUTS AND COMMANDS (1 OF 7)

System Menu Data List Data List Indication
Brake pedal pushed: ON
Brake Pedal Position Switch
Brake pedal released: OFF
Windshield Wiper Park Switch Wipers in park position: ON
(AUTO STOP/PARK) Wipers in other position: OFF
Wiper switch in HI position: ON
Windshield Wiper Switch (BACK-
Wiper switch in other position:
UP)
OFF
Wiper switch in INT position: ON
Windshield Wiper Switch
(INTERMITTENT)
OFF
Wiper switch in LOW position:
ON
Windshield Wiper Switch (LOW)
OFF
Wiper switch in HI position: ON
Windshield Wiper Switch (HIGH) Wiper switch in other position:
OFF
Wiper Wiper switch in MIST position:
ON
Windshield Wiper Switch (MIST)
OFF
Washer switch on: ON
Windshield Washer Switch
Washer switch off: OFF
Wiper high speed command on:
Windshield Wiper Motor HI ON
Command Wiper high speed command off:
OFF
Wiper low speed command on:
Windshield Wiper Motor Lo ON
Command Wiper high low command off:
OFF
Windshield Washer Motor Washer command on: ON
Command Washer command off: OFF
Switch at short setting: 0.0
Intermittent Wiper Dwell Timer
Switch at long setting: about 250
Door open: ON
Driver's Door Switch
Door closed: OFF
Door open: ON
Front Passenger's Door Switch
Door closed: OFF
On: ON
P/W Main Switch
Off: OFF
P/W Master Switch (Driver's Auto position: ON

111
window AUTO) Neutral position: OFF

P/W Master Switch (Driver's Up position: ON
window UP) Neutral position: OFF
P/W Master Switch (Driver's Down position: ON
window DOWN) Neutral position: OFF
P/W Master SW. (Front Psngr's Up position: ON
Wndw UP) Neutral position: OFF
P/W Master SW. (Front Psngr's Down position: ON
Wndw DOWN) Neutral position: OFF
P/W Master Switch (Left Rear UP position: ON
window UP) Neutral position: OFF
P/W Master Switch (Left Rear Down position: ON
window DOWN) Neutral position: OFF
P/W Master Switch (Right Rear UP position: ON
Wndw UP) Neutral position: OFF
Power window
P/W Master SW. (Right Rear Down position: ON
Wndw DOWN) Neutral position: OFF
Window in motion: DETECT
Driver's P/W Motor Pulse A
Window stopped: NONE
Window in motion: DETECT
Driver's P/W Motor Pulse B
Window stopped: NONE
Driver's P/W Motor Command OFF/UP/DOWN
Front Passenger's P/W Motor
OFF/UP/DOWN
Command
Left Rear P/W Motor Command OFF/UP/DOWN
Right Rear P/W Motor Command OFF/UP/DOWN
On command: ON
P/W Relay Command
Off command: OFF
Enabled: ON
Moonroof Timer Command(1) Disabled: OFF
(1) EX, EXL, EXSUL ('06-07 model), EXLSUL ('06-07 model)

Door open: ON
Door closed: OFF
Ignition ON (II): ON
Ignition Switch (IG1)
Other positions: OFF
Horn on command: ON
Horn Command
Horn off command: OFF
In off position: ON
Headlight Switch (OFF)
In other positions: OFF
In park light position: ON
Headlight Switch (Parking)
In headlight position: ON
Headlight Switch (HEADLIGHT)
In other position: OFF
111
Headlight Switch (BACK-UP)
In headlight position: OFF
In hi-beam position: ON
Headlight Switch (DIMMER)
In low-beam position: OFF
Passing switch on: ON
Headlight Switch (PASSING)
Passing switch off: OFF
In left position: ON
Turn Signal Switch (LEFT)
Neutral position: OFF
In right position: ON
Turn Signal Switch (RIGHT)
DRL Signal (Canada)
Ignition Key Cylinder Light Light on command: ON
Command Light off command: OFF
Light on command: ON
Interior Light Command
Light off command: OFF
Foot Light Command
Left Turn Signal Command
Lighting Light off command: OFF
Right Turn Signal Command
Hazard on command: ON
Hazard Signal Command
Hazard off command: OFF
Relay on command: ON
DRL Relay command (Canada)
Relay off command: OFF
Headlight Command
Headlight High Beam Command
Parking Light Command
Fog Light Command
Defroster on command: ON
Rear Defroster Command
Defroster off command: OFF
DRL on command: ON
DRL Command (Canada)
DRL off command: OFF

Door open: ON
Door closed: OFF
Door open: ON
Door closed: OFF
Door open: ON
Left Rear Door Switch
Door closed: OFF
Right Rear Door Switch Door open: ON
111
Door closed: OFF

Trunk open: ON
Trunk Lid/Tailgate Switch(1) Trunk closed: OFF
Trunk Key Cylinder Switch Key turned to unlock: ON
(UNLOCK) (1) Neutral position: OFF
Release command: ON
Trunk Lid Release Command
Other: OFF
In off position: ON
Headlight Switch (OFF)
In park light position: ON
Headlight Switch (Parking)
Headlight Switch (HEADLIGHT)
In hi-beam position: ON
Headlight Switch (DIMMER)
In low-beam position: OFF
Passing switch on: ON
Headlight Switch (PASSING)
Passing switch off: OFF
In left position: ON
Turn Signal Switch (LEFT)
Gauge Neutral position: OFF
In right position: ON
Turn Signal Switch (RIGHT)
DRL Signal (Canada)
Left Turn Signal Command
Hazard on command: ON
Hazard Signal Command
Hazard off command: OFF
Headlight Command N/A
Fog Light Command
Brake pedal pushed: ON
Brake pedal released: OFF
(1) EX, EXL

Key in ignition: ON
Ignition Key Cylinder Switch
Key out of ignition: OFF
Unbuckled: ON
Driver's Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Buckled: OFF
A/T Gear Position Switch (R) Shifter in reverse position: ON
111
Shifter in other position: OFF

Cruise main switch on: ON
Cruise Control Main Switch Input
Cruise main switch off: OFF
Engine off (low pressure): ON
Engine Oil Pressure Switch
Engine running: OFF
Washer Fluid Level Switch Fluid level low: ON
(Canada) Fluid level normal: OFF
Reset button pushed: ON
Gauge Select/Reset Switch
Reset button released: OFF
Park brake lever pulled: ON
Parking Brake Switch
Park brake lever released: OFF
Fluid level low: ON
Brake Fluid Level Switch
Fluid level normal: OFF
Fuel tank empty: 5 °
Fuel Sending Unit Input 1 Fuel tank half full: 50 °
Fuel tank full: 100°
Fuel tank empty: 4 V
Fuel Sending Unit Input 2 Fuel tank half full: 2.5 V
Fuel tank full: 1 V
Indicator command on: ON
ABS Indicator
Indicator command off: OFF
EBD (Brake Light) Indicator
Gauge MIL Indicator
Washer Fluid Level Indicator Indicator command on: ON
(Canada) Indicator command off: OFF
DRL Indicator (Canada)
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Charge System Indicator
Cruise Main Switch ON Indicator
Maintenance Required Indicator
High Beam Indicator
Parking Light ON Indicator
Low Fuel Warning Indicator
Security Indicator(1) Indicator command off: OFF
Fuel gauge Needle Command Fuel tank empty: 5 °

Fuel tank half full: 50 °
111
Fuel tank full: 100 °

(1) EX, EXL

Door open: ON
Door closed: OFF
Door open: ON
Door closed: OFF
Door open: ON
Driver's Rear Door Switch
Door closed: OFF
Door open: ON
Passenger's Rear Door Switch
Door closed: OFF
Driver's Door Lock Switch Switch pushed: ON
(LOCK) Switch released: OFF
(UNLOCK) Switch released: OFF
Front Psngr's Door Lock Switch Switch pushed: ON
Front Psngr's Door Lock Switch Switch pushed: ON
Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch Knob up: OFF
(LOCK) Knob down: ON
Door lock Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch Knob up: ON
(UNLOCK) Knob down: OFF
Front Psngr's Door Lock Knob Sw. Knob up: ON
(UNLOCK)(1) Knob down: OFF
Driver's Rear Door Lock Knob Knob up: ON
Switch (UNLOCK)(1) Knob down: OFF
Passenger's Rear Door Lock Knob Knob up: ON
Switch (UNLOCK)(1) Knob up: OFF
Driver's Door Key Cylinder Key turned to lock: ON
Switch (LOCK) Neutral position: OFF
Driver's Door Key Cylinder Key turned to unlock: ON
Switch (UNLOCK) Neutral position: OFF
Lock command: ON
Door LOCK Command
Other: OFF
Unlock command: ON
Door UNLOCK Command
Other: OFF
Driver's Door UNLOCK Unlock command: ON
Command Other: OFF
A/C Pressure Switch/Thermal
Climate control A/C on: ON
Protector
(1) EX, EXL
111

Door open: ON
Door closed: OFF
Door open: ON
Door closed: OFF
Door open: ON
Door closed: OFF
Door open: ON
Door closed: OFF
Trunk open: ON
(UNLOCK) Neutral position: OFF
Front Psngr's Door Lock Sw. Switch pushed: ON
Keyless Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch Knob up: ON
Front Psngr's Door Lock Knob Knob up: ON
Switch (UNLOCK) (1) Knob down: OFF
Passenger's Rear Door Lock Knob Knob up: ON
Driver's Door Key Cylinder Key turned to lock: ON
Switch (LOCK) Neutral position: OFF
Driver's Door Key Cylinder Key turned to unlock: ON
Switch (UNLOCK) Neutral position: OFF
Lock command: ON
Door LOCK Command
Other: OFF
Unlock command: ON
Door UNLOCK Command
Other: OFF
Command Other: OFF
Trunk Lid/Tailgate Release Release command: ON
Command Other: OFF
111
(1) EX, EXL

Door open: ON
Door closed: OFF
Door open: ON
Door closed: OFF
Door open: ON
Door closed: OFF
Door open: ON
Door closed: OFF
Trunk open: ON
(UNLOCK) Neutral position: OFF
Hood open: ON
Hood Switch(1) Hood closed: OFF
Security (UNLOCK) Switch released: OFF
Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch Knob up: ON
Front Psngr's Lock Knob Sw. Knob up: ON
(UNLOCK)(1) Knob down: OFF
Switch (UNLOCK) (1) Knob down: OFF
Passenger's Rear Door Lock Knob up: ON
Knob Switch (UNLOCK) (1) Knob down: OFF
Horn on command: ON
Horn Command
Horn off command: OFF
Lock command: ON
Door LOCK Command
Other: OFF
Unlock command: ON
Door UNLOCK Command
Other: OFF
Command Other: OFF
111
Trunk Lid/Tailgate Release Release command: ON

Command Other: OFF
Headlight Command
(1) EX, EXL
Output
HDS INPUTS AND COMMANDS

System Description Data List
Speedometer displays value
Speedometer
inputted
Tachometer displays value
Tachometer
inputted
Fuel gauge displays value
Fuel Level Gauge
inputted
Temperature gauge displays
Engine Temperature Gauge
value inputted
Turns ABS indicator on/off ABS Indicator
Turns BRAKE indicator on/off EBD Indicator
Turns MIL on/off MIL Status
Turns washer level indicator Windshield Washer Fluid Level
on/off Indicator (Canada)
Daytime Running Lights Indicator
Turns DRL indicator on/off
(Canada)
Turns Low oil pressure indicator
Gauge Engine Oil Pressure Indicator
on/off
Turns charging system indicator
Charging System Indicator
on/off
Turns cruise main switch Cruise Control Main Switch
indicator on/off Indicator
Turns maintenance required
Maintenance Required Indicator
indicator on/off
Turns high beam indicator on/off High Beam Indicator
Turns light on indicator on/off Lights On Indicator
Turns low fuel indicator on/off Low Fuel Indicator
Turns security indicator on/off Security Indicator
Displays inputted value Trip Meter
Turns A/T P position indicator
A/T Gear Position Indicator (P)
on/off
Turns A/T R position indicator
A/T Gear Position Indicator (R)
on/off
111
Turns A/T N position indicator

A/T Gear Position Indicator (N)
on/off
Turns A/T D position indicator
A/T Gear Position Indicator (D)
on/off
Turns A/T D3 position indicator
A/T Gear Position Indicator (D3)
on/off
Turns A/T 2 position indicator
A/T Gear Position Indicator (2)
on/off
Turns A/T 1 position indicator
A/T Gear Position Indicator (1)
on/off
Turns TCS indicator on/off(1) TCS Indicator
Turns TCS activation Indicator
TCS Activation Indicator
on/off(1)
Controls gauge illumination
Illumination Brightness Control
brightness to inputted value
Turns key chime on/off Key Chime
Turns headlight chime on/off Headlight Chime
Turns seatbelt chime on/off Seatbelt Reminder Chime
Turns ignition key cylinder light Ignition Key Cylinder Light
on/off Command
Turns interior light(s) on/off Interior Light Command
Turns foot light on/off Foot Light Command
Turns left turn signal light on/off Left Turn Signal Command
Turns right turn signal light
on/off
Lighting Turns hazard lights on/off Hazard Signal Command
Daytime Running Lights Relay
Turns DRL relay on/off
Command (Canada)
Turns headlights on/off Headlight Command
Turns high beams on/off Headlight High Beam Command
Turns parking lights on/off Parking Lights Command
Controls DRL functions on Daytime Running Lights Signal
command (Canada)
Controls lock and unlock
Door lock Door Lock Command
functions on command
Turns trunk lid/tailgate release Trunk Lid/Tailgate Release
Keyless
command on/off Command
Climate control Turns rear defroster on/off Rear Defroster
Runs driver's window up Driver's Window Up
Runs driver's window down Driver's Window Down
Runs passenger's window up Front Passenger's Window Up
Runs passenger's window down Front Passenger's Window Down
Power window
Runs left rear window up Left Rear Window Up
Runs left rear window down Left Rear Window Down
Runs right rear window up Right Rear Window Up
111
Runs right rear window down Right Rear Window Down

Turns power window relay on/off Power Window Relay Command
Windshield Wiper Motor Low
Turns wiper low speed on/off
Command
Windshield Wiper Motor High
Turns wiper high speed on/off
Wiper Command
Turns washer on/off Windshield Washer Command
Turns wiper intermittent function
Intermittent Wiper Dwell Timer
on/off
Security Turns horns on/off Horn Command
Initiates climate control self test Climate Control Self Test
Climate control
function (INSPECTION MENU)
(1) '03-05 models
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
111
Fig. 9: Multiplex Integrated Control System Circuit Diagram (1 Of 2)

111
Fig. 10: Multiplex Integrated Control System Circuit Diagram (2 Of 2)

DTC TROUBLESHOOTING
DTC CODES INDEX
DTC INDEX
DTC Description
DTC B1000 Communication Bus Line Error
DTC B1050, B1100, B1150, B1200, B1250 Communication Bus Line Error
DTC B1001, B1002 Multiplex Integrated Control Unit (MICU) Internal
111
Error
DTC B1005 MICU Lost Communication with Relay Control
Module
DTC B1006 MICU Lost Communication with Door Multiplex
Control Unit (Door Lock Switch Message)
Switch Control Unit (Headlight Switch Message)
DTC B1008 MICU Lost Communication (A/T Message) with
the Gauge Control Module
Switch Control Unit (Wiper/Washer Switch
Message)
DTC B1010 MICU Lost Communication (Panic Message) with
the Door Multiplex Control Unit
DTC B1102 Door Multiplex Control Unit Internal Error
DTC B1178 F-CAN Communication Line Error;
ECM/PCM (Engine Messages)
the PCM (A/T Messages)
DTC B1080 Power Supply Circuit (IG1 line) Input Error for
Relay Control Module and MICU
DTC B1251 Combination Switch Control Unit Internal Error
DTC B1255 Combination Switch Control Unit Lost
Communication With MICU
DTC B1000: COMMUNICATION BUS LINE ERROR
1. Clear the DTCs using the HDS.

2. Cycle the ignition switch to OFF and then back ON.
3. Check for DTCs using the HDS.
Is DTC B1000 indicated?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Intermittent failure. The communication bus line is OK at this time. Check for loose or
poor connections. If the connections are good, check the battery condition (see BATTERY
TEST ) and the charging system (see ALTERNATOR AND REGULATOR CIRCUIT
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
Are DTC B1005, B1006, B1007, B1008, B1009 and B1010 indicated?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Replace the MICU.
5. Disconnect each control unit one at a time. Clear the DTC, then recheck for DTCs after each unit is
disconnected.
111

 Relay control module
 Driver's multiplex control unit
 Climate control unit
 Combination switch control unit
Is DTC B1000 indicated with each unit disconnected?
YES - Check for a short to power or ground in the communication circuit by disconnecting the
harness at each control unit and testing for continuity to ground or short to power. Repair or
replace the harness as necessary.
NO - Substitute a known-good control unit with the one that was disconnected, and did not set
DTC B1000.
DTC B1050, B1100, B1150, B1200, B1250: COMMUNICATION BUS LINE ERROR

Are DTC(s) B1050, B1100, B1150, B1200 or B1250 indicated?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
COMMUNICATION BUS LINE ERROR

B1050 Relay Control Module
B1100 Door Multiplex Control Unit
B1150 Gauge Control Module
B1200 Audio-HVAC Display Module
B1250 Combination Switch Control Unit
Is DTC(s) B1000 indicated?
YES - Troubleshoot DTC B1000.

NO - If DTC B1050 is indicated, replace the relay control module. If DTC B1100 is indicated,
replace the door multiplex control unit. If DTC B1150 is indicated, replace the gauge control
module (see GAUGE CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT ). If DTC B1200 is
indicated, replace the climate control unit. If DTC B1250 is indicated, replace the combination
switch control unit.
DTC B1001, B1002: MULTIPLEX INTEGRATED CONTROL UNIT (MICU) INTERNAL ERROR

111
3. Operate the door lock (LOCK/UNLOCK).

Is DTC B1001 or B1002 indicated?
YES - Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box.

NO - Intermittent failure, the MICU is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections. If
the connections are good, check the battery condition (see BATTERY TEST ) and the
charging system (see ALTERNATOR AND REGULATOR CIRCUIT
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
DTC B1005: MICU LOST COMMUNICATION WITH RELAY CONTROL MODULE

YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Intermittent failure, the relay module is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections. If the connections are good, check the battery condition (see BATTERY TEST )
and the charging system (see ALTERNATOR AND REGULATOR CIRCUIT
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
4. Check for DTCs in the gauge control module using the HDS.
YES - Go to Relay Control Module Input Test (see RELAY CONTROL MODULE INPUT
TEST ).
NO - Check for an open in the communication circuit between the MICU and the relay control
module. If the circuit is OK, replace the MICU. If the circuit is bad, repair the open.
DTC B1006: MICU LOST COMMUNICATION WITH DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT
(DOOR LOCK SWITCH MESSAGE)

YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Intermittent failure, the door multiplex control unit is OK at this time. Check for loose or
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
111
4. Check for DTCs in the gauge control module and relay module using the HDS.
Is DTC B1160 and B1058 indicated?
YES - Go to Door Multiplex Control Unit Input Test (see DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL
UNIT INPUT TEST ).
NO - Check for an open in the communication circuit between the MICU and the door
multiplex control unit. If the circuit is OK, replace the MICU. If the circuit is bad, repair the
open.
DTC B1007: MICU LOST COMMUNICATION WITH THE COMBINATION SWITCH

CONTROL UNIT (HEADLIGHT SWITCH MESSAGE)

YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Intermittent failure, the MICU is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections. If
the connections are good, check the battery condition (see BATTERY TEST ) and the
charging system (see ALTERNATOR AND REGULATOR CIRCUIT
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
4. Check for DTCs of the gauge control module and relay control module using the HDS.
YES - Go to the Combination Switch Control Unit Input Test (see COMBINATION
SWITCH CONTROL UNIT INPUT TEST ).
NO - Check for an open in the communication circuit between the MICU and the combination
switch control unit. If the circuit is OK, replace the MICU. If the circuit is bad, repair the open.
DTC B1008: MICU LOST COMMUNICATION (A/T MESSAGE) WITH THE GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE

YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Intermittent failure, the gauge control module is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
4. Check for DTCs in the relay control module using the HDS.
111
YES - Go to the GAUGE CONTROL MODULE INPUT TEST.

 '03-05 models (see '03-05 models )
 '06-07 model (see '06-07 model )
NO - Check for an open in the communication circuit between the MICU and the gauge control
module. If the circuit is OK, replace the MICU. If the circuit is bad, repair the open.
DTC B1009: MICU LOST COMMUNICATION WITH THE COMBINATION SWITCH

CONTROL UNIT (WIPER/WASHER SWITCH MESSAGE)

YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Intermittent failure, the combination switch control unit is OK at this time. Check for
loose or poor connections. If the connections are good, check the battery condition (see
BATTERY TEST ) and the charging system (see ALTERNATOR AND REGULATOR
CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING ).
4. Check for DTCs of the gauge control module and relay control module using the HDS.
YES - Go to the Combination Switch Control Unit Input Test (see COMBINATION
SWITCH CONTROL UNIT INPUT TEST ).
NO - Check for an open in the communication circuit between the MICU and the combination
switch control unit. If the circuit is OK, replace the MICU. If the circuit is bad, repair the open.
DTC B1010: MICU LOST COMMUNICATION (PANIC MESSAGE) WITH THE DOOR
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT

YES - Go to step 4.
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
4. Check for DTCs of the relay control module using the HDS.
111
YES - Go to DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT INPUT TEST .

NO - Check for an open in the communication circuit between the MICU and the door
multiplex control unit. If the circuit is OK, replace the MICU. If the circuit is bad, repair the
open.
DTC B1102: DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT INTERNAL ERROR

3. Operate the power window (UP/DOWN).
YES - Faulty door multiplex control unit; replace the power window master switch.
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
DTC B1178: F-CAN COMMUNICATION LINE ERROR; DTC B1168: GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH ECM/PCM (ENGINE MESSAGES); DTC B1169:
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH THE PCM (A/T MESSAGES)

2. Turn the ignition switch OFF then back to the ON (II).
3. Start and run the engine for at least 5 seconds then turn the engine off.
Is DTC B1178, B1168 and/or B1169 indicated?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Intermittent failure, the F-CAN communication line is OK at this time. Check for loose or
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
5. Check for DTCs in the ECM/PCM, ABS/TCS or Navigation.
YES - Troubleshoot the ECM/PCM, ABS/TCS or Navigation DTCs.

NO - Go to step 6.
6. Perform the Gauge Control Module Input Test.
 '03-05 models (see '03-05 models )
 '06-07 model (see '06-07 model )
111
Are all inputs OK?
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Repair the faulty input then recheck for DTCs.
7. Substitute a known-good gauge control module.
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF then back to the ON (II).
10. Start and run the engine for at least 5 seconds then turn the engine off.
YES - Substitute a known-good ECM/PCM and retest. If the system/indication goes away,
replace the original ECM/PCM.
NO - The original gauge control module is faulty; replace the gauge control module (see
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT ).
DTC B1080: POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (IG1 LINE) INPUT ERROR FOR RELAY CONTROL
MODULE AND MICU

3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) and wait for 2 seconds or more.
Is DTC B1080 indicated again?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Intermittent failure, the relay control module is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
4. Check the MICU IG1 power supply No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Go to MICU Input Test (see MICU INPUT TEST ).

NO - Replace the fuse and recheck for DTCs.
DTC B1251: COMBINATION SWITCH CONTROL UNIT INTERNAL ERROR

YES - Faulty combination switch control unit-replace the wiper/washer switch.

111
NO - Intermittent failure, the CPU in the combination switch control unit is OK at this time.
Check for loose or poor connections. If the connections are good, check the battery condition
(see BATTERY TEST ) and the charging system (see ALTERNATOR AND REGULATOR
DTC B1255: COMBINATION SWITCH CONTROL UNIT LOST COMMUNICATION WITH

MICU

YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Intermittent failure, MICU is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections. If the
connections are good, check the battery condition (see BATTERY TEST ) and the charging
system (see ALTERNATOR AND REGULATOR CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING ).
4. Check for DTCs in the combination switch control using the HDS.
YES - Go to MICU input test (see MICU INPUT TEST ).

NO - Replace the combination switch control unit.
MICU INPUT TEST

1. Remove the left side kick panel.
 2 door (see 2-DOOR - DOOR SILL AREA )
 4 door (see 4-DOOR - FRONT DOOR SILL AREA )
2. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors D, E, H, I, J, K, N, P and X.
NOTE: All connectors are wire side of female terminals.
111
Fig. 11: Identifying Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Connectors

3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
 If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
 If the terminals look OK, go to step 4.
4. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make sure these input tests at the
appropriate connectors on the under-dash fuse/relay box.
 If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
 If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 5.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX (RECONNECT CONNECTORS)

Possible cause if
Test: Desired
Cavity Wire Test condition result is not
result
obtained
111
 Blown No. 13
(20 A) fuse in
Attach to the under-hood
Under all ground: The fuse/relay box
P7 WHT/BLK
conditions ignition key light
should come on.  Blown LED
 An open in the
wire
 Blown No. 6
(7.5 A) fuse in
Ceiling light Attach to the under-dash
switch in the ground: The fuse/relay box
14 GRN/RED
middle position, ceiling light  Faulty ceiling
all doors closed should come on. light
 An open in the
wire
 Blown No. 21
D6 Check for
(7.5 A) fuse in
voltage to
Ignition switch the under-dash
J9 YEL ground: There
ON (II) fuse/relay box
should be battery
X34 voltage.  An open in the
wire
 Blown No. 27
Check for
(20 A) fuse in
voltage to
Under all the under-dash
K4 GRN/WHT ground: There
conditions fuse/relay box
should be battery
voltage.  An open in the
wire
 Blown No. 7
Check for
(10 A) fuse in
voltage to
X35 WHT/RED ground:
There should be
battery voltage.  An open in the
wire
Check for
 Poor ground
voltage to
Under all (G601)
H9 BLK ground:
conditions  An open in the
There should be
less than 1 V. wire
Check for
 Poor ground
voltage to
Under all (G502)
P1 BRN/BLK ground:
There should be
less than 1 V. wire
Check for
Under all voltage to  Poor ground
E9 BLK (G601)
conditions ground:
There should be  An open in the
111
less than 1 V. wire
5. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors D, J, N and X, and make these input tests at the
connector(s).
 If all the input tests prove OK, the multiplex integrated control unit must be faulty, replace the
under-dash fuse/ relay box assembly.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX (DISCONNECT CONNECTORS)

Possible cause if
Test: Desired
result
obtained
Check for
continuity between
terminal N22 and
the climate control
Under all An open in the
unit B (16P)
conditions wire
connector terminal
No. 14:
N22 LT BLU There should be
continuity.
Check for
Climate control unit continuity to
B(16P) connector ground: Short to ground
disconnected There should be no
continuity.
Check for
continuity between
terminal J4 and
power window
master switch 23P
conditions wire
connector terminal
No. 16:
J4 BRN/RED There should be
continuity.
Check for
Power window
continuity to
master switch 23P
ground: Short to ground
connector
There should be no
disconnected
continuity.
Check for
continuity between
terminal D11 and
relay control
D11 BLU module I (10P)
conditions wire
connector terminal
No. 7:
There should be
continuity.
111
Check for
Relay control
continuity to
module I (10P)
connector
There should be no
disconnected
continuity.
Check for
continuity between
terminal X27 and
wiper/washer
switch 8P
conditions wire
connector terminal
No. 4:
X27 LT GRN There should be
continuity.
Check for
Wiper/washer
continuity to
switch 8P
connector
There should be no
disconnected
continuity.
Check for
continuity between
terminal N28 and
Under all gauge assembly An open in the
conditions (30P) connector wire
terminal No. 25:
N28 BRN/YEL There should be
continuity.
Check for
Gauge control
continuity to
module 30P
connector
There should be no
disconnected
continuity.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE INPUT TEST

'03-05 MODELS
1. Remove the gauge control module (see GAUGE CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT ).
2. Disconnect the 30P connector from the gauge control module.
111
Fig. 12: Inspecting Connector And Socket Terminals ('03-05 Models)

4. Reconnect the connector, and make these input tests at the connector.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE (RECONNECT CONNECTOR)

Possible cause if
Test: Desired
Cavity Wire Test Condition result is not
result
obtained
 Blown No. 21
Check for
(7.5 A) fuse in
voltage to
5 YEL ground:
There should be
wire
 Blown No. 7
Check for
(10 A) fuse in
voltage to
6 WHT/RED ground:
There should be
wire
Check for
 Poor ground
voltage to
Under all (G503)
21 BLK ground:
There should be
less than 1 V. wire
111
5. Disconnect the connector from the gauge control module, and make these input tests at the connector.
 If any test indicators a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
 If all the input tests prove OK, replace the gauge control module.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE (DISCONNECT CONNECTOR)

Possible cause if
Test: Desired
result
obtained
Check for
continuity
between the No.
25 terminal and
Under all under-dash An open in the
conditions fuse/relay box N wire
(45P) connector
25 BRN/YEL No. 28 terminal:
There should be
continuity.
Under-dash Check continuity
fuse/relay box to ground: Short to ground
connector N (45P) There should be on the wire
disconnected no continuity.
'06-07 MODEL
2. Disconnect the 36P connector from the gauge control module.
111
Fig. 13: Inspecting Connector And Socket Terminals ('06-07 Model)

WIRING CONDITION SPECIFICATION

Possible cause if
Test: Desired
result
obtained
 Blown No. 21
Check for
(7.5 A) fuse in
voltage to
5 YEL ground:
There should be
wire
 Blown No. 7
Check for
(10 A) fuse in
voltage to
6 WHT/RED ground:
There should be
wire
Check for
 Poor ground
voltage to
Under all (G503)
25 BLK ground:
There should be
less than 1 V. wire
5. Disconnect the connector from the gauge assembly, and make these input tests at the connector.
111
 If all the input tests prove OK, replace the gauge control module.
WIRING CONDITION SPECIFICATION

Possible cause if
Test: Desired
result
obtained
Check for
continuity
between the No.
25 terminal and
Under all under-dash An open in the
conditions fuse/relay box N wire
(45P) connector
31 BRN/YEL No. 28 terminal:
There should be
continuity.
Under-dash Check continuity
fuse/relay box to ground: Short to ground
connector N (45P) There should be on the wire
disconnected no continuity.
DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT INPUT TEST

1. Remove the driver's door switch panel.
 2-door (see DOOR PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION )
 4-door (see FRONT DOOR PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION )
2. Disconnect the 23P connector from the power window master switch (see MASTER SWITCH
REPLACEMENT ).
Fig. 14: Disconnecting 23P Connector From Power Window Master Switch
111
DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT (RECONNECT CONNECTOR)

Possible cause if
Test: Desired
result
obtained
Check for
 Poor ground
voltage to
Under all (G501, G601)
1 BLK ground:
There should be
less than 1 V. wire
 Blown No. 27
Check for
(20 A) fuse in
voltage to
10 GRN/WHT ground:
There should be
wire
 Blown No. 21
Check for
(7.5 A) fuse in
voltage to
20 YEL ground:
There should be
wire
5. Disconnect the connector from the door multiplex control unit, and make these input tests at the
connector.
 If all the input tests prove OK, the door multiplex control unit must be faulty, replace the power
window master switch.
DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT (DISCONNECT CONNECTOR)

Possible cause if
Test: Desired
result
obtained
Check for
continuity
between terminal
No. 16 and the
under-dash
Under all fuse/relay box An open in the
111
conditions connector J (21P) wire

connector terminal
No. 4:
There should be
continuity.
16 BRN/RED
Check for
Under-dash
continuity to
fuse/relay box
connector J (21P)
There should be
disconnected
no continuity.
COMBINATION SWITCH CONTROL UNIT INPUT TEST

1. Remove the steering column covers (see STEERING COLUMN REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION ).
2. Disconnect the 8P connector from the wiper/washer switch (see WIPER/WASHER SWITCH
INPUT TEST ).
Fig. 15: Disconnecting 8P Connector From Wiper/Washer Switch

111
COMBINATION SWITCH CONTROL UNIT (RECONNECT CONNECTOR)

Possible cause if
Test: Desired
result
obtained
Check for
 Poor ground
voltage to
3 BLK ground:
There should be
less than 1 V. wire
 Blown No. 7
Check for
(10 A) fuse in
voltage to
8 WHT/RED ground:
There should be
wire
 Blown No. 21
Check for
(7.5 A) fuse in
voltage to
7 YEL ground:
There should be
wire
5. Disconnect the connector from the wiper/washer switch, and make these input tests at the connector.
 If all the input tests prove OK, the combination switch control unit must be faulty, replace the
wiper/washer switch.
COMBINATION SWITCH CONTROL UNIT (DISCONNECT CONNECTOR)

Possible cause if
Test: Desired
result
obtained
Check for
continuity between
terminal 4 and the
under-dash
An open in the
4 LT GRN Under all conditions fuse/relay box
wire
connector X (39P)
connector terminal
No. 27:
There should be
111
continuity.
Under-dash Check for
fuse/relay box continuity to
connector X (39P) ground: Short to ground
connector There should be no
disconnected continuity.
RELAY CONTROL MODULE INPUT TEST

1. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box under cover.
2. Disconnect the 10P connector from the under-hood fuse/relay box.
111
Fig. 16: Disconnecting 10P Connector From Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box

RELAY CONTROL MODULE INPUT (RECONNECT CONNECTOR)

111
Possible cause if
Test: Desired
result
obtained
Check for voltage  Poor ground
Under all to ground: (G501, G601)
10 BLK
conditions There should be  An open in the
less than 1 V. wire
 Blown No. 21
Check for voltage (7.5 A) fuse in
Ignition switch to ground: the under-dash
8 YEL
ON (II) There should be fuse/relay box
wire
5. Disconnect the 10P connector from the under-hood fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the
connector.
 If all the input tests prove OK, the relay module must be faulty, replace the under-hood
fuse/relay box.
RELAY CONTROL MODULE INPUT (DISCONNECT CONNECTOR)

Possible cause if
Test: Desired
result
obtained
Check for
continuity between
terminal 7 and the
under-dash
fuse/relay box An open in the
Under all conditions
connector D (17P) wire
connector terminal
7 BLU No. 11:
There should be
continuity.
Check for
Under-dash
continuity to
fuse/relay box
connector D (17P)
There should be no
disconnected
continuity.
111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Cruise Control - Accord
Cruise Control - Accord
Fig. 1: Locating Cruise Control Components

111
2 августа 2011 г. 14:42:03
Fig. 2: Locating Cruise Control Components (2003-05 Models)

111
Fig. 3: Locating Cruise Control Components (2006 Models)

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX

'03-05 MODELS

Symptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for
1. Check for PGM-FI and body

DTCs.
2. Check horn operation.
3. Check the cruise control
combination switch (see
CRUISE CONTROL
COMBINATION SWITCH
TEST/REPLACEMENT ).
4. Test the brake pedal position
switch (see BRAKE SYSTEM
TEST ), and check its
adjustment (see BRAKE
PEDAL AND BRAKE  Blown No. 13 (20A) fuse
PEDAL POSITION SWITCH in the under-hood
111
ADJUSTMENT ). fuse/relay box

5. Test the clutch pedal position  Blown No. 18 (15A) fuse
switch (see CLUTCH PEDAL in the under-dash
POSITION SWITCH TEST ), fuse/relay box
and check its adjustment (M/T)  Poor ground: G202,
(see CLUTCH PEDAL, G501
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION
SWITCH, AND CLUTCH  Faulty horn relay
INTERLOCK SWITCH  Faulty ECM/PCM
ADJUSTMENT ).  Open circuit, loose or
6. Do the cruise control unit input disconnected terminals:
test (see CRUISE CONTROL GRN/YEL, LT GRN,
UNIT INPUT TEST ). PNK, LT GRN/BLK,
Cruise control cannot be set 7. Check for continuity between GRY/RED, LT BLU
engine control module (M/T), PNK (A/T)
(ECM)/powertrain control
module (PCM) connector
terminal E26 and cruise control
unit 14P connector terminal No.
12.
 If there is continuity,
replace the ECM/PCM
(see ECM/PCM
REPLACEMENT ).
 If there is no continuity,
repair open or short in the
wire.
 Faulty gauge control
Cruise control can be set, but Do the gauge control module self- module
the cruise main indicator diagnostic function (see SELF-  Open circuit, loose or
does not come on DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION ). disconnected terminals:
LT GRN
1. Do the gauge control module
self-diagnostic function (see  Faulty gauge control
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC module
Cruise control can be set, but
FUNCTION ).  Open circuit, loose or
the cruise control indicator
does not come on 2. Do the cruise control unit input disconnected terminals:
test on terminal No. 10 (see BLU/YEL
CRUISE CONTROL UNIT  Poor ground: G501
INPUT TEST ).
1. Check the cruise control actuator

(see CRUISE CONTROL
Cruise speed is noticeably
ACTUATOR TEST ).
higher or lower than what
was set 2. Adjust the cruise control
actuator cable (see CRUISE
CONTROL ACTUATOR
CABLE ADJUSTMENT ).
111
3. Do the cruise control unit input

test on terminal No. 12 (see
CRUISE CONTROL UNIT
INPUT TEST ).
(see CRUISE CONTROL
ACTUATOR TEST ).
2. Adjust the cruise control
Excessive overshooting or actuator cable (see CRUISE
undershooting when trying to CONTROL ACTUATOR
set speed CABLE ADJUSTMENT ).
CRUISE CONTROL UNIT
INPUT TEST ).
(see CRUISE CONTROL
ACTUATOR TEST ).
2. Adjust the cruise control
Speed fluctuates on a flat actuator cable (see CRUISE
road with the cruise control CONTROL ACTUATOR
set CABLE ADJUSTMENT ).
CRUISE CONTROL UNIT
INPUT TEST ).
Vehicle does not decelerate CRUISE CONTROL
or accelerate accordingly COMBINATION SWITCH Open circuit, loose or
when the set/decel, TEST/REPLACEMENT ). disconnected terminals:
resume/accel, or cancel 2. Do the cruise control unit input GRN/RED, LT GRN/BLK
switch is pressed test on terminals No. 6 and No. 7
(see CRUISE CONTROL
UNIT INPUT TEST ).
CRUISE CONTROL UNIT
INPUT TEST ).
Set speed does not cancel 2. Test the clutch pedal position  Short to ground in the LT
(engine rpm stays high) when switch (see CLUTCH PEDAL BLU wire
the clutch pedal is pressed POSITION SWITCH TEST ),  Faulty clutch pedal
(M/T) and check its adjustment (see position switch
CLUTCH PEDAL, CLUTCH
PEDAL POSITION SWITCH,
AND CLUTCH INTERLOCK
SWITCH ADJUSTMENT ).
111
Set speed does not cancel  Short to ground in the

Do the cruise control unit input test on
(engine rpm stays high) when PNK wire
terminal No. 14 (see CRUISE
the shift lever is moved to N  Faulty transmission range
CONTROL UNIT INPUT TEST ).
(A/T) switch
test on terminals No. 1 and No. 5
(see CRUISE CONTROL  Short to power on
UNIT INPUT TEST ). BRN/BLK wire
Set speed does not cancel 2. Test the brake pedal position  Open circuit, loose or
when the brake pedal is switch (see BRAKE SYSTEM disconnected terminals:
pressed INSPECTION AND TEST ), WHT/BLK
and check its adjustment (see  Faulty brake pedal
BRAKE PEDAL AND position switch
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION
CRUISE CONTROL
Set speed does not cancel COMBINATION SWITCH
when the cruise control main TEST/REPLACEMENT ). Short to power on PNK wire
switch is pressed 2. Do the cruise control unit input
CRUISE CONTROL UNIT
INPUT TEST ).
CRUISE CONTROL
Set speed does not cancel COMBINATION SWITCH Open circuit, loose or
when the cancel switch is TEST/REPLACEMENT ). disconnected terminals: LT
pressed 2. Do the cruise control unit input GRN/BLK or GRY/RED
test on terminals No. 6 and No. 7
(see CRUISE CONTROL
UNIT INPUT TEST ).
Set speed will not resume
CRUISE CONTROL
when the resume/accel switch
COMBINATION SWITCH Open circuit, loose or
is pressed (with the cruise
TEST/REPLACEMENT ). disconnected terminals:
control main switch turned
2. Do the cruise control unit input BRN/BLK, WHT/BLK, LT
on, and set speed temporarily
test on terminals No. 1, No. 5 GRN/BLK
canceled by pressing the
brake pedal) and No. 7 (see CRUISE
CONTROL UNIT INPUT
TEST ).
The transmission shifts down
Troubleshoot the cruise control Open circuit, loose or
slower than normal when
communication circuit (see CRUISE disconnected terminals:
going uphill with the cruise
CONTROL COMMUNICATION BLU/BLK
control on (A/T)
CIRCUIT
111
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
2006-07 MODELS
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX ('06-07 MODELS)

DTCs.
2. Check the No. 13 (20 A) fuse in
the under-hood fuse/relay box,
and the No. 18 (15 A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box.
Cruise control cannot be set 3. Do the cruise control input test Poor ground G501
(see CRUISE CONTROL
INPUT TEST ).
4. Do the cruise control
combination switch test (see
CRUISE CONTROL
COMBINATION SWITCH
TEST/REPLACEMENT ).
DTCs.
self-diagnostic function
Cruise control can be set, but procedure (see SELF-
the cruise main indicator DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION ). Faulty gauge control module
does not come on 3. Do the cruise control input test
(see CRUISE CONTROL
INPUT TEST ).
Test the cruise control master

button signal input.
DTCs.
self-diagnostic function
Cruise control can be set, but procedure (see SELF-
the cruise control indicator DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION ). Faulty gauge control module
does not come on 3. Do the cruise control input test
(see CRUISE CONTROL
INPUT TEST ).
Test the cruise control indicator

signal input.
DTCs.
2. Do the cruise control input test
111
(see CRUISE CONTROL

INPUT TEST ).
Test the cruise control Set/decel

Vehicle does not decelerate
and Resume/accel switch signal
or accelerate accordingly Open circuit, loose or
inputs.
when the set/decel or disconnected terminals: LT
resume/accel switch is GRN/BLK or GRY/RED wire
pressed 3. Do the cruise control
CRUISE CONTROL
COMBINATION SWITCH
TEST/REPLACEMENT ).
DTCs.
(see CRUISE CONTROL
INPUT TEST ).  Short in the BRN/BLK
Set speed does not cancel
wire
when the brake pedal is Test the brake pedal position
pressed  Faulty brake pedal
switch signal input.
position switch
3. Do the brake pedal position
switch test (see BRAKE
SYSTEM INSPECTION AND
TEST ).
DTCs.
(see CRUISE CONTROL
INPUT TEST ).
 Short in the LT BLU wire
(engine rpm stays high) Test the clutch pedal position
when the clutch pedal is  Faulty clutch pedal
pressed (M/T) position switch
3. Do the clutch pedal position
switch test (see CRUISE
CONTROL COMBINATION
SWITCH
TEST/REPLACEMENT ).

DTCs.
2. Do the cruise control input test Short to ground in the LT GRN
when the cruise control main
(see CRUISE CONTROL wire
switch is turned off
INPUT TEST ).
Test the cruise control main

111

CRUISE CONTROL
COMBINATION SWITCH
TEST/REPLACEMENT ).
DTCs.
(see CRUISE CONTROL
INPUT TEST ).
Set speed does not cancel Open circuit, loose or
when the cancel switch is Test the cruise control Cancel disconnected terminals: LT
pressed switch signal input. GRN/BLK or GRY/RED wire

CRUISE CONTROL
COMBINATION SWITCH
TEST/REPLACEMENT ).
DTCs.
2. Check the brake pedal position
switch adjustment (see
SYMPTOM
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
Set speed will not resume 3. Do the cruise control input test
(see CRUISE CONTROL  Open circuit, loose or
when the resume/accel
INPUT TEST ). disconnected terminals:
switch is pressed (with the
LT GRN/BLK,
cruise control main switch
Test the cruise control GRY/RED wire
turned on, and set speed
temporarily canceled by Resume/accel switch signal  Faulty brake pedal
pressing the brake pedal) input. Test the brake pedal position switch
position switch signal input.

CRUISE CONTROL
COMBINATION SWITCH
TEST/REPLACEMENT ).

DTCs.
2. Check the clutch pedal position
switch adjustment (see
CLUTCH PEDAL, CLUTCH
PEDAL POSITION SWITCH,
AND CLUTCH INTERLOCK
Set speed will not resume SWITCH ADJUSTMENT ).
when the resume/accel 3. Do the cruise control input test  Open circuit, loose or
111
switch is pressed (with the (see CRUISE CONTROL disconnected terminals:

cruise control main switch INPUT TEST ). LT GRN/BLK wire
turned on, and set speed  Faulty clutch pedal
temporarily canceled by Test the cruise control position switch
pressing the clutch pedal) Resume/accel switch signal
(M/T) input. Test the clutch pedal
position switch signal input.

CRUISE CONTROL
COMBINATION SWITCH
TEST/REPLACEMENT ).
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
'03-05 MODELS
111
Fig. 4: Cruise Control Circuit Diagram (2003-05 Models)

'06-07 MODELS
111
Fig. 5: Cruise Control Circuit Diagram (2006 Models)

CRUISE CONTROL COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING

A/T ('03-05 MODELS)
1. Start the engine.

2. Turn on the cruise control main switch, then drive the vehicle at speeds over 25 mph (40 km/h) with
the cruise control.
111
Does the cruise control operate?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Check the cruise control unit (see CRUISE CONTROL UNIT INPUT TEST ) or cruise
control actuator.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
4. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 in HOW
TO USE THE HDS (HONDA DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM) ). Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and
jump the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the powertrain control module (PCM)
from damage.
5. Disconnect PCM connector D (17P) and cruise control unit 14P connector.
6. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal D12 and body ground.
111
Fig. 6: Checking Continuity Between PCM Connector Terminal D12 And Body Ground
Is there continuity?
YES - Repair a short to ground in the wire between PCM connector terminal D12 and the cruise
control unit 14P connector terminal No. 8.
NO - Go to step 7.
7. Reconnect PCM connector D (17P) and the cruise control unit 14P connector.
8. Connect a voltmeter between cruise control unit 14P connector terminal No. 8 and body ground. Test-
drive the vehicle at speeds over 25 mph (40 km/h) with the cruise control set, and watch the voltmeter.
111
Fig. 7: Connecting Voltmeter Between Cruise Control Unit 14P Connector Terminal No. 8 And
Body Ground
Is there about 1 V?
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Substitute a known-good cruise control unit. If the system works properly, replace the
cruise control unit.
9. Connect a voltmeter between PCM connector terminal D12 and body ground. Drive the vehicle at
speeds over 25 mph (40 km/h) with the cruise control set, and watch the voltmeter.
111
Fig. 8: Connecting Voltmeter Between PCM Connector Terminal D12 And Body Ground
Is there about 1 V?
YES - Check for a loose connector or wire between the cruise control unit and the PCM. If the
wire is OK, update the PCM. If it does not have the latest software (see UPDATING THE
ECM/PCM ), substitute a known-good PCM (see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), and
recheck. If the system works properly, replace the original PCM (see ECM/PCM
REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Repair an open in the wire between PCM connector terminal D12 and the control unit 14P
connector terminal No. 8.
CRUISE CONTROL UNIT INPUT TEST
111
'03-05 MODELS
There are SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see
COMPONENT LOCATION INDEX ) and precautions and procedures (see PRECAUTIONS AND
PROCEDURES ), before doing repairs or service.
1. Disconnect the 14P connector from the control unit.

2. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to make sure they are all making good contact.
 If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
Fig. 9: Inspecting Connector And Socket Terminals

3. With the 14P connector disconnected, do these input tests.

 If test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
 If all the input tests prove OK, the cruise control unit may by faulty. Substitute a known-good
cruise control unit, and retest. If the system works properly, replace the cruise control unit.
CRUISE CONTROL UNIT INPUT TEST (2003-05 MODELS)

Test: Desired Possible cause if result is not
Cavity Wire Test condition
result obtained
Check the operation  Faulty brake pedal position

1 BRN/BLK
of the magnetic switch
Connect battery clutch: Clutch  Faulty actuator
111
power should click and  Poor ground (G202)

output link should
be locked.  An open in the wire
 Short to ground
Check for
continuity to
 Poor ground (G501)
3 BLK Under all conditions ground: There
should be  An open in the wire
continuity.
Check for voltage
 Blown No. 18 (15A) fuse in the
Ignition switch ON to ground: There
4 BLK/RED under-dash fuse/relay box
(II) should be battery
voltage.  An open in the wire
Check for voltage
to ground: There  Blown No. 13 (20A) fuse in the
should be battery under-hood fuse/relay box
Brake pedal pressed,
5 WHT/BLK voltage with the  Faulty brake pedal position
then released
pedal pressed, and 0 switch
V with the pedal  An open in the wire
released.
Check for voltage
to ground: There
should be battery
Set/decel switch voltage. When
6 GRY/RED
pressed testing terminal No.  Blown No. 13 (20A) fuse in the
6, there should be under-hood fuse/relay box
no voltage on  Faulty horn relay
terminal No. 7.
Check for voltage  Faulty cruise control
to ground: There combination switch
should be battery  Faulty cable reel
LT Resume/accel switch voltage. When  An open in the wire
7
GRN/BLK pressed testing terminal No.
7, there should be
no voltage on
terminal No. 6.
Connect battery
9 BRN/YEL power to the Check the operation
of the actuator  Faulty actuator
BRN/YEL terminal
motor: You should  An open in the wire
11 BRN/WHT and ground to the hear the motor.
BRN/WHT terminal
Attach to ground:
CRUISE  Blown bulb
Ignition switch ON CONTROL
10 BLU/YEL  Faulty gauge control module
(II) indicator in the
gauge assembly  An open in the wire
should comes on.
Ignition switch ON
(II) and cruise control
main switch ON; raise
111
the front of the

vehicle, and rotate one
wheel slowly while Check for voltage
holding the other between the
wheel BLU/WHT (+) and  Faulty ECM/PCM
12 BLU/WHT BLK (-) terminal:  An open in the wire
NOTE: There should be 0--  Short to ground
This input test must -5 V or more
be done with the 14P repeatedly.
connector
reconnected.
Check for
continuity between
No. 2 terminal and
No. 13 terminal:  Faulty cruise control
There should be combination switch
Cruise control main
13 LT GRN continuity with the
switch ON, then OFF  Faulty cable reel
cruise control main
switch ON and no  An open in the wire
continuity with the
cruise control main
switch OFF.
Check for
continuity to
ground: There
should be  Faulty clutch pedal position
continuity. switch
M/T: LT
Clutch pedal released
BLU  Poor ground (G501)
NOTE:
There should be  An open in the wire
no continuity
when the clutch
pedal is pressed.
14
Check for
continuity to
ground: There
should be
continuity.
 Faulty ECM/PCM
A/T: PNK Shift lever in D, D3
NOTE:  An open in the wire
There should be
no continuity
when shift lever is
in other positions.
Reconnect the cruise
control unit 14P Check for voltage  Blown No. 18 (15A) fuse in the
connector, turn the to ground: There under-dash fuse/relay box
2 PNK
ignition switch ON should be battery  Faulty cruise control unit
(II), and cruise control voltage.  Short to ground
main switch ON
111
Reconnect the cruise  Blown No. 18 (15A) fuse in the

control unit 14P under-hood fuse/relay box
connector, start the  Faulty cruise control unit
engine, press the  Short to ground
Check for voltage
cruise control main
8 BLU/BLK to ground: There  Cruise control communication
switch ON, and drive
should be about 1V circuit problem (see CRUISE
the vehicle at speeds
over 25 mph (40 CONTROL
km/h) with the cruise COMMUNICATION
control set CIRCUIT
TROUBLESHOOTING )
CRUISE CONTROL INPUT TEST

'06-07 MODELS
1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the data link connector (DLC).
2. Go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A, and check for DTCs.
3. Go to PGM-FI, and check for DTCs.
5. Do the following tests while monitoring parameters in the PGM-FI DATA LIST with the HDS.
NOTE: Intermittent failures are often caused by loose circuit connections. While
monitoring cruise control inputs, flex the circuits, and note if any of the test
result change.
CRUISE CONTROL INPUT TEST ('06-07 MODEL)

Parameter: Desired Possible cause if result is
Signal to be tested Test condition result not obtained
 Faulty brake pedal
position switch
 Blown No. 18 (15
A) fuse in the
under-dash
fuse/relay box
CRUISE BRAKE SW
should indicate OFF  An open in the wire
Brake pedal pressed, between the
Brake switch signal when the brake pedal is
then released ECM/PCM and the
pressed and ON when the
brake pedal is released. brake pedal position
switch
 A wire shorted to
ground between the
ECM/PCM and the
brake pedal position
switch
 Faulty clutch pedal

position switch
111
 An open in the wire

between the ECM
and the clutch pedal
SHIFT/CLUTCH SW position switch
should indicate OFF
Clutch pedal position Clutch pedal pressed,  A wire shorted to
when the clutch pedal is
switch signal (M/T) then released ground between the
pressed and ON when the
clutch pedal is released. ECM and the clutch
pedal position
switch
 Poor ground G501
SHIFT/TRANS RANGE  Faulty transmission
SW should indicate OFF range switch
in P, R, and N position
and ON in D, and D3  An open in the wire
position. between the PCM
and the
transmission range
Transmission range Shift lever in D, or D3
switch
switch signal (A/T) position
 A wire shorted to
ground between the
PCM and the
transmission range
switch
 Poor ground G101
 Faulty cruise
control combination
switch
between the gauge
assembly and the
CRUISE MASTER SW
cruise control
should indicate ON when
combination switch
the cruise control main
Cruise control main Cruise control main  A wire shorted to
switch is turned ON and
switch signal switch ON and OFF ground between the
OFF when the cruise
control main switch is gauge assembly and
turned OFF. the cruise control
combination switch
between the cruise
control combination
switch and the
ground
 Faulty cruise
control combination
switch
CRUISE SET SW should  An open in the wire
indicate ON when the between the gauge
Set/decel switch Set/decel switch is assembly and the
111
pressed and released pressed and OFF when cruise control

the Set/decel switch is combination switch
released.  A wire shorted to
Set switch signal ground between the
gauge assembly and
the cruise control
combination switch
 Faulty cruise
control combination
switch
CRUISE RESUME SW  An open in the wire
should indicate ON when between the gauge
Resume/accel pressed the Resume/accel is assembly and the
Resume switch signal cruise control
and released pressed and OFF when
the Resume/accel is combination switch
released.  A wire shorted to
ground between the
gauge assembly and
the cruise control
combination switch
CRUISE CANCEL SW
should indicate ON when
Cancel switch pressed the Cancel switch is  Faulty cruise
Cancel switch signal control combination
and released pressed and OFF when
the Cancel switch is switch
released.
CRUISE CONTROL COMBINATION SWITCH TEST/REPLACEMENT

LOCATION INDEX ) and precautions and procedures (see PRECAUTIONS AND PROCEDURES ),
before doing repairs or service.
1. Remove the driver's airbag (see DRIVER'S AIRBAG REPLACEMENT ).

2. Remove the two screws, then disconnect the connector, and remove the switch.
111
Fig. 10: Disconnecting Connector And Removing Switch

3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to Fig. 11 .
 If there is continuity, and it matches the table, but switch failure occurred on the cruise control
unit input test, check and repair the wire harness on the switch circuit.
 If there is no continuity in one or both positions, replace the switch.
111
Fig. 11: Checking Continuity Between Terminals Chart

CRUISE CONTROL ACTUATOR TEST

'03-05 MODELS
1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the actuator (B).
111
Fig. 12: Disconnecting 4P Connector From Actuator

2. Remove the cover (A), and check the output linkage (B) for smooth movement.
111
Fig. 13: Removing Cover And Checking Output Linkage For Smooth Movement
111
3. Connect battery power to the No. 2 terminal and ground to the No. 1 terminal.
4. Check for a clicking sound from the magnetic clutch. The output linkage should be locked. If the
output linkage is not locked, replace the actuator assembly.
5. Check the operation of the actuator motor in each output linkage position according to the table
below. You should hear the motor.
ACTUATOR MOTOR OPERATION

Battery power polarities Output linkage position
(+) (-) FULL CLOSE MIDDLE POSITION FULL OPEN
No. 4 Terminal No. 3 Terminal The motor runs. The motor runs. The motor stops.
No. 3 Terminal No. 4 Terminal The motor stops. The motor runs. The motor runs.
Fig. 14: Checking Operation Of Actuator Motor In Each Output Linkage Position
6. If the actuator motor does not operate as specified, replace the actuator assembly.
CRUISE CONTROL ACTUATOR/CABLE REPLACEMENT

'03-05 MODELS
1. Loosen the locknut (A), then remove the cruise control cable (B) from the throttle linkage.
111
Fig. 15: Removing Cruise Control Cable From Throttle Linkage

2. Disconnect the 4P connector (A), and remove the actuator cover (B), then remove the bolts securing
the actuator.
111
Fig. 16: Disconnecting 4P Connector And Removing Actuator Cover

3. Remove the actuator cable from the actuator.
111
Fig. 17: Removing Actuator Cable From Actuator

4. Install in the reverse order of removal, and adjust the free play at the throttle linkage after connecting
the cruise control cable.
CRUISE CONTROL ACTUATOR CABLE ADJUSTMENT

'03-05 MODELS
1. Check that the actuator cable (A) moves smoothly with no binding or sticking.
111
Fig. 18: Checking Actuator Cable Moves Smoothly With No Binding Or Sticking
2. Measure the amount of movement of the output linkage (B) until the engine speed starts to increase.
At first, the output linkage should be located at the fully closed position (C). The free play (D) should
be 3.75+/-0.5 mm (0.15+/-0.02 in.).
3. If the free play is not within specifications, loosen the locknut (E), and turn the adjusting nut (F) until
the free play is as specified, then retighten the locknut.
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH TEST

1. Disconnect the 3P connector from the clutch pedal position switch.
111
Fig. 19: Disconnecting 3P Connector From Clutch Pedal Position Switch

2. Check for continuity between the terminals according to Fig. 20 .

 If the continuity is not as specified, replace the clutch pedal position switch.
 If OK, install the clutch pedal position switch, and adjust the pedal height (see CLUTCH
PEDAL, CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH, AND CLUTCH INTERLOCK
111

111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Immobilizer System - Accord
Immobilizer System - Accord
Fig. 1: Locating Immobilizer System Components

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The vehicle is equipped with a type IV immobilizer system that will disable the vehicle unless the proper
ignition key is used. This system consists of a transponder located in the ignition key, an immobilizer
control unit-receiver, an indicator light, and the ECM/PCM.
When the key is inserted in the ignition switch and turned to the ON (II) position, the immobilizer control
unit-receiver sends power to the transponder in the ignition key. The transponder then sends a coded signal
back to the immobilizer control unit-receiver which then sends a coded signal to the ECM/PCM. The code is
a rolling type embedded in the immobilizer control unit-receiver instead the ECM/PCM.
111
2 августа 2011 г. 14:42:45
Fig. 2: Immobilizer Control Unit Receiver System Diagram

NOTE: This key is similar in appearance to other models, but it is a rolling code
type.
Only key with a V on the shank can be used.
 If the proper key has been used, the immobilizer indicator light will come on for about 2 seconds, then
go off.
 If the wrong key has been used or the code was not received or recognized by the unit, the indicator
light will come on for about 2 seconds, then it will blink until the ignition switch is turned OFF.
 If the ignition switch is turned OFF, the indicator will blink for about 5 seconds to signal that the unit
has reset correctly, then the indicator will go off.
111
Fig. 3: Identifying Immobilizer Indicator Light Blinking Pattern

SYSTEM CHECK
NOTE: The HDS can be used to check the state of the immobilizer key registration
and the IMOCD line by doing a SYSTEM CHECK.
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector.

3. Monitor the System Check in the Immobilizer Info with the HDS.
4. If the HDS displays the "Immobilizer system is normal", the immobilizer system is OK. If the HDS
displays any other messages, check as follows:
SYSTEM CHECK CHART

Status Log No. System Check Possible Failures
 This key is not registered in
the immobilizer unit. Try to
register keys by using
"KEYS".
 The communication was not
Immobilizer system is not good between the antenna and
A-1 the immobilizer key by
normal
influence of metal such as
key chains.
good between the antenna and
the immobilizer key by
battery voltage low.
 Intermittent interruption
between transponder and
immobilizer unit.
 The immobilizer key type is
different. It is not for this
vehicle but for another one or
for other company's one.
 Key failure (transponder
Immobilizer system is not failure)
A-2
normal  The communication was not
key chains.
111
 The ignition switch was

turned on with a non-
immobilizer key.
 The immobilizer key type is
different. It is not for this
vehicle but for another one or
for other company's one.
 Key failure (transponder
failure)
Immobilizer system is not
A-3  The communication was not
normal
key chains.
 Immobilizer unit failure
 The ECM/PCM was not
registered. Try to register the
ECM/PCM by using
"REPLACE ECM/PCM".
Immobilizer system is not good between the ECM/PCM
B-1 and the immobilizer unit by
normal
good between the
immobilizer unit and the
ECM/PCM by influence of
some noise.
 The ECM/PCM was not
registered. Try to register the
ECM/PCM by using
"REPLACE ECM/PCM".
Immobilizer system is not good between the ECM/PCM
B-2 and the immobilizer unit by
normal
good between the
some noise.
 Harness short from the

ECM/PCM to the
111
immobilizer unit. (IMOCD

short)
good between the ECM/PCM
and the immobilizer unit by
D-1  The communication was not
normal
good between the
some noise.
 ECM/PCM failure
 Blown fuse
 Harness open from the
ECM/PCM to the
immobilizer unit.
good between the ECM/PCM
and the immobilizer unit by
D-3 battery voltage low.
normal
good between the
some noise.
 ECM/PCM failure
STATUS LOG
If you suspect there is a immobilizer system problem, check the status log. The HDS can be used to check
the number of times the immobilizer control unit receiver doesn't permit the engine to run by check the
LOG.STATUS.
NOTE: Status log may not be available for all models. If you have an updated
immobilizer control unit-receiver ('03-05 models) or a '06-07 models, status
log should be available.

3. On the HDS screen, select Honda systems, select immobilizer set-up, select immobilizer information,
then select status log.
4. Check the Status log count. Troubleshoot the status with the highest count first. If no counts are listed,
the immobilizer system is OK. Continue with normal symptom troubleshooting.
111
STATUS DETECTING ITEM REFERENCE

Status Log No. Detected Item Probable Cause
1. The key was not registered
KEY CODE MISMATCH
A-1 (Code format normal, but code 2. Interference from metal such
data is mismatch) as key chains
3. Low battery voltage
1. Ignition switch was turned on
with another type of
immobilizer key or
KEY CODE MISMATCH aftermarket key
A-2
(Code format failure)
2. Interference from metal such
as key chains
1. Ignition switch was turned on
with another type of
immobilizer key or
aftermarket key
KEY CODE MISMATCH (No 2. Interference from metal such
A-3 key code or non-immobilizer as key chains
key)
4. Key failure
5. Immobilizer control unit-
receiver failure
1. ECM/PCM was not registered
correctly
ECM/PCM CODE MISMATCH 3. Poor or loose terminal
B-1 (Code format normal, but code connections at the
data is mismatch) immobilizer control unit-
receiver
4. Communication line electrical
noise
1. ECM/PCM was not registered
correctly
ECM/PCM MISMATCH (Code 3. Poor or loose terminal
B-2 connections at the
format failure)
immobilizer control unit-
receiver
noise

2. Poor or loose terminal
IMOCD LINE PROBLEM connections at the
111
(Short to ground) immobilizer control unit-

receiver and the ECM/PCM
D-1
noise
1. Open or short in the harness
from the ECM/PCM to the
receiver
IMOCD LINE PROBLEM
D-3 3. Poor or loose terminal
(Open line or ECM/PCM failure)
connections at the
receiver and the ECM/PCM
noise
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
111
Fig. 4: Immobilizer System Circuit Diagram

TROUBLESHOOTING
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) with a programmed key.
2. Check to see if the immobilizer indicator comes on.
Does the indicator come on?
111
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Go to step 12.
3. Check the immobilizer indicator operation.
Does the indicator come on for 2 seconds, then go off?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Go to step 6.
4. Try to crank the engine.
Does the starter motor operate?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Check the starter motor.
5. Try to start the engine.
Does the engine start?
YES - If available, check the Status Log in the Immobilizer Info with the HDS (see STATUS
LOG ). If the Status Log is not available, the immobilizer system is OK at this time.
NO - Go to step 25.
6. Check to see if the immobilizer indicator comes on and blinks.
Does the indicator blink?
YES - Go to step 25.

NO - Go to step 7.
7. Disconnect the 7P connector from the immobilizer control unit-receiver.
8. Check to see if the immobilizer indicator goes off.
Does the indicator go off?
YES - Check the immobilizer control unit-receiver.

NO - Go to step 9.
10. Remove the gauge control module and disconnect its 30P ('03-05 models) or 36P ('06-07 models)
connector (see GAUGE CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT ).
11. Check for continuity between the immobilizer control unit-receiver 7P connector No. 5 (IMOARM)
terminal and body ground.
111
Fig. 5: Checking Continuity Between Immobilizer Control Unit Receiver & Body Ground
YES - Repair a short in the wire.

NO - Faulty immobilizer indicator, replace the gauge control module.
Does the engine start?

NO - Go to step 18.
15. Check for voltage between the immobilizer control unit-receiver 7P connector No. 7 (+B) terminal
and body ground.
111
Fig. 6: Checking Voltage Between Immobilizer Control Unit-Receiver & Body Ground
Is there battery voltage?

NO - Faulty No. 7 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, check for an
open in the wire between the immobilizer control unit-receiver and under-dash fuse/relay box.
16. Remove the gauge control module and disconnect its 30P ('03-05 models) or 36P ('06-07 models)
connector (see GAUGE CONTROL MODULE` REPLACEMENT ).
17. Check for continuity between the immobilizer control unit-receiver 7P connector No. 5 (IMOARM)
terminal and gauge control module 30P ('03-05 models) or 36P ('06-07 models) connector No. 28
('03-05 models) or No. 21 ('06-07 models) terminal.
111
Fig. 7: Checking Continuity Between Immobilizer Control Unit-Receiver & Gauge Control
Module ('03-05 Models)
111
Fig. 8: Checking Continuity Between Immobilizer Control Unit-Receiver & Gauge Control
Module ('06-07 models)
YES - Faulty immobilizer indicator, replace the gauge control module.

NO - Repair an open in the wire.
21. Check for voltage between the immobilizer control unit-receiver 7P connector No. 6 (IG1) terminal
and body ground.
111
Fig. 9: Checking Voltage Between Immobilizer Control Unit-Receiver & Body Ground

NO - Faulty No. 19 (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, check for an
open in the wire between the immobilizer control unit-receiver and under-dash fuse/relay box.
23. Disconnect the 31P E connector from the ECM/PCM.
24. Check for continuity between the immobilizer control unit-receiver 7P connector No. 1 (LG3)
terminal and ECM/PCM connector E (31P) No. 3 terminal.
111
Fig. 10: Checking Continuity Between Immobilizer Control Unit-Receiver & ECM/PCM
YES - Check the immobilizer control unit-receiver.

28. Look at the System Check in the Immobilizer Info with the HDS (see SYSTEM CHECK ).
Is the immobilizer system normal?
YES - Go back to step 1.

NO - Go to step 29.
29. Verify the System Check display on the HDS for the following information:
111
 Harness short from the ECM/PCM to the immobilizer unit. (S-net line short)
 The communication was not good between the ECM/PCM and the immobilizer unit by the
 The communication was not good between the immobilizer unit and the ECM/PCM by
influence of some noise.
 ECM/PCM failure
Does the HDS display any of the above information?

NO - Go to step 34.
32. Disconnect the ECM/PCM connector E (31P).
33. Check for continuity between the immobilizer control unit-receiver 7P connector No. 2 (IMOCD)
terminal and body ground.
111
Fig. 11: Checking Continuity Between Immobilizer Control Unit-Receiver & Body Ground
YES - Repair a short in the wire.

NO - Substitute a known-good immobilizer control unit-receiver and/or ECM/PCM.
34. Verify the System Check display on the HDS for the following information:
 Blown fuse
 Harness open from the ECM/PCM and the immobilizer unit.
 The communication was not good between the ECM/PCM and the immobilizer unit by battery
voltage low.
 The communication was not good between the immobilizer unit and the ECM/PCM by
influence of some noise.
 ECM/PCM failure
111
Does the HDS display any of the above information?

NO - Check the Possible Failures shown on the System Check display (see SYSTEM
CHECK ).
37. Disconnect the ECM/PCM connector from the E (31P).
38. Check for continuity between the immobilizer control unit-receiver 7P connector No. 2 (IMOCD)
terminal and ECM/PCM connector E (31P) No. 27 terminal.
Fig. 12: Checking Continuity Between Immobilizer Control Unit Receiver & ECM/PCM
YES - Substitute a known-good immobilizer control unit-receiver and/or ECM/PCM.

111
IMMOBILIZER CONTROL UNIT-RECEIVER REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the dashboard lower cover (see DRIVER'S DASHBOARD LOWER COVER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).
INSTALLATION ).
3. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the immobilizer control unit-receiver (B).
Fig. 13: Disconnecting 7P Connector From Immobilizer Control Unit-Receiver

4. Remove the two screws and the immobilizer control unit-receiver from the ignition key cylinder (C).
5. Install the immobilizer control unit-receiver in the reverse order of removal.
6. After replacement, check the immobilizer system.
111
IMMOBILIZER KEY REGISTRATION
NOTE:  The HDS is required for registration of the immobilizer keys.

 Check for aftermarket electrical equipment that can cause problems
with transponder operation.
 The immobilizer control unit-receiver can store up to six immobilizer
keys.
ADD A NEW KEY
1. Have a registered key, a new immobilizer key, and the first pass word from the iN system.
4. Select "IMMOBILIZER" from the "SYSTEM SELECT"menu.
5. Select "Keys", then "Add 1 key".
6. Do the registration according to the instruction of HDS screen.
7. Check if the engine can be stared by the newly registered key.
ADD NEW KEYS
1. Have a registered key, all new keys, and the immobilizer PCM code.
4. Select "IMMOBILIZER" from the "SYSTEM SELECT" menu.
5. Select "Add and Delete Keys", or "Delete or Add Multiple Keys".
7. Check if the engine can be stared by all the registered keys.
REPLACE ANY OF THE KEYS
NOTE: If any of the registered keys were lost, do the following procedure to delete
the lost rested key.
1. Have at least on original key, were lost, do thee following procedure to delete the lost registered key.
4. Select "IMMOBILIZER" from the "SYSTEM SELECT".
5. Select "KEYS", then "REWRITE KEYS".
ALL KEYS ARE LOST
1. Prepare all new keys and have the immobilizer PCM code.
111

4. Select 'IMMOBILIZER" from the "SYSTEM SELECT" menu.
5. Select "KEYS", then "ALL KEYS LOST".
111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System - Accord
Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System - Accord
Fig. 1: Locating Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System Components (1 Of 2)

111
2 августа 2011 г. 14:43:21
Fig. 2: Locating Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System Components (2 Of 2)

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM
The security alarm system is armed automatically after the doors, hood, and trunk are closed and locked. For
the system to arm, the ignition switch must be off, the key must be removed, and the MICU must receive
signals that the doors, hood, trunk are closed and locked. The alarm can be disarmed at any time by
unlocking the driver's door with the key or pressing the UNLOCK button on the remote transmitter.
111
When everything is closed and locked, the only inputs that are grounded, and have 0 volts, are the driver's
door lock knob switch (LOCK position), and the integrated audio-HVAC display module. In other words, all
of the other switches are open, and have about 5 volts with system awake and 1 volts in sleep mode,
including the key cylinder switches. The security indicator in the gauge control module begins to flash
immediately after the vehicle is completely closed and locked, and 15 seconds later, the security system
arms and the security indicator flashes on for a shorter amount of time than before. If the security indicator
does not flash, the system is not arming. A beep sounds and parking lights flash to confirm the security
alarm system is armed if the LOCK button is pressed a second time within 5 seconds.
If one of the switches is misadjusted or shorted internally, or there is a short in the circuit, the security
system will not arm. As long as the control unit continues to receive a ground signal (0 volts), it senses that
the vehicle is not closed and locked, and the system will not arm. A switch that is slightly misadjusted can
cause the alarm to sound for no apparent reason. In this case, a significant change in outside air temperature,
the vibration of a passing truck, or someone bumping into the vehicle could cause the alarm to sound. There
is no glass breakage or motion detector feature.
If anything is opened or improperly unlocked after the system is armed, the control unit receives a ground
signal from that switch, and the 1-5 volts reference drops to 0 volts. If the integrated audio-HVAC display
module is disconnected, the input loses its ground, and the input voltage goes to 1-5 volts. The system
sounds the alarm when any of these occur:
 A door or the trunk is forced open

 A door is unlocked without using the key or the remote transmitter
 The hood is opened (EX, EXL, LX-V6, Canada LX, '06-07 models Canada SE)
 The audio-HVAC display module is disconnected (EX, EXL, LX-V6, '06-07 models USA SE, Canada
SE-V6)
 The remote panic is operated
When the system sounds the alarm, the horns sound and the exterior lights flash for 2 minutes. The alarm
can be stopped at any time by unlocking the driver's door with the key or by pressing any button on the
remote transmitter.
PANIC MODE
The panic mode sounds the alarm in order to attract attention. When the PANIC button on the remote
transmitter is pressed and held for 2 seconds, the alarm sounds and the exterior lights flash for about 20
seconds.
The panic mode can be cancelled at anytime by pressing any button on the remote transmitter or by turning
the ignition switch ON (II). The panic mode will not function if the ignition switch is ON (II).
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
The keyless entry system is integrated with the multiplex integrated control unit. The MICS receives LOCK,
UNLOCK and PANIC signals from the door multiplex control unit (keyless receiver).
The keyless entry system allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle with the remote transmitter. When you
press the LOCK button, all doors lock. When you press the UNLOCK button once, only the driver's door
unlocks. The other doors will unlock when you press the button a second time. The doors will not lock with
the remote transmitter if a door is not fully closed, or if the key is in the ignition switch.
111
If the UNLOCK button is pressed, released, then pressed and held, the windows will begin to open. The
windows stop if the button is released. See power windows for more information and troubleshooting.
When the switch for the ceiling light is in the center position, it will come on when the UNLOCK button is
pressed. If a door is not opened, the light will go off in about 30 seconds, and the doors will relock. If the
doors are locked with the remote transmitter within 30 seconds, the light will go off immediately.
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Fig. 3: Circuit Diagram - Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System (1 Of 3)

111

111

DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR TEST

DRIVER'S DOOR
1. Remove the driver's door panel.

 2-door (see 2-DOOR )
111
2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the actuator.

3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to table figure below. To prevent
damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily.
111
Fig. 7: Checking Actuator Operation By Connecting Power & Ground Chart

4. If the actuator does not operate as specified, replace it.
PASSENGER'S DOOR
1. Remove the passenger's door panel.

111

3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to figure table below. To prevent
damage to the actuator, apply battery voltage only momentarily.
111
Fig. 9: Checking Actuator Operation By Connecting Power & Ground Chart

4. If the actuator does not operate as specified, replace it.
DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH TEST

DRIVER'S DOOR

111

3. Check for continuity between the terminals.

 There should be continuity between the No. 2 and No. 3 terminals when the door lock knob
switch is in the LOCK position and no continuity when the switch is in the UNLOCK position.
 There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 3 terminals when the door lock knob
111
switch is in the UNLOCK position and no continuity when the switch is in the LOCK position.
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door lock actuator.
FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR (EX, EXL, '06-07 MODELS CANADA SE)
1. Remove the front passenger's door panel.

111

3. Check for continuity between the terminals. There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 3
terminals when the door lock knob switch in the UNLOCK position and no continuity when the
switch is in the LOCK position.
111
REAR DOOR (EX, EXL, '06-07 MODELS CANADA SE)
1. Remove the left or right rear door panel (see REAR DOOR PANEL

111
terminals when the door lock knob switch is UNLOCK position and no continuity when the switch is
in the LOCK position.
DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH TEST

2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the key cylinder switch.
111
Fig. 13: Disconnecting 3P Connector From Key Cylinder Switch


 There should be continuity between the No. 2 and No. 3 terminals when the door key cylinder
switch is in LOCK position.
 There should be no continuity between the No. 2 and No. 3 terminals when the door key
111
cylinder switch is in the neutral or UNLOCK position.

 There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when the door key cylinder
switch is in UNLOCK position.
 There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when the door key
cylinder switch is in the neutral or LOCK position.
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door key cylinder assembly.
CONTROL UNIT INPUT TEST

1. Before testing the keyless entry/security control functions, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated
control system. (see TROUBLESHOOTING - B-CAN SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS TEST MODE A ).
Multiplex Integrated Control Unit
2. Remove the left kick panel.

 2-door (see 2-DOOR - DOOR SILL AREA )
 4-door (see 4-DOOR - FRONT DOOR SILL AREA )
3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors.
111
Fig. 14: Disconnecting Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Connectors

5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connectors.
 If the input tests prove OK, go to step 6.
CONTROL UNIT INPUT TEST (CONNECTORS DISCONNECTED)

Possible cause if
Test: Desired
result
obtained
Check for
 Poor ground
continuity to
H9 BLK ground:
There should be
continuity. wire
 Poor ground
111
(G701)
Connect the F5
Check trunk  Faulty trunk
terminal to the
opener operation: opener
F5 YEL/GRN battery positive
Trunk lid should solenoid
terminal
open.  An open in the
momentarily.
wire
Connect the Check actuator
 Faulty driver's
K2 YEL/GRN battery positive operation:
door lock
terminal to K12 The driver's door
actuator
(K2) terminal, and lock actuator
K12 YEL/BLK K2 (K12) terminal should lock  An open in the
to H9 terminal. (unlock). wire
Check actuator
Connect the  Faulty front
N7 YEL/BLK operation:
battery positive passenger's
The front
terminal to N7 door lock
passenger's door
(N9) terminal, and actuator
lock actuator
N9 YEL N9 (N7) terminal  An open in the
should lock
to H9 terminal. wire
(unlock).
Connect the Check actuator
 Faulty left rear
E2 YEL/BLK battery positive operation:
door lock
terminal to E2 (E8) The left rear door
actuator
terminal, and E8 lock actuator
E8 YEL (E2) terminal to should lock  An open in the
H9 terminal. (unlock). wire
Connect the
Check actuator
H3 YEL/BLK battery positive  Faulty right
operation:
terminal to H3 rear door lock
The right rear
(H10) terminal, actuator
door lock actuator
and H10 (H3)  An open in the
H10 YEL should lock
terminal to H9 wire
(unlock).
terminal.
6. Reconnect all connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box.

7. Turn ignition switch to ON (II) to keep the system awake and make these input tests at the appropriate
connectors on the under-dash fuse/relay box.
CONTROL UNIT INPUT TEST (CONNECTORS RECONNECTED - 1 OF 2)

Possible cause if
Test: Desired
result
obtained
 Poor ground
Front passenger's (G503)
Check for
door lock knob
voltage to  Faulty front
switch unlocked
ground: passenger's
There should be door lock knob
111
less than 1 V. switch

 An open in the
wire
Q8(2) BRN/WHT Check for  Faulty front

Front passenger's voltage to passenger's
door lock knob ground: door lock knob
switch locked There should be switch
5 V or more.  Short to ground
 Poor ground
(G503)
Check for
Front passenger's voltage to  Faulty front
door lock switch ground: passenger's
unlocked There should be door lock
P9 PNK/BLU  An open in the
wire
Check for  Faulty front
door lock switch ground: door lock
in neutral There should be switch
 Poor ground
(G503)
Check for
door lock switch ground: passenger's
locked There should be door lock
P25 PNK/BLK  An open in the
wire
door lock switch ground: door lock
in neutral There should be switch
 Poor ground
Check for (G501, G601)
Left rear door lock voltage to  Faulty left rear
knob switch ground: door lock knob
unlocked There should be switch
less than 1 V.
Q2(2) BLK/WHT  An open in the
wire
Left rear door lock Check for
door lock knob
knob switch voltage to
switch
locked ground:
There should be  Short to ground
111
5 V or more.
 Poor ground
Check for (G602)
Right rear door voltage to  Faulty right
lock knob switch ground: rear door lock
unlocked There should be knob switch
less than 1 V. An open in the
Q3(2) BLK/RED 
wire
Check for
 Faulty right
Right rear door voltage to
rear door lock
lock knob switch ground:
knob switch
locked There should be
 Poor ground
Check for (G701)
Trunk key voltage to  Faulty trunk
cylinder switch ground: key cylinder
unlocked There should be switch
less than 1 V. An open in the
P11(1) GRY/BLU 
wire
Check for
 Faulty trunk
Trunk key voltage to
key cylinder
cylinder switch in ground:
switch
neutral There should be
(1) with security ('03-05 models)
(2) EX, EXL,'06 model Canada SE
CONTROL UNIT INPUT TEST (CONNECTORS RECONNECTED - 1 OF 2)

Possible cause if
Test: Desired
result
obtained
 Poor ground
(G504)
Check for  Faulty
voltage to connections at
Under all
Q1 RED/BLU ground: the audio unit
conditions
There should be  Faulty audio
less than 1 V. unit
 An open in the
wire
Ignition key Check for  Poor ground

inserted into the voltage to (G501, G601)
ignition switch. ground:  Faulty ignition
There should be key switch
111
less than 1 V.  An open in the

wire
Check for
P13 RED/WHT Ignition key voltage to  Faulty ignition
removed from the ground: key switch
ignition switch. There should be  Short to ground
5 V or more.
Check for
 Faulty driver's
voltage to
door switch
Driver's door open ground:
less than 1 V. wire
E15 GRN
Check for
voltage to  Faulty driver's
Driver's door
ground: door switch
closed
5 V or more.
voltage to passenger's
Front passenger's
ground: door switch
door open
less than 1 V. wire
H12 LT GRN/RED
Check for
 Faulty front
voltage to
Front passenger's passenger's
ground:
door closed door switch
There should be
Check for
voltage to
Left rear door door switch
ground:
open  An open in the
There should be
less than 1 V. wire
E14 GRN/YEL
Check for
voltage to  Faulty left rear
Left rear door
ground: door switch
closed
5 V or more.
Check for  Faulty right
voltage to rear door
Right rear door
ground: switch
open
less than 1 V. wire
H13 GRN/WHT
Check for
 Faulty right
voltage to
Right rear door rear door
ground:
closed switch
There should be
 Poor ground
111
Check for (G701)

voltage to  Faulty trunk
Trunk lid open ground: latch switch
less than 1 V. wire
P24 BLU/BLK
Check for
Trunk lid closed ground: latch switch
5 V or more.
Door Multiplex Control Unit
8. Remove the driver's power window switch panel (see DOOR PANEL
9. Disconnect the 23P connector from the power window master switch.
Fig. 15: Disconnecting 23P Connector From Power Window Master Switch
11. Reconnect the connector to the door multiplex control unit, and make these input tests at the
connectors.
DIAGNOSTIC CHART
Test: Desired Possible cause if

111
result result is not

obtained
 Poor ground
Check for (G501)
Driver's door lock voltage to  Faulty driver's
knob switch ground: door lock
unlocked There should be knob switch
less than 1 V.  An open in
7 WHT/BLK
the wire
Check for  Faulty driver's
Driver's door lock voltage to door lock
knob switch ground: knob switch
locked There should be  Short to
5 V or more. ground
 Poor ground
Check for (G501)
Driver's door lock voltage to  Faulty driver's
knob switch ground: door lock
locked There should be knob switch
22 YEL/RED
the wire
Driver's door lock voltage to door lock
knob switch ground: knob switch
unlocked There should be  Short to
5 V or more. ground
Check for
Driver's door key voltage to
cylinder switch in ground:  Faulty driver's
UNLOCK There should be door key
less than 1 V. cylinder
Check for switch
 Poor ground
21 WHT cylinder switch in ground:
(G501)
neutral There should be
5 V or more.  An open in
Check for the wire
Driver's door key voltage to  Short to
cylinder switch in ground: ground
LOCK There should be
5 V or more.
Check for
door key
less than 1 V.
cylinder
Check for switch
111
voltage to  Poor ground

Driver's door key
ground: (G501)
cylinder switch in
There should be
neutral  An open in
5 V or more.
the wire
8 WHT/RED Check for
UNLOCK There should be
5 V or more.
12. If all the input tests prove OK, and no DTCs were found during MICU troubleshooting (B-CAN
system diagnosis test mode A), go to the B-CAN system input and output index. If multiple failures
are found on more than one control unit, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (includes the MICU).
If input failures are related to a particular control unit, replace that control unit.
DTC TROUBLESHOOTING
DTC INDEX
DTC CHART
DTC Description
DTC B1026: Passenger's Door Lock Switch Passenger's Door Lock Switch Signal Error
Signal Error
DTC B1027: Trunk Key Cylinder Switch Trunk Key Cylinder Switch Signal Error
Signal Error
DTC B1127: Driver's Door Key Cylinder Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch Signal Error
Switch Signal Error
DTC B1128: Driver's Door Lock Switch Signal Driver's Door Lock Switch Signal Error
Error
DTC B1129: Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch Signal Error
Signal Error
DTC B1026: PASSENGER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH SIGNAL ERROR

3. Operate the passenger's door lock switch in the LOCK and UNLOCK positions for 2 seconds.
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Intermittent failure. The passenger's door lock system is OK at this time. Check pinfits
and connections.
5. With the door lock in UNLOCK position, select SECURITY from the HDS and enter the DATA
LIST.
6. Check the ON/OFF information of the Front Psnger's Door Lock Sw. (LOCK) and Front Psnger's
111
Door Lock Sw. (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
Are both information indicators OFF?
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Go to step 9.
7. Make sure the ON/OFF information of the Front Psnger's Door Lock Sw. (LOCK) and Front Psnger's
Door Lock Sw. (UNLOCK) are changed when the passenger's door lock switch is in the LOCK and
UNLOCK positions.
Does the information show the correct ON and OFF indications when the door lock switch in
the LOCK and UNLOCK positions?
YES - Faulty MICU; replace it.

NO - Go to step 8.
8. Check for a short between the door lock switch LOCK and UNLOCK wires.
Are the wire harnesses OK?
YES - Faulty passenger's door lock switch; replace it.

NO - A short in the wire, repair and recheck.
9. Remove the passenger's inner handle (see DOOR PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).
10. Disconnect the 3P connector from the passenger's door lock switch.
11. Check the ON/OFF information of the Front Psnger's Door Lock Sw. (LOCK) and Front Psnger's
Door Lock Sw. (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
YES - Faulty passenger's door lock switch; replace it.

NO - Go to step 12.
12. Check for a short in the wire between the MICU and passenger's door lock switch at the security
alarm/keyless door lock system control unit input test (see CONTROL UNIT INPUT TEST ).

DTC B1027: TRUNK KEY CYLINDER SWITCH SIGNAL ERROR

3. Operate the trunk key cylinder switch for 2 seconds.
4. Check the DTCs using the HDS.
111
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Intermittent failure. The trunk key cylinder system is OK at this time.
5. With the trunk key cylinder switch in the off (neutral) position, select the TEST MODE MENU from
the HDS and enter the DATA LIST.
6. Check the ON/OFF information of the Trunk Key Cylinder Switch (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
Is the information indicator OFF?
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Go to step 9.
7. Make sure the ON/OFF information of the Trunk Key Cylinder Switch (UNLOCK) are changed when
the trunk key cylinder switch is turned to UNLOCK position with the key.
Does the information show ON when the trunk key cylinder switch is turned to UNLOCK
position, and show OFF when the trunk key cylinder switch is returned to the off (neutral)
position?

NO - Go to step 8.
8. Check for an open in the wire between the MICU and trunk key cylinder switch.
YES - Faulty trunk key cylinder switch; replace it.

NO - An open in the wire, repair and recheck.
9. Disconnect the 3P connector from the trunk key cylinder switch.
10. Check the ON/OFF information of the Trunk Key Cylinder Switch (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
YES - Faulty trunk key cylinder switch; replace it.

NO - Go to step 11.
11. Check for a short in the wire between the MICU and trunk key cylinder switch.

DTC B1127: DRIVER'S DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH SIGNAL ERROR

3. Operate the driver's door key cylinder in the LOCK and UNLOCK positions for 2 seconds.
111
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Intermittent failure. The driver's door key cylinder system is OK at this time. Check
pinfits and connections.
5. With no driver's door key cylinder operation, select SECURITY from the HDS, and enter the DATA
LIST.
6. Check the ON/OFF information of the Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch (LOCK) and Driver's Door
Key Cylinder Switch (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Go to step 10.
7. Turn the driver's door key cylinder to the LOCK and UNLOCK positions with the ignition key and
check the ON/OFF information of the Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch (LOCK) and Driver's Door
Is the Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch (LOCK) (Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch
(UNLOCK)) information indicator ON when the key cylinder is in the LOCK (UNLOCK)
position, and OFF when the key is returned to the neutral position?
NO - Go to step 8.
8. Disconnect the driver's door key cylinder switch 3P connector.
9. Check for continuity between the No. 3 (LOCK) and No. 1 (UNLOCK) terminals of the driver's door
key cylinder switch 3P connector and the No. 8 (LOCK) and No. 21 (UNLOCK) terminals of the
power window master switch 23P connector.
111
Fig. 16: Checking For Continuity Between No.3 & No.1 Terminals Of Driver's Door Key
Cylinder Switch Connector And No.8 & No.21 Terminals Of Power Window Master Switch
Connector
YES - Faulty driver's door key cylinder switch.

NO - Repair an open in the WHT/RED (LOCK) or WHT (UNLOCK) wire.
10. Disconnect the driver's door key cylinder switch 3P connector.
11. Check the ON/OFF information of the Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch (LOCK) and Driver's Door
YES - Faulty driver's door key cylinder switch.

NO - Go to step 12.
key cylinder switch 3P connector and body ground.
111
Fig. 17: Checking For Continuity Between No.3 & No.1 Terminals Of Driver's Door Key
Cylinder Switch And Body Ground
YES - Repair a short in the WHT/RED (LOCK) or WHT (UNLOCK) wire.

NO - Faulty door multiplex control unit; replace the power window master switch.
DTC B1128: DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH SIGNAL ERROR

3. Operate the driver's door lock switch in the LOCK and UNLOCK positions for 2 seconds.
111
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Intermittent failure. The driver's door lock switch system is OK at this time. Check pinfits
and connections.
5. With no driver's door lock switch operation, select SECURITY from the HDS, and enter the DATA
LIST.
6. Check the ON/OFF information of the Driver's Door Lock Switch (LOCK) and Driver's Door Lock
Switch (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Check the door lock switch. If the driver's door lock switch is OK, faulty door multiplex
control unit; replace the power window master switch.
7. Push the driver's door lock switch in LOCK and UNLOCK positions, and check the ON/OFF
information of the Driver's Door Lock Switch (LOCK) and Driver's Door Lock Switch (UNLOCK) in
the DATA LIST.
Is the Driver's Door Lock Switch (LOCK) (Driver's Door Lock Switch (UNLOCK)) information
indicator ON when the door lock switch is pushed in each switch position, and OFF when the
door lock switch is released?
YES - Substitute a known-good power window master switch. If the code is still present,
replace the MICU.
NO - Faulty door multiplex control unit; replace the power window master switch.
DTC B1129: DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH SIGNAL ERROR

3. Operate the driver's door lock knob switch in the LOCK and UNLOCK positions for 2 seconds.
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Intermittent failure. The driver's door lock knob switch system is OK at this time. Check
pinfits and connections.
5. Select SECURITY from the HDS, and enter the DATA LIST.
Check the ON/OFF information of the Driver's Door Lock knob Switch (LOCK) and Driver's Door
Lock knob Switch (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
Is the Driver's Door Lock knob Switch (LOCK) information indicator ON and Driver's Door
Lock knob Switch (UNLOCK) information indicator OFF with the door lock knob switch in
LOCK position, and is the Driver's Door Lock knob Switch (LOCK) information indicator OFF
and Driver's Door Lock knob Switch (UNLOCK) information indicator ON with the door lock
knob switch in UNLOCK position?
111
YES - Substitute a known-good power window master switch. If the code is still present,
replace the MICU.
NO - Go to step 6.
6. Disconnect the driver's door lock knob switch 3P connector.
7. Check the ON/OFF information of the Driver's Door Lock knob Switch (LOCK) and Driver's Door
Lock knob Switch (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
YES - Faulty driver's door lock knob switch.

NO - Go to step 8.
lock knob switch 3P connector and body ground.
Fig. 18: Checking For Continuity Between No.2 & No.1 Terminals Of Driver's Door Lock Knob
Switch And Body Ground
111
YES - Repair a short in the YEL/RED (LOCK) or WHT/BLK (UNLOCK) wire.

NO - Go to driver's door lock knob switch test (see DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH TEST ).
If the driver's door lock knob switch is OK, the door multiplex control unit is faulty; replace the
power window master switch.
TRIPPED SENSOR HISTORY

The security system stores information on the last tripped sensor if the security system has been violated.
The information can be retrieved using the HDS.
To retrieve the last tripped sensor data:
1. Select HISTORY DATA from the security system test mode menu.
2. Select CURRENT DATA.
3. Confirm that the VIN matches the Vehicle then press the enter button.
4. Scroll through the data list.
 Sensors that were violated will indicate DETECT.
 Sensors that were not violated will indicate NONE.
5. Inspect the DETECT circuit for:

 Misadjusted or damaged switch.
 Loose or corroded connections.
 Intermittent short to ground.
TRUNK LID OPENER SOLENOID TEST

1. Disconnect the 3P connector from the trunk latch switch/trunk lid opener solenoid.
111
Fig. 19: Disconnecting 3P Connector

2. Check trunk lid opener solenoid operation by connecting power and ground according to table graphic
below. To prevent damage to the trunk lid opener solenoid, apply battery voltage only momentarily.
111
Fig. 20: Checking Trunk Lid Opener Solenoid Operation By Connecting Power And Ground
Chart
3. If the trunk lid opener solenoid does not work as specified, replace it.
TRUNK KEY CYLINDER SWITCH TEST

4-DOOR EX, EXL, LX-V6, '06-07 MODELS CANADA SE
1. Remove the trunk lid trim (see TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION - TRUNK LID ).
2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the key cylinder switch.
111
Fig. 21: Disconnecting 3P Connector From Key Cylinder Switch

terminals when the trunk key cylinder switch is in UNLOCK position. There should be no continuity
between the No. 2 and No. 3 terminals when the trunk key cylinder switch is in the released (neutral)
position.
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the trunk key cylinder switch.
111
DOOR LOCK SWITCH TEST

PASSENGER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH
1. Remove the front passenger's switch panel.

2. Disconnect the 10P connector from the front passenger's power window switch.
111
Fig. 22: Disconnecting 10P Connector From Front Passenger's Power Window Switch

 There should be continuity between the No. 2 and No. 9 terminals when the door lock switch is
in LOCK position. There should be no continuity between the No. 2 and No. 9 terminals when
the door lock switch is in the neutral position.
111
 There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 9 terminals when the door lock switch is
in UNLOCK position. There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 9 terminals
when the door lock switch is in the neutral position.
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door lock switch.
HOOD SWITCH TEST

EX, EXL, LX-V6, CANADA LX, '06-07 MODELS CANADA SE
1. Open the hood.

2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the hood switch.
111
Fig. 23: Disconnecting 2P Connector From Hood Switch

terminals when the hood is opened (lever released). There should be no continuity between the No. 1
and No. 2 terminals when the hood is closed (lever pushed down).
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the hood switch.
111
TRANSMITTER TEST
NOTE:  If the doors unlock or lock with the transmitter, but the LED on the
transmitter does not come on, the LED is faulty; replace the transmitter.
 If any door is open, you cannot lock the doors with the transmitter.
 If you unlocked the doors with the transmitter, but do not open any of
the doors within 30 seconds, the doors relock automatically.
 The doors do not lock or unlock with the transmitter if the ignition key
is inserted in the ignition switch.
1. Press the lock or unlock button five or six times to reset the transmitter.
 If the locks work, the transmitter is OK.
 If the locks don't work, go to step 2.
2. Open the transmitter and check for water damage.

 If you find any water damage, replace the transmitter.
 If there is no water damage, go to step 3.
111
Fig. 24: Opening Transmitter To Check For Water Damage

3. Replace the transmitter battery (A) with a new one, and try to lock and unlock the doors with the
transmitter by pressing the lock or unlock button five or six times.
 If the doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is OK.
 If the doors don't lock and unlock, go to step 4.
111
Fig. 25: Replacing Transmitter Battery

4. Reprogram and register the transmitter, then try to lock and unlock the doors.
 If the doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is OK.
 If the doors don't lock and unlock, try and program to another vehicle. If still not operating,
replace the transmitter.
111
TRANSMITTER PROGRAMMING
Storing transmitter codes:
The codes of up to three transmitters can be stored into the keyless receiver unit memory. (If a fourth code is
stored, the code which was input first will be erased.)
NOTE: It is important to maintain the time limits between the steps. Make sure the
doors, the hood and the tailgate are closed.

2. Within 1 to 4 sec, press the transmitter lock or unlock button with the transmitter aimed at the keyless
receiver in the power window master switch.
3. Within 1 to 4 sec, turn the ignition switch OFF.
4. Within 1 to 4 sec, turn the ignition switch ON (II).
7. Within 1 to 4 sec, turn the ignition switch ON (II).
10. Within 4 sec, turn the ignition switch ON (II).
12. Confirm you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators within 1 to 4 sec, then push the transmitter
lock or unlock button again, or the code will not be stored.
13. Within 10 sec, aim the transmitters (up to two additional ones) whose codes you want to store at the
keyless receiver, and press the transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
Confirm that you can hear the sound of the door lock actuators after each transmitter code is stored.
14. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and pull out the key.
15. Confirm proper operation with the transmitters.
111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Audio System - Accord
Audio System - Accord

4-DOOR
Fig. 1: Identifying Audio System Components (4-Door)

2-DOOR
111
2 августа 2011 г. 14:45:24
Fig. 2: Identifying Audio System Component (2-Door)

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OVERVIEW
The audio unit acts as the "processor" for all audio functions. Selection of the audio functions can be done
from the front panel, the audio remote (on steering wheel), or by using the navigation voice control system.
The audio display provides the current front and rear audio status. For vehicles with the navigation option,
additional audio information is available by touching the audio button. (See the owner's manual for more
details.)
Each audio component passes its audio signal to the audio unit. In addition it communicates with the audio
unit via the GA-Net bus. Any open connection in this circuit will cause audio and navigation functions to
appear inoperative.
The 6CD changer output can be directed to the audio unit.
The XM can be output to the audio unit.
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
111
Fig. 3: Audio System Diagram

XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
'04-05 models
XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ('04-05 MODELS - 1 OF 2)

Cavity Wire Connect to Cavity Wire Connect to
A1 WHT/GRN Constant power A8 - Not used
XM receiver Audio unit bus
A2 LT BLU A9 BLU
(ACC power) (+)
Audio unit bus
A3 BLK Bus ground A10 RED
(-)
Audio shield XM receiver
A4 BRN A11 BLK
ground ground
Audio unit
A5 GRN A12 - Not used
(Right+)
Audio unit (Left Audio unit
A6 BLU A13 RED
+) (Right -)
111
Audio unit (Left

A7 - Not used A14 WHT
-)

Cavity Wire Connect to
B1 - Terrestrial signal antenna
B2 - Satellite signal antenna
Fig. 4: Identifying XM Receiver Connector Inputs And Outputs ('04-05 Models)

'06-07 model

Cavity Wire Connect to Cavity Wire Connect to
A1 WHT/GRN Constant power A8 - Not used
XM receiver Audio unit bus
A2 LT BLU A9 BLU
(ACC power) (+)
Audio unit bus
A3 BLK Bus ground A10 RED
(-)
Audio shield XM receiver
A4 BRN A11 BLK
ground ground
Audio unit
A5 GRN A12 - Not used
(Right+)
A6 BLU Audio unit (Left A13 RED Audio unit
111
+) (Right -)
Audio unit (Left
A7 - Not used A14 WHT
-)
XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ('06-07 MODEL - 2 OF 2)

Cavity Wire Connect to
XM signal input satellite and
1 -
ground wave
2 - XM signal ground
Fig. 5: Identifying XM Receiver Connector Inputs And Outputs ('06-07 Model)

AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
Without Navigation
When replacing an audio unit connector, match the wires to the cavities listed in Fig. 6 .
111
Fig. 6: Identifying Audio Unit Connector Inputs And Outputs (Without Navigation)
With Navigation
111
Fig. 7: Audio Unit Connector Inputs And Outputs (With Navigation)

Navigation type printed circuit board connector
NAVIGATION TYPE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD CONNECTOR

Terminal Signal Terminal Signal
1 SWD-VDD 14 D-GND
2 CD-LED-G 15 CD-LED-R
111
3 ANTI-IND 16 EJECT
4 TUNE VOL-UP 17 TUNE VOL-DN
5 KEY-CLK 18 KEY-DATA
6 KEY-IN 19 KEY PS
7 ENC VOL-UP 20 ENC VOL-DN
8 IS-BUS-DATA 21 PW SW
9 LAMP +B 22 IS-BUS-FLAME
10 LAMP-RET 23 LAMP +B
11 IGN-DET 24 LAMP-RET
12 BUS+ 25 P-GND
13 P-GND 26 BUS -
111
Fig. 8: Identifying Navigation Type Printed Circuit Board Connector

6 CD type printed circuit board connector
10P Connector
6 CD TYPE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD CONNECTOR (10P)

1 AUDIO-GND 6 VDD 5V
2 Power switch 7 SEC-LED
3 ILLUMI-GND 4 8 RED-LED
111
4 ILLUMI 8V-4 9 GREEN-LED

5 VOL-B 10 VOL-A
20P Connector
6 CD TYPE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD CONNECTOR (20P)

1 ILLUMI-GND-1 11 ILLUMI 8V-1
2 ILLUMI-GND-3 12 LCD-CK
3 ILLUMI 8V-3 13 LCD-CE
4 ILLUMI-GND-2 14 LCD-DO
5 ILLUMI 8V-2 15 ACC 5V
6 SET4 16 LCD-GND
7 SET3 17 LCD 8V
8 SET2 18 AC-DATA
9 SET1 19 EJECT switch
10 Not used 20 LCD-DI
Fig. 9: Identifying 6 CD Type Printed Circuit Board Connector

111
Single CD type printed circuit board connector
SINGLE CD TYPE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD CONNECTOR

1 EJECT 13 PW SW
2 ENC VOL-DN 14 ENC VOL-UP
3 LCD-RST 15 LCD-CE
4 LCD-DO 16 LCD-CLK
5 D-GND 17 LCD-DI
6 IGN DET 18 SED-VDD
7 I/S-BUS-DATA 19 CD-LED
8 P-GND 20 I/S-BUS-FRAME
9 P-GND 21 P-GND
10 LCD LAMP +B 22 LCD LAMP-RET
11 LAMP-RET 23 LAMP-RET
12 LAMP +B 24 LAMP +B
111
Fig. 10: Identifying Single CD Type Printed Circuit Board Connector

AUDIO-HVAC SUBDISPLAY/CLOCK CONNECTOR INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
111
Fig. 11: Identifying Audio-HVAC Subdisplay/Clock Connector Inputs and Outputs (With Navigation)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
111
Fig. 12: Audio System Circuit Diagram (1 Of 3)

111

111

SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION (WITH NAVIGATION)
1. Turn the ignition switch to ACC (I) or ON (II).

2. Turn the audio unit off.
3. While holding down the upper part of both the "CH/DISK" and "SEEK/SKIP" bars at the same time,
press the VOL/PWR knob.
4. "DIAG" will appear on the audio-HVAC subdisplay/clock to indicate you have entered the self-
diagnostic mode.
111
Fig. 15: Identifying Self-Diagnostic Function (With Navigation)

5. By pressing a button while "DIAG" is displayed, the input will trigger a mode that is assigned to that
switch.
AM/FM button
111
Entire LCD lighting mode: Turns on the entire LCD to show the presence or absence of an LCD
failure.
CD/AUX or CD/SAT button
Entire LCD light-out mode: Turns off the entire LCD to show the presence or absence of an LCD
failure.
SEEK SKIP bar ("RTRIF" "RTRIF"|)
Display IS-BUS communication verification status: Displays the verification of the communication
between the climate control unit and Navigation-display (toggles between "nVd" and "AC" every 5
seconds).
SEEK SKIP bar (|"LTRIF" "LTRIF")
Display 12C-BUS communication verification status: Displays the verification of the communication
among the display, the EEPROM, and the tuner (toggles between "DSP", "EEP" and "TnR" every 5
seconds).
6. The self-diagnostic function will end when the audio unit is turned off, or the ignition switch is turned
off.
Display Specifications
111
Fig. 16: Identifying Display Specifications (With Navigation)

STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION (WITHOUT NAVIGATION)
1. Turn the ignition switch to ACC (I) or ON (II).

2. Turn the audio unit ON.
3. While holding down both the "Preset 1" and "Preset 6" buttons simultaneously, press the AUDIO
PWR knob.
4. DIAG" will appear on the audio unit display to indicate you have entered the self-diagnostic mode.
111
Fig. 17: Identifying Self-Diagnostic Function (Without Navigation)

5. By pressing a button while "DIAG" is displayed, the input will trigger a mode that is assigned to that
button.
Preset 3 button
Entire LCD lighting mode: Turns on the entire LCD to show the presence or absence of an LCD
failure.
Preset 4 button
Entire LCD lights-out mode: Turns off the entire LCD to show the presence or absence of an LCD
failure.
6. The self-diagnostic function will end when the audio unit is turned off, or the ignition switch is turned
off.
Display Specifications
111
Fig. 18: Identifying Display Specifications (Without Navigation)

ERROR CODES
The audio system displays error codes when a problem is detected with the disc changer, the disc, the XM
radio, or the anti-theft code.
ERROR CODE DISPLAYED

Error Code Displayed Possible Cause Solution
Eject the disc and try another
DISC Cannot read disc.
one.
There is a problem with the disc
Try to eject the disc and try
player. A common problem is
DISC ERROR another one. If there is still a
disc labels coming off the disc in
problem, replace the audio unit.
the player.
A disc was inserted that has a Eject the disc and try another
DISC FORMAT
format that is not recognized. one.
Park the vehicle in a cooler place

Disc player is hot. This can for awhile and try the disc player
DISC-H happen if the vehicle is parked again. If the error code is still
out in the hot sun all day. present, try another disc. If the
error code is still present, replace
111
the audio unit.

XM radio is acquiring audio or Wait until the radio has received
LOADING
program information. the information.
XM OFF AIR XM channel not in service. Try another XM channel.
Both terrestrial and satellite
antennas have lost signal. Park
XM NO SIGNAL Loss of signal.
the vehicle outside with a clear
view of the southern horizon.
XM radio is receiving
This message will disappear once
XM UPDATING information update from the
the update is done.
network.
Repair the open or short in the
terrestrial or satellite antenna.
Substitute the XM antenna and
XM ANTENNA XM antenna error. recheck. If the error is gone,
replace the original XM antenna.
If the error is still present, replace
the antenna lead.
Check known-good vehicle with
XM radio. If the known-good
- No signal from XM.
vehicle has the same symptoms,
contact XM at (800) 852-9090.
ERR 1 Anti-theft code mismatch (1st Enter the correct anti-theft code.
try).
Remove fuse No. 5 (20 A) in the
under-dash fuse/relay box, then
ERRE Anti-theft code mismatch (10th reinsert it. You will have 10 more
try). tries to enter the correct anti-theft
code.

SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING
Poor radio reception or Symptom Troubleshooting (see  Antenna lead short or
interference POOR RADIO RECEPTION OR open in the wire
INTERFERENCE )
 Window antenna open
Disc changer does not move Symptom Troubleshooting (see
between discs (with navigation) DISC CHANGER DOES NOT
MOVE BETWEEN DISCS
(WITH NAVIGATION) )
Radio preset memory is lost Symptom Troubleshooting (see  Battery condition
RADIO PRESET MEMORY IS
LOST )  Battery cable condition
XM radio preset memory is lost Symptom Troubleshooting (see XM
('04-06 models) RADIO PRESET MEMORY IS
LOST ('04-06 MODELS) )
111
Power will not turn OFF Symptom Troubleshooting (see

POWER WILL NOT TURN
OFF )
No sound is heard from speakers Symptom Troubleshooting (see NO
(display is normal) SOUND IS HEARD FROM
SPEAKERS (DISPLAY IS
NORMAL) )
Poor or no sound with XM radio Symptom Troubleshooting (see
('04-06 models) POOR OR NO SOUND WITH
XM RADIO ('04-06 MODELS) )
XM radio display is blank and Symptom Troubleshooting (see XM
no station information is RADIO DISPLAY IS BLANK
displayed ('04-06 models) AND NO STATION
INFORMATION IS
DISPLAYED ('04-06 MODELS) )
Audio disc does not play Symptom Troubleshooting (see
AUDIO DISC DOES NOT
PLAY )
Audio disc skips Symptom Troubleshooting (see Tire pressure (over inflated)
AUDIO DISC DOES NOT
PLAY )
Radio remote switch does not Symptom Troubleshooting (see
work properly RADIO REMOTE SWITCH
DOES NOT WORK
PROPERLY )
Volume does not change (with Symptom Troubleshooting (see
navigation or single CD type) VOLUME DOES NOT CHANGE
(WITH NAVIGATION OR
SINGLE CD TYPE) )
Volume does not change (6 CD Symptom Troubleshooting (see
type) VOLUME DOES NOT CHANGE
(6 CD TYPE) )
Audio disc does not load Symptom Troubleshooting (see
AUDIO DISC DOES NOT
LOAD )
Audio disc does not eject (with Symptom Troubleshooting (see
navigation or single CD type) AUDIO DISC DOES NOT
EJECT (WITH NAVIGATION
OR SINGLE CD TYPE) )
Audio disc does not eject (6 CD Symptom Troubleshooting (see
type) AUDIO DISC DOES NOT
EJECT (6 CD TYPE) )
Disc changer does not load all Symptom Troubleshooting (see
six discs DISC CHANGER DOES NOT
LOAD ALL SIX DISCS )
Audio-HVAC display module Symptom Troubleshooting (see
switches do not work AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY
MODULE SWITCHES DO NOT
WORK )
111
Disc LED does not turn ON or Symptom Troubleshooting (see

OFF DISC LED DOES NOT TURN
ON OR OFF )
Power switch will not turn ON Symptom Troubleshooting (see
(with navigation or single CD POWER SWITCH WILL NOT
type) TURN ON (WITH
NAVIGATION OR SINGLE CD
TYPE) )
Power switch will not turn ON Symptom Troubleshooting (see
(6 CD type) POWER SWITCH WILL NOT
TURN ON (6 CD TYPE) )
Display is missing information Symptom Troubleshooting (see
(6 CD type) DISPLAY IS MISSING
INFORMATION (6 CD TYPE) )
Audio-HVAC subdisplay/clock Symptom Troubleshooting (see
does not display (with AUDIO-HVAC
navigation) SUBDISPLAY/CLOCK DOES
NOT DISPLAY (WITH
NAVIGATION) )
Audio display and controls are Symptom Troubleshooting (see
dim, no back lighting (LCD AUDIO DISPLAY AND
segments can be read) CONTROLS ARE DIM, NO
BACK LIGHTING (LCD
SEGMENTS CAN BE READ) )
No display appears on the Symptom Troubleshooting (see
screen (LCD segments cannot AUDIO DISPLAY AND
be read) CONTROLS ARE DIM, NO
BACK LIGHTING (LCD
SEGMENTS CAN BE READ) )
Security indicator does not work Symptom Troubleshooting (see
properly SECURITY INDICATOR DOES
NOT WORK PROPERLY )
POOR RADIO RECEPTION OR INTERFERENCE
NOTE: Check the radio reception in an open area. Poor reception/interference can
be caused by the following:
 The radio station is far away.

 A tall building, a mountain, or high-voltage power line is nearby.
1. Check if each radio station can be received normally. Compare the radio reception/interference to
another vehicle of the same model and trim level in the exact same conditions.
Are they the same?
YES - Operation is normal.

111
NO - Go to step 2.
2. Check if the radio reception/interference is the same in several locations.
Is the reception/interference the same?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Multipath interference or weak station. Operation is normal.
3. Check the reception/interference when the rear window defogger is on.
Is the reception poor with the rear window defogger on?
YES - Check for a break in the rear window defogger grid (see WINDOW ANTENNA
TEST ), a poor connection, or a faulty antenna coil (see WINDOW ANTENNA COIL
REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Go to step 4.
4. Check to see if the problem is interference while the engine is running.
Is there noise (static or while) with the engine running?
YES - Check the antenna and radio grounds. If OK, check the charging system and the ignition
system.
NO - Go to step 5.
5. Wrap aluminum foil (A) around the tip of a tester probe (B) as shown in Fig. 19.
111
Fig. 19: Wrapping Aluminum Foil Around Tip Of Tester Probe

6. Check for continuity by touching one tester probe to the window antenna terminal (A), and move the
other tester probe along the antenna wires.
111
Fig. 20: Checking Continuity Touching One Tester To Window Antenna Terminal
Is there continuity in all sections of the antenna?
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Repair the antenna wires (see WINDOW ANTENNA REPAIR ).
7. Turn the radio ON, and measure the voltage between antenna amplifier connector A terminal 1 and
body ground.
111
Fig. 21: Measuring Voltage Between Antenna Amplifier Connector Terminal 1 & Body Ground
Is there 12 V?
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Go to step 13.
111
8. Remove the audio-HVAC display module, and disconnect the antenna lead.
9. Disconnect the antenna lead from the antenna amplifier.
10. Check for continuity between the antenna cable center pin at the audio unit lead and the antenna cable
center pin at the antenna amplifier lead.
Fig. 22: Checking Continuity Between Antenna Cable Center Pin And Antenna Cable Center
Pin

111
NO - Replace the antenna cable.

11. Check for continuity between the shield surface of the audio unit lead and the antenna cable shield
surface of the antenna amplifier lead.
Fig. 23: Checking Continuity Between Shield Surface And Antenna Cable Shield Surface

NO - Replace the antenna cable.
12. Check for continuity between the antenna cable center pin and the surface of the antenna lead.
111
Fig. 24: Checking Continuity Between Antenna Cable Center Pin & Surface Of Antenna Lead
YES - Replace the antenna cable.

NO - Replace the antenna amplifier and recheck. If the reception is still poor, replace the audio
unit.
111
13. Remove the audio-HVAC display module and disconnect the radio unit connector A (20P).
14. Check for continuity between audio unit connector A (20P) terminal No. 1 and antenna coil connector
A terminal No. 1.
Fig. 25: Checking Continuity Between Audio Unit Connector (20P) Terminal No. 1 & Antenna
Coil Connector Terminal No. 1
YES - Substitute a known-good audio-HVAC display module and retest.

NO - Repair the open in the wire between the audio unit and the antenna coil.
DISC CHANGER DOES NOT MOVE BETWEEN DISCS (WITH NAVIGATION)
1. Insert the six CDs into the audio unit and see if the changer moves between CDs.
Does the changer operate normally?
YES - Intermittent failure, the CD changer is OK at this time.

NO - Go to step 2.
2. Insert six different CDs into the audio unit.
111
Does the changer operate normally?
YES - At least one of the original CDs is faulty.

NO - Replace the audio unit.
RADIO PRESET MEMORY IS LOST
1. Set each of the radio station preset buttons.
Do each of the preset buttons set properly?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO - Replace the audio-HVAC display module.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF for 1 minute, then turn it back to ON (II).
3. Test all the preset buttons for proper recall operation.
Do the preset buttons recall the set radio stations?
YES - System is normal at this time. Check connections at the audio unit.
NO - Go to step 4.
4. Inspect the under-dash fuse/relay box No. 5 (10 A) fuse.
Is it OK?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Replace the fuse and reset. If it fails again, repair the short to ground in the harness.
5. Remove the audio-HVAC display module (see AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY MODULE
7. Measure voltage between the audio unit connector A10 terminal and body ground.
111
Fig. 26: Measuring Voltage Between Audio Unit Connector A10 Terminal And Body Ground
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - An open wire between the under-dash fuse/relay box and audio unit A10 terminal.
8. Check for continuity between the audio unit A20 terminal and body ground.
111
Fig. 27: Checking Continuity Between Audio Unit A20 Terminal And Body Ground
YES - Replace the audio-HVAC display module.

NO - An open wire between the audio unit A20 terminal and body ground (G504).
XM RADIO PRESET MEMORY IS LOST ('04-07 MODELS)
1. Set each of the XM radio channel preset buttons.
Do each of the XM radio channel preset buttons set properly?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO - Replace the audio-HVAC display module (see AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY MODULE
2. Turn OFF the ignition switch for 1 minute, then turn it back to ON (II).
3. Test all of the XM radio channel preset buttons for proper recall operation.
111
Do the preset buttons recall the set radio stations?
YES - System is normal at this time. Check connections at the audio unit.
NO - Go to step 4.
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
5. Measure voltage between audio unit connector A (20P) No. 10 terminal and body ground.
Fig. 28: Measuring Voltage Between Audio Unit Connector (20P) No. 10 Terminal & Body
Ground
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Repair an open in the wire between the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box and audio unit
connector A (20P) No. 10 terminal.
6. Check for voltage between audio unit connector A (20P) No. 20 terminal and body ground.
111
Fig. 29: Checking Voltage Between Audio Unit Connector (20P) No. 20 Terminal & Body
Ground
Is there less than 0.1 V?
YES - Replace the audio unit.

NO - Repair an open in the wire between audio unit connector A (20P) No. 20 terminal and
body ground (G504).
POWER WILL NOT TURN OFF
1. With the ignition switch ON (II), push the power switch OFF, or turn the ignition switch OFF to see if
the audio unit turns OFF.
Is the audio unit OFF?

NO - Go to step 2.
111
3. Remove the audio unit (see AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY PANEL AND AUDIO UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ). Disconnect the audio unit connector A (20P).
4. Measure the voltage between the No. 2 terminal of the audio unit connector A (20P) and body ground.
Fig. 30: Measuring Voltage Between No. 2 Terminal Of Audio Unit Connector (20P) & Body
Ground
Is there voltage?
YES - Check for short to power on YEL wire.

NO SOUND IS HEARD FROM SPEAKERS (DISPLAY IS NORMAL)
NOTE:  Set the fader and balance positions to the center.

 Before performing symptom troubleshooting, check for power switch
will not turn ON troubleshooting (see POWER SWITCH WILL NOT TURN
ON (WITH NAVIGATION OR SINGLE CD TYPE) ).
1. Check that the volume button is not set to min level.
111
Is it at MIN level?
YES - Raise the volume level, and recheck the function.

NO -
 With navigation: Go to step 2.
 Without navigation: Go to step 3.
2. Check the NAVIGATION MUTE MODE.
Is the NAVIGATION MUTE MODE set?
YES - Cancel the NAVIGATION MUTE MODE by pressing the voice command button, and
recheck the function.
NO - Go to step 3.
3. Check to see if there is a specific speaker that has no sound.
Is there a specific one?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Go to step 9.
5. Remove the speaker(s) with no sound (see SPEAKER REPLACEMENT ), and disconnect its
connector.
6. Check the speaker with no sound for damage.
Is there any damage?
YES - Substitute the speaker and recheck.

NO - Go to step 7.
7. Check the speaker 2P connector for a loose or poor connection.
Reconnect the speaker 2P connector and recheck the symptom; does it still fail?
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Operation is normal.
8. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the speaker connector.
Is there about 4 ohms?
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Faulty speaker(s).
10. Disconnect the audio unit connector A (20P).
11. Check the resistance between the following terminals of audio unit connector A (20P).
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)

111
Speaker Terminal Wire color

A8 (+) GRN/BLK
Driver's door speaker,
Left tweeter A18 (-) LT GRN
Front passenger's door speaker, A7 (+) GRN/YEL
Right tweeter A17 (-) GRY
A6 (+) BLU/WHT
Left rear speaker
A16 (-) BLU/BLK
A5 (+) PNK
Right rear speaker
A15 (-) BLU/YEL
Is there more than 4 ohms ?

NO - Repair an open in the wire between the audio unit and speaker.
12. Disconnect the speaker 2P connector.
13. Check for continuity between body ground and audio unit connector A (20P) terminals No. 5, 6, 7, 8,
15, 16, 17, and 18 individually.
Fig. 31: Checking Continuity Between Body Ground And Audio Unit Connector (20P) No.
5,6,7,8,15,17 & 18 Terminals Individually
111
YES - Repair short to ground in the wire between the audio unit and speaker.
NO - Substitute a known-good audio unit and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
replace the original audio unit.
POOR OR NO SOUND WITH XM RADIO ('04-07 MODELS)
NOTE: Check the radio reception in an open area. Poor reception/interference can
be caused by tall buildings, mountains, or high-voltage power lines are
nearby.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ACC (I).

2. Turn on the audio unit and select XM radio.
3. Check for an error message on the display.
Is there any message displayed?
YES - Go to error code list (see ERROR CODES ).

NO - Go to step 4.
4. Disconnect audio unit connector B (14P).
5. Check for continuity between XM receiver connector A (14P) and body ground according to the table
shown in XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P) AND BODY GROUND.
XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P) AND BODY GROUND

XM receiver connector Wire color
A6 BLU
A14 WHT
A5 GRN
A13 RED
A9 BLU
A10 RED
A2 LT BLU
YES - Repair a short to ground in the wire between the audio unit and the XM receiver.
NO - Go to step 6.
6. Check for continuity between XM receiver connector A (14P) and audio unit connector B (14P)
according to the table shown in XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P) AND AUDIO UNIT
CONNECTOR B (14P).
XM RECEIVER CONNECTOR A (14P) AND AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P)

XM receiver connector Audio unit connector Wire color
A6 B6 BLK, GRY
A14 B14 WHT, BRN/WHT
A5 B5 GRN, LT GRN
A13 B13 RED, BRN/YEL
111
A9 B9 BLU
A10 B10 RED, GRN
A11 B11 BLK
A2 B2 LT BLU
YES - Substitute a known-good XM receiver, then reconnect all connectors and recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away, replace the original XM receiver. If symptom/indication is still
present, replace the audio unit.
NO - Repair open in the wire between audio unit and XM receiver.
XM RADIO DISPLAY IS BLANK AND NO STATION INFORMATION IS DISPLAYED ('04-07

MODELS)

2. Disconnect XM receiver connector A (14P).
4. Check the voltage between XM receiver connector A (14P) No. 1 terminal and body ground.
111
Fig. 32: Checking Voltage Between XM Receiver Connector (14P) Terminal & Body Ground
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Repair an open in the wire between fuse No. 5 (10 A) under-dash fuse/relay box and XM
receiver connector A (14P) No. 1 terminal.
5. Check for voltage between XM receiver connector A (14P) No. 11 terminal and body ground.
111
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Repair an open in the wire between XM receiver connector A (14P) No. 11 terminal and
audio unit connector B (14P) No. 11 terminal.
111
Is there 10 V or more present?
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Substitute a known-good XM receiver and recheck. If 10 V or more are present, replace
the original XM receiver.
111
YES - Substitute a known-good XM receiver, then reconnect all connectors and recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away, replace the original XM receiver. If symptom/indication is still
present, replace the audio unit.
NO - Substitute a known-good audio unit and recheck. If 0.5 V or less are present, replace the
original audio unit.
Diagnostics CD 07AAZ-SDBA100
AUDIO DISC DOES NOT PLAY
1. Try loading a disc.

111
Does the disc load?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO - Go to disc does not load (see AUDIO DISC DOES NOT LOAD ).
2. Insert another disc to see if the symptom can be duplicated.
Does the disc play?

NO - Go to step 3.
3. Insert audio diagnostic CD (T/N 07AAZ-SDBA100) in the audio unit.
Does the disc play?
YES - The original disc is faulty or has an unreadable format.

NO - Replace the audio unit (see AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY PANEL AND AUDIO UNIT
AUDIO DISC SKIPS
1. Confirm the vehicles tires are properly inflated.

2. Check customer's CD for scratches, fingerprints, and marks.
NOTE: The following test should be performed with the audio unit bass and
treble set to customer's listening preference. When comparing to
known-good vehicles, comparison should be performed on same model
and trim level.
3. Test-drive to identify when customer's CD skipping occurs. The audio diagnostic CD (T/N: 07AAZ-
SDBA100) can be used if customer's CD is not available. Use tracks 10-12.
Does the skipping occur?
YES - Go to step 4.
4. Compare the customer's CD that is skipping to a known-good vehicle under the same conditions.
Does the CD skip in the known-good vehicle under the same conditions?

NO - Go to step 5.
5. With the vehicle parked and the engine running, insert the diagnostic skip test CD (07AAZ-
SDBA300). Play tracks 2-11 and note the track number(s) the CD starts skipping. Do the same test on
111
a known-good vehicle.
Does the CD skip on same track(s) number as the known-good vehicle?

NO - Go to step 6.
6. Insert the diagnostic skip test CD (07AAZ-SDBA200) play tracks 7-11 and tracks 13-15 and note the
track number(s) the CD starts skipping. Perform the same test on a known-good vehicle.
Does the CD skip on same track(s) number as known-good vehicle?

RADIO REMOTE SWITCH DOES NOT WORK PROPERLY
1. Test the radio remote switch (see REAR SPEAKER ).
Is the radio remote switch OK?
YES - Intermittent failure, the radio remote switch and audio unit is OK at this time.
NO - Go to step 2.
2. Check the audio unit operation (volume up, volume down, CH (-), CH (+), MODE).
Is the audio unit operation OK?
YES - Go to step 3.
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ), and recheck.
4. Measure resistance between the No. 3 and No. 11 terminals of the audio unit connector (20P). The
resistance should be as shown in RADIO REMOTE SWITCH .
111
Fig. 36: Measuring Resistance Between Terminals Of Audio Unit Connector (20P)
RADIO REMOTE SWITCH

Button held VOL DOWN VOL UP CH(-) CH(+) MODE (NONE)
down
Resistance about 100 about 370 about 840 about 2k about 4k 10k ohms
ohms ohms ohms ohms ohms
Is resistance OK?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Repair open or high resistance in the circuit between the audio unit and the radio remote
switch. If the wires are OK, replace the cable reel (see CABLE REEL REPLACEMENT ).
5. Check for continuity between the No. 3 terminal of the audio unit connector A (20P) and body
ground, and between the No. 11 terminal and body ground. There should be no continuity.
111
Fig. 37: Checking Continuity Between No. 3 Terminal Of Audio Unit Connector (20P) & Body
Ground And No. 11 & Body Ground
YES - Repair the short to body ground in the circuit between the audio unit and the radio
remote switch. If the wires are OK, replace the cable reel (see CABLE REEL
REPLACEMENT ).
 Radio test harness breakout box 07AAZ-SDAA100

 Test harness A&B (Alpine) 070AZ-SDAA100
VOLUME DOES NOT CHANGE (WITH NAVIGATION OR SINGLE CD TYPE)
1. Set the fader and balance position to the center.

2. Operate the volume knob to see if the volume changes accordingly.
111
Does it change?

NO - Go to step 3.
3. Operate the volume knob to see if the LCD display changes accordingly.
Does it change?

NO - Go to step 4.
5. Connect test harness (070AZ-SDAA100) test harness A (with navigation), or test harness B (with
single CD player) to radio test harness breakout box (07AAZ-SDAA100).
6. Connect the special tool (070AZ-SDAA100) PTN-1 (A) (with navigation) or PTN-4 (B) (with single
CD type) connector to the printed circuit board connector.
111
Fig. 38: Connecting Test Harness (070AZ-SDAA100) (With Navigation)

111
Fig. 39: Connecting Special Tool (070AZ-SDAA100) PTN-1(With single CD type)

7. Connect the ohm meter to the special tool (070AZ-SDAA100) GND terminal and VOL+ terminal.
8. Turn the volume knob clockwise one click at a time. The resistance should change as follows with
each turn of the knob:
111
1.0 ohms --> infinity --> 1.0 ohms --> infinity --> 1.0 ohms
Does the resistance change as indicated?
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Replace the audio-HVAC display panel.
9. Connect the ohm meter to the special tool (070AZ-SDAA100 adapter) GND terminal and VOL-
terminal.
111
Fig. 40: Connecting Ohm Meter To Special Tool (070AZ-SDAA100) (With Navigation)
111
Fig. 41: Connecting Ohm Meter To Special Tool (070AZ-SDAA100) (With Single CD Type)
1.0 kohms --> infinity --> 1.0 kohms --> infinity --> 1.0 kohms
111


 Test harness (Stanley) 070AZ-SDAA200
VOLUME DOES NOT CHANGE (6 CD TYPE)
1. Set the fader and balance position to the center.

2. Operate the volume knob to see if the volume changes accordingly.
Does it change?

NO - Go to step 3.
3. Operate the volume knob to see if the LCD display changes accordingly.
Does it change?

NO - Go to step 4.
5. Connect test harness (070AZ-SDAA200) to the radio test harness breakout box (07AAZ-SDAA100).
6. Connect the special tool (070AZ-SDAA200) connectors to the printed circuit board connector.
111
Fig. 42: Connecting Special Tools Connectors To Printed Circuit Board Connector
7. Connect the ohm meter to the special tool (070AZ-SDAA200 adapter) GND terminal and VOL-A
terminal.
111
0 kohms --> infinity --> 0 kohms --> infinity --> 0 kohms
YES - Go to step 9.
9. Connect the ohm meter to the special tool (070AZ-SDAA200 adapter) GND terminal and VOL-B
terminal.
Fig. 43: Connecting Ohm Meter To Special Tool (070AZ-SDAA200 Adapter) GND Terminal &
111
VOL-B Terminal
0 kohms --> infinity --> 0 kohms --> infinity --> 0 kohms

AUDIO DISC DOES NOT LOAD
1. Insert a CD to see if the symptom can be duplicated.
Does the CD load?
YES - Operation is normal. If the audio disc loads normally, but will not play, go to audio disc
does not play (see AUDIO DISC DOES NOT PLAY ).
NO - Go to step 2.
2. Insert another CD.
Does the CD load?
YES - The original CD is faulty.

NO - Replace audio unit.

AUDIO DISC DOES NOT EJECT (WITH NAVIGATION OR SINGLE CD TYPE)
NOTE: Inspect the quality of the CDs, and make sure there are no adhesive labels
applied to them.
1. Check to see if the CD disc is ejected correctly by pushing the EJECT button.
Is it normal?

NO - Go to step 2.
2. Check to see if it is ejected with some binding or not ejected at all.
Is it ejected with some binding?

111
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Go to step 4.
3. Replace the disc and recheck.
Does the problem continue?
YES - Faulty audio unit.

NO - Faulty disc.
5. Connect test harness (070AZ-SDAA100) test harness A (with navigation), or test harness B (single
CD type) to the radio test harness breakout box (07AAZ-SDAA100).
6. Connect the special tool connector to the printed circuit board connector.
111
Fig. 44: Connecting Special Tool Connector To Printed Circuit Board Connector (With
Navigation)
111
Fig. 45: Connecting Special Tool Connector To Printed Circuit Board Connector (With Single
CD Type)
7. Connect the ohm meter to the special tool (070AZ-SDAA100 adapter) EJECT and GND terminals.
111
8. Press the EJECT button and check for continuity between the EJECT and GND terminals.


AUDIO DISC DOES NOT EJECT (6 CD TYPE)
NOTE: Inspect the quality of the CDs, and make sure there are no adhesive labels
applied to them.
1. Check to see if the CD disc is ejected correctly by pushing the EJECT button.
Is it normal?

NO - Go to step 2.
2. Check to see if it is ejected with some binding or not ejected at all.
Is it ejected with some binding?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Go to step 4.
3. Replace the disc and recheck.
Does the problem continue?
YES - Replace audio unit.

NO - Faulty CD disc.
6. Connect the special tool connectors to the printed circuit board connector.
111
Fig. 46: Connecting Special Tool Connectors To Printed Circuit Board Connector
7. Connect the ohm meter to the special tool (070AZ-SDAA200 adapter) EJECT and GND terminals.
8. Push the EJECT button and check for continuity between the EJECT and GND terminals.
YES - Go to step 9.
111
9. Check the audio-HVAC display panel and audio unit for assembling integrity.
Are they assembled correctly?

NO - Reinstall the audio-HVAC display panel onto the audio unit, and check the problem.
DISC CHANGER DOES NOT LOAD ALL SIX DISCS
NOTE: Inspect the quality of the discs, and make sure there are no adhesive labels
applied to them.
1. Load six discs into the audio unit.
Does the audio unit accept all six discs?
YES - Intermittent failure, the audio unit is OK at this time.

NO - Go to step 2.
2. Try to load the discs again.
Does the audio unit accept all six discs?
YES - At least one of the original CDs is faulty.

AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY MODULE SWITCHES DO NOT WORK
NOTE: In order to troubleshoot the main power switch, go to POWER SWITCH WILL
NOT TURN ON (WITH NAVIGATION OR SINGLE CD TYPE) .
1. Refer to the following switch list, and find the appropriate switch for each button. Then perform the
following exercise to identify the switch that does not work by operating various buttons which only
belong to that switch.
Switch List:
Switch A: AM/FM, CD/AUX, SCAN, SEEK/SKIP, UP/DOWN, CH/DISC UP DOWN,

LOAD, EJECT
Switch B: INFO, MAP, MENU, JOY, CANCEL, SET UP, ZOOM UP/DOWN
Switch C: TUNE Push MODE
Switch D: TEMPERATURE CONTROL, AUTO, OFF, DEF, RECIRCULATION, REAR
DEF, DUAL
Switch E: AUDIO
Switch F: A/C
2. Check to see if the buttons that do not function all belong to switch A.
Are they all switch A's?

111
YES - Faulty audio-HVAC display panel and audio unit. Replace the audio-HVAC display
module.
NO - Go to step 3.
3. Check to see if the buttons that do not function all belong to switch B.
Are they all switch B's?
module.
NO - Go to step 4.
4. Check to see if the buttons that do not function all belong to switch C.
Are they all switch C's?
module.
NO - Go to step 5.
5. Check to see if the buttons that do not function all belong to switch D.
Are they all switch D's?
YES - Replace the audio-HVAC display panel.

NO - Go to step 6.
6. Check to see if the buttons that do not function all belong to switch E.
Are they all switch E's?
YES - Faulty audio-HVAC display panel, audio unit and navigation display. Replace the audio-
HVAC display module.
NO - Go to step 7.
7. Check to see if the button that do not function all belong to switch F.
Are they all switch F's?
YES - Faulty audio-HVAC display panel, climate control unit and navigation display. Replace
the audio-HVAC display module.
DISC LED DOES NOT TURN ON OR OFF
1. Identify whether the LED that does not turn on or off is the green or red one; they indicated the status.
 Green indicator: Loading on ready.
 Red indicator: Loading on wait.
Is LED indicated?

111

POWER SWITCH WILL NOT TURN ON (WITH NAVIGATION OR SINGLE CD TYPE)
1. With the ignition switch ON (II), push the power switch ON to see if the audio unit turns ON.
Does the power turn on?

NO - Go to step 2.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then check the No. 5 (10 A) and No. 32 (7.5 A) fuses in the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Replace the fuse(s) and recheck.
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ). Check that audio unit connector A (20P) is properly connected.
Is it connected properly?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Reconnect the connector, and recheck the function.
4. Measure voltage between audio unit connector A10 terminal and body ground.
111
Fig. 47: Measuring Voltage Between Audio Unit Connector A10 Terminal & Body Ground
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Repair the open circuit or poor connection in wire between the under-dash fuse/relay box
No. 5 (10 A) fuse and audio unit connector A terminal No. 10.
6. Measure the voltage between the audio unit connector A terminal No. 2 and body ground.
111
Fig. 48: Measuring Voltage Between Audio Unit Connector A Terminal No. 2 & Body Ground
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Repair the open circuit or poor connection in the wire between the under-dash fuse/relay
box No. 32 (7.5 A) fuse and audio unit connector A terminal No. 2.
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then check for continuity between audio unit connector A terminal No.
20 and body ground.
111
Fig. 49: Checking Continuity Between Audio Unit Connector A Terminal And Body Ground
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Repair the open wire between audio unit connector A20 and body ground (G504).
9. Connect test harness (070AZ-SDAA100) test harness A (with navigation), or test harness B (single
CD type) to the radio test harness breakout box (07AAZ-SDAA100).
10. Connect the special tool connector to the printed circuit board connector.
111
Fig. 50: Connecting Special Tool Connector To Printed Circuit Board Connector (With
Navigation)
111
Fig. 51: Connecting Special Tool Connector To Printed Circuit Board Connector (With Single
CD Player)
11. Connect the ohm meter to the special tool (070AZ-SDAA100 adapter) POWER and GND terminals.
111
12. Push the POWER button and check for continuity between the POWER and GND terminals.


POWER SWITCH WILL NOT TURN ON (6 CD TYPE)
1. With the ignition switch ON (II), push the power switch ON to see if the audio unit turns ON.
Does the power turn on?

NO - Go to step 2.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then check the No. 5 (10 A) and No. 32 (7.5 A) fuses in the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK?
YES - Go to step 3.
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ). Check that audio unit connector A (20P) is properly connected.
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Reconnect the connector, and recheck the function.
4. Measure voltage between audio unit connector A10 terminal and body ground.
111
Fig. 52: Measuring Voltage Between Audio Unit Connector A10 Terminal & Body Ground
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Repair the open circuit or poor connection in wire between the under-dash fuse/relay box
No. 5 (10 A) fuse and audio unit connector A terminal No. 10.
6. Measure the voltage between the audio unit connector A terminal No. 2 and body ground.
111
Fig. 53: Measuring Voltage Between Audio Unit Connector A Terminal No. 2 & Body Ground
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Repair the open circuit or poor connection in the wire between the under-dash fuse/relay
box No. 32 (7.5 A) fuse and audio unit connector A terminal No. 2.
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then check for continuity between audio unit connector A terminal No.
20 and body ground.
111
Fig. 54: Checking Continuity Between Audio Unit Connector A Terminal No. 20 & Body
Ground
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Repair the open wire between audio unit connector A20 and body ground (G504).
111
11. Connect the ohm meter to the special tool (070AZ-SDAA200 adapter) POW SW and GND terminals.
12. Push the POWER button and check for continuity between the POW SW and GND terminals.

111

DISPLAY IS MISSING INFORMATION (6 CD TYPE)
NOTE:  A part of the A/C does not display.

 There is display of A/C information.
 Wrong indication in LCD.
1. Repeat turning the ignition switch ON (II) and OFF to see if the problem appears.
Does the problem appear?
YES - Go to step 2.
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ), and check for the proper connection of the connectors.
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Reconnect the connectors, and recheck the problem.
3. Check all A/C information of LCD display.
Do all the indicators work?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Replace the audio-HVAC display module.
111
7. Connect the ohm meter to the special tool (070AZ-SDAA200 adapter) AUTO/MANU and GND
terminals.
YES - Faulty audio-HVAC display panel.

111
AUDIO-HVAC SUBDISPLAY/CLOCK DOES NOT DISPLAY (WITH NAVIGATION)
1. Check the connections at the audio-HVAC subdisplay/clock 10P connector and the audio unit
connector C (10P).
Are the connectors and terminals connected properly?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO - Repair the connection and recheck.
2. Check for continuity between the audio-HVAC subdisplay/clock 10P connector and the audio unit
connector C (10P) terminals for each wire listed in the chart shown in AUDIO-HVAC
SUBDISPLAY/CLOCK 10P CONNECTOR AND THE AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR C (10P).
AUDIO-HVAC SUBDISPLAY/CLOCK 10P CONNECTOR AND THE AUDIO UNIT

CONNECTOR C (10P)
Audio-HVAC subdisplay/clock Audio unit connector C (10P)
Wire 10P connector terminal terminal
BLU/ORN 2 2
YEL/RED 4 4
YEL 5 5
BLU/RED 6 6
BLU 7 7
GRY 8 8
BLK 1 1
RED 9 9
GRN 10 10
BLK 3 (body ground)
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Repair the open in the wire between the audio unit and the audio-HVAC subdisplay/clock.
3. Check for continuity between each audio-HVAC subdisplay/clock 10P connector terminal and body
ground.
AUDIO-HVAC SUBDISPLAY/CLOCK 10P CONNECTOR TERMINAL

Wire Clock 10P connector terminal
BLU/ORN 2
YEL/RED 4
YEL 5
BLU/RED 6
BLU 7
GRY 8
BLK 1
RED 9
GRN 10
111
YES - Repair the short to ground in the wire between the audio unit and the audio-HVAC
subdisplay/clock.
NO - Go to step 4.
4. Substitute a known-good audio-HVAC subdisplay/clock and recheck.
Does the subdisplay work properly?
YES - Replace the original audio-HVAC subdisplay/clock.

NO - Substitute a known-good audio-HVAC display panel and retest. If the problem is gone,
replace the original audio unit.
AUDIO DISPLAY AND CONTROLS ARE DIM, NO BACK LIGHTING (LCD SEGMENTS CAN
BE READ)
1. Repeat turning the ignition switch ON (II) and OFF to see if the back lighting returns.
Does the back lighting return?
YES - Operation is normal at this time.

NO - Go to step 2.
2. Shine a flashlight against the audio unit display.
Can the audio unit display information be seen?
YES - Replace the audio unit (see AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY PANEL AND AUDIO UNIT
NO - Go to no display appears on the screen (LCD segments can not be read) (see NO
DISPLAY APPEARS ON THE SCREEN (LCD SEGMENTS CANNOT BE READ) ).
NO DISPLAY APPEARS ON THE SCREEN (LCD SEGMENTS CANNOT BE READ)
1. Repeat turning the ignition switch ON (II) and OFF to see if the problem appears.
Does the problem appear?
YES - Go to step 2.
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ), and check for the proper connection of the audio unit connector A
(20P).
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Reconnect the connector, and recheck the problem.
3. Check that the audio unit switches correctly respond to your operation.
111
Do they function correctly?
YES - Faulty audio unit.

NO - Faulty front printed circuit board and audio printed circuit board.
SECURITY INDICATOR DOES NOT WORK PROPERLY
1. Check if the operation of the security indicator when turning the ignition switch OFF.
Does the security indicator flash?

NO - Go to step 2.
2. Check the operation of the radio station preset buttons.
Do the preset buttons set and keep their memory?

NO - Go to radio preset memory is lost (see RADIO PRESET MEMORY IS LOST ).
ERROR CODE: XM NO SIGNAL OR XM ANTENNA IS DISPLAYED ('04-07 MODELS)
NOTE: Check XM radio reception in an open area. Poor reception/interference can

be caused by tall buildings, mountains, or high-voltage power lines.
1. Park vehicle outside with a clear view of the southern horizon.
Does the XM radio receive a signal?
YES - Reception interference operation is normal.

NO - Go to step 2.
2. Check XM antenna connector B (2p) at XM receiver.
Is XM antenna connector B connected?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Reconnect XM connector B, recheck XM radio operation. If the signal is restored,
operation is normal. If signal is not restored, go to step 3.
3. Substitute known-good XM antenna.
Does the XM radio receive a signal?
YES - Replace the XM antenna.

NO - Substitute a known-good XM antenna lead. If the XM radio receives a signal, replace the
original XM antenna lead.
SOUND QUALITY DIAGNOSIS

111
Use the following tests to check sound quality.
NOTE: Before beginning the following tests, write down the client's bass, treble,
fader and balance settings, then set them to their center positions for the
testing.
LEFT/RIGHT CHANNEL ID
Do this test to confirm proper channel routing.
1. Insert the audio diagnostic CD (T/N 07AAZ-SDBA 100) into the audio unit.
2. Play track No. 1 (left, both, right channel ID) at a normal, or slightly higher than normal, volume
level.
3. The voice should be audible only from the channel or channels when indicated.
 If the channel ID is correct for each side, go to phase test (see PHASE TEST ).
 If the channel ID is not correct, check for
- Shorted speaker wire

- Faulty audio unit
PHASE TEST
Do this test to confirm proper speaker phasing.
2. Play track No. 2 (phase) at a normal, or slightly higher than normal, volume level.
3. The voice should sound centered and focused when it is in-phase.
4. The voice should sound diffused, and have "less bass" when it is out of phase.
 If the voice changes from in-phase to out of phase as indicated by the prompt, the phasing is
correct. Go to electrical noise test (see ELECTRICAL NOISE TEST ).
 If the voice always sounds out of phase, phasing is not correct. Check for
- Crossed speaker wires

- Faulty audio unit
ELECTRICAL NOISE TEST
111
Do this test to check for electrical noise being induced into the audio system.
NOTE: Electrical noise may be caused by outside sources that cannot be filtered by
the audio system. Make sure you remove cell phones and/or turn off any
aftermarket devices before beginning this test.
2. Play track No. 4 (digital zero) at a normal, or slightly higher than normal, volume level.
3. Operate any electrical device that may causes noise from the audio system, including starting the
engine.
4. Play track No. 5 (near digital zero) at a normal, or slightly higher than normal, volume level.
5. Operate any electrical device that may causes noise from the audio system, including starting the
engine.
6. Play track No. 6 (SNR) at a normal, or slightly higher than normal, volume level.
7. Operate any electrical device that causes noise from the audio system, including starting the engine.
 If no abnormal noise is heard, go to the individual speaker test (see INDIVIDUAL SPEAKER
TEST ).
 If the noise is present only during the SNR track, replace the audio unit.
 If the noise is heard during the digital zero or near digital zero track, check for
- Poor ground at the audio unit, engine, or battery cable

- Pinched or shorted speaker wire
- Faulty audio unit
- Other faulty components causing excessive electrical noise (ignition coils, alternator,
door lock actuators, etc.). Disconnect any suspect components, and then replay the tracks
that were originally noisy. If the noise is gone, check the component's circuit and the
component.
INDIVIDUAL SPEAKER TEST
Do this test to identify a faulty speaker.
2. Play track No. 30 (steady 300 Hz tone) at a normal, or slightly higher than normal, volume level.
3. Listen to each speaker for poor sound, and compare it to the other speakers. Use the audio unit's fader
and balance settings to help isolate the channel with the problem.
 If the sound quality produced by a specific speaker is poor, substitute it with a known-good
speaker. If the poor sound quality continues, go to the sound balance test (see SOUND
BALANCE TEST ).
 If the sound quality is OK, go to the sound balance test (see SOUND BALANCE TEST ).
111
SOUND BALANCE TEST
Perform this test to identify a faulty channel or speaker.
2. Confirm the bass and treble are set to the center positions.
3. Play track No. 3 (pink noise) at a normal, or slightly higher than normal, volume level.
4. A "static" type sound should be heard through all speakers.
5. Insert the audio diagnostic CD (T/N 07AAZ-SDBA 100) into the audio unit of a known-good vehicle.
6. Set the bass and treble to the center positions.
7. Play track No. 3 (pink noise) all the same level as was played in step 3.
8. Compare the sounds made by the two vehicles.
 If the sounds made by the two vehicles are very similar, go to the Frequency Sweep Test (see
FREQUENCY SWEEP ).
 If the sound does not have as much bass, go to the phase test (see PHASE TEST ).
 If the sound does not have enough "hiss," check the tweeters and their circuits.
FREQUENCY SWEEP
Do this test to find rattles or reverberation that may cause a perception of poor sound quality.
2. Play track No. 13 (sweep from 500 Hz to 35 Hz) at a normal, or slightly higher than normal, volume
level.
3. Listen to each speaker for poor sound quality or reverberations caused by specific frequencies. Use
the voice-over to estimate the frequency that causes the vibration. Use the audio unit's fader and
balance settings to help isolate the channel with the problem.
 If vibrations or poor sound quality is heard, go to step 4.
 If no vibrations or poor sound quality is heard, go to sound judging (see SOUND JUDGING ).
4. Choose the appropriate track from No. 14 to 25 (small range frequency sweep) or 26 to 53 (single
frequencies) to recreate the frequency that caused the poor sound quality or vibration located in step 3;
this aids in diagnosis of the cause.
NOTE: When you get to the track that recreates the problem, select the repeat
function on the audio unit, this will help you isolate the cause.
5. Replace or insulate the source of the vibration or, if the speaker is the source of the poor sound
quality, replace it.

111
SOUND JUDGING
Do this test to compare overall sound quality, imaging, and dynamics between the customer's vehicle and a
known-good vehicle. Only use a vehicle of the same model and trim level for this test.
1. In the customer's vehicle, set the bass, treble, fader, and balance settings to the customer's normal
settings that were written down before beginning the test.
3. Play tracks No. 7 to 12 (sound quality, midland, dynamics, and imaging demonstration tracks) at a
normal, or slightly higher than normal, volume level. Write down the volume setting being used.
4. Listen to areas of the track that stand out as being either real clear or poorer than other areas of the
track.
5. In a known-good vehicle, insert the audio diagnostic CD (T/N 07AAZ-SDBA100) into the audio unit.
6. Play the tracks at the same volume level and the same bass, treble, balance, and fader settings as used
in step 3 in the customer's vehicle.
7. Listen to the same area of the track that stood out as being either real clear or poorer than other areas
of the track.
8. Compare the customer's vehicle's sound quality results the known-good vehicle's results.
 If the sound quality in the customer's vehicle is comparable to the sound quality in the known-
good vehicle, then the customer's vehicle is operating as designed.
 If the sound quality is not comparable, check these items in order.
- Loose or improperly installed speakers or other hardware that may become excited by
the vibrations generated by the speakers
- Damaged speaker(s)
- Faulty audio unit
SEEK STOP TEST
Do this test to check the performance of the audio unit's AM and FM reception. Refer to symptom
troubleshooting: no sound is heard from speakers (display is normal) (see No sound is heard from
speakers (display is normal) ) before continuing with this test.
NOTE:  Aftermarket theft-recovery devices and other aftermarket accessories

may reduce radio reception.
 Changes in cloud cover and other atmospheric conditions will affect
the ability of the audio unit to receive radio signals.
1. Park the client's vehicle in an open area away from buildings or other obstacles.
2. Park a known-good vehicle (same year, model, and trim level) next to the customer's vehicle, facing
the same direction.
3. Start the engine in the customer's vehicle, and turn on the radio.
4. Set the FM receiver to 87.7 MHz.
5. Press the "Seek +" button, and record the first station that the audio unit locks onto.
111
6. Press the "Seek +" button repeatedly, and write down each station that the audio unit locks onto until
the station recorded in step 5 is reached again.
7. Set the AM receiver to 530 kHz.
8. Press the "Seek +" button, and record the first station that the audio unit locks onto.
9. Press the "Seek +" button repeatedly, and write down each station that the audio unit locks onto until
the station recorded in step 8 is reached again.
11. Start the engine in the known-good vehicle, and then perform steps 4 thru 10 on the known-good
vehicle.
12. Compare the number of stations received in steps 6 and 9 in the customer's vehicle with the number of
stations received in the known-good vehicle.
 If the number of stations received is the same, or within 10 %, the audio unit's tuner
performance is OK. The problem may be atmospheric conditions, multi-path interference, or
other obstructions to the radio signal.
 If the customer's vehicle receives fewer stations by at least 10 %, go to step 2 of poor radio
reception of interference (see POOR RADIO RECEPTION OR INTERFERENCE ).
AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY MODULE ILLUMINATION TROUBLESHOOTING
NOTE: If the display is blank when the headlights are off, the problem is not in the
illumination circuit (see AUDIO DISPLAY AND CONTROLS ARE DIM, NO
BACK LIGHTING (LCD SEGMENTS CAN BE READ) ).
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

2. Turn the combination light switch ON.
3. Turn the illumination control dial on the gauge control module back and forth between full dim and
full bright.
Does the problem with the illumination affect only the audio-HVAC display panel?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Go to B-CAN Diagnosis Test Mode A (see TROUBLESHOOTING - B-CAN SYSTEM
DIAGNOSIS TEST MODE A ).
4. Turn the illumination control dial on the gauge control module back and forth between full dim and
full bright while watching the audio-HVAC display panel buttons, button LEDs, LCD displays.
5. Proceed with the diagnostic procedure for the appropriate symptom(s).
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Symptom Diagnostic Procedure
 Buttons stay bright and do not adjust with

dimmer
 LEDs do not dim with dimmer off of full Go to step 6.
bright position
 LCD display or subdisplay is full bright and
does not adjust with dimmer
111
 Lower panel ambient light may or may not

dim with dimmer
 Buttons do not light up
 LEDs do not dim
 LCD display or subdisplay is full bright and
does not adjust with dimmer, or does not Go to step 9.
fully dim
 Lower panel ambient light may or may not
dim with dimmer
Lower panel ambient light does not light up
 Buttons dim with dimmer
 LEDs dim with dimmer off of full bright

Go to step 12.
position
 LCD display dims with dimmer
Symptom other than those listed above Replace the audio-HVAC display module.

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ) and check for loose wires terminals or poor connections at audio
unit connector A (20P).
Are all the wire terminals tight, and is audio unit connector A (20P) connected properly?
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Repair the loose wire terminal, or properly connect audio unit connector A (20P) and
recheck the symptom.
7. Turn the illumination control dial on the gauge control module to the full bright position.
8. Measure the voltage between the No. 19 and No. 20 terminals of audio unit connector A (20P).
Is there 1 V or less?
YES - Check connections at audio unit connector A (20P). If connections are OK substitute a
known-good audio-HVAC display module and recheck the symptom. If the symptom is gone,
replace the original audio-HVAC display module.
NO - Repair open in the RED wire between the MICU and the audio-HVAC display module.
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ) and check for loose wire terminals or poor connections at audio
unit connector A (20P).
Are all the wire terminals tight, and is audio unit connector A (20P) connected properly?

NO - Repair the loose wire terminal, or properly connect audio unit connector A (20P) and
recheck the symptom.
10. With the combination light switch still ON, turn the illumination control dial on the gauge control
module to the full bright position.
111
11. Measure the voltage between the No. 9 and No. 20 terminals of the audio unit connector A (20P).
YES - Check connections at the audio unit connector A (20P). If connections are OK substitute
a known-good audio-HVAC display module and recheck the symptom. If the symptom is gone,
replace the original audio-HVAC display module.
NO - Repair open in the RED/BLK wire between the under-hood fuse/relay box and the audio-
HVAC display panel.
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ) and check for loose wire terminals or poor connections at climate
control unit connector B (16P).
Are all the wire terminals tight, and is climate control unit connector B (16P) connector
connected properly?

NO - Repair the loose wire terminal, or properly connect climate control unit connector B (16P)
and recheck the symptom.
13. Turn the illumination control dial on the gauge control module to the full bright position.
14. Measure the voltage between the No. 12 and No. 6 terminals of climate control unit connector B
(16P).

NO - Repair open in the RED wire between the MICU and the climate control unit.
15. Measure the voltage between the No. 8 and No. 6 terminals of the climate control unit connector B
(16P).
YES - Check connections at climate control unit connector B (16P). If connections are OK
substitute a known-good audio-HVAC display module and recheck the symptom. If the
symptom is gone, replace the original audio-HVAC display module.
NO - Repair open in the RED/BLK wire between the under-hood fuse/relay box and the climate
control unit.
AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION


 Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related parts.
 Lay a workshop towel under the parts when working on them to protect
111
the face panel from scratches or other damage.

 Do not work in a dusty or dirty place.
 Discharge static electricity from your body before and during the work.
 Do not touch the circuit board with your bare hands.
 Do not work with dirty hands.
 Be careful not to fold the flat plate cable.
 Do not touch the terminal connector of the flat plate cable with your
bare hands. (If you have touched it, wipe it off thoroughly.)
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then write down the
frequencies for the radio's preset buttons.
2. Remove the upper panel (see UPPER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).
3. Remove the center pocket (see CENTER POCKET REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).
4. Remove the screws and bolts, disconnect the audio-HVAC display module connectors (A) and the
antenna lead (B), then remove the audio-HVAC display module (C).
111
Fig. 57: Disconnecting Audio-HVAC Display Module Connectors And Antenna Lead (Without
Climate Control)
111
Fig. 58: Disconnecting Audio-HVAC Display Module Connectors And Antenna Lead (With
Climate Control)
111
Fig. 59: Disconnecting Audio-HVAC Display Module Connectors And Antenna Lead (With
Navigation)
5. Install the audio-HVAC display module and note these items:

111
 Make sure the disconnected connectors plugged in properly, and the antenna lead is connected
properly.
 Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets.
AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY PANEL AND AUDIO UNIT

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Remove the mounting screws and the audio unit (A) from the radio brackets (B).
Fig. 60: Removing Audio Unit From Radio Brackets (Without Climate Control)
111
Fig. 61: Removing Audio Unit From Radio Brackets (With Climate Control)
111
Fig. 62: Removing Audio Unit From Radio Brackets (With Navigation)
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.
AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY PANEL DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY

1. Remove the audio-HVAC display panel (see AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY PANEL AND AUDIO
UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).
2. Remove the mounting screws and the covers (A), then disconnect the connectors (B) (Navigation
system) from the printed circuit board (C).
111
Fig. 63: Removing Mounting Screws & Covers (Without Climate Control)
111
Fig. 64: Removing Mounting Screws & Covers (With Climate Control)
111
Fig. 65: Removing Mounting Screws & Covers (With Navigation)

3. With navigation system: Remove the mounting screws and display unit (A) from the printed circuit
board (B).
111
Fig. 66: Removing Display Unit (With Navigation)

4. Remove the mounting screws and control knobs (A), then remove the printed circuit board (B).
111
Fig. 67: Removing Control Knobs And Printed Circuit Board (Without Climate Control)
111
Fig. 68: Removing Control Knobs And Printed Circuit Board (With Climate Control)
111
Fig. 69: Removing Control Knobs And Printed Circuit Board (With Navigation)
5. Install the audio unit and printed circuit board in the reverse order of removal.
AUDIO-HVAC SUBDISPLAY/CLOCK REPLACEMENT

WITH NAVIGATION

2. Remove the two mounting screws.
111
3. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the audio-HVAC subdisplay/clock (B).
Fig. 70: Disconnecting 10P Connector From Audio-HVAC Subdisplay/Clock

SPEAKER REPLACEMENT
FRONT SPEAKER
1. Remove the door panel.

NOTE: If you pull the speaker out too far from the door, you will damage the
lower clips (C).
2. Pull the speaker (A) straight out, just enough to release the upper clips. Then lift the speaker straight
111
up to release the lower clips (C).
Fig. 71: Removing Speaker Straight Out

3. Disconnect the 2P connector (B), and remove the speaker.

TWEETER
1. Remove the tweeter speaker grille (A).
111
Fig. 72: Removing Tweeter Speaker Grille

2. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the tweeter.

3. Remove the tweeter speaker grille from the tweeter.
111
Fig. 73: Removing Tweeter Speaker Grille From Tweeter

REAR SPEAKER
1. Remove the rear speaker cover by prying straight up to release the clips.
111
2. Remove the four mounting bolts from the rear speaker (A).
Fig. 74: Disconnecting 2P Connector & Removing Rear Speaker

3. Disconnect the 2P connector (B), and remove the speaker.

RADIO REMOTE SWITCH TEST

1. Remove the driver's airbag assembly (see DRIVER'S AIRBAG REPLACEMENT ).
2. Remove the 4P connector (A) from the radio remote switch (B).
111
Fig. 75: Removing 4P Connector From Radio Remote Switch

3. Remove the two mounting screws and the switch.

4. Measure resistance between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals in each switch position according to the
table shown in Fig. 76.
111
Fig. 76: Measuring Resistance Between No. 3 & No. 4 Terminals In Each Switch Position
5. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the remote switch.
WINDOW ANTENNA COIL REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the left rear pillar trim.
 2 door without side Curtain Airbags (see 2-DOOR - C-PILLAR - WITHOUT SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('03-04 MODELS) )
 4 door without side Curtain Airbags (see 4-DOOR - C-PILLAR - WITHOUT SIDE
 2 door with side Curtain Airbags (see 2-DOOR - C-PILLAR - WITH SIDE CURTAIN
AIRBAGS ('04-07 MODELS) )
 4 door with side Curtain Airbags (see 4-DOOR - C-PILLAR - WITH SIDE CURTAIN
2. Disconnect the 1P connectors (A) from the window antenna coil (B).
111
Fig. 77: Disconnecting 1P Connectors From Window Antenna Coil

3. Disconnect all connectors, then remove the bolt and window antenna coil.
WINDOW ANTENNA TEST

1. Wrap aluminum foil (A) around the tip of the tester probe (B) as shown in Fig. 78.
111
Fig. 78: Wrapping Aluminum Foil Around Tip Of Tester Probe

2. Touch one tester probe to the rear of the window antenna terminal (A) here, and move the other tester
probe along the antenna wires to check that continuity exists. Repair if continuity does not exist.
111
Fig. 79: Checking For Continuity Rear Window Antenna

WINDOW ANTENNA REPAIR
NOTE: To make an effective repair, the broken section must be no longer than one
inch.
1. Lightly rub the area around the broken section (A) with fine steel wool, then clean it with alcohol.
111
Fig. 80: Rubbing Area Around Broken Section With Fine Steel Wool
2. Carefully mask above and below the broken portion of the window antenna wire (B) with cellophane
tape (C).
3. Mix the silver conductive paint thoroughly. Using a small brush, apply a heavy coat of paint (A)
extending about 1/8" on both sides of the break. Allow 30 minutes to dry.
111
Fig. 81: Applying Silver Conductive Paint Using Small Brush

4. Check for continuity in the repaired wire.

5. Apply a second coat of paint in the same way. Let it dry three hours before removing the tape.
XM ANTENNA REPLACEMENT
'04-07 MODELS
111
1. Remove the headliner (see HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).

2. Disconnect the 2P ('04-05 models) or 1P ('06-07 model) connector (A) from the XM antenna (B).
Fig. 82: Disconnecting 2P ('04-05 Models) Or 1P ('06-07 Model) Connector From XM Antenna
3. Remove the nut from the XM antenna.

111
XM RECEIVER REPLACEMENT
'04-07 MODELS
1. Open the trunk lid.

2. Remove the right trunk side trim panel.
 4-door (see 4-DOOR ('03-05 MODELS) or 4-DOOR ('06-07 MODEL) )
3. Loosen the two nuts from the XM receiver.

4. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) and 2P ('04-05 models) or 1P ('06-07 model) connector (B) from
the XM receiver (C).
111
Fig. 83: Disconnecting 14P Connector And 2P ('04-05 Models) Or 1P ('06-07 Model) Connector
From XM Receiver
111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Consoles - Accord
Consoles - Accord
CENTER CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014* *Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program;
call 888-424-6857
NOTE:  Take care not to scratch the front seat, dashboard, and related parts.
 Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage
when prying components.
1. M/T model: Remove the shift knob (A).

-1 Lower the shift lever boot (B) to release the hooks (C) from the knob.
-2 Remove the shift knob.
111
2 августа 2011 г. 14:46:15
Fig. 1: Removing Shift Knob (M/T Model)

2. Detach the clips (A, B) by pulling the center console front panel (C) up. If equipped, disconnect the
seat heater switch connectors (D).
111
Fig. 2: Detaching Clips Pulling Center Console Front Panel Up

3. Pry up on the right of the console pocket (A) with a trim tool, and detach the clips, then remove the
pocket.
111
Fig. 3: Prying Right Of Console Pocket With Trim Tool

4. Remove the screws (A), detach the clips (B) and hook (C) by pulling the center holder (D) up, and
disconnect the front accessory power socket connector (E).
111
Fig. 4: Disconnecting Front Accessory Power Socket Connector

5. Detach the clips (A, B) by pulling the center console rear panel (C) up.
111
Fig. 5: Detaching Clips Pulling Center Console Rear Panel Up

6. Remove the center console (A).

-1 Open the console box lid (B) then remove the console mat (C).
-2 If equipped, disconnect the rear accessory power socket connector (D), and detach the clip
(E).
-3 Remove the screws (F, G), then pull the rear portion of the console up to release the hooks
(H), then remove it.
111
Fig. 6: Removing Center Console

7. Install the console in the reverse order of removal, and check if the clip is damaged or stress-whitened,
and if necessary, replace it with new one.
CENTER CONSOLE ARMREST DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
NOTE:  When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to
prevent damage.
 Take care not to scratch armrest.
1. Remove the center console armrest (see step 2 in CENTER CONSOLE REAR COVER
REPLACEMENT ).
2. Remove the screws, then remove the armrest hinge (A) and the console tray (B) as an assembly.
111
Fig. 7: Removing Armrest Hinge & Console Tray

111
3. Slide the console armrest forward fully.

4. Insert a large flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with protective tape into the center of the gap between the
console armrest (A) and the console armrest base (B), and gently push it straight down until both
inside hooks (C) of the console armrest come off the stop portions (D) of the console base.
NOTE: Apply protective tape (E) to the projection in the back surface of the
console armrest to prevent damage.
Fig. 8: Inserting Screwdriver Into Center Of Gap Between Console Armrest & Console Armrest
Base
5. Slightly slide the console armrest forward to get the inside hooks over the stop portions, then remove
the flat-tip screwdriver from the gap.
111
6. Remove the console armrest (A) from the guide rails of the console armrest base (B).
Fig. 9: Removing Console Armrest From Guide Rails Of Console Armrest Base
111
7. Remove the screws, then remove the slide bracket (A).
Fig. 10: Removing Slide Bracket

8. Separate the console armrest upper base (A) from the lower base (B). Remove the screws, then
remove the armrest lock (C) and the tray lock (D) from the upper base.
111
Fig. 11: Separating Console Armrest Upper Base From Lower Base
9. Reassemble the console armrest in the reverse order of disassembly.
CENTER CONSOLE REAR COVER REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the center console.
1. Remove the center console (see CENTER CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).

2. Open the center console armrest (A) and remove the hinge mounting screws, then remove the armrest.
111
Fig. 12: Removing Hinge Mounting Screws

3. Remove the screws (A) and detach the clips (B) then remove the center console rear cover (C).
111
Fig. 13: Removing Center Console Rear Cover

4. Install the cover the reverse order of removal.
111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Dashboard - Accord
Dashboard - Accord
INSTRUMENT PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

NOTE:  Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related parts.
1. Tilt the steering column down.

2. Remove the instrument panel (A).
-1 Remove the screws (B).
-2 Gently pull out along the bottom to release the clips (C) and hooks (D).
-3 Gently pull out the upper portion of the panel.
-4 With auto A/C: Disconnect the in-car temperature sensor connector (E) and the air hose (F).
111
2 августа 2011 г. 14:46:45
Fig. 1: Removing Instrument Panel

3. Install the panel in the reverse order of removal. If equipped, make sure the in-car temperature sensor
connector is plugged in properly, and the air hose is connected securely.
INSTRUMENT UPPER VISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related parts.

 Instrument panel (see INSTRUMENT PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION )
2. Remove the screws, then remove the instrument upper visor (A).
111
Fig. 2: Removing Instrument Upper Visor

3. Install the visor in the reverse order of removal.
DRIVER'S DASHBOARD LOWER COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
 When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to
prevent damage.
1. Adjust the steering column upward.

2. Remove the screw (A).
111
Fig. 3: Removing Driver's Dashboard Lower Cover Screw

3. Pull out the bottom of the driver's dashboard lower cover (B) to detach the lower clips (C).
4. Detach the upper clips (D) and a hook (E) by pulling the driver's dashboard lower cover back.
5. If any of the clips (C, D) securing the driver's dashboard lower cover is hard to detach, pry it with a
flat-tip screwdriver.
6. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (A). If equipped, disconnect the moonroof switch
connector (B).
111
Fig. 4: Removing Driver's Dashboard Lower Cover

7. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and make sure each connector is plugged in properly.
DRIVER'S DASHBOARD UNDER COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

'04-07 MODELS
1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (see DRIVER'S DASHBOARD LOWER COVER
2. Remove the driver's dashboard under cover (A).
-1 Gently pull down the rear edge to detach the clips.
-2 Pull the cover away to release the pins (B) from the holders (C).
111
Fig. 5: Removing Driver's Dashboard Under Cover

3. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal.
UPPER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

Upper panel/vent removal tool 07AAC-SDAA100
1. Push the hazard warning switch button (A). Carefully insert a flat-tip screwdriver into the slot (B)
below the button, and push down on the center clip.
111
Fig. 6: Pushing Hazard Warning Switch Button

With the special tool and a flat-tip screwdriver
2. Set both ends of the special tool in the center vent openings (A) as shown below. While pressing the
center clip (B) down, pull the upper panel (C) back with the tool to detach the clips (D).
111
Fig. 7: Setting Both Ends Of Special Tool In Center Vent Openings

With two flat-tip screwdrivers
3. Carefully insert a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with tape into the slot (A) on one side of the upper
panel (B). While pressing down on the center clip (C), carefully pull out on the side of the panel to
detach the clips (D). Repeat this operation on the other side of the panel.
111
Fig. 8: Inserting Flat-Tip Screwdriver Wrapped With Tape Into Slot On Side Of Upper Panel
4. Pull the upper panel (A) in the direction shown in Fig. 9 to release the remaining clips, disconnect the
hazard warning switch connector (B), and if equipped, sunlight sensor connector (C) and navigation
subdisplay connector (D). Detach the harness clips (E), then remove the upper panel.
111
Fig. 9: Pulling Upper Panel

5. Install the panel in the reverse order of removal, and make sure each connector is plugged in properly.
CENTER POCKET REMOVAL/INSTALLATION


 Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related parts.
1. Remove the center holder (see CENTER CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).

2. Remove the center pocket (A).
111
-1 Remove the screws (B).

-2 Open the lid, then pull the pocket back by hand to detach the clips (C).
-3 Close the lid, then remove the pocket.
Fig. 10: Removing Center Pocket

3. Install the pocket in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Make sure the holders (D) are installed onto the pins (E) properly.
 Push the clipped portions into place securely.
 Make sure the center pocket lid opens smoothly.
GLOVE BOX REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

111
1. Detach the hook (A) of the glove box damper (B), and remove the screws.
Fig. 11: Detaching Hook Of Glove Box Damper

111
2. While holding the glove box (A), release the glove box stop (B) on each side from the dashboard by
pushing them in, then remove the glove box.
Fig. 12: Releasing Glove Box Stop On Each Side From Dashboard Pushing In
3. Open the passenger's door, and gently pull out on the front of the dashboard side cover (A) to release
the hooks (B), and remove the cover.
111
Fig. 13: Pulling Out Front Of Dashboard Side cover To Release Hooks
4. Remove the screw, then remove the glove box damper (A).
111
Fig. 14: Removing Glove Box Damper

5. Install the glove box in the reverse order of removal.
GLOVE BOX LOCK CYLINDER REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the glove box.
1. Remove the glove box (see GLOVE BOX REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).

2. Pull out the glove box knob (A) and use a hooked-shaped tool to pull the top end of the retainer (B)
out of its slot (C).
NOTE: Do not remove the retainer entirely. Leave the other side of it in the
original position when removing and installing the lock cylinder.
111
Fig. 15: Removing Glove Box Knob

3. Remove the glove box lock cylinder (A).
111
Fig. 16: Removing Glove Box Lock Cylinder

4. Reinstall the top of the retainer (A) in its original position, then reinstall the lock cylinder (B). Push
the cylinder into place securely until the retainer snaps into place.
111
Fig. 17: Reinstalling Top Of Retainer In Original Position

PASSENGER'S DASHBOARD LOWER COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the passenger's dashboard lower cover (A).

-1 Gently pull down the edge nearest the glove box to detach the clips.
-2 Pull the cover away to release the pins (B) from the holders (C).
111
Fig. 18: Removing Passenger's Dashboard Lower Cover

2. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal.
DASHBOARD SIDE VENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

DRIVER'S
111
 Put on gloves to protect your hands.

2. Push up the lower clips by hand, then push out the driver's side vent (A) by releasing the upper and
side tabs (B).
Fig. 19: Pushing Out Driver's Side Vent Releasing Upper And Tabs
111
3. Reinstall the tab portions of the vent first, then push the clip portions into place securely.
PASSENGER'S
1. Detach the hook of the glove box damper, then lower the glove box (see GLOVE BOX
2. Carefully insert a flat-tip screwdriver under the clip, and push it up.
3. Pull out along the edge of the passenger's side vent (A) by hand to release the lower clips and the
upper and side tabs (B). Then remove the vent.
Fig. 20: Pulling Out Edge Of Passenger's Side Vent To Release Lower Clips And Upper & Side
Tabs
111
4. Reinstall the tab portions of the vent first, then push the clip portions into place securely.
DASHBOARD/STEERING HANGER BEAM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

NOTE:  When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape, and
apply protective tape around the related parts to prevent damage.
 Have an assistant help you when removing and installing the
dashboard/steering hanger beam.
 Take care not to scratch the dashboard, body and other related parts.
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the
frequencies for the preset buttons.
2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work.
 Center console (see CENTER CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION )
 Driver's dashboard lower cover (see DRIVER'S DASHBOARD LOWER COVER

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION )
 Passenger's dashboard lower coverPASSENGER'S DASHBOARD LOWER COVER
 Center pocket (see CENTER POCKET REMOVAL/INSTALLATION )
 Glove box (see GLOVE BOX REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).
 Driver's dashboard under cover (see DRIVER'S DASHBOARD LOWER COVER

 Kick panels, both sides, 2-door (see 2-DOOR - DOOR SILL AREA ), 4-door (see 4-DOOR -
FRONT DOOR SILL AREA )
 A-pillar trim, both sides, 2-door without side curtain airbags (see A-PILLAR - WITHOUT
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('03-04 MODELS) ), 2-door with side curtain airbags (see A-
PILLAR - WITH SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('04-06 MODELS) , 4-door without side
curtain airbags (see A-PILLAR - WITHOUT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('03-04
MODELS)). , ), 4-door with side curtain airbags (see A-PILLAR - WITH SIDE CURTAIN
AIRBAGS ('04-06 MODELS) ).
 Steering column (see STEERING COLUMN REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ).
4. Remove the screw (A) and release the clip (B), then remove the driver's center lower cover (C) by
releasing the hooks (D).
111
Fig. 21: Removing Driver's Center Lower Cover Releasing Hooks

5. Release the clip, then remove the passenger's center lower cover (A) and the rear vent duct (B) by
releasing the hooks (D) and the hook (E) ('04-07 models).
111
Fig. 22: Removing Passenger's Center Lower Cover And Rear Vent Duct Releasing Hooks ('04-
06 Models)
6. Remove the SRS control unit (see SRS UNIT REPLACEMENT ).
Driver's side
7. From under the dash, disconnect the roof wire harness connector (A) (with moonroof), clutch switch
111
connectors (B) (on M/T model), and brake switch connector (C), floor wire harness connectors (D),
engine compartment wire harness connectors (E), and disconnect the dashboard wire harness
connectors (F) from the under-dash fuse/relay box (G), then release the wire harness clip (H). On auto
A/C model, disconnect the air hose (I).
NOTE: Lift the white wire harness connector locks (J) before trying to remove
the connectors from the fuse box.
111
Fig. 23: Disconnecting Interior Wire Harness Connector (With Moonroof)

Middle portion (shift lever portion)
8. Disconnect the parking brake switch connector (A), radio antenna connector (B), antenna lead (C),
and A/C subharness connector (D), then release the wire harness clips (E).
Using a T30 Torx bit, remove the ground bolt (F). On A/T model, disconnect the parking pin switch
connector (G) and shift lock solenoid connector (H).
Fig. 24: Removing Parking Brake Switch Connector

Middle portion (passenger's side)
9. From under the dash, disconnect the ECM/PCM connector (A), power transistor connector (B), and
engine wire harness connector (C), then release the wire harness clips (D).
111
Fig. 25: Disconnecting ECM/PCM Connector

Passenger's side
10. From under the dash, disconnect the passenger's door wire harness connectors (A), floor wire harness
connector (B), and blower motor connector (C). On vehicles with navigation system, disconnect
connectors (D).
111
Fig. 26: Disconnecting Passenger's Door Wire Harness Connectors

11. Detach all of the harness and connector clips.

12. Remove bolts, then remove the brake pedal support member (A).
111
Fig. 27: Removing Brake Pedal Support Member

13. Cover the parking brake handle to protect it.

14. Open the driver's door, and remove the caps (A), then remove the bolts (B, C, D), and clips (E) and
lift up on the dashboard (F)/steering hanger beam to release it from the guide pins (G, H).
NOTE: Before removing the dashboard/steering hanger beam, make sure all
the harnesses have been disconnected.
111
Fig. 28: Removing Caps, Bolts And Clips & Lifting Up On Dashboard
15. Carefully remove the dashboard/steering hanger beam through the front door opening.
NOTE: Lay the dashboard/steering hanger beam on its front or back. Do not
stand it on the lower console opening or you may damage it.
16. Remove the bolts (A), then remove the center bracket (B).
111
Fig. 29: Removing Center Bracket

17. Install the dashboard/steering hanger beam in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Apply medium strength liquid thread lock to the bolts securing the center bracket and the
dashboard center frame before reinstallation.
 Reinstall the center bracket on the center frame, and slightly tighten the mounting bolts.
Reinstall the dashboard/steering hanger beam on the body. After tightening both
dashboard/steering hanger beam mounting bolts, tighten the center bracket mounting bolts and
center frame mounting bolts.
 Make sure the dashboard/steering hanger beam fits onto the guide pins correctly.
 Before tightening the bolts, make sure none of the wire harnesses are pinched.
 Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly, and the antenna lead and air hose are
connected properly.
111
 Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.

 Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the radio station
presets.
 Reset the clock.
DASHBOARD REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
1. Remove the dashboard (see DASHBOARD/STEERING HANGER BEAM

2. Remove these items from the dashboard:
 Upper panel (see UPPER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION )
 Instrument panel (see INSTRUMENT PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION )
 Gauge control module (see GAUGE CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT )
 Audio-HVAC-Display module (see AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY MODULE

 Passenger's airbag (see FRONT PASSENGER'S AIRBAG REPLACEMENT )
 Glove box damper (see step 4 in GLOVE BOX REMOVAL/INSTALLATION )
3. Detach the hooks by pulling both blind covers (A) back, release the hooks (B), then remove the
covers.
111
Fig. 30: Detaching Hooks By Pulling Blind Covers Back

4. On both sides, detach the clips and release the hooks (A), then remove the tweeters (B) or tweeter
grille. Disconnect the tweeter connectors (C).
111
Fig. 31: Detaching Clips And Releasing Hooks On Both Sides

5. From the front of the dashboard, detach the harness clips (A, B).
111
Fig. 32: Detaching Harness Clips

6. From the back of the dashboard, Detach the harness clips (A) from both sides.
111
Fig. 33: Detaching Harness Clips From Both Sides (Driver's Side)
111
Fig. 34: Detaching Harness Clips From Both Sides (Passenger's Side)
7. On passenger's side disconnect the glove box light bulb socket (B), and detach the connectors (C).
8. Remove the screws (A, B) securing the dashboard (C) and steering hanger beam (D), and detach the
clips (E), then separate the dashboard and steering hanger beam.
111
Fig. 35: Removing Screws Securing Dashboard And Steering Hanger Beam
9. Install the dashboard in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Make sure the dashboard wire harness (F) is not pinched.
 Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly, and the glove box light bulb socket is
connected securely.
111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Gauges - Accord
Gauges - Accord
Fig. 1: Locating Gauges Components

111
2 августа 2011 г. 14:48:40
Fig. 2: Locating Gauges Components (03-05 Models)

111
Fig. 3: Locating Gauges Components (06-07 Models)

111
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
Before troubleshooting the gauge system, refer to multiplex integrated control system B-CAN System
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see TROUBLESHOOTING - B-CAN SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS TEST MODE
A ).
The gauge control module has a self-diagnostic function.
 The beeper drive circuit check

 The indicator drive circuit check
 The switch input test
 The LCD segments check
 The gauges drive circuit check (Speedometer, Tachometer, Fuel gauge, Coolant temperature gauge)
 The communication line check (of the body-controller area network (B-CAN) communication line
and the frame-controller area network (F-CAN) communication line between the gauges).
NOTE: Indicators are also controlled via the communication line.
ENTERING THE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
Before running the self-diagnostic function, check the No. 7 (10 A) fuse and the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the
1. Push and hold the trip/reset button.

2. Turn the headlights ON.
4. Within 5 sec., turn the headlights OFF, then ON and OFF again.
5. Within 5 sec., release the trip/reset button, and then push and release the button three times repeatedly.
NOTE:  While in the self-diagnostic mode, the dash lights brightness controller
operates normally.
 While in the self-diagnostic mode, the trip/reset button is used to start
the Beeper Drive Circuit Test and the Gauge Drive Circuit Check.
 If the vehicle speed exceeds 1.2 mph (2 km/h) or the ignition switch is
turned OFF, the self-diagnostic mode ends.
111
Fig. 4: Self-Diagnostic Function Blinking Pattern

THE BEEPER DRIVE CIRCUIT CHECK
When entering the self-diagnostic mode, the beeper sounds five times.
THE INDICATOR DRIVE CIRCUIT CHECK
When entering the self-diagnostic mode, the following indicator lights blink:
Seat belt indicator, charging system indicator, low fuel indicator, maintenance required indicator, security
indicator, high beam indicator, lights on indicator, malfunction indicator lamp (MIL), A/T gear position
indicator, ABS indicator, cruise main indicator and safety indicators (doors and trunk).
SWITCH INPUT CHECK
After the intermittent beeper sounds at the initial stage of the self-diagnostic function, a beeper sounds
continuously while any of the following switch inputs are switched from OFF to ON:
Cruise control main cruise set, cruise cancel, cruise resume, and parking brake switches.
THE LCD SEGMENT CHECK
When entering the self-diagnostic mode, the odo/trip segments and outside air temperature segment blink
five times.
THE GAUGE DRIVE CIRCUIT CHECK
When entering the self-diagnostic mode, the speedometer, the tachometer, the fuel gauge, and the coolant
temperature gauge needles sweep from the minimum position to maximum position, then return to the
minimum position.
NOTE: After the beeper stops sounding and the gauge needles return to the
minimum position, pushing the trip/reset button starts the Beeper Drive
Circuit Check (one beep) and the Gauge Drive Circuit Check again.
The check cannot be started again until the gauge needles return to the
111
minimum position.
Fig. 5: Gauge Drive Circuit Check Blinking Pattern

If a needle fails to sweep or the beeper does not sound, replace the gauge control module.
THE COMMUNICATION LINE CHECK
While in the self-diagnostic mode, the Communication Line Check starts after the odo/trip LCD Segments
Check. If all segments comes on, the communication line is OK.
 If the word "Error 1" is indicated, there is a malfunction in the communication line between the gauge
control module and the frame-controller area network (F-CAN). Check for DTCs in the ECM/PCM. If
no DTCs are found, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see TROUBLESHOOTING - B-
CAN SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS TEST MODE A ).
control module and the body-controller area network (B-CAN). Go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test
Mode A (see TROUBLESHOOTING - B-CAN SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS TEST MODE A ).
control module and the body-controller area network (B-CAN) and the frame-controller area network
(F-CAN). Check for DTCs in the ECM/PCM. If no DTCs are found, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis
Test Mode A (see TROUBLESHOOTING - B-CAN SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS TEST MODE A ).
Fig. 6: Communication Line Check Display

If any communication line errors are found, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see
111
ENDING THE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: If the vehicle speed exceeds 1.2 mph (2 km/h), the self-diagnostic function
ends.
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
'03-05 MODELS
111
Fig. 7: Identifying Gauges Circuit Diagram (03-05 Models - 1 Of 7)

111

111

111

111

111

111

'06-07 MODELS
111
Fig. 14: Identifying Gauges Circuit Diagram ('06 Models - 1 Of 8)

111

111


111

111

111

111

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the instrument panel (see INSTRUMENT PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ), then
remove the upper column cover (see STEERING COLUMN REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION ).
2. Place a clean shop towel (A) under the gauge control module to prevent scratching the steering
column or dash panel.
111
Fig. 22: Placing Shop Towel Under Gauge Control Module

3. Remove the screws from the gauge control module (B).

4. Disconnect the 30P ('03-05 models) or 36P ('06-07 models) connector (C), and remove the gauge
control module.
5. Install the gauge control module in the reverse order of removal.
REWRITING THE ODO DATA ON A NEW GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
NOTE:  If the HDS retrieves the ODO data from the gauge control module, the
ODO value on the ODO/TRIP display will appear as "---------", making the
ODO function unusable, and the HDS will be unable to retrieve
additional ODO values.
 Rewriting is not possible on a gauge control module that does not
communicate.
 Obtain a new gauge control module before starting the rewriting
111
process.
1. Before replacing the gauge control module, connect the HDS to the data link connector.
2. Select GAUGES AND INDICATORS from the HDS menu display.
3. Select "ODO REWRITE" from the ADJUSTMENTS menu display, and follow the instructions on the
menu display to retrieve the ODO value.
4. Replace the gauge control module.
5. Follow the instructions on the menu display to write the new ODO value to the new gauge control
module.
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE INDICATOR TEST
NOTE: To test the outside air temperature sensor (see OUTSIDE AIR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR TEST ).
The outside air temperature sensor for the indicator is mounted behind the front bumper. Because of this, the
temperature reading can be affected by heat reflection from the road, engine heat, and even exhaust from the
surrounding traffic. To prevent bogus readings, the display uses a specific logic as shown.
The outside air is warmer than when the ignition switch was turned OFF (ACC or LOCK) position:
 If the ignition switch was turned OFF for less than 2 hours, the displayed temperature when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (II) stays at the ignition switch-off temperature until the vehicle has gone
faster than 18 mph (30 km/h) for 30 seconds, then rises 1 degree every minute until the outside air
temperature is reached.
 If the ignition switch was turned OFF for 2 hours or more, the displayed temperature when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (II) the display immediately updates to the measured outside air
temperature.
The outside air is cooler than when the ignition switch was turned OFF (ACC or LOCK) position:
 If the ignition switch was turned OFF for less than 2 hours, the displayed temperature when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (II) is the ignition switch-off temperature.
The displayed temperature then drops 1 degree every 2 seconds until the reading matches the outside
air temperature.
 If the ignition switch was turned OFF for 2 hours or more, the displayed temperature is the measured
outside air temperature.
FORCED DISPLAY
You can also force the indicator to display the measured temperature.

2. Remove the No. 7 (10 A) fuse from the under-dash fuse/relay box for 60 seconds, then reinstall it.
111
TROUBLESHOOTING
If the indicator displays "- - -" for more than 2 seconds after selecting the outside air temperature display
mode, check the climate control system for DTCs, or an open in the LT BLU wire between the under-dash
fuse/relay box and the climate control unit.
Fig. 23: Identifying Indicator Displays

CALIBRATION
NOTE: This procedure must be done after the temperature sensor stabilizes.
The outside air temperature indicator's displayed temperature can be recalibrated +/-3° to meet the
customer's expectations.

2. Press and hold the reset select button for 10 seconds. While you continue to hold the button, the
display will scroll through temperature settings from +/-3° to -3° as shown below.
111
Fig. 24: Recalibration Of Outside Air Temperature Indicator

3. When the desired correction value appears on the display, release the button, and the recalibrated
outside air temperature will be displayed.
Each time a desired correction valve is entered, it replaces the previous valve.
Example:
Incorrect value = 68°F (20°C)

Desired correction valve = +2°F (+1°C)
Correct valve = 70°F (21°C)
Desired correction valve = -2°F (-1°C)
Correct valve = 66°F (19°C)
NOTE: To recalibrate the display to the true temperature, remove the outside
air temperature sensor (A), but leave it connected. Submerge the
sensor and a thermometer (B) in a container of ice water (C). Select the
calibration mode as described above, then recalibrate the display to the
true temperature.
111
Fig. 25: Recalibration Of Temperature

RESETTING THE MAINTENANCE REQUIRED INDICATOR

MAINTENANCE REMINDER LIGHT BLINKING PATTERN
Miles (km) Maintenance Reminder Light
At 7,900 (12,640) to 8,100 (12,960) Blinks for 10 seconds when the ignition switch is
turned ON (II).
At 9,900 (15,840) to 11,000 (16,160) Comes on and stays on while the ignition switch is
ON (II).
HOW TO RESET
Push and hold the trip/reset button, turn the ignition switch ON (II), and continue to hold the button for more
than 10 seconds.
DTC TROUBLESHOOTING
DTC INDEX
DTC Description
DTC B1152 Gauge Control Module EEPROM Error
the Combination Switch Control Unit (Headlight
111
Switch Message)
the Combination Switch Control Unit (Wiper
Switch Message)
Multiplex Integrated Control Unit (MICU)
Relay Module
DTC B1159 Gauge Control Module Lost Communication
(Door Switch Message) with the Multiplex
Integrated Control Unit (MICU)
the Door Multiplex Control Unit (Door Lock
Switch Message)
DTC B1175 Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Signals Input Error
DTC B1177 Abnormal Battery Voltage (7.5 V)
DTC B1152: GAUGE CONTROL MODULE EEPROM ERROR

3. Check for DTCs by selecting the DTCs MENU (DTCs) from the HDS.
YES - Faulty gauge control module; replace the gauge control module (see GAUGE
CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Intermittent failure, the gauge control module is OK at this time. Check pinfits and
connections. If the connections are good, check the battery condition (see BATTERY TEST ),
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
DTC B1155: GAUGE CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH THE

COMBINATION SWITCH CONTROL UNIT (HEADLIGHT SWITCH MESSAGE)

YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Intermittent failure. The gauge control system is OK at this time. Check pinfits and
connections.
Is DTC B1007 or B1062 also indicated?
111
YES - Go to Combination Switch Control Unit Input Test (see COMBINATION SWITCH
NO - Go to Gauge Control Module Input Test.
 '03-05 models: see '03-05 MODELS
 '06-07 models: see '06 MODEL
DTC B1156: GAUGE CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH THE

COMBINATION SWITCH CONTROL UNIT (WIPER SWITCH MESSAGE)

YES - Go to step 4.
connections.
4. Check for DTCs by selecting the DTCs MENU (DTCs) of the HDS.
YES - Go to Combination Switch Control Unit Input Test (see COMBINATION SWITCH
DTC B1157: GAUGE CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH MULTIPLEX

INTEGRATED CONTROL UNIT (MICU)

YES - Go to step 4.
connections.
Are DTCs B1055 and B1255 also indicated?
YES - Go to Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Input Test (see MICU INPUT TEST ).
111

 '06-07 model: see '06 MODEL
DTC B1158: GAUGE CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH RELAY MODULE

YES - Go to step 4.
connections.
4. Check for DTCs by the DTCs MENU (DTCs) of the HDS.
Is DTC B1005 also indicated?
YES - Go to Relay Control Module Input Test (see RELAY CONTROL MODULE INPUT
TEST ).
 '06-07 model: see '06 MODEL
DTC B1159: GAUGE CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION (DOOR SWITCH

MESSAGE) WITH THE MULTIPLEX INTEGRATED CONTROL UNIT (MICU)

YES - Go to step 4.
connections.
Is DTC B1057 also indicated?
YES - Go to Multiplex Integrated Control Unit Input Test (see MICU INPUT TEST ).
DTC B1160: GAUGE CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH THE DOOR
111
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT (DOOR LOCK SWITCH MESSAGE)

YES - Go to step 4.
connections.
4. Check for DTCs by the DTCs MENU (DTCs) of the HDS.
YES - Go to Door Multiplex Control Unit Input Test (see DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL
UNIT INPUT TEST ).
DTC B1175: FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT SIGNALS INPUT ERROR
1. Do the fuel gauge sending unit test (see FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT TEST ).
Is the fuel gauge sending unit OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO - Replace the fuel gauge sending unit.
2. Disconnect the 30P ('03-05 models) or 36P ('06-07 models) from the gauge control module and the 5P
connector from the fuel pump/fuel gauge sending unit.
3. Check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals of the gauge control module 30P ('03-05
models) or 36P ('06-07 models) connector and No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the fuel pump/fuel gauge
sending unit 5P connector.
111
Fig. 26: Checking Continuity Between No. 3 & 4 Terminals Of Gauge Control Module 30P
Connector And No. 1 & 2 Terminals Of Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit 5P Connector
('03-05 Models)
111
Fig. 27: Checking Continuity Between No.3 & 4 Terminals Of Gauge Control Module 36P
Connector And No. 1 & 2 Terminals Of Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit 5P Connector ('06
Model)
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Repair an open in the BLK/WHT or YEL/BLK wire between the gauge control module
and fuel gauge sending unit.
4. Check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals of the gauge control module 30P ('03-05
models) or 36P ('06-07 models) connector and body ground.
111
Fig. 28: Checking Continuity Between No. 3 & 4 Terminals Of Gauge Control Module 30P
Connector And Body Ground ('03-05 Models)
Fig. 29: Checking Continuity Between No. 3 &4 Terminals Of Gauge Control Module 36P
111
Connector And Body Ground ('06-07 Models)

YES - Repair a short in the BLK/WHT or YEL/BLK wire.

NO - Inspect all pinfits between the gauge control module and the sending unit. If circuit
integrity is good, and the problem still exist, swap gauge control module with a known-good
one. If the problem is gone, replace the gauge control module (see GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE REPLACEMENT ).
DTC B1177: ABNORMAL BATTERY VOLTAGE (7.5 V)

3. Check the DTCs by selecting the DTCs MENU (DTCs) from the HDS.
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Go to step 4.
4. Crank the engine.
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Intermittent failure. The gauge control module and power supply voltage (IG1) that is
supplied to the gauge control module are OK at this time.
5. Check the battery (see BATTERY TEST ), and the charging system (see ALTERNATOR AND
REGULATOR CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING ).
Is the battery condition and the charging system normal?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Abnormal battery condition which needs a recharge or replacement, or a charging system
repair.
6. With the gauge control module 30P ('03-05 models), 36P ('06-07 models) connector still connected,
turn the ignition switch to ON, and check for voltage between the No. 5 terminal and body ground.
111
Fig. 30: Checking For Voltage Between No. 5 Terminal And Body Ground ('03-05 Models)
Fig. 31: Checking For Voltage Between No. 5 Terminal And Body Ground ('06-07 Models)
111
Is there 7.5 V or more?
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Repair an open or high resistance in the YEL wire between the gauge control module and
7. Check for voltage between the No. 5 and No. 21 terminals.
Fig. 32: Checking For Voltage Between No. 5 And No. 21 Terminals ('03-05 Models)
111
Fig. 33: Checking For Voltage Between No. 5 And No. 21 Terminals ('06-07 Models)
YES - Faulty gauge control module; Replace the gauge control module (see GAUGE
CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Repair an open or high resistance in the BLK wire between the gauge control module and
ground.
111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Reminder System Key Light, Timer & Engine Oil Pressure Indicator
System - Accord
Reminder System Key Light, Timer & Engine Oil Pressure Indicator System - Accord
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Fig. 1: Reminder System Key Light, Timer & Engine Oil Pressure Indicator System Circuit Diagram
(03-05 Models)
111
2 августа 2011 г. 14:49:33
System - Accord
Fig. 2: Reminder System Key Light, Timer & Engine Oil Pressure Indicator System Circuit Diagram
(06 Model)

1. Before testing, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system using B-CAN System Diagnosis
Test Mode A (see TROUBLESHOOTING - B-CAN SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS TEST MODE A ).
111
System - Accord

3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors F and P.
Fig. 3: Identifying Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Connectors (14P)

Fig. 4: Identifying Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Connectors (30P) - 03-05 Models

111
System - Accord
Fig. 5: Identifying Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Connectors (30P) - 06-07 Models

 If the terminals are OK, go to step 5.
5. Reconnect the connectors, and make these input tests at the connector.
CONTROL UNIT INPUT TEST REFERENCE

Possible cause if
Test: Desired
result
obtained
 Faulty
Check for driver's seat
Ignition switch belt switch
voltage to
ON (II), driver's
ground:  Poor ground
seat belt is
There should be (G601)
buckled.
F14 1 V or less.  An open in
(1) BLU/RED the wire
H14  Faulty
Check for
Ignition switch driver's seat
voltage to
ON (II), driver's belt switch
ground:
seat belt is  Short to
There should be
unbuckled. ground in the
about 5 V.
wire
 Faulty
Check for ignition
voltage to switch
Ignition key in the
ignition switch.
P13 RED/WHT There should be (G501, G601)
1 V or less.  An open in
the wire
 Faulty
Check for ignition
111
System - Accord
voltage to switch
Ignition key out of ground:
 Short to
the ignition There should be
switch. ground in the
about 5 V(1). wire
(1) Within 5 seconds of pulling the key out of the ignition switch, the system will go into sleep
mode and the reference voltage drops from about 5 V to about 1 V.
7. Disconnect the gauge control module 30P ('03-05 models) or 36P ('06-07 model) connector.
Fig. 6: Identifying Gauge Control Module 30P Connector ('03-05 Models)

Fig. 7: Identifying Gauge Control Module 36P Connector ('06-07 models)

111
System - Accord
 If the terminals are OK, go to step 9.
9. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector.

Possible cause if
Test: Desired
result
obtained
Check for  Faulty engine
continuity to oil pressure
Engine OFF ground: switch
continuity. wire
 Mechanical
16 20 (1) YEL/RED problem in the
Check for engine
continuity to  Faulty engine
Engine running ground: oil pressure
There should be switch
no continuity.  An short to
ground in the
wire
(1) '06-07 models

Possible cause if
Test: Desired
result
obtained
Check for  Faulty
voltage to parking brake
Parking brake
ground: switch
lever pulled
There should be  An open in
less than 1V. the wire
13(1) 17(2) GRN/ORN
Check for
voltage to  Faulty
Parking brake
ground: parking brake
lever released
There should be switch
about 5 V or  Short to
111
System - Accord
more. ground in the

wire
Check for
 Poor ground
voltage to
Under all (G501 G601)
20 36 (3) BLK
conditions
ground:
There should be  An open in
less than 1 V. the wire
(1) '04-05 models parking brake reminder
(2) '06-07 models parking brake reminder
(3) '06-07 models
11. Run the gauge control module Self-diagnostic Function (see SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION ).
 If the beeper sounds and the seatbelt light flashes, go to step 12.
 If the beeper does not sounds, or the seatbelt light does not flash, replace the gauge control
module (see GAUGE CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT ).
12. Substitute a known-good under-dash fuse/relay box and recheck the system.
 If the symptom is gone, the MICU is faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box.
 If the symptom is still present, the gauge control module is faulty; replace the gauge control
module (see GAUGE CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT ).
111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Safety Indicator System - Accord
Safety Indicator System - Accord
Fig. 1: Identifying Safety Indicator System Components

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
111
2 августа 2011 г. 14:52:15
Fig. 2: Identifying Safety Indicator System Circuit Diagram ('03-05 Models)

111
Fig. 3: Identifying Safety Indicator System Circuit Diagram ('06-07 Models)

SAFETY INDICATOR INPUT TEST

1. Before testing the safety indicator functions, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system
using the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see TROUBLESHOOTING - B-CAN SYSTEM
111

3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors E, H and P.
Fig. 4: Identifying Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box 16P Connectors

111
Fig. 5: Identifying Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box 14P Connectors

Fig. 6: Identifying Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Connectors P ('03-05 Models)

111
Fig. 7: Identifying Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Connectors P ('06 Models)

 If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, are recheck the system.
5. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box.

6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) to keep the system awake and make sure these input tests at the
SAFETY INDICATOR INPUT TEST

Possible cause if
Test: Desired
result
obtained
Check for
 Faulty driver's
voltage to
door switch
less than 1 V. wire
E15 GRN
Check for
Driver's door
ground: door switch
closed
about 5 V.
voltage to passenger's
Front passenger's
ground: door switch
door open
H12 LT GRN/RED There should be  An open in the
less than 1 V. wire
Check for
voltage to  Faulty front
111
ground: passenger's
Front passenger's There should be door switch
door closed about 5 V.  Short to ground
Check for
voltage to
ground:
There should be
less than 1 V. wire
E14(1) GRN/YEL
Check for
Left rear door
ground: door switch
closed
about 5 V.
Right rear door
ground: switch
open
less than 1 V. wire
H13(1) GRN/WHT
Check for
 Faulty right
voltage to
ground:
closed switch
There should be
about 5 V.  Short to ground
 Poor ground
Check for (G701)
voltage to
Trunk lid open ground:  Faulty trunk
There should be latch switch
P24(1) BLU/BLK wire
Check for
Trunk lid closed ground: latch switch
about 5 V.
(1) 4-door
7. Run the gauge control module Self-diagnostic Function (see SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION ).
 If the indicators flash, go to step 8.
 If the indicators do not flash, replace the gauge control module.
8. Substitute a known-good under-dash fuse/relay box and recheck the system.

 If the symptom is gone, the multiplex integrated control unit (MICU) is faulty; replace the
 If the symptom is still present, the gauge control module must be faulty; replace the gauge
control module.
111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Rear Window Defogger - Accord
Rear Window Defogger - Accord
Fig. 1: Identifying Rear Window Defogger Components

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
111
2 августа 2011 г. 14:53:41
WITH CLIMATE CONTROL:
Fig. 2: Circuit Diagram - With Climate Control

WITHOUT CLIMATE CONTROL:
111
Fig. 3: Circuit Diagram - Without Climate Control

FUNCTION TEST
Before troubleshooting the rear window circuit, perform multiplex integrated control system troubleshooting
using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see TROUBLESHOOTING - B-CAN SYSTEM
111
NOTE:  Be careful not to scratch or damage the defogger wires with the tester
probe.
 Before testing, check the No. 14(40 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay
box and No. 30 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
1. Check for voltage between the positive terminal (A) and body ground with the ignition switch and
defogger switch ON.
There should be battery voltage.
 If there is no voltage, check for:

-Faulty defogger relay.
-Faulty AM/FM antenna amplifier-rear window defogger coil..
-Faulty climate control unit (audio-HVAC display module)
-An open in the BLK/YEL wire to the positive terminal.
 If there is voltage, go to step 2.
Fig. 4: Checking Voltage Between Positive Terminal & Body Ground

2. Disconnect the negative terminal (B) from the rear window defogger.
3. Check for continuity between the negative terminal and body ground.
 If there is no continuity, check for an open in the BLK/YEL wire and ground.
 If there is continuity, go to step 4.
4. Reconnect the negative terminal to the rear window defogger.
111
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) and the rear window defogger switch ON.
6. Touch the voltmeter positive probe to the points (1), (2), (3) on each defogger wire, and the negative
probe to the negative terminal.
 If the voltage is as specified, the defogger wire up to that point is OK.
 If the voltage is not as specified, repair the defogger wire.
-If it is more than specified at one of the points, there is a break in the negative half of the
wire.
-If it is less than specified at one of the points, there is a break in the negative half of the
wire.
DEFOGGER WIRE REPAIR
NOTE: To make an effective repair, the broken section must be no longer than one
inch.
1. Lightly rub the area around the broken section (A) with fine steel wool, then clean it with alcohol.
Fig. 5: Rubbing Area Around Broken Section With Fine Steel Wool
111
2. Carefully mask above and below the broken portion of the defogger wire (B) with cellophane tape
(C).
3. Using a small brush, apply a heavy coat of silver conductive paint (commercially available) extending
about 1/8" on both sides of the break. Allow 25 minutes to dry.
Fig. 6: Applying Heavy Coat Of Silver Conductive Paint Using Small Brush
4. Perform the function test to confirm that the wire is repaired.

5. Apply a second coat of paint in the same way. Let it dry 3 hours before removing the tape.
111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Horns - Accord
Horns - Accord
Fig. 1: Identifying Horns Components

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
111
2 августа 2011 г. 14:54:22
Fig. 2: Identifying Horns Circuit Diagram

HORN TEST/REPLACEMENT
1. Remove the front bulkhead cover (see FRONT GRILLE REPLACEMENT ).
2. Disconnect the 1P connector (A) from each horn (B).
111
Fig. 3: Disconnecting 1P Connector From Each Horn

3. Test the horn by connecting battery power to the terminal (A) and grounding the bracket (B). The
horn should sound.
111
Fig. 4: Testing Horn Connecting Battery Power To Terminal And Grounding Bracket
4. If it fails to sound, replace it.
HORN SWITCH TEST

INSTALLATION ).
2. Disconnect the cable reel 5P (13P) connector (A) from the dashboard wire harness.
( ): With cruise control
111
Fig. 5: Disconnecting Cable Reel 5P (13P) Connector From Dashboard Wire Harness
3. Using a jumper wire, connect the No. 1 terminal of the dashboard wire harness 5P (or 13P) connector
to body ground.
 If the horns sound, go to step 4.
 If the horns don't sound, check these items:
-No. 13 (20 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box.

-Relay control module in the under-hood fuse/relay box.
-Horns (see CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ).
-An open in the wire.
4. Reconnect the cable reel 5P (13P) connector A to the dashboard wire harness.
111
( ): With cruise control
Fig. 6: Reconnecting Cable Reel 5P (13P) Connector To Dashboard Wire Harness

5. Remove the driver's airbag assembly (see DRIVER'S AIRBAG REPLACEMENT ), and disconnect
the horn switch 1P positive terminal from the cable reel (B).
6. Using a jumper wire, connect the cable reel side 1P connector (C) to body ground, and turn the wheel
side to side.
 If the horns sound, replace the driver's airbag assembly.
 If the horns don't sound or sounds intermittently, replace the cable reel.
111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Ignition Switch - Accord
Ignition Switch - Accord
TEST
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system, then write down the
customer's audio station presets and XM radio channel presets. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF.
2. Connect the HDS to the date link connector (DLC), and ground the SCS.
3. Disconnect the battery negative cable.
4. Remove the left front door sill trim and left kick panel (see 2-DOOR - DOOR SILL AREA ).
5. Disconnect the 6P connector from the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
111
2 августа 2011 г. 14:56:44
Fig. 1: Disconnecting 6P Connector From Driver's Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box

6. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table shown
111
below.
Fig. 2: Checking Continuity Between Terminals In Each Switch Position

7. If the continuity checks do not agree with the table, replace the steering lock.
8. After reconnecting the battery, enter the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system, then
enter the customer's audio station presets and XM radio channel presets.
9. Do the power window control unit reset procedure (see RESETTING THE POWER WINDOW
CONTROL UNIT ).
111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Mirrors - Accord
Mirrors - Accord

2-DOOR AND JAPAN-PRODUCED 4-DOOR
Fig. 1: Identifying Mirrors Component Location (2-Door And Japan-Produced 4-Door)

U.S.A-PRODUCED 4-DOOR
111
2 августа 2011 г. 14:57:14
Fig. 2: Identifying Mirrors Component Location (U.S.A-Produced 4-Door)

Fig. 3: Identifying Rear View Mirror Component Location

POWER MIRROR/MANUAL MIRROR REPLACEMENT
NOTE: The 4-door model shown in Fig. 2, the 2-door model is similar.
1. Lower the door glass fully.

2. Carefully pry out the mirror mount cover (A) by hand in the sequence shown in Fig. 4.
111
Fig. 4: Prying Out Mirror Mount Cover By Hand In Sequence

3. On power mirror models: Disconnect the connector (A).
111
Fig. 5: Disconnecting Connector (Power Mirror Models)

4. While holding the mirror, remove the nuts securing the mirror, and remove the mirror (manual mirror
models).
5. On power mirror models: While holding the mirror, push in on the connector clip tabs (A), then push
out to remove the mirror (B). Take care not to scratch the door.
111
Fig. 6: Pushing In Connector Clip Tabs (Power Mirror Models)

6. Install the mirror in the reverse order of removal, and make sure the connector is plugged in properly
(power mirror models).
MIRROR HOLDER REPLACEMENT

2-DOOR AND JAPAN-PRODUCED 4-DOOR
1. Carefully insert a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with a shop towel under the mirror holder (A) next to
the lower clips (B), then pry out on the clip portions.
Take care not to scratch the mirror.
111
Fig. 7: Inserting Flat-Tip Screwdriver Under Mirror Holder Next To Lower Clips
111
2. Separate the mirror holder from the actuator (C) by slowly pulling them apart while separating the
adhesive portion (D) and releasing the hooks (E, F). If equipped, disconnect the mirror defogger
connector (G).
3. If equipped, reconnect the mirror defogger connector.
4. Reattach the hooks of the mirror holder to the actuator, then position the mirror holder on the actuator.
Carefully push on the clip portions of the mirror holder until the mirror holder locks into place.
5. Check the operation of the actuator.
U.S.A-PRODUCED 4-DOOR
1. Adjust the mirror fully to the inward position.

2. Insert a long, thin flat-tipped screwdriver along the ribs (A) on the mirror holder (B). Slide the tip of
the screwdriver between the mirror holder and the actuator (C).
Fig. 8: Inserting Long, Thin Flat-Tipped Screwdriver Along Ribs On Mirror Holder
3. Quickly twist the screwdriver to separate the mirror holder from the mirror actuator.
4. Insert the screwdriver further under the mirror holder and twist it again.
111
NOTE: Do not pry up on the mirror holder to separate the two parts, as this can
cause either the mirror glass or actuator to break.
5. Separate the mirror holder (A) from the actuator (B) by slowly pulling them apart while separating the
adhesive (C). If equipped, disconnect the mirror defogger connectors (D) from the heater pad
terminals.
Fig. 9: Separating Mirror Holder From Actuator

6. Remove any remaining adhesive from the actuator.

7. If equipped, reconnect the mirror defogger connectors.
8. Reattach the mirror holder to the actuator, then position the mirror holder on the actuator. Carefully
111
push on the mirror holder until the mirror holder snaps into place.
9. Check the operation of the actuator.
MIRROR HOUSING COVER REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the mirror holder (see MIRROR HOLDER REPLACEMENT ).
2. From the mirror holder opening, release the hooks (A) of the mirror housing cover (B).
Fig. 10: Releasing Hooks Of Mirror Housing Cover

3. Release the hooks (A), then remove the mirror housing cover (B).
111
Fig. 11: Releasing Hooks And Removing Mirror Housing Cover

4. Install the mirror housing cover in the reverse order of removal.
REARVIEW MIRROR REPLACEMENT

1. Turn the rearview mirror base (A) 90°.
111
Fig. 12: Turning The Rearview Mirror Base 90°

2. Slide the rearview mirror (A) down toward the bottom of the windshield to detach it from the spring
(B) in the mount (C).
111
Fig. 13: Sliding Rearview Mirror Down Toward Bottom Of Windshield To Detach
3. If necessary, remove the spring from the mount.

4. Install the rearview mirror in the reverse order of removal.
111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Power Mirrors - Accord
Power Mirrors - Accord
Fig. 1: Identifying Power Mirrors Components Location

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
111
2 августа 2011 г. 14:57:39
Fig. 2: Power Mirrors Circuit Diagram

FUNCTION TEST
111
1. Remove the driver's door switch trim.

NOTE: The illustration below shows 4-door.
Fig. 3: Removing Driver's Door Switch Trim (4-Door)

2. Disconnect the 13P connector (A) from the power mirror switch (B), and inspect the terminals. If OK,
go to step 3.
3. Choose the appropriate test based on the symptom:
 Both mirrors don't work, go to step 4.
 Left mirror doesn't work, go to step 6.
 Right mirror doesn't work, go to step 7.
 Defogger doesn't work (Canada), go to step 8.
111
Both mirrors
4. Check for voltage between the No. 6 terminal and body ground with the ignition switch ON (II).
There should be battery voltage.
If there is no battery voltage, check for:


- Blown No. 30 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.

- An open in the BLK/YEL wire.
 If there is battery voltage, go to step 5.
5. Check for continuity between the No. 3 terminal and body ground.
There should be continuity.
 If there is no continuity, check for:

- An open in the BLK wire.
- Poor ground (G501, G601).
 If there is continuity, check both mirrors individually as described in steps 6 & 7 .
Left mirror
6. Connect the No. 6 terminal to the No. 9 terminal, and the No. 2 (or No. 10) terminal to the No. 3
terminal with jumper wires. The left mirror should tilt down (or swing left) with the ignition switch
ON (II).
 If the mirror does not tilt down (or does not swing left), check for an open in the BLU/WHT (or
GRN/WHT) wire between the left mirror and the 13P connector. If the wire is OK, check the
left mirror actuator.
 If the mirror neither tilts down nor swings left, repair the BLU/BLK wire.
 If the mirror works properly, check the mirror switch.
Right mirror
7. Connect the No. 6 terminal to the No. 7 terminal, and the No. 1 (or No. 10) terminal to the No. 3
terminal with jumper wires. The right mirror should tilt down (or swing left) with the ignition switch
ON (II).
 If the mirror does not tilt down (or does not swing left), check for an open in the WHT/RED (or
GRN/WHT) wire between the right mirror and the 13P connector.
If the wire is OK, check the right mirror actuator.
 If the mirror neither tilts down nor swings left, repair the RED/YEL wire.
 If the mirror works properly, check the mirror switch.
Defogger (Canada)
8. Connect the No. 12 and No. 11 terminals with a jumper wire, and check for voltage between the No. 4
terminal of the mirror connectors and body ground. There should be battery voltage and both mirrors
111
should warm up with the ignition switch ON (II).

 If there is no voltage or neither warms up, check for:
- An open in the BLK/YEL or ORN wire.

- Blown No. 30 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
 If only one fails to warm up, check:
- Its defogger.
 If both warm up, check the defogger switch.
POWER MIRROR SWITCH TEST/REPLACEMENT

2. Disconnect the 13P connector (A) from the power mirror switch (B).
111
Fig. 4: Disconnecting 13P Connector From Power Mirror Switch (4-Door)

3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the tables shown
below.
111
Fig. 5: Checking Continuity Between Terminals In Each Switch Position (Mirror Switch)
111
Fig. 6: Checking Continuity Between Terminals In Each Switch Position (Defogger Switch)
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the power mirror switch.
POWER MIRROR ACTUATOR TEST

1. Remove the door panel.
2. Disconnect the 8P connector (A) from the power mirror actuator (B).
111
Fig. 7: Disconnecting 8P Connector From Power Mirror Actuator (4-Door)

3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table shown below.
111
Fig. 8: Checking Actuator Operation By Connecting Power & Ground

4. If the mirror fails to work properly, replace the mirror actuator.
Defogger Test (Canada)
5. Check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals of the 8P connector. There should be
continuity with the defogger switch ON. If there is no continuity, check for an open circuit.
POWER MIRROR ACTUATOR REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the power mirror (see POWER MIRROR/MANUAL MIRROR REPLACEMENT ).
2. Disconnect the 8P connector.
3. Carefully remove the mirror holder from the mirror housing. Gently pull it out by hand (see
MIRROR HOUSING COVER REPLACEMENT ).
4. Remove the cover (A), then remove the two screws from the mirror connector (B).
111
Fig. 9: Removing Power Mirror Cover & Screws From Mirror Connector
5. Record the terminal locations and wire colors.

6. Cut the wire harness with the wire cutter.
7. Remove the three screws, and separate the mirror housing (A) from the bracket (B).
111
Fig. 10: Separating Mirror Housing From Bracket

8. Remove the three screws and separate the actuator (A) from the housing (B).
111
Fig. 11: Separating Actuator From Housing

9. Route the wire harness (A) of the new actuator (B) through the hole in the bracket (C).
111
Fig. 12: Routing Wire Harness Of New Actuator Through Hole In Bracket
10. Install the new actuator in the reverse order of removal.

11. Insert the terminals into the connector in the original arrangement as shown below.
Terminal View:
111
Fig. 13: Inserting Terminals Into Connector

12. Reassemble in the reverse order of disassembly. Be careful not to break the mirror holder when
reinstalling it to the actuator.
13. Reinstall the mirror assembly to the door.
14. Operate the power mirror to ensure smooth operation.
111
2003-05 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Navigation System - Accord
Navigation System - Accord
SPECIAL TOOLS
Fig. 1: Identifying Special Tools

111
2 августа 2011 г. 14:58:16
Fig. 2: Locating Navigation System Components

GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION

GENERAL OPERATION
Refer to the Navigation System Manual for the navigation system operating procedures.
ANTI-THEFT FEATURE
The navigation system and audio unit have a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's
anti-theft security codes number before;
 disconnecting the battery.

 disconnecting the navigation unit 8P connector.
111
 removing the No. 7 (10 A) fuse from the under-dash fuse/relay box.
After service, reconnect power to the navigation unit, and turn the ignition switch ON (II). Enter the 4-digit
anti-theft security code, then select "Done".
If the code cannot be found, use the interactive Network (iN) to look it up. You will need the serial number
from the navigation unit in the trunk. It is on a label on the underside of the unit. Alternatively, you can view
the serial number in the "Navi ECU" diagnostic screen (see NAVI ECU ).
When replacing the navigation unit, be sure to give the customer the new anti-theft security code.
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Certain circumstances and system limitations will result in occasional vehicle positioning errors. Some
customers may think this indicates a problem with the navigation system when, in fact, the system is normal.
Keep the following items in mind when interviewing customers about symptoms of the navigation system.
SELF-LNERTIAL NAVIGATION LIMITATIONS
The limitations of the self-inertial portion of the navigation system (the yaw rate sensor and the vehicle
speed signal) can cause some discrepancies between the vehicle's actual position and the indicated vehicle
position (GPS vehicle position).
The following circumstances may cause vehicle positioning errors:
 Moving the vehicle with the engine stopped and the vehicle stopped, such as by ferry or tow truck, or
if the vehicle is spun on a turn table.
 Tire slippage, changes in tire rolling diameters, and some driving situations may cause discrepancies
in travel distances. Examples of this include:
- Continuous tire slippage on a slippery surface
- Driving with snow chains mounted
- Abnormal tire pressure
- Incorrect tire size
- Frequent lane changes across a wide highway
- Continuous driving on a straight or gently curving highway
- Very bumpy roads
 Tolerances in the system and map inaccuracies sometimes limit how precisely the vehicle position is
indicated. Examples of this include:
- Driving on roads not shown on the map (map matching is not possible)
- Driving on a road that winds in one direction, such as a loop bridge, an interchange, or a spiral
parking garage
- Driving on a road with a series of sharp hair-pin turns
- Driving near a gradual highway exit or transition
- Driving on one of two close parallel roads
- Making many 90 degree turns
111
GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (GPS) LIMITATIONS
The GPS cannot detect the vehicle's position during the following instances:
 For the first 5 to 10 minutes after reconnecting the battery (This can take as long as 45 minutes).
 When the satellite signals are blocked by tall buildings, mountains, tunnels, large trees, inside parking
structures or large trucks.
 When the GPS antenna is blocked by metallic window tinting or by an object placed above it in the
vehicle. The GPS antenna requires a clear unobstructed view of the sky.
 When there is no satellite signal output (Signal output is sometimes stopped for satellite servicing).
 When the satellite signals are blocked by the operation of some electronic aftermarket accessories
including, but not limited to non-OEM in-dash entertainment units (radio, CD players/changers, radar
detectors and theft recovery systems), and cellphones placed near the navigation system.
The accuracy of GPS is reduced during these instances:
 Metallic window tinting above the GPS antenna.

 When only two satellite signals can be received (Three satellite signals are required for accurate
positioning).
 When the satellite control centers are experiencing problems.
 When driving near high tension power lines.
 When the satellite signals are blocked by the operation of some electronic aftermarket accessories
including, but not limited to non-OEM in-dash entertainment units (radio, CD players/changers, radar
detectors and theft recovery systems), and cellphones placed near the navigation system.
MUTING LOGIC
Whenever the navigation system is giving guidance all the front speakers are muted. When the voice control
system is being used, all of the speakers are muted.
LCD DISPLAY UNIT LIMITATIONS
 In cold temperatures, the display may stay dark for the first 2 or 3 minutes until it warms up.
 When the display is too hot because of direct summer sunlight, it will remain dark until the
temperature drops (You may see an error message displayed stating this fact).
 When the humidity is high and the interior temperature is low, the display may appear cloudy. The
display will clear up after some use.
 Fingerprints on the touch panel may sometimes be noticeable because of the panel's low-reflection
coating. Clean the screen with a soft, damp cloth. You may use a mild cleaner intended for eye glasses
or computer screens. To avoid scratching the panel, do not rub too hard, or use abrasive cleaners or
shop towels.
 The touch panel is an infrared system, so there is no need to press hard. If a touch switch does not
function immediately, shift your finger slightly, and touch again.
NOTE: Input may be affected by direct sunlight.
SYMPTOM DUPLICATION
111
 When the symptom can be duplicated, verify that it is not a characteristic of the system. Review the
navigation manual and compare it to a known-good vehicle (with the same software and database),
under the same conditions. If not the same, follow the self-diagnostic procedures and the appropriate
troubleshooting procedures.
 When the symptom does not reappear or only reappears intermittently, ask the customer about the
conditions when the symptom occurred.
- Ask the customer to demonstrate the problem.
- Try to establish possible user error or misunderstanding of the system.
- Try to establish if outside interference may have been the cause.
- Try to duplicate the symptom under the same conditions the customer was experiencing.
- Vibration, temperature extremes, and moisture (dew, humidity) are factors that are difficult to
duplicate.
- Inspect the vehicle for after-market electronic devices (vehicle locators, amps, radar detectors,
etc) that may be hidden.
SERVICE PRECAUTIONS
 If the navigation unit needs to be replaced, inform the customer that personal information in the
navigation system will be lost. If possible, have the customer record their personal information before
the unit is replaced.
 Before disconnecting the battery, make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the
navigation system, and write down the XM radio channel presets. Also obtain any PGM-FI or
transmission DTCs and freeze frame date (which will be lost when the PCM loses power).
 When the battery is disconnected, the internal GPS clock is reset to "0:00". The clock will reset to the
correct time after the system finishes GPS initialization.
 After reconnecting the battery, you have to wait to get the initial signal from the satellite. It will take
from 10 to 45 minutes.
 Before returning the vehicle to the customer, enter the radio and navigation anti-theft security code,
then enter the customer's XM radio channel presets, and set the clock.
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION
If for any reason, you lose power to the navigation system (like the battery was disconnected). The
navigation system will require initialization. Once completed, your system will be ready to use.
This initialization requires the following:
 Entry of the 4-digit anti-theft security code to "unlock" the system

 GPS initialization (may not be needed depending of the length of time the system was without power)
 Map matching to align the GPS to a location on the map
ENTERING SECURITY CODE
The navigation system and audio unit have a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the customer's
anti-theft security codes number before;
 disconnecting the battery

111
 disconnecting the navigation unit 8P connector

 removing the No. 7 (10 A) fuse from the under-dash fuse/relay box
After service, reconnect power to the navigation unit, and turn the ignition switch ON (II). Enter the 4-digit
anti-theft security code, then select "Done".
When replacing the navigation unit or audio unit, be sure to give the customer the new anti-theft security
code.
GPS INITIALIZATION
Depending on the length of time the battery was disconnected, your system may require GPS initialization.
If it does, the following screen appears:
Fig. 3: Identifying GPS Initialization (1 Of 2)

If this procedure is not necessary the system proceeds directly to the Disclaimer screen. During
initialization, the system searches for all available GPS satellites, and obtains their orbital information.
During this procedure the vehicle should be out in the open with a clear view of the sky.
If the navigation system finds the satellites properly, this box clears, and changes to the Disclaimer screen. If
within 10 minutes the system fails to locate a sufficient number of satellites to locate your position, the
following screen appears.
111
Fig. 4: Identifying GPS Initialization (2 Of 2)

If this is displayed, turn off the engine, then restart the vehicle. If you now see the Disclaimer screen, the
GPS initialization is complete.
NOTE:  The average acquiring time is less than 10 minutes, but it can take as
long as 45 minutes.
 If the system is still unable to acquire a signal, follow the instructions
on the screen. If this screen appears again, go to troubleshooting for
the GPS icon is white (see GPS ICON IS WHITE, OR NOT SHOWN ).
MAP MATCHING
This part of the initialization matches the GPS coordinates with a road on the map screen. To perform this
part of the procedure, ensure that the navigation system is displaying a map, and drive the vehicle on a
mapped road shown on the map screen. Do not enter a destination at this time. When the name of the current
road you are driving on, appears at the bottom of the screen, the entire procedure is complete. Your system
is now ready to use.
OBTAINING A NAVIGATION DVD
If the Navigation DVD is lost or damaged, or you need a yearly updated DVD, you have 2 ways to purchase
one. You can either call (888) 291-4675, or order on-line at www.honda.com.
Both methods require a credit card. The DVD for this model has an orange label, and cannot be ordered
through the parts system. The following DVDs will not work in this navigation system:
 Earlier or later model navigation DVDs (colored labels; white, black, or turquoise)
111
 Map software programs manufactured by other companies

 DVD movies, or DVDs containing audio recordings
Update DVDs are available for purchase usually in the fall of each year. They may contain the following:
 Enhanced maps and points of interest (POI) coverage

 Fixes for minor software bugs
 Additional features
NOTE: Updating is optional, and there is no program to provide free DVDs

containing yearly mapping updates.

 Navigation unit
Navigation system stays on System Initialization (see
the GPS initialization screen SYSTEM INITIALIZATION )  GPS antenna/cable
 Harness/fuses/switches
 Navigation unit
Troubleshooting (see NO
No picture is displayed  Display unit
PICTURE IS DISPLAYED )
Address cannot be found or Verify proper operation using the
system gives poor routing owner's manual
Troubleshooting (see VEHICLE  Navigation unit
Vehicle position icon POSITION ICON  GPS antenna/cable
constantly leaves road or is CONSTANTLY LEAVES  ECM/PCM (speed and fuel
very far from actual position ROAD OR IS VERY FAR pulses)
FROM ACTUAL POSITION )
Troubleshooting (see PICTURE
Picture is missing a color or  Navigation unit
IS MISSING A COLOR OR
tone  Harness/fuses/switches
TONE )
Troubleshooting (see PICTURE  Navigation unit
Picture has lines/rolls/other
HAS LINES/ROLLS/OTHER  Display unit
issues
ISSUES )  Harness/fuses/switches
Troubleshooting (see DISPLAY
Display unit buttons or touch UNIT BUTTONS OR TOUCH
 Display unit
screen buttons do not work SCREEN BUTTONS DO NOT
or respond properly WORK OR RESPOND  Harness/fuses/switches
PROPERLY )
 Navigation unit
GPS icon is white, or not Troubleshooting (see GPS ICON
shown IS WHITE, OR NOT SHOWN )  GPS antenna/cable
111
Troubleshooting (see VOICE  Navigation unit

Voice guidance cannot be
GUIDANCE CANNOT BE  Audio unit/amplifier
heard
HEARD )  Harness/fuses/switches
Troubleshooting (see VOICE  Navigation unit
Voice control does not
CONTROL DOES NOT  Microphone/steering buttons
work/respond
WORK/RESPOND )  Harness/fuses/switches
Troubleshooting (see DVD  Navigation unit
DVD screen error messages SCREEN ERROR  Display unit
MESSAGES )  DVD
 ECM/PCM (speed and fuel
Troubleshooting (see TRIP
Trip computer-no distance pulses)
COMPUTER-NO DISTANCE )
Troubleshooting (see TRIP
Trip computer-no fuel  Gauge assembly (CAN)
COMPUTER-NO FUEL
information  Harness/fuses/switches
INFORMATION )
Troubleshooting (see
Navigation cannot control  Display unit
NAVIGATION CANNOT
A/C  Harness/fuses/switches
CONTROL A/C )
Troubleshooting (see DISPLAY  Display unit
Display day/night mode does
DAY/NIGHT MODE DOES  Gauge assembly (CAN)
not work
NOT WORK )  Harness/fuses/switches
 Navigation unit
Troubleshooting (see SYSTEM
System locks up constantly  Harness/fuses/switches
LOCKS UP CONSTANTLY )
 DVD
Troubleshooting (see VEHICLE
Vehicle icon wanders across ICON WANDERS ACROSS
the map when driving (does THE MAP WHEN DRIVING
not follow a displayed road) (DOES NOT FOLLOW A  Navigation unit
or spins when driving DISPLAYED ROAD) OR
SPINS WHEN DRIVING )
Navigation drives by itself
NAVIGATION DRIVES BY
when parked
ITSELF WHEN PARKED )
Navigation stays on with NAVIGATION STAYS ON
ignition switch off WITH IGNITION SWITCH  Harness/fuses/switches
OFF )
NAVIGATION CANNOT
audio/CD  Audio unit/amplifier
CONTROL AUDIO/CD )
NAVIGATION CANNOT
XM radio  Harness
CONTROL XM RADIO )
Troubleshooting (see AUDIO-  Navigation unit
111
Audio-HVAC subdisplay HVAC SUBDISPLAY DOES  Subdisplay unit

does not work properly NOT WORK PROPERLY )
Make sure H/U Time Send is ON.
Audio-HVAC subdisplay Go to H/U Time Send under
does not match time in set-up functional set up (see
FUNCTIONAL SETUP )
Time is not correct Reset Time Adjustment in set-up
Navigation frequently asks NAVIGATION FREQUENTLY
 Navigation unit
for code and needs GPS ASKS FOR CODE AND
initialization NEEDS GPS  Harness/fuses/switches
INITIALIZATION )
Customer did not select "OK"
Some set-up and information
from Disclaimer screen. Refer to
functions of the navigation
System Function Diagram (see
system are "grayed-out" do
SYSTEM FUNCTION
not work
DIAGRAM )
The vehicle may be new, or the
Previous Destinations button customer deleted the destination.
is dim and not selectable in Enter a destination, and allow the
the Enter destination by system to route to it. After the trip,
screen the Previous Destinations button
will be selectable.
The customer has not entered a
Today's Destinations button group of locations for Today's
is dim and not selectable in Destinations.
the Enter destination by This is normal. The button is only
screen selectable if the customer is using
this function.
Wrong colored disc installed in the
Navigation system displays
navigation unit. The DVD should
Extension when XM is
have a white label. Install the
selected in the audio screen
correct color labeled disc.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OVERVIEW
The navigation system is a highly-sophisticated, hybrid locating system that uses satellites and a map
database to show you where you are and to help guide you to a desired destination.
The navigation system receives signals from the global positioning system (GPS), a network of 24 satellites
in orbit around the earth. By receiving signals from several of these satellites, the navigation system can
determine the latitude, longitude elevation of the vehicle. In addition, signals from the system's yaw rate
sensor and the ECM/PCM (vehicle speed pulse) enable the system to keep track of the vehicle's direction
and speed of travel.
This hybrid system has advantages over a system that is either entirely self-contained or one that relies
totally on the GPS. For example, the self-contained portion of the system can keep track of vehicle position
111
even when satellite signals cannot be received. When the navigation system is on, the GPS can keep track of
the vehicle position even when the vehicle is transported by ferry.
The navigation system applies all location, direction, and speed information to maps and calculates a route
to the destination entered. As you drive to that destination, the system provides both visual and audio
guidance.
This navigation system also has voice recognition that allows voice control of most of the navigation
functions. The Talk and BACK buttons on the steering wheel activate the voice control. The voice control
also allows control of the audio and climate control.
The navigation system provides a trip computer function. The fuel economy display is calculated by data
provided by the ECM/PCM. The ECM/PCM provides fuel pulses via the F-CAN bus, and a dedicated speed
signal. Trip computer screen data is approximate and will not agree with odometer or the customer's actual
fuel consumed.
The illumination signal is used by the navigation unit to automatically switch the display between Night and
Day brightness modes when Display is set to Auto. When the instrument panel brightness control is set to
full brightness, the navigation system stays in the Day mode, even with the headlights on. Display unit
button illumination is supplied through the audio unit. The illumination cancel signal (dash brightness full)
is passed by the CAN bus to the navigation control unit.
The GA-NET bus provides communication between the navigation unit and the display unit. This bus also
links the components in the audio-HVAC display module. The bus is used to pass button and touch-screen
commands to the navigation unit. In addition, muting and voice control commands are sent to the display
unit and the audio and climate control systems for processing. The audio unit uses the bus to control the
XM-receiver or other accessories.
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
111
Fig. 5: Identifying System Diagram

NAVIGATION FUNCTION
The navigation system is composed of the navigation unit, the ECM/PCM (vehicle speed signal), the GPS
antenna, microphone, voice control switch, audio unit, climate control unit, and the display unit.
Function Diagram
111
Fig. 6: Identifying Navigation Function

Vehicle Speed Pulse
The vehicle speed pulse is sent by the ECM/PCM. The ECM/PCM receives a signal from the countershaft
speed sensor, then it processes the signal and transmits it to the speedometer and other systems.
Fig. 7: Identifying Vehicle Speed Pulse

Charge Signal
The PCM sends a charge signal to the navigation unit via F-CAN. A thermister inside the navigation unit
monitors the units internal temperature. This information combined with charge signal determines the
control units internal cooling fan operation.
111
Fuel Use and Level Data
The navigation unit monitors the ECM/PCM fuel usage and tank level data via the F-CAN bus. The
navigation system combines this information, the vehicle speed signal, GPS, and the map data for trip
computer calculations.
Fig. 8: Identifying Fuel Use And Level Data

Yaw Rate Sensor
The yaw rate sensor (located in the navigation unit) detects the direction change (angular speed) of the
vehicle. The sensor is an oscillation gyro built into the navigation unit.
Sensor Element Structure
The sensor element is shaped like a tuning fork, and it consists of the piezoelectric parts, the metal block,
and the support pin. There are four piezoelectric parts: one to drive the oscillators, one to monitor and
maintain the oscillation at a regular frequency, and two to detect angular velocity. The two oscillators, which
have a 90-degree twist in the center, are connected at the bottom by the metal block and supported by the
support pin. A detection piezoelectric part is attached to the top of each oscillator. The driving piezoelectric
part is attached to the bottom of one oscillator, and the monitoring piezoelectric part is attached to the
bottom of the other oscillator.
Oscillation Gyro Principles
The piezoelectric parts have "electric/mechanical transfer characteristics." They bend vertically when
voltage is applied to both sides of the parts, and voltage is generated between both sides of the piezoelectoric
parts when they are bent by an external force. The oscillation gyro functions by utilizing this characteristic
of the piezoelectric parts and "Coriolis force." (Coriolis force deflects moving objects as a result of the
earth's rotation.) In the oscillation gyro, this force moves the sensor element when angular velocity is
applied.
Operation
1. The driving piezoelectric part oscillates the oscillator by repeatedly bending and returning when an
AC voltage of 6 kHz is applied to the part, The monitoring-side oscillator resonates because it is
connected to the driving-side oscillator by the metal block.
2. The monitoring piezoelectric part bends in proportion to the oscillation and outputs voltage (the
111
monitor signal). The navigation unit control circuit controls the drive signal to stabilize the monitor
signal.
3. When the vehicle is stopped, the detecting piezoelectric parts oscillate right and left with the
oscillators, but no signal is output because the parts are not bent (no angular force).
4. When the vehicle turns to the right, the sensor element moves in a circular motion with the right
oscillator bending forward and the left oscillator bending rearward. The amount of forward/rearward
bend varies according to the angular velocity of the vehicle.
5. The detecting piezoelectric parts output voltage (the yaw rate signal) according to the amount of bend.
The amount of vehicle direction change is determined by measuring this voltage.
Fig. 9: Operation Of Sensor Element

Global Positioning System (GPS)
The global positioning system (GPS) enables the navigation system to determine the current position of the
vehicle by utilizing the signals transmitted from the satellites in orbit around the earth. The satellites
transmit the satellite identification signal, orbit information, transmission time signal, and other information.
When the GPS receiver receives a signal from three or more satellites simultaneously, it calculates the
current position of the vehicle based on the distance to each satellite and the satellite is position in its
respective orbit.
Position detection Image with GPS satellite
111
Fig. 10: Identifying Position Detection Image GPS Satellite

Precision of GPS
The precision of the GPS varies according to the number of satellites from which signals are received and
the view of the sky. The precision is indicated by the color of the GPS icon shown on the display.
PRECISION OF GPS
NUMBER OF
GPS ICON CONDITION DESCRIPTION
SATELLITES
GPS function is normal.
The satellite signals
Impossible to detect
White GPS icon 2 or less received by the GPS are
vehicle position
too few to detect the
vehicle position.
The longitude and latitude
Vehicle position of the vehicle position can
3 detectable in 2 be detected. (Less precise
dimensions than detection in three
dimensions)
Green GPS icon The longitude, latitude
and the altitude of the
Vehicle position
vehicle position can be
4 or more detectable in 3
detected. (More precise
dimensions
than detection in two
dimensions)
The GPS can't be utilized
due to a faulty GPS
Not indicated - Faulty receiver, open in the wire,
or other fault or
interference.
GPS Antenna
The GPS antenna amplifies and transmits the signals received from the satellites to the GPS receiver.
111
GPS Receiver
The GPS receiver is built in the navigation unit. It calculates the vehicle position by receiving the signal
from the GPS antenna. The vehicle position and signal reception condition is transmitted from the GPS
receiver to the navigation control unit to adjust vehicle position.
Navigation Unit
The navigation unit calculates the vehicle position and guides you to the destination. The unit performs map
matching correction, GPS correction, and distance tuning. It also controls the menu functions and the DVD-
ROM drive, and interprets voice commands. With control of all these items, the navigation unit makes the
navigation picture signal, then it transmits the signal to the display unit and audio driving instructions to the
audio unit.
Calculation of Vehicle Position
The navigation unit calculates the vehicle position (the driving direction and the current position) by
receiving the directional change signals from the yaw rate sensor and the travel distance signals from the
PCMs vehicle speed pulse (VSP) signal.
Map Matching Tuning
The map matching tuning is accomplished by indicating the vehicle position on the roads on the map. The
map data transmitted from the DVD-ROM is checked against the vehicle position data, and the vehicle
position is indicated on the nearest road. Map matching tuning does not occur when the vehicle travels on a
road not shown on the map, or when the vehicle position is far away from a road on the map.
GPS Tuning
The GPS tuning is accomplished by indicating the vehicle position as the GPS's vehicle position. The
navigation unit compares its calculated vehicle position data with the GPS vehicle position data. If there is
large difference between the two, the indicated vehicle position is adjusted to the GPS vehicle position.
Distance Tuning
The distance tuning reduces the difference between the travel distance signal from the VSP and the distance
data on the map. The navigation unit compares its calculated vehicle position data with the GPS vehicle
position data. The navigation unit then decreases the tuning value when the vehicle position is always ahead
of the GPS vehicle position, and it increases the tuning value when the vehicle position is always behind the
GPS vehicle position.
Route Guidance
The navigation unit can calculate different routes to a selected destination. You have five options:
 Direct Route - Calculate a route that is the most direct.

 Easy Route - Calcute a route that minimizes the number of turns needed.
 Minimize Freeways - Calculate a route that avoids freeway travel. If that is not possible, keep the
amount of freeway travel to a minimum.
 Minimize Toll Roads - Calculate a route that avoids, or minimizes travel on toll roads.
111
 Maximize Freeways - Calculate a route that uses freeways as much as possible.
Audio Guidance
The navigation unit transmits audio driving instructions before entering an intersection or passing a junction.
The audio instructions come through the audio unit to the front speakers.
NOTE: The front speakers are muted whenever the navigation system is giving
guidance commands, and all of the speakers when the voice control system
is being used.
DVD-ROM
The DVD-ROM contains the following:
 MAP data
 POI database: Restaurants, and other points of interest
 NAVI Program: The DVD contains the software for each model that uses this DVD
Audio Unit
The audio unit receives the audio driving instructions from the navigation unit and transmits the instructions
through the front speakers even when the audio system is in use. The audio unit is also a termination point in
the GA-Net bus.
Display Unit
The display unit uses liquid crystal display (LCD). The LCD is a 7-inch-diagonal, thin film transistor (TFT),
stripe type with 280,800 picture elements, The color film and fluorescent light are laid out on the back of the
liquid crystal film. The touch sensor on the front of the LCD is an infrared type with 20 vertical and 9
horizontal infrared rays to produce 180 sensing points. The display unit transmits the signal from each
button and the touch screen command to the navigation unit using the GA-NET bus.
111
Fig. 11: View Of Display Unit (Infrared Rays - '04-05 Models)

Microphone
The microphone (on the ceiling, near the front map light) receives voice commands and transmits them to
the navigation unit for interpretation.
Talk Button
Activates the voice control system in the navigation unit to accept voice commands.
Back Button
Returns the display to the previous screen (similar function as the CANCEL button).
Glossary
The following is a glossary of terms pertaining to the Voice Recognition Navigation System.
GLOSSARY
111
Item Definition
The upper display that shows the time and current
Audio-HVAC subdisplay
status of the audio and climate control systems.
Off road tracking dots that can be followed on the
map to retrace your route back to a mapped
Breadcrumbs
(digitized) road. This function can be turned on/off
in Setup screen 1.
Controller Area Network. This communication
network allows processors in the vehicle to
CAN send/receive information. The fuel pulses used by
the trip computer are received from the PCM using
the F-CAN (Fast Controller Area Network) bus.
B-CAN Body CAN Bus (see CAN)
Central Processing Unit. The main device within
CPU the navigation unit that coordinates the rest of the
electronic functions.
This consists of the Map data, and the POI (Points
Database
Of Interest) data stored on the DVD
Drive By Wire. Allows electrical control of the
DBW
throttle without the need of a mechanical linkage.
Detailed Coverage Area. Main metropolitan areas
in the Lower 48 states, and Canada are mapped to
DCA
this level. See the Navigation Owner's manual for a
list of these areas.
Diagnostic Trouble Codes. Use the Honda PGM
DTC Tester, or HDS tablet to obtain, and troubleshoot
the cause of these codes.
The use of the speed signal, and yaw rate sensor to
position the vehicle on the map even when the
Dead Reckoning
GPS signal is obscured by tall buildings, or while
driving in a tunnel.
A road that appears on the navigation screen. The
road name will appear at the bottom of the
navigation screen. If the user drives "off road", the
Digitized Road
navigation system will display "Not on a digitized
road", and if 1/2 mile, then "breadcrumbs" will
appear.
Screen containing cautionary information. It is
Disclaimer Screen meant to be read carefully and acknowledged by
the customer when using the navigation system.
Digital Versatile Disk. The navigation program
and database resides on this disk. See the
DVD or DVD-ROM
Navigation Owner's Manual for information on
how to order a replacement or update DVD.
Engine Control Module. Typically referred to as
ECM
the PCM.
Elapsed Time for the current trip as displayed by
E/T
the trip computer screen.
111
A term displayed by the navigation system when

an "unknown" input has been selected (for example
Extension "XM" was selected). This is only displayed when
the wrong version software is installed in the
navigation unit.
Frequently Asked Question. See the Navigation
FAQ Owner's Manual for a list of the customer FAQs,
and troubleshooting information.
F-CAN Fast CAN Bus (see CAN)
Fuel Economy value as displayed on the trip
FE
computer screen.
This signal is transmitted on the CAN bus, and is
Fuel Pulses used by the Trip Computer to calculate the fuel
economy.
Global Positioning System. A network of 24
satellites in orbit around the earth. The navigation
GPS system can simultaneously receive signals from up
to 12 satellites to accurately position the vehicle on
the map.
Honda Diagnostic System. A hand held tablet PC
for use in diagnosing vehicle problems. This
HDS device can be used to obtain DTC codes for
diagnosis of navigation system CAN related
problems.
Head Unit. The navigation system display unit
H/U
assembly in the dash.
This refers to the period needed to re-acquire the
GPS satellite orbital information whenever the
Initialization
navigation system power has been disconnected.
This can take from 10 to 45 minutes.
LCD Liquid Crystal Display (the navigation screen)
The received GPS information allows the
navigation system to position the vehicle on the
Map Matching map. Map matching has occurred if the map screen
is displaying the current street name in the bottom-
shaded area.
Abbreviation for the microphone used for
Mic receiving voice commands. It is located near the
map light in the ceiling.
A "model code" stored on an internal "chip" in the
navigation unit. The model code tells the
Model (in the diagnosis Version screen) navigation unit what software to load. Every
navigation unit "model" has a unique part number
for the navigation unit.
Maneuver Window. While on-route to a
MW destination, this window displays information
about the next maneuver.
Navi Abbreviation for the Navigation System
This occurs when the user leaves mapped roads.
111
Off road tracking dots ("breadcrumbs") are

displayed if the option is enabled in Setup. The
Off Route user can use them to return to a mapped road. The
bottom of the navigation screen will say "Not on a
digitized road".
These are rural areas that typically have only their
main roads mapped. All other roads are shown in
Outlying Areas
light brown for reference only, since they have not
been verified.
The PC Card (PCMCIA, type II) slot is for factory
use only. Make sure that the sliding door is closed
PC Card Slot
at all items. If opened, an error message is
displayed on the screen.
Powertrain Control Module. This unit supplies the
navigation system speed signal, and sends fuel
PCM
pulses for the trip computer function via the F-
CAN network.
A computer industry defined term referring to the
PCMCIA
PC Card slot standard.
A Honda diagnostic tool for use in diagnosing
PGM Tester
vehicle problems.
Personal Identification Number. A random 4 digit
PIN number created by the customer to protect personal
information.
Point Of Interest. These are the businesses, schools
POI etc. found under the "places" option on the main
menu.
Colored areas on the map screen denoting parks,
schools etc. See the Navigation Owner's Manual
Polygon
"Traveling to Your Destination" for a list of the
assigned colors.
Keyboard layout resembling the typewriter keys.
QWERTY The keyboard layout can be changed to an
alphabetical layout in the Setup mode.
The 2-pin connector used to put the navigation
SCS connector
system into the diagnostic mode.
Code needed to activate the navigation system. The
security code can be obtained from the "iN" by
entering the navigation system control serial
Security Code
number. The serial number can be found from the
diagnostic screens (Unit Check, Navi ECU), or
from the under side of the control unit.
The sides of the navigation screen have 9 vertical
and 20 horizontal infrared beams that are
Touch Switches or Touch Sensor
interrupted by the user's finger to select the desired
function.
A continual update of internal navigation system
Tuning scaling factors. See the individual sensor tuning
discussions under either "System Description", or
111
"System Diagnosis Mode" (see SYSTEM

DIAGNOSIS MODE ) in this information.
These streets have not been verified for turn
restrictions, one-way, etc. They are shown in light
Unverified Streets brown on the map. You can enter address
destinations in these areas, but voice guidance ends
at the last verified street closest to your destination.
These streets consist of the detailed metropolitan
Verified Streets coverage areas, and all other inter-town connection
roads. These roads are shown in black on the map.
Vehicle Position. When in map mode, this circular
icon shows the vehicle position on the map. Touch
VP
this icon to show the latitude, longitude, and
elevation of your current position.
Voice Recognition. This allows voice control of
many of the navigation functions. The hardware
VR consists of the microphone, steering wheel
(Talk/Back) buttons, and the front speakers. See
the overview for more information.
Vehicle Speed Pulse. This pulse signal coming
from the PCM is used to update the Vehicle
position on the map, and to calculate the trip
computer fuel economy. These pulses do not
VSP
indicate direction (forward or backward). When in
reverse, the navigation receives a signal from the
MICU and directs the VP to move backwards on
the map.
Vehicle Speed Sensor. This sensor reads the output
shaft speed at the transmission and, provides a
VSS
speed pulse to the PCM. The PCM sends this pulse
to the navigation system and speedometer.
A satellite band radio system where signals are
XM Satellite Radio received from either a satellite or land based
transmitters.
This device is located in the navigation system
Yaw Sensor control unit and senses the side-to-side twisting
force generated when the vehicle turns.
SYSTEM FUNCTION DIAGRAM
This diagram shows the features of the navigation system starting at the center and working outward in
layers. The navigation program starts at "Key ON", and then displays the globe screen. Once the disclaimer
screen is acknowledged, the next shaded portions of the diagram become active. However, some functions
of the INFO and SET UP buttons, and all functions of the AUDIO and A/C buttons can be accessed
immediately after the globe screen (white).
These items above the map screen show various methods to begin a destination, such as "Go Home". Once
you begin driving to your destination, you are provided with map/voice guidance, routing cautions (in
unverified areas), and a directions list. While driving to your destination, use the voice control system as
much as possible to interact with the navigation, audio, and climate control systems.
111
Fig. 12: Identifying System Function Diagram

DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION DIAGRAM
This diagram shows the diagnostic slice of the System Function Diagram. It has the diagnostic features of
the navigation system starting at the center and working outward in layers. The diagnostic starts at "Key
ON," and then displays the Diagnostic Main Menu (Select Diagnosis items) after:
 Starting the vehicle with the SCS connector plugged in to the navigation service check connector (see
FORCED STARTING OF DISPLAY ) to get to the System Links screen, then selecting Return.
 Simultaneously pressing and holding the MENU, MAP/GUIDE, and CANCEL buttons.
The diagram shows the available menu choices starting at the bottom left and moving clockwise.
111
In most cases, do not clear or change settings in any diagnostic screen unless instructed to do so in the
explanation or by the factory. If the factory supplies you with a PCMCIA card to place in the PC slot, then
the features specified in the diagram with "Card" are available.
Fig. 13: Identifying Diagnostic Function Diagram

NAVIGATION UNIT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS FOR CONNECTOR A (20P)
111
Fig. 14: Identifying Navigation Unit Inputs And Outputs For Connector A (20P)
NAVIGATION UNIT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS FOR CONNECTOR B (14P)

111
Fig. 15: Identifying Navigation Unit Inputs And Outputs For Connector (14P)
NAVIGATION UNIT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS FOR CONNECTOR C (8P)
111
NAVIGATION UNIT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS FOR CONNECTOR E (2P)
DISPLAY UNIT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS FOR CONNECTOR A (10P)

111
Fig. 18: Displaying Unit Inputs And Outputs For Connector (10P)
DISPLAY UNIT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS FOR CONNECTOR B (20P)
111
Fig. 19: Displaying Unit Inputs And Outputs For Connector (20P)
AUDIO-HVAC SUBDISPLAY UNIT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS FOR 10P CONNECTOR
111
Fig. 20: Identifying Audio-HVAC Subdisplay Unit Inputs And Outputs For Connector (10P)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
111
Fig. 21: Identifying Circuit Diagram (1 Of 2)

111
Fig. 22: Identifying Circuit Diagram (2 Of 2)

AUDIO-HVAC SUBDISPLAY UNIT 10P CONNECTOR
111
Fig. 23: Identifying Audio-HVAC Subdisplay Unit 10P Connector

DISPLAY UNIT CONNECTORS
Fig. 24: Identifying Displaying Unit Connectors

111
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTORS
Fig. 25: Identifying Navigation Unit Connectors

NO PICTURE IS DISPLAYED
NOTE:  Always check the connectors for poor connections or loose terminals.
 Diagnostic Test: Navi System Link
1. Check the No. 7 (10 A) fuse and No. 32 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box, and reinstall the
fuse if it is OK.
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO - Replace the fuse and recheck.
3. Operate the radio and listen to the audio.
Can audio be heard?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Check the ACC circuit.
5. Measure the voltage between body ground and navigation unit connector C (8P) terminals No. 1 and
No. 2 individually.
111
Fig. 26: Measuring Voltage Between Body Ground & Navigation Unit Connector Terminals No.
1 And No. 2 Individually
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - If the +B wire does not have voltage, repair open in the wire between the under-dash
fuse/relay box and the navigation unit.
If the ACC wire does not have voltage, repair open in the wire between the under-dash

7. Disconnect the navigation unit connector C (8P).
8. Check for continuity between navigation unit connector C (8P) terminal No. 4 and body ground.
111
Fig. 27: Checking Continuity Between Navigation Unit Connector Terminal No. 4 & Body
Ground
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the navigation unit and body ground (G603).
9. Reconnect the navigation unit connector C (8P).
10. Perform the forced starting of the display (see FORCED STARTING OF DISPLAY ).
Is the diagnosis menu of the picture diagnosis displayed?
YES - Go into the Diagnostic mode and use the "Navi System Link" diagnostic (see NAVI
SYSTEM LINK ) to check the links.
NO - Go to step 11.
11. Shield the display unit from the sun with your hand, and check that the display is back lit (only back
111
light is ON.)
Can you see the back light?
YES - Replace the navigation unit (see NAVIGATION UNIT

NO - Go to step 12.
13. Measure the voltage between body ground and display unit connector B (20P) terminal No. 1 and No.
2 individually.
Fig. 28: Measuring Voltage Between Body Ground & Display Unit Connector Terminal No. 1
And No. 2 Individually
YES - Replace the display unit.

NO - If the +B wire does not have voltage, repair open in the wire between the under-dash
If the ACC wire does not have voltage, repair open in the wire between the under-dash
111
PICTURE IS MISSING A COLOR OR TONE
 Before troubleshooting, get the navigation system anti-theft codes.
 After troubleshooting, enter the navigation system anti-theft codes.
1. Go into the Diagnostic Menu and use "RGB Color" test under Monitor Check (see RGB COLOR ).
Are the red, green, and blue colored circles shown?
YES - The system is OK at this time.

NO - Go to step 2.
2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
3. Disconnect the navigation unit connector A (20P) and display unit 20P connector.
4. Check for loose terminals at navigation unit connector A (20P) and display unit 20P connector.
Are there loose terminals?
YES - Repair the terminal.

NO - Go to step 5.
5. Check for continuity between the appropriate terminals of navigation unit connector A (20P) to
display unit connector B (20P) based on the missing color(s).
MISSING COLOR CHART

Navigation unit Display unit connector
Missing color connector A (20P) B (20P) Wire color
Blue A11 B18 YEL
Green A2 B9 RED
Red A1 B8 WHT
111
Fig. 29: Checking Continuity Between Appropriate Terminals Of Navigation Unit (20P)
Connector & Display Unit Connector (20P) (1 Of 2)
111
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - There is an open in the circuit between the display unit and the navigation unit. Check for
poor connections or loose terminals at the display and navigation units. If a poor connection or
loose terminal is found, replace the affected shielded harness.
6. Check for continuity between the appropriate terminals of navigation unit connector A (20P) and
display unit connector B (20P) based on the missing color(s).
MISSING COLOR CHART

Navigation unit connector A
Missing color (12P) Display unit connector B (20P)
Blue A11 B10, B20
Green A2 B10, B20
Red A1 B10, B20
111
111
YES - There is a short to body ground in the circuit between the display unit and the navigation
unit. Replace the affected shielded harness.
NO - Replace the navigation unit. If the problem is still unresolved, replace the display unit.
PICTURE HAS LINES/ROLLS/OTHER ISSUES
1. Check for electronic aftermarket accessories (possibly hidden) mounted near the display unit or the
navigation unit.
111
Are there any electronic accessories?
YES - Disable the accessories, and recheck.

NO - Go to step 2.
2. Start up the navigation picture.
Is the picture scrolling horizontally (left to right or right to left)?
YES - Check for an open or short to ground in the C SIG wire from navigation unit connector A
(20P) terminal No. 12 to display unit connector B (20P) terminal No. 19. Also check for a short
to ground between display unit connector B terminal No. 19 and terminal No. 20.
NO - Go to step 3.
3. Go into the Diagnostic mode and use "RGB Color" test under Monitor Check (see RGB COLOR ).
Is the picture missing a red, green or blue color?
YES - Do the troubleshooting for the picture is missing a color or tone (see PICTURE IS
MISSING A COLOR OR TONE ).
NO - Go to step 4.
5. Substitute a known-good display unit, and recheck.
Is the picture OK?
YES - Replace the original display unit.

NO - Replace the navigation unit (see NAVIGATION UNIT
DISPLAY UNIT BUTTONS OR TOUCH SCREEN BUTTONS DO NOT WORK OR RESPOND

PROPERLY

2. Go into the Diagnostic mode and use the "Touch Panel" test under Monitor Check (see TOUCH
PANEL ) and, if necessary, the "Display" test under Unit Check (see DISPLAY ).
Do the buttons work properly?
YES - System is OK.

NO - Go to step 3.
3. Try all the buttons on the navigation system.
Is there a specific row or columns of buttons, set of button, or a certain button that does not
111
respond properly (i.e. pressing a button in the lower left corner causes a button in the right
lower corner to respond.)?

NO - Go to step 4.
4. Measure the voltage between body ground and display unit connector B (20P) terminal No. 1 and No.
2 individually.
Fig. 33: Measuring Voltage Between Body Ground & Display Unit Connector Terminal No. 1
And No. 2 Individually
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - If the +B wire does not have voltage, repair the open in the wire between the under-dash
fuse/relay box and the display unit. If the ACC wire does not have voltage, repair the open in
the wire between the under-dash fuse/relay box and the display unit.
6. Disconnect the display unit connector B (20P).
111
7. Check for continuity between display unit connector B (20P) terminal No. 10 and body ground.
Fig. 34: Checking For Continuity Between Display Unit Connector Terminal No. 10 & Body
Ground
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Repair the open in the wire between the display unit and body ground (G503).
8. Disconnect the navigation unit connector A (20P).
9. Check for continuity between body ground and display unit connector B (20P) terminal No. 5 and No.
15 individually.
111
Fig. 35: Checking Continuity Between Body Ground & Display Unit Connector (20P) Terminal
No. 5 And No. 15 Individually
YES - There is a short to body ground in the circuit between the display unit and the navigation
unit. Replace the affected shielded harness.
NO - Go to step 10.
10. Check for continuity between display unit connector B (20P) terminal No. 5 and navigation unit
connector A (20P) terminal No. 10.
111
Fig. 36: Checking Continuity Between Display Unit Connector (20P) Terminal No. 5 &
Navigation Unit Connector Terminal No. 10

11. Check for continuity between display unit connector B (20P) terminal No. 15 and navigation unit
111
Fig. 37: Checking Continuity Between Display Unit Connector (20P) Terminal No. 5 &
Navigation Unit Connector Terminal No. 20

GPS ICON IS WHITE, OR NOT SHOWN
NOTE:  Make sure the vehicle is parked outside and away from buildings.
 Refer to GPS Information (see GPS INFORMATION ) for realtime
111
satellite reception display.
1. Check for metallic window tint on the windshield and electronic aftermarket accessories (possibly
hidden) mounted near the GPS antenna or the navigation unit.
Is there metallic window tint or electronic accessories?
YES - Remove tint or the accessories and recheck.

NO - Go to step 2.
2. Go into the Diagnostic Menu and use the "Navi System Link" test (see NAVI SYSTEM LINK ) to
check the GPS antenna.
Is "GPS Ant" icon red?
YES - Use the "Navi ECU" test under Unit Check (see Navi ECU ) to check for a kinked,
crushed, or disconnected GPS antenna wire. If necessary, try a known-good GPS antenna. If
icon is still red, replace the navigation unit.
NO - Check that nothing is blocking the GPS antenna located under the rear shelf and recheck.
Substitute a known-good navigation unit, and recheck.
VOICE GUIDANCE CANNOT BE HEARD
 Before troubleshooting, write down the customer's radio station
presets, and get the radio and navigation system anti-theft codes.
 After troubleshooting, enter the radio and navigation system anti-theft
codes, and the radio station presets.
1. Press the display unit SET-UP button.

2. Check the volume setting for the navigation system.
Is it set to OFF?
YES - Set the volume to an audible level.

NO - Go to step 3.
3. Check the radio operation.
Can you hear the radio?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Troubleshoot the audio system.
4. Go into the Diagnostic Menu and use the "Navi System Link" test (see NAVI SYSTEM LINK ) to
check the radio.
Is "Radio" icon red?
YES - Troubleshoot the audio system.

111
NO - Go to step 5.
6. Disconnect the navigation unit connector B (14P) and the audio unit connector A (20P).
7. Check for continuity between body ground and navigation unit connector B (14P) terminals No. 5,
No. 12 individually.
Fig. 38: Checking Continuity Between Body Ground & Navigation Unit Connector (14P)
Terminals No. 5 And No. 12 Individually
YES - Replace the affected shielded harness.

NO - Go to step 8.
8. Check for continuity between navigation unit connector B (14P) terminal No. 5 and the audio unit
111
Fig. 39: Checking Continuity Between Navigation Unit Connector (14P) Terminal No. 5 &
Audio Unit Connector (20P) Terminal No. 13
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - There is an open in the circuit between the navigation unit and audio unit. Check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the audio and navigation units. If a poor connection or loose
terminal is found, replace the affected shielded harness.
9. Check for continuity between navigation unit connector B (14P) terminal No. 12 and the audio unit
111
Fig. 40: Checking Continuity Between Navigation Unit Connector (14P) Terminal No. 12 &
Audio Unit Connector (20P) Terminal No. 12

NO - There is an open in the circuit between the navigation unit and audio unit. Check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the audio and navigation units. If a poor connection or loose
terminal is found, replace the affected shielded harness.
10. Substitute a known-good audio unit, and recheck.
Is the system OK?
111
YES - Replace the original audio unit.

VOICE CONTROL DOES NOT WORK/RESPOND
 Before troubleshooting, write down the customer's radio station
presets, and get the radio and navigation system anti-theft codes.
 After troubleshooting, enter the radio and navigation system anti-theft
codes, and the radio station presets.
Before assuming that a voice complaint is hardware related, ensure that the voice control system is being
operated correctly.
 Make sure you are on the correct screen when trying to issue a voice command. For instance, the
command "Find the nearest Italian Restaurant" only works on a Map screen.
(See the Navigation System Manual for a complete list of allowed voice commands for the
information being displayed.)
 Close the windows and moonroof.

 Set the fan speed to low (1 or 2).
 Adjust the air flow from the air conditioning vents so that they do not blow against the microphone on
the ceiling.
 Pause after pressing the TALK button, then give a voice command clearly in a natural speaking voice.
If the system cannot recognize your command, speak louder.
 If the microphone picks up voices other than yours, the system may not interpret your voice
commands correctly.
 If you speak a command with something in your mouth, or your voice is too husky, the system may
misunderstand your command.
1. Go into the Diagnostic Menu and use the "Mic Level" test the under Functional Setup (see
FUNCTIONAL SETUP ) to check the operation of the TALK and BACK buttons.
Are the TALK and BACK buttons operational?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO - Check for an open or short to ground on navigation unit connector B (14P) terminal No.
10.
2. Use the "Mic Level" diagnostic under Functional Setup (see FUNCTIONAL SETUP ) to check the
operation of the microphone.
Is the microphone operational?
YES - Check the operation of the voice control system (see the Navigation System Manual ).
NO - Check for a loose front map light (microphone) assembly. If OK, check for an open or
111
short to ground on navigation unit connector B (14P) terminals No. 6 and No. 14.
VEHICLE POSITION ICON CONSTANTLY LEAVES ROAD OR IS VERY FAR FROM ACTUAL
POSITION
1. Check the GPS icon on the navigation picture.
Is the GPS icon white?
YES - Do the troubleshooting for GPS icon is white, or not shown (see GPS ICON IS
WHITE, OR NOT SHOWN ).
NO - Go to step 2.
2. Go into the Diagnostic Menu and use the "Yaw Rate" test (see YAW RATE ) to check the yaw rate
sensor.
3. Go into the Diagnostic Menu and use the "Car Status" test (see CAR STATUS ) to check the vehicle
speed pulse.
Are the yaw rate sensor and vehicle speed pulse OK?
YES - The problem may be normal. Check to see if the problem occurs in the same place. If it
does, the problem could be in the database. Go to step 4.
NO - If the problem is the yaw rate sensor, replace the navigation unit (see NAVIGATION
UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ). If the problem is the vehicle speed pulse,
troubleshoot the vehicle speed signal circuit.
4. Substitute a known-good navigation unit and check to see if the problem occurs in the same place.
Does the problem occur in the same place?
YES - The problem is in the database. Report the problem according to the Navigation System
Manual under "Reporting Errors".
NO - Replace the original navigation unit (see NAVIGATION UNIT
DVD SCREEN ERROR MESSAGES
NOTE:  Check the Navigation System Manual for a list of common DVD screen
error messages and the probable cause.
 Go into the Diagnostic Menu and use the "Car Status" test (see CAR
STATUS ) to check the status of the DVD lid.
1. Check the DVD-ROM reading surface for scratches.
Are there scratches?
YES - Replace the DVD-ROM (see DVD-ROM REPLACEMENT ).

NO - If the problem occurs occasionally when the system is cold, this is normal. If the problem
occurs frequently when driving, replace the navigation unit (see NAVIGATION UNIT
111
TRIP COMPUTER-NO DISTANCE
 If the Previous button on the Trip Computer screen is not active, make
sure to answer OK to the Disclaimer screen.
 Verify that the correct navigation unit is installed for this model. Go into
the Diagnostic Menu and use "Version" (see VERSION ).
1. Go into the Diagnostic Menu and use the "Car Status" test (see CAR STATUS ) to check for a
vehicle speed pulse (VSP).
Is there a VSP when the vehicle is moving?
YES - Check the CAN system for DTCs. If OK, replace the navigation unit.
NO - Check the VSP wire for an open or short to power or ground.
TRIP COMPUTER-NO FUEL INFORMATION
 If the Previous button on the Trip Computer screen is not active, make
sure to answer OK to the Disclaimer screen.
Do the "Navi System Link" test (see NAVI SYSTEM LINK ) to check the communication line between the
ECM/PCM (FI-ECU) and the navigation unit.
1. Go into the Diagnostic Menu and use "Trip Information" test under Functional Setup (see
FUNCTIONAL SETUP ) with the engine running.
Are the values greater than zero?
YES - The system is OK.

NO - Check the CAN system for DTCs. If OK, replace the navigation unit.
NAVIGATION CANNOT CONTROL A/C
 Before troubleshooting get the navigation system anti-theft codes.
111
1. Go into the Diagnostic Menu and use the "Navi System Link" test (see NAVI SYSTEM LINK ).
Is "Air-con" icon red?
YES - Do the climate control system troubleshooting.

NO - Check for an open or short to ground between display unit connector A (5P) terminals No.
2, No. 3 No. 4 and climate control unit connector A (16P) terminals No. 16, No. 15, No. 8. If
OK, check the climate control system for normal operation. If the climate control system works
properly, substitute a known-good display unit and recheck.
DISPLAY DAY/NIGHT MODE DOES NOT WORK
 Before troubleshooting get the navigation system anti-theft codes.
 Full brightness on the instrument panel brightness control causes the
system to stay in the day mode, even when the lights are on.
1. Make sure the instrument panel brightness control is not on full brightness.
2. Change the day/night mode to AUTO under Set-up and recheck.
Does the display change to day and night modes using the headlights?

NO - Go to step 3.
3. Go into the Diagnostic Menu and use the "Car Status" test to check for an ILL signal (see CAR
STATUS ).
Is "ILL" signal OK?
YES - To system is OK.

NO - Check the ILL + circuit between the navigation unit and relay module.
SYSTEM LOCKS UP CONSTANTLY
1. Start the engine and turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Does the system reboot?

NO - Check the DVD for scratches or damage and the navigation unit for water damage. If OK,
go into the Diagnostic Menu and do all of the "Unit Check" tests (see UNIT CHECK ).
VEHICLE ICON WANDERS ACROSS THE MAP WHEN DRIVING (DOES NOT FOLLOW A
DISPLAYED ROAD) OR SPINS WHEN DRIVING
111
NOTE: This symptom is caused by a defective yaw rate sensor. Perform this
diagnostic when the vehicle is cold and warm.
1. Go into the Diagnostic Menu and use the "Yaw Rate" test (see YAW RATE ).
Are the values correct?

NAVIGATION DRIVES BY ITSELF WHEN PARKED
 Before troubleshooting, get the navigation system anti-theft code.
 After troubleshooting, re-enter the anti-theft code, and re-initialize the
navigation system.

2. From the main menu, select places, then select any destination, and begin the trip.
3. With the vehicle parked, watch the vehicle icon on the display.
Does the vehicle position icon move by itself?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - The system is OK at this time.
4. Go into the Diagnostic Menu and select "Demonstration" test (see DEMONSTRATION ) under
Functional Setup.
Is "Demonstration Mode" set to "YES"?
YES - Set the Demonstration mode to "NO".

NAVIGATION STAYS ON WITH IGNITION SWITCH OFF
 Before troubleshooting, get the navigation system anti-theft code.
 After troubleshooting, re-enter the anti-theft code, and re-initialize the
navigation system.
1. With the key out of the ignition.
Does the navigation screen stay on?
111
YES - Go to step 2.
2. The vehicle may have been used as a demonstration vehicle at an event like an auto show. In these
events, power is often jumpered to the navigation system so that the ignition key is not needed in the
vehicle. At the end of the show, the jumper wire may not have been removed. Check the navigation
unit "C" connector (8P) for a "non-factory" jumper wire in series with the factory cable.
Is there a jumper wire?
YES - Remove the jumper wire, and re-test.

NO - Go to step 3.
3. The display or audio unit may have been jumpered behind the dash to allow the navigation system to
run without the ignition key.
Does the radio function with the ignition switch off?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Go to step 5.
4. Remove the display unit and check to see if the audio 20P connector has a non-factory jumper wire in
series with the factory connector.
Is there a jumper wire?
YES - Remove the jumper wire, and re-test.

NO - Go to step 5.
5. Check the interior lights with the ignition switch off.
Can you turn on the interior lights with the ignition switch off?
YES - Troubleshooting the ACC circuit.

NAVIGATION CANNOT CONTROL AUDIO/CD
1. Make sure the anti-theft code for the audio system is entered.
Is for "Radio" icon red?
YES - Do the troubleshooting for the voice guidance cannot be heard (see VOICE
GUIDANCE CANNOT BE HEARD ).
NO - Go to step 3.
3. Substitute a known-good navigation unit (see NAVIGATION UNIT
Can the navigation control audio/CD?

111
YES - Replace the original navigation unit (see NAVIGATION UNIT

NO - Do the audio system troubleshooting.
NAVIGATION CANNOT CONTROL XM RADIO
Is the "XM" icon red?
YES - Check the connector at the XM receiver.

NO - Go to step 2.
2. Substitute a known-good navigation unit (see NAVIGATION UNIT
Can the navigation control the XM radio?
YES - Replace the original navigation unit (see NAVIGATION UNIT

NO - Do the audio system troubleshooting.
AUDIO-HVAC SUBDISPLAY DOES NOT WORK PROPERLY
1. Check the clock. Reset if necessary.
Does the clock reset?

NO - Go to step 2.
2. Check for an open or short to body ground between subdisplay unit 10P connector terminal No. 4, No.
5, No. 6, No. 7 and navigation unit connector A (10P) terminal No. 4, No. 5, No. 6, No. 7.
Are the circuits OK?
YES - Replace the navigation unit.

NO - Repair the circuits.
NAVIGATION FREQUENTLY ASKS FOR CODE AND NEEDS GPS INITIALIZATION
1. Check for an open on navigation unit connector C (8P) terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
Are the circuits OK?
YES - Replace the navigation unit.

NO - Repair the circuits.
SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS MODE
111
START-UP PROCEDURE AND DIAGNOSIS MENU
There are two ways to enter the diagnostic mode:
1. Connect the SCS connector (see FORCED STARTING OF DISPLAY ) to the navigation service
connector located in the trunk. Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. The display will go
directly to the diagnostic menu screen shown in Fig. 41.
NOTE: When finished troubleshooting, make sure to remove the SCS

connector.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Use the navigation display hard buttons as described in Fig. 41 :
A. If the battery has not been disconnected, then press and hold the 3 buttons (Menu, Map/ Guide,
and Cancel), and keep them pressed for about 5 seconds. The display screen will go directly to
the "Select Diagnosis Items" menu shown in Fig. 41.
B. If the battery was disconnected and reconnected prior to this test, hold down the Menu and
Zoom Out buttons at the "Code" or "GPS Acquire" screen. The display will go to the "Navi
System Link" screen. Push the joystick to go to the "Functional Setup menu," then touch the
Return icon to get to the "Select Diagnosis Items" menu.
NOTE: This only allows access to the diagnostic screens. All other
navigation functions are disabled.
Fig. 41: Turning Ignition Switch ON (II) Using Navigation Display Hard Buttons
3. After the display changes to the Select Diagnosis Items menu, select the item you want to check and
the diagnostic will start. To return to the previous screen, select "RETURN".
111
 Navi System (Link)

 F-CAN (System link)
 B-CAN (System link)
 Monitor Check
 Unit Check
 Car Status
 GPS Information
 Yaw Rate
 Tire Calibrate
 Functional Setup
 Version
NAVI SYSTEM LINK
 This diagnostic tests the cables connecting the navigation components. Ensure that the ignition switch
is in the ON (II) position. When the diagnostic begins, a "bong" sound is heard. The system is in a
"Detecting" mode, and is waiting for all items in white to be tested. This includes the navigation voice
control (TALK/BACK) buttons, and microphone. Press the navigation TALK button on the steering
wheel, and in a normal voice, say "testing". The Talk indicator on the screen should become green,
and the voice level indicator should move to at least the 6th bar to pass. Next, press the navigation
BACK button. This should cause the "Cancel" indicator to go green.
 If all of the communication lines connecting the system components, and the navigation
TALK/BACK buttons/microphone check out OK (all block diagram items green), then the "OK"
indicator will become green.
 If there is a problem with the system, the faulty system component item will change to red, and the
screen will show "NG" in red. Use the troubleshooting index, and other diagnostic screens to help
locate the problem.
 The indication on the screen will not change until the ignition switch is cycled. After repairing the
affected cable or system, repeat this diagnostic.
NOTE: Green boxes and green "OK" indicate that the communications lines
(cables) are intact. This diagnostic does not necessarily imply that the
individual components are functioning properly. For instance, the GPS
antenna wire may be crushed, but still show as "green". A road test, or
other diagnostic may be necessary to find the problem.
 This navigation system is designed for use in the US or Canada market.

- US Market: English is the only language choice.
- Canada Market: On the disclaimer screen, English or French can be selected.
- Touch the "Chg Canada" or "Chg US" button to select the desired choice.
 Select "Return" to return to the Diagnosis Menu.
111
Fig. 42: Identifying Navi System Link

NOTE:  The mic level indicator must reach the 6th bar or greater to pass the
test.
 For '04-05 models; If the XM link is red or flashing red, go to audio
system symptom troubleshooting (see NAVIGATION CANNOT
CONTROL XM RADIO ).
F-CAN SYSTEM LINK
F-CAN (Fast Controller Area Network) passes information between processors on the network. For
example, the F-CAN network is used to pass fuel pulses between the ECM/PCM and the navigation unit for
the trip computer function. The F-CAN network uses a communication protocol that transmits data at 500
Kbps.
 If the diagnostic screen below reads NG with the ignition switch ON (II), then diagnostic trouble
codes (DTCs) for the F-CAN can be retrieved with the HDS (Honda Diagnostic System). The data
displayed in the ID boxes is irrelevant.
 For more details on troubleshooting the F-CAN, refer to the multiplex system.
111
Fig. 43: Identifying F-Can System Link

B-CAN SYSTEM LINK
B-CAN (Body Controller Area Network) communication moves at a slower speed for convenience related
items, and for other functions.
 If the diagnostic screen below reads NG with the ignition switch ON (II), then diagnostic trouble
codes (DTCs) for the B-CAN can be retrieved with the HDS (Honda Diagnostic System). The data
displayed in the ID boxes is irrelevant.
 For more details on troubleshooting the B-CAN, refer to the multiplex system.
111
Fig. 44: Identifying B-Can System Link

MONITOR CHECK
Overview of display unit
 The display unit communicates with the navigation unit over its own GA-Net bus. Information is sent
to the navigation unit whenever the user activates the touch screen, or buttons. Information sent by the
navigation unit to the display unit includes commands to control the LCD back light.
 The display unit is protected by the security system by daisy-chaining the security signal through it,
and then passing the signal to the audio unit.
 The illumination input from the gauge brightness control provides back lighting for the buttons
surrounding the screen.
 The display unit also communicates with the climate control unit to set the A/C, mode, and fan speed,
and to receive the outside temperature that is displayed on the A/C-INFO screen.
These screens allow troubleshooting of the display unit. Select the item you want to troubleshoot, and follow
the diagnostic instructions.
111
Fig. 45: Identifying Overview Of Display Unit

RGB Color
This screen verifies that the display unit is receiving the video (R, G, B and Composite sync) signals
properly. The three primary colors should all be shown without distortion. The combination of all three
should produce a central white section. If any of the colors are missing, troubleshoot for the color signal (see
PICTURE IS MISSING A COLOR OR TONE ). If the picture has lines in it, or scrolls horizontally or
vertically, troubleshoot for a Composite sync problem (see PICTURE HAS LINES/ROLLS/OTHER
ISSUES ).
111
Fig. 46: Identifying RGB Color

Gray Tone
This screen looks for problems with contrast. You should be able to see the changes from bar to bar across
the scale. It is normal for the 2 bars on either side to appear the same.
111
Fig. 47: Identifying Gray Tone

White Raster
The entire display must be shown in white.
Fig. 48: Identifying White Raster

Black Raster
The entire display must be shown in black.
111
Fig. 49: Identifying Black Raster

Test Pattern
The chart shown in Fig. 50 shows the colors being used for the Map and Menu screens. This is for factory
use only. To check the color signal use the "RGB Color" test.
Fig. 50: Identifying Test Pattern

111
Monitor Adjustment
This allows the navigation display to be centered. Use the joystick to move the picture up/down or left/right.
It is unlikely that you will ever need to adjust the monitor position. The "Default" button will reset the
display position to factory specifications.
Fig. 51: Identifying Monitor Adjustment

Touch Panel
The panel touch sensing system consists of 9 horizontal and 20 vertical infrared beams. Touching the screen
blocks both a horizontal and a vertical beam. Every possible touch position is shown on this diagnostic
screen. Touching one of these areas should cause its color to reverse, and sound a "beep". If any areas of the
screen either don't respond, or respond at some other location when touched, then replace the display unit.
The "Display" test under Unit Check provides an additional method to determine if one of the infrared
sources or detectors is bad.
NOTE: Direct sunlight can affect this test by falsely triggering the infrared detectors,
so perform this diagnostic inside or in a shaded area.
111
Fig. 52: Identifying Touch Panel

UNIT CHECK
Select the item you want to check, and the test starts.
Fig. 53: Identifying Unit Check Sheet

111
Display
This diagnostic performs additional checks on the communication bus between the control unit and the
display. In addition, the internal electronics and touch screen functionality are confirmed.
 When the connection is NG, first check for loose terminals at the navigation unit and the display unit
connections. Next check for an open or short in the communication line between the navigation unit
and the display unit. If the line is found to have an open or short, replace the affected shielded harness.
 If the ROM or RAM is NG, replace the display unit.
 If the touch sensor is NG, then check for zeros in the "X", or "Y" values below.
 The version represents the software version in the display.
 The "1" following the X, indicate the 20 working vertical infrared beams/receptors (from left to right).
The "1s" following the Y, indicate the 9 working horizontal beams (from top to bottom). If any one of
the "1s" is a zero, this indicates that there is a problem with one of the beams or receptors. Check all
around the inside rim of the navigation screen for dirt or anything that may be blocking a beam. If
nothing is found, replace the display unit. See the display unit diagram in the "System
Description" (see DISPLAY UNIT ) showing the infrared beam layout. Individual touch positions
can be verified by running the "Touch Panel" test under the Monitor Check.
Fig. 54: Identifying Display

Radio
If the NG is indicated, check for loose audio unit connector.
111
Fig. 55: Identifying Radio

Navi ECU
This screen looks for problem with the navigation unit. When this diagnostic is initiated, there is a delay of
up to a minute while it runs.
 "ROM (Application)", and "ROM (Loader)" are for factory use.

 If "V-RAM" or "D-RAM" is NG, then replace the navigation unit.
 If "GPS" indicates "NG (ANT)", then check the entire GPS antenna wire from the navigation unit to
the antenna. If the wire is crushed or damaged, try a known good antenna. If this diagnostic reads OK,
then order a new GPS antenna. If the diagnostic still reads NG (ANT), then replace the navigation
unit.
 "DVD ROM" represents the database version on the DVD. This information can also be found in
Setup Screen 4 by selecting System Information.
 "Serial No." should be the same as the serial number found on the underside of the navigation unit.
This number is needed to obtain the security code from the Interactive Network (IN) system.
 Mem Clr is for factory use and should not be used unless instructed by the factory.
Selecting this will erase the customer's settings, personal information, GPS orbital data, and anything
else stored in memory.
111
Fig. 56: Identifying Navi ECU

PC CARD INFO
There is no PC Card in the PC slot, and the screen should say, "PC Card is not inserted". Do not insert any
card or object into the slot.
Fig. 57: Identifying PC Card Info (1 Of 2)

111
If the factory provides a PC card and instructs you to insert a card, then the screen displays the
Manufacturer, and Product Name as shown in the following screen.
Fig. 58: Identifying PC Card Info (2 Of 2)

CAR STATUS
This screen is used to confirm that navigation unit is properly receiving input signals. Signals equal to (0)
are OFF, and signals equal to (1) are ON. If the value on the display does not match the actual vehicle status,
then check the wire carrying the signal.
 CHG-(OBSELETE-NOT USED) Charge indicator (Pin 3 of C-Connector)

a. OFF (0) when engine is off, or alternator is not charging
b. ON (1) when engine is running
This signal was used by the previous DVD navigation system. If CHG was off, then the screen was shut off
after 10 minutes of inactivity to minimize battery consumption.
 VSP-Vehicle Speed Pulse from ECM/PCM (Pin 6 of C-connector)

a. OFF (0) when vehicle is not moving
b. ON (1) when vehicle is moving
The VSP comes from the ECM/PCM as a dedicated signal. Internally, the navigation unit compares the
actual VP on the map against street data to adjust the pulse to speed scaling factor. As this scaling factor
becomes more accurate, the "Level" gradually increases from 0 to 10.
111
 BACK-Reverse indication from taillight relay (Pin 5 of C-connector)

a. OFF (0) when shift lever is in any position other than reverse
b. ON (1) when shift lever is in reverse
The Back signal is used by the navigation unit to allow the map screen to show the VP moving backwards
when in reverse. This signal is needed because the Speed Pulse has no direction indication.
 CHG (CAN)-Charge indicator from ECM/PCM using F-CAN bus (Pin 8,18 of navigation unit A-
connector)
a. OFF (0) when engine is off
b. ON (1) when engine is running
This signal is obtained off of the F-CAN bus. See DTC TROUBLESHOOTING system for
troubleshooting F-CAN. Diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) for the F-CAN can be retrieved with the HDS
(Honda Diagnostic System).
 ILL-Illumination Indication
(Pin 5 of navigation unit A-connector)
a. OFF (0) when parking lights, or headlights are off

b. ON (1) when parking lights, or headlights are off
This signal is used by the navigation unit to determine whether to put the navigation screen into the Day or
Night brightness mode. (Setup screen 1)
 DVD Lid-senses if DVD door is open

a. (Close) when door is closed
b. (Open) when door is open
The navigation unit has a micro switch to detect this. If open is indicated when the door is closed, replace
the navigation unit.
 PC Card Lid-Senses if PC Card door is open

a. (Close) when door is closed
b. (Open) when door is open
The navigation unit has a micro switch to detect this. If open is indicated when the door is slid shut, then
replace the navigation unit. This slot is for insertion of PC Flash memory cards for gathering diagnostic
information. This is for factory use only.
111
Fig. 59: Identifying Car Status

GPS INFORMATION
This screen shows the current status of GPS reception. The circular diagram shows the current location of
the GPS satellites (yellow numbers) as they would appear in the sky. The outer circle represents the horizon
(0 degrees elevation). The middle and inner circles represents 30 and 60 degrees respectively. The very
center of the diagram (90 degrees elevation) is directly overhead. Naturally, nearby obstructions, like tall
buildings will block satellites in that direction. That is why it is necessary to be in an open area to effectively
troubleshoot GPS reception issues. The satellite numbers shown on the diagram correspond to the "PRN"
number in the "GPS Details" screen. There are always 24 "active" GPS satellites in orbit. Because satellites
fail, and have to be removed from service, spares always parked in orbit, ready to be activated. This is why
the PRN (satellite ID number) can be greater than 24.
NOTE:  To use this screen for troubleshooting, the vehicle should be outside
away from buildings, tall trees, and high-tension wires for at least 10
minutes with the engine running.
 Metallic window tinting on the rear window or after-market electronic
accessories mounted near the navigation or display units can interfere
with GPS acquisition.
 The "Number of Satellites" box shows the number of acquired satellites
(maximum of 12). It should contain 3 or more icons. If not troubleshoot for
"GPS icon is white, or not shown" (see GPS ICON IS WHITE, OR NOT
SHOWN ).
 The "Current Position" shows latitude, longitude, and elevation (in
meters). If there are less than 3 satellites, the elevation can be grossly
inaccurate.
111
 The Date/Time field shows the current date, and also a time that includes
daylight savings and other offsets entered by the customer in Setup
screen 2 "Adjust Time Zone/Clock".
Fig. 60: Identifying GPS Information

GPS DETAIL
By pressing and holding the MENU button for 10 seconds, a GPS Detail screen is displayed. This screen
displays real time incoming satellite positional data. Most of the information shown on this screen is for
factory use, however some of the data can indicate partial GPS signal interference.
111
Fig. 61: Identifying GPS Detail

 The box TS/AS and HDop/VDop is for factory use.

 The Speed and Direction information is updated in real time when driving, and can be used to detect
intermittent speed sensor problems.
 The Date/Time Information is the same as in Setup screen 2 "Adjust Time Zone/Clock".
 If the "3D" icon is shown above the yellow dots, this implies that at least 4 satellites are available for
map positioning, and the "GPS" indicator on the map screen will be green. See the Global Positioning
System detailed explanation in the "System Description" (see GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM
(GPS) ).
 If the row of data shown in DESCRIPTION CHART begins with a "yellow dot", the AZI and EL
fields can be used to locate each satellite on the circular GPS diagram (see prior screen).
NOTE: The data shown in the GPS Detail screen is an example only.
The table of values shown on the screen below has the following columns:
DESCRIPTION CHART
Column Description Problem indication
If "3D" is missing, follow GPS
icon is white, or not shown
Active Active satellites (Yellow Dot) troubleshooting (see GPS ICON
IS WHITE, OR NOT
SHOWN ).
PRIM The satellite ID number
If all 0, then, follow GPS icon is

111
white, or not shown

The status: 0 = cannot view or troubleshooting (see GPS ICON
ST
searching, 2 = acquiring IS WHITE, OR NOT
SHOWN ).
Azimuth, the angle (0-360)
AZI
clockwise from north
Elevation from the horizon (90
EL
deg is overhead)
Healthy signal is 49-52, no signal:
C/N N/A
27-33
ACC N/A
YAW RATE
This diagnostic checks the yaw rate sensor in the control unit. This device detects when the vehicle turns,
and repositions the vehicle position icon on the map screen. For more detailed information, see the yaw rate
sensor theory of operation under "System Description" (see YAW RATE SENSOR ).
 "Sensor" indicates the voltage output from the yaw rate sensor. It should indicate about 2.500 bolts
when stopped.
 "Offset" is the reference voltage or standard within the yaw rate sensor. It also should indicate about
2.500 volts when stopped.
 A "sensor" output voltage HIGHER than the "Offset" voltage indicates that the vehicle is turning to
the right.
A "sensor" output voltage LOWER than the "Offset" voltage indicates that the vehicle is turning to the
left.
 The yaw rate offset, and sensor should both indicate about 2.500 volts when stopped. If either reads
zero, or 5.000 volts replace the navigation unit.
 The yaw rate offset and sensor should be within +/- 0.01 V of each other when stopped. The sensor
value should change relative to the offset as the car is turned while driving. If not, replace the
navigation unit.
Example: Car stopped
YAW RATE
Normal Abnormal
Offset 2.526 V Offset 2.526 V
Sensor 2.516---2.536 V Sensor 2.623 V
Example: Car turning
NORMAL AND ABNORMAL SPECIFICATION

Normal Abnormal
Offset 2.526 V Offset 2.526 V
Sensor 2.678 V (right turn) Sensor 2.623 V (no change on
turns)
111
2.478 V (left turn)
 Auto tuning should always be on. If it is off, turn it on.

 "Sensitivity study" represents the status of the internal tuning function. At initialization, this value
starts at 6 and increases to # 10 as the internal correction values become more accurate.
 The settings "CCW Cal Factor", "CW Cal Factor", and "Set" are for factory use only. THIS SHOULD
NEVER BE USED.
Fig. 62: Identifying Yaw Rate

TIRE CALIBRATE
As the vehicle moves, the navigation system receives speed pulses from the ECM/PCM. These pulses are
converted using a conversion factor to a mph speed that moves the vehicle position (VP) on the map. The
navigation system has an internal tuning function that generates and refines this factor based on actual
driving. The "Level" indicates the status of the tuning. At navigation initialization, it begins at 0, and
increases to 10 as the navigation system is used.
 The "Auto Tuning" is factory set to "ON", and should remain on.
 The "LEVEL" indicates the tuning status. If it is less than 10, the unit is still calibrating.
 The "Tire-Cal. Tuning" and "Set" should not be used. It is for factory use only.
111
Fig. 63: Identifying Tire Calibration

FUNCTIONAL SETUP
Select the item you want to check.
Fig. 64: Identifying Functional Setup

111
Trip Information
This screen shows current internal values used for trip computer calculations. They are for factory use only.
 Simulation "Start" is for factory use.

 "Data Save" should always be on. It is for factory use only.
Fig. 65: Identifying Trip Information

Trip Calibrate
By holding down the MENU button while on the "Trip Information" screen, you will see the screen below.
This screen allows you to adjust the vehicle range (distance to empty).
 "Calc. RANGE" is the calculated value.

 "Disp. RANGE" is the distance displayed on the trip computer "Range" field. If it reads "0", the
vehicle will have enough fuel to travel about 20 miles.
 Range Tuning can be adjusted "+" or "-" to adjust the range to empty. It is recommended that this
value not be changed.
NOTE: Setting the range offset too low (+ 10) could result in the vehicle running out
of gas before the display reads "0". Make changes slowly when changing
this value.
111
Fig. 66: Identifying Trip Calibrate

Solar Angle
This screen is used to graphically display the sun's position as determined by GPS. The navigation system
uses the sun's angle, along with the sunlight sensor to control the driver/passenger A/C air flow. The heat
that must be removed by the A/C unit varies, depending on the angle of the sun entering the vehicle. This
screen is for factory use only, and should not be adjusted.
 The screen shows a circular diagram of the sky oriented in the direction that the vehicle is pointing.
During daylight hours a red dot is shown, representing the direction and elevation of the sun. The
outer circle represents the horizon (0 degrees elevation). The middle circle is 30 degrees, the center
circle is 60 degrees, and the very center is directly overhead (90 degrees).
 "Auto" should always be on (yellow).
 The "Angle", "Dir", and "Reliability" settings are used by the factory to simulate the sun's position for
debugging this function.
111
Fig. 67: Identifying Solar Angle

Log Data
This screen allows the factory to collect log data to troubleshoot navigation system issues.
 Normally there is no card in the "PC Card Slot", and the PC slot door should always be closed. The
screen should look like the one shown in Fig. 68.
111
Fig. 68: Identifying Log Data (1 Of 2)

 However, if the factory provides a PC card and instructs you to insert it into the card slot (label side
up), and then slide the PC Card door shut. If instructed by the factory, select "Gyro. Sensor Logs ON".
Follow the factory procedure for gathering test data, and properly ending the test.
Fig. 69: Identifying Log Data (2 Of 2)

GPS Offset Time
This screen is for factory use only. It allows adjustment of the GPS time. This display updates in real time.
 "GPS Time" is the time as received from the GPS satellites. It is in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
 "System Time" is the internal time used by the navigation unit to calculate your position on the map.
It is also in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
 "Display Time" is the time shown on Setup screen 2 "Adjust Time Zone/Clock", and reflects any
changes due to daylight savings time or time adjustments entered by the customer.
 Date, Hour, Minute, and "Set" should not be used.
111
Fig. 70: Identifying GPS Offset Time

Mic Level
This diagnostic allows you to independently test the microphone and the TALK and BACK buttons. They
are used to activate the voice control system. The microphone is located near the map light in the ceiling. It
is directional, and works best if the voice is coming from the drivers seat.
 Press the TALK button on the steering wheel, and in a normal voice say "testing". The TALK
indicator on the screen should momentarily become green, and the text "Now Recording..." should
appear in yellow. In addition, the Mic Level indicator should on the screen does not briefly become
green, then check the wiring from the TALK button to the navigation unit. If there is no "Mic Level"
movement when you speak, then you should check the wire running from the microphone to the
control unit.
 Press the BACK button on the steering wheel. This should cause the Cancel indicator on the screen to
momentarily become green. If it does not briefly change to green, then check the wiring from the
steering wheel BACK button to the navigation unit.
NOTE: The Mic Level indicator must reach the 6th bar or greater to pass the test.
111
Fig. 71: Identifying Mic Level

VSP Count
This screen displays the number of pulses per revolution of the tire. This is for factory use only, and should
not be changed.
 "Pulse Count Setting" should always be set to "Auto".

 "VSP Count" should always be "4", and should never be adjusted or set to any other value.
111
Fig. 72: Identifying VSP Count

H/U Time Send
This screen determines whether to automatically send the navigation time to the upper display. The display
unit connector A (10P) passes this information to the subdisplay unit. The navigation time can be found in
the Setup screen 2 "Adjust Time Zone/Clock" setting.
 "H/U Time Send" should always be set to "ON".
NOTE: Selecting "Reset" on the Adjust Time Zone/ Clock screen automatically
resets this diagnostic function to "ON".
111
Fig. 73: Identifying H/U Time

Demonstration
This screen is for factory use only, and should always be set to "OFF". Occasionally this setting is turned
"ON" when vehicles are being used at Auto Shows or similar events. Turning this feature on, allows the
navigation system to automatically follow a route to a destination when the vehicle is stationary.
Fig. 74: Identifying Demonstration

111
Version
This screen displays the current version of the program, and allows the loading of a new version of the
program either from a CD/DVD or from a PC card.
The D-Ram Program version should always be greater than or equal to the Disc Program version. The
mapped database version is the date of the database on the DVD.
The Model code is 20H, and is for factory use only. This code is stored on a chip in the navigation unit.
Therefore, every model has a unique part number for the navigation unit.
NOTE: If any model number other than 20H is displayed, replace the navigation unit
with the correct part. The model code tells the navigation unit what software
to load off the DVD.
Do not use DISC LOAD or Card LOAD, unless instructed to do so by the factory.
Fig. 75: Identifying Version Point

ERROR MESSAGE TABLE
ERROR MESSAGE
Screen Error Message Solution
Navigation system is unable to acquire a proper Make sure there is nothing on the rear package
GPS signal. tray blocking the GOS antenna. If not, move the
vehicle to an open space away from tall buildings,
111
trees, etc. Rear window tinting and after-market

devices can affect the GPS reception.
Navigation unit door is open or No DVD disc Make sure the navigation DVD is installed with
installed. Please check system. the label side up and the navigation unit door is
fully snapped closed.
PC card slot door is open. Please check system. Make sure that the sliding door for the PC card is
fully closed.
No DVD disc, please check system. Check that the navigation DVD is installed with
the label side up.
Display temp is too high. System will shut down This message will appear briefly when the display
until display cools down. temperature is too high, and then the display will
turn off until the temperature cools down. The
system will turn back on when the display cools
down.
Outside temperature is low, system will take a The temperature is below -30°C and the
while to start up. navigation ECU has difficulties reading the DVD.
The system will start up when the temperate
warms up.
DVD disc reading error (unformatted), please Check the DVD source for deep scratches or other
consult your dealer. damage. Make sure you are using an official
Honda navigation DVD (orange in color). The
system cannot read other mapping databases or
video DVDs. If the problem persists, see your
dealer.
Route has not been completed. Please try again Routing to or from a place (new area) that is not
from a different location. in the database. Try planning a different route to
or from a different location.
No alternate route found. Original route will be No alternate route method was found. The original
guided. route will be used.
This destination cannot be found in database. The destination was not found in the database. Try
another destination nearby, or select the
destination with the joystick.
FORCED STARTING OF DISPLAY

SCS service connector 07PAZ-0010100
1. Connect the SCS service connector (A) to the navigation service check connector (B) located behind
the navigation unit.
111
Fig. 76: Connecting SCS Service Connector To Navigation Service Check Connector

3. Check that the system starts up and then changes to the "Navi System Link" screen.
NOTE: If the system fails to display the "Navi System Link" screen, refer to no
picture is displayed (see NO PICTURE IS DISPLAYED ).
DVD-ROM REPLACEMENT
111
NOTE: When the DVD-ROM is re-inserted or replaced, a map match must be done
(see MAP MATCHING ).

2. Open the front cover (A) of the navigation unit (B) located trunk room.
Fig. 77: Opening Front Cover Of Navigation Unit

3. Press the EJECT button (C).

4. Remove the DVD-ROM.
5. Insert the new DVD-ROM.
6. Close the front cover. Do not turn the ignition switch OFF, until data is down loaded to navigation
unit.
NOTE: After servicing, the front cover must be closed. If you start up the
navigation system with the front cover open, the display will indicate.
"Navigation unit door is open or No DVD Disk installed. Please check
system".
NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
NOTE: If the navigation unit is replaced or disconnected, a map match must be

111
done (see MAP MATCHING ).
1. Remove the navigation unit from the trunk room.
Fig. 78: Removing Navigation Unit From Trunk Room

2. Remove the navigation unit bracket (B) from the passenger's seat.
3. Remove the bracket from the navigation unit (C).
GPS ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

1. Remove the rear shelf (see TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION - REAR SHELF AREA ).
2. Remove the GPS antenna (A).
111
Fig. 79: Removing GPS Antenna

VOICE CONTROL SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

1. For 4 door, remove the driver's airbag (see DRIVER'S AIRBAG REPLACEMENT ), then remove
the voice control switch (see STEERING WHEEL DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY ).
For 2 door, remove the voice control switch cover (A) from left side of the steering wheel.
Illustration shown in Fig. 80 shows 2 door models
111
Fig. 80: Removing Voice Control Switch Cover

2. Remove the two screws (B) from the voice control switch (C), then remove the voice control switch.
3. Disconnect the voice control switch connector.
DISPLAY UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

For Display Unit removal/installation (See AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY MODULE
111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Power Seats - Accord
Power Seats - Accord

8-WAY ADJUSTABLE:
Fig. 1: Locating Power Seats Components (8-Way Adjustable)

2-WAY ADJUSTABLE:
111
2 августа 2011 г. 14:58:54
Fig. 2: Locating Power Seats Components (2-Way Adjustable)

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
8-WAY ADJUSTABLE
111
Fig. 3: Power Seats Circuit Diagram (8-Way Adjustable)

2-WAY ADJUSTABLE
111
Fig. 4: Power Seats Circuit Diagram (2-Way Adjustable)

POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT SWITCH TEST/REPLACEMENT

DRIVER'S POWER SEAT (2-WAY ADJUSTABLE)
1. Remove the recline cover (see FRONT SEAT DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY - 2-WAY

111
POWER ) from the driver's power seat, then remove the two screws and the power seat adjustment
switch.
2. Disconnect the 5P connector from the power seat adjustment switch (A).
Fig. 5: Disconnecting 5P Connector From Power Seat Adjustment Switch

below.

4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
DRIVER'S POWER SEAT (8-WAY ADJUSTABLE)
1. Remove the power seat adjustment switch knobs (A) and recline cover (see FRONT SEAT
DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY - 8-WAY POWER ) from the driver's power seat, then remove
the two screws and the power seat switch.
111
Fig. 7: Removing Power Seat Adjustment Switch Knobs And Recline Cover
2. Disconnect the 12P connector from the power seat adjustment switch (B).
3. Reinstall the adjustment switch knobs to the switch.
below.
Fig. 8: Checking Continuity Between Terminals In Each Switch

5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
MOTOR TEST
DRIVER'S 8-WAY ADJUSTABLE POWER SEAT
1. Remove the driver's seat (see FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).
111
2. Disconnect the 12P connector (A) from the power seat adjustment switch (B).

3. Test each motor by applying battery voltage and body ground to the terminals.
111
Fig. 10: Testing Motor By Applying Battery Voltage & Body Ground To Terminals (Slide
Motor)
Fig. 11: Testing Motor By Applying Battery Voltage & Body Ground To Terminals (Recline
Motor)
111
Fig. 12: Testing Motor By Applying Battery Voltage & Body Ground To Terminals (Front Up-
Down Motor)
Fig. 13: Testing Motor By Applying Battery Voltage & Body Ground To Terminals (Rear Up-
Down Motor)
4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, check for an open in the driver's seat wire harness
between the 12P connector and each motor connector. If the harness is OK, replace the motor (see
FRONT SEAT RECLINE MOTOR REPLACEMENT ).
DRIVER'S 2-WAY ADJUSTABLE POWER SEAT

2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the power seat adjustment switch (B).
111

3. Test the motor (C) by applying battery voltage to the 5P connector No. 2 (or No. 4) and ground to the
No. 4 (or No. 2) terminals. The motor should run.
4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, check for an open in the wire between the 5P
connector and the motor 2P connector. If the harness is OK, replace the motor (see FRONT SEAT
RECLINE MOTOR REPLACEMENT ).
111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Seat Heaters - Accord
Seat Heaters - Accord
Fig. 1: Identifying Seat Heaters Components Location

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
111
2 августа 2011 г. 14:59:24
Fig. 2: Seat Heaters Circuit Diagram

SEAT HEATER TEST

DRIVER'S SEAT

2. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) and 2P connector (B) from the seat heater.
111
Fig. 3: Disconnecting 4P Connector & 2P Connector From Seat Heater

3. Check for continuity between the B1 and B2 terminals of the seat-back heater 2P connector. There
should be continuity.
4. Check for continuity between the A1 and A2 terminals, and the A1 and B2 terminals. There should be
continuity.
111
5. If the continuity check is not as specified, replace the seat heater.
FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT
1. Remove the passenger's seat (see FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).

2. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the seat heater.
111
111
Fig. 4: Disconnecting 4P Connector From Seat Heater

3. Check for continuity between the No. 2 and No. 3 terminals, and No. 3 and No. 4 terminals of the 4P
connector. There should be continuity.
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the seat heater.
SWITCH TEST
1. Remove the center console front panel (see CENTER CONSOLE
2. Disconnect the 6P connector from the seat heater switch (A), then remove the switch.
111
111
Fig. 5: Disconnecting 6P Connector From Seat Heater Switch

below.

4. If the continuity check is not as specified, replace the illumination bulbs (B) or the switch.
111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Seats - Accord
Seats - Accord
Fig. 1: Locating Seats Components (2-Door)

111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:00:07
Fig. 2: Locating Seats Components (4-Door)

FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION


prevent damage.
 Take care not to scratch the body or tear the seat covers.
frequencies for the preset buttons.
111
2. Tilt the steering wheel all the way up and telescope it all the way in.
3. '04-07 models passenger's seat: Carefully insert the tip of a small screwdriver (A) through the hole in
the back of the front seat belt lower anchor cover (B) and into the hole in the front seat belt lower
anchor (C). Unlock the lower anchor by pushing in on the screwdriver. Remove the screwdriver, and
then detach the front seat belt anchor plate (D) and anchor cover from the lower anchor.
Fig. 3: Detaching Front Seat Belt Anchor Plate

4. Slide the seat all the way forward, then remove the seat track end covers (A) from the back of both
seat tracks.
111
Fig. 4: Removing Seat Track End Covers (Manual/Manual Height Adjustable/2-Way Power ('03
model))
111
Fig. 5: Removing Seat Track End Covers (Manual ('04-06 Models 2-Door))
111
Fig. 6: Removing Seat Track End Covers (Manual ('04-06 Models 4-Door))
111
Fig. 7: Removing Seat Track End Covers (8-Way Power)

5. Slide the seat about half way to the rear so you can access the seat mounting bolts. If equipped with
the 8-way power seat, fully raise the seat.
6. If equipped with a side airbag, disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3
minutes before removing the seat.
7. Remove the bolts securing the front seat (A).
111
Fig. 8: Removing Front Seat Bolts

8. Lift up the front seat, then detach the harness clip (A), and disconnect the connector.
 Seat belt switch connector (B) except on the 8-way power seat.
 Power seat harness connector (C) on the driver's and passenger's power seats.
 If equipped, the seat heater connector (D) on the 2-way power seat and passenger's manual seat.
 Side airbag connector (E) on the driver's and passenger's seat.
 OPDS/ODS unit connector (F) on the passenger's seat.
 '04-07 models, disconnect the seat position sensor subharness connector (G) on the driver's
111
manual height adjustable seat and the 8-way power seat.

 Weight sensor unit connector (H) ('04-05 models), weight sensor connector (I) ('06-07 models)
on the passenger's seat.
Fig. 9: Detaching Harness Clip (Manual Seat ('03 Model Passenger's))

111
Fig. 10: Detaching Harness Clip (Manual Seat ('04-05 Models Passenger's))
111
Fig. 11: Detaching Harness Clip (Manual Seat ('06-07 Models Passenger's))
111
Fig. 12: Detaching Harness Clip (Manual Seat ('03 Model Driver's/Manual Height Adjustable
Seat ('03 Model))
111
Fig. 13: Detaching Harness Clip (Manual Height Adjustable Seat ('04-07 Models))
111
Fig. 14: Detaching Harness Clip (2-Way Power Seat ('03 Model))
111
Fig. 15: Detaching Harness Clip (2-Way Power Seat ('04-06 Models))
111
Fig. 16: Detaching Harness Clip (8-Way Power Seat ('03 Model))
111
Fig. 17: Detaching Harness Clip (8-Way Power Seat ('04-06 Models))
9. With the help of an assistant, carefully remove the front seat through the front door opening.
10. Install the seat in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Apply medium strength liquid thread lock to the front seat mounting bolts before reinstallation.
 Make sure each connector is plugged in properly.
 Tighten the seat mounting bolts to the specified torque in the sequence shown in Fig. 18. Slide
the seat all the way back and tighten (1) and (2) then slide it forward and tighten (3) and (4).
 Before attaching the lower anchor bolts, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the seat belts.
 '04-07 models passenger's seat: The triangle marks (A) on the anchor plate (B) and the lower
anchor (C) must face the same side. Insert the anchor plate into the lower anchor, and make sure
that it is locked securely.
 If equipped with a side airbag, reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
 Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then enter the customer's radio
station presets.
111
Fig. 18: Tightening Seat Mounting Bolts In Sequence

111
Fig. 19: Front Seat Belt Lower Anchor Installation ('04-06 Models Passenger's)
FRONT SEAT DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY - MANUAL

'03 MODEL 2-DOOR

111
NOTE:  Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat covers.
 Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage when
prying components.
 Apply multipurpose grease to the moving parts of the seat track.
 To prevent wrinkles in the seat cushion cover, stretch the material evenly
over the pad.
Fig. 20: Exploded View Of Front Seat ('03 Model 2-Door - Manual)
'04-07 MODELS 2-DOOR

111
 SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see COMPONENT
LOCATION INDEX ) and the precautions and procedures (see PRECAUTIONS AND
PROCEDURES ) before performing repairs or service.
 '04-05 models: The front passenger's weight sensor (SWS) unit must be calibrated after any of these
actions (see CALIBRATING THE FRONT PASSENGER'S WEIGHT SENSOR UNIT ('04-05
MODELS) OR CALIBRATE THE ODS UNIT ('06 MODEL) ):
- Front passenger's seat replacement (including any seat components)
- Replacement of the seat weight sensors
- Replacement of the seat weight sensor unit
 '06-07 models: The front passenger's weight sensor (ODS) must be calibrated after any of these
prying components.
over the pad.
111
Fig. 21: Exploded View Of Front Seat ('04-07 Models 2-Door - Manual)
'03 MODEL 4-DOOR
prying components.
111
over the pad.

 The passenger's seat is shown below; driver's seat is similar except it has
no OPDS unit.
Fig. 22: Exploded View Of Front Seat ('03 Model 4-Door - Manual)
'04-07 MODELS 4-DOOR PASSENGER'S
MODELS) OR CALIBRATE THE ODS UNIT ('06-07 MODEL) ):
111

 '06-07 model: The front passenger's seat weight sensor (ODS) must be calibrated after any of these
prying components.
over the pad.
111
Fig. 23: Exploded View Of Front Seat ('04-07 Models 4-Door Passenger's -
Manual)
FRONT SEAT DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY - MANUAL HEIGHT

ADJUSTABLE
 '04-06 models: The operation of the driver's seat position sensor must be checked after any of these
actions (see OPERATION CHECK OF THE DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION SENSOR ):
- Driver's seat position sensor replacement
- Cover plate (front side of driver's seat slide rail) replacement
prying components.
 Apply multipurpose grease to the moving parts of the height ratchet unit
and seat track.
over the pad.
111
Fig. 24: Exploded View Of Front Seat (Manual Height Adjustable)

FRONT SEAT DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY - DRIVER'S 2-WAY POWER

111

prying components.
over the pad.
Fig. 25: Exploded View Of Front Seat (2-Way Power)

FRONT SEAT DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY - 8-WAY POWER

111

prying components.
over the pad.
Fig. 26: Exploded View Of Front Seat (8-Way Power)

FRONT SEAT LINKAGE DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY - MANUAL

'03 MODEL
111

 Apply oil to the pivot portions of the slide locks.
 Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding portions of the seat tracks.
 4-door model is shown below; 2-door model is similar.
Fig. 27: Exploded View Of Front Seat Linkage ('03 Model - Manual)
 Front passenger's seat replacement (including any seat components)
111
 Replacement of the seat weight sensors

 When tightening the weight sensor mounting bolts, tighten the bolts in
the sequence shown in Fig. 28. Improper tightening could cause the front
passenger's airbag system to malfunction.
 Make sure the weight sensor unit ('04-05 models) connectors are plugged
in properly.
 Make sure the weight sensor wires are routed properly so they are not
pinched and do not interfere with other parts.
Fig. 28: Exploded View Of Front Seat Linkage ('04-06 Models 2-Door -
111
Manual)
MODELS) OR CALIBRATE THE ODS UNIT ('06-07 MODEL) ):

 When tightening the weight sensor mounting bolts, tighten the bolts in
the sequence shown in Fig. 29. Improper tightening could cause the front
passenger's airbag system to malfunction.
 Make sure the weight sensor unit ('04-05 models) connectors are plugged
in properly.
 Make sure the weight sensor wires are routed properly so they are not
pinched and do not interfere with other parts.
111
Fig. 29: Exploded View Of Front Seat Linkage ('04-07 Models 4-Door -
Manual)
FRONT SEAT LINKAGE DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY - MANUAL

HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE

 Apply oil to the pivot portions of the slide lock.
111
 Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding portions and pivot portions of

the seat tracks.
Fig. 30: Exploded View Of Front Seat Linkage (Manual Height Adjustable)
FRONT SEAT LINKAGE DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY - 2-WAY POWER


 Apply oil to the pivot portions of the slide lock.
 Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding portions and pivot portions of
the seat tracks.
 Replace the bushing on the up-down motor with a new one.
111
Fig. 31: Exploded View Of Front Seat Linkage (2-Way Power)

FRONT SEAT LINKAGE DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY - 8-WAY POWER

NOTE: Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding and pivot portions.
111
Fig. 32: Exploded View Of Front Seat Linkage (8-Way Power)

FRONT SEAT RECLINE MOTOR REPLACEMENT

DRIVER'S 8-WAY POWER SEAT
1. Remove the front seat (see FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).

2. Remove the seat-back cover/pad from the seat-back frame (see FRONT SEAT COVER
REPLACEMENT ).
3. Remove the recline motor (A).
-1 Release the push nut (B) from the motor side end of the connecting rod (C).
111
-2 Gently tap on the motor side of the connecting rod to remove it from the recline motor and
both recline adjusters (D).
-3 Remove the rod cover (E).
-4 Remove the motor mounting bolt, then remove the recline motor.
Fig. 33: Removing Front Seat Recline Motor (8-Way Power Seat)
4. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Replace the push nut with a new one. Make sure the push nut is installed correctly.
 Apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to the motor mounting bolt before reinstallation.
FRONT SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORT REPLACEMENT

FOR SOME MODELS (DRIVER'S SEAT)
111
NOTE:  Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to avoid damage
 Take care not to bend the cable.
 Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat covers.

 Lumbar support knob (see step 6 in Seat-back Cover )
 Back panel (see step 8 in Seat-back Cover )
2. Release the hook strips on the inside of the seat-back (see step 9 in Seat-back Cover ).
3. Remove the screws securing the lumbar support actuator (A).
111
Fig. 34: Removing Lumbar Support Actuator Screws

4. Release the hook of the yoke wire (A) from top of the basket (B) to loosen the lumbar support cable
(C), then disconnect it.
111
Fig. 35: Releasing Hook Of Yoke Wire From Top Of Basket

5. Release the wire tie (A), then remove the lumbar support cable (B) and actuator (C) as an assembly.
111
Fig. 36: Removing Lumbar Support Cable & Actuator As An Assembly

6. Disconnect the lumbar support cable (A) from the lumbar support actuator (B).
111
Fig. 37: Disconnecting Lumbar Support Cable From Lumbar Support Actuator
7. Remove the lumbar support (A).

-1 Release both lower springs (B) from inside the seat-back.
-2 Release the lumbar support from both upper springs (C).
111
Fig. 38: Removing Lumbar Support

8. Install the lumbar support in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Make sure the cable is connected securely.
111
 To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back cover, make sure the material is stretched
evenly over the pad before securing the hook strips.
 Replace the back panel clips with new ones.
REAR SEAT ACCESS CABLE REPLACEMENT

2-DOOR DRIVER'S SEAT
 Take care not to bend the cable.
1. Remove the front driver's seat (see FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).

2. Remove the seat-back (see FRONT SEAT DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY - 8-WAY POWER ).
3. Remove the seat-back cover/pad as an assembly from the seat-back frame (see FRONT SEAT
COVER REPLACEMENT ).
4. Detach the cable clip (A), and disconnect the rear seat access cable (B) from the rear seat access lever
(C) and both recline adjusters (D). Release the wire ties (E), then remove the cable.
111
Fig. 39: Disconnecting Rear Seat Access Cable From Rear Seat Access Lever
5. Install the cable in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
111
 Replace any wire ties you removed with new ones.

evenly over the pad before securing the hooks.
FRONT SEAT COVER REPLACEMENT

 '04-05 models: The front passenger's weight sensor (SWS) unit must be calibrated after any of the
these actions (see CALIBRATING THE FRONT PASSENGER'S WEIGHT SENSOR UNIT
('04-05 MODELS) OR CALIBRATE THE ODS UNIT ('06 MODEL) ):
 '06-07 models: The front passenger's weight sensor must be calibrated after any for this action (see
CALIBRATING THE FRONT PASSENGER'S WEIGHT SENSOR UNIT ('04-05 MODELS)
OR CALIBRATE THE ODS UNIT ('06 MODEL) ):
NOTE:  With side airbag: Seats with a side airbag have a "SIDE AIRBAG" label
on the seat-back. Because the component parts (seat-back cover,
cushion, etc.) of seats with and without airbags are different, make sure
you install only the correct replacement parts.
 With side airbag: Do not repair any tears or frayed spots of the seat-
back cover. If necessary, replace the seat-back cover.
 Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat covers.
 On the passenger's seat with side airbag, do not touch the OPDS
sensor in the seat-back pad, and keep it away from oil. Oil can corrode
the sensor causing it to fail.
SEAT-BACK COVER

2. Remove the headrestraint.
3. With recline motor and/or side airbag: From under the seat cushion, disconnect the recline motor
connector (A), and if equipped, the seat-back heater connector (B) on the driver's 8-way power seat.
Detach the side airbag connector clip (C), the OPDS/ODS unit connector clip (D) on the passenger's
seat, and harness clips (E). Release the hook springs (F) (on some driver's seat) and seat cushion cover
(G) from the seat cushion frame spring (H), release the hook strips (I) on 2-door passenger's seat, then
111
pull the cover back, and remove the wire ties (J).
The driver's manual height adjustable seat is similar to the 2-way power seat.
Fig. 40: Detaching All Connectors (8-Way Power Seat)

111
Fig. 41: Detaching All Connectors (Manual Seat)

111
Fig. 42: Detaching All Connectors (Manual Height Adjustable Seat/2-Way Power Seat ('03
Model))
111
Fig. 43: Detaching All Connectors (Manual Height Adjustable Seat ('04-07 Models)/2-Way
Power Seat ('04-07 Models))
4. Remove these items from the front seat, then remove the seat-back, '03 model 2-door manual seat (see
'03 MODEL 2-DOOR ), '04-07 models 2-door manual seat (see '04-07 Models 2-door ), '03 model
4-door manual seat (see '03 Model 4-door ), '04-07 models 4-door manual seat (see '04-07 Models 4-
door Passenger's ), manual height adjustable seat (see FRONT SEAT
DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY - MANUAL HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE ), 2-way power seat (see
FRONT SEAT DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY - 2-WAY POWER ), 8-way power seat (see
FRONT SEAT DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY - 8-WAY POWER ):
 Recline cover
 Center cover
5. Remove the screws (A, B), then remove the rear seat access knob (C), and rear seat access trim (D).
111
Fig. 44: Removing Rear Seat Access Knob

6. If equipped with a lumbar support, remove the clip (A), then remove the lumbar support handle (B).
111
Fig. 45: Removing Lumbar Support Handle

7. Without side airbag: Release the hook (A), and unzip the seat-back cover (B).
111
Fig. 46: Releasing Hook And Unzipping Seat-Back Cover

8. With side airbag: Detach the clips and hooks (A) by pulling the bottom of the back panel (B) back,
then pull the panel downward to release the hooks (C) from the seat back frame, and remove the
panel.
111
Fig. 47: Removing Back Panel (With Side Airbag)

9. Release the hook strips (A), then loosen the seat-back cover (B).
111
Fig. 48: Releasing Hook Strips (Without Side Airbag)

111
Fig. 49: Releasing Hook Strips (With Side Airbag)

10. With recline motor and/or side airbag: Pull the recline motor harness (A), seat-back heater harness (B)
(some driver's seat), side airbag harness (C) and the OPDS/ODS harness (D) (passenger's seat) out
through the holes (E) in the seat-back cover.
111
Fig. 50: Removing All Harness (Driver's Seat-Back)

111
Fig. 51: Removing All Harness (Passenger's Seat-Back)

11. With side airbag: Release the front hook (A) and rear hook (B) of the reinforcing cloth (C) from seat-
back frame (D).
111
Fig. 52: Releasing Front And Rear Hook

12. Pull out the headrestraint guides (A) while pinching the tabs on the ends of the guides, and remove
them.
111
Fig. 53: Pulling Out Headrest Guides

13. From the back of the seat-back, pass both lower retainers (A) through the slots in the seat-back pad,
and on passenger's seat with side airbag release all of the clips (B).
111
Fig. 54: Passing Both Lower Retainers Through Slots In Back Seat-Back Pad
14. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover all the way around, and release the clips (A), then remove
the seat-back cover.
111
Fig. 55: Releasing Clips And Seat-Back Cover (Driver's And Passenger's Without Side Airbag)
111
Fig. 56: Releasing Clips And Seat-Back Cover (Passenger's With Side Airbag)
15. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Reinitialize the OPDS/ODS control unit (see INITIALIZING THE OPDS/ODS UNIT ).
evenly over the pad before securing the clips, hooks, and hook strips.
 Replace any clips you removed with new ones (A). Install them with commercially available
upholstery ring pliers (B).
 Reinstall the front hook (C) and rear hook (D) of the reinforcing cloth (E) securely.
 Use only original Honda replacement seat-back covers.
 If equipped, make sure the recline motor harness, side airbag harness, and OPDS/ODS harness
111
(passenger's seat) are routed properly.
Fig. 57: Installing Seat-Back Cover

SEAT CUSHION COVER

111
2. With recline motor and/or side airbag: From under the seat cushion, detach the recline motor
connector clip, the side airbag connector clip, and on the passenger's seat, the OPDS/ODS unit
connector clip. Release the hook springs (on some driver's seats) and the seat cushion cover from the
seat cushion frame spring, then pull the cover back, and remove the wire ties.
3. Remove these items from the front seat, then remove the seat-back, '03 model 2-door manual seat (see
'03 MODEL 2-DOOR ), '04-07 models 2-door manual seat (see '04-07 Models 2-door ), '03 model
4-door manual seat (see '03 Model 4-door ), '04-07 models 4-door manual seat (see '04-07 Models 4-
door Passenger's ), manual height adjustable seat (see FRONT SEAT
DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY - MANUAL HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE ), 2-way power seat (see
FRONT SEAT DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY - 2-WAY POWER ), 8-way power seat (see
FRONT SEAT DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY - 8-WAY POWER ):
 Recline cover
 Center cover
4. Release the hook strips (A) and retainers (B) (manual height adjustable seat) from both sides the seat
cushion.
NOTE: Manual height adjustable seat is shown below; other seats are similar,
except for the height ratchet unit portion.
111
Fig. 58: Releasing Hook Strips And Retainers

5. Pull back the seat cushion cover (A), and release the hooks (B) from under the seat cushion. On
driver's manual height adjustable/2-way power seat, detach the clips from the seat cushion frame (C).
111
Fig. 59: Pulling Back Seat Cushion Cover & Releasing Hooks From Under Seat Cushion
6. Remove the cushion cover/pad from the seat cushion frame.

7. Release the clips (A) from under the seat cushion (B).
111
Fig. 60: Removing Clips From Under Seat Cushion

8. Pull back the edge of the seat cushion cover all the way around, and release the clips (A), then remove
the seat cushion cover.
111
Fig. 61: Removing Seat Cushion Cover

111
 To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat cushion cover, make sure the material is stretched
evenly over the pad before securing the clips and hook strips.
 Replace any clips you removed with new ones (A). Install them with commercially available
Fig. 62: Installing Seat Cushion Cover

REAR SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

2-DOOR
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body or tear the seat covers.
1. Remove the rear seat as shown in Fig. 63.

 Before attaching the rear seat-back and cushion, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the
seat belts.
111
 When installing the seat cushion, slip the seat belt buckles through the slits in the seat cushion.
 Make sure the seat-back locks securely.
Fig. 63: Removing Rear Seat (2-door)

4-DOOR
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body or tear the seat covers.
1. To remove the seat side bolster, remove the rear door sill trim (see 4-DOOR - REAR DOOR SILL
AREA ).
2. Remove the rear seat as shown in Fig. 64.
 Before attaching the rear seat-back and cushion, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the
seat belts.
 When installing the seat cushion, slip the seat belt buckles through the slits in the seat cushion.
 Make sure the seat-back locks securely.
111
Fig. 64: Removing Rear Seat (4-Door)

REAR SEAT-BACK LATCH REPLACEMENT

2-DOOR
 Take care not to bend or scratch the interior trim.
1. Remove the rear bulkhead cover (see TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION - REAR SHELF
AREA ).
2. Disconnect the cylinder rod (A), remove the bolts, then remove the seat-back latch (B).
111
Fig. 65: Removing Seat-Back Latch (2-Door)

 Make sure the cylinder rod is connected securely.
 Make sure the seat-back locks securely and unlocks properly.
4-DOOR
111
 Take care not to bend or scratch the interior trim.

 Rear door sill trim, both sides (see 4-DOOR - REAR DOOR SILL AREA )
 Seat side bolster, both sides (see 4-DOOR )
 Rear bulkhead cover (see 4-DOOR )
2. Disconnect the cylinder rod (A).
Fig. 66: Disconnecting Cylinder Rod

3. Remove the bolts, then remove the seat-back latch.
111
Fig. 67: Removing Seat-Back Latch (4-door)

 Make sure the seat-back locks securely and unlocks properly.
REAR SEAT-BACK LOCK CYLINDER REPLACEMENT

2-DOOR
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the interior trim.
1. Remove the rear shelf (see TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION - REAR SHELF AREA ).
2. Disconnect the cylinder rods from both seat-back latches (see REAR SEAT-BACK LATCH
REPLACEMENT ).
3. Remove the self-tapping ET screws, then remove the seat-back lock cylinder (A) and cylinder rods
(B).
111
Fig. 68: Removing Seat-Back Lock Cylinder And Rods (2-door)

 Make sure the seat-back unlocks properly.
4-DOOR
NOTE: Take care not to bend or scratch the interior trim.
1. Remove the rear shelf (see 4-DOOR ).

2. Disconnect the cylinder rod (see REAR SEAT-BACK LATCH REPLACEMENT ).
3. Remove the bolts, then remove the seat-back lock cylinder.
111
Fig. 69: Removing Seat-Back Lock Cylinder (4-door)

 Make sure the seat-back unlocks properly.
REAR SEAT ARMREST/TRUNK PASS-THROUGH COVER

REPLACEMENT
4-DOOR
NOTE: Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat covers.
1. Remove the clip (A) from the left portion of the armrest pivot.
111
Fig. 70: Removing Clip From Left Portion Of Armrest Pivot

2. Remove the armrest.

-1 Slide the armrest (A) toward the driver's side of the vehicle.
-2 Remove the pivot shaft (B) from the collar (C) on the passenger's side of the vehicle by
pulling up on the armrest, and remove the pivot shaft from the collar (D) by pulling up on the
armrest.
111
Fig. 71: Removing Pivot Shaft From Collar On Passenger's Side

3. Remove the beverage holder.
111
Fig. 72: Removing Beverage Holder

4. Fold the seat-back forward.
111
5. Remove the screws, and detach the hooks (A), then remove the trunk pass-through cover (B).
Fig. 73: Removing Trunk Pass-Through Cover

6. Install the armrest and trunk pass-through cover in the reverse order of removal.
TRUNK PASS-THROUGH COVER KEY CYLINDER REPLACEMENT

4-DOOR
NOTE:  When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to
prevent damage.
 Take care not to scratch the cover.
111
1. Using a flat-tip screwdriver, pry the rear seat handle (A) up at both hook portions (B) on the forward
side of the trunk pass through cover (C). Then slide the handle half-way up.
Fig. 74: Prying Rear Seat Handle

2. From the trunk compartment side of the cover, insert a small screwdriver through the access hole (A)
and press down on the hook (B).
111
Fig. 75: Inserting Small Screwdriver In Access Hole

3. While pressing the hook, pry the trunk-side handle (C) up with a flat-tip screwdriver.
4. Remove the trunk-side handle (A) and rear seat handle (B) together.
111
Fig. 76: Removing Trunk-Side Handle And Rear Seat Handle Together
5. Remove the retainer clip (C), then remove the trunk pass-through cover key cylinder (D) from the
cover (E).
6. Install the key cylinder in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Put the two handles together before installing them on the trunk pass-through cover.
 Make sure the trunk pass-through cover opens properly and locks securely.
REAR SEAT-BACK COVER REPLACEMENT
111
1. Remove the seat-back, 2-door (see 2-DOOR ), 4-door (see 4-DOOR ).

 Armrest and trunk pass-through cover, 4-door (see 4-DOOR )
 Headrestraint
3. Remove the screws, then remove the center belt guide.
Fig. 77: Removing Center Belt Guide

4. Remove the clips and release the fasteners (A) (4-door), then pull back the seat-back mat (B).
111
Fig. 78: Releasing Fasteners And Pulling Back Seat-back Mat (2-Door Left Seat-Back)
111
Fig. 79: Releasing Fasteners And Pulling Back Seat-back Mat (2-Door Right Seat-Back)
111
Fig. 80: Releasing Fasteners And Pulling Back Seat-back Mat (4-Door)
5. Release all the clips (A), and hook strips (B), and fold back the seat-back cover (C).
111
Fig. 81: Releasing Clips And Hook Strips (2-Door Left Seat-Back)
111
Fig. 82: Releasing Clips And Hook Strips (2-Door Right Seat-Back)
111
Fig. 83: Releasing Clips And Hook Strips (4-Door)

6. Pull out the seat-back pad (A) from the frame (B), then pull out the headrest guides (C) while
pinching the end of the guides, and remove them.
111
Fig. 84: Pulling Out Seat-Back Pad From Frame

7. Remove the seat-back cover and pad from the seat-back frame.
8. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover (A) all the way around, and release the hooks (B) of the
horizontal wires (C) from the vertical wires (D) on the pad (4-door), and remove the clips (E), then
remove the seat-back cover.
111
Fig. 85: Pulling Back Edge Of Seat-Back Cover (2-Door Left Seat-Back)
111
Fig. 86: Pulling Back Edge Of Seat-Back Cover (2-Door Right Seat-Back)
111
Fig. 87: Pulling Back Edge Of Seat-Back Cover (4-Door)

evenly over the pad before securing the fasteners, hook strips, and clips.
 Replace any clips you removed with new ones. Install them with commercially available
upholstery ring pliers.
REAR SEAT SIDE BOLSTER COVER REPLACEMENT

4-DOOR
1. Remove the seat side bolster (see 4-DOOR ).

2. Release all the hook strips (A), fold back the seat side bolster cover (B), and release the cover from
111
the hooks (C) to remove it.
Fig. 88: Releasing Hook Strips Folding Back Seat Side Bolster Cover (4-Door)
3. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and to prevent wrinkles, make sure the material is
stretched evenly over the pad before securing the hook strips.
REAR SEAT CUSHION COVER REPLACEMENT
111
1. Remove the seat-backs and seat cushion, 2-door (see 2-DOOR ), 4-door (see 4-DOOR ).
2. Release all the clips (A) from under the seat cushion, and fold back the seat cushion cover.
Fig. 89: Releasing Clips From Under Seat Cushion (2-Door)

Fig. 90: Releasing Clips From Under Seat Cushion (4-Door)

111
3. Pull back the edge of the seat cushion cover all the way around, and release the clips (A), then remove
the seat cushion cover.
Fig. 91: Releasing Clips And Removing Seat Cushion Cover (2-Door)
Fig. 92: Releasing Clips And Removing Seat Cushion Cover (4-Door)
111
 To prevent wrinkles, make sure the material is stretched evenly over the pad before securing the
clips.
 Replace any clips (A) you removed with new ones. Install them with commercially available
Fig. 93: Installing Rear Seat Cushion Cover

111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Doors - Accord
Doors - Accord
COMPONENT LOCATIONS INDEX

2 DOOR
2-door
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:01:22
Fig. 2: Locating Door Components (2-Door - 1 Of 2)

111
Fig. 3: Locating Door Components (2-Door - 2 Of 2)

4-DOOR
Front Door
111
Fig. 4: Locating Front Door Components (4-Door - 1 Of 2)

111
Fig. 5: Locating Front Door Components (4-Door - 2 Of 2)

Rear Door
111
Fig. 6: Locating Rear Door Components (4-Door - 1 Of 2)

111
Fig. 7: Locating Rear Door Components (4-Door - 2 Of 2)

DOOR PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

 KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014

 Trim pad remover, Snap-on A 177A or equivalent, commercially available
2-DOOR
111
prying components.
1. Lower the glass fully.

2. Using a trim tool, pry out on the lower portion of the cover (A) to release the hooks (B, C), then
remove the cover and the screws.
Fig. 8: Prying Out Lower Portion Of Cover To Release Hooks

3. Remove the power window switch panel (A).

-1 Insert a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped with protective tape through the hole under the armrest,
and push up the bottom of the power window switch (B) to release the panel.
-2 Pull out along the edge of the panel to release the hook (C) and clips (D).
-3 Disconnect the power mirror switch connector (E) (driver's) and the power window switch
connector (F).
111
Fig. 9: Removing Power Window Switch Panel

4. Remove the screws (G) from under the armrest.

5. Remove the mirror mount cover (see step 2 on POWER MIRROR/MANUAL MIRROR
REPLACEMENT ).
6. Remove the door panel (A) with as little bending as possible to avoid creasing or breaking it.
-1 Start at the bottom edge of the door panel, release the clips that are just above the marks (B)
on the edge of the panel with a commercially available trim pad remover.
-2 Detach the upper clips.
-3 Starting at the rear, pull the door panel upward and over the lock knob (C).
NOTE: The inner handle cable (D) and the courtesy light bulb socket (E)
are connected to the door panel. Do not pull the door panel up too
far, or the inner handle cable will be damaged.
111
Fig. 10: Removing Door Panel

7. While holding the door panel (A) away from the door, disconnect the inner handle cable (B) and
courtesy light bulb socket (C), and detach the harness clip (D) from the panel, then remove the panel.
111
Fig. 11: Disconnecting Inner Handle Cable And Courtesy Light Bulb Socket (Back View)
8. If necessary, remove the door glass inner weatherstrip (A) from the door panel (B) by pulling it down.
111
Fig. 12: Removing Door Glass Inner Weatherstrip From Door Panel
9. Install the panel in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and replace them with new ones.
 Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly, and the cable and the bulb socket are
connected properly.
 Make sure the window and power door lock operate properly.
 Do the power window control unit reset procedure (see RESETTING THE POWER
WINDOW CONTROL UNIT ).
 When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the plastic cover is installed properly and sealed
around its around its outside perimeter to seal out water.
 Check for water leaks.
FRONT DOOR PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION


111
4-DOOR
prying components.

2. Using a trim tool, pry out on the rear portion of the cover (A) to release the hooks (B, C), then remove
the cover and the screws securing the inner handle (D).
Fig. 13: Removing Cover And Screws Securing Inner Handle

3. Remove the power window switch panel (A).

-1 Pry up on the rear edge of the switch panel with a trim tool to release the rear clip.
-2 Pull out along the edge of the panel to release the hooks (B) and front clip.
-3 Disconnect the power mirror switch connector (C) (driver's) and the power window switch
connector (D).
111
Fig. 14: Removing Power Window Switch Panel (Driver's)

111
Fig. 15: Removing Power Window Switch Panel (Passenger's)

4. Remove the screw from under the pull pocket cap (A).
111
Fig. 16: Removing Screw From Under Pull Pocket Cap

5. Remove the mirror mount cover (see step 2 on POWER MIRROR/MANUAL MIRROR
REPLACEMENT ).
-3 Starting at the rear, pull the door panel upward and over the lock knob (C).
NOTE: The inner handle cable (D) and the courtesy light bulb socket (E)
are connected to the door panel. Do not pull the door panel up too
111
far, or the inner handle cable will be damaged.

7. While holding the door panel (A) away from the door, disconnect the inner handle cable (B), and if
equipped, courtesy light bulb socket (C), and detach the harness clip (D), then remove the panel. If
necessary, remove the inner handle (E) by releasing the hooks (F, G).
111
Fig. 18: Disconnecting Inner Handle Cable And Harness Clip (Back View)
8. If necessary, remove the door glass inner weatherstrip (A) from the door panel (B) by pulling it down.
111
9. Install the door panel in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly, and the cable and the bulb socket are
connected properly.
 If equipped, make sure the window and power door lock operate properly.
around its outside perimeter to seal out water.
DOOR OUTER HANDLE REPLACEMENT

2-DOOR
111

 Door panel (see DOOR PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION )
 Plastic cover, as necessary (see 2-Door )
2. Raise the glass fully.

3. Disconnect the outer handle rod (A) and cylinder rod (B) from the joint bushings (C).
NOTE: Check the joint bushing for damage and replace if necessary.
Fig. 20: Disconnecting Outer Handle Rod And Cylinder Rod From Joint Bushings
4. Release the retainer clip (A), then remove the lock cylinder (B).
111
Fig. 21: Releasing Retainer Clip And Lock Cylinder

5. Remove the screw, then separate the lock cylinder (A) and lock cylinder switch (B).
111
Fig. 22: Separating Lock Cylinder And Lock Cylinder Switch

6. Disconnect the lock cylinder switch connector (A), and detach the harness clip (B), then remove the
lock cylinder switch (C).
111
Fig. 23: Disconnecting Lock Cylinder Switch Connector And Harness Clip
111
7. Remove the maintenance cap (A). While holding the outer handle (B) from the outside of the door,
remove the bolts, then remove the outer handle protector (C) by sliding it forward to release the hook
(D).
Fig. 24: Removing Maintenance Cap

8. Pull out the outer handle (A) in the numbered sequence, and remove it.
111
Fig. 25: Pulling Out Outer Handle In Sequence

9. Install the handle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Make sure the lock cylinder switch harness is routed properly.
 Make sure the lock cylinder switch connector is plugged in properly, and each rod is connected
securely.
 Be sure that the end of the lock cylinder is engaged with the lock cylinder switch correctly.
 Make sure the door locks and opens properly.
 When installing the lock cylinder, leave the outer door handle bolts loose so the inner protector
does not interfere with the lock cylinder, then tighten the handle bolts.
 Install the lock cylinder retaining clip on the handle, then install the lock cylinder. Be sure the
clip is fully seated in the slot on the lock cylinder.
FRONT DOOR OUTER HANDLE REPLACEMENT

4-DOOR
111

 Door panel (see FRONT DOOR PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION )
 Plastic cover, as necessary (see 4-DOOR )

3. Pull the glass run channel (A) away as necessary, and remove the bolt, then remove the center lower
channel (B) by pulling it downward.
Fig. 26: Pulling Glass Run Channel Away

4. Remove the maintenance cap (A), then disconnect the outer handle rod (B), and cylinder rod (C) from
the joint bushings (D).
NOTE: Check the joint bushing for damage and replace if necessary.
111
Fig. 27: Removing Maintenance Cap And Disconnecting Outer Handle Rod
5. Driver's and some passenger's: Remove the maintenance cap (A) from the rear of the door, then
loosen the screw securing the lock cylinder protector (B) and the outer handle (C).
NOTE: Because of the tape (D) on the middle of threads, the screw will stay on
the protector after it is loosened.
111
Fig. 28: Removing Maintenance Cap From Rear Of Door

6. Remove the bolt, slide the lock cylinder protector (A) rearward, then remove the lock cylinder switch
(for some models), lock cylinder, and lock cylinder protector as an assembly.
111
Fig. 29: Sliding Lock Cylinder Protector Rearward

7. With lock cylinder switch: Disconnect the lock cylinder switch connector (A), and detach the harness
clips (B), then remove the lock cylinder switch (C).
111
Fig. 30: Disconnecting Lock Cylinder Switch Connector

8. Remove the screws, then separate the lock cylinder (A), lock cylinder switch (B) (for some models),
and lock cylinder protector (C).
111
Fig. 31: Separating Lock Cylinder, Lock Cylinder Switch And Lock Cylinder Protector
9. Remove the bolt, then remove the spacer (A).
111
Fig. 32: Removing Spacer

10. While pulling the outer handle (A), remove the handle from the holes in the door panel. Take care not
to scratch the door.
111
Fig. 33: Removing Handle From Holes In Door Panel

 Make sure the lock cylinder switch harness is routed properly (for some models).
 Make sure the lock cylinder switch connector is plugged in properly (for some models), and
each rod is connected securely.
 Be sure that the end of the lock cylinder is engaged with the lock cylinder switch correctly.
 Make sure the door lock cylinder/door locks operate properly.
 Make sure the door handle works properly.
DOOR LATCH REPLACEMENT

2-DOOR
111

 Door panel (see DOOR PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION )
 Plastic cover, as necessary (see 2 Door )
3. Disconnect the cylinder rod from the lock cylinder, then disconnect the outer handle rod from the
outer handle (see step 3 in Door Outer Handle Replacement ).
4. Pull the glass run channel (A) away as necessary, and remove the bolt, then remove the center lower
channel (B) by pulling it downward.
Fig. 34: Removing Center Lower Channel

5. Remove the screw securing the lock knob (A).
111
Fig. 35: Removing Screw Securing Lock Knob

6. Detach the inner handle cable clip (A), and disconnect the actuator connectors (B). Remove the
screws, then remove the latch (C) through the hole in the door. Take care not to bend the outer handle
rod (D), cylinder rod (E), inner handle cable (F), and lock cable (G).
111
Fig. 36: Detaching Inner Handle Cable Clip

 Make sure the actuator connectors are plugged in property, and each rod is connected securely.
 Driver's: Perform the power window control unit reset procedure (see RESETTING THE
POWER WINDOW CONTROL UNIT ).
111
FRONT DOOR LATCH REPLACEMENT

4-DOOR

 Door panel (see FRONT DOOR PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION )
 Plastic cover, as necessary (see Front Door )
 Center lower channel (see 3 )
3. Disconnect the cylinder rod from the lock cylinder, and disconnect the outer handle rod from the outer
handle (see 4 ).
111

5. Disconnect the actuator connectors (A) (for some models), and detach the inner handle cable clip (B).
Remove the screws (C, D) securing the latch (E) and the lock cable protector.
111
Fig. 38: Disconnecting Actuator Connectors

6. Release the hooks (A) of the lock cable protector (B) from the door, then remove the latch (C) with
the protector through the hole in the door. Take care not to bend the outer handle rod (D), cylinder rod
(E), lock cable (F), and inner handle cable (G).
111
Fig. 39: Releasing Hooks Of Lock Cable Protector From Door

7. Remove the lock cable protector (A) from the latch protector (B) by releasing the hook (C).
111
Fig. 40: Removing Lock Cable Protector From Latch Protector By Releasing Hook
 If equipped, make sure the actuator connectors are plugged in properly and each rod is
connected securely.
 Do the power window control unit rest procedure (see RESETTING THE POWER
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR REPLACEMENT
111
1. Remove the door panel, 2-door (see 2-DOOR ), 4-door (see 4-DOOR ).
2. 4-door: Remove the screws, then remove the panel bracket (A).
Fig. 41: Removing Panel Bracket

3. Remove the plastic cover, 2-door (see 2-Door ), 4-door (see 4-DOOR ).
4. Carefully raise the glass (A) until you can see the bolts, then remove them. Carefully pull the glass out
through the window slot. Take care not to drop the glass inside the door.
111
Fig. 42: Raising Glass And Removing (2-Door)

111
Fig. 43: Raising Glass And Removing (4-Door)

5. Disconnect the connector (A) from the regulator (B).
111
Fig. 44: Disconnecting Connector From Regulator (2-Door)

111
Fig. 45: Disconnecting Connector From Regulator (4-Door)

6. Remove the bolts (C), and loosen the bolts (D), then remove the regulator through the hole in the
door.
7. Apply multipurpose grease to all the sliding surfaces of the regulator (A) where shown below.
111
Fig. 46: Applying Multipurpose Grease To Sliding Surfaces

8. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely without binding.
 Make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is
closed.
 Adjust the position of the glass as necessary (see Front and Rear Door Glass Adjustment ).
 Test-drive and check for wind noise and rattles.
 Make sure the power door locks, windows, and power mirror operate properly.
DOOR SASH TRIM REPLACEMENT

2-DOOR
111
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the door.

2. Remove the mirror (see POWER MIRROR/MANUAL MIRROR REPLACEMENT ).
3. Slide the door glass outer weatherstrip (A) forward to release the hook (B) on bottom of the door sash
trim (C) from under the rear end of the weatherstrip.
Fig. 47: Sliding Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Forward To Release Hook
4. Pull back the door weatherstrip (A) at the rear upper corner, and pull the glass run channel (B) away
as needed, then remove the screws.
111
Fig. 48: Pulling Back Door Weatherstrip At Rear Upper Corner

5. Pull up the door sash trim (A) to release the hooks (B) from the holes in the sash, then remove the
trim.
111
Fig. 49: Pulling Up Door Sash Trim To Release Hooks From Holes In Sash
111
6. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal.
FRONT DOOR GLASS OUTER WEATHERSTRIP REPLACEMENT

NOTE:  If you remove the door glass outer weatherstrip, replace it with a new
one because it will bend.
 Take care not to scratch the door.

 Door panel, 2-door (see 2-DOOR ), 4-door (see 4-DOOR )
 Mirror (see POWER MIRROR/MANUAL MIRROR REPLACEMENT )
 Door sash trim, 2-door (see 2-DOOR )
2. 4-door: Remove the screw from the rear edge of the door.
111
Fig. 50: Removing Screw From Rear Edge Of Door (4-door)

3. Starting at the rear, pull the door glass outer weatherstrip (A) up at each portion where the inner
molding (B) catches the inside edge of the window slot.
111
Fig. 51: Pulling Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip (2-Door)

111
Fig. 52: Pulling Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip (4-Door)

4. Pull the rear of the glass outer weatherstrip (A) away from the door, then release the front clip (B)
from the mounting hole in the door. If necessary, pry the clip, then remove the weatherstrip.
111
Fig. 53: Pulling Rear Of Glass Outer Weatherstrip And Release Front Clip
5. Install new weatherstrip in the reverse order of removal, and perform the power window control unit
reset procedure (driver's) (see RESETTING THE POWER WINDOW CONTROL UNIT ).
111
FRONT DOOR OUTER MOLDING REPLACEMENT

NOTE:  If you remove the door outer molding, replace it with a new one
because it will bend during removal.

 Mirror (see POWER MIRROR/MANUAL MIRROR REPLACEMENT )
 Door sash trim, 2-door (see 2-DOOR )
2. Remove the door outer molding (A).

-4-door: Pry the rear clip with a trim tool.
-While removing the upper edge of the door outer molding from the edge of the sash, cut the
double-sided adhesive tapes (B) with a utility knife, then remove the molding.
111
Fig. 54: Removing Door Outer Molding ('03 Model 2-Door)

111
Fig. 55: Removing Door Outer Molding ('04-07 Models 2-Door)

111
Fig. 56: Removing Door Outer Molding ('03 Model 4-Door)

111
Fig. 57: Removing Door Outer Molding ('04-07 Models 4-Door)

3. Scrape off the remaining double-sided adhesive tape from the sash, then clean the sash surface with a
sponge dampened in alcohol.
4. Install new door outer molding in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Push the clip and the adhesive portions into place securely.
 Make sure the upper and lower sides of the molding are catching the edges of the sash properly.
FRONT DOOR WEATHERSTRIP REPLACEMENT
NOTE:
111

 Use a clip remover to remove the clips.
1. At the A-pillar, remove the detent rod mounting bolt (A).
Fig. 58: Removing Detent Rod Mounting Bolt (2-Door)

111
Fig. 59: Removing Detent Rod Mounting Bolt (4-Door)

2. Detach the clips (B, C, D), then remove the door weatherstrip (E).
3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Make sure the weatherstrip is installed in the holder (F) securely.
111
 Apply medium strength liquid thread lock to detent rod mounting bolt before installation.
 Test-drive and check for wind noise.
REAR DOOR PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION


4-DOOR
prying components.

2. Using a trim tool, pry out on the rear portion of the cover (A) to release the hooks (B, C), then remove
the cover and the screws securing the inner handle (D).
111
Fig. 60: Removing Cover And Screws Securing Inner Handle

3. Remove the switch panel (A).

-1 Pry up on the rear edge of the switch panel with a trim tool to release the rear clip.
-2 Pull out along the edge of the panel to release the hooks (B) and clip.
-3 Disconnect the power window switch connector (C).
Fig. 61: Removing Switch Panel

4. Remove the screw from under the pull pocket cap (A).
111
Fig. 62: Removing Screw From Under Pull Pocket Cap

-3 Starting at the front, pull the door panel upward and over the lock knob (C).
NOTE: The inner handle cable (D) is connected to the door panel. Do not
pull the door panel up too far, or the inner handle cable will be
damaged.
111

6. While holding the door panel away from the door, disconnect the inner handle cable (A), then remove
the door panel. If necessary, remove the inner handle (B) by releasing the hooks (C, D).
111
Fig. 64: Removing Inner Handle By Releasing Hooks (Back View)

7. If necessary, remove the door glass inner weatherstrip (A) from the door panel (B).
111
 Make sure the connector is plugged in properly and the cable is connected securely.
 If equipped, make sure the window and power door lock operate properly.
 When reinstalling the door panel, make sure plastic cover is installed properly and sealed
REAR DOOR OUTER HANDLE REPLACEMENT

4-DOOR

 Door panel (see REAR DOOR PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION )
 Plastic cover, as necessary (see Rear Door )

111
3. Remove the screws (A, B) securing the latch (C) and the cable protector (D).
Fig. 66: Removing Screws Securing Latch And Cable Protector

4. Detach the cable clips (A) and the hook (B) of the cable protector (C), then pull the latch (D) and the
cable protector forward. Take care not to bend any of the cables.
111
Fig. 67: Detaching Cable Clips And Hook Of Cable Protector

5. Remove the maintenance hole seal (A) and bolts, slide the protector (B) ('03 model) or the outer
handle bracket (C) ('04-06 models) rearward, then remove it.
111
Fig. 68: Removing Maintenance Hole Seal And Bolts ('03 Model)
111
Fig. 69: Removing Maintenance Hole Seal And Bolts ('04-07 Models)
6. '03 model: Remove the spacer (D).

7. While pulling the outer handle (A), remove the handle from the holes in the door panel. Take care not
to scratch the door.
111
Fig. 70: Removing Handle From Holes In Door Panel

REAR DOOR LATCH REPLACEMENT

4-DOOR
1. Remove the door panel (see REAR DOOR PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).

111

4. Remove the plastic cover, as needed (see Rear Door ).

5. Disconnect the actuator connector(s) (A) (for some models). Remove the screws (B, C) securing the
latch (D) and the cable protector (E).
111
Fig. 72: Removing Screws Securing Latch And Cable Protector

6. Detach the cable clips (A) and the hook (B) of the cable protector (C), then remove the latch (D) with
the cable protector through the hole in the door. Take care not to bend any of the cables.
111
Fig. 73: Detaching Cable Clips And Hook Of Cable Protector

7. Remove the cable protector (A) from the latch protector (B) by releasing the hook (C).
111
Fig. 74: Removing Cable Protector From Latch Protector By Releasing Hook
 If equipped, make sure the actuator connector(s) are plugged in properly.
 Make sure the door locks and the window operates properly.
REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR REPLACEMENT

4-DOOR

 Door panel (see REAR DOOR PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION )
 Panel bracket (see step 2 in Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement )
 Plastic cover, as necessary (see Rear Door )
2. Carefully move the glass (A) until you can see the bolts, then remove them. Remove the glass from
the regulator (B), and carefully lower the glass. Take care not to drop the glass inside the door.
111
Fig. 75: Removing Glass From Regulator

3. Pull the glass run channel (A) away as needed. Pull the door weatherstrip (B) away as needed, then
remove the screw (C). Remove the bolt (D) securing the center channel (E).
111
Fig. 76: Pulling Glass Run Channel

4. Pull the upper portion of the center channel (A) forward to remove it from the door quarter glass seal
111
(B), then pull up and remove the center channel out through the window slot. Take care not to damage
the outer weatherstrip (C).
Fig. 77: Pulling Upper Portion Of Center Channel Forward To Remove From Door Quarter
Glass Seal
5. Remove the quarter glass (A). Take care not to damage the outer weatherstrip (B).
111
Fig. 78: Removing Quarter Glass

6. Carefully remove the glass (A) out through the window slot. Take care not to drop the glass inside the
door.
111
Fig. 79: Removing Glass Through Window Slot

7. Disconnect the connector (A) from the regulator (B).
111
Fig. 80: Disconnecting Connector From Regulator

8. Remove the bolts (C), and loosen the bolts (D), then remove the regulator through the hole in the
door.
9. Apply multipurpose grease to all the sliding surfaces of the regulator (A) where shown below.
111
Fig. 81: Applying Multipurpose Grease To Sliding Surfaces Of Regulator

10. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves freely without binding.
 Make sure that there is no clearance between the glass and glass run channel when the glass is
closed.
 Adjust the position of the glass as necessary (see Front and Rear Door Glass Adjustment ).
 Test-drive and check for wind noise and rattles.
around its perimeter to seal out the water.
REAR DOOR GLASS OUTER WEATHERSTRIP REPLACEMENT

4-DOOR
111
NOTE:  Once you remove the door glass outer weatherstrip, replace it with a
new one because it will bend.
1. Remove the door panel (see REAR DOOR PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).

2. Remove the screw from the front edge of the door.
Fig. 82: Removing Screw From Front Edge Of Door

3. Starting at the front, pull the door glass outer weatherstrip (A) up at each portion where the inner
molding (B) catches the inside edge of the window slot.
111
Fig. 83: Pulling Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip At Inner Molding Catches Inside Edge Of
Window Slot
4. Detach the rear clip (A), then remove the door glass outer weatherstrip (B).
111
Fig. 84: Removing Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip

5. Install a new weatherstrip in the reverse order of removal.
REAR DOOR OUTER MOLDING REPLACEMENT

4-DOOR
NOTE:  If you remove the door outer molding, replace it with a new one
111
because it will bend during removal.

1. Pry the front clip (A) with a trim tool.
Fig. 85: Prying Front Clip With Trim Tool ('03 Model)
111
Fig. 86: Prying Front Clip With Trim Tool ('04-07 Models)
2. While removing the upper edge of the door outer molding (B) from the edge of the sash, cut the
double-sided adhesive tapes (C) with a utility knife, then remove the molding.
3. Scrape off the remaining double-sided adhesive tape from the sash, then clean the sash surface with a
sponge dampened in alcohol.
4. Install new door outer molding in the reverse order of removal, and note these items.
 Push the clip and the adhesive portions into place securely.
 Make sure the upper and lower sides of the molding are catching the edges of the sash properly.
REAR DOOR WEATHERSTRIP REPLACEMENT

4-DOOR
NOTE:  Take care not to scratch the door.
111
 Use a clip remover to remove the clips.
1. At the B-pillar, remove the detent rod mounting bolt (A).
111
Fig. 87: Removing Detent Rod Mounting Bolt

111
2. Detach the clips (B, C), then remove the door weatherstrip (D).
3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Make sure the weatherstrip is installed in the holder (E) securely.
 Apply medium strength liquid thread lock to the detent rod mounting bolt before installation.
 Test-drive and check for wind noise.
REAR DOOR HOOK PIN AND CATCH REPLACEMENT

4-DOOR
1. With a T40 Torx bit, remove the door hook pin (A) from the door.
111
Fig. 88: Removing Door Hook Pin From Door

2. With a T40 Torx bit, remove the bolts, then remove the door catch (A) from the body.
111
Fig. 89: Removing Door Catch From Body

3. Install the hook pin and catch in the reverse order of removal, and apply medium strength liquid
thread lock to the threads of the door hook pin.
FRONT AND REAR DOOR GLASS ADJUSTMENT
NOTE:  Check the weatherstrips and glass run channel for damage or
deterioration, and replace them if necessary.
 Wipe the run channel clean with a shop towel.
 Lubricate the run channel with Shin-Etsu silicone grease P/N 08798-
9013.
1. Place the vehicle on a firm, level surface.

 Door panel, 2-door (see 2-DOOR ), 4-door front door (see 4-DOOR ), 4-door rear door (see 4-
DOOR )
111
Plastic cover, 2-door (see 2-DOOR ), 4-door front door (see 4-DOOR ), 4-door rear door (see
REAR DOOR )
3. Carefully move the glass (A) until you can see the glass mounting bolts (B), then loosen them.
Fig. 90: Loosening Glass Mounting Bolts (2-Door)

111
Fig. 91: Loosening Glass Mounting Bolts (4-Door Front Door)

111
Fig. 92: Loosening Glass Mounting Bolts (4-Door Rear Door)

4. Push the glass against the channel (C), then tighten the glass mounting bolts.
5. Check that the glass moves smoothly.
6. Raise the glass fully, and check for gaps. Also check that the glass (A) contacts the glass run channel
(B) evenly.
111
Fig. 93: Checking Glass Contacts Glass Run Channel

7. Check for water leaks. Run water over the roof and on the sealing area as shown in Fig. 94, and note
these items:
 Use a 12 mm (1/2 in.) diameter hose (A).
 Adjust the rate of water flow as shown in (B), see Fig. 94.
 Do not use a nozzle.
 Hold the hose about 300 mm (12 in.) away from the door (C).
111
Fig. 94: Checking For Water Leaks

8. Attach the plastic cover making sure it is sealed around its outside perimeter to seal out water, then
install the door panel, 2-door (see 2-DOOR ), 4-door front door (see 4-DOOR ), 4-door rear door (see
4-DOOR ).
CONTROL UNIT ).
111
10. Test-drive and check for wind noise.
FRONT AND REAR DOOR POSITION ADJUSTMENT

NOTE: Check for a flush fit with the body, then check for equal gaps between the
front, rear, and bottom door edges and the body. Check that the door and
body edges are parallel.
1. Place the vehicle on a firm, level surface when adjusting the doors.
2. Adjust at the hinges (A):
 On the front door: Remove the front inner fender (see FRONT INNER FENDER
REPLACEMENT ) and front fender fairing (see FRONT FENDER FAIRING
REPLACEMENT ). Loosen the hinge mounting bolts (B) slightly, and move the door
backward or forward, up or down as necessary to equalize the gaps. Pad a floor jack (C) with
shop towels (D), then use the jack to support the door while adjusting it.
 On the rear door: Remove the B-pillar lower trim, without side curtain airbags (see 4-DOOR-
B-PILLAR - WITHOUT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('03-04 MODELS) ), with side
curtain airbags (see 4-DOOR-B-PILLAR - WITH SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('04-07
MODELS) ) and remove the front seat belt and retractor (see FRONT SEAT BELT
REPLACEMENT ), and the plug seal from the body. Loosen the hinge mounting nuts (E)
slightly, and move the door backward or forward, up or down as necessary to equalize the gaps.
Pad a floor jack (C) with shop towels (D) then use the jack to support the door to prevent
damage to the door while adjusting it.
111
Fig. 95: Adjusting Door At Hinges (2-Door And 4-Door Front Door)
111
Fig. 96: Adjusting Door At Hinges (4-Door Rear Door)

3. If necessary, replace the door mounting bolts (F) with the adjusting bolts (P/N 90 102-SFA-305) made
specifically for door adjustment, then adjust at the door: Loosen the adjusting bolts slightly, move the
door in or out until it's flush with the body, and up or down as necessary to equalize the gaps.
4. Check that the door and body edges are parallel. If necessary, adjust the door cushions (A) to make
the rear of the doors flush with the body.
111
Fig. 97: Adjusting Door Cushions

5. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting bolts, and around the hinges.
6. Check for water leaks (see step 7 in Front and Rear Door Glass Adjustment ).
7. Test-drive and check for wind noise.
8. Reinstall all remaining removed parts.
FRONT AND REAR DOOR STRIKER ADJUSTMENT

Make sure the door latches securely without slamming it. If necessary, adjust the striker (A): The striker can
be adjusted slightly up or down, and in or out.
1. Loosen the screws (B).
111
Fig. 98: Adjusting Front And Rear Door Striker

2. Wrap the striker with a shop towel, then adjust the striker by tapping it with a plastic hammer (C). Do
not tap the striker too hard.
3. Lightly tighten the screws.
4. Hold the outer handle out, and push the door against the body to be sure the striker allows a flush fit.
If the door latches properly, tighten the screws and recheck.
111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Glass - Accord
Glass - Accord

2-DOOR
Fig. 1: Identifying Glass Component Location (2-Door)

111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:02:12
4-DOOR
Fig. 2: Identifying Glass Component Location (4-Door)

WINDSHIELD REPLACEMENT

 Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive with piano wire.
 Use seat covers to avoid damaging the seat.
 When replacing a broken windshield, a commercially available
windshield cutter can be efficiently used for cutting the adhesive. For
details, follow the instructions of the tool manufacturer.

 Windshield wiper arms (see WIPER MOTOR REPLACEMENT )
 Cowl covers (see COWL COVER REPLACEMENT )
 Rearview mirror (see REARVIEW MIRROR REPLACEMENT )
 A-pillar trim, both sides, 2-door without side curtain airbags (see A-PILLAR - WITHOUT
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('03-04 MODELS) ), 2-door with side curtain airbags (see A-
PILLAR - WITH SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('04-06 MODELS) ), 4-door without side
111
curtain airbags (see A-PILLAR - WITHOUT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('03-04

MODELS) ), 4-door with side curtain airbags (see A-PILLAR - WITH SIDE CURTAIN
 Roof moldings (see ROOF MOLDING REPLACEMENT )
2. Remove the molding (A) from the upper edge of the windshield (B). If necessary, cut the molding
with a utility knife.
Fig. 3: Removing Molding From Upper Edge Of Windshield

3. If the old windshield is to be reinstalled, make alignment marks across the glass and body with a
grease pencil.
4. Pull down the front portion of the headliner (see HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).
Take care not to bend the headliner excessively, as you may crease or break it.
111
5. Apply protective tape along the edge of the dashboard and body. Using an awl, make a hole through
the rubber dam and adhesive from inside the vehicle at the corner portion of the windshield. Push a
piece of piano wire through the hole, and wrap each end around a piece of wood.
6. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A) back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the
piano wire as close to the windshield (B) as possible to prevent damage to the body and dashboard.
Carefully cut through the rubber dam and adhesive (C) around the entire windshield.
Fig. 4: Pulling Piano Wire Back And Forth In Sawing Motion

111
Fig. 5: Identifying Cutting Positions

7. Carefully remove the windshield.

8. With a knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth to a thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in.) on the bonding
surface around the entire windshield opening flange:
 Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the body; damaged paint will interfere with proper
bonding.
 Remove the rubber dam and fasteners from the body.
 Replace the dashboard seal with a new one.
9. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease
and water from getting on the clean surface.
10. If the old windshield is to be reinstalled, use a putty knife to scrape off all of the old adhesive, the
fasteners and the rubber dam from the windshield. Clean the inside face and the edge of the
windshield with alcohol where new adhesive is to be applied. Make sure the bonding surface is kept
free of water, oil and grease.
11. Attach the upper rubber dam (A), lower rubber dam (B), and clips (C) with adhesive tape to the inside
face of the windshield (D) as shown in Fig. 6:
 Be sure the rubber dam and clips line up with the alignment marks (E).
 Be careful not to touch the windshield where adhesive will be applied.
Rubber dams adhesive tape:
111
Thickness 0.16 mm (0.0063 in.)

Width 3.5 mm (0.14 in.)
Clips adhesive tape:

Width 10 mm (0.39 in.)
Fig. 6: Attaching Upper Rubber Dam, Lower Rubber Dam And Clips With Adhesive
Tape To Inside Face Of Windshield
111
12. Attach the molding (A) with adhesive tape (B) to the upper edge of the windshield (C). Be careful not
to touch the windshield where adhesive will be applied.
Fig. 7: Attaching Molding With Adhesive Tape To Upper Edge Of Windshield

13. Apply primer to the molding (A), then attach the molding upper seal (B) with adhesive tape to the
inside surface of the molding as shown below.
111
Fig. 8: Applying Primer To Molding

14. Set the windshield in the opening, and center it. Make alignment marks (A) across the windshield and
body with a grease pencil at the four points shown below. Make sure both clips (B) contact with the
edge of the body holes. Be careful not to touch the windshield where adhesive will be applied.
111
Fig. 9: Making Alignment Marks Across Windshield And Body With Grease Pencil
15. Remove the windshield.

16. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer around the edge of the windshield (A) between the
dams (B) and molding (C) as shown in Fig. 10, then lightly wipe it off with gauze or cheesecloth:
 Apply glass primer to the molding.
 Do not apply body primer to the windshield, and do not get body and glass primer sponges
mixed up.
 Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the
windshield properly, causing a leak after the windshield is installed.
 Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away from the primed surfaces.
111
Fig. 10: Applying Coat Of Primer Around Edge Of Windshield Between Dams And
Molding
17. With a sponge, carefully apply a light coat of body primer to any exposed paint or metal around the
flange where new adhesive will be applied. Let the primer dry for at least 10 minutes:
111
 Do NOT apply body primer to any remaining original adhesive on the flange.
 Be careful not to mix up the body and glass primer sponges.
 Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands.
Fig. 11: Applying Coat Of Body Primer To Exposed Paint Or Metal Around Flange
111
18. Cut a "V" in the end of the nozzle (A) on the adhesive cartridge as shown below.
Fig. 12: Cutting "V" In End Of Nozzle On Adhesive Cartridge

19. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets to ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in
a caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A) around the edge of the windshield (B) between the
dams (C) and molding (D) as shown below. Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after applying the
glass primer. Make a slightly thicker bead at each corner.
111
Fig. 13: Running Bead Of Adhesive Around Edge Of Windshield Between Dams And Molding
111
20. Use suction cups to hold the windshield over the opening, align it with the alignment marks made in
step 14, and set it down on the adhesive. Lightly push on the windshield until its edges are fully seated
on the adhesive all the way around. Do not open or close the doors until the adhesive is dry.
21. Scrape or wipe the excess adhesive off with a putty knife or towel. To remove adhesive from a painted
surface or the windshield, wipe with a soft shop towel dampened with alcohol.
22. Let the adhesive dry for at least 1 hour, then spray water over the windshield and check for leaks.
Mark leaking areas, and let the windshield dry, then seal with sealant:
 Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours after windshield installation. If the vehicle has to be
used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven slowly.
 Keep the windshield dry for the first hour after installation.
NOTE: Advise the customer not to do the following things for 2 to 3 days:
 Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up.

 Twist the body excessively (such as when going in and out of
driveways at an angle or driving over rough, uneven roads).
REAR WINDOW REPLACEMENT

 Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive with piano wire.
 Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surfaces.
 Do not damage the rear window defogger grid lines, window antenna
grid lines, and terminals.

 Trunk lid
 Rear shelf, 2-door (see 2-DOOR ), 4-door (see 4-DOOR )
2. Disconnect the window antenna connectors (A) and rear window defogger connectors (B).
111
Fig. 14: Disconnecting Window Antenna Connectors And Rear Window Defogger Connectors
(2-Door)
Fig. 15: Disconnecting Window Antenna Connectors And Rear Window Defogger Connectors
111
(4-Door)
3. If the old rear window is to be reinstalled, make alignment marks across the glass and body with a
grease pencil.
4. Pull down the rear portion of the headliner (A) by detaching the clips (B). Take care not to bend the
headliner excessively, as you may crease or break it.
Fig. 16: Pulling Down Rear Portion Of Headliner By Detaching Clips (2-Door)
111
Fig. 17: Pulling Down Rear Portion Of Headliner By Detaching Clips (4-Door)
5. Apply protective tape along the inside and outside edges of the body. Using an awl, make a hole
through the adhesive from inside the vehicle at the corner portion of the rear window. Push a piece of
piano wire through the hole, and wrap each end around a piece of wood.
6. Remove the molding (A) from the lower edge of the rear window (B). If necessary, cut the molding
111
Fig. 18: Removing Molding From Lower Edge Of Rear Window

7. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A) back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the
piano wire as close to the rear window (B) as possible to prevent damage to the body, and carefully
cut through the adhesive (C) around the entire rear window.
111
Fig. 19: Pulling The Piano Wire Back And Forth In Sawing Motion
Cutting positions
111
Fig. 20: Identifying Cutting Positions (2-Door)

111
Fig. 21: Identifying Cutting Positions (4-Door)

8. Carefully remove the rear window.

9. With a putty knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth to a thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in.) on the
bonding surface around the entire rear window opening flange:
bonding.
 Remove the fasteners from the body.
10. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease
and water from getting on the surface.
11. If the old rear window is to be reinstalled, use a putty knife to scrape off all of the old adhesive, the
moldings and the fasteners from the rear window. Clean the inside face and the edge of the rear
window with alcohol where new adhesive is to be applied. Make sure the bonding surface is kept free
of water, oil and grease.
12. Attach the upper rubber dam (A), side rubber dam (B), lower rubber dam (C), clips (D), and fasteners
(E) with adhesive tape to the inside face of the rear window (F) as shown in Fig. 22 or Fig. 23:
 First attach the upper rubber dam, then attach the side rubber dams around the edge of the rear
window. Be sure top of the side rubber dam contacts with bottom of the upper rubber dam. If
necessary, cut the rubber dam.
 Be sure the side rubber dam, clips, and fasteners line up with the alignment marks (G).
 Attach the lower rubber dam, around the edge of the windshield (H).
111
Rubber dams adhesive tape:

Clips adhesive tape:

Fasteners adhesive tape:

111
Fig. 22: Attaching Upper Rubber Dam, Side Rubber Dam, Lower Rubber Dam, Clips And
Fasteners (2-Door)
111
111
Fig. 23: Attaching Upper Rubber Dam, Side Rubber Dam, Lower Rubber Dam, Clips And
Fasteners (4-Door)
13. 4-door: Apply primer to the edge of the rear window (A) where the molding adhesive tape will be
attached as shown in Fig. 24. Attach the molding (B) with adhesive tape (C) to the lower edge of the
rear window:
 Be sure both ends of the molding line up with the alignment marks (D) of the rear window.
 After installing the molding, cut the ends (E) of the molding as shown in Fig. 24.
111
Fig. 24: Applying Primer To Edge Of Rear Window (4-door)

111
14. Attach the fasteners (A) with adhesive tape to the rear window opening flange (B) of the body on both
sides.
Fasteners adhesive tape:

Fig. 25: Attaching Fasteners With Adhesive Tape To Rear Window Opening Flange Of Body (2-
Door)
111
Fig. 26: Attaching Fasteners With Adhesive Tape To Rear Window Opening Flange Of Body (4-
Door)
15. Set the rear window in the opening, and center it. Make alignment marks (A) across the rear window
and body with a grease pencil at the four points shown below. Make sure both upper clips (B) are in
the body holes. Be careful not to touch the rear window where adhesive will be applied.
111
Fig. 27: Identifying Alignment Marks And Upper Clips (2-Door)

111
Fig. 28: Identifying Alignment Marks And Upper Clips (4-Door)

16. 2-door: Make alignment marks (C) to the rear window with a grease pencil as shown in Fig. 27 where
the molding will be installed.
17. Remove the rear window.
18. 2-door: Apply primer to the edge of the rear window (A) where the molding adhesive tape will be
attached as shown in Fig. 29. Attach the molding (B) with adhesive tape (C) to the lower edge of the
rear window:
 Be sure both ends of the molding line up with the alignment marks (D) you made in step 16.
 After installing the molding, cut the ends (E) of the molding as shown in Fig. 29.
111
Fig. 29: Applying Primer To Edge Of Rear Window

19. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer along the edge of the rear window (A) between the
dams (B) and molding (C) as shown in Fig. 30 or Fig. 31, then lightly wipe it off with gauze or
cheesecloth:
 2-door: With the printed dots (D) on the rear window as a guide, apply the glass primer to both
lower corner portions of the rear window.
111
 Do not apply body primer to the rear window, and do not get body and glass primer sponges
mixed up.
rear window properly, causing a leak after the rear window is installed.
111
Fig. 30: Applying Glass Primer Along Edge Of Rear Window Between Dams And Molding (2-
111
Door)
Fig. 31: Applying Glass Primer Along Edge Of Rear Window Between Dams And Molding (4-
Door)
111
Fig. 32: Applying Light Coat Of Body Primer To Exposed Paint Or Metal Around Flange
111

a caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A) around the edge of the rear window (B) between the
dams (C) and molding (D) as shown in Fig. 34 for 2-door & Fig. 35 for 4-door:
 2-door: With the printed dots (E) on the rear window as a guide, apply the adhesive to both side
portions of the rear window.
 Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after applying the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker
bead at each corner.
111
Fig. 34: Running Bead Of Adhesive Around Edge Of Rear Window Between Dams And
Molding (2-Door)
4-door
111
Fig. 35: Running Bead Of Adhesive Around Edge Of Rear Window Between Dams And
Molding (4-Door)
23. Use suction cups to hold the rear window over the opening, align it with the alignment marks you
made in step 15, and set it down on the adhesive. Lightly push on the rear window until its edges are
fully seated on the adhesive all the way around. Do not open or close the doors until the adhesive is
dry.
111
NOTE: Do not open or close any of the doors for about an hour until the
adhesive is dry.
surface or the rear window, use a soft shop towel dampened with alcohol.
25. After the adhesive has dried, spray water over the rear window and check for leaks. Mar the leaking
sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours after rear window installation. If the vehicle has to be
used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven slowly.

QUARTER GLASS REPLACEMENT

2-DOOR

 Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surface.

 C-pillar trim, without side curtain airbags (see 2-DOOR-C-PILLAR - WITHOUT SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('03-04 MODELS) ), with side curtain airbags (see 2-DOOR-C-
 Side trim panel, as necessary (see TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION - REAR SIDE
AREA )
 Front seat belt upper anchor (see step 6 on FRONT SEAT BELT - 2-DOOR )
 B-pillar upper trim, without side curtain airbags (see 2-DOOR-B-PILLAR - WITHOUT
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('03-04 MODELS) ), with side curtain airbags (see 2-DOOR-B-
2. Apply protective tape along the inside and outside edges of the body, and along the edge of the
headliner. Using an awl, make a hole through the adhesive from inside the vehicle. Push a piece of
piano wire through the hole, and wrap each end around a piece of wood.
3. Remove the front seal (A) from the front edge of the quarter glass (B). If necessary, cut the front seal
111
Fig. 36: Removing Front Seal From Front Edge Of Quarter Glass
4. Carefully cut through the adhesive (A) at the rear corner portion of the quarter glass (B) with a utility
knife. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (C) back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold
the piano wire as close to the quarter glass as possible to prevent damage to the body, and carefully
cut through the adhesive around the entire quarter glass:
 If the quarter glass is to be reinstalled, take care not to damage the molding (D).
 If the molding is damaged, replace the quarter glass, molding, and clips (E) as an assembly.
 If any of the clips are broken, the quarter glass can be reinstalled using butyl tape (refer to step
9).
111
Fig. 37: Cutting Adhesive At Rear Corner Portion Of Quarter Glass

111
Fig. 38: Identifying Cutting Positions

5. Carefully remove the quarter glass.

6. With a putty knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth to a thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in.) on the
bonding surface around the entire quarter glass opening flange:
bonding.
 Remove the clips and fastener from the body.
7. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease,
8. If the old quarter glass is to be reinstalled, use a putty knife to scrape off all of the old adhesive, any
broken clips, and the fastener from the glass. Clean the inside face and the edge of the glass with
alcohol where new adhesive is to be applied. Make sure the bonding surface is kept free of water, oil,
and grease.
9. If the old quarter glass is to be reinstalled (and either clip is broken off the molding), apply a light coat
of primer, then apply butyl tape (A) to the molding (B) as shown in Fig. 39. Attach the fastener (C)
with adhesive tape to the inside face of the quarter glass (D):
 Be careful not to touch the quarter glass where adhesive will be applied.
 Do not peel the separator off the butyl tape.
111
Fig. 39: Applying Butyl Tape To Molding

10. Attach the front seal (A) with adhesive tape (B) onto the molding (C).
111
Fig. 40: Attaching Front Seal With Adhesive Tape Onto Molding
11. Attach the fastener (A) to the body. Be sure the fastener lines up with the alignment marks (B).
111
Fig. 41: Attaching Fastener To Body

12. If the old quarter glass is to be reinstalled (and either clip is broken off the molding), seal the body
holes with pieces of urethane tape (A). Then set the quarter glass upright in the opening, and make
alignment marks (B) across the quarter glass and body with a grease pencil at the three points shown
below. Be careful not to touch the quarter glass where adhesive will be applied.
111
Fig. 42: Sealing Body Holes With Pieces Of Urethane Tape

13. Remove the quarter glass.

14. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer along the edge of the front seal (A) and molding (B)
as shown in Fig. 43, then lightly wipe it off with gauze or cheesecloth:
 With the printed dots (C) on the quarter glass (D) as a guide, apply the glass primer to the front
111
portion of the quarter glass.

 Do not apply body primer to the quarter glass, and do not get body and glass primer sponges
mixed up.
quarter glass properly, causing a leak after the quarter glass is installed.
111
Fig. 43: Applying Light Coat Of Glass Primer Along Edge Of Front Seal And Molding
Fig. 44: Applying Light Coat Of Body Primer To Exposed Paint Or Metal Around Flange
111

a caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A) around the edge of the front seal (B) and molding (C)
as shown below. With the glass primer (D) you applied in step 14 on the quarter glass (E) as a guide,
apply the adhesive to the upper and lower corner portions of the quarter glass. Apply the adhesive
within 30 minutes after applying the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker bead at each corner.
111
Fig. 46: Running Bead Of Adhesive Around The Edge Of The Front Seal And Molding
18. Use suction cups (A) to hold the quarter glass (B) over the opening, align the clips or the alignment
111
marks (C) made in step 12, and set it down on the adhesive. Lightly push on the quarter glass until its
edges are fully seated on the adhesive all the way around.
NOTE: Do not open or close the doors for about an hour until the adhesive is
dry.
Fig. 47: Using Suction Cups To Hold Quarter Glass Over Opening
surface or the quarter glass, wipe with a soft shop towel dampened with alcohol.
20. After the adhesive has dried, spray water over the quarter glass and check for leaks. Mark the leaking
areas and let the quarter glass dry, then seal with sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours after
quarter glass installation. If the vehicle has to be used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven
slowly.
111

111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Power Windows - Accord
Power Windows - Accord
Fig. 1: Locating Power Windows Components

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
KEY CYLINDER OPERATION
With the key inserted in the driver's door key cylinder, turn the key a second time and hold within 10
seconds to operate the windows (clockwise to open, counterclockwise to close). The windows stop moving
when the key is released.
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:03:08
NOTE: Anti-trap will not work when door key cylinder switch is used to close the
windows.
KEYLESS OPERATION
By pressing the UNLOCK button of the keyless transmitter a second time and holding, the windows open.
The windows stop moving when the UNLOCK button is released. The windows do not close with the
LOCK button.
ANTI-TRAP POWER WINDOW OPERATION
The system is composed of the power window master switch, the power window master switch and the
driver's window motor. The power window motor incorporates a pulser which generates pulses during the
motor's operation and sends the pulses to the power window control unit. As soon as the power window
master switch detects no pulses from the pulser, the control unit makes the power window motor stop and
reverse. This is to prevent pinching your hand or fingers during auto-up operation.
Fig. 2: Identifying Anti-Trap Power Window Operation

RESETTING THE POWER WINDOW CONTROL UNIT

RESETTING THE POWER WINDOW IS REQUIRED WHEN ANY OF THE FOLLOWING HAVE
BEEN REMOVED OR REPAIRED
 Power window regulator

 Power window motor
 Window run channel
 Door glass
Using the HDS
1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the vehicle's DLC.

2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then enter the vehicle's VIN and mileage at the prompts.
3. Select Body Electrical from the System Selection menu.
4. From the Body Electrical System Select menu, select Power Windows.
5. From the Mode menu, select Adjustments.
6. From the Adjustment menu, select Window P Reset.
111
7. Follow the prompts on the screen.

8. Confirm that the power window master switch is reset by using the driver's window AUTO UP and
DOWN function.
RESETTING THE POWER WINDOW
Without the HDS

2. Move the driver's window all the way down by using the driver's window DOWN switch.
3. Open the driver's door.
NOTE: steps 4 - 7 must be done within 5 seconds of each other.
Fig. 3: Resetting Power Window - Without HDS


5. Push and hold the driver's window DOWN switch.
7. Release the driver's window DOWN switch.
8. Repeat steps 4 - 7 three more times.
9. Wait 1 second.
10. Confirm that AUTO UP and AUTO DOWN do not work. If AUTO UP and DOWN work, go back to
step 1.
11. Move the driver's window all the way down by holding the driver's window DOWN switch to the
AUTO DOWN position.
12. Pull up and hold the driver's window UP switch to the AUTO UP position until the window reaches
111
the fully closed position, then continue to hold the switch for 1 second.
13. Confirm that the power window master switch is reset by using the driver's window AUTO UP and
DOWN function.
If the window still does not work in AUTO, repeat the procedure several times, paying close attention
to the 5 second time limit between steps. If it still does not work, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Fig. 4: Power Window Circuit Diagram (1 Of 2)

111
Fig. 5: Power Window Circuit Diagram (2 Of 2)

MASTER SWITCH INPUT TEST

1. Before testing the power windows, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system using B-CAN
System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see TROUBLESHOOTING - B-CAN SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
TEST MODE A ).
111
3. Disconnect the 23P connector (A) from the power window switch (B).
Fig. 6: Disconnecting 23P Connector From Power Window Switch

111
If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.

5. Reconnect the 23P connector to the switch.

6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) to keep the system awake and perform the following input tests.
MASTER SWITCH TROUBLESHOOTING

Possible cause if
Test: Desired
result
obtained
 Faulty power
Check for voltage window master
Ignition switch ON to ground: There switch
6 RED/WHT
(II) should be battery  Short to
voltage. ground in the
wire
 Faulty power
Check for voltage
window master
Under all to ground: There
2 BLK switch
conditions should be 1 V or
less.  Poor ground
(G601)
 Blown No. 23
(P/W) (50 A)
fuse in the
under-hood
fuse/relay box
Check for voltage  Blown No. 27
Under all to ground: There (20 A) fuse in
10 GRN/WHT
conditions should be battery the under-dash
voltage. fuse/relay box
 Faulty under-
dash fuse/relay
box
 An open in the
wire
 Blown No. 21
(7.5 A) fuse in
the under-dash
Check for voltage fuse/relay box
Ignition switch ON to ground: There
20 YEL  Faulty under-
(II) should be battery
voltage. dash fuse/relay
box
 An open in the
wire
111
 Blown No. 7
(10 A) fuse in
the under-dash
Under all to ground: There
15(1) WHT/RED
conditions should be battery  Faulty under-
voltage. dash fuse/relay
box
 An open in the
wire
Under all to ground: There (G601)
1 BLK
conditions should be less than  An open in the
1 V. wire
Check for voltage
between the No. 4
and No. 2
terminals: There
Ignition switch ON  Blown No. 21
should be 0 V-
(II), and the (7.5 A) fuse in
about 5 V-0 V-
4 BLU driver's window the under-dash
about 5 V
switch AUTO fuse/relay box
repeatedly (a
DOWN Blown No. 27
digital voltmeter 
reads about 2.5 V (20 A) fuse in
while the window the under-dash
moves). fuse/relay box
Check for voltage  Faulty power
between the No. 17 window master
and No. 2 switch
terminals: There  Short to
Ignition switch ON
should be 0 V- ground in the
(II), and the
about 5 V-0 V- wire
17 ORN driver's window
about 5 V
switch AUTO  Faulty driver's
repeatedly (a
DOWN window motor
digital voltmeter
reads about 2.5 V
while the window
moves).
 Faulty driver's
door key
Check for voltage cylinder switch
Driver's door key
to ground: There
cylinder switch in  Poor ground
should be 1 V or
UNLOCK (G501)
less.
21 WHT  An open in the
wire
Check for voltage
Driver's door key
to ground: There
cylinder switch in
should be about 5
neutral  Short to
V.
ground
111
Check for voltage  Faulty driver's

Driver's door key
to ground: There door key
cylinder switch in
should be about 5 cylinder switch
LOCK
V.
 Faulty driver's
door key
Check for voltage cylinder switch
Driver's door key
to ground: There
should be 1 V or
LOCK (G501)
less.
 An open in the
wire
8 WHT/RED Check for voltage
Driver's door key
to ground: There
cylinder switch in  Short to
should be about 5
neutral ground
V.
Check for voltage  Faulty driver's
Driver's door key door key
to ground: There
cylinder switch in cylinder switch
should be about 5
UNLOCK
V.
(1) '05-06 models
NOTE: Reference voltage is approximately 5 V when system is awake. The

voltage drops to 0.8 V when the system goes into sleep mode.
7. Disconnect the 22P connector from the power window master switch, and make these input tests at
the connector.
 If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace the power window master
switch.
MASTER SWITCH TROUBLESHOOTING

Test: Desired Possible cause if
result result is not obtained
 Blown No. 23
(P/W) (50 A)
Connect terminal fuse in the
No. 3 to ground. under-hood
Check for voltage fuse/relay box.
Under all at under-dash  Faulty power
3 WHT/GRN
conditions fuse/relay box No. window relay
26 (20 A) fuse:  Faulty under-
There should be dash fuse/relay
battery voltage. box
 An open in the
wire
Connect the No. 10 Check the driver's

111
and No. 11 window motor

terminals with a operation: The  Blown No. 27
11 RED/YEL jumper wire, and window should go (20 A) fuse in
No. 23 terminal to down. the under-dash
body ground. fuse/relay box
Connect the No. 10  Faulty driver's
Check for driver's
and No. 23 power window
window motor
terminals with a motor
23 RED/BLK operation: The
jumper wire, and  An open in the
window should go
No. 11 terminal to wire
up.
body ground.
 Poor ground
Connect the No. 10 Check the front (G503)
and No. 9 passenger's  Blown No. 26
terminals with a window motor (20 A) fuse in
9 BLU/WHT
jumper wire, and operation: The the under-dash
the No. 3 terminal window should go fuse/relay box
to body ground. down.
 Faulty front
passenger's
power window
Connect the No. 10 Check the front switch
and No. 18 passenger's  Faulty front
terminals with a window motor passenger's
18 BLU/RED
jumper wire, and operation: The power window
the No. 3 terminal window should go motor
to body ground. up.  An open in the
wire
 Poor ground
Connect the No. 10
Check the left rear (G601)
and No. 13
window motor  Blown No. 24
terminals with a
13(1) BRN/WHT
jumper wire, and
operation: The (20 A) fuse in
window should go the under-dash
the No. 3 terminal
up. fuse/relay box
to body ground.
power window
Connect the No. 10 switch
Check the left rear
and No. 19
window motor  Faulty left rear
terminals with a
19(1) BRN
jumper wire, and
operation: The power window
window should go motor
the No. 3 terminal
down.  An open in the
to body ground.
wire
Connect the No. 10  Poor ground
Check the right
and No. 12 (G602)
rear window motor
terminals with a
12(1) BLU/ORN
jumper wire, and
operation: The  Blown No. 25
window should go (20 A) fuse in
the No. 3 terminal
up. the under-dash
to body ground.
fuse/relay box
111
 Faulty right rear

Connect the No. 10 power window
Check the right switch
and No. 14
rear window motor
terminals with a  Faulty right rear
14(1) BRN/YEL
jumper wire, and
operation: The
window should go power window
the No. 3 terminal motor
down.
to body ground.  An open in the
wire
(1) 4-door
DRIVER'S WINDOW MOTOR TEST

MOTOR TEST

2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the window motor.
111
Fig. 7: Disconnecting 6P Connector From Window Motor

3. Test the motor in each direction by connecting battery power and ground according to the table shown
below. When the motor stops running, disconnect one lead immediately.
111
Fig. 8: Connecting Battery Power And Ground Table

4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, replace it.
Pulser Test
5. Reconnect the 6P connector to the window motor.

6. Check for voltage between the terminals.
 There should be battery voltage between the No. 6 (+) and No. 5 (-) terminals when the ignition
switch is ON (II).
 Connect an analog voltmeter between the No. 2 (+) and No. 5 (-) terminals, and run the window
motor down or up. The voltmeter needle should move back and forth alternately (a digital
voltmeter should show the average voltage between 0-5 V).
 Connect an analog voltmeter between the No. 3 (+) and No. 5 (-) terminals, and run the window
motor at down or up. The voltmeter needle should move back and forth alternately.
If the voltage is not as specified, replace the driver's window motor.
PASSENGER'S WINDOW MOTOR TEST

1. Remove the passenger's door panel.
2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the window motor.
111
Fig. 9: Disconnecting 6P Connector From Window Motor

3. Test the motor by connecting battery power and ground according to the table shown below. When
the motor stops running, disconnect one lead immediately.
111
Fig. 10: Connecting Battery Power And Battery Table

4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, replace it.
MASTER SWITCH REPLACEMENT

1. Carefully pry off the driver's door switch trim.
2. Disconnect the power mirror and power window switch connectors (A).
111
Fig. 11: Disconnecting Power Mirror And Power Window Switch Connectors
3. Remove the four mounting screws, then remove the master switch (A) from the panel (B).
111
Fig. 12: Removing Master Switch From Panel

111
4. Reinstall the switch in reverse order of removal.

5. Reset the power window control unit (see RESETTING THE POWER WINDOW CONTROL
UNIT ).
6. Check for DTCs again using the HDS. ).
PASSENGER'S WINDOW SWITCH TEST/REPLACEMENT

1. Carefully pry off the door switch trim.
2. Disconnect the power window switch connector (A), then remove the three mounting screws and the
power window switch (B) from the switch trim (C).
Fig. 13: Disconnecting Power Window Switch Connector (Front Passenger's)

111
Fig. 14: Disconnecting Power Window Switch Connector (Rear)

3. Swap the window switch with another known-good switch and test.
If the original window switch is faulty, replace it.
DTC TROUBLESHOOTING
DTC INDEX
DTC Description
DTC B1125 Driver's Power Window Motor A Pulse Error
111
DTC B1126 Driver's Power Window Motor B Pulse Error

DTC B1140 Driver's Power Window Position Detect Circuit
Error
DTC B1125: DRIVER'S POWER WINDOW MOTOR A PULSE ERROR; DTC B1126: DRIVER'S
POWER WINDOW MOTOR B PULSE ERROR
1. Open and close the driver's power window by using the driver's switch manually.
2. While the power window moving, select POWER WINDOWS from the HDS and enter the DATA
LIST.
3. Check the EXIST/NONE information of the P/W PLSA (B1125) or P/W PLSB (B1126) in the DATA
LIST.
Do the information indicators display EXIST?
YES - Replace the power window master switch.

NO - Go to step 4.
4. Refer to the power window master switch input test, check for continuity between the driver's power
window motor 6P connector and the power window master switch 23P connector (see MASTER
SWITCH INPUT TEST ).
Are all the wire harnesses OK?
YES - Substitute a known-good power window master switch, and recheck. If DTC is gone, the
original master switch is faulty; replace it. If the DTC is still indicated, replace the driver's
power window motor.
NO - Repair a short or an open in the wire.
DTC B1140: DRIVER'S POWER WINDOW POSITION DETECT CIRCUIT ERROR

2. Cycle the ignition switch to OFF and then back ON (II).
3. Open and close the driver's power window by using the driver's switch manually.
Is DTC B1125 or B1126 indicated?
YES - Troubleshoot the DTC B1125 or B1126 (see DTC TROUBLESHOOTING ).

NO - Go to step 5.
UNIT ).
6. Check for DTCs again using the HDS.
NO - The system is recovered at this time.
111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Wiper/Washers - Accord
Wiper/Washers - Accord
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:05:38
Fig. 1: Locating Wiper/Washers Components

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
111
Fig. 2: Identifying Wiper/Washers Circuit Diagram (1 Of 2)

111
Fig. 3: Identifying Wiper/Washers Circuit Diagram (2 Of 2)

DTC TROUBLESHOOTING
DTC INDEX
DTC Description
DTC B1076 Windshield Wiper Signal Error
DTC B1077 Windshield Wiper (As) Signal Error
DTC B1281 Windshield Wiper Switch MIST Position Circuit
Malfunction
111
DTC B1282 Windshield Wiper Switch INT (AUTO) Position

DTC B1283 Windshield Wiper Switch LOW Position Circuit
Malfunction;
DTC B1284 Windshield Wiper Switch HIGH Position Circuit
Malfunction
DTC B1076: WINDSHIELD WIPER SIGNAL ERROR

3. Turn the wiper switch to INT, LOW, then HIGH for at least 2 seconds each.
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Intermittent failure. The windshield wiper system is OK at this time. Check pinfits and
connections.
5. With the wiper/washer switch OFF, select WINDSHIELD WIPERS from the HDS, and enter the
DATA LIST.
6. Check the ON/OFF information of the Windshield Wiper Switch (BACK-UP) in the DATA LIST.
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Go to step 11.
7. Turn the wiper switch ON (low or high).
8. Check the ON/OFF information of the Windshield Wiper Switch (BACK-UP) in the DATA LIST.
Is the information indicator ON?
YES - Faulty relay control module; replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.
NO - Go to step 9.
9. Disconnect the relay control module 10P connector and the wiper/washer switch 8P connector.
10. Check for continuity between the No. 5 terminal of the relay control module 10P connector and the
No. 5 terminal of the wiper/washer switch (combination switch control unit) 8P connector.
111
Fig. 4: Checking Continuity Between No. 5 Terminal Of Relay Control Module 10P Connector
And No. 5 Terminal Wiper/Washer Switch 8P Connector
YES - Faulty combination switch control unit; replace the wiper/washer switch.
NO - Repair an open in the GRN/WHT wire.
11. Disconnect the relay control module 10P connector and the wiper/washer switch 8P connector.
12. Check for continuity between the No. 5 terminal of the relay control module 10P connector and body
ground.
111
And Body Ground
YES - Repair a short in the GRN/WHT wire.

NO - Faulty relay control module; replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.
DTC B1077: WINDSHIELD WIPER (AS) SIGNAL ERROR

3. Turn the wiper switch to INT, LOW, then HIGH for at least 2 seconds each.
111
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Intermittent failure. The windshield wiper system is OK at this time. Check pinfits and
connections.
6. Select WINDSHIELD WIPERS from the HDS and enter the DATA LIST.
7. Turn the windshield wiper switch ON.
8. Check the ON/OFF information of the Windshield Wiper Switch (INTERMITTENT), Windshield
Wiper Switch (LOW), and Windshield Wiper Switch (HIGH) in the DATA LIST at each wiper switch
position.
Is the information indicator ON at each switch position?
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Go to step 17.
9. Select FUNCTIONAL. TEST from the TEST MODE MENU, and operate the windshield wiper
motor with FR WIPER (LOW) and FR WIPER (HIGH).
Does the windshield wiper motor run?

NO - Go to step 18.
10. Turn the windshield wiper switch OFF, and stop the wiper arms at the park position. (If the wiper
arms do not stop at the park position, turn the ignition switch OFF and stop the wiper arms at the park
position correctly.)
Do the wipers begin to run as soon as the ignition switch is cycled ON?

NO - Go to step 12.
12. Check the ON/OFF information of the Windshield Wiper Motor PARK Switch in the DATA LIST.

NO - Faulty relay control module; replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.
13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and turn the windshield wiper switch ON at low speed.
14. Check the ON/OFF information of the Windshield Wiper Motor PARK Switch in the DATA LIST.
Does the DATA LIST information indicate ON and OFF alternately as the wipers pass the
PARK position?
YES - Intermittent failure, the windshield wiper system is OK at this time. Check pinfits and
connections.
NO - Go to step 15.
15. Check for continuity between the No. 4 [No.5] terminal of the windshield wiper motor 5P connector
111
and No. 5 terminal of the under-hood fuse/relay box 5P connector J.
[ ]: 2-door
Fig. 6: Checking For Continuity Between No. 4 [No.5] Terminal Of Windshield Wiper Motor 5P
Connector And No. 5 Terminal Of Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box 5P Connector J
YES - Faulty windshield wiper motor; replace it.

NO - Repair an open in the WHT wire.
16. Check for continuity between the No. 5 terminal of the under-hood fuse/relay box 5P connector J and
body ground.
111
Fig. 7: Checking For Continuity Between No. 5 Terminal Of Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box 5P
Connector J And Body Ground
YES - Repair a short in the WHT wire.

NO - Faulty windshield wiper motor; replace it.
17. Check the No. 7 (10 A), No. 11 (30 A) and No. 21 (7.5 A) fuses in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK?
YES - Faulty relay module; Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.

NO - Replace the blown fuse and recheck the system.
18. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check the No. 11 (30 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?

20. Check for voltage between the No. 2 terminal of the windshield wiper motor 5P connector and body
111
ground.
Fig. 8: Checking For Voltage Between No. 2 Terminal Of Windshield Wiper Motor 5P
Connector And Body Ground

NO - Repair an open in the GRN wire.
21. Check for continuity between the No. 3 [No.1] and No. 5 [No.4] terminals of the windshield wiper
motor 5P connector and the No. 2 and No. 4 terminal of the under-hood fuse/relay box 5P connector J.
[ ] : 2-door
111
Fig. 9: Checking For Continuity Between Terminals Of Windshield Wiper Motor 5P Connector
And Terminal Of Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box 5P Connector J (4-Door)
111
Fig. 10: Checking For Continuity Between Terminals Of Windshield Wiper Motor 5P
Connector And Terminal Of Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box 5P Connector J (2-Door)
YES - Repair an open in the BLU or YEL wire.

NO - Go to step 22.
22. Perform the wiper motor test (see WIPER MOTOR TEST ).
Does the wiper motor operate correctly?
YES - Faulty relay module; Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.

NO - Replace the windshield wiper motor.
DTC B1281: WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH MIST POSITION CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION; DTC
B1282: WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH INT (AUTO) POSITION CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION;
DTC B1283: WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH LOW POSITION CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION; DTC
B1284: WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH HIGH POSITION CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
111

3. Turn the windshield wiper switch in MIST and wait for 2 seconds.
4. Turn the windshield wiper switch OFF and wait for 2 seconds.
5. Turn the windshield wiper switch in INT (AUTO) and wait for 2 seconds.
6. Turn the windshield wiper switch in LOW and wait for 2 seconds.
7. Turn the windshield wiper switch in HIGH and wait for 2 seconds.
Is DTC B1281, B1282, B1283, or B1284 indicated?
YES - Replace the windshield wiper/washer switch.

NO - Intermittent failure, the windshield wiper/washer switch and the combination switch
control unit are OK at this time. Check pinfits and connections.
WIPER/WASHER SWITCH TEST/REPLACEMENT
NOTE: The wiper/washer switch is built into the combination switch control unit.
For the wiper/washer test, refer to the wiper/washer switch input test (see
WIPER/WASHER SWITCH INPUT TEST ).
INSTALLATION ).
3. Disconnect the combination light switch 12P connector (A) and dashboard wire harness 8P connector
(B) from the wiper/washer switch (C).
111
Fig. 11: Disconnecting Combination Light Switch And Dashboard Wire Harness
4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the wiper/washer switch.
WIPER/WASHER SWITCH INPUT TEST

1. Before troubleshooting the wiper/washer system, troubleshoot the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test
INSTALLATION ).
4. Disconnect the 8P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B).
111

6. Reconnect the connect, and make these input tests at the connector.
WIPER/WASHER SWITCH INPUT TEST (RECONNECT CONNECTOR)

Possible cause if
Test: Desired
result
obtained
Check for
 Poor ground
voltage to
3 BLK ground:
There should be
less than 1 V. wire
 Blown No. 15
(40 A) fuse in
Check for the under-dash
voltage to fuse/relay box
Under all
8 WHT/RED ground:  Blown No. 7
conditions
There should be (10 A) fuse in
battery voltage. the under-dash
fuse/relay box
 An open in the
111
wire
 Blown No. 21
Check for
(7.5 A) fuse in
voltage to
7 YEL ground:
There should be
wire
7. Disconnect the connector from the wiper/washer switch, and make these input tests at the connector.
 If all the input tests prove OK, the combination switch control unit must be faulty, replace the
wiper/washer switch.
WIPER/WASHER SWITCH INPUT TEST (DISCONNECT CONNECTOR)

Possible cause if
Test: Desired
result
obtained
Check for
continuity between
the No. 5 terminal
and under-hood
5 GRN/WHT fuse/relay box 10P
conditions wire
connector No. 5
terminal:
There should be
continuity.
Check for
continuity between
the No. 4 terminal
and under-dash
4 LT GRN fuse/relay box X
conditions wire
connector No. 27
terminal:
There should be
continuity.
Check for
continuity between
the No. 1 terminal
and under-hood
1 WHT fuse/relay box 10P
conditions wire
connector No. 6
terminal:
There should be
continuity.
WIPER MOTOR TEST

1. Open the hood, and remove the wiper arms.
111
NOTE: Carefully remove the wiper arms, so that they do not touch the hood.
2. Remove the hood seal and cowl cover.

3. Disconnect the connector from the wiper motor.
111
Fig. 13: Disconnecting Connector From Wiper Motor

111
4. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the No. 2 terminal and ground the No. 3 [1] terminal of
the wiper motor 5P connector. The motor should run at low speed. If the motor does not run or fails to
run smoothly, replace the motor.
5. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the No. 2 terminal and ground the No. 5 [4] terminal of
the wiper motor 5P connector. The motor should run at high speed. If the motor does not run or fails
to run smoothly, replace the motor.
6. Connect an analog voltmeter between the No. 4 [5] (+) and No. 1 [3] (-) terminals, and run the motor
at low or high speed. The voltmeter should indicate 12 V and 4 V or less alternately. If it does not,
replace the wiper motor.
[ ] :2-door
WASHER MOTOR TEST

1. Remove the right inner fender (see FRONT INNER FENDER REPLACEMENT ).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the washer motor.
111
Fig. 14: Disconnecting 2P Connector From Washer Motor

111
3. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the No. 1 terminal and ground the No. 2 terminal of the
washer motor. The motor should run.
 If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, replace it.
 If the motor runs smoothly, but little or no washer fluid is pumped, check for a disconnected or
blocked washer hose, or a clogged washer motor outlet.
WIPER MOTOR REPLACEMENT

1. Open the hood. Remove the caps, nuts (A), and the windshield wiper arms (B).
Fig. 15: Removing Caps, Nuts And Windshield Wiper Arms

2. Remove the hood seals (C) and cowl covers (D).
111
3. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the wiper motor.
Fig. 16: Disconnecting 5P Connector From Wiper Motor

4. Remove the four bolts (B) and wiper linkage assembly (C).
5. Scribe a line (A) across the link and windshield wiper linkage to show the original adjustment.
Separate the windshield wiper linkage (B) from the wiper motor (C).
111
Fig. 17: Separating Windshield Wiper Linkage From Wiper Motor

6. Install in the reverse order to removal, and note these items:

 Apply multipurpose grease to the moving parts.
 Before reinstalling the wiper arms, turn the wiper switch ON, then OFF to return the wiper
shafts to the park position.
 If necessary, replace any damaged clips.
 Check the wiper motor operation.
111
WASHER RESERVOIR REPLACEMENT

2. Disconnect the washer tube (A) and washer motor 2P connector (B).
Fig. 18: Disconnecting Washer Tube And Washer Motor 2P Connector

3. Remove the clip (A) and three bolts (B), then remove the washer reservoir (C).
111
Fig. 19: Removing Washer Reservoir

4. Install the reservoir in the reverse order of removal.

111
WASHER FLUID LEVEL SWITCH TEST

CANADA
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the washer fluid level switch (B).
Fig. 20: Disconnecting 2P Connector From Washer Fluid Level Switch

111
3. Remove the washer fluid level switch from the reservoir.
NOTE: Fluid may flow out of the opening.
4. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals in each float position (C).
 There should be continuity when the float is down.
 There should be no continuity when the float is up.
WASHER TUBE REPLACEMENT

2. Remove the windshield washer nozzles and clips, then remove the tube.
111
Fig. 21: Removing Windshield Washer Nozzles, Clips And Tube

3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Take care not to pinch the washer tube. Check the windshield
111
washer operation.
111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Bumpers - Accord
Bumpers - Accord
FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

2-DOOR
NOTE:  Have an assistant help you when removing and installing the front
bumper.
 Take care not to scratch the front bumper and body.
1. Remove the front bumper as shown in Fig. 1.

2. Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Make sure the front bumper engages the hooks of the side spacers and upper beams on both
sides securely.
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:06:42
Fig. 1: Removing Front Bumper (2-Door)

4-DOOR
NOTE:  Have an assistant help you when removing and installing the front
bumper.
 Take care not to scratch the front bumper and body.
1. Remove the front bumper as shown below.

 Make sure the front bumper engages the hooks of the side spacers and upper beams on both
sides securely.
Fig. 2: Removing Front Bumper (4-Door)

111
LOWER GRILLE REPLACEMENT

'06-07 MODEL

 Take care not to scratch the front bumper.
1. Remove the front bumper (see FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).

2. Remove the license plate.
3. Remove the bolts (A) and screw (B), then remove the license plate base (C) from the front bumper
(D).
111
Fig. 3: Removing License Plate Base

4. From the back of the front bumper (A), remove the screws (B), securing the front bumper lower grille
(C).
111
Fig. 4: Securing Front Bumper Lower Grille

5. Detach the hooks (A) on the bottom of the front bumper lower grille (B), then remove the grille from
the front bumper (C).
111
Fig. 5: Removing Grille From Front Bumper

6. Install the grille in the reverse order of removal, and note these items: Push the hooks into place
securely.
FRONT BUMPER SIDE COVER REPLACEMENT

KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program;
call 888-424-6857.
'06-07 MODELS
111

 Take care not to scratch the front bumper.
1. Remove the front bumper (see FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).

2. From the back of the front bumper (A), release the hooks (B), and pull out the front bumper side cover
(C), then remove the cover.
Fig. 6: Removing Front Bumper Side Cover (4-Door)

111
Fig. 7: Removing Front Bumper Side Cover (2-Door)

3. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, and push the hooks into place securely.
REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 *Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program;
call 888-424-6857.
2-DOOR
111
NOTE:  Have an assistant help you when removing and installing the rear
bumper.
 Take care not to scratch the rear bumper and body.
1. Remove the rear bumper as shown in Fig. 8.

 Make sure the rear bumper engages the hooks of the side spacers and upper brackets on both
sides securely.
Fig. 8: Removing Rear Bumper (2-Door)


111
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014*Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program; call
888-424-6857.
4-DOOR
NOTE:  Have an assistant help you when removing and installing the rear
bumper.
 Take care not to scratch the rear bumper and body.
1. Remove the rear bumper as shown in Fig. 9.

 Make sure the rear bumper engages the hooks of the side spacers and upper brackets on both
sides securely.
111
Fig. 9: Removing Rear Bumper (4-Door)

111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Fenderwell - Accord
Fenderwell - Accord
FRONT INNER FENDER REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body.
1. Remove the front inner fender (A).

-1 On the back of the wheel arch, remove the screws (B). If equipped, remove the front splash
guard (C).
-2 From under the front bumper (D), remove the bolts (E) securing the front bumper, splash
shield (F), and front inner fender, and remove the clip (G) securing the front bumper and front
inner fender.
-3 From the wheel arch, remove the clips (H, I) securing the front inner fender (and splash
shield) to the body.
-4 Release the hook (J) of the splash shield, then remove the front inner fender.
Fig. 1: Removing Front Inner Fender

111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:07:40
2. Install the inner fender in the reverse order of removal, and check the clips for damage or stress-
whitened, and if necessary, replace it with new one.
SPLASH SHIELD REPLACEMENT
1. Remove the splash shield (A).

-1 From both wheel arches, remove the bolts (B) and clips (C) securing the front inner fender
(D) and splash shield to the body.
-2 From under the front bumper (E), remove the clips (F).
-3 Pull the splash shield out.
Fig. 2: Removing Splash Shield

111
2. Install the splash shield in the reverse order of removal, and check if the clip is damaged or stress-
whitened, and replace it with new one.
FRONT FENDER FAIRING REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the front inner fender as necessary (see FRONT INNER FENDER REPLACEMENT ).
2. Open the front door. Remove the upper clip (A), and from inside the door, remove the lower clip (A)
securing the front fender fairing (B) and front fender (C).
Fig. 3: Removing Upper & Lower Clips

111
3. From the wheel arch, remove the clip (A), and then release the clip (B).
Fig. 4: Removing Clip From Wheel Arch

111
4. Remove the front fender fairing (A).
Fig. 5: Removing Front Fender Fairing

5. Install the fender fairing in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
111
 Before installing the clips in the door opening area, install the front fender fairing (A) to the
front fender (B) properly as shown below.
Fig. 6: Installing Fender Fairing

FUEL PIPE PROTECTOR REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the clips, then remove the fuel pipe protector (A). Take care not to scratch the body.
111
Fig. 7: Removing Fuel Pipe Protector

2. Install the protector in the reverse order of removal, and check if the clip is damaged or stress-
111
REAR INNER FENDER REPLACEMENT
1. Remove the screws, then remove rear inner fender (A) from the rear bumper (B) and body.
Fig. 8: Removing Rear Inner Fender From Rear Bumper And Body
111
2. Install the inner fender in the reverse order of removal, and check if the clip is damaged or stress-
REAR AIR OUTLET REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the rear bumper, 2-door (see 2-DOOR ) or 4-door (see 4-DOOR ).
2. Detach the hooks (A), then remove the rear air outlet (B). Take care not to scratch the body.
Fig. 9: Removing Rear Air Outlet (Left)

111
Fig. 10: Removing Rear Air Outlet (Right - 2-Door)

3. Install the air outlet by pushing on the hook portions until the hooks snap into place.
111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Fuel Fill Door - Accord
Fuel Fill Door - Accord
ADJUSTMENT
1. Slightly loosen the hinge mounting bolts (A).
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:08:40
Fig. 1: Loosening Hinge Mounting Bolts

2. Adjust the fuel fill door (B) in or out until it's flush with the body, and up or down as necessary to
equalize the gaps.
3. Tighten the hinge mounting bolts.
111
4. Check that the fuel fill door opens properly and locks securely, and check that the rear of the door is
flush with the body.
5. Apply multipurpose grease to each location indicated by the arrows shown in Fig. 2.
Fig. 2: Applying Multipurpose Grease

6. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting bolts and around the hinges.
111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Hood - Accord
Hood - Accord
ADJUSTMENT
1. Slightly loosen each hood hinge bolt.
2. Adjust the hood (A) alignment in this sequence.
 Adjust the hood right and left, as well as forward and rearward, by using the elongated holes on
the hood hinges (B).
 Turn the hood edge cushions (C), as necessary, to make the hood fit flush with the body at the
front and side edges.
Fig. 1: Adjusting Hood Alignment

3. Remove the front bulkhead cover (see step 1 in FRONT GRILLE REPLACEMENT ), and release
the upper portion of the hood latch cover (D) as necessary. Adjust the hood latch (E) to obtain the
proper height at the forward edge, and move the hood latch right or left until the striker (F) is centered
in the hood latch.
4. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:09:47
5. Check that the hood opens properly and closes securely.

6. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting bolts and around the hinges.
7. Apply multipurpose grease to the hood latch and hood hinge as indicated by the arrows shown below.
Fig. 2: Applying Multipurpose Grease To Hood Latch And Hood Hinge

111
8. Reinstall the front bulkhead cover.
HOOD SEAL AND HOOD MOLDING REPLACEMENT

1. Using a clip remover, detach the clips (A, B), then remove the hood seal (C) and hood corner seals
(D).
On Canadian models; remove the hood molding (E). Take care not to scratch the hood.
Fig. 3: Detaching Clips And Removing Hood Seal & Hood Corner Seals
2. Install the seals in the reverse order of removal, and check the clip is damage or stress-whitened, and
if necessary replace it with new one.
HOOD INSULATOR REPLACEMENT

1. Using a clip remover, detach the clips. Release the hooks (A), then remove the hood insulator (B).
Take care not to scratch the hood.
111
Fig. 4: Removing Hood Insulator

2. Install the insulator in the reverse order of removal, and check if the clip is damaged or stress-
whitened, and replace it with new one.
111
2003-07 GENERAL INFORMATION Specifications - Accord
2003-07 GENERAL INFORMATION
Specifications - Accord
STANDARDS AND SERVICE LIMITS

ENGINE ELECTRICAL
ENGINE ELECTRICAL SERVICE LIMITS CHART

Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit
Rated voltage 12 V
Ignition coil
Firing order 1---3---4---2
Except
LX-SULEV, NGK: IZFR6K11
EX-SULEV, DENSO: SKJ20DR-M11
Type EX-L-SULEV
LX-SULEV,
NGK: IZFR6K13
EX-SULEV,
DENSO: SKJ20DR-M13
EX-L-SULEV
Spark plug
Except -
LX-SULEV, 1.0---1.1 mm
EX-SULEV, (0.039---0.043 in.)
Gap EX-L-SULEV
LX-SULEV, -
1.2---1.3 mm
EX-SULEV,
(0.047---0.051 in.)
EX-L-SULEV
M/T(in neutral) 8+/-2° BTDC
At idle
Ignition timing
Check the red mark A/T (in N or P 8+/-2° BTDC
position)
Drive belt Tension Auto tensioner
At 13.5 V and
Output normal engine 105A
temperature
Coil (rotor)
At 68°F (20°C) 2.5 ohms
Alternator resistance
14.0 mm (0.55
Slip ring O.D. 14.4 mm (0.57 in.)
in.)
Brush length 10.5 mm (0.41 in.) 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)
Brush spring tension 3.2 N (0.33 kgf, 0.7 lbf)
Output 1.7 kW
Commutator mica 0.4---0.6 mm 0.2 mm (0.008
depth (0.016---0.024 in.) in.)
0.05 mm (0.002 0.1 mm (0.004
Starter Commutator runout
in.) max. in.)
(MITSUBISHI)
29.3---29.5 mm 28.8 mm (1.134
Commutator O.D.
(1.154---1.161 in.) in.)
0.9 mm (0.04 in.)
Brush length
7.7---8.0 mm
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:10:20
(0.30---0.31 in.)
Output 1.6 kW
Commutator mica 0.4---0.5 mm 0.15 mm (0.006
depth (0.016---0.020 in.) in.)
0.02 mm (0.001 0.05 mm (0.002
Commutator runout
Starter (MITSUBA) in.) max. in.)
28.0---28.1 mm 27.5 mm (1.083
Commutator O.D.
(1.102---1.106 in.) in.)
11.1---11.5 mm 4.3 mm (0.17 in.)
Brush length
(0.44---0.45 in.)
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
ENGINE ASSEMBLY SERVICE LIMITS CHART

Pressure 930 kPa (9.5
Minimum -
Check the engine kgf/cm2 , 135 psi)
Compression
with the starter 200 kPa (2.0
cranking Maximum variation -
kgf/cm2 , 28 psi)
CYLINDER HEAD
CYLINDER HEAD SERVICE LIMITS CHART

0.05 mm (0.002
Warpage -
in.)
Head 103.95---104.05
Height mm (4.093---4.096 -
in.)
0.05---0.20 mm
End play 0.4 mm (0.02 in.)
(0.002---0.008 in.)
0.030---0.069 mm 0.15 mm (0.006
No. 1 journal
Camshaft-to-holder (0.001---0.003 in.) in.)
oil clearance No. 2, 3, 4, 5 0.060---0.099 mm 0.15 mm (0.006
journals (0.002---0.004 in.) in.)
0.03 mm (0.001 0.04 mm (0.002
Camshaft Total runout
in.) max. in.)
33.925 mm
Intake, primary -
(1.3356 in.)
29.638 mm
Cam lobe height Intake, secondary -
(1.1668 in.)
34.092 mm
Exhaust -
(1.3422 in.)
0.21---0.25 mm
Intake -
(0.008---0.010 in.)
Clearance (cold)
0.28---0.32 mm
Exhaust -
(0.011---0.013 in.)
111
5.475---5.485 mm
5.445 mm (0.214
Intake (0.2156---0.2159
in.)
in.)
Stem O.D.
5.450---5.460 mm
5.42 mm (0.213
Exhaust (0.2146---0.2150
in.)
in.)
Valve
0.030---0.055 mm
0.08 mm (0.003
Intake (0.0012---0.0022
in.)
Stem-to-guide in.)
clearance 0.055---0.080 mm
0.11 mm (0.004
Exhaust (0.0022---0.0031
in.)
in.)
1.25---1.55 mm 2.00 mm (0.079
Intake
(0.049---0.061 in.) in.)
Width
1.25---1.55 mm 2.00 mm (0.079
Exhaust
(0.049---0.061 in.) in.)
Valve seat
44.0---44.5 mm 44.7 mm (1.76
Intake
(1.73---1.75 in.) in.)
Stem installed height
44.1---44.6 mm 44.8 mm (1.76
Exhaust
(1.74---1.76 in.) in.)
47.61 mm (1.874
Intake -
in.)
Valve spring Free length
49.64 mm (1.954
Exhaust -
in.)
5.515---5.530 mm
5.55 mm (0.219
Intake (0.2171---0.2177
in.)
in.)
I.D.
5.515---5.530 mm
5.55 mm (0.219
Exhaust (0.2171---0.2177
Valve guide in.)
in.)
15.2---16.2 mm
Intake -
(0.598---0.638 in.)
Installed height
15.5---16.5 mm
Exhaust -
(0.610---0.650 in.)
0.025---0.052 mm
0.08 mm (0.003
Intake (0.0010---0.0020
in.)
Arm-to-shaft in.)
Rocker arm
0.08 mm (0.003
Exhaust (0.0007---0.0022
in.)
in.)
ENGINE BLOCK
ENGINE BLOCK SERVICE LIMITS CHART

0.07 mm (0.003 0.10 mm (0.004
Warpage of deck
in.) max. in.)
87.010---87.020
111
mm (3.4256--- 87.070 mm
A or I
3.4260 in.) (3.4279 in.)
Bore diameter 87.000---87.010
87.070 mm
B or II mm (3.4252---
(3.4279 in.)
Block 3.4256 in.)
0.05 mm (0.002
Bore taper -
in.)
0.25 mm (0.01
Reboring limit -
in.)
86.980---86.990
86.930 mm
No letter or A mm (3.4244---
Skirt O.D. at 13 mm (3.4224 in.)
3.4248 in.)
(0.5 in.) from bottom
of skirt 86.970---86.980
86.920 mm
Letter B mm (3.4240---
(3.4220 in.)
3.4244 in.)
0.020---0.040 mm
0.05 mm (0.002
Clearance in cylinder (0.0008---0.0016
in.)
in.)
Piston
1.230---1.240 mm
1.26 mm (0.0450
Top (0.0484---0.0488
in.)
in.)
1.240---1.250 mm
1.270 mm (0.050
Ring groove width Second (0.0488---0.0492
in.)
in.)
2.005---2.025 mm
2.05 mm (0.081
Oil (0.0789---0.0797
in.)
in.)
0.045---0.070 mm
0.13 mm (0.005
Top (0.0018---0.0028
in.)
Ring-to-groove in.)
0.13 mm (0.005
Second (0.0020---0.0030
in.)
in.)
Piston ring
0.20---0.35 mm 0.60 mm (0.024
Top
(0.008---0.014 in.) in.)
0.40---0.55 mm 0.70 mm (0.028
Ring end gap Second
(0.016---0.022 in.) in.)
0.20---0.70 mm 0.80 mm (0.031
Oil
(0.008---0.028 in.) in.)
21.961---21.965
21.953 mm
O.D. mm (0.8646---
(0.8643 in.)
0.8648 in.)
Piston pin -0.005 to +0.002
Pin-to-piston mm 0.005 mm
clearance (-0.00020 to (0.0002 in.)
+0.00008 in.)
Pin-to-rod clearance 0.005---0.015 mm 0.02 mm (0.0008

(0.0002---0.0006 in.)
111
in.)
21.970---21.976
Small-end bore
mm (0.8650--- -
diameter
0.8652 in.)
Connecting rod
Large-end bore
51.0 mm (2.01 in.) -
diameter (Normal)
End play installed on 0.15---0.35 mm 0.40 mm (0.016
crankshaft (0.006---0.014 in.) in.)
No. 1 journal
54.984---55.008
No. 2 journal
mm (2.1648--- -
No. 4 journal
Main journal 2.1657 in.)
No. 5 journal
diameter
54.976---55.000
No. 3 journal mm (2.1644--- -
2.1654 in.)
47.976---48.000
Rod journal diameter mm (1.8888--- -
Crankshaft 1.8898 in.)
Rod/main journal 0.005 mm (0.0002 0.010 mm
taper in.) max. (0.0004 in.)
Rod/main journal 0.005 mm (0.0002 0.010 mm
out-of-round in.) max. (0.0004 in.)
0.10---0.35 mm 0.45 mm (0.018
End play
(0.004---0.014 in.) in.)
0.03 mm (0.0012 0.04 mm (0.0016
Runout
in.) max. in.)
No. 1 journal
0.017---0.041 mm
No. 2 journal 0.050 mm
(0.0007---0.0016
No. 4 journal (0.0020 in.)
Main bearing-to- in.)
No. 5 journal
journal oil clearance
0.025---0.049 mm
Crankshaft bearing 0.055 mm
No. 3 journal (0.0010---0.0019
(0.0022 in.)
in.)
0.020---0.050 mm
Rod bearing 0.060 mm
(0.0008---0.0020
clearance (0.0024 in.)
in.)
ENGINE LUBRICATION
ENGINE LUBRICATION SERVICE LIMITS CHART

Engine overhaul 5.3 L (5.6 US qt)
Oil change,
4.2 L (4.4 US qt)
Engine oil Capacity including filter
Oil change, without
4.0 L(4.2 US qt)
filter
Inner-to-outer rotor 0.06---0.16 mm 0.20 mm (0.008
clearance (0.002---0.006 in.) in.)
111
Pump housing-to- 0.15---0.21 mm 0.23 mm (0.009

outer rotor clearance (0.006---0.008 in.) in.)
0.035---0.070 mm
Pump housing-to- 0.12 mm (0.005
(0.0014---0.0028
rotor axial clearance in.)
in.)
19.938---19.950
No. 1 journal, front 19.92 mm (0.784
mm (0.7850---
shaft in.)
0.7854 in.)
23.938---23.950
Balancer shafts, No. 1 journal, rear 23.92 mm (0.942
mm (0.9424---
journal diameter shaft in.)
0.9429 in.)
32.949---32.961
mm (1.2972---
and rear shaft in.)
1.2977 in.)
Balancer shafts, 0.005 mm (0.0002
-
journal taper in.) max.
0.063---0.108 mm
0.14 mm (0.0055
Front (0.0025---0.0043
in.)
Balancer shafts, end in.)
play 0.063---0.108 mm
0.14 mm (0.0055
Rear (0.0025---0.0043
in.)
in.)
Oil pump
0.050---0.082 mm
(0.0020---0.0032
shaft in.)
in.)
Balancer shafts, 0.050---0.082 mm
No. 1 journal, rear 0.10 mm (0.004
shaft-to-bearing (0.0020---0.0032
shaft in.)
clearance in.)
0.060---0.120 mm
(0.0024---0.0047
and rear shaft in.)
in.)
20.000---20.020
mm (0.7874---
shaft in.)
0.7882 in.)
24.000---24.020
Balancer shaft No. 1 journal, rear 24.03 mm (0.946
mm (0.9449---
bearings, I.D. shaft in.)
0.9457 in.)
33.021---33.069
mm (1.3000---
and rear shaft in.)
1.3019 in.)
Relief valve, oil
pressure with oil
At idle 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm2 , 10 psi) min.
temperature at 176°F
(80°C)
At 3,000 rpm 300 kPa (3.1 kgf/cm2 ,44 psi) min.
COOLING
COOLING STANDARD CHART
111
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New

Coolant capacity M/T at engine overhaul 7.2 L (1.90 US gal)
(includes engine, heater,
hoses, and reservoir) M/T at coolant change 5.1 L (1.35 US gal)
Radiator
Use Honda All Season A/T at engine overhaul 7.1 L (1.88 US gal)
Antifreeze/Coolant Type
2 A/T at coolant change 5.0 L (1.32 US gal)
Reservoir Coolant capacity 0.6 L (0.16 US gal)
93---123 kPa (0.95---
Radiator cap Opening pressure 1.25 kgf/cm2 , 14---18
psi)
Begins to open 169---176°F (76---80°C)
Opening temperature
Thermostat Fully open 194°F (90°C)
Valve lift at fully open 8.0 mm (0.31 in.) min.
Turns ON 196---203°F (91---95°C)
Radiator fan switch Subtract 5---15°F (3---8°
Switching temperature
(2003-2004 models) Turns OFF C) from actual ON
temperature
FUEL AND EMISSIONS
FUEL AND EMISSIONS STANDARD CHART

2003-2004 (except
SULEV) models, 2005 330---380 kPa (3.4---3.9
Pressure with fuel model, and 2006-07 kgf/cm2 , 48---55 psi)
Fuel pressure regulator pressure gauge SULEV model
connected 2003-2004 SULEV 320---370 kPa (3.3---3.8
model and 2006-07
(except SULEV) model kgf/cm2 , 47---54 psi)
Fuel tank Capacity 64.7 L (17.1 US gal)
SULEV and M/T models
(A/T in P or N position, 700+/-50 rpm
M/T in neutral)
Idle speed without load
A/T (except SULEV)
models (in P or N 800+/-50 rpm
position)
Engine idle (2003-2004 Idle speed with high
models) SULEV and M/T models
electric load (A/C switch
(A/T in P or N position, 720+/-50 rpm
ON, temperature set to
M/T in neutral)
Max Cool, blower fan on
High, rear window
A/T (except SULEV)
defogger ON, and
models (in P or N 800+/-50 rpm
headlights on high
position)
beam)
M/T models (in neutral) 720+/-50 rpm
Idle speed with no load A/T models (in P or N
800+/-50 rpm
position)
111
Idle speed with high

electric load (A/C switch M/T models (in neutral) 720+/-50 rpm
ON, temperature set to
Engine idle (2005-2007 Max Cool, blower fan on
models) High, rear window A/T models (in P or N
defogger ON, and 800+/-50 rpm
position)
headlights on high
beam)
CLUTCH
CLUTCH SERVICE LIMIT CHART

Height from floor 191 mm (7.52 in.) -
130---140 mm
Stroke -
(5.12---5.51 in.)
Clutch pedal 10---18 mm (0.39--
Play -
-0.71 in.)
Disengagement 95 mm (3.74 in.)
-
height from floor min.
Runout on clutch 0.05 mm (0.002 0.15 mm (0.006
Flywheel
mating surface in.) max. in.)
1.65---2.25 mm
Rivet head depth 0.7 mm (0.03 in.)
(0.065---0.089 in.)
Clutch disc
8.6---9.2 mm
(0.34---0.36 in.)
0.03 mm (0.001 0.15 mm (0.006
Warpage
in.) max. in.)
Height of diaphragm
Pressure plate spring fingers
0.6 mm (0.02 in.)
measured with 0.8 mm (0.03 in.)
max.
special tool and feeler
gauge
MANUAL TRANSMISSION AND M/T DIFFERENTIAL
111
Fig. 1: Manual Transmission And M/T Differential Chart

MANUAL TRANSMISSION AND M/T DIFFERENTIAL CHART

20.016---20.043
20.90 mm (0.832
I.D. mm (0.7880---
in.)
0.7891 in.)
Reverse idler gear
0.036---0.084 mm
Gear-to-reverse gear 0.16 mm (0.006
(0.0014---0.0033
shaft clearance in.)
in.)
Synchro ring Ring-to-gear Ring pushed against 0.70---1.49 mm 0.4 mm (0.016
111
clearance gear (0.028---0.059 in.) in.)

Outer synchro ring-
Ring pushed against 0.70---1.19 mm 0.3 mm (0.012
to-synchro cone
gear (0.028---0.047 in.) in.)
clearance
Double cone Synchro cone-to- Ring pushed against 0.50---1.04 mm 0.3 mm (0.012
synchro gear clearance gear (0.020---0.041 in.) in.)
Outer synchro ring-
to-gear cone
gear (0.037---0.066 in.) in.)
clearance
Outer synchro ring-
to-synchro cone
gear (0.028---0.047 in.) in.)
clearance
Triple cone Synchro cone-to- Ring pushed against 0.50---1.04 mm 0.3 mm (0.012
synchro gear clearance gear (0.020---0.041 in.) in.)
Outer synchro ring-
to-gear cone
gear (0.037---0.066 in.) in.)
clearance
7.4---7.6 mm
Finger thickness -
(0.29---0.30 in.)
Shift fork
Fork-to-synchro 0.35---0.65 mm 1.0 mm (0.039
sleeve clearance (0.014---0.026 in.) in.)
13.4---13.7 mm
Finger thickness -
(0.527---0.539 in.)
Reverse shift fork
Fork-to-reverse idler 0.20---0.59 mm 1.2 mm (0.047
gear clearance (0.007---0.024 in.) in.)
13.973---14.000
I.D. mm (0.5501--- -
0.5512 in.)
Shift arm Shift fork diameter at 16.9---17.0 mm
-
contact area (0.665---0.669 in.)
Shift arm-to-shift 0.2---0.5 mm 0.6 mm (0.024
lever clearance (0.008---0.020 in.) in.)
14.85---14.95 mm
Select lever Finger width -
(0.585---0.589 in.)
Change-to-select 0.05---0.25 mm 0.5 mm (0.020
lever clearance (0.002---0.010 in.) in.)
Groove (to select 15.00---15.10 mm
-
Change lever lever) (0.591---0.594 in.)
0.013---0.07 mm
Shaft-to-shift arm 0.1 mm (0.004
(0.0005---0.003
clearance in.)
in.)
18.010---18.028
Pinion shaft contact
mm (0.7091--- -
area I.D.
0.7098 in.)
M/T differential 0.027---0.057 mm
carrier Carrier-to-pinion 0.1 mm (0.004
(0.0011---0.0022
in.)
28.025---28.045
111
Driveshaft contact mm (1.1033---

-
area I.D. 1.1041 in.)
0.05---0.15 mm
Backlash -
(0.002---0.006 in.)
18.042---18.066
M/T differential I.D. mm (0.7103--- -
pinion gear 0.7113 in.)
0.059---0.095 mm
Pinion gear-to-pinion 0.15 mm (0.006
(0.0023---0.0037
in.)
80 mm shim-to-
bearing outer race 0---0.10 mm (0---
80 mm shim Adjust
clearance in 0.0039 in.)
transmission housing
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AND A/T DIFFERENTIAL
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AND A/T DIFFERENTIAL CHART

ATF (Automatic Capacity Fluid change 2.9 L (3.0 US qt)
Transmission Fluid) Use Honda ATF-Z1 Overhaul 6.5 L (6.9 US qt)
900---960 kPa
850 kPa
At 2,000 rpm in N (9.2---9.8
Line pressure (8.7 kgf/cm2 ,120
or P position kgf/cm2 , 130---
psi)
140 psi)
890---970 kPa
840 kPa
At 2,000 rpm in 1 (9.1---9.9
1st clutch pressure (8.6 kgf/cm2 , 120
position kgf/cm2 , 130---
psi)
140 psi)
890---970 kPa
840 kPa
At 2,000 rpm in 2 (9.1---9.9
2nd clutch pressure (8.6 kgf/cm2 , 120
position kgf/cm2 , 130---
psi)
140 psi)
ATF pressure
890---970 kPa
840 kPa
At 2,000 rpm in 3rd (9.1---9.9 2
3rd clutch pressure
gear in D3 position kgf/cm2 , 130--- (8.6 kgf/cm , 120
psi)
140 psi)
890---970 kPa
840 kPa
At 2,000 rpm in 4th (9.1---9.9 2
4th clutch pressure
gear in D position kgf/cm2 , 130--- (8.6 kgf/cm , 120
psi)
140 psi)
890---970 kPa
840 kPa
At 2,000 rpm in 5th (9.1---9.9 2
5th clutch pressure
gear in D position kgf/cm2 , 130--- (8.6 kgf/cm , 120
psi)
140 psi)
Torque converter Stall speed 2,400 rpm 2,250---2,550 rpm

Check with vehicle
111
on level ground
1st (2003-2005 1.28---1.48 mm
-
models) (0.050---0.058 in.)
1.38---1.58 mm
1st (2006-07 model) -
(0.054---0.062 in.)
2nd (2003-2005 0.88---1.08 mm
-
models) (0.035---0.043 in.)
2nd (2006-07 1.18---1.38 mm
-
Clutch end plate-to- model) (0.046---0.054 in.)
top disc clearance 3rd (2003-2005 0.93---1.13 mm
-
models) (0.037---0.044 in.)
3rd (2006-07 1.23---1.43 mm
-
model) (0.048---0.056 in.)
4th and 5th (2003- 0.73---0.93 mm
-
2004 models) (0.029---0.037 in.)
4th and 5th (2005- 0.93---1.13 mm
-
2007 models) (0.037---0.044 in.)
50.8 mm (2.00
1st, 2nd, and 3rd 48.8 mm (1.92 in.)
Clutch return spring in.)
free length 33.5 mm (1.32
4th and 5th 31.5 mm (1.24 in.)
in.)
Clutch disc 1.94 mm (0.076
-
thickness in.)
1.6 mm (0.063
1st and 3rd When discolored
in.)
2.0 mm (0.079
When discolored
in.)
2nd
Clutch plate 4.0 mm (0.157
When discolored
thickness in.)
4th and 5th (2003- 2.3 mm (0.091
When discolored
2004 models) in.)
4th and 5th (2005- 2.0 mm (0.079
When discolored
2007 models) in.)
0.15---0.25 mm
1st -
Clutch waved-plate (0.006---0.010 in.)
phase difference 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 0.1---0.2 mm
-
5th (0.004---0.008 in.)
2.6 mm (0.102
Mark 1 When discolored
in.)
2.7 mm (0.106
in.)
2.8 mm (0.110
in.)
2.9 mm (0.114
in.)
1st, 2nd, and 3rd 3.0 mm (0.118
clutch end plate Mark 5 When discolored
in.)
thickness (2003-
111
2005 models) 3.1 mm (0.122

in.)
3.2 mm (0.126
in.)
3.3 mm (0.130
in.)
3.4 mm (0.134
in.)
2.6 mm (0.102
in.)
2.7 mm (0.106
in.)
2.8 mm (0.110
in.)
2.9 mm (0.114
in.)
1st and 2nd clutch
3.0 mm (0.118
end plate thickness Mark 5 When discolored
in.)
(2006-07 model)
3.1 mm (0.122
in.)
3.2 mm (0.126
in.)
3.3 mm (0.130
in.)
3.4 mm (0.134
in.)
2.1 mm (0.083
in.)
2.2 mm (0.087
in.)
2.3 mm (0.091
in.)
2.4 mm (0.094
in.)
3rd clutch end plate
2.5 mm (0.098
thickness (2006-07 Mark 5 When discolored
in.)
model)
2.6 mm (0.102
in.)
2.7 mm (0.106
in.)
2.8 mm (0.110
in.)
2.9 mm (0.114
in.)
2.1 mm (0.083
in.)
Mark 2 2.2 mm (0.087 When discolored
111
in.)
2.3 mm (0.091
in.)
2.4 mm (0.095
in.)
2.5 mm (0.098
in.)
4th and 5th clutch
end plate thickness Mark 6 2.6 mm (0.102
When discolored
in.)
2.7 mm (0.106
in.)
2.8 mm (0.110
in.)
2.9 mm (0.114
in.)
111
Clutch
111
22.984---23.000
When worn or
At stator shaft mm (0.905---
damaged
0.906 in.)
51.975---51.991
Diameter of needle When worn or
At 5th gear mm (2.046---
bearing contact area damaged
2.047 in.)
37.975---33.991
When worn or
4th gear collar mm (1.3376 -
damaged
1.3382 in.)
57.000---57.019
When worn or
5th gear mm (2.2441---
damaged
2.2448 in.)
I.D. of gears
40.000---40.016
When worn or
4th gear mm (1.5748---
damaged
1.5754 in.)
0.03---0.11 mm
5th gear -
(0.001---0.004 in.)
End play of gears
0.1---0.22 mm
4th gear -
(0.004---0.009 in.)
6.35 mm (0.250 When worn or
No. 1
in.) damaged
No. 2
in.) damaged
Mainshaft 6.45 mm (0.254 When worn or
No. 3
41 x 68 mm thrust in.) damaged
washer thickness 6.50 mm (0.256 When worn or
No. 4
in.) damaged
No. 5
in.) damaged
No. 6
in.) damaged
4th gear collar 66.3---66.4 mm
-
length (2.610---2.614 in.)
Length of 4th gear
19.15---19.30 mm When worn or
collar flange from
(0.754---0.760 in.) damaged
end
1.91---1.97 mm
Sealing ring 1.86 mm (0.0732
(0.0752---0.0776
thickness in.)
in.)
2.025---2.060 mm
Width of sealing 2.080 mm (0.0819
(0.0797---0.0811
ring groove in.)
in.)
7.97---7.98 mm
Clutch feed pipe
(0.3138---0.3142 7.95 mm (0.313 in.)
O.D.
in.)
8.000---8.015 mm
Clutch feed pipe (0.3150---0.3156 8.030 mm (0.3161
111
bushing I.D. in.) in.)

36.005---36.015
At torque converter When worn or
mm (1.4175---
housing damaged
1.4179 in.)
34.982---34.998
At 4th gear mm (1.3772---
1.3779 in.)
39.979---40.000
When worn or
At reverse gear mm (1.5740---
damaged
1.5748 in.)
41.000---41.016
When worn or
4th gear mm (1.6142---
damaged
1.6148 in.)
I.D. of gears
46.000---46.016
When worn or
Reverse gear mm (1.8110---
damaged
Countershaft 1.8116 in.)
0.00---0.48 mm
5th gear -
(0.000---0.019 in.)
0.04---0.27 mm
End play of gears 4th gear -
(0.002---0.011 in.)
0.10---0.25 mm
Reverse gear -
(0.004---0.010 in.)
Collar, 35 x 47 x 7.8
7.8 mm (0.31 in.) -
mm thickness
Collar, 37 x 41 x 57.75---57.80 mm
-
57.8 mm length (2.274---2.276 in.)
Reverse selector hub 25.45---25.65 mm
-
width (1.002---1.010 in.)
Reverse selector hub 55.87---55.90 mm When worn or
O.D. (2.200---2.201 in.) damaged
39.986---39.999
When worn or
At 1st gear mm (1.5742---
damaged
1.5748 in.)
39.986---39.999
At 2nd gear mm (1.5742---
1.5748 in.)
36.975---36.991
When worn or
3rd gear collar mm (1.4557---
damaged
1.4563 in.)
47.000---47.016
When worn or
1st gear mm (1.8504---
damaged
1.8510 in.)
46.000---46.016
When worn or
I.D. of gears 2nd gear mm (1.8110---
damaged
1.8116 in.)
43.000---43.016
When worn or
3rd gear mm (1.6929---
damaged
1.6935 in.)
111
0.04---0.12 mm
1st gear -
(0.002---0.005 in.)
0.04---0.12 mm
End play of gears 2nd gear -
(0.002---0.005 in.)
0.10---0.22 mm
3rd gear -
(0.004---0.009 in.)
No. 1
in.) damaged
No. 2
in.) damaged
No. 3
in.) damaged
No. 4
in.) damaged
No. 5
in.) damaged
No. 6
in.) damaged
No. 7
in.) damaged
No. 8
in.) damaged
No. 9
in.) damaged
No. 10
37 x 58 mm thrust in.) damaged
No. 11
in.) damaged
No. 12
in.) damaged
No. 13
in.) damaged
No. 14
in.) damaged
No. 15
in.) damaged
No. 16
in.) damaged
No. 17
in.) damaged
No. 18
in.) damaged
No. 19
in.) damaged
No. 20
in.) damaged
No. 1 4.80 mm (0.189 When worn or
111
in.) damaged
No. 2
in.) damaged
No. 3
in.) damaged
40 x 51.5 mm thrust
No. 4
in.) damaged
No. 5
in.) damaged
No. 6
in.) damaged
3rd gear collar 43.9---44.0 mm
-
length (1.728---1.732 in.)
Length of 3rd gear
5.25---5.40 mm When worn or
collar flange from
(0.207---0.213 in.) damaged
end
1.91---1.97 mm
Sealing ring 1.86 mm (0.0732
(0.0752---0.0776
thickness in.)
in.)
2.025---2.060 mm
Width of sealing 2.080 mm (0.0819
(0.0797---0.0811
ring groove in.)
in.)
11.47---11.48 mm
11.45 mm (0.4508
3rd clutch feed pipe (0.4516---0.4520
in.)
Clutch feed pipe in.)
O.D. 6.97---6.98 mm
6.95 mm (0.2736
1st clutch feed pipe (0.2744---0.2748
in.)
in.)
11.500---11.518
11.530 mm (0.4539
3rd clutch feed pipe mm (0.4528---
in.)
Clutch feed pipe 0.4553 in.)
bushing O.D. 7.018---7.030 mm
7.045 mm (0.2774
1st clutch feed pipe (0.2763---0.2768
in.)
in.)
ATF guide collar of 29.000---29.021
29.05 mm (1.144
sealing ring contact mm (1.1417---
in.)
I.D. 1.1426 in.)
111
Secondary shaft
32.003---32.013
End cover side mm {1.2600---
1.2604 in.)
Idler gear shaft
1.39---1.42 mm
Thickness of cotters (0.0547---0.0559 -----
in.)
Reverse idler gear
14.99---15.00 mm
shaft diameter at When worn or
(0.7877---0.7882
needle bearing damaged
in.)
contact area
20.007---20.020
When worn or
I.D. mm (0.7877---
damaged
0.7882 in.)
Reverse idler gear
I.D. of reverse idler
14.800---14.818
gear shaft contact
mm (0.5827--- -----
area on transmission
0.5834 in.)
housing
14.800---14.824
I.D. of reverse idler When worn or
mm (0.5827---
gear shaft holder damaged
0.5836 in.)
ATF pump thrust 0.03---0.05 mm
0.07 mm (0.003 in.)
clearance (0.001---0.002 in.)
0.210---0.265 mm
Drive gear -----
ATF pump gear-to- (0.008---0.010 in.)
body clearance 0.070---0.125 mm
Driven gear -----
(0.003---0.005 in.)
ATF pump
14.016---14.034
ATF pump driven When worn or
mm (0.5518---
gear I.D. damaged
0.5525 in.)
13.980---13.990
ATF pump driven When worn or
mm (0.5504---
gear shaft O.D. damaged
0.5508 in.)
27.000---27.021
Torque converter When worn or
mm (1.063---
side damaged
Needle bearing 1.064 in.)
contact I.D. 29.000---29.021
ATF pump side mm (1.1417--- -----
Stator shaft 1.1426 in.)
29.000---29.021
Sealing ring contact 29.05 mm (1.144
mm (1.1417---
area I.D. in.)
1.1426 in.)
Fork finger 5.90---6.00 mm
Reverse shift fork 5.40 mm (0.213 in.)
thickness (0.232---0.236 in.)
When worn or
Park gear and pawl -----
damaged
Shift fork shaft bore 14.000---14.010

111
I.D. mm (0.5512---
-----
0.5516 in.)
Servo body 37.000---37.039
Shift fork shaft 37.045 mm (1.4585
mm (1.4567---
valve bore I.D. in.)
1.4582 in.)
29.000---29.021
Regulator valve Sealing ring contact 29.05 mm (1.144
mm (1.1417---
body I.D. in.)
1.1426 in.)

Standard or New
Item Measurement Qualification Wire Free No. of
O.D.
Diameter Length Coil
Shift valve A 0.8 mm 5.6 mm 28.1 mm
15.9
spring (0.031 in.) (0.220 in.) (1.106 in.)
Shift valve B 0.8 mm 5.6 mm 28.1 mm
15.9
spring (0.031 in.) (0.220 in.) (1.106 in.)
Shift valve C 0.8 mm 5.6 mm 28.1 mm
15.9
spring (0.031 in.) (0.220 in.) (1.106 in.)
Main valve body Relief valve 1.0 mm 9.6 mm 34.1 mm
10.2
spring (see MAIN spring (0.039 in.) (0.378 in.) (1.343 in.)
VALVE BODY Lock-up control 0.65 mm 7.1 mm 23.1 mm
12.7
DISASSEMBLY, valve spring (0.026 in.) (0.280 in.) (0.909 in.)
INSPECTION, 2003-2004 0.9 mm 6.6 mm 26.5 mm
AND ) 12.6
Cooler check models (0.035 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.043 in.)
valve spring 2005-2007 0.85 mm 6.6 mm 27.0 mm
11.3
models (0.034 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.063 in.)
Servo control 0.7 mm 6.6 mm 35.7 mm
17.2
valve spring (0.028 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.406 in.)
Shift valve E 0.8 mm 5.6 mm 28.1 mm
15.9
spring (0.031 in.) (0.220 in.) (1.106 in.)
Stator reaction 4.5 mm 35.4 mm 30.3 mm
1.92
spring (0.177 in.) (1.394 in.) (1.193 in.)
Regulator valve 1.9 mm 14.7 mm 80.6 mm
16.1
spring A (0.075 in.) (0.579 in.) (3.173 in.)
Regulator valve 1.6 mm 9.2 mm 44.0 mm
Regulator valve spring B 12.5
(0.063 in.) (0.362 in.) (1.732 in.)
body spring 2003-
Torque
2004 models (see 1.2 mm 8.6 mm 33.8 mm
converter check 12.2
2003-2004 (0.047 in.) (0.339 in.) (1.331 in.)
valve spring
MODELS ),
2005-2007 models Lock-up shift 1.0 mm 6.6 mm 35.5 mm
18.2
(see 2005-2007 valve spring (0.039 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.398 in.)
MODELS ) 3rd accumulator 2.5 mm 14.6 mm 29.9 mm
4.9
spring (0.098 in.) (0.575 in.) (1.177 in.)
1st accumulator 2.4 mm 18.6 mm 49.0 mm
7.1
spring A (0.094 in.) (0.732 in.) (1.929 in.)
1st accumulator 2.3 mm 12.2 mm 31.5 mm 6.6

111
spring B (0.091 in.) (0.480 in.) (1.240 in.)

Shift valve D 0.8 mm 5.6 mm 28.1 mm
15.9
spring (0.031 in.) (0.220 in.) (1.106 in.)
4th accumulator 2.3 mm 12.2 mm 31.5 mm
6.6
spring B (0.091 in.) (0.480 in.) (1.240 in.)
Servo body spring 4th accumulator 2.4 mm 18.6 mm 49.0 mm
(see SERVO 7.1
spring A (0.094 in.) (0.732 in.) (1.929 in.)
BODY
DISASSEMBLY, 2nd 2.0 mm 10.6 mm 34.0 mm
INSPECTION, accumulator (0.079 in.) (0.417 in.) (1.339 in.)
8.0
AND spring B
REASSEMBLY ) 2nd 2.2 mm 16.6 mm 48.2 mm
accumulator 8.5
(0.087 in.) (0.654 in.) (1.898 in.)
spring A
5th accumulator 2.5 mm 14.6 mm 29.9 mm
4.9
spring (0.098 in.) (0.575 in.) (1.177 in.)

18.000---18.025
Pinion shaft contact
mm (0.709---0.719 -----
area I.D.
in.)
Carrier-to-pinion 0.013---0.054 mm 0.1 mm (0.004
shaft clearance (0.001---0.002 in.) in.)
28.015---28.045
Driveshaft contact
mm (1.103---1.104 -----
area I.D.
in.)
A/T differential Carrier-to-driveshaft 0.035---0.086 mm 0.12 mm (0.005
carrier clearance (0.002---0.003 in.) in.)
2.7---3.9 N.m (28--
For new bearing -40 kgf.cm, 24--- Adjust
Carrier bearing 35 lbf.in.)
starting torque
(preload 2.5---3.6 N.m (25--
For bearing reused -37 kgf.cm, 22--- Adjust
32 lbf.in.)
Final driven gear 0.085---0.144 mm 0.2 mm (0.008
(References)
backlash (0.003---0.006 in.) in.)
0.05---0.15 mm
Backlash -----
(0.002---0.006 in.)
18.042---18.066
A/T differential I.D. mm (0.7103--- -----
pinion gear 0.7113 in.)
0.055---0.095 mm
Pinion gear-to-pinion 0.12 mm (0.005
(0.0022---0.0037
in.)
STEERING
STEERING STANDARD CHART

111

Rotational play measured
at outside edge with 0---10 mm (0---0.39 in.)
engine running
Steering wheel
Starting load measured at
outside edge with engine 29 N (3.0 kgf, 6.6 lbf)
running
Angle of rack guide screw
Gearbox loosened from locked 10°---20° max.
position
7,160---7,850 kPa (73---
Output pressure with
Pump
shut-off valve closed 80 kgf/cm2 , 1,040---
1,140 psi)
Capacity Fluid change 0.4 L (0.42 US qt)
Power steering fluid Use Honda Power
Steering Fluid System overhaul 1.1 L (1.16 US qt)
SUSPENSION
SUSPENSION SERVICE LIMIT CHART

Front 0°03'+/-45'
Camber
Rear -0°50'+/-30'
Wheel alignment: Caster Front 3°10'+/-45'
DX (2003-2005 Front 0+/-2 mm (0+/-1/16 in.)
models), VP Total Toe-in
Rear 2+/-2 mm (1/16+1/16 in.)
Front wheel turning Inside wheel 39°00'+/-2°
angle Outside wheel 31°50' (Reference)
Front 0°00'+/-45'
Camber
Rear -1°00'+/-30'
Wheel alignment: Caster Front 3°15'+/-45'
DX (2006-07
Front 0+/-2 mm (0+/-1/16 in.)
model), LX, LX-P, Total Toe-in
SE, EX, EX-L Rear 2+/-2 mm (1/16+/-1/16 in.)
Front wheel turning Inside wheel 38°50'+/-20
angle Outside wheel 31°40' (Reference)
0---0.7 mm (0---
Axial 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)
Aluminum wheel 0.03 in.)
runout 0---0.7 mm (0---
Radial 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)
0.03 in.)
Wheel
0---1.0 mm (0---
Axial 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)
0.04 in.)
Steel wheel runout
0---1.0 mm (0---
Radial 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)
0.04 in.)
Front 0---0.05 mm (0---0.002 in.)
Wheel bearing End play
Rear 0---0.05 mm (0---0.002 in.)
111
BRAKES
BRAKES SERVICE LIMIT CHART

Distance traveled
Disc brake 6 to 9 clicks
Parking brake when lever pulled
lever with 196 N (20 kgf,
Drum brake 4 to 7 clicks
44 lbf) of force
Pedal height (carpet M/T 167 mm (6 9/16 in.)
Brake pedal removed) A/T 172 mm (6 13/16 in.)
Free play 1---5 mm (1/16---3/16 in.)
22.9---23.1 mm
Front 21.0 mm (0.83 in.)
(0.90---0.91 in.)
Thickness
8.9---9.1 mm
Rear 8.0 mm (0.31 in.)
(0.35---0.36 in.)
0.10 mm (0.004
Brake disc Front -----
in.)
Runout
0.10 mm (0.004
Rear -----
in.)
0.015 mm (0.0006
Parallelism Front and rear -----
in.)
10.5---11.5 mm
Front 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
(0.41---0.45 in.)
Brake pad Thickness
8.9---9.1 mm
Rear 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
(0.350---0.358 in.)
219.9---220.0 mm 221 mm (8.701
Brake drum I.D.
(8.657---8.661 in.) in.)
Brake shoe Lining thickness 4.5 mm (0.18 in.) 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)
AIR CONDITIONING
AIR CONDITIONING STANDARD CHART

Type HFC-134a (R-134a)
Refrigerant 500---550 g (17.6---
Capacity of system
19.4 oz)
DENSO: ND-OIL 8
(P/N 38897-PR7-
Type
A01AH or 38899-PR7-
A01)
Condenser 25 mL (5/6 fl oz)
Refrigerant oil Evaporator 45 mL (1 1/2 fl oz)
Each line and hose 10 mL (1/3 fl oz)
Capacity of components
Receiver 10 mL (1/3 fl oz)
160---175 mL (5 1/3---
Compressor
5 2/3 fl oz)
Starter coil resistance At 68°F (20°C) 3.9---4.3 ohms
111
Pulley-to-pressure plate 0.35---0.60 mm (0.014-

Compressor
clearance --0.024 in.)
DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS
DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS CHART
Item Measurement Qualification Specification
2003-2005 models 4,813 mm (189.5 in.)
Overall length
2006-07 model 4,854 mm (191.1 in.)
Overall width 1,820 mm (71.7 in.)
DX, LX (2003-2005
1,453 mm (57.2 in.)
models)
Overall height EX, EX-L (2003-2005
DIMENSIONS 4-door 1,456 mm (57.3 in.)
models)
2006-07 model 1,453 mm (57.2 in.)
Wheelbase 2,740 mm (107.9 in.)
Front 1,553 mm (61.1 in.)
Track
Rear 1,554 mm (61.2 in.)
Seating capacity five (5)
2003-2005 models 4,766 mm (187.6 in.)
Overall length
2006-07 model 4,770 mm (187.8 in.)
Overall width 1,810 mm (71.3 in.)
Overall height 1,415 mm (55.7 in.)
DIMENSIONS 2-door
Wheelbase 2,670 mm (105.1 in.)
Front 1,553 mm (61.1 in.)
Track
Rear 1,554 mm (61.2 in.)
Seating capacity five (5)
DX, VP (2006-07
4,080 lbs
Gross Vehicle Weight model), LX
WEIGHT (U.S.A.)
Rating (GVWR) SE (2006-07 model),
4,145 lbs
EX, EX-L
DX (2003-2005
1,850 kg
models), LX
Gross Vehicle Weight
WEIGHT (CANADA) DX (2006-07 model),
Rating (GVWR)
SE (2006-07 model), 1,880 kg
EX, EX-L
Water cooled, 4-stroke
Type
DOHC i-VTEC engine
Inline 4-cylinder,
Cylinder arrangement
transverse
87 x 99 mm (3.43 x
Bore and stroke
3.90 in.)
Displacement 2,354 cm3 (144 cu in.)
Compression ratio 9.7
111
Chain drive, DOHC i-

Valve train VTEC 4 valves per
cylinder
Forced, wet sump, with
Lubrication system
trochoid pump
52.8 L (55.8 US
ENGINE Oil pump displacement At 6,000 rpm
qt)/minute
Water pump 95.5 L (101 US
At 6,000 rpm
displacement qt)/minute
Regular UNLEADED
Fuel required gasoline with 87 pump
octane number or higher
Type Gear reduction
M/T (2003-2005
1.7 kW
models)
Normal output
A/T, M/T (2006-07
1.6 kW
STARTER model)
Normal voltage 12 V
Hour rating 30 seconds
Clockwise as viewed
Rotation of direction
from gear end
Single plate dry,
M/T
diaphragm spring
Clutch type 3-element torque
CLUTCH A/T converter with lock-up
clutch
Clutch friction material
surface area
M/T 221 cm2 (34.22 sq in.)
Synchronized, 5-speed
Type APG6
forward, 1 reverse
Primary reduction Direct 1:1
1st 3.267
2nd 1.769
MANUAL 3rd 1.147
TRANSMISSION
Gear ratio 4th 0.872
5th 0.659
Reverse 3.583
Final 4.389
Final reduction Type Single helical gear
Electronically
Type MCLA controlled automatic, 5-
speed forward, 1 reverse
AUTOMATIC Primary reduction Direct 1:1
TRANSMISSION 1st 2.652
Gear ratio 2nd 1.517
3rd 1.037
111
4th 0.738
5th 0.566
Reverse 2.000
Type Single helical gear
Final reduction
Gear ratio 4.438
Power-assisted rack and
Type
pinion
STEERING Overall ratio 15.21
Turns, lock-to-lock 2.98
Steering wheel diameter 380 mm (15.0 in.)
Independent double
Front wishbone, coil spring,
with stabilizer
Type
Independent double
Rear wishbone, coil spring,
SUSPENSION with stabilizer
Telescopic, hydraulic,
Front
nitrogen gas-filled
Shock absorber
Telescopic, hydraulic,
Rear
nitrogen gas-filled
DX (2003-2005
P195/65R15 89H M+S
models), VP
LX (2003-2005 models),
LX (2006-07 model 4- P205/65R15 92H M+S
Size of front and rear door), LX-P
TIRES
tires DX (2006-07 model),
LX (2006-07 model 2-
P205/60R16 91V M+S
door), SE, EX,
EX-L
Size of spare tire T135/80D16
Front: DX (2003-2005
0°03'
models), VP
Front: DX (2006-07
model), LX,
0°00'
LX-P, SE (2006-07
Camber (2003-2005 model), EX, EX-L
models), VP (2006-07
model) Rear: DX (2003-2005
-0°50'
models), VP
WHEEL ALIGNMENT Rear: DX (2006-07
model) LX,
-1°00'
LX-P, SE (2006-07
model), EX, EX-L
Front: DX (2003-2005
3°10'
models), VP
Caster
Front: DX (2006-07
3°15'
model), LX,
LX-P, SE (2006-07
111
model), EX, EX-L

Front 0 mm (0 in.)
Total Toe-in
Rear 2 mm (1/16 in.)
Power-assisted self-
Front
adjusting ventilated disc
Rear: DX, VP (2006-07 Power-assisted self-
Type of service brake
model), LX, LX-P adjusting drum
Rear: SE (2006-07 Power-assisted self-
model), EX, EX-L adjusting solid disc
BRAKES Mechanical actuating,
Type of parking brake
rear wheels
Front: US model 56 cm2 (8.7 sq in.) x 2
Pad friction surface area Front: Canada model 57 cm2 (8.8 sq in.) x 2
Rear 28 cm2 (4.3 sq in.) x 2
Shoe friction surface
area
Rear 74 cm2 (11.5 sq in.) x 2
Type Swash plate
188 mL (11.47 cu
Capacity
in.)/rev.
Compressor
Maximum speed 7,922 rpm
Lubricant capacity 160 mL (5 1/3 fl oz)
Lubricant type DENSO ND-OIL 8
Condenser Type Corrugated fin
Evaporator Type Corrugated fin
Type Radial
Motor type 210 W/12 V
AIR CONDITIONING Blower Speed control Infinite variable
Maximum capacity 505 m3 /h (17,805 cu
ft/h)
Temperature control Air-mix type
Dry, single plate, poly
Type
V-belt drive
Compressor clutch Electrical power
consumption at 68°F 35 W maximum at 12 V
(20°C)
Type HFC-134a (R-134a)
Refrigerant 500---550 g (17.6---19.4
Capacity
oz)
Battery 12 V---36 AH/5 hours
M/T 12 V---1.7 kW
Starter
A/T 12 V---1.6 kW
Alternator 12 V---105A
Under-hood fuse/relay 100A, 50A, 40A, 30A,
Fuses box 20A, 15A, 10A, 7.5A
Under-dash fuse/relay 30A, 20A, 15A, 10A,
111
box 7.5A
Headlight high beam 12 V---60 W
Headlight low beam 12 V---51 W
12 V---21/5 W (two
Front turn signal/front
filaments)
side marker lights
Amber color
12 V---21 W
Rear turn signal lights
Amber color
Brake/taillights (2003- 12 V---21/5 W (two
2005 models) filaments)
Brake/taillights (2006-
LED
07 model)
Inner/taillights 12 V---5 W
High mount brake light
12 V---21 W
ELECTRICAL (2003-2005 models)
RATINGS Light bulbs High mount brake light
LED
(2006-07 model)
Back-up lights: 4-door 12 V---21 W
Back-up lights: 2-door 12 V---16 W
License plate light 12 V---5 W
Ceiling light 12 V---8 W
Spotlights 12 V---8 W
Trunk light 12 V---5 W
Door courtesy lights 12 V---3.8 W
Glove box light 12 V---3.8 W
Vanity mirror lights 12 V---1.1 W
12 V---LED (non-
Gauge lights
replaceable)
Indicator, panel, ambient 12 V---LED, 14 V---
light 0.56 W, 0.84 W
BODY SPECIFICATIONS
2003-2005 MODELS 4-DOOR:
111
Fig. 2: Identifying 2003-2005 Models 4-Door Body Specifications

2003-2005 MODELS 2-DOOR:
111
Fig. 3: Identifying 2003-2005 Models 2-Door Body Specifications

2006-07 MODEL 4-DOOR:
Fig. 4: Identifying 2006-07 Model 4-Door Body Specifications

2006-07 MODEL 2-DOOR:
111
Fig. 5: Identifying 2006-07 Model 2-Door Body Specifications

111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Trunk Lid - Accord
Trunk Lid - Accord
ADJUSTMENT
 Rear shelf, 2-door (see 2-DOOR ) or 4-door (see 4-DOOR )
 Trunk rear trim panel, 2-door (see 2-DOOR ), 4-door (see 4-DOOR ('03-05 MODELS) , or 4-
door (see 4-DOOR ('06 MODEL) )
2. Slightly loosen each bolt.
3. Adjust the trunk lid (A) alignment in the following sequence.
 Adjust the trunk lid hinges (B) right and left, as well as forward and rearward, by using the
elongated holes. Take care not to hit the rear window when loosening the bolts (C).
 Turn the trunk lid edge cushions (D), in or out as necessary, to make the trunk lid fit flush with
the body at the rear and side edges.
 Adjust the fit between the trunk lid and the trunk lid opening by moving the striker (E).
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:10:49
Fig. 1: Adjusting Trunk Lid Alignment

4. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque.

5. Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and closes securely.
TRUNK LID TORSION BAR REPLACEMENT

Torsion bar assembly tool 08M10-SM4-100 or 07AAE-SDAA100
1. Remove the torsion bars (A) from the torsion bar center clip (B).
Fig. 2: Removing Torsion Bars From Torsion Bar Center Clip (2-Door)
111
Fig. 3: Removing Torsion Bars From Torsion Bar Center Clip (4-Door)
2. Use the torsion bar tool to remove the torsion bars from both trunk lid hinges.
NOTE:  2-door: First remove the left torsion bar (A), then remove the right
torsion bar (B).
 4-door: First remove the right torsion bar (A), then remove the left
torsion bar (B).
111
Fig. 4: Removing Torsion Bars From Both Trunk Lid Hinges (2-Door)
111
Fig. 5: Removing Torsion Bars From Both Trunk Lid Hinges (4-Door)
3. Remove the torsion bar center clip from the body.
111
Fig. 6: Removing Torsion Bar Center Clip From Body

4. Install the torsion bars in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 The shapes of the left torsion bar (A) and right torsion bar (B) are shown in Fig. 7. Install the
torsion bars properly.
 Adjust the torsion bars forward or rearward with the torsion bar assembly tool. The standard
111
torsion bar positions are:

Left torsion bar: Higher tension
Right torsion bar: Normal position
Fig. 7: Installing Torsion Bars

111
TRUNK LID WEATHERSTRIP REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the trunk lid weatherstrip (A) by pulling it off.
Fig. 8: Removing Trunk Lid Weatherstrip

111
2. Apply clear sealant (B) into the channel of the trunk lid weatherstrip all the way around.
Sealant: Cemedine P/N 08712-0004, or equivalent
3. Locate the painted alignment mark (C or D) on the trunk lid weatherstrip. Align the painted mark with
the center of the tailgate opening, and install the trunk lid weatherstrip all the way around in the
direction shown in Fig. 8. Make sure there are no wrinkles in the weatherstrip.
4. Check for water leaks.
111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Exterior Trim - Accord
Exterior Trim - Accord
FRONT GRILLE REPLACEMENT

2-DOOR
prying components.
1. Remove the front bumper (see 2-DOOR ).

2. '03-05 models: Remove the screws and release the hooks (A), and remove the front grille (B) from the
front bumper (C) by pulling it out. Take care not to scratch the front bumper.
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:12:43
Fig. 1: Removing Front Grille (2003-05 Models - 2-Door))

3. '06-07 models: Remove the clips (A) and screws (B), and remove the front grille (C) from the front
bumper (D) by pulling it out. Take care not to scratch the front bumper.
111
Fig. 2: Removing Front Grille (2006 Model - 2-Door)

4. Install the grille in the reverse order of removal.
4-DOOR
111
 Take care not to scratch the front bulkhead cover and front grille.
1. Remove the clips (A, B) and detach the hooks (C), then remove the front bulkhead cover (D).
111
Fig. 3: Removing Front Bulkhead Cover

2. '03-05 models: Remove the clips, then remove the front grille (A). Take care not to drop the clips
inside the front bumper.
Fig. 4: Removing Front Grille (2003-05 Models - 4-Door)

3. '06-07 models: Remove the clips (A) and screws (B), then remove the front grille (C). Take care not to
drop the clips and screws inside the front bumper (D).
111
Fig. 5: Removing Front Grille ('06-07 Models - 4-Door)

4. '06-07 models: If necessary, remove the screws, then remove the upper grille molding (A) from the
front grille.
111
Fig. 6: Removing Upper Grille Molding From Front Grille (2006 Models - 4-Door)
5. Install the front grille in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Check the clip is not damaged or stress-whitened, and if necessary, replaced it with new one.
 Push the front hook portions into place securely.
FRONT FENDER TRIM REPLACEMENT
1. Remove the clips fastening the front bulkhead cover (A) and the front fender trim (B).
111
Fig. 7: Removing Clips Fastening Front Bulkhead Cover

2. Pull up the rear of the front bulkhead cover, then remove the front fender trim by releasing the hooks
(C) from the body.
3. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and check if the clip is damaged or stress-whitened,
COWL COVER REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the windshield wiper arms (see WIPER MOTOR REPLACEMENT ).
2. Remove the hood rear seal (A) by pulling it out. Using a clip remover, detach the clips (B) from the
111
cowl covers. Take care not to scratch the cowl covers.
Fig. 8: Removing Hood Rear Seal

3. Detach the clips (C, D) by carefully pulling the passenger's cowl cover (E) upward, and release the
hooks (F) on the passenger's cowl cover from the driver's side, then remove the cover. Take care not
to scratch the body.
4. Disconnect the windshield washer tubes (G).
5. Detach the clips (C, D, H) by carefully pulling the driver's cowl cover (I) upward, then remove the
cover. Take care not to scratch the body.
6. Install the covers in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Make sure the washer tubes are connected securely.
ROOF MOLDING REPLACEMENT

111
 Take care not to damage the windshield.

 Do not use any of metallic tools to remove the roof molding, or you may
chip the edge of the windshield and cracks in the windshield will occur.
 Take care not to bend the roof molding.
MOLDING REPLACEMENT
1. Remove the cowl cover (see COWL COVER REPLACEMENT ).

2. Remove the windshield portion of the roof molding (A).
-1 Carefully insert a plastic trim tool (B) under the molding next to the clip (C).
-2 While pulling the clip portion of the molding up by hand, push each of the eight small hooks
(D) in the numbered sequence shown in Fig. 9 to release the clip from the retainer (E).
Do not try to pry up the clip even if it is hard to release from the retainer.
-3 Gradually work your way up to release each of the upper clips (F, G, H).
-4 Slide the molding off the lower clip (I).
-5 Rotate the lower clip to remove it.
111
Fig. 9: Removing Windshield Portion Of Roof Molding

3. Pull up and slide the middle portion (A) of the roof molding to release it from the retainers (B).
111
Fig. 10: Sliding Middle Portion Of Roof Molding (2-Door)

111
Fig. 11: Sliding Middle Portion Of Roof Molding (4-Door)

4. Pull up the front portion of roof molding.

5. Pull up and release the rear end of the roof molding (A) from the pin (B), then remove the roof
molding (C).
111
Fig. 12: Releasing Rear End Of Roof Molding From Pin

6. Install the molding in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Make sure the roof molding is installed securely.
 Check if the clip is damaged or stressed whitened, and if necessary, replace it with new one.
RETAINER REPLACEMENT (4-DOOR ADHESIVE TYPE)
1. Gradually scrape off the adhesive tape (A) under the retainers (B) while heating it with a heat gun.
NOTE:  Do not heat the painted body surface around the retainers too much.
 To keep the exterior resin parts near the A-pillar from being overheated
by the heat gun, wrap them with aluminum foil.
111
Fig. 13: Scraping Off Adhesive Tape Under Retainers

2. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease,
3. Install the upper retainers (A) and the lower retainers (B).
-1 Peel the adhesive backing away from the upper and lower retainers.
-2 Line up the retainers with the alignment marks (C) on the body, and attach the retainers with
adhesive tape (D) (3M 9259, or equivalent).
111
-3 Apply epoxy two-part mixing adhesive (E) around the edge of the retainers as shown below.
Fig. 14: Installing Upper And Lower Retainers

RETAINER REPLACEMENT (T-STUD TYPE)
1. While prying the middle hooks (A) with a flat-tip screwdriver, slide the upper retainers (B) and lower
retainers (C) upward to release them from the T-studs (D) on the A-pillar. Take care not to scratch the
body.
111
Fig. 15: Sliding Upper Retainers And Lower Retainers (2-Door)

111
Fig. 16: Sliding Upper Retainers And Lower Retainers (4-Door)

2. Install the retainers in the reverse order of removal.
DOOR MOLDING REPLACEMENT

4-DOOR
111
 Be careful not to pry too far or you may bend the molding.
1. Prepare to release the molding clips from inside the vehicle.

 To remove the front door molding, remove the front door panel (see FRONT DOOR PANEL
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ) and plastic cover.
 To remove the rear door molding, remove the rear door panel (see REAR DOOR PANEL
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ) and plastic cover.
2. Release the clips (A) and gently pry the front door molding (B) or rear door molding (C) away from
the door while separating the adhesive tape (D, E, F).
Fig. 17: Removing Front & Rear Door Moldings While Separating Adhesive Tape
3. Install the moldings in the reverse order or removal, and check the clips for damage or stress-
whitening, and replace them with new ones and adhesive tape.
SIDE SILL PANEL REPLACEMENT

111
1. Remove the side sill panel.

-1 On the back of the wheel Arch, remove the screws. If equipped, remove the front splash
guard (A).
-2 Remove the expansion clips (B).
-3 Pull the inner fender (C) back as necessary, and slide the side sill panel (D) forward, and
remove it. The side clips (E) will stay in the body.
-4 Remove the side clips from the body.
Fig. 18: Removing Side Sill Panel

2. Check if the clip is damaged or stress whitened, and if necessary, replace it with new one.
3. Install the side clips on the side sill panel.
4. Hold the panel up, and fit all the side clips into the holes in the body, then push on the panel until the
clips snap into place.
5. Install all the expansion clips.
6. Reinstall the inner fender (and splash guard).
REAR LICENSE TRIM REPLACEMENT

111
1. On the inside of the trunk lid, remove the nuts (A), and release the clips (B, C, D), then remove the
rear license trim (E). Take care not to scratch the trunk lid.
Fig. 19: Removing Rear License Trim

2. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and check if the clip is damaged or stress-whitened,
'06-07 MODEL 4-DOOR
1. Remove the trunk lid trim (see 4-DOOR ).

2. From inside the trunk lid, disconnect back-up connectors (A), then remove the nuts.
111
Fig. 20: Disconnecting Back-Up Connectors

3. On the inside of the trunk lid, release the clips (A, B, C), then remove the rear license trim (D). Take
care not to scratch the trunk lid.
111
Fig. 21: Removing Clips And Rear License Trim

TRUNK LID SPOILER REPLACEMENT

'05 MODEL 2-DOOR (CANADA)
1. Remove the trunk trim panel (see 2-DOOR ).

2. From inside the trunk, remove the bolts and nuts.
111
Fig. 22: Removing Trunk Bolts And Nuts

3. Install the spoiler in the order of removal.
EMBLEM/STICKER REPLACEMENT
2-DOOR
NOTE: When removing the emblems/sticker, take care not to scratch the body.
1. Clean the body surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water
111
from getting on the surface.

2. Apply the emblems/sticker where shown below. When installing the LEV/ULEV/PZEV ('05-07
models) sticker on the inside surface of the quarter glass, align the sticker application tape with the
edge of the black ceramic and the alignment mark on the quarter glass, then press the sticker into
place, and remove the application tape.
Fig. 23: Applying Emblem/Sticker (2-Door Models)

2. Apply the emblems/sticker where shown below. When installing the LEV/ULEV/SULEV ('03-05
111
models)/ZEV/PZEV/AT-PZEV ('05-07 models) sticker on the inside surface of the rear door quarter
glass, align the rear edge of the application tape and bottom of the sticker with the glass mark, then
press the sticker into place, and remove the application tape.
Fig. 24: Applying Emblem/Sticker (2003-05 Models 4-Door)

'06-07 MODEL 4-DOOR
2. Apply the emblems/sticker where shown below. When installing the LEV/ZEV/PZEV/AT-PZEV
sticker on the inside surface of the rear door quarter glass, align the rear edge of the application tape
and bottom of the sticker with the glass mark, then press the sticker into place, and remove the
application tape.
111
Fig. 25: Applying Emblem/Sticker (2006 Model 4-Door)

111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Interior Trim - Accord
Interior Trim - Accord

2-DOOR
Fig. 1: Locating Components Of Interior Trim (2-Door)

4-DOOR
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:13:21
Fig. 2: Locating Components Of Interior Trim (4-Door)

TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION - DOOR AREA

2-DOOR - DOOR SILL AREA

 Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels.
1. Left side: Remove the foot rest (see step 5 in CARPET REPLACEMENT ).
2. Left side: Remove the front side cap from the door sill trim, and remove the opener lock cylinder and
bolt (see TRUNK LID OPENER/FUEL FILL DOOR OPENER REPLACEMENT ).
3. Detach the hooks (A) and tabs (B) from the kick panel (C) and side trim panel (D), and pull the door
sill trim (E) up by hand to detach the clips (F), then remove it.
111
Fig. 3: Detaching Hooks & Tabs From Kick Panel And Side Trim Panel
111
4. Disconnect the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable (G) from the opener (H).
5. If necessary, pull the side outer trim (I) up to detach the clips (J), then remove the trim.
6. Remove the left kick panel (A) or the right kick panel (B).
-1 Pull out the door opening trim (C) as needed from the kick panel hooks (D) and the door
opening flange.
-2 Left side: Pull the hood release handle, and hold it.
-3 Pull the kick panel back by hand to detach the clips (E, F, G), then remove it.
111
Fig. 4: Removing Left Kick Panel Or Right Kick Panel

7. Pull out the door opening trim (A) from the trim hooks (B) and around the door opening flange, then
remove the trim.
111
Fig. 5: Removing Door Opening Trim From Trim Hooks Around Door Opening Flange
8. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Push the clips and hooks into place securely.
 Make sure the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable is connected securely.
4-DOOR - FRONT DOOR SILL AREA
NOTE:
111

1. Left side: Remove the footrest (see step 5 in CARPET REPLACEMENT ).

2. Left side: Remove the front side cap from the front door sill trim, and remove the opener lock cylinder
and bolt (see TRUNK LID OPENER/FUEL FILL DOOR OPENER REPLACEMENT ).
3. Detach the hooks (A) and tabs (B) from the kick panel (C) and B-pillar lower trim (D), and pull the
front door sill trim (E) up by hand to detach the clips (F) or (G), then remove it.
111
Fig. 6: Detaching Hooks & Tabs From Kick Panel And B-Pillar Lower Trim
4. Disconnect the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable (H) from the opener (I).
5. If necessary, pull the front side outer trim (J) up to detach the clips (K), then remove the trim.
111
6. Remove the left kick panel (A) or the right kick panel (B).
-1 Pull out the door opening trim (C) as needed from the kick panel hooks (D) and the door
opening flange.
-2 Left side: Pull the hood release handle, and hold it.
-3 Pull the kick panel back by hand to detach the clips (E, F, G), then remove it.
111
Fig. 7: Removing Left Kick Panel Or Right Kick Panel

111
7. Pull out the front door opening trim (A) from the trim hooks (B) and around the front door opening
flange, then remove the trim.
Fig. 8: Removing Front Door Opening Trim

111
 Make sure the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener cable is connected securely.
4-DOOR - REAR DOOR SILL AREA

1. Detach the hook (A) and tab (B) from the B-pillar lower trim (C), and pull the rear door sill trim (D)
up by hand to detach the clips (E), then remove it.
111
Fig. 9: Detaching Hooks And Tabs From B-Pillar Lower Trim

111
2. If necessary, pull the rear side outer trim (F) up to detach the clips (G), then remove the trim.
3. Pull out the rear door opening trim (A) from the trim hooks (B) and around the rear door opening
flange, then remove the trim.
111
Fig. 10: Removing Rear Door Opening Trim
111
TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION - PILLAR AREA

A-PILLAR - WITHOUT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('03-04 MODELS)

1. Pull out the door opening trim (A) as needed. Pull the upper portion of the A-pillar trim (B) back by
hand to detach the clips, and pull the trim up, then remove it from the dashboard (C).
NOTE: The 2-door is shown, the 4-door is similar.
111
Fig. 11: Pulling Out Door Opening Trim

 Push the clips into place securely.
111
2-DOOR-B-PILLAR - WITHOUT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('03-04 MODELS)


 C-pillar trim, front portion as needed (see 2-DOOR-C-PILLAR - WITHOUT SIDE
 Side trim panel, upper portion as needed (see TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION - REAR
SIDE AREA )
 Door opening trim, as needed (see step 7 in 2-DOOR - DOOR SILL AREA )
2. Remove the front seat belt upper anchor bolt (see step 6 in FRONT SEAT BELT - 2-DOOR ).
3. Remove the B-pillar upper trim (A).
-1 Remove the clip (B) from the seat belt guide (C).
-2 Pull out the trim by hand to detach the clips (D), and to release the hooks (E) in the
numbered sequence shown in Fig. 12.
111
Fig. 12: Removing B-Pillar Upper Trim

111
 Apply medium strength liquid thread lock to the front seat belt upper anchor bolt before
reinstallation (see step 9 in FRONT SEAT BELT - 2-DOOR ).
 Before installing the anchor bolt, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the seat belt.
 When installing the side trim panel, make sure the seat belt is not pinched.
4-DOOR - B-PILLAR - WITHOUT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('03-04 MODELS)


 Front door opening trim, as needed (see step 7 in 4-DOOR - FRONT DOOR SILL AREA )
 Rear door opening trim, as needed (see step 3 in 4-DOOR - REAR DOOR SILL AREA )
2. Remove the B-pillar lower trim (A).

-1 Detach the lower clips by pulling the bottom of the trim back by hand.
-2 Pull the trim down to release the upper hooks (B).
111
Fig. 13: Removing B-Pillar Lower Trim

3. Remove the upper anchor cover, and remove the upper anchor bolt (see step 7 in FRONT SEAT
BELT - 4-DOOR ).
-1 Pull the bottom of the trim back by hand to detach the lower clip.
111
-2 Detach the upper clip by pulling the top of the trim.

111

reinstallation (see step 12 on FRONT SEAT BELT - 4-DOOR ).
2-DOOR-C-PILLAR - WITHOUT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('03-04 MODELS)

1. Remove the rear seat cushion (see REAR SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).

2. Remove the rear seat belt lower anchor bolt (see step 2 in REAR SEAT BELT REPLACEMENT ).
3. Left side: Pull the coat hanger (A) down, and remove the coat hanger cover (B) by releasing the hook
(C), then remove the screw (D).
Right side: Remove the right C-pillar cap (E) by releasing the hooks (F), then remove the screw (G).
111
Fig. 15: Pulling & Removing Coat Hanger Cover Releasing Hook (Left Side)
111
Fig. 16: Removing Right C-Pillar Cap Releasing Hooks (Right Side)
4. Remove the C-pillar trim (A).

-1 Pull the front edge of the trim down to detach the hooks (B) and clips (C) from the B-pillar
upper trim (D).
-2 Pull out the trim to detach the clips (E).
-3 Pull out the bottom portion of the trim to detach the hooks (F) from the rear shelf (G) and the
side trim panel (H).
-4 Pass the rear seat belt (I) out through the slit in the trim.
111
Fig. 17: Removing C-Pillar Trim

 Apply medium strength liquid thread lock to the anchor bolt before reinstallation (see step 6 in
REAR SEAT BELT REPLACEMENT ).
111
 Before installing the anchor bolt, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the belt.
4-DOOR-C-PILLAR - WITHOUT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('03-04 MODELS)


 Rear seat side bolster (see 4-DOOR )
2. Pull the C-pillar trim (A) back by hand to detach the clips, then remove it.
111
Fig. 18: Pulling C-Pillar Trim Back To Detach Clips

111
A-PILLAR - WITH SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('04-07 MODELS)

1. Remove the A-pillar trim (A).

-1 Pull out the door opening trim (B) as needed.
-2 Pry the A-pillar cap (C) out until it is stopped by the hooks (D). Release the hooks and pull
the cap out of the grommet (E). Discard the cap.
-3 Pull the trim back by hand to detach the clip, then pull the trim up.
NOTE: The 2-door is shown, the 4-door is similar.
111
111
Fig. 19: Removing A-Pillar Trim

 Do not reuse the A-pillar cap; always replace it.
 If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the A-pillar trim with a new one.
 To prevent the side curtain airbag from accidentally deploying, removed trim pieces should be
checked for these types of damage:
-Any cracks, deformations, or press-whitenings in the A-pillar trim (A)
-Any cracks, or press-whitenings in the grommet and clip seating surfaces (B)
-Bent or broken grommet (C)
 Replace any damaged parts with new ones.
 Make sure the top of the trim overlaps with the headliner correctly (see CHECKING AND
ADJUSTING THE HEADLINER/PILLAR TRIM OVERLAP ).
111
Fig. 20: Installing A-PILLAR - With Side Curtain Airbags ('04-07 Models)
2-DOOR - B-PILLAR - WITH SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('04-07 MODELS)
111


 C-pillar trim, front portion as needed (see 2-DOOR -C-PILLAR - WITH SIDE CURTAIN
 Side trim panel, upper portion as needed (see TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION - REAR
SIDE AREA )
 Door opening trim, as needed (see step 7 in 2-DOOR - DOOR SILL AREA )
2. Remove the front seat belt upper anchor bolt (see step 6 in FRONT SEAT BELT - 2-DOOR ).
-1 Remove the clip (B) from the seat belt guide (C).
-2 Pull out the trim by hand to detach the clips (D), and to release the hooks (E) from the side
curtain airbag B-pillar bracket (F) in the numbered sequence.
111

 If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the B-pillar upper trim with new one.
111

-Any cracks or deformations in the B-pillar upper trim (A) and the upper hooks (B), and
any press-whitenings in the upper part of the trim
-Any cracks or press-whitenings in the clip seating surface (C)
 Make sure the trim hooks are installed into the holes in the side curtain airbag B-pillar bracket
securely.
 When installing the side trim panel, make sure the seat belt is not pinched.
111
111
Fig. 22: Installing B-Pillar Upper Trim

4-DOOR - B-PILLAR - WITH SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('04-07 MODELS)


 Front door opening trim, as needed (see step 7 in 4-DOOR - FRONT DOOR SILL AREA )
2. Remove the B-pillar lower trim (A).

-1 Detach the lower clips by pulling the bottom of the trim back by hand.
111
Fig. 23: Removing B-Pillar Lower Trim

111
3. Remove the upper anchor cover, and remove the upper anchor bolt (see step 7 in FRONT SEAT
BELT - 4-DOOR ).
-1 Pull the bottom of the trim back by hand to detach the lower clip.
-2 Detach the upper clip by pulling the top of the trim.
-3 Pull the trim down to release the upper hooks (B) from the side curtain airbag B-pillar
bracket (C).
111

111
 If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the B-pillar upper trim with a new one.
checked for these kinds of damage:
-Any cracks or deformations in the B-pillar upper trim (A) and the upper hooks (B), and
any press-whitenings in the upper part of the trim
-Any cracks or deformations in the B-pillar lower trim (C), and any breakages in the part
(D) fitted with the B-pillar upper trim
-Any cracks or press-whitenings in the clip seating surfaces (E)
 Check the clips for damage or stress-whitening, and if necessary, replace them with new ones.
 Make sure the trim hooks are installed into the holes in the side curtain airbag B-pillar bracket
securely.
111
Fig. 25: Installing B-Pillar Upper Trim

111
2-DOOR - C-PILLAR - WITH SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('04-07 MODELS)

1. Remove the rear seat cushion (see 2-DOOR ).

2. Remove the rear seat belt lower anchor bolt (see step 2 in REAR SEAT BELT - 2-DOOR ).
3. Left side: Pull the coat hanger (A) down, and remove the coat hanger cover (B) by releasing the hook
(C), then remove the screw (D).
Right side: Remove the right C-pillar cap (E) by releasing the hooks (F), then remove the screw (G).
Left side
Fig. 26: Pulling Coat Hanger And Removing Coat Hanger Cover (Left Side)
111
Right side
Fig. 27: Removing Right C-Pillar Cap Releasing Hooks (Right Side)

-1 Pry the C-pillar cap (B) out until it is stopped by the hooks (C). Release the hooks and pull
the cap out of the grommet (D). Discard the cap.
-2 Pull the front edge of the trim down to detach the hooks (E) and clips (F) from the B-pillar
upper trim (G).
-3 Pull out the trim to detach the clips (H).
-4 Pull out the bottom portion of the trim to detach the hooks (I) from the rear shelf (J) and the
side trim panel (K).
111
-5 Pass the rear seat belt (L) out though a slit in the trim.
111

 Do not reuse the C-pillar cap; always replace it.
 If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the C-pillar trim with new one.
-Any cracks, deformations, or press-whitenings in the C-pillar trim (A)
-Any cracks, or press-whitenings in the grommet and clip seating surfaces (B)
-Bent or broken grommet (C)
 Apply medium strength liquid thread lock to the anchor bolt before reinstallation (see step 6 in
REAR SEAT BELT - 2-DOOR ).
111
Fig. 29: Installing 2-Door - C-Pillar - With Side Curtain Airbags ('04-07 Models)
4-DOOR - C-PILLAR - WITH SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('04-07 MODELS)
111


 Rear seat side bolster (see 4-DOOR )

-1 Pry the C-pillar cap (B) out until it is stopped by the hooks (C). Release the hooks and pull
the cap out of the grommet (D). Discard the cap.
-2 Pull the C-pillar trim back by hand to detach the clips, then remove the trim.
111

 Do not reuse the C-pillar cap; always replace it.
 If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the C-pillar trim with new one.
checked for these kinds of damage:
 -Any cracks, deformations, or press-whitenings in the C-pillar trim (A)
 -Any cracks, or press-whitenings in the grommet and clip seating surfaces (B)
 -Bent or broken grommet (C)
111
Fig. 31: Installing 4-Door - C-Pillar - With Side Curtain Airbags ('04-07 Models)
TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION - REAR SIDE AREA
111
2-DOOR


 Rear seat-back and seat cushion (see REAR SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION )
 Door sill trim, as needed (see TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION - DOOR AREAS )
 C-pillar trim, without side curtain airbags (see 2-DOOR - C-PILLAR - WITHOUT SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('03-04 MODELS) ), with side curtain airbags (see 2-DOOR - C-
 Rear bulkhead cover (see step 2 in 2-DOOR )
 Rear speaker grille (see step 4 in 2-DOOR )
 Rear shelf, as needed (see step 5 in 2-DOOR )
2. Remove the side trim panel (A).

-1 Remove the clip (B).
-2 Pull out the front upper edge of the trim panel by hand to release the hooks (C) from the B-
pillar upper trim (D).
-3 Pull the trim panel back by hand to detach the clips (E).
-4 While pulling the rear shelf (F) up, pull the trim panel out and forward to release it from the
rear clip (G).
111
Fig. 32: Removing Side Trim Panel

 Before reinstalling the side trim panel, remove the remaining rear clip from the body, and install
in on the side trim panel.
111
 Make sure there are no twists or kinks in the seat belt and that it is not pinched by the side trim
panel.
TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION - REAR SHELF AREA

2-DOOR

1. Remove the C-pillar trim from both sides, without side curtain airbags (see 2-DOOR - C-PILLAR -
WITHOUT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('03-04 MODELS) ), with side curtain airbags (see 2-
DOOR - C-PILLAR - WITH SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('04-07 MODELS) ).
2. Remove the rear bulkhead cover (A).
-1 Pull the upper edge of the cover back to detach the hooks (B) and clips.
-2 Pull the bottom edge of the cover back to detach the hooks (C) from the body flange.
111
Fig. 33: Removing Rear Bulkhead Cover

3. '03-05 models: Remove the high mount brake light (A).

-1 From the trunk compartment, disconnect the high mount brake light bulb socket (B).
-2 Push the high mount brake light towards the rear window, and gently pry up at the back to
release the front hooks (C).
-3 Release the rear hooks (D), then remove the high mount brake light.
111
Fig. 34: Removing High Mount Brake Light ('03-05 Models)

4. From both sides, pull the rear speaker grille (A) up to detach the clips, then remove the rear speaker
grille.
111
Fig. 35: Pulling Rear Speaker Grille Up

5. Remove the rear shelf (A).

-1 From the trunk compartment, release the hooks (B) from the rear seat-back lock cylinder (C),
then remove the lock cylinder trim (D).
-2 Lift the rear shelf to detach the clips.
-3 Release both rear corner edges (E) of the rear shelf from the rear window opening flange (F),
and pull the rear shelf toward the front of the vehicle.
111
Fig. 36: Removing Rear Shelf ('03-05 Model)

111
Fig. 37: Removing Rear Shelf ('06-07 Model)

6. Pull the rear center seat belt (G) out through the slit (H) in the rear shelf.
111
7. Install the shelf in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 When installing the rear shelf, slip the rear center seat belt through the slit in the rear shelf.
 Make sure the high mount brake light bulb socket is connected securely.
4-DOOR

1. Remove the C-pillar trim from both sides, without side curtain airbags (see 4-DOOR - C-PILLAR -
DOOR - C-PILLAR - WITH SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('04-07 MODELS) ).
2. Remove the rear bulkhead cover (A).
-1 Pull the upper edge of the cover back to detach the hooks (B) and clips.
-2 Pull the bottom edge of the cover back to release the cover from the body flange.
111
Fig. 38: Removing Rear Bulkhead Cover

3. '03-05 models: Remove the high mount brake light (A).

-1 From the trunk compartment, disconnect the high mount brake light bulb socket (B).
-2 Push the high mount brake light towards the rear window, and gently pry up at the back to
release the front hooks (C).
-3 Release the rear hooks (D), then remove the high mount brake light.
111
Fig. 39: Removing High Mount Brake Light ('03-05 Models)

4. From both sides, pull the rear speaker grille (A) up to detach the clips (B, C), then remove the rear
speaker grille.
111
Fig. 40: Pulling Rear Speaker Grille Up

5. Remove the rear shelf (A).

-1 Pull the lock cylinder trim (B) up to release the hooks (C), then remove the trim from the rear
seat-back lock cylinder (D).
-2 Lift the rear shelf to detach the clips.
-3 Pull the rear shelf toward the front of the vehicle.
111
Fig. 41: Removing Rear Shelf ('03-5 Models)

111
Fig. 42: Removing Rear Shelf ('06-07 Models)

6. Pull both rear seat belts (E) and rear center seat belt (F) out through the slits (G) in the rear shelf.
7. Install the shelf in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
111
 When installing the rear shelf, slip the rear seat belts and center seat belt through the slits in the
rear shelf.
 Make sure the high mount brake light bulb socket is connected securely.
TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION - TRUNK AREA

2-DOOR

1. Remove the clip, then remove the spare tire lid (A).
Fig. 43: Removing Spare Tire Lid

111
2. Detach the clips, and release the hooks (A) by pulling the trunk rear trim panel (B) up, then remove it.
Fig. 44: Detaching Clips And Releasing Hooks Pulling Trunk Rear Trim Panel Up
3. Remove the left trunk side trim panel (A) and the right trunk side trim panel (B).
-1 Right side: Remove the trunk hook (C), the jack cover (D), and the jack (E).
-2 Remove the hook bolts (F) and clips.
-3 Remove the trim panels from the trunk compartment. Left side: Release the trunk lid opener
cable (G) from the slit (H) in the trim panel.
111
Fig. 45: Removing Left & Right Trunk Side Trim Panels
4-DOOR ('03-05 MODELS)

111

2. Detach the clips, and release the hooks (A) by pulling the trunk rear trim panel (B) up, then remove it.
111
Fig. 47: Detaching Clips And Releasing Hooks Pulling Trunk Rear Trim Panel
 -1 Right side: Remove the trunk hook (C), the jack cover (D), and the jack (E).
 -2 Remove the clips.
 -3 Remove the trim panels from the trunk compartment. Left side: Release the trunk lid opener
cable (F) from the slit (G) in the trim panel.
111
4-DOOR ('06-07 MODEL)

111

2. Detach the clips (A, B), and release the hooks (C) by pulling the trunk rear trim panel (D) up, then
remove it.
111
Fig. 50: Detaching Clips And Releasing Hooks Pulling Trunk Rear Trim Panel Up
-1 Right side: Remove the trunk hook (C), the jack cover (D), and the jack (E).
-2 Remove the clips.
-3 Remove the trim panels from the trunk compartment. Left side: Release the trunk lid opener
cable (F) from the slit (G) in the trim panel.
111
TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION - TRUNK LID

2-DOOR

 Take care not to bend or scratch the trim.
1. Using the appropriate tool from the KTC tool set, detach the clips (A, B, C), then remove the trunk lid
111
trim (D). Take care not to scratch the trunk lid.
Fig. 52: Detaching Clips And Removing Trunk Lid Trim

4-DOOR

 Take care not to bend or scratch the trim.
1. Using the appropriate tool from the KTC tool set, detach the clips (A, B, C), then remove the trunk lid
trim (D). Take care not to scratch the trunk lid.
111
Fig. 53: Detaching Clips And Removing Trunk Lid Trim

HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
prevent damage.
 Take care not to bend or scratch the headliner.
111
 Be careful not to damage the dashboard and other interior trim.

 A-pillar trim, both sides, 2-door without side curtain airbag (see A-PILLAR - WITHOUT
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('03-04 MODELS) ), 2-door with side curtain airbag (see A-
PILLAR - WITH SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('04-07 MODELS) ), 4-door without side
curtain airbag (see A-PILLAR - WITHOUT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('03-04
MODELS) ) or 4-door with side curtain airbag (see A-PILLAR - WITH SIDE CURTAIN
 Ceiling light (see CEILING LIGHT REPLACEMENT )
 Front seat belt upper anchor, both sides, 2-door (see step 7 in FRONT SEAT BELT - 2-
DOOR ), 4-door (see step 7 in FRONT SEAT BELT - 4-DOOR )
 B-pillar lower trim, 4-door without side curtain airbags (see 4-DOOR - B-PILLAR -
WITHOUT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('03-04 MODELS) ), 4-door with side curtain
airbags (see 4-DOOR - B-PILLAR - WITH SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('04-07
MODELS) )
 B-pillar upper trim, both sides, 2-door without side curtain airbags (see 2-DOOR - B-PILLAR
- WITHOUT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('03-04 MODELS) ), 2-door with side curtain
airbags (see 2-DOOR -B-PILLAR - WITH SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('04-07
MODELS) ), 4-door without side curtain airbags (see 4-DOOR - B-PILLAR - WITHOUT
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('03-04 MODELS) ) or 4-door with side curtain airbags (see 4-
DOOR - B-PILLAR - WITH SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('04-07 MODELS) )
 C-pillar trim, both sides, 2-door without side curtain airbags (see 2-DOOR - C-PILLAR -
WITHOUT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('03-04 MODELS) ), 2-door with side curtain
airbags (see 2-DOOR - C-PILLAR - WITH SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('04-07
MODELS) ), 4-door without side curtain airbags (see 4-DOOR - C-PILLAR - WITHOUT
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('03-04 MODELS) ) or 4-door with side curtain airbags (see 4-
DOOR - C-PILLAR - WITH SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('04-07 MODELS) )
2. From both sides, using a trim tool, release the tabs (A), then turn the sunvisor cap (B), and remove it
from the bracket (C).
111
Fig. 54: Releasing Tabs & Turning Sunvisor Cap

111
3. From both sides, remove the sunvisor (A) and holder (B).
-1 Remove the self-tapping ET screws.
-2 Remove the sunvisor from the body and holder.
-3 If equipped, disconnect the vanity mirror light connector (C).
-4 Using a flat-tip screwdriver, push the hook (D), turn the holder 90°, and then pull it out.
Fig. 55: Removing Sunvisor & Holder

4. Remove the roof console (A).
111
-1 Remove the lens (B).

-2 Remove the bolts (C, D).
-3 Pull out the roof console, and front individual map light (E). Disconnect the front individual
map light connector (F), and if equipped, ambient light connector (G).
Fig. 56: Removing Roof Console

111
5. 4-door: Lower the grab handle, then pry out the lids (A). Remove the self-tapping ET screws, then
remove the grab handle (B). Remove the remaining grab handles.
Fig. 57: Removing Grab Handle

6. With moonroof: Remove the headliner.

-1 4-door: Remove the socket plug (A).
-2 Remove the front door opening trim (B) and rear door opening trim (C) from each roof
portion.
-3 Detach the clip (D) (4-door), and release the fasteners (E) by pulling the front portion of the
headliner (F) down.
-4 With the help of an assistant, detach the rear clips (G) by pulling the rear portion of the
headliner down, and release the headliner from the moonroof frame (H) by sliding the headliner
rearward, and lowering it.
-5 Remove the headliner through the front passenger's door opening.
111
Fig. 58: Removing Headliner (With Moonroof - 2-Door)

111
Fig. 59: Removing Headliner (With Moonroof - 4-Door)

7. Without moonroof: Remove the headliner.

-1 Remove the front door opening trim (A) and rear door opening trim (B) from each roof
portion.
-2 With the help of an assistant, detach the rear clips (C) by pulling the rear portion of the
headliner (D) down.
-3 Remove the cushion tape (E), then remove the roof harness (F) from the headliner.
-4 Remove the headliner through the front passenger's door opening.
111
Fig. 60: Removing Headliner (Without Moonroof - 2-Door)

111
Fig. 61: Removing Headliner (Without Moonroof - 4-Door)

8. 4-door without side curtain airbag: If necessary, remove the bolts, then remove the front grab handle
bracket (A) and rear grab handle brackets (B) from both sides by releasing the hooks (C).
111
Fig. 62: Removing Front And Rear Grab Handle Brackets From Both Sides Releasing Hooks
9. Without side curtain airbag: If necessary, detach the hooks (A) and the clip (B), then remove the front
roof side pad (C) and rear roof side pad (D).
111
Fig. 63: Removing Front And Rear Roof Side Pad (2-door)
111
Fig. 64: Removing Front And Rear Roof Side Pad (4-Door)
10. 4-door with moonroof: If necessary, pull down the roof console bracket (A) to release the clip.
111
Fig. 65: Pulling Down Roof Console Bracket To Release Clip

11. Install the headliner in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 If the side curtain airbag has been deployed, replace the headliner and front grab handle (4-
door) on deployed side with new ones.
 To prevent the side curtain airbag from accidentally deploying, being damaged when deploying,
and injuring persons when deploying, removed trim pieces should be checked for these kinds of
damage:
-Any creases or tears in the headliner (A)
-Any fasteners (B) or clip bases (C) which have come off the headliner
-Any damage around the grab handle holes (D) (4-door) or sunvisor holes (E) in the
111
headliner
-Any deformations in the grab handle (F) (4-door)
-Any cracks in the sunvisor stay base (G)
-Any bends or cracks in the sunvisor stay shaft (H)
-Any cracks in the sunvisor base (I)
-Any cracks in the vanity mirror base (J)
-Any deformations in the grab handle bracket (4-door)
 Make sure the top of the headliner overlaps with the trim pieces correctly (see CHECKING
AND ADJUSTING THE HEADLINER/PILLAR TRIM OVERLAP ).
 When passing the headliner through the door opening, be careful not to fold or bend it. Also, be
careful not to scratch the body.
 4-door: If the threads on a visor or grab handle screw are worn out, use an oversized self-
tapping ET screw made specifically for this application:
Visor: P/N 90137-S30-003
Grab handle: P/N 90137-S0A-003
 Check that both sides of the headliner are securely attached to the trim.
111
Fig. 66: Checking Headliner For Damage (2-door)

111
Fig. 67: Checking Headliner For Damage (4-door)

111
Fig. 68: Checking Grab Handle For Damage (4-door)

111
Fig. 69: Checking Sunvisor For Damage

CARPET REPLACEMENT

 Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the carpet.
 Be careful not to damage the dashboard or other interior trim pieces.
1. With side curtain airbag: Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation
system, then write down the frequencies for the preset buttons.
2. With side curtain airbag: Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes
before beginning work.
111
Front seats, both sides (see FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION )


 Rear seat cushion, 2-door (see 2-DOOR ), 4-door (see 4-DOOR )
 Rear seat side bolsters, both sides, 4-door (see 4-DOOR )
 Front door sill trim, both sides, 2-door (see 2-DOOR - DOOR SILL AREA ) or 4-door (see 4-
DOOR - FRONT DOOR SILL AREA )
 Kick panels, both sides, 2-door (see 2-DOOR - DOOR SILL AREA ) or 4-door (see 4-DOOR
- FRONT DOOR SILL AREA )
 Rear door sill trim, both sides, 4-door (see 4-DOOR - REAR DOOR SILL AREA )
 B-pillar lower trim, 4-door without side curtain airbags (see 4-DOOR - B-PILLAR -
WITHOUT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('03-04 MODELS) ) or 4-door with side curtain
airbags (see 4-DOOR - B-PILLAR - WITH SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('04-07
MODELS) )
 Center console (see CENTER CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION )
 Driver's dashboard center lower cover (see DASHBOARD/STEERING HANGER BEAM

 Passenger's dashboard center lower cover (see step 4 in DASHBOARD/STEERING
HANGER BEAM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION )
 '04-07 models: Driver's dashboard under cover (see DRIVER'S DASHBOARD UNDER
COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION )
 '04-07 models: Passenger's dashboard lower cover (see PASSENGER'S DASHBOARD
LOWER COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION )
 Parking brake lever (see PARKING BRAKE CABLE REPLACEMENT )
4. Remove the front seat belt lower anchor bolt, both sides ('03 model) or passenger's side ('04-07
models), 2-door (see step 4 in FRONT SEAT BELT - 2-DOOR ) or 4-door (see step 4 in FRONT
SEAT BELT - 4-DOOR ).
5. Detach the clips, then remove the footrest (A).
111
Fig. 70: Removing Footrest

6. M/T model: Remove the bolts, then remove the center console bracket (A).
111
Fig. 71: Removing Center Console Bracket

7. Disconnect the antenna lead (A) and antenna connector (B). If equipped, disconnect the side curtain
airbag subharness connector (C). Detach the harness clips (D), and using a T30 Torx bit, remove the
ground bolt (E).
111
Fig. 72: Disconnecting Antenna Lead & Connector (A/T Model Only)
8. Remove the bolts securing the change lever bracket or select lever bracket (A).
111
Fig. 73: Removing Change Lever Bracket Or Select Lever Bracket Bolts
9. Two-piece type: Release the clips (A) fastening the front carpet (B) and rear carpet (C).
One-piece type: Release the clip (A) from middle of the carpet (D).
111
Fig. 74: Releasing Fastening Clips From Front And Rear Carpet (Two-Piece Type)
111
Fig. 75: Releasing Clip From Middle Of Carpet (One-Piece Type)

10. Release the hooks (E) with a flat-tip screwdriver; push the screwdriver toward the door, then lift
upward. Remove the fastener (F), and then remove the carpet (one-piece type) or the front and rear
carpets (two-piece type).
11. Install the carpet(s) in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the carpet.
 Make sure the seat harnesses are routed correctly.
 Replace the clip if it is damaged.
With side curtain airbags:
111

 Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's
radio station presets.
111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Frame - Accord
Frame - Accord
MIDDLE CROSS-MEMBER GUSSET REPLACEMENT

2-DOOR
1. Remove the side trim panel (see TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION - REAR SIDE AREA ).
2. Pull back the rear part of the carpet, as necessary.
3. Detach the floor wire harness clip (A), and remove seat cushion clip (B).
Fig. 1: Detaching Floor Wire Harness Clip

111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:14:08
4. Remove the bolts (C, D) and nut (E), then remove the middle cross-member gusset (F).
5. Install the gusset in the reverse order of removal. When installing the mounting bolts for the middle
cross-member gusset (A), torque the mounting hardware in the sequence shown below. If the
mounting bolts are not torqued in this sequence, damage to the quarter panel will occur.
Fig. 2: Installing Middle Cross-Member Gusset Bolts

FRAME STIFFENER REPLACEMENT
111
Fig. 3: Identifying Frame Stiffener

SUBFRAME REPLACEMENT
FRONT SUBFRAME TORQUE
After removing the subframe mounting bolts, front suspension subframe middle mounting rubber mounting
bolts, front suspension subframe rear bracket mounting bolts, and front suspension subframe rear damper
front mounting bolt, be sure to replace them with new ones.
111
Fig. 4: Tightening Front Subframe

FRONT SUBFRAME ALIGNMENT
NOTE:  Before removing the subframe, make an alignment mark for the front
suspension subframe rear bracket as shown below.
 When installing, align both installation reference holes in the subframe
with both reference holes in the body using a screwdriver or tapered
punch as a guide.
 After mounting the subframe and brackets loosely, align the reference
marks with the edge of the rear brackets then tighten all bolts.
111
Fig. 5: Aligning Front Subframe

REAR SUBFRAME TORQUE
After removing the subframe mounting bolts, be sure to replace them with new ones.
111
Fig. 6: Tightening Rear Subframe

FRAME REPAIR CHART

2-DOOR TOP VIEW
111
Fig. 7: Frame Repair Chart (2-Door Top View - 1 Of 2)

111

4-DOOR TOP VIEW
111

111

SIDE VIEW
111
Fig. 11: Frame Repair Chart (Side View - 1 Of 2)

111
Fig. 12: Frame Repair Chart (Side View - 2 Of 2)

111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Moonroof - Accord
Moonroof - Accord

2-DOOR
Fig. 1: Identifying Moonroof Component Location (2-Door)

4-DOOR
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:14:46
Fig. 2: Identifying Moonroof Component Location (4-Door)


2-DOOR
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX (2-DOOR)

Symptom Diagnostic procedure
1. Check for a clogged drain tube.

2. Check for a gap between the glass
111
weatherstrip and the roof panel.

3. Check for a defective or an improperly
Water leaks from moonroof installed glass weatherstrip or drain channel.
4. Check for a gap between the drain seal and
the roof panel.
Check for excessive clearance between the glass
Wind noise from moonroof
1. Check for a loose motor.
Motor noise from moonroof 2. Check for a worn gear or bearing.
3. Check for a deformed cable assembly.
1. Check for a defective gear or inner cable.
2. Check for foreign matter stuck between the
guide rail and the slider.
Moonroof glass does not move, but motor turns
3. Check for a loose inner cable.
4. Make sure the cable assembly is attached
properly.
1. Check for a blown fuse.
Moonroof glass does not move and motor does
2. Check for a faulty moonroof switch.
not turn (glass can be moved with moonroof
wrench) 3. Check for a run down battery.
4. Check for a defective motor control unit.
Moonroof glass does not stop at proper flush 1. Perform moonroof calibration.
closed position 2. Check glass height adjustment.
Moonroof glass moves in a jerking motion
(moves 40 mm, stops for 0.4 seconds, and Perform moonroof calibration.
repeats)
During auto close operation, moonroof glass Check for dirt and debris in the track. Perform
reverses when no object is trapped moonroof calibration.
Moonroof glass moves, but there is no Auto Reprogram moonroof motor (see MOONROOF
function CALIBRATION ).
4-DOOR
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX (4-DOOR)

1. Check for a clogged drain tube.
2. Check for a gap between the glass
Water leaks from moonroof 3. Check for a defective or an improperly
installed glass weatherstrip or drain channel.
4. Check for a gap between the drain seal and
the roof panel.
Check for excessive clearance between the glass
Wind noise from moonroof
111
1. Check for a loose motor.

Motor noise from moonroof 2. Check for a worn gear or bearing.
3. Check for a deformed cable assembly.
1. Check for a defective gear or inner cable.
2. Check for foreign matter stuck between the
guide rail and the slider.
Moonroof glass does not move, but motor turns
3. Check for a loose inner cable.
4. Make sure the cable assembly is attached
properly.
1. Check for a blown fuse.
2. Check for a faulty moonroof switch.
Moonroof glass does not move and motor does
3. Check the limit switch.
not turn (glass can be moved with moonroof
wrench) 4. Check for a run down battery.
5. Check for a defective motor.
6. Check for a faulty relay.
GLASS HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT

The roof panel (A) should be even with the glass weatherstrip (B), to within 0+1/-1 mm (0+0.04/-0.04 in.)
all the way around. If not, make the following adjustment:
Fig. 3: Adjusting Glass Height (2-Door)

111
Fig. 4: Adjusting Glass Height (4-Door)

1. 4-door: Remove the bracket cover from each side (see step 3 in Glass Replacement ).
2. Using a T25 Torx bit, loosen the bolts on each side, and adjust the glass (A).
111
Fig. 5: Loosening Bolts On Each Side And Adjust Glass (2-Door)

111
Fig. 6: Loosening Bolts On Each Side And Adjust Glass (4-Door)

3. If necessary, repeat on the opposite side.
GLASS REPLACEMENT
1. Close the glass fully.
2. Slide the sunshade all the way back.
3. 2-door: Turn the slit portions of the molding (A) up. 4-door: Pry out the lid (B), remove the screws
(C), and release the hooks (D), then remove both bracket covers (E).
111
Fig. 7: Turning Slit Portions Of Molding Up (2-Door)

111
Fig. 8: Prying Out Lid Removing Screws And Releasing Hooks (4-Door)
4. Using a T25 Torx bit, remove the bolts (F) from both glass brackets (G).
5. Remove the glass (A) by lifting it up. Do not damage the roof panel.
111
Fig. 9: Removing Glass By Lifting Up

6. Install the glass in the reverse order of the removal, and note these items:
 2-door: Apply medium strength liquid thread lock to the glass mounting bolts before
reinstallation.
 Adjust the glass height alignment.
7. Check for water leaks. Use free-flowing water from a hose without a nozzle. Do not use high-pressure
water.
NOTE: It is normal for some water to seep past the moonroof into the
moonroof frame, and exit out through the drains.
WIND DEFLECTOR REPLACEMENT

2-DOOR
1. Open the glass fully.

2. Remove the screws securing the wind deflector (A).
111
Fig. 10: Removing Wind Deflector Screws

3. Remove the deflector link bases (A) from each side. Twist the wind deflector (B) forward and push it
down, and pass the deflector spring (C) out through the slot of the slide stop (D) on each side, then
remove the wind deflector.
111
Fig. 11: Removing Deflector Link Bases From Each Side

4. Install the deflector in the reverse order of removal, and apply multipurpose grease to both slots where
the deflector springs are installed.
4-DOOR
1. Open the glass fully.

2. Remove the links (A) from both sides.
111
Fig. 12: Removing Links From Both Sides

3. Remove the wind deflector (A).
111
Fig. 13: Removing Wind Deflector

4. Pry up on the deflector bases (A) and release the hooks (B), then remove the bases with springs (C)
from both sides.
111
Fig. 14: Removing Bases With Springs From Both Sides

5. Install the deflector in the reverse order of removal.
DRAIN CHANNEL REPLACEMENT

2-DOOR
1. Remove the glass (see GLASS REPLACEMENT ).

111
2. Move both glass brackets (A) to detach the pins (B) inside from both glass brackets.
Fig. 15: Moving Both Glass Brackets To Detach Pins

3. Turn the drain channel (A) up while sliding it forward to release it from the pins (B) on both drain
channel sliders (C).
111
Fig. 16: Turning Drain Channel Up Sliding Forward To Release From Pins
4. Stand the drain channel (A) upright, and pull up the channel to remove it from both drain channel
sliders (B).
111
Fig. 17: Pulling Up Channel To Remove From Drain Channel Sliders

5. Install the channel in the reverse order of removal, and check the glass height adjustment (see GLASS
HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT ).
6. Check for water leaks. Let the water run freely from a hose without a nozzle. Do not use a high-
pressure spray.
111
4-DOOR
1. Remove the glass (see GLASS REPLACEMENT ).

2. With the moonroof wrench, move both glass brackets (A) to the position where the moonroof
normally tilts up and disconnect the drain channel rods (B) on both sides.
Fig. 18: Disconnecting Drain Channel Rods On Both Sides

3. Slide the drain channel (A) forward.
111
Fig. 19: Sliding Drain Channel Forward

4. Pull the rear edge of the drain channel (A) up while pushing both clips (B), and release the channel
from both hooks (C) of the drain channel slider by pulling it rearward.
111
Fig. 20: Pulling Rear Edge Of Drain Channel Up Pushing Both Clips
5. Remove the drain channel.

6. Install the channel in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Push the clip portions into place securely.
 Check the glass height adjustment (see GLASS HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT ).
pressure spray.
111
SUNSHADE REPLACEMENT
2-DOOR
1. Remove the drain channel (see 2-door ).

2. Remove the screws, then remove the set plate (A) from each side.
Fig. 21: Removing Set Plate From Each Side

111
3. Slide the sunshade (A) until you can see both front sunshade base sliders (B).
Fig. 22: Sliding Sunshade

4. While lifting the front portion of the sunshade (A), move the sunshade forward until you can see both
rear sunshade base sliders (B). Do not damage the sunshade.
111
Fig. 23: Lifting Front Portion Of Sunshade

5. Release both rear sunshade base sliders from the guide rail portions of the frame, then remove the
sunshade.
6. Install the sunshade in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Apply medium strength liquid thread lock to the set plate mounting screws before reinstallation.
 Check the glass height adjustment (see GLASS HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT ).
pressure spray.
4-DOOR
1. Remove the drain channel (see 4-DOOR ).

2. Slide the sunshade (A) until you can see both sunshade slider spacers (B).
111
Fig. 24: Sliding Sunshade

3. Remove the screws, then remove both spacers.

4. While lifting the front portion of the sunshade (A), move the sunshade forward until you can see both
sunshade rear hooks (B). Do not damage the sunshade and hooks.
111
Fig. 25: Lifting Front Portion Of Sunshade

5. Remove the screws, then remove both hooks.

6. Remove the sunshade (A).
111
Fig. 26: Removing Sunshade

7. Remove both front sunshade base sliders (A) and both rear sunshade base sliders (B).
111
Fig. 27: Removing Front & Rear Sunshade Base Sliders

8. Install the sunshade in the reverse order of removal, and check the glass height adjustment (see
GLASS HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT ).
pressure spray.
MOTOR REPLACEMENT
2-DOOR

2. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Disconnect the connector (A), and using a T25 Torx bit, remove
the bolts, then remove the motor (B). Do not operate the motor before reinstallation.
111
Fig. 28: Disconnecting Connector Using T25 Torx Bit

 Apply medium strength liquid thread lock to the motor mounting bolts before reinstallation.
 Make sure the connector is plugged in properly.
 Do the moonroof motor reprogram procedure (see MOONROOF CALIBRATION ).
 Check the motor operation.
4-DOOR

2. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Disconnect the connector (A), and remove the bolts, then remove
111
the motor (B).
Fig. 29: Disconnecting Connector

 Make sure the connector is plugged in properly.
 Check the motor operation.
FRAME AND DRAIN TUBE REPLACEMENT

111

 Headliner (see HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION )
 Moonroof glass (see GLASS REPLACEMENT )
2. 2-door: Remove the moonroof frame (A). Put on gloves to protect your hands.
-Disconnect the motor connector (B), and the drain tubes (C).
-Remove the interior harness (D) by detaching the harness clips (E) and removing the cushion
tape (F).
-With an assistant holding the frame, remove the bolts (G, H) starting at the rear, and release the
rear hooks (I) by moving the frame forward, then remove the frame.
-With the help of an assistant, carefully remove the frame through the door opening. Take care
not to damage the interior trim, body, or seat covers.
Fig. 30: Removing Moonroof Frame (2-Door)

3. 4-door: Remove the moonroof frame (A). Put on gloves to protect your hands.
-Disconnect the motor connector (B), open/close-tilt/close switch connector (C), and the drain
tubes (D), and remove the moonroof relays (E).
-Remove the interior harness (F) by detaching the harness clips (G) and removing the tapes (H).
-With an assistant holding the frame, remove the bolts starting at the rear, and release the rear
hooks (I) by moving the frame forward, then remove the frame.
111
-With the help of an assistant, carefully remove the frame through the front door opening. Take
care not to damage the interior trim, body, or seat covers.
Fig. 31: Removing Moonroof Frame (4-Door)

4. To remove a front drain valve (A) from the body, remove the kick panel, left or right, 2-door (see 2-
DOOR - DOOR SILL AREA ), 4-door (see 4-DOOR - FRONT DOOR SILL AREA ). Tie a string
to the top end of the drain tube, then pull the front drain tube (B) down out of the front pillar.
111
Fig. 32: Removing Front Drain Valve From Body

5. To remove a rear drain valve (A) from the body, remove these parts, 2-door (see 2-DOOR ), 4-door
(see '03-05 MODELS 4-DOOR ):
 Spare tire lid
 Trunk rear trim panel
 Jack lid
Tie a string to the top end of the rear drain tube (B), then pull back the trunk side trim panel and
pull the drain tube down out of the pillar.
111
Fig. 33: Removing Rear Drain Valve From Body

6. Install the frame and drain tube in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Before installing the frame, clear the drain tubes and drain valves using compressed air.
 Check the frame seal.
 Clean the surface of the frame.
 To install a drain tube, tie the top of the tube to the string that was pulled through when the tube
was removed. Use the string to pull the tube up into the roof.
 When installing the frame, first attach the rear hooks into the body holes.
 Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly.
 When installing the rear drain tube at the rear pillar, make sure the cushion on the tube aligns
111
with the hole in the body, and that the alignment mark on the tube aligns with the upper clip.
 When connecting the drain tube, slide it over the frame nozzle at least 10 mm (0.39 in.).
 Install the tube clip (A) on the drain tube (B) as shown in Fig. 34.
Fig. 34: Installing Frame And Drain Tube

pressure spray.
INNER CABLE REPLACEMENT

2-DOOR
1. Remove the frame (see FRAME AND DRAIN TUBE REPLACEMENT ).

 Wind deflector (see WIND DEFLECTOR REPLACEMENT )
 Moonroof motor (see MOTOR REPLACEMENT )
3. Tilt the glass bracket (A) up by sliding the link lifter (B) forward fully.
111
Fig. 35: Tilting Glass Bracket Up Sliding Link Lifter Forward

4. Remove the screws (A, B), then remove the slide stop (C) and the plate (D).
111
Fig. 36: Removing Slide Stop & Plate

5. Slide the glass bracket (A) forward to remove the front slider portion (B) of the bracket out of the
guide rail (C).
111
Fig. 37: Sliding Glass Bracket Forward To Remove Front Slider Portion
6. Remove the glass bracket (A) from the link lifter (B).
111
Fig. 38: Removing Glass Bracket From Link Lifter

7. Pull the slider portion (A) of the inner cable (B) out of the slide rail (C), then remove the inner cable.
111
Fig. 39: Pulling Slider Portion Of Inner Cable Out Of Slide Rail
8. If necessary, remove the drain channel slider (A) by sliding it forward.
111
Fig. 40: Removing Drain Channel Slider

9. Install the slider and cable in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Damaged parts should be replaced.
 Apply multipurpose grease to the glass bracket (A) and guide rail portion of the frame (B)
indicated by the arrows shown in Fig. 41.
 Apply butyl sealant (C) to the frame (D) where the slide stops (E) will be reinstalled with
screws (F).
 Apply medium strength liquid thread lock to the set plate (G) mounting screws (H) before
reinstallation.
 Before reinstalling the motor, slide both glass brackets rearward fully until the slider portions
(I) of the inner cable contact with the screws (J) on the guide rail to align both glass brackets.
 Before reinstalling the motor, install the frame and glass, then check the opening drag (see
CLOSING FORCE AND OPENING DRAG CHECK ).
 After reinstalling the motor, do the moonroof motor reprogram procedure (see MOONROOF
CALIBRATION ).
111
Grease application
Fig. 41: Installing Slider And Cable

Butyl sealant application
111
Fig. 42: Identifying Butyl Sealant Application Surface And Fastener Location
Glass bracket alignment
111
Fig. 43: Identifying Glass Bracket Alignment

DRAIN CHANNEL SLIDER AND CABLE ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT

4-DOOR
1. Remove the frame (see FRAME AND DRAIN TUBE REPLACEMENT ).

2. Remove these parts from the frame:
 Sunshade (see 4-DOOR )
 Moonroof motor (see MOTOR REPLACEMENT )
3. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Remove the screws (A, B) securing the slide stops (C), and cable
tube rear brackets (D), cable tube side bracket mounting bolts (E) and the cable tube mounting screws
(F) from both sides of the frame (G).
111
Fig. 44: Removing Screws Securing Slide Stops

4. Turn both cable tube side brackets (A) up to release the hooks (B) from the holes in both sides of the
frame.
111
Fig. 45: Turning Both Cable Tube Side Brackets To Release Hooks From Holes
5. Pivot the glass brackets (C) down by sliding the lift up sliders (D) back, then slide both glass brackets
back with the lift up sliders.
6. Slide the cable assembly (E) half-way.
7. Remove the slide stops (A) and the drain channel sliders (B) from both sides.
111
Fig. 46: Removing Slide Stops And Draining Channel Sliders

8. Slide the cable assembly (A) and both glass brackets (B) back, remove the deflector sliders (C) from
both glass brackets, then remove them from the frame (D).
111
Fig. 47: Sliding Cable Assembly And Glass Brackets Back

9. Install the slider and cable assembly in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Damaged parts should be replaced.
 Apply multipurpose grease to the glass bracket (A) and guide rail portion of the frame (B)
indicated by the arrows shown in Fig. 48.
 Before reinstalling the motor, make sure both link lifters are parallel, and in the fully closed
position.
 Before reinstalling the motor, install the frame and glass, then check the opening drag (see
CLOSING FORCE AND OPENING DRAG CHECK ).
111
Fig. 48: Installing Slider And Cable

LIMIT SWITCH ADJUSTMENT

4-DOOR
111

2. With the moonroof wrench, close the glass (A) fully:
 Make sure both link lifters (B) are parallel, and in the position shown in Fig. 49.
 Check the glass fit to the roof panel and the glass height (see GLASS HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT ).
Fig. 49: Closing Glass With Moonroof Wrench

3. With an open-end wrench, loosen the limit switch mounting bolts (C).
4. Adjust the limit switch (D):
 Move the switch plate (E) a little at a time, then secure it at the position where you hear a faint
click when the switch cam (F) pushes the limit switch (open/close).
 Check that the switch plate contacts the switch bracket (G).
5. Check the operation of the glass (from the tilt-up position to fully closed position, from the fully open
position to the fully closed position) by operating the moonroof switch: Adjust the switch plate until
the glass opens and closes correctly.
111
6. Reinstall all remaining parts in the reverse order of removal.
CLOSING FORCE AND OPENING DRAG CHECK

2. Closing force check:
 With a shop towel (A) on the leading edge of the glass (B), attach a spring scale (C) as shown in
Fig. 50.
 Have an assistant hold the switch to close the glass while you measure the force required to stop
it.
 Read the force as soon as the glass stops moving, then immediately release the switch and
spring scale.
Fig. 50: Closing Force Check

3. If the force in not within specification, remove the moonroof motor, 2-door (see MOTOR
REPLACEMENT ), 4-door (see MOTOR REPLACEMENT ), then check:
 The gear portion and the inner cable for breakage and damage. If the gear portion is broken,
replace the motor. If the inner cable is damaged, remove the frame (see FRAME AND DRAIN
111
TUBE REPLACEMENT ), and replace the cable, 2-door (see INNER CABLE
REPLACEMENT ), 4-door (see DRAIN CHANNEL SLIDER AND CABLE ASSEMBLY
REPLACEMENT ).
 The moonroof motor, 2-door (see MOONROOF CONTROL UNIT INPUT TEST ), 4-door
(see MOTOR TEST ). If the motor fails to run or doesn't turn smoothly, replace it.
 The opening drag. Go to step 4.
4. Opening drag check: Protect the leading edge of the glass with a shop towel (A). Measure the effort
required to open the glass using a spring scale (B) as shown in Fig. 51.
Fig. 51: Protecting Leading Edge Of Glass With Shop Towel

5. If the load is over 40 N (4 kgf, 9 lbf), check:

 The side clearance and glass height adjustment (see GLASS HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT ).
 For broken or damaged sliding parts. If any sliding parts are damaged, replace them.
6. 2-door: Do the moonroof motor reprogram procedure (see 2-DOOR ) after reinstalling the moonroof
motor.
111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Power Moonroof - Accord
Power Moonroof - Accord
Fig. 1: Identifying Moonroof Components Location (4-Door)

111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:15:12
Fig. 2: Identifying Moonroof Components Location (2-Door)

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
111
Fig. 3: Moonroof Circuit Diagram (4-Door)

111
Fig. 4: Moonroof Circuit Diagram (2-Door)

LIMIT SWITCH TEST

4-DOOR
111

2. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the moonroof limit switch (B).
Fig. 5: Disconnecting 4P Connector From Moonroof Limit Switch

below.
111
Fig. 6: Checking Continuity Between Terminals In Switch Position Table

4. If the continuity is not as specified, adjust the moonroof limit switch (see LIMIT SWITCH
ADJUSTMENT ). If the continuity is still not as specified, replace the moonroof limit switch.
LIMIT SWITCH REPLACEMENT

4-DOOR

2. Mark the position of the moonroof limit switch (A) on the moonroof frame (B).
111
Fig. 7: Marking Position Of Moonroof Limit Switch On Moonroof Frame

3. Disconnect the 4P connector (C) from the moonroof limit switch.

4. Remove the two mounting bolts (D).
5. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal.
6. Adjust the moonroof limit switch as needed (see LIMIT SWITCH ADJUSTMENT ).
111
SWITCH TEST
NOTE: The moonroof can still be operated for about 10 minutes after the ignition
switch is turned from the "II" to the "I" or "0" positions, as long as none of
the doors are opened. This provides a convenience to parked occupants
while offering a degree of security against unwanted or accidental moonroof
operation.
1. Carefully push out the moonroof switch (A) from behind the dashboard lower cover, then disconnect
the 6P connector (B) from the switch.
111
Fig. 8: Disconnecting 6P Connector From Switch

below.
Fig. 9: Checking Continuity Between Terminals In Each Switch Position Table

3. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulb (C) or the switch.
MOTOR TEST
4-DOOR

2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the moonroof motor.
111
Fig. 10: Disconnecting 2P Connector From Moonroof Motor

3. Check the motor by connecting power and ground according to the table shown below.
111
Fig. 11: Checking Motor Connecting Power And Ground Table

4. If the motor does not run, replace it.
NOTE: See closing force check (see CLOSING FORCE AND OPENING DRAG
CHECK ) for motor clutch test.
MOONROOF CALIBRATION
2-DOOR
NOTE: Moonroof calibration is required if any of the conditions listed below occur:
 The ignition switch is turned OFF while operating the moonroof (pressing the open/close switch). As
a countermeasure, if the ignition switch is returned to the ON (II) position within 10 minutes, and
moonroof operation is continued, calibration will not necessary.
NOTE: If a door is opened during the 10 minutes period, the calibration will be
required.
 The moonroof is manually operated using the moonroof wrench with the battery dead or
disconnected.
 The moonroof motor is replaced with a new one.
 The moonroof motor is removed from the moonroof assembly and operated before it is reinstalled.
MOONROOF GLASS IS POSITIONED IN THE OPEN POSITION (OR PARTIALLY OPEN)
1. Press the moonroof OPEN switch until the moonroof stops in its fully open position.
2. Release the moonroof OPEN switch.
3. Press the moonroof OPEN switch again for about 13 seconds.
111
NOTE: Keep pressing the switch even through the moonroof motor continues
to function.
4. Calibration is complete. The moonroof will automatically move to the regular preset fully open
position and come to stop.
MOONROOF GLASS IS POSITIONED IN THE TILT POSITION
1. Press the moonroof OPEN switch until the moonroof glass stops in its fully open position.
3. Press the moonroof OPEN switch for about 13 seconds.
NOTE: Keep pressing the switch even through the moonroof glass will repeat
an inching behavior (moving 40 mm, then stopping for 0.4 seconds)
4. Calibration is complete. The moonroof will automatically move to the regular preset fully open
position and come to stop.
MOONROOF MOTOR IS REPLACED
1. Open the moonroof to its fully open position manually with the moonroof wrench.
2. Remove the moonroof motor (see MOTOR REPLACEMENT ).
NOTE: If you have accidentally moved the moonroof glass after the removal of
the moonroof motor, return the moonroof to its fully open position.
3. Install the new moonroof motor (see MOTOR REPLACEMENT ).

4. Perform the moonroof OPEN position calibration procedure.
5. Within 5 seconds after completion of the moonroof calibration, press the moonroof OPEN switch
again. After 3 seconds the moonroof glass will move toward the fully closed position.
NOTE: The moonroof glass will move toward the fully closed position even
though the open switch is being pressed. Allow it to move until it
reaches the fully closed position.
NOTE: Step 5 is only applicable if a new motor is installed, and must not be
applied to the original motor. The original motor memorized the initial
position data and does not require recalibration.
MOONROOF CONTROL UNIT INPUT TEST

2-DOOR

2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the moonroof control unit (B).
111
Fig. 12: Disconnecting 10P Connector From Moonroof Control Unit

MOONROOF CONTROL UNIT INPUT TEST (RECONNECT CONNECTOR)

Possible cause if
Test: Desired
result
obtained
 Blown No. 28
(20 A) fuse in
the under-dash
Under all to ground:
6 GRN  Faulty under-
conditions There should be
battery voltage. dash fuse/relay
box
 An open in the
wire
Under all
2 BLK to ground: (G501, G601)
conditions
111
less than 1 V. wire
5. Disconnect the connector from the moonroof control unit, and make these input tests at the connector
 If all the inputs prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it.
MOONROOF CONTROL UNIT INPUT TEST (DISCONNECT CONNECTOR)

Possible cause if
Test: Desired
Result
obtained
Check for
continuity
between the No. 3
terminal and the
Under all
3 GRN/BLK multiplex An open in the wire
conditions
integrated control
unit P12 terminal:
There should be
continuity.
Check for
continuity  Faulty
between the No. 3 moonroof
Moonroof switch
4 GRN/ORN and No. 4 switch
in TILT position
terminals:  An open in the
There should be wire
continuity.
Check for
between the No. 3 moonroof
Moonroof switch
5 GRY/BLU and No. 5 switch
in OPEN position
terminals:  An open in the
continuity.
Check for
Moonroof switch between the No. 3 moonroof
10 LT GRN/BLK in CLOSE and No. 10 switch
position terminals:  An open in the
continuity.
111
2003-07 BRAKES ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) - Accord
2003-07 BRAKES
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) - Accord
Fig. 1: Identifying ABS (Anti - Lock Brakes) System Components


ABS INDICATOR
 If the system is OK, the ABS indicator goes off 2 seconds after turning the ignition switch ON (II).
 The ABS indicator comes on when the ABS modulator-control unit detects a problem in the system.
However, even though the system is operating properly, the indicator will come on under these
conditions:
- Only the drive wheels rotate
- One drive wheel is stuck
- The vehicle goes into a spin
- The ABS continues to operate for a long time
- The vehicle is subjected to an electrical signal disturbance
To determine the actual cause of the problem, question the customer about the problem, taking the
conditions into consideration.
 When a problem is detected and the ABS indicator comes on, there are cases when the indicator stays
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:15:47
on until the ignition switch is turned OFF, and cases when the indicator goes off automatically when
the system returns to normal.
- DTC 61 or 62: The ABS indicator goes off automatically when the system returns to normal.
- DTC 11, 13, 15, 17, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 54, 71, or 81: The ABS indicator stays on
until the ignition switch is turned OFF whether or not the system returns to normal.
- DTC 12, 14, 16, 18, 21, 22, 23, 24, 41, 42, 43, 44, 51, 52, or 53: The ABS indicator goes off
after the ignition switch is turned OFF and then back ON (II), the vehicle is driven, and the
system is OK.
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR
The brake system indicator in the gauge control module will come on under these conditions:
 Parking brake lever pulled up

 Low brake fluid in the brake master cylinder reservoir
 ABS modulator-control unit detects a problem that affects the EBD
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
 The memory can hold any number of DTCs. However, when the same DTC is detected more than
once, the more recent DTC is written over the earlier one. Therefore, when the same problem is
detected repeatedly, it is memorized as a single DTC.
 The DTCs are indicated in the order they occurred, beginning with the most recent.
 The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM (nonvolatile memory). Therefore, the memorized DTCs
are not cleared when the battery is disconnected, the ignition switch is turned off, or the system
returns to normal. Do the specified procedures to clear the DTCs.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS
 Self-diagnosis can be classified into two categories:

- Initial diagnosis:
Done right after the ignition switch is turned ON (II) and until the ABS indicator goes off
- Regular diagnosis:
Done right after the initial diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned OFF
 When a problem is detected by self-diagnosis, the system does the following:

- Turns the ABS indicator and possibly the brake system indicator on
- Memorizes the DTC
- Stops ABS operation
KICKBACK
The pump motor operates when the ABS modulator-control unit is functioning, and the fluid in the reservoir
is forced back to the master cylinder, causing kickback at the brake pedal.
111
PUMP MOTOR
 The pump motor operates when the ABS modulator-control unit is functioning.
 The ABS modulator-control unit checks the pump motor operation when the vehicle is driven the first
time after the ignition switch is turned ON (II). You may hear the motor operate at this time, but it is
normal.
HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT DTCS
The troubleshooting flowchart procedures assume that the cause of the problem is still present, and the ABS
indicator and possibly the brake system indicator are still on. Following the flowchart when the ABS
indicator does not come on can result in incorrect diagnosis. The connector illustrations show the female
terminal connectors with a single outline and the male terminal connectors with a double outline.
1. Question the customer about the conditions when the problem occurred, and try to reproduce the same
conditions for troubleshooting. Find out when the ABS indicator and possibly the brake system
indicator came on, such as during ABS control, after ABS control, when the vehicle was at a certain
speed, etc.
2. Clear the code and, test-drive the vehicle. If the code resets immediately, refer to DTC
TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX .
3. When the ABS indicator and possibly the brake system indicator does not come on during the test-
drive, but troubleshooting is done based on the DTC, check for loose connectors, poor terminal
contact, etc., before you start troubleshooting.
4. After troubleshooting, clear the DTC, and test-drive the vehicle. Make sure the ABS indicator and
possibly the brake system indicator does not come on.
HOW TO RETRIEVE DTCS
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the 16P data link
connector (DLC) (A) under the left side of the dashboard.
111
Fig. 2: Connecting HDS To DLC

2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and follow the prompts on the HDS to display the ABS DTC(s) on
the screen. After determining the DTC, refer to DTC TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX .
NOTE: See the HDS Help menu for specific instructions.
HOW TO CLEAR DTCS
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the HDS to the 16P data link connector (DLC) (A) under the
left side of the dashboard.
111

2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and clear the DTC(s) by following the screen prompts on the HDS.
NOTE: See the HDS Help menu for specific instructions.

Brake system
DTC ABS indicator Detection Item Troubleshooting
indicator
(see DTC 11, 13, 15, 17:
Right-front wheel WHEEL SENSOR
ON or OFF (1), sensor (open/short to (OPEN/SHORT TO
11 ON (2) body ground/short to BODY
power) GROUND/SHORT TO
POWER) )
111
(see DTC 12, 14, 16, 18:

Right-front wheel
WHEEL SENSOR
ON or OFF (1), sensor (electrical
12 ON (2) (ELECTRICAL
noise/intermittent
NOISE/INTERMITTENT
interruption)
INTERRUPTION) )
(see DTC 11, 13, 15, 17:
Left-front wheel WHEEL SENSOR
POWER) )
(see DTC 12, 14, 16, 18:
Left-front wheel
WHEEL SENSOR
noise/intermittent
NOISE/INTERMITTENT
interruption)
INTERRUPTION) )
(see DTC 11, 13, 15, 17:
Right-rear wheel WHEEL SENSOR
POWER) )
(see DTC 12, 14, 16, 18:
Right-rear wheel
WHEEL SENSOR
noise/intermittent
NOISE/INTERMITTENT
interruption)
INTERRUPTION) )
(see DTC 11, 13, 15, 17:
Left-rear wheel WHEEL SENSOR
POWER) )
(see DTC 12, 14, 16, 18:
Left-rear wheel
WHEEL SENSOR
noise/intermittent
NOISE/INTERMITTENT
interruption)
INTERRUPTION) )
(see DTC 21, 22:
ON or OFF (1), Right-front magnetic
21 ON (2) MAGNETIC ENCODER
encoder
(FRONT) )
(see DTC 21, 22:
ON or OFF (1), Left-front magnetic
22 ON (2) MAGNETIC ENCODER
encoder
(FRONT) )
ON or OFF (1), (see DTC 23, 24: PULSER
23 ON (2) Right-rear pulser (REAR) )
ON or OFF (1), (see DTC 23, 24: PULSER
24 ON (2) Left-rear pulser (REAR) )
111
(see DTC 31, 32, 33, 34,

31 ON ON Solenoid 35, 36, 37, 38:
SOLENOID )
(see DTC 31, 32, 33, 34,
32 ON ON Solenoid 35, 36, 37, 38:
SOLENOID )
(see DTC 31, 32, 33, 34,
33 ON ON Solenoid 35, 36, 37, 38:
SOLENOID )
(see DTC 31, 32, 33, 34,
34 ON ON Solenoid 35, 36, 37, 38:
SOLENOID )
(see DTC 31, 32, 33, 34,
35 ON ON Solenoid 35, 36, 37, 38:
SOLENOID )
(see DTC 31, 32, 33, 34,
36 ON ON Solenoid 35, 36, 37, 38:
SOLENOID )
(see DTC 31, 32, 33, 34,
37 ON ON Solenoid 35, 36, 37, 38:
SOLENOID )
(see DTC 31, 32, 33, 34,
38 ON ON Solenoid 35, 36, 37, 38:
SOLENOID )
ON or OFF (1), Right-front wheel (see DTC 41, 42, 43, 44:
41 ON (2) WHEEL LOCK )
lock
ON or OFF (1), (see DTC 41, 42, 43, 44:
42 ON (2) Left-front wheel lock WHEEL LOCK )
ON or OFF (1), Right-rear wheel (see DTC 41, 42, 43, 44:
43 ON (2) WHEEL LOCK )
lock
ON or OFF (1), (see DTC 41, 42, 43, 44:
44 ON (2) Left-rear wheel lock WHEEL LOCK )
(see DTC 51: MOTOR

51 ON ON Motor lock
LOCK )
(see DTC 52: MOTOR
52 ON ON Motor stuck OFF
STUCK OFF )
(see DTC 53: MOTOR
53 ON ON Motor stuck ON
STUCK ON )
(see DTC 54: ABS FAIL-
SAFE RELAY; DTC 61:
54 ON ON ABS fail-safe relay
LOW +B-FSR
VOLTAGE )
(see DTC 61: LOW +B-
61 ON ON or OFF Low +B-FSR voltage
FSR VOLTAGE )
High +B-FSR (see DTC 62: HIGH +B-
62 ON ON
voltage FSR VOLTAGE )
111
(see DTC 71:

Different diameter
71 ON ON DIFFERENT
tire
DIAMETER TIRE )
Central processing (see DTC 81: CENTRAL
unit (CPU) PROCESSING UNIT
81 ON ON diagnosis, and (CPU) DIAGNOSIS, AND
ROM/RAM ROM/RAM
diagnosis DIAGNOSIS )
(1) With EBD type.
(2) Braike system indicator turns ON when 2 or more wheel fail.

ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see
ABS indicator does not come on
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING )
ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see ABS
ABS indicator does not go off, and no DTCs
indicator does not go off, and no DTCs are
are stored
stored )
Brake System Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see
Brake system indicator does not come on BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR DOES NOT
COME ON )
Brake System Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see
Brake system indicator does not go off, and no
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR DOES NOT GO
DTCs are stored
OFF, AND NO DTCS ARE STORED )
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ABS MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS FOR 25P CONNECTOR
111
Fig. 4: Identifying ABS Modulator-Control Unit Inputs And Outputs For 25P Connector (1 Of 2)
111
Fig. 5: Identifying ABS Modulator-Control Unit Inputs And Outputs For 25P Connector (2 Of 2)
FEATURES
When the brake pedal is pressed during driving, the wheels can lock before the vehicle comes to a stop. In
such an event, the maneuverability of the vehicle is reduced if the front wheels are locked, and the stability
of the vehicle is reduced if the rear wheels are locked, creating an extremely unstable condition. The ABS
precisely controls the slip rate of the wheels to ensure maximum grip force from the tires, thereby ensuring
the maneuverability and stability of the vehicle.
The ABS calculates the slip rate of the wheels based on the vehicle speed and the wheel speed, then it
controls the brake fluid pressure to reach the target slip rate.
Grip Force of Tire and Road Surface
111
Fig. 6: Grip Force Of Tire And Road Surface Graph

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION CHART

COMPONENTS MAIN FUNCTION
The wheel sensor outputs the
speed signal to the ABS control
Wheel sensor
unit according to the pulser's
rotation speed.
The ABS control unit processes
the signal from the wheel sensors,
ABS control unit
then outputs the ABS control
ABS modulator-control unit signal to the modulator unit.
The modulator unit receives the
Modulator unit control signal, then controls brake
fluid pressure for each wheel.
Motor relay (inside of the ABS control unit) The motor relay drives the ABS
pump motor.
The ABS fail-safe relay cuts the
ABS fail-safe relay (inside of the ABS control unit) power to the solenoid valves
when a problem is detected.
111
Fig. 7: ABS System Description Diagram

ABS CONTROL UNIT
Main Control
The ABS control unit detects the wheel speed based on the wheel sensor signal it received, then it calculates
the vehicle speed based on the detected wheel speed. The control unit detects the vehicle speed during
deceleration based on the rate of deceleration.
The ABS control unit calculates the slip rate of each wheel, and transmits the control signal to the modulator
unit solenoid valve when the slip rate is high.
The hydraulic control has three modes: Pressure reducing, pressure retaining, and pressure intensifying.
111
Fig. 8: Identifying Hydraulic Control Modes

Electronic Brake Distribution (EBD) Control
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) function helps control vehicle braking by adjusting the rear brake
force before the ABS operates. Based on wheel sensor signals, the ABS control unit uses the modulator to
control the rear brakes individually. When the rear wheel speed is less than the front wheel speed, the ABS
control unit retains the current rear brake fluid pressure by closing the inlet valve in the modulator. As the
rear wheel speed increases and approaches the front wheel speed, the control unit increases the rear brake
fluid pressure by momentarily opening the inlet valve. This whole process is repeated very rapidly. While
this is happening, there is kickback at the brake pedal.
During self-diagnosis, if the ABS control unit detects a problem that affects the EBD, it turns on the brake
system indicator and the ABS indicator.
Self-diagnosis Function
1. The ABS control unit is equipped with a CPU and a monitor IC. They check each other for problems.
2. The CPU check the system circuits.
3. The ABS control unit turns on the ABS and possibly the brake system indicator when the unit detects
a problem, and the unit stops ABS operation.
4. The self-diagnosis can be classified into these two categories:
 Initial diagnosis
 Regular diagnosis
On-board Diagnosis Function
The ABS can be diagnosed with the HDS.
The ALB Checker cannot be used with this system. For air bleeding, and checking wheel sensor signals, use
the HDS.
111
See the HDS Help menu for specific operating instructions.
ABS MODULATOR
The ABS modulator consists of the inlet solenoid valve, outlet solenoid valve, reservoir, pump, and the
pump motor. The modulator reduces the caliper fluid pressure directly. It is a circulating-type modulator
because the brake fluid circulates through the caliper, reservoir, and the master cylinder. The hydraulic
control has three modes; normal braking, pressure retaining, and pressure reducing. The hydraulic circuit is
an independent four channel type, one channel for each wheel.
Shown in normal braking mode
Fig. 9: Identifying Modulator Unit Wiring Diagram

ABS MODULATOR
Inlet valve open, outlet valve closed:
Normal braking mode:
Master cylinder fluid is pumped out to the caliper.
Inlet valve closed, outlet valve closed:
Pressure retaining mode: Caliper fluid is retained by the inlet valve and
outlet valve.
Inlet valve closed, outlet valve open:

Caliper fluid flows through the outlet valve to the
Pressure reducing mode: reservoir.
When in pressure reducing mode, the pump motor
is ON.
The reservoir fluid is pumped out by the pump,
111
through the damping chamber, to the master

cylinder.
When stopping ABS operation, the pump motor is
OFF.
WHEEL SENSORS
The wheel sensors are the magnetic contactless type. The wheel sensors detect changing of magnetic
polarity on the magnetic encoder contained inside the front wheel bearings. The ABS modulator-control unit
calculates the wheel speed based on signals sent from the wheel sensor.
NOTE: The front wheel bearings are directional.
Wheel Speed and Modulator Control
Fig. 10: Identifying Wheel Speed And Modulator Control

When the wheel speed drops sharply below the vehicle speed, the outlet valve opens momentarily to reduce
the caliper fluid pressure. The pump motor starts at this time. As the wheel speed is restored, the inlet valve
opens momentarily to increase the caliper fluid pressure.
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
111
Fig. 11: Identifying ABS Circuit Diagram (1 Of 3)

111

111

DTC CODES
DTC CHART
DTC Description
DTC 11, 13, 15, 17 Wheel Sensor (Open/Short to Body Ground/Short to
Power)
DTC 12, 14, 16, 18 Wheel Sensor (Electrical Noise/Intermittent
Interruption)
DTC 21, 22 Magnetic Encoder (Front)
DTC 23, 24 Pulser (Rear)
DTC 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38 Solenoid
DTC 41, 42, 43, 44 Wheel Lock
DTC 51 Motor Lock
DTC 52 Motor Stuck OFF
DTC 53 Motor Stuck ON
DTC 54 ABS Fail-safe Relay
DTC 61 Low +B-FSR Voltage
DTC 62 High +B-FSR Voltage
DTC 71 Different Diameter Tire
DTC 81 Central Processing Unit (CPU) Diagnosis, and
ROM/RAM Diagnosis
111
DTC TROUBLESHOOTING
DTC 11, 13, 15, 17: WHEEL SENSOR (OPEN/SHORT TO BODY GROUND/SHORT TO POWER)
1. Disconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector.

3. Measure the voltage between body ground and the appropriate wheel sensor +B and GND terminals
of the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector individually (see WHEEL SENSOR +B AND
GND TERMINALS ).
WHEEL SENSOR +B AND GND TERMINALS

Appropriate Terminal
DTC
+B GND
11 (Right-front) FR +B: No. 2 FR-GND: No. 18
13 (Left-front) FL +B: No. 12 FL-GND: No. 3
15 (Right-rear) RR +B: No. 6 RR-GND: No. 15
17 (Left-rear) RL +B: No. 14 RL-GND: No. 5
Fig. 14: Measuring Voltage Between Body Ground And Appropriate Wheel Sensor +B And
GND Terminals

111
YES - Repair short to power in the wire between the ABS modulator-control unit and the
appropriate wheel sensor.
NO - Go to step 4.
5. Check for continuity between body ground and the appropriate wheel sensor +B and GND terminals
GND TERMINALS ).

DTC
+B GND
Fig. 15: Checking Continuity Between Body Ground And Appropriate Wheel Sensor +B And
GND Terminals
YES - Go to step 6.
111
NO - Go to step 8.
6. Disconnect the appropriate wheel sensor 2P connector.
7. Check for continuity between body ground and the appropriate wheel sensor +B and GND terminals
GND TERMINALS ).

DTC
+B GND
Fig. 16: Checking Continuity Between Body Ground And Appropriate Wheel Sensor +B And
GND Terminals
YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire between the ABS modulator-control unit and the
wheel sensor.
NO - Replace the wheel sensor (see WHEEL SENSOR REPLACEMENT ).
111
8. Measure the resistance between the appropriate wheel sensor +B and GND terminals of the ABS
modulator-control unit 25P connector (see WHEEL SENSOR +B AND GND TERMINALS ). Then
measure the resistance between the same terminals and reverse the positive and negative tester probes.

DTC
+B GND
Fig. 17: Measuring Resistance Between Appropriate Wheel Sensor +B And GND Terminals
Is the resistance infinity (open circuit) in both directions?
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Go to step 11.
10. Measure the resistance between the appropriate wheel sensor 2P connector terminals, then measure
the resistance between the same terminals and reverse the positive and negative tester probes.
111
Fig. 18: Measuring Resistance Between Appropriate Wheel Sensor 2P Connector Terminals
Is the resistance infinity (open circuit) in both directions?
YES - Replace the wheel sensor (see WHEEL SENSOR REPLACEMENT ).

NO - Repair open in the wire between the ABS modulator-control unit and the wheel sensor.
12. Check for continuity between the appropriate wheel sensor +B and GND terminals of the ABS
modulator-control unit 25P connector (see WHEEL SENSOR +B AND GND TERMINALS ). Then
check for continuity between the same terminals and reverse the positive and negative tester probes.

111
DTC
+B GND
Fig. 19: Identifying ABS Modulator-Control Unit 25P Connector

Is there continuity in both directions?
YES - Repair the wires between the ABS modulator-control unit and the wheel sensor that are
shorted to each other.
NO - Check for loose or poor connections at the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector and
the appropriate wheel sensor 2P connector. If the connections are good, replace the appropriate
wheel sensor and recheck for DTCs. If the DTC returns, replace the ABS modular-control unit
(see ABS MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ).
DTC 12, 14, 16, 18: WHEEL SENSOR (ELECTRICAL NOISE/INTERMITTENT INTERRUPTION)
NOTE: If the ABS indicator comes on because of electrical noise, the indicator will
go off when you drive the vehicle over 19 mph (30 km/h) and the noise is
gone.
1. Inspect the appropriate wheel sensor and magnetic encoder (front) and pulser (rear) (see WHEEL
111
SENSOR INSPECTION ).
APPROPRIATE WHEEL SENSOR

DTC Appropriate Wheel Sensor
12 Right-front
14 Left-front
16 Right-rear
18 Left-rear
Are they OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO - Reinstall or replace the appropriate wheel sensor or magnetic encoder (front) and pulser
(rear) (see WHEEL SENSOR REPLACEMENT ).
3. Check for continuity between the appropriate wheel sensor GND terminal and other wheel sensor
GND terminals (see WHEEL SENSOR GND TERMINAL AND OTHER WHEEL SENSOR
GND TERMINALS ).
WHEEL SENSOR GND TERMINAL AND OTHER WHEEL SENSOR GND TERMINALS
DTC Appropriate Terminal Other Terminals
12 FR-GND: No. 18 No. 3 No. 15 No. 5
14 FL-GND: No. 3 No. 18 No. 15 No. 5
16 RR-GND: No. 15 No. 18 No. 3 No. 5
18 RL-GND: No. 5 No. 18 No. 3 No. 15
111
Fig. 20: Identifying ABS Modulator-Control Unit 25P Connector

YES - Repair short in the wires between the appropriate wheel sensor and the other wheel
sensor.
NO - Clear the DTC, and test-drive the vehicle. If the ABS indicator comes on and the same
DTC is indicated, replace the ABS modulator-control unit (see ABS MODULATOR-
CONTROL UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ).
DTC 21, 22: MAGNETIC ENCODER (FRONT); DTC 23, 24: PULSER (REAR)
1. Clear the DTC (see HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT DTCS ).

2. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more.
Does the ABS indicator come on, and are DTCs21, 22, 23, 24 indicated?
YES - Go to step 3.
3. Inspect the appropriate encoder or pulser (see APPROPRIATE ENCODER OR PULSER and ).
WHEEL SENSOR INSPECTION
APPROPRIATE ENCODER OR PULSER

DTC Appropriate Encoder or Pulser
21 Right-front
22 Left-front
23 Right-rear
24 Left-rear
Is the sensor OK?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Replace the magnetic encoder or pulser.
4. Check that the front encoder is installed correctly (see step 7 in KNUCKLE/HUB
REPLACEMENT ), or rear pulser for damage.
Are they installed correctly?
YES - Check for loose terminals in the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector. If
necessary, substitute a known-good ABS modulator-control unit, and recheck.
NO - Reinstall or replace the appropriate encoder or pulser.
DTC 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38: SOLENOID

111
3. Verify the DTC.
Does the ABS indicator come on, and are DTCs 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38 indicated?
necessary, substitute a known-good ABS modulator-control unit.
DTC 41, 42, 43, 44: WHEEL LOCK
1. Check for brake drag when the brakes are hot.
Do the brakes drag?
YES - Repair the brake drag.

NO - Go to step 2.
2. Check the installation of the appropriate wheel sensor (see APPROPRIATE WHEEL SENSOR ).
APPROPRIATE WHEEL SENSOR

DTC Appropriate Wheel Sensor
41 Right-front
42 Left-front
43 Right-rear
44 Left-rear
Is it correct?
YES - The probable cause was the vehicle spun during cornering. If the code reoccurs during
normal driving, replace the ABS modulator-control unit (see ABS MODULATOR-
NO - Reinstall the wheel sensor correctly.
DTC 51: MOTOR LOCK; DTC 52: MOTOR STUCK OFF
1. Check the No. 17 (30 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Reinstall the fuse, and go to step 2.

NO - Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse is blown, check for a short to body ground in
this fuse circuit. If the circuit is OK, replace the ABS modulator-control unit (see ABS
MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ).
3. Measure the voltage between the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector terminal No. 9 and body
ground.
111
Fig. 21: Measuring Voltage Between ABS Modulator-Control Unit 25P Connector Terminal 9
And Body Ground
YES - Reconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector, then go to step 4.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the No. 17 (30 A) fuse and the ABS modulator-control
unit.
4. Measure the voltage between the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector terminal No. 25 and
body ground.
111
And Body Ground
Is there less than 0.1 voltage?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ABS control unit and body ground (G203).
Does the ABS indicator come on, and are DTC 51 or DTC 52 indicated?
connections are OK, replace the ABS modulator-control unit (see ABS MODULATOR-
DTC 53: MOTOR STUCK ON

2. Test-drive the vehicle.
Does the ABS indicator come on, and is DTC 53 indicated?

111
YES - Replace the ABS modulator-control unit (see ABS MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ).
DTC 54: ABS FAIL-SAFE RELAY; DTC 61: LOW +B-FSR VOLTAGE
1. Check the No. 18 (20 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Reinstall the fuse, and go to step 2.

NO - Replace the fuse, and recheck.
Does the ABS indicator come on, and are DTC 54 or DTC 61 indicated?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Intermittent failure; the vehicle is OK at this time.
5. Measure the voltage between the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector terminal No. 8 and body
ground.
111
And Body Ground

NO - Repair open in the wire between the No. 18 (20 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box
and the ABS modulator-control unit.
DTC 62: HIGH +B-FSR VOLTAGE

Does the ABS indicator come on?
YES - Go to step 3.
3. Verify the DTC.
Is DTC 62 indicated?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Do the appropriate troubleshooting for the DTC.
4. Check the charging system.
Is the charging system OK?
NO - Repair the charging system, and retest.
DTC 71: DIFFERENT DIAMETER TIRE

YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Intermittent failure; confirm that tire inflation is set to spec. The vehicle is OK at this
time.
3. Check that all four tires are the specified size and are inflated to the proper specification.
Are all four tires the correct size and properly inflated?
111
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Install the correct tires or set the tires to the correct inflation, and retest.
4. With the vehicle on level ground, mark each tire with a small spot of grease. Roll the vehicle until
each of the tires makes two grease spots on the floor.
5. Measure and record the distance between the two grease spots.
Is the difference between the shortest and the longest measurement more than 10%?
YES - Replace the tire/tires that is smaller or larger than the others.
NO - Replace the ABS modulator-control unit (see ABS MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT
DTC 81: CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT (CPU) DIAGNOSIS, AND ROM/RAM DIAGNOSIS
1. Check for other DTCs.
Is another DTC present?
YES - Do the appropriate troubleshooting for the other DTC.

NO - Go to step 2.
NO - Intermittent failure; the vehicle is OK at this time.
ABS INDICATOR DOES NOT COME ON
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the ABS indicator.
Does the ABS indicator come on?

NO - Go to step 2.
2. Apply the parking brake.
Does the brake system indicator come on?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Repair open in the indicator power source circuit. If necessary, substitute a known-good
gauge control module, and recheck.
111

Does ABS indicator come on?
NO - Go to step 6.
8. Disconnect the gauge control module connector (30P) ('03-05 models), (36P) ('06-07 models).
9. Check for continuity between the gauge control module connector and body ground.
 '03-05 models: Check between the gauge control module connector (30P) terminal No. 27 and
body ground.
 '06-07 models: Check between the gauge control module connector (36P) terminal No. 33 and
body ground.
Fig. 24: Checking Between Gauge Control Module Connector (30P) Terminal No. 27 And Body
Ground ('03-05 Models)
111
Fig. 25: Checking Between Gauge Control Module Connector (36P) Terminal No. 33 And Body
Ground ('06-07 models)
YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire between the gauge control module and the ABS
modulator-control unit.
NO - Check for loose terminals in the gauge control module connector. If connector is OK,
replace the gauge control module (see GAUGE CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT ).
ABS INDICATOR DOES NOT GO OFF, AND NO DTCS ARE STORED

3. Measure the voltage between the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector terminal No. 16 and
body ground.
111
And Body Ground
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Check fuse No. 18 (15 A) in the under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is good, repair open
in the wire between the No. 18 (15 A) fuse and the ABS modulator-control unit.
5. Check for continuity between the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector terminal No. 24 and
body ground.
111
Fig. 27: Checking Continuity Between ABS Modulator-Control Unit 25P Connector Terminal
24 And Body Ground
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ABS modulator-control unit and body ground
(G203).
6. Turn the ignition switch ON.
7. Connect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector terminal No. 21 and body ground with a
jumper wire.
111
Fig. 28: Connecting ABS Modulator-Control Unit 25P Connector Terminal No. 21 And Body
Ground With Jumper Wire
Does the ABS indicator go off?
NO - Go to step 8.
9. Remove the gauge control module, and leave the connector connected.
10. Connect the gauge control module connector to body ground with a jumper wire. Turn the ignition
switch ON (II).
 '03-05 models: Connect a jumper wire between the gauge control module connector (30P)
terminal No. 27 and body ground.
111
Fig. 29: Identifying Wire Side Of Female Terminals 03-05 Model (30P Connector - '03-05
Models)
111
Fig. 30: Identifying Wire Side Of Female Terminals 06-07 models (36P Connector - '06-07
models)
Does the ABS indicator go off?
YES - Repair open in the wire between the gauge control module and the ABS modulator-
control unit.
NO - Check for loose terminal in the gauge control module connectors. If connections are OK,
replace the gauge control module (see GAUGE CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT ).
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR DOES NOT COME ON
1. With the parking brake applied, turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the brake system
indicator.
YES - The system is OK at this time

NO - Go to step 2.
111
4. Connect the gauge control module connector to body ground with a jumper wire.
Fig. 31: Connecting Jumper Wire Between Gauge Control Module Connector (30P) Terminal
No. 11 And Body Ground ('03-05 Models)
111
Fig. 32: Connecting Jumper Wire Between Gauge Control Module Connector (36P) Terminal
No. 15 And Body Ground ('06-07 models)
Does the brake system indicator come on and stay on?
YES - Replace the gauge control module (see GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Go to step 6.
8. Connect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector terminal No. 11 and body ground with a
jumper wire.
111
Ground With Jumper Wire ('03-05 Models)
111
Ground With Jumper Wire ('06-07 models)
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ABS modulator-control unit and the gauge control
module.
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR DOES NOT GO OFF, AND NO DTCS ARE STORED

2. Release the parking brake.
Does the brake system indicator go off after several seconds?

NO - Go to step 3.
3. Check the brake fluid level.
111
Is the level OK?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Inspect the brake system for fluid leaks.
4. Check the ABS indicator.
Does the ABS indicator stay on?
YES - Read the ABS DTC (see HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT DTCS ), and do the applicable
troubleshooting for the DTC.
NO - Go to step 5.
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the brake system indicator.
Does the brake system indicator go off?
NO - Go to step 8.
10. Disconnect the gauge control module connector (30P) ('03-05 models), (36P) ('06-07 models).
11. Check for continuity between the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector terminal No. 21 and
body ground.
111
Fig. 35: Checking Continuity Between ABS Modulator-Control Unit 25P Connector Terminal
21 And Body Ground
YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire between the gauge control module and the ABS
modulator-control unit.
NO - Check for a short to body ground in the brake system indicator circuit (see BRAKE
SYSTEM INDICATOR CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ).
ABS MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE:  Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake
fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately with water.
 Be careful not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and
installation.
 To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends
and joints with a shop towel or equivalent material.
REMOVAL
111
1. Pull up the lock (A) of the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector (B), and the connector
disconnects itself.
Fig. 36: Pulling Up Lock Of ABS Modulator-Control Unit 25 Connector

2. Disconnect the six brake lines from the ABS modulator-control unit (C).
3. Remove the five 6 mm bolts and the one hex bolt.
4. Remove the ABS modulator-control unit.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the ABS modulator-control unit, then tighten the five 6 mm bolts and the one hex bolt.
2. Reconnect the six brake lines, then tighten the flare nuts to the specified torque.
3. Align the connecting surface of the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector to the ABS modulator-
control unit.
4. Push in the lock (A) of the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector (B) until you hear it click into
111
place.
Fig. 37: Pushing Lock Of ABS Modulator-Control Unit 25P Connector

5. Bleed the brake system, starting with the front wheels (see BRAKE SYSTEM BLEEDING ).
111
6. Start the engine, and check that the ABS indicator goes off.
7. Test-drive the vehicle, check the ABS operation, and check that the ABS indicator does not come on.
8. If the brake pedal is now spongy, there may be air trapped in the modulator and then induced into the
normal brake system during modulation. Exercise the ABS then bleed the brake system again, starting
with the front wheels (see BRAKE SYSTEM BLEEDING ).
WHEEL SENSOR INSPECTION

1. Check the magnetic encoder (A) and pulser (B) after cleaning. If necessary, replace the encoder or
pulser.
111
Fig. 38: Checking Front Magnetic Encoder And Pulser After Cleaning (Front)
111
Fig. 39: Checking Rear Magnetic Encoder And Pulser After Cleaning (Rear)
2. Measure the air gap between the wheel sensor (C) and the magnetic encoder or pulser all the way
around while rotating the encoder or pulser.
Standard:
Front: 0.5-1.2 mm (0.02-0.05 in.)

Rear: 0.4-1.1 mm (0.02-0.04 in.)
WHEEL SENSOR REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Install the sensor carefully to avoid twisting the wires.
111
Fig. 40: Installing Front Sensor

111
Fig. 41: Installing Rear Sensor

111
2003-07 BRAKES Conventional Brake Components - Accord
2003-07 BRAKES
Conventional Brake Components - Accord
SPECIAL TOOLS

Fig. 2: Identifying Conventional Brake Components Location

111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:17:16
BRAKE SYSTEM INSPECTION AND TEST

Inspect the brake system components listed. Repair or replace any parts that are leaking or damaged.
COMPONENT INSPECTIONS:
COMPONENT INSPECTIONS CHART

Component Procedure Also check for:
Look for damage or signs of fluid
leakage at:
 Reservoir or master Bulging seal at reservoir cap.

Master Cylinder cylinder body. This is a sign of fluid
 Line, grommets and their contamination.
joints
 Between master cylinder
and booster
leakage at:
 Line joints and banjo bolt

Brake Hoses connections Bulging, twisted, or bent lines.
 Hoses and lines, also
inspect for twisting or
damage
leakage at:
Caliper  Piston seal Seized or sticking caliper pins.

 Banjo bolt connections
 Bleed screw
Wheel Cylinder
Look for damage or signs of
fluid leakage at:
 Wheel Cylinder.
 Line joints.
 Bleed Screw.
leakage at:
ABS Modulator-Control Unit
 Line joints
 Modulator-control unit
BRAKE SYSTEM TEST
Brake pedal sinks/fades when braking
111
1. Set the parking brake, and start the engine , then turn off the A/C switch. Allow the engine to warm up
to normal operating temperature (radiator fan comes on twice).
2. Attach a 50 mm (2 in.) piece of masking tape along the bottom of the steering wheel, and draw a
horizontal reference mark across it.
3. With the transmission M/T in Neutral position, A/T in P or N position, press and hold the brake pedal
lightly (about the same pressure needed to keep an A/T-equipped vehicle from creeping), then release
the parking brake.
4. While still holding the brake pedal, hook the end of the tape measure the brake pedal, then pull the
tape up to the steering wheel. Note the measurement between the brake pedal and the reference mark
on the steering wheel.
5. Apply steady pressure to the brake pedal for 3 minutes.
6. Watch the tape measure.
 If the measurement increases 10 mm (3/8 in.) or less, the master cylinder is OK.
 If the measurement increases more than 10 mm (3/8 in.), replace the master cylinder.
RAPID BRAKE PAD WEAR, VEHICLE VIBRATION (AFTER A LONG DRIVE), OR HIGH,
HARD BRAKE PEDAL
NOTE: Make sure that the caliper pins are installed correctly.
The upper and lower caliper pins are different. If the top and bottom caliper
pins are installed in the wrong location, it will cause uneven tire wear,
vibration, and or uneven or rapid pad wear for proper caliper pin location:
AKEBONO type (see AKEBONO Type), NISSIN type (see NISSIN Type).
1. Drive the vehicle until the brakes drag or until the pedal is high and hard. This can take 20 or more
brake pedal applications during an extended test-drive.
2. With the engine running, raise the vehicle on a lift, and spin all four wheels by hand.
Is there brake drag at any of the wheels?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Look for other causes of the pad wear, high pedal, or vehicle vibration.
3. Turn the engine off, pump the brake pedal to deplete the vacuum in the brake booster, and then spin
the wheels again to check for brake drag.
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Replace the brake booster (see BRAKE BOOSTER REPLACEMENT ).
4. Without removing the brake lines, unbolt and separate the master cylinder from the booster, then spin
the wheels to check for brake drag.
YES - Go to step 5.
111
NO - Check the brake pedal position switch adjustment and pedal free play (see BRAKE
PEDAL AND BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH ADJUSTMENT ).
5. Loosen the hydraulic lines at the master cylinder, then spin the wheels to check for brake drag.
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Replace the master cylinder (see MASTER CYLINDER REPLACEMENT ).
6. Loosen the bleed screws at each caliper or wheel cylinder, then spin the wheels to check for brake
drag.
YES - Disassemble and repair the caliper or wheel cylinder, on the wheel(s) with brake drag.
NO - Look for a bulging master cylinder cap seal, discolored or contaminated brake fluid in the
master cylinder, or damaged brake lines. If any of these items are damaged, replace them. If all
of these items are OK, replace the ABS modulator-control unit (see ABS MODULATOR-
BRAKE PEDAL AND BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH ADJUSTMENT

PEDAL HEIGHT
1. Turn the brake pedal position switch (A) counterclockwise, and pull it back until it is no longer
touching the brake pedal.
111
Fig. 3: Turning Brake Pedal Position Switch Counterclockwise

2. Lift up the carpet. At the insulator cutout, measure the pedal height (B) from the left side of the pedal
pad (C).
Standard pedal height (with carpet removed):
111
M/T: 167 mm (6 9/16 in.)

A/T: 172 mm (6 13/16 in.)
3. Loosen the pushrod locknut (A), and screw the pushrod in or out with pliers on the knurled part of the
push rod (B) until the standard pedal height from the floor is reached. After adjustment, tighten the
locknut firmly. Do not adjust the pedal height with the pushrod pressed.
Fig. 4: Loosening Pushrod Locknut

Brake Pedal Position Switch Clearance
4. Using on hand, lift up on the brake pedal, while doing step 4. Push in the brake pedal position switch
until its plunger is fully pressed (threaded end (A) touching the pad (B) on the pedal arm). Then, turn
the brake pedal position switch 45° clockwise to lock it. The gap between the brake pedal position
switch and the pad is automatically adjusted to 0.7 mm (0.03 in.) by locking the switch. Make sure the
brake lights go off when the pedal is released.
111
Fig. 5: Measuring Gap Between Brake Pedal Position Switch

111
5. Check the brake pedal free play.
PEDAL FREE PLAY
1. With the engine off, inspect the pedal free play (A) on the pedal pad (B) by pushing the brake pedal
by hand.
Fig. 6: Inspecting Pedal Free Play On Pedal Pad

111
2. If the pedal free play is out of specification, adjust the brake pedal position switch (C). If the brake
pedal free play is insufficient, it may result in excessive brake drag.
PARKING BRAKE CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT

CHECK
1. Pull the parking brake lever (A) with 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbf) of force to fully apply the parking brake.
The parking brake lever should be locked within the specified number of clicks (B).
111
Fig. 7: Pulling Parking Brake Lever With Force To Fully Apply Parking Brake
2. Adjust the parking brake if the lever clicks are not within the specification.
ADJUSTMENT
NOTE: After servicing the rear brake shoes, loosen the parking brake adjusting nut,
start the engine, and press the brake pedal several times to set the self-
adjusting brake before adjusting the parking brake (with rear drum brake).
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations (see LIFT AND
SUPPORT POINTS ).
3. Release the parking brake lever fully.
4. With rear disc brake: Loosen the parking brake adjusting nut.
5. With rear disc brake: Remove the rear wheels.
6. With rear disc brake: Make sure the parking brake arm (A) on the rear brake caliper contacts the brake
caliper pin (B).
NOTE: The parking brake arm will only contact the brake caliper pin when the
parking brake adjusting nut is loosened.
Fig. 8: Identifying Brake Caliper Contacts
7. Reinstall the center console (see CENTER CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).
111
Fig. 9: Pulling Parking Brake Lever Up One Click

8. Tighten the adjusting nut (A) until the parking brakes drag slightly when the rear wheels are turned.
111
Fig. 10: Tightening Adjusting Nut Until Parking Brakes Drag

9. Release the parking brake lever fully, and check that the parking brakes do not drag when the rear
wheels are turned. Readjust if necessary.
10. Pull the parking brake all the way up, and make sure the parking brakes are fully applied.
11. Reinstall the center console (see CENTER CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).
BRAKE SYSTEM BLEEDING
NOTE:  Do not reuse the drained fluid. Use only clean Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid
from an unopened container.
Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life
of the system.
 Do not mix different brands of brake fluid; they may not be compatible.
 Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed to contaminate the
111
brake fluid.
 Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle, it may damage the paint; if brake
fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water.
 The reservoir on the master cylinder must be at the MAX (upper) level
mark at the start of the bleeding procedure and checked after bleeding
each brake caliper. Add fluid as required.
1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir is at the MAX (upper) level line (A).
Fig. 11: Making Sure Brake Fluid In Reservoir Is MAX Level Line
2. Attach a length of clear drain tube to the bleed screw.
111
3. Have someone slowly pump the brake pedal several times, then apply steady pressure.
4. Starting at the left-front, loosen the brake bleed screw to allow air to escape from the system. Then
tighten the bleed screw securely.
5. Repeat the procedure for each wheel in the sequence shown below until air bubbles no longer appear
in the fluid.
BLEEDING SEQUENCE:
Fig. 12: Bleeding Brake In Sequence

111
Fig. 13: Identifying Front Brake System Bleeding

111
Fig. 14: Identifying Rear Brake System Bleeding

6. Refill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX (upper) level line.
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
111
Fig. 15: Brake System Indicator Circuit Diagram

PARKING BRAKE SWITCH TEST

2. Disconnect the connector (A) from the parking brake switch (B).
111
Fig. 16: Disconnecting Connector From Parking Brake Switch

3. Check for continuity between the positive terminal (C) and body ground.
 With the brake lever up, there should be continuity.
 With the brake lever down, there should be no continuity.
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH TEST

Check for continuity between the terminals (1 and 2) with the float in the down position and in the up
111
position.
 Remove the brake fluid completely from the reservoir. With the float down, there should be
continuity.
 Fill the reservoir with brake fluid to the MAX (upper) level (A). With the float up, there should be no
continuity.
Fig. 17: Checking Continuity Between Terminals

FRONT BRAKE PAD INSPECTION AND REPLACEMENT
CAUTION: Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material

composition, could be hazardous to your health.
 Avoid breathing dust particles.

 Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an
111
OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.
INSPECTION-AKEBONO TYPE
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations (see LIFT
AND SUPPORT POINTS ).
2. Remove the front wheels.
3. Check the thickness (A) of the inner pad (B) and outer pad (C). Do not include the thickness of the
backing plate.
Brake pad thickness:
Standard: 10.5-11.5 mm (0.41-0.45 in.)

Service limit: 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
111
Fig. 18: Checking Thickness Of Inner Pad

Fig. 19: Checking Thickness Of Outer Pad

4. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service limit, replace all the front brake pads as a set.
REPLACEMENT-AKEBONO TYPE
1. Remove some brake fluid from the master cylinder.

4. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A).
111
Fig. 20: Identify Brake Hose Mounting Bolt

5. Remove the flange bolt (B) while holding the caliper pin (C) with a wrench being careful not to
damage the pin boot (D), and pivot the caliper (E) up out of the way. Check the brake hose and pin
boots for damage and deterioration.
6. Remove the brake pads (A) and the pad shims (B).
111
Fig. 21: Removing Pad Shims And Brake Pads

7. Check the hose and pin boots for damage and deterioration.
8. Remove the pad retainers (A), and check the caliper pin for free movement.
111
Fig. 22: Removing Pad Retainers

9. Clean the caliper thoroughly; remove any rust, and check for grooves and cracks.
10. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks.
11. Clean and install the pad retainers.
12. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N 08798-9010) to the pad side of shim outer pad shim C,
inner pad shim B, both sides of inner pad shim A, the back of brake pads (D), and to the other areas
indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess assembly paste off the pad shims and brake pads.
Contaminated brake discs and pads reduce stopping ability. Keep assembly paste off the brake discs
and brake pad material.
111
Fig. 23: Applying Thin Coat Of M-77 Assembly Paste To Pad Side Of Shim
13. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly. Install the brake pads with the wear indicator (E) on
top.
If you are reusing the brake pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent
a momentary loss of braking efficiency.
14. Push in the piston (B) so the caliper will fit over the brake pads. Check the brake fluid level. The
brake fluid may overflow if the reservoir is too full. Make sure the piston boot is in position to prevent
111
damaging it when pivoting the caliper down.
Fig. 24: Pushing Piston So Caliper Will Fit Over Brake Pads
15. Pivot the caliper (C) down into position. Install the flange bolt (D), and tighten it to the specified
torque while holding the pin A with a wrench being careful not to damage the pin boot.
16. Install the brake hose mounting bolt, and tighten it to the specified torque.
111
Fig. 25: Installing Brake Hose Mounting Bolt

17. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure the brakes work.
NOTE: Engagement of the brake may require a greater pedal stroke

immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a set. Several
applications of the brake pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke.
18. Add brake fluid as needed.

19. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary.
Then test-drive the vehicle.
INSPECTION-NISSIN TYPE
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations (see ).
3. Check the thickness (A) of the inner pad (B) and out pad (C). Do not include the thickness of the
brake pad backing the plate.
111
Fig. 26: Removing Brake Hose Mounting Bolts A,B C, D

4. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service limit, replace all of the front brake pads as a set.
REPLACEMENT-NISSAN TYPE

2. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations (see )
4. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A)
111
Fig. 27: Identify Brake Hose Mounting Bolt

5. Remove the flange bolt (B) while holding the caliper pin (C) with a wrench being careful not to
damage the pin boot (D), and pivot the caliper (E) up out of the way. Check the bake hose and pin
boots for damage and deterioration.
6. Remove the brake pads (A) and the pad shims (B).
111
Fig. 28: Removing Brake Pads (A) & Pad Shims (B)
7. Check the hose and pin boots for damage and deterioration.
8. Remove the pad retainers (A), and check the caliper pins for free movement.
111

9. Clean the caliper thoroughly; remove any rust, and check for grooves and cracks.
11. Clean and install the pad retainers.
12. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N08798-9010) to the pad sides of shims (A), the back of
the brake pads (B), and to the other areas indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess paste off the pad shim
and brake pads. Contaminated brake discs and pads reduce stopping ability. Keep assembly paste off
the brake discs and pad Material.
111
Fig. 30: Installing Brake Pads & Shims

13. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly. Install the brake pads with the wear indicator (C) on
the inside. The wear indicator should be on the top of the pad. If you are reusing the pads, always
reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent a momentary loss of braking efficiency.
14. Push in the piston (B) so the clipper will fit over the brake pads. Check the brake fluid level. The
brake fluid may over flow if the reservoir is too full. Make sure the piston boot is in position to
prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper down.
111
Fig. 31: Identify Pushing Piston

15. Pivot the caliper (C) down into position. Install the flange bolt (D), and tighten it to the specified
torque while holding the pin A with a wrench being careful not to damage the pin boot.
16. Install the brake hose mounting bolt (A), and tighten it to the specified torque.
111
Fig. 32: Identifying Brake Hose Mounting Bolt


immediately after the brake pads have been replace as a set. Several
18. Add bake fluid as needed.

FRONT BRAKE DISC INSPECTION

RUNOUT
3. Remove the brake pads: AKEBONO type (see REPLACEMENT-AKEBONO Type ), NISSIN type
(see Replacement-NISSAN Type).
4. Inspect the brake disc surface for damage and cracks. Clean the brake disc thoroughly, and remove all
rust.
111
5. Install suitable flat washers (A) and wheel nuts, and tighten the nuts to the specified torque to hold the
brake disc securely against the hub.
Fig. 33: Installing Flat Washers And Wheel Nuts

6. Set up the dial gauge against the brake disc as shown above, and measure the runout at 10 mm (3/8
in.) from the outer edge of the brake disc.
Brake disc runout:
111
7. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit, refinish the brake disc with an on-car brake lathe. The
"Front Brake Disc Lathe" offered by Snap-on Tools Co. are approved for this operation.
Max. refinish limit: 21.0 mm (0.83 in.)
NOTE:  If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for refinishing, replace
it (see step 3 on KNUCKLE/HUB REPLACEMENT ).
 A new disc should be refinished if its runout is greater than 0.10
mm (0.004 in.).
THICKNESS AND PARALLELISM
3. Remove the brake pads: AKEBONO type (see REPLACEMENT-AKEBONO Type ), NISSIN type
(see Replacement-NISSAN Type).
4. Using a micrometer, measure brake disc thickness at eight points, approximately 45° apart and 10 mm
(3/8 in.) in from the outer edge of the brake disc. Replace the brake disc if the smallest measurement
is less than the max. refinishing limit.
Brake disc thickness:
Standard: 22.9-23.1 mm (0.90-0.91 in.)

Max. refinishing limit: 21.0 mm (0.83 in.)
Brake disc parallelism: 0.015 mm (0.0006 in.) max.
NOTE: This is the maximum allowable difference between the thickness

measurements.
111
Fig. 34: Measuring Brake Disc Thickness

5. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for parallelism, refinish the brake disc with an on-car
brake lathe. The "Front Brake Disc Lathe" offered by Snap-on Tools Co. are approved for this
operation.).
NOTE: If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for refinishing, replace it
(see KNUCKLE/HUB REPLACEMENT ).
FRONT BRAKE CALIPER OVERHAUL

111

AKEBONO TYPE
Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items:
The upper and lower caliper pins are different. If the caliper pins are installed
in the wrong location, it will cause uneven tire wear, vibration, and or uneven
or rapid pad wear.
 Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash
it off immediately with water.
 To prevent dripping brake fluid, cover disconnected hose joints with rags or shop towels.
 Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages with compressed air.
 Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dust and other foreign particles.
 Replace parts with new ones as specified in Fig. 35 .
 Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets in the brake fluid.
 Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or pads.
 When reusing brake pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking
efficiency.
 Do not reuse drained brake fluid. Use only clean Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened
container. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system.
 Do not mix different brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible.
 Coat the pistons, piston seals grooves, and caliper bore with clean brake fluid.
 Replace all rubber parts with new ones whenever disassembled.
 After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting.
111
Fig. 35: Identifying Front Brake Caliper Overhaul

NISSIN TYPE
The upper and lower caliper pins are different. If the caliper pins are installed
in the wrong location, it will cause uneven tire wear, vibration, and or uneven
or rapid pad wear.
 Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dust and other foreign particles.
 Replace parts with new ones as specified in .
 Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets in the brake fluid.
efficiency.
111
 Coat the pistons, piston seals grooves, and caliper bore with clean brake fluid.
Fig. 36: Identifying Front Brake Caliper Overhaul

MASTER CYLINDER REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid
does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water.
1. Remove the cable clamps from the body.
111
Fig. 37: Removing Cable Clamps From Body

2. Remove the access panel (A), then remove the right strut brace (B).
111
Fig. 38: Removing Access Panel And Right Strut Brace

3. Remove the reservoir cap and brake fluid from the master cylinder reservoir.
4. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch connector (A).
111
Fig. 39: Disconnecting Brake Fluid Level Switch Connector

5. Disconnect the brake lines (B) from the master cylinder (C). To prevent spills, cover the hose joints
with rags or shop towels.
6. Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts (D) and washers.
7. Remove the master cylinder from the brake booster (E). Be careful not to bend or damage the brake
lines when removing the master cylinder.
8. Remove the rod seal (F) from the master cylinder.
9. Install the master cylinder in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Replace all the rubber parts with new ones whenever the master cylinder is removed.
 Use a new rod seal on reassembly.
 Coat the inner bore lip and outer circumference of the new rod seal with the Shin-Etsu silicone
grease (P/N 08798-9013).
 Install the rod seal onto the master cylinder with its grooved side (G) toward the master
cylinder.
111
Check the brake pedal height and free play after installing the master cylinder, and adjust it if
necessary (see BRAKE PEDAL AND BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
ADJUSTMENT ).
10. Bleed system (see BRAKE SYSTEM BLEEDING ).
11. Spin the wheels to check for brake drag.
MASTER CYLINDER INSPECTION
NOTE:  Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign
particles.
 Do not try to disassemble the master cylinder assembly. Replace the
master cylinder assembly with a new part if necessary.
 Do not allow dirt or foreign matter to contaminate the brake fluid.
111
Fig. 40: Inspecting Master Cylinder

BRAKE BOOSTER TEST

FUNCTIONAL TEST
1. With the engine stopped, press the brake pedal several times to deplete the vacuum reservoir, then
press the brake pedal hard, and hold it for 15 seconds. If the brake pedal sinks, either the master
111
cylinder is bypassing internally, or the brake system is leaking (see Brake Hose and Line
Inspection).
2. Start the engine with the brake pedal pressed. If the pedal sinks slightly, the vacuum booster is
operating normally. If the brake pedal height does not vary, do the leak test.
3. Do the brake system test. (see Brake System Inspection and Test).
LEAK TEST
1. Press the brake pedal with the engine running, then stop the engine. If the brake pedal height does not
vary while pressed for 30 seconds, the vacuum booster is OK. If the pedal rises go to step 6. If it does
not rise go to step 2.
2. Start the engine and let it idle for 30 seconds. Turn the ignition switch off, and wait 30 seconds. Press
the brake pedal several times using normal pressure. When the pedal is first pressed it should be low.
On consecutive applications, the pedal height should gradually rise. Does the pedal rise on each
consecutive application? If it rises the booster is OK. If it does not go to step 3.
3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose (A) at the booster . The check valve (B) is built into the
hose.
Fig. 41: Disconnecting Brake Booster Vacuum Hose At Booster

4. Start the engine, and let it idle. There should be vacuum available. If no vacuum is available, the
check valve is not working properly. Replace the brake booster vacuum hose and check valve, and
111
retest. If vacuum is found, go to step 5.

5. With the engine off, reconnect the vacuum hose to the brake booster.
6. Start the engine, and then pinch the brake booster vacuum hose between the check valve and the
booster.
7. Turn the ignition switch off, and wait 30 seconds. Press the brake pedal several times using normal
pressure. When the pedal is first pressed, it should be low. On consecutive applications, the pedal
height should gradually rise.
 If the brake pedal position does not vary, inspect the seal between the master cylinder and
booster. If the seal is OK, replace the brake booster.
 If the pedal position varies, replace the brake booster vacuum hose/check valve assembly.
BRAKE BOOSTER REPLACEMENT

1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the audio and navigation system, then write down the
audio presets.
2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
3. Remove the master cylinder (see MASTER CYLINDER REPLACEMENT ).
4. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the brake booster (B).
111
Fig. 42: Disconnecting Vacuum Hose From Brake Booster

5. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box cover.

6. Disconnect (+) and (-) terminals (A) of the under-hood fuse/relay box (B).
111
Fig. 43: Disconnecting Terminals Of Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box

7. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box mounting bolt (C), then remove the under-hood fuse/relay box
from the body.
8. Remove the air cleaner assembly (A).
111
Fig. 44: Removing Air Cleaner Assembly

9. Remove the primary and secondary brake lines from the hose clamp (A).
111
Fig. 45: Removing Primary And Secondary Brake Lines From Hose Clamp
10. Remove the lock pin (A) and the joint pin (B), then disconnect the yoke from the brake pedal.
111
Fig. 46: Removing Lock Pin And Joint Pin

11. Remove the brake booster mounting nuts (C).

12. Remove the brake booster (A) from the engine compartment.
NOTE:  Be careful not to damage the booster surfaces and threads of the booster
stud bolts.
 Be careful not to bend or damage the brake lines.
111
Fig. 47: Removing Brake Booster From Engine Compartment

13. Install the brake booster in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Use a new lock pin whenever installing.
 After installing the brake booster and master cylinder, fill the reservoir with new brake fluid,
bleed the brake system (see BRAKE SYSTEM BLEEDING ), and adjust the brake pedal
height and free play (see BRAKE PEDAL AND BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
ADJUSTMENT ).
REAR BRAKE PAD INSPECTION AND REPLACEMENT

111

INSPECTION
SUPPORT POINTS ).
2. Remove the rear wheels.
3. Check the thickness (A) of the inner pad (B) and outer pad (C). Do not include the thickness of the
backing plate.
Brake pad thickness:
Standard: 8.9-9.1 mm (0.35-0.36 in.)

Fig. 48: Checking Thickness Of Inner Pad And Outer Pad

111
4. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service limit, replace all the rear brake pads as a set.
REPLACEMENT

SUPPORT POINTS ).
4. Remove the flange bolts (C) while holding the pin A and pin B with a wrench being careful not to
damage the pin boots, and remove the caliper (D). Check the hose and pin boots for damage and
deterioration.
Fig. 49: Removing Flange Bolts Holding Pin A And B

5. Remove the pad shim (A) and brake pads (B).
111
Fig. 50: Removing Pad Shim And Brake Pads

6. Remove the pad retainers (A).
111

7. Clean the caliper thoroughly; remove any rust and check for grooves and cracks.
9. Install the pad retainers.
10. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N 08798-9010) to both sides of the pad shim (A), the
back of brake pads (B), and the other areas indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess assembly paste off
the pad shims and brake pads. Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping ability. Keep
assembly paste off the brake discs and pad material.
111
Fig. 52: Applying Thin Coat Of M-77 Assembly Paste To Pad Shim
11. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly. Install the brake pad with the wear indicator (C) on the
inside bottom.
If you are reusing the brake pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent
a momentary loss of braking efficiency.
12. Rotate the caliper piston (C) clockwise into the cylinder, then align the cutout (D) in the piston with
the tab (E) on the inner pad by turning the piston back. Lubricate the boot with rubber grease to avoid
twisting the piston boot. If the piston boot is twisted, back it out so it is positioned properly.
111
Fig. 53: Rotating Caliper Piston Clockwise Into Cylinder

13. Install the caliper. Install the flange bolts (F), and tighten it to the specified torque while holding the
pin A and pin B with a wrench. Be careful not to damage the pin boots.

immediately after the brake pads have been replaced as a set. Several
REAR BRAKE DISC INSPECTION

RUNOUT
111
SUPPORT POINTS ).
3. Remove the brake pads (see REAR BRAKE PAD INSPECTION AND REPLACEMENT ).
4. Inspect the brake disc surface for damage and cracks. Clean the brake disc thoroughly, and remove all
rust.
5. Install suitable flat washers (A) and wheel nuts, and tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque to
hold the brake disc securely against the hub.
Fig. 54: Installing Flat Washers And Wheel Nuts

6. Set up the dial gauge against the brake disc as shown above, and measure the runout at 10 mm (3/8
in.) from the outer edge of the brake disc.
Brake disc runout:
111
7. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit, refinish the brake disc with an on-car brake lathe. The
"Front Brake Disc Lathe" offered by Snap-on Tools Co. are approved for this operation.
Max. refinish limit: 8.0 mm (0.31 in.)
NOTE:  If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for refinishing, replace
it (see step 3 on HUB REPLACEMENT-DISC BRAKE ).
 A new disc should be refinished if its runout is greater than 0.10
mm (0.004 in.).
THICKNESS AND PARALLELISM
SUPPORT POINTS ).
3. Remove the brake pads (see REAR BRAKE PAD INSPECTION AND REPLACEMENT ).
4. Using a micrometer, measure the brake disc thickness at eight points, about 45° apart and 10 mm (3/8
in.) in from the outer edge of the brake disc. Replace the brake disc if the smallest measurement is less
than the max. refinishing limit.
Brake disc thickness:
Standard: 8.9-9.1 mm (0.35-0.36 in.)

Max. refinishing limit: 8.0 mm (0.31 in.)
Brake disc parallelism: 0.015 mm (0.0006 in.) max.
NOTE: This is the maximum allowable difference between the thickness

measurements.
111
Fig. 55: Measuring Disc Thickness

5. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for parallelism, refinish the brake disc with an on-car
brake lathe. The "Front Brake Disc Lathe" offered by Snap-on Tools Co. are approved for this
operation.
NOTE: If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for refinishing, replace it
(see step 3 on HUB REPLACEMENT-DISC BRAKE ).
REAR BRAKE CALIPER OVERHAUL

111


 Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles.
 Replace parts with new ones as specified in Fig. 56 .
 Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets into the brake fluid.
efficiency.
 Coat the piston, piston seal groove, and caliper bore with clean brake fluid.
111
Fig. 56: Identifying Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul

REAR DRUM BRAKE INSPECTION


NOTE:  Contaminated brake linings or drums reduce stopping ability.

 Block the front wheels before jacking up the rear of the vehicle.
SUPPORT POINTS ).
3. Release the parking brake, and remove the rear brake drum (see step 5 on HUB REPLACEMENT-
DRUM BRAKE ).
111
Fig. 57: Removing Rear Brake Drum

4. Check the wheel cylinder (A) for leakage.
111
Fig. 58: Checking Wheel Cylinder Leakage

5. Check the brake linings (B) for cracking, glazing, wear, and contamination.
6. Measure the brake lining thickness (C). Measurement does not include brake shoe thickness.
Brake lining thickness:
Standard: 4.5 mm (0.18 in.)

7. If the brake lining thickness is less than the service limit, replace the brake shoes as a set.
8. Check the hub bearing for smooth operation. If it requires servicing, replace it (see HUB
REPLACEMENT-DRUM BRAKE ).
9. Measure the inside diameter of the brake drum with inside vernier calipers.
Drum inside diameter:

111
Standard: 219.9-220 mm (8.657-8.661 in.)

Service limit: 221 mm (8.701 in.)
Fig. 59: Measuring Inside Diameter Of Brake Drum With Inside Vernier Calipers
10. If the inside diameter of the brake drum is more than the service limit, replace the brake drum.
11. Check the brake drum for scoring, grooves, corrosion, and cracks.
REAR BRAKE SHOE REPLACEMENT

Brake spring installer 07LAF-SM40200


REMOVAL/DISASSEMBLY
111
SUPPORT POINTS
3. Release the parking brake, and remover the brake drum (see KNUCKLE/HUB BEARING UNIT
REPLACEMENT ).
4. Unhook the upper return spring (A) from the rearward shoe using the special tool (B).
Fig. 60: Unhooking Upper Return Spring From Rearward Shoe Using Special Tool
5. Remove the tension pins (A) by pushing each retainer spring (B) and turning the pins.
111
Fig. 61: Removing Tension Pins

6. Lower the brake shoe assembly, and remove the lower return spring (A). Be careful not to damage the
wheel cylinder dust cover.
111
Fig. 62: Removing Lower Return Spring

7. Remove the brake shoe assembly from the backing plate, and disassemble the brake shoe assembly.
8. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the parking brake lever, and remove the brake shoe.
9. Remove the U-clip (A), and wave washer (B), and separate the parking brake lever (C) from the brake
shoe (D).
111
Fig. 63: Removing U-Clip And Wave Washer

REASSEMBLY
1. Apply a thin coat of rubber grease onto the sliding surfaces as illustrated below. Wipe off any excess
assembly paste. Do not get assembly paste on the brake lining material.
111
Fig. 64: Applying Thin Coat Of 44 Ma Assembly Paste Onto Sliding Surfaces
2. Install the parking brake lever (A) to the rearward brake shoe (B), and secure it with the wave washer
(C), and a new U-clip (D). Pinch the U-clip securely to prevent it from coming off.
NOTE: Install the wave washer with its convex side facing outside.
111
Fig. 65: Installing Parking Brake Lever To Rearward Brake Shoe

3. Connect the parking brake cable to the rearward brake shoe.

4. Install the self-adjuster lever (C) and self-adjuster spring (D) on the front side brake shoe (E).
111
Fig. 66: Installing Self-Adjuster Lever And Self-Adjuster Spring

5. Assemble the brake shoes with the clevis A, adjuster bolt (F), clevis B, upper return spring (G), and
lower return spring (H).
111
NOTE: Fully turn the adjuster bolt into the clevis A.
6. Apply a thin coat of Molykote 44 MA assembly paste onto the sliding surfaces as illustrated below.
Wipe off any excess assembly paste. Do not get assembly paste on the brake lining material.
Fig. 67: Applying Thin Coat Of Assembly Paste Onto Sliding Surface
7. Install the brake shoe assembly on the backing plate fitting the top of the brake shoes onto the wheel
cylinder pistons and the bottom of the brake shoes onto the locating plate.
8. Install the tension pins (A), and secure with the retainer springs (B) by pushing it and turning each
pin.
111
Fig. 68: Installing Tension Pins

9. Hook the end (A) of the upper return spring (B) with the brake spring installer.
111
Fig. 69: Hooking End Of Upper Return Spring With Special Tool
10. Install the brake drum and rear wheel.

11. If the wheel cylinder has been removed, bleed the brake system (see BRAKE SYSTEM
BLEEDING ).
12. Press the brake pedal several times to set the self-adjusting brake.
13. Adjust the parking brake (see PARKING BRAKE CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT ).
REAR WHEEL CYLINDER REPLACEMENT
NOTE:  Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake
fluid does contact the paint, wash it off immediately with water.
 To prevent spills, cover the hose joints with rags or shop towels.
 Use only a Honda wheel cylinder special bolt.
111
1. Remove the brake shoes (see REAR BRAKE SHOE REPLACEMENT ).

2. Disconnect the brake line (A) from the wheel cylinder (B).
Fig. 70: Disconnecting Brake Line From Wheel Cylinder

3. Remove the bolt (C) and the wheel cylinder from the backing plate.
4. Apply Cemedienne 366E sealant or equivalent (D) between the wheel cylinder and backing plate (E),
and install the wheel cylinder.
5. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal.
6. Bleed the brake system (see BRAKE SYSTEM BLEEDING ).
7. Do the parking brake inspection and adjustment (see Parking Brake Check and Adjustment).
8. Spin the wheels to check for brake drag.
9. Check for leaks at the line joint and bleed screw, and retighten if necessary.
111
BRAKE PEDAL REPLACEMENT

1. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch connector (E).
Fig. 71: Removing Lock Pin And Pin

2. Remove the brake pedal bracket mounting bolt (C) and nuts (D).
3. Remove the lock pin (A) and pin (B).
4. Remove the brake pedal with bracket (F).
NOTE: Replace the lock pin whenever the brake pedal is replaced.
6. Do the brake pedal and brake pedal position switch adjustment (see BRAKE PEDAL AND BRAKE
PEDAL POSITION SWITCH ADJUSTMENT ).
111
BRAKE HOSE AND LINE INSPECTION

1. Inspect the brake hoses for damage, deterioration, leaks, interference, and twisting.
2. Check the brake lines for damage, rusting, and leaks. Also check for bent brake lines.
3. Check for leaks at hose and line joints and connections, and retighten if necessary.
4. Check the master cylinder and ABS modulator-control unit for damage and leakage.
NOTE: Replace the brake hose clip whenever the brake hose is serviced.
Fig. 72: Inspecting Brake Hose And Line

111
BRAKE HOSE REPLACEMENT
NOTE:  Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other
foreign particles.
 Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to do so.
 Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake
fluid gets on the paint, wash it off immediately with water.
 To prevent dripping, cover disconnecting line joints with rags or shop
towels.
1. Replace the brake hose (A) if the hose is twisted, cracked, or if it leaks.
Fig. 73: Replacing Brake Hose

111
2. Disconnect the brake hose from the brake line (B) using a 10 mm flare-nut wrench (C).
3. Remove and discard the brake hose clip (A) from the brake hose (B).
Fig. 74: Removing Brake Hose Clip From Brake Hose

4. Remove the banjo bolt (C), and disconnect the brake hose from the caliper.
5. Remove the brake hose from the knuckle.
6. Install the brake hose (A) on the damper with flange bolts (B) first, then connect the brake hose to the
caliper with the banjo bolt (C) and new sealing washers (D).
111
Fig. 75: Installing Brake Hose On Damper With Flange Bolts

7. Install the brake hose (A) on the upper brake hose bracket (B) with a new brake hose clip (C).
111
Fig. 76: Installing Brake Hose On Upper Brake Hose Bracket

8. Connect the brake line (D) to the brake hose.

9. After installing the brake hose, bleed the brake system (see BRAKE SYSTEM BLEEDING ).
10. Do the following checks:
 Check the brake hose and line joint for leaks, and tighten if necessary.
 Check the brake hoses for interference and twisting.
PARKING BRAKE CABLE REPLACEMENT
111
Fig. 77: Exploded View Of Parking Brake Cable

NOTE: The parking brake cable must not be bent or distorted. This will lead to stiff
operation and premature cable failure. Refer to the Exploded View as needed
during this procedure.
WITH REAR DISC BRAKE
1. Release the parking brake lever fully.

2. Remove the clip (A) from the rear brake caliper.
111
Fig. 78: Removing Clip A From Rear Brake Caliper

3. Remove the parking brake cable from the rear brake caliper.
4. Reinstall the parking brake cable in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surface of the rear hub and the inside of the
brake disc.
 Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces on the brake disc and inside of the wheel.
 Adjust the parking brake (see PARKING BRAKE CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT ). Apply
the parking brake firmly 10 times then adjust it again.
WITH REAR DRUM BRAKE
1. Remove the brake drum and shoes, and disconnect the parking brake cable from the brake shoe (see
Rear Brake Shoe Replacement).
2. Remove the flange bolts (A) and parking brake cable (B) from the backing plate (C).
111
Fig. 79: Removing Flange Bolts And Parking Brake Cable

3. Reinstall the parking brake cable in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Before installing the brake drum, clean the mating surface of the rear hub and the inside of the
brake drum.
 Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces on the brake drum and inside of the
wheel.
 Adjust the parking brake (see Parking Brake Check and Adjustment). Apply the parking
brake firmly 10 times then adjust it again.
111
2003-07 DRIVELINE/AXLE Driveline/Axle - Accord
2003-07 DRIVELINE/AXLE
Driveline/Axle - Accord
SPECIAL TOOLS
Fig. 1: View Of Special Service Tools And Description Chart

111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:18:21
Fig. 2: Identifying Driveline/Axle

DRIVESHAFT INSPECTION
1. Check the inboard boot (A) and the outboard boot (B) on the driveshaft (C) for cracks, damage,
leaking grease, and loose boot bands (D). If any damage is found, replace the boot and boot bands.
111
Fig. 3: Inspecting Inboard Boot And Outboard Boot On Driveshaft

2. Check the driveshaft for cracks and damage. If any damage is found, replace the driveshaft.
3. Check the inboard joint (E) and the out board joint (F) for cracks and damage. If any damage is found,
replace the inboard joint or the outboard joint as an assembly.
4. Hold the inboard joint and turn the front wheel by hand, then make sure the joint is not excessively
loose. If necessary, replace the inboard joint or the outboard joint as an assembly.
DRIVESHAFT REMOVAL
1. Raise the vehicle on a lift.
3. Lift up the locking tab (A) on the spindle nut (B), then remove the nut.
111
Fig. 4: Removing Wheel Nuts And Front Wheels With Torque Specifications
4. Drain the transmission fluid. Reinstall the drain plug using a new washer:
 Manual transmission (see TRANSMISSION FLUID INSPECTION AND
REPLACEMENT )
 Automatic transmission (see ATF REPLACEMENT )
5. Separate the front stabilizer link from the lower arm (see STABILIZER LINK REPLACEMENT ).
111
6. Remove the self-locking nut (A), 12 mm flange bolt (B), and 10 mm flange bolt (C), then remove the
damper fork (D).
Fig. 5: Removing Damper Fork

7. Remove the cotter pin form the lower arm ball joint castle nut, and remove the nut, then separate the
ball joint from the lower arm using the ball joint thread protector and remover (see KNUCKLE/HUB
REPLACEMENT ).
NOTE:  To avoid damaging the ball joint, install the ball joint thread
protector onto the threads of the ball joint.
 Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when installing the
remover.
8. Pull the knuckle outward, and remove the outboard joint from the front wheel hub using a plastic
hammer.
111
Fig. 6: Removing Outboard Joint From Front Wheel

9. A/T model: Remove the heat shield. ).
111
Fig. 7: Removing Heat Shield (A/T Model)

10. Left driveshaft: Pry the inboard joint (A) from the transmission housing with a prybar. Remove the
driveshaft as an assembly.
NOTE: Do not pull on the driveshaft (B), or the inboard joint may come apart.
Pull the driveshaft straight out to avoid damaging the oil seal.
111
Fig. 8: Prying Inboard Joint From Differential Case (Left Driveshaft)

11. Right driveshaft: Drive the inboard joint (A) off of the intermediate shaft using a drift and hammer
(M/T model). Pry the inboard joint (B) from the transmission housing with a prybar (A/T model).
Remove the driveshaft as an assembly.
NOTE: Do not pull on the driveshaft (C), or the inboard joint may come apart.
Pull the driveshaft straight out to avoid damaging the oil seal.
M/T model:
111
Fig. 9: Removing Intermediate Shaft Inboard Joint (Right Driveshaft M/T Model)
A/T model:
111
Fig. 10: Prying Inboard Joint From Differential Case (Right Driveshaft A/T Model)
DRIVESHAFT DISASSEMBLY
 Threaded adapter, 22 x 1.5 mm 07XAC-001010A

 Threaded adapter, 24 x 1.5 mm 07XAC-001020A
 Slide hammer, 5/8"-18 UNF, commercially available
 Boot band pliers, Kent-Moore J-35910 or equivalent, commercially available
 Puller, commercially available.
INBOARD JOINT SIDE
1. Remove the set ring from the inboard joint.
111
Fig. 11: Removing Set Ring From Inboard Joint

2. Remove the boot bands. Be careful not to damage the boot and dynamic damper.
 If the boot band is a welded type (A), cut the boot band.
 If the boot band is a double loop type (B), lift up the band end (C), and push it into the clip (D).
 If the boot band is a low profile type (E), pinch the boot band using commercially available
boot pliers (F).
Welded Type
111
Fig. 12: Removing Boot Bands (Welded Type)

Double Loop Type
111
Fig. 13: Removing Boot Bands (Double Loop Type)

Low Profile Type
111
Fig. 14: Removing Boot Bands (Low Profile Type)

3. Make a mark (A) on each roller (B) and inboard joint (C) to identify the locations of rollers and
grooves in the inboard joint. Then remove the inboard joint on the shop towel (D). Be careful not to
drop the rollers when separating them from the inboard joint.
111
Fig. 15: Placing Mark On Roller And Inboard Joint

4. Make a mark (A) on the rollers (B) and spider (C) to identify the locations of the rollers on the spider,
then remove the rollers.
NOTE:  Do not engrave or scribe mark on the rolling surface.

 If necessary, use a commercially available puller.
111
Fig. 16: Placing Marks On Rollers And Spider

5. Remove the circlip (D).

6. Mark the spider and driveshaft (E) to identify the position of the spider on the shaft.
7. Remove the spider.
8. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft with vinyl tape (A) to prevent damage to the boot.
111
Fig. 17: Wrapping Splines On Driveshaft With Vinyl Tape

9. Remove the inboard boot. Be careful not to damage the boot.

10. Remove the vinyl tape.
OUTBOARD JOINT SIDE
1. Remove the boot bands (A). Lift up the three tabs (B) with a screwdriver. Be careful not to damage
the boot and dynamic damper.
111
Fig. 18: Lifting Boot Bands Tabs

2. Slide the outboard boot (A) partially to the inboard joint side. Be careful not to damage the boot.
111
Fig. 19: Sliding Outboard Boot

3. Wipe off the grease to expose the driveshaft and the outboard joint inner race.
4. Make a mark (A) on the driveshaft (B) at the same level as the outboard joint rim (C).
Fig. 20: Placing Mark On Driveshaft And Outboard Joint End

5. Securely clamp the driveshaft in a bench vise with a shop towel.
A/T model: 07XAC-001010A
M/T model: 07XAC-001020A
111
Fig. 21: Clamping Driveshaft In Vise

6. Remove the outboard joint (A) using the threaded adapter (B) and a commercially available 5/8"-18
UNF slide hammer (C).
7. Remove the driveshaft from the bench vise.
8. Remove the stop ring from the driveshaft.
111
Fig. 22: Removing Stop Ring From Driveshaft

9. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft with vinyl tape (A) to prevent damage to the boot.
111

10. Remove the outboard boot. Be careful not to damage the boot.
11. Remove the vinyl tape.
DYNAMIC DAMPER REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the inboard joint (see Inboard Joint Side ).
2. Remove the dynamic damper bands (see step 2 ).
 If the band is a welded type, cut the band.
 If the band is a double loop type, lift up the band end, and push it into the clip.
 If the band is a low profile type, pinch the band using commercially available boot band pliers.
3. Remove the dynamic damper.
111

111
4. Adjust the position of the new dynamic damper to these measurements.
NOTE: Be careful not to swap the dynamic dampers. The right and left
dynamic dampers are different.
M/T model right driveshaft: 275-281 mm (10.83-11.06 in.)
Fig. 25: Identifying Dynamic Damper Adjusting Dimension (M/T Model)

A/T model right driveshaft: 274-278 mm (10.79-10.94 in.)
111
Fig. 26: Identifying Dynamic Damper Adjusting Dimension (A/T Model)

M/T model left driveshaft: 275-281 mm (10.83-11.06 in.)
A/T model left driveshaft: 283-287 mm (11.14-11.30 in.)
111
Fig. 27: Identifying Dynamic Damper Adjusting Dimension (A/T And M/T Model)
5. Install the dynamic damper band (see step 10 ).

6. Install the inboard joint (see step 1 ).
DRIVESHAFT REASSEMBLY
EXPLODED VIEW
111
Fig. 28: Exploded View Of Driveshaft Assembly Components

 Boot band tool, KD-3191 or equivalent, commercially available

 Boot band pliers, Kent-Moore J-35910 or equivalent, commercially available
NOTE: Refer to the EXPLODED VIEW as needed during this procedure.
INBOARD JOINT SIDE
111
1. Wrap the splines with vinyl tape (A) to prevent damage to the inboard boot.
Fig. 29: Wrapping Inboard Joint Splines With Vinyl Tape

2. Install the inboard boot onto the driveshaft, then remove the vinyl tape. Be careful not to damage the
inboard boot.
3. Install the spider (A) onto the driveshaft by aligning the marks (B) you made on the spider and the end
of the driveshaft.
111
Fig. 30: Installing Spider Onto Driveshaft

4. Install a new circlip (C) into the driveshaft groove. Always rotate the circlip in its groove to make sure
it is fully seated.
5. Fit the rollers (A) onto the spider (B) with their high shoulders facing outward, and note these items:
111
 Reinstall the rollers in their original positions on the spider by aligning the marks (C) you made.
 Hold the driveshaft pointed up to prevent the rollers from falling off.
Fig. 31: Fitting Rollers Onto Spider

6. Pack the inboard joint with the joint grease included in the new boot set.
Grease quantity
Inboard joint:
A/T model: 130-140 g (4.6-4.9 oz)
M/T model: 150-160 g (5.3-5.6 oz)
111
Fig. 32: Packing Inboard Joint With Joint Grease

7. Fit the inboard joint onto the driveshaft, and note these items:
 Reinstall the inboard joint onto the driveshaft by aligning the marks (A) you made on the
inboard joint and the rollers.
 Hold the driveshaft so the inboard joint is pointing up to prevent it from falling off.
111
Fig. 33: Fitting Inboard Joint Onto Driveshaft

8. Fit the boot (A) ends onto the driveshaft (B) and the inboard joint (C).
Fig. 34: Locating Driveshaft And Inboard Joint
111
9. Adjust the length of the driveshafts to the figure as shown, then adjust the boots to halfway between
full compression and full extension.
Fig. 35: Identifying M/T Model

111
Fig. 36: Identifying A/T Model

10. Install the boot bands.

 For the low profile type, got to step11.
 For the double loop type, go to step 14 (Boot band replacement only.)
11. Install the new low profile band (A) onto the boot (B), then hook the tab (C) of the band.
111
Fig. 37: Installing Low Profile Band Onto Boot
12. Close the hook portion of the band with commercially available boot band pliers (A), then hook the
tabs (B) of the band.
111
Fig. 38: Closing Hook Portion Of Band

13. Install the boot band on the other end of the boot, and repeat steps 11 through 12.
14. Fit the boot ends onto the driveshaft and the inboard joint, then install the new double loop band (A)
onto the boot (B).
NOTE: Pass the end of the new double loop band through the clip (C) twice in
the direction of the forward rotation of the driveshaft.
111
Fig. 39: Twicing In Direction Of Forward Rotation Of Driveshaft
15. Pull up the slack in the band by hand.

16. Mark position (A) on the band 10-14 mm (0.4-0.6 in.) from the clip (B).
Fig. 40: Identifying Mark Position On Band From Clip
17. Thread the free end of the band through the nose section of the commercially available boot band tool
(A), and into the slot on the winding mandrel (B).
111
Fig. 41: Tightening Band Until Marked Spot
111
Fig. 42: Threading Free End Of Band And Into Slot On Winding Mandrel
18. Using a wrench of the winding mandrel of the boot band tool, tighten the band until the marked spot
(C) on the band meets the edge of the clip.
19. Lift up the boot band tool to bend the free end of the band 90 degrees to the clip. Center-punch the
clip, then fold over the remaining tail onto the clip.
111
Fig. 43: Lifting Up Boot Band Tool To Bend
20. Unwind the boot band tool, and cut off the excess free end of the band to leave a 5-10 mm (0.2-0.4
in.) tail protruding from the clip.
Fig. 44: Identifying Pand Tail Protruding
21. Bend the band end (A) by tapping it down with a hammer.
NOTE:  Make sure the band and clip do not interfere with anything on the
vehicle and the band does not move.
 Remove any grease remaining on the surrounding surfaces.
111
Fig. 45: Tapping Band
22. Repeat steps 13 through 20 for the band on the other end of the boot.
OUTBOARD JOINT SIDE
1. Wrap the splines with vinyl tape (A) to prevent damage to the outboard boot.
111
Fig. 46: Wrapping Outboard Joint Splines With Vinyl Tape

2. Install the new ear clamp bands (B) and outboard boot, then remove the vinyl tape. Be careful not to
damage the outboard boot.
3. Install the new stop ring in the driveshaft groove (A).
111
Fig. 47: Installing Stop Ring In Driveshaft Groove

4. Pack about half of the grease included in the new outboard boot set into the driveshaft hole in the
outboard joint.
111
Fig. 48: Packing Outboard Joint With Joint Grease

5. Insert the driveshaft (A) into the outboard joint (B) until the stop ring (C) is close to the joint.
111
Fig. 49: Inserting Driveshaft Into Outboard Joint

6. To completely seat the outboard joint, pick up the driveshaft and joint, and tap or hit them from a
height of about 10 cm (4 in.) onto a hard surface.
NOTE: Do not use a hammer as excessive force may damage the driveshaft.
Be careful not to damage the threaded section (A) of the outboard joint
111
Fig. 50: Seating Outboard Joint

7. Check the alignment of the paint mark (A) with the outboard joint end (B).
111
Fig. 51: Checking Alignment Of Paint Mark With Outboard Joint End
8. Pack the outboard joint (A) with the remaining joint grease included in the new out board boot set.
Grease quantity
Outboard joint:
A/T model: 105-115 g (3.7-4.1 oz)
M/T model: 140-150 g (4.9-5.3 oz)
111
Fig. 52: Packing Outboard Joint With Joint Grease

9. Fit the boot (A) ends onto the driveshaft (B) and outboard joint (C).
111
Fig. 53: Fitting Boot Ends Onto Driveshaft And Outboard Joint
10. Close the ear portion (A) of the band with commercially available boot band pliers (B).
111
Fig. 54: Closing Band Ear Portion

11. Check the clearance between the closed ear portion of the band. If the clearance is not within the
standard, close the ear portion of the band tighter.
111
Fig. 55: Identifying Clearance Between Band Closed Ear Portion

12. Repeat steps 10 and 11 for the band on the other end of the boot.
DRIVESHAFT INSTALLATION
NOTE: Before starting installation, make sure the mating surfaces of the joint and
the splined section are not dusty or dirty.
1. Apply about 5g (0.18 oz) moly 60 paste (P/N08734-0001) to the contact area of the out board joint
and the front wheel bearing.
NOTE: The paste helps to prevent noise and vibration.
111
Fig. 56: Identifying Area Applying Grease
2. Install a new set ring in the set ring groove of the driveshaft.
Fig. 57: Installing Set Ring In Driveshaft Set Ring Groove (Left Driveshaft)
3. Apply 0.5-1.0 g (0.02-0.04 oz) of grease to the whole splined surface (A) of the right driveshaft. After
applying grease, remove the grease from the splined grooves at intervals of 2-3 splines and from the
set ring groove (B) so that air can bleed from the intermediate shaft.
111
Fig. 58: Locating Grease Applying Point

4. Clean the areas where the driveshaft contacts the differential thoroughly with solvent or brake cleaner,
and dry with compressed air.
NOTE: Do not wash the rubber parts with solvent.
5. Insert the inboard end (A) of the driveshaft into the differential (B) or intermediate shaft (C) until the
new set ring (D) locks in the groove (E).
NOTE: Insert the driveshaft horizontally to prevent damaging the differential oil
seal.
111
Fig. 59: Inserting Inboard End Of Driveshaft Into Differential

6. Install the outboard joint (A) into the front hub (B).
111
Fig. 60: Installing Outboard Joint Into Front Hub

7. A/T model: Install the heat shield .
111
Fig. 61: Installing Heat Shield (A/T Model) With Torque Specifications
8. Clean off any grease contamination from the ball joint tapered section and threads, then install the
knuckle (A) onto the lower arm (B). Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot (C). Wipe off the
grease before tightening the nut (D) to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough
to align the slot with the ball joint pin hole.
NOTE:  Make sure the ball joint boot is not damaged or cracked.
 Do not align the nut by loosening it.
111
Fig. 62: Installing Knuckle Onto Lower Arm With Torque Specifications
9. Install the new cotter pin (E) into the ball joint pin hole, and bend the cotter pin as shown in Fig. 63.
10. Install the damper fork (A) over the driveshaft and onto the lower arm. Install the damper in the
damper fork so the aligning tab (B) is aligned with the slot in the damper fork. Loosely install the
flange bolt (C).
111
Fig. 63: Installing Damper Fork Over Driveshaft And Onto Lower Arm With Torque
Specifications
111
Fig. 64: Connecting Front Stabilizer Link With Torque Specifications

11. Loosely install the flange bolt (D) and a new self-locking nut (E).
12. Connect the front stabilizer link (A) to the lower arm (see step 4 in STABILIZER LINK
REPLACEMENT ).
13. Apply small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the new spindle nut (A).
111
Fig. 65: Removing Wheel Nuts And Front Wheels With Torque Specifications
14. Install a new spindle nut, then tighten the nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut
shoulder (B) against the driveshaft.
15. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the front wheel, then install the front wheel.
16. Turn the front wheel by hand, and make sure there is no interference between the driveshaft and
surrounding parts.
111
17. Tighten the flange bolt and the self-locking nut with the vehicle's weight on the damper.
18. Refill the transmission with recommended transmission fluid:
REPLACEMENT )
19. Lower the vehicle on a lift.

20. Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary (see WHEEL ALIGNMENT ).
21. Test drive the vehicle.
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT REMOVAL

M/T MODEL
1. Drain the transmission fluid. Reinstall the drain plug using a new washer (see TRANSMISSION
FLUID INSPECTION AND REPLACEMENT ).
2. Remove the right driveshaft (see Driveshaft Removal ).
3. Remove the flange bolt (A) and two dowel bolts (B).
111
Fig. 66: Removing Flange Bolt And Dowel Bolts

4. Remove the intermediate shaft (A) from the differential. Hold the intermediate shaft horizontal until it
is clear of the differential to prevent damage to the differential oil seal (B).
Fig. 67: Removing Intermediate Shaft From Differential

INTERMEDIATE SHAFT DISASSEMBLY

 Half shaft base 07NAF-SR30101 or 07NAF-SR34101

 Oil seal driver 07947-SB00100
M/T MODEL
111
1. Remove the set ring (A), outer seal (B), and external snap ring (C).
Fig. 68: Removing Set Ring, Outer Seal And External Snap Ring
2. Press the intermediate shaft (A) out of the intermediate shaft bearing (B) using a press. Be careful not
to damage the metal rings (C) on the intermediate shaft during disassembly.
111
Fig. 69: Removing Intermediate Shaft From Intermediate Shaft Bearing

3. Remove the internal snap ring.
111
Fig. 70: Removing Internal Snap Ring

4. Press the intermediate shaft bearing (A) out of the bearing support (B) using the oil seal driver (C),
half shaft base (D) and a press.
111
Fig. 71: Removing Intermediate Shaft Bearing From Bearing Support

INTERMEDIATE SHAFT REASSEMBLY

EXPLODED VIEW
M/T model:
111
Fig. 72: Exploded View Of Intermediate Shaft Assembly Components (M/T Model) With Torque
Specifications
 Oil seal driver 07GAD-PH70201

 Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 07746-0010400
 Attachment, 35 mm I.D. 07746-0030400
 Driver 07749-0010000
M/T MODEL
NOTE: Refer to the EXPLODED VIEW as needed during this procedure.
1. Clean the disassembled parts with solvent, and dry them with compressed air.
2. Press the intermediate shaft bearing (A) into the bearing support (B) using the 52 x 55 mm attachment
(C), driver (D) and a press.
111
Fig. 73: Inserting Intermediate Shaft Bearing Into Bearing Support

3. Seat the internal snap ring in the groove of the bearing support.
111
Fig. 74: Installing Internal Snap Ring In Groove Of Bearing Support

4. Press the intermediate shaft bearing (A) into the shaft bearing (B) using the 35 mm I.D. attachment
(C) and a press.
111
Fig. 75: Inserting Intermediate Shaft Bearing Into Shaft Bearing

5. Seat the external snap ring (A) in the groove of the intermediate shaft (B).
111
Fig. 76: Seating External Snap Ring In Intermediate Shaft Groove

6. Install the new outer seal (A) into the bearing support (B) using the oil seal driver (C) and a press.
111
Fig. 77: Installing Outer Seal Into Bearing Support

7.
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT INSTALLATION

M/T MODEL
1. Install the set ring.
111
Fig. 78: Installing Set Ring

2. Clean the areas where the intermediate shaft contacts the differential thoroughly with solvent or brake
cleaner, and dry with compressed air.
3. Insert the intermediate shaft assembly (A) into the differential until the set ring locks in the groove.
NOTE: Insert the intermediate shaft horizontally to prevent damage to the

differential oil seal (B).
111
Fig. 79: Inserting Intermediate Shaft Assembly Into Differential (M/T Model)
4. Install the flange bolt (A) and two dowel bolts (B).
111
Fig. 80: Installing Flange Bolt And Dowel Bolts With Torque Specifications
5. Install the right driveshaft (see Driveshaft Installation).

6. Refill the transmission fluid (see TRANSMISSION FLUID INSPECTION AND
REPLACEMENT
111
2003-07 ELECTRICAL Accessory Power Sockets - Accord
2003-07 ELECTRICAL
Accessory Power Sockets - Accord
Fig. 1: Locating Accessory Power Sockets Components

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:20:39
Fig. 2: Accessory Power Sockets Circuit Diagram

FRONT ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET TEST/REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the center console holder (see CENTER CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the front accessory power socket.
111
Fig. 3: Disconnecting 2P Connector From Front Accessory Power Socket

3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
4. Turn the ignition switch to ACC (I), and check for voltage between the No. 2 terminal and body
ground. There should be battery voltage.
 If there is battery voltage, go to step 5.
 If there is no battery voltage, check for:
- Blown No. 9 (15 A) or No. 32 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
- Faulty accessory power socket relay.
- An open in the wire.
5. Check for continuity between the No. 1 terminal and body ground. There should be continuity.
111
If there is continuity, go to step 6.


- Poor ground (G503).

6. Remove the housing (A) and socket (B).
Fig. 4: Removing Housing And Socket

7. Remove the ring (A).
111
Fig. 5: Removing Ring

8. Install the power socket in the reverse order of removal.
REAR ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET TEST/REPLACEMENT

1. Open the center console.
2. Remove the screw and accessory power socket panel (A).
111
Fig. 6: Removing Accessory Power Socket Panel

3. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the rear accessory power socket (C).
5. Turn the ignition switch to ACC (I), and check for voltage between the No. 2 terminal and body
111
If there is battery voltage, go to step 6.


 If there is no battery voltage, check for:
- Blown No. 9 (15 A) or No. 32 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
- Faulty accessory power socket relay.
6. Check for continuity between the No. 1 terminal and body ground. There should be continuity.
- Poor ground (G503).

7. Remove the housing (A) and socket (B).
Fig. 7: Removing Housing And Socket

111
8. Remove the housing (A) from the panel (B).
Fig. 8: Removing Housing From Panel

9. Install the power socket in the reverse order of removal.
111
2003-07 ELECTRICAL Battery - Accord
2003-07 ELECTRICAL
Battery - Accord
BATTERY TEST
WARNING: A battery can explode if you do not follow the proper procedure,
causing serious injury to anyone nearby. Follow all procedures
carefully and keep sparks and open flames away from the battery.
Use either a JCI or Bear ARBST tester, and follow the manufacturer's procedures. If you don't have one of
these computerized testers, follow this conventional test procedure:
1. Be sure the temperature of the electrolyte is between 70°F (21°C) and 100°F (38°C).
2. Inspect the battery case for cracks or leaks.
 If the case is damaged, replace the battery.
 If the case looks OK, go to step 3.
3. Check the indicator EYE.

 If the EYE indicates the battery is charged, go to step 4.
 If the EYE indicates a low charge, go to step 7.
4. Apply a 300 amp load for 15 seconds to remove the surface charge.
5. Wait 15 seconds, then apply a test load of 280 amps for 15 seconds.
6. Record battery voltage.
 If voltage is above 9.6 volts, the battery is OK.
 If voltage is below 9.6 volts, go to step 7.
7. Charge the battery on High (40 amps) until the EYE shows the battery is charged, plus an additional
30 minutes. If the battery charge is very low, it may be necessary to bypass the charger's polarity
protection circuitry.
 If the EYE indicates the battery is charged within three hours, the battery is OK.
 If the EYE indicates the battery is not charged within three hours, replace the battery.
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:21:19
2003-07 ELECTRICAL Body Electrical - Accord
2003-07 ELECTRICAL
Body Electrical - Accord
SPECIAL TOOLS


TIPS AND PRECAUTIONS
Before Troubleshooting
1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay box.

2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and clean and tight connections.
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:21:57
NOTE:  Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery ground cable has
been disconnected, otherwise you will damage the alternator
diodes.
 Do not attempt to crank the engine with the battery ground cable
loosely connected or you will severely damage the wiring.
Handling Connectors
 Make sure the connectors are clean and have no loose wire terminals.
 Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with dielectric grease (except watertight connectors).
 All connectors have push-down release type locks (A).
Fig. 2: Identifying Push-Down Release Type Locks

 Some connectors have a clip on their side used to attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on
another component. This clip has a pull type lock.
 Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected unless you first release the lock and remove the
connector from its mount bracket (A).
111
Fig. 3: Removing Connector From Mount Bracket

 Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their wires; pull on the connector halves instead.
 Always reinstall plastic covers.
111
Fig. 4: Reinstalling Plastic Covers

 Before connecting connectors, make sure the terminals (A) are in place and not bent.
111
Fig. 5: Checking Terminals Are In Place And Not Bent

 Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B).
111
Fig. 6: Checking Retainer And Rubber Seals

 The backs of some connectors are packed with dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease
is contaminated, replace it.
111
Fig. 7: Identifying Connectors Packed With Dielectric Grease

 Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is securely locked.
 Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces down.
111
Fig. 8: Positioning Wires So That Open End Of Cover Faces Down

Handling Wires and Harnesses
 Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with their respective wire ties at the designated
locations.
 Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A).
111
Fig. 9: Remove Clips

 Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to
release the clip.
111
Fig. 10: Slipping Pliers Under Clip Base Through Hole At An Angle
 After installing harness clips, make sure the harness doesn't interfere with any moving parts.
 Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and
holes, and from exposed screws and bolts.
 Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not leave grommets distorted (B).
Fig. 11: Seating Grommets In Grooves Properly

111
Testing and Repairs
 Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation. Replace them or repair them by wrapping the
break with electrical tape.
 Never attempt to modify, splice, or repair SRS wiring. If there is an open or damage is SRS wiring or
terminals, replace the harness.
 After installing parts, make sure that no wires are pinched under them.
 When using electrical test equipment, follow the manufacturer's instructions and those described in
this information.
 If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire side (except waterproof connector).
Fig. 12: Inserting Probe Of Tester From Wire Side

 Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A.
Fig. 13: Using Back Probe Adapter 07TAZ-001020A

111
 Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for identification and replacement of connector
terminals.
FIVE-STEP TROUBLESHOOTING
1. Verify The Complaint:
Turn on all the components in the problem circuit to verify the customer complaint. Note the
symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have narrowed down the problem area.
2. Analyze The Schematic:
Look up the schematic for the problem circuit. Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
tracing the current paths from the power feed through the circuit components to ground. If several
circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or a ground is a likely cause.
Based on the symptoms and your understanding of the circuit operation, identify one or more possible
causes of the problem.
3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit:
Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting. Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to
make tests at points that are easily accessible.
4. Fix The Problem:
Once the specific problem is identified, make the repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe
procedures.
5. Make Sure The Circuit Works:
Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all modes to make sure you've fixed the entire
problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure to test all of the circuits on the fuse. Make sure no
new problems turn up and the original problem does not recur.
WIRE COLOR CODES
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire colors in the circuit schematics:
WIRE COLOR CODES CHART

WHT White
YEL Yellow
BLK Black
BLU Blue
GRN Green
RED Red
ORN Orange
PNK Pink
111
BRN Brown
GRY Gray
PUR Purple
LT BLU Light Blue
LT GRN Light Green
The wire insulation has one color or one color with another color stripe. The second color is the stripe.
Fig. 14: Identifying Wire Insulation

HOW TO CHECK FOR DTCS WITH THE HONDA DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (HDS)
1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the Data Link Connector (DLC) (A) located under
the driver's side of the dashboard.
NOTE: For specific operations, refer to the user's manual that came with the
Honda Diagnostic System (HDS).
111
Fig. 15: Connecting HDS To Data Link Connector

2. Select the TEST MODE MENU and check for Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTCs), and note them.
Refer to the Troubleshooting Index and begin the appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
111
2003-07 ELECTRICAL Connectors & Harnesses - Accord
2003-07 ELECTRICAL
Connectors & Harnesses - Accord
CONNECTOR INDEX
Identification numbers have been assigned to in-line connectors, junction connectors, and terminals. The
number is preceded by the letter "C" for connectors, "G" for ground terminals or "T" for non-ground
terminals.
CONNECTOR INDEX
Location
Harness Others (Floor,
Engine
Dashboard Door, Trunk, Notes
Compartment
and Roof)
Battery ground (-) (see BATTERY
cable G1 GROUND CABLE )
(see ENGINE
Engine ground T1
GROUND CABLE
cable A G2
A)
(see ENGINE
Engine ground T2
GROUND CABLE
cable B G3
B)
C101, C153
(see STARTER
Starter subharness (+)
SUBHARNESS )
T101 through T104
C101 through C103,
C108
Engine wire C152, C201 through (see ENGINE WIRE
harness C203 HARNESS )
T10 through T13
G101
Front engine (see Front Engine
compartment wire C301 Compartment Wire
harness (left G301 Harness (Left
branch) branch) )
(see FRONT
Front engine
ENGINE
compartment wire
G201 COMPARTMENT
harness (right
WIRE HARNESS
branch)
(RIGHT BRANCH) )
Engine (see ENGINE
C153, C301, C310,
compartment wire C401 through COMPARTMENT
C415
harness (left C403 WIRE HARNESS
G302
branch) (LEFT BRANCH) )
Engine (see ENGINE
compartment wire COMPARTMENT
G202 and G203
harness (right WIRE HARNESS
branch) (RIGHT BRANCH) )
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:22:37
(see Transmission
Transmission range
C152 Range Switch
switch subharness
Subharness )
C401 through
C408, C411,
Dashboard wire C416 (see DASHBOARD
harness (left C501 and C502, WIRE HARNESS
branch) C601 (LEFT BRANCH) )
G501 and G502,
G504
C251, C551
Dashboard wire through C557 (see DASHBOARD
harness (right C731 and C732, G505 WIRE HARNESS
branch) C851 (RIGHT BRANCH) )
G503, G506
ECM/PCM wire (see ECM/PCM
C201 through C203 C251 and C281
harness WIRE HARNESS )
(see THROTTLE
Throttle actuator ACTUATOR
control module CONTROL
C281
subharness ('06-07 MODULE
model) SUBHARNESS ('06-
07 MODEL) )
Cable reel (see CABLE REEL
subharness SUBHARNESS )
 4-door (see
FLOOR WIRE
HARNESS
(LEFT
C531, C701, BRANCH) (4-
Floor wire harness C751 and C752 DOOR) )
C501 and C502
(left branch) C901 and C903  2-door (see
G601 and G603 FLOOR WIRE
HARNESS
(LEFT
BRANCH) (2-
DOOR) )
 4-door (see
Floor Wire
Harness (Right
branch) (4-
C551 through door) )
Floor wire harness C781, C801
C553  2-door (see
(right branch) G602
C651 FLOOR WIRE
HARNESS
(LEFT
BRANCH) (2-
DOOR) )
111
 4-door (see
EVAP Canister
Vent Shut
Valve
EVAP canister vent
Subharness
shut valve
C531 (SULEV) )
subharness
(SULEV)  2-door (see
Floor Wire
Harness (Right
branch) (2-
door) )
 4-door (see
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
GROUND
WIRE (4-
Rear window
DOOR) )
defogger ground G604
wire  2-door (see
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
GROUND
WIRE (2-
DOOR) )
4-door (see XM

Radio
Subharness
('04-07
XM Radio
models) )
Subharness ('04-07
models)  2-door (see XM
Radio
Subharness
('04-07
models) )
(see REAR WIRE
C701 through
HARNESS (4-
Rear wire harness C704
DOOR) ('03-05
G701 and G702
MODELS) )
(see ROOF WIRE
Roof wire harness C601, C651 C602 HARNESS (4-
DOOR) )
(see ODS Unit
Harness ('06-07
ODS/OPDS unit
C801 model) and OPDS
wire harness
Unit Harness ('03-05
models) )
Seat position sensor (see Seat Position

111
harness ('04-07 Sensor Harness ('04-

C901 and C903
models) 07 models) )
Side curtain airbag (see Side Curtain
harness ('04-07 Airbag Harness ('04-
models) 07 models) )
(see DRIVER'S
Driver's door wire DOOR WIRE
C631 and C632
harness HARNESS (4-
DOOR) )
Driver's door (see Driver's Door
C631 and C632
subharness Subharness (4-door) )
(see FRONT
PASSENGER'S
Front passenger's
C731 and C732 DOOR WIRE
door wire harness
HARNESS (4-
DOOR) )
(see LEFT REAR
Left rear door wire DOOR WIRE
C751
harness (4-door) HARNESS (4-
DOOR) )
(see RIGHT REAR
Right rear door
DOOR WIRE
wire harness (4- C781
HARNESS (4-
door)
DOOR) )
(see DRIVER'S
Driver's seat wire SEAT WIRE
C901
harness HARNESS (8-WAY
ADJUSTABLE) )
(see A/C WIRE
A/C wire harness C851
HARNESS )
CONNECTOR TO HARNESS INDEX

BATTERY GROUND CABLE
BATTERY GROUND CABLE REFERENCE CHART

Connector or Terminal Ref Location Connects to
Left side of engine Body ground, via battery
G1 6
compartment ground cable
(-) 5 Battery Battery negative terminal
ENGINE GROUND CABLE A
ENGINE GROUND CABLE REFERENCE CHART

Right side of engine Body ground, via battery
T1 2
compartment ground cable
Right side of engine Body ground, via engine
111
G2 1 compartment ground cable A
ENGINE GROUND CABLE B
ENGINE GROUND CABLE B REFERENCE CHART

Left side of engine
T2 3 Transmission housing
compartment
Left side of engine Body ground, via engine
G3 4
compartment around cable B
Fig. 1: Identifying Battery And Engine Ground Cable
111
STARTER SUBHARNESS
STARTER SUBHARNESS REFERENCE CHART

Connector or
Ref Cavities Location Connects to
Terminal
Middle of engine
Alternator 1 4
compartment
Middle of engine
Knock sensor 3 1
compartment
Middle of engine
Starter solenoid 5 1
compartment
Engine wire harness
Left side of engine
C101 10 6 (see ENGINE
compartment
WIRE HARNESS )
Left side of engine Engine compartment
C153 8 1
compartment wire harness (see )
Left side of engine Under-hood
T101 7
compartment fuse/relay box
Left side of engine Under-hood
T102 6
compartment fuse/relay box
T103 2 Alternator
Middle of engine
T104 4 Starter motor
compartment
Battery positive
(+) 9 Battery
terminal
111
Fig. 2: Identifying Starter Subharness

ENGINE WIRE HARNESS
ENGINE WIRE HARNESS REFERENCE CHART (1 OF 2)

Connector or
Ref Cavities Location Notes
Terminal
Left side of engine
A/F sensor 1 18 4 A/T
compartment
Left side of engine
A/F sensor 1 23 4 M/T
compartment
A/T clutch pressure Left side of engine
24 2
control solenoid compartment
111
valve connector A
A/T clutch pressure
Left side of engine
control solenoid 31 2
compartment
valve connector B
A/T clutch pressure
Left side of engine
control solenoid 30 2 M/T
compartment
valve connector C
Left side of engine
Back-up light switch 33 2
compartment
Left side of engine
CMP sensor A 5 3
compartment
Left side of engine
CMP sensor B 8 3
compartment
Right side of engine
CKP sensor 45 3
compartment
EGR valve and EGR Left side of engine
7 6
valve position sensor compartment
EVAP canister purge Left side of engine
12 2
valve compartment
Engine coolant
Left side of engine
temperature (ECT) 13 2
compartment
sensor
Engine mount
control solenoid 44 2 A/T
compartment
valve
Engine oil pressure Right side of engine
47 1
switch compartment
Idle air control (IAC) Left side of engine
34 3
valve compartment
Middle of engine
Ignition coil No. 1 1 3
compartment
Middle of engine
compartment
Middle of engine
compartment
Middle of engine
compartment
Middle of engine
Injector No. 1 43 2
compartment
Middle of engine
Injector No. 2 42 2
compartment
Middle of engine
Injector No. 3 41 2
compartment
Middle of engine
Injector No. 4 39 2
compartment
Intake air
Left side of engine
temperature (IAT) 35 2 Except SULEV
compartment
sensor
111
Input shaft
Left side of engine
(mainshaft) speed 23 3 A/T
compartment
sensor
Left side of engine
MAP sensor 37 3
compartment
Mass air flow (MAF)
sensor/Intake air Left side of engine
20 5
temperature (IAT) compartment
sensor
Output shaft
Left side of engine
(countershaft) speed 19 3
compartment
sensor
Throttle position Left side of engine
36 3
(TP) sensor compartment
Left side of engine
Throttle body 5 10
compartment
VTC oil control Right side of engine
46 2
solenoid valve compartment
Rocker arm oil
pressure switch Right side of engine
48 2
(VTEC oil pressure compartment
switch)
Rocker arm oil
control solenoid Right side of engine
49 2
(VTEC solenoid compartment
valve)
2nd clutch
Left side of engine
transmission fluid 29 1 A/T
compartment
pressure switch
3rd clutch
Left side of engine
transmission fluid 28 1 A/T
compartment
pressure switch
(1) '03-04 SULEV, LX-P models, '05-07 models
111
Fig. 3: Identifying Engine Wire Harness And Transmission Range Switch Subharness (1 Of 2)
ENGINE WIRE HARNESS REFERENCE CHART (2 OF 2)

Connector or
Terminal Notes
Left side of Starter subharness
C101 38 6 engine (see STARTER
compartment SUBHARNESS )
Left side of
C102 (Junction
21 24 engine
connector)
compartment
Left side of
111
C103 (Junction engine

22 5
connector) compartment
Left side of
C108 32 8 engine
compartment
Transmission Transmission range
C152 25 10
housing switch subharness
ECM/PCM wire
Left side of
harness (see
C201 9 33 engine
ECM/PCM Wire
compartment
Harness )
ECM/PCM wire A/T
Left side of
harness (see
C202 10 33 engine
ECM/PCM Wire
compartment
Harness )
ECM/PCM wire M/T
Left side of
harness (see
C202 10 23 engine
ECM/PCM Wire
compartment
Harness )
Left side of
ECM/PCM wire SULEV(1)
harness (see
C203 11 1 engine
ECM/PCM Wire
compartment
Harness )
ECM/PCM wire (2)
Left side of
harness (see
C203 11 6 engine
ECM/PCM Wire
compartment
Harness )
Left side of
T10 (Terminal
17 engine
joint)
compartment
Left side of
T11 (Terminal
16 engine
joint)
compartment
Left side of
T12 (Terminal
15 engine
joint)
compartment
Left side of
T13 (Terminal
14 engine
joint)
compartment
Middle of engine Engine ground, via
G101 40
compartment engine wire harness
(1) '03-05 models
(2) '06-07 A/T model
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH SUBHARNESS
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH SUBHARNESS REFERENCE CHART
111
Connector or
Terminal
Transmission range Transmission
26 10
switch housing
Transmission Engine wire
C152 25 10
housing harness
Fig. 4: Identifying Engine Wire Harness And Transmission Range Switch Subharness (2 Of 2)
FRONT ENGINE COMPARTMENT WIRE HARNESS (RIGHT BRANCH)
FRONT ENGINE COMPARTMENT WIRE HARNESS REFERENCE CHART

111
Connector or
Terminal
A/C compressor Right side of engine
7 1
clutch compartment
A/C pressure switch 6 2
compartment
A/C condenser fan Right side of engine
5 2
motor compartment
Right front turn
Behind right
signal/side marker 1 3
headlight
light
Right headlight Behind right
4 2
(high) headlight
Right headlight Behind right
2 2
(low) headlight
Body ground, via
Right side of engine front engine
G201 3
compartment compartment wire
harness
111
Fig. 5: Identifying Front Engine Compartment Wire Harness

FRONT ENGINE COMPARTMENT WIRE HARNESS (LEFT BRANCH)
FRONT ENGINE COMPARTMENT WIRE HARNESS REFERENCE CHART

Connector or
Ref Cavities Location Connects to Notes
Terminal
111
Behind middle of (4)

Hood switch 13 2
front bumper
Behind middle of
Horn (high) 11 1
front bumper
Behind middle of
Horn (low) 14 1
front bumper
Left front turn
Behind left
signal/side marker 4 3
headlight
light
Left headlight Behind left
8 2
(high) headlight
Left headlight Behind left
5 2
(low) headlight
Outside air Middle of engine Climate
12 2
temperature sensor compartment control
Left side of
Radiator fan motor 9 2 engine
compartment
Left side of
Radiator fan (2)
10 2 engine
switch
compartment
Under-hood
fuse/relay box
Behind under-
connector F (see
2 20 hood fuse/relay
UNDER-HOOD
box
FUSE/RELAY
BOX )
Under-hood
fuse/relay box
Behind under-
connector H (see
UNDER-HOOD
box
FUSE/RELAY
BOX )
Daytime running In multi-relay
1 5 Canada
lights relay box
Engine
Left side of
compartment (1)
C301 6 2 engine
wire harness
compartment
(see )
Engine
Left side of
compartment (3)
C301 6 4 engine
wire harness
compartment
(see )
Body ground, via
Left side of
front engine
G301 7 engine
compartment
compartment
wire harness
(1) '03-04 Canada models
111
(2) '03-04 models
(3) '05-07 models
(4) EX, EXL, Canada LX, '06-07 model Canada SE
Fig. 6: Identifying Front Engine Compartment Wire Harness And Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box
ENGINE COMPARTMENT WIRE HARNESS (RIGHT BRANCH)
111
ENGINE COMPARTMENT WIRE HARNESS REFERENCE CHART

Connector or
Terminal
Right side of
ABS modulator-
4 25 engine
control unit
compartment
Right side of
Cruise control (1)
1 4 engine
actuator
compartment
Power steering Right side of
pressure (PSP) 3 2 engine
switch compartment
Right side of
Right front
9 2 engine
impact sensor
compartment
Right side of
Right front
2 2 engine
wheel sensor
compartment
Washer fluid Behind right of
7 2 Canada
level switch front bumper
Windshield Behind right of
6 2
washer motor front bumper
Body ground, via
Right side of
engine
G202 8 engine
compartment wire
compartment
harness
Body ground, via
Right side of
engine
G203 5 engine
compartment wire
compartment
harness
(1) '03-05 models
111
Fig. 7: Identifying Engine Compartment Wire Harness

ENGINE COMPARTMENT WIRE HARNESS (LEFT BRANCH)
ENGINE COMPARTMENT WIRE HARNESS REFERENCE CHART

Connector or
Terminal
Brake fluid level Left side of

111
switch engine
8 2
compartment
Left side of
Left front impact
21 2 engine
sensor
compartment
Left side of
Left front wheel
17 2 engine
sensor
compartment
Under-dash
fuse/relay box
connector B (see Under left side of
15 6
UNDER-DASH dash
FUSE/RELAY
BOX )
Under-dash
fuse/relay box
connector C (see Under left side of
14 12
UNDER-DASH dash
FUSE/RELAY
BOX )
Under-dash
fuse/relay box
connector D (see Under left side of
16 17
UNDER-DASH dash
FUSE/RELAY
BOX )
Under-hood
fuse/relay box
connector A (ELD
In under-hood
unit) (see 6 3
fuse/relay box
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY
BOX )
Under-hood
fuse/relay box
Behind under-
connector C (see
1 2 hood fuse/relay
UNDER-HOOD
box
FUSE/RELAY
BOX )
Under-hood
fuse/relay box
Behind under-
connector D (see
7 9 hood fuse/relay
UNDER-HOOD
box
FUSE/RELAY
BOX )
Under-hood
fuse/relay box Behind under-
connector E (see 2 16 hood fuse/relay
UNDER-HOOD box
FUSE/RELAY
111
BOX )
Under-hood
fuse/relay box
Behind under-
connector G (see
5 2 hood fuse/relay
UNDER-HOOD
box
FUSE/RELAY
BOX )
Under-hood
fuse/relay box
Behind under-
connector I (see
UNDER-HOOD
box
FUSE/RELAY
BOX )
Under-hood
fuse/relay box
Behind under-
connector J (see
3 5 hood fuse/relay
UNDER-HOOD
box
FUSE/RELAY
BOX )
Left side of
Windshield wiper
9 5 engine
motor
compartment
Left side of Starter subharness
C153 22 1 engine (see STARTER
compartment SUBHARNESS )
Front engine
compartment wire
harness (see
Left side of
ENGINE (1)
C301 21 2 engine
COMPARTMENT
compartment
WIRE HARNESS
(RIGHT
BRANCH) )
Front engine
compartment wire
harness (see
Left side of
ENGINE (2)
C301 20 4 engine
COMPARTMENT
compartment
WIRE HARNESS
(RIGHT
BRANCH) )
Left side of
C310 (Optional
10 3 engine
connector A)
compartment
Dashboard wire
harness (see
Under left side of
C401 11 20 DASHBOARD
dash
WIRE HARNESS
(LEFT BRANCH) )
111
Dashboard wire
harness (see
Under left side of (3)
C402 12 5 DASHBOARD
dash
WIRE HARNESS
(LEFT BRANCH) )
Dashboard wire
harness (see
Under left side of (4)
C402 12 12 DASHBOARD
dash
WIRE HARNESS
(LEFT BRANCH) )
Dashboard wire
harness (see
Under left side of
C403 13 4 DASHBOARD
dash
WIRE HARNESS
(LEFT BRANCH) )
Left side of
C415 (Optional
18 3 engine
connector B)
compartment
Left side of Body ground, via
G302 19 engine engine compartment
compartment wire harness
(1) '03-04 Canada models
(2) '05-07 models
(3) '03-05 models
(4) '06-07 model
111
Fig. 8: Identifying Engine Compartment Wire Harness And Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS (LEFT BRANCH)
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS REFERENCE CHART (1 OF 2)

Connector or
Terminal
111
Audio unit Location Under

15 20
connector A middle of dash
Audio unit Under middle (1)
16 14
connector B of dash
Brake pedal Under left side
7 4
position switch of dash
Cable reel Under left side
24 4
connector A of dash
Cable reel
Cable reel In steering connector C (see (2)
25 5
connector B column cover CABLE REEL
SUBHARNESS )
Cable reel
Cable reel In steering connector C (see (3)
25 13
connector B column cover CABLE REEL
SUBHARNESS )
Clutch interlock Under left side
27 2 Interlock M/T
switch of dash
Clutch pedal Under left side
28 3 M/T
position switch of dash
Under left side (6)
Cruise control unit 32 14
of dash
Daytime running Under left side (7)
32 14
lights control unit of dash
Data link Under left side
33 16
connector (DLC) of dash
Gauge control Behind gauges (4)
10 30
module assembly
Gauge control Behind gauges (5)
10 36
module assembly
In steering
Ignition switch 26 7
column cover
Immobilizer
In steering
control unit- 23 7
column cover
receiver
In-car temperature Under middle
11 2 Climate control
sensor of dash
Ignition key In steering
22 6
switch/key light column cover
Behind left side
Moonroof switch 9 6
of dash
Navigation display Under middle
17 10 Navigation
unit connector A of dash
Under left side
Left tweeter 3 2
of dash
Under-dash
fuse/relay box
connector A (see
111
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY 40 6 Left kick panel
BOX )
Under-dash
fuse/relay box
connector N (see
39 45 Left kick panel
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX )
Under-dash
fuse/relay box
connector P
[Multiplex
integrated control 36 30 Left kick panel
unit (MICU)] (see
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX )
Under-dash
fuse/relay box
connector Q
[Multiplex
integrated control 37 14 Left kick panel
unit (MICU)] (see
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX )
Under-dash
fuse/relay box
connector R (see
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX )
Under-dash
fuse/relay box
connector S (see
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX )
Under-dash
fuse/relay box
connector X (see
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX )
Wiper/washer
In steering
switch connector 21 8
column cover
A
(1) '03-05 models with navigation system, '04-05 models with XM radio, '06-07 model
111
(2) '03-04 models except USA DX and LX, '05 model DX
(3) '03-04 models USA DX and LX, '05 model except USA DX and LX, '06-07 model
(4) '03-05 models
(5) '06-07 model
(6) '03-05 models except USA DX
(7) '06-07 model USA
Fig. 9: Identifying Dashboard Wire Harness And Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box (1 Of 2)

111

Connector or
Terminal
Engine
Under left side
C401 30 20 compartment wire
of dash
harness (see )
Engine
Under left side (6)
of dash
harness (see )
Engine
Under left side (7)
of dash
harness (see )
Engine
Under left side
of dash
harness (see )
C404 (Junction Behind left side
6 28
connector) of dash
4 28
connector) of dash
5 28
connector) of dash
C407 (Junction Under middle of (1)
18 14
connector) dash
13 14
connector) dash
19 14
connector) dash
14 14
connector) dash
Under middle of
C411 20 1 4-door
dash
C416 (Optional Left side of
8 2
connector) dash
Floor wire harness
 4-door (see
FLOOR
WIRE
Under left side HARNESS
C501 34 24 (LEFT
of dash
BRANCH)
(4-DOOR) )
 2-door (see
FLOOR
WIRE
HARNESS
111
(LEFT
BRANCH)
(2-DOOR) )
Floor wire harness
4-door (see
FLOOR
WIRE
HARNESS
(LEFT
Under left side BRANCH) (6)
C502 35 4 (4-DOOR) )
of dash
 2-door (see
FLOOR
WIRE
HARNESS
(LEFT
BRANCH)
(2-DOOR) )
Floor wire harness
 4-door (see
FLOOR
WIRE
HARNESS
(LEFT
Under left side BRANCH) (7)
C502 35 6 (4-DOOR) )
of dash
 2-door (see
FLOOR
WIRE
HARNESS
(LEFT
BRANCH)
(2-DOOR) )
Roof wire harness
Under left side (see ROOF WIRE (3)
C601 43 8
of dash HARNESS (4-
DOOR) )
Roof wire harness
C601 41 10
of dash HARNESS (4-
DOOR) )
Roof wire harness
C601 41 3
of dash HARNESS (4-
DOOR) )
Behind left side
G501 2 Body ground, via
of dash
dashboard wire
111
harness
Body ground, via
Behind left side
G502 1 dashboard wire
of dash
harness
Under middle of Body ground, via
G504 12
dash dashboard
(1) '04 model with XM radio
(2) '05 model with XM radio
(3) '03-04 models
(4) '05-07 models with moonroof
(5) '05-07 models without moonroof
(6) '03-05 models
(7) '06-07 model
111
Fig. 10: Identifying Dashboard Wire Harness And Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box (2 Of 2)
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS (RIGHT BRANCH)

Connector or
Terminal
Audio-HVAC
5 10 Middle of dash Navigation
subdisplay/clock
Audio-HVAC display Under middle of
111
panel connector A 7 22 dash

Audio-HVAC display Under middle of
4 16 Climate control
panel connector B dash
Under right side of
Blower motor 18 2
dash
Blower power Under right side of
21 4
transistor dash
Driver's seat heater Under console
36 6
switch panel
ECM/PCM connector Under middle of
28 31
E dash
Front accessory power Under console
30 2
socket panel
Front passenger's Under right side of
24 4
airbag inflator dash
Front passenger's seat Under console
31 6
heater switch panel
Under right side of
Glove box light 22 2
dash
Hazard warning switch 6 5 Middle of dash (1)
Hazard warning
switch/passenger's 6 6 Middle of dash (2)
airbag cutoff indicator
Navigation display unit
25 20 Middle of dash
connector B
Park pin switch/A/T
Under console
gear position console 2 4 A/T
panel
light
Behind rear
Parking brake switch 34 1
console
Under middle of
PCM connector D 29 17
dash
Rear accessory power Behind rear
35 2
socket console
Right tweeter 13 2 Right side of dash
Under left side of
SRS unit connector A 32 28
dash
Under right side of
Seat heater relay 23 4
dash
Under console
Shift lock solenoid 33 2 A/T
panel
Sunlight sensor 8 2 Middle of dash Climate control
Throttle actuator Under right side of (3)
23 4
control module relay dash
(1) '03 model
(2) '04-07 models
111
(3) '06-07 model
Fig. 11: Identifying Dashboard Wire Harness (1 Of 2)


Connector or
Terminal
ECM/PCM wire
111
harness (see
Under middle
C251 27 13 ECM/PCM Wire
of dash
Harness )
Floor wire harness
 4-door (see
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
GROUND
Under right WIRE (4- (1)
C551 17 4 DOOR) )
side of dash
 2-door (see
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
GROUND
WIRE (2-
DOOR) )
Floor wire harness
 4-door (see
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
GROUND
Under right WIRE (4- (2)
C551 17 17 DOOR) )
side of dash
 2-door (see
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
GROUND
WIRE (2-
DOOR) )
Floor wire harness
 4-door (see
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
GROUND
Under right WIRE (4-
C552 16 13 With navigation
side of dash DOOR) )
 2-door (see
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
GROUND
WIRE (2-
111
DOOR) )
Floor wire harness
 4-door (see
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
GROUND
Under right WIRE (4-
C553 15 6 DOOR) ) With navigation
side of dash
 2-door (see
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
GROUND
WIRE (2-
DOOR) )
C554 (Junction Under right
9 28
connector) side of dash
10 28
12 28
11 28
Front passenger's
door wire harness
(see FRONT
Under right
C731 19 13 PASSENGER'S
side of dash
DOOR WIRE
HARNESS (4-
DOOR) )
Front passenger's
door wire harness
(see FRONT
Under right
C732 20 12 PASSENGER'S
side of dash
DOOR WIRE
HARNESS (4-
DOOR) )
A/C wire harness
Under middle
C851 3 21 (see A/C WIRE
of dash
HARNESS )
Body ground, via
Behind right
side of dash
harness
Body ground, via
Under middle
of dash
harness
Body ground, via
111
Under middle dashboard wire

G506 26
of dash harness
(1) '03 model, '04-07 models without XM radio, '04-07 models without navigation
(2) '04-07 models with XM radio or '04-07 models with navigation
Fig. 12: Identifying Dashboard Wire Harness (2 Of 2)

FLOOR WIRE HARNESS (LEFT BRANCH) (4-DOOR)

111
FLOOR WIRE HARNESS REFERENCE CHART

Connector or
Terminal
Driver's door
23 1 Left B-pillar
switch
Driver's seat belt Under driver's (1)
19 3
switch seat
Driver's seat belt
21 4 Left B-pillar
tensioner
Driver's side Under driver's
20 2
airbag inflator seat
25 2
impact sensor seat
EVAP canister Left side of (6)
16 2
vent shut valve trunk
Fuel pump/fuel
10 5 Fuel tank
gauge sending unit
Fuel tank pressure Left side of
17 3
(FTP) sensor trunk
Left rear door
14 1 Left C-pillar
switch
Left rear wheel Under rear
15 2
sensor floor
SRS unit Under middle
6 28
connector B of dash
Under-dash
fuse/relay box
connector E (see Under left side
2 16
UNDER-DASH of dash
FUSE/RELAY
BOX )
Under-dash
fuse/relay box
connector F (see Under left side
1 14
UNDER-DASH of dash
FUSE/RELAY
BOX )
Under-dash
fuse/relay box
connector H (see Under left side
3 14
UNDER-DASH of dash
FUSE/RELAY
BOX )
Window antenna
11 1 Left C-pillar
coil connector A
Dashboard wire
C501 5 24
harness (see
Under left side DASHBOARD
111
of dash WIRE HARNESS

(LEFT
BRANCH) )
Dashboard wire
harness (see
Under left side DASHBOARD (7)
C502 4 4
(LEFT
BRANCH) )
Dashboard wire
harness (see
C502 4 6
(LEFT
BRANCH) )
EVAP canister vent
Left side of (5)
C531 7 2 shut valve
trunk
subharness
Rear wire harness
 '03-05 models
(see REAR
WIRE
HARNESS
(4-DOOR)
Left side of ('03-05
C701 12 8 MODELS) )
trunk
 '06-07 model
(see REAR
WIRE
HARNESS
(4-DOOR)
('06-07
MODEL) )
Left rear door wire
harness (see LEFT
C751 22 10 Left B-pillar REAR DOOR
WIRE HARNESS
(4-DOOR) )
Rear wire harness
connectors C702
and C703 via
junction connector
C752 (Junction
13 18 Left C-pillar  '03-05 models
connector)
(see REAR
WIRE
HARNESS
(4-DOOR)
('03-05
111
MODELS) )
 '06-07 model
(see REAR
WIRE
HARNESS
(4-DOOR)
('06-07
MODEL) )
Driver's seat wire
harness (see
Under driver's DRIVER'S SEAT (2)
C901 18 10
seat WIRE HARNESS
(8-WAY
ADJUSTABLE) )
Driver's seat wire
harness (see
C901 18 5
seat WIRE HARNESS
(2-WAY
ADJUSTABLE) )
Seat position sensor
harness (see
Under driver's (3)
C901 18 5 DASHBOARD
seat
WIRE HARNESS
(SRS BRANCH) )
harness (see
Under driver's (4)
C903 26 2 DASHBOARD
seat
WIRE HARNESS
(SRS BRANCH) )
G601 24
floor floor wire harness
Left front of Body ground, via
G603 9
trunk floor wire harness
(1) Power seat 2-way adjustable
(3) '04-07 models without power seat
(4) '04-07 models power seat 8-way adjustable
(5) With SULEV
(6) Except SULEV
(7) '03-05 models
(8) '06-07 model
EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE SUBHARNESS (SULEV)
111
EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE SUBHARNESS REFERENCE CHART

Connector or
Terminal
EVAP canister vent
8 2 Left side of trunk
shut valve
C531 7 2 Left side of trunk Floor wire harness
Fig. 13: Identifying Floor Wire Harness And EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve
FLOOR WIRE HARNESS (RIGHT BRANCH) (4-DOOR)

Connector or
111
Terminal Ref Cavities Location Connects to Notes

Front
passenger's 14 1 Right B-pillar
door switch
Front
Under front
passenger's seat 5 3
passenger's seat
belt switch
Front
passenger's seat 15 4 Right B-pillar
belt tensioner
Front
Under front
passenger's seat
heater
Front
Under front
passenger's side 17 2
passenger's seat
airbag inflator
Front
Under front
passenger's seat
impact sensor
Front
passenger's
Under front (5)
weight sensor 10 6
passenger's seat
unit connector
C
Navigation
Right side of
inspection 25 2
rear shelf
connector
Navigation unit Middle of rear
27 20
connector A shelf
28 14
connector B shelf
26 8
connector C shelf
Right rear door
19 1 Right C-pillar
switch
Right rear Right side of
24 2 With navigation
speaker rear shelf
Right rear
18 2 Under rear floor
wheel sensor
Secondary
Under front
heated oxygen 11 4
passenger's seat
sensor
XM receiver Right side of (1)
23 14
connector A trunk
XM receiver Right side of (2)
22 14
connector A trunk
Dashboard wire
harness (see
111
DASHBOARD
WIRE
Under right side (3)
C551 6 4 HARNESS
of dash
(RIGHT
BRANCH) )
Dashboard wire
harness (see
DASHBOARD
Under right side (4)
C551 6 17 WIRE
of dash
HARNESS
(RIGHT
BRANCH) )
Dashboard wire
harness (see
DASHBOARD
Under right side
C552 8 13 WIRE With navigation
of dash
HARNESS
(RIGHT
BRANCH) )
Dashboard wire
harness (see
DASHBOARD
Under right side
of dash
HARNESS
(RIGHT
BRANCH) )
Roof wire harness
(see ROOF
Under right side
of dash
HARNESS (4-
DOOR) )
Right rear door
wire harness (see
RIGHT REAR
C781 16 10 Right B-pillar
DOOR WIRE
HARNESS (4-
DOOR) )
OPDS unit
harness (see
Under front DASHBOARD (6)
C801 3 4
passenger's seat WIRE
HARNESS (SRS
BRANCH) )
ODS unit harness
(see
Under front DASHBOARD (7)
C801 9 4
passenger's seat WIRE
HARNESS (SRS
BRANCH) )
Right side of Body ground, via
111
G602 13 floor floor wire harness

(1) '04-07 models with navigation
(2) '04-07 models without navigation
(5) '04-05 models
(6) '03-05 models
(7) '06-07 model
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER GROUND WIRE (4-DOOR)
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER GROUND WIRE REFERENCE CHART

Connector or
Terminal
Rear window
defogger connector 2 1 Right C-pillar
B
Body ground, via
rear window
G604 1 Right C-pillar
defogger ground
wire
XM RADIO SUBHARNESS ('04-07 MODELS)
XM RADIO SUBHARNESS REFERENCE CHART

Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location
XM receiver connector B 21 2 Right side of trunk
XM radio antenna 20 2 Right C-Pillar
111
Fig. 14: Identifying Floor Wire Harness And XM Receiver Connector

FLOOR WIRE HARNESS (LEFT BRANCH) (2-DOOR)

Connector or
Terminal
Driver's door
18 1 Left B-pillar
switch
Driver's seat belt Under driver's (1)
20 3
switch seat
111
Driver's seat belt

17 4 Left B-pillar
tensioner
21 2
airbag inflator seat
23 2
impact sensor seat
EVAP canister Left side of (6)
15 2
vent shut valve trunk
Fuel pump/fuel
10 5 Fuel tank
gauge sending unit
Fuel tank pressure Left side of
16 3
(FTP) sensor trunk
Left rear wheel Under rear
14 2
sensor floor
SRS unit Under middle
6 28
connector B of dash
Under-dash
fuse/relay box
connector E (see Under left side
2 16
UNDER-DASH of dash
FUSE/RELAY
BOX )
Under-dash
fuse/relay box
connector F (see Under left side
1 14
UNDER-DASH of dash
FUSE/RELAY
BOX )
Under-dash
fuse/relay box
connector H (see Under left side
3 14
UNDER-DASH of dash
FUSE/RELAY
BOX )
Window antenna
11 1 Left C-pillar
coil connector A
Dashboard wire
harness (see
C501 5 24
(LEFT
BRANCH) )
Dashboard wire
harness (see
C502 4 4
(LEFT
BRANCH) )
Dashboard wire
111
harness (see
DASHBOARD
Under left side
C502 4 6 WIRE HARNESS (8)
of dash
(LEFT
BRANCH) )
EVAP canister vent
Left side of (5)
C531 7 2 shut valve
trunk
subharness
Rear wire harness
 '03-05 models
(see REAR
WIRE
HARNESS
(2-DOOR)
Left side of ('03-05
C701 12 8 MODELS) )
trunk
 '06-07 model
(see REAR
WIRE
HARNESS
(2-DOOR)
('06-07
MODEL) )
Rear wire harness
connectors C702
and C703 via
junction connector
'03-05 models
(see REAR
WIRE
HARNESS
C752 (Junction (2-DOOR)
13 18 Left C-pillar
connector) ('03-05
MODELS) )
 '06-07 model
(see REAR
WIRE
HARNESS
(2-DOOR)
('06-07
MODEL) )
Driver's seat wire
harness (see
C901 19 10
seat WIRE HARNESS
(8-WAY
ADJUSTABLE) )
Driver's seat wire
111
harness (see
DRIVER'S SEAT
Under driver's
C901 19 5 WIRE HARNESS (1)
seat
(2-WAY
ADJUSTABLE) )
harness (see
Under driver's (3)
C901 19 5 DASHBOARD
seat
WIRE HARNESS
(SRS BRANCH) )
harness (see
Under driver's (4)
C903 24 2 DASHBOARD
seat
WIRE HARNESS
(SRS BRANCH) )
G601 22
Left front of Body ground, via
G603 9
trunk floor wire harness
(5) With SULEV
(6) Except SULEV
(7) '03-05 models
(8) '06-07 model
EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE SUBHARNESS (WITH SULEV)

Connector or
Terminal
EVAP canister vent
8 2 Left side of trunk
shut valve
C531 7 2 Left side of trunk Floor wire harness
111
Fig. 15: Identifying Floor Wire Harness And EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve Subharness
FLOOR WIRE HARNESS (RIGHT BRANCH) (2-DOOR)

Connector or
Terminal
Front
Under front
passenger's seat
belt switch
Front
111
passenger's seat
15 4 Right B-pillar
belt tensioner
Front
Under front
passenger's seat
heater
Front
Under front
passenger's seat
airbag inflator
Front
Under front
passenger's seat
impact sensor
Front
passenger's Under front (3)
10 6
weight sensor passenger's seat
unit
Navigation
Right side of
inspection 22 2
rear shelf
connector
24 20
connector A shelf
25 14
connector B shelf
23 8
connector C shelf
Passenger's door
14 1 Right B-pillar
switch
Right rear Right side of
21 2 With navigation
speaker rear shelf
Right rear wheel
17 2 Under rear floor
sensor
Secondary
Under front
heated oxygen 11 4
passenger's seat
sensor
XM receiver Right side of
20 14
connector A trunk
Dashboard wire
harness (see
Under right side DASHBOARD (1)
C551 6 4
(RIGHT
BRANCH) )
Dashboard wire
harness (see
Under right side DASHBOARD (2)
C551 6 17
(RIGHT
BRANCH) )
Dashboard wire
111
harness (see
DASHBOARD
Under right side
C552 8 13 WIRE HARNESS With navigation
of dash
(RIGHT
BRANCH) )
Dashboard wire
harness (see
Under right side DASHBOARD
(RIGHT
BRANCH) )
Roof wire harness
Under right side (see ROOF
(2-DOOR) )
OPDS unit harness
(see
Under front (4)
C801 3 4 DASHBOARD
passenger's seat
WIRE HARNESS
(SRS BRANCH) )
ODS unit harness
(see
Under front (5)
C801 9 4 DASHBOARD
passenger's seat
WIRE HARNESS
(SRS BRANCH) )
Right side of Body ground, via
G602 13
(3) '04-05 models
(4) '03-05 models
(5) '06-07 model
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER GROUND WIRE (2-DOOR)
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER GROUND WIRE REFERENCE CHART

Connector or
Terminal
Rear window
defogger connector 2 1 Right C-pillar
B
Body ground, via
rear window
G604 1 Right C-pillar
defogger ground
wire
XM RADIO SUBHARNESS ('04-07 MODELS)

111
XM RADIO SUBHARNESS REFERENCE CHART

XM receiver connector B 19 2 Right side of trunk
XM radio antenna 18 2 Right rear corner of roof
Fig. 16: Identifying Floor Wire Harness And XM Receiver Subharness

REAR WIRE HARNESS (4-DOOR) ('03-05 MODELS)
REAR WIRE HARNESS REFERENCE CHART

Connector or
Terminal
111
High mount brake Middle of rear

6 2
light shelf
Left side of
Left back-up light 16 3
trunk
Left inner brake Left side of
17 2
light/taillight trunk
Left side of rear
Left rear speaker 4 2
shelf
Left rear turn Left side of
19 3
signal light trunk
Left side of
Left taillight 20 4
trunk
License plate Behind middle
13 2
light of trunk lid
Right back-up Right side of
11 3
light trunk
Right inner brake Right side of
10 2
Right rear Right side of Without
5 2
speaker rear shelf navigation
Right rear turn Right side of
9 3
signal light trunk
Right side of
Right taillight 8 4
trunk
Trunk key Behind right
12 3
cylinder switch side of trunk lid
Trunk latch
Behind middle
switch/trunk lid 14 3 Keyless
of trunk lid
opener solenoid
Trunk latch Behind middle
14 2 Without keyless
switch of trunk lid
Under middle of
Trunk light 7 2
rear shelf
Floor wire
harness (see
FLOOR WIRE
Left side of
C701 3 8 HARNESS
trunk
(LEFT
BRANCH) (4-
DOOR) )
Floor wire
harness
connector C752
C702 (Junction Left side of via junction
2 14
connector) trunk connector (see
FLOOR WIRE
HARNESS
(LEFT
111
BRANCH) (4-
DOOR) )
Floor wire
harness
connector C752
via junction
C703 (Junction Left side of connector (see
1 10
connector) trunk FLOOR WIRE
HARNESS
(LEFT
BRANCH) (4-
DOOR) )
Left side of
C704 18 2
trunk
G701 15
trunk rear wire harness
111
Fig. 17: Identifying Rear Wire Harness (03-05 Models)

REAR WIRE HARNESS (4-DOOR) ('06-07 MODEL)

Connector or
Terminal
High mount Middle of rear
12 3
brake light shelf
Left side of
trunk
111
Left side of rear

shelf
16 3
signal light trunk
Left side of
Left taillight 17 4
trunk
Left license plate Behind middle
13 2
light of trunk lid
Right back-up Right side of
9 2
light trunk
5 2
8 3
signal light trunk
Right side of
Right taillight 7 4
trunk
Right license Behind middle
10 2
plate light of trunk lid
Trunk latch
Behind middle
switch/trunk lid 11 3 Keyless
of trunk lid
opener solenoid
Under middle of
Trunk light 6 2
rear shelf
Floor wire
harness (see
FLOOR WIRE
Left side of
C701 3 8 HARNESS
trunk
(LEFT
BRANCH) (4-
DOOR) )
Floor wire
harness
connector C752
via junction
2 14
HARNESS
(LEFT
BRANCH) (4-
DOOR) )
Floor wire
harness
connector C752
C703 (Junction Left side of via junction
1 10 connector (see
connector) trunk
FLOOR WIRE
HARNESS
(LEFT
BRANCH) (4-
111
DOOR) )
G701 14

REAR WIRE HARNESS (2-DOOR) ('03-05 MODELS)
111
Connector or
Terminal
11 2
light shelf
Left side of
trunk
Left side of rear
shelf
3 2
signal light trunk
Left brake Left side of
1 3
16 2
light connector A of trunk lid
18 2
light connector B of trunk lid
10 2
13 2
signal light trunk
Right brake Right side of
15 3
Trunk latch
Behind middle
switch/trunk lid 17 3
of trunk lid
opener solenoid
Under middle of
Trunk light 12 2
rear shelf
Floor wire
harness (see
FLOOR WIRE
Left side of
C701 8 8 HARNESS
trunk
(LEFT
BRANCH) (2-
DOOR) )
Floor wire
harness
connector C752
via junction
7 10
HARNESS
(LEFT
BRANCH) (2-
DOOR) )
Floor wire
harness
connector C752
via junction
111

HARNESS
6 14 (LEFT
BRANCH) (2-
DOOR) )
Left side of
C704 4 2
trunk
G701 19
Behind middle Body ground, via
G702 5
of trunk lid rear wire harness
111

REAR WIRE HARNESS (2-DOOR) ('06-07 MODEL)

Connector or
Terminal
14 3
light shelf
Left rear speaker 7 2 Left side of rear
111
shelf
3 2
signal light trunk
Left brake Left side of
1 4
12 2
light connector A of trunk lid
15 2
light connector B of trunk lid
8 2
10 2
signal light trunk
Right brake Right side of
11 4
Trunk latch
Behind middle
switch/trunk lid 13 3
of trunk lid
opener solenoid
Under middle of
Trunk light 9 2
rear shelf
Floor wire
harness (see
FLOOR WIRE
Left side of
C701 6 8 HARNESS
trunk
(LEFT
BRANCH) (2-
DOOR) )
Floor wire
harness
connector C752
via junction
4 10
HARNESS
(LEFT
BRANCH) (2-
DOOR) )
Floor wire
harness
connector C752
via junction
3 14
HARNESS
(LEFT
BRANCH) (2-
DOOR) )
G701 1
111
Behind middle Body ground, via

G702 5
of trunk lid rear wire harness

ROOF WIRE HARNESS (4-DOOR)
ROOF WIRE HARNESS REFERENCE CHART

Connector or
Terminal
111
Ambient light 3 10 Roof With moonroof

Without
Ceiling light 7 3 Roof
moonroof
Ceiling light 8 3 Roof With moonroof
Driver's vanity
6 2 Roof
mirror light
Front passenger's
2 2 Roof
vanity mirror light
Individual map
4 3 Roof
light
Moonroof close
11 5 Roof With moonroof
relay
Moon roof motor 9 2 Roof With moonroof
Moonroof open
relay
Moonroof limit
switch
Under-dash
fuse/relay box
connector I (see Under left side
13 5
UNDER-DASH of dash
FUSE/RELAY
BOX )
Dashboard wire
harness (see
DASHBOARD
Under left side (2)
C601 14 8 WIRE
of dash
HARNESS
(LEFT
BRANCH) )
Dashboard wire
harness (see
DASHBOARD
Under left side (1)
C601 14 10 WIRE
of dash
HARNESS
(LEFT
BRANCH) )
Dashboard wire
harness (see
DASHBOARD
Under left side (3)
C601 14 3 WIRE
of dash
HARNESS
(LEFT
BRANCH) )
C602 (Optional Behind (4)
5 3
connector) rearview mirror
Floor wire harness
(see REAR
Under right WINDOW
111
side of dash DEFOGGER

C651 1 6 GROUND WIRE With navigation
(4-DOOR) )
(2) '03-04 models
(3) '05-07 models without moonroof
(4) '05-07 models
Fig. 21: Identifying Roof Wire Harness And Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box
ROOF WIRE HARNESS (2-DOOR)
ROOF WIRE HARNESS REFERENCE CHART

Connector or
Terminal
Ambient light 3 10 Roof With moonroof
Without
111
Ceiling light 6 3 Roof moonroof

Ceiling light 7 3 Roof With moonroof
Driver's vanity
9 2 Roof
mirror light
Front passenger's
2 2 Roof
vanity mirror light
Individual map
4 3 Roof
light
Moonroof control
unit
Under-dash
fuse/relay box
connector I (see Under left side
10 5
UNDER-DASH of dash
FUSE/RELAY
BOX )
Dashboard wire
harness (see
DASHBOARD
Under left side (2)
C601 11 8 WIRE
of dash
HARNESS
(LEFT
BRANCH) )
Dashboard wire
harness (see
DASHBOARD
Under left side (1)
C601 11 10 WIRE
of dash
HARNESS
(LEFT
BRANCH) )
Dashboard wire
harness (see
DASHBOARD
Under left side (3)
C601 11 3 WIRE
of dash
HARNESS
(LEFT
BRANCH) )
C602 (Optional Behind rear (4)
5 3
connector) view mirror
Floor wire harness
(see REAR
Under right WINDOW
C651 1 6 With moonroof
side of dash DEFOGGER
GROUND WIRE
(2-DOOR) )
(2) '03-04 models
'05-07 models without moonroof

111
(3)
(4) '05-07 models
Fig. 22: Identifying Roof Wire Harness And Driver Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box
DRIVER'S DOOR WIRE HARNESS (4-DOOR)
DRIVER'S DOOR WIRE HARNESS REFERENCE CHART

Connector or
Terminal
Driver's door
11 2 Driver's door
courtesy light
Driver's door key
1 3 Driver's door
cylinder switch
Driver's door lock
12 2 Driver's door
actuator
Driver's door lock 13 3 Driver's door
111
knob switch
Driver's door
9 2 Driver's door
speaker
Driver's power
10 6 Driver's door
window motor
Left power mirror 4 8 Driver's door
Power mirror switch 3 13 Driver's door
Power window
master switch (door
2 23 Driver's door
multiplex control
unit)
Driver's door
C631 5 20 Driver's door
subharness
Driver's door
subharness
DRIVER'S DOOR SUBHARNESS (4-DOOR)
DRIVER'S DOOR SUBHARNESS REFERENCE CHART

Connector or
Terminal
Under-dash fuse/relay
box connector J (see
UNDER-DASH 6 21 Left kick panel
FUSE/RELAY
BOX )
box connector K (see
FUSE/RELAY
BOX )
Driver's door wire
harness
Driver's door wire
harness
111
Fig. 23: Identifying Driver'S Door Subharness (4-door)

DRIVER'S DOOR WIRE HARNESS (2-DOOR)
DRIVER'S DOOR WIRE HARNESS REFERENCE CHART

Connector or
Terminal
Driver's door
11 2 Driver's door
courtesy light
Driver's door key
1 3 Driver's door
cylinder switch
Driver's door lock
12 2 Driver's door
actuator
Driver's door lock
13 3 Driver's door
knob switch
Driver's door
9 2 Driver's door
speaker
Driver's power
10 6 Driver's door
window motor
Left power mirror 4 8 Driver's door
Power mirror switch 3 13 Driver's door
Power window
master switch (door
2 23 Driver's door
multiplex control
unit)
111
Driver's door
subharness
Driver's door
subharness
DRIVER'S DOOR SUBHARNESS (2-DOOR)
DRIVER'S DOOR SUBHARNESS REFERENCE CHART

Connector or
Terminal
box connector J (see
FUSE/RELAY
BOX )
box connector K (see
FUSE/RELAY
BOX )
Driver's door
harness
Driver's door
harness
Fig. 24: Identifying Driver's Door Subharness (2-door)

111
FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR WIRE HARNESS (4-DOOR)
Checking FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR WIRE HARNESS REFERENCE CHART

Connector or
Terminal
Front passenger's Front passenger's
6 2
door courtesy light door
5 2
door lock actuator door
Front passenger's
Front passenger's
door lock knob 4 3
door
switch
8 2
door speaker door
Front passenger's
Front passenger's
power window 7 6
door
motor
Front passenger's
Front passenger's
power window 3 10
door
switch
Front passenger's
Right power mirror 2 8
door
Dashboard wire
harness (see
Under right side of DASHBOARD
C731 9 13
dash WIRE HARNESS
(RIGHT
BRANCH) )
Dashboard wire
harness (see
C732 1 12
dash WIRE HARNESS
(RIGHT
BRANCH) )
111
Fig. 25: Identifying Front Passenger's Door Wire Harness (4-door)

FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR WIRE HARNESS (2-DOOR)
FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR WIRE HARNESS REFERENCE CHART

Connector or
Terminal
5 2
door courtesy light door
4 2
door lock actuator door
Front passenger's
Front passenger's
door lock knob 3 3
door
switch
8 2
door speaker door
Front passenger's
Front passenger's
power window 7 6
door
motor
Front passenger's
Front passenger's
power window 6 10
door
switch
Front passenger's
Right power mirror 2 8
door
Dashboard wire
111
harness (see
DASHBOARD
Under right side of
C731 9 13 WIRE HARNESS
dash
(RIGHT
BRANCH) )
Dashboard wire
harness (see
C732 1 12
dash WIRE HARNESS
(RIGHT
BRANCH) )
Fig. 26: Identifying Front Passenger's Door Wire Harness (2-door)

LEFT REAR DOOR WIRE HARNESS (4-DOOR)
LEFT REAR DOOR WIRE HARNESS REFERENCE CHART

Connector or
Terminal
Left rear power door
4 2 Left rear door
lock actuator
Left rear power door
5 3 Left rear door
lock knob switch
Left rear power
2 6 Left rear door
window motor
111
Left rear power

1 6 Left rear door
window switch
Floor wire harness
(see FLOOR WIRE
C751 3 10 Left B-pillar HARNESS (LEFT
BRANCH) (4-
DOOR) )
Fig. 27: Identifying Left Rear Door Wire Harness (4-door)

RIGHT REAR DOOR WIRE HARNESS (4-DOOR)
RIGHT REAR DOOR WIRE HARNESS REFERENCE CHART

Connector or
Terminal
Right rear power
2 2 Right rear door
door look actuator
Right rear power
door lock knob 1 3 Right rear door
switch
Right rear power
4 6 Right rear door
window motor
Right rear power
5 6 Right rear door
window switch
Floor wire harness
111
(see REAR
WINDOW
C781 3 10 Right B-pillar DEFOGGER
GROUND WIRE
(4-DOOR) )
Fig. 28: Identifying Right Rear Door Wire Harness (4-door)

ECM/PCM WIRE HARNESS
ECM/PCM WIRE HARNESS REFERENCE CHART

Connector or
Terminal
ECM/PCM Under middle of
8 31
connector A dash
ECM/PCM Under middle of
9 24
connector B dash
ECM connector Under middle of '05 model
10 22
C dash M/T
PCM connector Under middle of
10 22 A/T
C dash
Engine wire
Left side of
harness (see
C201 1 33 engine
ENGINE WIRE
compartment
HARNESS )
Left side of Engine wire
111
engine harness (see

C202 2 33 compartment ENGINE WIRE A/T
HARNESS )
Engine wire
Left side of
harness (see
C202 2 23 engine M/T
ENGINE WIRE
compartment
HARNESS )
Engine wire
Left side of
harness (see
C203 3 1 engine
ENGINE WIRE SULEV (1)
compartment
HARNESS )
Engine wire
Left side of
harness (see (2)
C203 3 6 engine
ENGINE WIRE
compartment
HARNESS )
Dashboard wire
harness (see
Under middle of DASHBOARD
C251 7 13
dash WIRE HARNESS
(RIGHT
BRANCH) )
Throttle actuator
Under right side
C281 6 13 control module
of dash
subharness
(1) '03-05 models
(2) '06-07 model A/T
THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MODULE SUBHARNESS ('06-07 MODEL)
THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MODULE SUBHARNESS REFERENCE CHART

Connector or
Terminal
APP sensor 4 6
compartment
Throttle actuator Under right side of
5 16
control module dash
Under right side of ECM/PCM wire
C281 6 13
dash harness
111
Fig. 29: Identifying Throttle Actuator Control Module Subharness ('06-07 model)
CABLE REEL SUBHARNESS
CABLE REEL SUBHARNESS REFERENCE CHART

Connector or
Terminal
Cable reel
connector B (see
Cable reel In steering DASHBOARD (1)
4 5
connector C column cover WIRE HARNESS
(LEFT
BRANCH) )
Cable reel
connector B (see
Cable reel In steering DASHBOARD (2)
4 13
connector C column cover WIRE HARNESS
(LEFT
BRANCH) )
Cruise control
In steering
combination 5 5
column cover
switch
In steering
Horn switch 3 1
column cover
2 4
Radio remote In steering
111
switch column cover

Voice control In steering
1 4
switch column cover
(1) '03-04 models except USA DX and LX, '05 model DX
(2) '03-04 models USA DX and LX, '05 model except USA DX and LX, '06-07 model
Fig. 30: Identifying Cable Reel Subharness

DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS (SRS BRANCH)
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS REFERENCE CHART

Connector or
Terminal
Cable reel Under left side
23 4
connector A of dash
Front passenger's Under right
6 4
airbag inflator side of dash
Hazard warning
switch/passenger's ()
3 6 Middle of dash
airbag cutoff
indicator
SRS unit connector 2 28 Under middle
111
A of dash
Under-dash
fuse/relay box
connector R (see Under left side
25 2
UNDER-DASH of dash
FUSE/RELAY
BOX )
Under-dash
fuse/relay box
connector S (see Under left side
26 2
UNDER-DASH of dash
FUSE/RELAY
BOX )
Engine
Under left side
of dash
harness (see )
Floor wire harness
 4-door (see
FLOOR
WIRE
HARNESS
(LEFT
Under left side BRANCH)
C501 24 24 (4-DOOR) )
of dash
 2-door (see
FLOOR
WIRE
HARNESS
(LEFT
BRANCH)
(2-DOOR) )
Body ground, via
harness
FLOOR WIRE HARNESS (SRS BRANCH)

Connector or
Terminal
Driver's seat belt
17 4 Left B-pillar
tensioner
Driver's side Under left side
22 2
airbag inflator of dash
Driver's side
Under driver's
impact sensor 20 2
seat
(First)
Front passenger's
111
seat belt
12 4 Right B-pillar
tensioner
Front passenger's
Under front
side airbag 10 2
passenger's seat
inflator
Front passenger's
Under front
side impact 13 2
passenger's seat
sensor (First)
Front passenger's
Under front ()
weight sensor 8 6
passenger's seat
unit
SRS unit Under middle of
4 28
connector B dash
Dashboard wire
harness (see
C501 24 24
dash WIRE HARNESS
(LEFT
BRANCH) )
Under front
C801 9 4 OPDS unit harness ()
passenger's seat
Under front
C801 9 4 ODS wire harness ()
passenger's seat
Under driver's Seat position ()
C901 21 5
seat sensor harness
Under driver's Seat position ()
C903 7 2
seat sensor harness
OPDS UNIT HARNESS ('03-05 MODELS)
OPDS UNIT HARNESS REFERENCE CHART

Connector or
Terminal
OPDS unit In front
14 18
connector D passenger's seat
Seat weight Under front ()
15 3
sensor (Inside) passenger's seat
Seat weight Under front ()
11 2
sensor (Outside) passenger's seat
Under front Floor wire
C801 9 4
passenger's seat harness
ODS UNIT HARNESS ('06-07 MODEL)
ODS UNIT HARNESS REFERENCE CHART

Connector or
Terminal
ODS unit connector In front passenger's
111
D 13 8 seat
Seat weight sensor Under front
15 3
(Inside) passenger's seat
Seat weight sensor Under front
11 2
(Outside) passenger's seat
Under front
C801 9 4 Floor wire harness
passenger's seat
SEAT POSITION SENSOR HARNESS ('04-07 MODELS)
SEAT POSITION SENSOR HARNESS REFERENCE CHART

Connector or
Terminal
Driver's seat Under driver's (2)
18 2
position sensor seat
16 2
Under driver's Floor wire (2)
C901 21 5
seat harness
Under driver's Floor wire (3)
C903 7 2
seat harness
(1) '04-07 models
(4) '04-05 models
(5) '06-07 model
(6) '03-05 models
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG HARNESS ('04-07 MODELS)
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG HARNESS REFERENCE CHART

SRS unit connector C 5 16 Under middle of dash
111
Fig. 31: Identifying Side Curtain Airbag Harness ('04-07 models)

DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS (SRS BRANCH)
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS REFERENCE CHART

SRS unit connector A 1 28 Under middle of dash
FLOOR WIRE HARNESS (SRS BRANCH)
111

SRS unit connector B 2 28 Under middle of dash
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG HARNESS ('04-07 MODELS)
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG HARNESS REFERENCE CHART

Connector or
Terminal
Left side impact 4-door, '05-07
6 2 Left quarter panel
sensor (Second) models 2-door
Left side curtain
7 2 Left C-pillar
airbag
Right side curtain
4 2 Right quarter panel
airbag
Right side impact 4-door, '05-07
5 2 Right C-pillar
sensor (Second) models 2-door
SRS unit connector Under middle of
3 16
C dash
Fig. 32: Identifying Side Curtain Airbag Harness ('04-07 models)

111
DRIVER'S SEAT WIRE HARNESS (8-WAY ADJUSTABLE)
DRIVER'S SEAT WIRE HARNESS REFERENCE CHART

Connector or
Terminal
Driver's power seat Left side of driver's
6 12
adjustment switch seat
Driver's seat belt
4 3 Under driver's seat
switch
Driver's seat heater 5 4 Under driver's seat
Front up-down
motor
Rear up-down
motor
Recline motor 8 5 Under driver's seat
Slide motor 2 2 Under driver's seat
Floor wire harness
 4-door (see
FLOOR WIRE
HARNESS
(LEFT
BRANCH) (4-
C901 3 10 Under driver's seat DOOR) )
 2-door (see
FLOOR WIRE
HARNESS
(LEFT
BRANCH) (2-
DOOR) )
111
Fig. 33: Identifying Driver'S Seat Wire Harness (8-Way Adjustable)

DRIVER'S SEAT WIRE HARNESS (2-WAY ADJUSTABLE)

111
DRIVER'S SEAT WIRE HARNESS REFERENCE CHART

Connector or
Terminal
Driver's power
Left side of
seat adjustment 3 5
driver's seat
switch
4 2
Under driver's
Up-down motor 1 2
seat
Floor wire harness
 4-door (see
FLOOR
WIRE
HARNESS
(LEFT
Under driver's BRANCH)
C901 2 5 (4-DOOR) )
seat
 2-door (see
FLOOR
WIRE
HARNESS
(LEFT
BRANCH)
(2-DOOR) )
(1) '04-07 models
111
Fig. 34: Identifying Driver'S Seat Wire Harness (2-Way Adjustable)

A/C WIRE HARNESS

111
A/C WIRE HARNESS REFERENCE CHART

Connector or
Terminal
Air mix control Under middle of Manual A/C 4-
1 7
motor dash door
Air mix control Under middle of Manual A/C 2-
1 5
motor dash door
Driver's air mix Under middle of Auto A/C 4-
1 7
control motor dash door
Driver's air mix Under middle of Auto A/C 2-
1 5
control motor dash door
Evaporator
Under middle of
temperature 2 2
dash
sensor
Front passenger's
Under middle of Auto A/C 4-
air mix control 5 7
dash door
motor
Front passenger's
Under middle of Auto A/C 2-
air mix control 5 5
dash door
motor
Mode control Under middle of
3 7 4-door
motor dash
Mode control Under middle of
3 10 2-door
motor dash
Recirculation Under middle of
4 7 4-door
control motor dash
Recirculation Under middle of
4 5 2-door
control motor dash
Dashboard wire
harness (see
Under middle of DASHBOARD
C851 6 21
dash WIRE HARNESS
(RIGHT
BRANCH) )
111
Fig. 35: Identifying A/C Wire Harness

111
2003-07 ELECTRICAL Engine Electrical - Accord
2003-07 ELECTRICAL
Engine Electrical - Accord
SPECIAL TOOLS

111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:23:21
2003-07 ELECTRICAL Fuse/Relay Boxes - Accord
2003-07 ELECTRICAL
Fuse/Relay Boxes - Accord
CONNECTOR TO FUSE/RELAY BOX INDEX

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

Socket Ref Terminal Connects to
A/C compressor clutch
2 4
relay
A/C condenser fan relay 15 4
Engine compartment wire
harness (see ENGINE
A (ELD unit) 5 3 COMPARTMENT WIRE
HARNESS (LEFT
BRANCH) )
B 7 Not used
Blower motor relay 1 4
harness (see ENGINE
C 8 2 COMPARTMENT WIRE
HARNESS (LEFT
BRANCH) )
harness (see ENGINE
D 4 9 COMPARTMENT WIRE
HARNESS (LEFT
BRANCH) )
harness (see ENGINE
E 9 16 COMPARTMENT WIRE
HARNESS (LEFT
BRANCH) )
Front engine compartment
wire harness (see FRONT
ENGINE
F 10 20
COMPARTMENT WIRE
HARNESS (LEFT
BRANCH) )
harness (see ENGINE
G 6 2 COMPARTMENT WIRE
HARNESS (LEFT
BRANCH) )
ENGINE
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:23:54
COMPARTMENT WIRE
H 11 14 HARNESS (LEFT
BRANCH) )
harness (see ENGINE
I 13 10 COMPARTMENT WIRE
HARNESS (LEFT
BRANCH) )
harness (see ENGINE
J 12 5 COMPARTMENT WIRE
HARNESS (LEFT
BRANCH) )
Radiator fan relay 14 4
Rear window defogger
3 4
relay
Starter subharness (see
T101 16 STARTER
SUBHARNESS )
Starter subharness (see
T102 17 STARTER
SUBHARNESS )
Fig. 1: Identifying Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box

UNDER-HOOD MULTI-RELAY BOX (CANADA)
UNDER-HOOD MULTI-RELAY BOX (CANADA)


111

ENGINE
Daytime running lights
1 5 COMPARTMENT WIRE
relay (Canada)
HARNESS (LEFT
BRANCH) )
Fig. 2: Identifying Under-Hood Multi-Relay Box (Canada)

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

Dashboard wire harness
(see DASHBOARD WIRE
A 6 6
HARNESS (LEFT
BRANCH) )
Accessory power socket
19 4
relay
A/F sensor relay 20 4
111
harness (see ENGINE

COMPARTMENT WIRE
B 12 6
HARNESS (LEFT
BRANCH) )
harness (see ENGINE
C 11 12 COMPARTMENT WIRE
HARNESS (LEFT
BRANCH) )
harness (see ENGINE
D 13 17 COMPARTMENT WIRE
HARNESS (LEFT
BRANCH) )
Floor wire harness
 4-door (see FLOOR

WIRE HARNESS
(LEFT BRANCH)
E 8 16 (4-DOOR) )
WIRE HARNESS
(LEFT BRANCH)
(2-DOOR) )
Floor wire harness

WIRE HARNESS
(LEFT BRANCH)
F 9 14 (4-DOOR) )
WIRE HARNESS
(LEFT BRANCH)
(2-DOOR) )
G 14 6 Not used
Floor wire harness
4-door (see FLOOR

WIRE HARNESS
(LEFT BRANCH)
H 15 14 (4-DOOR) )
WIRE HARNESS
(LEFT BRANCH)
(2-DOOR) )
Roof wire harness (see
I 10 5 ROOF WIRE HARNESS
(4-DOOR) )
Ignition coil relay 23 4
111
Driver's door subharness

(see DRIVER'S DOOR
J 27 21
WIRE HARNESS (4-
DOOR) )
Driver's door subharness
(see DRIVER'S DOOR
K 26 12
WIRE HARNESS (4-
DOOR) )
MICS (MPCS) service
M 25 3
check connector
(see DASHBOARD WIRE
N 2 45
HARNESS (LEFT
BRANCH) )
(see DASHBOARD WIRE
P 17 30
HARNESS (LEFT
BRANCH) )
PGM-FI main relay 1 21 4
PGM-FI main relay 2 24 4
Power window relay 22 4
(see DASHBOARD WIRE
Q 16 14
HARNESS (LEFT
BRANCH) )
(see DASHBOARD WIRE
R 3 2
HARNESS (LEFT
BRANCH) )
(see DASHBOARD WIRE
S 5 2
HARNESS (LEFT
BRANCH) )
Starter cut relay 18 4
T 7 6 Optional connector
Turn signal/hazard relay 4 6
(see DASHBOARD WIRE
X 1 39
HARNESS (LEFT
BRANCH) )
111
Fig. 3: Identifying Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box

111
2003-07 ELECTRICAL Ground Distribution - Accord
2003-07 ELECTRICAL
Ground Distribution - Accord
GROUND TO COMPONENTS INDEX

GROUND TO COMPONENTS INDEX
Ground Component or circuit grounded
G1 Battery-terminal
G2 Engine mount bracket
G3 Transmission housing
ECM/PCM (PG1 and PG2 are BLK; LG1 and
LG2 are BRN/YEL), CMP sensor A, CKP sensor,
Countershaft speed sensor (A/T), CMP sensor B,
EGR valve, IAC valve, Ignition coils, Mainshaft
speed sensor (A/T), Thermal joints, A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A (A/T), A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve B (A/T),
G101 A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
(A/T), Transmission range switch (A/T), Rocker
arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure
switch), Rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC
solenoid valve)
Shielding between the ECM/PCM and knock
sensor has BRN/YEL wire
A/C condenser fan motor, Hood switch (with
G201 security). Right headlights, Right front turn
signal/side marker lights
Brake fluid level switch, Cruise control actuator,
G202 Power steering pressure (PSP) switch, Washer
fluid level switch (Canada)
G203 ABS modulator-control unit
Daytime running lights relay (Canada), Left
headlights, Left front turn signal/side marker
G301
lights, Radiator fan motor. Radiator fan switch
('03-04 models)
Blower motor relay, ELD unit, Relay control
G302
module, Windshield wiper motor
G401 Daytime running lights control unit (2 wires)
Accessory power socket relay, Ambient light (with
moonroof), Clutch interlock switch (M/T), Clutch
pedal position switch (M/T with cruise control),
Combination switch control unit, Cruise control
G501 unit, Data link connector (DLC), Daytime running
lights control unit (2 wires) (USA '06-07 models),
Driver's door lock knob switch, Driver's door key
cylinder switch, Gauge control module, Ignition
key switch, Key interlock solenoid, Moonroof
switch, Moonroof control unit (2-door), Moonroof
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:24:28
2003-07 ELECTRICAL Ground Distribution - Accord
open and close relays (4-door), Power window

master switch, Relay control module, Vanity
mirror lights (G501 connects to G601 via under-
dash fuse/relay box)
G502 Multiplex integrated control unit (MICU)
Audio-HVAC subdisplay (with navigation),
Audio-HVAC display module, Data link
connector (DLC), Front accessory power socket,
Front passenger's door lock knob switch, Front
passenger's power window switch, Gauge control
G503 module, Glove box light, Memory erase signal
(MES) connector, Navigation display unit, Power
transistor, Rear accessory power socket, Right
power mirror defogger (Canada), Park pin switch
Shielding between the ECM/PCM, Gauge control
module, and Navigation unit have BRN wire.
G504 Audio unit
G505 SRS unit
Driver's seat heater switch, Front passenger's seat
G506
heater switch, Seat heater relay
Driver's power seat switch (2 wires for 8-way
adjustable, 1 wire for 2-way adjustable). Driver's
seat belt switch. Driver's seat heater, Door
multiplex control unit, Left power mirror defogger
(Canada), Left rear door lock knob switch (with
G601
security) (4-door), Left rear power window switch
(4-door), Multiplex integrated control unit
(MICU), MICU service check connector. Power
mirror switch, Turn signal/hazard relay (G601
connects to G501 via under-dash fuse/relay box.)
Front passenger's seat belt switch, Front
passenger's seat heater. Front passenger's weight
sensor unit ('04-05 models), Navigation unit,
G602
OPDS/ODS unit, Right rear door lock knob switch
(with security) (4-door), Right rear power window
switch (4-door)
G603 Fuel pump
Back-up lights, Brake lights, High mount brake
light, License plate light, Taillights, Turn signal
G701 (4-door)
lights, Trunk latch switch, Trunk key cylinder
switch
High mount brake light. Left back-up light, Left
G701 (2-door) brake light, Left taillight, Left turn signal light,
License plate light, Trunk latch switch
Right back-up light, Right brake light, Right
G702 (2-door)
taillight, Right turn signal light
111
2003-07 ELECTRICAL Power Distribution - Accord
2003-07 ELECTRICAL
Power Distribution - Accord
FUSE TO COMPONENTS INDEX

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
FUSE TO COMPONENTS INDEX

Component(s) or
Fuse Number Amps Wire Color
Circuit(s) Protected
1 10 A RED/YEL Left headlight (low beam)
Relay control module
2 30 A Internal connection
(with climate control)
Left headlight (high
3 10 A WHT/RED
beam)
Audio-HVAC display
module light, A/T gear
position console light,
Front side marker lights,
Glove box light, Hazard
warning switch light,
License plate light,
Moonroof switch light,
Navigation unit, Relay
control module, Seat
heater switches light,
Taillights
Right headlight (high
5 10 A WHT
beam)
Right headlight (low
6 10 A RED/GRN
beam)
7 7.5 A Internal connection Relay control module
CMP sensor B, CKP
sensor, ECM/PCM (2
wires), IAC valve,
8 15 A WHT/RED
Injectors, Mass air flow
meter, PGM-FI main
relay
Condenser fan motor (via
9 20 A BLU/YEL
condenser fan relay)
10 - - Not used
Radiator fan motor (via
11 20 A BLU/BLK
radiator fan relay)
12 7.5 A BLU/RED (via A/C compressor
clutch relay)
ABS modulator-control
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:24:55
unit, Brake lights,

ECM/PCM, High mount
brake light, Ignition key
RED
light, Multiplex
13 20 A integrated control unit
(MICU)
Horns (via relay module),
Internal connection
Relay module
AM/FM antenna
amplifier-rear window
defogger coil, Rear
14 40 A BLK/YEL
window defogger (via
rear window defogger
relay)
No. 5 through No. 9 fuses
YEL in the under-dash
15 40 A fuse/relay box
No. 7 fuse in the under-
Internal connection
hood fuse/relay box
16 15 A WHT/BLK Turn signal/hazard relay
17 30 A WHT/RED
unit (MR +B)
18 20 A WHT/GRN
unit (+B FSR)
No. 1 through No. 4 fuses
GRN/WHT*1(1)
19 40 A in the under-dash
BLK/RED *2(2) fuse/relay box
No. 12 and No. 14
through No. 16 fuses in
20 40 A BLU
the under-dash fuse/relay
box
Blower motor (via blower
21 40 A WHT/BLU
motor relay)
Battery, Power
22 100 A -
distribution
WHT Ignition switch (BAT)
WHT/BLU Power
window relay. No. 24
through No. 28 fuses in
the under-dash fuse/relay
23 50A (IG)
50 A (P/W) box
(1) * 1: '03-05 models
(2) * 2: '06-07 models
111


Component(s) or
Fuse Number Amps Wire Color
Circuit(s) Protected
- - Not used ('03-05 models)
1 Throttle actuator control
15 A BLU/WHT
module ('06-07 models)
Internal connection Ignition coil (IG) relay
2 15 A Ignition coils (via Ignition
BLK/WHT
coil (IG) relay)
Daytime running lights
3 10 A RED/WHT
relay (Canada)
4 15 A BLU/WHT Air fuel ratio sensor
Audio unit, XM receiver
5 10 A WHT/GRN
('04-07 models)
Ambient light, Ceiling
light, Courtesy lights,
6 7.5 A WHT/BLU
Map lights, Trunk light.
Vanity mirror lights
Combination switch
control unit, Door
7 10 A WHT/RED multiplex control unit,
Gauge control module,
Immobilizer control unit-
receiver, Navigation
111
display unit, Navigation

unit
Multiplex integrated
Internal connection
control unit (MICU)
control unit (MICU)
Front accessory power
9 15 A WHT/RED socket, Rear accessory
power socket
Front passenger's weight
sensor unit ('04-05
10 7.5 A WHT
models), OPDS/ODS
unit, SRS unit
11 30 A GRN Windshield wiper motor
12 - - Not used
13 - - Not used
Driver's power seat slide
motor and front up-down
motor (8-way adjustable),
14 20 A WHT/BLU
Driver's power seat up-
down motor (2-way
adjustable)
Seat heaters and seat
15 20 A RED/BLK heater switches indicator
light
Driver's power seat
recline motor and rear up-
16 20 A WHT/RED
down motor (8-way
adjustable)
17 - - Not used
Alternator, CMP sensor
A, Cruise control unit,
ELD unit. Engine mount
control solenoid, EVAP
18 15 A BLK/RED purge cut solenoid valve,
EVAP vent shut solenoid
valve, Mass air flow
sensor, Secondary heated
oxygen sensor
ECM/PCM, Immobilizer
BLK/YEL
control unit-receiver
19 15 A
Fuel pump (via PGM-FI
YEL/GRN
main relay 2)
20 7.5 A YEL/GRN Windshield washer motor
Back-up lights,
Combination switch
control unit, Door
multiplex control unit,
111
Front passenger's power

window switch indicator,
control unit (MICU),
Gauge control module,
21 7.5 A YEL
Relay control module,
Navigation unit.
Passenger's airbag cutoff
indicator ('04-06 models),
Shift lock solenoid (A/T)
Internal connection
Multiplex intergrated
control unit (MICU)
22 10 A WHT/RED SRS unit
ECM/PCM (via A/F
23 7.5 A Internal connection
sensor relay)
Left rear power window
24 20 A YEL/RED
motor (4-door)
Right rear power window
25 20 A YEL/BLU
motor (4-door)
Front passenger's power
26 20 A GRN/BLK
window motor
Driver's power window
27 20 A GRN/WHT
motor
Moonroof motor,
Moonroof control unit (2-
28 20 A GRN
door), Moonroof
open/close relays (4-door)
29 - - Not used
relay, Audio-HVAC
display module, Blower
motor relay, Condenser
fan relay, Power mirror
30 7.5 A BLK/YEL
defoggers (Canada),
Power mirror actuator,
Radiator fan relay,
Recirculation control
motor, Seat heater relay
31 - - Not used
Accessory power socket
relay, Audio unit,
32 7.5 A YEL/RED
Navigation display unit,
Navigation unit
33 - - Not used
111

111
2003-07 ELECTRICAL Relay And Control Unit Locations - Accord
2003-07 ELECTRICAL
Relay And Control Unit Locations - Accord
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Fig. 1: Identifying Engine Compartment Relay & Control Unit

DASHBOARD
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:25:50
Fig. 2: Identifying Dashboard Relay & Control Unit (1 Of 3)

111

111

ROOF AND TRUNK

4-DOOR:
111
Fig. 5: Identifying Roof And Trunk Relay & Control Unit (4-Door)
2-DOOR
Fig. 6: Identifying Roof And Trunk Relay & Control Unit (2-Door)
DOOR AND SEAT

DRIVER'S DOOR:
111
Fig. 7: Identifying Driver's Door Control Unit

FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT:
111
Fig. 8: Identifying Front Passenger's Seat Control Unit

111
2003-07 ELECTRICAL Relays - Accord
2003-07 ELECTRICAL
Relays - Accord
POWER RELAY TEST

Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the test listed for it.
NOTE: For the turn signal/hazard relay input test (see TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD
RELAY INPUT TEST ).
POWER RELAY TEST

Relay Test
A/C compressor clutch relay
Accessory power socket relay
Blower motor relay
A/C condenser fan relay
Ignition coil relay
Air fuel ratio sensor relay
Normally-open type
PGM-FI main relay 1, 2
Power window relay
Radiator fan relay
Rear window defogger relay
Starter cut relay
Throttle actuator control module relay
Daytime running lights relay (Canada)
Moonroof close relay
Five-terminal type
Moonroof open relay
Seat heater relay
NORMALLY-OPEN TYPE
Check for continuity between the terminals.
 There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when battery positive terminal is
connected to the No. 4 terminal, and battery negative terminal is connected to the No. 3 terminal.
 There should be no continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when power is disconnected.
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:26:40
Fig. 1: Checking Continuity Between Terminals 1 & 2 When Power & Ground Are Connected
To No. 3 & 4 Terminals
FIVE-TERMINAL TYPE B
Check for continuity between the terminals.
111
 There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals when battery positive terminal is
connected to the No. 5 terminal, and battery negative terminal is connected to the No. 3 terminal.
 There should be continuity between the No. 1 and No. 4 terminals when power is disconnected.
Fig. 2: Checking Continuity Between Terminals No. 1 & 2 When Power & Ground Are
Connected To No. 3 & 5 Terminals
111
2003-07 ELECTRICAL Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box - Accord
2003-07 ELECTRICAL
Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box - Accord
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

REMOVAL
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC), and ground the SCS.
3. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes.
4. Remove the left front door sill trim and left kick panel (see TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION -
DOOR AREA ).
5. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side of the under-dash fuse/relay box (A).
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:27:20
Fig. 1: Disconnecting Connectors From Fuse Side Of Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box

111
6. Remove the two mounting bolts and pull the fuse/relay box away from the body.
7. Disconnect the connectors and remove the under-dash fuse/relay box.
NOTE: Some SRS harness connectors are spring-loaded lock type (see
SPRING-LOADED LOCK CONNECTOR ).
8. Carefully remove the relays. Do not use pliers.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the removed relays.

2. Connect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, then install the under-dash fuse/relay box in
the reverse order of removal.
4. Connect both the positive cable and negative cable to the battery.
UNIT ).
6. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then enter the customer's audio station
presents and XM radio channel presets.
7. Confirm that all systems work properly.
111
2003-07 ELECTRICAL Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box - Accord
2003-07 ELECTRICAL
Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box - Accord
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

REMOVAL
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC), and ground the SCS.
3. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 minutes.
4. Remove the under-hood multi-relay box (Canada) from the under-hood fuse/relay box.
5. Remove the screws (A) from the alternator and battery cable terminals.
6. Remove the two mounting bolts (B) from the under-hood fuse/relay box.
7. Remove the under cover from the under-hood fuse/relay box.
8. Disconnect the connectors from the under-hood fuse/relay box.
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:27:43
Fig. 1: Remove Mounting Bolts (B) From Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box

111
INSTALLATION
1. Connect the connectors to the under-hood fuse/relay box, then install the under-hood fuse/relay box in
the reverse order of removal.
3. Connect the both positive cable and negative cable to the battery.
4. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see ECM/PCM IDLE LEARN PROCEDURE ).
UNIT ).
6. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation system, then enter the customer's audio station
presets and XM radio channel presets.
7. Confirm that all systems work properly.
DTC TROUBLESHOOTING
DTC B1055: RELAY CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH MICU; DTC
B1056: RELAY CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH MICU; DTC B1057:
RELAY CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH MICU (DOOR SWITCH
MESSAGE); DTC B1058: RELAY CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT (DOOR LOCK SWITCH MESSAGE); DTC B1059:
RELAY CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH DOOR MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT (PANIC MESSAGE); DTC B1060: RELAY CONTROL MODULE LOST
COMMUNICATION WITH GAUGE CONTROL MODULE (VSP/NE MESSAGE); DTC B1061:
RELAY CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
(A/T MESSAGE); DTC B1062: RELAY CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH
COMBINATION SWITCH CONTROL UNIT (HEADLIGHT SWITCH MESSAGE); DTC B1063:
RELAY CONTROL MODULE LOST COMMUNICATION WITH COMBINATION SWITCH
CONTROL UNIT (WIPER SWITCH MESSAGE)

2. Cycle the ignition switch OFF then ON.
Is DTC B1055, B1056, B1057, B1058, B1059, B1060, B1061, B1062 and/or B1063 indicated?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Intermittent failure, the B-CAN communication line is OK at this time.
4. Check for DTCs other than those listed above.
Are any other DTCs present?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Perform Relay Control Module Input Test (see RELAY CONTROL MODULE INPUT
TEST ).
5. Find the chart that contains at least one retrieved DTC in column A and one retrieved DTC in column
B. Perform the input test for the ECU listed in that chart.
111
If no DTC from column B is found, then continue to Relay Control Module input test.
RELAY CONTROL MODULE INPUT TEST (CHART 1)

A B ECU
B1055 B1157
MICU (see MICU INPUT
B1056 B1159
TEST )
B1057 B1255

A B ECU
Door Multiplex Control Unit (see
B1006
B1058 DOOR MULTIPLEX
B1010
B1059 CONTROL UNIT INPUT
B1160
TEST )

A B ECU
Gauge Control Module
B1008
B1060 B1205  '03-05 models, see '03-05
B1061 B1206 MODELS
B1207  '06-07 model, see '06
MODEL

A B ECU
B1007 Combination Switch Control Unit
B1062 B1109 (see COMBINATION SWITCH
B1063 B1155 CONTROL UNIT INPUT
B1156 TEST )
111
2003-07 ELECTRICAL Charging System - Accord
2003-07 ELECTRICAL
Charging System - Accord
Fig. 1: Identifying Components Of Charging System


'03-'04 MODELS
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:29:00
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX (2003-2004 MODELS)

Troubleshoot the charging system
Charging system indicator does
indicator circuit (see CHARGING
not come on with the ignition
SYSTEM INDICATOR CIRCUIT
switch ON (II)
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
1. Troubleshoot the charging system
indicator circuit (see
CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR CIRCUIT
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
Charging system indicator
stays on 2. Check for a broken drive belt (see
DRIVE BELT INSPECTION ).
3. Check the drive belt auto-
tensioner (see DRIVE BELT
AUTO-TENSIONER
INSPECTION ).
1. Check for a poor connection and
for open or shorted wire(s) in
charging system.
2. Check for parasitic electrical
current draw with the ignition
switch off, and the key removed.
The multiplex control unit may
take up to 10 minutes to turn off
(sleep mode) for some models.
3. Check for a broken drive belt (see
Battery discharged 4. Check the drive belt auto-
AUTO-TENSIONER
INSPECTION ).
5. Troubleshoot the alternator and
regulator circuit (see
ALTERNATOR AND
REGULATOR CIRCUIT
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
6. Check for a poor connection at
the battery terminal.
7. Test the battery (see BATTERY
TEST ).

Battery overcharged ALTERNATOR AND
REGULATOR CIRCUIT
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
111
TEST ).
'05-'07 MODELS

Charging system indicator does Troubleshoot the charging system
not come on with the ignition indicator circuit (see 2005-2006
switch ON (II) Models ).
Charging system indicator 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see
stays on GENERAL
TROUBLESHOOTING
INFORMATION ).
2. Troubleshoot the charging system
indicator circuit (see 2005-2006
Models ).
AUTO-TENSIONER
INSPECTION ).
Battery discharged 1. Check for parasitic electrical
current draw with the ignition
switch off, and the key removed.
The multiplex control unit may
take up to 10 minutes to turn off
(sleep mode) for some models
AUTO-TENSIONER
INSPECTION ).
ALTERNATOR AND
REGULATOR CIRCUIT
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
5. Check for a poor connection at
the battery terminal.
TEST ).
Battery overcharged 1. Troubleshoot the alternator and
regulator circuit (see 2005-2006
Models ).
111
TEST ).
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Fig. 2: Circuit Diagram

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING

111
'03-'04 MODELS
Does the charging system indicator come on?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO - Go to step 3.
Does the charging system indicator go off?
YES - Charging system indicator circuit is OK. Go to the alternator and regulator circuit
troubleshooting (see ALTERNATOR AND REGULATOR CIRCUIT
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
NO - Go to step 3.
3. Do the gauge control module self-test procedure (see SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION ).
Does the charging system indicator flash?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Replace the gauge control module (see GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
REPLACEMENT ).
5. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector.
7. Measure the voltage between alternator 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
111
Fig. 3: Measuring Voltage Between Alternator 4P Connector Terminal No. 1 And Body Ground
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Check for a blown No. 18 (15A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK,
repair open in the wire between the alternator and under-dash fuse/relay box.
9. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on HOW
TO USE THE HDS (HONDA DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM) ).
111
10. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the engine control module
(ECM)/powertrain control module (PCM) from damage.
11. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (24P)

NO - Repair an open in the wire between the alternator and the ECM/PCM.
12. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal B10 and alternator 4P connector
terminal No. 3.
Fig. 4: Checking Continuity Between ECM/PCM Connector Terminal And Alternator 4P

Connector Terminal
111

NO - Repair open in the wire between the alternator and the ECM/PCM.
13. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal B10 and body ground.
Fig. 5: Checking Continuity Between ECM/PCM Connector Terminal B10 And Body Ground
111
YES - Repair a short in the wire between the alternator and the ECM/PCM.
NO - Go to the alternator and regulator circuit troubleshooting (see ALTERNATOR AND
REGULATOR CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING ).
'05-'07 MODELS
YES - Go to step 2.
NO - Go to step 12.
2. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm for 1 minute.
YES - Charging system indicator circuit is OK. Go to the alternator and regulator circuit
troubleshooting (see ALTERNATOR AND REGULATOR CIRCUIT
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
NO - Go to step 3.
3. Do the gauge control module self-test procedure (see SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION ).
Does the charging system indicator flash?
YES - Go to step 4.
REPLACEMENT ).
YES - Replace the alternator (see ALTERNATOR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ) or

repair the alternator (see ALTERNATOR OVERHAUL ).
NO - Go to step 7.
111
10. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (24P).

12. YES - Repair a short in the wire between the alternator and the ECM/PCM.
13. NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software (see UPDATING THE
ECM/PCM ), or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), then
111
recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original
ECM/PCM (see ECM/PCM REPLACEMENT ).Then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
away with a known-good ECM/PCM,
14. Do the gauge control module self-test procedure. See SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
Fig. 7: Disconnecting Alternator 4P Connector

17. Connect alternator 4P connector terminal No.3 and body ground with a jumper wire.

111

NO - Go to step 17.
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the ECM/PCM from damage.

terminal No.3.
111
YES - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software (see UPDATING THE
ECM/PCM ), or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ),
then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the
original ECM/PCM; (see ECM/PCM REPLACEMENT '03-'05 models see ECM/PCM
REPLACEMENT ).
ALTERNATOR AND REGULATOR CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING

1. Make sure the battery connections are good and the battery is sufficiently charged (see BATTERY
TEST ).
2. Connect a VAT-40 (or equivalent tester), and turn the selector switch to position 1 (starting).
111
Fig. 9: Connecting VAT-40 (Or Equivalent Tester)

3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm, with no load until the radiator fan comes on,
then let it idle.
4. Raise the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there.
Is the voltage over 15.1 V?
YES - Replace the alternator or the rear housing assembly.

NO - Go to step 5.
5. Release the accelerator pedal, and let the engine idle.
111
6. Turn off all the accessories. Select the charging test on the tester.
7. Remove the inductive pickup, and zero the ammeter.
8. Place the inductive pickup over the B terminal wire of the alternator so that the arrow points away
from the alternator.
9. Raise the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there.
Is the voltage less than 13.5 V?
YES - Go to Alternator Control Circuit Troubleshooting (see ALTERNATOR CONTROL

NO - Go to step 10.
10. Apply a load with the VAT-40 until the battery voltage reads between 12---13.5 V.
Is the amperage 60A or more?
YES - The charging system is OK.
NOTE: If the charging system indicator is still on, replace the alternator
or the rear housing assembly.
NO - Replace the alternator (see ALTERNATOR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ) or

ALTERNATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING

1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the data link connector (DLC) (see IF THE MIL
(MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP) HAS COME ON step 2), and check for DTC's. If the
DTC is present, diagnose and repair the cause before continuing with this test.
2. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector from the alternator.
3. Start the engine, and turn on the headlights to high beam.
4. Measure the voltage between alternator 4P connector terminal No. 2 and the positive terminal of the
battery.
111
Fig. 10: Measuring Voltage Between Alternator 4P Connector Terminal And Positive Terminal
Of Battery
YES - Go to step6.
NO - Go to step8.
5. Jump the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the ignition switch OFF.
6. Disconnect engine control module ECM/PCM connector B (24P).

111
YES - Repair a short in the wire between the alternator and the ECM/PCM.
NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software (see UPDATING THE
ECM/PCM ), or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ),
then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the
original ECM/PCM (see ECM/PCM REPLACEMENT ).
8. Jump the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the ignition switch OFF.
111
(ECM)/powertrain control module (PCM) for damage.
9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (24P) and the alternator 4P connector.

terminal No. 2.
Fig. 12: Checking Continuity Between ECM/PCM Connector Terminal B18 And Alternator 4P
Connector Terminal
DRIVE BELT INSPECTION

1. Inspect the belt for cracks and damage. If the belt is cracked or damaged, replace it.
111
2. Check that the auto-tensioner indicator (A) is within the standard range (B) as shown in below. If it is
out of the standard range, replace the drive belt, see "Drive Belt Replacement" below.
Fig. 13: Checking Auto-Tensioner Indicator Is Within Standard Range

111
DRIVE BELT REPLACEMENT

Belt tension release tool Snap-on YA9317 or equivalent, commercially available
1. Move the auto-tensioner (A) with the belt tension release tool to relieve tension from the drive belt
(B), and remove the drive belt.
Fig. 14: Moving Auto-Tensioner

2. Install the new belt in the reverse order of removal.
111
NOTE: For belt routing, see the Charging SystemComponent Location Index.
DRIVE BELT AUTO-TENSIONER INSPECTION

Belt tension release tool Snap-on YA9317 or equivalent, commercially available
1. Check whether there is a change in the position of the auto-tensioner indicator before starting the
engine and after starting the engine. If there is a change in the position, replace the auto-tensioner.
111
Fig. 15: Identifying Auto-Tensioner

2. Check for abnormal noise from the tensioner pulley. If you hear abnormal noise, replace the tensioner
pulley. If you hear abnormal noise, replace the tensioner pulley.
3. Remove the drive belt (see Drive Belt Replacement )
4. Move the auto-tensioner within its limit with the belt tension release tool in the direction shown
below. Check that the tensioner moves smoothly and without any abnormal noise. If the tensioner
111
does not move smoothly or you hear abnormal noise, replace the auto-tensioner.
Fig. 16: Moving Auto-Tensioner Within Its Limit With Belt Tension Release Tool
5. Remove the auto-tensioner (see DRIVE BELT AUTO-TENSIONER REPLACEMENT ).

6. Clamp the auto-tensioner (A) by using two 8 mm bolts (B) and a vise (C) as shown below. Do not
clamp the auto-tensioner itself.
111
Fig. 17: Clamping Auto-Tensioner By Using Two Bolts And Vise

7. Set the torque wrench (D) in the pulley bolt in the direction shown above.
8. Align the indicator (E) on the tensioner base with center mark on the tensioner arm by using the
torque wrench, and measure the torque. If the torque value is out of specification, replace the auto-
tensioner.
111
NOTE: If the indicator exceeds the center mark, recheck the torque.
Auto-tensioner Spring Torque:
32.5---39.7 N.m (3.31---4.05 kgf.m, 23.9---29.3 lbf.ft)
DRIVE BELT AUTO-TENSIONER REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the drive belt (see Drive Belt Replacement ).
2. Remove the power steering (P/S) pump without disconnecting the P/S hoses.
111
Fig. 18: Removing Power Steering (P/S) Pump Without Disconnecting P/S Hoses
3. Remove the auto-tensioner.
111
Fig. 19: Removing Auto-Tensioner

4. Install the auto-tensioner in the reverse order of removal.
TENSIONER PULLEY REPLACEMENT

2. Remove the pulley bolt (A), and remove the tensioner pulley (B).
111
Fig. 20: Removing Pulley Bolt, And Tensioner Pulley

3. Install the tensioner pulley in the reverse order of removal.
ALTERNATOR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

REMOVAL
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the audio unit (and navigation code if equipped), then
write down the audio presets.
2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery first, then disconnect the positive cable.
4. Remove the auto-tensioner (see DRIVE BELT AUTO-TENSIONER REPLACEMENT ).
5. Disconnect the alternator connector (A) and BLK wire (B) from the alternator.
111
Fig. 21: Disconnecting Alternator Connector And BLK Wire From Alternator
6. Remove the three bolts securing the alternator.
111
Fig. 22: Removing Three Bolts Securing Alternator

INSTALLATION
1. Install the three bolts securing the alternator.
111
Fig. 23: Installing Three Bolts Securing Alternator

2. Connect the positive cable to the battery first, and then connect the negative cable.
111
Fig. 24: Installing Alternator Connector And BLK Wire From Alternator
3. Install the auto-tensioner (seeDrive Belt Auto-tensioner Replacement).

4. Install the drive belt (see Drive Belt Replacement).
5. Connect the positive cable to the battery first, and then connect the negative cable.
6. Enter the anit-theft codes for the audio unit (and navigation code if equipped), then enter the audio
presets.
7. Set the clock.
ALTERNATOR OVERHAUL
EXPLODED VIEW
111
Fig. 25: Exploded View Of Alternator

 Driver 07749-0010000
 Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View above as needed during the procedure.
ALTERNATOR DISASSEMBLY
1. Test the alternator and regulator before you remove them (see CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR
2. Remove the alternator (see ALTERNATOR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ).
3. If the front bearing needs replacing, remove the pulley locknut with a 10 mm wrench (A) and a 22
mm wrench (B). If necessary, use an impact wrench.
111
Fig. 26: Removing Pulley Locknut With 10 mm Wrench And 22 mm Wrench

4. Remove the harness stay and the three flange nuts from the alternator.
111
Fig. 27: Removing Harness Stay And Three Flange Nuts From Alternator
5. Remove the end cover.

111
Fig. 28: Removing End Cover

111
6. Remove the brush holder.
111
Fig. 29: Removing Brush Holder

7. Remove the four bolts, then remove the rear housing assembly (A), and washer (B).
Fig. 30: Removing Rear Housing Assembly, And Washer

111
8. If you are not replacing the front bearing, go to step 13. Remove the rotor from the drive end housing.
Fig. 31: Removing Rotor From Drive End Housing

9. Inspect the rotor shaft for scoring, and inspect the bearing journal surface in the drive end housing for
seizure marks.
111
If the rotor is damaged, replace the rotor assembly.


 If the rotor is OK, go to step 10.
10. Remove the front bearing retainer plate.
Fig. 32: Removing Front Bearing Retainer Plate

111
11. Drive out the front bearing with a brass drift and hammer.
111
Fig. 33: Drive Out Front Bearing With Brass Drift And Hammer
111
12. With a hammer and special tools, install a new front bearing in the drive end housing.
Fig. 34: Installing Front Bearing In Drive End Housing

Alternator Brush Inspection
13. Measure the length of both brushes (A) with vernier calipers (B).
 If either brush is shorter than the service limit, replace the brush holder assembly.
111
 If the brush length is OK, go to step 14.
Fig. 35: Measuring Length Of Both Brushes With Vernier Calipers

Rotor Slip Ring Test
14. Check for continuity between the slip rings (A).

 If there is no continuity, replace the rotor assembly.
111
Fig. 36: Checking Continuity Between Slip Rings

15. Check for continuity between each slip ring and the rotor (B) and the rotor shaft (C).
 If there is no continuity, replace the rear housing assembly, and go to step 16.
 If there is continuity, replace the rotor assembly.
Alternator Reassembly
16. If you removed the pulley, put the rotor in the drive-end housing, then tighten its locknut to 110 N.m
(11.2 kgf.m, 81.0 lbf.ft).
17. Remove any grease or oil from the slip rings.
18. Put the rear housing assembly and drive-end housing/rotor assembly together, then tighten the four
through bolts.
19. Push the brushes (A) in, then insert a pin or drill bit (B) (about 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) diameter) to hold
them there.
111
Fig. 37: Pushing Brushes In, Then Insert A Pin Or Drill Bit
20. Install the brush holder, and pull out the pin.
111
Fig. 38: Installing Brush Holder, And Pull Out Pin

21. Install the end cover.

22. After assembling the alternator, turn the pulley by hand to make sure the rotor rotates smoothly and
without noise.
23. Install the alternator and drive belt (see ALTERNATOR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ).
111
2003 HONDA Accord
2003 HONDA
Accord
BUZZERS, RELAYS & TIMERS

BUZZERS, RELAYS & TIMERS LOCATION
Component Component Location
Accessory Power Socket Relay In driver's underdash fuse/relay box.
A/C Compressor Clutch Relay In underhood fuse/relay box.
A/F Sensor Relay In driver's underdash fuse/relay box.
Blower Motor Relay In underhood fuse/relay box.
Condenser Fan Relay In underhood fuse/relay box.
DRL Relay In underhood multi-relay box. See Fig. 7 .
Fan Control Relay In underhood multi-relay box.
Ignition Coil Relay In driver's underdash fuse/relay box.
Moon Roof Close Relay At rear of roof.
Moon Roof Open Relay At rear of roof.
PGM-FI Main Relay 2 In driver's underdash fuse/relay box.
Power Window Relay In driver's underdash fuse/relay box.
Radiator Fan Relay In underhood fuse/relay box.
Rear Window Defogger Relay In underhood fuse/relay box.
Seat Heater Relay Behind glove box. See Fig. 10 .
Starter Cut Relay In driver's underdash fuse/relay box.
Turn Signal/Hazard Relay In driver's underdash fuse/relay box.
CIRCUIT PROTECTION DEVICES

CIRCUIT PROTECTION DEVICES LOCATION
On left rear corner of engine compartment, attached to underhood fuse/relay
Fuse/Relay Box (2.4L)
box. See Fig. 7 .
On left rear corner of engine compartment, attached to underhood fuse/relay
Multi-Relay Box (3.0L)
box. See Fig. 7 .
Underdash Fuse/Relay
Behind left kick panel. See Fig. 9 .
Box
Underhood Fuse/Relay On left rear corner of engine compartment, forward of strut tower. See Fig.
Box 7.
CONTROL UNITS
CONTROL UNITS LOCATION
ABS Modulator Unit At left front of engine compartment.
ABS-TCS Control Unit Behind right side of engine compartment.
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:29:32
2003 HONDA Accord
Audio-HVAC Display Module Behind center of dash. See Fig. 10 .

Cruise Control Unit Behind left side of dash. See Fig. 9 .
ECM/PCM Under middle of dash. See Fig. 10 .
Gauge Control Module Behind instrument cluster. See Fig. 8 .
Immobilizer Control Unit Receiver In steering column cover. See Fig. 8 .
Moon Roof Control Unit At rear of roof.
Navigation Unit In trunk, at middle of rear shelf. See Fig. 14 .
OPDS Unit In front passenger's seat back.
PCM Behind center of dash, forward of floor console.
SRS Unit Under middle of dash.
Throttle Actuator Control Module Under right side of dash. See Fig. 11 .
MOTORS
MOTORS LOCATION
ABS Modulator Unit At left front of engine compartment.
Air Mix Control Motor (Except EX & LX) Under left side of dash. See Fig. 12 .
Blower Motor Under right side of dash. See Fig. 10 .
Driver's Air Mix Control Motor (Except EX & LX) Under left side of dash. See Fig. 12 .
Front Passenger's Air Mix Control Motor Under right side of dash. See Fig. 12 .
Mode Control Motor Behind glove box. See Fig. 12 .
Moon Roof Motor Under headliner, above center of rear window.
Recirculation Control Motor Behind glove box, on blower unit. See Fig. 12 .
Windshield Washer Motor On bottom of windshield washer fluid reservoir.
Windshield Wiper Motor On left side of air scoop.
SENDING UNITS & SENSORS

SENDING UNITS & SENSORS LOCATION
A/F Sensor On exhaust manifold. See Fig. 1 .
APP Sensor At right side of engine compartment. See Fig. 11 .
ATF Temperature Sensor On transmission. See Fig. 6 .
CMP Sensor A (2.4L) At right rear of engine. See Fig. 1 .
CMP Sensor B (2.4L) At right rear of engine. See Fig. 1 .
CMP Sensor (3.0L) At left front of engine. See Fig. 5 .
CKP Sensor (2.4L) At left front of engine. See Fig. 2 .
Countershaft Speed Sensor (2.4L) On top left of transaxle. See Fig. 2 .
Countershaft Speed Sensor (3.0L) On top right of transaxle. See Fig. 5 .
Driver's Side Impact Sensor At left "B" pillar.
ECT Sensor (2.4L) On right rear of cylinder head. See Fig. 2 .
ECT Sensor (3.0L) On left rear of engine. See Fig. 4 .
EGR Valve & EGR Valve Position Sensor On rear of intake manifold.
111
2003 HONDA Accord
(2.4L)
EGR Valve & EGR Valve Position Sensor
On left rear of engine.
(3.0L)
Evaporator Temperature Sensor Behind glove box, in evaporator unit. See Fig. 12 .
In right exhaust bank, before catalytic converter. See
Front A/F Sensor (Bank No. 2, Sensor No. 1)
Fig. 5 .
Front Passenger's Side Impact Sensor Under front passenger's seat. See Fig. 14 .
Front Secondary HO2S (Bank No. 2, Sensor In right exhaust bank, before catalytic converter. See
No. 2) Fig. 4 .
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor Under left rear of vehicle, in fuel tank. See Fig. 13 .
IAT Sensor (2.4L) On left rear intake manifold. See Fig. 1 .
IAT Sensor (3.0L) On top left rear of intake manifold. See Fig. 4 .
In-Car Temperature Sensor Under middle of dash. See Fig. 8 .
Knock Sensor On lower left side of engine, below exhaust manifold.
At left front of engine compartment, behind left
Left Impact Sensor
headlight.
MAF Sensor (2.4L) At left side of engine compartment. See Fig. 1 .
Mainshaft Speed Sensor (2.4L) On rear of transaxle. See Fig. 1 .
Mainshaft Speed Sensor (3.0L) On left rear of transaxle. See Fig. 4 .
MAP Sensor (2.4L) At left side of engine. See Fig. 1 .
MAP Sensor (3.0L) At left side of engine compartment. See Fig. 5 .
Moon Roof Limit Sensor At rear of roof.
Outside Air Temperature Sensor Below center of front bumper. See Fig. 7 .
Rear A/F Sensor (Bank No. 1, Sensor No. 1) At rear of engine compartment. See Fig. 4 .
Rear Secondary HO2S (Bank No. 1, Sensor
At rear of engine compartment. See Fig. 5 .
No. 2)
Right Front Impact Sensor At right front of engine compartment.
Secondary HO2S On TWC converter.
Sunlight Sensor On center front of dash. See Fig. 10 .
TP Sensor (2.4L) On throttle body. See Fig. 2 .
TP Sensor/Throttle Actuator (3.0L) On throttle body. See Fig. 4 .
Wheel Speed Sensor (Left Front) On left front suspension knuckle.
Wheel Speed Sensor (Left Rear) On left rear suspension knuckle.
Wheel Speed Sensor (Right Front) On right front suspension knuckle.
Wheel Speed Sensor (Right Rear) On right rear suspension knuckle. See Fig. 14 .
SOLENOIDS & SOLENOID VALVES

SOLENOIDS & SOLENOID VALVES LOCATION
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid
On left side of transaxle.
Valve A (2.4L)
On top rear of transaxle. See Fig. 5 .
Valve A (3.0L)
A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid On left side of transaxle. See Fig. 2 .
111
2003 HONDA Accord
Valve B (2.4L)
On top rear of transaxle. See Fig. 4 .
Valve B (3.0L)
On left side of transaxle. See Fig. 1 .
Valve C (2.4L)
On left side of transaxle. See Fig. 4 .
Valve C (3.0L)
Cruise Control Actuator At right side of firewall.
At rear of engine. See Fig. 2 .
(2.4L)
At right front top corner of engine.
(3.0L)
Engine Mount Control Solenoid Valve
On left front of engine. See Fig. 1 .
(2.4L)
Engine Mount Control Solenoid Valve
On left rear of engine compartment. See Fig. 5 .
(3.0L)
EVAP Canister Purge Valve (2.4L) On right side of intake manifold. See Fig. 1 .
EVAP Canister Purge Valve (3.0L) On right side of engine. See Fig. 4 .
EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve On underside of vehicle, on EVAP control canister.
IAC Valve (2.4L) On left side of intake manifold. See Fig. 2 .
IMRC Valve (3.0L) At front of engine. See Fig. 4 .
Shift Control Solenoid Valve A (3.0L) On top front of transaxle. See Fig. 4 .
Shift Control Solenoid Valve B (3.0L) On left side of transaxle. See Fig. 4 .
Shift Control Solenoid Valve C (3.0L) On top front of transaxle. See Fig. 4 .
Under floor console, on bottom right of gear selector
Shift Lock Solenoid
lever. See Fig. 10 .
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve
On top front of transaxle. See Fig. 4 .
(3.0L)
VTC Oil Control Solenoid Valve (2.4L) At front of engine. See Fig. 1 .
VTEC Oil Control Solenoid Valve (2.4L) At front of engine.
VTEC Solenoid Valve (2.4L) On right front of engine. See Fig. 1 .
VTEC Solenoid Valve (3.0L) On right front of engine. See Fig. 5 .
SWITCHES
SWITCHES LOCATION
A/C Pressure Switch At right front of engine compartment, near front bumper.
Back-Up Light Switch (2.4L) On top left of transaxle. See Fig. 1 .
Back-Up Light Switch (3.0L) On top left of transaxle. See Fig. 5 .
Brake Fluid Level Switch In brake fluid reservoir cap.
Brake Pedal Position Switch On brake pedal support. See Fig. 8 .
Clutch Interlock Switch On clutch pedal support.
Moon Roof Switch At left side of dash.
Oil Pressure Switch (2.4L) At front of engine. See Fig. 2 .
111
2003 HONDA Accord
Oil Pressure Switch (3.0L) At front of engine. See Fig. 4 .

Parking Brake Switch Mounted under parking brake lever. See Fig. 10 .
Park Pin Switch Below console, on shift lever. See Fig. 10 .
PSP Switch (2.4L) At right side of engine compartment.
PSP Switch (3.0L) At right rear of engine compartment, on power steering line.
Radiator Fan Switch (2.4L) On left side of radiator.
Radiator Fan Switch (3.0L) On left side of radiator. See Fig. 7 .
At front of engine compartment, on hood lock/latch assembly. See
Security Hood Switch
Fig. 7 .
Transmission Range Switch
On rear of transaxle.
(2.4L)
Trunk Key Cylinder Switch At right rear of trunk. See Fig. 16 .
Trunk Latch Switch At trunk latch/lock assembly. See Fig. 15 .
VTEC Oil Pressure Switch
On front of cylinder head. See Fig. 2 .
(2.4L)
VTEC Oil Pressure Switch
On front of right cylinder head. See Fig. 5 .
(3.0L)
Washer Fluid Level Switch Behind right side of front bumper, on washer fluid reservoir.
2nd Clutch Pressure Switch
On left front of transaxle. See Fig. 2 .
(2.4L)
3rd Clutch Pressure Switch
On side of transaxle. See Fig. 1 .
(2.4L)
3rd Clutch Pressure Switch
On left rear of transaxle. See Fig. 6 .
(3.0L)
4th Clutch Pressure Switch On left rear of transaxle. See Fig. 5 .
MISCELLANEOUS
MISCELLANEOUS LOCATION
A/C Diode Under left side of dash.
Blower Power Transistor On bottom of blower unit. See Fig. 10 .
DLC On lower left of dash, above the kick panel. See Fig. 9 .
At front of engine compartment, behind front grille. See Fig.
High Horn
7.
Junction Connector C101 At middle of right cylinder head.
Junction Connector C102 At left side of engine compartment.
Junction Connector C103 At left side of engine compartment.
Junction Connector C404 Below left side of dash.
Junction Connector C503 Behind glove box.
Junction Connector C552 Behind right kick panel.
Junction Connector C553 Behind right kick panel.
Junction Connector C554 Under right side of dash.
111
2003 HONDA Accord
Junction Connector C555 Under right side of dash.

Junction Connector C702 At left "C" pillar.
At front of engine compartment, behind front grille. See Fig.
Low Horn
7.
Seat Belt Tensioner (Driver's) At base of left "B" pillar.
Seat Belt Tensioner (Front
At base of right "B" pillar.
Passenger's)
Trailer Lighting Connector On left rear of trunk. See Fig. 15 .
Window Antenna Coil At left "C" pillar.
CONNECTORS
CONNECTORS LOCATION
Component Location
C101 (Gray, 6 Pin) At center front of engine compartment. See Fig. 2 .
C108 (2.4L) (Gray, 8 Pin) At left front side of engine compartment. See Fig. 2 .
C110 (3.0L) (Black, 6 Pin) At right rear of engine compartment. See Fig. 4 .
C151 (Gray, 1 Pin) At left side of engine compartment, near battery. See Fig. 5 .
C152 (2.4L) (Gray, 10 Pin) At left front of engine compartment, near battery. See Fig. 1 .
C152 (3.0L) (Gray, 10 Pin) At left rear of engine compartment. See Fig. 4 .
C153 (Black, 6 Pin) On top of transmission housing. See Fig. 5 .
C154 (Black, 1 Pin) On left front of engine. See Fig. 4 .
C201 (2.4L) (Black, 33 Pin) At left rear of engine compartment. See Fig. 2 .
C202 (2.4L) (Gray, 33 Pin) At left rear of engine compartment.
C202 (3.0L) (Gray, 33 Pin) At left rear of engine compartment. See Fig. 5 .
C203 (3.0L) (Black, 23 Pin) At left side of engine compartment. See Fig. 5 .
C251 (White, 13 Pin) Under center right of dash. See Fig. 10 .
C281 (White, 13 Pin) Under middle side of dash. See Fig. 11 .
C301 (Gray, 2 Pin) Behind left side of front bumper. See Fig. 7 .
C310 (Brown, 3 Pin) At left rear of engine compartment, forward of strut tower.
C311 (Gray/Black, 1 Pin) At right side of engine compartment.
C401 (Brown, 20 Pin) Under left side of dash. See Fig. 8 .
C402 (Brown, 5 Pin) Under left side of dash. See Fig. 9 .
C403 (Yellow, 4 Pin) Under left side of dash. See Fig. 8 .
C415 (Gray, 3 Pin) Under left side of dash.
C416 (Gray, 2 Pin) Under left side of dash.
C501 (White, 24 Pin) Under left side of dash. See Fig. 9 .
C502 (Gray, 4 Pin) Under left side of dash. See Fig. 9 .
111
2003 HONDA Accord
C551 (Gray, 4 Pin) Behind right kick panel. See Fig. 10 .

C552 (13 Pin) Behind right kick panel. See Fig. 10 .
C601 (Gray, 8 Pin) Under left side of dash. See Fig. 9 .
C631 (White, 20 Pin) In driver's door.
C632 (Blue/White, 17 Pin) In driver's door.
C701 (Coupe) (Gray, 8 Pin) At left "C" pillar.
C701 (Sedan) (Gray, 8 Pin) At left "C" pillar. See Fig. 16 .
C711 (Gray, 2 Pin) Under left rear of vehicle. See Fig. 13 .
C731 (White, 13 Pin) Behind glove box. See Fig. 10 .
C732 (Gray, 12 Pin) Behind glove box. See Fig. 10 .
C751 (Gray, 10 Pin) At left "B" pillar. See Fig. 13 .
C781 (Blue, 10 Pin) At right "B" pillar. See Fig. 14 .
C801 (Gray, 4 Pin) Under front passenger's seat. See Fig. 14 .
C851 (Blue/White, 21 Pin) Under middle of dash. See Fig. 10 .
C901 (Gray, 10 Pin) Under driver's seat. See Fig. 13 .
C902 (Gray, 10 Pin) Under front passenger's seat. See Fig. 14 .
GROUNDS
GROUNDS LOCATION
Component Location
G1 At left front of engine compartment. See Fig. 3 .
G2 At right side of engine compartment. See Fig. 3 .
G3 At left side of engine compartment. See Fig. 3 .
G101 (2.4L) At top middle of engine. See Fig. 1 .
G101 (3.0L) Left side of engine compartment. See Fig. 4 .
G102 At right front side of engine. See Fig. 4 .
G151 On transmission housing. See Fig. 6 .
G201 (2.4L) At right side of engine compartment.
G201 (3.0L) At right front side of engine compartment.
At right side of engine compartment, near right front
G202 (2.4L)
headlight.
G202 (3.0L) At right rear side of engine compartment.
G203 At right side of engine compartment.
G301 At left side of front bumper. See Fig. 7 .
G302 Behind left side of front bumper.
G501 Behind left side of dash. See Fig. 8 .
G502 Behind left side of dash. See Fig. 8 .
G503 Behind glove box. See Fig. 10 .
G504 Under middle of dash. See Fig. 8 .
G505 Under center of dash. See Fig. 10 .
G506 Under center of dash. See Fig. 10 .
111
2003 HONDA Accord
G601 At left side of floor. See Fig. 13 .

G602 At right side of floor. See Fig. 14 .
G603 Behind center of rear seats. See Fig. 13 .
G701 (Coupe) At left side of trunk. See Fig. 15 .
G701 (Sedan) At left side of trunk. See Fig. 16 .
G702 At left side of trunk. See Fig. 15 .
COMPONENT LOCATION GRAPHICS
NOTE: Figures may show multiple component locations. Refer to appropriate table
for proper figure references.
111
2003 HONDA Accord
Fig. 1: Engine Compartment (2.4L)


111
2003 HONDA Accord
Fig. 3: Engine Compartment

111
2003 HONDA Accord

111
2003 HONDA Accord

111
2003 HONDA Accord
Fig. 6: View Of Automatic Transmission (3.0L)

111
2003 HONDA Accord
Fig. 7: Front Of Vehicle

111
2003 HONDA Accord
Fig. 8: Left Side Of Dash

111
2003 HONDA Accord
Fig. 9: Left Side Of Dash

111
2003 HONDA Accord
Fig. 10: Right Side Of Dash

111
2003 HONDA Accord
Fig. 11: Front View Of Dash

111
2003 HONDA Accord
Fig. 12: View Of HVAC Unit

111
2003 HONDA Accord
Fig. 13: Left Side Of Vehicle

111
2003 HONDA Accord
Fig. 14: Right Side Of Vehicle

111
2003 HONDA Accord
Fig. 15: Rear Of Vehicle (Coupe)

111
2003 HONDA Accord
Fig. 16: Rear Of Vehicle (Sedan)

111
2003-07 ENGINE Starting System - Accord
2003-07 ENGINE
Starting System - Accord
Fig. 1: Identifying Starting System Component Location

111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:31:33

1. Check for loose battery terminals
or connections.
2. Test the battery for a low charge
(see BATTERY TEST ).
3. Check the starter (see STARTER
CIRCUIT
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
4. Check the starter cut relay (see
Engine does not start (does not POWER RELAY TEST ). Poor ground at G101 (A/T)or
crank) 5. Check the transmission range G501 (M/T)
switch (A/T) (see
TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH TEST ).
6. Check the clutch interlock switch
(M/T) (see CLUTCH
INTERLOCK SWITCH
TEST ).
7. Check the ignition switch or wire
(see TEST ).
1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs.
2. Check the fuel pressure (see
FUEL PRESSURE TEST ).
3. Check for a plugged or damaged
fuel line (see FUEL LINE
INSPECTION ).
4. Check for a plugged fuel filter
Engine cranks, but does not (see FUEL FILTER
start REPLACEMENT ).
5. Check the throttle body (see
THROTTLE BODY TEST ).
6. Check for low engine
compression (see ENGINE
COMPRESSION
INSPECTION ).
7. Check for a damaged or broken
cam chain.
1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs.
Engine is hard to start FUEL PRESSURE TEST ).
3. Check for a plugged or damaged
fuel line (see FUEL LINE
INSPECTION ).
111
4. Check for a plugged fuel filter

(see FUEL FILTER
REPLACEMENT ).
1. Check for loose battery terminals
or connections.
2. Test the battery for a low charge
Engine cranks slowly 3. Check the starter for binding (see
STARTER CIRCUIT
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
4. Check for excessive drag in the
engine.
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
111
Fig. 2: Circuit Diagram

STARTER CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING
NOTE:  Air temperature must be between 59 and 100°F (15 and 38°C) during
this procedure.
111
 After this inspection, you must select engine control module

(ECM)/powertrain control module (PCM) reset using the Honda
Diagnostic System (HDS) (see ECM/PCM RESET ), otherwise the
ECM/PCM continues to stop the fuel injectors.
 The battery must be in good condition and fully charged.
Recommended Procedure:
 Use a starter system tester.

 Connect and operate the equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
1. Hook up the following equipment:

 Ammeter, 0---400 A
 Voltmeter, 0---20 V (accurate within 0.1 V)
111
Fig. 3: Identifying Ammeter And Voltmeter

2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (see GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING
INFORMATION ).
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then select PGM-FI, INSPECTION, then ALL INJECTORS OFF on
the HDS.
111
4. With the shift lever in N or P (A/T) or the clutch pedal pressed (M/T), turn the ignition switch to
START (III).
Did the starter crank the engine normally?
YES - The starting system is OK. Go to step 10.

NO - Go to step 5.
5. Check the battery condition. Check electrical connections at the battery, the negative battery cable to
body, the engine ground cables, and the starter for looseness and corrosion. Then try cranking the
engine again.
Did the starter crank the engine?
YES - Repairing the loose connection corrected the problem. The starting system is OK. Go to
step 10.
NO - Check the following:
 If the starter will not crank the engine at all, go to step 6.
 If it cranks the engine erratically or too slowly, go to step 7.
 If it does not disengage from the flywheel or torque converter ring gear when you release
the key, check the following:
 Solenoid plunger and switch malfunction
 Dirty drive gear or damaged overrunning clutch
6. Make sure the transmission is in Neutral, then disconnect the BLK/WHT wire from the starter
solenoid S terminal. Connect a jumper wire from the battery positive terminal to the solenoid terminal.
M/T (2003-2005 Models)
111
Fig. 4: Disconnecting BLK/WHT Wire From Starter Solenoid S Terminal (M/T (2003-2005
Models))
A/T, M/T (2006 Model)
111
Fig. 5: Disconnecting BLK/WHT Wire From Starter Solenoid S Terminal (A/T, M/T (2006
Model))
Did the starter crank the engine?
YES - Check the following items in the order listed until you find the open circuit:
 The BLK/WHT wire and connectors between the under-dash fuse/relay box and the
ignition switch, and between the under-dash fuse/relay box and the starter.
 The ignition switch (see TEST ).
 The transmission range switch and connector (A/T) or the clutch interlock switch and
connector (M/T).
 The starter cut relay (see POWER RELAY TEST ).
NO - Remove the starter, and repair or replace as necessary.

7. While cranking the engine, check the cranking voltage and current draw.
Is cranking voltage greater than or equal to 7.7 V (M/T 2003-2005 Models)/8.5 V (A/T, M/T 2006
Model) and current draw less than or equal to 400A (M/T 2003-2005 Models)/380A (A/T, M/T 2006
111
Model)?
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Replace the starter, or remove and disassemble it, and check for the following until you
find the cause:
 Drag in the starter armature
 Shorted armature winding
 Excessive drag in the engine
8. Check the engine speed while cranking the engine.
Is the engine speed above 100 rpm?
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Replace the starter, or remove and disassemble it, and check for the following:
 Open circuit in starter armature commutator segments
 Excessively worn starter brushes
 Open circuit in commutator brushes
 Dirty or damaged helical splines or drive gear
 Faulty drive gear clutch
9. Remove the starter, and inspect its drive gear and the flywheel or torque converter ring gear for
damage. Replace any damaged parts.
10. Select ECM/PCM reset (see ECM/PCM RESET ) to cancel the ALL INJECTORS OFF function on
the HDS.
CLUTCH INTERLOCK SWITCH TEST

M/T
1. Disconnect the clutch interlock switch 2P connector (A).
111
Fig. 6: Disconnecting Clutch Interlock Switch 2P Connector And Clutch Interlock Switch
2. Remove the clutch interlock switch (B).

3. Check for continuity between the terminals according to the table.
111
Fig. 7: Terminals Continuity Checking Table

 If the continuity is not as specified, replace the clutch interlock switch.

 If OK, install the clutch interlock switch and adjust the pedal height (see CLUTCH PEDAL,
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH, AND CLUTCH INTERLOCK SWITCH
ADJUSTMENT ).
STARTER SOLENOID TEST

M/T (2003-2005 MODELS)
1. Check the hold-in coil for continuity between the S terminal and the armature housing (ground). There
2. Check the pull-in coil for continuity between the S terminal and the M terminal. There should be
continuity.
3. Remove the starter cable (A), BLK/WHT wire (B) and motor cable (C)
111
Fig. 8: Checking Pull-In Coil For Continuity Between S Terminal And M Terminal
4. Check the hold-in coil for continuity between the S terminal and the armature housing (ground). There
 If there is no continuity, replace the solenoid.
5. Check the pull-in coil between the S terminal and the M terminal. There should be continuity.
 If there is continuity, the solenoid is OK.
 If there is no continuity, replace the solenoid.
6. Install the cobles and wire in the reverse order of removal.

7. Connect the positive cable the the battery first, and then connect the negative cable.
8. Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio unit (and navigation code if equipped), then enter the audio
presets.
111
STARTER PERFORMANCE TEST

M/T (2003-2005 MODELS)
1. Disconnect the wires from the M terminal.

2. Make the connections using as heavy a wire as possible (preferably equivalent to the wire used for the
vehicle). To avoid damaging the starter, never leave the battery connected for more than 10 seconds.
3. Connect the battery as shown in Fig. 9. Be sure to disconnect the starter motor wire from the solenoid.
If the starter pinion moves out, it is working properly.
Fig. 9: Disconnecting Starter Motor Wire From Solenoid

4. Disconnect the negative battery terminal from the M terminal. If the pinion does not retract, the hold-
in coil of the solenoid is working properly.
111
Fig. 10: Disconnecting Negative Battery Terminal From M Terminal

5. Disconnect the battery from the starter body. If the pinion retracts immediately, it is working properly.
111
Fig. 11: Disconnecting Battery From Starter Body

6. Firmly clamp the starter in a vise.

7. Reconnect the wire to the M terminal.
8. Connect the starter to the battery as shown in Fig. 12, and check that the motor turns and keeps
rotating.
111
Fig. 12: Connecting Starter To Battery And Check That Motor Keeps Rotating
9. If the electric current and motor speed meet the specifications when the battery voltage is at 11 V, the
starter is working properly.
Specifications
111
Electric current: 90 A or less
Motor speed: 2,000 rpm or more
A/T, M/T (2006 MODEL)
1. Connect the battery to the starter using as heavy a wire as possible (preferably equivalent to the wire
used for the vehicle). To avoid damaging the starter, never leave the battery connected for more than
10 seconds.
Fig. 13: Connecting Battery To Starter

2. Connect the battery as shown in Fig. 13. If the starter pinion moves out, it is working properly.
3. Disconnect the negative battery terminal from the body as shown in Fig. 14. If the pinion retracts
immediately, it is working properly.
111
Fig. 14: Disconnecting Negative Battery Terminal From Body

4. Firmly clamp the starter in a vise.

5. Connect the starter to the battery as shown in Fig. 15, and check that the motor turns and keeps
rotating.
111
Fig. 15: Connecting Starter To Battery And Check That Motor Keeps Rotating
6. If the electric current and motor speed meet the specifications when the battery voltage is at 11.5 V,
the starter is working properly.
Specifications
Electric current: 80 A or less
Motor speed: 2,300 rpm or more
STARTER REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

REMOVAL
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the radio, and the navigation system, then write down the
customer's radio station and XM radio channel presets.
3. Remove the intake manifold (see REMOVAL (2003-2005 MODELS) ).
4. Disconnect the starter cable (A) from the B terminal, then disconnect the BLK/WHT wire (B) from
the S terminal.
111
M/T (2003-2005 Models)
Fig. 16: Disconnecting Starter Cable From B Terminal And BLK/WHT Wire From S Terminal
(M/T (2003-2005 Models))
A/T, M/T (2006 Model)
111
(A/T, M/T (2006 Model))
5. Remove the harness clamp (C).

6. Remove the harness holder (D).
7. Remove the two bolts holding the starter, then remove the starter.
INSTALLATION
1. Install in the reverse order of removal. Make sure the crimped side of the ring terminal (A) is facing
out.
111
(M/T (2003-2005 Models))
111
(A/T, M/T (2006 Model))
2. Install the intake manifold:

 '03-05 modelsINSTALLATION (2003-2005 MODELS)
 '06-07 modelsINSTALLATION (2006 MODEL)
3. Connect the positive cable to the battery first, then connect the negative cable.
4. Start the engine to make sure the starter works properly.
5. Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio unit (and naviagtion code if equipped), then enter the audio
presets.
6. Set the clock.
STARTER OVERHAUL
MITSUBISHI M/T (2003-2005 MODELS)
111
Disassembly/Reassembly
Fig. 20: Identifying Components Of Starter Assembly (Mitsubishi M/T (2003-2005 Models))
Brush Holder Removal
1. Remove the starter (see STARTER REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ).

2. Disconnect the wire from the M terminal, and remove the end cover.
3. Place a 29.4 mm (1.16 in.) outside diameter plastic pipe on the armature.
111
Fig. 21: Placing 29.4 mm (1.16 in.) Outside Diameter Plastic Pipe On Armature
4. Move the brush holder (A) up to the pipe (B) while holding the pipe so the brushes do not pop out
from the holder.
111
Fig. 22: Moving Brush Holder Up To Pipe

Armature Inspection and Test
5. Disassemble the starter as shown at the beginning of this procedure.

6. Inspect the armature for wear or damage from contact with the permanent magnet. If there is wear or
damage, replace the armature.
111
Fig. 23: Identifying Armature

7. Check the commutator (A) surface. If the surface is dirty or burnt, resurface with emery cloth or a
lathe within the following specifications, or recondition with #500 or #600 sandpaper (B).
111
Fig. 24: Reconditioning Commutator Surface With Sandpaper

8. Check the commutator diameter. If the diameter is below the service limit, replace the armature.
Commutator Diameter
Standard (New): 29.3---29.5 mm (1.154---1.161 in.)
Service Limit: 28.8 mm (1.134 in.)
111
Fig. 25: Checking Commutator Diameter

9. Measure the commutator (A) runout.

 If the commutator runout is within the service limit, check the commutator for carbon dust or
brass chips between the segments.
 If the commutator runout is not within the service limit, replace the armature.
Commutator Runout
Standard (New): 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) max.
111
Fig. 26: Measuring Commutator Runout

10. Check the mica depth (A). If the mica is too high (B), undercut the mica with a hacksaw blade to the
proper depth. Cut away all the mica (C) between the commutator segments. The undercut should not
be too shallow, too narrow, or V-shaped (D).
Commutator Mica Depth
111
Fig. 27: Checking Mica Depth

11. Check for continuity between the segments of the commutator. If there is an open circuit between any
segments, replace the armature.
111
Fig. 28: Checking Continuity Between Segments Of Commutator

12. Place the armature (A) on an armature tester (B). Hold a hacksaw blade (C) on the armature core. If
the blade is attached to the core or vibrates while the core is turned, the armature is shorted. Replace
the armature.
111
Fig. 29: Placing Armature On Armature Tester And Hold Hacksaw Blade On Armature Core
13. Check with an ohmmeter for continuity between the commutator (A) and armature coil core (B), and
between the commutator and armature shaft (C). If there is continuity, replace the armature.
111
Fig. 30: Checking Continuity Between Commutator And Armature Coil Core, And Armature
Shaft
Starter Brush Inspection
14. Measure the brush length (A). If it is shorter than the service limit, replace the brush holder assembly.
Brush Length
111
Fig. 31: Measuring Brush Length

Starter Brush Holder Test
15. Check for continuity between the (+) brush (A) and (-) brush (B). If there is continuity, replace the
brush holder assembly.
111
Fig. 32: Checking Continuity Between (+) Brush And (-) Brush
Planetary Gear Inspection
16. Check the planetary gears (A) and ring gear (B). Replace them if they are worn or damaged.
111
Fig. 33: Checking Planetary Gears And Ring Gear

Overrunning Clutch Inspection
17. Slide the overrunning clutch along the shaft. Replace it, if it does not slide smoothly.
18. Hold the drive gear (A), and turn the overrunning clutch in the direction shown in Fig. 34to be sure it
turns freely. Also make sure the overrunning clutch locks in the opposite direction. If it does not lock
in either direction or it locks in both directions, replace it.
111
Fig. 34: Turning Overrunning Clutch While Holding Drive Gear

19. If the starter drive gear (B) is worn or damaged, replace the overrunning clutch assembly; the gear is
not available separately. Check the condition of the flywheel ring gear to see, if the starter drive gear
teeth are damaged.
Starter Reassembly
20. Install the armature into the housing.

21. Place the brush holder assembly on the armature, then move the brush holder (A) down to the
armature.
111
Fig. 35: Placing Brush Holder Assembly On Armature

22. Install the end cover to retain the brush holder.
111
Fig. 36: Installing End Cover To Retain Brush Holder

MITSUBA A/T, M/T ('06-'07 MODELS)
Disassembly/Reassembly
111
Fig. 37: Identifying Components Of Starter Assembly (MITSUBA A/T, M/T (2006 Model))
Armature Inspection and Test
1. Remove the starter (see STARTER REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ).

2. Disassemble the starter as shown at the beginning of this procedure.
3. Inspect the armature for wear or damage from contact with the permanent magnet. If there is wear or
damage, replace the armature.
111
Fig. 38: Identifying Armature Assembly

4. Check the commutator (A) surface. If the surface is dirty or burnt, resurface with emery cloth or a
lathe within the following specifications, or recondition with #500 or #600 sandpaper (B).
111
Fig. 39: Reconditioning Commutator Surface With Sandpaper

5. Check the commutator diameter. If the diameter is below the service limit, replace the armature.
Commutator Diameter
111
Fig. 40: Checking Commutator Diameter

6. Measure the commutator (A) runout.
111
 If the commutator runout is within the service limit, check the commutator for carbon dust or
brass chips between the segments.
 If the commutator runout is not within the service limit, replace the armature.
Commutator Runout
Fig. 41: Measuring Commutator Runout

7. Check the mica depth (A). If the mica is too high (B), undercut the mica with a hacksaw blade to the
proper depth. Cut away all the mica (C) between the commutator segments. The undercut should not
be too shallow, too narrow, or V-shaped (D).
111
Commutator Mica Depth
Fig. 42: Checking Mica Depth

8. Check for continuity between the segments of the commutator. If there is an open circuit between any
segments, replace the armature.
111
Fig. 43: Checking Continuity Between Segments Of Commutator

9. Place the armature (A) on an armature tester (B). Hold a hacksaw blade (C) on the armature core. If
the blade is attracted to the core or vibrates while the core is turned, the armature is shorted. Replace
the armature.
111
Fig. 44: Placing Armature On Armature Tester And Hold Hacksaw Blade On Armature Core
10. Check with an ohmmeter for continuity between the commutator (A) and armature coil core (B), and
between the commutator and armature shaft (C). If there is continuity, replace the armature.
111
Fig. 45: Checking Continuity Between Commutator And Armature Coil Core And Armature
Shaft
Starter Brush Inspection
11. Measure the brush length. If it is shorter than the service limit, replace the brush holder assembly.
Brush Length
111
Fig. 46: Measuring Brush Length

Starter Brush Holder Test
12. Check for continuity between the (+) brush (A) and (-) brush (B). If there is continuity, replace the
brush holder assembly.
111
Fig. 47: Checking Continuity Between (+) Brush And (-) Brush
Planetary Gear Inspection
13. Check the planetary gears (A) and ring gear (B). Replace them if they are worn or damaged.
111
Fig. 48: Checking Planetary Gears And Ring Gear

Overrunning Clutch Inspection
14. While holding the drive gear (A), turn the gear shaft (B) clockwise. Check that the drive gear comes
out to the other end. If the drive gear does not move smoothly, replace the gear cover assembly.
111
Fig. 49: Turning Gear Shaft Clockwise While Holding Drive Gear
15. While holding the drive gear, turn the gear shaft counterclockwise. The gear shaft should rotate freely.
If the gear shaft does not rotate smoothly, replace the gear cover assembly.
16. If the starter drive gear is worn or damaged, replace the overrunning clutch assembly; the gear is not
available separately.
Check the condition of the torque converter ring gear to see if the starter drive gear teeth are damaged.
Starter Reassembly
17. Install the brush into the brush holder, and set the armature (A) in the brush holder (B).
NOTE: To seat the new brushes, slip a strip of #500 or #600 sandpaper, with
the grit side up, between the commutator and each brush, and
smoothly rotate the armature. The contact surface of the brushes will
111
be sanded to the same contour as the commutator.
Fig. 50: Installing Brush Into Brush Holder, And Set Armature In Brush Holder
18. While squeezing a spring (C), insert it in the hole on the brush holder, and push it until it bottoms.
Repeat this for the other three springs (D, E, and F).
19. Install the armature and brush holder assembly into the housing.
NOTE: Make sure the armature stays in the holder.
111
2003-07 ENGINE Cooling System - Accord
2003-07 ENGINE
Cooling System - Accord
BELT ROUTING
For belt routing illustration, see COMPONENT LOCATION INDEX in CHARGING SYSTEM article.
Fig. 1: Locating Cooling System Components

RADIATOR CAP TEST
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:32:16
1. Remove the radiator cap (A), wet its seal with engine coolant, then install it on the pressure tester (B).
Fig. 2: Testing Radiator Cap

2. Apply a pressure of 93-123 kPa (0.95-1.25 kgf/cm2 , 14-18 psi).

3. Check for a drop in pressure.
4. If the pressure drops, replace the cap.
RADIATOR TEST
1. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove the radiator cap and fill the radiator with engine
coolant to the top of the filler neck.
2. Attach a commercially available pressure tester (A) to the radiator, Apply a pressure of 93-123 kPa
(0.95-1.25 kgf/cm 2 14-18 psi).
111
Fig. 3: Attaching Pressure Tester to Radiator

3. Inspect for engine coolant leaks and a drop in pressure.

4. Remove the tester, and reinstall the radiator cap.
5. Check for engine oil in the coolant and/or coolant in the engine oil.
FAN MOTOR TEST

1. Disconnect the 2P connectors from the radiator fan motor and condenser fan motor.
111
Fig. 4: Disconnecting 2P Connectors From Radiator Fan And Condenser Fan Motor
2. Test the motor by connecting battery power to No. 2 terminal and ground to No. 1 terminal.
3. If the motor fails to run or does not run smoothly, replace it (see RADIATOR AND FAN
REPLACEMENT ).
THERMOSTAT TEST
Replace the thermostat if it is in the stuck open position at room temperature.
To test a closed thermostat:
1. Suspend the thermostat (A) in a container of water. Do not let the thermometer (B) touch the bottom
of the hot container.
111
Fig. 5: Suspending Thermostat In Container Of Water

2. Heat the water, and check the temperature with a thermometer. Check the temperature at which the
thermostat first opens, and at which it is fully open.
111
3. Measure the lift height of the thermostat when it is fully open.
Standard Thermostat
Lift Height: above 8.0 mm (0.31 in.)

Starts Opening: 169-176°F (76-80°C)
Fully Open: 194°F (90°C)
WATER PUMP INSPECTION

1. Remove the drive belt (see DRIVE BELT REPLACEMENT ).
2. Turn the water pump pulley counterclockwise. Check that it turns freely. If it doesn't turn smoothly,
replace the water pump (see Water Pump Replacement ).
NOTE: When you check the water pump pulley, you may see a small amount of
"weeping" from the bleed holes (A). This is normal.
111
Fig. 6: Identifying Bleed Holes

3. Install the drive belt (see DRIVE BELT REPLACEMENT ).
WATER PUMP REPLACEMENT

2. Drain the engine coolant (see Coolant Replacement ).
3. Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner (see DRIVE BELT AUTO-TENSIONER
REPLACEMENT ).
4. Remove the six bolts securing the water pump, then remove the water pump (A).
Fig. 7: Removing Water Pump

5. Inspect and clean the O-ring groove and mating surface with the water passage.
6. Install the water pump with new O-rings in the reverse order of removal.
7. Clean up any spilled engine coolant.
111
8. Install the drive belt auto-tensioner (see DRIVE BELT AUTO-TENSIONER REPLACEMENT ).
9. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed air from the cooling system with the heater valve
open (see step 6 in Coolant Replacement ).
COOLANT CHECK
1. Look at the coolant level in the reserve tank. Make sure it is between the MAX mark (A) and MIN
mark (B).
Fig. 8: Identifying Coolant Level

2. If the coolant level in the reserve tank is at or below the MIN mark, add coolant to bring it up to the
MAX mark, and inspect the cooling system for leaks.
COOLANT REPLACEMENT
111
1. Start the engine. Set the heater temperature control dial to maximum heat, or climate control system to
HI, then turn off the ignition switch. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool to the touch.
2. Remove the radiator cap.
3. Loosen the drain plug (A), and drain the coolant.
Fig. 9: Loosening Drain Plug And Drain Coolant

4. After the coolant has drained, tighten the radiator drain plug.
5. Remove, drain and reinstall the reverse tank.
6. Fill the reserve tank to the MAX mark (A) with Honda Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 (P/N OL999-9001).
111
Fig. 10: Identifying MAX Mark

7. Pour Honda Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 into the radiator up to the base of the filler neck.
NOTE:  Always use Honda Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 (P/N OL999-9001).

Using a non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the
cooling system to malfunction or fail.
 Honda Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a mixture of 50% antifreeze
and 50% water. Do not add water.
Engine Coolant Capacities (including the reserve tank capacity of 0.6 L (0.16 US gal))
After Coolant Change:
M/T: 5.1 L (1.35 US gal)

A/T: 5.0 L (1.32 US gal)
111
After Engine Overhaul:
M/T: 7.2 L (1.90 US gal)

A/T: 7.1 L (1.88 US gal)
Fig. 11: Pouring Honda Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 Into Radiator

8. Install the radiator cap loosely.

9. Start the engine, and let it run until it warms up (the radiator fan comes on at least twice).
10. Turn off the engine. Check the level in the radiator and add Honda Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 if
needed.
11. Put the radiator cap on tightly, then run the engine again and check for leaks.
THERMOSTAT REPLACEMENT
111
2. Clean any dirt off the quick connector (A), thermostat cover, and lower radiator hose.
Fig. 12: Cleaning Dirt Off Quick Connector

3. Pull out lock (B) by hand, then wiggle the quick connector loose, and remove it from the thermostat
cover. Do not use any tools to remove the quick connector.
4. Remove the thermostat (A).
111
Fig. 13: Removing Thermostat

5. Install the thermostat with a new O-ring (B).

6. Check the quick connector (A) and set ring (B) for cracks or damage. If the connector and/or set ring
are cracked or damaged, replace the connector.
111
Fig. 14: Checking Quick Connector And Set Ring For Cracks Or Damage
7. Make sure the set ring is in place inside the quick connector. If the set ring is off the connector,
replace the quick connector.
8. Replace the O-ring (C) in the quick connector.
9. Check the lock (D). If the lock is damaged or deformed, replace it. When installing the new lock on
the connector, press it straight down along the groove.
10. Clean the connecting surface of the thermostat cover (E), then apply clean engine coolant around the
connecting surface.
11. Push down the lock (A), then push the quick connector (B) onto the thermostat cover until you hear it
click.
111
Fig. 15: Pushing Down Lock

WATER PASSAGE REPLACEMENT

111
Fig. 16: Cleaning Dirt Off Quick Connector

3. Pull out the lock (B) by hand, then wiggle the quick connector loose, and remove it from the
thermostat cover. Do not use any tools to remove the quick connector.
5. Remove the splash shield (see step 25 on TRANSMISSION REMOVAL ).
6. Remove the A/C compressor without disconnecting the A/C hoses (see step 26 on ENGINE
REMOVAL ).
7. Remove the intake manifold: ).
 '03-05 models (see REMOVAL ('03-05 MODELS)
 '06-07 models (see REMOVAL ('06--07 MODELS)
8. Remove a bolt (A) securing the connecting pipe.
111
Fig. 17: Removing Connecting Pipe Bolt

9. Remove the connecting pipe (B), water bypass hose (C), and positive crankcase ventilation (PCV)
hose (D).
10. Remove the water passage (A).
111
Fig. 18: Removing Water Passage

11. Remove the thermostat housing (B).

12. Remove the water pump (see Water Pump Replacement ).
13. Clean and dry the water passage mating surfaces.
14. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001, 08718-0002, 08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly
to the cylinder block mating surface of the water passage and to the inner threads of the bolt holes.
NOTE:  Do not install components if too much time has passed after
applying the liquid gasket (for P/N 08718-0002, no more than 4
minutes, for all others, no more than 5 minutes). Instead, remove
the old residue and reapply the liquid gasket.
 Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after installing the water
passage.
111
Fig. 19: Applying Liquid Gasket To Cylinder Block Mating Surface

15. Install the water pump (see Water Pump Replacement ).

16. Install the thermostat housing (A) with a new O-ring (B).
111
Fig. 20: Installing Thermostat Housing With New O-Ring

17. Install the water passage (C) with a new O-ring (D).
18. Install the connecting pipe (A) with a new O-ring (B).
111
Fig. 21: Installing Connecting Pipe With New O-Ring

19. Install the water bypass hose (C), and PCV hose (D), then tighten a bolt (E) securing the connecting
pipe.
20. Install the intake manifold.
 '03-05 models (seeINSTALLATION ('03-05 MODELS) )
 '06-07 models (seeINSTALLATION '06--07 MODEL) ).
21. Install the A/C compressor (see step 30 on ENGINE INSTALLATION ).

22. Install the splash shield (see step 25 on TRANSMISSION INSTALLATION ).
23. Install the alternator (see ALTERNATOR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ).
111
Fig. 22: Checking Quick Connector And Set Ring For Cracks Or Damage
connecting surface.
29. Push down the lock (A), then push the quick connector (B) onto the thermostat cover until you here it
click.
111
Fig. 23: Pushing Down Lock And Quick Connector

30. After assembly, wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine with coolant or oil.
EGR PASSAGE REPLACEMENT

1. Drain the engine coolant (see COOLANT CHECK ).
2. Remove the two bolts (A) securing the EVAP canister purge valve bracket and remove the bolt (B)
securing the harness bracket.
111
Fig. 24: Removing EVAP Canister Purge Valve Bracket Bolts

3. Remove the upper radiator hose (A), heater hose (B), water bypass hose (C), and connecting pipe
mounting bolt (D).
111
Fig. 25: Removing Upper Radiator Hose, Heater Hose, Water Bypass Hose And Connecting
Pipe Mounting Bolt
4. Disconnect the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve connector.

5. Remove the EGR passage (A).
111
Fig. 26: Removing EGR Passage

6. Install the EGR passage with a new gasket (B).

7. Install the other parts in the reverse order of removal.
RADIATOR AND FAN REPLACEMENT

2. Remove the front bulkhead cover:
111

3. Remove the automatic transmission fluid (ATF) cooler hoses (A/T). Plug the ATF cooler hoses and
lines.
Fig. 27: Removing ATF Cooler Hoses

4. Remove the upper radiator hose and lower radiator hose from the radiator.
5. Disconnect the fan motor connectors and radiator fan switch connector ('03-2004 models)/engine
coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 2 connector ('05-07 models).
6. Remove the A/C compressor clutch connector.
7. Remove the upper bracket and cushions, then pull up the radiator.
8. Remove the fan shroud assemblies and other parts from the radiator.
9. Install the radiator in the reverse order of removal. Make sure the upper and lower cushions are set
securely.
10. Fill the radiator with engine coolant, then bleed air from the cooling system (see step 6 in Coolant
Replacement ).
11. Check the ATF level in the automatic transmission (A/T) (see ATF LEVEL CHECK ).
111
2003-07 ENGINE Fan Controls - Accord
2003-07 ENGINE
Fan Controls - Accord
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:35:14
Fig. 1: Identifying Fan Controls Component Location Index


'03-04 MODELS

1. Inspect the water pump (see
WATER PUMP
INSPECTION ).
2. Check for a broken drive belt
(see DRIVE BELT
INSPECTION ).
tensioner (see DRIVE
BELT AUTO-
TENSIONER
INSPECTION ).
4. Check the thermostat (see
THERMOSTAT TEST ).
5. Check for the coolant
leakage (from gaskets, hoses,
O-rings, etc.).
6. Check for dirt, leaves, or
Engine overheats insects on radiator and
condenser.
7. Check for damaged or
deformed fan shroud.
8. Check for plugged or
deteriorated radiator hoses.
9. Check the radiator cap (see
RADIATOR CAP TEST ).
10. Inspect the fan motors or fan
relays.
11. Check for plugged heater
core or hose(s).
12. Check the coolant level.
13. Check for deteriorated
coolant.
14. Check for a damaged
cylinder head gasket.
Radiator fan circuit troubleshooting
The radiator fan does not Cleanliness and tightness of all
(see RADIATOR FAN CIRCUIT
run at all connectors
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
111
Radiator fan switch circuit

troubleshooting (Open) (see
The radiator fan does not
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH Cleanliness and tightness of all
run for engine cooling, but
CIRCUIT connectors
it runs with the A/C on
TROUBLESHOOTING
(OPEN) ).
Radiator fan switch circuit
The radiator fan runs with
troubleshooting (Short) (see
the ignition switch ON (II),
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH Cleanliness and tightness of all
the A/C off, and the engine
CIRCUIT connectors
coolant temperature below
TROUBLESHOOTING
199°F (93°C)
(SHORT) ).
 HVAC DTCs (see GENERAL
The A/C condenser fan A/C condenser fan circuit
TROUBLESHOOTING
does not run at all (but the troubleshooting (see A/C
INFORMATION )
radiator fan runs with the CONDENSER FAN CIRCUIT
A/C on) TROUBLESHOOTING ).  Cleanliness and tightness of all
connectors
Radiator and A/C condenser fan
Both the radiator fan and  HVAC DTCs (see GENERAL
common circuit troubleshooting
the A/C condenser fan do TROUBLESHOOTING
(see RADIATOR AND A/C
not run with the A/C on INFORMATION )
CONDENSER FAN COMMON
(but the A/C compressor  Cleanliness and tightness of all
CIRCUIT
runs with the A/C on) connectors
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
The A/C compressor A/C compressor clutch circuit  HVAC DTCs (see GENERAL
clutch does not engage (but troubleshooting (see A/C TROUBLESHOOTING
both the radiator fan and COMPRESSOR CLUTCH INFORMATION )
the A/C condenser fan run CIRCUIT  Cleanliness and tightness of all
with the A/C on) TROUBLESHOOTING ). connectors
'05-07 MODELS

1. Inspect the water pump (see

WATER PUMP
INSPECTION ).
2. Check for a broken drive belt
(see DRIVE BELT
INSPECTION ).
tensioner (see DRIVE
BELT AUTO-
TENSIONER
INSPECTION ).
4. Check the thermostat (see
THERMOSTAT TEST ).
5. Check for the coolant
111
leakage (from gaskets, hoses,

O-rings, etc.).
6. Check for dirt, leaves, or
insects on radiator and
condenser.
7. Check for damaged or
deformed fan shroud.
8. Check for plugged or
deteriorated radiator hoses.
9. Check the radiator cap (see
Engine overheats RADIATOR CAP TEST ).
10. Inspect the fan motors or fan
relays.
11. Check for plugged heater
core or hose(s).
12. Check the coolant level.
13. Check for deteriorated
coolant.
14. Check for a damaged
The radiator fan does not Radiator fan circuit troubleshooting Cleanliness and tightness of all
run at all (see 2005-2006 Models ). connectors
Remove the radiator fan relay, and
test.
Both the radiator fan and
the A/C condenser fan run  If the relay is faulty, replace
with the ignition switch it.
Cleanliness and tightness of all
ON (II), the A/C off, and  If the relay is OK, repair a connectors
the engine coolant short in the wire between
temperature below 199°F radiator fan relay 4P socket
(93°C) terminal No. 4 and
ECM/PCM connector
terminal E12.
TROUBLESHOOTING
does not run at all (but the troubleshooting (see A/C
INFORMATION )
radiator fan runs with the CONDENSER FAN CIRCUIT
A/C on) TROUBLESHOOTING ).  Cleanliness and tightness of all
connectors
Radiator and A/C condenser fan
Both the radiator fan and  HVAC DTCs (see GENERAL
common circuit troubleshooting
the A/C condenser fan do TROUBLESHOOTING
(see RADIATOR AND A/C
not run with the A/C on INFORMATION )
CONDENSER FAN COMMON
(but the A/C compressor  Cleanliness and tightness of all
CIRCUIT
runs with the A/C on) connectors
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
The A/C compressor A/C compressor clutch circuit  HVAC DTCs (see GENERAL
clutch does not engage (but troubleshooting (see A/C TROUBLESHOOTING
both the radiator fan and COMPRESSOR CLUTCH INFORMATION )
111
the A/C condenser fan run CIRCUIT  Cleanliness and tightness of all
with the A/C on) TROUBLESHOOTING ). connectors
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Fig. 2: Identifying Fan Controls Circuit Diagram

RADIATOR FAN CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING

111
'03-04 MODELS
NOTE: Before beginning this troubleshooting procedure, refer to SYMPTOM

TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX.
1. Check the No. 11 (20 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box, and the No. 30 (7.5 A) fuse in the
Are the fuses OK?
YES - Reinstall the fuse, then got to step 2.

2. Remove the radiator fan relay from the under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it (see UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX (EXCEPT HYBRID & V6) ).
Is the relay OK?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Replace the radiator fan relay.
3. Measure the voltage between radiator fan relay 4P socket terminal No. 2 and body ground.
111
Fig. 3: Measuring Voltage Between Radiator Fan Relay 4P Socket Terminal No. 2 And Body
Ground
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.
4. Connect radiator fan relay 4P socket terminal No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 4: Connecting Radiator Fan Relay 4P Socket Terminal No. 1 And No. 2 With Jumper Wire
Does the radiator fan run?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Go to step 6.
5. Disconnect the jumper, and turn the ignition switch ON (II). Check for voltage between radiator fan
relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and body ground.
111
Fig. 5: Checking For Voltage Between Radiator Fan Relay 4P Socket Terminal No. 3 And Body
Ground
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Repair an open in the wire between the under-hood fuse/relay box and under-dash
fuse/relay box.
6. Disconnect the radiator fan motor 2P connector.
7. Check for continuity between radiator fan relay 4P socket terminal No. 1 and radiator fan motor 2P
111
Fig. 6: Checking Continuity Between Radiator Fan Relay 4P Socket And Radiator Fan Motor
2P Connector
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Repair an open in the wire between the under-hood fuse/relay box and radiator fan motor
2P connector terminal No. 2.
8. Check for continuity between radiator fan motor 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
111
Fig. 7: Checking Continuity Between Radiator Fan Motor 2P Connector Terminal No. 1 And
Body Ground
YES - Replace the radiator fan motor (see RADIATOR AND FAN REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Repair an open in the wire between radiator fan motor 2P connector terminal No. 1 and
body ground. If the wire is OK, check for a poor ground at G301.
9. Reinstall the radiator fan relay.
10. Disconnect the radiator fan switch 2P connector.
11. Connect radiator fan switch 2P connector terminal No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 8: Connecting Radiator Fan Switch 2P Connector Terminal No. 1 And No. 2 With Jumper
Wire
YES - Replace the radiator fan switch (see Radiator Fan Switch Replacement ).
NO - Go to step 12.
12. Remove the jumper wire, and measure the voltage between radiator fan switch 2P connector terminal
No. 2 and body ground.
111
Fig. 9: Measuring Voltage Between Radiator Fan Switch 2P Connector Terminal No. 2 And
Body Ground
YES - Repair an open in the wire between radiator fan switch 2P connector terminal No. 1 and
111
NO - Repair open in the wire between radiator fan switch 2P connector terminal No. 2 and the
under-hood fuse/relay box.
'05-07 MODELS

1. Check the No. 11 (20 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box, and the No. 30 (7.5 A) fuse in the
Are the fuses OK?
YES - Reinstall the fuse, then go to step 2.

FUSE/RELAY BOX (EXCEPT HYBRID & V6 ).
Is the relay OK?
YES - Reinstall the fuse, then go to step 3.

3. Measure the voltage between radiator fan relay 4P socket terminal No. 2 and body ground.
111
Fig. 10: Measuring Voltage Between Radiator Fan Relay 4P Socket Terminal No. 2 And Body
Ground
YES - Go to step 4.
4. Connect radiator fan relay 4P socket terminal No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 11: Connecting Radiator Fan Relay 4P Socket Terminal No. 1 And No. 2 With Jumper
Wire
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Go to step 6.
5. Disconnect the jumper, and turn the ignition switch ON (II). Check for voltage between radiator fan
relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and body ground.
111
Fig. 12: Checking Voltage Between Radiator Fan Relay 4P Socket Terminal No. 3 And Body
Ground
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Repair an open in the wire between the under-hood fuse/relay box and under-dash
fuse/relay box.
6. Disconnect the radiator fan motor 2P connector.
7. Check for continuity between radiator fan relay 4P socket terminal No. 1 and radiator fan motor 2P
111
Fig. 13: Checking Continuity Between Radiator Fan Relay 4P Socket And Radiator Fan Motor
2P Connector
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Repair an open in the wire between the under-hood fuse/relay box and radiator fan motor
8. Check for continuity between radiator fan motor 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
111
Fig. 14: Checking Continuity Between Radiator Fan Motor 2P Connector Terminal No. 1 And
Body Ground
YES - Replace the radiator fan motor (see RADIATOR AND FAN REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Repair an open in the wire between radiator fan motor 2P connector terminal No. 1 and
111
10. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P).

11. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal E12 and body ground.
Fig. 15: Checking Continuity Between ECM/PCM Connector Terminal E12 And Body Ground
YES - Repair a short in the wire between the under-hood fuse/relay box and the ECM/PCM.
NO - Repair an open in the wire between the under-hood fuse/relay box and the ECM/PCM.
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING (OPEN)

'03-04 MODELS

111
1. Disconnect the radiator fan switch 2P connector.

3. Measure voltage between radiator fan switch 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
Fig. 16: Measuring Voltage Between Radiator Fan Switch 2P Connector Terminal No. 2 And
Body Ground

111
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Repair an open in the wire between radiator fan switch 2P connector terminal No. 2 and
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check for continuity between radiator fan switch 2P connector
Fig. 17: Checking Continuity Between Radiator Fan Switch 2P Connector Terminal No. 1 And
Body Ground
111
YES - Replace the radiator fan switch (see Radiator Fan Switch Replacement ).
NO - Repair an open in the wire between radiator fan switch 2P connector terminal No. 1 and
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING (SHORT)

'03-'04 MODELS

FUSE/RELAY BOX (EXCEPT HYBRID & V6 ).
Is the relay OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
2. Remove the radiator fan switch, and test it (see Radiator Fan Switch Replacement ).
Is the radiator fan switch OK?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Replace the radiator fan switch (see Radiator Fan Switch Replacement ).
3. Disconnect the under-hood fuse relay box 20P connector.
4. Check for continuity between radiator fan switch 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
111
Fig. 18: Checking Continuity Between Radiator Fan Switch 2P Connector Terminal No. 2 And
Body Ground
YES - Repair a short in the wire between radiator fan switch 2P connector terminal No. 2 and
111
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH TEST

'03-04 MODELS
NOTE: Bleed air from the cooling system after installing the radiator fan switch (see
COOLANT REPLACEMENT ).
1. Remove the radiator fan switch from the radiator (see RADIATOR AND FAN REPLACEMENT ).
2. Suspend the radiator fan switch (A) in a container of water as shown below.
111
Fig. 19: Suspending Radiator Fan Switch In Container Of Water

3. Heat the water, and check the temperature with a thermometer. Do not let the thermometer (B) touch
the bottom of the hot container.
4. Measure the continuity between terminal No. 1 and terminal No. 2 according to table below. .
Fig. 20: Terminal Continuity Specification Table

RADIATOR FAN SWITCH REPLACEMENT

'03-04 MODELS
1. Drain the engine coolant (see COOLANT REPLACEMENT ).

2. Remove the splash shield.
3. Disconnect the radiator fan switch connector (A), then remove the radiator fan switch (B).
111
Fig. 21: Disconnecting Radiator Fan Switch Connector And Radiator Fan Switch
4. Install the radiator fan switch with a new O-ring (C).

open (see step 6 on COOLANT REPLACEMENT ).
111
2003-07 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Catalytic Converter System - Accord
2003-07 ENGINE PERFORMANCE
Catalytic Converter System - Accord
DTC CODES
DTC INDEX
DTC Description
(2003-2004 models)
(2005-2006 models)
DTC TROUBLESHOOTING
DTC P0420: CATALYST SYSTEM EFFICIENCY BELOW THRESHOLD '03-04 MODELS)
NOTE:  If some of the DTCs listed below are stored at the same time as DTC
P0420, troubleshoot them first, then recheck for DTC P0420.
P0137, P0138: Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2)
P0141: Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) heater
 Poor quality fuel may cause this DTC.

2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
4. Test-drive under these conditions:
 ETC SENSOR above 158 °F (70 °C)
 A/T in D position (M/T in 5th gear)
 Vehicle speed between 50 mph (80 km/h) and 55 mph (88 km/h) with cruise control set
 Drive about 2 minutes, decelerate for at least 4 seconds with the throttle completely closed, then
maintain 55 mph (88 km/h) for 20 minutes with cruise control set
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0420 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Does the screen indicate EXECUTING?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - If the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, got to step 4 and recheck. If the screen
indicates PASSED, intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. If the screen indicates
FAILED, go to step 8.
6. Continue test driving until a result comes on.
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:36:20
Does the screen indicate FAILED?
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. If the
screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes on. If the screen indicates
OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 4 and recheck.
9. Replace the TWC (see EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER REPLACEMENT ).
11. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
14. Test-drive for about 10 minutes, varying the vehicle speed.
15. Check the CATA MONITOR CONDITION in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is the temperature OK?

NO - Go to step 13 and recheck.
 ECT SENSOR above 158 °F (70 °C)
 Vehicle speed between 50 mph (80 km/h) and 55 mph (88 km/h) with cruise control set
 Drive about 2 minutes, decelerate for at least 4 seconds with the throttle completely closed, then
maintain 55 mph (88 km/h) for 20 minutes with cruise control set

19. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0420 indicated?
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the secondary H02S (sensor 2) and the
ECM/PCM, then to step1.
NO - Go to step 20.
Does the screen indicate PASSED?
YES - Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in
111
step 19, got to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.

NO - If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
secondary HO2S (sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates
EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 16.
DTC P0420: CATALYST SYSTEM EFFICIENCY BELOW THRESHOLD ('05-07 MODELS)
NOTE:  Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board
snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see
GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION .
 If some of the DTCs listed below are stored at the same time as DTC
P0420, troubleshoot them first, then recheck for DTC P0420.
P0137, P0138: Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2)
 Poor quality fuel may cause this DTC.

 ETC SENSOR 1 above 158 °F (70 °C)
 Vehicle speed between 45-75 mph (72 - 120 km/h) for 5 minutes or more with cruise control set
 Maintain the vehicle speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) for 5 minutes or more with cruise control set
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - If the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, got to step 4 and recheck. If the screen
indicates PASSED, intermittent failure the system is OK at them time. If the screen indicates
FAILED, go to step 8.
YES - Go to step 8.
111

9. Replace the TWC; '05 model (see EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER REPLACEMENT , '06-07
models (see 2006 MODEL ).
14. Test-drive for about 10 minutes, varying the vehicle speed.
15. Check the CATA MONITOR CONDITION in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is the temperature OK?

 ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 °F (70 °C)
 Vehicle speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) for 5 minutes or more with cruise control set

YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the secondary HO2S (sensor 2) and the
ECM/PCM, the got to step 1.
NO - Go to step 20.
step 19 go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
secondary HO2S (sensor 2) and the EMC/PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates
111
2003-07 ENGINE PERFORMANCE EGR System - Accord
EGR System - Accord
Fig. 1: Identifying EGR System Component Location Index

DTC INDEX
DTC INDEX
DTC Description
DTC P0401 EGR Insufficient Flow
DTC P0404 EGR Valve Circuit Range/Performance Problem
DTC P0406 EGR Valve Position Sensor Circuit High Voltage
DTC P2413 EGR System Malfunction
DTC TROUBLESHOOTING
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:37:13
DTC P0401: EGR INSUFFICIENT FLOW
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot,
and review the general troubleshooting information (seeGENERAL
INFORMATION (EXCEPT HYBRID & V6) ).

4. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
Is the result OK?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Go to step 7.
 Engine coolant temperature above 158°F (70°C)
 Vehicle speed at 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, and engine speed between 1,100 and 3,000 rpm
 During the drive, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) for 5 seconds
YES - Remove the EGR plate; '03-05 models (see REMOVAL ('03-05 MODELS) ), '06-07
modelsREMOVAL ('06--07 MODELS) and clean the intake manifold port with throttle plate
and induction cleaner, then go to step 9.
NO - If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Check for
poor connections or loose terminals at the EGR valve and the ECM/PCM. If the screen
indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 5 and recheck.
8. Replace the EGR valve (see EGR VALVE REPLACEMENT ).

111
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the EGR valve and the ECM/PCM. If
the connections are OK, go to step 15.
NO - Go to step 14.
NO - If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the EGR
the valve and the ECM/PCM, go to step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving
until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 12 and
recheck.
15. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see UPDATING THE ECM/PCM ,SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ).
the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see GENERAL
INFORMATION (EXCEPT HYBRID & V6) ) then go to step 16 above. If the ECM/PCM
was substituted go to step 1.
NO - Go to step 18. ).
YES- If the ECM/PCM was substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM; '03-05 models (see
ECM/PCM REPLACEMENT ), '06-07 models (seeECM/PCM REPLACEMENT ). If any
other Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 17, got the indicated DTC's
troubleshooting.
NO- If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the EGR
valve and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see GENERAL INFORMATION (EXCEPT HYBRID & V6) ), then go to step 16. If the
ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving
until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 16.
DTC P0404: EGR VALVE CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE PROBLEM
111
TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION ).

Is the result OK?
YES - Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Clean any carbon build-up on the EGR
valve with throttle plate and induction cleaner.
NO - Go to step 5.
6. Disconnect the EGR valve 6P connector.
7. At the sensor side, measure resistance between EGR valve 6P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
111
Fig. 2: Measuring Resistance Between EGR Valve 6P Connector Terminals No. 1 And No. 2
Is there 100 kohms or more?

NO - Go to step 8.
8. Measure resistance between EGR valve 6P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.
111

NO - Go to step 9.
9. Check for continuity between EGR valve 6P connector terminal No. 6 and body ground.
111
Fig. 4: Checking Continuity Between EGR Valve 6P Connector Terminal No. 6 And Body
Ground

NO - Repair open in the wire between the EGR valve and G101, then go to step 27.
111

YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (B16) and the EGR valve, then go to
step 27.
NO - Go to step 13.
13. Connect EGR valve 6P connector terminal No. 4 to body ground with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 6: Connecting EGR Valve 6P Connector Terminal No. 4 To Body Ground With Jumper
Wire
111

NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (B16) and the EGR valve, then go to step
27.
15. Remove the EGR valve (see EGR VALVE REPLACEMENT ).
16. Clean the intake manifold EGR port with throttle plate and induction cleaner.
17. Install the EGR valve (see EGR VALVE REPLACEMENT ).
18. Reconnect the EGR valve 6P connector.
19. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector B (24P).
111
Is the result OK?

NO - Go to step 25.
27. Reconnect all connectors.
the connections are OK, go to step 35.
NO - Go to step 34.
valve and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving
35. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a know-good ECM/PCM
Is the DTC P0404 indicated?
the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see), then go to step 36. If
the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step1.
NO - Go to step 38.
38. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0404 in the DTC's MENU with the HDS.
111
YES- If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM was
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM; '03-05 models (seeECM/PCM
REPLACEMENT ), '06-07 models (see ECM/PCM REPLACEMENT ). If any other
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 37, got to the indicated DTC's
troubleshooting.
NO - If the screen indicate FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the EGR
(see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), then go to step 3636. If the ECM/PCM was
substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes
on. If the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 36.
DTC P0406: EGR VALVE POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE
and review the general troubleshooting information (see GENERAL

2. Check the EGR VLS in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is 4.88 V or higher indicated?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the EGR valve and the ECM/PCM.
6. Measure voltage between EGR valve 6P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3.
111
Fig. 8: Measuring Voltage Between EGR Valve 6P Connector Terminals No. 2 And No. 3
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Go to step 7.
7. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A20 and A23.
111
Fig. 9: Measuring Voltage Between ECM/PCM Connector Terminals A20 And A23
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Repair open in the wire between the EGR valve and the ECM/PCM (A23), then go to
step 10.
NO - Go to step 14.
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the EGR valve and the ECM/PCM,
then go to step 1.
NO - Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Temporary DTC's or DTC's are indicated, go to
the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
111

16. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software (see UPDATING THE ECM/PCM ), or
substitute a know-good ECM/PCM (see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM )
Yes - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the EGR valve and the ECM/PCM. If
the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see SUBSTITUTE THE
ECM/PCM ), then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1
No- If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM was
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM; '03-05 models (seeECM/PCM
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, got to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
DTC P2413: EGR SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

Is the result OK?
YES - Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the EGR valve and the ECM/PCM.
NO - Go to step 5.
7. Check the EGR VLS in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Go to step 19.
11. Measure voltage between EGR valve 6P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
111
Fig. 10: Measuring Voltage Between EGR Valve 6P Connector Terminal No. 3 And Body
Ground
Is there about 5 V?

NO - Go to step 12.
12. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminal A20 and body ground.
111
Fig. 11: Measuring Voltage Between ECM/PCM Connector Terminal A20 And Body Ground
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Repair open in the wire between the EGR valve and the ECM/PCM (A20), then go to
step 44.
NO - Go to step 51.
111
step 44.
NO - Go to step 17.
111
Wire
111

44.
20. If not already done, disconnect the EGR valve 6P connector.
111
Is there continuity or resistance of 100 kohms or more?

NO - Go to step 22.
111

NO - Go to step 23.
23. If not already done, jump the SCS line with the HDS.
24. If not already done, disconnect ECM/PCM connector B (24P).
111
step 44.
NO - Go to step 26.
111
Wire
111
Fig. 19: Checking For Continuity Between ECM/PCM Connector Terminal B16 And Body
Ground

44.
28. Remove the jumper wire from the EGR valve 6P connector.
29. Check for continuity between EGR valve 6P connector terminal No. 6 and body ground.
111
Fig. 20: Checking Continuity Between EGR Valve 6P Connector Terminal No. 6 And Body
Ground

NO - Repair open in the wire between the EGR valve and G101, then go to step 44.
111
31. Connect the battery positive terminal to EGR valve 6P connector terminal No. 4 with a jumper wire.
Fig. 21: Connecting Battery Positive Terminal To EGR Valve 6P Connector Terminal No. 4
With Jumper Wire
32. Start the engine and let it idle, then connect the battery negative terminal to EGR valve 6P connector
terminal No. 6 with a jumper wire.
Does the engine stall or run rough?

111
NO - Go to step 33.
35. Clean the intake manifold EGR port and the passage inside the EGR valve with throttle plate and
induction cleaner.
36. Install the EGR valve (see EGR VALVE REPLACEMENT ).
37. Reconnect the EGR valve 6P connector.
Is the result OK?

NO - Go to step 42.
Are any Temporary DTCs or DTCs indicated?
YES - If DTC P2413 is indicated, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the EGR
valve and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are
indicated, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
NO - Go to step 50.
step 49, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
valve and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1 and recheck. If the screen indicates EXECUTING,
keep driving until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step
48.
111
substitute a known- good ECM/PCM (see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ).

55. Check for temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
YES- Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the EGR valve and the ECM/PCM. If
the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-food ECM/PCM (see), then go to step 54. If
the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO- Go to step 56.
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM; '03-05 models (see ECM/PCM
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 55, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
NO- If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the EGR
(seeHOW TO SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), then go to step 54. If the ECM/PCM was
substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes
on. If the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 54.
EGR VALVE REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the air cleaner (see AIR CLEANER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).
2. Remove the EGR valve 6P connector (A).
111
Fig. 22: Removing EGR Valve 6P Connector

3. Remove the EGR valve (B).

4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new gasket (C).
111
2003-07 ENGINE Intake Manifold And Exhaust System - Accord
2003-07 ENGINE
Intake Manifold And Exhaust System - Accord
INTAKE MANIFOLD REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

EXPLODED VIEW
2003-2005 Models
Fig. 1: Exploded View Of Intake Manifold '03-05 Models)

EXPLODED VIEW
2006 Model
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:37:42
Fig. 2: Exploded View Of Intake Manifold ('06-07 Models)

REMOVAL ('03-05 MODELS)
1. Disconnect the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor connector (A).
111
Fig. 3: Disconnecting Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Connector

2. Remove the vacuum hose (B) and breather pipe (C), then remove the intake air duct (D).
3. Remove the engine cover.
111
Fig. 4: Removing Intake Manifold Cover

4. Remove the throttle cable (A) and cruise control actuator cable (B) by loosening the locknuts (C), then
slipping the cable ends out of the accelerator linkage. Take care not to bend the cables when removing
them. Always replace any kinked cable with a new one.
111
Fig. 5: Removing Throttle Cable And Cruise Control Actuator Cable

5. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister hose (A) and brake booster vacuum hose (B).
111
Fig. 6: Removing Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Hose

6. Remove the engine wire harness connectors and wire harness clamps from the intake manifold.
 Idle air control (IAC) valve connector
 Throttle position sensor connector
 Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor connector
7. Remove the bolt (A) securing the harness holder, and remove the harness clamps (B).
111
Fig. 7: Removing Bolt (A) Securing Harness Holder

8. Remove and plug the water bypass hoses.
111
Fig. 8: Removing And Plug Water Bypass Hoses

9. Remove the harness clamp (A), and the harness connector (B) from the intake manifold bracket, then
remove the intake manifold bracket (C).
111
Fig. 9: Removing Harness Clamp (A), And Harness Connector

10. Remove the vacuum hose (A/T).
111
Fig. 10: Removing Vacuum Hose (A/T)

11. Remove the intake manifold.
111
Fig. 11: Removing Intake Manifold

INSTALLATION ('03-05 MODELS)
1. Install the intake manifold (A) with a new gasket (B), and tighten the bolts/nuts in a crisscross pattern
in two or three steps, beginning with the inner bolt.
111
Fig. 12: Installing Intake Manifold With Gasket

2. Install the vacuum hose (A/T).
111
Fig. 13: Installing Vacuum Hose (A/T)

3. Install the intake manifold bracket (A), then install the harness clamp (B), and harness connector (C)
to the intake manifold bracket.
111
Fig. 14: Installing Intake Manifold Bracket

4. Install the water bypass hoses.
111
Fig. 15: Installing Water Bypass Hoses

5. Tighten the bolt (A) securing the harness holder, and install the harness clamps (B).
111
Fig. 16: Tightening Bolt Securing Harness Holder

6. Install the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister hose (A) and brake booster vacuum hose (B).
111
Fig. 17: Installing Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Hose

7. Install the throttle cable (see THROTTLE CABLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ), then adjust
the cable (see THROTTLE CABLE ADJUSTMENT ).
8. Install the cruise control actuator cable (see CRUISE CONTROL ACTUATOR/CABLE
REPLACEMENT ), then adjust the cable (see CRUISE CONTROL ACTUATOR CABLE
ADJUSTMENT ).
9. Install the engine cover.
111
Fig. 18: Installing Intake Manifold Cover

10. Install the intake air duct (A), then connect the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor connector (B), and
install the vacuum hose (C) and breather pipe (D).
111
Fig. 19: Installing Vacuum Hose And Breather Pipe


12. After installation, check that all tubes, hoses, and connectors are installed correctly.
1. Remove the vacuum hose (A) and breather pipe (B), then remove the intake air duct (C).
111

111

111
Fig. 22: Removing Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Hose And Brake Booster Vacuum
Hose
4. Remove the engine wire harness connectors and wire harness clamps from the intake manifold.
5. Throttle actuator connector
6. Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor connector
7. Remove the harness holder (A), and remove the harness clamp (B).
111
Fig. 23: Removing Harness Holder

8. Remove and plug the water bypass hoses.
111
Fig. 24: Removing And Plug Water Bypass Hoses

9. Remove the harness clamp (A) and the harness connector (B) from the intake manifold bracket, then
remove the intake manifold bracket (C).
111
Fig. 25: Removing Harness Clamp And Harness Connector

10. Remove the vacuum hose.
A/T model:
111
Fig. 26: Removing Vacuum Hose - A/T Model

M/T model:
111
Fig. 27: Removing Vacuum Hose - M/T Model

11. Remove the intake manifold.
111
Fig. 28: Removing Intake Manifold

INSTALLATION '06-07 MODEL)
1. Install the intake manifold (A) with a new gasket (B), and tighten the bolts/nuts in a crisscross pattern
in two or three steps, beginning with the inner bolt.
111
Fig. 29: Installing Intake Manifold

2. Install the vacuum hose.
A/T model:
111
Fig. 30: Installing Vacuum Hose A/T Model

M/T model:
111
Fig. 31: Installing Vacuum Hose M/T Model

3. Install the intake manifold bracket (A), then install the harness clamp (B), and harness connector (C)
to the intake manifold bracket.
111
Fig. 32: Installing Harness Clamp, And Harness Connector To Intake Manifold Bracket
4. Install the water bypass hoses.
111
Fig. 33: Installing Water Bypass Hoses

5. Install the harness holder (A), and install the harness clamp (B).
111
Fig. 34: Installing Harness Holder

6. Reconnect the MAP sensor and throttle actuator connectors.

7. Install the EVAP canister hose (A) and brake booster vacuum hose (B).
111
Fig. 35: Installing EVAP Canister Hose And Brake Booster Vacuum Hose
8. Install the Engine cover.
111

9. Install the intake air duct (A), then connect the IAT sensor connector (B), and install the vacuum hose
(C) and breather pipe (D).
111
Fig. 37: Installing Intake Air Duct


open (see COOLANT REPLACEMENT ).
EXHAUST MANIFOLD REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

1. Remove the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve) (see ROCKER ARM OIL
CONTROL SOLENOID (VTEC SOLENOID VALVE) ASSEMBLY
2. Remove the driveshafts heat shield (A/T) (see step 11 on DRIVESHAFT REMOVAL ).
3. Remove the cover and exhaust manifold bracket, then remove the exhaust manifold.
111
Fig. 38: Removing Cover And Exhaust Manifold Bracket

4. Install the exhaust manifold and tighten the bolts/nuts in a crisscross pattern in two or three steps,
beginning with the inner nut.
5. Install the other parts in the reverse order of removal.
EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts when reassembling.
'03-05 MODELS
111
Fig. 39: Replacing Exhaust Pipe And Muffler (2003-2005 Models)

NOTE: Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts when reassembling.
'06-07 MODELS
111
Fig. 40: Replacing Exhaust Pipe And Muffler (2006 Model)

111
2003-07 ENGINE PERFORMANCE EVAP System - Accord
EVAP System - Accord
Fig. 1: Identifying EVAP System Component Location Index

NON-SULEV MODEL
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:38:44
Fig. 2: Identifying EVAP System Component Location Index (Non-SULEV Model)

SULEV MODEL
Fig. 3: Identifying EVAP System Component Location Index (SULEV Model)

DTC CODES
111
DTC INDEX
DTC Description
DTC P0442 EVAP System Small Leak Detected (2003-2004
models)
DTC P0455 EVAP System Large Leak Detected (2005-2006
models)
DTC P0456 EVAP System Very Small Leak Detected
DTC P0443 EVAP Canister Purge Valve Circuit Malfunction
models)
models)
DTC P0453 FTP Sensor Circuit High Voltage
DTC P0457 EVAP System Leak Detected/Fuel Cap Loose or
Missing
DTC P0496 EVAP System High Purge Flow
DTC P0497 EVAP System Low Purge Flow
DTC P0498 EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve Circuit Low
Voltage
DTC P0499 EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve Circuit High
Voltage
DTC P2422 EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve; Stuck Close
Malfunction
DTC TROUBLESHOOTING
DTC P0442: EVAP SYSTEM SMALL LEAK DETECTED (2003-2004 MODELS); DTC P0455:
EVAP SYSTEM LARGE LEAK DETECTED (2005-2007 MODELS); DTC P0456: EVAP SYSTEM
VERY SMALL LEAK DETECTED;
NOTE: The fuel system is designed to allow specified maximum vacuum and
pressure conditions. Do not deviate from the vacuum and pressure tests as
indicated in these procedures. Excessive pressure/vacuum would damage
the EVAP components or cause eventual fuel tank failure.
 Vacuum/pressure gauge, 0-4 in.Hg 07JAZ-001000B

 Vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A or equivalent, commercially available
GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION ).
 Fresh fuel has a higher volatility that will create greater
111
pressure/vacuum. The optimum condition for testing is less than a full

tank of fresh fuel. If possible, to assist in leak detection, add 1 gallon of
fresh fuel to the tank (as long as it will not fill the tank) just before
starting these procedures.
1. Check the fuel fill cap (the cap must say "Tighten to click"). It should turn 1/4 turn after it's tight, then
it clicks.
Is the correct fuel fill cap installed and properly tightened?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO - Replace or tighten the cap, then go to step 22.
2. Check the fuel fill cap seal (A) and the fuel fill pipe mating surface (B). Verify that the fuel fill cap
tether cord (C) is not caught under the cap.
Fig. 4: Checking Fuel Fill Cap Seal And Fuel Fill Pipe Mating Surface
Is the fuel fill cap seal missing or damaged, is the fuel fill pipe damaged, or is the tether cord
caught under the cap?
111
YES - Replace the fuel fill cap or the fuel fill pipe, then go to step 22.
NO - Go to step 3.
5. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
Is the result OK?
terminals at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve, or the EVAP canister vent shut
valve and the ECM/PCM.
NO - Go to step 6.
7. Check for a poor connection or damage at the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube (see FUEL LINE
INSPECTION ).
Is the tube OK?
YES - Go to step 9.
NO -
 Replace the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube (see FUEL TANK REPLACEMENT ),
then go to step 22.
 If necessary, replace the fuel tank (see FUEL TANK REPLACEMENT ), then go to
step 22.
8. Disconnect the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube (A) from the EVAP canister (B), and plug the EVAP
canister port (C).
111
Fig. 5: Disconnecting Fuel Tank Vapor Recirculation Tube From EVAP Canister (SULEV
Model)
111
Fig. 6: Disconnecting Fuel Tank Vapor Recirculation Tube From EVAP Canister (Non-SULEV
Model)
9. Disconnect the vacuum hose (purge line) (A) from the EVAP canister purge valve (B) in the engine
compartment, and connect a T-fitting (C) from the vacuum gauge and the vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30
in.Hg, to the hose as shown below.
111
Fig. 7: Disconnecting Vacuum Hose From EVAP Canister Purge Valve


11. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
12. Apply vacuum to the hose until the FTP reads 1.90 V (-0.59 in.Hg, -15.1 mmHg).
NOTE: Be careful not to exceed the pressure. If you exceed the pressure, the
FTP sensor can be damaged.
13. Monitor the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST for 1 minute with the HDS.
111
Does the voltage increase more than 0.2 V (0.1 in.Hg, 2.5 mmHg)?

NO - Go to step 19.
14. Select EVAP CVS OFF in the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
15. Disconnect the fresh air hoses (A) from the EVAP canister vent shut valve (B), and plug the EVAP
canister vent shut valve ports (C).
SULEV model
Fig. 8: Disconnecting Fresh Air Hoses From EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve (SULEV Model)
Non-SULEV model
111
Fig. 9: Disconnecting Fresh Air Hoses From EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve (Non-SULEV
Model)
16. Apply vacuum to the hose (disconnected in step 10) until the FTP reads 1.90 V (-0.59 in.Hg, -15.1
mmHg).
NOTE: Be careful not to exceed the pressure. If you exceed the pressure, the
FTP sensor can be damaged.
17. Monitor the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST for 1 minute with the HDS.
Does the voltage increase more than 0.2 V (0.1 in.Hg, 2.5 mmHg)?

NO - Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve; Non-SULEV model (see Non-SULEV
model ) or SULEV model (see SULEV model ), then go to step 21.
18. Check for a loose or damaged EVAP canister purge line between the EVAP canister and the EVAP
canister purge valve.
Is the line OK?

111
YES - Replace the following parts, then go to step 21.

 FTP sensor O-ring (see FTP Sensor Replacement )
 EVAP canister vent shut valve case and O-ring; Non-SULEV model (see Non-SULEV
model ) or SULEV model (see SULEV model )
 EVAP canister (see EVAP Canister Replacement )
NO - Reconnect or repair the EVAP canister purge hose, then go to step 21.
19. Select EVAP CVS OFF in the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
20. Check these parts for looseness or damage:
 Fuel fill pipe
 Fuel vapor return pipe
 Fuel tank vapor signal tube (SULEV model)
Are the parts OK?
YES - Check the fuel pump base gasket (see FUEL PUMP/FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT
REPLACEMENT ), and check the fuel tank, then go to step 21.
NO - Repair or replace the damaged parts, then go to step 21.
21. Reconnect all hoses and connectors.
Is the result OK?
YES - Troubleshooting is complete.

NO - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge
valve, or the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
DTC P0443: EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

YES - Go to step 5.
111
terminals at the EVAP canister purge valve and the ECM/PCM.

5. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and allow the engine to cool below 131°F (55°C).
6. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the EVAP canister purge valve (B) in the engine compartment,
and connect a vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, to the hose.
Fig. 10: Disconnecting Vacuum Hose From EVAP Canister Purge Valve In Engine
Compartment
7. Start the engine, and let it idle.
Is there vacuum?
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Go to step 14.
9. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P connector.
10. Check for continuity between EVAP canister purge valve 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground.
111
Fig. 11: Checking Continuity Between EVAP Canister Purge Valve 2P Connector Terminal No.
2 And Body Ground

NO - Go to step 24.
13. Check for continuity between EVAP canister purge valve 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground.
111
Fig. 12: Checking Continuity Between EVAP Canister Purge Valve 2P Connector Terminal No.
2 And Body Ground
YES - Repair short in the wire between the EVAP canister purge valve and the ECM/PCM
(B21), then go to step 25.
NO - Go to step 31.
15. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P connector.
17. Measure voltage between EVAP canister purge valve 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
111
Fig. 13: Measuring Voltage Between EVAP Canister Purge Valve 2P Connector Terminal No. 1
And Body Ground

NO - Repair open in the wire between the EVAP canister purge valve and the No. 18 ACG (15
A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to step 25.
21. Connect EVAP canister purge valve 2P connector terminal No. 2 to body ground with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 14: Connecting EVAP Canister Purge Valve 2P Connector Terminal No. 2 To Body
111

NO - Repair open in the wire between the EVAP canister purge valve and the ECM/PCM
(B21), then go to step 25.
23. At the valve side, measure resistance between EVAP canister purge valve 2P connector terminals No.
1 and No. 2.
111
Fig. 16: Measuring Resistance Between EVAP Canister Purge Valve 2P Connector Terminals
No. 1 And No. 2
Is there about 33 ohms at room temperature?

NO - Go to step 24.
24. Replace the EVAP canister purge valve (see EVAP Canister Purge Valve Replacement ).
Is DTC P0443 Indicated?
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the EVAP canister purge valve and the
ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
NO - 2003 model: Troubleshooting is complete. 2004-2007 models: Go to step 30.
111
NO - If the screen indicate FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
EVAP canister purge valve and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates
EXECUTING, keep idling until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
(see UPDATING THE ECM/PCM , SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ).
YES - If DTC P0443 is indicated, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the EVAP
canister purge valve and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
NO - If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM was
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM (see ECM/PCM REPLACEMENT ).
YES - If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM was substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM; '03-05 models, '06-07 models (see ECM/PCM
REPLACEMENT ). If any other Temporary DTC's or DTCs were indicated in step 34, go to
NO - If the screen indicate FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
EVAP canister purge valve and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good ECM/PCM (see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), then recheck. If the
ECM/PCM was substituted, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING or OUT OF
CONDITION, keep idling until result comes on.
DTC P0451: FTP SENSOR RANGE/PERFORMANCE PROBLEM
 If DTC P2422 is stored at the same time as DTC P0451, troubleshoot
DTC P2422 first, then recheck for DTC P0451, troubleshoot DTC P2422
first, then recheck for DTC P0451.

3. Start the engine, and let it idle 1 minute.
111
YES - Go to step 5.
poor connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor and the ECM/PCM. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 3 and recheck.
6. Replace the FTP sensor (see FTP Sensor Replacement ).
10. Start the engine, and let it idle 1 minute.
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor and the ECM/PCM. If
ECM/PCM ), then go to step 10 above. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If any
other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
NO - Go to step 12.
YES - Troubleshooting is complete. IF any other Temporary DTC's or DTC's were indicated in
NO - If the screen indicate FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the FTP
sensor and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
(see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, then
go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until result comes on.
DTC P0452: FTP SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (2003-2004 MODELS)

111
Are DTC P0107, P0122, and P0452 indicated at the same time?

NO - Go to step 6.
7. Remove the fuel fill cap.
9. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is about - 7.3 kPa (-2.16 in.Hg, - 55 mmHg), or 0.3 V or less indicated?

NO - Go to step 10.
10. Install the fuel fill cap.

14. Disconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector.
Is about 7.3 kPa (2.15 in.Hg, 54.7 mmHg), or 4.90 V indicated?

NO - Go to step 17.
17. Measure voltage between FTP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
111
Fig. 17: Measuring Voltage Between FTP Sensor 3P Connector Terminal No. 1 And Body
Ground
Is there about 5 V?

NO - Go to step 18.
18. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminal E5 and body ground.
111
Fig. 18: Measuring Voltage Between ECM/PCM Connector Terminal E5 And Body Ground
Is there 5 V?
YES - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E5) and the FTP sensor, then go to step
35.
NO - Go to step 41.
22. Check for continuity between FTP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
111
Fig. 19: Checking Continuity Between FTP Sensor 3P Connector Terminal No. 2 And Body
Ground
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E14) and the FTP sensor, then go to
step 34.
NO - Go to step 42.
111
25. Disconnect ECM/PCM connectors A (31P) and E(31P).

26. Disconnect the connectors from these parts:
 MAP sensor
 TP sensor
 FTP sensor
 EGR valve
 Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
 Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor
27. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminals A20, A21, and E5
individually.
Fig. 20: Checking Continuity Between Body Ground And ECM/PCM Connector Terminals
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A20, A21, or E5) and each
111
disconnected part, then go to step 34.

NO - Go to step 28.
28. Reconnect ECM/PCM connectors A (31P) and E (31P).
Is there about 5 V?

NO - Go to step 41.
31. Continue to monitor voltage at ECM/PCM connector terminal A21 while reconnecting these parts,
one at a time:
 MAP sensor
 TP sensor
 FTP sensor
 EGR valve
111
Did the voltage drop to about 0 V?
YES - Replace the part that caused the voltage to drop, then go to step 36.
NO - Go to step 41.
34. Reconnect the ECM/PCM connectors.
35. Reconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector.
Is there P0452 indicated?
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor and the ECM/PCM,
then go to step1.
NO - Go to step 40.
NO - If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the FTP
sensor and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep
idling until a result comes on.
41. Turn ignition switch OFF.
44. Start the engine, then let it idle for 10 seconds.

ECM/PCM then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO - Go to step 46. ).

111
YES - If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM was
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM (see ECM/PCM REPLACEMENT ). If any other
Temporary DTC's or DTCs were indicated in step 45, go to the indicated DTC's
troubleshooting.
(see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), then go to step 44. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
go to step 1. If the screen indicate NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on.
DTC P0452: FTP SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (2005-2007 MODELS)

Is about - 7.3 kPa (-2.16 in.Hg, -55 mmHg), or 0.3 V or less indicated?

NO - Go to step 7.

Is about 7.3 kPa (2.15 in.Hg, 54.7 mmHg), or 4.90 V indicated?

NO - Go to step 14.
14. Measure voltage between FTP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
111
Fig. 22: Measuring Voltage Between FTP Sensor 3P Connector Terminal No. 1 And Body
Ground
Is there about 5 V?

NO - Go to step 15.
111
Is there 5 V?
YES - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E5) and the FTP sensor, then go to step
22.
NO - Go to step 28.
19. Check for continuity between FTP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
111
Fig. 24: Checking Continuity Between FTP Sensor 3P Connector Terminal No. 2 And Body
Ground
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E14) and the FTP sensor, then go to
step 22.
NO - Go to step 29.
111

then go to step 1.
NO - Go to step 27.
30. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software (seeUPDATING THE ECM/PCM ), or
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ).
31. Start the engine, then let it idle without load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.

ECM/PCM ), then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO - Go to step 33.
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM; '05, '06-07 models (see ECM/PCM
REPLACEMENT ). If any other Temporary DTC's or DTC's were indicated in step 32, go to
sensor and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known good ECM/PCM
(see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to
step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on.
111
DTC P0453: FTP SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE

Is about 7.3 kPa (2.16 in.Hg, 55 mmHg), or 4.7 V or more indicated?

NO - Go to step 7.

12. Connect FTP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3 with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 25: Connecting FTP Sensor 3P Connector Terminals No. 2 And No. 3 With Jumper Wire


NO - Go to step 25.
111
15. Measure voltage between FTP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.
Fig. 26: Measuring Voltage Between FTP Sensor 3P Connector Terminals No. 1 And No. 3
Is there about 5 V?

NO - Go to step 16.
111

19. Connect FTP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 3 to body ground with a jumper wire.
Fig. 27: Connecting FTP Sensor 3P Connector Terminal No. 3 To Body Ground With Jumper
Wire
111

NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E4) and the FTP sensor, then go to step
27.
22. Connect ECM/PCM connector terminals E4 and E14 with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 29: Connecting ECM/PCM Connector Terminals E4 And E14 With Jumper Wire


NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E14) and the FTP sensor, then go to step
27.
111
then go to step 1.
NO - Go to step 32.
YES - If DTC P0453 is indicated, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the FTP
sensor and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are
NO - Go to step 37.
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM; '03-05, '06-07 (see ECM/PCM
REPLACEMENT ). If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 36, go to
sensor and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known good ECM/PCM
111
step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on.
DTC P0457: EVAP SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED/FUEL CAP LOOSE OR MISSING
1. Check the fuel fill cap (the cap must say "Tighten to click"). It should turn 1/4 turn after it's tight, then
it clicks.
Is the correct fuel fill cap installed and properly tightened?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO - Replace or tighten the cap, then go to step 19.
2. Check the fuel fill cap seal (A) and the fuel fill pipe mating surface (B). Verify that the fuel fill cap
tether cord (C) is not caught under the cap.
Fig. 30: Checking Fuel Fill Cap Seal And Fuel Fill Pipe Mating Surface
111
Is the fuel fill cap seal missing or damaged, is the fuel fill pipe damaged, or is the tether cord
caught under the cap?
YES - Replace the fuel fill cap or the fuel fill pipe, then go to step 19.
NO - Go to step 3.
Is the result OK?
terminals at the FTP sensor or the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM.
NO - Go to step 6.
7. Remove the EVAP canister vent shut valve from the EVAP canister; Non-SULEV model (see Non-
SULEV model ) or SULEV model (see SULEV model ).
8. Connect the 2P connector to the EVAP canister vent shut valve.
11. Check the EVAP canister vent shut valve (A) operation.
111
Fig. 31: Checking EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve Operation

Does the valve operate?
YES - Check the routing of the EVAP canister vent tube, then go to step 18.
NO - Go to step 12.
13. Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve; Non-SULEV model (see Non-SULEV model ) or
SULEV model (see SULEV model ).
Is the result OK?

NO - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor or the EVAP canister
vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
18. Reinstall the EVAP canister vent shut valve; Non-SULEV model (see Non-SULEV model ) or
111

Is the result OK?

NO - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor or the EVAP canister
DTC P0496: EVAP SYSTEM HIGH PURGE FLOW

Is the result OK?
NO - Go to step 4.
5. Replace the EVAP canister purge valve; Non-SULEV model (see Non-SULEV model ) or SULEV
model (see SULEV model ).
Is the result OK?

DTC P0497: EVAP SYSTEM LOW PURGE FLOW
111
 Vacuum/pressure gauge, 0-4 in.Hg, 07 JAZ-001000B

 Vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A or equivalent, commercially available
1. Check the fuel fill cap installation.
Is the fuel fill cap installed and properly tightened?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO - Properly install the fuel fill cap (the cap must say "Tighten to click"). It should turn 1/4
turn after it's tight, then go to step 23.
Is the result OK?
NO - Go to step 5.
5. Check for a loose or damaged EVAP canister purge line between the intake manifold and the EVAP
canister purge valve.
Is the line OK?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Reconnect or repair the EVAP canister purge line, then go to step 23.
6. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the EVAP canister purge valve (B) in the engine compartment,
and connect a T-fitting (C) from the vacuum gauge and the vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, to the
EVAP canister purge valve as shown below.
111
Fig. 32: Disconnecting Vacuum Hose From EVAP Canister Purge Valve In Engine
Compartment And Connecting T-Fitting
7. Select EVAP PCS ON in the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.

8. Slowly apply about 2 kPa (0.6 in.Hg, 15 mmHg) of vacuum to the hose.
111
Does it hold vacuum?
YES - Check for blockage in the EVAP canister purge line between the intake manifold and the
EVAP canister purge valve. If the vacuum hose is OK, replace the EVAP canister purge valve,
then go to step 22.
NO - Go to step 9.
9. Reconnect the vacuum hose to the EVAP canister purge valve.
10. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the EVAP canister purge line (EVAP canister side), and connect a
T-fitting (A) from the vacuum gauge and the vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, to the hose as shown
below.
111
Fig. 33: Connecting T-Fitting From Vacuum Gauge And Vacuum Pump/Gauge To Hose
11. Select EVAP PCS ON in the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
Does it hold vacuum?
111
YES - Check for a restricted in the EVAP canister purge line between the EVAP canister purge
valve and the EVAP canister, then go to step 22.
NO - Go to step 13.
13. Remove the FTP sensor with its connector connected (see FTP Sensor Replacement ).
14. Connect a T-fitting (A) from the vacuum gauge and the commercially available vacuum pump/gauge,
0-30 in.Hg, to the FTP sensor (B) as shown below.
Fig. 34: Connecting T-Fitting From Vacuum Gauge And Commercially Available Vacuum
Pump/Gauge
15. Check and record the FTP SENSOR reading in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
16. Slowly apply about 1.3 kPa (0.4 in.Hg, 10 mmHg) of vacuum to the hose.
Is the difference more than 1.1 kPa (0.31 in.Hg, 8 mmHg) before and after applying vacuum?
111

NO - Replace the FTP sensor (see FTP Sensor Replacement ), then go to step 22.
18. Reconnect the vacuum hose to the EVAP canister purge line (EVAP canister side) and reinstall the
FTP sensor.
19. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the EVAP canister purge valve (B), and connect a T-fitting (C)
from the vacuum gauge and the vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, to the hose as shown below.
Fig. 35: Disconnecting Vacuum Hose From EVAP Canister Purge Valve And Connect T-Fitting
111
Does the hose hold vacuum?
YES - Check for blockage at the EVAP canister port, then go to step 22.
NO - Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve, then go to step 22.
22. Reconnect all hoses.
Is the result OK?

DTC P0498: EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE

2. Clear the DTC with the HDS, then wait 5 seconds.
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Go to step 4.
YES - Go to step 6.
terminals at the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM.
7. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P connector.
8. Measure resistance between EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
111
Fig. 36: Measuring Resistance Between EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve 2P Connector
Terminals No. 1 And No. 2
Is there about 25-30 ohms at room temperature?
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Go to step 12.
111
YES - Repair short in the wire between the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM
(E19), then go to step 13.
NO - Go to step 21.
13. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P).
14. Reconnect the EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P connector.
111
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the EVAP canister vent shut valve and
the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
NO - Go to step 20.
step 19, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
EVAP canister vent shut valve and the ECMPCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates
NOT COMPLETED, go to step 18.
21. Reconnect connectors.
22. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software (see ECM/PCM REPLACEMENT ), or
24. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with HDS.
the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/CPM (see
SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), then go to step 23. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to
step 1.
NO - Go to step 25.
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM; '03-05 models, '06-07 models (see ECM/PCM
REPLACEMENT ). If any other Temporary DTC's or DTCs were indicated in step 24, go to
EVAP canister vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good ECM/PCM (see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), then go to step 23. If the
ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step
23.
DTC P0499: EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE
111


2. Clear the DTC with the HDS, then wait 5 seconds.
YES - Go to step 5.
terminals at the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM.
6. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P connector.
8. Measure voltage between EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P connector terminal No. 2 (No. 1)* and
body ground.
*: SULEV model
Fig. 38: Measuring Voltage Between EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve 2P Connector Terminal
No. 2 And Body Ground
111
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - 2003-2004 models: Repair open in the wire between the EVAP canister vent shut valve
and the No. 18 ACG (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to step 16.
2005-2007 models: Repair open in the wire between the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the
A/F sensor relay, then go to step 16.

10. At the valve side, Measure resistance between EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P connector terminals
No. 1 and No. 2.
Fig. 39: Measuring Resistance Between EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve 2P Connector
Is there about 25-30 ohms at room temperature?

NO - Go to step 15.
13. Connect EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P connector terminal No. 1 (No. 2)* to body ground with a
111
jumper wire.
*: SULEV model
Fig. 40: Connecting EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve 2P Connector Terminal No. 1 To Body
111

NO - Repair open in the wire between the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM
(E19), then go to step 16.
111
NO - Go to step 22.
NO - IF the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
EVAP canister vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicate NOT
COMPLETED, go to step20.
25. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU with HDS.
the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see
SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), then go to step 25. If the ECM/CPM was substituted, go to
step1.
NO - IF the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
EVAP canister vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicate NOT
COMPLETED, go to step20.
YES - If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM; '03-05, '06-07 models (see ECM/PCM REPLACEMENT ). If any
other Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 26, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
NO - If the screen indicates FAILED, check the poor connections or loose terminals at the EVAP
canister vent shut valve and ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM (see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), then go to step 25. If the ECM/PCM was
substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 25.
DTC P1454: FTP SENSOR RANGE/PERFORMANCE PROBLEM; DTC P2422: EVAP CANISTER
VENT SHUT VALVE; STUCK CLOSE MALFUNCTION
111


4. Remove the fuel fill cap, and wait 1 minute.
Is it between - 0.67 kPa and 0.67 kPa (- 0.2 and 0.2 in.Hg, -5 and 5 mmHg), or 2.4-2.6 V?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Go to step 17.

poor connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor, or the EVAP canister vent shut valve and
the ECM/ PCM. Also check for a blockage in the canister filter, vent hoses, and drain joint. If
the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 8 and recheck.
12. Remove the EVAP canister vent shut valve from the EVAP canister; Non-SULEV model (see Non-
SULEV model ) or SULEV model (see SULEV model ).
13. Connect the 2P connector to the EVAP canister vent shut valve.
16. Check the EVAP canister vent shut valve (A) operation.
111
Fig. 42: Checking EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve Operation

Does the valve operate?
YES - Check for a blockage in the EVAP canister, canister filter, vent hoses, and drain joint,
then install the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and go to step 23.
NO - Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve; Non-SULEV model (see Non-SULEV
model ) or SULEV model (see SULEV model ), then go to step 23.
17. Disconnect the air tube (A) from the FTP sensor (B).
111
Fig. 43: Disconnecting Air Tube From FTP Sensor

Is it between - 0.67 kPa and 0.67 kPa (- 0.2 and 0.2 in.Hg, -5 and 5 mmHg), or 2.4 - 2.6 V?
YES - Check for a blockage in the FTP sensor air tube, then go to step 23.
NO - Go to step 19.
20. Remove the FTP sensor (A) from the EVAP canister with its connector connected (see FTP Sensor
Replacement ).
111
Fig. 44: Removing FTP Sensor From EVAP Canister With Connector Connected

111
Is it between - 0.67 kPa and 0.67 kPa (- 0.2 and 0.2 in.Hg, -5 and 5 mmHg), or 2.4 - 2.6 V?
YES - Check for debris or clogging at the EVAP canister and the FTP sensor port, then go to
step 23.
NO - Replace the FTP sensor (see FTP Sensor Replacement ), then go to step 23.
Is DTC P01454 and/or P2422 Indicated?
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor, or the EVAP canister
NO - Go to step 28.
sensor, or the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until the result comes on.
EVAP CANISTER REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the EVAP canister cover (A).
111
Fig. 45: Removing EVAP Canister Cover (Non-SULEV Model)

111
Fig. 46: Removing EVAP Canister Cover (SULEV Model)

111
2. Remove the hoses (A), the FTP sensor 3P connector (B), and the EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P
connector (C).
Fig. 47: Removing Hoses, FTP Sensor 3P Connector And EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve 2P
Connector (Non-SULEV Model)
111
Fig. 48: Removing Hoses, FTP Sensor 3P Connector And EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve 2P
Connector (SULEV Model)
3. Remove the bolts (D).

4. Remove the EVAP canister assembly (E).
5. Remove the EVAP canister bracket (A).
111
Fig. 49: Removing EVAP Canister Bracket (Non-SULEV Model)

111
Fig. 50: Removing EVAP Canister Bracket (SULEV Model)

6. Install the canister in the reverse order of removal.
FTP SENSOR REPLACEMENT
111
1. Remove the EVAP canister (see EVAP Canister Replacement ).

2. Remove the FTP sensor (A).
Fig. 51: Removing FTP Sensor

111
3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (B).
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE REPLACEMENT

1. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P connector (A).
Fig. 52: Disconnecting EVAP Canister Purge Valve 2P Connector

2. Remove the bolts (B) and the hoses (C), then remove the EVAP canister purge valve assembly (D).
3. Remove the screws (A).
111
Fig. 53: Removing EVAP Canister Purge Valve Screws

4. Remove the EVAP canister purge valve (B) from the bracket.
5. Install the valve in the reverse order of removal.
EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE REPLACEMENT

NON-SULEV MODEL
111

2. Pry the lock tabs outward (A) then remove the EVAP canister vent shut valve (B).
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the lock tabs.
Fig. 54: Removing EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve

111
3. Install the valve in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C).
NOTE: Do not coat the O-ring with oil.
SULEV MODEL

2. Remove the cap (A).
Fig. 55: Removing Cap

3. Remove the EVAP canister vent shut valve (B).

4. Install the valve in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (B).
NOTE: Do not coat the O-ring with engine oil.
111
2003-07 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Fuel Supply System - Accord
Fuel Supply System - Accord

NON-SULEV MODEL
Fig. 1: Locating Fuel Supply System Components (Non-SULEV Model)

SULEV MODEL
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:40:25
Fig. 2: Locating Fuel Supply System Components (SULEV Model - 1 Of 2)

111
Fig. 3: Locating Fuel Supply System Components (SULEV Model - 2 Of 2)

DTC CODES
DTC INDEX
DTC Description
DTC P0461 Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit)
Range/Performance Problem (2005-2006 models)
DTC P0462 Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit Low
DTC P0463 Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit High
DTC TROUBLESHOOTING
DTC P0461: FUEL LEVEL SENSOR (FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT) RANGE/PERFORMANCE
PROBLEM (2005-2006 MODELS)
NOTE: Because it requires 162 miles (260 km) of driving without refueling to
complete this diagnosis, DTC P0461 cannot be duplicated during this
troubleshooting.
111
1. Test the fuel gauge sending unit (see NON-SULEV MODEL ).
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the fuel gauge sending unit and the
gauge assembly.
NO - Replace the fuel gauge sending unit; Non-SULEV model (see Non-SULEV model ) or
SULEV model (see SULEV model ), then go to step 2.
YES - If DTC P0461 is indicated, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the fuel
gauge sending unit and the gauge assembly, then go to step 1. If any other Temporary DTCs or
NO - Troubleshooting is complete.
DTC P0462: FUEL LEVEL SENSOR (FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT) CIRCUIT LOW
VOLTAGE (2005-2006 MODELS)
NOTE:  Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to 2005 model.

 Information marked with double asterisk (**) applies to 2006 model.

2. Clear the DTC with the HDS, and wait 5 seconds.
YES - Go to step 4.
terminals at the gauge control module and the fuel gauge sending unit.
5. Remove the trunk floor trim panel.
6. Remove the access panel from the floor.
7. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 5P connector.
111

13. Disconnect the gauge control module 30P* (36P**) connector.
14. Check for continuity between fuel tank unit 5P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
Fig. 4: Checking For Continuity Between Fuel Tank Unit 5P Connector Terminal No. 2 And
Body Ground
YES - Repair short in the wire between the gauge control module (signal line) and the fuel
111
gauge sending unit, then go to step 23.

NO - Go to step 15.
15. Reconnect the gauge control module 30P* (36P**) connector.
16. Remove the fuel tank unit; Non-SULEV model (see Non-SULEV model ) or SULEV model (see
SULEV model ).
17. Connect the fuel tank unit 5P connector.
20. Set the float (A) to the E position.
111
Fig. 5: Setting Float To E Position (Non-SULEV Model)

111
Fig. 6: Setting Float To E Position (SULEV Model)

21. Check the fuel gauge.
Does the gauge move to the empty position?

REPLACEMENT ), then go to step 22.
24. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
111
YES - If DTC P0462 is indicated, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the gauge
control module and the fuel gauge sending unit, then go to step 1. If any other Temporary DTCs
or DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
(see UPDATING THE ECM/PCM ).
DTC P0463: FUEL LEVEL SENSOR (FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT) CIRCUIT HIGH
VOLTAGE (2005-2006 MODELS)
NOTE:  Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to 2005 model.


YES - Go to step 4.
terminals at the gauge control module and the fuel gauge sending unit.
5. Remove the trunk floor trim panel.
6. Remove the access panel from the floor.
7. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 5P connector.
8. Connect fuel tank unit 5P connector terminal No. 1 to body ground with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 7: Connecting Fuel Tank Unit 5P Connector Terminal No. 1 To Body Ground With Jumper
Wire
10. Disconnect the gauge control module 30P* (36P**) connector.
11. Check for continuity between gauge control module 30P* (36P**) connector terminal No. 3 and body
ground.
111
Fig. 8: Checking Continuity Between Gauge Control Module 30P* Connector Terminal No. 3
And Body Ground
111
Fig. 9: Checking Continuity Between Gauge Control Module 36P** Connector Terminal No. 3
And Body Ground

NO - Repair open in the wire between the gauge control module (GND line) and the fuel gauge
sending unit, then go to step 24.
12. Connect fuel tank unit 5P connector terminal No. 2 to body ground with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 10: Connecting Fuel Tank Unit 5P Connector Terminal No. 2 To Body Ground With
Jumper Wire
13. Check for continuity between gauge control module 30P* (36P**) connector terminal No. 4 and body
ground.
111
Fig. 11: Checking Continuity Between Gauge Control Module 30P* Connector Terminal No. 4
And Body Ground
111
Fig. 12: Checking Continuity Between Gauge Control Module 36P** Connector Terminal No. 4
And Body Ground

NO - Repair open in the wire between the gauge control module (signal line) and the fuel gauge
sending unit, then go to step 24.
14. Remove the jumper wire from the fuel tank unit 5P connector.
SULEV model ).
16. Test the fuel gauge sending unit; Non-SULEV model (see FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT
TEST ), SULEV model (see NON-SULEV MODEL ).

17. Connect the fuel tank unit 5P connector.
18. Reconnect the gauge control module 30P* (36P**) connector.
111
21. Set the float (A) to the F position.
Fig. 13: Setting Float To F Position (Non-SULEV Model)

111
Fig. 14: Setting Float To F Position (SULEV Model)

22. Check the fuel gauge.
Does the gauge move to the full position?

111

FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING

If you suspect a problem with the fuel pump, check that the fuel pump actually runs; when it is on, you will
hear some noise if you listen to the fuel fill port with the fuel fill cap removed. The fuel pump should run for
2 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on. If the fuel pump does not make noise, check as
follows:

2. Remove the left kick panel; 2-door (see 2-DOOR - DOOR SILL AREA ) or 4-door (see 4-DOOR -
FRONT DOOR SILL AREA ), then remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A) from the
111
Fig. 15: Removing PGM-FI Main Relay 2 (FUEL PUMP)


4. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) 4P connector terminal No. 3 and body
ground.
111
Fig. 16: Measuring Voltage Between PGM-FI Main Relay 2 (Fuel Pump) 4P Connector
Terminal No. 3 And Body Ground
YES - Go to step 5.
NO -
 Replace PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN)
 If needed, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box.
5. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body
ground.
111
Fig. 17: Measuring Voltage Between PGM-FI Main Relay 2 (Fuel Pump) 4P Connector
YES - Go to step 6.
NO -
 Replace the No. 19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
 If needed, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box.

7. Connect PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) 4P connector terminal No. 4 to body ground with a
jumper wire.
111
Fig. 18: Connecting PGM-FI Main Relay 2 (Fuel Pump) 4P Connector Terminal No. 4 To Body

10. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31 P).
11. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal E17.
111
Fig. 19: Checking Continuity Between Body Ground And ECM/PCM Connector Terminal E17

NO - Repair open in the wire between PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) and the ECM/PCM
(E17).
12. Reinstall PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP).
13. Connect ECM/PCM connector terminal E7 to body ground with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 20: Connecting ECM/PCM Connector Terminal E7 To Body Ground With Jumper Wire

111

NO - Replace PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP).
17. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P), and disconnect the jumper wire.
18. Open the SCS line with the HDS.
20. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminal E17
and body ground within 2 seconds.
111
YES - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM (see UPDATING THE ECM/PCM ), then recheck. If the symptom/indication
goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM (see ECM/PCM
NO - If needed, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to step 21.
22. Remove the trunk floor.
23. Remove the access panel from the floor; Non-SULEV model (see Non-SULEV model ) or SULEV
model (see SULEV model ).
24. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure voltage between fuel pump 5P connector terminal No.
5 and body ground within 2 seconds.
111
Fig. 23: Measuring Voltage Between Fuel Pump 5P Connector Terminal No. 5 And Body
Ground

NO - Go to step 25.
26. Remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP).
111
27. Connect PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper
wire.
Fig. 24: Connecting PGM-FI Main Relay 2 (Fuel Pump) 4P Connector Terminals No. 1 And No.
2 With Jumper Wire
28. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure voltage between fuel pump 5P connector terminal No.
5 and body ground.
111
Fig. 25: Measuring Voltage Between Fuel Pump 5P Connector Terminal No. 5 And Body
Ground
YES - Replace PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP).

NO - Repair open in the wire between PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) and the fuel pump
5P connector.
30. Check for continuity between fuel pump 5P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.
111
Fig. 26: Checking Continuity Between Fuel Pump 5P Connector Terminal No. 4 And Body
Ground
YES - Replace the fuel pump.

NO - Repair open in the wire between the fuel pump 5P connector and G603.
111
FUEL PRESSURE RELIEVING

Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, relieve pressure from the system by stopping the fuel pump and
disconnecting the fuel tube/quick connect fitting in the engine compartment.
WITH THE HDS

3. From the INSPECTION MENU of the HDS, select Fuel Pump OFF, then start the engine, and let it
idle until it stalls.
NOTE:  Do not allow the engine to idle above 1,000 rpm or the ECM/PCM
will continue to operate the fuel pump.
 A DTC or a Temporary DTC may be set during this procedure.
Check for DTCs, and clear them as needed (see GENERAL

6. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio and the navigation system (if equipped), then
write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons.
8. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A).
111
Fig. 27: Removing Quick-Connect Fitting Cover

9. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean it if needed.
10. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (A).
111
Fig. 28: Placing Rag Or Shop Towel Over Quick-Connect Fitting

11. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the
retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off.
NOTE:  Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts.

 Do not use tools.
 If the connector does not move, keep the retainer tabs pressed
down, and alternately pull and push the connector until it comes
off easily.
 Do not remove the retainer from the line; once removed, the
retainer must be replaced with a new one.
111
Fig. 29: Disconnecting Quick-Connect Fitting

12. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage (see step 4 in Fuel
Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Removal ).
13. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, and do these items:
 Power window control unit reset procedure (see RESETTING THE POWER WINDOW
CONTROL UNIT ).
WITHOUT THE HDS
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, and the navigation system (if equipped) then
write down the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons.
2. Remove the left kick panel; 2-door (see 2-DOOR - DOOR SILL AREA ) or 4-door (see 4-DOOR -
111
Fig. 30: Removing PGM-FI Main Relay 2 (Fuel Pump)

3. Start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls.
NOTE: If any DTCs are stored, clear and ignore them.

7. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A).
111

8. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and clean it if needed.
9. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting (A).
111
Fig. 32: Placing Rag Or Shop Towel Over Quick-Connect Fitting

10. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the
retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector off.
NOTE:  Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other parts.

 Do not use tools.
off easily.
111
Fig. 33: Disconnecting Quick-Connect Fitting

11. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check it for dirt or damage (see step 4 in Fuel
Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Removal ).
12. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, and do these items:
 Power window control unit reset procedure (see RESETTING THE POWER WINDOW
CONTROL UNIT ).
FUEL PRESSURE TEST

 Fuel pressure gauge 07406-004000A

 Fuel pressure gauge attachment set 07AAJ-S6MA150
1. Relieve the fuel pressure (see FUEL PRESSURE RELIEVING ).

2. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting. Attach the fuel pressure gauge set and the fuel pressure gauge.
111
Fig. 34: Attaching Fuel Pressure Gauge Set And Fuel Pressure Gauge

 If the engine starts, go to step 5.
 If the engine does not start, go to step 4.
4. Check to see if the fuel pump is running: Listen to the fuel filler port with the fuel fill cap removed.
The fuel pump should run for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on.
 If the pump runs, go to step 5.
 If the pump does not run, do the fuel pump circuit troubleshooting (see FUEL PUMP
5. Read the fuel pressure gauge. The pressure should be:
2003-2004 SULEV models and 2006 (except SULEV) model
111
320-370 kPa (3.3-3.8 kgf/cm2 , 47-54 psi)
2003-2004 (except SULEV) models, 2005 model, and 2006 SULEV model
330-380 kPa (3.4-3.9 kgf/cm2 , 48-55 psi)

 If the pressure is OK, the test is complete.
 If the pressure is out of specification, replace the fuel pressure regulator; Non-SULEV model
(see FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR REPLACEMENT ) or SULEV model (see FUEL
PRESSURE REGULATOR REPLACEMENT ) and the fuel filter (see FUEL FILTER
REPLACEMENT ), then recheck the fuel pressure.
FUEL TANK DRAINING

SULEV model ).
2. Using a hand pump, a hose, and a container suitable for fuel, draw the fuel from the fuel tank.
3. Install the fuel tank unit; Non-SULEV model (see Non-SULEV model ) or SULEV model (see
SULEV model ).
FUEL LINE INSPECTION

Check the fuel system lines and hoses for damage, leaks, and deterioration. Replace any damaged parts.
Fig. 35: Checking Fuel System Lines And Hoses
111
Check all clamps, and retighten any if necessary.
Fig. 36: Inspecting Fuel Line (Non-SULEV Model)

111
Fig. 37: Inspecting Fuel Line (SULEV Model)

FUEL LINE/QUICK-CONNECT FITTING PRECAUTIONS

The fuel line/quick-connect fittings connect the fuel rail (A) to fuel feed hose (B), fuel feed hose to the fuel
feed hose (C), the fuel feed hose to the fuel line (D), and the fuel line (E) to the fuel tank unit (F) and the
fuel vapor line (G) to the EVAP canister (H) (SULEV model: and fuel fill neck tube (I), fuel tank vapor
signal tube (J), fuel tank vapor recirculation tube (K) to the fuel tank). When removing or installing the fuel
feed hose, fuel tank unit, or fuel tank, it is necessary to disconnect or connect the quick-connect fittings.
Pay attention to the following:
 The fuel feed hoses, fuel line, and quick-connect fittings are not heat-resistant; be careful not to
damage them during welding or other heat-generating procedures.
 The fuel feed hoses, fuel line, and quick-connect fittings are not acid-proof; do not touch them with a
shop towel that was used for wiping battery electrolyte. Replace them if they came into contact with
electrolyte or something similar.
 When connecting or disconnecting the fuel feed hoses, fuel line, and quick-connect fittings, be careful
not to bend or twist them excessively. Replace them if they are damaged.
111
Fig. 38: Identifying Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions (1 Of 3)

111

111

111
Fig. 41: Identifying Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions (SULEV Model)

A disconnected quick-connect fitting can be reconnected, but the retainer on the mating line cannot be
reused once it has been removed from the line. Replace the retainer when:
 replacing the fuel rail.

 replacing the fuel line.
 replacing the fuel pump.
 replacing the fuel filter.
 replacing the fuel gauge sending unit.
 replacing the fuel tank (SULEV model).
 it has been removed from the line.
 replacing EVAP purge line.
 replacing EVAP canister.
 it is damaged.
RETAINER SPECIFICATIONS
Retainer location Manufacturer Retainer color Piping diameter
Engine compartment
111
fuel feed hose A, fuel

Tokai Blue/green 0.3 in. (8 mm)
rail side
Engine compartment
fuel feed hose A, fuel
Tokai Green 0.2 in. (6.3 mm)
feed hose B side and
fuel hose B
Fuel tank unit: Fuel
feed line, fuel tank unit Tokai Orange 0.4 in. (9.5 mm)
side
feed line, fuel line side
EVAP canister: fuel
Tokai Orange 0.4 in. (9.5 mm)
vapor line
feed neck tube Tokai Grey 1.1 in. (28.55 mm)
(SULEV model)
tank vapor recirculation Tokai Natural 0.5 in. (11.8 mm)
tube (SULEV model)
feed tank vapor signal
tube, fuel tank side
(SULEV model)
tank vapor signal tube,
Tokai Blue/green 0.3 in. (8 mm)
fuel fill side (SULEV
model)
FUEL LINE/QUICK-CONNECT FITTING REMOVAL
NOTE: Before you work on the fuel lines and fittings, read the "Fuel Line/Quick-
Connect Fitting Precautions" (see FUEL LINE/QUICK-CONNECT FITTING
PRECAUTIONS ).

2. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting (A) for dirt, and clean it if needed.
111
Fig. 42: Checking Fuel Quick-Connect Fitting For Dirt (Non-SULEV Model - 1 Of 2)
111
Fig. 43: Checking Fuel Quick-Connect Fitting For Dirt (Non-SULEV Model - 2 Of 2)
111
Fig. 44: Checking Fuel Quick-Connect Fitting For Dirt (SULEV Model)
3. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect fitting. Hold the connector (A) with one hand, and
squeeze the retainer tabs (B) with the other hand to release them from the locking tabs (C). Pull the
connector off.
NOTE:  Be careful not to damage the line (D) or other parts. Do not use
tools.
off easily.
111
Fig. 45: Holding Connector And Squeezing Retainer Tabs To Release From Locking Tabs
4. Check the contact area (A) of the line (B) for dirt or damage.
 If it is dirty, clean it.
 If it is rusty or damaged, replace the fuel pump, fuel filter, or fuel feed line.
111
Fig. 46: Checking Contact Area Of Line For Dirt Or Damage

5. To prevent damage and keep foreign matter out, cover the disconnected connector and line ends with
plastic bags (A).
NOTE: The retainer cannot be reused once it has been removed from the line.
Replace the retainer when:

 replacing the fuel feed line.
 replacing the fuel gauge sending unit.
 it has been removed from the line.
 it is damaged.
111
Fig. 47: Covering Disconnected Connector And Line Ends With Plastic Bags
FUEL LINE/QUICK-CONNECT FITTING INSTALLATION
NOTE: Before you work on the fuel line and fittings, read the "Fuel Line/Quick-
Connect Fitting Precautions" (see FUEL LINE/QUICK-CONNECT FITTING
PRECAUTIONS ).
1. Check the contact area (A) of the line (B) for dirt or damage, and clean it if needed.
111
Fig. 48: Checking Contact Area Of Line For Dirt Or Damage

2. Insert a new retainer (A) into the connector (B) if the retainer is damaged, or after:
 replacing the fuel feed line.
 replacing the fuel gauge sending unit
 removing the retainer from the line.
111
Fig. 49: Inserting Retainer Into Connector

3. Before connecting a new fuel tube/quick-connect fitting assembly (A), remove the old retainer from
the mating line.
111
Fig. 50: Connecting Fuel Tube/Quick-Connect Fitting Assembly

111
Fig. 51: Connecting Fuel Tube/Quick-Connect Fitting Assembly (Non-SULEV Model)

111
Fig. 52: Connecting Fuel Tube/Quick-Connect Fitting Assembly (SULEV Model)

4. Align the quick-connect fittings with the line (A), and align the retainer locking tabs (B) with the
connector tabs (C), then press the quick-connect fittings onto the line until both retainer pawls lock
with a clicking sound.
NOTE: If it is hard to connect, put a small amount of new engine oil on the line
111
end.
Fig. 53: Connection With New Retainer

111
Fig. 54: Reconnection To Existing Retainer

111
Fig. 55: Connection To New Fuel Line

5. When you reconnect the connector with the old retainer, make sure the connection is secure and the
tabs (A) are firmly locked into place; check visually and also by pulling the connector (B). When you
replace the fuel line with a new one, make sure you remove the ring pull (C) upwards after you
confirm the connection is secure.
NOTE: Before you remove the ring pull, make sure the fuel line connection is
secure. If the connection is not secure, the ring pull could break when
you try to remove it.
111
Fig. 56: Reconnecting To Existing Retainer

111
Fig. 57: Connecting To New Fuel Line

6. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, and turn the ignition switch ON (II). The fuel pump will
run for about 2 seconds, and fuel pressure will rise. Repeat this two or three times, and check that
there is no leakage in the fuel supply system.
FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR REPLACEMENT

NON-SULEV MODEL
1. Remove the fuel tank unit (see Non-SULEV model ).

111
2. Remove the clip (A).
Fig. 58: Removing Clip

3. Remove the fuel pressure regulator (B).

4. Install the regulator in the reverse order of removal with new O-rings (C).
Make sure the regulator is installed with the drain hole (D) facing down.
SULEV MODEL
1. Remove the fuel tank unit (see SULEV model ).

2. Remove the holder (A).
111
Fig. 59: Removing Holder

3. Remove the fuel pressure regulator (B).

4. Install the regulator in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C).
NOTE: Coat the O-ring with clean engine oil.
111
FUEL FILTER REPLACEMENT

The fuel filter should be replaced whenever the fuel pressure drops below the specified value (see FUEL
PRESSURE RELIEVING ), after making sure that the fuel pump and the fuel pressure regulator are OK.
SULEV model ).
2. Remove the fuel filter set (A).
111
Fig. 60: Removing Fuel Filter Set (Non-SULEV Model)

111
Fig. 61: Removing Fuel Filter Set (SULEV Model)

3. Check these items before installing the fuel tank unit:

 When connecting the wire harness, make sure the connection is secure and the connectors (B)
are firmly locked into place.
 When installing the fuel gauge sending unit (C), make sure the connection is secure and the
connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful not to bend or twist it excessively.
4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new base gasket (D) and new O-rings (E).
When installing the fuel tank unit, align the marks on the unit and the fuel tank (see FUEL TANK
REPLACEMENT ).
111
NOTE: For non-SULEV models, replace the fuel tank unit locknut and base
gasket as a set.
FUEL PUMP/FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT REPLACEMENT

Fuel sender wrench 07AAA-S0XA100
NON-SULEV MODEL

4. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor.
111
Fig. 62: Removing Access Panel From Floor

111
5. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector (B).

6. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (C) from the fuel tank unit.
7. Using the special tool, loosen the fuel tank unit locknut (A).
Fig. 63: Loosening Fuel Tank Unit Locknut

8. Remove the locknut (A) and the fuel tank unit.
111
Fig. 64: Removing Locknut And Fuel Tank Unit

9. Remove the fuel filter (B), the fuel gauge sending unit (C), the case (D), the wire harness (E), and the
fuel pressure regulator (F).
111
10. Check these items before installing the fuel tank unit:
 Make sure the connection is secure and the suction filter (G) is firmly connected to the fuel
pump (H).
 When connecting the wire harness, make sure the connection is secure and the connectors (I)
 When installing the fuel gauge sending unit, make sure the connection is secure and the
11. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new base gasket (J), new locknut, and new O-
rings (K). When installing the fuel tank unit, align the marks (L) on the unit (M) and the fuel tank (N).
Fuel sender wrench 07AAA-S0XA100
SULEV MODEL

111
111

5. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector (B).

6. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (C) from the fuel tank unit.
7. Remove the fuel tank unit (A).
Fig. 66: Removing Fuel Tank Unit

111
8. Remove the strainer case (A), the fuel gauge sending unit (B), and the wire harness (C).
Fig. 67: Removing Strainer Case, Fuel Gauge Sending Unit And Wire Harness
9. Install the part in the reverse order of removal with a new base gasket (D) and new O-ring (E), then
check these items:
 Make sure the connection is secure and the suction filter (F) is firmly connected to the fuel
111
pump (G).
 When connecting the wire harness, make sure the connection is secure and the connectors (H)
 When installing the fuel gauge sending unit, make sure the connection is secure and the
FUEL TANK REPLACEMENT

REMOVAL

2. Drain the fuel tank (see FUEL TANK DRAINING ).
3. Loosen the rear wheel nuts slightly, then raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported.
Remove the rear wheels.
4. Release the parking brake.
5. SULEV model:
Remove the fuel tank covers (A).
Fig. 68: Removing Fuel Tank Covers (SULEV Model)

111
6. Remove the exhaust muffler (see EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER REPLACEMENT ).
7. Non-SULEV model:
Disconnect the fuel fill neck tube (A) and breather hose (B).
Fig. 69: Disconnecting Fuel Fill Neck Tube And Breather Hose (Non-SULEV Model)
8. SULEV model:
Disconnect the fuel fill neck tube (A), fuel tank vapor recirculation tube (B), and fuel tank vapor
signal tube (C).
111
Fig. 70: Disconnecting Fuel Fill Neck Tube, Fuel Tank Vapor Recirculation Tube And Fuel
Tank Vapor Signal Tube (SULEV Model)
9. Disconnect the vapor line (A) from the EVAP canister (B). Then disconnect the fuel line (C).
111
Fig. 71: Disconnecting Vapor Line From EVAP Canister

10. Disconnect the wheel sensor 2P connector (A).
111
Fig. 72: Disconnecting Wheel Sensor 2P Connector

11. If the vehicle has rear drum brakes, go to step 14. If it has rear disc brakes, remove the clip (A),
parking brake cable (B), two caliper bolts (C), and caliper body (D).
111
Fig. 73: Removing Clip, Parking Brake Cable, Two Caliper Bolts And Caliper Body
12. Remove the brake hose bracket (A).
111
Fig. 74: Removing Brake Hose Bracket

13. Hook the caliper body (A) on the damper spring (B), then go to step 17.
111
Fig. 75: Hooking Caliper Body On Damper Spring

14. Disconnect the brake line (A) and the brake hose clip (B).
111
Fig. 76: Disconnecting Brake Line And Brake Hose Clip

15. Remove the bolts (A) from the brake plate (B).
111
Fig. 77: Removing Bolts From Brake Plate

16. Remove the parking brake cable (A).
111
Fig. 78: Removing Parking Brake Cable

17. Remove the flange bolt (A).
111
Fig. 79: Removing Flange Bolt

18. Remove the parking brake cable bracket (A).
111
Fig. 80: Removing Parking Brake Cable Bracket

19. Remove the heat shield (A). Place a jack or support under the suspension subframe. Remove the
mounting bolts (B). Remove the rear suspension subframe.
111
Fig. 81: Removing Heat Shield

20. Remove the bolts (A) and the fuel tank straps (B).
111
Fig. 82: Removing Bolts And Fuel Tank Straps

21. Lift the fuel tank out of the subframe.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the tank straps (A), and tighten the bolts (B).
111
Fig. 83: Installing Tank Straps

2. Place a jack or support under the rear suspension subframe. Install the rear suspension subframe,
aligning the pins (A) with the holes in the rear suspension subframe.
111
Fig. 84: Aligning Pins With Holes In Rear Suspension Subframe

3. Install the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal.

4. If equipped with drum brakes, bleed the brake system after installing the brake hose (see BRAKE
HOSE REPLACEMENT ). If not, go to step 5.
5. After installation, check the wheel alignment (see WHEEL ALIGNMENT ).
FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT TEST

2003-2004 MODELS
NOTE: For the fuel gauge system circuit diagram, refer to the Gauges Circuit
Diagram (see CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ).
1. Do multiplex integrated control system troubleshooting test mode A (see TROUBLESHOOTING -

B-CAN SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS TEST MODE A ).
 If no problem is found, go to step 2.
 If DTC B1175 is indicated, go to the DTC B1175 troubleshooting (see DTC B1175: FUEL
GAUGE SENDING UNIT SIGNALS INPUT ERROR ).
111
2. Check the No. 21 METER (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
3. Do the gauge drive circuit check (see THE GAUGE DRIVE CIRCUIT CHECK ).
 If the fuel gauge needle sweeps from the minimum to maximum position and then returns to
minimum, the gauge is OK. Go to step 4.
 If the fuel gauge needle does not sweep correctly, replace the gauge assembly and retest.


111
7. Disconnect the fuel tank unit connector (B).

8. Non-SULEV model:
Remove the fuel tank unit from the fuel tank (see FUEL PUMP/FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT
REPLACEMENT ).
9. SULEV model:
Remove the fuel tank unit from the fuel tank (see SULEV model ).
10. Measure resistance between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the fuel tank unit 5P connector with the
float at E (EMPTY), 1/2 (HALF FULL), and F (FULL) positions.
If you do not get the following readings, replace the fuel gauge sending unit; Non-SULEV model (see
Non-SULEV model ) or SULEV model (see SULEV model ).
FUEL TANK UNIT 5P CONNECTOR TERMINALS RESISTANCE (NON-SULEV MODEL)

F 7.5 in. (191.4 1/2 4.4 in. (113.1 LOW 2.0 in. (52.4 E 1.0 in. (25.6
Float Position
mm) mm) mm) mm)
Resistance
19 to 21 205.5 to 215.5 487.9 to 617.1 770 to 790
(ohms)
FUEL TANK UNIT 5P CONNECTOR TERMINALS RESISTANCE (SULEV MODEL)

F 1.9 in. (49 1/2 5.2 in. (132.4 LOW 7.6 in. (194.1 E 8.6 in. (219.7
Float Position
mm) mm) mm) mm)
Resistance
19 to 21 215.4 to 225.4 491.7 to 634.2 770 to 790
(ohms)
NOTE: Remove the No. 15 BACK UP (40 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box
for at least 10 seconds after completing troubleshooting, otherwise it may
take up to 20 minutes for the fuel gauge to indicate the correct fuel level.
Non-SULEV model
111
Fig. 86: Identifying Fuel Float Position (Non-SULEV Model)

SULEV model
111
Fig. 87: Identifying Fuel Float Position (SULEV Model)

2005-2006 MODELS
111
NOTE: For the fuel gauge system circuit diagram, refer to the Gauges Circuit
Diagram; 2003-2005 models (see '03-05 MODELS ) or 2006 model (see '06
MODEL ).
1. Check the No. 21 METER (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box before testing.
2. Do the B-CAN system diagnosis Test Mode A troubleshooting (see TROUBLESHOOTING - B-
 If no problem is found, go to step 3.
 If DTC B1175 or B1176 is indicated, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.

111

6. Disconnect the fuel tank unit connector (B).

7. Measure voltage between fuel tank unit 5P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with the ignition
switch ON (II). There should be battery voltage.
 If the voltage is OK, go to step 8.
 If the voltage is not as specified, check for:
- a short in the YEL/BLK wire to ground.

- an open in the YEL/BLK or BLK/WHT wire.
111
Fig. 89: Measuring Voltage Between Fuel Tank Unit 5P Connector Terminals No. 1
And No. 2

9. Non-SULEV model:
Remove the fuel tank unit from the fuel tank (see FUEL PUMP/FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT
REPLACEMENT ).
10. SULEV model:
Remove the fuel tank unit from the fuel tank (see SULEV model ).
111
11. Measure resistance between fuel tank unit 5P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with the float at E
(EMPTY), LOW (LOW FUEL INDICATOR), 1/2 (HALF FULL), and F (FULL) positions.
If you do not get the following readings, replace the fuel gauge sending unit; Non-SULEV model (see
Non-SULEV model ) or SULEV model (see SULEV model ).
FUEL TANK UNIT 5P CONNECTOR TERMINALS RESISTANCE (NON-SULEV MODEL)

F 7.5 in. (191.4 1/2 4.4 in. (113.1 LOW 2.0 in. (52.4 E 1.0 in. (25.6
Float Position
mm) mm) mm) mm)
Resistance
19 to 21 205.5 to 215.5 487.9 to 617.1 770 to 790
(ohms)
FUEL TANK UNIT 5P CONNECTOR TERMINALS RESISTANCE (SULEV MODEL)

F 1.9 in. (49 1/2 5.2 in. (132.4 LOW 7.6 in. (194.1 E 8.6 in. (219.7
Float Position
mm) mm) mm) mm)
Resistance
19 to 21 215.4 to 225.4 491.7 to 634.2 770 to 790
(ohms)
111
Fig. 90: Measuring Resistance Between Fuel Tank Unit 5P Connector Terminals No. 1 And No.
2 With Float At E (EMPTY), LOW (LOW FUEL INDICATOR), 1/2 (HALF FULL), And F
(FULL) Positions (Non-SULEV Model)
111
Fig. 91: Measuring Resistance Between Fuel Tank Unit 5P Connector Terminals No. 1 And No.
2 With Float At E (EMPTY), LOW (LOW FUEL INDICATOR), 1/2 (HALF FULL), And F
(FULL) Positions (SULEV Model)
111
12. Reconnect the fuel tank unit 5P connector.

13. Remove the No. 15 BACK UP (40 A) fuse from the under-hood fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds,
then reinstall it.
15. Check that the pointer of the fuel gauge indicates "F" with the float at F.
 If the pointer of the fuel gauge does not indicate "F" replace the gauge assembly.
 If the gauge is OK, the test is complete.
NOTE:  The pointer of the fuel gauge returns to the bottom of the gauge
dial when the ignition switch is OFF, regardless of the fuel level.
 Remove the No. 15 BACK UP (40 A) fuse from the under-hood
fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds after completing
troubleshooting, otherwise it may take up to 20 minutes for the
fuel gauge to indicate the correct fuel level.
LOW FUEL INDICATOR TEST

1. Do the gauge drive circuit check (see THE GAUGE DRIVE CIRCUIT CHECK ).
 If the low fuel indicator flashes, go to step 2.
 If the low fuel indicator does not flash, replace the gauge control module assembly.
2. Do the B-CAN system diagnosis Test Mode A troubleshooting (see TROUBLESHOOTING - B-

 If any DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
 If no DTCs are indicated, go to step 3.
3. Do the fuel gauge sending unit test; 2003-2004 models (see 2003-2004 models ) or 2005-2006 models
(see 2005-2006 models ).
111
2003-07 ENGINE Ignition System - Accord
2003-07 ENGINE
Ignition System - Accord
Fig. 1: Identifying Ignition System Component Location

111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:42:57
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Fig. 2: Ignition System Circuit Diagram

IGNITION TIMING INSPECTION
111
TO USE THE HDS (HONDA DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM) ), and check for DTCs. If a DTC is
present, diagnose and repair the cause before inspecting the ignition timing.
2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Neutral) until the radiator fan comes
on, then let it idle.
3. Check the idle speed (see IDLE SPEED INSPECTION ).
4. Select "SCS" mode using the HDS.
5. Free the service loop from the wire harness, then connect the timing light to the service loop.
Fig. 3: Connecting Timing Light To Service Loop

6. Aim the light toward the pointer (A) on the cam chain case. Check the ignition timing under a no load
condition (headlights, blower fan, rear window defogger, and air conditioner are turned off).
111
Fig. 4: Aiming Pointer On Cam Chain Case

7. If the ignition timing differs from the specification, check the cam timing. If the cam timing is OK,
update the engine control module (ECM)/ powertrain control module (PCM) if it does not have the
latest software (see UPDATING THE ECM/PCM ), or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see
SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), then recheck. If the system works properly, and the ECM/PCM
was substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM (see ECM/PCM REPLACEMENT ).
8. Disconnect the HDS and the timing light.
9. Secure the service loop to the wire harness with wire ties.
IGNITION COIL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

1. Remove the ignition coil cover (A), disconnect the ignition coil connectors (B), then remove the
ignition coils (C).
111
Fig. 5: Removing Ignition Coil Cover

2. Install the ignition coils in the reverse order of removal.
IGNITION COIL RELAY CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING

1. Check the No. 2 (15A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO - Replace the fuse.
2. Remove the ignition coil relay from the under-dash fuse/relay box, and test it (see POWER RELAY
TEST ).
111
Is the relay OK?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Replace the ignition coil relay.
3. Measure the voltage between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 1 and body ground, then
Fig. 6: Measuring The Voltage Between Ignition Coil Relay 4P Socket Terminal No. 1 And Body
Ground
YES - Go to step 4.
111
NO - Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box.

4. Check for continuity between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 2 and the No. 1 ignition coil
Fig. 7: Checking Continuity Between Ignition Coil Relay 4P Socket Terminal And Ignition Coil
3P Connector Terminal
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Repair an open in the wire between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 2 and
ignition coil 3P connector terminal No. 3.
5. Check for continuity between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and body ground.
111
Fig. 8: Checking Continuity Between Ignition Coil Relay 4P Socket Terminal No. 3 And Body
Ground
YES - Repair a short in the wire between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and the
ECM/PCM (E7).
NO - Go to step 6.
6. Check for continuity between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and engine control module
(ECM)/powertrain control module (PCM) connector terminal E7.
111
Fig. 9: Checking Continuity Between Ignition Coil Relay 4P Socket Terminal And Engine
Control Module Connector Terminal
YES - The system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections at the ignition coil
relay and the ECM/PCM (E7).
NO - Repair an open in the wire between ignition coil relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and the
ECM/PCM (E7).
SPARK PLUG INSPECTION

1. Inspect the electrodes and ceramic insulator.
 Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by:
-Advanced ignition timing

-Loose spark plug
-Plug heat range too hot
-Insufficient cooling
111
 Fouled plug may be caused by:

-Retarded ignition timing
-Oil in combustion chamber
-Incorrect spark plug gap
-Plug heat range too cold
-Excessive idling/low speed running
-Clogged air cleaner element
-Deteriorated ignition coils
Fig. 10: Inspecting The Electrodes And Ceramic Insulator

2. If the spark plug electrode is dirty or contaminated, clean the electrode with a plug cleaner.
111
NOTE:  Do not use a wire brush or scrape the iridium electrode since this
will damage the electrode.
 When using a sand blaster spark plug cleaner, do not clean for
more than 20 seconds to avoid damaging the electrode.
3. Do not adjust the gap (A) or iridium tip plugs; replace the spark plug if the gap is out of specification.
Fig. 11: Identifying Gap Of Iridium Tip Plugs

4. Replace the plug at the specified interval, if the center electrode is rounded (A). Use only the spark
plugs listed.
111
Fig. 12: Replacing Plug

5. Apply a small amount of anti seize compound to the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the
cylinder head, finger-tight. Torque them to 18 N•m (1.8 kgf •m, 13 ibf•ft
111
2003-07 ENGINE Engine Lubrication - Accord
2003-07 ENGINE
Engine Lubrication - Accord
SPECIAL TOOLS

111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:43:39
Fig. 2: Identifying Engine Lubrication Component Location


1. Check the loose of the engine
oil fill cap, oil drain bolt, and
111
oil filter.
2. Check for oil leaks.
3. Check for worn valve guide(s)
(see VALVE INSPECTION )
or worn valve stem seal(s) (see
VALVE INSPECTION ).
Excessive engine oil 4. Check for damaged or worn
consumption piston ring(s) (see PISTON
RING REPLACEMENT ).
5. Check for damaged or worn
engine internal parts (cylinder
wall, pistons, etc.) (see
BLOCK AND PISTON
INSPECTION ).
self-diagnostic function (see
Low oil pressure indicator does SELF-DIAGNOSTIC An open in the wire between
not come on with the ignition FUNCTION ). the gauge control module and
switch ON (II) 2. Test the oil pressure switch (see the oil pressure switch
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
TEST ).
1. Check the engine oil level.
self-diagnostic function (see
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
FUNCTION ).
3. Test the oil pressure switch (see
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
TEST ). A wire shorted to ground
Low oil pressure indicator stays between the gauge control
4. Check the engine oil pressure
on module and the oil pressure
(see OIL PRESSURE TEST ).
switch
5. Check the oil filter for
clogging.
6. Check the oil screen for
clogging.
7. Check the relief valve.
8. Test the oil pump (see OIL
PUMP INSPECTION ).
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH TEST

1. Remove the YEL/RED wire (A) from the engine oil pressure switch (B).
111
Fig. 3: Removing Yel/Red Wire From Engine Oil Pressure Switch

2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal (C) and the engine (ground). There should be
continuity with the engine stopped. There should be no continuity with the engine running.
3. If the switch fails to operate, check the engine oil level. If the engine oil level is OK, check the engine
oil pressure. If the oil pressure is OK, replace the oil pressure switch (see OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH TEST ).
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH REPLACEMENT

1. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector, then remove the oil pressure switch.
111
Fig. 4: Disconnecting Oil Pressure Switch Connector

2. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the switch and switch mounting hole.
3. Apply liquid gasket to the new oil pressure switch threads, then install the oil pressure switch.
NOTE: Using too much liquid gasket may cause liquid gasket to enter the oil
passage or the end of the new oil pressure switch.
OIL PRESSURE TEST

If the oil pressure warning light stays on with the engine running, check the engine oil level. If the oil level
is correct:
1. Remove the engine oil pressure switch, and install an oil pressure gauge (A).
111
Fig. 5: Installing Oil Pressure Gauge

2. Start the engine. Shut it off immediately if the gauge registers no oil pressure. Repair the problem
before continuing.
3. Allow the engine to reach operating temperature (fan comes on at least twice). The pressure should
be:
Engine Oil Temperature: 176 °F (80 °C)
Engine Oil Pressure:
At Idle: 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm2 , 10 psi) min.
At 3,000 rpm: 300 kPa (3.1 kgf/cm2 , 44 psi) min.
4. If the oil pressure is NOT within specifications, inspect these items:
111
 Check the oil screen for clogging.

 Inspect the oil pump (see OIL PUMP INSPECTION ).
ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT

1. Warm up the engine.
2. Remove the drain bolt (A), and drain the engine oil.
Fig. 6: Removing Drain Bolt

3. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer (B).

4. Refill with the recommended oil (see SERVICE INFORMATION ).
Capacity
At Oil Change:
4.0 L (4.2 US qt)
111
At Oil Change Including Filter:
4.2 L (4.4 US qt)
After Engine Overhaul:
5.3 L (5.6 US qt)
5. Run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check for oil leakage.
6. '06-07 models:Reset the engine oil life indicator (see RESETTING THE MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION DISPLAY ).
ENGINE OIL FILTER REPLACEMENT

Oil filter wrench 07HAA-PJ70100
1. Remove the oil filter with the special tool.

2. Inspect the threads (A) and rubber seal (B) on the new filter. Clean the seat on the engine block, then
apply a light coat of new engine oil to the filter rubber seal. Use only filters with a built-in bypass
system.
111
Fig. 7: Inspecting Threads And Rubber Seal On Filter

3. Install the oil filter by hand.

4. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter clockwise with the special tool.
Tighten: 3/4 Turn Clockwise
Tightening torque:12 N.m (1.2 kgf.m, 8.7 lbf.ft)
Fig. 8: Tightening Oil Filter

5. If four numbers or triangle marks (1 to 4 or triangle symbols) are printed around the outside of the
filter, use the following procedure to tighten the filter.
 Spin the filter on until its seal lightly seats against the block, and note which number or mark is
at the bottom.
 Tighten the filter by turning it clockwise three numbers or marks from the one you noted. For
example, if number 2 is at the bottom when the seal is seated, tighten the filter until the number
1 comes around the bottom.
111
Fig. 9: Tightening Filter

6. After installation, fill the engine with oil up to the specified level, run the engine for more than 3
minutes, then check for oil leakage.
7. '06 -07 models: Reset the engine oil life indicator (see RESETTING THE MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION DISPLAY ).
OIL FILTER FEED PIPE REPLACEMENT
111
1. Remove the oil filter (see ENGINE OIL FILTER REPLACEMENT ).

2. Remove the oil filter feed pipe.
Fig. 10: Removing Oil Filter Feed Pipe

3. Install the two 20 x 1.5 mm nuts (A) onto the new oil filter feed pipe. Hold one nut with a wrench,
then tighten the other nut.
111
Fig. 11: Installing Nuts Onto Oil Filter Feed Pipe

4. Tighten the oil filter feed pipe to the block to 49 N.m (5.0 kgf.m, 36 lbf.ft), then remove the nuts from
the oil filter feed pipe.
OIL PUMP OVERHAUL

EXPLODED VIEW
111
Fig. 12: Exploded View Of Oil Pump

OIL PUMP REMOVAL
1. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its top dead center (TDC) mark lines up with the pointer (see step 1 on
INSTALLATION ).
2. Remove the oil pan (see OIL PAN REMOVAL ).
3. Remove and discard the oil pump chain tensioner.
111
Fig. 13: Discarding Oil Pump Chain Tensioner

4. To hold the rear balancer shaft, insert a 6 mm pin driver (A) into the maintenance hole in the lower
balancer shaft holder and through the rear balancer shaft.
111
Fig. 14: Inserting Pin Driver Into Maintenance Hole In Lower Balancer Shaft Holder
5. Loosen the oil pump sprocket mounting bolt.

6. Remove the oil pump sprocket (A), then remove the oil pump (B).
111
Fig. 15: Removing Oil Pump Sprocket

OIL PUMP INSPECTION
1. Remove the pump housing.
111
Fig. 16: Removing Pump Housing

2. Check the inner-to-outer rotor radial clearance between the inner rotor (A) and outer rotor (B). If the
inner-to-outer rotor radial clearance exceeds the service limit, replace the oil pump.
Inner Rotor-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance
Standard (New): 0.06-0.16 mm (0.002-0.006 in.)
111
Fig. 17: Checking Inner-To-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance Between Inner Rotor And Outer
Rotor
3. Check the housing-to-rotor axial clearance between the rotor (A) and pump housing (B). If the
housing-to-rotor axial clearance exceeds the service limit, replace the oil pump.
Housing-to-Rotor Axial Clearance
Standard (New): 0.035---0.070 mm
(0.0014---0.0028 in.)
111
Fig. 18: Checking Housing-To-Rotor Axial Clearance Between Rotor And Pump Housing
4. Check the housing-to-outer rotor radial clearance between the outer rotor (A) and pump housing (B).
If the housing-to-outer rotor radial clearance exceeds the service limit, replace the oil pump.
Housing-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance
111
Fig. 19: Checking Housing-To-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance Between Outer Rotor And Pump
Housing
5. Inspect both rotors and the pump housing for scoring or other damage. Replace parts if necessary.
BALANCER SHAFT INSPECTION
1. Seat the balancer shaft by pushing it away from the oil pump sprocket end of the oil pump.
2. Zero the dial indicator against the end of the balancer shaft, then push the balancer shaft back and
forth and read the end play.
Balancer Shaft End Play
Front Balancer Shaft:
(0.0025---0.0043 in.)
111
Rear Balancer Shaft:
(0.0025---0.0043 in.)
Fig. 20: Pushing Balancer Shaft Back And Forth

3. Remove the baffle plate (A) and upper balancer shaft holder (with bearings) (B), then remove the
front balancer shaft (C) and rear balancer shaft (D).
111
Fig. 21: Removing Baffle Plate (A) And Upper Balancer Shaft Holder
4. Measure the inner diameter of the No. 1 bearing for the front balancer shaft hole and the rear balancer
shaft hole.
Bearing Inner Diameter
111
Front:
Standard (New): 20.000---20.020 mm
(0.7874---0.7882 in.)
Rear:
Standard (New): 24.000---24.020 mm
(0.9449---0.9457 in.)
Front:
111
Fig. 22: Measuring Inner Diameter Of Bearing For Front Balancer Shaft Hole
Rear:
111
Fig. 23: Measuring Inner Diameter Of Bearing For Rear Balancer Shaft Hole
5. Measure the diameters of the No. 1 journals on the front balancer shaft and rear balancer shaft.
Journal Diameter
Front:
111
Standard (New): 19.938---19.950 mm
(0.7850---0.7854 in.)
Rear:
Standard (New): 23.938---23.950 mm
(0.9424---0.9429 in.)
Front:
Fig. 24: Measuring Diameters Of No. 1 Journals On Front Balancer Shaft

Rear:
111
Fig. 25: Measuring Diameters Of No. 1 Journals On Rear Balancer Shaft

6. Clean both balancer shaft No. 2 journals and bearing halves with a clean shop towel.
7. Place one strip of plastigage across each No. 2 journal.
8. Reinstall the bearings and upper balancer shaft holder, then torque the bolts.
NOTE: Do not rotate the balancer shafts during inspection.
9. Remove the upper balancer shaft holder and bearings again, and measure the widest part with the
plastigage. If the balancer shaft No. 2 journal oil clearance is out-of-tolerance, install new bearings,
and recheck. If it is still out-of-tolerance, replace the balancer shafts.
No. 2 Journal Oil Clearance
(0.0024---0.0047 in.)
111
Fig. 26: Measuring Widest Part With Plastigage

10. Align the punch mark on the rear balancer shaft in the center of the two punch marks on the front
balancer shaft, then install the balancer shafts on the lower balancer shaft holder.
111
Fig. 27: Aligning Punch Mark On Rear Balancer Shaft

11. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the 8 mm bolts (A).
111
Fig. 28: Applying Engine Oil To Threads Of Bolts

12. Install the upper balancer shaft holder (B) and baffle plate (C).
13. Install the pump housing.
111
Fig. 29: Installing Pump Housing

OIL PUMP INSTALLATION
1. Make sure the No. 1 piston is at TDC (see step 1 on INSTALLATION ).

2. Align the dowel pin (A) on the rear balancer shaft with the mark (B) on the oil pump.
111
Fig. 30: Aligning Dowel Pin On Rear Balancer Shaft

3. To hold the rear balancer shaft, insert a 6 mm pin driver (A) into the maintenance hole in the lower
balancer shaft holder and through the rear balancer shaft.
111
Fig. 31: Inserting Pin Driver Into Maintenance Hole

4. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the oil pump sprocket mounting bolt (A).
111
Fig. 32: Applying Engine Oil To Threads Of Oil Pump Sprocket Mounting Bolt
5. Loosely install the oil pump (B), then install the oil pump sprocket (C).
6. Remove the pin driver (D).
7. Tighten the oil pump mounting bolts.
8. Squeeze the new oil pump chain tensioner (A), then install the set clip (B) on it as shown below.
NOTE: The set clip is supplied with the oil pump chain tensioner.
111
Fig. 33: Installing Set Clip

9. Install the new oil pump chain tensioner.
111
Fig. 34: Installing Oil Pump Chain Tensioner

10. Remove the set clip from the oil pump chain tensioner.
111
Fig. 35: Removing Set Clip From Oil Pump Chain Tensioner
11. Install the oil pan (see OIL PAN INSTALLATION ).
111
2003-07 ENGINE Cylinder Head - Accord
2003-07 ENGINE
Cylinder Head - Accord
SPECIAL TOOLS

111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:44:27
Fig. 2: Identifying Cylinder Head Component (1 Of 3)

111

111

ENGINE COMPRESSION INSPECTION

After this inspection, you must reset the engine control module (ECM)/the powertrain control module
(PCM) will continue to stop the injectors from functioning. Select ECM/PCM reset using the Honda
Diagnostic System (HDS) (see HDS CLEAR COMMAND ).
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (cooling fan comes on).
3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on HOW TO USE THE HDS
111
(HONDA DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM) ).

4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), select PGM-FI, INSPECTION, then ALL INJECTORS OFF on the
HDS.
5. Remove the four ignition coils (see IGNITION COIL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).
6. Remove the four spark plugs.
7. Attach the compression gauge to the spark plug hole.
Fig. 5: Attaching Compression Gauge To Spark Plug Hole

8. Open the throttle fully, then crank the engine with the starter motor and measure the compression.
Compression Pressure:
Above 930 kPa (9.5 kgf/cm2 ,135 psi)
9. Measure the compression on the remaining cylinders.
Maximum Variation:
Within 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2 ,28 psi)
111
10. If the compression is not within specifications, check the following items, then remeasure the
compression.
 Damaged or worn valves and seats
 Damaged cylinder head gasket
 Damaged or worn piston rings
 Damaged or worn piston and cylinder bore
11. Select ECM/PCM reset (see ECM/PCM RESET ) to cancel the ALL INJECTORS OFF function on
the HDS.
VTEC ROCKER ARM TEST

 Air pressure regulator 07AAJ-PNAA100

 VTEC air adapter 07ZAJ-PNAA100
 VTEC air stopper 07ZAJ-PNAA200
 Air joint adapter 07ZAJ-PNAA300
1. Start the engine and let it run for 5 minutes, then turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove the cylinder head cover (see CYLINDER HEAD COVER REMOVAL ).
3. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC) (see step 1 ).
4. Verify that the intake primary rocker arm (A) moves independently of the intake secondary rocker
arm (B).
 If the intake primary rocker arm does not move, remove the primary and secondary rocker arms
as an assembly, then check that the pistons in the secondary and primary rocker arms move
smoothly. If any rocker arm needs replacing, replace the primary and secondary rocker arms as
an assembly, and test.
 If the intake primary rocker arm moves freely, go to step 4.
111
Fig. 6: Checking Intake Primary Rocker Arm Moves Independently Of Intake Secondary
Rocker Arm
5. Repeat step 3 on the remaining intake primary rocker arms with each piston at TDC. When all the
primary rocker arms pass the test, go to step 5.
6. Check that the air pressure on the shop air compressor gauge indicates over 400 kPa (4 kgf/cm2 , 57
psi).
7. Inspect the valve clearance (see VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT ).
8. Remove the sealing bolt (A) from the relief hole, and install the VTEC air stopper (B).
111
Fig. 7: Installing VTEC Air Stopper

9. Remove the No. 2 and No. 3 camshaft holder bolts, and install the VTEC air adapters (C) finger-tight.
10. Connect the air joint adapter (D) and air pressure regulator (E).
11. Loosen the valve on the regulator, and apply the specified air pressure.
Specified air pressure:
290 kPa (3.0 kgf/cm2 ,42 psi)
NOTE: If the synchronizing piston does not move after applying air pressure,
move the primary or secondary rocker arm up and down manually by
rotating the crankshaft clockwise.
12. With the specified air pressure applied, move the intake primary rocker arm (A) for the No. 1
cylinder. The primary rocker arm and secondary rocker arm (B) should move together.
111
If the intake secondary rocker arm does not move, remove the primary and secondary rocker arms as
an assembly, and check that the pistons in the primary and secondary rocker arms move smoothly. If
any rocker arm needs replacing, replace the primary and secondary rocker arms as an assembly, and
test.
Fig. 8: Moving Intake Primary Rocker Arm

13. Remove the special tools.

14. Tighten the camshaft holder mounting bolts to 22 N.m (2.2 kgf.m, 16 lbf.ft).
15. Tighten the sealing bolt to 20 N.m (2.0 kgf.m, 14 lbf.ft).
16. Install the cylinder head cover (see CYLINDER HEAD COVER INSTALLATION ).
VTC ACTUATOR INSPECTION

1. Remove the cam chain (see Cam Chain Removal ).
2. Loosen the rocker arm adjusting screws (see step 2 ).
3. Remove the camshaft holder (see step 3 ).
111
4. Remove the intake camshaft.

5. Check that the variable valve timing control (VTC) actuator is locked by turning the VTC actuator
clockwise and counterclockwise. If the VTC actuator is not locked, replace the VTC actuator.
6. Seal the advance holes (A) and retard holes (B) in the No. 1 camshaft journal with tape.
Fig. 9: Sealing Advance Holes And Retard Holes

7. Punch a hole in the tape over one of the advance holes.

8. Apply air to the advance hole to release the lock.
111
Fig. 10: Applying Air To Advance Hole To Release Lock

9. Check that the VTC actuator moves smoothly. If the VTC actuator does not move smoothly, replace
the VTC actuator.
111
Fig. 11: Checking That VTC Actuator Moves Smoothly

10. Make sure the punch marks on the VTC actuator and exhaust camshaft sprocket are facing up, then set
the camshafts in the rocker shaft holder (see step 6 ).
11. Set the camshaft holders and chain guide B in place (see step 7 ).
12. Tighten the camshaft holder bolts to the specified torque (see step 8 ).
13. Check that the variable valve timing control (VTC) actuator is locked by turning the VTC actuator
counterclockwise. If not locked, turn the VTC actuator clockwise until it stops, then recheck it. If it is
still not locked, replace the VTC actuator.
14. Install the cam chain (see CAM CHAIN INSTALLATION ).
15. Adjust the valve clearance (see VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT ).
111
VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT

Tappet adjust wrench set 07MAA-PR70100
NOTE: Adjust the valves only when the cylinder head temperature is less than 100 °
F (38 °C).
2. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC). The punch mark (A) on the variable valve timing
control (VTC) actuator and the punch mark (B) on the exhaust camshaft sprocket should be at the top.
Align the TDC marks (C) on the VTC actuator and exhaust camshaft sprocket.
Fig. 12: Identifying Punch Mark On Variable Valve Timing Control (VTC) Actuator
3. Select the correct thickness feeler gauge for the valves you're going to check.
Valve Clearance
111
Intake: 0.21---0.25 mm (0.008---0.010 in.)
Exhaust: 0.28---0.32 mm (0.011---0.013 in.)
Fig. 13: Identifying Adjusting Screw Location Exhaust And Intake

4. Insert the feeler gauge (A) between the adjusting screw (B) and the end of the valve stem, and slide it
back and forth; you should feel a slight amount of drag.
111
Fig. 14: Inserting Feeler Gauge Between Adjusting Screw And End Of Valve Stem
5. If you feel too much or too little drag, loosen the locknut with the special tools, and turn the adjusting
screw until the drag on the feeler gauge is correct.
111
Fig. 15: Loosening Locknut

6. Tighten the locknut.
Specified torque
Intake: 20 N.m (2.0 kgf.m, 14 lbf.ft)
Apply engine oil to the nut threads.
Exhaust: 14 N.m (1.4 kgf.m, 10 lbf.ft)
Apply engine oil to the nut threads.
7. Recheck the valve clearance. Repeat the adjustment if necessary.

8. Rotate the crankshaft 180° clockwise (camshaft pulley turns 90°).
111
Fig. 16: Rotating Crankshaft 180° Clockwise (Camshaft Pulley Turns 90°)
9. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance on No. 3 cylinder.

111
Fig. 17: Rotating Crankshaft 180° Clockwise (Camshaft Pulley Turns 90°)
111
Fig. 18: Rotating Crankshaft

CRANKSHAFT PULLEY REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

 Holder handle 07JAB-001020A

 Holder attachment, 50 mm 07NAB-001040A
 Socket, 19 mm 07JAA-001020A or a commercially available 19 mm socket
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front tires/wheels.

4. Hold the pulley with holder handle (A) and holder attachment (B).
111
Fig. 19: Holding Pulley With Holder Handle And Holder Attachment
5. Remove the bolt with a 19 mm socket (C) and breaker bar.
INSTALLATION
1. Clean the crankshaft pulley (A), crankshaft (B), bolt (C), and washer (D). Lubricate new engine oil as
shown in Fig. 20.
111
Fig. 20: Cleaning Crankshaft Pulley, Crankshaft, Bolt, And Washer

2. Install the crankshaft pulley, and hold the pulley with holder handle (A) and holder attachment (B).
111
Fig. 21: Installing Crankshaft Pulley

3. Tighten the bolt to 49 N.m (5.0 kgf.m, 36 lbf.ft) with a torque wrench and 19 mm socket (C). Do not
use an impact wrench.
4. Mark the bolt head (A) and the crankshaft pulley (B) as shown, then tighten the bolt an additional 90°
(The mark on the bolt head line up with the mark on the crankshaft pulley).
111
Fig. 22: Marking The Bolt Head And The Crankshaft Pulley

7. Install the front tires/wheels.
CAM CHAIN REMOVAL
NOTE: Keep the cam chain away from magnetic fields.
1. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its top dead center (TDC) mark (A) lines up with the pointer (B).
Fig. 23: Turning Crankshaft Pulley


6. Check that the No. 1 piston TDC marks (A) on the variable valve timing control (VTC) actuator and
exhaust camshaft sprocket are aligned.
111
Fig. 24: Checking No. 1 Piston TDC Marks

7. Remove the crankshaft pulley (see step 4 ).

8. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor connector (A) and variable valve timing control
(VTC) oil control solenoid valve connector (B).
111
Fig. 25: Disconnecting Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Connector

9. Remove the VTC oil control solenoid valve (see VTC OIL CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
REMOVAL/TEST/INSTALLATION ).
10. Support the engine with a jack and wood block under the oil pan.
11. Remove the ground cable (A), and remove the upper bracket (B).
111
Fig. 26: Removing Ground Cable

12. Remove the side engine mount bracket.
111
Fig. 27: Removing Side Engine Mount Bracket

13. Remove the chain case.
111
Fig. 28: Removing Chain Case

14. Loosely install the crankshaft pulley.

15. Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise to compress the auto-tensioner.
111
Fig. 29: Turning Crankshaft

16. Align the holes on the lock (A) and the auto-tensioner (B), then insert a 1.2 mm (0.05 in.) diameter
111
pin or lock pin (P/N 14511-PNA-003) (C) into the holes. Turn the crankshaft clockwise to secure the
pin.
Fig. 30: Aligning Holes On Lock And Auto-tensioner

111

18. Remove the cam chain guide B.
111
Fig. 32: Removing CAM Chain Guide

19. Remove the cam chain guide A and tensioner arm (B).
111
Fig. 33: Removing CAM Chain Guide And Tensioner Arm

20. Remove the cam chain.
CAM CHAIN INSTALLATION
NOTE:  Keep the cam chain away from magnetic fields.

 Before this procedure, check that the variable valve timing control
(VTC) actuator is locked by turning the VTC actuator counterclockwise.
If not locked, turn the VTC actuator clockwise until it stops, then
recheck it. If it is still not locked, replace the VTC actuator.
111
1. Set the crankshaft to top dead center (TDC). Align the TDC mark (A) on the crankshaft sprocket with
the pointer (B) on the engine block.
Fig. 34: Identifying Marks

2. Set the camshafts to TDC. The punch mark (A) on the variable valve timing control (VTC) actuator
and the punch mark (B) on the exhaust camshaft sprocket should be at the top. Align the TDC marks
(C) on the VTC actuator and exhaust camshaft sprocket.
111
Fig. 35: Identifying Punch Mark

3. Install the cam chain on the crankshaft sprocket with the colored piece (A) aligned with the mark (B)
on the crankshaft sprocket.
111
Fig. 36: Installing CAM Chain On Crankshaft Sprocket

4. Install the cam chain on the VTC actuator and the exhaust camshaft sprocket with the punch marks
(A) aligned with the center of the two colored pieces (B).
111
Fig. 37: Installing CAM Chain On VTC Actuator And Exhaust Camshaft Sprocket
5. Install the cam chain guide A and tensioner arm (B).
111
Fig. 38: Installing CAM Chain Guide And Tensioner Arm

6. Install the auto-tensioner.
111
Fig. 39: Installing Auto-Tensioner

7. Install the cam chain guide B.
111
Fig. 40: Installing CAM Chain Guide B

8. Remove the pin or lock pin (P/N 14511-PNA-003) from the auto-tensioner.
111
Fig. 41: Removing Pin Or Lock Pin (P/N 14511-Pna-003) From Auto-Tensioner
9. Check the chain case oil seal for damage. If the oil seal is damaged, replace the chain case oil seal (see
CHAIN CASE OIL SEAL INSTALLATION ).
10. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the chain case mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt holes.
11. Clean and dry the chain case mating surfaces.
12. Install the crankshaft position (CKP) pulse plate (A) on the crankshaft (B).
111
Fig. 42: Identifying CKP Pulse Plate

111
13. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004,08718-0001, 08718-0002,08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly

to the engine block mating surface of the chain case.
NOTE: Do not install components if too much time has passed after applying
the liquid gasket (for P/N 08718-0002, no more than 4 minutes, for all
others, no more than 5 minutes). Instead, remove the old residue and
reapply the liquid gasket.
Fig. 43: Applying Liquid Gasket

14. Apply liquid gasket to the engine block upper surface contact areas (A) on the chain case and lower
block upper surface contact areas (B) on the chain case.
111
15. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08718-0001, 08718-0002, or 08718-0009, evenly to the oil pan mating
surface of the chain case.
Fig. 44: Applying Liquid Gasket To Engine Block Upper Surface Contact Areas
16. Install the new O-ring (A) on the chain case. Set the edge of the chain case (B) to the edge of the oil
pan (C), then install the chain case on the engine block (D). Wipe off all of the excess liquid gasket on
the oil pan and chain case mating area.
NOTE:  When installing the chain case, do not slide the bottom surface on
the oil pan mounting surface.
 Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine with oil.
 Do not run the engine within 3 hours after installing the chain
case.
111
Fig. 45: Installing CAM Chain

17. Install the side engine mount bracket.
111
Fig. 46: Installing Side Engine Mount Bracket

18. Install the upper bracket (A), then tighten the bolt in the numbered sequence shown in Fig. 47.
111
Fig. 47: Installing Upper Bracket

19. Install the ground cable (B).

20. Install the variable valve timing control (VTC) oil control solenoid valve (see VTC OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE REMOVAL/TEST/INSTALLATION ).
21. Connect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor connector (A) and VTC oil control solenoid valve
connector (B).
111
Fig. 48: Connecting Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Connector

22. Install the crankshaft pulley (see INSTALLATION ).

24. Install the drive belt.
26. Do the CKP pattern clear/CKP learn procedure (see CKP PATTERN CLEAR/CKP PATTERN
LEARN ).
111
AUTO-TENSIONER REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

REMOVAL
1. Remove the chain case cover.
Fig. 49: Removing Chain Case Cover

111
2. Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise to compress the auto-tensioner.
Fig. 50: Turning Crankshaft

3. Align the holes on the lock (A) and the auto-tensioner (B), then insert a 1.2 mm (0.05 in.) diameter
pin or lock pin (P/N 14511-PNA-003) (C) into the holes. Turn the crankshaft clockwise to secure the
pin.
111
Fig. 51: Aligning Holes On Lock

111

INSTALLATION
1. Install the auto-tensioner.
111
Fig. 53: Installing Auto-Tensioner

2. Remove the pin or lock pin (P/N 14511-PNA-003) from the auto-tensioner.
111
Fig. 54: Removing Pin Or Lock Pin

3. Remove old liquid gasket from the chain case cover mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt holes.
4. Clean and dry the chain case cover mating surfaces.
to the chain case mating surface of the chain case cover.
111

6. Install the chain case cover.
NOTE:  Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine with oil.
 Do not run the engine within 3 hours after installing the chain case cover.
111
Fig. 56: Installing Chain Case Cover

CHAIN CASE OIL SEAL INSTALLATION

 Driver 07749-0010000
 Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 07746-0010400
111
1. Use the special tools to drive a new oil seal squarely into the chain case to the specified installed
height.
Fig. 57: Driving Oil Seal

2. Measure the distance between the chain case surface (A) and oil seal (B).
111
Fig. 58: Measuring Distance Between Chain Case Surface And Oil Seal
CAM CHAIN INSPECTION

111

5. Remove the crankshaft pulley (see CRANKSHAFT PULLEY REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION ).
6. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor connector and variable valve timing control (VTC)
oil control solenoid valve connector (see step 8 ).
9. Remove the ground cable, and remove the upper bracket (see step 11 ).
10. Remove the side engine mount bracket (see step 12 ).
11. Remove the chain case (see step 13 ).
12. Measure the tensioner rod length between the tensioner body and bottom of the flat surface section on
the tensioner rod. If the length is over the tolerance, replace the cam chain and oil pump chain.
111
Fig. 59: Measuring Tensioner Rod Length Between Tensioner Body And Bottom Of Flat
Surface
14. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the chain case mating surfaces, bolt, and bolt holes.
to the engine block mating surface of the chain case (see step 13 ).
17. Apply liquid gasket to the engine block upper surface contact areas on the chain case and lower block
upper surface contact areas on the chain case (see step 14 ).
18. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001, 08718-0002,08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly
to the oil pan mating surface of the chain case (see step 15 ).
19. Install the new O-ring on the chain case. Set the edge of the chain case to the edge of the oil pan, then
install the chain case on the engine block (see step 16 ). Wipe off the excess liquid gasket on the oil
pan and chain case mating area.
 Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after installing the chain
case.
20. Install the side engine mount bracket (see step 17 ).

21. Install the upper bracket and the ground cable (see step 18 ).
22. Install the VTC oil control solenoid valve (see VTC OIL CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
23. Connect the CKP sensor connector and VTC oil control solenoid valve connector (see step 21 ).
27. Install the splash shield.
28. Install the front wheels.
LEARN ).
CKP PULSE PLATE REPLACEMENT
111

5. Remove the crankshaft pulley (see CRANKSHAFT PULLEY REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION ).
6. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor connector and variable valve timing control (VTC)
oil control solenoid valve connector (see step 8 ).
9. Remove the ground cable, and remove the upper bracket (see step 11 ).
10. Remove the side engine mount bracket (see step 12 ).
11. Remove the chain case (see step 13 ).
12. Remove the CKP pulse plate.
111
Fig. 60: Removing CKP Pulse Plate

111
13. Install the CKP pulse plate.

15. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the chain case mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt holes.
to the engine block mating surface of the chain case (see step 13 ).
18. Apply liquid gasket to the engine block upper surface contact areas on the chain case and lower block
upper surface contact areas on the chain case (see step 14 ).
19. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004,08718-0001, 08718-0002, 08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly
to the oil pan mating surface of the chain case (see step 15 ).
20. Install the new O-ring on the chain case. Set the edge of the chain case to the edge of the oil pan, then
install the chain case on the engine block (see step 16 ). Wipe off the excess liquid gasket on the oil
pan and chain case mating area.
 Do not run the engine within 3 hours after installing the chain
case.
21. Install the side engine mount bracket (see step 17 ).

22. Install the upper bracket and the ground cable (see step 18 ).
23. Install the VTC oil control solenoid valve (see VTC OIL CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
24. Connect the CKP sensor connector and VTC oil control solenoid valve connector (see step 21 ).
29. Install the front tires/wheels.
LEARN ).
111
CYLINDER HEAD COVER REMOVAL

1. Remove the intake manifold cover.

111
2. Remove the four ignition coils (see IGNITION COIL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).

3. Remove the two bolts (A) securing the vacuum line.
Fig. 62: Removing Bolts Securing Vacuum Line

4. Remove the bolt (B) securing the power steering hose bracket.
5. Remove the dipstick (C) and breather hose (D).
6. Remove the cylinder head cover.
111
Fig. 63: Removing Dipstick And Breather Hose & Cover

111
CYLINDER HEAD COVER INSTALLATION

1. Thoroughly clean the head cover gasket and the groove.
2. Install the head cover gasket (A) in the groove of the cylinder head cover (B).
Fig. 64: Installing Head Cover Gasket In Groove

3. Check that the mating surfaces are clean and dry.

4. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001, 08718-0002, 08718-0003, or 08718-0009, on the
chain case and the No. 5 rocker shaft holder mating areas.
111

5. Set the spark plug seals (A) on the spark plug tubes. Place the cylinder head cover (B) on the cylinder
head, then slide the cover slightly back and forth to seat the head cover gasket.
111
Fig. 66: Setting Spark Plug Seal On Spark Plug Tubes

6. Inspect the cover washers (C). Replace any washer that is damaged or deteriorated.
7. Tighten the bolts in two or three steps. In the final step tighten all bolts, in sequence, to 12 N.m (1.2
kgf.m, 8.7 lbf.ft).
 Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after installing the head cover.
111
Fig. 67: Tightening Bolts

8. Install the dipstick (A) and breather hose (B).
111
Fig. 68: Installing Dipstick And Breather Hose

9. Tighten the bolt (C) securing the power steering hose bracket.
10. Tighten the two bolts (D) securing the vacuum line.
11. Install the four ignition coils (see IGNITION COIL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).
12. Check that all tubes, hoses, and connectors are installed correctly.
13. Install the intake manifold cover.
111

CYLINDER HEAD REMOVAL
NOTE:  Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted surfaces.

 To avoid damaging the wires and terminals, unplug the wiring
111
connectors carefully while holding the connector portion.

 To avoid damaging the cylinder head, wait until the engine coolant
temperature drops below 100 °F (38 °C) before loosening the cylinder
head bolts.
 Mark all wiring and hoses to avoid misconnection.
Also, be sure that they do not contact other wiring or hoses, or interfere
with other parts.
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the audio unit (and navigation code, if equipped), then
write down the audio presets.
2. Relieve fuel pressure (see FUEL PRESSURE RELIEVING ).
4. Drain the engine coolant (see COOLANT CHECK ).
6. Disconnect the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor connector (A).
111

8. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A), then disconnect the fuel feed hose (see FUEL
LINE/QUICK-CONNECT FITTING REMOVAL ).
Fig. 71: Removing Vacuum Hose And Breather Pipe

9. Remove the intake manifold:

 2003-2005 models (see REMOVAL (2003-2005 MODELS) )
 2006-07 models (see REMOVAL (2006-07 MODELS) )
10. Remove the exhaust manifold (see EXHAUST MANIFOLD REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION ).
11. Remove the bolt (A) securing the connecting pipe.
111
Fig. 72: Removing Bolt Securing Connecting Pipe

12. Remove the water bypass hose (B).

111

14. Remove the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) hose (A) and ground cable (B).
111
Fig. 74: Removing Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Hose

15. Remove the upper radiator hose (A) and heater hoses (B).
111
Fig. 75: Removing Upper Radiator Hoses And Heater Hoses

16. Remove the engine wire harness connectors and wire harness clamps from the cylinder head.
 Four injector connectors
 Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor connector
 Camshaft position (CMP) sensor A/B connectors
 Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve connector
 Rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve) connector
 Engine oil pressure (EOP) sensor connector
17. Remove the two bolts (A) securing the EVAP canister purge valve bracket and remove the bolt (B)
securing the harness bracket.
111
Fig. 76: Removing Bolts Securing EVAP Canister Purge Valve Bracket

19. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLY REMOVAL ).
20. Remove the cylinder head bolts. To prevent warpage, unscrew the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a time;
repeat the sequence until all bolts are loosened.
111
Fig. 77: Removing Cylinder Head Bolts

21. Remove the cylinder head.
CMP PULSE PLATE A REPLACEMENT

2. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then loosen the bolt.
111
Fig. 78: Holding Camshaft With An Open-End Wrench

3. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) pulse plate A.
111
Fig. 79: Removing Camshaft Position (CMP) Pulse Plate

4. Install the CMP pulse plate A in the reverse order of removal.
CMP PULSE PLATE B REPLACEMENT

2. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then loosen the bolt.
111

3. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) pulse plate B.
111
Fig. 81: Removing Camshaft Position (CMP) Pulse Plate

4. Install the CMP pulse plate B in the reverse order of removal.
VTC ACTUATOR, EXHAUST CAMSHAFT SPROCKET REMOVAL AND

INSTALLATION
REMOVAL

2. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then loosen the variable valve timing control (VTC)
actuator mounting bolt and exhaust camshaft sprocket mounting bolt.
111

3. If the VTC actuator is reused, do the following steps.

 1 Remove the intake camshaft, and seal the advance holes and retard holes in the No. 1
camshaft journal with tape (see step 6 ).
 2 Punch a hole in the tape over one of the advance holes (see step 7 ).
 3 Apply air to the advance hole to release the lock (see step 8 ).
 4 Remove the tape from the No. 1 camshaft journal.
4. Remove the VTC actuator and exhaust camshaft sprocket.
INSTALLATION
111
1. Install the VTC actuator and exhaust camshaft sprocket.
NOTE: Installing the VTC actuator to unlock position.
2. Apply engine oil to the threads of the VTC actuator mounting bolt and exhaust camshaft mounting
bolt, then install them.
3. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then tighten the bolts.
Specified torque
VTC actuator mounting bolt:
113 N.m (11.5 kgf.m, 83 lbf.ft)
Exhaust camshaft sprocket mounting bolt:
72 N.m (7.3 kgf.m, 53 lbf.ft)
111
Fig. 83: Installing VTC Actuator To Unlock Position

4. Hold the camshaft, and turn the VTC actuator clockwise until you hear it click.
CYLINDER HEAD INSPECTION FOR WARPAGE

1. Remove the cylinder head (see CYLINDER HEAD REMOVAL ).
2. Inspect the camshaft (see CAMSHAFT INSPECTION ).
3. Check the cylinder head for warpage. Measure along the edges, and three ways across the center.
 If warpage is less than 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) cylinder head resurfacing is not required.
 If warpage is between 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) and 0.2 mm (0.008 in.), resurface the cylinder head.
 Maximum resurface limit is 0.2 mm (0.008 in.) based on a height of 104 mm (4.09 in.).
111
Fig. 84: Checking Cylinder Head For Warpage

ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLY REMOVAL

2. Loosen the rocker arm adjusting screws (A).
111
Fig. 85: Loosening Rocker Arm Adjusting Screws

3. Remove the camshaft holder bolts. To prevent damaging the camshafts, unscrew the bolts two turns at
a time, in a crisscross pattern.
NOTE: Bolt (1) is not on all engines.
111
Fig. 86: Removing Camshaft Holder Bolts

4. Remove the cam chain guide B, camshaft holders, and camshafts.

5. Insert the bolts (A) into the rocker shaft holder, then remove the rocker arm assembly (B).
111
Fig. 87: Inserting Bolts Into Rocker Shaft Holder

ROCKER ARM AND SHAFT DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
NOTE:  Identify parts as they are removed to ensure reinstallation in original

location.
 Inspect the rocker arm shaft and rocker arms (see ROCKER ARM AND
SHAFT INSPECTION ).
111
 The rocker arms must be installed in the same positions if reused.

 When removing or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the
camshaft holder bolts. The bolts will keep the holders and rocker arms on
the shaft.
 Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply
lubricant to any contact points.
 Bundle the intake rocker arms with rubber bands to keep them together
as a set.
 When replacing the intake rocker arm assembly, remove the fastening
hardware from the new intake rocker arm assembly.
Fig. 88: Disassembling Rocker Arm And Shaft

ROCKER ARM AND SHAFT INSPECTION
111
1. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLY REMOVAL ), then
disassemble the rocker arm assembly (see ROCKER ARM AND SHAFT
DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY ).
2. Measure the diameter of the shaft at the first rocker location.
Fig. 89: Measuring Diameter Of Shaft

3. Zero the gauge (A) to the shaft diameter.
111
Fig. 90: Zero Gauge To Shaft Diameter

4. Measure the inside diameter of the rocker arm, and check it for an out-of-round condition.
Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance Standard (New):
Intake: 0.025---0.052 mm (0.0010-0.0020 in.)
Exhaust: 0.018---0.056 mm (0.0007---0.0022 in.)
111
Fig. 91: Measuring Inside Diameter Of Rocker Arm

5. Repeat for all rocker arms and both shafts. If the clearance is over the limit, replace the rocker shaft
and all overtolerance rocker arms. If any VTEC rocker arm needs replacement, replace the rocker
arms (primary and secondary) as a set.
6. Inspect the rocker arm pistons (A). Push each piston manually. If it does not move smoothly, replace
the rocker arm set.
111
NOTE: Apply oil to the pistons when reassembling.
Fig. 92: Identifying Rocker Arm Piston

7. Install the rocker arm assembly (see ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION ).
CAMSHAFT INSPECTION
NOTE: Do not rotate the camshaft during inspection.
1. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLY REMOVAL ).
2. Put the rocker shaft holders, camshaft and camshaft holders on the cylinder head, then tighten the
bolts to the specified torque.
NOTE: If the engine does not have bolt (21), skip it and continue the torque
sequence.
Specified torque
8 mm bolts: 22 N.m (2.2 kgf.m, 16 lbf.ft)
6 mm bolts: 12 N.m (1.2 kgf.m, 8.7 lbf.ft)
6 mm bolts: (21), (22), (23)
111
Fig. 93: Tightening Bolts To Specified Torque

3. Seat the camshaft by pushing it away from the camshaft pulley end of the cylinder head.
4. Zero the dial indicator against the end of the camshaft, then push the camshaft back and forth and read
the end play. If the end play is beyond the service limit, replace the cylinder head and recheck. If it is
still beyond the service limit, replace the camshaft.
Camshaft End Play
111
Fig. 94: Zero Dial Indicator Against End Of Camshaft

5. Unscrew the camshaft holder bolts two turns at a time, in a crisscross pattern. Then remove the
camshaft holders from the cylinder head.
6. Lift the camshafts out of the cylinder head, wipe them clean, then inspect the lift ramps. Replace the
camshaft if any lobes are pitted, scored, or excessively worn.
7. Clean the camshaft journal surfaces in the cylinder head, then set the camshafts back in place. Place a
plastigage strip across each journal.
8. Install the camshaft holders, then tighten the bolts to the specified torque as shown in step 2.
9. Remove the camshaft holders. Measure the widest portion of plastigage on each journal.
 If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is within limits, go to step 11.
 If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the service limit and the camshaft has been
replaced, replace the cylinder head.
111
 If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the service limit and the camshaft has not been
replaced, go to step 10.
Camshaft-to-Holder Oil Clearance Standard (New):
No. 1 Journal: 0.030---0.069 mm (0.001---0.003 in.)
No. 2,3,4,5 Journals: 0.060---0.099 mm (0.002---0.004 in.)
Fig. 95: Removing Camshaft Holders

10. Check the total runout with the camshaft supported on V-blocks.
 If the total runout of the camshaft is within the service limit, replace the cylinder head.
 If the total runout is beyond the service limit, replace the camshaft and recheck the camshaft-to-
holder oil clearance. If the oil clearance is still beyond the service limit, replace the cylinder
head.
Camshaft Total Runout
111
Fig. 96: Checking Total Runout With Camshaft Supported On V-Blocks

11. Measure cam lobe height.
Cam Lobe Height Standard (New):
CAM LOBE HEIGHT STANDARD

INTAKE EXHAUST
33.925 mm (1.3356 in.) (1)
Primary
34.263 mm (1.3489 in.) (2) 34.092 mm (1.3422 in.)
Secondary 29.638 mm (1.1668 in.)
(1) '03-05 models
(2) '06-07 models
111
C/C: Cam Chain
Fig. 97: Measuring CAM Lobe Height

VALVE, SPRING, AND VALVE SEAL REMOVAL

Valve spring compressor attachment 07757-PJ1010A
Identify the valves and valve springs as they are removed so that each item can be reinstalled in its original
position.

2. Using an appropriate-sized socket (A) and plastic mallet (B), lightly tap the valve retainer to loosen
the valve cotters.
111
Fig. 98: Tapping Valve Retainer

3. Install the spring compressor. Compress the spring, and remove the valve cotters.
111
Fig. 99: Installing Spring Compressor

4. Remove the special tool, then remove the valve retainer and valve spring.
5. Install the valve guide seal remover.
111
Fig. 100: Installing Valve Guide Seal

6. Remove the valve seal.

111
Fig. 101: Removing Valve Seal

VALVE INSPECTION
1. Remove the valves (see VALVE, SPRING, AND VALVE SEAL REMOVAL ).
2. Measure the valve in these areas.
Intake Valve Dimensions
A Standard (New): 34.85---35.15 mm (1.372---1.384 in.)
B Standard (New): 108.7---109.5 mm (4.280---4.311 in.)
C Standard (New): 5.475---5.485 mm (0.2156---0.2159 in.)
C Service Limit: 5.445 mm (0.214 in.)
Exhaust Valve Dimensions
A Standard (New): 29.85---30.15 mm (1.175---1.187 in.)

111
B Standard (New): 108.3---109.1 mm (4.264---4.295 in.)
C Standard (New): 5.450---5.460 mm (0.2146---0.2150 in.)
C Service Limit: 5.42 mm (0.213 in.)
Fig. 102: Measuring Valve

VALVE STEM-TO-GUIDE CLEARANCE INSPECTION

1. Remove the valves (see VALVE, SPRING, AND VALVE SEAL REMOVAL ).
2. Slide the valve out of its guide about 10 mm (0.39 in.), then measure the guide-to-stem clearance with
a dial indicator while rocking the stem in the direction of normal thrust (wobble method).
 If the measurement exceeds the service limit, recheck it using a new valve.
 If the measurement is now within the service limit, reassemble using a new valve.
 If the measurement with a new valve still exceeds the service limit, go to step 3.
Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance
Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance
111
Fig. 103: Sliding Valve Out

3. Subtract the O.D. of the valve stem, measured with a micrometer, from the I.D. of the valve guide,
measured with an inside micrometer or ball gauge. Take the measurements in three places along the
valve stem and three places inside the valve guide. The difference between the largest guide
measurement and the smallest stem measurement should not exceed the service limit.
Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance
Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance
VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT

111
 Valve guide driver, 5.5 mm 07742-0010100

 Valve guide reamer, 5.5 mm 07HAH-PJ7010B
1. Inspect valve stem-to-guide clearance (see VALVE INSPECTION ).

2. As illustrated, use a commercially available air-impact valve guide driver (A) modified to fit the
diameter of the valve guides. In most cases, the same procedure can be done using the special tool and
a conventional hammer.
Fig. 104: Identifying Valve Guide Driver

3. Select the proper replacement guides, and chill them in the freezer section of a refrigerator for about
an hour.
4. Use a hot plate or oven to evenly heat the cylinder head to 300 °F (150 °C). Monitor the temperature
with a cooking thermometer. Do not get the head hotter than 300 °F (150 °C); excessive heat may
loosen the valve seats.
111
Fig. 105: Using A Hot Plate Or Oven To Evenly Heat Cylinder Head
5. Working from the camshaft side, use the driver and an air hammer to drive the guide about 2 mm (0.1
in.) towards the combustion chamber. This will knock off some of the carbon and make removal
easier. Hold the air hammer directly in line with the valve guide to prevent damaging the driver. Wear
safety goggles or a face shield.
6. Turn the head over, and drive the guide out toward the camshaft side of the head.
111
Fig. 106: Turning Head Over, And Drive Guide Out Toward Camshaft Side Of Head
7. If a valve guide won't move, drill it out with a 8 mm (5/16 in.) bit, then try again. Drill guides only in
extreme cases; you could damage the cylinder head if the guide breaks.
8. Take out the new guide(s) from the freezer, one at a time, as you need them.
9. Apply a thin coat of clean engine oil to the outside of the new valve guide. Install the guide from the
111
camshaft side of the head; use the special tool to drive the guide in to the specified installed height (A)
of the guide (B). If you have all 16 guides to do, you may have to reheat the head.
Valve Guide Installed Height
Intake: 15.2---16.2 mm (0.598---0.638 in.)
Exhaust: 15.5---16.5 mm (0.610---0.650 in.)
111
Fig. 107: Installing Guide From Camshaft Side Of Head

10. Coat both reamer and valve guide with cutting oil.
11. Rotate the reamer clockwise the full length of the valve guide bore.
111
Fig. 108: Rotating Reamer

12. Continue to rotate the reamer clockwise while removing it from the bore.
13. Thoroughly wash the guide in detergent and water to remove any cutting residue.
14. Check the clearances with a valve (see VALVE INSPECTION ). Verify that a valve slides in the
intake and exhaust valve guides without exerting pressure.
15. Inspect the valve seating, if necessary renew the valve seat using a valve seat cutter (see VALVE
SEAT RECONDITIONING ).
VALVE SEAT RECONDITIONING

1. Inspect valve stem-to-guide clearance (see VALVE INSPECTION ). If the valve guides are worn,
replace them (see VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT ) before cutting the valve seats.
2. Renew the valve seats in the cylinder head using a valve seat cutter.
111
Fig. 109: Renewing Valve Seats In Cylinder Head Using A Valve Seat Cutter
3. Carefully cut a 45° seat, removing only enough material to ensure a smooth and concentric seat.
4. Bevel the upper and lower edges at the angles shown in Fig. 110 . Check the width of the seat and
adjust accordingly.
111
Fig. 110: Checking Width Of Seat

5. Make one more very light pass with the 45° cutter to remove any possible burrs caused by the other
cutters.
Valve Seat Width
6. After resurfacing the seat, inspect for even valve seating. Apply Prussian Blue compound (A) to the
valve face. Insert the valve in its original location in the head, then lift it and snap it closed against the
111
seat several times.
Fig. 111: Applying Prussian Blue Compound To Valve Face

7. The actual valve seating surface (B), as shown in Fig. 111by the blue compound, should be centered
on the seat.
 If it is too high (closer to the valve stem), you must make a second cut with the 67.5° cutter to
move it down, then one more cut with the 45° cutter to restore seat width.
 If it is too low (close to the valve edge), you must make a second cut with the 35 ° cutter (intake
side) or the 30 ° cutter (exhaust side) to move it up, then make one more cut with the 45° cutter
to restore seat width.
NOTE: The final cut should always be made with the 45° cutter.
8. Insert the intake and exhaust valves in the head, and measure valve stem installed height (A).
Intake Valve Stem Installed Height

111
Exhaust Valve Stem Installed Height
111
Fig. 112: Inserting Intake And Exhaust Valves In Head

9. If valve stem installed height is over the service limit, replace the valve and recheck. If it is still over
the service limit, replace the cylinder head; the valve seat in the head is too deep.
VALVE, SPRING, AND VALVE SEAL INSTALLATION
111
 Stem seal driver 07PAD-0010000

 Valve spring compressor attachment 07757-PJ1010A
1. Coat the valve stems with new engine oil. Install the valves in the valve guides.
2. Check that the valves move up and down smoothly.
3. Install the spring seats on the cylinder head.
4. Install the new valve seals (A) using the stem seal driver (B).
NOTE: The exhaust valve seal (C) has a black spring (D), and the intake valve
seal (E) has a white spring (F). They are not interchangeable.
111
Fig. 113: Installing Valve Seals

5. Install the valve spring. Place the end of the valve spring with closely wound coils toward the cylinder
head.
6. Install the valve retainer.
7. Install the valve spring compressor. Compress the spring, and install the valve cotters.
111
Fig. 114: Installing Valve Spring Compressor

8. Lightly tap the end of each valve stem two or three times with a plastic mallet (A) to ensure proper
seating of the valve and valve cotters. Tap the valve stem only along its axis so you do not bend the
stem.
111
Fig. 115: Lightly Tapping End Of Each Valve Stem

ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION

1. Reassemble the rocker arm assembly (see ROCKER ARM AND SHAFT
DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY ).
2. Clean and dry the No. 5 rocker shaft holder mating surface.
to the cylinder head mating surface of the No. 5 rocker shaft holder.
111

4. Insert the bolts (A) into the rocker shaft holder, then install the rocker arm assembly (B) on the
cylinder head.
111
Fig. 117: Inserting Bolts Into Rocker Shaft Holder

5. Remove the bolts from the rocker shaft holder.

6. Make sure the punch marks on the variable valve timing control (VTC) actuator and exhaust camshaft
sprocket are facing up, then set the camshafts (A) in the holder.
111
Fig. 118: Setting Camshafts In Holder

7. Set the camshaft holders (B) and cam chain guide B (C) in place.
8. Tighten the bolts in sequence to the specified torque.
NOTE: If the engine does not have bolt(21), skip it and continue the torque
sequence.
111

9. Install the cam chain (see CAM CHAIN INSTALLATION ), and adjust the valve clearance (see
VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT ).
CYLINDER HEAD INSTALLATION

Install the cylinder head in the reverse order of removal.
1. Install the new coolant separator in the engine block, when replacing the engine block.
111
Fig. 120: Installing Coolant Separator In Engine Block

2. Clean the cylinder head and engine block surface.

3. Install the new cylinder head gasket (A) and dowel pins (B) on the engine block. Always use a new
111
Fig. 121: Installing Cylinder Head Gasket

4. Set the crankshaft to top dead center (TDC). Align the TDC mark (A) on the crankshaft sprocket with
the pointer (B) on the engine block.
111
Fig. 122: Aligning TDC Mark On Crankshaft Sprocket

5. Install the cylinder head on the engine block.

6. Measure the diameter of each cylinder head bolt at point A and point B.
111
Fig. 123: Measuring Diameter Of Each Cylinder Head Bolt At Point And Point
7. If either diameter is less than 10.6 mm (0.42 in.), replace the cylinder head bolt.
8. Apply new engine oil to the threads and flange of all cylinder head bolts.
9. Tighten the cylinder head bolts in sequence to 39 N.m (4.0 kgf.m, 29 lbf.ft). Use a beam-type torque
wrench. When using a preset-type torque wrench, be sure to tighten slowly and do not overtighten. If
a bolt makes any noise while you are torquing it, loosen the bolt and retighten it from the first step.
Specified Toque: 39 N.m (4.0 kgf.m, 29 lbf.ft)
111
Fig. 124: Tightening Cylinder Head Bolts

10. After torquing, tighten all cylinder head bolts in two steps (90° per step). If you are using a new
cylinder head bolt, tighten the bolt an extra 90°.
NOTE: Remove the cylinder head bolt if you tightened it beyond the specified
angel, and go back to step 6 of the procedure. Do not loosen it back to
the specified angel.
111
Fig. 125: Identifying Tightening Steps Of Bolts

11. Install the rocker arm assembly (see ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION ).
13. Tighten the two bolts (A) securing the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister purge valve bracket and
tighten the bolt (B) securing the harness brackets.
111
Fig. 126: Tightening Bolts Securing Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Valve
Bracket
14. Install the upper radiator hose (A) and heater hoses (B).
111
Fig. 127: Installing Upper Radiator Hose

15. Install the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) hose (A) and ground cable (B).
111
Fig. 128: Installing Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Hose

16. Install the water bypass hose (A).
111
Fig. 129: Installing Water Bypass Hose

17. Tighten the bolt (B) securing the connecting pipe.

18. Install the exhaust manifold (see EXHAUST MANIFOLD REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ).
19. Install the intake manifold (see INSTALLATION (2006 MODEL) ).
111

21. Connect the fuel feed hose (see FUEL LINE/QUICK-CONNECT FITTING INSTALLATION ),
then install the quick-connect fitting cover (A). Make sure the connector engages fully.
111
Fig. 131: Connecting Fuel Feed Hose

22. Install the intake air duct (A), then connect the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor connector (B), and
install the vacuum hose (C) and breather pipe (D).
111

24. Inspect for fuel leaks. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) (do not operate the starter) so that the fuel
pump runs for about 2 seconds and pressurizes the fuel line. Repeat this operation two or three times,
then check for fuel leakage at any point in the fuel line.
open (see COOLANT CHECK ).
CONTROL UNIT ).
27. Inspect the idle speed (see IDLE SPEED INSPECTION ).
28. Inspect the ignition timing (see IGNITION TIMING INSPECTION ).
29. Set the clock.
111
2003-07 ENGINE Engine Assembly - Accord
2003-07 ENGINE
Engine Assembly - Accord
ENGINE REMOVAL

 To avoid damaging the wire and terminals, unplug the wiring
connectors carefully while holding the connector portion.
 Mark all wiring and hoses to avoid misconnection. Also, be sure that
they do not contact other wiring or hoses, or interfere with other parts.
1. Secure the hood in the wide open position (support rod in the lower hole).
2. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the audio unit, then write down the audio presets. Make
sure the ignition switch is OFF.
5. Remove the battery.
6. Except '03-04 SULEV, LX-P models and '05-07 models: Disconnect the intake air temperature (IAT)
sensor connector (A).
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:45:09

8. Remove the air cleaner housing (see AIR CLEANER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).
9. Remove the harness clamp (A).
111
Fig. 2: Removing Harness Clamp

10. Remove the two bolts (B), and loosen the two bolts (C) securing the battery base, then remove the
battery base (D).
11. Remove the battery cables (A) from the under-hood fuse/relay box, then disconnect the harness
connector (B).
111
Fig. 3: Removing Battery Cables (A) From Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box

12. Remove the two bolts (C) securing the under-hood fuse/relay box.
13. '03-05 models: Remove the throttle cable (A) and cruise control actuator cable (B) by loosening the
locknuts (C), then slipping the cable ends out of the accelerator linkage. Take care not to bend the
cables when removing them. Always replace any kinked cable with a new one.
111
Fig. 4: Removing Throttle Cable And Cruise Control Actuator Cable

14. '06-07 models: Remove the harness clamp (A) and bolt (B), then remove the strut brace (C).
111
Fig. 5: Removing Harness Clamp And Bolt

111
15. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A), then disconnect the fuel feed hose (see FUEL
LINE/QUICK-CONNECT FITTING REMOVAL ).

111

17. '03-2005 models: Remove the harness clamp (A), then disconnect the engine wire harness connectors
(B) on the left side of the engine compartment.
111
Fig. 8: Removing Harness Clamp

18. '06-07 models: Disconnect the engine control module (ECM)/powertrain control module (PCM)
connectors (A) and the main wire harness connectors (B).
111
Fig. 9: Disconnecting Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM)

Connectors
19. '06-07 models: Disconnect the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor connector (A).
111
Fig. 10: Disconnecting Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Connector

20. '06-07 models: Remove the harness clamps (B) and grommet (C), then pull the engine wire harness
through the bulkhead.
21. M/T model: Remove the clutch slave cylinder (A), and clutch line bracket mounting bolt (B).
111
Fig. 11: Removing Clutch Slave Cylinder

22. M/T model: Remove the shift cable (A) and select cable (B).
111
Fig. 12: Removing Shift Cable

23. Disconnect the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor connector.

111
Fig. 13: Disconnecting Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Connector


25. Remove the power steering (P/S) pump (A), and the P/S hose clamp (B). Do not disconnect the P/S
hoses from the pump.
111
Fig. 14: Removing Power Steering (P/S) Pump (A)

26. Remove the A/C compressor without disconnecting the A/C hoses.
111
Fig. 15: Removing A/C Compressor

27. Remove the radiator cap.

28. Raise the vehicle on the hoist to full height.
30. Loosen the drain plug in the radiator and drain the engine coolant (see COOLANT
REPLACEMENT ).
31. Drain the transmission fluid:
REPLACEMENT )
32. Drain the engine oil (see ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT ).

33. Disconnect the stabilizer links (see STABILIZER LINK REPLACEMENT ).
111
34. Remove the damper fork (see step 3 on REMOVAL ).

35. Separate the knuckles from the lower arm ball joints (see step 6 on LOWER ARM
36. Remove the driveshafts (see step 12 on DRIVESHAFT DISASSEMBLY ). Coat all precision-
finished surfaces with clean engine oil. Tie plastic bags over the driveshaft ends.
37. Remove exhaust pipe A.
Fig. 16: Removing Exhaust Pipe

111
38. A/T model: Remove the three bolts securing the shift cable holder (A), then remove the shift cable
cover (B).
Fig. 17: Removing Shift Cable Cover

39. A/T model: Remove the spring clip (C) and control pin (D), then separate the shift cable (E) from the
control lever (F). Do not bend the cable excessively.
40. Remove the nuts securing the transmission lower front mount and transmission lower rear mount.
111
Fig. 18: Removing Spring Clip And Control Pin

41. Lower the vehicle on the lift.

42. A/T model: Remove the automatic transmission fluid (ATF) cooler hoses, then plug the line and the
hoses.
111
Fig. 19: Removing Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) Cooler Hoses

43. Remove the upper radiator hose (A) and heater hoses (B).
111
Fig. 20: Removing Upper Radiator Hose (A) And Heater Hoses
111
Fig. 21: Cleaning Any Dirt Quick Connector

45. Pull out the lock (B) by hand, then wiggle the quick connector loose, and remove it from the
thermostat cover. Do not use any tools to remove the quick connector.
46. Remove the ground cable (A), then remove the upper bracket (B).
111
Fig. 22: Removing Ground Cable

47. Attach the chain hoist to the engine as shown below.
111
Fig. 23: Attaching Chain Hoist To Engine

48. M/T model: Remove the ground cable (A), then remove the transmission upper mount/bracket
assembly (B) and clutch line clamp bracket (C).
111
Fig. 24: Removing Ground Cable & Upper Mount/Bracket Assy (MT)
49. A/T model: Remove the ground cable (A), then remove the transmission upper mount/bracket
assembly (B).
111
Fig. 25: Removing Ground Cable & Upper Mount/Bracket Assy (AT)
50. M/T model: Remove the front mount stop (A), then remove the front mount bolt (B).
111
Fig. 26: Removing Front Mount Stop (MT)

51. A/T model: Remove the vacuum hose (A) from the vacuum line. Remove the front mount stop (B)
and vacuum hose clamp bracket (C), then remove the front mount bolt (D).
111
Fig. 27: Removing Vacuum Hose (A) From Vacuum Line (AT)
52. Remove the rear mount stop (A), then remove the rear mount bolt (B).
111
Fig. 28: Removing Rear Mount Stop

53. Check that the engine/transmission is completely free of vacuum hoses, fuel and coolant hoses, and
electrical wiring.
54. Slowly lower the engine/transmission assembly about 150 mm (6 in.). Check once again that all hoses
and wires are disconnected from the engine/transmission.
55. Raise the engine/transmission assembly from under the vehicle.
ENGINE INSTALLATION
1. Install the accessory brackets and tighten their bolts to the specified torques.
111
Fig. 29: Installing Accessory Brackets

2. Install the engine/transmission assembly into position in the vehicle, then remove the chain hoist from
the engine.
NOTE: Reinstall the mounting bolts/support nuts in the sequence given.

Failure to follow this sequence may cause excessive noise and
vibration, and reduce bushing life.
3. M/T model: Tighten the front mount bolt (A), then install the front mount stop (B).
111
Fig. 30: Tightening Front Mount Bolt

4. A/T model: Tighten the front mount bolt (A), then install the front mount stop (B) and vacuum hose
clamp bracket (C). Install vacuum hose (D).
111
Fig. 31: Tightening Front Mount Bolt

5. Tighten the rear mount bolt (A), then install the rear mount stop (B).
111
Fig. 32: Tightening Rear Mount Bolt

6. Install the upper bracket (A), then tighten the bolts in the numbered sequence shown below.
111
Fig. 33: Installing Upper Bracket

7. Install the ground cable (B).

8. M/T model: Loosen the mount bolt (A), then install the transmission upper mount/bracket assembly
(B), clutch line clamp bracket (C), and ground cable (D).
111
Fig. 34: Loosening Mount Bolt

9. A/T model: Loosen the mount bolt (A) and bracket plate mounting bolts (B), then install the
transmission upper mount/bracket assembly (C), and ground cable (D).
111
Fig. 35: Loosening Mount Bolt (A) And Bracket Plate Mounting Bolts
10. M/T model: Tighten the transmission upper mount bolt.
111
Fig. 36: Tightening Transmission Upper Mount Bolt

11. A/T model: Tighten the transmission upper mount bracket plate mounting bolts (A), then tighten the
transmission upper mount bolt (B).
111
Fig. 37: Tightening Transmission Upper Mount Bracket Plate Mounting Bolts
12. Raise the vehicle on the lift to full height.

13. Tighten the nuts securing the transmission lower front mount and transmission lower rear mount.
111
Fig. 38: Tightening Nuts Securing Transmission Lower Front Mount

14. A/T model: Install the shift control cable (A).
111
Fig. 39: Installing Shift Control Cable

15. A/T model: Install the shift cable cover (B), then install the shift cable holder (C).
16. Install exhaust pipe A. Use new gaskets (B) and new self locking nuts (C).
111
Fig. 40: Installing Exhaust Pipe A

17. Install a new set ring on the end of each driveshaft, then install the driveshafts. Make sure each ring
"clicks" into place in the differential and intermediate shaft.
18. Connect the suspension lower arm ball joints (see step 8 on LOWER ARM
19. Install the damper fork (see step 2 on INSTALLATION ).
20. Connect the stabilizer links (see STABILIZER LINK REPLACEMENT ).
111
Fig. 41: Checking Quick Connector And Set Ring

connecting surface.
27. Push down the lock (A), then push the quick connector (B) onto the thermostat cover until you hear it
click.
111
Fig. 42: Pushing Down Lock

28. Install the upper radiator hose (A) and heater hoses (B).
111
Fig. 43: Installing Upper Radiator Hose

29. A/T model: Install the automatic transmission fluid (ATF) cooler hoses.
111
Fig. 44: Installing Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) Cooler Hoses

30. Install the A/C compressor.
111
Fig. 45: Installing A/C Compressor

31. Install the power steering (P/S) pump (A), and the P/S hose clamp (B).
111
Fig. 46: Installing Power Steering (P/S) Pump (A)


33. Connect the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor connector.
111
Fig. 47: Connecting Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Connector

34. M/T model: Install the select cable (A) with the plastic washers (B) washers (C), and new cotter pins
(D).
111
Fig. 48: Installing Select Cable (A) And Shift Cable

35. M/T model: Install the clutch slave cylinder (A) and clutch line bracket mounting bolt (B).
111
Fig. 49: Installing Clutch Slave Cylinder

36. '06-07 models: Push the engine control module (ECM)/powertrain control module (PCM) connectors
through the bulkhead, then install the grommet (A) and harness clamps (B).
111
Fig. 50: Installing Grommet And Harness Clamps

37. Connect the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor connector (C).
38. '03-05 models: Connect the engine wire harness connectors (A), then install the harness clamp (B).
111
Fig. 51: Connecting Engine Wire Harness Connectors

39. '06-07 models: Connect the ECM/PCM connectors (A) and main wire harness connectors (B).
111
Fig. 52: Connecting ECM/PCM Connectors

111

41. Connect the fuel feed hose (see FUEL LINE/QUICK-CONNECT FITTING INSTALLATION ),
then install the quick-connect fitting cover (A). Make sure the connector engages fully.
111
Fig. 54: Installing Quick-Connect Fitting Cover

42. '03-05 models: Install the throttle cable (see THROTTLE BODY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ),
then adjust the cable (see THROTTLE CABLE ADJUSTMENT ).
43. '03-05 models: Install the cruise control actuator cable (see CRUISE CONTROL
ACTUATOR/CABLE REPLACEMENT ), then adjust it (see CRUISE CONTROL ACTUATOR
CABLE ADJUSTMENT ).
44. '06-07 models: Install the strut brace (A), then install the harness clamp (B) and bolt (C).
111
Fig. 55: Installing Strut Brace

45. Connect the harness connector (A).
111
Fig. 56: Connecting Harness Connector

46. Install the under-hood fuse/relay box (B), then install the battery cables (C).
47. Install the battery base (A), then install the harness clamp (B).
111
Fig. 57: Installing Battery Base

48. Install the air cleaner housing (see AIR CLEANER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).
49. Install the intake air duct (A), and install the vacuum hose (B), and breather pipe (C).
111

50. Except '03-04 SULEV, LX-P models, and '05-07 models: Connect the intake air temperature (IAT)
sensor connector (D).
51. Install the battery. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and
apply grease to prevent corrosion.
52. Install the front wheels.
53. A/T model: Move the shift lever to each gear, and verify that the A/T gear position indicator follows
the transmission range switch.
54. M/T model: Check that the transmission shift into gear smoothly.
55. Inspect for fuel leaks. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) (do not operate the starter) so the fuel pump
runs for about 2 seconds and pressurizes the fuel line. Repeat this operation two or three times, then
check for fuel leakage at any point in the fuel line. ).
56. Refill the engine with engine oil (see step 4 on ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT .
57. Refill the transmission with fluid:
111
REPLACEMENT )
 Automatic transmission (see ATF REPLACEMENT ).
59. Do the ECM/PCM reset procedure (see HDS CLEAR COMMAND ).
60. Do the crankshaft position (CPK) pattern clear/CPK pattern learn procedure (see CKP PATTERN
CLEAR/CKP PATTERN LEARN ).
61. Inspect the idle speed (see IDLE SPEED INSPECTION ).
63. Check the wheel alignment (see WHEEL ALIGNMENT ).
64. Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio unit (and the navigation code if equipped), then enter the audio
presets.
65. Set the clock.
111
2003-07 ENGINE Engine Block - Accord
2003-07 ENGINE
Engine Block - Accord
SPECIAL TOOLS

111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:45:46
Fig. 2: Identifying Engine Block Component Location (1 Of 2)

111
Fig. 3: Identifying Engine Block Component Location (2 Of 2)

111
CONNECTING ROD AND CRANKSHAFT END PLAY INSPECTION

1. Remove the oil pump (see OIL PUMP REMOVAL ).
2. Remove the baffle plates (see step 8 ).
3. Measure the connecting rod end play with a feeler gauge between the connecting rod and crankshaft.
Connecting Rod End Play
Fig. 4: Measuring Connecting Rod End Play With A Feeler Gauge

4. If the connecting rod end play is out-of-tolerance, install a new connecting rod, and recheck. If it is
still out-of-tolerance; replace the crankshaft (see step 9 ).
5. Push the crankshaft firmly away from the dial indicator, and zero the dial against the end of the
crankshaft. Then pull the crankshaft firmly back toward the indicator; the dial reading should not
exceed the service limit.
Crankshaft End Play
111
Fig. 5: Pushing Crankshaft Firmly Away From Dial Indicator

6. If the end play is out-of-tolerance, replace the thrust washers and recheck, if it is still out-of-tolerance,
replace the crankshaft (see step 9 ).
CRANKSHAFT MAIN BEARING REPLACEMENT

MAIN BEARING CLEARANCE INSPECTION
1. To check main bearing-to-journal oil clearance, remove the lower block and bearing halves (see
CRANKSHAFT AND PISTON REMOVAL ).
2. Clean each main journal and bearing half with a clean shop towel.
111
3. Place one strip of plastigage across each main journal.

4. Reinstall the bearing half and lower block, then torque the bolts to 29 N.m (3.0 kgf.m, 22 lbf.ft) + 56 °
in the proper sequence (see step 18 ).
NOTE: Do not rotate the crankshaft during inspection.
5. Remove the lower block and bearing half again, and measure the widest part of the plastigage.
Main Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance No. 1,2,4,5 Journals:
Standard (New): 0.017 - 0.041 mm (0.0007 - 0.0016 in.)
No. 3 Journal:
Standard (New): 0.025 - 0.049 mm (0.0010 - 0.0019 in.)
Fig. 6: Measuring Widest Part Of Plastigage

111
6. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow, remove the crankshaft, and remove the upper half
of the bearing. Install a new, complete bearing with the same color code(s), and recheck the clearance.
Do not file, shim, or scrape the bearings or the caps to adjust clearance.
7. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the color
listed above or below that one), and check again. If the proper clearance cannot be obtained by using
the appropriate larger or smaller bearings, replace the crankshaft and start over.
MAIN BEARING SELECTION
Crankshaft Bore Code Location
1. Numbers or letters or bars have been stamped on the end of the block as a code for the size of each of
the five main journal bores. Write down the crank bore codes.
If you can't read the codes because of accumulated dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a wire brush
or scraper. Clean them only with solvent or detergent.
Fig. 7: Identifying Crankshaft Bore Code Location
111
Main Journal Code Location
2. The main journal codes are stamped on the crankshaft.
111
Fig. 8: Identifying Main Journal Code Location

111
3. Use the crank bore codes and crank journal codes to select the appropriate replacement bearings from
the following table.
NOTE:  Color code is on the edge of the bearing.

 When using bearing halves of different colors, it does not matter
which color is used in the top or bottom.
Fig. 9: Identifying Crank Bore Codes And Crank Journal Codes

CONNECTING ROD BEARING REPLACEMENT
111
ROD BEARING CLEARANCE INSPECTION

2. Remove the baffle plates (see step 8 ).
3. Remove the connecting rod cap and bearing half.
4. Clean the crankshaft rod journal and bearing half with a clean shop towel.
5. Place plastigage across the rod journal.
6. Reinstall the bearing half and cap, and torque the bolts to 20 N.m (2.0 kgf.m, 14 lbf.ft) + 90°.
NOTE: Do not rotate the crankshaft during inspection.
7. Remove the rod cap and bearing half, and measure the widest part of the plastigage.
Connecting Rod Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance
Fig. 10: Measuring Widest Part Of Plastigage

8. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow, remove the upper half of the bearing, install a new,
111
complete bearing with the same color code(s), and recheck the clearance. Do not file, shim, or scrape
the bearings or the caps to adjust clearance.
9. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the color
listed above or below that one), and check clearance again. If the proper clearance cannot be obtained
by using the appropriate larger or smaller bearing, replace the crankshaft and start over.
ROD BEARING SELECTION
1. Inspect each connecting rod for cracks and heat damage.
Connecting Rod Big End Bore Code Locations
2. Each rod has a tolerance range from 0 to 0.024 mm (0.0009 in.), in 0.006 mm (0.0002 in.) increments,
depending on the size of its big end bore. It's then stamped with a number or bar (1, 2, 3 or 4/I, II, III,
or IIII) indicating the range. You may find any combination of numbers and bars in any engine. (Half
the number or bar is stamped on the bearing cap, the other half is on the rod.)
If you can't read the code because of an accumulation of oil and varnish, do not scrub it with a wire
brush or scraper. Clean it only with solvent or detergent.
Normal Bore Size: 51.0 mm (2.01 in.)
111
Fig. 11: Identifying Connecting Rod Big End Bore Code Locations
Connecting Rod Journal Code Location
3. The connecting rod journal codes are stamped on the crankshaft.
Connecting Rod Journal Code Location (Letters or Bars)
111
Fig. 12: Identifying Connecting Rod Journal Code Location

111
4. Use the big end bore codes and rod journal codes to select appropriate replacement bearings from the
following table.
NOTE:  The color code is on the edge of the bearing.

 When using bearing halves of different colors, it does not matter
which color is used in the top or bottom.
Fig. 13: Identifying Big End Bore Codes And Rod Journal Codes
OIL PAN REMOVAL

1. If the engine is out of the vehicle, go to step 19.
2. Drain the engine oil (see ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT ).
3. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the audio unit (and navigation code if equipped), then
write down the audio preset.
111
4. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery first, then disconnect the positive cable. Remove the
battery.
5. Remove the air cleaner assembly (see AIR CLEANER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).
6. Remove the harness clamp. Remove the two bolts, and loosen the two bolts securing the battery base,
then remove the battery base (see step 9 on ENGINE REMOVAL ).
7. Remove the clutch slave cylinder, and clutch line bracket mounting bolt (M/T) (see step 21 on
ENGINE REMOVAL ).
8. Remove the ground cable, then remove the transmission upper mount/bracket assembly:
 Manual transmission (see step 48 on ENGINE REMOVAL )
 Automatic transmission (see step 49 on ENGINE REMOVAL )
9. Remove the front mount stop, then remove the front mount bolt (see step 50 on ENGINE
REMOVAL ).
10. Remove the rear mount stop, then remove the rear mount bolt (see step 52 on ENGINE
REMOVAL ).
11. Raise the vehicle on the hoist to full height.
13. Disconnect the stabilizer links (see STABILIZER LINK REPLACEMENT ).
14. Remove the left side damper fork (see REMOVAL ).
15. Disconnect the left side suspension lower arm ball joint (see LOWER ARM
16. Remove the left side driveshaft (see step 12 on DRIVESHAFT DISASSEMBLY ). Coat all
precision-finished surfaces with clean engine oil. Tie plastic bag over the driveshaft end.
17. Remove the nuts securing the transmission lower front mount and transmission lower rear mount (see
step 40 on ENGINE REMOVAL ).
18. Use a transmission jack to lift the transmission 40-55 mm (1.6-2.2 in.).
111
Fig. 14: Using A Transmission Jack To Lift Transmission

19. Remove the stiffener.
111
Fig. 15: Removing Stiffener

20. Remove the bolts/nuts securing the oil pan.

21. Drive an oil pan seal cutter between the oil pan and engine block.
111
Fig. 16: Driving An Oil Pan Seal Cutter Between Oil Pan And Engine Block
22. Cut the oil pan seal by striking the side of the cutter to slide the cutter along the oil pan.
111
Fig. 17: Cutting Oil Pan Seal By Striking Side Of Cutter

23. Remove the oil pan.
CRANKSHAFT AND PISTON REMOVAL

1. Remove the engine assembly (see ENGINE REMOVAL ).
2. Remove the transmission:
 Manual transmission (see TRANSMISSION REMOVAL )
 Automatic transmission (see TRANSMISSION REMOVAL )
3. M/T model: Remove the pressure plate (see PRESSURE PLATE AND CLUTCH DISC
REMOVAL ), clutch disc (see CLUTCH REPLACEMENT ), and flywheel (see FLYWHEEL
INSPECTION ).
4. A/T model: Remove the drive plate (see DRIVE PLATE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ).
111
5. Remove the oil pan (see OIL PAN REMOVAL ).

8. Remove the baffle plates.
Fig. 18: Removing Baffle Plates

9. Remove the 8 mm bolts.
111
Fig. 19: Removing Bolts

10. Remove the bearing cap bolts. To prevent warpage, unscrew the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a time:
repeat the sequence until all bolts are loosened.
111
Fig. 20: Removing Bearing Cap Bolts

11. Remove the lower block and bearings. Keep all bearings in order.
111
Fig. 21: Removing Lower Block And Bearings

12. Remove the rod caps/bearings. Keep all caps/ bearings in order.
13. Lift the crankshaft out of the engine, being careful not to damage the journals.
111
Fig. 22: Lifting Crankshaft Out Of Engine

111
14. Remove the upper bearing halves from the connecting rods, and set them aside with their respective
caps.
15. If you can feel a ridge of metal or hard carbon around the top of each cylinder, remove it with a ridge
reamer (A). Follow the reamer manufacturer's instructions. If the ridge is not removed, it may damage
the pistons as they are pushed out.
Fig. 23: Removing Upper Bearing Halves From Connecting Rods

16. Use the wooden handle of a hammer (A) to drive out the pistons (B).
111
Fig. 24: Driving Out Pistons

17. To avoid mixup on reassembly, mark each piston/connecting rod assembly with its cylinder number.
NOTE: The existing number on the connecting rod does not indicate its
position in the engine, it indicates the rod bore size.
18. Reinstall the connecting rod bearings and caps after removing each piston/connecting rod assembly.
19. Reinstall the lower block and bearings on the engine in the proper order.
CRANKSHAFT INSPECTION
OUT-OF-ROUND AND TAPER
1. Remove the crankshaft from the engine block (see CRANKSHAFT AND PISTON REMOVAL ).
2. Clean the crankshaft oil passages with pipe cleaners or a suitable brush.
3. Clean the keyway and threads.
4. Measure out-of round at the middle of each rod and main journal in two places. The difference
between measurements on each journal must not be more than the service limit.
Journal Out-of-Round

111
Fig. 25: Measuring Out-Of Round At Middle Of Each Rod And Main Journal
111
5. Measure taper at the edges of each rod and main journal. The difference between measurements on
each journal must not be more than the service limit.
Journal Taper
Straightness
6. Place the engine block on the surface plate.

7. Clean and install the bearings on the No. 1 and No. 5 journals of the engine block.
8. Lower the crankshaft into the block.
9. Measure the runout on all of the main journals. Rotate the crankshaft two complete revolutions. The
difference between measurements on each journal must not be more than the service limit.
Crankshaft Total Runout
111
Fig. 26: Measuring Runout On All Of Main Journals

BLOCK AND PISTON INSPECTION

1. Remove the crankshaft and pistons (see CRANKSHAFT AND PISTON REMOVAL ).
2. Check the piston for distortion or cracks.
3. Measure the piston diameter at a point 13 mm (0.5 in.) from the bottom of the skirt. There are two
standard-size pistons (No Letter or A, and B). The letter is stamped on the top of the piston. Letters
are also stamped on the block as cylinder bore sizes.
Piston Diameter
Standard (New):
No Letter (or A): 86.980-86.990 mm (3.4244-3.4248 in.)
111
B: 86.970-86.980 mm (3.4240-3.4244 in.)
Service Limit:
No Letter (or A): 86.930 mm (3.4224 in.)
B: 86.920 mm (3.4220 in.)
Oversize Piston Diameter
0.25: 87.230-87.240 mm (3.4342-3.4346 in.)
111
Fig. 27: Measuring Piston Diameter At A Point 13 Mm (0.5 In.) From Bottom Of Skirt
4. Measure wear and taper in direction X and Y at three levels in each cylinder as shown in Fig. 28. If
measurements in any cylinder are beyond the Oversize Bore Service Limit, replace the block. If the
block is to be rebored, refer to step 7 after reboring.
Cylinder Bore Size

111
Standard (New):
A or I: 87.010-87.020 mm (3.4256-3.4260 in.)
B or II: 87.000-87.010 mm (3.4252-3.4256 in.)
Oversize
0.25: 87.250-87.260 mm (3.4350-3.4354 in.)
Reboring limit: 0.25 mm (0.01 in.) max.
Bore Taper
Limit: (Difference between first and third measurement) 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
111
Fig. 28: Measuring Wear And Taper In Direction X And Y

111
5. Scored or scratched cylinder bores must be honed.

6. Check the top of the block for warpage. Measure along the edges and across the center as shown in
Fig. 29.
Engine Block Warpage
Fig. 29: Checking Top Of Block For Warpage

111
Fig. 30: Identifying Precision Straight Edge

7. Calculate the difference between the cylinder bore diameter and the piston diameter. If the clearance
is near or exceeds the service limit, inspect the piston and engine block for excessive wear.
Piston-to-Cylinder Bore Clearance
111
Fig. 31: Calculating Difference Between Cylinder Bore Diameter And Piston Diameter
CYLINDER BORE HONING

Only a scored or scratched cylinder bore must be honed.
1. Measure the cylinder bores (see step 4 ).
If the block is to be reused, hone the cylinders and remeasure the bores. Only scored or scratched
cylinder bores must be honed.
2. Hone the cylinder bores with honing oil and a fine (400 grit) stone in a 60 degree cross-hatch pattern
111
(A).
NOTE:  Use only a rigid hone with 400 grit or finer stone such as Sunnen,
Ammco, or equivalent.
 Do not use stones that are worn or broken.
Fig. 32: Honing Cylinder Bores With Honing Oil And A Fine (400 Grit) Stone
3. When honing is complete, thoroughly clean the engine block of all metal particles. Wash the cylinder
bores with hot soapy water, then dry and oil them immediately to prevent rusting. Never use solvent,
it will only redistribute the grit on the cylinder walls.
4. If scoring or scratches are still present in the cylinder bores after honing to the service limit, rebore the
engine block. Some light vertical scoring and scratching is acceptable if it is not deep enough to catch
your fingernail and does not run the full length of the bore.
PISTON, PIN, AND CONNECTING ROD REPLACEMENT

DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove the piston from the engine block (see CRANKSHAFT AND PISTON REMOVAL ).
2. Apply new engine oil to the piston pin snap rings (A), and turn them in the ring grooves until the end
gaps are lined up with the cutouts in the piston pin bores (B).
111
NOTE: Take care not to damage the ring grooves.
Fig. 33: Applying Engine Oil To Piston Pin Snap Rings

3. Remove both snap rings (A). Start at the cutout in the piston pin bore. Remove the snap rings
carefully so they do not go flying or get lost. Wear eye protection.
111
Fig. 34: Removing Both Snap Rings

4. Heat the piston and connecting rod assembly to about 158 °F (70 °C), then remove the piston pin.
111
Fig. 35: Heating Piston And Connecting Rod Assembly

INSPECTION
NOTE: Inspect the piston, piston pin, and connecting rod when they are at room
temperature.
1. Measure the diameter of the piston pin.
Piston Pin Diameter
111
Fig. 36: Measuring Diameter Of Piston Pin

2. Zero the dial indicator to the piston pin diameter.
111
Fig. 37: Zero Dial Indicator To Piston Pin Diameter

111
3. Check the difference between the piston pin diameter and piston pin hole diameter in the piston.
Piston Pin-to-Piston Clearance
Standard (New): -0.005 to +0.002 mm (-0.00020 to +0.00008 in.)
111
Fig. 38: Checking Difference Between Piston Pin Diameter And Piston Pin Hole Diameter In
Piston
4. Measure the piston pin-to-connecting rod clearance.
Piston Pin-to-Connecting Rod Clearance
Fig. 39: Measuring Piston Pin-To-Connecting Rod Clearance

REASSEMBLY
1. Install a piston pin snap ring (A) only on one side.

111
Fig. 40: Installing A Piston Pin Snap Ring

2. Coat the piston pin bore in the piston, the bore in the connecting rod, and the piston pin with new
engine oil.
3. Heat the piston to about 158 °F (70 °C).
111
Fig. 41: Heating Piston To About 158°F (70 °C)

4. Install the piston pin (A). Assemble the piston (B) and connecting rod (C) with the arrow (D) and the
embossed mark (E) on the same side.
111
Fig. 42: Installing Piston Pin

5. Install the remaining snap ring (F).

6. Turn the snap rings in the ring grooves until the end gaps are positioned at the bottom of the piston.
PISTON RING REPLACEMENT

111
1. Remove the piston from the engine block (see CRANKSHAFT AND PISTON REMOVAL ).
2. Using a ring expander (A), remove the old piston rings (B).
Fig. 43: Removing Piston Rings

3. Clean all ring grooves thoroughly with a squared-off broken ring or ring groove cleaner with a blade
to fit the piston grooves.
The top and 2nd ring grooves are 1.2 mm (0.05 in.) wide. The oil ring groove is 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)
wide. File down a blade if necessary.
Do not use a wire brush to clean the ring grooves, or cut the ring grooves deeper with the cleaning
tools.
111
NOTE: If the piston is to be separated from the connecting rod, do not install
new rings yet.
4. Using a piston, push a new ring (A) into the cylinder bore 15-20 mm (0.6-0.8 in.) from the bottom.
Fig. 44: Pushing Ring Into Cylinder Bore

5. Measure the piston ring end-gap (B) with a feeler gauge:

 If the gap is too small, check to see if you have the proper rings for your engine.
 If the gap is too large, recheck the cylinder bore diameter against the wear limits (see BLOCK
AND PISTON INSPECTION ). If the bore is over the service limit, the engine block must be
rebored.
Piston Ring End-Gap
Top Ring:
111
Second Ring:
Oil Ring:
6. Install the top ring and second ring as shown below. The top ring (A) has a T, 1A, or 1R mark and the
second ring (B) has a 2T, 2A, or 2R mark. The manufacturing marks (C) must be facing upward.
111
Fig. 45: Installing Top Ring And Second Ring

7. Rotate the rings in their grooves to make sure they do not bind.
8. Position the ring end gaps as shown below:
111
Fig. 46: Positioning Ring End Gaps

9. After installing a new set of rings, measure the ring-to-groove clearances:
Top Ring Clearance
Second Ring Clearance
111
Fig. 47: Measuring Ring-To-Groove Clearances

PISTON INSTALLATION
IF THE CRANKSHAFT IS ALREADY INSTALLED
1. Set the crankshaft to bottom dead center (BDC) for each cylinder.
2. Remove the connecting rod caps, then install the ring compressor. Check that the bearing is securely
in place.
3. Position the mark (A) to face the cam chain side of the engine.
111
111
Fig. 48: Positioning Mark To Face Cam Chain Side Of Engine

4. Position the piston in the cylinder, and tap it in using the wooden handle of a hammer (A).
Maintain downward force on the ring compressor (B) to prevent the rings from expanding before
entering the cylinder bore.
Fig. 49: Positioning Piston In Cylinder

5. Stop after the ring compressor pops free, and check the connecting rod-to-crank journal alignment
111
before pushing the piston into place.

6. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance with plastigage (see CONNECTING ROD BEARING
REPLACEMENT ).
7. Inspect the connecting rod bolts (see Connecting Rod Bolt Inspection ).
8. Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads, then install the rod caps with bearings. Torque the bolts to
20 N.m (2.0 kgf.m, 14 lbf.ft).
9. Tighten the connecting rod bolts an additional 90°.
NOTE: Remove the connecting rod bolt if you tightened it beyond the specified
angle, and go back to step 7 of the procedure. Do not loosen it back to
the specified angle.
Fig. 50: Tightening Connecting Rod Bolts

111
IF THE CRANKSHAFT IS NOT INSTALLED
1. Remove the connecting rod caps, then install the ring compressor, and check that the bearing is
securely in place.
2. Position the mark (A) to face the cam chain side of the engine.
111
111
Fig. 51: Positioning Mark

3. Position the piston in the cylinder, and tap it in using the wooden handle of a hammer (A).
Maintain downward force on the ring compressor (B) to prevent the rings from expanding before
entering the cylinder bore.
Fig. 52: Positioning Piston In Cylinder

4. Position all pistons at top dead center (TDC).

111
CONNECTING ROD BOLT INSPECTION

1. Measure the diameter of each connecting rod bolt at point A and point B.
111
Fig. 53: Measuring Diameter Of Each Connecting Rod Bolt At Point And Point
2. Calculate the difference in diameter between point A and point B.
Point A-Point B = Difference in Diameter
Difference in Diameter:
Specification: 0-0.1 mm (0-0.004 in.)
3. If the difference in diameter is out of tolerance, replace the connecting rod bolt.
CRANKSHAFT INSTALLATION
 Driver 07749-0010000
 Attachment, 24 x 26 mm 07746-0010700
 Oil seal driver attachment 96 07ZAD-PNAA100
1. With a manual transmission, install the crankshaft end bushing when replacing the crankshaft.
Using the special tools, drive in the crankshaft end bushing until the special tools bottom against the
crankshaft.
111
Fig. 54: Driving In Crankshaft End Bushing

2. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance with plastigage (see CONNECTING ROD BEARING
REPLACEMENT ).
3. Check the main bearing clearance with plastigage (see CRANKSHAFT MAIN BEARING
REPLACEMENT ).
4. Install the bearing halves in the engine block and connecting rods.
5. Apply a coat of new engine oil to the main bearings and rod bearings.
6. Hold the crankshaft so rod journal No. 2 and rod journal No. 3 are straight up, and lower the
crankshaft into the block.
7. Apply new engine oil to the thrust washer surfaces. Install the thrust washers (A) in the No. 4 journal
of the engine block.
111
Fig. 55: Applying Engine Oil To Thrust Washer Surfaces

8. Inspect the connecting rod bolts (see Connecting Rod Bolt Inspection ).
9. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the connecting rod bolts.
10. Seat the rod journals into connecting rod No. 1 and connecting rod No. 4. Line up the mark (B) on the
connecting rod and cap, then install the caps and bolts finger-tight.
11. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise, and seat the journals into connecting rod No. 2 and connecting rod
No. 3. Line up the mark on the connecting rod and cap, then install the caps and bolts finger-tight.
12. Tighten the connecting rod bolts to 20 N.m (2.0 kgf.m, 14 lbf.ft).
13. Tighten the connecting rod bolts an additional 90°.
NOTE: Remove the connecting rod bolt if you tightened it beyond the specified
111
angle, and go back to step 8 of the procedure. Do not loosen it back to

the specified angle.
Fig. 56: Tightening Connecting Rod Bolts

14. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the lower block mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt holes.
15. Clean and dry the lower block mating surfaces.
to the engine block mating surface of the lower block and to the inner threads of the bolt holes.
111

17. Put the lower block on the engine block.

18. Tighten the bearing cap bolts in sequence to 29 N.m (3.0 kgf.m, 22 lbf.ft).
111
Fig. 58: Tightening Bearing Cap Bolts

19. Tighten the bearing cap bolts an additional 56°.
111
Fig. 59: Tightening Bearing Cap Bolts An Additional 56°

20. Tighten the 8 mm bolts in sequence to 22 N.m (2.2 kgf.m, 16 lbf.ft).
111

21. Use the special tools to drive a new oil seal squarely into the block to the specified installed height.
111
Fig. 61: Driving Oil Seal Squarely Into Block

22. Measure the distance between the engine block (A) and oil seal (B).
111
Fig. 62: Measuring Distance Between Engine Block And Oil Seal
23. Install the baffle plates.
111
Fig. 63: Installing Baffle Plates

24. Install the oil pump (see OIL PUMP INSTALLATION ).

25. Install the oil pan (see OIL PAN INSTALLATION ).
26. Install the cylinder head (see CYLINDER HEAD INSTALLATION ).
27. M/T model: Install the flywheel (see FLYWHEEL REPLACEMENT ), clutch disc (see CLUTCH
DISC AND PRESSURE PLATE INSTALLATION ), and pressure plate (see CLUTCH DISC
AND PRESSURE PLATE INSTALLATION ),
111
28. A/T model: Install the drive plate (see DRIVE PLATE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ).
29. Install the transmission:
 Manual transmission (see TRANSMISSION INSTALLATION )
 Automatic transmission (see TRANSMISSION INSTALLATION )
30. Install the engine assembly (see ENGINE INSTALLATION ).
NOTE: Whenever any crankshaft or connecting rod bearing is replaced, it is

necessary after reassembly to run the engine at idling speed until it
reaches normal operating temperature, then continue to run it for about
15 minutes.
OIL PAN INSTALLATION

1. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the oil pan mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt holes.
2. Clean and dry the oil pan mating surfaces.
3. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-004, 08718-0001, 08718-0002, 8718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to
the engine block mating surface of the oil pan and to the inner threads of the bolt holes.
111

4. Install the oil pan.

5. Tighten the bolts in two or three steps. In the final step, tighten all bolts, in sequence, to 12 N.m (1.2
kgf.m, 8.7 lbf.ft). Wipe off the excess liquid gasket on the each side of crankshaft pulley and
flywheel/drive plate.
 Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after installing the oil
pan.
111

6. Install the stiffener.
111
Fig. 66: Installing Stiffener

7. If the engine is still in the vehicle, do the following steps.

8. Tighten the nuts securing the transmission lower front mount and transmission lower rear mount (see
step 13 on ENGINE INSTALLATION ).
9. Install a new set ring on the end of the left side driveshaft, then install the driveshaft. Make sure each
ring "clicks" into place in the differential.
10. Connect the left side suspension lower arm ball joint (see step 8 on LOWER ARM
11. Install the left side damper fork (see step 2 on INSTALLATION ).
12. Connect the stabilizer links (see STABILIZER LINK REPLACEMENT ).
14. Tighten the front mount bolt, then install the front mount stop (see step 3 on ENGINE
111
INSTALLATION ).
15. Tighten the rear mount bolt, then install the rear mount stop (see step 5 on ENGINE
INSTALLATION ).
16. Loosen the mount bolt, then install the transmission upper mount/bracket assembly, clutch line clamp
bracket and ground cable (M/T) (see step 8 on ENGINE INSTALLATION ).
17. Loosen the mount bolt and bracket plate mounting bolts, then install the transmission upper
mount/bracket assembly, and ground cable (A/T) (see step 9 on ENGINE INSTALLATION ).
18. Tighten the transmission upper mount bolt (M/T) (see step 10 on ENGINE INSTALLATION ).
19. Tighten the transmission upper mount bracket plate mounting bolts, then tighten the transmission
upper mount bolt (A/T) (see step 11 on ENGINE INSTALLATION ).
20. Install the clutch slave cylinder and clutch line bracket mounting bolt (M/T) (see step 35 on ENGINE
INSTALLATION ).
21. Install the battery base, then install the harness clamp (see step 47 on ENGINE INSTALLATION ).
22. Install the air cleaner assembly (see AIR CLEANER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).
23. Install the battery. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and
apply grease to prevent corrosion.
24. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's radio
station presets.
25. Set the clock.
TRANSMISSION END CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL INSTALLATION - IN CAR

 Driver 07749-0010000
 Oil seal driver attachment 96 07ZAD-PNAA100
1. Remove the transmission:

 Manual transmission (see TRANSMISSION REMOVAL )
 Automatic transmission (see TRANSMISSION REMOVAL )
2. M/T model: Remove the pressure plate (see PRESSURE PLATE AND CLUTCH DISC
REMOVAL ), clutch disc (see CLUTCH REPLACEMENT ), and flywheel (see FLYWHEEL
REPLACEMENT ).
3. A/T model: Remove the drive plate (see DRIVE PLATE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ).
4. Clean and dry the crankshaft oil seal housing.
5. Use the special tools to drive a new oil seal squarely into the block to the specified installed height.
111
Fig. 67: Driving Oil Seal Squarely Into Block

6. Measure the distance between the engine block (A) and oil seal (B).
111
Fig. 68: Measuring Distance Between Engine Block And Oil Seal
7. M/T model: Install the flywheel (see FLYWHEEL REPLACEMENT ), clutch disc (see CLUTCH
DISC AND PRESSURE PLATE INSTALLATION ), and pressure plate (see CLUTCH DISC
AND PRESSURE PLATE INSTALLATION ).
8. A/T model: Install the drive plate (see DRIVE PLATE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ).
9. Install the transmission:
 Manual transmission (see TRANSMISSION INSTALLATION )
 Automatic transmission (see TRANSMISSION INSTALLATION )
111
2003-07 ENGINE Engine Mount Control System - Accord
2003-07 ENGINE
Engine Mount Control System - Accord
Fig. 1: Identifying Engine Mount Control System Components

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
A/T
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:46:56
Fig. 2: Wiring Diagram - Engine Mount Control System Circuit

TROUBLESHOOTING
111
Vacuum pump/gauge, 0---30 in.Hg
Snap-on YA4000A or equivalent, commercially available
NOTE: Check the vacuum hoses and lines for damage and proper connections
before troubleshooting.
Follow this procedure if the engine vibrates excessively when idling.
A/T
1. Start the engine, and let it idle (see IDLE SPEED INSPECTION ).
2. Raise the engine speed from idling to 2,000 rpm.
3. Check the MOUNT CTRL SOL in the PGM-FI DATA LIST with the Honda Diagnostic System
(HDS).
Is ON indicated at idling and OFF indicated at 2,000 rpm?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Update the powertrain control module (PCM) if it does not have the latest software (see
UPDATING THE ECM/PCM ), or substitute a known-good PCM (see SUBSTITUTE THE
ECM/PCM ), then recheck. If the engine mount control system works properly, and the PCM
was updated, the troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the original
PCM (see ECM/PCM REPLACEMENT ).
5. Disconnect the engine mount control solenoid valve 2P connector from the engine mount control
solenoid valve.
7. Measure the voltage between engine mount control solenoid valve 2P connector terminal No.2 and
body ground.
111
Fig. 3: Measuring Voltage Between Engine Mount Control Solenoid Valve 2P Connector
Terminal And Body Ground

YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Repair an open in the wire between the engine mount control solenoid valve 2P connector
terminal No. 2 and No. 18 (15A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
8. Measure voltage between engine mount control solenoid valve 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No.
2.
111
Terminals
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Repair an open in the wire between PCM (B15) and the engine mount control solenoid
valve 2P connector. If the wire is OK, update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see UPDATING THE ECM/PCM ), or substitute a known-good PCM (see SUBSTITUTE
THE ECM/PCM ), and recheck. If the engine mount control system works properly, and the
PCM was updated, the troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see ECM/PCM REPLACEMENT ).
9. Raise the engine speed above 1,000 rpm.
111
10. Measure the voltage between engine mount control solenoid valve 2P connector terminals No. 1 and
No. 2.
Terminals
YES - Repair a short to body ground in the wire between PCM (B15) and the engine mount
control solenoid valve. If the wire is OK, update the PCM if it does not have the latest software
(see UPDATING THE ECM/PCM ), or substitute a known-good PCM (see SUBSTITUTE
THE ECM/PCM ), and recheck. If the engine mount control system works properly, and the
PCM was updated, the troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see ECM/PCM REPLACEMENT ).
111
NO - Go to step 11.
11. Disconnect the upper vacuum hose (A) from the engine mount control solenoid valve (B), and connect
a vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in. Hg, to the hose. Apply about 20 in.Hg of vacuum, and wait 20
seconds.
Fig. 6: Disconnecting The Upper Vacuum Hose From The Engine Mount Control Solenoid
Valve
Does the engine mount hold vacuum?

NO - Either the vacuum hose or the engine mount has a vacuum leak. Repair as needed.
12. Release the vacuum, then apply vacuum again.
Is there a noticeable change in idle smoothness with and without vacuum applied?
111
NO - Replace the front engine mount.

13. Connect a vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in. Hg, to the engine mount control solenoid valve (A).
Fig. 7: Connecting Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0---30 in. Hg, To The Engine Mount Control Solenoid
Valve
Is there manifold vacuum at idle, and a decrease in manifold vacuum when you raise the engine speed
above 1,000 rpm?

NO - Replace the engine mount control solenoid valve.
111
HONDA 3.0L & 3.5L V6 - Except Accord Hybrid
HONDA
3.0L & 3.5L V6 - Except Accord Hybrid
MANUFACTURER'S SUGGESTED SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

Normal replacement interval is at 105,000 miles or 84 months. Replace at 60,000 miles if car is regularly
driven in extreme temperatures (over 110°F, or under -20°F).
REMOVAL & INSTALLATION
CAUTION: The 3.0L is an interference engine. Do not rotate camshaft or crankshaft

when timing belt is removed, or engine damage may occur.
TIMING BELT
Removal
1. Disconnect negative battery cable. Turn crankshaft pulley so that No. 1 piston is at TDC on
compression stroke. White mark on crankshaft pulley should align with pointer on front cover.
Remove right front wheel. Remove lower engine splash shield. Move auto-tensioner to relieve
tension, then remove the generator and power steering pump drive belt(s).
2. Support engine with a jack and wood block under the oil pan. Remove ground cable (if necessary),
then remove engine side mount bracket. If necessary, remove dipstick tube from front of engine
(discard "O" ring). Remove crankshaft pulley. See Fig. 1.
3. Remove upper and lower timing belt covers. See Fig. 2. If reusing timing belt, mark direction of belt
rotation for installation reference.
4. Remove one of the battery clamp bolts from battery tray. Grind threaded end of bolt to a partial point
(about 45-degree chamfer). Thread battery bolt as shown to hold timing belt adjuster in installed
position (hand tighten ONLY). See Fig. 3.
5. If applicable, remove timing belt guide plate from front of crankshaft sprocket. Remove engine mount
bracket from front of engine.
6. On 1998-02 Accord, loosen timing belt idler pulley bolt 5-6 turns and remove timing belt. On all other
models, remove idler pulley bolt and idler pulley, then remove timing belt.
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:48:03
Fig. 1: Removing Crankshaft Pulley Bolt

111
Fig. 2: Exploded View Of Timing Belt & Components

111
Fig. 3: Installing Battery Clamp Bolt On Auto-Tensioner

Installation (New Belt)
1. Ensure that engine is at TDC. Align dimple on timing belt drive pulley with pointer on oil pump. See
Fig. 4. Align camshaft pulleys with pointers on back covers.
2. Remove battery clamp bolt from back cover. Remove the timing belt auto-tensioner. For auto-
tensioner with removable bolt, go to next step. For models with sealed auto-tensioner, go to step 5.
For identification, see Fig. 5 and Fig. 6 .
CAUTION: Handle auto-tensioner carefully so oil does not spill or leak out.
Replace any oil that may leak out. Capacity is 0.22 fl. oz. (6.5 ml.).
3. Hold auto-tensioner with maintenance bolt pointing up. Remove maintenance bolt. See Fig. 5. Clamp
auto-tensioner in soft-jawed vise. DO NOT grip auto-tensioner housing. Insert flat-bladed screwdriver
into maintenance hole. Place stopper on auto-tensioner while turning screwdriver clockwise to
compress tensioner to bottom.
4. Replace any oil that may have spilled out of auto-tensioner. Reinstall maintenance bolt with NEW
gasket. Ensure no oil is leaking around maintenance bolt, then reinstall auto-tensioner onto engine
with stopper in place.
NOTE: When compressing sealed auto-tensioners, compression pressure

should not exceed 2200 lbs. (9800 N).
111
5. Place sealed auto-tensioner in press. SLOWLY compress tensioner until pin can be inserted through
tensioner body, and insert pin. See Fig. 6. Install auto-tensioner onto engine.
6. On all models except 1998-02 Accord, install battery clamp bolt into back cover. On 2003-05 models,
apply liquid thread lock to idler pulley bolt and loosely install idler pulley.
7. On all models, install timing belt in counterclockwise direction in the following sequence: Crankshaft
pulley, idler pulley, front camshaft pulley, water pump pulley, rear camshaft pulley and tension adjust
pulley. See Fig. 7. Ensure crankshaft and camshaft pulleys remained aligned with marks on back
cover. Tighten idler pulley bolt to specification. See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS.
8. Remove stopper or pin from auto-tensioner. Remove battery clamp bolt from back cover, if necessary.
Install engine mount bracket to the front of engine. If applicable, install timing belt guide plate with
concave surface facing out. Install lower cover, then upper front and rear covers. Clean, then install
crankshaft pulley. Lubricate crankshaft pulley bolt threads and install bolt. Tighten crankshaft pulley
bolt to specification. See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS.
9. Rotate crankshaft about 5-6 turns clockwise to position timing belt on pulleys. Ensure crankshaft and
camshaft pulleys are aligned at TDC. Crankshaft pulley White mark should be aligned with pointer on
front cover. Remove rubber plugs from upper covers to check camshaft pulley positions.
10. If either camshaft is not at TDC, remove timing belt and readjust position. To complete installation,
reverse removal procedure. Tighten all fasteners to specification. See TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS. Adjust drive belts to proper tension.
11. On 2003-04 Accord and all 2005 models, perform Powertrain Control Module (PCM) reset procedure
and Crankshaft Position (CKP) pattern learn procedure. See RESET PROCEDURES.
111
Fig. 4: Aligning Crankshaft & Camshaft Timing Marks

111
Fig. 5: Compressing Auto-Tensioner (1998-02 Accord & 1999 Odyssey)

111
Fig. 6: Compressing Auto-Tensioner (2003-05 Accord, 2000-05 Odyssey & Pilot)

111
Fig. 7: Installing Timing Belt

Installation (Used Belt)
1. Ensure that engine is at TDC. Align dimple on timing belt drive pulley with pointer on oil pump. See
Fig. 4. Align camshaft pulleys with pointers on back covers.
2. On 2003-05 models, apply liquid thread lock to idler pulley bolt, and loosely install idler pulley. If
auto-tensioner has extended and timing belt cannot be installed, perform new belt installation
procedure. See INSTALLATION (NEW BELT). On all other models, if auto-tensioner has extended
and timing belt cannot be installed, remove and compress auto-tensioner. Install auto-tensioner.
3. On all models, install timing belt in counterclockwise direction in the following sequence: Crankshaft
pulley, idler pulley, front camshaft pulley, water pump pulley, rear camshaft pulley and tension adjust
pulley. See Fig. 7. Ensure crankshaft and camshaft pulleys remained aligned with marks on back
cover. Tighten idler pulley bolt to specification. See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS.
4. Remove battery clamp bolt from back cover. Install engine mount bracket to the front of engine. If
applicable, install timing belt guide plate with concave surface facing out. Install lower cover, then
upper front and rear covers. Clean, then install crankshaft pulley. Lubricate crankshaft pulley bolt
threads and install bolt. Tighten crankshaft pulley bolt to specification. See TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS.
5. Rotate crankshaft about 5-6 turns clockwise to position timing belt on pulleys. Ensure crankshaft and
camshaft pulleys are aligned at TDC. Crankshaft pulley White mark should be aligned with pointer on
front cover. Remove rubber plugs from upper covers to check camshaft pulley positions.
6. If either camshaft is not at TDC, remove timing belt and readjust position. To complete installation,
reverse removal procedure. Tighten all fasteners to specification. See TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS. Adjust drive belts to proper tension.
111
7. On 2003-04 Accord and all 2005 models, perform Powertrain Control Module (PCM) reset procedure
and Crankshaft Position (CKP) pattern learn procedure. See RESET PROCEDURES.
RESET PROCEDURES
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) RESET PROCEDURE/CLEARING DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODES
To clear codes using the Honda PGM Tester or the HDS, use the "CLEAR COMMAND". The PCM stores
data and DTCs to correct the system even when there is no electrical power (such as the No. 10 BACK UP
fuse removed or battery negative cable disconnected).
Honda PGM Tester and HDS has 3 kinds of clear commands:
 DTC Clear - This command erases all stored DTC codes and Freeze Data.
 PCM Clear - This command erases all stored DTC codes, Freeze Data and all specific data to correct
the system except CKP pattern.
 CKP Pattern Clear - This command erases only CKP pattern data. This command is for the repair of
a misfire or CKP sensor. If CKP pattern data is cleared from PCM, you must do the CKP pattern
relearn procedure by test drive. See CKP PATTERN LEARN PROCEDURE.
CKP PATTERN LEARN PROCEDURE
NOTE: Enable criteria: Engine coolant temperature must be 176°F (80°C) or higher.
1. Having cleared the CKP pattern from PCM, leave Honda PGM Tester or the HDS connected to Data
Link Connector (DLC) and turn ignition off. Turn ignition on. Wait for 30 seconds.
2. Test drive the vehicle on a level road. Decelerate (with throttle fully closed) from engine speed of
2500 RPM to 1000 RPM with A/T in "2" position.
3. Stop vehicle. DO NOT turn ignition off. Select the ALL DATA list in DATA LIST menu using
Honda PGM Tester or HDS.
4. Check status of PULSER F/B LEARN. If it is set to NOT COMPLETED, enable criteria was
probably not met. Repeat procedure from beginning. If it is set COMPLETED, go to next step.
5. Test drive the vehicle on a level road. Decelerate (with throttle fully closed) from engine speed of
5000 RPM to 3000 RPM with A/T in "2" position.
6. Stop vehicle. DO NOT turn ignition off. Select the ALL DATA list in DATA LIST menu using
Honda PGM Tester or HDS.
7. Check status of PULSER F/B LEARN (HIGH RPM). If it is set NOT COMPLETED, enable criteria
was probably not met. Repeat procedure from previous step. If it is set COMPLETED, go to next step.
8. Turn ignition off. Turn ignition on, then wait for 30 seconds. The procedure is now complete.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Application Ft. Lbs. (N.m)
Auto-Tensioner Mount Bolt 19 (28)
111
Camshaft Sprocket Center Bolt (1) 67 (90)

Crankshaft Pulley Bolt
2003-07 Accord 47 (60), then + 60
degrees
Except 2003-07 Accord 181 (245)
Engine Mount Bracket (Front)
10 x 1.25 mm Bolts 33 (44)
6 x 1.0 mm Bolt (2)
Engine Side Mount Bracket

10 x 1.25 mm Bolts (3) 33 (44)
12 x 1.25 mm Bolts 40 (54)
Idler Pulley Bolt 33 (44)
Power Steering Pump Lock Nut 17 (24)
Power Steering Pump Mount Bolt 17 (24)
INCH Lbs. (N.m)
Auto-Tensioner Maintenance Bolt 71 (8)
Dipstick & Tube (4) 106 (12)
Ground Cable Bolt 106 (12)
Lower Engine Splash Shield Bolts 106 (12)
Timing Belt Cover Bolts 106 (12)
Water Pump Bolts 106 (12)
(1) Apply engine oil to bolt threads.
(2) Tighten bolt to 106 INCH lbs. (12 N.m).
(3) Tighten these bolts first.
(4) Use a NEW "O" ring.
111
1973-2003 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Emission Applications - Honda (1973-2003)
Emission Applications - Honda (1973-2003)
EMISSION APPLICATIONS
1973-2003 EMISSION APPLICATIONS - HONDA
Year, Model, Engine & Fuel System (1) Emission Control Systems & Devices
1973
All Engines Carb. PCV, TAC, EVAP, SPK,
EVAP-VC, (2) SPK-DDD, (2) SPK-TCS, TP
1974
All Engines Carb. PCV, TAC, EVAP, SPK,
EVAP-VC, (2) SPK-TCS, SPK-VR, TP
1975-76
CVCC Carb. PCV, TAC, EVAP, SPK,
EVAP-VC (3) SPK-VR, TP
Except CVCC Carb. PCV, TAC, EVAP, SPK,
EVAP-VC, (2) SPK-TCS, (3) SPK-VR, TP
1977
Accord & Civic CVCC Carb. PCV, TAC, EVAP, SPK,
EVAP-VC, SPK-ITCS, TP
Civic Carb. PCV, TAC, EVAP, SPK, AIS,
EVAP-VC, SPK-ITCS, (2) SPK-TCS, SPK-
VR, (2) TOS
1978
Accord & Civic CVCC Carb. PCV, TAC, EVAP, SPK,
EVAP-VC, SPK-ITCS, (2) TOS, TP
Civic Carb. PCV, TAC, EVAP, SPK, AIS,
EVAP-VC, SPK-ITCS, SPK-VR, (2) TOS
1979
Accord & Prelude Carb. PCV, TAC, EVAP, SPK,
EVAP-VC, SPK-ITCS, TOS
Civic 1.2L 4-Cyl. Carb. PCV, TAC, EVAP, SPK, AIS,
EVAP-VC, SPK-ITCS, (2) TOS
Civic CVCC Carb. PCV, TAC, EVAP, SPK,
1980
Accord & Prelude Carb. PCV, TAC, EVAP, (4) OC, FR, (3) (4) (12)
EGR, SPK,
Civic 1.3L 4-Cyl. Carb. PCV, TAC, EVAP, (4) (5) OC, (4) (5) FR,
SPK,
Civic 1.5L 4-Cyl. Carb.
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:48:32
PCV, TAC, EVAP, (4) (5) OC, (4) (5) FR,

EGR, SPK,
1981
Accord & Prelude Carb. PCV, TAC, EVAP, OC, FR, EGR, SPK,
Civic 1.3L & 1.5L 4-Cyl. Carb. PCV, TAC, EVAP, OC, FR, EGR, SPK,
1982
All Engines Carb. PCV, TAC, EVAP, OC, FR, EGR, SPK,
PAIR,
1983
All Engines Carb. PCV, TAC, EVAP, OC, FR, EGR, SPK,
PAIR,
EVAP-VC, SPK-ITCS, (6) SPK-TCS, TOS
1984
All Engines Carb. PCV, TAC, EVAP, OC, FR, EGR, SPK, (7)
PAIR, (7) O2S, (7) CEC,
EVAP-VC, SPK-ITCS, (7) FBC, HAC, TOS
1985
Accord & Prelude 1.8L 4-Cyl. Carb. & Fuel PCV, (8) TAC, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR,
Injected SPK, (8) PAIR, O2S, CEC,
EVAP-VC, SPK-ITCS
Civic 1.3L & 1.5L 4-Cyl. Carb. PCV, TAC, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK,
(9) PAIR, (10) O2S, (10) CEC,
EVAP-VC, SPK-ITCS
Civic 1.5L 4-Cyl. Fuel Injected PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, SPK, O2S, CEC,
EVAP-VC, SPK-ITCS
CRX-HF Civic 1.5L 4-Cyl. Carb. (11) PCV, TAC, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK,
(9) PAIR,
EVAP-VC, SPK-ITCS
CRX-HF 1.5L 4-Cyl. Fuel Injected PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, SPK, O2S, CEC,
EVAP-VC, SPK-ITCS
1986-87
Accord & Prelude 1.8L & 2.0L 4-Cyl. Carb. PCV, (4) TAC, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR,
& Fuel Injected SPK, (4) PAIR, O2S, CEC,
EVAP-VC, SPK-ITCS
Civic 1.3L & 1.5L 4-Cyl. Carb. PCV, TAC, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK,
(15) PAIR, (16) O2S, (16) CEC,
EVAP-VC, SPK-ITCS
Civic 1.5L 4-Cyl. Fuel Injected PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, SPK, O2S, CEC,
EVAP-VC, SPK-ITCS
1988
Accord 2.0L 4-Cyl. 2-Bbl. PCV, TAC, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK,
111
AIS, O2S, CEC, EFE,

EVAP-VC, SPK-VAS, SPK-DDD
Accord 2.0L 4-Cyl. EFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK, O2S,
CEC,
EVAP-VC, SPK-DDD
Civic 1.5L 4-Cyl. EFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK, O2S,
CEC,
EVAP-VC, EVAP-CPCS, EVAP-CPCV,
EVAP-VSV, EGR-SOL, EGR-VSV, SPK-CC
Civic 1.5L 4-Cyl. TBI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, SPK, O2S, CEC,
EVAP-VC
Civic 1.6L 4-Cyl. EFI PCV, EVAP, (5) OC, (5) TWC, FR, SPK,
O2S, CEC,
EVAP-VC
CRX Civic 1.5L 4-Cyl. TBI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, SPK, (3) EGR,
O2S, CEC,
EVAP-VC
CRX 1.6L 4-Cyl. EFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, SPK, O2S, CEC,
EVAP-VC
Prelude 2.0L 4-Cyl. 2x1-Bbl. PCV, TAC, EVAP, TWC, FR, (14) EGR,
SPK, AIS, O2S, CEC,
Prelude 2.0L 4-Cyl. EFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK, O2S,
CEC
1989
Accord 2.0L 4-Cyl. 2-Bbl. PCV, TAC, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK,
O2S, CEC, EFE,
Accord 2.0L 4-Cyl. EFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK, O2S,
CEC,
EVAP-VC, SPK-DDD
Civic 1.5L 4-Cyl. TBI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, SPK, O2S, CEC,
EVAP-VC
Civic 1.6L 4-Cyl. EFI PCV, EVAP, (5) OC, (5) TWC, FR, O2S,
CEC,
EVAP-VC
CRX Civic 1.5L 4-Cyl. TBI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, SPK, EGR, O2S,
CEC,
EVAP-VC, TP
CRX 1.5L 4-Cyl. TBI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, (13) EGR, SPK,
O2S, CEC,
EVAP-VC
CRX 1.6L 4-Cyl. EFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, SPK, O2S, CEC,
EVAP-VC
Prelude 2.0L 4-Cyl. 2x1-Bbl. PCV, TAC, EVAP, TWC, FR, (14) EGR,
SPK, AIS, O2S, CEC,
111

Prelude 2.0L 4-Cyl. EFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK, O2S,
CEC
1990
Accord 2.2L EFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK, O2S,
CEC, MIL,
EVAP-CPCS, EVAP-VC, EVAP-VSV,
EVAP-CPCV, EGR-SOL, EGR-VSV, SPK-
CC
Civic 1.5L 4-Cyl. TBI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, (13) EGR, SPK,
O2S, CEC, MIL,
EVAP-VC, EVAP-CPCV, EVAP-CPCS,
EVAP-VSV, (13) EGR-SOL, EGR-VSV, SPK-
CC
Civic 1.6L 4-Cyl. EFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, SPK, O2S, CEC,
MIL,
EVAP-CPCS, EVAP-VC, EVAP-CPCV,
SPK-CC
Civic CRX 1.5L 4-Cyl. TBI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, (13) EGR, SPK,
O2S, CEC, MIL,
EVAP-CPCS, EVAP-CPCV, EVAP-VC,
EVAP-VSV, (13) EGR-SOL, EGR-VSV, SPK-
CC
Civic 1.5L 4-Cyl. EFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK, O2S,
CEC, MIL,
EVAP-VSV, EGR-SOL, EGR-VSV, SPK-CC
Civic 1.6L 4-Cyl. EFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, SPK, O2S, CEC,
MIL,
EVAP-VC, EVAP-CPCV, EVAP-CPCS,
EVAP-VSV, SPK-CC
Prelude 2.0L 4-Cyl. 1-Bbl. PCV, TAC, EVAP, TWC, FR, (21) EGR,
SPK, PAIR, O2S, CEC, MIL,
EVAP-CPCS, EVAP-IVS, EVAP-VC, EVAP-
VSV, EGR-SOL, EGR-VSV, SPK-CC, PAIR-
ASVL, PAIR-SOL
Prelude 2.0L & 2.1L 4-Cyl. EFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, (19) EGR, SPK,
O2S, CEC, MIL,
EVAP-VC, EVAP-VSV, EVAP-CPCV,
EVAP-CPCS, EGR-SOL, EGR-VSV, SPK-
CC
1991
Accord 2.2L 4-Cyl. MFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK, O2S,
CEC, MIL,
EGR-CVCV, EGR-SOL, SPK-CC
Civic 1.5L 4-Cyl. TBI
111
PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, (13) EGR, SPK,

O2S, CEC, MIL,
EVAP-CPCS, EVAP-CPCV, EVAP-VC, (13)
EGR-CVCV, (13) EGR-SOL, SPK-CC
Civic 1.6L 4-Cyl. MFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, SPK, O2S, CEC,
MIL,
SPK-CC
CRX 1.5L 4-Cyl. TBI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, (13) EGR, SPK,
O2S, CEC, MIL,
CRX 1.5L 4-Cyl. MFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK, O2S,
CEC, MIL,
EGR-CVCV, EGR-SOL, SPK-CC
CRX 1.6L 4-Cyl. MFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, SPK, O2S, CEC,
MIL,
SPK-CC
Prelude 2.0L & 2.1L 4-Cyl. MFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, (19) EGR, SPK,
O2S, CEC, MIL,
EGR-SOL, (19) EGR-VSV, SPK-CC
1992
Accord 2.2L 4-Cyl. MFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK, O2S,
CEC, MIL,
EGR-CVCV, EGR-PS, EGR-SOL, SPK-CC
Civic 1.5L 4-Cyl. MFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK, O2S,
CEC, MIL,
Civic 1.6L 4-Cyl. MFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, SPK, HO2S, CEC,
MIL,
SPK-CC
Prelude 2.2L & 2.3L 4-Cyl. MFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK, HO2S,
CEC, MIL,
EGR-PS, EGR-SOL, EGR-CVCV, SPK-CC
1993
Accord 2.2L 4-Cyl. MFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, EGR, SPK, HO2S,
CEC, MIL,
Civic 1.5L 4-Cyl. MFI
111
PCV, EVAP, TWC, (17) EGR, SPK, (18)

HO2S, CEC, MIL,
Civic 1.6L 4-Cyl. MFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, SPK, HO2S, CEC,
MIL,
SPK-CC
Civic Del Sol 1.5L & 1.6L 4-Cyl. MFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, SPK, HO2S, CEC,
MIL,
SPK-CC
Prelude 2.2L & 2.3L 4-Cyl. MFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, EGR, SPK, HO2S,
CEC, MIL,
1994-95
Accord 2.2L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, EGR, SPK, HO2S,
CEC, MIL,
Civic 1.5L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, (22) EGR, SPK, (23)
O2S, CEC, MIL,
Civic 1.6L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, SPK, HO2S, CEC,
MIL,
SPK-CC
Civic Del Sol 1.5L & 1.6L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, SPK, HO2S, CEC,
MIL,
SPK-CC
Odyssey 2.2L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, EGR, SPK, HO2S,
CEC, MIL,
Passport 2.6L 4-Cyl. MFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, (4) EGR, (21)
BP/EGR, SPK, AP, HO2S, CEC, MIL,
EVAP-VSV, EVAP-CPCV, EVAP-VC, (4)
EGR-DSOL, (4) EGR-VSV, (4) EGR-SOL, (21)
BP/EGR-TVV, (21) BP/EGR-BPT, (21)
BP/EGR-VSV, SPK-CC, AP-AMV
Passport 3.2L V6 MFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, BP/EGR, SPK,
HO2S, CEC, MIL,
EVAP-CPCS, EVAP-VSV, EVAP-VC,
BP/EGR-BPT, BP/EGR-VSV, SPK-CC
111
Prelude 2.2L & 2.3L 4-Cyl. MFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, EGR, SPK, HO2S,
CEC, MIL,
1996
Accord 2.2L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, (24) WU-TWC, EGR,
SPK, (25) HO2S, CEC, MIL,
Accord 2.7L V6 SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, EGR, SPK, (25) HO2S,
CEC, MIL,
EVAP-CPCS, EVAP-CPCV, EVAP-FS,
EVAP-TWV, EVAP-VC, EGR-CVCV, EGR-
PS, EGR-SOL, SPK-CC
Civic 1.6L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, (26) (27) EGR, SPK, (25)
HO2S, CEC, MIL,
EVAP-CPCS, EVAP-CPCV, EVAP-TWV,
EVAP-VC, (26) EGR-SOL, SPK-CC
Civic Del Sol 1.6L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, SPK, (25) HO2S, CEC,
MIL,
EVAP-VC, SPK-CC
Odyssey 2.2L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, EGR, SPK, (25) HO2S,
CEC, MIL,
PS, EGR-SOL, SPK-CC
Passport 2.6L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, (28) EGR, SPK, (25)
HO2S, CEC, MIL,
EVAP-CPCS, EVAP-VC, EVAP-VV, SPK-
CC
Passport 3.2L V6 SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, (28) EGR, SPK, (25)
HO2S, CEC, MIL,
EVAP-CPCS, EVAP-VC, EVAP-VV, SPK-
CC
Prelude 2.2L & 2.3L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, EGR, SPK, (25) HO2S,
CEC, MIL,
EVAP-VC, EGR-CVCV, EGR-PS, EGR-SOL,
SPK-CC
1997-98
Accord 2.2L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, (29) WU-TWC, FR, EGR,
EVAP-BPSV, EVAP-CPCS, EVAP-CPCV,
EVAP-CVSV, EVAP-TRWV, EVAP-TWV,
FTEV, FTPS, SPK-CC
111
Accord 2.7L V6 SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK, (30)
HO2S, CEC, MIL,
SOL, EGR-PS, SPK-CC
Civic 1.6L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, (29) (26) (27) EGR,
EVAP-BPSV, EVAP-CVSV, EVAP-CPCS,
EVAP-CPCV, EVAP-TRWV, EVAP-TWV,
EGR-PS, (26) EGR-SOL, FTEV, FTPS, SPK-
CC
Civic Del Sol 1.6L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, SPK, (30) HO2S,
CEC, MIL,
EVAP-CPCS, EVAP-CPCV, EVAP-CPCSV,
EVAP-TWV, EVAP-VC, SPK-CC
CR-V 2.0L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, SPK, (30) HO2S,
CEC, MIL,
EVAP-VC, FTEV, SPK-CC
Odyssey 2.2L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK, (30)
HO2S, CEC, MIL,
PS, EGR-SOL, FTEV, SPK-CC
Passport 2.6L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK, (30)
HO2S, CEC, MIL,
EVAP-CPCS, EVAP-VC, EVAP-VV, FTPS,
SPK-CC
Passport 3.2L V6 SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, (31) EGR, SPK, (30)
HO2S, CEC, MIL,
EVAP-CPCS, EVAP-VC, EVAP-VV, FTPS,
SPK-CC
Prelude 2.2L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK, (30)
HO2S, CEC, MIL,
(4) EVAP-BPSV, EVAP-CPCS, EVAP-CPCV,
(4) EVAP-CVSV, EVAP-FS, (4) EVAP-
TRWV, EVAP-TWV, EVAP-VC, EGR-
CVCV, EGR-PS, EGR-SOL, FTEV, (4) FTPS,
SPK-CC
1998
Accord 2.3L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, (32) EGR, SPK, (30)
HO2S, CEC, MIL, ORVR,
EVAP-CVSV, EVAP-TWV, EVAP-VC,
EGR-PS, FTPS, ORVR-VRV, ORVR-VSV,
SPK-CC
111
Accord 3.0L V6 SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, (32) EGR, SPK, (30)
HO2S, CEC, MIL, ORVR,
EVAP-TWV, EVAP-VC, EGR-PS, ORVR-
VRV, ORVR-VSV, SPK-CC
Civic 1.6L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, SPK, (30) HO2S,
CEC, MIL,
EVAP-VC, (32) EGR-PS, (26) EGR-SOL,
FTEV, FTPS, SPK-CC
CEC, MIL,
EVAP-CPCS, EVAP-CPCV, EVAP-CVSV,
EVAP-TRWV, EVAP-TWV, EVAP-VC,
FTEV, FTPS, SPK-CC
Odyssey 2.3L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK, (30)
HO2S, CEC, MIL,
EGR-PS, EGR-SOL, FTEV, FTPS, SPK-CC
HO2S, CEC, MIL,
EVAP-CPCS, EVAP-VC, EVAP-VV, EGR-
PS, FTPS, SPK-CC
HO2S, CEC, MIL
FTEV, FTPS, SPK-CC
1999
HO2S, CEC, MIL,
EVAP-CPCSV, EVAP-TWV, EVAP-VC,
EVAP-VCF, EGR-PS, FTPS, ORVR-VRV,
ORVR-VSV, SPK-CC
HO2S, CEC, MIL,
ORVR-VSV, SPK-CC
111

EVAP-VCF, EGR-PS, (26) (27) EGR-SOL,
FTPS, ORVR-VSV, ORVR-VRV, SPK-CC
CEC, MIL,
FTEV, EVAP-BPSV, FTPS, SPK-CC
Odyssey 3.5L V6 SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK, (34)
HO2S, CEC, MIL,
EGR-PS, EVAP-VCF, FTEV, FTPS, SPK-CC
HO2S, CEC, MIL,
EVAP-CPCS, EVAP-VC, EVAP-VV, EGR-
PS, FTPS, SPK-CC
HO2S, CEC, MIL,
EVAP-CPCSV, EVAP-TRWV, EVAP-TWV,
EVAP-VC, EVAP-VCF, EGR-CVCV, EGR-
PS, EGR-SOL, FTEV, FTPS, ORVR-VSV,
ORVR-VRV, SPK-CC
2000
HO2S, CEC, MIL,
ORVR-VSV, SPK-CC
HO2S, CEC, MIL,
ORVR-VSV, SPK-CC
EVAP-VCF, EGR-PS, (26) EGR-SOL, FTPS,
ORVR-VSV, ORVR-VRV, SPK-CC
CEC, MIL,
111
FTEV, EVAP-BPSV, FTPS, SPK-CC

Odyssey 3.5L V6 SFI PCV, (35) TAC, EVAP, TWC, FR, (32) EGR,
EVAP-VCF, FTEV, FTPS, EGR-PS, SPK-CC
HO2S, CEC, MIL,
EVAP-CPCS, EVAP-VC, EVAP-VCVS,
EVAP-VV, FTPS, FTVV, EGR-PS, SPK-CC
HO2S, CEC, MIL,
EVAP-CPCSV, EVAP-TRWV, EVAP-TWV,
EVAP-VC, EVAP-VCF, FTEV, FTPS,
ORVR-VSV, ORVR-VRV, EGR-CVCV,
EGR-PS, EGR-SOL, SPK-CC
S2000 2.0L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, SPK, AIS, (34)
HO2S, CEC, MIL,
EVAP-VCF, FTPS, ORVR-VSV, ORVR-
VRV, AIS-CKV, AIS-CV, AIS-SOL, AIS-VT,
SPK-CC
2001
Accord 2.3L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK, (36)
HO2S, (31) CEC, MIL,
EVAP-BPSV, EVAP-CPCS, EVAP-CVSV,
EVAP-TWV, EVAP-VC, EVAP-VCF,
ORVR-FTVCV, ORVR-FTVRV, EGR-CSV,
SPK-CC
EVAP-TWV, EVAP-VC, EVAP-VCF, FTPS,
SPK-CC
Civic 1.7L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, (37) EGR, SPK, (36)
EVAP-EV, EVAP-TWV, EVAP-VC, EVAP-
VCF, FTPS, ORVR-FTVCV, ORVR-FTVRV,
EGR-CSV, SPK-CC
(31) CEC, MIL,
111
FTPS, FTV/LSV, SPK-CC

Insight 1.0L 3-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK, (36)
SPK-CC
Odyssey 3.5L V6 SFI PCV, (35) TAC, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR,
SPK, (36) HO2S, (31) CEC, MIL,
EVAP-BPSV, EVAP-CPCV, EVAP-CVSV,
EVAP-TWV, EVAP-VC, EVAP-VCF, FTEV,
FTPS, ORVR-FTVCV, ORVR-FTVRV,
EGR-CSV, SPK-CC
Passport 3.2L V6 SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK, (36)
EVAP-CPCSV, EVAP-CPCS, EVAP-CVSV,
EVAP-FLS, EVAP-VC, EVAP-VCVS, FTPS,
FTVV, EGR-CSV, SPK-CC
SPK-CC
ORVR-FTVCV, ORVR-FTVRV, AIS-CKV,
AIS-CV, AIS-VT, SPK-CC
2002
Accord 2.3L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK, (36)
SPK-CC
SPK-CC
Civic 1.7L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, (37) EGR, SPK, (36)
EVAP-BPSV, EVAP-CPCSV, EVAP-CVSV,
111

VCF, FTPS, ORVR-FTVCV, ORVR-FTVRV,
EGR-CSV, SPK-CC
Civic 2.0L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, (37) SPK, (36)
VCF, FTPS, SPK-CC
(31) CEC, MIL,
VCF, FTPS, SPK-CC
Insight 1.0L 3-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, NOxTWC, FR, EGR, SPK,
(36) HO2S, (31) CEC, MIL,
SPK-CC
Odyssey 3.5L V6 SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK, (36)
EVAP-TWV, EVAP-VC, EVAP-VCF, FTEV,
FTPS, ORVR-FTVCV, ORVR-FTVRV,
EGR-CSV, SPK-CC
Passport 2.2L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK, (33)
EVAP-CPCS, EVAP-CVS, EVAP-VC, FTPS,
SPK-CC
Passport 3.2L V6 SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK, (33)
EVAP-CPCS, EVAP-CPCV, EVAP-CVS,
EVAP-VC, EGR-PS, SPK-CC
ORVR-FTVCV, ORVR-FTVRV, AIS-CKV,
AIS-CSV, AIS-VT, SPK-CC
2003
Accord 2.3L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK, AFS,
EVAP-CPCSV, EVAP-CVSV, EVAP-VC,
EVAP-VCF, FTPS, ORVR-FTVCV, (39)
ORVR-FTVRV, EGR-CSV, SPK-CC
Accord 3.0L V6 SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK, AFS,
111

EVAP-VCF, FTPS, ORVR-FTVCV, EGR-
CSV, SPK-CC
Civic 1.3L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, (40) TWC, FR, EGR, SPK,
AFS, HO2S, (38) CEC, MIL,
EVAP-EV, EVAP-BPSV, EVAP-CVS,
EVAP-VCF, FTPS, ORVR-FTVCV, ORVR-
FTVRV, EGR-CSV, SPK-CC
Civic 1.7L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, SPK, HO2S, (38)
CEC, MIL,
VCF, ORVR-FTVCV, ORVR-FTVRV, SPK-
CC
Civic 2.0L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, SPK, HO2S, (38)
CEC, MIL,
VCF, ORVR-FTVCV, ORVR-FTVRV, FTPS,
SPK-CC
CR-V 2.4L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, SPK, HO2S, (38)
CEC, MIL,
VCF, ORVR-FTVCV, ORVR-FTVRV, FTPS,
SPK-CC
Element 2.4L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, SPK, HO2S, (38)
CEC, MIL,
EVAP-VCF, FTPS, ORVR-FTVCV, SPK-CC
Insight 1.0L 3-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, (40) TWC, FR, EGR, SPK,
AFS, HO2S, CEC, MIL,
SPK-CC
Odyssey 3.5L V6 SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK, HO2S,
(38) CEC, MIL,
EVAP-CPCSV, EVAP-CVSV, EVAP-TWV,
EVAP-VC, EVAP-VCF, FTPS, ORVR-
FTVCV, ORVR-FTVRV, EGR-CSV, SPK-
CC
Pilot 3.5L V6 SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, EGR, SPK, (33)
EGR-CSV, EVAP-BPSV, EVAP-CPCV,
111

EVAP-VCF, ORVR-FTVCV, ORVR-
FTVRV, EGR-PS, SPK-CC
S2000 2.0L 4-Cyl. SFI PCV, EVAP, TWC, FR, SPK, AIS, HO2S,
(38) CEC, MIL,
AIS-CKV, AIS-CSV, AIS-VT, SPK-CC
(1) Major emission control systems and devices are listed in bold type; components and other related
devices are listed in light type.
(2) M/T only.
(3) A/T only.
(4) California only.
(5) Some models. Check emission label.
(6) Civic only.
(7) Except 1.3L engines.
(8) Carbureted models only.
(9) 1.5L California and high altitude only.
(10) Except California 1.3L HF.
(11) Low altitude with engine family FHN1.5V3EJF5 only.
(12) Accord only.
(13) California A/T only.
(14) Except California.
(15) 1.5L California and high altitude only.
(16) Except CRX HF models with fuel injection & carbureted 1.3L & 1.5L engines only.
(17) Engine model D15Z1 only.
(18) Non-heated oxygen sensor on Federal engine model D15B8.
(19) Speed controlled.
(20) Equipped with 2.
(21) Federal only.
(22) Engine model D15Z1 only.
(23) Non-heated oxygen sensor on Federal engine model D15B8.
(24) Calif. LX without ABS.
(25) Uses primary & secondary HO2S.
(26) D16Y5 engine with CVT.
111
(27) D16Y5 engine with M/T.
(28) Electronic EGR valve.
(29) California F22B2 engine in Sedan LX (without ABS) and SE.
(30) Uses primary and secondary HO2S sensors.
(31) PCM controlled.
(32) Linear EGR.
(33) Equipped with 4.
(34) Uses primary & secondary HO2S sensors.
(35) Heated air induction system.
(36) Uses primary & secondary HO2S sensors.
(37) D17A2 engine only.
(38) OBD-II engine control system.
(39) SULEV only.
(40) NOx Adsorptive Three-Way Catalyst.
ABBREVIATIONS
AFS
Air/Fuel Ratio Sensor
AIS
Air Injection System
AIS-CKV
AIS Check Valve
AIS-CSV
AIS Control Solenoid Valve
AIS-CV
AIS Control Valve
AIS-SOL
AIS Solenoid
AIS-VT
111
AIS Vacuum Tank
A/T
Automatic Transmission
BP/EGR-BPT
BP/EGR Backpressure Transducer
BP/EGR-TVV
BP/EGR Thermal Vacuum Valve
BP/EGR-VSV
BP/EGR Vacuum Switching Valve
CEC
Computerized Engine Controls
EFE
Early Fuel Evaporation
EFI
Electronic Fuel Injection
EGR
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
EGR-CSV
EGR Control Solenoid Valve
EGR-CVCV
EGR Constant Vacuum Control Valve
EGR-DSOL
EGR Duty Solenoid
EGR-PS
EGR Position Sensor
111
EGR-SOL
EGR Control Solenoid
EGR-VSV
EGR Vacuum Switching Valve
EVAP
Fuel Evaporative System
EVAP-BPSV
EVAP By-Pass Solenoid Valve
EVAP-CKV
EVAP Check Valve
EVAP-CPCS
EVAP Canister Purge Control Solenoid
EVAP-CPCSV
EVAP Canister Purge Control Solenoid Valve
EVAP-CPCV
EVAP Canister Purge Control Valve
EVAP-CVS
EVAP Canister Vent Solenoid
EVAP-CVSV
EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve
EVAP-EV
EVAP Emission Valve
EVAP-FLS
EVAP Fuel Level Sensor
EVAP-FS
111
EVAP Flow Switch
EVAP-IVS
EVAP Inner Vent Solenoid
EVAP-TRWV
EVAP Three-Way Valve
EVAP-TWV
EVAP Two-Way Valve
EVAP-VC
EVAP Vapor Canister
EVAP-VCF
EVAP Vapor Canister Filter
EVAP-VCVS
EVAP Vapor Canister Vent Solenoid
EVAP-VSV
EVAP Vacuum Switching Valve
EVAP-VV
EVAP Vent Valve
FBC
Feedback Carburetor
FR
Fill Pipe Restrictor
FTEV
Fuel Tank EVAP Valve
FTPS
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor
111
FTVV
Fuel Tank Vent Valve
FTV/LSV
Fuel Tank Vapor/Liquid Separation Valve
HAC
High Altitude Compensator
HO2S
Heated Oxygen Sensor
MFI
Multiport Fuel Injection
MIL
Malfunction Indicator Light
M/T
Manual Transmission
NOxTWC
NOx Adsorptive Three-Way Catalyst
OC
Oxidation Catalytic Converter
ORVR
On-Board Refueling Vapor Recovery
ORVR-FTVCV
ORVR Fuel Tank Vapor Control Valve
ORVR-FTVRV
ORVR Fuel Tank Vapor Recirculation Valve
ORVR-VRV
111
ORVR Vapor Recirculation Valve
ORVR-VSV
ORVR Vent Shut Valve
O2S
Oxygen Sensor
PAIR
Pulsed Secondary Air Injection
PAIR-ASVL
PAIR Air Suction Valve
PAIR-SOL
PAIR Solenoid
PCV
Positive Crankcase Ventilation
SFI
Sequential Fuel Injection
SPK
Spark Controls
SPK-CC
SPK Computer Controlled
SPK-DDD
SPK Dual Diaphragm Distributor
SPK-ITCS
SPK Ignition Timing Control System
SPK-TCS
SPK Transmission Controlled Spark
111
SPK-VAS
SPK Vacuum Advance Solenoid
SPK-VR
SPK Vacuum Retard
TAC
Thermostatic Air Cleaner
TBI
Throttle Body Injection
TOS
Throttle Opener System
TP
Throttle Position
TWC
Three-Way Catalyst
WU-TWC
Warm-Up Three-Way Catalyst
111
2003-07 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Fuel And Emission System - Accord
Fuel And Emission System - Accord
SPECIAL TOOLS


INTERMITTENT FAILURES
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:51:54
The term "intermittent failure" means a system may have had a failure, but it checks OK now. If the
malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the dash does not come on, check for poor connections or loose pins at
all connectors related to the circuit that you are troubleshooting. If the MIL was on, but then went out, the
original problem may have been intermittent.
OPENS AND SHORTS
"Open" and "Short" are common electrical terms. An open is a break in a wire or at a connection. A short is
an accidental connection of a wire to ground or to another wire. In simple electronics, this usually means
something won't work at all. With complex electronics (such as ECMs and PCMs) this can sometimes mean
something works, but not the way it's supposed to.
HOW TO USE THE HDS (HONDA DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM)
If the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp) has come on
1. Start the engine, and check the MIL (A).
NOTE: If the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and the engine is not started, the
MIL will stay on for 15-20 seconds (see HOW TO SET READINESS
CODES ).
Fig. 2: Identifying MIL

111
2. If the MIL stays on, connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's
side of the dashboard.


4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit
troubleshooting (see DLC CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING ).
5. Check the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) and note it. Also check the freeze data/or on-board snapshot
data, and download any data found. Then refer to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting, and begin the
appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
NOTE:  Freeze data indicates the engine conditions when the first
malfunction, misfire, or fuel trim malfunction was detected.
 The HDS can read the DTC, freeze data, on-board snapshot,
current data, and other engine control module (ECM)/powertrain
control module (PCM) data.
 For specific operations, refer to the user's manual that came with
the HDS.
111
6. If no DTCs are found, go to MIL troubleshooting (see MIL CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING ).
If the MIL did not stay on
If the MIL did not stay on but there is a driveability problem, do the symptom troubleshooting.
If you can't duplicate the DTC
Some of the troubleshooting requires you to reset the ECM/PCM and try to duplicate the DTC. If the
problem is intermittent and you can't duplicate the code, do not continue through the procedure. To do so
will only result in confusion and possibly, a needlessly replaced ECM/PCM.
HDS CLEAR COMMAND
The ECM/PCM stores various specific data to correct the system even if there is no electrical power such as
when the battery negative terminal or No. 8 Fl ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse are disconnected. Stored data
based on failed parts should be cleared by using the "CLEAR COMMAND" of the HDS, if parts are
replaced.
The HDS has three kinds of clear commands to meet this purpose. They are DTC clear, ECM/PCM reset,
and CKP pattern clear. DTC clear command erases all stored DTC codes, freeze data, readiness codes, and
on-board snapshot. This must be done with the HDS after reproducing the DTC during troubleshooting. The
ECM/PCM reset command erases all stored DTC codes, freeze data, readiness codes, on-board snapshot,
and all specific data to correct the system except CKP pattern. If the CKP pattern data in the ECM/PCM was
cleared, you must do the CKP pattern learn procedure. The CKP pattern clear command erases only CKP
pattern data. This command is for repair of a misfire or the CKP sensor.
SCAN TOOL CLEAR COMMAND
If you are using a generic scan tool to clear commands, be aware that there is only one setting for clearing
the ECM/PCM, and it clears all commands at the same time (CKP pattern learn, idle learn, readiness codes,
freeze data, on-board snapshot, and DTCs). After you clear all commands, you then need to do these
procedures, in this order: ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see ECM/PCM IDLE LEARN
PROCEDURE ); CKP pattern learn procedure; Test-drive to set readiness codes to complete (see HOW
TO SET READINESS CODES ).
DTC CLEAR
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS while the engine is stopped.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Wait 30 seconds.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the HDS from the DLC.
ECM/PCM RESET
1. Reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS while the engine is stopped.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait 30 seconds.
111
CRANK (CKP) PATTERN CLEAR/CRANK (CKP) PATTERN LEARN; CLEAR/LEARN

PROCEDURE (WITH THE HDS)
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the
dashboard.

3. Make sure the HDS communications with the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit
4. Select CRANK PATTERN in the ADJUSTMENT MENU with the HDS.
5. Select CRANK PATTERN LEARNING with HDS, and follow the screen prompts.
LEARN PROCEDURE (WITHOUT THE HDS
1. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in park or neutral) until the radiator
fan comes on.
2. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road:Decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed
of 2,500 rpm down to 1,000 rpm with A/T in 2 position, or M/T in 1st gear.
111
3. Repeat step 2 several times.

5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for 30 seconds.
HOW TO END A TROUBLESHOOTING SESSION (REQUIRED AFTER ANY

TROUBLESHOOTING)

4. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.
NOTE: The ECM/PCM is part of the immobilizer system. If you replace the
ECM/PCM, it will have a different immobilizer code. In order for the
engine to start, you must rewrite the immobilizer code with the HDS.
HOW TO TROUBLESHOOT CIRCUITS AT THE ECM/PCM
 Digital multimeter KS-AHM-32-003 (1) or a commercially available digital multimeter

 Backprobe set 07SAZ-001000A (2)
1. Connect the backprobe adapters (A) to the stacking patch cords (B), and connect the cords to a digital
multimeter.
111
Fig. 5: Connecting Backprobe Adapters To Stacking Patch Cords

2. Using the wire insulation as a guide for the contoured tip of the backprobe adapter, gently slide the tip
into the connector from the wire side until it touches the end of the wire terminal.
3. If you cannot get to the wire side of the connector or the wire side is sealed (A), disconnect the
connector and probe the terminals (B) from the terminal side. Do not force the probe into the
connector.
NOTE: Do not puncture the insulation on a wire. Punctures can cause poor or
intermittent electrical connections.
111
Fig. 6: Disconnecting Connector And Probe Terminals From Terminal Side

UPDATING THE ECM/PCM
 Honda diagnostic system (HDS)

 Honda interface module (HIM)
 HDS pocket tester
NOTE:  Use this procedure when you need to update the ECM/PCM during
troubleshooting procedures.
 Make sure the HDS/HIM has the latest sofware version.
 Before you update the ECM/PCM, make sure the vehicle's battery is
fully changed.
 Never turn the ignition switch OFF during the update. If there is a
problem with update, leave the ignition switch ON.
 To prevent ECM/PCM damage, do not operate anything electrical
(headlights, audio system brakes, A/C, power windows, door locks,
etc.) during the update.
 To ensure the latest program is installed, do an ECM/PCM update
whenever the ECM/PCM is substituted or replaced.
 You cannot update an ECM/PCM with the program it already has. It will
only accept a new program.
 If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module (HIM) because the
111
HIM's red (# 3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave
the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM
from the data link connector (DLC). This will prevent ECM/PCM damage.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Do not start the engine.

dashboard.
Fig. 7: Connecting HDS Or HIM To DLC

troubleshooting (seeDLC CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING ). '06-07 models: If you are returning
from the DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 4 and 5, then clean the throttle body after updating
the ECM/PCM (see THROTTLE BODY CLEANING ).
4. '06-07 models: Select the INSPECTION MENU with HDS.
5. '06-07 models: Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION CHECK, and follow the screen
prompts with the HDS.
6. Exit the HDS diagnostic system, then select the update mode, and follow the screen prompts to update
the ECM/PCM.
7. If the software in the ECM/PCM is the latest, disconnect the HDS/HIM from the DLC and go back to
111
the procedure that you were doing. If the software in the ECM/PCM is not the latest, follow the
instructions on the screen. If prompted to choose the PGM-FI system or the A/T system, make sure
you update both.
NOTE: If the ECM/PCM update system requires you to cool the ECM/PCM,
follow the screen prompts. If you run into a problem (programming
takes over 15 minutes, status bar goes over 100%, D or immobilizer
indicator flashes, HDS tablet freezes, etc.) during the update procedure,
following these steps to minimize the chance of damaging the
ECM/PCM:
 Leave the ignition switch in the "ON (II)" position.

 Connect a jumper battery (do not connect a battery charger).
 Shut down the HDS.
 Disconnect the HDS from the HDS.
 Reboot the HDS.
 Reconnect the HDS to the DLC, and try the update procedure
again.
8. 05-07 models: If the TP POSTION CHECK failed in step 6, clean the throttle body (see THROTTLE
BODY CLEANING ).
10. Do the CKP pattern clear/pattern learn procedure with the HDS.
SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM
 Honda diagnostic system (HDS)

 Honda interface module (HIM)
 HDS pocket tester
NOTE: Use this procedure when you need to substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
during troubleshooting procedures.
dashboard.
111


troubleshooting (see DLC CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING ). '06-07 models: If you are returning
from DLC circuit troubleshooting skip steps 4 to 11, then clean the throttle body after substituting the
ECM/PCM (see THROTTLE BODY CLEANING ).
4. '06-07 models: Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
5. '06-07 models: Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION CHECK, and follow the screen
prompts.
8. Remove the center lower covers (A).
111
Fig. 9: Removing Center Lower Covers

9. Remove the duct (B).

10. Disconnect ECM/PCM connectors (C).
11. Remove the bolts (D), then remove the ECM/PCM (E).
12. Install the ECM/PCM in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: '05-07 models:DTC P0630 "VIN Not Programmed or Mismatch" may be

stored because VIN has not been programmed into the ECM/PCM;
ignore it, and continue this procedure.
111
15. '05-07 models: Manually input the VIN to the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
16. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software.
17. Select the IMMOBI SYSTEM with the HDS.
18. Enter the immobilizer code with the ECM/PCM replacement procedure in the HDS; it allows you to
start the engine.
20. '06-07 models: if the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 5, clean the throttle body (see
THROTTLE BODY CLEANING ).
22. Do the CKP pattern clear/pattern learn procedure with the HDS.
OBD STATUS
The OBD status shows the current system status of each DTC and all of the parameters. This function is
used to see if the technician's repair was successfully finished. The results of diagnostic tests for the DTC
are displayed as:
 PASSED: On board diagnosis is successfully finished.

 FAILED: On board diagnosis has finished but failed.
 EXECUTING: The vehicle is in enable criteria conditions for the DTC and the on board diagnosis is
running.
 NOT COMPLETED: The on board diagnosis was running but is out of the enable conditions of the
DTC.
 OUT OF CONDITION: The vehicle has stayed out of the enable conditions of the DTC.
111
Fig. 10: DTC Troubleshooting Index (1 of 4)

111

111

111


When the vehicle has one of these symptoms, check for a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) with the HDS. If
there is no DTC, do the diagnostic procedure for the symptom, in the sequence listed, until you find the
cause.


TEST ).
2. Test the starter solenoid (see
STARTER SOLENOID  Low compression
TEST ).  No ignition spark
111
3. Check the fuel pressure (see  Intake air leaks

FUEL PRESSURE TEST ).  Locked up engine
Engine will not start (MIL 4. Troubleshoot the fuel pump
works OK, no DTCs set)  Broken cam chain
circuit (see FUEL PUMP
CIRCUIT  Contaminated fuel
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
Engine will not start (MIL
comes on and stays on, or Troubleshoot the MIL circuit (see MIL
never comes on at all, no CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING ).
DTCs set)
Engine will not start
Troubleshoot the immobilizer system
(immobilizer indicator stays
(see TROUBLESHOOTING ).
on or flashes)
Engine starts but stalls
Troubleshoot the immobilizer system
immediately (MIL works
(see TROUBLESHOOTING ).
OK, no DTCs set)
TEST )  Low compression
Engine is hard to start (MIL 2. Check the fuel pressure (see  Intake air leaks
works OK, no DTCs set) FUEL PRESSURE TEST ).
 Contaminated fuel
3. '06-07 models: Clean the throttle
body (see THROTTLE BODY  Weak spark
CLEANING ).
1. Do the ECM/PCM idle learn
procedure (see ECM/PCM
IDLE LEARN
PROCEDURE ).
Cold fast idle too low (MIL
works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Check the idle speed (see IDLE
SPEED INSPECTION ).
3. '06-07 models: Clean the throttle
body (see THROTTLE BODY
CLEANING ).

IDLE LEARN
PROCEDURE ).
2. Check the idle speed (see IDLE
SPEED INSPECTION ).
Cold fast idle too high (MIL
works OK, no DTCs set) 3. Inspect/adjust the throttle cable;
'03-05 models (see '03-05
MODELS ) or '06-07 models
(see '06-07 MODEL ).
4. '03-05 models: Test the throttle
body (see '03-05 MODELS ).
5. '06-07 models: Do the throttle
position learning check (see
111
THROTTLE POSITION
SENSOR SIGNAL
INSPECTION ).
IDLE LEARN
PROCEDURE ).
2. Check the idle speed (see IDLE
SPEED INSPECTION ).
Idle speed fluctuates (MIL 3. Inspect/adjust the throttle cable;
'03-05 models (see '03-05 Intake vacuum leaks
works OK, no DTCs set)
MODELS ) or '06-07 models
(see '06-07 MODEL ).
5. '06-07 models: Do the carbon
accumulation check (see '06-07
MODELS ).

1. '03-04 models: Troubleshoot the
alternator FR signal circuit (see
'03-04 MODELS ).
'05-07 MODELS ).
After warming up, idle speed is
below specification without 4. '06-07 model: Do the carbon
load (MIL works OK, no DTCs accumulation check (see '06-07
set) MODELS ).
5. Troubleshoot the PSP switch
signal circuit (see PSP
SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
6. Troubleshoot the A/C signal
circuit (see A/C SIGNAL
CIRCUIT
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
1. Inspect/adjust the throttle cable;
'03-05 models (see '03-05
MODELS ), '06-07 models (see
'06-07 MODEL ).
'03-04 MODELS ).
111

'05-07 MODELS ).
4. '06-07 models: Inspect the APP
sensor (see APP SENSOR
SIGNAL INSPECTION ).
5. '03-05 models: Inspect the TP
After warming up, idle speed is sensor (see THROTTLE
above specification without POSITION SENSOR
load (MIL works OK, no DTCs SIGNAL INSPECTION ).
set) 6. Troubleshoot the PSP switch
signal circuit (see PSP
SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
7. Troubleshoot the A/C signal
circuit (see A/C SIGNAL
CIRCUIT
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
 Low compression
Low power (MIL works OK,  Incorrect camshaft
no DTCs set) timing
3. Inspect/adjust the throttle cable;
 Incorrect engine oil
'03-05 models (see '03-05
level
MODELS ), '06-07 models (see
'06-07 MODEL ).
IDLE LEARN
PROCEDURE ).
 Intake air leaks
Engine stalls (MIL works OK, 3. Check the idle speed (see IDLE
no DTCs set)  Faulty harness and
SPEED INSPECTION ).
sensor connections
4. Troubleshoot the brake pedal
position switch signal circuit
(see BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH
SIGNAL CIRCUIT
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
1. Check the fuel vent tube

between the EVAP canister and
the fuel tank.
2. Check the fuel tank vapor
recirculation tube between the
Difficult to refuel (MIL works fuel pipe and the fuel tank. Malfunctioning gas station
111
OK, no DTCs set) 3. Check the fuel tank signal tube filling nozzle.
between the fuel pipe and the
fuel tank (SULEV and LX-P
models).
4. Replace the fuel tank (see
FUEL TANK
REPLACEMENT ).
Fuel overflows during refueling Replace the fuel tank (see FUEL Malfunctioning gas station
(No DTCs set) TANK REPLACEMENT ). filling nozzle.
Fuel overflows during refuel
(No DTCs set).
Replace the fuel tank (see
FUEL TANK
REPLACEMENT ).
Malfunction gas station filling
nozzle.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM
The functions of the fuel and emission control systems are managed by the engine control module (ECM) on
vehicles with manual transmission, or the powertrain control module (PCM) on vehicles with automatic
transmissions.
Self-diagnosis
The ECM/PCM detects a failure of a signal from a sensor or from another control unit and stores a
Temporary DTC or a DTC. Depending on the failure, a DTC is stored in the either first or the second drive
cycle. When a DTC is stored, the ECM/PCM turns on the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) by supplying
ground to the MIL circuit.
 One Drive Cycle Detection Method
When an abnormality occurs in the signal from a sensor or from another control unit, the ECM/PCM
stores a DTC and turns on the MIL.
 Two Drive Cycle Detection Method
When an abnormality occurs in the signal from a sensor or from another control unit in the first drive
cycle, the ECM/PCM stores a Temporary DTC. The MIL does not come on at this time. If the failure
continues in the second drive cycle, the ECM/PCM stores a DTC in erasable memory and turns on the
MIL.
Fail-safe Function
When an abnormality occurs in the signal from a sensor or from another control unit, the ECM/PCM ignores
that signal, and substitutes a pre programmed value for them that allows the engine to continue running.
This causes a DTC to be stored and the MIL to comes on.
111
MIL Bulb Check and Readiness Code Condition
When the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the ECM/PCM supplies ground to the MIL circuit for about 15
to 20 seconds to check the bulb condition. If any readiness codes are not set to complete, the MIL flashes
five times. If all readiness codes are set to complete, the MIL goes out.
Self Shut Down (SSD) Mode
After the ignition switch is turned OFF, the ECM/PCM stays on (up to 15 minutes). If the ECM/PCM
connector is disconnected during this time, the ECM/PCM may be damaged. To cancel this mode,
disconnect the negative cable from the battery or jump the SCS line with the HDS after the ignition switch is
turned OFF.
ECM/PCM Electrical Connections
111
Fig. 14: ECM/PCM Electrical Connection Wiring Diagram (1 of 5)


111

111

111

ECM/PCM INPUTS AND OUTPUTS AT CONNECTOR A (31P)
111
Fig. 19: ECM/PCM Inputs & Outputs at Connector A (31P) (1 of 2)

111
Fig. 20: ECM/PCM Inputs & Outputs at Connector A (31P) (2 of 2)

ECM/PCM INPUTS AND OUTPUTS AT CONNECTOR B (24P)
111
Fig. 21: ECM/PCM Inputs & Outputs at Connector B (24P)

ECM/PCM INPUTS AND OUTPUTS AT CONNECTOR C (22P)
111
Fig. 22: ECM/PCM Inputs & Outputs at Connector C (22P)

111
Fig. 23: ECM/PCM Inputs & Outputs at Connector C (22P) (2 of 2)

ECM/PCM INPUTS AND OUTPUTS AT CONNECTOR D (17P)
111
Fig. 24: ECM/PCM Inputs & Outputs Connector D (17P)

ECM/PCM INPUTS AND OUTPUTS AT CONNECTOR E (31P)
111
Fig. 25: ECM/PCM Inputs & Outputs at Connector E (31P) (1 of 2)

111
Fig. 26: ECM/PCM Inputs & Outputs at Connector E (31P) (2 of 2)

VACUUM HOSE ROUTING
111
Fig. 27: Identifying Vacuum Hose Routing

VACUUM DISTRIBUTION
Non-SULEV model
111
Fig. 28: Identifying Vacuum Distribution (Non-SULEV Model (2003-2005 Models))

111
Fig. 29: Identifying Vacuum Distribution (Non-SULEV Model (2006-07 Models))

SULEV model
111
Fig. 30: Identifying Vacuum Distribution (SULEV Model (2003-2005 Models))

111
Fig. 31: Identifying Vacuum Distribution (SULEV Model (2006-2007 Models))

PGM-FI SYSTEM
The programmed fuel injection (PGM-FI) system is a sequential multiport fuel injection system.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Clutch Relay
When the ECM/PCM receives a demand for cooling from the A/C system, it delays the compressor from
being energized and enriches the mixture to assure smooth transition to the A/C mode.
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor
111
The A/F sensor operates over a wide air/fuel range. The A/F sensor is installed upstream of the TWC, and
sends signals to the ECM/PCM which varies the duration of fuel injection accordingly.
Fig. 32: Identifying Air Fuel Ratio Sensor

Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor
The BARO sensor is inside the ECM/PCM. It converts atmospheric pressure into a voltage signal that the
ECM/PCM uses to modify the basic duration of the fuel injection discharge.
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor B
CMP sensor B detects the position of the No. 1 cylinder as a reference for sequential fuel injection to each
cylinder.
111
Fig. 33: Identifying Camshaft Position Sensor B

Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The CKP sensor detects crankshaft speed and is used by the ECM/PCM to determine ignition timing and
timing for fuel injection of each cylinder, as well as detecting engine misfire.
111
Fig. 34: Identifying Crankshaft Position Sensor

Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor ('05-07 models: Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1)
The ECT sensor ('05-07 models: ECT sensor 1) is a temperature dependent resistor (thermistor). The
resistance of the thermistor decreases as the engine coolant temperature increases.
111
Fig. 35: Identifying ECT Sensor (2005-2007 Models: ECT Sensor 1)

Ignition Timing Control
The ECM/PCM contains the memory for basic ignition timing at various engine speeds and manifold
absolute pressures. It also adjusts the timing according to engine coolant temperature and intake air
temperature.
Injector Timing and Duration
The ECM/PCM contains the memory for basic discharge duration at various engine speeds and manifold
pressures. The basic discharge duration, after being read out from the memory, is further modified by signals
sent from various sensors to obtain the final discharge duration.
By monitoring long term fuel trim, the ECM/PCM detects long term malfunctions in the fuel system and
sets a diagnostic trouble code (DTC).
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor (except '03-04 SULEV, LX-P models, and '05-07 models)
The IAT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor (thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases
as the intake air temperature increases.
111
Fig. 36: Identifying IAT Sensor (Except 2003-2004 SULEV, LX-P Models And 2005-2007 Models)
Knock Sensor
The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to minimize knock.
111
Fig. 37: Identifying Knock Sensor

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication (In relation to Readiness Codes)
The vehicle has certain "readiness codes" that are part of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems.
If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone dead, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the
ECM/PCM has been reset, these codes are reset. In some states, part of the emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set to complete. If all of them are not set to complete, the vehicle may fail the test, or the test
cannot be finished.
To check if the readiness codes are set to complete, turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the
engine. The MIL will come on for 15---20 seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are complete. If it
flashes five times, one or more readiness codes are not complete. To set each code, drive the vehicle or run
the engine as described in the procedures (see HOW TO SET READINESS CODES ).
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor

111
The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure into electrical signals to the ECM/PCM.
Fig. 38: Identifying Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor

Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor ('03-04 SULEV, LX-P models, and '05-07
models)
The mass air flow (MAF) sensor/intake air temperature (IAT) sensor contains a hot wire and a thermistor. It
is located in the intake air passage. The resistance of the hot wire and thermistor change due to intake air
temperature and air flow. The control circuit in the MAF sensor controls the current to keep the hot wire at a
set temperature. The current is converted to voltage in the control circuit, then output to the ECM/PCM.
111
Fig. 39: Identifying MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor (2003-2004 SULEV, LX-P Models And 2005-2007
Models)
Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor (M/T)
This sensor detects countershaft speed.
111
Fig. 40: Identifying Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor (M/T)

Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary HO2S)
The secondary HO2S detects the oxygen content in the exhaust gas downstream of the three way catalytic
converter (TWC), and sends signals to the ECM/PCM which varies the duration of fuel injection
accordingly. To stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater. The ECM/PCM compares the HO2S
output with the A/F sensor output to determine catalyst efficiency. The secondary HO2S is on the TWC.
111
Fig. 41: Identifying Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor

Throttle Position (TP) Sensor ('03-05 models)
The TP sensor is a potentiometer connected to the throttle valve shaft. As the throttle position changes, the
sensor varies the signal voltage to the ECM/PCM. The TP sensor is not available separately from the throttle
body.
111
Fig. 42: Identifying Throttle Position Sensor (2003-2005 Models)

ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM ('06-07 MODELS)
The throttle is electronically controlled by the electronic throttle control system. Refer to the Electronic
Throttle Control System Diagram ('06-07 models) to see a functional layout of the system.
Idle control: When the engine is idling, the ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain the proper
idle speed according to engine loads.
Acceleration control: When the accelerator pedal is pressed, the ECM/PCM opens the throttle valve
depending on the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor signal.
Cruise control: The ECM/PCM controls the throttle actuator to maintain set speed when the cruise control is
operating. The throttle actuator takes the place of the cruise control actuator.
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
As the accelerator pedal position changes, the sensor varies the signal voltage to the ECM/PCM.
111
Fig. 43: Identifying Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor

Throttle Body
111
The throttle body is a single-barrel side draft type. The lower portion of the throttle valve is heated by
engine coolant from the cylinder head to prevent icing of the throttle plate.
Fig. 44: Identifying Throttle Body

VTEC/VTC
 The i-VTEC has a VTC (Variable Valve Timing Control) mechanism on the intake camshaft in
addition to the usual VTEC.
This mechanism improves fuel efficiency and reduces exhaust emissions at all levels of engine speed,
vehicle speed, and engine load.
 The VTEC mechanism changes the valve lift and timing by using more than one cam profile.
 The VTC changes the phase of the intake camshaft via oil pressure. It changes the intake valve timing
continuously.
111
Fig. 45: Identifying VTEC/VTC Flow System

VTC System
 The VTC system makes continuous intake valve timing changes based on operating conditions.
 Intake valve timing is optimized to allow the engine to produce maximum power.
 Cam angle is advanced to obtain the EGR effect and reduce pumping loss. The intake valve is closed
quickly to reduce the entry of the air/fuel mixture into the intake port and improve the charging effect.
 The system reduces the cam advance at idle, stabilizes combustion, and reduces engine speed.
 If a malfunction occurs, the VTC system control is disabled and the valve timing is fixed at the fully
retarded position.
111
Fig. 46: Identifying VTC System

VTEC System
 The VTEC system changes the cam profile to correspond to the engine speed. It maximizes torque at
low engine speed and output at high engine speed.
 The low lift cam is used at low engine speeds, and the high lift cam is used at high engine speeds.
Fig. 47: Identifying VTEC System

VTEC/VTC
System Diagram
111
Fig. 48: VTEC/VTC System Diagram

Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor A
CMP sensor A detects camshaft angle position for the VTC system.
111
Fig. 49: Identifying Camshaft Position Sensor A

IDLE CONTROL SYSTEM
'03-05 models
When the engine is cold, the A/C compressor is on, the transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is pressed,
the power steering load is high, or the alternator is charging, the ECM/PCM controls current to the idle air
control (IAC) valve to maintain the correct idle speed. Refer to the Idle Control System Diagram (2003-
2005 models) to see the functional layout of the system.
'06-07 models
When the engine is cold, the A/C compressor is on, the transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is pressed,
the power steering load is high, or the alternator is charging, the ECM/PCM controls current to the throttle
actuator to maintain the correct idle speed.

111
The brake pedal position switch signals the ECM/PCM when the brake pedal is pressed.
Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve ('03-05 models)
To maintain proper idle speed, the IAC valve changes the amount of air bypassing the throttle body in
response to an electrical signal from the ECM/PCM.
Fig. 50: Identifying Idle Air Control Valve (2003-2005 Models)

Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The PSP switch signals the ECM/PCM when the power steering load is high.
FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM
Fuel Cutoff Control
During deceleration with the throttle valve closed, current to the injectors is cut off to improve fuel economy
at engine speeds over 1,000 rpm (A/T ('06-07 models): 1,200 rpm). Fuel cutoff control also occurs when the
engine speed exceeds 6,700 rpm, regardless of the position of the throttle valve, to protect the engine from
over-revving. When the vehicle is stopped, the ECM/PCM cuts the fuel at engine speeds over 5,000 rpm
111
(M/T ('03-05 models: 4,200 rpm)). The engine speed of fuel cut is lower on a cold engine.
Fuel Pump Control
When the ignition is turned on, the ECM/PCM grounds PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) which feeds
current to the fuel pump for 2 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. With the engine running, the
ECM/PCM grounds PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) and feeds current to the fuel pump. When the
engine is not running and the ignition is on, the ECM/PCM cuts ground to PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL
PUMP) which cuts current to the fuel pump.
PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2
PGM-FI main relay 1 (Fl MAIN) is energized whenever the ignition switch is ON (II) to supply battery
voltage to the ECM/PCM, power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP).
PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the
ignition switch is turned ON (II), and when the engine is cranking or running.
INTAKE AIR SYSTEM
Refer to the Intake Air System Diagram to see a functional layout of the system.
Intake Air Bypass Control Thermal Valve
When the engine is cold, the intake air bypass control thermal valve sends air to the injector.
The amount of air is regulated by engine coolant temperature.
Once the engine is hot, the intake air bypass thermal valve closes, stopping air to the injector.
111
Fig. 51: Identifying Intake Air Bypass Control Thermal Valve

Throttle Body ('03-05 models)
The throttle body is a single-barrel side draft type. The lower portion of the idle air control (IAC) valve is
heated by engine coolant from the cylinder head to prevent icing of the throttle plate.
111
Fig. 52: Identifying Throttle Valve Body (2003-2005 Models)

CATALYTIC CONVERTER SYSTEM
Three Way Catalytic Converter (TWC)
The TWC converts hydrocarbons (HC), carbon monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the
exhaust gas to carbon dioxide (CO2 ), nitrogen (N2 ), and water vapor.
111
Fig. 53: Identifying Three Way Catalytic Converter

POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) SYSTEM
The PCV valve prevents blow-by gasses from escaping into the atmosphere by venting them into the intake
manifold.
111
Fig. 54: Identifying Positive Crankcase Ventilation System

EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM
Refer to the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Diagram to see a functional layout of the system.
EGR Valve
The EGR valve lowers peak combustion temperatures and reduces oxides of nitrogen emissions (NOx) by
recirculating exhaust gas through the intake manifold and into the combustion chambers.
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM
Refer to the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Diagram to see a functional layout of the system.
EVAP Canister
The EVAP canister temporarily stores fuel vapor from the fuel tank until it can be purged from the EVAP
111
canister into the engine and burned.
EVAP Canister Purge Valve
When the engine coolant temperature is below 131°F (55°C), the ECM/PCM turns off the EVAP canister
purge valve which cuts vacuum to the EVAP canister.
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
The FTP sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure into an electrical input to the ECM/PCM.
Fig. 55: Identifying Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor

EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve
The EVAP canister vent shut valve is on the EVAP canister.
The EVAP canister vent shut valve controls the venting of the EVAP canister.
111
Fig. 56: Identifying EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve

FUEL CAP WARNING MESSAGE (2005-2007 MODELS)
The ECM/PCM detects whether the fuel fill cap is loose or missing under certain conditions and alerts the
driver by showing the information in the odometer/outside temperature display. If the ECM/PCM detects a
small volume leak, the MIL may come on during the second drive cycle and store a DTC.
First drive cycle
During the first drive cycle after a cold start, the ECM/PCM alerts the driver to check the fuel fill cap by
showing a "CHECK FUEL CAP" message in the odometer/outside temperature display (A), and it stores
Temporary DTC P0457 "Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Leak Detected/Fuel Cap Loose or Missing".
Tightening the fuel cap does not make the message go off immediately.
111
Fig. 57: Identifying Fuel Cap Warning Message (First Drive Cycle)
To make the message go off (With the HDS)
Procedure
1. Tighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks at least once.

2. Clear the Temporary DTC with the HDS.
3. Verify there is no leak by doing the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the
HDS. Start the engine, and drive at a steady speed over 28 mph (45 km/h), without moving the
accelerator pedal, for about 1 minute.
To make the message go off (Without the HDS)
Procedure
111
1. Tighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks at least once.

3. Start the engine, and drive at a steady speed over 28 mph (45 km/h), without moving the accelerator
pedal, for about 1 minute.
Second drive cycle
During the second drive cycle after a cold start, if the fuel fill cap is still loose or missing, the ECM/PCM
alerts the driver to check the fuel fill cap by showing a "CHECK FUEL CAP" message in the
odometer/outside temperature display as same as the first drive cycle. Tightening the fuel cap does not make
the message go off immediately.
Third drive cycle
During the third drive cycle after a cold start, if the fuel fill cap is still loose or missing, the ECM/PCM
stores DTC P0457 "Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Leak Detected/Fuel Cap Loose or Missing". The
malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) (A) comes on, and the "CHECK FUEL CAP" message goes off.
111
Fig. 58: Identifying MIL (Third Drive Cycle)

IDLE CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM ('03-05 MODELS)
The engine idle speed is controlled by the idle air control (IAC) valve:
 After the engine starts, the IAC valve opens for a certain amount of time. The amount of air is
increased to raise the idle speed.
 When the engine coolant temperature is low, the IAC valve is opened to obtain the proper fast idle
speed. The amount of bypassed air is controlled in relation to engine coolant temperature.
111
Fig. 59: Identifying Idle Control System Diagram (2003-2005 Models)

INTAKE AIR SYSTEM DIAGRAM
This system supplies air for engine needs. A resonator in the intake air duct provides additional silencing as
air is drawn into the system.
111
Fig. 60: Identifying Intake Air System Diagram

ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM ('06-07 MODELS)
The electronic throttle control system consists of the throttle actuator, throttle position (TP) sensor,
accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor, throttle actuator control module, and the ECM/PCM. The throttle is
electronically controlled by this system.
111
Fig. 61: Identifying Electronic Throttle Control System Diagram ('06-07 Models)
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM DIAGRAM
The EGR system reduces oxides of nitrogen (NOx) emissions by recirculating exhaust gas through the EGR
valve and the intake manifold into the combustion chambers. The ECM/PCM memory includes the ideal
EGR valve position for varying operating conditions.
The EGR valve position sensor detects the amount of EGR valve lift and sends it to the ECM/PCM. The
ECM/PCM then compares it with the ideal lift in its memory (based on signals sent from other sensors). If
there is any difference between the two, the ECM/PCM cuts current to the EGR valve.
111
Fig. 62: Identifying Exhaust Gas Recirculation System Diagram (2003-2005 Models)
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL DIAGRAM
The EVAP controls minimize the amount of fuel vapor escaping to the atmosphere. Vapor from the fuel
tank is temporarily stored in the EVAP canister until it can be purged from the canister into the engine and
burned.
 The EVAP canister is purged by drawing fresh air through it and into a port on the intake manifold.
The purging vacuum is controlled by the EVAP canister purge valve, which operates whenever engine
coolant temperature is above 131 °F (55 °C).
 During refueling, the fuel tank vapor control valve opens with the pressure in the fuel tank, and feeds
the fuel vapor to the EVAP canister (SULEV model).
111
Fig. 63: Identifying Evaporative Emission Control Diagram

ECM/PCM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
111
Fig. 64: ECM/PCM Circuit Diagram (1 Of 11)

111

111

111

111

111

111

111

111

111

111

HOW TO SET READINESS CODES

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) INDICATION (IN RELATION TO READINESS
CODES)
The vehicle has certain "readiness codes" that are part of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems.
If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone dead, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the
ECM/PCM has been reset, these readiness codes are reset. In some states, part of the emissions testing is to
make sure these codes are set to complete. If all of them are not set to complete, the vehicle may fail the
111
emission test, or the test cannot be finished.
To check if the readiness codes are set to complete, turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the
engine. The MIL will come on for 15-20 seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are complete. If it
flashes five times, one or more readiness codes are not set to complete. To set readiness codes from
incomplete to complete, do the procedure for the appropriate code.
To check the status of a specific DTC system, check the OBD status in the DTC MENU with the HDS (see
SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ). This screen displays the code, the current data list of the enable criteria,
and the status of the readiness testing.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER MONITOR AND READINESS CODE
NOTE:  Do not turn the ignition switch off during the procedure.
 All readiness codes are cleared when the battery is disconnected or
when the ECM/PCM is cleared with the HDS.
 Low ambient temperatures or excessive stop-and-go traffic may
increase the drive time needed to switch the readiness code from
incomplete to complete.
 The readiness code will not switch to complete until all the enable
criteria are met.
 If a fault in the secondary HO2S system caused the MIL to come on, the
readiness code cannot be set to complete until you correct the fault.
Enable Criteria
 ECT at 158°F (70°C) or more.

 Intake air temperature (IAT) at -13°F (-25°C) or higher.
 Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) reads more than 3 mph (5 km/h).
Procedure
1. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC), and bring up the READINESS CODEs
screen for Catalyst in the DTCs MENU.
3. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions with short periods of steady cruise. After about 5
miles (8 km), the readiness code should switch to completed.
4. If the readiness code is still not set to complete, check for a Temporary DTC with the HDS. If there is
no DTC, one or more of the enable criteria were probably not met; repeat the procedure.
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL SYSTEM MONITOR AND READINESS CODE
NOTE: All readiness codes are cleared when the battery is disconnected or when
the ECM/PCM is cleared with the HDS.
Enable Criteria
 Battery voltage is higher than 10.5 V.

111
 Engine at idle.
 ECT sensor between 176°F (80°C) and 212°F (100°C).
 MAP sensor less than 46.6 kPa (14 in.Hg, 350 mmHg).
 Vehicle speed 0 mph (0 km/h).
 IAT sensor between 32°F (0°C) and 212°F (100°C).
Procedure
1. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC).

3. Select EVAP TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS, then select the FUNCTION TEST in
the EVAP TEST MENU.
 If the functions are normal, readiness is complete.
 If the functions are not normal, go to the next step.
4. If the readiness code is still not set to complete, check for a temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, one
or more of the enable criteria were probably not met; repeat the procedure.
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR MONITOR AND READINESS CODE
Enable Criteria
ECT at 158°F (70°C) or more.
Procedure

2. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions with short periods of steady cruise. During the
drive, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) for 5 seconds. After about 3.5 miles (5.6 km), the
readiness code should switch from incomplete to complete.
3. Check the readiness codes screen for the Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor in the DTCs MENU with the
HDS.
 If the screen shows complete, readiness is complete.
 If the screen shows not complete, go to the next step.
4. Check for a Temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, the enable criteria was probably not met. Select the
DATA LIST Menu. Check the ECT in the ALL DATA LIST with the HDS. If the ECT is lower than
158°F (70°C), run the engine until it is higher than 158°F (70°C), then repeat the procedure.
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR HEATER MONITOR READINESS CODE
NOTE: All readiness codes are cleared when the battery is disconnected or when
the ECM/PCM is cleared with the HDS.
111
Procedure
1. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute. The readiness code should switch from incomplete to
complete.
2. If the readiness code is still not set to complete, check for a temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, repeat
the procedure.
MISFIRE MONITOR AND READINESS CODE
 This readiness code is always set to available because misfiring is continuously monitored.
 Monitoring pauses, and the misfire counter resets, if the vehicle is driven over a rough road.
 Monitoring also pauses, and the misfire counter holds at its current value, if the throttle position
changes more than a predetermined value, or if driving conditions fall outside the range of any related
enable criteria.
FUEL SYSTEM MONITOR AND READINESS CODE
 This readiness code is always set to available because the fuel system is continuously monitored
during closed loop operation.
 Monitoring pauses when the catalytic converter, EVAP control system, and A/F sensor monitors are
active.
 Monitoring also pauses when any related enable criteria are not being met. Monitoring resumes when
the enable criteria is again being met.
COMPREHENSIVE COMPONENT MONITOR AND READINESS CODE
This readiness code is always set to available because the comprehensive component monitor is
continuously running whenever the engine is cranking or running.
EGR MONITOR AND READINESS CODE
Enable Criteria
ECT at 176°F (80°C) or more.
Procedure
1. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's data link connector (DLC).

3. Drive at a steady speed with the A/T in D or M/T in 4th gear, 50-62 mph (80-100 km/h) or above for
more than 10 seconds.
4. With the A/T in D or M/T in 4th gear, decelerate from 62 mph (100 km/h) or above by completely
releasing the throttle for at least 5 seconds. If the engine is stopped during this procedure, go to step 2
and do the procedure again.
111
5. Check the OBD status screen for DTC P0401 in the DTC's MENU with the HDS.
 If it is passed, readiness is complete.
 If it is not passed, go to step 3 and retest.
111
ENGINE PERFORMANCE Firing Order & Cylinder Identification - Honda - All Models
ENGINE PERFORMANCE
Firing Order & Cylinder Identification - Honda - All Models
FIRING ORDER & CYLINDER IDENTIFICATION
Engine Configuation Firing Order Cylinder Identification
In-Line 3 1-3-2
In-Line 4 1-3-4-2
V6
3.0L & 3.5L 1-4-2-5-3-6
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:53:41
ENGINE PERFORMANCE Firing Order & Cylinder Identification - Honda - All Models
3.2L 1-2-3-4-5-6
111
2003-07 Engine Performance Electronic Throttle Control System - Accord
2003-07 Engine Performance
Electronic Throttle Control System - Accord
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:55:51
Fig. 1: Identifying Electronic Throttle Control System Components

DTC CODES
111
DTC INDEX
DTC Description
DTC P0122 TP Sensor A Circuit Low Voltage (2006-07 model)
DTC P0123 TP Sensor A Circuit High Voltage (2006-07 model)
DTC P0222 TP Sensor B Circuit Low Voltage (2006-07 model)
DTC P0223 TP Sensor B Circuit High Voltage (2006-07 model)
DTC P1683 Throttle Valve Default Position Spring Performance Problem
(2006-07 model)
DTC P1684 Throttle Valve Return Spring Performance Problem (2006-07
model)
DTC P2101 Throttle Actuator System Malfunction (2006-07 model)
DTC P2108 Throttle Actuator Control Module Problem (2006-07 model)
DTC P2118 Throttle Actuator Current Range/Performance Problem
(2006-07 model)
DTC P2122 APP Sensor A (TP Sensor D) Circuit Low Voltage (2006-07
model)
DTC P2123 APP Sensor A (TP Sensor D) Circuit High Voltage (2006-07
model)
DTC P2127 APP Sensor B (TP Sensor E) Circuit Low Voltage (2006-07
model)
DTC P2128 APP Sensor B (TP Sensor E) Circuit High Voltage (2006-07
model)
DTC P2135 TP Sensor A/B Incorrect Voltage Correlation (2006-07
model)
DTC P2138 APP Sensor A/B (TP Sensor D/E) Incorrect Voltage
Correlation (2006-07 model)
DTC P2176 Throttle Actuator Control System Idle Position Not Learned
(2006-07 model)
DTC P2552 Throttle Actuator Control Module Relay Malfunction (2006-
07 model)
DTC U0107 Lost Communication With Throttle Actuator Control Module
(2006-07 model)
DTC TROUBLESHOOTING
DTC P0122: TP SENSOR A CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (2006-07 MODEL)

3. Check TP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is there about 0.3 V or less?
YES - Go to step 4.
terminals at the throttle body and the throttle actuator control module.
111
Are DTC P0122 and P0222 indicated at the same time?
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the throttle body, the throttle actuator
control module, and at the ECM/PCM, then go to step 18. If the connections are OK, go to step
9.
NO - Go to step 5.
6. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
7. Disconnect the throttle actuator control module 16P connector.
8. Check for continuity between throttle body 6P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
111
Fig. 2: Checking Continuity Between Throttle Body 6P Connector Terminal No. 1 And Body
Ground
YES - Repair short in the wire between the throttle body and the throttle actuator control
module (TPSA line), then go to step 17.
NO - Substitute a known-good throttle actuator control module (see Throttle Actuator
Control Module Replacement ), then go to step 17 and recheck. If DTC P0122 is not
indicated, replace the original throttle actuator control module (see Throttle Actuator Control
Module Replacement ), then go to step 18. If DTC P0122 is indicated, go to step 15.
9. Measure voltage between throttle body 6P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
111
Fig. 3: Measuring Voltage Between Throttle Body 6P Connector Terminal No. 2 And Body
Ground
Is there about 5 V?

NO - Go to step 10.
13. Connect throttle body 6P connector terminal No. 2 to body ground with a jumper wire.
Fig. 4: Connecting Throttle Body 6P Connector Terminal No. 2 To Body Ground With A
Jumper Wire
111
14. Check for continuity between throttle actuator control module 16P connector terminal No. 11 and
body ground.
Fig. 5: Checking Continuity Between Throttle Actuator Control Module 16P Connector
YES - Substitute a known-good throttle actuator control module (see Throttle Actuator
NO - Repair open in the wire between the throttle body and the throttle actuator control module
(VCC line), then go to step 17.
16. Replace the throttle body (see 2006-07 MODEL ).
111
YES - If DTC P0122 is indicated, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the throttle
body and the throttle actuator control module, then go to step 1. If any other Temporary DTCs
DTC P0123: TP SENSOR A CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (2006-07 MODEL)

3. Check TP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is there about 4.8 V or more?
YES - Go to step 4.

NO - Go to step 5.
111
Ground
Is there about 5 V?

NO - Go to step 6.
111
Fig. 7: Connecting Throttle Body 6P Connector Terminal No. 1 To Body Ground With Jumper
Wire
body ground.
111
(TPSA line), then go to step 18.
111
Wire
15. Check for continuity between throttle actuator control module 16P connector terminal No. 9 and body
ground.
111
(SG line), then go to step 18.

111
DTC P0222: TP SENSOR B CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (2006-07 MODEL)

3. Check TP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
YES - Go to step 4.
control module, and at the ECM/PCM, then go to step 18. If the connections are OK, go to step
9.
NO - Go to step 5.
8. Check for continuity between throttle body 6P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
111
Fig. 11: Checking Continuity Between Throttle Body 6P Connector Terminal No. 3 And Body
Ground
YES - Repair short in the wire between the throttle body and the throttle actuator control
module (TPSB line), then go to step 17.
111
Ground
Is there about 5 V?

NO - Go to step 10.
111
Wire
body ground.
111
(VCC line), then go to step 17.

111
DTC P0223: TP SENSOR B CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (2006-07 MODEL)

3. Check TP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
YES - Go to step 4.

NO - Go to step 5.
111
Ground
Is there about 5 V?

NO - Go to step 6.
111
Wire
body ground.
111
(TPSB line), then go to step 19.
111
Fig. 18: Connecting Throttle Body 6P Connector Terminal No. 4 To Body Ground With A
Jumper Wire
ground.
111
(SG line), then go to step 19.

111
DTC P1683: THROTTLE VALVE DEFAULT POSITION SPRING PERFORMANCE PROBLEM

(2006-07 MODEL)
CAUTION: Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle body when you turn
the ignition switch ON (II) or while the ignition switch is ON (II). If you
do, you will seriously injure your finger if the throttle valve is activated.

4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
YES - Go to step 7.
8. Disconnect the intake air duct from the throttle body.
9. Push the throttle valve closed as shown in Fig. 20.
NOTE:  Do not operate the ignition switch during the check.

 Be careful not to pinch your finger during the check.
111
Fig. 20: Pushing Throttle Valve Closed

10. Release the throttle valve.
Does the throttle valve return?
YES - Clean the throttle body (see THROTTLE BODY CLEANING ), then go to step 13.
NO - Go to step 11.
111
DTC P1684: THROTTLE VALVE RETURN SPRING PERFORMANCE PROBLEM (2006-07

MODEL)
do, you will seriously injure your finger if the throttle valve is activated.

YES - Go to step 7.
9. Push the throttle valve open as shown in Fig. 21.
NOTE:  Do not operate the ignition switch during the check.

 Be careful not to pinch your finger during the check.
111
Fig. 21: Pushing Throttle Valve Open

10. Release the throttle valve.
Does the throttle valve return?
YES - Clean the throttle body (see THROTTLE BODY CLEANING ), then go to step 13.
NO - Go to step 11.
111
DTC P2101: THROTTLE ACTUATOR SYSTEM MALFUNCTION (2006-07 MODEL)
1. Record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot with the HDS.
3. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Go to step 5.
5. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
 Engine speed
 Vehicle speed
 Accelerator position
YES - Go to step 7.
terminals at the throttle body and at the throttle actuator control module, then clean the throttle
body (see THROTTLE BODY CLEANING ).
12. Visually check the throttle valve operation.
NOTE: Be careful not to pinch your finger during the check.
Does the throttle valve operate smoothly?
YES - Clean the throttle body (see THROTTLE BODY CLEANING ), then go to step 21 and
recheck. If DTC P2101 is indicated, go to step 18.
111
NO - Go to step 13.
16. Connect throttle body 6P connector terminals No. 5 and No. 6 with a jumper wire.
Fig. 22: Connecting Throttle Body 6P Connector Terminals No. 5 And No. 6 With Jumper Wire
17. Check for continuity between throttle actuator control module 16P connector terminals No. 1 and No.
8.
111
NO - Repair open in the wires between the throttle body and the throttle actuator control
module (motor drive lines), then go to step 20.
 Engine speed
 Vehicle speed
 Accelerator position
111
body and the throttle actuator control module, then clean the throttle body (see THROTTLE
BODY CLEANING ), and go to step 1. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
DTC P2108: THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MODULE PROBLEM (2006-07 MODEL)

Control Module Replacement ), and recheck. If DTC P2108 is not indicated, replace the
original throttle actuator control module (see Throttle Actuator Control Module
Replacement ).
terminals at the throttle body, the throttle actuator control module, and the ECM/PCM.
DTC P2118: THROTTLE ACTUATOR CURRENT RANGE/PERFORMANCE PROBLEM (2006-

07 MODEL)

2. Measure resistance between throttle actuator control module 16P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 8.
111
Fig. 24: Measuring Resistance Between Throttle Actuator Control Module 16P Connector
Is there about 1.0 ohms or less?
YES - Go to step 3.
Control Module Replacement ), then go to step 6 and recheck. If DTC P2118 is not indicated,
replace the original throttle actuator control module (see Throttle Actuator Control Module
Replacement ), then go to step 6.
4. At the throttle body side, measure resistance between throttle body 6P connector terminals No. 5 and
No. 6 with the throttle fully closed.
111
Fig. 25: Measuring Resistance Between Throttle Body 6P Connector Terminals No. 5 And No. 6
With Throttle Fully Closed
Is there about 1.0 ohms or less?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Repair short in the wires between the throttle body and throttle actuator control module
(motor drive lines), then go to step 6.
111
12. Slowly press the accelerator pedal to the floor.
DTC P2122: APP SENSOR A (TP SENSOR D) CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (2006-07 MODEL)

2. Check APP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
YES - Go to step 3.
terminals at APP sensor A and the ECM/PCM.
4. Disconnect APP sensor A/B 6P connector.
6. Measure voltage between APP sensor A/B 6P connector terminals No. 5 and No. 6.
111
Fig. 26: Measuring Voltage Between APP Sensor A/B 6P Connector Terminals No. 5 And No. 6
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Go to step 17.
9. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P).
10. Check for continuity between APP sensor A/B 6P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.
111
Fig. 27: Checking Continuity Between APP Sensor A/B 6P Connector Terminal No. 4 And Body
Ground
YES - Repair short in the wire between APP sensor A and the ECM/PCM (A26), then go to
step 20.
NO - Go to step 11.
11. Connect APP sensor A/B 6P connector terminal No. 4 to body ground with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 28: Connecting APP Sensor A/B 6P Connector Terminal No. 4 To Body Ground With
Jumper Wire
12. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal A26 and body ground.
111
Fig. 29: Checking Continuity Between ECM/PCM Connector Terminal A26 And Body Ground

NO - Repair open in the wire between APP sensor A and the ECM/PCM (A26), then go to step
20.
13. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P).
14. Connect APP sensor A/B 6P connector terminals No. 4 and No. 5 with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 30: Connecting APP Sensor A/B 6P Connector Terminals No. 4 And No. 5 With Jumper
Wire


NO - Go to step 18.
111
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Repair open in the wire between APP sensor A and the ECM/PCM (A21), then go to
step 20.
NO - Go to step 25.
19. Replace APP sensor A/B (see APP SENSOR REPLACEMENT ).
YES - If DTC P2122 is indicated, check for poor connections or loose terminals at APP sensor
A and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
111

substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM (seeECM/PCM REPLACEMENT ).
DTC P2123: APP SENSOR A (TP SENSOR D) CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (2006-07 MODEL)

YES - Go to step 3.
terminals at APP sensor A and the ECM/PCM.
111
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Go to step 7.
111
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Repair open in the wire between APP sensor A and the ECM/PCM (A24), then go to
step 10.
NO - Go to step 15.
10. Reconnect APP sensor A/B 6P connector.
15. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the test latest software, or substitute known-good
111
ECM/PCM (See UPDATING THE ECM/PCM ).

DTC P2127: APP SENSOR B (TP SENSOR E) CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (2006-07 MODEL)

2. Check APP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
YES - Go to step 3.
terminals at APP sensor B and the ECM/PCM.
111
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Go to step 17.
10. Check for continuity between APP sensor A/B 6P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
111
Fig. 35: Checking Continuity Between APP Sensor A/B 6P Connector Terminal No. 3 And Body
Ground
YES - Repair short in the wire between APP sensor B and the ECM/PCM (A25), then go to
step 20.
NO - Go to step 11.
11. Connect APP sensor A/B 6P connector terminal No. 3 to body ground with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 36: Connecting APP Sensor A/B 6P Connector Terminal No. 3 To Body Ground With
Jumper Wire
111

NO - Repair open in the wire between APP sensor B and the ECM/PCM (A25), then go to step
20.
13. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector A (31P).
14. Connect APP sensor A/B 6P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3 with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 38: Connecting APP Sensor A/B 6P Connector Terminals No. 1 And No. 3 With Jumper
Wire


NO - Go to step 18.
111
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Repair open in the wire between APP sensor B and the ECM/PCM (A20), then go to step
20.
NO - Go to step 27.
B and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
111

DTC P2128: APP SENSOR B (TP SENSOR E) CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (2006-07 MODEL)

YES - Go to step 3.
terminals at APP sensor B and the ECM/PCM.
111
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Go to step 7.
111
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Repair open in the wire between APP sensor B and the ECM/PCM (A23), then go to step
10.
NO - Go to step 15.
10. Reconnect APP sensor A/B 6P connector.
111
DTC P2135: TP SENSOR A/B INCORRECT VOLTAGE CORRELATION (2006-07 MODEL)
do, you will seriously injure your fingers if the throttle valve is
activated.

YES - Go to step 5.
Does the valve temporarily move to the fully closed position?

NO - Go to step 10.
12. Check for continuity between throttle actuator control module 16P connector terminals No. 10 and
No. 12.
111

Module Replacement ), then go to step 18.
14. Check for continuity between throttle actuator control module 16P connector terminals No. 10 and
No. 12.
111
YES - Repair short in the wires between the TPSA line and the TPSB line, then go to step 17.
NO - Go to step 15.
111
DTC P2138: APP SENSOR A/B (TP SENSOR D/E) INCORRECT VOLTAGE CORRELATION
(2006-07 MODEL)

2. Clear the DTC with HDS.
3. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor.
YES - Go to step 5.
terminals at APP sensor A/B and the ECM/PCM.
5. Check APP SENSOR A and APP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Are they the same voltage?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Go to step 11.
10. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminals A25 and A26.
111
Fig. 44: Checking Continuity Between ECM/PCM Connector Terminals A25 And A26
YES - Repair short in the wires between the ECM/PCM terminals (A25, A26), then go to step
13.
NO - Go to step 21.
111
A/B and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are
A/B and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are
DTC P2176: THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL SYSTEM IDLE POSITION NOT LEARNED
(2006-07 MODEL)
do, you will seriously injure your fingers if the throttle valve is
activated.
NOTE: If DTC P2135 is stored at the same time as DTC P2176, troubleshoot DTC
P2135 first, then recheck for DTC P2176.

YES - Go to step 6.
terminals at the throttle body and the throttle actuator control module, then clean the throttle
body (see THROTTLE BODY CLEANING ).
111

NOTE: Be careful not to pinch your finger. Keep hands away from the throttle
valve.
Does the throttle valve move to its fully closed position?

NO - Go to step 13.
12. Check for sludge or carbon on the throttle valve.
Is there sludge or carbon on the throttle valve?
YES - Clean the throttle body (see THROTTLE BODY CLEANING ), then go to step 21 and
recheck.
NO - Go to step 18.
16. Connect throttle body 6P connector terminals No. 5 and No. 6 with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 45: Connecting Throttle Body 6P Connector Terminals No. 5 And No. 6 With Jumper Wire
17. Check for continuity between throttle actuator control module 16P connector terminals No. 1 and No.
8.
111
NO - Repair open in the wires between the throttle body and the throttle actuator control
module (motor drive lines), then go to step 20.
111
body and the throttle actuator control module, then clean the throttle body (see THROTTLE
BODY CLEANING ), and go to step 1. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated,
DTC P2552: THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MODULE RELAY MALFUNCTION (2006-07

MODEL)

Is the RELAY Circuit OK?
terminals at the throttle actuator control module relay, the throttle actuator control module, and
the ECM/PCM.
NO - Go to step 4.
6. Remove the throttle actuator control module relay (A).
111
Fig. 47: Removing Throttle Actuator Control Module Relay

7. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector D (17P).

8. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal D15 and body ground.
111
Fig. 48: Checking Continuity Between ECM/PCM Connector Terminal D15 And Body Ground
YES - Repair short in the wire between the throttle actuator control module relay and the
ECM/PCM (D15), then go to step 10.
NO - Go to step 9.
9. Test the throttle actuator control module relay (see POWER RELAY TEST ).
Is the relay OK?

111

NO - Replace the throttle actuator control module relay, then go to step 10.
10. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector D (17P).
actuator control module relay, the throttle actuator control module, and the ECM/PCM, then go
to step 1. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTC's
troubleshooting.
actuator control module relay, the throttle actuator control module, and the ECM/PCM, then go
to step 1. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTC's
troubleshooting.
DTC U0107: LOST COMMUNICATION WITH THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MODULE

(2006-07 MODEL)

Is DTC U0107 indicated?
control module, and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 50. If the connections are OK, go to step 6.
NO - Go to step 4.
Is DTC U0107 indicated?

111

terminals at the throttle body, the throttle actuator control module relay, the throttle actuator
control module, and the ECM/PCM.
11. Check the throttle valve operation.
Does it open after the throttle valve closes?

NO - Go to step 13.
12. Check the throttle valve again.
Does the throttle valve open fully?

NO - Go to step 34.
ground.
111

NO - Repair open in the wire between the throttle body, the throttle actuator control module,
and G101, then go to step 50.
111

17. Measure voltage between throttle actuator control module relay 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body
ground.
111
Fig. 51: Measuring Voltage Between Throttle Actuator Control Module Relay 4P Connector

NO - Go to step 18.
18. Check the No. 1 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Repair open in the wire between the throttle actuator control module relay (+B line) and
the No. 1 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL (15 A) fuse, then go to step 50.
NO - Repair short in the wire between the throttle actuator control module relay (+B line) and
the No. 1 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL (15 A) fuse. Also replace the fuse, then go to
step 50.
19. Install the throttle actuator control module relay.
20. Measure voltage between throttle actuator control module 16P connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground.
111
Fig. 52: Measuring Voltage Between Throttle Actuator Control Module 16P Connector
Is there battery voltage for about 2 seconds?
Control Module Replacement ), then go to step 50 and recheck. If DTC U0107 is not
NO - Go to step 22.
111

24. Check the throttle actuator control module relay (see POWER RELAY TEST ).
Is the throttle actuator control module relay OK?

NO - Replace the throttle actuator control module relay, then go to step 50.
26. Measure voltage between throttle actuator control module relay 4P connector terminal No. 4 and body
ground.
111
Fig. 54: Measuring Voltage Between Throttle Actuator Control Module Relay 4P Connector

NO - Repair open in the wire between the throttle actuator control module relay and PGM-FI
main relay 1 (Fl MAIN), then go to step 50.
29. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector D (17P).
30. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal D15 and throttle actuator control module
relay 4P connector terminal No. 3.
111
Fig. 55: Checking Continuity Between ECM/PCM Connector Terminal D15 And Throttle
Actuator Control Module Relay 4P Connector Terminal No. 3

NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (D15) and the throttle actuator control
module relay, then go to step 50.
ground.
111
YES - Repair short in the wire between the throttle actuator control module and the throttle
actuator control module relay (+B line), then go to step 50.
NO - Go to step 32.
32. Connect throttle actuator control module relay 4P connector terminal No. 2 to body ground with a
jumper wire.
111
Fig. 57: Connecting Throttle Actuator Control Module Relay 4P Connector Terminal No. 2 To
Body Ground With Jumper Wire
ground.
111

NO - Repair open in the wire between the throttle actuator control module and the throttle
actuator control module relay (+B line), then go to step 50.
38. Check for continuity between ECM connector terminal B19 and body ground.
111
Fig. 59: Checking Continuity Between ECM Connector Terminal B19 And Body Ground
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (B 19) and the throttle actuator control
module, then go to step 50.
NO - Go to step 39.
39. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal B 19 and throttle actuator control
module 16P connector terminal No. 6.
111
Fig. 60: Checking Continuity Between ECM/PCM Connector Terminal B 19 And Throttle
Actuator Control Module 16P Connector Terminal No. 6
Module Replacement ), then go to step 50. If DTC U0107 is indicated, go to step 56.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (B 19) and the throttle actuator control
111

YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (B20) and the throttle actuator control
111

NO - Go to step 45.
45. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal B20 and throttle actuator control module
Fig. 62: Checking Continuity Between ECM/PCM Connector Terminal B20 And Throttle
Actuator Control Module 16P Connector Terminal No. 14
Module Replacement ), then go to step 50. If DTC U0107 is indicated, go to step 56.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (B20) and the throttle actuator control
111

49. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminals A8 and A9
individually.
Fig. 63: Checking Continuity Between Body Ground And ECM/PCM Connector Terminals A8
And A9 Individually
control module relay, the throttle actuator control module, and the ECM/PCM. Then reconnect
all connectors, and go to step 6.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A8, A9) and G 101, then go to step 50.
111
YES - If DTC U0107 is indicated, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the throttle
body, the throttle actuator control module relay, the throttle actuator control module, and the
ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
YES - If DTC U0107 is indicated, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the throttle
body, the throttle actuator control module relay, the throttle actuator control module, and the
ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
APP SENSOR SIGNAL INSPECTION
NOTE:  Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS before doing this
procedure. If any DTCs are indicated, troubleshoot them first, then do
this procedure.
 Press the accelerator pedal several times to check its operation. If it
does not operate properly, check the pedal, the throttle cable, and the
APP sensor individually. If you find a problem in one of them, replace
the part(s) that caused the problem.
dashboard.
111


3. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed, then check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with
the HDS.
 If it is below 2%, the APP sensor is OK.
 If it is above 2%, adjust the throttle cable (see 2006-07 MODEL ), then go to step 4.
the HDS.
 If it is above 2%, update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a
known-good ECM/PCM (see UPDATING THE ECM/PCM ), then go to step 5.
the HDS.
 If it is above 2%, replace the APP sensor (see APP SENSOR REPLACEMENT ), then go to
step 1.
APP SENSOR REPLACEMENT

111
1. Remove the throttle cable (see 2006-07 MODEL ).

2. Disconnect the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor 6P connector (A).
Fig. 65: Disconnecting Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6P Connector

3. Remove the bolts (B) and the APP sensor (C).

4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal.
THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the right kick panel; 2-door (see 2-DOOR - DOOR SILL AREA ), 4-door (see 4-DOOR -
FRONT DOOR SILL AREA ).
2. Disconnect the throttle actuator control module 16P connector (A).
111
Fig. 66: Disconnecting Throttle Actuator Control Module 16P Connector

3. Remove the bolts (B) and the throttle actuator control module (C).
4. Install the control module in the reverse order of removal.
111
2003-07 ENGINE PERFORMANCE Idle Control System - Accord
Idle Control System - Accord
Fig. 1: Identifying Idle Control System Component Location Index

DTC INDEX
DTC INDEX
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:57:38
DTC Description
('03-05 models)
('06-07 model)
('03-05 models)
('06-07 models)
DTC P0511 IAC Valve Circuit Malfunction ('03-05 models)
DTC TROUBLESHOOTING
DTC P0506: IDLE CONTROL SYSTEM RPM LOWER THAN EXPECTED ('03-05 MODELS)
NOTE: If DTC P0511 is stored at the same time as DTC P0506, troubleshoot DTC
P0511 first, then recheck for DTC P0506.

radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 20 seconds.
4. Confirm this data in the DATA LIST with the HDS:
 Intake air temperature above 18°F (-7.6°C)
 VSS is 0 mph (0 km/h)
 FSS is CLOSED
 ST FUEL TRIM between 0.65 and 1.47
YES - Go to step 6.
poor connections or loose terminals at the IAC valve and the ECM/PCM. If it is EXECUTING,
keep the engine idling until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION,
recheck with a different load condition (electrical, A/C, gear position, etc.), then go to step 3.
7. Do the IACV TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
Is the result OK?
YES - Check the A/C system and the power steering system, then go to step 10.
NO - Go to step 8.
111
9. Replace the IAC valve (see THROTTLE BODY DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY ).

14. Check this data in the DATA LIST with the HDS:
 ECT SENSOR above 158°F (70°C)
 IAT SENSOR above 18°F (-7.6°C)
 FSS is CLOSED
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the IAC valve and the ECM/PCM, then
go to step 1. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTC's
troubleshooting.
NO - Go to step 16.
YES - Troubleshooting is complete. If any other temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in
NO - If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the IAC
valve and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving
until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, recheck with a different
load condition (electrical, A/C, gear position, etc.), then go to step 14.
DTC P0506: IDLE CONTROL SYSTEM RPM LOWER THAN EXPECTED ('06-07 MODEL)

4. Check this data in the DATA LIST with the HDS:
 ECT SENSOR 1 above 156°F (70°C)
 IAT SENSOR above 32°F (0°C)
111
ST FUEL TRIM between 0.73 and 1.47


 FSS is CLOSED
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - If the screen indicates PASSED, go to step 15. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, let
the engine idle until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step
4 and recheck.
6. Remove the intake air duct from the throttle body.
7. Check for dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle bore.
Is there dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle bore?
YES - If there is dirt or carbon, clean the throttle body (see THROTTLE BODY
CLEANING ). Also check for a damage at the air cleaner element (see AIR CLEANER
ELEMENT INSPECTION/REPLACEMENT ), then go to step 9. If there is damage in the
throttle bore, go to step 8.
NO - Check the A/C system or power steering system, then go to step 17.
8. Replace the throttle body (see '06-07 MODELS ).
12. Conform this data in the DATA LIST with the HDS:
 IAT SENSOR above 32°F (0°C)
 FSS is CLOSED
YES - Go to step 1 and recheck.

NO - Go to step 14.
NO - If the screen indicates FAILED, check the A/C system and /or power steering system,
then go to step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes on. If
111
the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 12.

15. Remove the intake air duct from the throttle body.
16. Check for dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle bore.
Is there dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle bore?
YES - If there is dirt or carbon, clean the throttle body (see THROTTLE BODY
CLEANING ). Also check for a damage at the air cleaner element (see AIR CLEANER
ELEMENT INSPECTION/REPLACEMENT ), then go to step 9. If there is damage in the
throttle bore, go to step 8.
NO - Go to step 17.
17. Recheck with different load conditions (turn on the headlights, blower motor, rear window defogger
and/or/A/C, change the gear position, etc.).
YES - Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.

NO - If the screen indicates FAILED, check the A/C system and/or power steering system, then
go to step 1 and recheck. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until result comes
on. If the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 17 and recheck.
DTC P0507: IDLE CONTROL SYSTEM RPM HIGHER THAN EXPECTED ('03-05 MODELS)
DTC P0511 first, then recheck for DTC P0507.

YES - Go to step 5.
poor connections or loose terminals at the IAC valve and the ECM/PCM. If the screen indicates
EXECUTING, keep the engine idling until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, recheck with a different load condition (electrical, A/C, gear position, etc.), then
go to step 3.
6. Do the IACV TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
111
Is the result OK?
YES - Check these parts for vacuum leaks, then go to step 8:

 PCV valve
 PCV hose
 EVAP canister purge valve
 Throttle body
 Intake manifold
 Brake booster hose
NO - Go to step 7.
go to step 1. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTC's
troubleshooting.
NO - Go to step 14.

NO - If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the IAC
valve and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING or OUT OF
CONDITION, recheck with a different load condition (electrical, A/C, gear position, etc.), keep
DTC P0507: IDLE CONTROL SYSTEM RPM HIGHER THAN EXPECTED ('06-07 MODELS)

111
YES - Go to Step 5.
screen indicates EXECUTING, let the engine idle until a result comes on. If the screen indicates
OUT OF CONDITION, recheck with different load conditions (turn on the headlights, blower
motor, or A/C; change the gear position, etc.), then go to step 3.
5. Check for vacuum leaks at these parts:
 PCV valve
 PCV hose
 Throttle body
 Intake manifold
Are there any leaks?
YES - Repair or replace faulty parts, then go to step 6.

NO - Go to step 6.
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the throttle body and the ECM/PCM,
then go to step 1. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTC's troubleshooting.
NO - Go to step 11.
throttle body and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING or
OUT OF CONDITION, recheck with different load conditions (turn on the headlights, blower
motor, or A/C; change the gear position, etc.), keep idling until a result comes on.
DTC P0511: IAC VALVE CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION ('03-05 MODELS)

111
YES - Go to step 4.
terminals at the IAC valve and the ECM/PCM.
5. Disconnect the IAC valve 3P connector.
7. Measure voltage between IAC valve 3P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
111
Fig. 2: Measuring Voltage Between IAC Valve 3P Connector Terminal No. 2 And Body Ground
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the IAC valve and PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN),
then go to step 21.
111
9. Check for continuity between body ground and IAC valve 3P connector terminal No. 1.
Fig. 3: Checking Continuity Between Body Ground And IAC Valve 3P Connector Terminal No.
1
111
NO - Repair open in the wire between the IAC valve and G101, then go to step 21.
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A12) and the IAC valve, then go to
step 21.
NO - Go to step 14.
14. Connect IAC valve 3P connector terminal No. 3 to body ground with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 5: Connecting IAC Valve 3P Connector Terminal No. 3 To Body Ground With Jumper
Wire
111
Fig. 6: Checking For Continuity Between ECM/PCM Connector Terminal A12 And Body
Ground

NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A12) and the IAC valve, then go to step
21.
16. Reconnect the IAC valve 3P connector.
111

NO - Go to step 19.

111
go to step 1.
NO - Troubleshooting is complete. If any other temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to
26. Reconnect all connectors
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ). .

YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminal at the IAC valve and the ECM/PCM. If the
ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see SUBSTITUTE THE
A/C SIGNAL CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING

2. Turn the blower switch on.
3. Turn the A/C switch on.
4. Check the A/C CLUTCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is it ON?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Do the A/C pressure switch circuit troubleshooting (see A/C PRESSURE SWITCH
5. Check the A/C system.
Does the A/C system operate?
YES - The air conditioning system circuit is OK.

NO - Go to step 6.
8. Activate the A/C CLUTCH in the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
Is there a clicking noise from the A/C compressor clutch?
YES - Do the A/C system test (see A/C SYSTEM TEST ).

NO - Go to step 9.
9. Momentarily connect under-hood fuse/relay box 16P connector terminal No. 15 to body ground with a
jumper wire several times.
111
Fig. 8: Connecting Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box 16P Connector Terminal No. 15 To Body
Is there clicking noise from the A/C compressor clutch?
YES - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E18) and the A/C clutch relay.
NO - Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM (see UPDATING THE ECM/PCM , SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), then
recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the
ALTERNATOR FR SIGNAL CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING

'03-04 MODELS

2. Monitor the ALTERNATOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
3. Check if the indicated percentage varies when the headlight switch is on.
Does the percentage vary?
YES - The alternator signal circuit is OK.
111
NO - Go to step 4.
4. Turn the headlight switch and ignition switch OFF.
7. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminals A9 and B13.
Fig. 9: Measuring Voltage Between ECM/PCM Connector Terminals A9 And B13

Is there about 5 V?
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Go to step 13.
111
11. Connect alternator 4P connector terminal No. 4 to body ground with a jumper wire.
Fig. 10: Connecting Alternator 4P Connector Terminal No. 4 To Body Ground With Jumper
Wire
12. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal B13.
111
Fig. 11: Checking Continuity Between Body Ground And ECM/PCM Connector Terminal B13
YES - Test the alternator (see ALTERNATOR AND REGULATOR CIRCUIT

TROUBLESHOOTING ).
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (B13) and the alternator.
111
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (B13) and the alternator.
'05-06 MODELS

2. Monitor the ALTERNATOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
3. Check if the indicated percentage varies when the headlight switch is on.
111
Does the percentage vary?
YES - The alternator signal circuit is OK.

NO - Go to step 4.
4. Turn the headlight switch and ignition switch OFF.
111
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (B13) and the alternator.
PSP SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING

2. Align the steering wheel straight ahead.
3. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Does it indicate ON?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Go to step 14.
4. Turn the steering wheel to the full lock position.
Does it change to OFF?
YES - The PSP switch signal circuit is OK.

NO - Go to step 6.
7. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector.
Does it change to OFF?
YES - Replace the PSP switch (see POWER STEERING HOSE, LINE, AND PRESSURE
SWITCH REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Go to step 10.
13. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
111
Fig. 14: Checking Continuity Between PSP Switch 2P Connector Terminal No. 1 And Body
Ground
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E16) and the PSP switch.
15. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector.
16. Connect PSP switch 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire, then start the engine.
111
Fig. 15: Connecting PSP Switch 2P Connector Terminals No. 1 And No. 2 With Jumper Wire
Does it change to ON?
YES - Replace the PSP switch (see POWER STEERING HOSE, LINE, AND PRESSURE
SWITCH REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Go to step 18.
19. Remove the jumper wire from the PSP switch 2P connector.
22. Connect PSP switch 2P connector terminal No. 1 to body ground with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 16: Connecting PSP Switch 2P Connector Terminal No. 1 To Body Ground With Jumper
Wire
23. Check for continuity between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal E16.
111
Fig. 17: Checking Continuity Between Body Ground And ECM/PCM Connector Terminal E16

NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and the ECM/PCM (E16).
24. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
111
Fig. 18: Checking Continuity Between PSP Switch 2P Connector Terminal No. 2 And Body
Ground
NO - Repair open in the wire between the PSP switch and G202.
111
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT

TROUBLESHOOTING
2. Check the BRAKE SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Does it indicate OFF?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Inspect the brake pedal position switch (see BRAKE PEDAL AND BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH ADJUSTMENT ).
3. Press the brake pedal, and check the BRAKE SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Does it change to ON?
YES - The brake pedal position switch signal circuit (BKSW line) is OK.
NO - Go to step 4.
6. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch 4P connector.
111
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E22) and the No. 13 HORN, STOP (20
A) fuse. Replace the No. 13 HORN, STOP (20 A) fuse.
NO - Go to step 9.
9. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal E22 and brake pedal position switch 4P
111
Fig. 20: Checking Continuity Between ECM/PCM Connector Terminal E22 And Brake Pedal
Position Switch 4P Connector Terminal No. 2
YES - Repair open in the wire between the brake pedal position switch and the No. 13 HORN,
STOP (20 A) fuse. Inspect the brake pedal position switch (see BRAKE PEDAL AND
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH ADJUSTMENT ).
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E22) and the brake pedal position
switch.
IDLE SPEED INSPECTION
NOTE:  Leave the idle air control (IAC) valve connected.

 Before checking the idle speed, check these items:
111
-The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has not been reported on.
-Ignition timing
-Spark plugs
-Air cleaner
-PCV system
 Pull the parking brake lever up.
1. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister purge valve connector.

dashboard.


6. Check the idle speed without load conditions: headlights, blower fan, radiator fan, and air conditioner
111
off.
IDLE SPEED WITHOUT LOAD CONDITIONS ('03-04 SULEV AND M/T MODELS)
M/T 700+/-50 rpm
A/T 700+/-50 rpm (in Park or neutral)
A/T (except SULEV) model
800+/-50 rpm (in Park or neutral)
IDLE SPEED WITHOUT LOAD CONDITIONS ('05-07 MODELS)

M/T 720+/-50 rpm
7. Let the engine idle for 1 minute with high electric load (A/C switch on, temperature set to max cool,
blower fan on High, and headlights on high beam).
IDLE SPEED WITH HIGH ELECTRIC LOAD ('03-2004 SULEV AND M/T MODELS)
M/T 720+/-50 rpm
A/T (except SULEV) model
800+/-50 rpm (in Park or neutral)
'05-07 models:
IDLE SPEED WITH HIGH ELECTRIC LOAD (05-07 MODELS)

M/T 720+/-50 rpm
NOTE: If the idle speed is not within specification, do the ECM/PCM idle learn
procedure (see ECM/PCM IDLE LEARN PROCEDURE ). If the idle is still
out of specification, go to the symptom troubleshooting.
8. Reconnect the EVAP canister purge valve connector.
ECM/PCM IDLE LEARN PROCEDURE

The idle learn procedure must be done so the ECM/PCM can learn the engine idle characteristics.
Do the idle learn procedure whenever you do any of these actions:
 Replace ECM/PCM.
 Reset ECM/PCM.
 Update ECM/PCM.
111
NOTE: Erasing DTCs with the HDS does not require you to do the idle learn
procedure.
 Replace or clean the throttle body.
Procedure
1. Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio, rear window defogger, lights, etc.) are off.
radiator fan comes on, or until the engine coolant temperature reaches 194°F (90°C).
5. Let the engine idle for about 5 minutes with the throttle fully closed.
NOTE: If the radiator fan comes on, do not include its running time in the 5
minutes.
111
2003-07 ENGINE PERFORMANCE PCV System - Accord
PCV System - Accord
DTC CODES
DTC INDEX
DTC Description
DTC P2279 Intake Air System Leak Detected (2003-2004
except SULEV, LX-P models)
DTC TROUBLESHOOTING
DTC P2279: INTAKE AIR SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED ('03-04 EXCEPT SULEV, LX-P
MODELS)
NOTE:  Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on_board
1. Check for vacuum leaks at these parts:

 PCV valve
 PCV hose
 Purge (PCS) line
 Throttle body
 Intake manifold
Are the parts OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO - Repair or replace the leaking part(s), then go to step 4.
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle for 1 minute.
YES - Check the camshaft timing (see step 1 in CAM CHAIN INSTALLATION ), then go to
step 4.
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 2 and recheck.
111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:58:45
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle for 1 minute.
YES - Check for vacuum leaks at the PCV valve, the PCV hose, the purge (PCS) line, the
throttle body, the intake manifold, or the brake booster hose, then go to step 4. If any other
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
NO - Go to step 8.
YES - Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Temporary DTCs or were indicated in step 7,
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
NO - If the screen indicates FAILED, check for vacuum leaks at the PCV valve, the PCV hose,
the purge (PCS) line, the throttle body, the intake manifold, and the brake booster hose, then go
to step 1 and recheck. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result
comes on.
PCV VALVE INSPECTION

1. Check the PCV valve (A), hoses (B), and connections for leaks or restrictions.
111
Fig. 1: Checking PCV Valve, Hoses, And Connections For Leaks Or Restrictions
2. At idle, make sure there is a clicking sound from the PCV valve when the hose between the PCV
valve and intake manifold is lightly pinched (A) with your fingers or pliers.
If there is no clicking sound, check the PCV valve washer for cracks or damage. If the washer is OK,
replace the PCV valve and recheck.
111
Fig. 2: Checking PCV Valve Washer For Cracks Or Damage

PCV VALVE REPLACEMENT

1. Disconnect the PCV hose.
2. Remove the PCV valve (A).
111
Fig. 3: Removing PCV Valve

3. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new washer (B).
111
2003-07 ENGINE PERFORMANCE PGM-FI System - Accord
PGM-FI System - Accord
Fig. 1: Identifying PGM-FI System Component Location Index (1 Of 2)

111
2 августа 2011 г. 15:59:35
Fig. 2: Identifying PGM-FI System Component Location Index (2 Of 2)

DTC CODES
DTC INDEX
DTC Description
DTC P0101 MAF sensor Range/Performance Problem (2003-2004
111
SULEV, LX-P models and 2005-2007 models)

DTC P0102 MAF Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (2003-2004 SULEV, LX-P
DTC P0103 MAF Sensor Circuit High Voltage (2003-2004 SULEV, LX-
DTC P0108 MAP Sensor Circuit High Voltage
DTC P0111 IAT Sensor Circuit Range/Performance Problem (2005-2007
models)
DTC P0112 IAT Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (2003-2004 except SULEV,
LX-P models)
DTC P0112 IAT Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (2003-2004 SULEV, LX-P
DTC P0113 IAT Sensor Circuit High Voltage (2003-2004 except SULEV,
LX-P models)
DTC P0113 IAT Sensor Circuit High Voltage (2003-2004 SULEV, LX-P
DTC P0116 ECT Sensor Circuit Range/Performance Problem (2003-2004
models)
models)
DTC P0117 ECT Sensor/ECT Sensor 1 Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P0118 ECT Sensor/ECT Sensor 1 Circuit High Voltage
DTC P0122 TP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (2003-2004 models)
DTC P0122 TP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (2005 model)
DTC P0123 TP Sensor Circuit High Voltage (2003-2005 models)
DTC P0125 ECT Sensor Malfunction/Slow Response (2003-2004 models)
DTC P0125 ECT Sensor 1 Malfunction/Slow Response (2005-2007
models)
models)
models)
DTC P0134 A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Heater System Malfunction
DTC P0135 A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Heater Circuit Malfunction
DTC P0137 Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) Circuit Low Voltage (2003-2004
models)
DTC P0137 Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) Circuit Low Voltage (2005-2007
models)
2004 models)
2007 models)
111

models)
models)
DTC P0141 Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) Heater Circuit Malfunction
DTC P0171 Fuel System Too Lean
DTC P0172 Fuel System Too Rich
DTC P0300 Random Misfire and Any Combination of the Following
DTC P0325 Knock Sensor Circuit Malfunction
DTC P0335 CKP Sensor No Signal
DTC P0339 CKP Sensor Intermittent Interruption
DTC P0365 CMP Sensor B No Signal
DTC P0369 CMP Sensor B Intermittent Interruption
DTC P0562 Charging System Low Voltage (2005-2007 models)
DTC P0563 ECM/PCM Power Source Circuit Unexpected Voltage
DTC P050A Cold Start Idle Air Control System Performance (2007
model)
DTC P050B Cold Start Ignition Timing Performance (2007 model)
DTC P0602 ECM/PCM Programming Error (2005-2007 models)
DTC P0603 ECM/PCM Internal Control Module Keep Alive Memory
(KAM) Error
DTC P0606 ECM/PCM Processer Malfunction
DTC P0630 VIN Not Programmed or Mismatch (2005-2007 models)
DTC P0685 ECM/PCM Power Control Circuit/Internal Circuit
Malfunction
DTC P0700 A/T Control System Malfunction
DTC P0720 Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Circuit
Malfunction
DTC P1109 BARO Sensor Circuit Out of Range High (2005-2007
models)
DTC P1116 ECT Sensor 1 Performance Problem (2005-2007 models)
DTC P1121 TP Sensor Signal Lower Than Expected (2003-2005 models)
DTC P1122 TP Sensor Signal Higher Than Expected (2003-2005 models)
DTC P1128 MAP Sensor Signal Lower Than Expected
DTC P1129 MAP Sensor Signal Higher Than Expected
DTC P1157 A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) AFS Line High Voltage
DTC P1172 A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Circuit Out of Range High (2005-2007
111
models)
DTC P1297 ELD Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P1298 ELD Circuit High Voltage
DTC P1549 Charging System High Voltage (2005-2007 models)
DTC P16BB Alternator B Terminal Circuit Low Voltage (2005-2007
models)
DTC P16BC Alternator FR Terminal Circuit/IGP Circuit Low Voltage
(2005-2007 models)
models)
DTC P2184 ECT Sensor 2 Circuit Low Voltage (2005-2007 models)
DTC P2185 ECT Sensor 2 Circuit High Voltage (2005-2007 models)
DTC P2195 A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Signal Stuck Lean
DTC P2227 BARO Sensor Range/Performance Problem
DTC P2228 BARO Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P2229 BARO Sensor Circuit High Voltage
DTC P2238 A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) AFS+ Line Low Voltage
DTC P2252 A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) AFS- Line Low Voltage
DTC P2270 Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2); Circuit Signal Stuck Lean;
(2005-2007 models)
DTC P2271 Secondary HO2S (Sensor 2); Circuit Signal Stuck Rich;
(2005-2007 models)
DTC P2610 ECM/PCM Ignition Off Internal; Timer Performance
Problem; (2005-2007 models)
DTC P2A00 A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Range/Performance Problem
DTC U0073 F-CAN Malfunction (Bus-Off) (2003-2004 models)
DTC U0155 F-CAN Malfunction (Gauge; Control Module-ECM/PCM)
(2003-2005 models)
DTC U1102 F-CAN Malfunction (Bus-Off) (2005 model)
DTC U0073 F-CAN Malfunction (Bus-off); (2003-2004 models)
DTC U0155 F-CAN Malfunction (gauge control module-ECM/PCM);
(2003-2005 models)
DTC U1102 F-CAN Malfunction (Bus-Off); (2005 model)
(2006 model)
(2006 model)
DTC TROUBLESHOOTING
DTC P0101: MAF SENSOR RANGE/PERFORMANCE PROBLEM (2003-2004 SULEV, LX-P
MODELS AND 2005-2007 MODELS)
NOTE:
111
 Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board
 If DTC P1128, P1129, P2228, and/or P2229 are stored at the same time
as DTC P0101, troubleshoot those DTCs first, then recheck for DTC
P0101.
1. Check for poor connections or damage to these parts:

 PCV hose
 Intake air tube
 Air cleaner
 Purge (PCS) line
Are the parts OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO - Repair or replace the damaged parts, then go to step 14.
2. Check for damage or looseness at the air tube in the air cleaner.
Is it OK?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Reconnect or replace the air tube in the air cleaner, then go to step 14.
3. Check for a dirty air cleaner.
Is it dirty?
YES - Replace the air cleaner element (see AIR CLEANER ELEMENT
INSPECTION/REPLACEMENT ), then go to step 14.
NO - Go to step 4.
5. Check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is there about 0.2 gm/s or 0.5 V?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Go to step 12.
7. Vary the engine speed between 2,000 rpm and 3,000 rpm.
Does the reading change?
YES - Go to step 9.
111
NO - Go to step 12.
9. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on,
then let it idle.
 Engine speed
 Vehicle speed
 MAP sensor
 MAF sensor

NO - If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Check the
poor connections or loose terminals at the MAF sensor and the ECM/PCM. If the screen
13. Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor Replacement ).
 Engine speed
 Vehicle speed
 MAP sensor
 MAF sensor
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the MAF sensor and the ECM/PCM,
then go to step 1.
NO - Go to step 19.
NO - If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the MAF
sensor and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 17 and recheck.
DTC P0102: MAF SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (2003-2004 SULEV, LX-P MODELS AND
2005-2007 MODELS)
111
TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION .

Is about 0 gm/s or 0.1 V or less indicated?
YES - Go to step 3.
terminals at the MAF sensor and the ECM/PCM.
4. Check the No. 18 ACG (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Repair short in the wire between the MAF sensor and the No. 18 ACG (15 A) fuse. Also
replace the No. 18 ACG (15 A) fuse, then go to step 20.
5. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector.
7. Measure voltage between MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector terminal No. 5 and body ground.
111
Fig. 3: Measuring Voltage Between MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor 5P Connector Terminal No. 5 And
Body Ground
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the No. 18 ACG (15 A) fuse and the MAF sensor, then
go to step 20.
9. Measure resistance between MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
111
Fig. 4: Measuring Resistance Between MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor 5P Connector Terminal No. 3
And Body Ground
Is there 190-210 kohms?

NO - Go to step 10.
11. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (22P).
12. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal C22 and body ground.
111
Fig. 5: Checking Continuity Between ECM/PCM Connector Terminal C22 And Body Ground
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (C22) and the MAF sensor, then go to
step 20.
NO - Go to step 13.
13. Connect MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector terminal No. 3 to body ground with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 6: Connecting MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor 5P Connector Terminal No. 3 To Body Ground
With Jumper Wire
111

NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (C22) and the MAF sensor, then go to
step 20.
15. Reconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector.
16. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral).
17. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminal C22 and body ground.
111
Fig. 8: Measuring Voltage Between ECM/PCM Connector Terminal C22 And Body Ground
Is there about 1.5 V?

NO - Go to step 18.
111

then go to step 1.
NO - Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to
the indcated DTC's troubleshooting.
(see UPDATING THE ECM/PCM , or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see SUBSTITUTE
THE ECM/PCM ). ).
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the MAF sensor and the ECM/PCM. If
the ECM/PCM was updated substitute a known good ECM/PCM (see SUBSTITUTE THE
ECM/PCM ) then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM (see '03-05 models ), '06-07 models. If any other
DTC P0103: MAF SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (2003-2004 SULEV, LX-P MODELS AND
2005-2007 MODELS)

Is about 202 gm/s or 4.89 V or more indicated?
YES - Go to step 3.
terminals at the MAF sensor and the ECM/PCM.
6. Disconnect ECM/PCM connector C (22P).
111
Fig. 9: Connecting MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor 5P Connector Terminal No. 4 To Body Ground
With Jumper Wire
111
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (C21) and the MAF sensor, then go to
step 15.
9. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector C (22P).
10. Reconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector.
11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral).
111
12. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminal C22 and body ground.
Fig. 11: Measuring Voltage Between ECM/PCM Connector Terminal C22 And Body Ground
Is there about 1.5 V?

NO - Go to step 13.
111

20. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software (seeUPDATING THE ECM/PCM ), or
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the MAF sensor and the ECM/PCM. If
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM; '03-05 (see '03-05 models ), '06-07 (see '06-07
models). If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTC's
troubleshooting.
DTC P0107: MAP SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (2003-2004 MODELS)


NO - Go to step 6.
6. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is about 3 kPa (1.0 in.Hg, 26 mmHg), or 0.23 V or less indicated?

111
YES - Go to step 7.
terminals at the MAP sensor and the ECM/PCM.
8. Disconnect the MAP sensor 3P connector.

NO - Go to step 11.
11. Measure voltage between MAP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.
111
Fig. 12: Measuring Voltage Between MAP Sensor 3P Connector Terminals No. 1 And No. 3
Is there about 5 V?

NO - Go to step 12.
111
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A21) and the MAP sensor, then go to
step 29.
NO - Go to step 33.
16. Check for continuity between MAP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
111
Fig. 14: Checking Continuity Between MAP Sensor 3P Connector Terminal No. 2 And Body
Ground
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A30) and the MAP sensor, then go to
step 28.
NO - Go to step 33.
111
19. Disconnect ECM/PCM connectors A (31P) and E(31P).

 MAP sensor
 TP sensor
 FTP sensor
 EGR valve
individually.
A20, A21 And E5 Individually
111
NO - Go to step 22.
22. Reconnect ECM/PCM connectors A (31P) and E(31P).
Is there about 5 V?

NO - Go to step 33.
25. Continue to monitor voltage at the ECM/PCM connector terminal A21 while reconnecting these parts,
one at a time:
 MAP sensor
 TP sensor
 FTP sensor
 EGR valve
111

NO - Go to step 33.
27. Replace the MAP sensor (see MAP SENSOR REPLACEMENT ).
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the MAP sensor and the ECM/PCM,
then go to step 1.
the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
35. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs wit h the HDS.

YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the MAP sensor and the ECM/PCM. If
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM (see ECM/PCM Replacement ). If any other
DTC P0107: MAP SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (2005-2007 MODELS)

YES - Go to step 3.
111
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Go to step 7.
111
Is there about 5 V?

NO - Go to step 8.
111
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A21) and the MAP sensor, then go to
step 15.
NO - Go to step 20.
12. Check for continuity between MAP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
111
Fig. 19: Checking Continuity Between MAP Sensor 3P Connector Terminal No. 2 And Body
Ground
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A30) and the MAP sensor, then go to
step 15.
NO - Go to step 20.
111

then go to step 1.
the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (seeSUBSTITUTE THE
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM; '03-05 models (see '03-05 models ), '06-07 models
(see '06-07 models). If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTC P0108: MAP SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE

Is 160 kPa (47.1 in.Hg, 1,197 mmHg), or 4.49 V or more indicated?
YES - Go to step 3.
5. Connect MAP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3 with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 20: Connecting MAP Sensor 3P Connector Terminals No. 2 And No. 3 With Jumper Wire

YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Go to step 21.
111
9. Remove the jumper wire from the MAP sensor 3P connector.

10. Turn the ignition switch ON(II).
Is there about 5 V?

NO - Go to step 12.
111

15. Connect MAP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 3 to body ground with a jumper wire.
Fig. 22: Connecting MAP Sensor 3P Connector Terminal No. 3 To Body Ground With Jumper
Wire
111

NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A24) and the MAP sensor, then go to
step 23.
18. Connect ECM/PCM connector terminals A24 and A30 with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 24: Connecting ECM/PCM Connector Terminals A24 And A30 With Jumper Wire


NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A30) and the MAP sensor, then go to
step 23.
111
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM; '03-05 (see '03-05 models ), '06-07 (see '06-07
models).
DTC P0111: IAT SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE PROBLEM (2005-2007 MODELS)
1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the ECT sensor 1/2 and the IAT sensor.
Are the connections and terminals OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO - Repair the connectors or terminals, then go to step 15.
3. Allow IAT sensor to cool to ambient temperature.
4. Note the ambient temperature.
5. Connect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor to the 5P connector, but do not install the sensor to the air
cleaner.
7. Note the value of the IAT SENSOR quickly in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
8. Compare the value of IAT SENSOR and the ambient temperature.
Does the value of IAT SENSOR differ 5.4°F (3°C) or more?

NO - Go to step 9.
9. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor from the 5P connector.
10. Using a heat gun, blow hot air on the MAF sensor/IAT sensor for a few seconds. Do not apply the
111
heat longer than a few seconds or you will damage the sensor.
11. Connect MAF sensor/IAT sensor to the 5P connector, but do not install the sensor to the air cleaner.
12. Check the IAT SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Does the IAT SENSOR change 58°F (32°C) or more?
terminals at the IAT sensor and the ECM/PCM.
NO - Go to step 13.
YES - If DTC P0111 is indicated, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the IAT
sensor and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
NO - Go to step 19.
NO - IF the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at IAT
DTC P0112: IAT SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (2003-2004 EXCEPT SULEV, LX-P
MODELS)

Is about 356°F (180°C) or more, or 0.08 V or less indicated?
YES - Go to step 3.
111

4. Disconnect the IAT sensor 2P connector.
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Go to step 11.
10. Check for continuity between IAT sensor 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
111
Fig. 25: Checking Continuity Between IAT Sensor 2P Connector Terminal No. 2 And Body
Ground
YES - Repair short in the wire between the IAT sensor and the ECM/PCM (B17), then go to
step 13.
NO - Go to step 18.
111
12. Replace the IAT sensor (see MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor Replacement ).
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the IAT sensor and the ECM/PCM,
then go to step 1.
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the IAT sensor and the ECM/PCM. If
DTC P0112: IAT SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (2003-2004 SULEV, LX-P MODELS AND
2005-2007 MODELS)

YES - Go to step 3.
111
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Go to step 11.
10. Check for continuity between MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
Fig. 26: Checking Continuity Between MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor 5P Connector Terminal No. 2
And Body Ground
YES - Repair short in the wire between the IAT sensor and the ECM/PCM (B17), then go to
step 13.
NO - Go to step 18.
111
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the
ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see SUBSTITUTE
THE ECM/PCM ), then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO - If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
replace the original ECM/PCM (see '03-05 models, '06-07 models ). If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTC P0113: IAT SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (2003-2004 EXCEPT SULEV, LX-P
MODELS)

Is about -40°F (-40°C) or less, or 4.90 V or more indicated?
YES - Go to step 3.
4. Disconnect the IAT sensor 2P connector.
5. Connect IAT sensor 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 27: Connecting IAT Sensor 2P Connector Terminals No. 1 And No. 2 With Jumper Wire

YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Go to step 18.
111

9. Remove the jumper wire from the IAT sensor 2P connector.
11. Measure voltage between IAT sensor 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
Fig. 28: Measuring Voltage Between IAT Sensor 2P Connector Terminal No. 2 And Body
Ground
111
Is there about 5 V?

NO - Go to step 17.
15. Connect IAT sensor 2P connector terminal No. 1 to body ground with a jumper wire.
Fig. 29: Connecting IAT Sensor 2P Connector Terminal No. 1 To Body Ground With Jumper
Wire
111

NO Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A23) and the IAT sensor, then go to step
20.
17. Measure voltage between ECM/PCM connector terminal B17 and body ground.
111
Fig. 31: Measuring Voltage Between ECM/PCM Connector Terminal B17 And Body Ground
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (B17) and the IAT sensor, then go to
step 20.
NO - Go to step 25.
19. Replace the IAT sensor (see MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor Replacement ).
111
then go to step 1.
25. Turn ignition switch OFF.
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the IAT sensor and the ECM/PCM. If
DTC P0113: IAT SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (2003-2004 SULEV, LX-P MODELS AND
2005-2007 MODELS)

YES - Go to step 3.
5. Connect MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 32: Connecting MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor 5P Connector Terminals No. 1 And No. 2 With
Jumper Wire

YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Go to step 18.
9. Remove the jumper wire from the IAT sensor 5P connector.
11. Measure voltage between MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
111
Fig. 33: Measuring Voltage Between MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor 5P Connector Terminal No. 2
And Body Ground
Is there about 5 V?

NO - Go to step 17.
111
Fig. 34: Connect MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor 5P Connector Terminal No. 1 To Body Ground With
Jumper Wire
111

NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A23) and the IAT sensor, then go to step
20.
111
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (B17) and the IAT sensor, then go to
step 20.
NO - Go to step 25.
Is P0113 indicated?
111
then go to step 1.
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the MAF/IAT sensor and the
ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see
SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step
1.
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM; '03-05, '06-07 models (see '03-05 models, '06-07
models ). If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTC's
troubleshooting.
DTC P0116: ECT SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE PROBLEM (2003-2004

MODELS)

2. Check the ECT SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Go to step 7.
3. Note the coolant temperature from step 2.
5. Let the engine cool for 1 hour.
Did the ECT change 3.6°F (2°C) or more?
YES - Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Check the thermostat and the cooling
system.
NO - Go to step 10.
7. Note the coolant temperature.
111
Does the ECT change 3.6°F (2°C) or more?
YES - Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Check the thermostat and the cooling
system.
NO - Go to step 10.
11. Replace the ECT sensor (see ECT SENSOR/ECT SENSOR 1 REPLACEMENT ).
15. Allow the engine to cool to ambient temperature.
16. Start the engine, and let it idle 20 minutes.
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the ECT sensor and the ECM/PCM,
NO - Go to step 18.
Does the screen indicates PASSED?
NO - If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the ECT
step 15.
DTC P0116: ECT SENSOR 1 RANGE/PERFORMANCE PROBLEM (2005-2007 MODELS)

2. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
YES - Go to step 6.
111
NO - Go to step 3.
3. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Does ECT SENSOR 1 change 18°F (10°C) or more?
terminals at ECT sensor 1 and the ECM/PCM.
NO - Go to step 11.
8. Open the hood, and let the engine cool for 3 hours.
Does ECT SENSOR 1 change 18°F (10°C) or more?
NO - Go to step 11.
12. Replace ECT sensor 1 (see ECT SENSOR/ECT SENSOR 1 REPLACEMENT ).
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 1 and the ECM/PCM, then
go to step 1.
NO - Go to step 17.
YES - Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 16,
NO - If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 1
and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a
result comes on.
DTC P0117: ECT SENSOR/ECT SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE

111

2. Check the ECT SENSOR (1) in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
YES - Go to step 3.
terminals at the ECT sensor/ECT sensor 1 and the ECM/PCM.
4. Disconnect the ECT sensor/ECT sensor 1 2P connector.
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Go to step 11.
10. Check for continuity between ECT sensor/ECT sensor 1 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body
ground.
111
Fig. 37: Checking Continuity Between ECT Sensor/ECT Sensor 1 2P Connector Terminal No. 1
And Body Ground
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECT sensor/ECT sensor 1 and the ECM/PCM (B8),
then go to step 13.
NO - Go to step 18.
12. Replace the ECT sensor/ECT sensor 1 (see ECT SENSOR/ECT SENSOR 1 REPLACEMENT ).
111
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the ECT sensor/ECT sensor 1 and the
1.
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM (see '03-05 models, '06-07 models ). If any other
DTC P0118: ECT SENSOR/ECT SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE

YES - Go to step 3.
terminals at the ECT sensor/ECT sensor 1 and the ECM/PCM.
4. Disconnect the ECT sensor/ECT sensor 1 2P connector.
5. Connect ECT sensor/ECT sensor 1 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 38: Connecting ECT Sensor/ECT Sensor 1 2P Connector Terminals No. 1 And No. 2 With
Jumper Wire

YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Go to step 18.
9. Remove the jumper wire from the ECT sensor/ECT sensor 1 2P connector.
11. Measure voltage between ECT sensor/ECT sensor 1 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
111
Fig. 39: Measuring Voltage Between ECT Sensor/ECT Sensor 1 2P Connector Terminal No. 1
And Body Ground
Is there about 5 V?

NO - Go to step 17.
15. Connect ECT sensor/ECT sensor 1 2P connector terminal No. 2 to body ground with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 40: Connecting ECT Sensor/ECT Sensor 1 2P Connector Terminal No. 2 To Body Ground
With Jumper Wire
111

NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A23) and the ECT sensor/ECT sensor 1,
then go to step 20.
111
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (B8) and the ECT sensor/ECT sensor 1,
then go to step 20.
NO - Go to step 25.
19. Replace the ECT sensor/ECT sensor 1 (see ECT SENSOR/ECT SENSOR 1 REPLACEMENT ).
111
Is P0118 indicated?
SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ) then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step
1.
DTC P0122: TP SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (2003-2004 MODELS)


NO - Go to step 6.
6. Check the TP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is there about 0.5 V when the throttle is fully closed, and about 4.5 V when the throttle is fully
opened?
terminals at the TP sensor and the ECM/PCM.
NO - Go to step 7.
8. Disconnect the TP sensor 3P connector.
111

10. Measure voltage between TP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.
Fig. 43: Measuring Voltage Between TP Sensor 3P Connector Terminals No. 1 And No. 3
Is there about 5 V?

NO - Go to step 19.
111

12. At the sensor side, measure resistance between TP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2
with the throttle fully closed.
Fig. 44: Measuring Resistance Between TP Sensor 3P Connector Terminals No. 1 And No. 2
Is there about 0.5-0.9 kohms?

NO - Go to step 29.
111
Is there about 5.0 kohms ?

NO - Go to step 29.
111

16. On the wire harness side, check for continuity between TP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 2 and
body ground.
Fig. 46: Checking Continuity Between TP Sensor 3P Connector Terminal No. 2 And Body
Ground
111
YES - Repair short in the wire between the TP sensor and the ECM/PCM (A29), then go to step
30.
NO - Go to step 17.
17. Connect ECM/PCM connector terminal A29 to body ground with a jumper wire.
Fig. 47: Connecting ECM/PCM Connector Terminal A29 To Body Ground With Jumper Wire
18. Check for continuity between TP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
111
Ground

NO - Repair open in the wire between the TP sensor and the ECM/PCM (A29), then go to step
30.
111
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A20) and the TP sensor, then go to step
30.
NO - Go to step 35.
22. Disconnect ECM/PCM connectors A (31P) and E (31P).
 MAP sensor
 TP sensor
 FTP sensor
 EGR valve
individually.
111
A20, A21 And E5 Individually
NO - Go to step 25.
25. Reconnect ECM/PCM connectors A (31P) and E (31P).
111
Is there about 5 V?

NO - Go to step 35.
28. Continue to monitor voltage at ECM/PCM connector terminal A21 while reconnecting these parts,
one at a time:
 MAP sensor
 TP sensor
 FTP sensor
 EGR valve
NO - Go to step 35.
29. Replace the throttle body (see THROTTLE BODY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).
111

YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the TP sensor and the ECM/PCM, then
go to step 1.
NO - Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go the
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the TP sensor and the ECM/PCM. If the
terminals at the TP sensors and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good ECM/PCM, then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
DTC P0122: TP SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (2005 MODEL)

opened?
NO - Go to step 3.
6. On the wire harness side, measure voltage between TP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.
111
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Go to step 15.
111
Is there about 0.5-0.9 kohms ?
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Go to step 16.
111
Is there about 5.0 kohms ?

NO - Go to step 16.
111
Ground
YES - Repair short in the wire between the TP sensor and the ECM/PCM (A29), then go to step
17.
NO - Go to step 13.
111
13. Connect ECM/PCM connector terminal A29 to body ground with a jumper wire.
Fig. 56: Connecting ECM/PCM Connector Terminal A29 To Body Ground With Jumper Wire
111
Ground

NO - Repair open in the wire between the TP sensor and the ECM/PCM (A29), then go to step
17.
111
Is there about 5 V?
17.
NO - Go to step 22.
go to step 1.
111
22. Turn the ignition switch OFF

DTC P0123: TP SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (2003-2005 MODELS)

opened?
NO - Go to step 3.
6. Measure voltage between TP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.
111
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Go to step 7.
111
Is there about 5 V?
10.
NO - Go to step 15.
12. Reset ECM/PCM with the HDS.
go to step 1.
111

DTC P0125: ECT SENSOR MALFUNCTION/SLOW RESPONSE (2003-2004 MODELS)

Is about 86°F (30°C) or less, or 2.61 V or more indicated?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Check the thermostat and the cooling
system.
3. Let the engine idle for 6 minutes.
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Check the thermostat (see
THERMOSTAT TEST ) and the cooling system.
6. Replace the ECT sensor (see ECT SENSOR/ECT SENSOR 1 REPLACEMENT ).
111
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the ECT sensor and the ECM/PCM,
then go to step 1.
NO - Go to step 13.
YES - Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTC were indicated in
DTC P0125: ECT SENSOR 1 MALFUNCTION/SLOW RESPONSE (2005-2007 MODELS)
1. Start the engine, and let it idle 5 minutes or more.

Is about 10°F (-12°C) or less, or 4.45 V or more indicated?
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Go to step 3.
3. Allow the engine to cool to 104°F (40°C) or less.
4. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
6. Let the engine idle until ECT SENSOR 1 goes up 49°F (27°C) or more from the recorded
temperature.
8. Compare ECT SENSOR 2 and the recorded temperature.
Did ECT SENSOR 2 change 17°F (9.5°C) or more?
terminals at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2 and the ECM/PCM.
NO - Check the thermostat (see THERMOSTAT TEST ), then go to step 9.
10. Replace ECT sensor 1 (see ECT SENSOR/ECT SENSOR 1 REPLACEMENT ).
111

YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the
NO - Go to step 17.
NO - If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT
sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 14 and recheck.
DTC P0128: COOLING SYSTEM MALFUNCTION (2003-2004 MODELS)
 If the DTCs listed below are stored at the same time as DTC P0128,
troubleshoot them first, then recheck for P0128.
P0112, P0113: Intake air temperature (IAT) sensor

P0116, P0117, P0118, P0125: Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor
P0300: Random misfire
P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304: No. 1, No. 2, No. 3, or No. 4 cylinder misfire
P0335, P0339: Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor
P2227, P2228, P2229: Barometric pressure (BARO) sensor
P2646, P2647, P2648, P2649: VTEC system
P0506, P0507: Idle control system malfunction
P0511: Idle air control (IAC) valve
DTC P0128 can occasionally set when the hood is opened while the engine is running.

3. Turn the blower switch OFF.
4. Turn the A/C switch OFF.
5. Check the FAN CTRL in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
111
Is it OFF?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Wait until the FAN CTRL is off, then go to step 6.
6. Check the ECT SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS, then check the radiator fan operation.
Does the radiator fan keep running when the engine coolant temperature is less than 158°F (70°
C)?
YES - Check the radiator fan circuit (see RADIATOR FAN CIRCUIT
TROUBLESHOOTING ), the radiator fan switch circuit for open (see RADIATOR FAN
SWITCH CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING (OPEN) ), the radiator fan switch circuit for
short (see RADIATOR FAN SWITCH CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING (SHORT) ), and
the radiator fan switch (see RADIATOR FAN SWITCH TEST ). If the circuits and the switch
are OK, go to step 21.
NO - Go to step 7.
10. Do the RADIATOR FAN TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS for 20 minutes.
YES - Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.

NO - Go to step 12.
13. Let the engine cool until the coolant temperature is between 23°F (-5°C) and 95°F (35°C).
14. Replace the thermostat (see THERMOSTAT REPLACEMENT ).
YES - Check the cooling system, then go to step 1.

NO - Go to step 20.
111

NO - If the screen indicates FAILED, check the cooling system, then go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until the result comes on.
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the ECT sensor and the ECM/PCM. If
ECM/PCM ), then go to step 22. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO - Go to step 25.
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM (see ECM/PCM Replacement). If any other
(see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), the go to step 22. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
go to step 1 If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 22.
DTC P0128: COOLING SYSTEM MALFUNCTION (2005-2007 MODELS)

3. Turn the blower switch OFF.
4. Turn the A/C switch OFF.
5. Check the FAN CTRL in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is it OFF?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Wait until the FAN CTRL is off, then go to step 6.
6. Check the radiator fan operation.
Does the radiator fan keep running?

111
YES - Check the radiator fan circuit (see 2005-2007 MODELS ), the radiator fan switch circuit
for open (see RADIATOR FAN SWITCH CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING (OPEN) ),
the radiator fan switch circuit for short (see RADIATOR FAN SWITCH CIRCUIT
TROUBLESHOOTING (SHORT) ), and the radiator fan switch (see RADIATOR FAN
SWITCH TEST ). If the circuits and the switch are OK, go to step 20.
NO Go to step 7.
7. Let the engine cool until the coolant temperature is 104°F (40°C) or less.
8. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
10. Let the engine idle until ECT SENSOR 1 goes up 49°F (27°C) or more from the recorded
temperature.
12. Compare the value of recorded ECT SENSOR 2 and the value of present ECT SENSOR 2.
Did temperature rise 17°F (9.5°C) or more?
terminals at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the ECM/PCM.
NO - Test the thermostat (see THERMOSTAT TEST ), then go to step 13.
17. Test-drive at a steady speed between 15-75 mph (24-120 km/h) for 10 minutes.
YES - Check the cooling system, then go to step 1.

NO - Go to step 19.
NO - If the screen indicates FAILED, check the cooling system, then go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 17.
111
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2 and the
step 1.
NO - Go to step 25.
25. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0128 in the DTCS MENU with the HDS.
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM; '05 model, '06-07 (see '03-05 models, '06-07
models). If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 24, go to the indicated
NO - If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT
sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-
good ECM/PCM (see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), then go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 21.
DTC P0133: A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) RESPONSE MALFUNCTION (2003-2004 MODELS)

YES - Go to step 6.
poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM. If the
111
7. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see A/F SENSOR REPLACEMENT ).

YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the
NO - Go to step 13.
NO - If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F
sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING,
11.
DTC P0133: A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) RESPONSE MALFUNCTION (2005-2007 MODELS)
DTC P0139 first, then recheck for DTC P0133

 A/T in D position (M/T in 3rd or 4th gear)
 Drive the vehicle at 25 mph (40 km/h) or less for 5 minutes, then drive at a steady speed
between 26-81 mph (41-130 km/h).
111
YES - Go to step 6.
11.
 A/T in D position (M/T in 3rd and 4th gear)
 Drive the vehicle at 25 mph (40 km/h) or less for 5 minutes, the drive at a steady speed between
26-81 mph (41-130 km/h).
NO - Go to step 14.
YES - Troubleshoot is complete. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step
13, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
12.
DTC P0134: A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) HEATER SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
DTC P0135 first, then recheck for DTC P0134

111
3. Start the engine without load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
YES - Go to step 5.
terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the A/F sensor relay and the ECM/PCM.
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the A/F
sensor relay and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
NO - Go to step 11.
sensor (Sensor 1), the A/F sensor relay and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step keep idling until a result comes on.
DTC P0135: A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) HEATER CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

YES - Go to step 5.
111
terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the A/F sensor relay (LAF) and the ECM/PCM.
6. Check these fuses:
 No. 19 OPTION (40 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box.
 No. 4 A/F SENSOR (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
 No. 23 IGP (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Are any of the fuses blown?
YES - Repair short in the wire between the A/F sensor relay and the (LAF) fuses. Also replace
the blown fuse, then go to step 22.
NO - Go to step 7.
7. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector.
8. At the sensor side, measure resistance between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector terminals No. 3
and No. 4.
Fig. 61: Measuring Resistance Between A/F Sensor 4P Connector Terminals No. 3 And No. 4
111
Is there 2.1-2.9 ohms at room temperature?
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Go to step 21.
9. Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3, and
between terminals No. 1 and No. 4 individually.
Fig. 62: Checking Continuity Between A/F Sensor 4P Connector Terminals No. 1 And No. 3,
And Between Terminals No. 1 And No. 4

NO - Go to step 10.
111
YES Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A10) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then
go to step 22.
NO Go to step 13.
13. Connect A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector terminal No. 3 to body ground with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 64: Connecting A/F Sensor 4P Connector Terminal No. 3 To Body Ground With Jumper
Wire
111

NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A10) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1),
then go to step 22.
15. Remove the A/F sensor relay (A).
111
Fig. 66: Removing A/F Sensor Relay

111
Fig. 67: Connecting A/F Sensor 4P Connector Terminal No. 4 To Body Ground With Jumper
Wire
17. Check for continuity between A/F sensor relay 4P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
111
Fig. 68: Checking Continuity Between A/F Sensor Relay 4P Connector Terminal No. 2 And
Body Ground

NO - Repair open in the wire between the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the A/F sensor relay, then
go to step 22.
19. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminal E8 and A/F sensor relay 4P connector
terminal No. 4.
111
Fig. 69: Checking Continuity Between ECM/PCM Connector Terminal E8 And A/F Sensor
Relay 4P Connector Terminal No. 4

NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E8) and the A/F sensor relay (LAF),
then go to step 22.
20. Check the A/F sensor relay (LAF) (see POWER RELAY TEST ).
Is the A/F sensor relay (LAF) OK?

NO - Replace the A/F sensor relay (LAF), then go to step 22.
111
sensor relay (LAF), and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
NO - Go to step 27.
sensor (Sensor 1), the A/F sensor relay (LAF), and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until the result comes on.
YES - If DTC P0135 is indicated, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F
sensor (Sensor 1), the A/F sensor relay, and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If any other
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM (see ECM/PCM Replacement ).
sensor relay (LAF), and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-
good ECM/PCM (see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), the recheck. If the ECM/PCM was
substituted, go to step 1.
NO - Go to step 32.
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM; (see '03-05 models, '06-07 models). If any other
sensor (sensor 1), the A/F sensor relay (LAF), and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), then go
to step 30. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on.
DTC P0137: SECONDARY HO2S (SENSOR 2) CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (2003-2004 MODELS)
111

4. Check the HO2S S2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Does the voltage stay at 0.29 V or less?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Go to step 9.
6. Disconnect the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 4P connector (see Secondary HO2S Replacement ).

NO - Go to step 15.
 Engine speed at 2,000-3,000 rpm
 Drive about 10 minutes, then decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) for 5 seconds

poor connections or loose terminals at the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM. If
the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes on. If the screen indicates
14. Check for continuity between secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground.
111
Fig. 70: Checking Continuity Between Secondary HO2S 4P Connector Terminal No. 2 And
Body Ground
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E20) and the secondary HO2S (Sensor
2), then go to step 17.
NO - Go to step 25.
16. Replace the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) (see Secondary HO2S Replacement ).
111
Drive about 10 minutes, then decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) for 5 seconds

YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) and the
NO - Go to step 24.
secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates
 Drive about 10 minutes, then decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) for 5 seconds.
29. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS
SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ) then go to step 28. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to
step 1.
NO - Go to step 30.
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM (see '03-05 models, '06-07 models). If any other
secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a
111
ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicate EXECUTING, keep driving until
a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 28.
DTC P0137: SECONDARY HO2S (SENSOR 2) CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (2005-2007 MODELS)

YES - Go to step 5.
terminals at the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM.
6. Disconnect the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 4P connector.
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Go to step 13.
12. Check for continuity between secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground.
111
Fig. 71: Checking Continuity Between Secondary HO2S 4P Connector Terminal No. 2 And
Body Ground
NO - Go to step 23.
111
Drive about 1 minute or more


NO - Go to step 22.
YES - Troubleshooting is complete. If an y other Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in

 Drive 1 minute or more
ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), then go to step
26. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, then go to step 1.
NO - Go to step 1.
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM; '03-05, '06-07 (see '03-05 models, '06-07 models).
If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 27, go to the indicated DTC's
troubleshooting.
111
DTC P0138: SECONDARY HO2S (SENSOR 2) CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (2003-2004 MODELS)

Does the voltage stay at 0.75 V or more?
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Go to step 5.

9. Connect secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 72: Connecting Secondary HO2S 4P Connector Terminals No. 1 And No. 2 With Jumper
Wire


NO - Go to step 19.
15. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminals E4 and E20.
111
Fig. 73: Checking Continuity Between ECM/PCM Connector Terminals E4 And E20

NO - Go to step 16.
16. Remove the jumper wire from the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 4P connector.
17. Connect secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 2 to body ground with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 74: Connecting Secondary HO2S 4P Connector Terminal No. 2 To Body Ground With
Jumper Wire
111
YES - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E4) and the secondary HO2S (Sensor
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E20) and the secondary HO2S (Sensor

111
Engine speed at 2,000-3,000 rpm


NO - Go to step .
step 1.
NO - Go to step 34.
Temporary DTCs or DTCS were indicated in step 33, go to the indicated DTC's
troubleshooting.
111
DTC P0138: SECONDARY HO2S (SENSOR 2) CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (2005-2007 MODELS)

YES - Go to step 5.
6. Disconnect the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 4P connector.
7. Connect secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 76: Connecting Secondary HO2S 4P Connector Terminals No. 1 And No. 2 With Jumper
Wire


NO - Go to step 19.
11. Remove the jumper wire from the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 4P connector.
12. Connect secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 2 to body ground with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 77: Connecting Secondary HO2S 4P Connector Terminal No. 2 To Body Ground With
Jumper Wire


NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E4) and the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2),
then go to step 21.
111

NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E20) and the secondary HO2S (Sensor
111

NO Go to step 28.
step 1.
NO - Go to step 34.
111
DTC P0139: SECONDARY HO2S (SENSOR 2) SLOW RESPONSE (2003-2004 MODELS)

YES - Go to step 6.
111
NO - Go to step 14.
DTC P0139: SECONDARY HO2S (SENSOR 2) SLOW RESPONSE (2005-2007 MODELS)

 Vehicle speed between 35-55 mph (56-88 km/h)
 Drive 5 minutes or more
YES - Go to step 6.
111
 Drive 5 minutes or more
NO - Go to step 14.
DTC P0141: SECONDARY HO2S (SENSOR 2) HEATER CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

YES - Go to step 5.
6. Check the No. 18 ACG (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?

111
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Repair short in the wire between the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) and the No. 18 ACG (15
A) fuse, then go to step 24.
8. At the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2), measure resistance between secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 4P
connector terminals No. 3 and No. 4.
Fig. 79: Measuring Resistance Between Secondary HO2S 4P Connector Terminals No. 3 And
No. 4
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Go to step 22.
9. At the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2), check for continuity between body ground and secondary HO2S
(Sensor 2) 4P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 4 individually.
111
Fig. 80: Checking Continuity Between Body Ground And Secondary HO2S 4P Connector

NO - Go to step 10.
11. Measure voltage between secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 4.
111
Fig. 81: Measuring Voltage Between Secondary HO2S 4P Connector Terminals No. 3 And No. 4

NO - Go to step 16.
111
NO - Go to step 29.
16. Measure voltage between secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.
111
Fig. 83: Measuring Voltage Between Secondary HO2S 4P Connector Terminal No. 4 And Body
Ground

NO - Check the No. 18 ACG (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK,
repair open in the wire between the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) and the No. 18 ACG (15 A)
fuse, then go to step 23.
20. Connect the secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 3 to body ground with jumper
wire.
111
Fig. 84: Connect Secondary HO2S to Body Ground

21. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminals E21 and body ground.
Fig. 85: Identifying Continuity between ECM/PCM Terminals

111
NO - Go to step 28.
secondary HO2S (Sensor 2) and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
step 1.
NO - Go to step 33.
ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicated NOT COMPLETED, keep
DTC P0171: FUEL SYSTEM TOO LEAN; DTC P0172: FUEL SYSTEM TOO RICH
111
 If some of the DTCs listed below are indicated at the same time as DTC
P0171 and/or P0172, troubleshoot those DTCs first, then recheck for
P0171 and/or P0172.
P0101, P0102, P0103: Mass air flow (MAF) sensor (2003-2004 SULEV, LX-P models and 2005-
2007 models)
P0107, P0108, P1128, P1129: Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor
P0133, P1172 (2005-2007 models), P1157, P2195, P2238,
P2252, P2A00: Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor (Sensor 1)
P0134, P0135: Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor (Sensor 1) heater
P0137, P0138, P0139, P2270 (2005-2007 models), P2271 (2005-2007 models): Secondary HO2S
(Sensor 2)
P2646, P2647, P2648, P2649: VTEC system
P0401, P0404, P0406, P2413: Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system
P2279: Intake air leakage (2003-2004 except SULEV, LX-P models)
P0443, P0496: EVAP canister purge valve (2003-2004 SULEV, LX-P models and 2005-2007 models)
1. Check the fuel pressure (see FUEL PRESSURE TEST ).
Is the fuel pressure OK?
YES
 2003-2004 SULEV, LX-P models and 2005-2007 models: Go to step 2.
 2003-2004 except SULEV, LX-P models: Check the engine valve clearances and adjust if
necessary (see VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT ). If the valve clearances are
OK, replace the injectors (see INJECTOR REPLACEMENT ), then go to step 7.
NO
If the pressure is too high, replace the fuel pressure regulator; SULEV model (see

SULEV MODEL ), Non-SULEV model (see NON-SULEV MODEL ), then go to step
7.
 If the pressure is too low, check the fuel pump and the fuel feed line. Then go to step 7.
2. Check these parts for vacuum leaks:

 PCV valve
 PCV hose
 Throttle body
 Intake manifold
Are the parts OK?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Repair or replace parts with leaks, then go to step 7.
111
4. Check for these conditions:
 M/T in neutral (A/T in Park or neutral)
 All electric load off
5. Monitor the ENG SPD in the DATA LIST with the HDS, and hold the engine speed at 4,500 rpm.
Once the engine speed is met, hold the accelerator pedal steady for more than 10 seconds.
Did the engine speed vary more than 100 rpm from 4,500 rpm?
YES - Repeat step 5.

NO - Go to step 6.
6. While holding the engine speed at 4,500 rpm, check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is there about 14-20 gm/s?
YES - Check the engine valve clearances and adjust if necessary (see VALVE CLEARANCE
ADJUSTMENT ). If the valve clearances are OK, replace the injectors (see INJECTOR
NO - Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor Replacement ), then
go to step 7.
 All electric loads off
NOTE: DTC P0171 and/or P0172 may take up to 80 minutes of test driving to
set. Using the HDS, monitor the long term fuel trim (LT FUEL TRIM) or
the air fuel feed back average (AF FB AVE). If the long term fuel trim/air
fuel feed back average stays within 0.80-1.20, there is no problem at
this time.
Is DTC P0171 or P0175 indicated?
YES - Go to step 1.
111
DTC P0300: RANDOM MISFIRE AND ANY COMBINATION OF THE FOLLOWING; DTC
P0301: NO. 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE DETECTED; DTC P0302: NO. 2 CYLINDER MISFIRE
DETECTED; DTC P0303: NO. 3 CYLINDER MISFIRE DETECTED; DTC P0304: NO. 4
CYLINDER MISFIRE DETECTED
 Pressure gauge adapter 07NAJ-P07010A

 A/T low pressure gauge w/panel 07406-0070300
 A/T pressure hose 07406-0020201
 A/T pressure hose, 2,210 mm 07MAJ-PY4011A
 A/T pressure adapter 07MAJ-PY40120
 Oil pressure hose 07ZAJ-S5A0200
 If the misfire is frequent enough to trigger detection of increased
emissions during two consecutive driving cycles, the MIL will come on,
and DTC P0300 (and some of the combination of P0301 through P0304)
will be stored.
 If the misfire is frequent enough to damage the catalyst, the MIL will
flash whenever the misfire occurs, and DTC P0300 (and some of the
combination of P0301 through P0304) will be stored. When the misfire
stops, the MIL will remain on.
 Troubleshoot the following DTCs first, if any of them were stored along
with the random misfire DTC(s) (Because parts can sometimes fail
without setting DTCs, you should also do a physical inspection of the
systems listed below.):
P0101, P0102, P0103: Mass air flow (MAF) sensor (2003-2004 SULEV, LX-P models and 2005-
2007 models)
P0107, P0108, P1128, P1129: Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor
P0171, P0172: Fuel system
P0335, P0339: Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor
P0365, P0369: Camshaft position (CMP) sensor B
P2646, P2647, P2648, P2649: VTEC system
P0506, P507: Idle control system
P0511: Idle air control (IAC) valve (2003-2005 models)
P0401, P0404, P0416, P2413: Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system

3. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in Park or neutral).
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, or P0304 in the DTCs MENU with the
111
HDS.
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - If the screen indicates PASSED, go to step 5. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep
driving until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, wait for several
minutes, then recheck.
5. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE in the DATA
LIST for 10 minutes with the HDS.
Does CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE show
misfire counts?
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Go to step 6.
 Engine speed
 VSS
 REL TP SENSOR
 CLV (calculated load value)
HDS.
YES - Go to step 9.
driving until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 6 and
recheck.
misfire counts?
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
10. Check the fuel quality.
Is the quality good?

NO - Drain the tank and fill with a known-good fuel, then go to step 24.
11. Inspect the spark plugs (see SPARK PLUG INSPECTION ). If the spark plugs are fouled or worn,
111
replace them.
 Engine speed
 VSS
 REL TP SENSOR
misfire counts?

NO - Go to step 24.
14. Check the fuel pressure (see FUEL PRESSURE TEST ).
Is the fuel pressure OK?
YES
 2003-2004 SULEV, LX-P models and 2005-2007 models: Go to step 15.
 2003-2004 except SULEV, LX-P models: Go to step 19.
NO
If the fuel pressure is too high, replace the fuel pressure regulator; SULEV model (see

SULEV MODEL ), Non-SULEV model (see NON-SULEV MODEL ), then go to step
24.
 If the fuel pressure is too low, check the fuel pump, the fuel feed pipe, and the fuel filter.
If they are OK, replace the fuel pressure regulator; SULEV model (see SULEV
MODEL ), Non-SULEV model (see NON-SULEV MODEL ), then go to step 24.
16. Check for these conditions:
 All electric load off
17. Monitor the ENG SPD in the DATA LIST with the HDS, and hold the engine speed at 4,500 rpm.
Once the engine speed is met, hold the accelerator pedal steady for more than 10 seconds.
Did the engine speed vary more than 100 rpm from 4,500 rpm?
YES - Repeat step 17.

NO - Go to step 18.
HDS.
Is there about 14-20 gm/s?

111

go to step 24.
20. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure switch) (A), and install the special
tools as shown below, then install the rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure switch) in
the pressure gauge adapter (B).
NOTE: Install the switch in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring.
Fig. 86: Removing Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch & Installing Special Tools
21. Reconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure switch) 2P connector.
23. Check the oil pressure at engine speeds of 1,000 rpm and 2,000 rpm. Keep the test time as short as
possible (less than 1 minute) because the engine is running without load.
111
Is the oil pressure below 49 kPa (7 psi, 0.5 kgf/cm2 )?
YES - Check for air in the fuel line, then go to step 24.
NO - Inspect the VTEC system, then go to step 24.
26. Clear the CKP pattern with the HDS.
28. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see CKP PATTERN CLEAR/CKP PATTERN LEARN ).
 Engine speed
 VSS
 REL TP SENSOR
Is DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, or P0304 indicated?
YES - Check for a poor connection or loose terminals at the ignition coil, the injector, and the
ECM/PCM, then go to troubleshooting DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, or P0304 (see DTC P0301:
No. 1 Cylinder Misfire Detected; DTC P0302: No. 2 Cylinder Misfire Detected; DTC
P0303: No. 3 Cylinder Misfire Detected; DTC P0304: No. 4 Cylinder Misfire Detected ).
NO - Go to step 31.
HDS.
ignition coil, the injector, and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1 and recheck. If the screen
indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
DTC P0301: NO. 1 CYLINDER MISFIRE DETECTED; DTC P0302: NO. 2 CYLINDER MISFIRE
DETECTED; DTC P0303: NO. 3 CYLINDER MISFIRE DETECTED; DTC P0304: NO. 4
CYLINDER MISFIRE DETECTED

3. Start the engine without load (in Park or neutral), then let it idle.
111
HDS.
YES - Go to step 9.
driving until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, wait for several
minutes, and recheck.
misfire counts?
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Go to step 6.
 Engine speed
 VSS
 REL TP SENSOR
HDS.
YES - Go to step 9.
driving until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 6 and
recheck.
misfire counts?
YES - Go to step 9.
10. Remove the intake manifold cover; 2003-2005 models (see step 3 on REMOVAL (2003-2005
MODELS) ), 2007 model (see step 3 on REMOVAL (2007 MODEL) ).
11. Start the engine, and listen for a clicking sound at the injector of the problem cylinder.
Does the injector click?
111

NO - Go to step 43.
13. Exchange the ignition coil from the problem cylinder with one from another cylinder.
 Engine speed
 VSS
 REL TP SENSOR
misfire counts?

NO - Intermittent misfire due to poor contact at the ignition coil connector (no misfire at this
time). Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the ignition coil.
16. Determine which cylinder had the misfire.
Does the misfire occur in the cylinder where the ignition coil was exchanged?
YES - Replace the faulty ignition coil (see IGNITION COIL

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ), then go to step 62.
NO - Go to step 17.
18. Exchange the spark plug from the problem cylinder with one from another cylinder.
 Engine speed
 VSS
 REL TP SENSOR
misfire counts?

NO - Intermittent misfire due to spark plug fouling (no misfire at this time).
Does the misfire occur in the cylinder where the spark plug was exchanged?
YES - Replace the faulty spark plug, then go to step 62.

111
NO - Go to step 22.
23. Exchange the injector from the problem cylinder with one from another cylinder.
 Engine speed
 VSS
 REL TP SENSOR
misfire counts?

NO - Intermittent misfire due to bad contact in the injector connector (no misfire at this time).
Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the injector.
Does the misfire occur in the cylinder where the injector was exchanged?
YES - Replace the faulty injector (see INJECTOR REPLACEMENT ), then go to step 62.
NO - Go to step 28.
29. Disconnect the ignition coil 3P connector from the problem cylinder.
31. Measure voltage between ignition coil 3P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
111
Fig. 87: Measuring Voltage Between Ignition Coil 3P Connector Terminal No. 3 And Body
Ground

NO - Repair open in the wire between the ignition coil and the ignition coil relay, then go to
step 62.
33. Check for continuity between ignition coil 3P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
111
Fig. 88: Checking Continuity Between Ignition Coil 3P Connector Terminal No. 2 And Body
Ground

NO - Repair open in the wire between the ignition coil and G101, then go to step 62.
111
37. Check for continuity between body ground and the appropriate ECM/PCM connector terminal (see
table).
Fig. 89: Checking Continuity Between Body Ground And Appropriate ECM/PCM Connector
Terminal
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM and the ignition coil, then go to step 62.
NO - Go to step 38.
38. Connect appropriate ignition coil 3P connector terminal No. 1 to body ground with a jumper wire. See
below.
111
Fig. 90: Connecting Appropriate Ignition Coil 3P Connector Terminal No. 1 To Body Ground
With Jumper Wire
below).
111
Terminal

NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM and the ignition coil, then go to step 62.
40. Reconnect the ignition coil 3P connector and ECM/PCM connector A (31P).
41. Do an engine compression and a cylinder leakdown test.
Did the engine pass both tests?

NO - Repair the engine, then go to step 62.
42. Do the VTEC rocker arm test (see VTEC ROCKER ARM TEST ).
111
Did the VTEC rocker arm pass the test?

NO Repair as necessary, then go to step 62.
47. Measure voltage between body ground and the appropriate ECM/PCM connector terminal (see
below ).
Fig. 92: Measuring Voltage Between Body Ground And Appropriate ECM/PCM Connector
Terminal
111

NO - Go to step 48.
49. Disconnect the injector 2P connector from the problem cylinder.
51. Measure voltage between injector 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
Fig. 93: Measuring Voltage Between Injector 2P Connector Terminal No. 1 And Body Ground
111

NO - Repair open in the wire between the injector and PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN), then
go to step 62.
table below).
Terminal
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM and the injector, then go to step 62.
NO - Go to step 54.
54. Connect appropriate injector 2P connector terminal No. 2 to body ground with a jumper wire (see
111
table below).
Fig. 95: Connecting Appropriate Injector 2P Connector Terminal No. 2 To Body Ground With
Jumper Wire
111
table below).
Terminal

NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM and the injector, then go to step 62.
56. Measure resistance between injector 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
111
Fig. 97: Measuring Resistance Between Injector 2P Connector Terminals No. 1 And No. 2
Is there 10-13 ohms?

NO - Replace the injector (see INJECTOR REPLACEMENT ), then go to step 62.
57. Substitute a known-good injector from another cylinder to the problem cylinder.
111
Engine speed

 VSS
 REL TP SENSOR
misfire counts?

NO - Replace the original injector (see INJECTOR REPLACEMENT ), then go to step 62.
 Engine speed
 VSS
 REL TP SENSOR
Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 indicated?
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the ignition coil, the injector, and the
ECM/PCM, then go to DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, or P0304 (see DTC P0300:
Random Misfire and Any Combination of the Following; DTC P0301: No. 1 Cylinder
Misfire Detected; DTC P0302: No. 2 Cylinder Misfire Detected; DTC P0303: No. 3
Cylinder Misfire Detected; DTC P0304: No. 4 Cylinder Misfire Detected ).
NO - Go to step 70.
HDS.
NO - If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminal at the
ignition coil, the injector, and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates
111

 ENGINE SPEED
 VSS
 REL TP SENSOR
Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 indicated?
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the injector, the ignition coil, and the
1.
NO - Go to step 76.
HDS.
ignition coil, the injector, and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a
DTC P0325: KNOCK SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

4. Hold the engine speed at 3,000-4,000 rpm for at least 10 seconds.
111
YES - Go to step 6.
terminals at the knock sensor and the ECM/PCM.
8. Disconnect the knock sensor 1P connector.
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A1) and the knock sensor, then go to
step 14.
NO - Go to step 11.
11. Connect the knock sensor 1P connector terminal to body ground with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 99: Connecting Knock Sensor 1P Connector Terminal To Body Ground With Jumper Wire
111

NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A1) and the knock sensor, then go to
step 14.
13. Replace the knock sensor (see Knock Sensor Replacement ).

NO - Go to step 20.
111
knock sensor and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1 and recheck. If the screen indicates NOT
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the knock sensor and the ECM/PCM. If
ECM/PCM ), then go to step 22. If the ECM/PCM was substituted then go to step 1.
NO - Go to step 24.
HDS.
ignition coil, the injector, and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a
ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step . If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step
22.
DTC P0335: CKP SENSOR NO SIGNAL

YES - Go to step 5.
111
terminals at the CKP sensor and the ECM/PCM.

6. Disconnect the CKP sensor 3P connector.
8. Measure voltage between CKP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
Fig. 101: Measuring Voltage Between CKP Sensor 3P Connector Terminal No. 1 And Body
Ground
YES - Go to step 9.
111
NO - Repair open in the wire between the CKP sensor and PGM-FI main relay 1, then go to
step 18.
9. Measure voltage between CKP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
Fig. 102: Measuring Voltage Between CKP Sensor 3P Connector Terminal No. 2 And Body
Ground
Is there about 5 V?
111

NO - Go to step 11.
10. Measure voltage between CKP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.
Fig. 103: Measuring Voltage Between CKP Sensor 3P Connector Terminals No. 1 And No. 3
111
NO - Repair open in the wire between the CKP sensor and G101, then go to step 18.
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A7) and the CKP sensor, then go to
step 18.
NO - Go to step 12.
111
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A7) and the CKP sensor, then go to
step 18.
NO - Go to step 25.
17. Replace the CKP sensor (see CKP SENSOR REPLACEMENT ).
111
YES - If DTC P0335 is indicated, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the CKP
sensor and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
YES - If DTC P0335 is indicated, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the CKP
sensor and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are
NO If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM was
Temporary DTC's or DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
DTC P0339: CKP SENSOR INTERMITTENT INTERRUPTION

3. Start the engine, and let it idle 10 seconds.
4. Check the CKP NOISE COUNT in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Are 0 counts indicated?
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Go to step 5.
 ENGINE SPEED
 VSS
6. Check the CKP NOISE COUNT in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
YES - Go to step 7.
terminals at the CKP sensor and the ECM/PCM.
7. Check for poor or loose connections and terminals at these locations:
111
 CKP sensor
 ECM/PCM
 Engine ground
 Body ground
YES - Go to step 8.
8. Remove the cam chain case (see CAM CHAIN REMOVAL ), and check for damage on the CKP
sensor pulse plate.
Is the pulse plate damaged?
YES - Replace the CKP sensor pulse plate, then go to step 11.
NO - Go to step 9.
10. Replace the CKP sensor (see CKP SENSOR REPLACEMENT ).
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the CKP sensor and the ECM/PCM,
then go to step 1.
NO - Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Temporary DTCs are indicated, go to the
DTC P0365: CMP SENSOR B NO SIGNAL


111
YES - Go to step 5.
terminals at CMP sensor B and the ECM/PCM.
6. Disconnect the CMP sensor B 3P connector.
8. Measure voltage between CMP sensor B 3P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
Fig. 106: Measuring Voltage Between CMP Sensor B 3P Connector Terminal No. 3 And Body
Ground
111
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Repair open in the wire between CMP sensor B and PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN),
then go to step 18.
9. Measure voltage between CMP sensor B 3P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
Fig. 107: Measuring Voltage Between CMP Sensor B 3P Connector Terminal No. 1 And Body
Ground
Is there about 5 V?
111

NO - Go to step 11.
10. Measure voltage between CMP sensor B 3P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3.
Fig. 108: Measuring Voltage Between CMP Sensor B 3P Connector Terminals No. 2 And No. 3

NO - Repair open in the wire between CMP sensor B and G101, then go to step 18.
111
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A6) and CMP sensor B, then go to step
18.
NO - Go to step 12.
111
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A6) and CMP sensor B, then go to step
18.
NO - Go to step 23.
17. Replace CMP sensor B (see CMP Sensor B Replacement ).
111
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at CMP sensor B and the ECM/PCM, then
go to step 1.
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at CMP sensor B and the ECM/PCM. If
DTC P0369: CMP SENSOR B INTERMITTENT INTERRUPTION

4. Check the CMP NOISE B COUNT in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Go to step 5.
 ENGINE SPEED
 VSS
6. Check the CMP NOISE B COUNT in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
YES - Go to step 7.
terminals at CMP sensor B and the ECM/PCM.
 CMP sensor B
 ECM/PCM
111
 Engine ground
 Body ground
YES - Go to step 8.
8. Check for damage on the CMP sensor B pulse plate (see CMP PULSE PLATE B
REPLACEMENT ).
YES - Replace the CMP sensor B pulse plate (see CMP PULSE PLATE B
NO - Go to step 9.
10. Replace CMP sensor B (see CMP Sensor B Replacement ).
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at CMP sensor B and the ECM/PCM, then
go to step 1.
DTC P050A: COLD START IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (2006-2007
MODELS)

Are any Temporary DTCs or DTCs (except P050A) indicated?
YES - Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.

NO - Go to step 3.
3. Check for poor connections or blockage at the intake air duct.
111
Is it OK?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Reconnect or repair the intake air duct, then go to step 19.
4. Check for damage at the air cleaner.
Is it OK?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Replace the air cleaner (see AIR CLEANER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ), then go
to step 19.
5. Check for dirt at the air cleaner.
Is it dirty?
YES - Replace the air cleaner element (see AIR CLEANER ELEMENT
INSPECTION/REPLACEMENT ), then go to step 19.
NO - Go to step 6.
6. Let the engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR 1 is 122°F (50°C) or less.
8. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in Park or neutral) for at least 10 seconds.
9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050A in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.

Is the THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL VALVE normal?

NO - Replace the throttle body (see 2006 MODEL ), then go to step 19.
12. Monitor the ENG SPD in the DATA LIST with the HDS, and hold the engine speed at 2,500 rpm for
at least 30 seconds.
HDS.
Is there about 7.70-11.09 g/s (A/T model), 6.72-9.67 g/s (M/T model)?

111
go to step 19.
17. Note the value of the IAT SENSOR quickly in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
18. Compare the value of the IAT SENSOR and the ambient temperature.
Does the value of the IAT SENSOR differ 5.4°F (3°C) or more?
YES - Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor Replacement ),
then go to step 19.
NO - Check for dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle bore. If there is dirt or carbon, clean the
throttle body (see THROTTLE BODY CLEANING ), then go to step 19. If there is damage in
the throttle bore, replace the throttle body (see 2006-2007 MODEL ), then go to step 19.
23. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (Park or neutral) for at least 10 seconds.
Is DTC P050A indicated?
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT
sensor, and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
NO - Go to step 24.
25. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050A in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
YES - Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated in
throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen
indicates EXECUTING, let the engine idle until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT
OF CONDITION, go to step 22.
DTC P050B: COLD START IGNITION TIMING PERFORMANCE (2006-2007 MODELS)

111
Are any Temporary DTCs or DTCs (except P050B) indicated?

NO - Go to step 3.
3. Check for poor connections or blockage at the intake air duct.
Is it OK?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Reconnect or repair the intake air duct, then go to step 20.
4. Check for damage at the air cleaner.
Is it OK?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Replace the air cleaner (see AIR CLEANER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ), then go
to step 25.
5. Check for dirt in the air cleaner element.
Is it dirty?
YES - Replace the air cleaner element (see AIR CLEANER

NO - Go to step 6.
8. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in Park or neutral) for at least 10 seconds or more.
9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050B in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.

Is the ignition timing OK?

NO - Go to step 11.
11. Check for damage at the CKP sensor (see CKP SENSOR REPLACEMENT ) and the CKP sensor
pulse plate (see CKP PULSE PLATE REPLACEMENT ).
Is the CKP sensor and/or the CKP sensor pulse plate damaged?
YES - Replace the CKP sensor (see CKP SENSOR REPLACEMENT ) and/or the CKP
111
sensor pulse plate (see CKP PULSE PLATE REPLACEMENT ), then go to step 25.
NO - Go to step 32.
Is the THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL VALVE normal?

NO - Replace the throttle body (see 2006-2007 MODELS ), then go to step 25.
14. Monitor the ENG SPD in the DATA LIST with the HDS, and hold the engine speed at 2,500 rpm for
at least 30 seconds.
HDS.
Is there about 7.70-11.09 g/s (A/T model), 6.72-9.67 g/s (M/T model)?

go to step 25.
17. Drain the coolant (see COOLANT REPLACEMENT ).
18. Remove ECT sensor 1 (see ECT SENSOR/ECT SENSOR 1 REPLACEMENT ), and ECT sensor 2
(see ECT SENSOR 2 REPLACEMENT ).
19. Allow the sensors to cool to the ambient temperature.
21. Connect ECT sensor 1 to its 2P connector, and ECT sensor 2 to its 2P connector, but do not install
them on the engine.
23. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT SENSOR 2 quickly in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
24. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and the ambient temperature, and the value of ECT SENSOR
2 and the ambient temperature individually.
Does either sensor differ more than 5.4°F (3°C) from the ambient temperature?
YES - Replace the sensor that differed more than 5.4°F (3°C) from the ambient temperature,
then go to step 24.
NO - Check and repair any problems with these items, then go to step 24.
 Engine compression and cylinder leakdown
 VTEC system
 Engine oil
 A/C system
 Power steering
111

Is DTC P050B indicated?
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the CKP sensor, the throttle body, the
MAF sensor/IAT sensor, ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
NO - Go to step 31.
NO - If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the CKP
sensor, the throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the
ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, let the engine idle until a
result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 28.
Is DTC P050B indicated?
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the CKP sensor, the throttle body, the
MAF sensor/IAT sensor, ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ),
then go to step 34. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO - Go to step 37.
NO - If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the CKP
sensor, the throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the
ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
111
DTC P0562: CHARGING SYSTEM LOW VOLTAGE (2005-2007 MODELS)
 If any high current load accessories are installed, this DTC can be set.
 If DTC P16BB and/or P16BC is stored at the same time as DTC P0562,
troubleshoot DTC P16BB and/or P16BC first, then recheck for DTC
P0562.

4. Check under these conditions:
 A/C on
 Temperature control at maximum cool
 Blower fan at maximum speed
 Rear window defogger on
 Headlights on high beam
5. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (in Park or neutral) for 1 minute.
YES - Replace the alternator (see ALTERNATOR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ),

then go to step 7.
terminals at the alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box, and check the battery performance
 A/C on
111
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the alternator and the under-hood
fuse/relay box, then go to step 1.
DTC P0563: ECM/PCM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT UNEXPECTED VOLTAGE

4. Wait 10 seconds.
YES - Go to step 7.
terminals at the No. 8 ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box, PGM-FI
main relay 1 (FI MAIN), and the ECM/PCM.
111

NO - Go to step 11.
11. Remove the left kick panel; 2-door (see 2-DOOR - DOOR SILL AREA ), 4-door (see 4-DOOR -
FRONT DOOR SILL AREA ), then remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) (A) from the under-
dash fuse/relay box.
111
Fig. 112: Removing PGM-FI Main Relay 1

111
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E7) and PGM-FI main relay 1, then go
to step 20.
NO - Go to step 19.
111

NO - Go to step 27.
16. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminals A3 and A2 individually.
111
Fig. 115: Measuring Voltage Between Body Ground And ECM/PCM Connector Terminals A3
And A2 Individually

NO - Go to step 27.
111
Fig. 116: Removing PGM-FI Main Relay 1

111
And A2 Individually
YES - Repair short to power in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A2, A3) and PGM-FI main
relay 1, then go to step 20.
NO - Go to step 19.
19. Replace PGM-FI main relay 1 (A).
111
Fig. 118: Replacing PGM-FI Main Relay


24. Wait 10 seconds.
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at PGM-FI main relay 1 and the
111

YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at PGM-FI main relay (FI MAIN) 1 and
1.
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
DTC P0602: ECM/PCM PROGRAMMING ERROR (2005-2007 MODELS)
 This DTC is indicated when the ECM/PCM update is not completed.
 Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating the ECM/PCM. If you
turn the ignition switch OFF before completion, the ECM/PCM can be
damaged.
1. Do the ECM/PCM update procedure (see UPDATING THE ECM/PCM , SUBSTITUTE THE
ECM/PCM ).
YES - Replace the original ECM/PCM (see '03-05 models, '06-07 models ).
NO - Updating is complete.
DTC P0603: ECM/PCM INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE KEEP ALIVE MEMORY (KAM)
ERROR

3. Check for Temporary DTC's or DTCs with the HDS.
111
YES - Go to step 4.
YES - If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see SUBSTITUTE
DTC P0606: ECM/PCM PROCESSOR MALFUNCTION

5. Wait 40 seconds.
original ECM/PCM (see ECM/PCM Replacement ).
10. Wait 40 seconds.
THE ECM/PCM ), then go to step 8. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
111
Temporary DTC s or DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
DTC P0630: VIN NOT PROGRAMMED OR MISMATCH (2005-2007 MODELS)
 This DTC is stored only when the ECM/PCM does not have the VIN
information of the vehicle. Use the HDS to input the missing VIN
information.

2. Check the VIN with the HDS.
Does the HDS show the vehicle's VIN?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Go to step 3.
3. Input the VIN to the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
Does the screen show COMPLETE?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Go to step 4.
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
YES - Go to the DTC P0603 troubleshooting.

NO - Go to step 9.
YES - If DTC P0630 is indicated, update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software,
or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see UPDATING THE ECM/PCM , SUBSTITUTE
THE ECM/PCM ), then recheck. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to
111
DTC P0685: ECM/PCM POWER CONTROL CIRCUIT/INTERNAL CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
 If the problem doesn't return after you clear the DTC, or if this DTC is
stored intermittently, check for loose terminals at the IGP line
connectors before replacing the ECM/PCM.

3. Start the engine, then let it idle 30 seconds.
5. Start the engine, then let it idle 30 seconds.
YES - Go to step 9. ).
10. Start the engine, then let it idle for 30 seconds.
12. Start the engine, then let it idle for 30 seconds
THE ECM/PCM ), then go to step 10. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1
111
DTC P0700: A/T CONTROL SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
 This DTC is stored when there is a problem in the A/T control system.
Check for A/T DTCs with the HDS, and go to the indicated DTC's
troubleshooting.
DTC P0720: OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT) SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
 This DTC only occurs on M/T vehicles.
1. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in neutral) until the radiator fan
comes on, then let it idle.
2. Test-drive several miles.
3. Check the C SHAFT SPD in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is any vehicle speed indicated?
terminals at the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and the ECM.
NO - Go to step 4.
5. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor 3P connector.
7. Measure voltage between output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor 3P connector terminal No. 1 and
body ground.
111
Fig. 119: Measuring Voltage Between Output Shaft Speed Sensor 3P Connector Terminal No. 1
And Body Ground
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM (A20) and the output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor, then go to step 17.
8. Measure voltage between output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor 3P connector terminal No. 2 and
body ground.
111
Fig. 120: Measuring Voltage Between Output Shaft Speed Sensor 3P Connector Terminal No. 2
And Body Ground
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Go to step 10.
9. Measure voltage between output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor 3P connector terminals No. 1 and
No. 3.
111
Fig. 121: Measuring Voltage Between Output Shaft Speed Sensor 3P Connector Terminals No. 1
And No. 3
Is there about 5 V?

NO -
 '03-04 models: Repair open in the wire between the output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor and G101, then go to step 17.
 '05-07 models: Repair open in the wire between the out put shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor and ECM (A23), then go to step 17.
10. Measure voltage between ECM connector terminal A18 and body ground.
111
Fig. 122: Measuring Voltage Between ECM Connector Terminal A18 And Body Ground
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Repair open in the wire between the ECM (A18) and the output shaft (countershaft)
speed sensor, then go to step 17.
NO - Go to step 11.
13. Disconnect ECM connector A (31P).
14. Check for continuity between ECM connector terminal A18 and body ground.
111
Fig. 123: Checking Continuity Between ECM Connector Terminal A18 And Body Ground
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM (A18) and the output shaft (countershaft)
speed sensor, then go to step 17.
NO - Go to step 24.
16. Replace the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (see Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed
Sensor Replacement ).
19. Reset the ECM with the HDS.
20. Do the ECM idle learn procedure (see ECM/PCM IDLE LEARN PROCEDURE ).
111

 ECT SENSOR (1) above 158°F (70°C)
 Transmission in 5th gear
 Drive for several minutes, then decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) for 8 seconds
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor and the ECM, then go to step 1.
NO - Go to step 23.
output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and the ECM, then go to step 1 and recheck. If the
25. Update the ECM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM (see
UPDATING THE ECM/PCM , SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ).
 Transmission in 5th gear
 Drive for several minutes, then decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) for 8 seconds

sensor and the ECM. If the ECM was updated, substitute a known-good ECM (see
SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), then go to step 26. If the ECM was substituted, go to step
1.
NO - Go to step 28.
111
output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and the ECM. If the ECM was updated, substitute a
known-good ECM (see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), then go to step 26. If the ECM was
substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 26.
DTC P1109: BARO SENSOR CIRCUIT OUT OF RANGE HIGH (2005-2007 MODELS)

YES - Go to step 4.
(see UPDATING THE ECM/PCM , SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ),
YES - If the ECM was updated, substitute a known-good ECM (see SUBSTITUTE THE
ECM/PCM ). If the ECM was substituted, go to step 1.
DTC P1116: ECT SENSOR 1 PERFORMANCE PROBLEM (2005-2007 MODELS)
1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2.
YES - Go to step 2.

111
NO - Go to step 4.
YES - Replace ECT sensor 1 (see ECT SENSOR/ECT SENSOR 1 REPLACEMENT ), then
go to step 27.
NO - Go to step 6.
8. Remove ECT sensor 1 (see ECT SENSOR/ECT SENSOR 1 REPLACEMENT ).
9. Allow ECT sensor 1 to cool to ambient temperature.
11. Connect ECT sensor 1 to the 2P connector, but do not install sensor on the engine.
13. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 quickly in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
14. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and the ambient temperature.
Does the value of ECT SENSOR 1 differ 5.4°F (3°C) or more?
go to step 27.
go to step 27.
NO - Go to step 17.
17. Let the engine idle 10 minutes.
YES Replace ECT sensor 2 (see ECT SENSOR 2 REPLACEMENT ), then go to step 27.
NO Go to step 19.
21. Remove ECT sensor 1 (see ECT SENSOR/ECT SENSOR 1 REPLACEMENT ) and the ECT
sensor 2 (see ECT SENSOR 2 REPLACEMENT ).
111
22. Allow the sensors to cool to ambient temperature.

24. Connect ECT sensor 1 to the 2P connector, and ECT sensor 2 to the 2P connector, but do not install
them on the engine.
Does one of the sensors differ more than 5.4°F (3°C) from the ambient temperature?
then go to step 27.
NO - Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Temporary DTC s or DTCs are indicated, go to
DTC P1121: TP SENSOR SIGNAL LOWER THAN EXPECTED (2003-2005 MODELS)

3. Open the throttle fully.
Is the throttle position less than 4.0 degrees (REL) (14% (REL)) for 5 seconds?
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Go to step 5.
6. Test-drive the vehicle at 16 mph (25 km/h) or more, and at 1,400 rpm or more.
111
YES - Go to step 8.
poor connections or loose terminals at the TP sensor and the ECM/PCM. If the screen indicates
NOT COMPLETED, go to step 5 and recheck.
go to step 1.
NO - Go to step 17.
YES - Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Temporary DTC s or DTCs are indicated, go
to the indicated in step 16, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
NO - If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the TP
DTC P1122: TP SENSOR SIGNAL HIGHER THAN EXPECTED (2003-2005 MODELS)

Is the throttle position more than 6.4 degrees (REL) (16% (REL)) for 5 seconds?
111
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Go to step 5.
YES - Go to step 8.
poor connections or loose terminals at the TP sensor and the ECM/PCM. If the screen indicates
NOT COMPLETED, go to step 5 and recheck.
go to step 1.
NO - Go to step 17.
NO - If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the TP
DTC P1128: MAP SENSOR SIGNAL LOWER THAN EXPECTED

111
Is less than 54.1 kPa (16.0 in.Hg, 406 mmHg) or 1.61 V held for more than 5 seconds?
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Go to step 3.
 Engine speed between 1,400 and 5,700 rpm
 A/T in D position (M/T in 3rd gear)
 Vehicle speed accelerated from 16 mph (25 km/h) to 31 mph (50 km/h) under half throttle
YES - Go to step 7.
poor connections or loose terminals at the MAP sensor and the ECM/PCM. If the screen
 Vehicle speed accelerated from 16 mph (25 km/h) to 31 mph (50 km/h) under half throttle
Is P1128 indicated?
then go to step 1.
NO - Go to step 15.

111
NO - If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the MAP
step 13.
DTC P1129: MAP SENSOR SIGNAL HIGHER THAN EXPECTED
1. Check for vacuum leaks in these parts:

 PCV valve
 PCV hose
 Throttle body
 Intake manifold
Are there any vacuum leaks?
YES - Repair or replace parts with vacuum leaks, then go to step 9.

NO - Go to step 2.
Is more than 36.9 kPa (11.0 in.Hg, 277 mmHg) or 1.1 V held for more than for 5 seconds?
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Go to step 4.
 Vehicle speed decelerated from more than 50 mph (80 km/h) with the throttle fully closed for at
least 5 seconds
YES - Go to step 7.
111
poor connections or loose terminals at the MAP sensor and the ECM/PCM. If the screen
 Vehicle speed decelerated from more than 50 mph (80 km/h) with the throttle fully closed for at
least 5 seconds
then go to step 1.
NO - Go to step 15.
NO - If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the MAP
step 13.
DTC P1157: A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) AFS LINE HIGH VOLTAGE

3. Start the engine, and wait 1 minute.
YES - Go to step 5.
111
terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM.
9. Connect A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire.
Fig. 124: Identifying Connectors to Body Ground

10. Check for continuity between ECM/PCM connector terminals A31 and body ground.
111
Fig. 125: Checking Continuity Between ECM/PCM Connector Terminals A28 And A31

then go to step 15.
11. Remove the jumper wire from the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector.
111
Fig. 126: Connecting Sensor to Body Ground

111

then go to step 15.
111
ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the connector and terminal fits are OK, go to step 21.
NO - Go to step 20.
sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
sensor and the ECM. If the ECM was updated, substitute a known-good ECM (see
SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ) then recheck. If the ECM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO - Go to step 24.
Temporary DTC s or DTCs are indicated in step 23, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM was updated, substitute a known-good ECM
(see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), then go to step 22. If the ECM/PCM was substituted,
go to step1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on.
DTC P1172: A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) CIRCUIT OUT OF RANGE HIGH (2005-2007 MODELS)

111
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Go to step 12.
keep driving until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, keep idling
until a result comes on.
DTC P1297: ELD CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE

2. Check the ELD in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is 72 A or more indicated?
YES - Go to step 3.
111
terminals at the ELD and the ECM/PCM.

4. Disconnect the ELD 3P connector.
Is 72 A or more indicated?
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Go to step 11.
111
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E15) and the ELD, then go to step 13.
NO - Go to step 20.
12. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box (see UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX (EXCEPT
HYBRID & V6) ).
111

18. Turn on the headlights.
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the ELD and the ECM/PCM, then go to
step 1.
23. Turn on the headlights.
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the ELD and the ECM/PCM. If the
ECM/PCM ), then go to step 22. If the ECM/PCM was substituted go to step 1.
DTC P1298: ELD CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE

Is 0.2 A or less indicated?
YES - Go to step 3.
terminals at the ELD and the ECM/PCM.
4. Disconnect the ELD 3P connector.
6. Measure voltage between ELD 3P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
111
Fig. 129: Measuring Voltage Between ELD 3P Connector Terminal No. 1 And Body Ground
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the No. 18 ACG (15 A) fuse and the ELD, then go to
step 14.
8. Connect ELD 3P connector terminal No. 3 to body ground with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 130: Connecting ELD 3P Connector Terminal No. 3 To Body Ground With Jumper Wire

111

NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E15) and the ELD, then go to step 14.
12. Check for continuity between ELD 3P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
111
Fig. 132: Checking Continuity Between ELD 3P Connector Terminal No. 2 And Body Ground

NO - Repair open in the wire between the ELD and G302, then go to step 14.
13. Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box (see UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX (EXCEPT
HYBRID & V6) ).
111


YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the ELD and the ECM/PCM. If the
ECM/PCM , then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
DTC P1549: CHARGING SYSTEM HIGH VOLTAGE (2005-2007 MODELS)
 If a high voltage battery (24 V, etc.) is connected to the vehicle, this
DTC can be stored.

 A/C off
 Headlights off
 Rear window defogger off

111

then go to step 7.
terminals at the alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box.
 A/C off
 Headlights off
 Rear window defogger off
DTC P16BB: ALTERNATOR B TERMINAL CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (2005-2007 MODELS)

2. Clear the DTC with HDS.
 A/C on
Is DTC P16BB indicated?
YES - Go to step 7.
111
terminals at the alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box, and check the battery performance
7. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box (+B
line).
YES - Go to step 8.
8. Check for an open in the wire between the alternator and under fuse/relay box at the starter
subharness.
Is the harness OK?

then go to step 9.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box, then go
to step 9.
 A/C on
Is DTC P16BB indicated?
DTC P16BC: ALTERNATOR FR TERMINAL CIRCUIT/IGP CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (2005-

2007 MODELS)
1. Check for poor connections at the alternator 4P connector.

111
Are the connectors and terminals OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO - Reconnect the connector, then go to step 20.
2. Check the alternator mounting surfaces for corrosion.
Are the mounting surfaces corroded?
YES - Remove the alternator (see ALTERNATOR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ).

Clean all mounting surfaces, then reinstall the alternator, and go to step 18.
NO - Go to step 3.
 A/C on
Is DTC P16BC indicated?
YES - Go to step 9.
terminals at the alternator.
12. Measure voltage between alternator 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
111
Fig. 133: Measuring Voltage Between Alternator 4P Connector Terminal No. 1 And Body
Ground

NO - Repair open in the wire between the alternator (IG1 line) and the No. 18 ACG (15 A) fuse
in under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to step 19.
13. Measure voltage between alternator 4P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.
111
Fig. 134: Measuring Voltage Between Alternator 4P Connector Terminal No. 4 And Body
Ground
Is there about 5 V?

then go to step 19.
NO - Go to step 14.
111

17. Connect alternator 4P connector terminal No. 4 to body ground with a jumper wire.
Fig. 135: Connecting Alternator 4P Connector Terminal No. 4 To Body Ground With Jumper
Wire
111

NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (B13) and the alternator, then go to step
20.
111

 A/C on
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the alternator and the ECM/PCM, then
go to step 1.
 A/C on
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the alternator and the ECM/PCM. If the
ECM/PCM ), then go to step 31. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
DTC P2183: ECT SENSOR 2 RANGE/PERFORMANCE PROBLEM (2005-2007 MODELS)
111

1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2.
YES - Go to step 2.

NO - Go to step 4.
YES - Replace ECT sensor 2 (see ECT SENSOR 2 REPLACEMENT ), then go to step 27.
NO - Go to step 6.
8. Remove ECT sensor 2 (see ECT SENSOR 2 REPLACEMENT ).
9. Allow ECT sensor 2 to cool to ambient temperature.
11. Connect ECT sensor 2 to the 2P connector, but do not install it on the engine.
13. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 2 quickly in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
14. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 2 and the ambient temperature.
Does ECT SENSOR 2 differ 5.4°F (3°C) or more?
111
go to step 27.
NO - Go to step 17.
17. Let the engine idle 10 minutes.
NO - Go to step 19.
21. Remove ECT sensor 1 (see ECT SENSOR/ECT SENSOR 1 REPLACEMENT ) and ECT sensor 2
(see ECT SENSOR 2 REPLACEMENT ).
22. Allow the sensors to cool to ambient temperature.
24. Connect ECT sensor 1 to 2P connector, and ECT sensor 2 to the 2P connector, but do not install them
into the engine.
Does one of the sensors differ more than 5.4°F (3°C) from the ambient temperature?
then go to step 27.
DTC P2184: ECT SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (2005-2007 MODELS)

111
YES - Go to step 3.
4. Disconnect ECT sensor 2 2P connector.
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Go to step 11.
10. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 2 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
111
Fig. 137: Checking Continuity Between ECT Sensor 2 2P Connector Terminal No. 1 And Body
Ground
YES - Repair short in the wire between ECT sensor 2 and the ECM/PCM (E1), then go to step
13.
NO - Go to step 18.
12. Replace ECT sensor 2 (see ECT SENSOR 2 REPLACEMENT ).
111

go to step 1.
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 2 and the ECM/PCM. If the
DTC P2185: ECT SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (2005-2007 MODELS)

YES - Go to step 3.
4. Disconnect ECT sensor 2 2P connector.
5. Connect ECT sensor 2 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 138: Connecting ECT Sensor 2 2P Connector Terminals No. 1 And No. 2 With Jumper
Wire

YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Go to step 18.
111
9. Remove the jumper wire from ECT sensor 2 2P connector.

11. Measure voltage between ECT sensor 2 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
Fig. 139: Measuring Voltage Between ECT Sensor 2 2P Connector Terminal No. 1 And Body
Ground
Is there about 5 V?

111
NO - Go to step 17.
15. Connect ECT sensor 2 2P connector terminal No. 2 to body ground with a jumper wire.
Fig. 140: Connecting ECT Sensor 2 2P Connector Terminal No. 2 To Body Ground With
Jumper Wire
111

NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E4) and ECT sensor 2, then go to step
20.
111
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E1 and ECT sensor 2, then go to step
20.
NO - Go to step 25.
19. Replace ECT sensor 2 (see ECT SENSOR 2 REPLACEMENT ).
Is P2185 indicated?
go to step 1.
111

Is P2185 indicated?
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 2 and the ECM/PCM. If the
ECM/PCM ), then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was updated go to step 1.
DTC P2195: A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) SIGNAL STUCK LEAN
 If the vehicle was out of fuel and the engine stalled before this DTC was
stored, refuel and clear the DTC with the HDS.
 If DTC P2101, P2108, P2118, P2135, P2138, P2176, U0107 or a
combination of P2122 and P2127, P2122 and P2138, or P2127 and P2138
is stored at the same time, troubleshoot them first, then recheck for
DTC P2195 (2006-07 models).
1. Check the installation of the A/F sensor (Sensor 1).
Is the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) loose or disconnected from the exhaust pipe?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Go to step 2.
3. Clear the DTC with the DTC.
YES - If DTC P2195 is indicated, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F
sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 13. If any other Temporary DTCs or
111

7. Reinstall the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see A/F SENSOR REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Go to step 12.
YES - Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to
13. Update the ECM/PCM if the it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM (see UPDATING THE ECM/PCM , SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ).
step1.
NO - Go to step 16.
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM (see'03-05 models, '06-07 models). If any other
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated in step 15, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result
comes on.
111
DTC P2227: BARO SENSOR RANGE/PERFORMANCE PROBLEM
 If DTC P0107, P0108, P1128, and/or P1129 are stored at the same time
as DTC P2227, troubleshoot those DTCs first, then recheck for DTC
P2227.

2. Check the BARO SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is about 101 kPa (29.9 in.Hg, 760 mmHg), or about 2.9 V at sea level indicated?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Go to step 7.
5. Test-drive under these conditions, then connect the HDS:
 ECM SENSOR 1 above 158°F (70°C)
 Throttle position between 12 degrees and 20 degrees for 2 seconds
YES - Go to step 7.
radiator fan comes on, the let it idle.
 ECM SENSOR 1 above 158°F (70°C)
 REL TP SENSOR between 12 degrees and 20 degrees for 2 seconds
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), then go
to step 8. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
111
NO - Go to step 11.
SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), then go to step 9. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 9.
DTC P2228: BARO SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE

YES - Go to step 3.
updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), then
recheck. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM (see '03-05 models, '06-07 models ) If any other
DTC P2229: BARO SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE

111
Is about 160 kPa (47.2 in.Hg, 1,200 mmHg), or 4.5 V or higher indicated?
YES - Go to step 3.
updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), then
recheck. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
DTC P2238: A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) AFS+ LINE LOW VOLTAGE

YES - Go to step 4.
111
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A31) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1),
then go to step 10.
NO - Go to step 9.
ECM/PCM. If the connector and terminal fits are OK, go to step 16.
111
NO - Go to step 15.
THE ECM/PCM ), then go to step 17. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1
NO - Go to step 19.
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM; (see '03-05 models, '06-07 models). If an other
sensor (Sensor 1) and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM (see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), then recheck. If the screen indicates NOT
DTC P2252: A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) AFS- LINE LOW VOLTAGE

YES - Go to step 5.
111

YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A28) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1),
then go to step 11.
NO - Go to step 10.
111
ECM/PCM. If the connector and terminal fits are OK, go to step 17.
NO - Go to step 16.
THE ECM/PCM ), then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was substituted go to step 1.
NO - Go to step 20.
20. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2252 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS
DTC P2270: SECONDARY HO2S (SENSOR 2); CIRCUIT SIGNAL STUCK LEAN;(2005-2007
MODELS); DTC P2271: SECONDARY HO2S (SENSOR 2); CIRCUIT SIGNAL STUCK RICH;
(2005-2007 MODELS)
111

5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2270 or P2271 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
YES - Go to step 6.
11. Start the engine. Then let idle without load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
Is DTC P2270 or P2271 indicated?
NO - Go to step 14.
14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2270 or P2271 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
111
DTC P2610: ECM/PCM IGNITION OFF INTERNAL TIMER PERFORMANCE PROBLEM (2005-
2007 MODELS)

Is P2610 indicated?
YES - Go to step 4.
(see UPDATING THE ECM/PCM , SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), then recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM (see
ECM/PCM Replacement ).
Is P2610 indicated?
THE ECM/PCM ), the recheck. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
DTC P2A00: A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) RANGE/PERFORMANCE PROBLEM

 Vehicle speed at 26 mph (41 km/h) or more, and engine speed at 3,250 rpm or less
111
Drive with the throttle fully opened for 5 seconds from an engine speed of 1,600 rpm, then slow

down with the throttle completely closed.
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2A00 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
YES - Go to step 6.
 Vehicle speed at 26 mph (41 km/h) or more, and engine speed at 3,250 rpm or less
 Drive with the throttle fully opened for 5 seconds from an engine speed of 1,600 rpm, then slow
down with the throttle completely closed.
Is DTC P2A00 indicated?
NO - Go to step 13.
13. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2A00 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
11 and recheck.
DTC U0073: F-CAN MALFUNCTION (BUS-OFF); (2003-2004 MODELS); DTC U0155: F-CAN
MALFUNCTION (GAUGE; CONTROL MODULE-ECM/PCM);(2003-2005 MODELS); DTC
U1102: F-CAN MALFUNCTION (BUS-OFF); (2005 MODEL)
111

 Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to 2003-2004 models.
 Information marked with triple asterisk (***) applies to '03-05.
With Navigation System

Is DTC U0073* (U1102)** and/or U0155*** indicated?
YES - Go to step 4.
terminals at the gauge control module, the navigation unit, and the ECM/PCM.
4. Check for Body Electrical DTCs in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Is DTC B1168, B1169, and/or B1178 indicated?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Do the gauge control module input test (see SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION ).
8. Disconnect the gauge assembly 30P connector.
9. Disconnect the navigation unit 20P connector.
11. Check for continuity between gauge assembly 30P connector terminals No. 23, No. 24 and body
ground individually.
111
Fig. 145: Checking Continuity Between Gauge Assembly 30P Connector Terminals No. 23, No.
24 And Body Ground
YES - Repair short in the wire between the gauge control module, the navigation unit, and the
ECM/PCM (E11*1 (E24)*2 ), then go to step 18.
NO - Go to step 12.
*1: CANH line
*2: CANL line
12. Check for continuity between gauge assembly 30P connector terminal No. 24 and ECM/PCM
connector terminal E11, and between gauge assembly 30P connector terminal No. 23 and ECM/PCM
connector terminal E24 individually.
111
Fig. 146: Checking Continuity Between Gauge Assembly 30P Connector Terminal No. 24 And
ECM/PCM Connector Terminal E11

NO - Repair open in the wire between the gauge control module and the ECM/PCM (E11*1
(E24)*2 ), then go to step 18.
*1: CANH line
*2: CANL line
111
YES - Repair short in the wires between ECM/PCM connector terminals E11 and E24, then go
to step 18.
NO - Go to step 14.
14. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P) and the gauge assembly 30P connector.

111

YES - If DTC U0073* (U1102)** and/or U0155*** is indicated, check for poor connections or
loose terminals at the gauge assembly, the navigation unit, and the ECM/PCM, then go to step
1.
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the gauge assembly, the navigation
unit, and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM
step 1. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTC's
troubleshooting.
DTC U0073: F-CAN MALFUNCTION (BUS-OFF); (2003-2004 MODELS); DTC U0155: F-CAN
MALFUNCTION (GAUGE CONTROL MODULE-ECM/PCM); (2003-2005 MODELS); DTC
U1102: F-CAN MALFUNCTION (BUS-OFF); (2005 MODEL)
 Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to 2003-2004 models.
 Information marked with triple asterisk (***) applies to '03-05.
Without Navigation System

YES - Go to step 4.
111
terminals at the gauge control module, and the ECM/PCM.
4. Check for Body DTCs in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Is DTC B1168, B1169, and/or B1178 indicated?
YES - Go to step 5.
8. Disconnect the gauge assembly 30P connector.
10. Check for continuity between gauge assembly 30P connector terminals No. 23, No. 24 and body
Fig. 148: Checking Continuity Between Gauge Assembly 30P Connector Terminals No. 23, No.
24 And Body Ground
YES - Repair short in the wire between the gauge control module and the ECM/PCM (E11*1
111

NO - Go to step 11.
*1: CANH line
*2: CANL line
11. Check for continuity between gauge assembly 30P connector terminal No. 24 and ECM/PCM
connector terminal E11, and between gauge assembly 30P connector terminal No. 23 and ECM/PCM
connector terminal E24 individually.
Fig. 149: Checking Continuity Between Gauge Assembly 30P Connector Terminal No. 24 And
ECM/PCM Connector Terminal E11

NO - Repair open in the wire between the gauge control module and the ECM/PCM (E11*1
*1: CANH line
*2: CANL line
111
to step 13.
NO - Go to step 18.
Is DTCsDTC U0073* (U1102)** and/or U0155*** indicated?
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the gauge control module and the
111

Is DTC U0073* (U1102)** and/or U0155 indicated?
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the gauge assembly, and the
SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ) then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step
1.
DTC U0155: F-CAN MALFUNCTION (GAUGE CONTROL MODULE-ECM/PCM);('06-07

MODELS); DTC U1102: F-CAN MALFUNCTION (BUS-OFF);('06-07 MODELS)
With Navigation System

Is DTC U0155 and/or U1102 indicated?
YES - Go to step 4.
terminals at the gauge control module, the navigation unit, and the ECM/PCM.
YES - Go to step 5.
8. Disconnect the gauge control module 36P connector.
9. Disconnect the navigation unit 20P connector.
111
11. Check for continuity between gauge control module 36P connector terminals No. 1, No. 19 and body
Fig. 151: Checking Continuity Between Gauge Control Module 36P Connector Terminals No. 1,
YES - Repair short in the wire between the gauge control module, the navigation unit, and the
ECM/PCM (E11 (E24)*), then go to step 18.
NO - Go to step 12.
*: CANL line
12. Check for continuity between gauge control module 36P connector terminal No. 1 and ECM/PCM
connector terminal E11, and between gauge control module 36P connector terminal No. 19 and
ECM/PCM connector terminal E24 individually.
111
Fig. 152: Checking Continuity Between Gauge Control Module 36P Connector Terminal No. 1
And ECM/PCM Connector Terminal E11

NO - Repair open in the wire between the gauge control module and the ECM/PCM (E11 (E24)
*), then go to step 18.
*: CANL line
111
to step 18.
NO - Go to step 14.
14. Reconnect ECM/PCM connector E (31P) and the gauge control module 36P connector.

111

YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the gauge control module, the
navigation unit, and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the gauge control module, the
navigation unit, and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
ECM/PCM (see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was
DTC U0155: F-CAN MALFUNCTION (GAUGE CONTROL MODULE-ECM/PCM); ('06-07

MODELS); DTC U1102: F-CAN MALFUNCTION (BUS-OFF);('06-07 MODEL)
Without Navigation System

YES - Go to step 4.
terminals at the gauge control module and the ECM/PCM.
YES - Go to step 5.
111
8. Disconnect the gauge control module 36P connector.

10. Check for continuity between gauge control module 36P connector terminals No. 1, No. 19 and body
Fig. 154: Checking Continuity Between Gauge Control Module 36P Connector Terminals No. 1,
YES - Repair short in the wire between the gauge control module and the ECM/PCM (E11
(E24)*), then go to step 13.
NO - Go to step 11.
*: CANL line
11. Check for continuity between gauge control module 36P connector terminal No. 1 and ECM/PCM
connector terminal E11, and between gauge control module 36P connector terminal No. 19 and
ECM/PCM connector terminal E24 individually.
111
Fig. 155: Checking Continuity Between Gauge Control Module 36P Connector Terminal No. 1

NO - Repair open in the wire between the gauge control module and the ECM/PCM (E11 (E24)
*), then go to step 13.
*: CANL line
111
to step 13.
NO - Go to step 18.
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the gauge control module and the
111

YES Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the gauge control module and the
1.
NO If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM was
MIL CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING

2. Do the gauge self-diagnostic procedure (see SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION ).
Does the MIL indicator flash?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Substitute a known-good gauge control module (see GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
REPLACEMENT ), and recheck. If the MIL circuit is OK, replace the original gauge control
module.
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the MIL.
Does the MIL stay off?

NO - Go to step 5.
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), wait 20 seconds, and watch the MIL.
Does the MIL stay on more than 20 seconds or flash more than 5 times?
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - The MIL circuit is OK.
8. Connect the HDS (see HOW TO USE THE HDS (HONDA DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM) ).
9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and read the HDS.
Does the HDS communicate with the ECM/PCM?
111

NO - Go to DLC CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING .

NO - Go to step 11.
11. Check the MIL in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is ON indicated?

NO - Substitute a known-good gauge control module (see GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
REPLACEMENT ), and recheck. If the MIL circuit is OK, replace the original gauge control
module.
12. Check the SCS in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is a short indicated?

original ECM/PCM (see '03-05 models, '06-07 models ).
111
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E29) and the DLC.
Does the engine start and idle smoothly?

NO - Go to step 22.
19. Connect the HDS (see GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION ).
111
20. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and read the HDS.
Does the HDS communicate with the ECM/PCM?

NO - Go to DLC CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING .

23. Inspect the No. 23 +BIG MAIN (50 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Repair open in the wire between the No. 23 +B IG MAIN (50 A) fuse and the ignition
switch. If the wire is OK, go to step 24.
NO - Repair short in the wire between No. 23 +B IG MAIN (50 A) fuse and the under-dash
fuse/relay box. Also replace the No. 23 +B IG MAIN (50 A) fuse.
24. Inspect the No. 8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?

NO - Go to step 25.
25. Remove the blown No. 8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse from the under-dash fuse/relay box.
111
Fig. 158: Removing PGM-FI Main Relay 1 (FI Main)

27. Check for continuity between body ground and PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) 4P connector
terminals No. 2 and No. 3 individually.
111
Fig. 159: Checking Continuity Between Body Ground And PGM-FI Main Relay 1 4P Connector
YES - Repair short in the wire between the No. 8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse and PGM-
FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN). Also replace the No. 8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse.
NO - Go to step 28.
28. Disconnect each of the components or connectors below, one at a time, and check for continuity
between PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
 PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP)
 A/F sensor relay (LAF)
 Throttle actuator control module relay (2006-07 models)
 ECM/PCM connector A (31P)
 Each injector 2P connector
 Idle air control (IAC) valve 3P connector (2003-2005 models)
 Camshaft position (CMP) sensor B 3P connector
 Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor 3P connector
111
Fig. 160: Checking Continuity Between PGM-FI Main Relay 1 4P Connector Terminal
Does continuity go away when one of the above components is disconnected?
YES - Replace the component that made the short to body ground go away when disconnected.
If the item is the ECM/PCM, update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see UPDATING THE ECM/PCM , SUBSTITUTE
THE ECM/PCM ), then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM (see '03-05 models, '06-07 models ).
Also replace the No. 8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse.
NO - Go to step 29.
29. Disconnect the connectors from these components:
 PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP)
 A/F sensor relay (LAF)
 Throttle actuator control module relay (2006-07 models)
 ECM/PCM connector A (31P)
 Injectors
 Idle air control (IAC) valve (2003-2005 models)
111
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor B


 Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor
30. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body
ground.
Fig. 161: Checking Continuity Between PGM-FI Main Relay 1 4P Connector Terminal No. 1
And Body Ground
YES - Repair short in the wire between PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) and each component.
Also replace the No. 8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse.
NO - Replace PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN). Also replace the No. 8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM)
(15 A) fuse.
31. Inspect the No. 19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?

NO - Go to step 32.
32. Remove the blown No. 19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse from the under-dash fuse/relay box.
111


NO - Replace the No. 19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse, and update the ECM/PCM if it does not
have the latest software, or substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see UPDATING THE
ECM/PCM , SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
away with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM (see '03-05 models, '06-
07 models ).
111
Fig. 163: Removing PGM-FI Main Relay 2 (FUEL PUMP)

111
YES - Repair short in the wire between the No. 19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse and the
ECM/PCM (E9), or between the No. 19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse and PGM-FI main relay 2
(FUEL PUMP), or between the No. 19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse and the immobilizer control
unit. Also replace the No. 19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse.
NO - Go to step 38.
38. Remove the spare tire lid (see TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION - TRUNK AREA ).
39. Remove the access panel from the floor (see FUEL PUMP/FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT
REPLACEMENT ).
40. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector.
111
Ground
YES - Repair short in the wire between the fuel pump and PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL
PUMP). Also replace the No. 19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse.
NO - Go to step 42.
42. Reinstall PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (A).
111
Fig. 166: Reinstalling PGM-FI Main Relay 2 (FUEL PUMP)

111
Ground
YES - Replace PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). Also replace the No. 19 FUEL PUMP (15
A) fuse.
NO - Check the fuel pump, and replace it if necessary. Also replace the No. 19 FUEL PUMP
(15 A) fuse.
111


NO - Repair open in the wire between the No. 19 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse and the ECM/PCM
(E9).
111

NO - Go to step 49.
111
Fig. 170: Removing PGM-FI Main Relay 1 (FI MAIN)

51. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) 4P connector terminal No. 3 and body
ground.
111
Fig. 171: Measuring Voltage Between PGM-FI Main Relay 1 4P Connector Terminal No. 3 And
Body Ground

NO - Repair open in the wire between the No. 8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse and PGM-FI
main relay 1 (FI MAIN).
52. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) 4P connector terminal No. 4 and
ECM/PCM connector terminal E7.
111
YES - Test PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) (see POWER RELAY TEST ). If the relay is
OK, update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good
NO - Repair open in the wire between PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) and the ECM/PCM
(E7).
111
And A3

NO - Go to step 56.
57. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) (A).
111
Fig. 174: Removing PGM-FI Main Relay 1 (FI MAIN)


59. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) 4P connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground.
111
Fig. 175: Measuring Voltage Between PGM-FI Main Relay 1 4P Connector Terminal No. 2 And
Body Ground

NO - Repair open in the wire between the No. 8 FI ECU (ECM/PCM) (15 A) fuse and PGM-FI
main relay 1 (FI MAIN).
61. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) 4P connector terminal No. 1 and
ECM/PCM connector terminals A2 and A3 individually.
111
And ECM/PCM Connector Terminals A2 And A3
YES - Replace PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN).

NO - Repair open in the wire between PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) and the ECM/PCM
(A2, A3).
62. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminals A4, A5, A8, and A9
individually.
111
Fig. 177: Measuring Voltage Between Body Ground And ECM/PCM Connector Terminals A4,
A5, A8 And A9
Is there more than 0.2 V?
YES - Repair open in the wire(s) that had more than 0.2 V between G101 and the ECM/PCM
(A4, A5, A8, A9).
NO
 2003-2004 models: Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software, or
substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see UPDATING THE ECM/PCM ,
SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away
with a known-good ECM/PCM, replace the original ECM/PCM (see '03-05 models, '06-
07 models ).
 2005-2007 models: Go to step 63.
63. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal A21.
111
Fig. 178: Measuring Voltage Between Body Ground And ECM/PCM Connector Terminal A21
Is there about 5 V?

NO - Go to step 64.
65. Disconnect the connector from each of these sensors, one at a time, and measure voltage between
body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal A21 with the ignition switch ON (II).
 Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor
 Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor
 Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (A/T)
111
Fig. 179: Measuring Voltage Between Body Ground And ECM/PCM Connector Terminal
A21 With Ignition Switch On (II)
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Replace the sensor that restored 5 V when disconnected.

NO - Go to step 66.
68. Disconnect the connectors from these sensors:
 Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor
 Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor
 Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (A/T)

111
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A21) and the MAP sensor, the APP
sensor or the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (A/T).
71. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal A20.
111
Fig. 181: Measuring Voltage Between Body Ground And ECM/PCM Connector Terminal A20
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Go to Step 79.

NO - Go to step 72.
73. Disconnect the connector from each of these sensors, one at a time, and measure voltage between
body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal A20 with the ignition switch ON (II).
 TP sensor (2005 model)
 Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor (2006-07 models)
 EGR valve
111
Fig. 182: Measuring Voltage Between Body Ground And ECM/PCM Connector Terminal
A20 With Ignition Switch On
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Replace the sensor that restored 5 V when disconnected.

NO - Go to step 74.
76. Disconnect the connector from these sensors:
 TP sensor (2005 model)
 Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor (2006-07 models)
 EGR valve

111
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A20) and the TP sensor (2005 model),
the APP sensor (2006-07 models), the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor or EGR valve.
79. Measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM connector terminal E5.
111
Fig. 184: Measuring Voltage Between Body Ground And ECM/PCM Connector Terminal E5
Is there about 5 V?
NO - Go to step 80.
81. Disconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector, and measure voltage between body ground and ECM/PCM
connector terminal E5 with the ignition switch ON (II).
111
Fig. 185: Measure Voltage Between Body Ground And ECM/PCM Connector Terminal E5
With Ignition Switch On
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Replace the FTP sensor (see FTP SENSOR REPLACEMENT ).

NO Go to step 82.
111
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (E5) and the FTP sensor.
DLC CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING
NOTE:  If the ECM/PCM does not communicate with the HDS, do this
troubleshooting procedure.
 Check that the MIL circuit is normal, then do this troubleshooting.
1. Measure voltage between DLC terminal No. 16 and body ground.
111
Fig. 187: Measuring Voltage Between DLC Terminal No. 16 And Body Ground
YES - Go to step 2.
NO - Repair open in the wire between DLC terminal No. 16 and the No. 8 FI ECU (15 A) fuse
in the under-hood fuse/relay box.
2. Measure voltage between DLC terminals No. 4 and No. 16.
111
Fig. 188: Measuring Voltage Between DLC Terminals No. 4 And No. 16
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Repair open in the wire between DLC terminal No. 4 and body ground (G501).
111
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Repair open in the wire between DLC terminal No. 5 and body ground (G503).
111

NO - Go to step 6.
9. Check for continuity between DLC terminal No. 7 and body ground.
111
Fig. 191: Checking Continuity Between DLC Terminal No. 7 And Body Ground
YES - Repair short to ground in the wire between DLC terminal No. 7 and the ECM/PCM
(E23). After repairing the wire, check for a DTC with the HDS, then go to the indicated DTC's
troubleshooting.
NO - Go to step 10.
10. Check for continuity between DLC terminal No. 7 and ECM/PCM terminal E23.
111
Fig. 192: Checking Continuity Between DLC Terminal No. 7 And ECM/PCM Terminal E23
NO - Repair open in the wire between DLC terminal No. 7 and the ECM/PCM (E23). After
repairing the wire, check for a DTC with the HDS, then go to the indicated DTC's
troubleshooting.
111
Is there 0 V?
NO - Repair short to power in the wire between DLC terminal No. 7 and the ECM/PCM (E23).
After repairing the wire, check for a DTC with the HDS, then go to the indicated DTC's
troubleshooting.
111
INJECTOR REPLACEMENT
1. Relieve fuel pressure (see FUEL PRESSURE RELIEVING ).
3. Disconnect the connectors from the injectors (A). On A/T models, disconnect the engine mount
control solenoid valve (B).
Fig. 194: Disconnecting Connectors from Injectors

4. Remove the ground cable bolt (G101) (C).

111
5. Disconnect the quick-connect fittings (D).

6. Remove the fuel rail mounting nuts (E) from the fuel rail (F).
7. Remove the injector clip (G) from the injector.
8. Remove the injector from the fuel rail.
9. Coat the new O-rings (A) with clean engine oil, and insert the injectors (B) into the fuel rail (C).
Fig. 195: Coating and Inserting the Injectors

10. Install the injector clip (D).

11. Coat the injector O-rings (E) with clean engine oil.
111
12. Install the injectors into the injector base (F).

13. Install the fuel rail mounting nuts (G) and the ground cable bolt (G101).
14. Connect the connectors on the injectors. On A/T models, connect the engine mount control solenoid
valve.
15. Connect the quick-connect fittings.
16. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not operate the starter. After the fuel pump runs for about 2
seconds, the fuel rail will be pressurized. Repeat this two or three times, then check for fuel leakage.
A/F SENSOR REPLACEMENT

O2 sensor wrench, Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available
1. Disconnect the A/F sensor 4P connector (A), then remove the A/F sensor (B).
111
Fig. 196: Disconnecting A/F Sensor 4P Connector

111
SECONDARY HO2S REPLACEMENT

O2 sensor wrench, Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or equivalent, commercially available
1. Pull back the carpet from the floor rail under the front edge of the front passenger seat to expose the
secondary HO2S 4P connector.
2. Disconnect the secondary HO2S 4P connector (A).
Fig. 197: Disconnecting Secondary HO2S 4P Connector

3. Remove the secondary HO2S (A), and the covers (B).
111
Fig. 198: Removing Secondary HO2S And Covers

4. Install the secondary HO2S in the reverse order of removal.
ECT SENSOR/ECT SENSOR 1 REPLACEMENT

2. Remove the EVAP canister purge valve (see EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE
REPLACEMENT ).
3. Unbolt the under-hood fuse/relay box, and move the box aside.
4. Disconnect the ECT sensor/ECT sensor 1 connector (A).
111
Fig. 199: Disconnecting ECT Sensor/ECT Sensor 1 Connector

5. Remove the ECT sensor/ECT sensor 1 (B).

6. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C), then refill the radiator with
engine coolant (see COOLANT REPLACEMENT ).
CMP SENSOR B REPLACEMENT

111
2. Remove the EVAP canister purge valve (seeEVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE
REPLACEMENT ).
3. Disconnect the CMP sensor B connector (A).
Fig. 200: Disconnecting CMP Sensor B Connector

4. Remove CMP sensor B (B) from the exhaust camshaft side of the cylinder head.
5. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C).
IAT SENSOR REPLACEMENT

EXCEPT 2003-2004 SULEV, LX-P MODELS
1. Disconnect the IAT sensor connector (A).
111
Fig. 201: Disconnecting IAT Sensor Connector

2. Remove the clamp (B) and the IAT sensor (C).

111
KNOCK SENSOR REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the intake manifold (see REMOVAL ('03-05 MODELS) REMOVAL ('06--07
MODELS) ).
2. Disconnect the knock sensor connector (A).
Fig. 202: Disconnecting Knock Sensor Connector

3. Remove the knock sensor (B).

111
CKP SENSOR REPLACEMENT

1. Disconnect the CKP sensor connector (A).
Fig. 203: Disconnecting CKP Sensor Connector

2. Remove the CKP sensor (B).

3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C).
4. Do the CKP pattern clear/pattern learn procedure with the HDS (see HDS CLEAR COMMAND ).
OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT) SPEED SENSOR REPLACEMENT

M/T
111

2. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector (A).
Fig. 204: Disconnecting Output Shaft Speed Sensor Connector

3. Remove the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (B).

4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C).
MAP SENSOR REPLACEMENT

1. Disconnect the MAP sensor connector (A).
111
Fig. 205: Disconnecting MAP Sensor Connector

*: This illustration shows 2003-2005 models.
2. Remove the screw (B).

3. Remove the MAP sensor (C).
4. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (D).
MAF SENSOR/IAT SENSOR REPLACEMENT

2003-2004 SULEV, LX-P MODELS AND 2005-2007 MODELS
1. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor connector (A).
111
Fig. 206: Disconnecting MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor Connector

2. Remove the bolts (B).

3. Remove the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (C).
ECM/PCM REPLACEMENT
'03-05 MODELS
NOTE:  Make sure the HDS is loaded with the latest software version.
 If you are replacing the ECM/PCM after substituting a known-good
ECM/PCM, reinstall the original ECM/PCM, then do this procedure.
111
dashboard.

2. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit (see DLC
Circuit Troubleshooting).
111


8. Disconnect ECM/PCM connectors (C).
111
NOTE: DTC P0630 "VIN Not Programmed or Mismatch" may be stored because
VIN has not been programmed into the ECM/PCM; ignore it, and
continue this procedure.
13. '05 model: Input the VIN to the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
14. Rewrite the immobilizer code with the ECM/PCM replacement procedure in the HDS; it allows you
to start the engine.
17. Do the CKP pattern clear/pattern learn procedure with the HDS (see HDS CLEAR COMMAND ).
'06-07 MODELS
NOTE:  Make sure the HDS is loaded with the latest software version.
 If you are replacing the ECM/PCM after substituting a known-good
ECM/PCM, reinstall the original ECM/PCM, then do this procedure.
 During the procedure, if any READ DATA, WRITE DATA, or other data
checks fail, not the failure, the continue.
dashboard.
111


3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the ECM/PCM. If it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit (see DLC
Circuit Troubleshooting). If you are returning from DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 4
through 9 and 20 through 25, and do the following procedure after replacing a ECM/PCM.
 Replace the engine oil and the engine oil filter (see ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT ,
ENGINE OIL FILTER REPLACEMENT ).
 Replace the ATF (seeATF REPLACEMENT ).
 Clean the throttle body (see THROTTLE BODY CLEANING ).
4. Select the PGM-FI system with the HDS.

5. Select INSPECTION MENU with HDS..
6. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION CHECK, and follow the screen prompts.
NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED, continue with this

procedure.
7. Select the REPLACE ECM/PCM MENU, then READ DATA and follow the screen prompts.
8. A/T: Select the A/T SYSTEM with the HDS.
111
9. A/T: Select the REPLACE TCM/PCM, then READ DATA and follow the screen prompts.
NOTE:  Doing this step copies (READS) the ATF life data from the original
PCM so you can later download (WRITES) it into the new PCM.
 If READ DATA indicates FAILED, continue with this procedure.

11. Jump the SCS line with HDS.
111


14. Disconnect the ECM/PCM connectors (C).
19. Manually input the VIN to the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
NOTE: DTC P0630 "VIN Not Programmed or Mismatch" maybe stored because
the VIN has not been programmed into the ECM/PCM; ignore it, and
continue this procedure.
20. If the READ DATA (engine oil life) failed in step 7, go to step 23 (A/T) or step 26 (M/T). Otherwise
go to step 21.
21. Select the PGM-FI system with the HDS.
22. Select the REPLACE ECM/PCM MENU, then WRITE DATA and follow the screen prompts.
NOTE: If the WRITE DATA indicates FAILED, continue with this procedure.
23. A/T: If the READ DATA (ATF life) failed in step 9, go to step 26. Otherwise go to step 24.
24. A/T: Select the A/T SYSTEM with HDS.
25. A/T: Select the REPLACE TCM/PCM MENU, then WRITE DATA and follow the screen prompts.
NOTE: If the WRITE DATA indicates FAILED, continue with this procedure.
26. Select IMMOBI system with the HDS.

27. Enter the immobilizer code with the ECM/PCM replacement procedure in the HDS; it allows you to
start the engine.
28. If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 6 clean the throttle body (see THROTTLE BODY
CLEANING ), then go to step 29.
29. If the READ DATA failed in step 7 or the WRITE DATA failed in step 22, replace the engine oil and
engine oil filter (see ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT , ENGINE OIL FILTER
REPLACEMENT ), then go to step 30 (A/T) or step 31 (M/T).
30. If the READ DATA failed in step 9 or the WRITE DATA failed in step 25, replace the ATF (see
ATF REPLACEMENT ), then go to step 31.
31. Select PGM-FI system and reset the ECM/PCM with the HDS.
32. Update the ECM/PCM if it does not have the latest software (see UPDATING THE ECM/PCM ).
34. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see CRANK (CKP) PATTERN CLEAR/CRANK (CKP)
PATTERN LEARN; CLEAR/LEARN PROCEDURE (WITH THE HDS) ).
ECT SENSOR 2 REPLACEMENT

111
2005-2007 MODELS
1. Drain the engine coolant (see COOLANT REPLACEMENT ).

3. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2 connector (A), then remove ECT sensor 2 (B).
Fig. 211: Disconnecting ECT Sensor 2 Connector

4. Install ECT sensor 2 with a new O-ring (C).

6. Refill the radiator with engine coolant (see COOLANT REPLACEMENT ).
111
2003-07 ENGINE PERFORMANCE VTEC/VTC - Accord
VTEC/VTC - Accord
Fig. 1: Locating VTEC Components

DTC CODES
DTC INDEX
DTC Description
DTC P0010 VTC Oil Control Solenoid Valve Malfunction
DTC P0011 VTC System Malfunction
DTC P0340 CMP Sensor A No Signal
DTC P0341 CMP Sensor and CKP Sensor Incorrect Phase Detected
DTC P0344 CMP Sensor A Intermittent Interruption
DTC P1009 VTC Advance Malfunction
111
2 августа 2011 г. 16:00:35
Low Voltage
High Voltage
Low Voltage
High Voltage
DTC TROUBLESHOOTING
DTC P0010: VTC OIL CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE MALFUNCTION
and review the general troubleshooting information.

4. Do the VTC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
YES - Go to step 6.
terminals at the VTC oil control solenoid valve and the ECM/PCM.
7. Disconnect the VTC oil control solenoid valve 2P connector.
8. At the solenoid side, measure resistance between VTC oil control solenoid valve 2P connector
terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
111
Fig. 2: Measuring Resistance Between VTC Oil Control Solenoid Valve 2P Connector
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Go to step 15.
9. Check for continuity between VTC oil control solenoid valve 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body
ground.
111
Fig. 3: Checking Continuity Between VTC Oil Control Solenoid Valve 2P Connector Terminal

NO - Repair open in the wire between the VTC oil control solenoid valve and G101, then go to
step 16.
111
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (B1) and the VTC oil control solenoid
valve, then go to step 16.
NO - Go to step 13.
13. Connect VTC oil control solenoid valve 2P connector terminal No. 2 to body ground with a jumper
wire.
111
Fig. 5: Connecting VTC Oil Control Solenoid Valve 2P Connector Terminal No. 2 To Body
111

NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (B1) and the VTC oil control solenoid
valve, then go to step 16.
15. Replace the VTC oil control solenoid valve (see VTC OIL CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
111
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the VTC oil control solenoid valve and
NO - Go to step 22.
NO - If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the VTC
oil control solenoid valve and the ECM/PCM, then go to step1. If the screen indicates NOT
SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), then go to step 25. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, got
to step 1.
NO- Go to step 27.
NO- If the screen indicates FAILED, check the poor connections or loose terminals at the VTC
oil control solenoid valve and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good ECM/PCM (see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), Then got to step 25 . If the
ECM/PCM was substituted, go the step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 25 .
DTC P0011: VTC SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
and review the general troubleshoot information (see GENERAL
111

4. Watch the low oil pressure indicator with the engine running.
Is the low oil pressure indicator on?
YES - Check the oil pressure (see OIL PRESSURE TEST ), then go to step 15.
NO - Go to step 5.
Is the result OK?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Go to step 9.
7. Check the VTC STATUS in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
YES - Go to step 8.
YES - Go to step 9.
10. Remove the power steering pump (see PUMP REPLACEMENT ) and the auto-tensioner (see
DRIVE BELT AUTO-TENSIONER INSPECTION ).
11. Remove the VTC strainer (A), and check it for clogging.
111
Fig. 7: Removing VTC Strainer

Is the strainer OK?

NO - Clean the VTC strainer, replace the engine oil filter and the engine oil, then go to step 14.
12. Test the VTC oil control solenoid valve (see VTC OIL CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Is the VTC oil control solenoid valve OK?

NO - Replace the VTC oil control solenoid valve (see VTC OIL CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE REMOVAL/TEST/INSTALLATION ), then go to step 14.
13. Inspect the VTC actuator (see VTC ACTUATOR INSPECTION ).
Is the VTC actuator OK?
111

NO - Replace the VTC actuator (see VTC ACTUATOR, EXHAUST CAMSHAFT
SPROCKET REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ), then go to step 14.
NO - Go to step 21.
oil control solenoid valve and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
DTC P0340: CMP SENSOR A NO SIGNAL

YES - Go to step 5.
terminals at CMP sensor A and the ECM/PCM.
6. Disconnect the CMP sensor A 3P connector.
111
8. Measure voltage between CMP sensor A 3P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
Fig. 8: Measuring Voltage Between CMP Sensor A 3P Connector Terminal No. 3 And Body
Ground
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the No. 18 ACG (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay
box and CMP sensor A, then go to step 18.
9. Measure voltage between CMP sensor A 3P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
111
Fig. 9: Measuring Voltage Between CMP Sensor A 3P Connector Terminal No. 1 And Body
Ground
Is there about 5 V?

NO - Go to step 11.
10. Measure voltage between CMP sensor A 3P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3.
111
Fig. 10: Measuring Voltage Between CMP Sensor A 3P Connector Terminals No. 2 And No. 3

NO - Repair open in the wire between CMP sensor A and G101, then go to step 18.
111
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A19) and CMP sensor A, then go to
step 18.
NO - Go to step 12.
111
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (A19) and CMP sensor A, then go to
step 18.
NO - Go to step 24.
17. Replace CMP sensor A (see CMP SENSOR A REPLACEMENT ).

111
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at CMP sensor A and the ECM/PCM,
then go to step 1.
NO - Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Temporary DTC's or DTC's are indicated, go to
27. Check for Temporary DTC's or DTC's with HDS.
YES- Check for poor connections or loose terminals at CMP sensor A and the ECM/PCM. If
ECM/PCM ), then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was substituted, got to step 1.
NO- If the ECM/PCM was updated, troubleshooting is complete. If the ECM/PCM was
REPLACEMENT ). If any other Temporary DTC's or DTC's are indicated, go to the indicated
DTC P0341: CMP SENSOR AND CKP SENSOR INCORRECT PHASE DETECTED
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on -board snapshot,

YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Go to step 5.
Is the result OK?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Go to step 9.
7. Check the VTC STATUS in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
111
YES - Go to step 8.
YES - Go to step 9.
poor connections or loose terminals at the VTC oil control solenoid valve and the ECM/PCM. If
the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 6 and recheck.
Is the VTC oil control solenoid valve OK?

VALVE REMOVAL/TEST/INSTALLATION ), then go to step 14.
11. Check the camshaft timing (see step 1 on CAM CHAIN INSTALLATION ).
Is the camshaft timing OK?

NO - Reset the camshaft timing (see CAM CHAIN INSTALLATION ), then go to step 14.
12. Check for damage or stretch at the cam chain (see COMPONENT LOCATION INDEX ).
Is the cam chain damaged or stretched?
YES - Replace the cam chain (see CAM CHAIN REMOVAL ), then go to step 14.
NO - Go to step 13.
Is the actuator OK?

111
NO - Go to step 21.
YES - Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Temporary DTC's or DTC's were indicated in
oil control solenoid valve and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
DTC P0344: CMP SENSOR A INTERMITTENT INTERRUPTION
TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION )

4. Check the CMP NOISE A COUNT in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Go to step 5.
 ENGINE SPEED
 VSS
6. Check the CMP NOISE A COUNT in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
YES - Go to step 7.
terminals at CMP sensor A and the ECM/PCM.
 CMP sensor A
 ECM/PCM
 Engine ground
 Body ground
111
YES - Go to step 8.
8. Check for damage on the CMP sensor A pulse plate (see CMP PULSE PLATE A
REPLACEMENT ).
YES - Replace the CMP sensor A pulse plate (see CMP PULSE PLATE A
NO - Go to step 9.
10. Replace CMP sensor A (see CMP SENSOR A REPLACEMENT ).
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at CMP sensor A and the ECM/PCM,
then go to step 1.
NO - Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Temporary DTCs are indicated, go to the
DTC P1009: VTC ADVANCE MALFUNCTION

YES - Go to step 5.
111

6. Remove the power steering pump (see PUMP REPLACEMENT ) and auto-tensioner (see DRIVE
BELT AUTO-TENSIONER INSPECTION ).
7. Remove the VTC strainer (A), and check it for clogging.
Fig. 13: Removing VTC Strainer And Checking For Clogging

Is the strainer OK?
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Clean the VTC strainer, replace the engine oil filter and the engine oil, then go to step 10.
Is the valve OK?
YES - Go to step 9.
111
VALVE REMOVAL/TEST/INSTALLATION ), then go to step10.

Is the actuator OK?
YES - Check the VTC system oil passages, then go to step 10.
YES - Check the oil passages for at the VTC system, then go to step 1.
NO - Go to step 16.
YES- Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Temporary DTC's or DTC's were indicated in
NO- If the screen indicates FAILED, check the oil passages for at VTC system, then go to step
1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on.
DTC P2646: ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH (VTEC OIL PRESSURE SWITCH)
CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE
 Pressure gauge adapter 07NAJ-P07010A

 A/T low pressure gauge w/panel 07406-0070300
 A/T pressure hose 07406-0020201
 A/T pressure adapter 07MAJ-PY40120
 Oil pressure hose 07ZAJ-S5A0200
111
Is the level OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO - Adjust the engine oil to the proper level, then go to step 19.
4. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
Is the result OK?
terminals at the rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure switch), the rocker arm oil
control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve), and the ECM/PCM.
NO - Go to step 5.
6. Disconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure switch) 2P connector.
8. Check the VTEC PRES SW in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is SWITCH ON indicated?

NO - Go to step 9.
10. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure switch) (A) and install the special
tools as shown in Fig. 14, then install the rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure switch)
to the oil pressure gauge adapter (B).
NOTE: Install the switch in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring.
111
Fig. 14: Removing Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch (VTEC Oil Pressure Switch) & Installing
Special Tools

13. Check the oil pressure.
Does the oil pressure increase to at least 392 kPa (56.9 psi, 4.0 kgf/cm2 )?
YES - Replace the rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure switch) (see ROCKER
ARM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH (VTEC OIL PRESSURE SWITCH)
NO - Inspect the VTEC system. If it is OK, replace the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC
solenoid valve) (see Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid (VTEC Solenoid Valve) Assembly
Removal/Installation ), then go to step 18.
111
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (B11) and the rocker arm oil pressure
switch (VTEC oil pressure switch), then go to step 18.
NO - Go to step 25.
111

YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the rocker arm oil pressure switch
(VTEC oil pressure switch), the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve), and the
NO - Go to step 24.
YES - Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Temporary DTC's or DTC's were indicated in
NO - If the screen indicates FAILED, check the poor connections or loose terminals at the
rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure switch), the rocker arm oil control solenoid
(VTEC solenoid valve), and the ECM/PCM, then go to step1. If the screen indicates NOT
28. Check for Temporary DTC's or DTC's with HDS.
YES- Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the rocker arm oil pressure switch
(VTEC oil pressure switch), the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve), and the
step 1.
NO- Go to step 29.
substituted, replace the original ECM/PCM;'03-05 models (see ECM/PCM
Temporary DTC's or DTC's were indicated in step 28, go to the indicated DTC's
troubleshooting.
NO- If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure switch), the rocker arm oil solenoid (VTEC
111
solenoid valve), and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
substituted, go to step 1 . If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 27.
DTC P2647: ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH (VTEC OIL PRESSURE SWITCH)
CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshots,
Is the level OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO - Adjust the engine oil to the proper level, then go to step 14.
Is the result OK?
terminals at the rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure switch) and the ECM/PCM.
NO - Go to step 5.
5. Check the result of step 4.
 Rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure switch) Failure
 Rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure switch) Open
 Rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure switch) SIG line Open
 Rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure switch) GND Open
Is the test result any of the above?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the rocker arm oil pressure switch
(VTEC oil pressure switch). If it is OK, replace the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC
solenoid valve) (see Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid (VTEC Solenoid Valve) Assembly
Removal/Installation ), then go to step 14.
7. Disconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure switch) 2P connector.
8. At the rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure switch), check for continuity between rocker
arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure switch) 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
111
Fig. 16: Checking Continuity Between Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch 2P Connector
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Replace the rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure switch) (see ROCKER
ARM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH (VTEC OIL PRESSURE SWITCH)
10. Measure voltage between rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure switch) 2P connector
111
Fig. 17: Measuring Voltage Between Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch 2P Connector Terminal
YES - Repair open in the wire between the rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure
switch) and G101, then go to step 13.
NO - Go to step 11.
111
YES - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (B11) and the rocker arm oil pressure
switch (VTEC oil pressure switch), then go to step 12.
NO - Go to step 19.
13. Reconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure switch) 2P connector.
111

(VTEC oil pressure switch) and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
NO - Go to step 18.
YES - Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTC's were indicated in
step 17 go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure switch) and the ECM/PCM, then go to step
1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on.

(VTEC oil pressure switch) and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good ECM/PCM (see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), then recheck. If the
ECM/PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO - Go to step 24.
Doe the screen indicate PASSED?

NO - If the screen indicated FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the
rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure switch) and the ECM/PCM. If the
ECM/PCM ), then go step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a
result comes on.
DTC P2648: ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOLENOID (VTEC SOLENOID VALVE) CIRCUIT
LOW VOLTAGE
111

Is the result OK?
terminals at the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve) and the ECM/PCM.
NO - Go to step 4.
5. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve) 2P connector.
6. At the solenoid side, measure resistance between rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid
valve) 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
111
Fig. 19: Measuring Resistance Between Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid 2P Connector
Is there 14-30 ohms at room temperature?
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Go to step 10.
111
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ECM/PCM (B6) and the rocker arm oil control
solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve), then go to step 11.
NO - Go to step 18.
10. Replace the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve) (see Rocker Arm Oil Control
Solenoid (VTEC Solenoid Valve) Assembly Removal/Installation ).
YES - Check for poor connections or loose terminals at the rocker arm oil control solenoid
(VTEC solenoid valve) and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
NO - Go to step 17.
rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve) and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If
the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 15.
20. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS .
(VTEC solenoid valve) and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-
good ECM/PCM (see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ) then go to step 20. If the ECM/PCM
was substituted, got to step 1.
NO - Go to step 22.
111
rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve) and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM (see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ),
then go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 20.
DTC P2649: ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOLENOID (VTEC SOLENOID VALVE) CIRCUIT
HIGH VOLTAGE

YES - Go to step 5.
terminals at the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve) and the ECM/PCM.
6. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve) 2P connector.
7. At the solenoid side, measure resistance between rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid
valve) 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
111
Is there 14-30 ohms at room temperature?
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Go to step 13.
8. Check for continuity between rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve) 2P connector
111
Fig. 22: Checking Continuity Between Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid 2P Connector
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid
valve) and G101, then go to step 14.
11. Connect rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve) 2P connector terminal No. 1 to body
ground with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 23: Connecting Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid (VTEC Solenoid Valve) 2P Connector
Terminal No. 1 To Body Ground With Jumper Wire
111

NO - Repair open in the wire between the ECM/PCM (B6) and the rocker arm oil control
solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve), then go to step 14.
13. Replace the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve) (see Rocker Arm Oil Control
Solenoid (VTEC Solenoid Valve) Assembly Removal/Installation ).
111
Is DTC P2649?
(VTEC solenoid valve) and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1.
NO - Go to step 19.
NO - If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor connections for loose terminals at the
rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve) and the ECM/PCM, then go to step 1. If
the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling unit results come on.
22. Star the engine.
(VTEC solenoid valve) and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM was updated, substitute a known-
good ECM/PCM (see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ), then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was
NO - Go to step 24.
NO - If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor connections for loose terminals at the
rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve) and the ECM/PCM. If the ECM/PCM
was updated, substitute a known good ECM/PCM (see SUBSTITUTE THE ECM/PCM ),
then recheck. If the ECM/PCM was substituted go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
VTC OIL CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE REMOVAL/TEST/INSTALLATION

1. Disconnect the VTC oil control solenoid valve connector (A).
111
Fig. 25: Disconnecting VTC Oil Control Solenoid Valve Connector

2. Remove the bolt (B) and the VTC oil control solenoid valve (C).
3. Check the VTC oil control solenoid valve for sticking and the solenoid valve filter for clogging. If the
valve is stuck or clogged, replace the VTC oil control solenoid valve.
4. Check clearance between the port (advance side) and the valve. Make sure the valve (A) closes fully.
111
Fig. 26: Making Sure Valve Closes Fully

5. Connect the battery positive terminal to VTC oil control solenoid valve 2P connector terminal No. 2.
111
Fig. 27: Connecting Battery Positive Terminal To VTC Oil Control Solenoid Valve 2P
Connector Terminal No. 2
6. Connect the battery negative terminal to VTC oil control solenoid valve 2P connector terminal No. 1.
Clearance (A) should be at least 1/16 in. (1.8 mm). If the valve does not open, replace it, then go to
step 7.
111
Fig. 28: Connecting Battery Negative Terminal To VTC Oil Control Solenoid Valve 2P
Connector Terminal No. 1. Clearance
7. Replace the VTC valve O-ring (A).
111
Fig. 29: Replacing VTC Valve O-Ring

8. Coat a new O-ring with engine oil, then install it.

9. Clean and dry the mating surface of the valve.
10. Install the valve.
NOTE: Do not install the valve while wearing cloth fibrous gloves. Be careful
not to contaminate the cylinder head opening.
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOLENOID (VTEC SOLENOID VALVE)

INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve) connector.
2. Measure resistance between rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve) 2P connector
Resistance: 14-30 ohms
111
3. If the resistance is within specifications, remove the rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil
pressure switch) connector (A), cover (B), and the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid
valve) (C), then check the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve) filter (D) for
clogging. If it is clogged, replace the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve) filter, the
engine oil filter, and the engine oil. If the filter is not clogged, replace the rocker arm oil control
solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve).
111
Fig. 31: Removing Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch Connector, Cover And Rocker Arm Oil
Control Solenoid
111
CMP SENSOR A REPLACEMENT

3. Disconnect the CMP sensor A connector (A).
Fig. 32: Disconnecting CMP Sensor A Connector

4. Remove the bolt (B).

5. Remove CMP sensor A (C) from the intake camshaft side of the cylinder head.
6. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (D).
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOLENOID (VTEC SOLENOID VALVE)

ASSEMBLY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve) connector (A) and the rocker
arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure switch) connector (B).
111
Fig. 33: Disconnecting Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid Connector And Rocker Arm Oil
Pressure Switch Connector
111
2. Remove the bolts (C).

3. Remove the rocker arm oil control valve (VTEC solenoid valve) (D).
4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new rocker arm oil control valve (VTEC
solenoid valve) filter (E).
ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH (VTEC OIL PRESSURE SWITCH)

1. Remove the rocker arm oil control solenoid (VTEC solenoid valve) assembly (see Rocker Arm Oil
Control Solenoid (VTEC Solenoid Valve) Assembly Removal/Installation ).
2. Remove the cover (A).
Fig. 34: Removing Cover

111
3. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure switch (VTEC oil pressure switch) (B).
4. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring (C).
111
2003-07 HVAC Climate Control - Accord
2003-07 HVAC
Climate Control - Accord

4-DOOR
Fig. 1: Identifying Climate Control Component Location - 4-Door

2-DOOR
111
2 августа 2011 г. 16:03:46
Fig. 2: Identifying Climate Control Component Location - 2-door

4-DOOR
111

2-DOOR
111

4-DOOR/2-DOOR
111
Fig. 5: Identifying Climate Control Component Location - 4-door/2-door


HOW TO CHECK FOR DTCS WITH THE HDS
NOTE: Before troubleshooting the climate control system, refer to the multiplex
integrated control system test mode A (see TROUBLESHOOTING - B-CAN
SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS TEST MODE A ).
1. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF.

2. Connect the HDS to the Data Link Connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the
dashboard.
111


4. Select DTCs in the body electrical climate control mode MENU of the HDS.
5. Check for DTCs. If a DTC is indicated, go to the next step. If no DTC(s) is indicated, refer to
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX.
8. Do the troubleshooting procedure for the DTC indicated.
HOW TO RETRIEVE A DTC (WITHOUT HDS)
The audio-HVAC display panel has a self-diagnosis function for climate control. To run the self-diagnosis
function, do the following:
111

2. Set the driver's temperature control dial or button on MAX Cool.
3. Press and hold the OFF button.
4. While holding the OFF button, press the rear window defogger button five times within 10 seconds.
The self-diagnosis will begin..
Fig. 7: Locating Auto Button And Off Button (Without Navigation System)
111
Fig. 8: Locating Auto Button And Off Button (With Navigation System)
If there are any problems in the system, the temperature indicator will light up the segment (A through
Q) corresponding to the error. The temperature indicator will then alternate every second between
displaying "88" (all segments lit) and the error code segment (A through Q).
111
NOTE: The system will only display the DTC when the AUTO and OFF buttons
are pressed. If you release the buttons, the display will go blank. To
return the display, simply press the AUTO then the OFF buttons again.
To determine the meaning of the DTC, refer to the DTC TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX. If no
segments light up, the system is still not operating properly, check the sensor inputs to the climate
control unit, or refer to SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX.
Fig. 9: Identifying Drivers Temperature Indicator

111
Fig. 10: Identifying Passenger's Temperature Indicator

Cancelling the Self-diagnostic Function
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF to cancel the self-diagnostic function. After completing repair work, run
the self-diagnostic function again to make sure that there are no other malfunctions.
CHECKING THE DTCS BY DTC INDICATOR
To retrieve the DTC, you must run the self-diagnostic function. In the case of multiple problems, the
respective indicator segments will come on. If indicator segments A, C, E, G, I, L, and O come on at the
same time, there may be an open in the common ground wire of the sensors.
111
Fig. 11: Checking DTCs By DTC Indicator Chart

DISPLAYING SENSOR INPUTS AT THE CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
The climate control unit has a mode that displays sensor inputs it receives. This mode shows you what the
climate control unit is receiving from each of the sensors, one at a time, and it can help you determine if a
sensor is faulty.
Check these items before using the sensor input display mode
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the recirculation door function; press the recirculation
button to switch from FRESH to RECIRC. The air volume and sound should change slightly.
2. Set the temperature control knob to the desired test temperature. When selecting the test temperature,
note these items:
 "LO" temperature setting will default to MAX COOL, VENT, and RECIRC.
 "HI" temperature setting will default to MAX HOT, FLOOR, and FRESH.
111
61 through 89°F settings will use the automatic climate control logic.
To run the sensor input display mode, follow these steps

2. Press and hold both the AUTO and DUAL buttons, then start the engine.
3. After the engine starts, release the buttons. The audio-HVAC display panel will flash the sensor
number and then the value for that sensor. Record the value displayed.
4. To advance to the next sensor, press the rear window defogger button.
SENSOR ITEM AND DISPLAYED VALUE DESCRIPTION

Sensor Item Displayed Value
1 In-car Temperature Sensor °C
2 Ambient Temperature °C
Solar Radiation Sensor Value:
3 Dark = 00, Flashlight = 04, Kcal/m2 .h
Cloudy = 10, Sunny = 65
4 Engine Coolant Temperature °C
Evaporator Outlet Air
5 °C
Temperature
Driver's Air Mix Opening (Low
value indicates cooler air
6 % of opening
distribution, higher value
indicates warmer air distribution)
Passenger's Air Mix Opening
(Low value indicates cooler air
7 % of opening
distribution, higher value
indicates warmer air distribution)
Vehicle Speed (Vehicle must be
8 Km/h
driven to display speed)
9 Vent Temperature Air Out (TAO) °C
NOTE:  The sensor values will be displayed in degrees Celsius (°C) or an

alphanumeric code. Use the chart to convert the value to degrees
Fahrenheit (°F).
 If the sensor value displays "Er", this indicates there is an open or
short in the circuit or sensor. Check for DTCs using the HDS, or
refer to checking DTCs by DTC indication to check for DTCs.
 If necessary, compare the sensor input display to an alike, known-
good vehicle under the same test conditions.
 If the sensor is out of the normal range, refer to the sensor test, or
substitute with a known-good sensor, and recheck.
5. To cancel the sensor input display mode, press the AUTO button, or turn the ignition off.
Celsius to Fahrenheit Conversion Table

111
CELSIUS TO FAHRENHEIT CONVERSION (1 OF 2)

°C °F °C °F °C °F °C °F °C °F
0 32 10 50 20 68 30 86 40 104
1 34 11 52 21 70 31 88 41 106
2 36 12 54 22 72 32 90 42 108
3 37 13 55 23 73 33 91 43 109
4 39 14 57 24 75 34 93 44 111
5 41 15 59 25 77 35 95 45 113
6 43 16 61 26 79 36 97 46 115
7 45 17 63 27 81 37 99 47 117
8 46 18 64 28 82 38 100 48 118
9 48 19 66 29 84 39 102 49 120
CELSIUS TO FAHRENHEIT CONVERSION (2 OF 2)

°C °F °C °F °C °F °C °F °C °F
50 122 60 140 70 158 80 176 90 194
51 124 61 142 71 160 81 178 91 196
52 126 62 144 72 162 82 180 92 198
53 127 63 145 73 163 83 181 93 199
54 128 64 147 74 165 84 183 94 201
55 131 65 149 75 167 85 185 95 203
56 133 66 151 76 169 86 187 96 205
57 135 67 152 77 170 87 188 97 207
58 136 68 154 78 172 88 190 98 208
59 139 69 158 79 174 89 192 99 210
Alphanumeric Conversion Table
ALPHANUMERIC CONVERSION
Display Reading (Alphanumeric) °C °F %
A1 thru A9 -1 thru -9 30 thru 16 -1 thru -9
B0 thru B9 -10 thru -19 14 thru -2 -10 thru -19
C0 thru C9 -20 thru -29 -4 thru -20 -20 thru -29
D0 thru D9 -30 thru -39 -22 thru -38 -30 thru -39
E0 thru E9 -40 thru -49 -40 thru -58 -
F0 thru F9 -50 thru -59 -58 thru -74 +100 thru +109

CHECKING THE DTCS BY HDS

Detection Item or
DTC ECU DTC type Refer To
Symptom
(see DTC B1050,
111
B1100, B1150, B1200,

Communication
Climate control Loss of B1250:
B1200 circuit error (BUS
unit communication COMMUNICATION
Off)
BUS LINE ERROR )
(see DTC B1202:
Climate control unit Climate control CLIMATE
B1202 Internal error
internal error unit CONTROL UNIT
INTERNAL ERROR )
(see DTC B1205:
CLIMATE
Climate control unit
CONTROL UNIT
lost communication
Climate control Loss of LOST
B1205 with the gauge
control module
WITH THE GAUGE
(VSP/NE message)
CONTROL MODULE
(VSP/NE MESSAGE) )
(see DTC B1206:
CLIMATE
Climate control unit
CONTROL UNIT
lost communication
Climate control Loss of LOST
B1206 with the gauge
control module
WITH THE GAUGE
(ECT message)
CONTROL MODULE
(ECT MESSAGE) )
(see DTC B1207:
CLIMATE
Climate control unit CONTROL UNIT
lost communication LOST
Climate control Loss of
B1207 with the gauge COMMUNICATION
unit communication
control module WITH THE GAUGE
(ILLUMI message) CONTROL MODULE
(ILLUMI
MESSAGE) )
(see DTC B1225 OR
DTC INDICATOR A:
An open in the in-car
Climate control AN OPEN IN THE IN-
B1225 temperature sensor Signal error
unit CAR
circuit
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR CIRCUIT )
(see DTC B1226 OR
DTC INDICATOR B:
A short in the in-car
Climate control A SHORT IN THE IN-
B1226 temperature sensor Signal error
unit CAR
circuit
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR CIRCUIT )
An open in the (see DTC B1227 OR

outside air Climate control DTC INDICATOR C:
B1227 Signal error AN OPEN IN THE
temperature sensor unit
circuit OUTSIDE AIR
TEMPERATURE
111
SENSOR CIRCUIT )
(see DTC B1228 OR
A short in the DTC INDICATOR D:
outside air Climate control A SHORT IN THE
B1228 Signal error
temperature sensor unit OUTSIDE AIR
circuit TEMPERATURE
SENSOR CIRCUIT )
(see DTC B1229 OR
An open in the DTC INDICATOR E:
Climate control
B1229 sunlight sensor Signal error AN OPEN IN THE
unit
circuit SUNLIGHT SENSOR
CIRCUIT )
(see DTC B1230 OR
A short in the DTC INDICATOR F:
Climate control
B1230 sunlight sensor Signal error A SHORT IN THE
unit
circuit SUNLIGHT SENSOR
CIRCUIT )
(see DTC B1231 OR
An open in the DTC INDICATOR G:
evaporator Climate control AN OPEN IN THE
B1231 Signal error
temperature sensor unit EVAPORATOR
circuit TEMPERATURE
SENSOR CIRCUIT )
(see DTC B1232 OR
A short in the DTC INDICATOR H:
evaporator Climate control A SHORT IN THE
B1232 Signal error
temperature sensor unit EVAPORATOR
circuit TEMPERATURE
SENSOR CIRCUIT )
(see DTC B1233 OR
DTC INDICATOR I:
An open in the
Climate control AN OPEN IN THE
B1233 driver's air mix Signal error
unit DRIVER'S AIR MIX
CONTROL MOTOR
CIRCUIT )
(see DTC B1234 OR
DTC INDICATOR J:
A short in the
Climate control A SHORT IN THE
B1234 driver's air mix Signal error
unit DRIVER'S AIR MIX
CONTROL MOTOR
CIRCUIT )
(see DTC B1235 OR
DTC INDICATOR K:
A problem in the
A PROBLEM IN THE
driver's air mix Climate control
B1235 Signal error DRIVER'S AIR MIX
control linkage, unit
CONTROL
door, or motor
LINKAGE, DOOR,
OR MOTOR )
(see DTC B1236 OR
DTC INDICATOR O:
111
AN OPEN IN THE
An open in the
Climate control PASSENGER'S AIR
B1236 passenger's air mix Signal error
unit MIX CONTROL
MOTOR CIRCUIT )
(see DTC B1237 OR
DTC INDICATOR P:
A short in the
Climate control A SHORT IN THE
B1237 passenger's air mix Signal error
unit PASSENGER'S AIR
MIX CONTROL
MOTOR CIRCUIT )
(see DTC B1238 OR
DTC INDICATOR Q:
A problem in the
A PROBLEM IN THE
passenger's air mix Climate control
B1238 Signal error PASSENGER'S AIR
control linkage, unit
MIX CONTROL
door, or motor
LINKAGE, DOOR,
OR MOTOR )
(see DTC B1239 OR
DTC INDICATOR L:
An open or short in
Climate control AN OPEN OR
B1239 the mode control Signal error
unit SHORT IN THE
motor circuit
MODE CONTROL
MOTOR CIRCUIT )
(see DTC B1240 OR
A problem in the DTC INDICATOR M:
mode control Climate control A PROBLEM IN THE
B1240 Signal error
linkage, doors, or unit MODE CONTROL
motor LINKAGE, DOORS,
OR MOTOR )
(see DTC B1241 OR
DTC INDICATOR N:
A problem in the Climate control
B1241 Signal error A PROBLEM IN THE
blower motor circuit unit
BLOWER MOTOR
CIRCUIT )

 HVAC DTCs (see
GENERAL
Recirculation control motor circuit TROUBLESHOOTING
Recirculation control
troubleshooting (see INFORMATION )
doors do not change
RECIRCULATION CONTROL
between Fresh and  Blown fuse No. 30 (7.5A) in
MOTOR CIRCUIT
Recirculate the under-dash fuse/relay box
TROUBLESHOOTING )
 Cleanliness and tightness of
all connectors
 HVAC DTCs (see

111
GENERAL
TROUBLESHOOTING
Climate control power and ground INFORMATION )
Blower, heater controls, circuit troubleshooting (see CLIMATE  Blown fuse No. 30 (7.5A) in
and A/C do not work CONTROL POWER AND GROUND the under-dash fuse/relay box
CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING )  Poor ground at G503
all connectors
 HVAC DTCs (see
GENERAL
TROUBLESHOOTING
INFORMATION )
 Blown fuse No. 9 (20A) in
does not run at all (but troubleshooting (see A/C
the under-hood fuse/relay
the radiator fan runs CONDENSER FAN CIRCUIT
box, and No. 30 (7.5A) in the
with the A/C on) TROUBLESHOOTING )
under-dash fuse/relay box
 Poor ground at G201
all connectors
 HVAC DTCs (see
GENERAL
TROUBLESHOOTING
Radiator and A/C condenser fan INFORMATION )
Both fans do not run
common circuit troubleshooting (see  Blown fuse No. 9 (20A) and
with the A/C on (but the
RADIATOR AND A/C No. 11 (20A) in the under-
A/C compressor runs
CONDENSER FAN COMMON hood fuse/relay box, and No.
with the A/C on)
CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING ) 30 (7.5A) in the under-dash
fuse/relay box
all connectors
 HVAC DTCs (see
GENERAL
TROUBLESHOOTING
The A/C compressor A/C compressor clutch circuit INFORMATION )
clutch does not engage troubleshooting (see A/C  Blown fuse No. 12 (7.5A) in
(but both fans run with COMPRESSOR CLUTCH CIRCUIT the under-hood fuse/relay
the A/C on) TROUBLESHOOTING ) box, and No. 30 (7.5A) in the
under-dash fuse/relay box
all connectors
 HVAC DTCs (see
A/C system does not A/C pressure switch circuit GENERAL
come on (both fans and troubleshooting (see A/C PRESSURE TROUBLESHOOTING
the A/C compressor do SWITCH CIRCUIT INFORMATION )
not work); heater is OK TROUBLESHOOTING )  Cleanliness and tightness of
all connectors
111
ECT Troubleshooting (see DTC P0116:

ECT SENSOR CIRCUIT
RANGE/PERFORMANCE
PROBLEM (2003-2004 MODELS) )
Blower fan runs slower Powertrain DTCs (see GENERAL
than expected in cold NOTE: TROUBLESHOOTING
weather It is normal for the blower to run INFORMATION )
slowly until the engine coolant
temperature begins to rise. If the
blower continues to run slowly for an
abnormal length of time, continue to
troubleshoot the problem.

2. Press the OFF button, then press
the AUTO button and check the
display.
 If AUTO is displayed, but
the climate control is not
working properly, check for
DTCs with the HDS (see
GENERAL Climate control power and ground
AUTO button does not TROUBLESHOOTING circuit troubleshooting (see
work INFORMATION ), or do CLIMATE CONTROL POWER
the self-diagnostic (see AND GROUND CIRCUIT
HOW TO RETRIEVE A TROUBLESHOOTING ).
DTC (WITHOUT HDS) ).
 If AUTO is not displayed,
check for poor connections
at the climate control
connector, if the
connections are OK,
replace the audio-HVAC
display panel.
2. Press the AUTO button, then
press the OFF button and check
the display.
 If climate control display
turns off, check for DTCs
with the HDS (see
OFF button does not GENERAL
work TROUBLESHOOTING
INFORMATION ), or go
to self-diagnostic (see
HOW TO RETRIEVE A
 If the climate control
display does not turn on,
111
display panel.
press the DUAL button several
times and check the DUAL
button LED. The LED should
toggle on and off as the button is
pressed.
 If the LED turns on and off,
Dual button does not check for DTCs with the
work HDS (see GENERAL
TROUBLESHOOTING
HOW TO RETRIEVE A
 If the LED does not turn on
or off, replace the audio-
HVAC display panel.
2. Press the recirculation button
several times and check the
button's LED. The LED should
toggle on and off as the button is
pressed.
Recirculation button  If the LED turns on and off
does not work go to recirculation control
motor test, 4-door (see 4-
DOOR ) or 2-door (see 2-
DOOR ).
HVAC display panel.

press the defroster button several
times and check the button's
LED. The LED should toggle on
Defroster button does and off as the button is pressed.
not work  If the LED turns on and off,
check for DTCs with the
HDS (see GENERAL
TROUBLESHOOTING
HOW TO RETRIEVE A
111

HVAC display panel.
2. Press the rear window defogger
button several times and check
the button's LED. The LED
should toggle on and off as the
button is pressed.
Rear window defogger
button does not work  If the LED turns on and off,
go to rear window defogger
troubleshooting (see
FUNCTION TEST )
HVAC display panel.
2. Press the MODE button and
check the display.
 If the display scrolls
through the modes as the
MODE button is pressed,
check for DTCs with the
HDS (see GENERAL
MODE button does not TROUBLESHOOTING
work INFORMATION ), or go
HOW TO RETRIEVE A
 If the display does not
scroll the modes as the
MODE button is pressed,
display panel.

adjust the fan control button
up/down and check the display.
 If the display indicates the
Fan control button does fan speed selection
not work up/down, check for DTCs
with the HDS (see
GENERAL
TROUBLESHOOTING
HOW TO RETRIEVE A
111

indicate the fan speed
selection up/down, replace
the audio-HVAC display
panel.
adjust the TEMP control dial
change in temperature
up/down, check for DTCs
with the HDS (see
TEMP control dial does GENERAL
not work TROUBLESHOOTING
HOW TO RETRIEVE A
indicate the change in
temperature up/down,
display panel.
2. Press the AUTO button, press the
DUAL button, then adjust the
passenger's TEMP control dial
change in temperature
up/down for the passenger's
side, check for DTCs with
Passenger's TEMP dial the HDS (see GENERAL
does not work TROUBLESHOOTING
HOW TO RETRIEVE A
indicate the change in
temperature up/down for
the passenger's side, replace
the audio-HVAC display
panel.
2. Press the A/C button, and then
111
OFF button and check the

display.
 If the display turns on and
off as the buttons are
pressed, there are no DTCs
stored, troubleshoot the
Audio-HVAC display individual symptoms.
panel will not run self-  If the display does not
diagnosis respond as the buttons are
pressed, check for loose or
poor connections at the
audio-HVAC display panel.
If the connections are OK,
display panel.
Climate control power and ground
HVAC DTCs (see GENERAL
More than one button is circuit troubleshooting (see CLIMATE
TROUBLESHOOTING
not working CONTROL POWER AND GROUND
INFORMATION ).
Audio-HVAC display module
Audio-HVAC illumination troubleshooting (see
display/button AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY MODULE
illumination problems ILLUMINATION
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
DUAL AIR MIX CONTROL SYSTEM
111
Fig. 12: Identifying Dual Air Mix Control System (1 Of 2)

111
Fig. 13: Identifying Dual Air Mix Control System (2 Of 2)

The air conditioning system removes heat from the passenger compartment by circulating refrigerant
through the system.
111
Fig. 14: Identifying Climate Control System

This vehicle uses HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant which does not contain chlorofluorocarbons. Pay attention
to the following service items:
 Do not mix refrigerants CFC-12 (R-12) and HFC-134a (R-134a). They are not compatible.
 Use only the recommended polyalkyleneglycol (PAG) refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8) designed
for the R-134a compressor. Intermixing the recommended (PAG) refrigerant oil with any other
refrigerant oil will result in compressor failure.
 All A/C system parts (compressor, discharge line, suction line, evaporator, condenser, receiver/dryer,
expansion valve, O-rings for joints) are designed for refrigerant R-134a. Do not exchange with R-12
parts.
 Use a halogen gas leak detector designed for refrigerant R-134a.
 R-12 and R-134a refrigerant servicing equipment are not interchangeable. Use only a
recovery/recycling/charging station that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE
J2210 to service the R-134a air conditioning systems.
 Always recover the refrigerant R-134a with an approved recovery/recycling/charging station before
disconnecting any A/C fitting.
DUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM) 2004-2005 MODELS
This system automatically controls the temperature and the vent mode of the air direction to the driver and
passenger's side, depending on the angle of the sun, and the direction of the vehicle. It calculates information
111
such as date, time, longitude, and latitude from the navigation system, as well as the radiant strength of the
sun from the sunlight sensor, to determine the appropriate mode position and temperature to be directed to
each side.
Fig. 15: Identifying Dual Climate Control System (With Navigation System - 2004-2005 Models)
In the event that the navigation system malfunctions, or when driving in areas where the navigation cannot
determine the vehicle position (non-coverage areas, tunnels, etc.), the climate control system will operate the
same as a vehicle without navigation.
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
111
Fig. 16: Identifying Climate Control Unit Inputs And Outputs (With Navigation)
Fig. 17: Identifying Climate Control Unit Inputs And Outputs (Without Navigation)
111
Fig. 18: Identifying Audio HVAC Display Panel Connectors

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
111
Fig. 19: Identifying Climate Control Circuit Diagram (1 Of 2)

111
Fig. 20: Identifying Climate Control Circuit Diagram (2 Of 2)

DTC TROUBLESHOOTING
DTC CODE
DTC CODE CHART

DTC Description
DTC B1225 or DTC indicator A An Open in the In-car Temperature Sensor Circuit
111
DTC B1226 or DTC indicator B A Short in the In-car Temperature Sensor Circuit
DTC B1227 or DTC indicator C An Open in the Outside Air Temperature Sensor
Circuit
DTC B1228 or DTC indicator D A Short in the Outside Air Temperature Sensor
Circuit
DTC B1229 or DTC indicator E An Open in the Sunlight Sensor Circuit
DTC B1230 or DTC indicator F A Short in the Sunlight Sensor Circuit
DTC B1231 or DTC indicator G An Open in the Evaporator Temperature Sensor
Circuit
DTC B1232 or DTC indicator H A Short in the Evaporator Temperature Sensor
Circuit
DTC B1233 or DTC indicator I An Open in the Driver's Air Mix Control Motor
Circuit
DTC B1234 or DTC indicator J A Short in the Driver's Air Mix Control Motor
Circuit
DTC B1235 or DTC indicator K A Problem in the Driver's Air Mix Control
DTC B1239 or DTC indicator L An Open or Short in the Mode Control Motor
Circuit
DTC B1240 or DTC indicator M A Problem in the Mode Control Linkage, Doors, or
Motor
DTC B1241 or DTC indicator N A Problem in the Blower Motor Circuit
DTC B1236 or DTC indicator O An Open in the Passenger's Air Mix Control Motor
Circuit
DTC B1237 or DTC indicator P A Short in the Passenger's Air Mix Control Motor
Circuit
DTC B1238 or DTC indicator Q A Problem in the Passenger's Air Mix Control
DTC B1202 Climate Control Unit Internal Error
DTC B1205 Climate Control Unit Lost Communication with the
Gauge Control Module (VSP/NE message)
Gauge Control Module (ECT message)
Gauge Control Module (ILLUMI message)
DTC B1225 OR DTC INDICATOR A: AN OPEN IN THE IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

CIRCUIT
1. Clear the DTC.

2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then ON.
3. Operate the climate control system in several modes.
4. Check the DTCs.
Is DTC B1225 or A indicated?
YES - Go to step 5.
111
NO - Intermittent failure, check for loose wires or poor connections in the in-car temperature
sensor circuit.
5. Remove the in-car temperature sensor (see IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR TEST ) and test it
(see IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR TEST ).
Does the in-car temperature sensor test OK?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Replace the in-car temperature sensor.
6. Disconnect audio-HVAC display panel connector A (22P).
7. Check for continuity between the No. 11 terminal of audio-HVAC display panel connector A (22P)
and the No. 1 terminal of the in-car temperature sensor 2P connector.
Fig. 21: Checking Continuity Between No. 11 Terminal Of Audio-HVAC Display Panel
Connector A (22P) & No. 1 Terminal Of In-Car Temperature Sensor 2P Connector
YES - Go to step 8.
111
NO - Repair open in the wire between the climate control unit and the in-car temperature
sensor.
and the No. 2 terminal of the in-car temperature sensor 2P connector.
Connector A (22P) & No. 2 Terminal Of In-Car Temperature Sensor 2P Connector
YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at audio-HVAC display panel connector A
(22P) and at the in-car temperature sensor 2P connector. If the connections are good, substitute
a known-good audio-HVAC display panel, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
replace the original audio-HVAC display panel.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the climate control unit and the in-car temperature
sensor.
DTC B1226 OR DTC INDICATOR B: A SHORT IN THE IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

CIRCUIT
111
1. Clear the DTC.

4. Check the DTCs.
Is DTC B1226 or B indicated?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Intermittent failure.
5. Remove the in-car temperature sensor (see IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
REPLACEMENT ).
6. Test the in-car temperature sensor (see IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR TEST ).
Is the resistance within the specifications in the graph shown in Fig. 73?
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Replace the in-car temperature sensor.
and body ground.
111
Connector & Body Ground
YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire between the climate control unit and the in-car
temperature sensor.
NO - Substitute a known-good audio-HVAC display panel, and recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away, replace the original audio-HVAC display panel.
DTC B1227 OR DTC INDICATOR C: AN OPEN IN THE OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE

SENSOR CIRCUIT
1. Clear the DTC.

4. Check the DTCs.
Is DTC B1227 or C indicated?
YES - Go to step 5.
111
NO - Intermittent failure, check for loose wires or poor connections on the outside air
temperature sensor circuit.
5. Remove the outside air temperature sensor (see OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
REPLACEMENT ) and test it (see OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR TEST ).
Does the outside air temperature sensor test OK?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Replace the outside air temperature sensor.
and the No. 1 terminal of the outside air temperature sensor 2P connector.
Connector A (22P) & No. 1 Terminal Of Outside Air Temperature Sensor 2P Connector
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the climate control unit and the outside air temperature
sensor.
111
and the No. 2 terminal of the outside air temperature sensor 2P connector.
Connector A (22P) & No. 2 Terminal Of Outside Air Temperature Sensor 2P Connector
(22P) and at the outside air temperature sensor 2P connector. If the connections are good,
substitute a known-good audio-HVAC display panel, and recheck. If the symptom/indication
goes away, replace the original audio-HVAC display panel.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the climate control unit and the outside air temperature
sensor.
DTC B1228 OR DTC INDICATOR D: A SHORT IN THE OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE

SENSOR CIRCUIT
1. Clear the DTC.

4. Check the DTCs.
Is DTC B1228 or D indicated?

111
YES - Go to step 5.
5. Remove the outside air temperature sensor (see OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
REPLACEMENT ).
6. Test the outside air temperature sensor (see OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR TEST ).
Is the resistance within the specifications in the graph shown in Fig. 75?
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Replace the outside air temperature sensor.
and body ground.
Connector A (22P) & Body Ground
111
YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire between the climate control unit and the outside
air temperature sensor.
DTC B1229 OR DTC INDICATOR E: AN OPEN IN THE SUNLIGHT SENSOR CIRCUIT
1. Clear the DTC.

4. Check the DTCs.
Is DTC B1229 or E indicated?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Intermittent failure, check for loose wires or poor connections on the sunlight sensor
circuit.
5. Disconnect the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
and the No. 2 terminal of the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
111
Connector A (22P) & No. 2 Terminal Of Sunlight Sensor 2P Connector
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the climate control unit and the sunlight sensor.
and the No. 1 terminal of the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
111
Connector A (22P) & No. 1 Terminal Of Sunlight Sensor 2P Connector
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the climate control unit and the sunlight sensor.
9. Reconnect the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
10. Reconnect audio-HVAC display panel connector A (22P).
11. Test the sunlight sensor (see SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEST ).
Is the sunlight sensor OK?
(22P) and at the sunlight sensor 2P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-
good audio-HVAC display panel, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace
the original audio-HVAC display panel.
NO - Replace the sunlight sensor.
111
DTC B1230 OR DTC INDICATOR F: A SHORT IN THE SUNLIGHT SENSOR CIRCUIT
1. Clear the DTC.

4. Check the DTCs.
Is DTC B1230 or F indicated?
YES - Go to step 5.
5. Disconnect the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
and body ground.
111
YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire between the climate control unit and the sunlight
sensor.
NO - Go to step 8.
8. Reconnect the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
9. Reconnect audio-HVAC display panel connector A (22P).
10. Test the sunlight sensor (see SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEST ).
Is the sunlight sensor OK?
YES - Substitute a known-good audio-HVAC display panel, and recheck. If the

NO - Replace the sunlight sensor.
DTC B1231 OR DTC INDICATOR G: AN OPEN IN THE EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE

SENSOR CIRCUIT
1. Clear the DTC.

4. Check the DTCs.
Is DTC B1231 or G indicated?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Intermittent failure, check for loose wires or poor connections on the evaporator
5. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor (see EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
REPLACEMENT ) and test it (see EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR TEST ).
Does the evaporator temperature sensor test OK?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Replace the evaporator temperature sensor.
and the No. 1 terminal of the evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector.
111
Connector A (22P) & No. 1 Terminal Of Evaporator Temperature Sensor 2P Connector
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the climate control unit and the evaporator temperature
sensor.
and the No. 2 terminal of the evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector.
111
Connector A (22P) & No. 2 Terminal Of Evaporator Temperature Sensor 2P Connector
(22P) and at the evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector. If the connections are good,
substitute a known-good audio-HVAC display panel, and recheck. If the symptom/indication
goes away, replace the original audio-HVAC display panel.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the climate control unit and the evaporator temperature
sensor.
DTC B1232 OR DTC INDICATOR H: A SHORT IN THE EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE

SENSOR CIRCUIT
1. Clear the DTC.

4. Check the DTCs.
Is DTC B1232 or H indicated?
111
YES - Go to step 5.
REPLACEMENT ).
6. Test the evaporator temperature sensor (see EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR TEST ).
Is the resistance within the specifications in the graph shown in EVAPORATOR

TEMPERATURE SENSOR TEST ?
YES - Go to step 7.
and body ground.
111
YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire between the climate control unit and the
evaporator temperature sensor.
DTC B1233 OR DTC INDICATOR I: AN OPEN IN THE DRIVER'S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR
CIRCUIT
1. Clear the DTC.

4. Check the DTCs.
Is DTC B1233 or I indicated?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Intermittent failure, check for loose wires or poor connections on the evaporator
5. Test the driver's air mix control motor.
Is the driver's air mix control motor OK?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Replace the driver's air mix control motor.
6. Disconnect the driver's air mix control motor 7P (4-door) or 5P (2-door) connector.
8. Check for continuity between the following terminals of audio-HVAC display panel connector A
(22P) and the driver's air mix control motor 7P (4-door) or 5P (2-door) connector.
AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY PANEL CONNECTOR A (22P) AND DRIVER'S AIR MIX

CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR (4-DOOR)
22P 7P
No. 1 No. 3
No. 8 No. 1
No. 9 No. 2
No. 15 No. 5
No. 20 No. 7
111
Fig. 33: Checking Continuity Between Terminals Of Audio-HVAC Display Panel Connector A
(22P) & Driver's Air Mix Control Motor Connector (4-Door)
AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY PANEL CONNECTOR A (22P) AND DRIVER'S AIR MIX

CONTROL MOTOR 5P CONNECTOR (2-DOOR)
22P: 5P:
No. 1 No. 3
No. 8 No. 2
No. 9 No. 1
No. 15 No. 5
No. 20 No. 4
111
Fig. 34: Checking Continuity Between Audio-HVAC Display Panel Connector A (22P) &
Driver's Air Mix Control Motor Connector (2-Door)
(22P) and at the driver's air mix control motor 7P (4-door) or 5P (2-door) connector. If the
connections are good, substitute a known-good audio-HVAC display panel, and recheck. If the
NO - Repair any open in the wire(s) between the climate control unit and the driver's air mix
control motor.
DTC B1234 OR DTC INDICATOR J: A SHORT IN THE DRIVER'S AIR MIX CONTROL
MOTOR CIRCUIT
1. Clear the DTC.

4. Check the DTCs.
111
Is DTC B1234 or J indicated?
YES - Go to step 5.
Is the driver's air mix control motor OK?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Replace the driver's air mix control motor.
6. Disconnect the driver's air mix control motor 7P (4-door) or 5P (2-door) connector.
8. Check for continuity between body ground and audio-HVAC display panel connector A (22P)
terminals No. 1, 8, 9, 15 and 20 individually.
Fig. 35: Checking Continuity Between Body Ground & Audio-HVAC Display Panel Connector
A (22P) Terminals No. 1, 8, 9, 15 And 20 Individually
111
YES - Repair any short to body ground in the wire(s) between the climate control unit and the
driver's air mix control motor.
NO - Go to step 9.
9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the same terminals for voltage.
Fig. 36: Checking Terminals For Voltage

Is there any voltage?
YES - Repair any short to power in the wire(s) between the climate control unit and the driver's
air mix control motor. This short may also damage the climate control unit. Repair the short to
power before replacing the audio-HVAC display panel.
DTC B1235 OR DTC INDICATOR K: A PROBLEM IN THE DRIVER'S AIR MIX CONTROL
LINKAGE, DOOR, OR MOTOR
1. Clear the DTC.

4. Check the DTCs.
Is DTC B1235 or K indicated?

111
YES - Go to step 5.
Are the driver's air mix control motor and linkage OK?

NO - Replace the driver's air mix control motor, 4-door (see 4-DOOR ) or 2-door (see 2-
DOOR ), or repair the driver's air mix control linkage or door.
DTC B1239 OR DTC INDICATOR L: AN OPEN OR SHORT IN THE MODE CONTROL MOTOR
CIRCUIT
1. Clear the DTC.

4. Check the DTCs.
Is DTC B1239 or L indicated?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Intermittent failure, check for loose wires or poor connections on the mode control motor
circuit.
5. Test the mode control motor.
Is the mode control motor OK?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Replace the mode control motor.
6. Disconnect the mode control motor 7P (4-door) or 10P (2-door) connector.

terminals No. 6, 7, 15, 16, 17, 18, and 19 individually.
111
Fig. 37: Checking Continuity Between Body Ground & Audio-HVAC Display Panel Connector
A (22P) Terminals No. 6, 7, 15, 16, 17, 18, And 19 Individually
mode control motor.
NO - Go to step 9.
111
Fig. 38: Checking Same Terminals For Voltage

YES - Repair any short to power in the wire(s) between the climate control unit and the mode
control motor. This short may also damage the climate control unit. Repair the short to power
before replacing the audio-HVAC display panel.
NO - Go to step 10.
10. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check for continuity between the following terminals of audio-
HVAC display panel connector A (22P) and the mode control motor 7P (4-door) or 10P (2-door)
connector.
AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY PANEL CONNECTOR A (22P) AND MODE CONTROL MOTOR

7P CONNECTOR (4-DOOR)
22P 7P
No. 6 No. 1
No. 7 No. 2
No. 15 No. 7
No. 16 No. 3
No. 17 No. 4
No. 18 No. 5
No. 19 No. 6
111
(22P) (4-Door)
AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY PANEL CONNECTOR A (22P) AND MODE CONTROL MOTOR

10P CONNECTOR (2-DOOR)
22P 10P
No. 6 No. 1
No. 7 No. 2
No. 15 No. 10
No. 16 No. 6
No. 17 No. 7
No. 18 No. 8
No. 19 No. 9
111
(22P) (2-Door)
(22P) and at the mode control motor 7P (4-door) or 10P (2-door) connector. If the connections
are good, substitute a known-good audio-HVAC display panel, and recheck. If the
NO - Repair any open in the wire(s) between the climate control unit and the mode control
motor.
DTC B1240 OR DTC INDICATOR M: A PROBLEM IN THE MODE CONTROL LINKAGE,
111
DOORS, OR MOTOR
1. Clear the DTC.

4. Check the DTCs.
Is DTC B1240 or M indicated?
YES - Go to step 5.
5. Test the mode control motor.
Are the mode control motor and linkage OK?

NO - Replace the mode control motor, 4-door (see 4-DOOR ) or 2-door (see 2-DOOR ), or
repair the mode control linkage or doors.
DTC B1241 OR DTC INDICATOR N: A PROBLEM IN THE BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUIT
1. Clear the DTC.

4. Check the DTCs.
Is DTC B1241 or N indicated?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Intermittent failure, check for loose wires or poor connections on the blower motor
circuit.
5. Check the No. 21 (40A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box, and the No. 30 (7.5A) fuse in the
Are the fuses OK?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Replace the fuse(s), and recheck.
6. Connect the No. 2 (4-door) or No. 1 (2-door) terminal of the blower motor 2P connector to body
111
Fig. 41: Connecting No. 2 Terminal Of Blower Motor 2P Connector To Body Ground With
Jumper Wire (4-Door)
111
Fig. 42: Connecting No. 1 Terminal Of Blower Motor 2P Connector To Body Ground With
Jumper Wire (2-Door)
Does the blower motor run?
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Go to step 21.
9. Disconnect the jumper wire.
10. Disconnect the power transistor 4P connector.
11. Check for continuity between the No. 2 (4-door) or No. 3 (2-door) terminal of the power transistor 4P
connector and body ground.
111
Fig. 43: Checking Continuity Between No. 2 Terminal Of Power Transistor 4P Connector &
Body Ground (4-Door)
111
Fig. 44: Checking Continuity Between No. 3 Terminal Of Power Transistor 4P Connector &
Body Ground (2-Door)

NO - Check for an open in the wire between the power transistor and body ground. If the wire
is OK, check for poor ground at G503.
12. Connect the No. 2 and No. 4 (4-door) or No. 1 and No. 3 (2-door) terminals of the power transistor 4P
connector with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 45: Connecting No. 2 & No. 4 Terminals Of Power Transistor 4P Connector With Jumper
Wire (4-Door)
111
Fig. 46: Connecting No. 1 & No. 3 Terminals Of Power Transistor 4P Connector With Jumper
Wire (2-Door)
Does the blower motor run at high speed?

NO - Repair open in the BLU/BLK wire between the power transistor and the blower motor.
16. Disconnect the audio-HVAC display panel connector B (16P).
17. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of audio-HVAC display panel connector
B (16P) and body ground individually.
111
Fig. 47: Checking Continuity Between No. 1 & No. 2 Terminals Of Audio-HVAC Display Panel
Connector B (16P) & Body Ground Individually
power transistor.
NO - Go to step 18.
18. Check the continuity between the following terminals of audio-HVAC display panel connector B
(16P) and the power transistor 4P connector.
AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY PANEL CONNECTOR B (16P) AND POWER TRANSISTOR 4P (4-

DOOR)
16P 4P
No. 1 No. 1
No. 2 No. 3
111
Fig. 48: Checking Continuity Between Terminals Of Audio-HVAC Display Panel Connector B
(16P) & Power Transistor 4P Connector (4-Door)
AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY PANEL CONNECTOR B (16P) AND POWER TRANSISTOR 4P (2-

DOOR)
16P 4P
No. 1 No. 4
No. 2 No. 2
111
(16P) & Power Transistor 4P Connector (2-Door)

NO - Repair any open in the wire(s) between the climate control unit and the power transistor.
19. Reconnect audio-HVAC display panel connector B (16P).
20. Test the power transistor (see POWER TRANSISTOR TEST ).
Is the power transistor OK?
YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at audio-HVAC display panel connector B
(16P) and at the power transistor 4P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-
NO - Replace the power transistor.
22. Disconnect the blower motor 2P connector.
23. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 (4-door) or No. 2 (2-door) terminal of the blower motor 2P
111
Fig. 50: Measuring Voltage Between No. 1 Terminal Of Blower Motor 2P Connector & Body
Ground (4-Door)
111
Fig. 51: Measuring Voltage Between No. 2 Terminal Of Blower Motor 2P Connector & Body
Ground (2-Door)
YES - Replace the blower motor.

NO - Go to step 24.
25. Remove the blower motor relay from the under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it (see POWER
RELAY TEST ).
Is the relay OK?
111

NO - Replace the blower motor relay.
26. Measure the voltage between the No. 2 terminal of the blower motor relay 4P socket and body
ground.
Fig. 52: Measuring Voltage Between No. 2 Terminal Of Blower Motor Relay 4P Socket And
Body Ground

111
ground.
Body Ground

NO - Repair open in the wire between the No. 30 fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the
blower motor relay.
30. Check for continuity between the No. 3 terminal of the blower motor relay 4P socket and body
111
ground.
Fig. 54: Checking For Continuity Between No. 3 Terminal Of Blower Motor Relay 4P Socket
And Body Ground
YES - Repair open in the WHT/BLU wire between the blower motor relay and the blower
motor.
NO - Check for an open in the wire between the blower motor relay and body ground. If the
wire is OK, check for poor ground at G302.
111
DTC B1236 OR DTC INDICATOR O: AN OPEN IN THE PASSENGER'S AIR MIX CONTROL
MOTOR CIRCUIT
1. Clear the DTC.

4. Check the DTCs.
Is DTC B1236 or O indicated?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Intermittent failure, check for loose wires or poor connections on the passenger's air mix
control motor circuit.
5. Test the passenger's air mix control motor.
Is the passenger's air mix control motor OK?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Replace the passenger's air mix control motor.
6. Disconnect the passenger's air mix control motor 7P (4-door) or 5P (2-door) connector.
8. Check for continuity between the following terminals of audio-HVAC display panel connector A
(22P) and the passenger's air mix control motor 7P (4-door) or 5P (2-door) connector.
AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY PANEL CONNECTOR A (22P) AND PASSENGER'S AIR MIX

CONTROL MOTOR 7P (4-DOOR)
22P 7P
No. 2 No. 3
No. 10 No. 1
No. 15 No. 5
No. 20 No. 7
No. 22 No. 2
111
(22P) & Passenger's Air Mix Control Motor 7P Connector (4-Door)
AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY PANEL CONNECTOR A (22P) AND PASSENGER'S AIR MIX

22P 5P
No. 2 No. 3
No. 10 No. 2
No. 15 No. 5
No. 20 No. 4
No. 22 No. 1
111
(22P) & Passenger's Air Mix Control Motor 5P Connector (2-Door)
(22P) and at the passenger's air mix control motor 7P (4-door) or 5P (2-door) connector. If the
NO - Repair any open in the wire(s) between the climate control unit and the passenger's air
mix control motor.
DTC B1237 OR DTC INDICATOR P: A SHORT IN THE PASSENGER'S AIR MIX CONTROL
MOTOR CIRCUIT
1. Clear the DTC.

4. Check the DTCs.
111
Is DTC B1237 or P indicated?
YES - Go to step 5.
Is the passenger's air mix control motor OK?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Replace the passenger's air mix control motor.
6. Disconnect the passenger's air mix control motor 7P (4-door) or 5P (2-door) connector.
terminals No. 2, 10, 15, 20 and 22 individually.
Fig. 57: Checking For Continuity Between Body Ground And Audio-HVAC Display Panel
Connector A (22P) Terminals No. 2, 10, 15, 20 & 22 Individually
111
passenger's air mix control motor.
NO - Go to step 9.
Fig. 58: Checking Same Terminals For Voltage

YES - Repair any short to power in the wire(s) between the climate control unit and the
passenger's air mix control motor. This short may also damage the climate control unit. Repair
the short to power before replacing the audio-HVAC display panel.
DTC B1238 OR DTC INDICATOR Q: A PROBLEM IN THE PASSENGER'S AIR MIX CONTROL
LINKAGE, DOOR, OR MOTOR
1. Clear the DTC.

111
4. Check the DTCs.
Is DTC B1238 or Q indicated?
YES - Go to step 5.
Is the passenger's air mix control motor and linkage OK?

NO - Replace the passenger's air mix control motor, 4-door (see 4-DOOR ) or 2-door (see 2-
DOOR ), or repair the passenger's air mix control linkage or door.
DTC B1202: CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT INTERNAL ERROR

3. Turn the climate control system on and operate several functions. (A/C on/off, air mix and blend door
operations, temperature settings etc..)
4. Check for DTCs by selecting the DTC MENU (DTCs) from the HDS.
YES - The climate control unit is faulty; replace the audio-HVAC display panel.
NO - Intermittent failure, the climate control unit is OK at this time.
DTC B1205: CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT LOST COMMUNICATION WITH THE GAUGE
CONTROL MODULE (VSP/NE MESSAGE); DTC B1206: CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT LOST
COMMUNICATION WITH THE GAUGE CONTROL MODULE (ECT MESSAGE); DTC B1207:
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT LOST COMMUNICATION WITH THE GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE (ILLUMI MESSAGE)

2. Push the AUTO button.
Does the climate control turn on?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Go to climate control power and ground circuit troubleshooting (see CLIMATE
CONTROL POWER AND GROUND CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING ).
5. Turn the climate control system on and operate several functions. (A/C on/off, air mix and blend door
111
operations, temperature settings etc..)

YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Intermittent failure, the gauge control module and climate control unit are OK at this time.
7. Check the DTCs by selecting the DTCs MENU (DTCs) from the HDS.
YES - Perform the gauge control module input test (see SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION ).
NO - Go to step 8.
8. Disconnect audio-HVAC display panel connector B (16P).
9. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connector N (45P) from the fuse/relay box.
10. Check for continuity between the No. 22 terminal of under-dash fuse/relay box connector N (45P) and
the No. 14 terminal of the audio-HVAC display panel connector B (16P).
111
Fig. 59: Checking Continuity Between No. 22 Terminal Of Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box
Connector N (45P) & No. 14 Terminal Of Audio-HVAC Display Panel Connector B (16P)
YES - The gauge control module and/or climate control unit faulty. Substitute one component
at a time and recheck. Replace the component that eliminates the DTC/symptom.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the gauge control module and the climate control unit.
RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING

1. Check the No. 30 (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
2. Disconnect the recirculation control motor 7P (4-door) or 5P (2-door) connector.
4. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of the recirculation control motor 7P (4-door) or No.
5 terminal of the 5P (2-door) connector and body ground.
111
Fig. 60: Measuring Voltage Between No. 1 Terminal Of Recirculation Control Motor 7P
Connector & Body Ground (4-Door)
111
Fig. 61: Measuring Voltage Between No. 1 Terminal Of Recirculation Control Motor 5P
Connector & Body Ground (2-Door)
YES - Go to step 5.
recirculation control motor.
6. Test the recirculation control motor.
Is the recirculation control motor OK?

111
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Replace the recirculation control motor, 4-door (see 4-DOOR ) or 2-door (see 2-DOOR ),
or repair the recirculation control linkage or doors.
8. Check for continuity between the No. 10 and No. 11 terminals audio-HVAC display panel connector
B (16P) and body ground individually.
Fig. 62: Checking For Continuity Between No. 10 And No. 11 Terminals Audio-HVAC Display
Panel Connector B (16P) & Body Ground Individually
NO - Go to step 9.
9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the same wires for voltage.
111
Fig. 63: Checking Same Wires For Voltage

YES - Repair any short to power in the wire(s) between the climate control unit and the
recirculation control motor. This short may also damage the climate control unit. Repair the
short to power before replacing the audio-HVAC display panel.
NO - Go to step 10.
11. Check for continuity between the following terminals of audio-HVAC display panel connector B
(16P) and the recirculation control motor 7P (4-door) or 5P (2-door) connector.
AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY PANEL CONNECTOR B (16P) AND RECIRCULATION

16P 7P
No. 10 No. 5
No. 11 No. 7
111
(16P) & Recirculation Control Motor 7P Connector (4-Door)
AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY PANEL CONNECTOR B (16P) AND RECIRCULATION

16P 5P
No. 10 No. 2
No. 11 No. 1
111
(16P) & Recirculation Control Motor 5P Connector (2-Door)
(16P) and at the recirculation control motor 7P (4-door) or 5P (2-door) connector. If the
NO - Repair any open in the wire(s) between the climate control unit and the recirculation
control motor.
CLIMATE CONTROL POWER AND GROUND CIRCUIT

TROUBLESHOOTING
Is the fuse OK?

111
YES - Go to step 2.
4. Measure the voltage between the No. 4 terminal of audio-HVAC display panel connector B (16P) and
body ground.
Fig. 66: Measuring Voltage Between No. 4 Terminal Of Audio-HVAC Display Panel Connector
B (16P) And Body Ground
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the No. 30 fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
and the climate control unit.
6. Check for continuity between the No. 6 terminal of audio-HVAC display panel connector B (16P) and
body ground.
111
Fig. 67: Checking For Continuity Between No. 6 Terminal Of Audio-HVAC Display Panel
(16P). If the connections are good, substitute a known-good audio-HVAC display panel, and
recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original audio-HVAC display panel.
NO - Check for an open in the wire between the climate control unit and body ground. If the
A/C PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING
NOTE:  Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the following items are
operative; condenser fan, A/C compressor, or if the heater is
inoperative. Refer to SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX.
 Before performing symptom troubleshooting, check for powertrain
DTCs (see GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION ).
1. Check for body DTCs in test mode A of the multiplex integrated control system (see
Are there any DTC indicated?

111
YES - Do the appropriate troubleshooting for the DTC indicated.

NO - Go to step 2.
2. Disconnect the A/C pressure switch 2P connector.
4. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of the A/C pressure switch 2P connector and body
ground.
Fig. 68: Measuring Voltage Between No. 1 Terminal Of A/C Pressure Switch 2P Connector And
Body Ground
Is there 5 V or more?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Go to step 13.
111
6. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the A/C pressure switch.
Fig. 69: Checking For Continuity Between No. 1 And No. 2 Terminals Of A/C Pressure Switch
111
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Go to step 14.
7. Reconnect the A/C pressure switch 2P connector.
10. Measure the voltage between the No. 5 terminal of the audio-HVAC display panel connector A (22P)
and body ground.
A (22P) And Body Ground

NO - Repair open in the wire between the climate control unit and the A/C pressure switch.
12. Measure the resistance between the No. 14 and No. 15 terminals of the audio-HVAC display panel
connector A (22P).
111
Fig. 71: Measuring Resistance Between No. 14 And No. 15 Terminals Of Audio-HVAC Display
Panel Connector A (22P)
Is the resistance less than 24 k ohms?
(22P) and at the A/C pressure switch 2P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a
known-good audio-HVAC display panel, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
NO - Repair cause of high resistance in the evaporator temperature circuit.
13. Measure the voltage between the No. 2 terminal of under-hood fuse/relay box connector H (14P) and
body ground with the under-hood fuse/relay box connectors connected.
111
Fig. 72: Measuring Voltage Between No. 2 Terminal Of Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Connector
H (14P) & Body Ground
YES - Repair open in the wire between the under-hood fuse/relay box and the A/C pressure
switch.
NO - Check for loose or poor connections at the No. 2 terminal of the under-hood fuse/relay
box. If the connections are OK, replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.
14. Check for proper A/C system pressure.
Is the pressure within specifications?
YES - Replace the A/C pressure switch.

NO - Repair the A/C pressure problem.
IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR TEST

Check for a change in resistance by heating or cooling the sensor with a hair drier.
Compare the resistance reading between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the in-car temperature sensor with
the specifications in the graph shown in Fig. 73; the resistance should be within the specifications.
111
Fig. 73: Checking Resistance By Heating Or Cooling Sensor

IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the instrument panel (see INSTRUMENT PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).
2. Remove the self-tapping screw and the in-car temperature sensor (A) from the instrument panel (B).
111
Fig. 74: Removing Self-Tapping Screw And In-Car Temperature Sensor

3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Be sure to connect the air hose securely.
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR TEST

Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the resistance. Then pour warm water on the sensor, and check for
a change in resistance.
Compare the resistance reading between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the outside air temperature sensor
with the specifications in the graph shown in Fig. 75; the resistance should be within the specifications.
111
Fig. 75: Checking Resistance Between No. 1 And No. 2 Terminals Of Outside Air Temperature Sensor
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT

1. Lift the tab (A) to release the lock, and remove the outside air temperature sensor (B) from the back of
the front bumper beam. Disconnect the 2P connector (C) from the outside air temperature sensor.
111
Fig. 76: Releasing Lock & Removing Outside Air Temperature Sensor
SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEST

1. Remove the sunlight sensor, and reconnect the connector.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Measure the voltage between the terminals with the (+) probe on the
No. 1 terminal and the (-) probe on the No. 2 terminal with the 2P connector connected. The voltage
readings will not change under the light of a flashlight or a fluorescent lamp. Voltage should be:
 3.6-3.7 V or more with the sensor out of direct sunlight.
 3.3-3.5 V or less with the sensor in direct sunlight.
111
Fig. 77: Measuring Voltage Between Terminals

SUNLIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the upper panel from the dashboard (see UPPER PANEL
2. Remove the sunlight sensor (A) from the upper panel (B). Be careful not to damage the sensor.
111
Fig. 78: Removing Sunlight Sensor From Upper Panel

PASSENGER'S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR TEST

4-DOOR
1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the passenger's air mix control motor.
NOTE: Incorrectly applying power and ground to the passenger's air mix
control motor will damage it. Follow the instructions carefully.
2. Connect battery power to the No. 1 terminal of the passenger's air mix control motor, and ground the
No. 2 terminal; the passenger's air mix control motor should run, and stop at Max Cool. If it doesn't,
reverse the connections; the passenger's air mix control motor should run, and stop at Max Hot.
3. If the passenger's air mix control motor did not run in step 2, remove it, then check the passenger's air
mix control linkage and door for smooth movement.
 If the linkage and door move smoothly, replace the passenger's air mix control motor.
111
 If the linkage or door sticks or binds, repair them as needed.

 If the passenger's air mix control motor runs smoothly, go to step 4.
Fig. 79: Checking Passenger's Air Mix Control Motor (4-Door)

4. Measure the resistance between the No. 5 and No. 7 terminals. It should be between 4.2 to 7.8 kohms.
5. Reconnect the passenger's air mix control motor 7P connector, then turn the ignition switch ON (II).
6. Using the backprobe set, measure the voltage between the No. 3 and No. 5 terminals.
Max Cool-about 1.5 V
Max Hot-about 4.5 V
7. If either the resistance or voltage readings are not as specified, replace the passenger's air mix control
motor (see PASSENGER'S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR REPLACEMENT ).
2-DOOR
111
1. Disconnect the 5P connector from the passenger's air mix control motor.
NOTE: Incorrectly applying power and ground to the passenger's air mix
control motor will damage it. Follow the instructions carefully.
2. Connect battery power to the No. 1 terminal of the passenger's air mix control motor, and ground the
No. 2 terminal; the passenger's air mix control motor should run, and stop at Max Hot. If it doesn't,
reverse the connections; the passenger's air mix control motor should run, and stop at Max Cool.
3. If the passenger's air mix control motor did not run in step 2, remove it, then check the passenger's air
mix control linkage and door for smooth movement.
 If the linkage and door move smoothly, replace the passenger's air mix control motor.
 If the passenger's air mix control motor runs smoothly, go to step 4.
Fig. 80: Checking Passenger's Air Mix Control Motor (2-Door)

111
4. Measure the resistance between the No. 4 and No. 5 terminals. It should be between 4.2 to 7.8 kohms.
5. Reconnect the passenger's air mix control motor 5P connector, then turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Max Cool-about 10. V
Max Hot-about 4.0 V
7. If either the resistance or voltage readings are not as specified, replace the passenger's air mix control
motor (see PASSENGER'S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR REPLACEMENT ).
PASSENGER'S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR REPLACEMENT

4-DOOR
1. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the evaporator temperature sensor. Disconnect the 7P
connector (B) from the passenger's air mix control motor (C). Remove the self-tapping screws and the
passenger's air mix control motor from the heater unit.
Fig. 81: Disconnecting 2P Connector & Removing Passenger's Air Mix Control Motor (4-Door)
111
2. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal. Make sure the pin on the motor is properly engaged
with the linkage. After installation, make sure the motor runs smoothly.
2-DOOR
1. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the mode control motor. Disconnect the 2P connector (B)
from the evaporator temperature sensor. Disconnect the 5P connector (C) from the passenger's air mix
control motor (D). Remove the self-tapping screws and the passenger's air mix control motor from the
heater unit.
Fig. 82: Disconnecting 10P Connector & Removing Passenger's Air Mix Control Motor (2-
Door)
111
CABIN AIR FILTERS Dust & Pollen Filter - Accord & Accord Hybrid
CABIN AIR FILTERS
Dust & Pollen Filter - Accord & Accord Hybrid
REMOVAL & INSTALLATION
NOTE: Manufacturer's terminology for this filter is dust and pollen filter.
CABIN AIR FILTER
Removal & Installation
1. Open the glove box. Remove the damper from the glove box then let the glove box hang down. See
Fig. 1.
Fig. 1: Releasing Glove Box Damper

111
2 августа 2011 г. 16:04:52
2. Remove the dust and pollen filter assembly from the evaporator case. See Fig. 2.
Fig. 2: Removing Filter Assembly From Evaporator Case

111
3. Remove the filter from the housing and replace the filter. See Fig. 3.
4. Install the filter in the reverse order of removal. Ensure arrow marks on edge of filter point in
direction of air flow. Make sure that there is no air leaking out of the evaporator.
Fig. 3: Removing Filter From Housing

111
2003-07 HVAC Heating/Air Conditioning - Accord
2003-07 HVAC
Heating/Air Conditioning - Accord

4-DOOR
Fig. 1: Identifying Heating/Air Conditioning Component Location (Underdash)

2-DOOR
111
2 августа 2011 г. 16:05:39
Fig. 2: Identifying Heating/Air Conditioning Component Location (Underdash)

4-DOOR
111
Fig. 3: Identifying Heating/Air Conditioning Component Location (Underhood)

2-DOOR
111
Fig. 4: Identifying Heating/Air Conditioning Component Location (Underhood)

4-DOOR/2-DOOR
Fig. 5: Identifying Heating/Air Conditioning Component Location (Cooling Fans)

A/C SERVICE TIPS AND PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:  Compressed air mixed with R-134a forms a combustible vapor.

 The vapor can burn or explode causing serious injury.
 Never use compressed air to pressure test R-134a service
equipment or vehicle air conditioning systems.
CAUTION:  Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor can irritate your

eyes, nose, or throat.
 Be careful when connecting service equipment.
 Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor.
The air conditioning system uses HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant and polyalkyleneglycol (PAG) refrigerant
111
oil, which are not compatible with CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and mineral oil. Do not use R-12 refrigerant or
mineral oil in this system, and do not attempt to use R-12 servicing equipment; damage to the air
conditioning system or your servicing equipment will result. Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed
and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to remove R-134a from the air conditioning system.
If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service.
R-134a service equipment or vehicle air conditioning systems should not be pressure tested or leak tested
with compressed air.
Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers.
 Always disconnect the negative cable from the battery whenever replacing air conditioning parts.
 Keep moisture and dirt out of the system. When disconnecting any lines, plug or cap the fittings
immediately; don't remove the caps or plugs until just before you reconnect each line.
 Before connecting any hose or line, apply a few drops of refrigerant oil to the O-ring.
 When tightening or loosening a fitting, use a second wrench to support the matching fitting.
 When discharging the system, use a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station; don't
release refrigerant into the atmosphere.
A/C REFRIGERANT OIL REPLACEMENT

Recommended PAG oil: DENSO ND-OIL 8
 P/N 38897-PR7-A01AH: 120 mL (4 fl.oz)

 P/N 38899-PR7-A01: 40 mL (1 1/3 fl.oz)
Add the recommended refrigerant oil in the amount listed if you replace any of the following parts.
 To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to the container once dispensed, and never mix it with
other refrigerant oils.
 Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture
absorption.
 Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if it gets on the paint, wash it
off immediately.
RECOMMENDED REFRIGERANT OIL

A/C condenser 25 mL (5/6 fl. oz)
Evaporator 45 mL (1 1/2 fl. oz)
Line or hose 10 mL (1/3 fl. oz)
Receiver/Dryer 10 mL (1/3 fl. oz)
Leakage repair 25 mL (5/6 fl. oz)
A/C Compressor For A/C compressor replacement, subtract the
volume of oil drained from rmoved A/C
compressor from 160 mL (5 1/3 fl. oz), and drain
the calculated volumne of oil from the new A/C
compressor:
160 mL (5 1/3 fl.oz) - Volume of removed A/C
111
compressor = volume to drain from new A/C

compressor.
NOTE: Even if no oil is drained from the removed A/C compressor, don't drain
more than 50 mL (1 2/3 fl.oz) from the new A/C compressor.
Fig. 6: Identifying A/C Compressor Fluid Level

4-DOOR
111
Fig. 7: Replacing A/C Refrigerant Oil (4-Door)

2-DOOR
111
Fig. 8: Replacing A/C Refrigerant Oil (2-Door)

111
HOW TO RETRIEVE A DTC
The audio-HVAC display panel has a self-diagnostic function for heating, ventilation, and air conditioning
system. To run the self-diagnostic function, do the following:

2. Turn the fan switch OFF.
3. Set the temperature control dial on Max Cool, then push the mode control button to select Vent.
5. Press and hold the recirculation control button.
6. While holding the button down, press the rear window defogger button five times within 10 seconds.
The recirculation indicator blinks two times, then the self-diagnostic will begin.
 If there is any problem in the system after self-diagnostic is finished, the recirculation indicator
will blink Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) 1 through 6. If there are any problems in the
evaporator temperature sensor circuit, the A/C indicator will blink DTC 7 or 8.
 If no DTC's are found, the indicator will not blink.
Fig. 9: Pressing Rear Window Defogger Button

111
Fig. 10: Example Of DTC Indication Pattern (DTC 3)

Cancelling the Self-diagnostic Function
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF to cancel the self-diagnostic function. After completing repair work, run
the self-diagnostic function again to make sure that there are no other malfunctions.
Max Cool Position Function
When the mode control button is in the MAX COOL position, the audio-HVAC display panel will
automatically select the recirculation mode and turn the A/C on. The recirculation switch and A/C switch are
disabled and cannot be turned off in this mode. If the audio-HVAC display panel fails to function as
described, replace it.

DTC (RECIRCULATION INDICATOR BLINKS)
DTC (Recirculation Indicator
Detection Item Refer To
Blinks)
(see DTC 1: AN OPEN IN THE
An open in the air mix control
1 AIR MIX CONTROL
motor circuit
MOTOR CIRCUIT )
(see DTC 2: A SHORT IN THE
A short in the air mix control
2 AIR MIX CONTROL
motor circuit
MOTOR CIRCUIT )
(see DTC 3: A PROBLEM IN
A problem in the air mix control THE AIR MIX CONTROL
3
linkage, door, or motor LINKAGE, DOOR, OR
MOTOR )
(see DTC 4: AN OPEN OR
An open or short in the mode SHORT IN THE MODE
4
control motor circuit CONTROL MOTOR
CIRCUIT )
A problem in the mode control THE MODE CONTROL
111
linkage, doors, or motor LINKAGE, DOORS, OR

5
MOTOR )
A problem in the blower motor
6 THE BLOWER MOTOR
circuit
CIRCUIT )
DTC (A/C INDICATOR BLINKS)

DTC (A/C Indicator Blinks) Detection Item Refer To
(see DTC 7: An Open in the
An open in the evaporator
7 Evaporator Temperature
temperature sensor circuit
Sensor Circuit )
(see DTC 8: A Short in the
A short in the evaporator
8 Evaporator Temperature
temperature sensor circuit
Sensor Circuit )
In case of multiple problems, the recirculation indicator will indicate only the DTC with the least number of
blinks.

Recirculation control motor circuit TROUBLESHOOTING
Recirculation control doors troubleshooting (see INFORMATION )
do not change between RECIRCULATION CONTROL  Blown fuse No. 30 (7.5A) in
Fresh and Recirculate MOTOR CIRCUIT the under-dash fuse/relay box
TROUBLESHOOTING )  Cleanliness and tightness of all
connectors
Audio-HVAC display panel power TROUBLESHOOTING
and ground circuit troubleshooting INFORMATION )
Blower, heater controls, and (see AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY  Blown fuse No. 30 (7.5A) in
A/C do not work PANEL POWER AND the under-dash fuse/relay box
GROUND CIRCUIT  Poor ground at G503
TROUBLESHOOTING )
 Cleanliness and tightness of all
connectors

TROUBLESHOOTING
INFORMATION )
A/C condenser fan circuit
The A/C condenser fan does  Blown fuse No. 9 (20A) in the
troubleshooting (see A/C
not run at all (but radiator under-hood fuse/relay box, and
CONDENSER FAN CIRCUIT
fan runs with the A/C on) No. 30 (7.5A) in the under-
TROUBLESHOOTING )
dash fuse/relay box
 Poor ground at G201
111
connectors
TROUBLESHOOTING
Radiator and A/C condenser fan INFORMATION )
Both fans do not run with common circuit troubleshooting  Blown fuse No. 9 (20A) and
the A/C on (but the A/C (see RADIATOR AND A/C No. 11 (20A) in the under-
compressor runs with the CONDENSER FAN COMMON hood fuse/relay box, and No.
A/C on) CIRCUIT 30 (7.5A) in the under-dash
TROUBLESHOOTING ) fuse/relay box
connectors
TROUBLESHOOTING
A/C compressor clutch circuit INFORMATION )
The A/C compressor clutch troubleshooting (see A/C  Blown fuse No. 12 (7.5A) in
does not engage (but both COMPRESSOR CLUTCH the under-hood fuse/relay box,
fans run with the A/C on) CIRCUIT and No. 30 (7.5A) in the
TROUBLESHOOTING ) under-dash fuse/relay box
connectors
 Body DTCs in test mode A of
the MICS (see
TROUBLESHOOTING - B-
CAN SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
A/C pressure switch circuit TEST MODE A )
A/C system does not come
troubleshooting (see A/C
on (both fans and the A/C  HVAC DTCs (see GENERAL
PRESSURE SWITCH
compressor do not work); TROUBLESHOOTING
CIRCUIT
heater is OK INFORMATION )
TROUBLESHOOTING )
connectors
 Blown fuse No. 30 (7.5A) in
the under-dash fuse/relay box
SYMPTOM AND DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE

2. Press the recirculation button several times and
check the button's LED. The LED should
toggle on and off as the button is pressed.
Recirculation button does not work  If the LED turns on and off, go to
recirculation control motor test, 4-door
(see 4-door ) or 2-door (see 2-door ).
 If the LED does not turn on or off,
replace the audio-HVAC display panel.

111
2. Press the defroster button several times and

 If the LED turns on and off, go to self-
Defroster button does not work diagnostic (see GENERAL
TROUBLESHOOTING
INFORMATION ).
2. Press the rear window defogger button several
times and check the button's LED. The LED
should toggle on and off as the button is
pressed.
Rear window defogger button does not work
 If the LED turns on and off, go to rear
window defogger troubleshooting (see
FUNCTION TEST ).
2. Turn the fan control dial ON.
3. Press the A/C button several times and check
the button's LED. The LED should toggle on
and off as the button is pressed.
A/C button does not work  If the LED turns on and off, go to self-
diagnostic (see GENERAL
TROUBLESHOOTING
INFORMATION ).
2. Turn the fan control dial ON.
3. Press the MAX A/C button several times and
MAX A/C button does not work  If the LED turns on and off, go to self-
TROUBLESHOOTING
INFORMATION ).

2. Press the MODE (VENT) button several times
and check the button's LED. The LED should
111
 If the LED turns on and off, go to self-

TROUBLESHOOTING
Mode button (VENT) does not work
INFORMATION ).
2. Press the MODE (VENT/FLOOR) button
several times and check the button's LED. The
LED should toggle on and off as the button is
pressed.
Mode button (VENT/FLOOR) does not work  If the LED turns on and off, go to self-
TROUBLESHOOTING
INFORMATION ).
2. Press the MODE (FLOOR) button several
times and check the button's LED. The LED
should toggle on and off as the button is
pressed.
Mode button (FLOOR) does not work  If the LED turns on and off, go to self-
TROUBLESHOOTING
INFORMATION ).
2. Press the MODE (DEFROSTER/FLOOR)
button several times and check the button's
LED. The LED should toggle on and off as the
button is pressed.
Mode button (DEFROSTER/FLOOR) does not
work  If the LED turns on and off, go to self-
TROUBLESHOOTING
INFORMATION ).
2. Press the A/C button, and then OFF button and
Audio-HVAC display panel will not run self- check the display.
diagnosis  If the display turns on and off as the
buttons are pressed, there are no DTCs
stored, troubleshoot the individual
symptoms.
111
 If the display does not respond as the

buttons are pressed, check for loose or
poor connections at the audio-HVAC
display panel. If the connections are OK,
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Fig. 11: Identifying Air Flow System Description (1 Of 2)

111
Fig. 12: Identifying Air Flow System Description (2 Of 2)

The air conditioning system removes heat from the passenger compartment by circulating refrigerant
through the system.
111
Fig. 13: Air Conditioning System Description

This vehicle uses HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant which does not contain chlorofluorocarbons. Pay attention
to the following service items:
 Do not mix refrigerants CFC-12 (R-12) and HFC-134a (R-134a). They are not compatible.
 Use only the recommended polyalkyleneglycol (PAG) refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8) designed
for the R-134a compressor. Intermixing the recommended (PAG) refrigerant oil with any other
refrigerant oil will result in compressor failure.
 All A/C system parts (compressor, discharge line, suction line, evaporator, condenser, receiver/dryer,
expansion valve, O-rings for joints) are designed for refrigerant R-134a. Do not exchange with R-12
parts.
 Use a halogen gas leak detector designed for refrigerant R-134a.
 R-12 and R-134a refrigerant servicing equipment are not interchangeable. Use only a
recovery/recycling/charging station that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE
J2210 to service the R-134a air conditioning systems.
 Always recover the refrigerant R-134a with an approved recovery/recycling/charging station before
disconnecting any A/C fitting.
AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY PANEL INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
111
Fig. 14: Identifying Audio-HVAC Display Panel Inputs And Outputs

Fig. 15: Identifying Audio-HVAC Display Panel 22P Connector

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
111
Fig. 16: Identifying Heating And Air Conditioning Circuit Diagram (1 Of 2)

111
Fig. 17: Identifying Heating And Air Conditioning Circuit Diagram (2 Of 2)

DTC TROUBLESHOOTING
DTC CODES
DTC CHART
DTC Description
DTC 1 An Open in the Air Mix Control Motor Circuit
111
DTC 2 A Short in the Air Mix Control Motor Circuit

DTC 3 A Problem in the Air Mix Control Linkage, Door,
or Motor
DTC 4 An Open or Short in the Mode Control Motor
Circuit
DTC 5 A Problem in the Mode Control Linkage, Doors, or
Motor
DTC 6 A Problem in the Blower Motor Circuit
DTC 7 An Open in the Evaporator Temperature Sensor
Circuit
DTC 8 A Short in the Evaporator Temperature Sensor
Circuit
DTC 1: AN OPEN IN THE AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect the air mix control motor 7P (4-door) or 5P (2-door) connector.

2. Disconnect audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector.
3. Check for continuity between the following terminals of audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector
and the air mix control motor 7P (4-door) or 5P (2-door) connector.
AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY PANEL 22P CONNECTOR AND AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR
7P (4-door)
22P 7P
No. 9 No. 5
No. 13 No. 2
No. 14 No. 1
No. 17 No. 3
No. 18 No. 7
111
Fig. 18: Checking Continuity Between Audio-HVAC Display Panel & Air Mix Control Motor
7P (4-Door)
AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY PANEL 22P CONNECTOR AND AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR
5P (4-door)
22P 5P
No. 9 No. 5
No. 13 No. 1
No. 14 No. 2
No. 17 No. 3
No. 18 No. 4
111
Fig. 19: Checking Continuity Between Audio-HVAC Display Panel & Air Mix Control Motor
5P (2-Door)
YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector
and at the air mix control motor 7P (4-door) or 5P (2-door) connector. If the connections are
good, test the air mix control motor, 4-door (see 4-door ) or 2-door (see AIR MIX CONTROL
MOTOR TEST ). If the air mix control motor is OK, substitute a known-good audio-HVAC
display panel, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original audio-
HVAC display panel.
111
NO - Repair any open in the wire(s) between the audio-HVAC display panel and the air mix
control motor.
DTC 2: A SHORT IN THE AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect the air mix control motor 7P (4-door) or 5P (2-door) connector.

3. Check for continuity between body ground and audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector terminals
No. 9, 13, 14, 17, and 18 individually.
Fig. 20: Checking For Continuity Between Body Ground And Audio-HVAC Display Panel 22P
Connector Terminals Individually
YES - Repair any short to body ground in the wire(s) between the audio-HVAC display panel
and the air mix control motor.
NO - Go to step 4.
111

YES - Repair any short to power in the wire(s) between the audio-HVAC display panel and the
air mix control motor. This short may also damage the audio-HVAC display panel. Repair the
NO - Test the air mix control motor, 4-door (see 4-door ) or 2-door (see 2-door ). If the air mix
control motor is OK, substitute a known-good audio-HVAC display panel, and recheck. If the
DTC 3: A PROBLEM IN THE AIR MIX CONTROL LINKAGE, DOOR, OR MOTOR
1. Test the air mix control motor.

 4-door (see 4-door )
 2-door (see 2-door )
Is the air mix control motor OK?

111
NO - Replace the air mix control motor, or repair the linkage and doors.
DTC 4: AN OPEN OR SHORT IN THE MODE CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect the mode control motor 7P (4-door) or 10P (2-door) connector.

3. Check for continuity between body ground and audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector terminals
No. 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, 11, and 12 individually.
Fig. 22: Checking For Continuity Between Body Ground And Audio-HVAC Display Panel 22P
Connector Terminals Individually
and the mode control motor.
NO - Go to step 4.
111

mode control motor. This short may also damage the audio-HVAC display panel. Repair the
NO - Go to step 5.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check for continuity between the following terminals of audio-
HVAC display panel 22P connector and the mode control motor 7P (4-door) or 10P (2-door)
connector.
AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY PANEL 22P CONNECTOR AND CONTROL MOTOR 7P

CONNECTOR (4-DOOR)
22P 7P
No. 2 No. 6
No. 3 No. 5
No. 4 No. 4
No. 5 No. 3
No. 9 No. 7
No. 11 No. 2
111
No. 12 No. 1
Fig. 24: Checking For Continuity Between Terminals Of Audio-HVAC Display Panel 22P
Connector (4-Door)
AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY PANEL 22P CONNECTOR AND 10P CONNECTOR (2-DOOR)

22P 10P
No. 2 No. 9
No. 3 No. 8
No. 4 No. 7
No. 5 No. 6
111
No. 9 No. 10
No. 11 No. 2
No. 12 No. 1
Connector (2-Door)
and at the mode control motor 7P (4-door) or 10P (2-door) connector. If the connections are
good, test the mode control motor, 4-door (see 4-door ) or 2-door (see 2-door ). If the mode
control motor is OK, substitute a known-good audio-HVAC display panel, and recheck. If the
NO - Repair any open in the wire(s) between the audio-HVAC display panel and the mode
control motor.
DTC 5: A PROBLEM IN THE MODE CONTROL LINKAGE, DOORS, OR MOTOR

111
1. Test the mode control motor, 4-door (see 4-door ) or 2-door (see 2-door ).
Is the mode control motor OK?

NO - Replace the mode control motor, or repair the linkage and doors.
DTC 6: A PROBLEM IN THE BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUIT
1. Check the No. 21 (40A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box, and the No. 30 (7.5A) fuse in the
Are the fuses OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
2. Connect the No. 2 (4-door) or No. 1 (2-door) terminal of the blower motor 2P connector to body
111
Fig. 26: Connecting No. 2 Terminal Of Blower Motor Connector To Body Ground With Jumper
Wire (4-Door)
111
Fig. 27: Connecting No. 1 Terminal Of Blower Motor Connector To Body Ground With Jumper
Wire (2-Door)
Does the blower motor run?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Go to step 17.
6. Disconnect the power transistor 4P connector.
111
7. Check for continuity between the No. 2 (4-door) or No. 3 (2-door) terminal of the power transistor 4P
Fig. 28: Checking Continuity Between No.2 Terminal & Body Ground (4-Door)
111
Fig. 29: Checking Continuity Between No.3 Terminal & Body Ground (2-Door)
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Check for an open in the wire between the power transistor and body ground. If the wire
is OK, check for poor ground at G503.
8. Connect the No. 2 and No. 4 (4-door) or No. 1 and No. 3 (2-door) terminals of the power transistor 4P
connector with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 30: Connecting No.2 & No.4 Terminals With Jumper Wire (4-Door)
111
Fig. 31: Connecting No.1 & No.3 Terminals With Jumper Wire (2-Door)
Does the blower motor run at high speed?

NO - Repair open in the BLU/BLK wire between the power transistor and the blower motor.
13. Check for continuity between the No. 15 and No. 16 terminals of audio-HVAC display panel 22P
connector and body ground individually.
111
Fig. 32: Checking For Continuity Between No. 15 And No. 16 Terminals & Body Ground
Individually
and the power transistor.
NO - Go to step 14.
14. Check the continuity between the following terminals of audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector
and the power transistor 4P connector.
AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY PANEL 22P CONNECTOR AND POWER TRANSISTOR 4P

CONNECTOR (4-DOOR)
22P 4P
No. 15 No. 3
No. 16 No. 1
111
Fig. 33: Checking Continuity Between 22P Connector & 4P Connector (4-Door)
AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY PANEL 22P CONNECTOR AND POWER TRANSISTOR 4P

CONNECTOR (2-DOOR)
22P 4P
No. 15 No. 2
No. 16 No. 4
No. 4
111
Fig. 34: Checking Continuity Between 22P Connector & 4P Connector (2-Door)

NO - Repair any open in the wire(s) between the audio-HVAC display panel and the power
transistor.
15. Reconnect audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector.
16. Test the power transistor (see POWER TRANSISTOR TEST ).
Is the power transistor OK?
111
and at the power transistor 4P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-good
audio-HVAC display panel, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the
original audio-HVAC display panel.
NO - Replace the power transistor.
18. Disconnect the blower motor 2P connector.
19. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 (4-door) or No. 2 (2-door) terminal of the blower motor 2P
Fig. 35: Measuring Voltage Between No. 1 Terminal Of Blower Motor & Body Ground (4-Door)
111
Fig. 36: Measuring Voltage Between No. 2 Terminal Of Blower Motor & Body Ground (2-Door)
YES - Replace the blower motor.

NO - Go to step 20.
21. Remove the blower motor relay from the under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it (see POWER
RELAY TEST ).
111
Is the relay OK?

NO - Replace the blower motor relay.
ground.
Body Ground

111

ground.
Body Ground

blower motor relay.
111

26. Check for continuity between the No. 3 terminal of the blower motor relay 4P socket and body
ground.
Fig. 39: Checking For Continuity Between No. 3 Terminal Of Blower Motor Relay 4P Socket
And Body Ground
YES - Repair open in the WHT/BLU wire between the blower motor relay and the blower
motor.
NO - Check for an open in the wire between the blower motor relay and body ground. If the
111
DTC 7: AN OPEN IN THE EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

TEST ) and test it.
Does the evaporator temperature sensor test OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
2. Disconnect the audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector.
3. Check for continuity between the No. 10 terminal of audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector and
the No. 1 terminal of the evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector.
Fig. 40: Checking Continuity Between No. 10 Terminal Of 22P Connector & No.1 Terminal Of
EVAP Temp Sensor Connector
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the audio-HVAC display panel and the evaporator
temperature sensor.
4. Check for continuity between the No. 9 terminal of audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector and the
No. 2 terminal of the evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector.
111
Fig. 41: Checking Continuity Between No. 9 Terminal Of 22P Connector & No.2 Terminal Of
EVAP Temp Sensor Connector
YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at audio-HVAC display panel 22P connectors
and at the evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a
known-good audio-HVAC display panel, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
NO - Repair open in the wire between the audio-HVAC display panel and the evaporator
temperature sensor.
DTC 8: A SHORT IN THE EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

TEST ) and test it.
Is the resistance within the specifications shown on the graph in Fig. 81? .
YES - Go to step 2.
body ground.
111
Fig. 42: Checking Continuity Between No. 10 Terminal Of 22P Connector & Body Ground
YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire between the audio-HVAC display panel and the
evaporator temperature sensor.
RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING

Is the fuse OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
2. Disconnect the recirculation control motor 7P (4-door) or 5P (2-door) connector.
4. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 (4-door) or No. 5 (2-door) terminal of the recirculation control
motor 7P (4-door) or 5P (2-door) connector and body ground.
111
Fig. 43: Measuring Voltage Between No. 1 Terminal Of Recirculation Control Motor & Body
Ground (4-Door)
111
Fig. 44: Measuring Voltage Between No.5 Terminal Of Recirculation Control Motor & Body
Ground (2-Door)
YES - Go to step 5.
6. Test the recirculation control motor.
 4-door (see 4-door)
 2-door (see 2-door) )
Is the recirculation control motor OK?
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Replace the recirculation control motor.
8. Check for continuity between the No. 7 and No. 8 terminals of audio-HVAC display panel 22P
connector and body ground individually.
111
Fig. 45: Checking For Continuity Between No. 7 And No. 8 Terminals & Body Ground
Individually
and the recirculation control motor.
NO - Go to step 9.
9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the same wires for voltage.
111
Fig. 46: Checking Wires For Voltage

recirculation control motor. This short may also damage the audio-HVAC display panel. Repair
the short to power before replacing the audio-HVAC display panel.
NO - Go to step 10.
11. Check for continuity between the following terminals of audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector
and the recirculation control motor 7P (4-door) or 5P (2-door) connector.
AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY PANEL 22P CONNECTOR AND RECIRCULATION CONTROL

MOTOR 7P (4-DOOR) CONNECTOR
22P 7P
No. 7 No. 7
No. 8 No. 5
111
Connector (4-Door)
AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY PANEL 22P CONNECTOR AND RECIRCULATION CONTROL

MOTOR 5P (2-DOOR) CONNECTOR
22P 5P
No. 7 No. 1
No. 8 No. 2
111
Connector (2-Door)
and at the recirculation control motor 7P (4-door) or 5P (2-door) connector. If the connections
are good, substitute a known-good audio-HVAC display panel, and recheck. If the
NO - Repair any open in the wire(s) between the audio-HVAC display panel and the
AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY PANEL POWER AND GROUND CIRCUIT

TROUBLESHOOTING
111
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
4. Measure the voltage between the No. 20 terminal of audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector and
body ground.
& Body Ground
YES - Go to step 5.
audio-HVAC display panel.
body ground.
111
Fig. 50: Checking For Continuity Between No. 22 Terminal Of Audio-HVAC Display Panel
YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector.
If the connections are good, substitute a known-good audio-HVAC display panel, and recheck.
If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the original audio-HVAC display panel.
NO - Check for an open in the wire between the audio-HVAC display panel and body ground.
If the wire is OK, check for poor ground at G503.
A/C CONDENSER FAN CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING
NOTE: Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the radiator fan and/or the A/C
compressor is inoperative. Refer to SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX.
1. Check the No. 9 (20A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box, and the No. 30 (7.5A) fuse in the under-
Are the fuses OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
111

2. Remove the A/C condenser fan relay from the under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it (see POWER
RELAY TEST ).
Is the relay OK?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Replace the A/C condenser fan relay.
3. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of the A/C condenser fan relay 4P socket and body
ground.
Fig. 51: Measuring Voltage Between No. 1 Terminal Of A/C Condenser Fan Relay & Body
Ground
YES - Go to step 4.
4. Connect the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the A/C condenser fan relay 4P socket with a jumper wire.
111
Fig. 52: Connecting No. 1 And No. 2 Terminals Of A/C Condenser Fan Relay 4P Socket With
Jumper Wire
Does the A/C condenser fan run?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Go to step 8.
ground.
111
Fig. 53: Measuring Voltage Between No. 3 Terminal Of A/C Condenser Fan Relay And Body
Ground
YES - Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.

A/C condenser fan relay.
9. Disconnect the A/C condenser fan 2P connector.
10. Check for continuity between the No. 2 terminal of the A/C condenser fan relay 4P socket and the No.
2 terminal of the A/C condenser fan 2P connector.
111
Fig. 54: Checking For Continuity Between No. 2 Terminal Of A/C Condenser Fan Relay 4P
Socket & 2P Socket

NO - Repair open in the wire between the A/C condenser fan relay and the A/C condenser fan.
11. Check for continuity between the No. 1 terminal of the A/C condenser fan 2P connector and body
ground.
111
Fig. 55: Checking For Continuity Between No. 1 Terminal Of A/C Condenser Fan 2P Connector
And Body Ground
YES - Replace the A/C condenser fan motor.

NO - Check for an open in the wire between the A/C condenser fan and body ground. If the
RADIATOR AND A/C CONDENSER FAN COMMON CIRCUIT

TROUBLESHOOTING
NOTE:  Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if only one fan is

111
inoperative, or if the A/C compressor is inoperative. Refer to SYMPTOM

1. Check the No. 9 (20A) and No. 11 (20A) fuses in the under-hood fuse/relay box, and the No. 30
(7.5A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
2. Remove the A/C condenser fan relay from the under-hood fuse/relay box.
ground.
111
Fig. 56: Measuring Voltage Between No. 3 Terminal Of A/C Condenser Fan Relay & Body
Ground
YES - Go to step 5.
A/C condenser fan relay.
6. Reinstall the A/C condenser fan relay.
7. Make sure the A/C switch is OFF, and the engine coolant temperature is below 199°F (93°C).
9. Using a backprobe set, measure the voltage between the No. 12 terminal of ECM/PCM connector E
(31P) and body ground with the ECM/PCM connectors connected.
111
Fig. 57: Measuring Voltage Between No. 12 Terminal Of ECM/PCM Connector E (31P) And
Body Ground
YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at terminal E12 of the ECM/PCM connector E
(31P). If the connections are good, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, and recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away, replace the original ECM/PCM.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the radiator fan relay, the A/C condenser fan relay, and
the ECM/PCM.
NOTE: After replacing the ECM/PCM, do the following items:
 ECM/PCM idle learn procedure (see ECM/PCM IDLE LEARN

PROCEDURE ).
 Reset the power window control unit (see RESETTING THE
POWER WINDOW CONTROL UNIT ).
 Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and navigation
system, then enter the customer's radio station presets.
111
A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING
NOTE:  Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the fans are also
inoperative. Refer to SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX.
1. Check the No. 12 (7.5A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box, and the No. 30 (7.5A) fuse in the
Are the fuses OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
2. Check the engine coolant temperature, throttle position, and idle speed (use the HDS PGM-FI data list
if possible).
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

ECT Sensor 169-194°F (76-90°C)
TPS About 0.5
More than 700 AT
RPM MT
More than 800
Is the coolant temperature, throttle position, and idle speed OK?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Troubleshoot and repair the cause of the high engine coolant temperature, low idle, or
excessively high throttle position sensor reading.
3. Remove the A/C compressor clutch relay from the under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it (see
POWER RELAY TEST ).
Is the relay OK?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Replace the A/C compressor clutch relay.
4. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of the A/C compressor clutch relay 4P socket and
body ground.
111
Fig. 58: Measuring Voltage Between No. 1 Terminal Of A/C Compressor Clutch Relay & Body
Ground
YES - Go to step 5.
5. Connect the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the A/C compressor clutch relay 4P socket with a jumper
wire.
111
Fig. 59: Connecting No. 1 And No. 2 Terminals Of A/C Compressor Clutch Relay With Jumper
Wire
Does the A/C compressor clutch click ?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Go to step 14.
8. Measure the voltage between the No. 4 terminal of the A/C compressor clutch relay 4P socket and
body ground.
111
Fig. 60: Measuring Voltage Between No. 4 Terminal Of A/C Compressor Clutch Relay & Body
Ground
YES - Go to step 9.
A/C compressor clutch relay.
10. Reinstall the A/C compressor clutch relay.
11. Make sure the A/C switch is OFF.
13. Using a backprobe set, measure the voltage between the No. 18 terminal of ECM/PCM connector E
(31P) and body ground with the ECM/PCM connectors connected.
111
Fig. 61: Measuring Voltage Between No. 18 Terminal Of ECM/PCM Connector E (31P) & Body
Ground
YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at terminal E18 of the ECM/PCM connector E
(31P). If the connections are good, substitute a known-good ECM/PCM, and recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away, replace the original ECM/PCM.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the A/C compressor clutch relay and the ECM/PCM.
15. Disconnect the A/C compressor clutch 1P connector.
16. Check for continuity between the No. 2 terminal of the A/C compressor clutch relay 4P socket and the
No. 1 terminal of the A/C compressor clutch 1P connector.
111
Fig. 62: Checking Continuity Between No. 2 Terminal Of A/C Compressor Clutch Relay & No.1
Of A/C Clutch 1P Connector
YES - Check the A/C compressor clutch clearance, and the A/C compressor clutch field coil
(see A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH CHECK ). Repair as needed.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the A/C compressor clutch relay and the A/C compressor
clutch.
A/C PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING
NOTE:  Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the following items are
operative; A/C condenser fan, radiator fan, A/C compressor, or if the
heater is inoperative. Refer to SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX.
111
1. Check for body DTCs in test mode A of the MICS (see TROUBLESHOOTING - B-CAN SYSTEM
Are the any DTCs indicated?
YES - Do the appropriate troubleshooting for the DTC indicated.

NO - Go to step 2.
2. Disconnect the A/C pressure switch 2P connector.
4. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of the A/C pressure switch 2P connector and body
ground.
Fig. 63: Measuring Voltage Between No. 1 Terminal Of A/C Pressure Switch 2P Connector And
Body Ground
111
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Go to step 13.
6. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the A/C pressure switch.
111
Fig. 64: Checking For Continuity Between No. 1 And No. 2 Terminals Of A/C Pressure Switch
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Go to step 14.
7. Reconnect the A/C pressure switch 2P connector.
10. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of audio-HVAC display panel 22P connector and
body ground.
And Body Ground

NO - Repair open in the wire between the audio-HVAC display panel and the A/C pressure
switch.
111
12. Measure the resistance between the No. 9 and No. 10 terminals of the audio-HVAC display panel 22P
connector.
Fig. 66: Measuring Resistance Between No. 9 And No. 10 Terminals Of Audio-HVAC Display
Panel 22P Connector
Is the resistance less than 24 k ohms?
and at the A/C pressure switch 2P connector. If the connections are good, substitute a known-
NO - Repair cause of high resistance in the evaporator temperature circuit.
13. Measure the voltage between the No. 2 terminal of under-hood fuse/relay box connector H (14P) and
body ground with the under-hood fuse/relay box connectors connected.
111
Fig. 67: Measuring Voltage Between No. 2 Terminal Of Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Connector
& Body Ground
YES - Repair open in the wire between the under-hood fuse/relay box and the A/C pressure
switch.
NO - Check for loose or poor connections at the No. 2 terminal of the under-hood fuse/relay
box. If the connections are OK, replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.
14. Check for proper A/C system pressure.
Is the pressure within specifications?
YES - Replace the A/C pressure switch.

NO - Repair the A/C pressure problem.
AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR TEST

4-DOOR
1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the air mix control motor.
111
NOTE: Incorrectly applying power and ground to the air mix control motor will
damage it. Follow the instructions carefully.
2. Connect battery power to the No. 1 terminal of the air mix control motor, and ground the No. 2
terminal; the air mix control motor should run, and stop at Max Cool. If it doesn't, reverse the
connections; the air mix control motor should run, and stop at Max Hot.
3. If the air mix control motor did not run in step 2, remove it, then check the air mix control linkage and
door for smooth movement.
 If the linkage and door move smoothly, replace the air mix control motor.
 If the air mix control motor runs smoothly, go to step 4.
Fig. 68: Checking Air Mix Control Motor

4. Measure the resistance between the No. 5 and No. 7 terminals. It should be between 4.2 to 7.8 k ohms.
5. Reconnect the air mix control motor 7P connector, then turn the ignition switch ON (II).
111
Max Hot-about 4.5 V
7. If either the resistance or voltage readings are not as specified, replace the air mix control motor.
2-DOOR
1. Disconnect the 5P connector from the air mix control motor.
NOTE: Incorrectly applying power and ground to the air mix control motor will
2. Connect battery power to the No. 1 terminal of the air mix control motor, and ground the No. 2
terminal; the air mix control motor should run, and stop at Max Hot. If it doesn't, reverse the
connections; the air mix control motor should run, and stop at Max Cool.
3. If the air mix control motor did not run in step 2, remove it, then check the air mix control linkage and
door for smooth movement.
 If the linkage and door move smoothly, replace the air mix control motor.
 If the air mix control motor runs smoothly, go to step 4.
111
Fig. 69: Checking Air Mix Control Motor

4. Measure the resistance between the No. 5 and No. 7 terminals. It should be between 4.2 to 7.8 k ohms.
5. Reconnect the air mix control motor 7P connector, then turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Max Hot-about 4.0 V
7. If either the resistance or voltage readings are not as specified, replace the air mix control motor.
AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR REPLACEMENT

111
4-DOOR
1. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the air mix control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping screws
and the air mix control motor from the heater unit.
Fig. 70: Disconnecting Connector From Air Mix Control Motor

2-DOOR
1. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the air mix control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping screws
and the air mix control motor from the heater unit.
111
Fig. 71: Disconnecting Connector From Air Mix Control Motor

MODE CONTROL MOTOR TEST

4-DOOR
1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the mode control motor.
NOTE: Incorrectly applying power and ground to the mode control motor will
2. Connect battery power to the No. 2 terminal of the mode control motor, and ground the No. 1
terminal; the mode control motor should run smoothly, and stop at Vent. If it doesn't, reverse the
connections; the mode control motor should run smoothly, and stop at Defrost. When the mode
control motor stops running, disconnect battery power immediately.
111
Fig. 72: Connecting Battery Power To No. 2 Terminal Of Mode Control Motor And Ground No.
1 Terminal (4-Door)
3. If the mode control motor did not run in step 2, remove it, then check the mode control linkage and
doors for smooth movement.
 If the linkage and doors move smoothly, replace the mode control motor.
 If the linkage or doors stick or bind, repair them as needed.
 If the mode control motor runs smoothly, go to step 4.
4. Use a digital multimeter with an output of 1 mA or less at the 20 k ohms range. With the mode control
motor running as in step 2, check for continuity between the No. 3, 4, 5 and 6 terminals and the No. 7
terminal individually. There should be continuity for a moment at each terminal as the motor moves
past the switch's terminal.
5. If there is no continuity for a moment at each terminal, replace the mode control motor.
2-DOOR
1. Disconnect the 10P connector from the mode control motor.
NOTE: Incorrectly applying power and ground to the mode control motor will
111
2. Connect battery power to the No. 2 terminal of the mode control motor, and ground the No. 1
terminal; the mode control motor should run smoothly, and stop at Vent. If it doesn't, reverse the
connections; the mode control motor should run smoothly, and stop at Defrost. When the mode
control motor stops running, disconnect battery power immediately.
Fig. 73: Connecting Battery Power To No. 2 Terminal Of Mode Control Motor And Ground No.
1 Terminal (2-Door)
3. If the mode control motor did not run in step 2, remove it, then check the mode control linkage and
doors for smooth movement.
 If the linkage and doors move smoothly, replace the mode control motor.
 If the mode control motor runs smoothly, go to step 4.
4. Use a digital multimeter with an output of 1 mA or less at the 20 k ohms range. With the mode control
motor running as in step 2, check for continuity between the No. 6, 7, 8 and 9 terminals and the No.
10 terminal individually. There should be continuity for a moment at each terminal as the motor
moves past the switch's terminal.
5. If there is no continuity for a moment at each terminal, replace the mode control motor.
MODE CONTROL MOTOR REPLACEMENT

111
4-DOOR
1. Open the glove box. Remove the damper from the glove box, then let the glove box hang down (see
GLOVE BOX REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).
2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the mode control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping screws
and the mode control motor from the heater unit.
Fig. 74: Disconnecting Connector From Mode Control Motor (4-Door)

3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal. After installation, make sure the motor runs
smoothly.
2-DOOR
2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the mode control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping screws
and the mode control motor from the heater unit.
111
Fig. 75: Disconnecting Connector From Mode Control Motor (2-Door)

3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal. After installation, make sure the motor runs
smoothly.
RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR TEST

4-DOOR
1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the recirculation control motor.
NOTE: Incorrectly applying power and ground to the recirculation control

motor will damage it. Follow the instructions carefully.
2. Connect battery power to the No. 1 terminal of the recirculation control motor, and ground the No. 5
or No. 7 terminals; the recirculation control motor should run smoothly. To avoid damaging the
recirculation control motor, do not reverse power and ground. Disconnect the No. 5 or No. 7 terminals
from ground; the recirculation control motor should stop at Fresh (when the No. 7 terminal is
disconnected) or Recirculate (when the No. 5 terminal is disconnected). Don't cycle the recirculation
control motor for a long time.
111
Fig. 76: Connecting Battery Power To No. 1 Terminal Of Recirculation Control Motor And
Ground No. 5 Or No. 7 Terminals (4-Door)
3. If the recirculation control motor did not run in step 2., remove it, then check the recirculation control
linkage and doors for smooth movement.
 If the linkage and doors move smoothly, replace the recirculation control motor.
2-DOOR
1. Disconnect the 5P connector from the recirculation control motor.
NOTE: Incorrectly applying power and ground to the recirculation control

motor will damage it. Follow the instructions carefully.
2. Connect battery power to the No. 5 terminal of the recirculation control motor, and ground the No. 1
or No. 2 terminals; the recirculation control motor should run smoothly. To avoid damaging the
recirculation control motor, do not reverse power and ground. Disconnect the No. 1 or No. 2 terminals
from ground; the recirculation control motor should stop at Fresh (when the No. 1 terminal is
disconnected) or Recirculate (when the No. 2 terminal is disconnected). Don't cycle the recirculation
111
control motor for a long time.
Fig. 77: Connecting Battery Power To No. 5 Terminal Of Recirculation Control Motor &
Ground No. 1 Or No. 2 (2-Door)
3. If the recirculation control motor did not run in step 2, remove it, then check the recirculation control
linkage and doors for smooth movement.
 If the linkage and doors move smoothly, replace the recirculation control motor.
RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR REPLACEMENT

4-DOOR
111

2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the recirculation control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping
screws and the recirculation control motor from the blower unit.
Fig. 78: Disconnecting Connector From Recirculation Control Motor (4-Door)

2-DOOR
2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the recirculation control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping
screws and the recirculation control motor from the blower unit.
111
Fig. 79: Disconnecting Connector From Recirculation Control Motor (2-Door)

EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR TEST

1. First, dip the sensor in ice water (32°F) (0°C) and measure the resistance between its terminals.
111
Fig. 80: Measuring Resistance Between Terminals Dipping Sensor In Ice Water
2. Next, pour warm water on the sensor and check for a change in resistance.
3. Compare the resistance readings with the specifications in the graph shown in Fig. 81; the resistance
should be within the specifications.
111
Fig. 81: Resistance To Temperature Graph

EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT

2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the evaporator temperature sensor (B), then remove the
connector clip (C). Remove the self-tapping screw, and carefully pull out the evaporator temperature
sensor.
111
Fig. 82: Disconnecting Connector From Evaporator Temperature Sensor (4-Door)

Fig. 83: Disconnecting Connector From Evaporator Temperature Sensor (2-Door)

111
POWER TRANSISTOR TEST

1. Disconnect the 4P connector from the power transistor.
2. Measure the resistance between the No. 3 and No. 4 (4-door) or No. 1 and No. 2 (2-door) terminals of
the power transistor. It should be about 1.4-1.5 k ohms.
 If the resistance is within the specifications, go to step 3.
 If the resistance is not within the specifications, replace the power transistor.
111
Fig. 84: Measuring Resistance Between No. 3 And No. 4 Terminals Of Power Transistor
(4-Door)
111
Fig. 85: Measuring Resistance Between No. 1 And No. 2 Terminals Of Power Transistor
(2-Door)
111
3. Carefully release the lock tab on the No. 1 (4-door) or No. 4 (2-door) terminal (BLU/YEL) (A) in the
4P connector, then remove the terminal and insulate it from body ground.
Fig. 86: Releasing Lock Tab No. 1 Terminal In 4P Connector (4-Door)

111
Fig. 87: Releasing Lock Tab No. 4 Terminal In 4P Connector (2-Door)

4. Reconnect the 4P connector to the power transistor.

5. Supply 12 volts to the No. 1 (4-door) or No. 4 (2-door) cavity of the power transistor connector with a
jumper wire.
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check that the blower motor runs.
 If the blower motor does not run, replace the power transistor.
 If the blower motor runs, the power transistor is OK.
DUST AND POLLEN FILTER REPLACEMENT

111
The dust and pollen filter should be replaced every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months, whichever
comes first. Replace the filter more often if the airflow is less than usual, or if the vehicle is driven in areas
that have high concentrations of soot from industry or diesel powered vehicles.
1. Open the glove box. Remove the damper from the glove box then let the glove box hang down (see
2. Remove the dust and pollen filter assembly from the evaporator case.
Fig. 88: Removing Dust And Pollen Filter Assembly From Evaporator Case (4-Door)
111
Fig. 89: Removing Dust And Pollen Filter Assembly From Evaporator Case (2-Door)
3. Remove the filter (A) from the housing (B), and replace the filter.
111
Fig. 90: Removing Filter From Housing

4. Install the filter in the reverse order of removal.
Make sure that there is no air leaking out of the evaporator.
BLOWER UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

4-DOOR
1. Remove the glove box (see GLOVE BOX REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ), and the passenger's
kick panel (see 4-DOOR - FRONT DOOR SILL AREA ).
2. Remove the connector clips (A), the wire harness clip (B), and bolt. Cut the plastic cross brace (C) in
the glove box opening with diagonal cutters in the area shown in Fig. 91. Retain these parts to be
reinstalled later.
111
Fig. 91: Cutting Plastic Cross Brace With Diagonal Cutters

3. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the blower motor, and the recirculation control motor, then
remove the wire harness clip (B). Remove the mounting nuts, the mounting bolts and the blower unit
(C).
111
Fig. 92: Disconnecting Connectors From Blower Motor (4-Door)

4. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal.
Make sure that there is no air leakage.
2-DOOR
1. Remove the glove box (see GLOVE BOX REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ), and the passenger's
kick panel (see TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION - DOOR AREA ).
2. Remove the connector clips (A), the wire harness clip (B), and bolt. Cut the plastic cross brace (C) in
the glove box opening with diagonal cutters in the area shown in Fig. 93. Retain these parts to be
reinstalled later.
111
Fig. 93: Cutting Plastic Brace With Diagonal Cutters

3. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the blower motor, and the recirculation control motor. Remove
the mounting nuts, the mounting bolts and the blower unit (B).
111
Fig. 94: Disconnecting Connectors From Blower Motor (2-Door)

4. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal.
Make sure that there is no air leakage.
BLOWER UNIT COMPONENT REPLACEMENT

Note these items when overhauling the blower unit:
 The recirculation control motor (A), blower motor cooling hose (B) (2-door), blower motor cover (C)
(2-door), the blower motor (D) and the dust and pollen filter (E) can be replaced without removing the
blower unit.
 Before reassembly, make sure the recirculation control linkage and doors move smoothly without
111
binding.
 After reassembly, make sure the recirculation control motor runs smoothly, 4-door (see 4-door) or 2-
door (see 2-door).
Fig. 95: Replacing Blower Unit Component (4-Door)

2-door:
111
Fig. 96: Replacing Blower Unit Component (2-Door)

HEATER UNIT/CORE REPLACEMENT

before performing repairs of service.
3. With air conditioning; disconnect the suction and receiver lines from the evaporator core, 4-door (see
4-DOOR ) or 2-door (see 2-DOOR ).
4. From under the hood, open the cable clamp (A), then disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the
heater valve arm (C). Turn the heater valve arm to the fully opened position as shown in Fig. 97.
111
Fig. 97: Disconnecting Heater Valve Cable From Heater Valve Arm
5. When the engine is cool, drain the engine coolant from the radiator (see COOLANT CHECK ).
6. Slide the hose clamps (A) back, then disconnect the inlet heater hose (B) and the outlet heater hose
(C) from the heater unit. Engine coolant will run out when the hoses are disconnected; drain it into a
clean drip pan. Be sure not to let coolant spill on the electrical parts or the painted surfaces. If any
coolant spills, rinse it off immediately.
111
Fig. 98: Disconnecting Hose Clamps

7. Remove the mounting nut from the heater unit.
Take care not to damage or bend the fuel lines and the brake lines, etc.
111
Fig. 99: Removing Mounting Nut From Heater Unit

8. Remove the dashboard (see DASHBOARD/STEERING HANGER BEAM

9. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the air mix control motor, the evaporator temperature sensor, the
power transistor, and the recirculation control motor, then remove the wire harness clips (B), the
connector clip (C) and the wire harness (D). Remove the heater ducts (E), then remove the mounting
nuts and the blower-heater unit (F).
111
Fig. 100: Disconnecting Connectors From Air Mix Control Motor (4-Door)
111
Fig. 101: Disconnecting Connectors From Air Mix Control Motor (2-Door)
10. Remove the self-tapping screws, the evaporator temperature sensor (C) and the joint duct A, then
remove the self-tapping screws and the joint duct B (4-door). Remove the self-tapping screws, then
remove the passenger's heater outlet (D), and the heater core cover (E). Remove the self-tapping
screws and the mode control motor (F) (2-door). Remove the self-tapping screws, the heater pipe
brackets (G), the grommets (H) and carefully pull out the heater core (I) so you don't bend the inlet
and outlet pipes.
111
Fig. 102: Removing Self-Tapping Screws, Evaporator Temperature Sensor And Joint Duct A (4-
Door)
111
Fig. 103: Removing Self-Tapping Screws, Evaporator Temperature Sensor And Joint Duct A (2-
Door)
11. Install the heater core and the evaporator core (with A/C) in the reverse order of removal.
12. Install the heater unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater hoses, and install the hose clamps securely.
 Refill the cooling system with engine coolant (see COOLANT CHECK ).
 Adjust the heater valve cable (see HEATER VALVE CABLE ADJUSTMENT ).
 Make sure that there is no coolant leakage.
 Make sure that there is no air leakage.
 With air conditioning: refer to evaporator core replacement (see EVAPORATOR CORE
111
REPLACEMENT ).
 Reset the power window control unit (see RESETTING THE POWER WINDOW
CONTROL UNIT ).
HEATER VALVE CABLE ADJUSTMENT

1. From under the hood, open the cable clamp (A), then disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the
heater valve arm (C).
Fig. 104: Opening Cable Clamp And Disconnecting Heater Valve Cable
2. From under the dash, disconnect the heater valve cable housing from the cable clamp (A), and
disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the air mix control linkage (C).
111
Fig. 105: Disconnecting Heater Valve Cable From Cable Clamp (4-Door)
111
Fig. 106: Disconnecting Heater Valve Cable From Cable Clamp (2-Door)
3. Set the temperature control dial to Max Cool (LO) with the ignition switch ON (II).
4. Attach the heater valve cable (B) to the air mix control linkage (C) as shown in step 2. Hold the end of
the heater valve cable housing against the stop (D), then snap the heater valve cable housing into the
cable clamp (A).
NOTE:  Insert the ring from the end of the cable securely to the linkage
pin.
 4-door: Insert the ring over the nail, making sure it is correctly
attached.
 2-door: Insert the ring all the way to the base of the pin.
5. From under the hood, turn the heater valve arm (C) to the fully closed position and hold it as shown in
Fig. 107. Attach the heater valve cable (B) to the heater valve arm, and gently pull on the heater valve
111
cable housing to take up any slack, then install the heater valve cable housing into the cable clamp
(A).
Fig. 107: Turning Heater Valve Arm To Fully Closes Position And Hold
EVAPORATOR CORE REPLACEMENT

4-DOOR
1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/charging station (see REFRIGERANT

RECOVERY ).
2. Remove the bolt, then disconnect the suction line (A) and the receiver line (B) from the evaporator
core.
111
Fig. 108: Disconnecting Suction Line & Receiver Line

3. Remove the blower unit, 4-door (see 4-DOOR ) or 2-door (see 2-DOOR ).
TEST ).
5. Disconnect the connector (A) from the power transistor, then remove the self-tapping screws, and the
expansion valve cover (B).
111
Fig. 109: Disconnecting Connector From Power Transistor

6. Carefully pull out the evaporator core (A) and the plate (B) without bending the pipes.
111
Fig. 110: Pulling Out Evaporator Core And Plate

7. Install the core in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
111
 If you're installing a new evaporator core, add refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8) (see A/C
REFRIGERANT OIL REPLACEMENT ).
 Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
installing them. Be sure to use the correct O-rings for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
absorption.
 Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if the refrigerant oil
contacts the paint, wash it off immediately.
 Charge the system (see SYSTEM CHARGING ).
2-DOOR

RECOVERY ).
2. Remove the bolt, then disconnect the suction line (A) and the receiver line (B) from the evaporator
core.
Fig. 111: Disconnecting Suction Line And Receiver Line (2-Door)

3. Remove the blower unit, 4-door (see 4-DOOR ) or 2-door (see 2-DOOR ).
111
TEST ).
5. Disconnect the connector (A) from the power transistor, then remove the self-tapping screws, and the
expansion valve cover (B).
Fig. 112: Disconnecting Connector From Power Transistor (2-Door)

6. Carefully pull out the evaporator core without bending the pipes.
111
Fig. 113: Pulling Out Evaporator Core

7. Install the core in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 If you're installing a new evaporator core, add refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8) (see A/C
absorption.
111
A/C COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT

1. If the A/C compressor is marginally operable, run the engine at idle speed, and let the air conditioning
work for a few minutes, then shut the engine off.
RECOVERY ).
6. Remove the A/C compressor clutch connector (A) from the A/C condenser fan shroud, then
disconnect the connector. Remove the bolt and the nut, then disconnect the suction line (B) and
discharge line (C) from the A/C compressor. Plug or cap the lines immediately after disconnecting
them to avoid moisture and dust contamination.
111
Fig. 114: Removing A/C Compressor Clutch Connector From A/C Condenser Fan Shroud
7. Remove the mounting bolts and the A/C compressor. Be careful not to damage the radiator fins when
removing the A/C compressor.
Fig. 115: Removing Mounting Bolts And A/C Compressor

8. Install the A/C compressor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 If you're installing a new A/C compressor, you must calculate the amount of refrigerant oil to be
removed from it (see A/C SERVICE TIPS AND PRECAUTIONS ).
 Use refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8) for HFC-134a DENSO piston type A/C compressor
only.
 To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to the container once dispensed, and never mix it
with other refrigerant oils.
absorption.
111
 Be careful not to damage the radiator fins when installing the A/C compressor and the A/C
condenser fan shroud.
 Reset the power window control unit (see RESETTING THE POWER WINDOW
CONTROL UNIT ).
 Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio, and the navigation system, then enter the customer's
A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH CHECK

1. Check the pressure plate for discoloration, peeling, or other damage. If there is damage, replace the
clutch set (see A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH OVERHAUL ).
2. Check the pulley bearing play and drag by rotating the pulley by hand. Replace the clutch set with a
new one if it is noisy or has excessive play/drag (see A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH
OVERHAUL ).
111
Fig. 116: Checking Pulley Bearing Play And Dragging By Rotating Pulley By Hand
3. Measure the clearance between the pulley (A) and the pressure plate (B) with a dial indicator. Zero
out the indicator, then apply battery voltage to the A/C compressor clutch. Measure the movement of
the pressure plate when the voltage is applied. If the clearance is not within the specified limits, the
pressure plate must be reshimmed (see A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH OVERHAUL ).
111
Clearance: 0.35-0.6 mm (0.014-0.024 in.)
NOTE: The shims are available in three thicknesses: 0.1 mm, 0.3 mm and 0.5
mm.
Fig. 117: Measuring Clearance Between Pulley And Pressure Plate With Dial Indicator
4. Check resistance of the field coil. If resistance is not within specifications, replace the field coil (see
A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH OVERHAUL ).
Field Coil Resistance: 3.9-4.3 ohms at 68°F (20°C)
111
Fig. 118: Checking Resistance Of Field Coil

A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH OVERHAUL

A/C clutch holder, Robinair 10204 or Kent-Moore J37872, or Honda Tool and Equipment KMT-J33939,
commercially available
1. Remove the center bolt (A) while holding the pressure plate with a commercially available A/C clutch
holder (B).
111
Fig. 119: Removing Center Bolt While Holding Pressure Plate

2. Remove the pressure plate (A) and shim(s) (B), taking care not to lose the shim(s). If the clutch needs
adjustment, increase or decrease the number and thickness of shims as necessary, then reinstall the
pressure plate, and recheck its clearance (see A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH CHECK ).
NOTE: The shims are available in three thicknesses: 0.1 mm, 0.3 mm and 0.5
mm.
111
Fig. 120: Removing Pressure Plate And Shim(s)

3. If you are replacing the field coil, remove the snap ring (A) with snap ring pliers, then remove the
pulley (B). Be careful not to damage the pulley or the A/C compressor.
111
Fig. 121: Removing Snap Ring With Snap Ring Pliers

4. Remove the screw, the wire harness clip (A), and the holder (B). Remove the snap ring (C) with snap
ring pliers, then remove the field coil (D). Be careful not to damage the field coil or the A/C
compressor.
111
Fig. 122: Removing Field Coil

5. Reassemble the clutch in the reverse order of disassembly, and note these items:
 Install the field coil with the wire side facing down, and align the boss on the field coil with the
hole in the A/C compressor.
 Clean the pulley and A/C compressor sliding surfaces with contact cleaner or other non-
petroleum solvent.
 Install new snap rings, note the installation direction, and make sure they are fully seated in the
groove.
 Make sure that the pulley turns smoothly after it's reassembled.
 Route and clamp the wires properly or they can be damaged by the pulley.
111
A/C COMPRESSOR RELIEF VALVE REPLACEMENT

RECOVERY ).
2. Remove the relief valve (A) and the O-ring (B). Plug the opening to keep foreign matter from entering
the system and the A/C compressor oil from running out.
Fig. 123: Removing Relief Valve And O-Ring

3. Clean the mating surfaces.

4. Replace the O-ring with a new one at the relief valve, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
installing it.
5. Remove the plug, and install and tighten the relief valve.
6. Charge the system (see SYSTEM CHARGING ).
111
A/C CONDENSER REPLACEMENT

RECOVERY ).
2. Remove the front bulkhead cover.
3. Remove the clips (A), then remove the air intake cover (B) and the air intake tube or duct (C).
Fig. 124: Removing Air Intake Cover And Air Intake Tube Or Duct
4. Remove the bolts and radiator upper mount brackets.
111
Fig. 125: Removing Radiator Upper Mount Brackets

5. Remove the bolt, then disconnect the receiver line (A) from the A/C condenser. Disconnect the A/C
pressure switch connector (B).
111
Fig. 126: Disconnecting Receiver Line From A/C Condenser

6. Remove the bolts from the A/C condenser.
111
Fig. 127: Removing Bolts From A/C Condenser

7. Remove the nut, then disconnect the discharge line from the A/C condenser.
111
Fig. 128: Disconnecting Discharge Line From A/C Condenser

8. Remove the A/C condenser by lifting it up. Be careful not to damage the radiator and A/C condenser
fins when removing the A/C condenser.
111
Fig. 129: Removing A/C Condenser By Lifting It Up

9. Install the A/C condenser in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 If you're installing a new A/C condenser, add refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8) (see A/C
absorption.
 Be careful not to damage the radiator or the A/C condenser fins when installing the A/C
condenser.
111
RECEIVER/DRYER DESICCANT REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the A/C condenser (see A/C COMPRESSOR RELIEF VALVE REPLACEMENT ).
2. Remove the bolts from the A/C condenser, then remove the receiver/dryer (A), the bracket (B) and the
O-rings (C).
Fig. 130: Removing Receiver/Dryer

3. Install the receiver/dryer in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
Replace the O-rings with new ones, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil (DENSO ND-OIL 8)
before installing them. Be sure to use the correct O-rings for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
REFRIGERANT RECOVERY

111

Use only service equipment that is U.L-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to
remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the air conditioning system.
1. Connect a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station (A) to the high-pressure service port
(B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as shown in Fig. 131, following the equipment
manufacturer's instructions.
111
Fig. 131: Connecting R-134a Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling/Charging Station To High-

Pressure Service Port
2. Measure the amount of refrigerant oil removed from the A/C system after the recovery process is
completed. Be sure to put the same amount of new refrigerant oil back into the A/C system before
111
charging.
SYSTEM EVACUATION

Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to
1. When an A/C System has been opened to the atmosphere, such as during installation or repair, it must
be evacuated using a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station. (If the system has been
open for several days, the receiver/dryer should be replaced, and the system should be evacuated for
several hours.)
manufacturer's instructions. Evacuate the system.
111

3. If the low-pressure does not reach more than 93.3 kPa (700 mmHg, 27.6 in.Hg) in 15 minutes, there is
111
probably a leak in the system. Partially charge the system, and check for leaks (see step 3 in
Refrigerant Leak Test ).
SYSTEM CHARGING

Use only service equipment that is U.L-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to
111

2. Evacuate the system (see SYSTEM EVACUATION ).
111
3. Add the same amount of new refrigerant oil to the system that was removed during recovery. Use only
DENSO ND-OIL 8 refrigerant oil.
4. Charge the system with the specified amount of R-134a refrigerant. Do not overcharge the system; the
compressor will be damaged.
Select the appropriate units of measure for your refrigerant charging station.
Refrigerant Capacity:
500 to 550 g
0.50 to 0.55 kg
1.1 to 1.2 lbs
17.6 to 19.4 oz
5. Check for refrigerant leaks (see REFRIGERANT LEAK TEST ).
6. Check for system performance (see PERFORMANCE TEST ).
REFRIGERANT LEAK TEST

Leak detector, Honda Tool and Equipment YGK-H-10PM commercially available

equipment or vehicle air conditioning system.

111

2. Open high pressure valve to charge the system to the specified capacity, then close the supply valve,
111
and disconnect the charging station fittings.
Select the appropriate units of measure for your refrigerant charging station.
Refrigerant Capacity:
500 to 550 g
0.50 to 0.55 kg
1.1 to 1.2 lbs
17.6 to 19.4 oz
3. Check the system for leaks using a R-134a refrigerant leak detector with an accuracy of 14 g (0.5 oz)
per year or better.
4. If you find leaks that require the system to be opened (to repair or replace hoses, fittings, etc.), recover
the system.
5. After checking and repairing leaks, the system must be evacuated.
A/C SYSTEM TEST

PERFORMANCE TEST

equipment or vehicle air conditioning systems.

The performance test will help determine if the air conditioner system is operating within specifications.
1. Connect a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station to the high-pressure service port and
the low-pressure service port, following the equipment manufacturer's instructions.
2. Determine the relative humidity and air temperature.
111

4. Insert a thermometer (A) in the center vent.
Fig. 135: Inserting Thermometer In Center Vent

5. Place a thermometer (B) near the blower unit.

6. Test conditions:
 Avoid direct sunlight.
 Open hood.
 Open front doors.
 Set the temperature control dial to Max Cool, the mode control switch to Vent and the
recirculation control switch to Recirculate.
 Turn the A/C switch on and the fan switch to Max.
 Run the engine at 1,500 rpm.
 No driver or passengers in vehicle.
7. After running the air conditioning for 10 minutes under the above test conditions, read the delivery
temperature from the thermometer in the center vent, the intake temperature near the blower unit, and
111
the high and low system pressure from the A/C gauges.
8. To complete the charts:
 Mark the delivery temperature along the vertical line.
 Mark the intake temperature (ambient air temperature) along the bottom line.
 Draw a line straight up from the air temperature to the humidity.
 Mark a point 10% above and 10% below the humidity level.
 From each point, draw a horizontal line across the delivery temperature.
 The delivery temperature should fall between the two lines.
 Complete the low-side pressure test and high-side pressure test in the same way.
 Any measurements outside the line may indicate the need for further inspection.
Fig. 136: Example Of Temperature And Pressure Chart

111
PRESSURE TEST
PRESSURE TEST REFERENCE

Test results Related symptoms Probable cause Remedy
After stopping A/C Recover, evacuate (see
compressor, pressure SYSTEM
drops about 196 kPa EVACUATION ), and
Air in system
(2.0 kgf/cm2 , 28 psi) recharge with specified
quickly, and then falls amount (see SYSTEM
gradually. CHARGING ).
Discharge (high)
 Clogged A/C
pressure abnormally
condenser or  Clean
high
Reduced or no air flow radiator fins  Check voltage and
through A/C condenser.  A/C condenser or fan rpm.
radiator fan not  Check fan direction.
working properly
Line to A/C condenser Restricted flow of
Restricted lines
is excessively hot. refrigerant in system
High and low-pressures
 Faulty A/C
are balanced soon after
compressor
stopping A/C Replace the A/C
discharge valve
compressor. compressor.
Low side is higher than  Faulty A/C
Discharge pressure compressor seal
abnormally low normal.
Outlet of expansion  Replace
 Faulty expansion
valve is not frosted,  Recover, evacuate,
valve
low-pressure gauge and recharge with
indicates vacuum.  Moisture in system
specified amount.
Expansion valve is not  Frozen expansion  Recover, evacuate,
frosted, and low- valve (Moisture in and recharge with
pressure line is not cold. system) specified amount.
Low-pressure gauge  Faulty expansion  Replace the
indicates vacuum. valve expansion valve.
Suction (low) pressure
abnormally low Run the fan with A/C
Discharge temperature
compressor off, then
is low, and the air flow Frozen evaporator
check evaporator
from vents is restricted.
temperature sensor.
Expansion valve is
Clogged expansion valve Clean or replace.
frosted.
Low-pressure hose and
check joint are cooler Expansion valve open too
Repair or replace.
than the temperature long
around evaporator.
Suction pressure
abnormally high Suction pressure is
Recover, evacuate, and
lowered when A/C Excessive refrigerant in
recharge with specified
condenser is cooled by system
amount.
water.
111
High and low-pressures  Faulty gasket

are equalized as soon as  Faulty high-
the A/C compressor is pressure valve Replace the A/C
stopped, and both  Foreign particle compressor.
gauges fluctuate while stuck in high-
running. pressure valve
 Clogged A/C
condenser or  Clean
Suction and discharge
Reduced air flow radiator fins  Check voltage and
pressures abnormally
through A/C condenser.  A/C condenser or fan rpm.
high
radiator fan not  Check fan direction.
working properly
Low-pressure hose and
Clogged or kinked low-
metal end areas are Repair or replace.
pressure hose parts
Suction and discharge cooler than evaporator.
pressures abnormally Temperature around
low expansion valve is too Clogged high-pressure
Repair or replace.
low compared with that line
around receiver/dryer.
A/C compressor clutch A/C compressor shaft Replace the A/C
is dirty. seal leaking compressor.
A/C compressor bolt(s) Tighten bolt(s) or replace
Leaking around bolt(s)
are dirty. the A/C compressor.
Refrigerant leaks
A/C compressor gasket Replace the A/C
Gasket leaking
is wet with oil. compressor.
Clean A/C fitting and
A/C fitting is dirty. Leaking O-ring.
replace O-ring.
111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Exterior Lights - Accord
Exterior Lights - Accord
Fig. 1: Locating Exterior Lights Components

111
2 августа 2011 г. 16:06:39
Fig. 2: Locating Exterior Lights Components (4-Door - '03-05 Models)

111

111

111

111
Fig. 6: Locating Exterior Lights Components ('03-05 Models)

111
Fig. 7: Locating Exterior Lights Components ('06 Model)

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
USA ('03-05 MODELS):
111
Fig. 8: Exterior Lights Circuit Diagram (1 Of 2)

111

CANADA ('03-05 MODELS):
111

111

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM - LIGHTING SYSTEM

USA ('06-07 MODELS):
111
Fig. 12: Lighting System Circuit Diagram (1 Of 2)

111

CANADA ('06-07 MODELS):
111

111

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM - SIDE MARKER/LICENSE PLATE LIGHTS

4-DOOR ('06-07 MODELS):
111
Fig. 16: Side Marker/License Plate Lights Circuit Diagram (1 Of 2)

111

2-DOOR ('06-07 MODELS):
111

111

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM - BACK-UP LIGHTS
111
Fig. 20: Back-Up Lights Circuit Diagram ('03-05 Models)

111
Fig. 21: Back-Up Lights ('06-07 Model)

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM - BRAKE LIGHTS
111
Fig. 22: Brake Lights Circuit Diagram ('03-05 Models)

111
Fig. 23: 4-Door ('06 Model) Circuit Diagram - Brake Lights Circuit Diagram (4-door - '06 Model)
111
Fig. 24: 2-Door ('06 Model) Circuit Diagram - Brake Lights Circuit Diagram (2-door - '06 Model)
DTC TROUBLESHOOTING
DTC LIST
DTC Description
DTC B1075 Headlight Signal Error
DTC B1078 Daytime Running Lights Signal Error (Canada)
DTC B1079 Daytime Running Lights Malfunction (USA) ('06-
07 models)
DTC B1275 Headlight Switch OFF Position Circuit
111
Malfunction
DTC B1276 Headlight Switch Parking (SMALL) Position
DTC B1277 Headlight Switch AUTO Position Circuit
Malfunction;
DTC B1278 Headlight Switch ON Position Circuit Malfunction
DTC B1279 Headlight Switch DIMMER Position Circuit
Malfunction
DTC B1280 Turn Signal Switch Circuit Malfunction
DTC B1075: HEADLIGHT SIGNAL ERROR

2. Turn the headlights switch from the OFF position to the ON position.
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Intermittent failure, the headlight circuit is OK at this time. Check pinfits and connections.
4. With the headlight switch OFF, select LIGHTING SYSTEM from the HDS, and enter the DATA
LIST.
5. Check the ON/OFF information of the Headlight Switch (BACK-UP) in the DATA LIST.
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Go to step 10.
6. Turn the headlight switch ON.
7. Check the ON/OFF information of the Headlight Switch (BACK-UP) in the DATA LIST.
Is the information Indicator ON?
YES - Troubleshoot DTC B1278: Headlight Switch ON Position Circuit Malfunction .

NO - Go to step 8.
8. Disconnect the relay control module 10P connector (under-hood fuse/relay box connector I) and the
wiper/washer switch 8P connector.
9. Check for continuity between the No. 6 terminal of the relay control module 10P connector and the
No. 1 terminal of the wiper/washer switch (combination switch control unit) 8P connector.
111
& No.1 Terminal Of Wiper/Washer Switch 8P Connector
YES - Faulty combination switch control unit; replace the wiper/washer switch.
NO - Repair an open in the WHT wire.
10. Disconnect the relay control module 10P connector.
11. Check for continuity between the No. 6 terminal of the relay control module 10P connector and body
ground.
111
And Body Ground
YES - Repair a short in the WHT wire.

NO - Faulty combination switch control unit; replace the wiper/washer switch.
DTC B1078:DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS SIGNAL ERROR (CANADA)

3. Operate the parking brake lever.
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Intermittent failure, the daytime running lights system is OK at this time. Check pinfits
and connections.
5. Turn the headlight switch ON, then push the combination light switch forward for high beams.
111
Do both headlights come on?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Go to step 9.
6. Turn the headlight switch OFF.
7. Select LIGHTING SYSTEM from the HDS, and enter the DATA LIST.
8. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRL Relay Command (Canada) in the DATA LIST.
YES - Replace the daytime running lights relay.

NO - Go to the relay control module input test (see RELAY CONTROL MODULE INPUT
TEST ).
9. Check the No. 3 (10 A) or No. 5 (10 A) fuses in the under-hood fuse/relay box.
Are both fuses OK?

10. Check headlight bulbs.
Are both bulbs OK?

NO - Replace the blown bulb and recheck the system.
11. Check for continuity between the No. 2 terminal of the headlight (high beam) 2P connectors and the
No. 8 (left headlight) or No. 10 (right headlight) terminals of the under-hood fuse/relay box 14P
connector H.
111
Fig. 27: Checking Continuity Between No. 2 Terminal Of Headlight (High Beam) 2P Connectors
& No. 8 (Left Headlight) Or No. 10 (Right Headlight) Terminal Of Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box
Connector

NO - Repair an open in the WHT/YEL (left headlight) or WHT/GRN (right headlight) wire.
12. Check for continuity between the No. 1 terminal of the headlight (high beam) 2P connectors and body
ground.
111
Fig. 28: Checking Continuity Between No. 1 Terminal Of Headlight (High Beam) 2P Connectors
And Body Ground
NO - Check the daytime running lights relay (left headlight). If OK, repair an open in the BLK
wire or poor ground (G201, G301).
DTC B1079: DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS MALFUNCTION (USA) ('06-07 MODELS)
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.

3. Make sure the brake pedal position switch is OFF.
4. Make sure the headlight switch is OFF.
6. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
111
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Intermittent failure. The daytime running light system is OK at this time. Check for loose
or poor connections.
7. Turn the headlight switch ON, then push the combination light switch forward for high beams.
Do both headlights come on?
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - If one of the headlights doesn't come on, check the fuse and bulb, and for a poor ground
(G201, G301) or an open in the wire. If both headlights don't come on, go to step 11.
8. Turn the headlight switch OFF.
9. Select LIGHTING SYSTEM from the HDS, and enter the DATA LIST.
10. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRL Command in the DATA LIST.
YES - Go to relay control module input test (see RELAY CONTROL MODULE INPUT
TEST ).
NO - Substitute a known-good daytime running light control unit and recheck the system
11. Check the No. 3 (10 A) and No. 5 (10 A) fuses in the under-hood fuse/relay box.
Are both fuses OK?

NO - Replace the blown fuse, and recheck the system.
12. Check the headlight bulbs.
Are both bulbs OK?

NO - Replace the blown bulb, and recheck the system.
13. Disconnect the 2P connector from each headlight high beam.
14. Disconnect under-hood fuse/relay box connector H (14P).
15. Check for continuity between left headlight high beam 2P connector terminal No. 2 and under-hood
fuse/relay box connector H (14P) terminal No. 8, and between right headlight high beam 2P connector
terminal No. 2 and under-hood fuse/relay box connector H (14P) terminal No. 10.
111
Fig. 29: Checking Continuity Between Left Headlight High Beam 2P Connector Terminal No. 2
& Under-Hood Fuse/Relay Box Connector

16. Check for continuity between each headlight high beam 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body
ground.
111
Fig. 30: Checking Continuity Between Each Headlight High Beam 2P Connector Terminal No. 1
& Body Ground
NO - Repair an open in the wire or a poor ground (G201, G301).
DTC B1275: HEADLIGHT SWITCH OFF POSITION CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION; DTC B1276:
HEADLIGHT SWITCH PARKING (SMALL) POSITION CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION; DTC B1277:
HEADLIGHT SWITCH AUTO POSITION CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION; DTC B1278:
HEADLIGHT SWITCH ON POSITION CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

Is DTC B1275, B1276, B1277 or B1278 indicated?
111
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Intermittent failure, the headlight system is OK at this time. Check pinfits and
connections.
4. Reset the DTCs using the HDS.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) and wait for 2 seconds.
6. Turn the parking (small) light switch ON and wait for 2 seconds.
7. Turn the headlight light switch (LOW) ON and wait for 2 seconds.
8. Change the dimmer switch position from low beam to high beam and wait for 2 seconds.
9. Check the DTCs using the HDS.
Is DTC B1275, B1276, B1277, B1278 indicated?

NO - Intermittent failure, the combination switch and the control unit are OK at this time.
Check pinfits and connections.
10. Disconnect the combination light switch 12P connector from the wiper/washer switch.
11. Perform the combination light switch test (see COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH
TEST/REPLACEMENT ).
Is the combination light switch check OK?
YES - Faulty combination switch control unit, replace the wiper/washer switch.
NO - Replace the combination light switch.
DTC B1279:HEADLIGHT SWITCH DIMMER POSITION CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Intermittent failure. The turn signal switch circuit is OK at this time. Check pinfits and
connections.
4. Reset the DTCs by CLEAR MENU (DTC CLEAR) of the HDS.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then turn the headlight switch ON.
6. Change the combination light switch from low beam to high beam and wait for 2 seconds.
7. Pull and hold the combination light switch lever and keep the passing switch position for more than 2
seconds.
YES - Go to step 9.
111
NO - Intermittent failure, the combination switch and the combination switch control unit are
OK at this time. Check pinfits and connections.
10. Perform the combination light switch test (see COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH
TEST/REPLACEMENT ).
Is the combination light switch OK?
YES - Faulty combination switch control unit, replace the wiper/washer switch.
NO - Replace the combination light switch.
DTC B1280: TURN SIGNAL SWITCH CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Intermittent failure. The turn signal switch circuit is OK at this time. Check pinfits and
connections.
4. Reset the DTCs by CLEAR MENU (DTC CLEAR) of the HDS.
6. Turn the turn signal switch to the left position and wait for 2 seconds.
7. Turn the turn signal switch to the right position and wait for 2 seconds.
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Intermittent failure, the turn signal light switch and the combination switch control unit
are OK at this time. Check pinfits and connections.
10. Check for short in the turn signal light switch terminals in each switch position (see
COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH TEST/REPLACEMENT ).
Is there a short?
YES - Faulty, turn signal light switch, replace the combination light switch.
NO - Faulty combination switch control unit, replace the wiper/washer switch.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS CONTROL UNIT INPUT TEST

USA ('06-07 MODELS)
111
NOTE:  Before troubleshooting the daytime running lights control system,

troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system first using B-CAN
System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see TROUBLESHOOTING - B-CAN
 Make sure the headlights high beam come on normally with the
combination light switch ON.
2. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the daytime running lights control unit (B).
Fig. 31: Disconnecting 14P Connector From Daytime Running Lights Control Unit
 If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system.
4. Reconnect the connector to the daytime running lights control unit, and make these input tests at the
connector.
RUNNING LIGHTS CONTROL UNIT SPECIFICATION

Possible cause if
Test: Desired
result
obtained
111
Check for
13  Poor ground
voltage to
BLK ground.
14 There should be
less than 1 V. wire
 Blown No. 21
Check for (7.5 A) fuse in
voltage to the driver's
Ignition switch
8 YEL ground. under-dash
ON (II).
There should be fuse/relay box
wire
 Blown No. 19
(40 A) fuse in
the under-
hood
Check for fuse/relay box
voltage to
Under all  Blown No. 3
1 RED/WHT ground
conditions (10 A) fuse in
There should be
battery voltage. the driver's
under-dash
fuse/relay box
 An Open in
the wire
5. Disconnect the 14P connector from the daytime running lights control unit, and make these input tests
at the connector.
 If all input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty: replace it.
CONTROL UNIT SPECIFICATION

Possible cause if
Test: Desired
result
obtained
Check for
continuity
between the No. 2
terminal and
Under all under-hood
2 BLU/WHT An open in the wire
connector H (14P)
No. 3 terminal:
There should be
continuity.
Check for
Under all continuity to  Faulty under-
7 WHT
conditions ground: There hood
should be fuse/relay box
111
continuity.  A open in the

wire
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH TEST

1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the brake pedal position switch (B).
111
Fig. 32: Disconnecting 4P Connector From Brake Pedal Position Switch

2. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals.

 There should be continuity when the brake pedal is pressed.
 There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is released.
3. Check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals (with cruise control).
 There should be no continuity when the brake pedal is pressed.
 There should be continuity when the brake pedal is released.
4. If necessary, adjust or replace the switch, or adjust the pedal height (see PEDAL HEIGHT ).
HEADLIGHT ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION: Headlights become very hot during use; do not touch them or any
attaching hardware immediately after they have been turned off.
Before adjusting the headlights:
 Park the vehicle on a level surface.

 Make sure the tire pressures are correct.
 The driver or someone who weighs the same should sit in the driver's seat.
1. Clean the outer lens so that you can see the center (A) of the headlights.
111
Fig. 33: Cleaning Outer Lens Of Center Of Headlights
111
2. Park the vehicle in front of a wall or a screen (A).
Fig. 34: Parking Vehicle In Front Of Wall Or Screen

3. Turn the low beams on.

4. Determine if the headlights are aimed properly.
Vertical adjustment:
Measure the height of the headlights (A). The lights should reflect 52 mm (2.1 in.) below headlight
height (B).
111
Fig. 35: Measuring Height Of Headlights Lights

5. If necessary, open the hood and adjust the headlights to local requirements by turning the vertical
adjuster.
111
Fig. 36: Opening Hood And Adjusting Headlights Turning Vertical Adjuster
HEADLIGHT REPLACEMENT
1. Remove the front bumper.
111
4-door (see 4-DOOR )


2. Remove the connectors (A) from the headlight assembly (B).
Fig. 37: Removing Connectors From Headlight Assembly

111
3. Remove the five mounting bolts and the harness clip, then remove the headlight.
4. Remove the bolt and the corner upper beam (C) from the headlight.
5. Install the headlight in the reverse order of removal.
6. After replacement, adjust the headlight to local requirement.
BULB REPLACEMENT
HEADLIGHT
1. For low beam headlight bulb, remove the inner fender (see FRONT INNER FENDER
REPLACEMENT ).
2. Disconnect the 2P connectors (A) from the headlight.
Headlight (high beam): 60 W
Headlight (low beam): 51 W
111
Fig. 38: Disconnecting 2P Connectors From Headlight (High Beam)

111
Fig. 39: Disconnecting 2P Connectors From Headlight (Low Beam)

3. Turn the bulb socket (B) 45° counterclockwise to remove the bulb.
4. Install a new bulb in the reverse order of removal.
FRONT TURN SIGNAL/SIDE MARKER LIGHTS
1. Remove the inner fender (see FRONT INNER FENDER REPLACEMENT ).

2. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) from the front turn signal/side marker light.
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights: 21/5 W
111
Fig. 40: Disconnecting 3P Connector From Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Light
4. Install a new bulb in the reverse order of removal.
TAILLIGHT REPLACEMENT
TAILLIGHT (2-DOOR)
1. Remove the rear bumper (see REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).

2. Open the trunk lid and remove the trunk side trim panel (see TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
- TRUNK AREA ).
111
3. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the taillights (B).
Brake/Taillight ('03-05 models): 21/5 W
Back-up Light ('03-05 models): 16 W
Brake/Taillight ('06-07 models): LED
Fig. 41: Disconnecting Connectors From Taillights ('03-05 Models)

111

4. Remove the mounting nuts and screws, then remove the taillight.
5. Turn the turn signal light bulb socket 45° counterclockwise to remove the bulb.
Turn Signal Light: 21 W
111
Fig. 43: Turning Signal Light Bulb Socket Counterclockwise

6. Inspect the gasket; replace it if it is distorted or stays compressed.

7. Install the taillight in the reverse order of removal and tighten the nuts to 5 N.m (0.5 kgf.m, 4 ldf.ft).
8. After installing the taillight, run water over it to make sure it does not leak.
TAILLIGHT (4-DOOR)
1. Remove the rear bumper (see 4-DOOR ).

2. Open the trunk lid and remove the trunk side trim panel (see 4-DOOR ('03-05 MODELS) ).
111
3. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the taillights (B).
Brake/Taillight ('03-05 models): 21/5 W
Brake/Taillight ('06 model): LED

111

4. Remove the mounting nuts and screws, then remove the taillight.
5. Turn the turn signal light bulb socket 45° counterclockwise to remove the bulb.
Turn Signal Light: 21 W
111
Fig. 46: Turning Signal Light Bulb Socket Counterclockwise

6. Inspect the gasket; replace it if it is distorted or stays compressed.

7. Install the taillight in the reverse order of removal and tighten the nuts to 5 N.m (0.5 kgf.m, 4 ldf.ft).
INNER TAILLIGHT (4-DOOR) ('03-05 MODELS)
1. Open the trunk lid and disconnect the connectors (A) from the trunk lid.
Taillight: 5 W
Back-up Light: 21 W
111
Fig. 47: Opening Trunk Lid And Disconnecting Connectors From Trunk Lid
2. Remove the three nuts and the inner taillight (B).

3. Turn the bulb socket 45° counterclockwise to remove the bulb.
4. Inspect the gasket; replace it. If it is distorted or stays compressed.
5. Install the taillight and tighten the nuts to 5 N.m (0.5 kgf.m, 4 lbf.ft).
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT REPLACEMENT

1. 2-door, 4-door ('06-07 models): Remove the rear license plate trim (see '03-07 MODELS 2-DOOR ).
2. Pull the license plate light assembly out, and disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the light.
License Plate Light: 5 W
111
Fig. 48: Disconnecting 2P Connector From Light (4-Door - '03-05 Models)

111
Fig. 49: Disconnecting 2P Connector From Light (2-Door, 4-Door - '06-07 Models)
3. Separate the lens (B) and housing (C), then remove the bulb.
4. Install the light in the reverse order of removal.
TAILLIGHT/BRAKE LIGHT LED REPLACEMENT

2-door ('06-07 models)
1. Remove the taillight (see TAILLIGHT REPLACEMENT ).

2. Remove the gasket (A) from the taillight.
111
Fig. 50: Removing Gasket From Taillight

3. Release and uncoil the taillight harness (B) from the taillight housing. Note the installation of the
harness.
4. Remove the four screws. Carefully disconnect the connector (C) from the taillight/brake light LED
(D).
5. Inspect the gaskets. If the gaskets are distorted or compressed, replace them.
6. Install the new LED in the reverse order of removal.
1. Remove the taillight (see TAILLIGHT (4-DOOR) ).

2. Remove the gasket (A) from the taillight.
111
Fig. 51: Removing Gasket From Taillight

3. Remove the four screws. Carefully disconnect the connector (B) from the taillight/brake light LED
(C).
4. Inspect the gaskets. If the gaskets are distorted or compressed, replace them.
5. Install the new LED in the reverse order of removal.
BACK-UP LIGHT BULB REPLACEMENT

1. Open the trunk lid and remove the trunk lid trim (see 4-DOOR ).
111
2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the back-up light.

3. Turn the bulb socket (A) 45° counterclockwise, then remove the bulb (B).
Back-up Light: 21 CP
Fig. 52: Turning Bulb Socket Counterclockwise

4. Install the bulb in the reverse order of removal.
BACK-UP LIGHT REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the rear license trim (see REAR LICENSE TRIM REPLACEMENT ).
2. Remove the four screws, then remove the back-up lights (A).
111
Fig. 53: Removing Back-Up Lights

3. Install the back-up lights in the reverse order of removal.
HIGH MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT REPLACEMENT

BULB REPLACEMENT ('03-05 MODELS)
1. Open the trunk lid and disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the bulb socket (B).
High Mount Brake Light: 21 W
111
Fig. 54: Disconnecting 2P Connector From Bulb Socket

HOUSING REPLACEMENT ('03-05 MODELS)
1. Remove the rear shelf.

 2 door (see 2-DOOR )
2. Remove the high mount brake light housing (A) from the cover (B).
111
Fig. 55: Removing High Mount Brake Light Housing From Cover
'06-07 MODELS

2. Remove the trunk lid trim.
3. Remove the four nuts and the high mount brake light (A).
111
Fig. 56: Removing High Mount Brake Light

4. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the high mount brake light.
COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH TEST/REPLACEMENT

INSTALLATION ).
3. Disconnect the 12P connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B).
111

4. Remove the two screws, then slide out the combination light switch (A).
111
Fig. 58: Sliding Out Combination Light Switch

 If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position
according to the tables shown in Fig. 59 & Fig. 60.
- If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
Light switch:
Fig. 59: Checking Continuity Between Terminals Table (Light Switch)

111
Fig. 60: Checking Continuity Between Terminals Table (Turn Signal Switch)
111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher - Accord
Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher - Accord
Fig. 1: Identifying Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher Components

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
111
2 августа 2011 г. 16:10:18
Fig. 2: Identifying Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher Circuit Diagram (1 Of 2)

111
Fig. 3: Identifying Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher Circuit Diagram (2 Of 2)

TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD RELAY INPUT TEST

1. Remove the turn signal/hazard relay (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay box (B).
111
Fig. 4: Removing Turn Signal/Hazard Relay From Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box

2. Inspect the relay and fuse/relay box socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
3. Make these input tests at the fuse/relay box.

 If all the input tests prove OK, the turn signal/hazard relay must be faulty; replace it.
FUSE/RELAY BOX INPUT TESTS

Possible cause if result is
Cavity Test condition Test: Desired result
not obtained
 Blown No. 16 (15 A)
fuse in the under-
Check for voltage to hood fuse/relay box
6 Under all conditions ground: There should be
battery voltage.  Faulty under-dash
fuse/relay box
Check for continuity to  Poor ground (G501,

1 Under all conditions ground: There should be G601)
continuity.  Faulty under-dash
fuse/relay box
111

Connect the No. 6 Check the turn signal  Blown bulb
terminal to the No. 2 lights operation:  Poor ground (G301,
2
terminal with a jumper The left turn signal G701)
wire. lights should come on.  An open in the wire
Connect the No. 6 Check the turn signal  Blown bulb
terminal to the No. 3 lights operation:  Poor ground (G201,
3
terminal with a jumper The right turn signal G701 or G702)
wire. lights should come on.  An open in the wire
 Poor ground (G501,
Ignition switch ON (II) Check for voltage to G601)
4 and turn signal switch ground: There should be  Faulty turn signal
in Left position. about 10 V. switch
 Faulty under-dash
fuse/relay box
Ignition switch ON (II) Check for voltage to
5 and turn signal switch ground: There should be  Faulty combination
in Right position. about 10 V. switch control unit(1)
 Faulty MICU(1)
 Poor ground (G501,
Check for voltage to G601)
4 ground: There should be  Blown No. 16 (15 A)
about 10 V. fuse in the under-
hood fuse/relay box
Hazard warning switch  Faulty under-dash
ON fuse/relay box
Check for voltage to  Faulty hazard
5 ground: There should be warning switch
about 10 V.  An open in the wire
 Faulty MICU(1)
(1) Go to the multiplex integrated control system test mode A troubleshooting (see
HAZARD WARNING SWITCH TEST

HAZARD WARNING SWITCH ('03 MODEL)

2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the hazard warning switch (B).
111
Fig. 5: Disconnecting 5P Connector From Hazard Warning Switch

3. Push out the hazard warning switch from behind the upper panel.
below.
111

5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulb (C) or the hazard warning switch.
HAZARD WARNING SWITCH/PASSENGER'S AIRBAG CUTOFF INDICATOR ('04-07

MODELS)

2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the hazard warning switch/passenger's airbag cutoff indicator
(B).
111
Fig. 7: Disconnecting 6P Connector From Hazard Warning Switch/Passenger's Airbag Cutoff

Indicator
3. Push out the hazard warning switch/passenger's airbag cutoff indicator from the upper panel.
111
below.

5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the illumination bulb(s) (C) or the hazard warning switch.
111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Dash Lights Brightness Controller - Accord
Dash Lights Brightness Controller - Accord
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
'03-05 MODELS
111
2 августа 2011 г. 16:10:53
Fig. 1: Dash Lights Brightness Controller Circuit Diagram ('03-05 Models)

'06-07 MODELS
111
Fig. 2: Dash Lights Brightness Controller Circuit Diagram ('06-07 Models)

111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Entry Lights Control System - Accord
Entry Lights Control System - Accord
Fig. 1: Locating Entry Lights Control System Components

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
111
2 августа 2011 г. 16:11:20
Fig. 2: Entry Lights Control System Circuit Diagram


1. Before testing the entry light control functions, troubleshoot the multiplex integrated control system
using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see TROUBLESHOOTING - B-CAN SYSTEM

111

3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors.
Fig. 3: Identifying Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Connectors

5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector.
 If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, the recheck the system.
CONTROL UNIT INPUT TEST (CONNECTORS DISCONNECTED)

Possible cause if
Test: Desired
result
obtained
Check for
 Poor ground
continuity to
Under all (G502)
P1 BRN/BLK ground:
There should be
continuity. wire
Check for  Poor ground

Under all continuity to (G601)
111
conditions ground:  An open in the

E9 BLK There should be wire
continuity.
 Blown No. 13
(20 A) fuse in
the under-
hood
Attach to ground: fuse/relay box
Under all
P7 WHT/BLK Ignition key light
conditions  Faulty ignition
should come on.
keylight
(LED)
 An open in the
wire
 Blown No. 6
(7.5 A) fuse in
the under-dash
Ceiling light Attach to ground: fuse/relay box
14 GRN/RED switch in middle Ceiling light(s)  Blown bulb
position should come on.  Faulty ceiling
light
 An open in the
wire
6. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box.

7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) to keep the system awake and make these input tests at the
CONTROL UNIT INPUT TEST (CONNECT RECONNECTED)

Possible cause if
Test: Desired
result
obtained
Check for
 Faulty driver's
voltage to
door switch
less than 1 V. wire
E15 GRN
Check for
Driver's door
ground: door switch
closed
battery voltage.
Check for
door open ground: passenger's
There should be door switch
111

wire
Check for
H12 LT GRN/RED  Faulty front
voltage to
Front passenger's passenger's
ground:
door closed door switch
There should be
battery voltage.  Short to ground
Check for
voltage to
ground:
There should be
less than 1 V. wire
E14(1) GRN/YEL
Check for
Left rear door
ground: door switch
closed
5 V or more.
Right rear door
ground: switch
open
less than 1 V. wire
H13(1) GRN/WHT
Check for
 Faulty right
voltage to
ground:
closed switch
There should be
 Poor ground
Check for (G501)
Ignition key voltage to
inserted into the ground:  Faulty ignition
ignition switch There should be key switch
P13 RED/WHT wire
Check for
Ignition key voltage to  Faulty ignition
removed from the ground: There key switch
ignition switch should be 5 V or  Short to ground
more.
(1) 4-door
Door Multiplex Control Unit
8. Remove the driver's door panel (see DOOR PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).

9. Disconnect the 23P connector from the door multiplex control unit.
111
Fig. 4: Identifying Door Multiplex Control Unit 23P Connector

11. Reconnect the connector to the door multiplex control unit, and make these input tests at the
appropriate connector.
 If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace the power window master
switch.
DOOR MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT

Possible cause if
Test: Desired
result
obtained
voltage to door lock
Driver's door lock
ground: actuator
knob locked
There should be  Poor ground
less than 1 V. (G501)
22 YEL/RED
voltage to door lock
Drive's door lock
ground: actuator
knob unlocked
There should be  Short to
5 V or more. ground
 Faulty driver's
Driver's door lock Check for door lock
knob unlocked voltage to actuator
There should be (G501)
111

the wire
7 WHT/BLK voltage to door lock
Driver's door lock
ground: actuator
knob locked
There should be  Short to
5 V or more. ground
Check for
LOCK There should be door key
Check for switch
Driver's door key
voltage to
8 WHT/RED ground:
the neutral (G501)
There should be
position  An open in
5 V or more.
Check for the wire
UNLOCK There should be
5 V or more.
Check for
UNLOCK There should be door key
Check for switch
Driver's door key
voltage to
21 WHT ground:
the neutral (G501)
There should be
position  An open in
5 V or more.
Check for the wire
5 V or more.
IGNITION KEY SWITCH TEST

1. Remove the steering column upper and lower covers (see STEERING COLUMN REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION ).
111
Fig. 5: Disconnecting 6P Connector (Ignition Key Switch)


 There should be continuity with the key in the ignition switch.
 There should be no continuity with the key removed.
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the ignition switch.

111
IGNITION KEY LIGHT TEST

1. Remove the steering column upper and lower covers (see STEERING COLUMN REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION ).
Fig. 6: Disconnecting 6P Connector (Ignition Key Light)
111
3. The LED should come on when power is connected to the No. 6 terminal and ground is connected to
No. 5 terminal.
4. If the LED does not come on, replace the ignition switch.
111
2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT Interior Lights - Accord
Interior Lights - Accord
Fig. 1: Identifying Interior Lights Components

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
111
2 августа 2011 г. 16:11:46
Fig. 2: Interior Lights Circuit Diagram (1 Of 2)

111
Fig. 3: Interior Lights Circuit Diagram (2 Of 2)

FRONT INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHT REPLACEMENT

WITH MOONROOF
1. Carefully pry off the lens (A) with a small screwdriver.
111
Fig. 4: Prying Off Lens With Screwdriver (Front Map Light: 8Wx2)

3. Disconnect the 3P connector (B) from the housing (C).
4. Disconnect the 8P connector (D) from the ambient light (E).
111
WITHOUT MOONROOF
Fig. 5: Prying Off Lens With Small Screwdriver (Front Map Light: 8Wx2)

111

AMBIENT LIGHT REPLACEMENT

WITH MOONROOF
1. Remove the front individual map light (see FRONT INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHT
REPLACEMENT ).
2. Disconnect the 8P connector (A) from the ambient light.
111
Fig. 6: Disconnecting 8P Connector From Ambient Light

3. Carefully pry off the ambient light assembly (B) from the map light housing (C) while pressing in on
the retaining tabs (D).
4. Install in the reverse order removal.
111
CEILING LIGHT REPLACEMENT

1. Turn the light switch OFF.
Fig. 7: Prying Off Lens With Small Screwdriver (Ceiling Light: 8W)

TRUNK LIGHT TEST/REPLACEMENT
111

2. Carefully pry out the trunk light (A).
Fig. 8: Prying Out Trunk Light (Trunk Light: 5W)

3. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the light.

4. Check for continuity between the No. 1 (+) and No. 2 (-) terminals. There should be continuity. If
111
there is no continuity, check the bulb (C). If the bulb(s) is OK, replace the trunk light.
TRUNK LID LATCH SWITCH TEST

2. Disconnect the 3P (2P) connector (A) from the trunk lid latch (B).
( ): DX ('03-05 models)
111
Fig. 9: Disconnecting 3P (2P) Connector From Trunk Lid Latch (With Keyless Entry)
111
Fig. 10: Disconnecting 3P (2P) Connector From Trunk Lid Latch (Without Keyless Entry)
3. Check for continuity between the No. 2 (No. 1) and No. 3 (No. 2) terminals.
( ): DX ('03-05 models)
 There should be continuity with the trunk lid latch unlatched (trunk open).
 There should be no continuity with the trunk lid latch latched (trunk closed).
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the trunk lid latch switch.
VANITY MIRROR LIGHT TEST

1. Open the sunvisor.
2. Remove the sunvisor (see HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the vanity mirror light.
111
Fig. 11: Disconnecting 2P Connector From Vanity Mirror Light (Vanity Mirror Light: 1.1W)
111

 With the vanity mirror cover (B) opened, there should be continuity.
 With the vanity mirror cover closed, there should be no continuity.
5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulb (C) or the sunvisor.
COURTESY LIGHT REPLACEMENT

Fig. 12: Prying Off Lens With Small Screwdriver (Courtesy Light: 3.8W)
2. Remove the bulb (B) from the socket.
111
GENERAL INFORMATION Service Reminder Indicators - Honda
GENERAL INFORMATION
Service Reminder Indicators - Honda
ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR
NOTE: To determine the appropriate reset procedure, refer to ENGINE OIL LIFE
INDICATOR RESET INDEX.
ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR RESET INDEX

Model & Year Reset Procedure
ACCORD
2006-09 ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR - PROCEDURE
1
CIVIC
1
CR-V
2
ELEMENT
1
FIT
1
PILOT
1
ODYSSEY (EXCEPT TOURING MODEL)
1
ODYSSEY (TOURING MODEL)
3
RIDGELINE
4
S2000
5
ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR - PROCEDURE 1
1. Turn ignition switch to ON (II). Press SELECT/RESET knob until engine oil life indicator is
displayed.
2. Press SELECT/RESET knob for 10 seconds. Engine oil life indicator and the maintenance item code
111
2 августа 2011 г. 16:12:48
(s) will blink. Press SELECT/RESET knob for more than 5 seconds. Maintenance items code(s) will
disappear and engine oil life indicator will reset to "100."
1. Turn ignition switch to ON (II). Press SELECT/RESET knob until engine oil life indicator is
displayed.
2. Press the SELECT/RESET knob for about 10 seconds. The information display shows the reset mode
initial display as shown.
3. Select the "OIL LIFE" indicator by turning the SELECT/RESET knob. The display begins to blink.
Push the same knob to enter this setting.
4. The engine oil life and maintenance item code(s) will begin blink. Push the SELECT/RESET knob to
reset.
5. The maintenance item code(s) will disappear, and engine oil life will reset to "100".
1. Turn ignition switch to ON (II). Press SELECT/RESET button on steering wheel until engine oil life
is displayed.
2. Press SELECT/RESET knob in instrument panel for 10 seconds. Display will change to "CUSTOM
SETUP" mode. Press SELECT/RESET button on steering wheel. Maintenance item code(s) will
disappear and engine oil life will reset to "100."
3. To cancel resetting press INFO button on steering wheel. Press SELECT/RESET button. This cancels
resetting procedure and normal display mode returns. Select "RESET" button and press
SELECT/RESET button multi-information will.
1. Turn ignition switch to ON (II) position.

2. Press SELECT button repeatedly until engine oil life display or service message is displayed.
3. Press the RESET button for about 10 seconds. A "MAINT RESET" message will appear.
4. Select appropriate answer - "MAINT RESET >N" (NO) or "MAINT RESET >Y" (YES) by pressing
the select button. ">N" or ">Y" is displayed on the outside temperature display.
5. Select the "MAINT RESET >Y" (YES), and press and hold RESET button again to reset engine oil
life to "100".
1. Turn ignition switch to ON (II). Press TRIP button until engine oil life indicator is displayed.
2. Press TRIP knob for 10 seconds. Engine oil life indicator and the maintenance item code(s) will blink.
Press TRIP knob for more than 5 seconds. Maintenance items code(s) will disappear and engine oil
life indicator will reset to "100."
MAINTENANCE REQUIRED REMINDER LIGHT/ENGINE OIL LIFE

INDICATOR
NOTE: To determine the appropriate reset procedure, refer to MAINTENANCE

111
REQUIRED REMINDER LIGHT/ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR RESET INDEX.
MAINTENANCE REQUIRED REMINDER LIGHT/ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR RESET

INDEX
ACCORD
1991-97 MAINTENANCE REQUIRED REMINDER
LIGHT/ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR RESET
- PROCEDURE 1
- PROCEDURE 2
CIVIC
- PROCEDURE 2
- PROCEDURE 3
CR-V
- PROCEDURE 1
- PROCEDURE 2
ELEMENT
- PROCEDURE 3
INSIGHT
- PROCEDURE 4
ODYSSEY
- PROCEDURE 1
- PROCEDURE 2
PILOT
- PROCEDURE 2
PRELUDE
111

- PROCEDURE 1
S2000
- PROCEDURE 2
MAINTENANCE REQUIRED REMINDER LIGHT/ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR RESET -

PROCEDURE 1
1. At each 7500 mile service interval, the MAINTENANCE REQUIRED light will change from Green
to Yellow. If service is not performed (and light is not reset), the MAINTENANCE REQUIRED light
will change from Yellow to Red.
2. When service has been completed, reset MAINTENANCE REQUIRED reminder light. To reset
reminder light, turn ignition off. Insert ignition key in slot provided to the right of tachometer (or
beside the indicator). See Fig. 1.
Fig. 1: Maintenance Reminder Light Reset

111

PROCEDURE 2
To reset MAINT REQ'D indicator light, turn ignition switch to OFF position. Push and hold the
SELECT/RESET button and turn ignition switch to ON (II) position. Continue to hold button for more than
10 seconds or until MAINT REQ'D light goes out.

PROCEDURE 3
1. For the first 8000 miles after maintenance required indicator is reset, the MAINT REQ'D indicator
light illuminates when the ignition is turned on, then will go out after 2 seconds. When mileage is
8000-10,000 miles, the MAINT REQ'D reminder light will illuminate for 2 seconds, then blink for 10
seconds, and then go out. When mileage exceeds 10,000 miles, MAINT REQ'D indicator light
illuminates and stays on while ignition switch is in ON (II) position.
2. To reset the MAINT REQ'D indicator light, turn ignition switch to OFF position. Press and hold the
SELECT/RESET button. While still holding button, turn ignition switch to ON position, with engine
off. Hold SELECT/RESET button for about 10 seconds until indicator resets.
3. If MAINT REQ'D reminder light does not reset, ensure headlights, parking lights, or both are turned
off when resetting reminder light. The MAINT REQ'D indicator cannot be reset if any of these lights
are on. If vehicle is equipped with daytime running lights and lights come on when ignition switch is
turned to ON (II) position, daytime running lights must be disabled before indicator light can be reset.

PROCEDURE 4
1. When distance driven since maintenance required indicator was reset is 6000 miles, the MAINT
REQ'D reminder light will start to blink. After exceeding 7500 miles without having scheduled
maintenance performed and MAINT REQ'D reminder light reset, light will remain on until it is reset.
2. To reset the light, turn ignition switch to OFF position. Press and hold TRIP button, located on lower
right side of instrument cluster. While still holding TRIP button, turn ignition switch to ON position
with engine off. Hold button for about 10 seconds until indicator resets.
OXYGEN SENSOR WARNING LIGHT
NOTE: To determine the appropriate reset procedure, refer to OXYGEN SENSOR

WARNING LIGHT RESET INDEX.
OXYGEN SENSOR WARNING LIGHT RESET INDEX

PASSPORT DX
1994-95 OXYGEN SENSOR WARNING LIGHT RESET -
PROCEDURE 1
OXYGEN SENSOR WARNING LIGHT RESET - PROCEDURE 1
1. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) must be replaced every 90,000 miles. When odometer reaches 90,000
miles, O2S indicator light on dash will illuminate, and then every subsequent 90,000 miles. After
servicing, turn off or reset warning light.
111
NOTE: Reset procedure is for first 90,000 mile reset. At every subsequent
90,000 mile reset, move screw back to previous hole.
2. To reset warning light, remove instrument cluster. Remove masking tape from hole "B". See Fig. 2 or
Fig. 3 . Remove screw from hole "A" and insert into hole "B". Apply new masking tape to hole "A".
Fig. 2: Identifying Oxygen Sensor Warning Light Reset Holes (2.6L)

Fig. 3: Identifying Oxygen Sensor Warning Light Reset Holes (3.2L)

111
Courtesy of ISUZU MOTOR CO.
SERVICE INTERVAL REMINDER
NOTE: To determine the appropriate reset procedure, refer to SERVICE INTERVAL

REMINDER RESET INDEX.
SERVICE INTERVAL REMINDER RESET INDEX

ACCORD
1982-85 SERVICE INTERVAL REMINDER RESET -
PROCEDURE 1
SERVICE INTERVAL REMINDER RESET - PROCEDURE 1
Oil, filter and service interval indicator flags/lights activate every 7500 miles. To reset indicators, insert
ignition key into appropriate slot below glowing indicator flags/lights at lower right corner of instrument
cluster. Push key in until reminder window changes from Red to Green.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
NOTE: To determine the appropriate reset procedure, refer to TPMS RESET INDEX.
TPMS RESET INDEX

ACCORD
2008-09 TPMS RESET - PROCEDURE 1
CIVIC
CR-V
ELEMENT
FIT
ODYSSEY
PILOT
RIDGELINE
S2000
TPMS RESET - PROCEDURE 1
111
NOTE: If a flat tire is replaced with the spare tire, and the flat tire is stored in the
cargo area, the low pressure indicator will stay on but the appropriate tire
indicator will go off. This prevents the customer from thinking there is a
problem with the spare tire. When the flat tire is taken out of the vehicle for
repair, the TPMS indicator will come on because the system is no longer
receiving the signal from the tire's transmitter.
NOTE: When a tire pressure sensor is replaced or tires are rotated, the sensor ID
must be memorized by the TPMS control unit. See TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR
REGISTRATION in appropriate manufacturer service information.
TPMS RESET - PROCEDURE 2
NOTE: If a flat tire is replaced with the spare tire, and the flat tire is stored in the
cargo area, the low pressure indicator will stay on but the appropriate tire
indicator will go off. This prevents the customer from thinking there is a
problem with the spare tire. When the flat tire is taken out of the vehicle for
repair, the TPMS indicator will come on because the system is no longer
receiving the signal from the tire's transmitter.
NOTE: When a tire pressure sensor is replaced or tires are rotated, the sensor ID
must be memorized by the TPMS control unit. See TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR
REGISTRATION in appropriate manufacturer service information.
NOTE: On models equipped with PAX tire systems, if a tire is repaired or replaced,
the warning indicator (and the mileage counter that supports it) must be
reset, no matter how far the vehicle was driven in the run flat mode.
1. To put the gauge control module into the self-diagnostic mode, perform the following:
 Turn the headlight switch to ON.
 Press and hold the SELECT/RESET (Instrument panel brightness) knob.
 Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
 Within 5 seconds, turn the headlights to AUTO, then to ON, and then to AUTO again.
 Within 5 seconds, release the SELECT/RESET knob, then push and release the knob three
times.
2. Once the gauge control module is in the self-diagnostic mode, press and hold the INFO button on the
steering wheel for 5 seconds to get to the CUSTOMIZE MENU.
3. Use the INFO button to scroll through to the PAX RESET screen, then press the SEL/RESET button
on the steering wheel.
4. Use the INFO button to scroll to the appropriate wheel, and then press the SEL/RESET button on the
steering wheel to reset the PAX warning system display. The screen should read "PAX RESET
COMPLETED". Repeat this step for each wheel that needs to be reset.
5. Use the INFO button to scroll through to EXIT, then press the SEL/RESET button.
6. Turn the ignition switch to OFF to exit the self-diagnostic mode.
111
2003-07 RESTRAINTS Restraints (Special Tools) - Accord
2003-07 RESTRAINTS
Restraints (Special Tools) - Accord
SPECIAL TOOLS
Fig. 1: Identifying Tools And Description Chart

111
2 августа 2011 г. 16:13:18
2003-07 RESTRAINTS SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) - Accord
2003-07 RESTRAINTS
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) - Accord
Fig. 1: Locating SRS Components

111
2 августа 2011 г. 16:16:03
Fig. 2: Locating SRS Components (4-Door Shown; 2-Door Similar)

PRECAUTIONS AND PROCEDURES

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
Please read the following precautions carefully before performing the airbag system service. Observe the
instructions described in this information, or the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or
injuries.
 Except when performing electrical inspections, always turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the
negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work.
NOTE: The SRS memory is not erased even if the ignition switch is turned OFF
or the battery cables are disconnected from the battery.
 Use replacement parts which are manufactured to the same standards and quality as the original parts.
Do not install used SRS parts. Use only new parts when making SRS repairs.
 Carefully inspect any SRS part before you install it. Do not install any part that shows signs of being
dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation.
111
Fig. 3: Inspecting SRS Parts

 Before removing any of the SRS parts (including the disconnection of the connectors), always
disconnect the SRS connector.
 Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it is not a Honda multimeter, make sure its
output is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the lowest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester
with a higher output could cause accidental deployment and possible injury.
 Do not put objects on the front passenger's airbag.
 The original radio and navigation system have a coded theft protection circuit. Be sure to get the
customer's anti-theft codes and write down the frequencies for the radio's preset stations before
disconnecting the battery negative cable.
 Before returning the vehicle to the customer, enter the radio code, the navigation code, then enter the
customer's audio presets, and set the clock.
STEERING-RELATED PRECAUTIONS
Cable Reel Alignment
 Misalignment of the cable reel could cause an open in the wiring, make the SRS system remote
steering wheel controls and the horn inoperative. Center the cable reel whenever the following is
performed (see step 6 in Installation ).
111
- Installation of the steering wheel

- Installation of the cable reel
- Installation of the steering column
- Other steering-related adjustment or installation
 Do not disassemble the cable reel.
 Do not apply grease to the cable reel.
 If the cable, reel shows any signs of damage, replace it with a new one. For example, if it does not
rotate smoothly, replace the cable reel.
AIRBAG HANDLING AND STORAGE
Do not disassemble an airbag. It has no serviceable parts. Once an airbag has been deployed, it cannot be
repaired or reused.
For temporary storage of an airbag during service, observe the following precautions.
 Store the removed airbag with the pad surface up. Never put anything on the airbag.
Fig. 4: Storing Removed Airbag With Pad Surface Up

 To prevent damage to the airbag, keep it away from any oil, grease, detergent, or water.
111
Fig. 5: Keeping Airbag Away From Oil, Grease, Detergent Or Water

 Store the removed airbag on a secure, flat surface away from any high heat source (exceeding 200°
F/93°C).
111
Fig. 6: Removing Airbag Keeping Flat Surface Away From Any Heat Source
 Never perform electrical inspections to the airbags, such as measuring resistance.

 Do not position yourself in front of the airbag during removal, inspection, or replacement.
111
Fig. 7: Precaution For Airbag Removal, Inspection, Or Replacement

 Refer to the scrapping procedures for disposal of a damaged airbag.

 The side curtain airbag inflator assembly is a long, jointed part containing an inflator (A), a flexible
bag (B), an adapter pipe (C), and a center bracket (D).
111
Fig. 8: Identifying Side Curtain Airbag Inflator Assembly Components

 When removing or installing the side curtain airbag inflator assembly, never handle the flexible bag
(B) or the adapter pipe (C).
SRS UNIT, FRONT IMPACT SENSORS, SIDE IMPACT SENSORS, FRONT PASSENGER'S
WEIGHT SENSOR UNIT ('04-05 MODELS), AND FRONT PASSENGER'S WEIGHT SENSORS
('04-07 MODELS)
 Be careful not to bump or impact the SRS unit, front impact sensors, or side impact sensors when the
ignition switch is ON (II), or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF.
 During installation or replacement, be careful not to bump (by impact wrench, hammer, etc.) the area
around the SRS unit, front impact sensors, or side impact sensors. The airbags could accidentally
deploy and cause damage or injury.
111
Fig. 9: Precaution For Bump Area Around SRS Unit, Front Impact Sensors, Or Side Impact
Sensors
 After a collision in which the front airbags or seat belt tensioners were deployed, replace the SRS unit,
front sensors, and other related components (see COMPONENT REPLACEMENT/INSPECTION
AFTER DEPLOYMENT ). After a collision in which a side airbag was deployed, replace the side
impact sensor on the deployed side, and the SRS unit. After a collision in which the airbags or the side
airbags did not deploy, inspect for any damage or any deformation on the SRS unit, front impact
sensors, and side impact sensors. Replace all damaged parts.
111
Fig. 10: Precaution For Deformation On SRS Unit

 Do not disassemble the SRS unit, front impact sensors, side impact sensors, driver's seat position
sensor, front passenger's weight sensor unit ('03-05 models), and front passenger's weight sensors.
 Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before
beginning installation or replacement of the SRS unit or disconnecting the connectors from the SRS
unit.
 Be sure the SRS unit, front impact sensors, and side impact sensors are installed securely with the
mounting bolts torqued to 9.8 N.m (1.0 kgf.m, 7.2 lbf.ft)
 Do not spill water or oil on the SRS unit or the side impact sensors, and keep them away from dust.
 Store the SRS unit, front impact sensors, and side impact sensors in a cool (less than 104 °F/40 °C)
and dry (less than 80 % relative humidity, no moisture) area.
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
Some of the SRS wiring can be identified by special yellow outer covering, and the SRS connectors can be
identified by their yellow color. Observe the instructions.
 Never attempt to modify, splice, or repair SRS wiring. If there is an open or damage in SRS wiring or
terminals, replace the harness.
111
Fig. 11: Never Attempt To Modify, Splice Or Repair SRS Wiring

 Be sure to install the harness wires so they do not get pinched or interfere with other parts.
111
Fig. 12: Do Not Pinch Or Interfere With Other Parts When Installing Harness Wires
 Make sure all SRS ground locations are clean and securely fastened for optimum metal-to-metal
contact. Poor grounding can cause intermittent problems that are difficult to diagnose.
PRECAUTIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSPECTIONS
 When using electrical test equipment, insert the probe of the tester into the wire side of the connector.
Do not insert the probe of the tester into the terminal side of the connector, and do not tamper with the
connector.
111
Fig. 13: Do Not Insert Probe Of Tester Into Terminal Side Of Connector
 Use a U-shaped probe. Do not insert the probe forcibly.
111
Fig. 14: Using U-Shaped Probe

 Use specified service connectors in troubleshooting. Using improper tools could cause an error in
inspection due to poor metal-to-metal contact.
SPRING-LOADED LOCK CONNECTOR
Some SRS system connectors have a spring-loaded lock.
Front Airbag Connectors
Disconnecting
To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A) toward the stop (B) while holding the opposite half of
the connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector.
111
Fig. 15: Disconnecting Front Airbag Connectors

Connecting
1. To reconnect, hold the pawl-side connector, and press on the back of the sleeve-side connector in the
direction shown in Fig. 17. As the two connector halves are pressed together, the sleeve (A) is pushed
back by the pawl (C). Do not touch the sleeve.
111
Fig. 16: Holding Pawl-Side Connector And Pressing On Back Of Sleeve-Side Connector
2. When the connector halves are completely connected, the pawl is released, and the spring-loaded
sleeve locks the connector.
111
Fig. 17: When Connector Is Connected Pawl Is Released And Spring-Loaded Sleeve Locks
Connector
Side Airbag Connector
Disconnecting
To release the lock, pull the spring-loaded sleeve (A) and the slider (B) while holding the opposite half of
the connector. Then pull the connector halves apart. Be sure to pull on the sleeve and not on the connector
half.
111
Fig. 18: Disconnecting Side Airbag Connector

Connecting
Hold both connector halves, and press them firmly together until the projection (C) of the sleeve-side
connector clicks.
111
Fig. 19: Connecting Side Airbag Connector

REOPENING THE SRS UNIT CIRCUIT FOR DIAGNOSIS
NOTE:  To prevent damage of the connector cavity, insert the SRS short
canceller straight into the cavity from the terminal side.
 Do not use the special tool if it is damaged.
 Make sure to remove the special tool before reconnecting.
When SRS unit connectors A, B, or C are disconnected, a short circuit is created in the connector by its own
function to prevent airbag deployment. The circuit may need to be opened when diagnosis is performed on
the circuit.
Insert the SRS short canceller (No. 070AZ-SAA0100, short canceller) in the specified cavities when it is
necessary to keep the circuit open for diagnosis.
111
Fig. 20: Inserting SRS Short Canceller In Specified Cavities

111
Fig. 21: Identifying SRS Unit Connector A 28P

111
Fig. 22: Identifying SRS Unit Connector B 28P

111
Fig. 23: Identifying SRS Unit Connector C 16P

BACKPROBING SPRING-LOADED LOCK CONNECTORS
When checking voltage or resistance on this type of connector the first time, you must remove the retainer to
insert the tester probe from the wire side.
NOTE: It is not necessary to reinstall the removed retainer; the terminals will stay
locked in the connector housing.
111
To remove the retainer (A), insert a flat-tip screwdriver (B) between the connector body and the retainer,
then carefully pry out the retainer. Take care not to break the connector.
Fig. 24: Removing Retainer Inserting Screwdriver Between Connector Body And Retainer
SEATS WITH SIDE AIRBAGS
111
Seats with side airbags have a "SIDE AIRBAG" label on the seat-back. Because the component parts (seat-
back cover, cushion, etc.) of seats with and without airbags are different, make sure you install only the
correct replacement parts.
Fig. 25: Identifying Side Airbag Label

 When cleaning, do not saturate the seat with liquid, and do not spray steam on the seat.
 Do not repair a torn or frayed seat-back cover. Replace the seat-back cover.
 After a collision in which the side airbag was deployed, replace the side airbag with new parts. If the
seat-back cushion is split, it must be replaced. If the seat-back frame is deformed, it must be replaced.
 Never put aftermarket accessories on the seat (covers, pads, seat heaters, lights, etc.).
DISCONNECTING SYSTEM CONNECTORS
111
Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3 minutes
before beginning the following procedures.
 Before disconnecting SRS unit connector B (3) from SRS unit, disconnect both seat belt tensioner 4P
connectors (4, 5).
 Before disconnecting the cable reel 4P connector (1), disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (2).
Fig. 26: Disconnecting Negative Cable From Battery

111
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes.
Driver's Airbag
2. Remove the access panel (A) from the steering wheel, then disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector
(B) from the cable reel.
Fig. 27: Removing Access Panel From Steering Wheel (Driver's Airbag)
Front Passenger's Airbag
3. Remove the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (A) from the
dashboard wire harness.
111
Fig. 28: Disconnecting Front Passenger's Airbag 4P Connector From Dashboard Wire Harness
(Front Passenger's Airbag)
Side Airbag
4. Disconnect both side airbag 2P connectors (A) from the floor wire harness.
111
Fig. 29: Disconnecting Side Airbag 2P Connectors From Floor Wire Harness (Side Airbag)
Side Curtain Airbag
111

6. Remove the antenna coil (see WINDOW ANTENNA COIL REPLACEMENT ).
7. Disconnect both side curtain airbag subharness 2P connectors from the side curtain airbags.
Fig. 30: Disconnecting Side Curtain Airbag Subharness 2P Connectors From Side Curtain
Airbags (Side Curtain Airbag)
Seat Belt Tensioner
8. Remove the side trim panel.

9. Remove the middle cross-member gusset.
10. Disconnect both floor wire harness 4P connectors (A) from the seat belt tensioners.
111
Fig. 31: Disconnecting Floor Wire Harness 4P Connectors From Seat Belt Tensioners (Seat Belt
Tensioner)
SRS Unit
11. Remove the center console and front panel.

12. Remove the center console and front panel (see CENTER CONSOLE
111

15. Remove the driver's and passenger's center lower cover (see DASHBOARD/STEERING HANGER
BEAM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).
16. Disconnect SRS unit connector A, and/or SRS unit connector B, and/or SRS unit connector C from
the SRS unit.
Fig. 32: Disconnecting SRS Unit Connector A, B And C From SRS Unit From SRS Unit (SRS
Unit)

DTC (DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES)
The self-diagnostic function of the SRS system allows it to locate the causes of system problems and then
store this information in memory. For easier troubleshooting, this data can be retrieved via a data link
circuit.
111
 When you turn the ignition switch ON (II), the SRS indicator comes on. If it goes off after 6 seconds,
the system is normal, and is not currently detecting any abnormality.
 If there is an abnormality, the system locates and defines the problem, stores this information in
memory, and turns the SRS indicator on. The data will remain in the memory even when the ignition
switch is turned off or if the battery is disconnected.
 The data is stored in memory as a diagnostic trouble code (DTC).
 DTCs are either latching or resetting depending on the malfunction. With resetting DTCs, the SRS
indicator will go off the next time the ignition switch is turned ON and the system is normal, but the
DTC is still stored. With latching DTCs the SRS indicator will not turn OFF until the malfunction is
repaired and the DTC is cleared.
 When you connect the HDS to the 16P data link connector (DLC), you can retrieve a more detailed
DTC in the Honda Systems "SRS" menu.
 After reading and recording the DTC, proceed with the troubleshooting procedure for that code.
Precautions
 Use only a digital multimeter to check the system. If it's not a Honda multimeter, make sure its output
is 10 mA (0.01 A) or less when switched to the smallest value in the ohmmeter range. A tester with a
higher output could damage the airbag circuit or cause accidental airbag deployment and possible
injury.
 Whenever the ignition switch is ON (II), or has been turned OFF for less than 3 minutes, be careful
not to bump the SRS unit; the airbags could accidentally deploy and cause damage or injuries.
 Before you remove the SRS harness, disconnect the driver's airbag connector, the front passenger's
airbag connector, both side airbag connectors, both side curtain airbag connectors, and both seat belt
tensioner connectors.
 Make sure the battery is sufficiently charged. If the battery is dead or low, measuring values won't be
correct.
 Do not touch a tester probe to the terminals in the SRS unit or harness connectors, and do not connect
the terminals with a jumper wire. Use only the backprobe set and the HDS. Backprobe spring-loaded
lock type connectors correctly.
READING THE DTC
HDS

2. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A).
111


4. Use the HDS to check for DTCs.
5. Read and record the DTC.
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait for 10 seconds.
8. Do the troubleshooting procedure for the DTC.
ERASING THE DTC MEMORY WITH HDS

111


4. In the TEST MODE MENU of the HDS, select DTC CLEAR. This erases the DTC(s).
ERASING THE DTC MEMORY WITH MANUAL MODE
SCS Service Connector 07PAZ-0010100
To erase the DTC(s) from the SRS unit, use the HDS, or the following procedure.

2. Connect the SCS service connector (A) to the yellow MES 2P connector (B). Do not use a jumper
111
wire.
Fig. 35: Connecting SCS Service Connector To Yellow MES 2P Connector


4. The SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds, and then goes off. Remove the SCS service
connector from the MES connector (2P) within 4 seconds after the indicator goes off.
5. The SRS indicator comes on again. Reconnect the SCS service connector to the MES connector (2P)
within 4 seconds after the indicator comes on.
6. When the SRS indicator goes off, remove the SCS service connector from the MES connector (2P)
within 4 seconds.
7. The SRS indicator blinks two times indicating that the memory has been erased.
111

9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) again. If the SRS indicator comes on for 6 seconds, and then goes
off, the system is OK.
INITIALIZING THE OPDS/ODS UNIT
When a seat-back cover, seat-back cushion, and/or OPDS/ODS unit is replaced, initialize the OPDS/ODS by
following the procedure.
NOTE: A new (uninitialized) OPDS/ODS unit installed with a faulty OPDS sensor can
cause DTC 85-71.
1. Erase the DTC memory (see "ERASING THE DTC MEMORY WITH HDS").
2. Make sure the front passenger's seat is dry. Set the seat-back in a normal position, and make sure there
is nothing on the seat.
3. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF and the MES connector is not shorted.
111


6. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Misc Test, then Adjustments. In the Adjustment Menu,
select OPDS/ODS INIT. Follow the screen prompts to initialize the OPDS/ODS.
NOTE: If the OPDS/ODS system fails to initialize after several attempts, replace
the OPDS sensor and retry. If the OPDS/ODS system continues to fail to
initialize, replace the OPDS/ODS unit.
TROUBLESHOOTING INTERMITTENT FAILURES
If there was a malfunction, but it doesn't recur, it will be stored in the memory as an intermittent failure, and
the SRS indicator may come on depending on the malfunction detected.
111
After checking the DTC, troubleshoot as follows:
1. Read the DTC (see "Reading the DTC").

2. Erase the DTC memory (see "ERASING THE DTC MEMORY WITH HDS").
3. Set the parking brake, then start the engine, and let it idle.
4. The SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then go off.
5. Shake the wire harness and the connectors, take a test drive (quick acceleration, quick braking,
cornering), turn the steering wheel fully left and right, and hold it there for 5 to 10 seconds. If the
problem recurs, the SRS indicator will come on.
6. If you can't duplicate the intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
CALIBRATING THE FRONT PASSENGER'S WEIGHT SENSOR UNIT ('04-05 MODELS) OR

CALIBRATE THE ODS UNIT ('06-07 MODEL)
When the front passenger's weight sensors and/or weight sensor unit ('04-05 models) or calibrate the ODS
unit ('06-07 model) is replaced, calibrate the weight sensor unit ('04-05 models) or calibrate the ODS unit
('06-07 model) by following the procedure.
While calibrating the front passenger's weight sensor unit ('04-05 models) or calibrate the ODS unit ('06-07
model), observe these precautions:
 Make sure all components of the front passenger's seat are correctly installed.
 Make sure all optional parts such as seat covers are removed.
 Make sure nothing is on or under the front passenger's seat.
 Make sure there is nothing in the front passenger's seat-back pocket.
 Keep the windows closed.
 Perform all calibration procedures except test driving in the service bay.
 Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
 Keep the A/C and the heater off.
 Do not touch the front passenger's seat until you drive the vehicle.
 Do not expose the front passenger's seat to sudden temperature changes.
1. Position the front passenger's seat to the rear most position, and adjust the recliner to the most forward
position. Do not move from these positions.
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A).
111

3. Drive the vehicle, and accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h), then stop on level ground.
4. From the Main Menu, select SRS, then Seat Weight Sensor, then Misc Test, then Adjustments. Select
"SWS INIT" in the Adjustment Menu and follow the prompts until the initialization operation has
been completed.
OPERATION CHECK OF THE FRONT PASSENGER'S WEIGHT SENSOR UNIT ('04-05

MODELS) OR OPERATE THE ODS UNIT ('06-07 MODEL)
The operation of the front passenger's weight sensor unit ('04-05 models) or operate the ODS unit ('06-07
model) must be checked after any of these actions.
 Replacement of front passenger's seat component(s) (except weight sensor unit and/or weight sensors)
 After a vehicle collision
Pre-Operation Check Set-up
111
 Make sure all the components of the front passenger's seat are correctly installed.
 Position the front passenger's seat to the rear most position.
 Adjust the seat recline to the forward most position.
 Do not move the seat from this position.
 Make sure nothing is on or under the front passenger's seat.
 Make sure there is nothing in the front passenger's seat-back pocket.
 Keep the windows closed.
 Perform all calibration procedures except test-driving in the service bay.
 Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
 Turn the heater and the A/C off.
 Do not touch the passenger's seat during the calibration.
 Do not expose the front passenger's seat to sudden temperature changes.
After Replacing Front Passenger's Seat Component(s)
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A).
111

2. Drive the vehicle, accelerate to 20 mph (36 km/h), then stop on level ground.
3. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Seat Weight Sensor, then Misc Test, then Inspection.
Select "SEAT OUTPUT CHK." in the HDS Inspection Menu. The weight (T0) of the front
passenger's seat is recorded by the HDS.
OPERATION CHECK OF THE DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION SENSOR
The driver's seat position sensor must be checked after any of these actions.
 Driver's seat position sensor replacement

 Cover plate (front side of driver's seat slide rail) replacement
1. Make sure the driver's seat is at its full forward position.

2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF (0).
111


5. From the HDS Main Menu, select SRS, then Data List, then All Data List, then SPS.
6. Move the seat all the way forward. Using a piece of tape, mark a line on the seat's outer cover where
the front riser cover meets the seat riser. The SPS should read "NEAR."
NOTE: It takes a few seconds for the HDS to display changes, so wait about 5
seconds between each move.
Move the seat back in small increments (about 5 mm) until the SPS reads "NOT NEAR." The seat
should be approximately 25 mm from the front.
If the SPS data does not work as described above, check the driver's seat position sensor or the cover
plate for damage, and replace parts as needed.
111
NOTE: Before looking up DTC's in the DTC troubleshooting index, verify the
manufacturer of the SRS unit. The DTC's are different from manufacturer to
manufacturer.
DTC TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX - TRW SRS UNIT ('03-05 MODELS)

DTC Latch(1) Reset(2) Detection Item Notes
Open or increased (see DTC 11-1X (11-10 TO 11-19,11-
11-1x X resistance in driver's 1A TO 11-1F): OPEN IN DRIVER'S
airbag first inflator AIRBAG FIRST INFLATOR )
(see DTC 11-3X (11-30 TO 11-39,11-
Short to another wire or 3A TO 11-3F): SHORT TO
decreased resistance in ANOTHER WIRE OR
11-3x X
driver's airbag first DECREASED RESISTANCE IN
inflator DRIVER'S AIRBAG FIRST
INFLATOR )
Open or increased (see DTC 11-4X (11-40 TO 11-49,11-
airbag second inflator AIRBAG SECOND INFLATOR )
(see DTC 11-6X (11-60 TO 11-69,11-
11-6x X
driver's airbag second DECREASED RESISTANCE IN
inflator DRIVER'S AIRBAG SECOND
INFLATOR )
(see DTC 11-8X (11-80 TO 11-89, 11-
Short to power in
8A TO 11-8F): SHORT TO POWER
11-8x X driver's airbag first
IN DRIVER'S AIRBAG FIRST
inflator
INFLATOR )
(see DTC 11-9X (11-90 TO 11-99, 11-
Short to ground in
9A TO 11-9F): SHORT TO
11-9x X driver's airbag first
GROUND IN DRIVER'S AIRBAG
inflator
FIRST INFLATOR )
(see DTC 11-AX (11-A0 TO 11-A9,
Short to power in
11-AA TO 11-AF): SHORT TO
11-Ax X driver's airbag second
POWER IN DRIVER'S AIRBAG
inflator
SECOND INFLATOR )
(see DTC 11-BX (11-B0 TO 11-B9,
Short to ground in
11-BA TO 11-BF): SHORT TO
11-Bx X driver's airbag second
inflator
SECOND INFLATOR )
Open or increased (see DTC 12-1X (12-10 TO 12-19, 12-
resistance in front 1A TO 12-1F): OPEN IN FRONT
12-1x X
passenger's airbag first PASSENGER'S AIRBAG FIRST
inflator INFLATOR )
(see DTC 12-3X (12-30 TO 12-39, 12-

111

front passenger's airbag DECREASED RESISTANCE IN
12-3x X
first inflator FRONT PASSENGER'S AIRBAG
FIRST INFLATOR )
12-4x X
passenger's airbag PASSENGER'S AIRBAG SECOND
second inflator INFLATOR )
(see DTC 12-6X (12-60 TO 12-69, 12-
12-6x X
second inflator FRONT PASSENGER'S AIRBAG
SECOND INFLATOR )
(see DTC 12-8X (12-80 TO 12-89, 12-
Short to power in front
12-8x X passenger's airbag first
IN FRONT PASSENGER'S
inflator
AIRBAG FIRST INFLATOR )
(see DTC 12-9X (12-90 TO 12-99, 12-
Short to ground in front 9A TO 12-9F): SHORT TO
12-9x X passenger's airbag first GROUND IN FRONT
inflator PASSENGER'S AIRBAG FIRST
INFLATOR )
(see DTC 12-AX (12-A0 TO 12-A9,
Short to power in front 12-AA TO 12-AF): SHORT TO
12-Ax X passenger's airbag POWER IN FRONT
second inflator PASSENGER'S AIRBAG SECOND
INFLATOR )
(see DTC 12-BX (12-B0 TO 12-B9,
Short to ground in front 12-BA TO 12-BF): SHORT TO
12-Bx X passenger's airbag GROUND IN FRONT
second inflator PASSENGER'S AIRBAG SECOND
INFLATOR )
21-1x X resistance in driver's seat 1A TO 21-1F): OPEN IN DRIVER'S
belt tensioner SEAT BELT TENSIONER )
(see DTC 21-3X (21-30 TO 21-39, 21-
21-3x X
driver's seat belt DECREASED RESISTANCE IN
tensioner DRIVER'S SEAT BELT
TENSIONER )
(see DTC 21-8X (21-80 TO 21-89, 21-
Short to power in
21-8x X driver's seat belt
IN DRIVER'S SEAT BELT
tensioner
TENSIONER )
Short to ground in
(see DTC 21-9X (21-90 TO 21-99, 21-
21-9x X driver's seat belt
tensioner
GROUND IN DRIVER'S SEAT
111
BELT TENSIONER )
22-1x X
passenger's seat belt PASSENGER'S SEAT BELT
tensioner TENSIONER )
(see DTC 22-3X (22-30 TO 22-39, 22-
22-3x X
front passenger's seat DECREASED RESISTANCE IN
belt tensioner FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT
BELT TENSIONER )
(see DTC 22-8X (22-80 TO 22-89, 22-
Short to power in front
22-8x X passenger's seat belt
IN FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT
tensioner
BELT TENSIONER )
(see DTC 22-9X (22-90 TO 22-99, 22-
22-9x X passenger's seat belt GROUND IN FRONT
tensioner PASSENGER'S SEAT BELT
TENSIONER )
side airbag inflator SIDE AIRBAG INFLATOR )
(see DTC 31-3X (31-30 TO 31-39, 31-
31-3x X
driver's side airbag DECREASED RESISTANCE IN
inflator DRIVER'S SIDE AIRBAG
INFLATOR )
(see DTC 31-8X (31-80 TO 31-89, 31-
Short to power in
31-8x X driver's side airbag
IN DRIVER'S SIDE AIRBAG
inflator
INFLATOR )
(see DTC 31-9X (31-90 TO 31-99, 31-
Short to ground in
31-9x X driver's side airbag
GROUND IN DRIVER'S SIDE
inflator
AIRBAG INFLATOR )
32-1x X
passenger's side airbag PASSENGER'S SIDE AIRBAG
inflator INFLATOR )
(see DTC 32-3X (32-30 TO 32-39, 32-
32-3x X
front passenger's side DECREASED RESISTANCE IN
airbag inflator FRONT PASSENGER'S SIDE
AIRBAG INFLATOR )
32-8x X Short to power in front (see DTC 32-8X (32-80 TO 32-89, 32-
passenger's side airbag 8A TO 32-8F): SHORT TO POWER
111
inflator IN FRONT PASSENGER'S SIDE

AIRBAG INFLATOR )
(see DTC 32-9X (32-90 TO 32-99, 32-
32-9x X passenger's side airbag GROUND IN FRONT
inflator PASSENGER'S SIDE AIRBAG
INFLATOR )
(see DTC 33-1X (33-10 TO 33-19, 33-
Open or increased 1A TO 33-1F): OPEN OR
33-1x X resistance in left side INCREASED RESISTANCE IN
curtain airbag inflator LEFT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
INFLATOR )
(see DTC 33-3X (33-30 TO 33-39, 33-
33-3x X
left side curtain airbag DECREASED RESISTANCE IN
inflator LEFT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
INFLATOR )
(see DTC 33-8X (33-80 TO 33-89, 33-
Short to power in left
33-8x X side curtain airbag
IN LEFT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
inflator
INFLATOR )
(see DTC 33-9X (33-90 TO 33-99, 33-
Short to ground in left
GROUND IN LEFT SIDE
inflator
CURTAIN AIRBAG INFLATOR )
(see DTC 34-1X (34-10 TO 34-19, 34-
Open or increased 1A TO 34-1F): OPEN OR
34-1x X resistance in right side INCREASED RESISTANCE IN
curtain airbag inflator RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
INFLATOR )
(see DTC 34-3X (34-30 TO 34-39, 34-
34-3x X
right side curtain airbag DECREASED RESISTANCE IN
inflator RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
INFLATOR )
(see DTC 34-8X (34-80 TO 34-89, 34-
Short to power in right
IN RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN
inflator
AIRBAG INFLATOR )
(see DTC 34-9X (34-90 TO 34-99, 34-
Short to ground in right
GROUND IN RIGHT SIDE
inflator
(1) The SRS indicator turns on and stays on whenever the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position, or
until the code is cleared.
(2) The SRS indicator turns on when the DTC is set. The SRS indicator will not turn on after the
ignition switch is cycled from ON (II) to OFF (0), but the DTC will be stored in the SRS unit.
111
NOTE: The "x" at the end of each DTC denotes a numeric character (0 thru 9) or an
alpha character (A thru F) that you will see on the HDS display. The character
is unrelated to your troubleshooting; it designates the SRS unit
manufacturer and other detail used for product analysis.
NOTE: Before looking up DTCs in the DTC troubleshooting index, verify the
manufacturer of the SRS unit. The DTCs are different from manufacturer to
manufacturer.
DTC TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX - TRW SRS UNIT ('03-05 MODELS) (CONT.)

(see DTC 41-1x (41-10 to 41-19,
No signal from the left
41-1x X 41-1A to 41-1F): No signal from
front impact sensor
the Left Front Impact Sensor )
41-2x (see DTC 41-2x (41-20 to 41-29,
X 41-2A to 41-2F), 41-3x (41-30 to
Internal failure of the left
41-3x 41-39, 41-3A to 41-3F): Internal
front impact sensor
Failure of the Left Front Impact
41-Bx X Sensor )
(see DTC 42-1x (42-10 to 42-19,
No signal from the right
42-1x X 42-1A to 42-1F): No Signal from
front impact sensor
the Right Front Impact Sensor )
42-2x (see DTC 42-2x (42-20 to 42-29,
X 42-2A to 42-2F), 42-3x (42-30 to
Internal failure of the right
42-3x 42-39, 42-3A to 42-3F): Internal
front impact sensor
Failure of the Right Front
42-Bx X Impact Sensor )
(see DTC 43-1x (43-10 to 43-19,
No signal from the left side 43-1A to 43-1F): No Signal from
43-1X X
impact sensor (first) the Left Side Impact Sensor
(first) )
43-2x (see DTC 43-2x (43-20 to 43-29,
43-2A to 43-2F), 43-3x (43-30 to
X
Internal failure of the left 43-39, 43-3A to 43-3F), 43-Bx
43-3x
side impact sensor (first) (43-B0 to 43-B9, 43-BA to 43-
BF): Internal Failure of the Left
43-Bx X Side Impact Sensor (first) )
(see DTC 44-1x (44-10 to 44-19,
No signal from the right 44-1A to 44-1F): No Signal from
44-1 x X
side impact sensor (first) the Right Side Impact Sensor
(first) )
44-2x (see DTC 43-2x (43-20 to 43-29,
43-2A to 43-2F), 43-3x (43-30 to
X
Internal failure of the right 43-39, 43-3A to 43-3F), 43-Bx
44-3X
side impact sensor (first) (43-B0 to 43-B9, 43-BA to 43-
44-Bx X Side Impact Sensor (first) )
(see DTC 45-1x (45-10 to 45-19,
No signal from left side 45-1A to 45-1F): No Signal from
111
impact sensor (second) the Left Side Impact Sensor

45-1x X
(second) )
45-2x (see DTC 45-2x (45-20 to 45-29,
45-2A to 45-2F), 45-3x (45-30 to
X
Internal failure of left side 45-39, 45-3A to 45-3F), 45-Bx
45-3x
impact sensor (second) (45-B0 to 45-B9, 45-BA to 45-
45-Bx X Side Impact Sensor (second) )
(see DTC 46-1x (46-10 to 46-19,
No signal from right side 46-1A to 46-1F): No Signal from
46-1x X
impact sensor (second) the Right Side Impact Sensor
(second) )
46-2x (see DTC 45-2x (45-20 to 45-29,
45-2A to 45-2F), 45-3x (45-30 to
X
Internal failure of right side 45-39, 45-3A to 45-3F), 45-Bx
46-3x
impact sensor (second) (45-B0 to 45-B9, 45-BA to 45-
46-Bx X Side Impact Sensor (second) )
51-2x (see DTC 51-2x (51-20 to 51-29,
X 51-2A to 51-2F), 51-4x (51-40 to
51-4x
51-49, 51-4A to 51-4F), 51-7x
52-8x Internal failure of SRS unit
(51-70 to 51-79, 51-7A to 51-7F):
52-9x X Internal Failure of the SRS
52-Ax Unit )
52-Bx (see DTC 52-Bx (52-B0 to 52-B9,
52-Cx 52-BA to 52-BF), 52-Cx (52-C0
52-Dx X to 52-C9, 52-CA to 52-CF), 52-
Internal failure of SRS unit
52-Ex Dx (52-D0 to 52-D9, 52-DA to
52-Fx 52-DF): Internal Failure of the
53-1 x X SRS Unit )
53-2x (see DTC 53-2x (53-20 to 53-29,
53-3x 53-2A to 53-2F), 53-3x (53-30 to
53-4x 53-39, 53-3A to 53-3F), 53-4x
X Internal failure of SRS unit
54-1x (53-40 to 53-49, 53-4A to 53-4F):
54-2x Internal Failure of the SRS
54-3x Unit )
54-4x (see DTC 54-4x (54-40 to 54-49,
54-5x 54-4A to 54-4F), 54-5x (54-50 to
54-6x 54-59, 54-5A to 54-5F), 54-6x
54-7x (54-60 to 54-69,54-6A to 54-6F):
55-1x Internal Failure of the SRS
55-2x Unit )
55-3x (see DTC 55-3x (55-30 to 55-39,

55-3A to 55-3F), 55-4x (55-40 to
X Internal failure of SRS unit 55-49, 55-4A to 55-4F), 55-7x
55-4x (55-70 to 55-79, 55-7A to 55-7F):
Internal Failure of the SRS
111
Unit )
manufacturer.

(see DTC 61-1x (61-10 to 61-
Open in driver's seat belt
19,61-1A to 61-1F): Open in
buckle switch (with power
seat)
(with power seat) )
61-1x
(see DTC 61-1x (61-10 to 61-
Open in driver's seat belt
19,61-1A to 61-1F): Open in
buckle switch (without
power seat)
(without power seat) )
(see DTC 61-2x (61-20 to 61-
Short in driver's seat belt
29,61-2A to 61-2F): Short in
seat)
(with power seat) )
61-2x
(see DTC 61-2x (61-20 to 61-29,
61-2A to 61-2F): Short in
buckle switch (without
power seat)
X (without power seat) )
(see DTC 62-1x (62-10 to 62-19,
Open in front passenger's
62-1A to 62-1F): Open in Front
seat belt buckle switch (with
Passenger's Seat Belt Buckle
power seat)
Switch (with power seat) )
62-1x (see DTC 62-1x (62-10 to 62-
Open in front passenger's 19,62-1A to 62-1F): Open in
seat belt buckle switch Front Passenger's Seat Belt
(without power seat) Buckle Switch (without power
seat) )
(see DTC 62-2x (62-20 to 62-
Short in front passenger's 29,62-2A to 62-2F): Short in
seat belt buckle switch (with Front Passenger's Seat Belt
62-2x power seat) Buckle Switch (with power
seat) )
111
(see DTC 62-2x (62-20 to 62-29,

Short in front passenger's
62-2A to 62-2F): Short in Front
seat belt buckle switch
Passenger's Seat Belt Buckle
(without power seat)
Switch (without power seat) )
(see DTC 71-1x171-10 to 71-19,
Open in driver's seat position
71-1x 71-1A to 71-1F): Open in
sensor
Driver's Seat Position Sensor )
(see DTC 71-2x (71-20 to 71-29,
Short in driver's seat position
71-2x 71-2A to 71-2F): Short in
sensor
Driver's Seat Position Sensor )
(see DTC 81-4x (81-40 to 81-49,
81-4x 81-4A to 81-4F), 81-5x (81-50 to
Faulty front passenger's 81-59, 81-5A to 81-5F), 81-63,
weight sensor unit 81-64: Internal Failure of the
81-5x Front Passenger's Weight
Sensor Unit ('04-05 models) )
(see DTC 81-61: No Signal from
Front Passenger's Weight
No signal from the front Sensor Unit (with side airbag)
passenger's weight sensor ('04-05 models); DTC 81-62:
unit (with side airbag) Non-stipulated Response Data
(with side airbag) ('04-05
models) )
81-61
No signal from the front Sensor Unit (without side
passenger's weight sensor airbag) ('04-05 models); DTC
unit (without side airbag) 81-62: Non-stipulated Response
Data (without side airbag) ('04-
05 models) )
Sensor Unit (with side airbag)
Non-stipulated response data
('04-05 models); DTC 81-62:
(with side airbag)
Non-stipulated Response Data
(with side airbag) ('04-05
models) )
81-62
Sensor Unit (without side
Non-stipulated response data
airbag) ('04-05 models); DTC
(without side airbag)
81-62: Non-stipulated Response
Data (without side airbag) ('04-
05 models) )
(see DTC 81-4x (81-40 to 81-49,
Model ID code or variation
81-63 81-4A to 81-4F), 81-5x (81-50 to
code inconsistent
81-59, 81-5A to 81-5F), 81-63,
81-64: Internal Failure of the
ECU serial ID code
81-64 Front Passenger's Weight
inconsistent
111
81-71 (see DTC 81-71, 81-78: Front

Front passenger's weight passenger's weight sensor unit
81-78 sensor unit does not calibrate does not calibrate ('04-05
models) )
(see DTC 81-4x (81-40 to 81-49,
81-4A to 81-4F), 81-5x (81-50 to
Front passenger's weight 81-59, 81-5A to 81-5F), 81-63,
81-79
sensors drift check failure 81-64: Internal Failure of the
(see DTC 82-1x (82-10 to 82-19,
No signal from the inner side
82-1A to 82-1F): No Signal from
82-1x front passenger's weight
the Inner Side Front Passenger's
sensor
Weight Sensor ('04-06 models) )
(see DTC 82-1x (82-10 to 82-19,
No signal from the outer side
82-1A to 82-1F): No Signal from
the Inner Side Front Passenger's
sensor
Weight Sensor ('04-06 models) )
(see DTC 85-4x (85-40 to 85-49,
85-4x 85-4A to 85-4F), 85-5x (85-50 to
Faulty OPDS unit 85-59, 85-5A to 85-5F), 85-63,
85-5x 85-64: Internal Failure of the
OPDS/ODS Unit )
No signal from the OPDS (see DTC 85-61: No Signal from
85-61 the OPDS Unit ('04-05 models):
unit
DTC 85-62: Non-stipulated
85-62 Non-stipulated response data Response Data ('04-05 models) )
Model ID code or variation (see DTC 85-4x (85-40 to 85-49,
85-63 85-4A to 85-4F), 85-5x (85-50 to
code inconsistent
85-59, 85-5A to 85-5F), 85-63,
ECU serial ID code 85-64: INTERNAL FAILURE
85-64
inconsistent OF THE OPDS/ODS UNIT )
85-71 (see DTC 85-71, 85-78:
OPDS unit not initialized
85-78 OPDS/ODS unit not initialized )
(see DTC 85-4x (85-40 to 85-49,
85-4A to 85-4F), 85-5x (85-50 to
86-79 OPDS drift check failure 85-59, 85-5A to 85-5F), 85-63,
85-64: Internal Failure of the
OPDS/ODS Unit )
Faulty seat-back OPDS
86-1x
sensor (see DTC 85-71, 85-78:
Faulty seat support OPDS OPDS/ODS unit not initialized )
86-2x
sensor
Internal failure of the OPDS (see DTC 87-31: Internal Failure
87-31
unit of the OPDS/ODS Unit )
The side airbag cutoff (see DTC 87-31: Internal Failure
87-32
indicator stays on of the OPDS/ODS Unit )
91-1x (see DTC 91-1x (91-10 to 91-19,
Internal failure of the SRS 91-1A to 91-1F): Internal
111
unit Failure of the SRS Unit )

X (see DTC 91-1x (91-10 to 91-19,
Short in SRS indicator
91-2x 91-1A to 91-1F): Internal
circuit
Failure of the SRS Unit )
(see DTC 92-1x (92-10 to 92-19,
Open in passenger's airbag 92-1A to 92-1F): Passenger's
92-1x
cutoff indicator Airbag Cutoff Indicator
Malfunction ('04-06 models) )
X
(see DTC 92-1x (92-10 to 92-19,
Short to ground in
92-1A to 92-1F): Passenger's
92-2x passenger's airbag cutoff
Airbag Cutoff Indicator
indicator
Malfunction ('04-06 models) )
(see DTC A1-1x (A1-10 to A1-19,
Faulty power supply (VA
A1-1x A1-1A to A1-1F): Faulty Power
line)
Supply (VA Line) )
(see DTC A2-1x (A2-10 to A2-19,
Faulty power supply (VB
A2-1x A2-1A to A2-1F): Faulty Power
line)
Supply (VB Line) )
Driver's airbag and/or
D1-11 driver's seat belt tensioner
deployed
Front passenger's airbag
D2-11 and/or front passenger's seat
belt tensioner deployed
D3-11 Driver's side airbag deployed
Front passenger's side airbag
D4-11
X deployed
D7-11 Rear-end collisioned (see DTC 55-3x (55-30 to 55-39,
55-3A to 55-3F), 55-4x (55-40 to
E2-11 55-49, 55-4A to 55-4F), 55-7x
deployed
(55-70 to 55-79, 55-7A to 55-7F):
Front passenger's side airbag Internal Failure of the SRS
E4-11
deployed Unit )
Driver's airbag and/or
F1-11 driver's seat belt tensioner
deployed
F2-11 and/or front passenger's seat
F3-11 Driver's side airbag deployed
F4-11
deployed
111
manufacturer.
DTC TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX - DENSO SRS UNIT ('03-05 MODELS)

(see DTC 11-1X (11-10 TO 11-
Open in driver's airbag 19,11-1A TO 11-1F): OPEN IN
11-1x X
first inflator DRIVER'S AIRBAG FIRST
INFLATOR )
(see DTC 11-2X (11-20 TO 11-
Increased resistance in 29,11-2A TO 11-2F): INCREASED
11-2x X
driver's airbag first inflator RESISTANCE IN DRIVER'S
FIRST AIRBAG INFLATOR )
(see DTC 11-3X (11-30 TO 11-
39,11-3A TO 11-3F): SHORT TO
Short to another wire or
ANOTHER WIRE OR
11-3x X decreased resistance in
DECREASED RESISTANCE IN
driver's airbag first inflator
DRIVER'S AIRBAG FIRST
INFLATOR )
(see DTC 11-4X (11-40 TO 11-
Open in driver's airbag 49,11-4A TO 11-4F): OPEN IN
11-4x X
second inflator DRIVER'S AIRBAG SECOND
INFLATOR )
(see DTC 11-5X (11-50 TO 11-
Increased resistance in
59,11-5A TO 11-5F): INCREASED
11-5x X driver's airbag second
RESISTANCE IN DRIVER'S
inflator
AIRBAG SECOND INFLATOR )
(see DTC 11-6X (11-60 TO 11-
Short to another wire or 69,11-6A TO 11-6F): SHORT TO
11-6x X
driver's airbag second DECREASED RESISTANCE IN
inflator DRIVER'S AIRBAG SECOND
INFLATOR )
(see DTC 11-8X (11-80 TO 11-89,
Short to power in driver's 11-8A TO 11-8F): SHORT TO
11-8x X
airbag first inflator POWER IN DRIVER'S AIRBAG
FIRST INFLATOR )
(see DTC 11-9X (11-90 TO 11-99,
Short to ground in driver's 11-9A TO 11-9F): SHORT TO
11-9x X
airbag first inflator GROUND IN DRIVER'S AIRBAG
FIRST INFLATOR )
(see DTC 11-AX (11-A0 TO 11-A9,
Short to power in driver's
11-Ax X 11-AA TO 11-AF): SHORT TO
airbag second inflator
111
SECOND INFLATOR )
(see DTC 11-BX (11-B0 TO 11-B9,
Short to ground in driver's 11-BA TO 11-BF): SHORT TO
11-Bx X
airbag second inflator GROUND IN DRIVER'S AIRBAG
SECOND INFLATOR )
(see DTC 12-1X (12-10 TO 12-19,
Open in front passenger's 12-1A TO 12-1F): OPEN IN
12-1x X
airbag first inflator FRONT PASSENGER'S AIRBAG
FIRST INFLATOR )
(see DTC 12-2X (12-20 TO 12-29,
Increased resistance in 12-2A TO 12-2F): INCREASED
12-2x X front passenger's airbag RESISTANCE IN FRONT
first inflator PASSENGER'S AIRBAG FIRST
INFLATOR )
(see DTC 12-3X (12-30 TO 12-39,
Short to another wire or 12-3A TO 12-3F): SHORT TO
12-3x X
first inflator FRONT PASSENGER'S AIRBAG
FIRST INFLATOR )
(see DTC 12-4X (12-40 TO 12-49,
12-4x X
airbag second inflator FRONT PASSENGER'S AIRBAG
SECOND INFLATOR )
(see DTC 12-5X (12-50 TO 12-59,
12-5X X front passenger's airbag RESISTANCE IN FRONT
second inflator PASSENGER'S AIRBAG
SECOND INFLATOR )
(see DTC 12-6X (12-60 TO 12-69,
12-6x X
second inflator FRONT PASSENGER'S AIRBAG
SECOND INFLATOR )
(see DTC 12-8X (12-80 TO 12-89,
Short to power in front 12-8A TO 12-8F): SHORT TO
12-8x X passenger's airbag first POWER IN FRONT
INFLATOR )
(see DTC 12-9X (12-90 TO 12-99,
Short to ground in front 12-9A TO 12-9F): SHORT TO
12-9x X passenger's airbag first GROUND IN FRONT
INFLATOR )
Short to power in front (see DTC 12-AX (12-A0 TO 12-A9,

12-Ax X passenger's airbag second 12-AA TO 12-AF): SHORT TO
inflator POWER IN FRONT
PASSENGER'S AIRBAG
111
SECOND INFLATOR )
(see DTC 12-BX (12-B0 TO 12-B9,
Short to ground in front 12-BA TO 12-BF): SHORT TO
12-Bx X passenger's airbag second GROUND IN FRONT
inflator PASSENGER'S AIRBAG
SECOND INFLATOR )
(see DTC 21-1X (21-10 TO 21-19,
Open in driver's seat belt 21-1A TO 21-1F): OPEN IN
21-1x X
tensioner DRIVER'S SEAT BELT
TENSIONER )
(see DTC 21-2X (21-20 TO 21-29,
21-2x X
driver's seat belt tensioner RESISTANCE IN DRIVER'S
SEAT BELT TENSIONER )
(see DTC 21-3X (21-30 TO 21-39,
21-3A TO 21-3F): SHORT TO
ANOTHER WIRE OR
driver's seat belt tensioner
DRIVER'S SEAT BELT
TENSIONER )
(see DTC 21-8X (21-80 TO 21-89,
21-8x X
seat belt tensioner POWER IN DRIVER'S SEAT
BELT TENSIONER )
(see DTC 21-9X (21-90 TO 21-99,
21-9x X
seat belt tensioner GROUND IN DRIVER'S SEAT
BELT TENSIONER )
(see DTC 22-1X (22-10 TO 22-19,
22-1x X
seat belt tensioner FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT
BELT TENSIONER )
(see DTC 22-2X (22-20 TO 22-29,
22-2x X front passenger's seat belt RESISTANCE IN FRONT
TENSIONER )
(see DTC 22-3X (22-30 TO 22-39,
22-3x X
front passenger's seat belt DECREASED RESISTANCE IN
tensioner FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT
BELT TENSIONER )
(see DTC 22-8X (22-80 TO 22-89,
22-8x X passenger's seat belt POWER IN FRONT
TENSIONER )
(see DTC 22-9X (22-90 TO 22-99,

111

Short to ground in front
GROUND IN FRONT
22-9x X passenger's seat belt
PASSENGER'S SEAT BELT
tensioner
TENSIONER )
(see DTC 31-1X (31-10 TO 31-19,
Open in driver's side 31-1A TO 31-1F): OPEN IN
31-1x X
airbag inflator DRIVER'S SIDE AIRBAG
INFLATOR )
(see DTC 31-2X (31-20 TO 31-29,
31-2x X
driver's side airbag inflator RESISTANCE IN DRIVER'S
SIDE AIRBAG INFLATOR )
(see DTC 31-3X (31-30 TO 31-39,
ANOTHER WIRE OR
driver's side airbag inflator
DRIVER'S SIDE AIRBAG
INFLATOR )
(see DTC 31-8X (31-80 TO 31-89,
31-8x X
side airbag inflator POWER IN DRIVER'S SIDE
AIRBAG INFLATOR )
(see DTC 31-9X (31-90 TO 31-99,
31-9x X
side airbag inflator GROUND IN DRIVER'S SIDE
AIRBAG INFLATOR )
(see DTC 32-1X (32-10 TO 32-19,
32-1x X
side airbag inflator FRONT PASSENGER'S SIDE
AIRBAG INFLATOR )
(see DTC 32-2X (32-20 TO 32-29,
32-2x X front passenger's side RESISTANCE IN FRONT
airbag inflator PASSENGER'S SIDE AIRBAG
INFLATOR )
(see DTC 32-3X (32-30 TO 32-39,
32-3x X
front passenger's side DECREASED RESISTANCE IN
airbag inflator FRONT PASSENGER'S SIDE
AIRBAG INFLATOR )
(see DTC 32-8X (32-80 TO 32-89,
32-8x X passenger's side airbag POWER IN FRONT
INFLATOR )
(see DTC 32-9X (32-90 TO 32-99,

32-9x X
Short to ground in front 32-9A TO 32-9F): SHORT TO
passenger's side airbag GROUND IN FRONT
111

INFLATOR )
manufacturer.
DTC TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX - DENSO SRS UNIT ('03-05 MODELS) (CONT.)

41-1x X No signal from the left front (see DTC 41-1X (41-10 TO 41-19,
impact sensor 41-1A TO 41-1F): NO SIGNAL
FROM THE LEFT FRONT
IMPACT SENSOR )
41-2x Internal failure of the left (see DTC 41-2X (41-20 TO 41-29,
front impact sensor 41-2A TO 41-2F), 41-3X (41-30 TO
41-9x X 41-39, 41-3A TO 41-3F):
INTERNAL FAILURE OF THE
41-Bx LEFT FRONT IMPACT
SENSOR )
41-Cx X Faulty power supply to the (see DTC 41-CX (41-C0 TO 41-C9,
left front impact sensor 41-CA TO 41-CF): FAULTY
POWER SUPPLY TO THE LEFT
FRONT IMPACT SENSOR )
42-1x X No signal from the right (see DTC 42-1X (42-10 TO 42-19,
front impact sensor 42-1A TO 42-1F): NO SIGNAL
FROM THE RIGHT FRONT
IMPACT SENSOR )
42-2x Internal failure of the right (see DTC 42-2X (42-20 TO 42-29,
front impact sensor 42-2A TO 42-2F), 42-3X (42-30 TO
42-9x X 42-39, 42-3A TO 42-3F):
42-Bx RIGHT FRONT IMPACT
SENSOR )
42-Cx Faulty power supply to the (see DTC 42-CX (42-CO TO 42-
right front impact sensor C9, 42-CA TO 42-CF): FAULTY
POWER SUPPLY TO THE
RIGHT FRONT IMPACT
SENSOR )
43-1x X No signal from the left side (see DTC 43-1X (43-10 TO 43-19,
111
impact sensor (First) 43-1A TO 43-1F): NO SIGNAL

FROM THE LEFT SIDE
IMPACT SENSOR (FIRST) )
43-2x Internal failure of the left (see DTC 43-2X (43-20 TO 43-29,
side impact sensor (First) 43-2A TO 43-2F), 43-3X (43-30 TO
43-39, 43-3A TO 43-3F), 43-BX
(43-B0 TO 43-B9, 43-BA TO 43-
43-Bx X BF): INTERNAL FAILURE OF
THE LEFT SIDE IMPACT
SENSOR (FIRST) )
43-Cx Faulty power supply to the (see DTC 43-CX (43-C0 TO 43-C9,
left side impact sensor (First) 43-CA TO 43-CF): FAULTY
POWER SUPPLY TO THE LEFT
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
(FIRST) )
44-1x X No signal from the right side (see DTC 44-1X (44-10 TO 44-19,
impact sensor (First) 44-1A TO 44-1F): NO SIGNAL
FROM THE RIGHT SIDE
44-2x Internal failure of the right (see DTC 44-2X (44-20 TO 44-29,
side impact sensor (First) 44-2A TO 44-2F), 44-3X (44-30 TO
44-39, 44-3A TO 44-3F), 44-BX
(44-B0 TO 44-B9, 44-BA TO 44-
44-Bx X BF): INTERNAL FAILURE OF
THE RIGHT SIDE IMPACT
SENSOR (FIRST) )
44-Cx Faulty power supply to the (see DTC 44-CX (44-C0 TO 44-C9,
right side impact sensor 44-CA TO 44-CF): FAULTY
(First) POWER SUPPLY TO THE
RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
(FIRST) )
51-2x X Internal failure of SRS unit (see DTC 51-2X (51-20 TO 51-29,
51-4x 51-2A TO 51-2F), 51-4X (51-40 TO
51-7x 51-49, 51-4A TO 51-4F), 51-7X
(51-70 TO 51-79, 51-7A TO 51-
52-8x X
7F): INTERNAL FAILURE OF
52-9x THE SRS UNIT )
52-Ax
52-Bx Internal failure of SRS unit (see DTC 52-BX (52-B0 TO 52-B9,
52-Cx 52-BA TO 52-BF), 52-CX (52-C0
TO 52-C9, 52-CA TO 52-CF), 52-
52-Dx
DX (52-D0 TO 52-D9, 52-DA TO
52-Ex 52-DF): INTERNAL FAILURE
52-Fx OF THE SRS UNIT )
53-3x X Internal failure of SRS unit (see DTC 53-2x (53-20 TO 53-29,
53-4x 53-2A TO 53-2F), 53-3x (53-30 to
53-39, 53-3A TO 53-3F), 53-4x (53-
54-1x
40 TO 53-49, 53-4A TO 53-4F):
54-2x INTERNAL FAILURE OF THE
54-3x SRS UNIT )
111
54-4x Internal failure of SRS unit (see DTC 54-4X (54-40 TO 54-49,
54-7x 54-4A TO 54-4F), 54-5X (54-50 TO
54-59, 54-5A TO 54-5F), 54-6X
55-1x (54-60 TO 54-69,54-6A TO 54-6F):
SRS UNIT )
55-7x Internal failure of SRS unit (see DTC 55-3x (55-30 TO 55-39,
55-3A TO 55-3F), 55-4x (55-40 TO
55-49, 55-4A TO 55-4F), 55-7x (55-
70 TO 55-79, 55-7A TO 55-7F):
SRS UNIT )
manufacturer.
DTC TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX - DENSO SRS UNIT ('03-05 MODELS) (CONT.)

(see DTC 61-1X (61-10 TO 61-
Open in driver's seat belt 19,61-1A TO 61-1F): OPEN IN
buckle switch (with power DRIVER'S SEAT BELT BUCKLE
seat) SWITCH (WITH POWER
SEAT) )
61-1x
(see DTC 61-1X (61-10 TO 61-
buckle switch (without power DRIVER'S SEAT BELT BUCKLE
seat) SWITCH (WITHOUT POWER
SEAT) )
(see DTC 61-2X (61-20 TO 61-
Short in driver's seat belt 29,61-2A TO 61-2F): SHORT IN
seat) SWITCH (WITH POWER
SEAT) )
61-2x
(see DTC 61-2X (61-20 TO 61-29,
Short in driver's seat belt 61-2A TO 61-2F): SHORT IN
buckle switch (without power DRIVER'S SEAT BELT BUCKLE
seat) SWITCH (WITHOUT POWER
SEAT) )
111
(see DTC 62-1X (62-10 TO 62-19,

Open in front passenger's seat 62-1A TO 62-1F): OPEN IN
belt buckle switch (with FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT
power seat) BELT BUCKLE SWITCH (WITH
POWER SEAT) )
62-1x
(see DTC 62-1X (62-10 TO 62-
Open in front passenger's seat 19,62-1A TO 62-1F): OPEN IN
belt buckle switch (without FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT
power seat) BELT BUCKLE SWITCH
(WITHOUT POWER SEAT) )
X
(see DTC 62-2X (62-20 TO 62-
Short in front passenger's seat 29,62-2A TO 62-2F): SHORT IN
belt buckle switch (with FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT
POWER SEAT) )
62-2x
(see DTC 62-2X (62-20 TO 62-29,
Short in front passenger's seat 62-2A TO 62-2F): SHORT IN
belt buckle switch (without FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT
power seat) BELT BUCKLE SWITCH
(see DTC 71-1x171-10 to 71-19, 71-
Open in driver's seat position
71-1x 1A to 71-1F): Open in Driver's
sensor
Seat Position Sensor )
(see DTC 71-2X (71-20 TO 71-29,
Short in driver's seat position 71-2A TO 71-2F): SHORT IN
71-2x
sensor DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION
SENSOR )
(see DTC 71-22: SHORT TO
Short to power in driver's seat
71-22 POWER IN DRIVER'S SEAT
position sensor
POSITION SENSOR )
(see DTC 81-4X (81-40 TO 81-49,
81-4x 81-4A TO 81-4F), 81-5X (81-50 TO
81-59, 81-5A TO 81-5F), 81-63, 81-
Faulty front passenger's
64: INTERNAL FAILURE OF
weight sensor unit
THE FRONT PASSENGER'S
81-5x WEIGHT SENSOR UNIT ('04-05
MODELS) )
(see DTC 81-61: NO SIGNAL
No signal from the front FROM FRONT PASSENGER'S
81-61 passenger's weight sensor unit WEIGHT SENSOR UNIT (WITH
(with side airbag) SIDE AIRBAG) ('04-05
MODELS) )
(see DTC 81-62: NON-
No signal from the front
STIPULATED RESPONSE DATA
81-62 passenger's weight sensor unit
(WITH SIDE AIRBAG) ('04-05
(without side airbag)
MODELS) )
Model ID code or variation (see DTC 81-4X (81-40 TO 81-49,

81-63
code inconsistent 81-4A TO 81-4F), 81-5X (81-50 TO
81-59, 81-5A TO 81-5F), 81-63, 81-
111

ECU serial ID code THE FRONT PASSENGER'S
81-64
inconsistent WEIGHT SENSOR UNIT ('04-05
MODELS) )
(see DTC 81-71, 81-78: FRONT
81-71
Front passenger's weight PASSENGER'S WEIGHT
sensor unit does not calibrate SENSOR UNIT DOES NOT
81-78
CALIBRATE ('04-05 MODELS) )
(see DTC 81-79: FRONT
81-79
sensors drift check failure SENSORS DRIFT CHECK
FAILURE ('04-05 MODELS) )
(see DTC 82-1X (82-10 TO 82-19,
82-1A TO 82-1F): NO SIGNAL
No signal from the inner side
FROM THE INNER SIDE
FRONT PASSENGER'S
sensor
WEIGHT SENSOR ('04-06
MODELS) )
(see DTC 83-2X (83-20 TO 83-29,
83-2A TO 83-2F): NO SIGNAL
No signal from the outer side
X FROM THE OUTER SIDE
FRONT PASSENGER'S
sensor
WEIGHT SENSOR ('04-06
MODELS) )
(see DTC 85-4X (85-40 TO 85-49,
85-4x 85-4A TO 85-4F), 85-5X (85-50 TO
Faulty OPDS unit 85-59, 85-5A TO 85-5F), 85-63, 85-
85-5X 64: INTERNAL FAILURE OF
THE OPDS/ODS UNIT )
85-61 No signal from the OPDS unit (see DTC 85-61: NO SIGNAL
FROM THE OPDS UNIT ('04-05
85-62 Non-stipulated response data MODELS) )
Model ID code or variation (see DTC 85-4x (85-40 to 85-49, 85-
85-63 4A to 85-4F), 85-5x (85-50 to 85-59,
code inconsistent
85-5A to 85-5F), 85-63, 85-64:
ECU serial ID code INTERNAL FAILURE OF THE
85-64
inconsistent OPDS/ODS UNIT )
85-71 (see DTC 85-71, 85-78: OPDS/ODS
OPDS unit not initialized
85-78 UNIT NOT INITIALIZED )
(see DTC 85-79: OPDS SENSOR
85-79 OPDS drift check failure
DRIFT CHECK FAILURE )
86-1x Faulty seat-back OPDS sensor (see DTC 86-1X (86-10 TO 86-19,
Faulty seat support OPDS 86-1A TO 86-1F): FAULTY OPDS
86-2x SEAT-BACK SENSOR )
sensor
(see DTC 87-31: INTERNAL
X Internal failure of the OPDS
87-31 FAILURE OF THE OPDS/ODS
unit
UNIT )
87-32 (see DTC 87-32: SIDE AIRBAG
The side airbag cutoff CUTOFF INDICATOR STAYS
111
indicator stays on ON ('03-05 MODELS) )

(see DTC 91-1X (91-10 TO 91-19,
91-1x Internal failure of the SRS unit 91-1A TO 91-1F): INTERNAL
FAILURE OF THE SRS UNIT )
(see DTC 91-2X (91-20 TO 91-29,
91-2x Short in SRS indicator circuit 91-2A TO 91-2F): SHORT IN SRS
INDICATOR )
(see DTC 92-1X (92-10 TO 92-19,
92-1A TO 92-1F): PASSENGER'S
Short to power in passenger's
92-1x AIRBAG CUTOFF INDICATOR
airbag cutoff indicator
MALFUNCTION ('04-06
MODELS) )
(see DTC 92-2X (92-20 TO 92-29,
92-2A TO 92-2F): OPEN OR
Open in passenger's airbag SHORT TO GROUND IN
cutoff indicator PASSENGER'S AIRBAG
CUTOFF INDICATOR ('04-06
MODELS) )
92-2x
(see DTC 92-2X (92-20 TO 92-29,
92-2A TO 92-2F): OPEN OR
Short to ground in passenger's SHORT TO GROUND IN
airbag cutoff indicator PASSENGER'S AIRBAG
CUTOFF INDICATOR ('04-06
MODELS) )
(see DTC A1-1X (A1-10 TO A1-19,
A1-1x Faulty power supply (VA line) A1-1A TO A1-1F): FAULTY
POWER SUPPLY (VA LINE) )
(see DTC A2-1X (A2-10 TO A2-19,
A2-1x X Faulty power supply (VB line) A2-1A TO A2-1F): FAULTY
POWER SUPPLY (VB LINE) )
Driver's airbag and/or driver's
D1-11
seat belt tensioner deployed
D2-11 and/or front passenger's seat
D3-11 Driver's side airbag deployed
D4-11
deployed (see DTC D1-11, D2-11, D3-11, D4-
D7-11 Rear-end collisioned 11, D7-11, E2-11, E4-11, F1-11, F2-
Front passenger's airbag 11, F3-11, F4-11: AIRBAGS, SIDE
E2-11 AIRBAGS, AND/OR SEAT BELT
deployed
Front passenger's side airbag TENSIONERS DEPLOYED )
E4-11
deployed
Driver's airbag and/or driver's
F1-11
F2-11 and/or front passenger's seat
111
F3-11 Driver's side airbag deployed

F4-11
deployed
manufacturer of the SRS unit. The DTCs a re different from manufacturer to
manufacturer.
DTC TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX - TRW SRS UNIT ('06-07 MODELS)

11-1x X Open or increased (see DTC 11-1X (11-10 TO 11-
resistance in driver's airbag 19,11-1A TO 11-1F): OPEN IN
first inflator DRIVER'S AIRBAG FIRST
INFLATOR )
11-3x X Short to another wire or (see DTC 11-3X (11-30 TO 11-
decreased resistance in 39,11-3A TO 11-3F): SHORT TO
driver's airbag first inflator ANOTHER WIRE OR
DRIVER'S AIRBAG FIRST
INFLATOR )
11-4x X Open or increased (see DTC 11-4X (11-40 TO 11-
resistance in driver's airbag 49,11-4A TO 11-4F): OPEN IN
second inflator DRIVER'S AIRBAG SECOND
INFLATOR )
11-6x X Short to another wire or (see DTC 11-6X (11-60 TO 11-
decreased resistance in 69,11-6A TO 11-6F): SHORT TO
driver's airbag second ANOTHER WIRE OR
inflator DECREASED RESISTANCE IN
DRIVER'S AIRBAG SECOND
INFLATOR )
11-8x X Short to power in driver's (see DTC 11-8X (11-80 TO 11-89,
airbag first inflator 11-8A TO 11-8F): SHORT TO
FIRST INFLATOR )
11-9x X Short to ground in driver's (see DTC 11-9X (11-90 TO 11-99,
airbag first inflator 11-9A TO 11-9F): SHORT TO
FIRST INFLATOR )
111
11-Ax X Short to power in driver's (see DTC 11-AX (11-A0 TO 11-A9,

airbag second inflator 11-AA TO 11-AF): SHORT TO
SECOND INFLATOR )
11-Bx X Short to ground in driver's (see DTC 11-BX (11-B0 TO 11-B9,
airbag second inflator 11-BA TO 11-BF): SHORT TO
SECOND INFLATOR )
12-1x X Open or increased (see DTC 12-1X (12-10 TO 12-19,
resistance in front 12-1A TO 12-1F): OPEN IN
passenger's airbag first FRONT PASSENGER'S AIRBAG
inflator FIRST INFLATOR )
12-3x X Short to another wire or (see DTC 12-3X (12-30 TO 12-39,
decreased resistance in 12-3A TO 12-3F): SHORT TO
front passenger's airbag ANOTHER WIRE OR
first inflator DECREASED RESISTANCE IN
FRONT PASSENGER'S AIRBAG
FIRST INFLATOR )
passenger's airbag second FRONT PASSENGER'S AIRBAG
inflator SECOND INFLATOR )
front passenger's airbag ANOTHER WIRE OR
second inflator DECREASED RESISTANCE IN
FRONT PASSENGER'S AIRBAG
SECOND INFLATOR )
12-8x X Short to power in front (see DTC 12-8X (12-80 TO 12-89,
passenger's airbag first 12-8A TO 12-8F): SHORT TO
PASSENGER'S AIRBAG FIRST
INFLATOR )
12-9x X Short to ground in front (see DTC 12-9X (12-90 TO 12-99,
passenger's airbag first 12-9A TO 12-9F): SHORT TO
inflator GROUND IN FRONT
PASSENGER'S AIRBAG FIRST
INFLATOR )
12-Ax X Short to power in front (see DTC 12-AX (12-A0 TO 12-A9,
passenger's airbag second 12-AA TO 12-AF): SHORT TO
PASSENGER'S AIRBAG
SECOND INFLATOR )
12-Bx X Short to ground in front (see DTC 12-BX (12-B0 TO 12-B9,
passenger's airbag second 12-BA TO 12-BF): SHORT TO
PASSENGER'S AIRBAG
SECOND INFLATOR )
111
resistance in driver's seat 21-1A TO 21-1F): OPEN IN

belt tensioner DRIVER'S SEAT BELT
TENSIONER )
driver's seat belt tensioner ANOTHER WIRE OR
DRIVER'S SEAT BELT
TENSIONER )
seat belt tensioner 21-8A TO 21-8F): SHORT TO
POWER IN DRIVER'S SEAT
BELT TENSIONER )
seat belt tensioner 21-9A TO 21-9F): SHORT TO
GROUND IN DRIVER'S SEAT
BELT TENSIONER )
passenger's seat belt FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT
tensioner BELT TENSIONER )
front passenger's seat belt ANOTHER WIRE OR
tensioner DECREASED RESISTANCE IN
FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT
BELT TENSIONER )
passenger's seat belt 22-8A TO 22-8F): SHORT TO
tensioner POWER IN FRONT
TENSIONER )
passenger's seat belt 22-9A TO 22-9F): SHORT TO
tensioner GROUND IN FRONT
TENSIONER )
resistance in driver's side 31-1A TO 31-1F): OPEN IN
airbag inflator DRIVER'S SIDE AIRBAG
INFLATOR )
driver's side airbag inflator ANOTHER WIRE OR
DRIVER'S SIDE AIRBAG
INFLATOR )
side airbag inflator 31-8A TO 31-8F): SHORT TO
111
POWER IN DRIVER'S SIDE

AIRBAG INFLATOR )
side airbag inflator 31-9A TO 31-9F): SHORT TO
GROUND IN DRIVER'S SIDE
AIRBAG INFLATOR )
passenger's side airbag FRONT PASSENGER'S SIDE
inflator AIRBAG INFLATOR )
front passenger's side ANOTHER WIRE OR
airbag inflator DECREASED RESISTANCE IN
FRONT PASSENGER'S SIDE
AIRBAG INFLATOR )
passenger's side airbag 32-8A TO 32-8F): SHORT TO
PASSENGER'S SIDE AIRBAG
INFLATOR )
passenger's side airbag 32-9A TO 32-9F): SHORT TO
PASSENGER'S SIDE AIRBAG
INFLATOR )
resistance in left side 33-1A TO 33-1F): OPEN OR
curtain airbag inflator INCREASED RESISTANCE IN
LEFT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
INFLATOR )
decreased resistance in left 33-3A TO 33-3F): SHORT TO
side curtain airbag inflator ANOTHER WIRE OR
LEFT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
INFLATOR )
33-8x X Short to power in left side (see DTC 33-8X (33-80 TO 33-89,
curtain airbag inflator 33-8A TO 33-8F): SHORT TO
POWER IN LEFT SIDE
33-9x X Short to ground in left side (see DTC 33-9X (33-90 TO 33-99,
GROUND IN LEFT SIDE
resistance in right side 34-1A TO 34-1F): OPEN OR
curtain airbag inflator INCREASED RESISTANCE IN
RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
111
INFLATOR )
right side curtain airbag ANOTHER WIRE OR
inflator DECREASED RESISTANCE IN
RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
INFLATOR )
34-8x X Short to power in right side (see DTC 34-8X (34-80 TO 34-89,
POWER IN RIGHT SIDE
34-9x X Short to ground in right (see DTC 34-9X (34-90 TO 34-99,
side curtain airbag inflator 34-9A TO 34-9F): SHORT TO
GROUND IN RIGHT SIDE
manufacturer.

(see DTC 41-1X (41-10 TO 41-19,
No signal from the left 41-1A TO 41-1F): NO SIGNAL
41-1x X
front impact sensor FROM THE LEFT FRONT
IMPACT SENSOR )
41-2x (see DTC 41-2X (41-20 TO 41-29,
41-2A TO 41-2F), 41-3X (41-30 TO
X
Internal failure of the left 41-39, 41-3A TO 41-3F):
41-3x
front impact sensor INTERNAL FAILURE OF THE
LEFT FRONT IMPACT
41-Bx X SENSOR )
(see DTC 42-1X (42-10 TO 42-19,
No signal from the right 42-1A TO 42-1F): NO SIGNAL
42-1x X
front impact sensor FROM THE RIGHT FRONT
IMPACT SENSOR )
42-2x (see DTC 42-2X (42-20 TO 42-29,
X 42-2A TO 42-2F), 42-3X (42-30 TO
Internal failure of the right 42-39, 42-3A TO 42-3F):
111
42-3x front impact sensor INTERNAL FAILURE OF THE

RIGHT FRONT IMPACT
42-Bx X SENSOR )
(see DTC 43-1X (43-10 TO 43-19,
No signal from the left side 43-1A TO 43-1F): NO SIGNAL
43-1x X
impact sensor (first) FROM THE LEFT SIDE IMPACT
SENSOR (FIRST) )
(see DTC 43-2X (43-20 TO 43-29,
43-2x 43-2A TO 43-2F), 43-3X (43-30 TO
X 43-39, 43-3A TO 43-3F), 43-BX
Internal failure of the left
43-3x (43-B0 TO 43-B9, 43-BA TO 43-
side impact sensor (first)
BF): INTERNAL FAILURE OF
43-Bx X THE LEFT SIDE IMPACT
SENSOR (FIRST) )
(see DTC 44-1X (44-10 TO 44-19,
No signal from the right 44-1A TO 44-1F): NO SIGNAL
44-1x X
side impact sensor (first) FROM THE RIGHT SIDE
(see DTC 44-2X (44-20 TO 44-29,
44-2x 44-2A TO 44-2F), 44-3X (44-30 TO
X 44-39, 44-3A TO 44-3F), 44-BX
Internal failure of the right
44-3x (44-B0 TO 44-B9, 44-BA TO 44-
side impact sensor (first)
44-Bx X THE RIGHT SIDE IMPACT
SENSOR (FIRST) )
(see DTC 45-1X (45-10 TO 45-19,
No signal from left side 45-1A TO 45-1F): NO SIGNAL
45-1x X
impact sensor (second) FROM THE LEFT SIDE IMPACT
SENSOR (SECOND) )
(see DTC 45-2X (45-20 TO 45-29,
45-2x 45-2A TO 45-2F), 45-3X (45-30 TO
X 45-39, 45-3A TO 45-3F), 45-BX
Internal failure of left side
45-3x (45-B0 TO 45-B9, 45-BA TO 45-
impact sensor (second)
45-Bx X THE LEFT SIDE IMPACT
SENSOR (SECOND) )
(see DTC 46-1X (46-10 TO 46-19,
No signal from right side 46-1A TO 46-1F): NO SIGNAL
46-1x X
impact sensor (second) FROM THE RIGHT SIDE
IMPACT SENSOR (SECOND) )
(see DTC 46-2X (46-20 TO 46-29,
46-2x 46-2A TO 46-2F), 46-3X (46-30 TO
X 46-39, 46-3A TO 46-3F), 46-BX
Internal failure of right side
46-3x (46-B0 TO 46-B9, 46-BA TO 46-
impact sensor (second)
46-Bx X THE RIGHT SIDE IMPACT
SENSOR (SECOND) )
51-2x (see DTC 51-2X (51-20 TO 51-29,
X 51-2A TO 51-2F), 51-4X (51-40 TO
51-4x
51-49, 51-4A TO 51-4F), 51-7X (51-
111
52-8x 70 TO 51-79, 51-7A TO 51-7F):

52-9x X Internal failure of SRS unit INTERNAL FAILURE OF THE
52-Ax SRS UNIT )
52-Bx (see DTC 52-BX (52-B0 TO 52-B9,
52-Cx 52-BA TO 52-BF), 52-CX (52-C0
52-Dx X TO 52-C9, 52-CA TO 52-CF), 52-
Internal failure of SRS unit
52-Ex DX (52-D0 TO 52-D9, 52-DA TO
52-Fx 52-DF): INTERNAL FAILURE
53-1x X OF THE SRS UNIT )
53-2x (see DTC 53-2X (53-20 TO 53-29,
53-3x 53-2A TO 53-2F), 53-3X (53-30 TO
53-4x 53-39, 53-3A TO 53-3F), 53-4X (53-
54-1x 40 TO 53-49, 53-4A TO 53-4F):
54-3x SRS UNIT )
54-4x (see DTC 54-4X (54-40 TO 54-49,
54-5x 54-4A TO 54-4F), 54-5X (54-50 TO
54-6x 54-59, 54-5A TO 54-5F), 54-6X (54-
54-7x 60 TO 54-69,54-6A TO 54-6F):
55-2x SRS UNIT )
(see DTC 55-3X (55-30 TO 55-39,
55-3x 55-3A TO 55-3F), 55-4X (55-40 TO
55-49, 55-4A TO 55-4F), 55-7X (55-
70 TO 55-79, 55-7A TO 55-7F):
55-4X INTERNAL FAILURE OF THE
SRS UNIT )
manufacturer.

(see DTC 61-1X (61-10 TO 61-
111

seat) SWITCH (WITH POWER SEAT) )
(see DTC 61-1X (61-10 TO 61-
61-1x Open in driver's seat belt 19,61-1A TO 61-1F): OPEN IN
buckle switch (without DRIVER'S SEAT BELT BUCKLE
power seat) SWITCH (WITHOUT POWER
SEAT) )
(see DTC 61-2X (61-20 TO 61-
29,61-2A TO 61-2F): SHORT IN
DRIVER'S SEAT BELT BUCKLE
seat)
SWITCH (WITH POWER SEAT) )
61-2x (see DTC 61-2X (61-20 TO 61-29,
Short in driver's seat belt 61-2A TO 61-2F): SHORT IN
buckle switch (without DRIVER'S SEAT BELT BUCKLE
power seat) SWITCH (WITHOUT POWER
SEAT) )
(see DTC 62-1X (62-10 TO 62-19,
X Open in front passenger's 62-1A TO 62-1F): OPEN IN
seat belt buckle switch (with FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT
POWER SEAT) )
62-1x
(see DTC 62-1X (62-10 TO 62-
Open in front passenger's 19,62-1A TO 62-1F): OPEN IN
seat belt buckle switch FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT
(without power seat) BELT BUCKLE SWITCH
(see DTC 62-2X (62-20 TO 62-
Short in front passenger's 29,62-2A TO 62-2F): SHORT IN
seat belt buckle switch (with FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT
POWER SEAT) )
62-2x
(see DTC 62-2X (62-20 TO 62-29,
Short in front passenger's 62-2A TO 62-2F): SHORT IN
seat belt buckle switch FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT
(without power seat) BELT BUCKLE SWITCH
(see DTC 71-1X171-10 TO 71-19,
Open in driver's seat 71-1A TO 71-1F): OPEN IN
71-1x
position sensor DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION
SENSOR )
(see DTC 71-2X (71-20 TO 71-29,
Short in driver's seat 71-2A TO 71-2F): SHORT IN
71-2x
position sensor DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION
SENSOR )
81-4x (see DTC 81-4X (81-40 TO 81-49,

81-4A TO 81-4F), 81-5X (81-50 TO
Faulty ODS unit
81-59, 81-5A TO 81-5F), 81-63, 81-
81-5x 64: INTERNAL FAILURE OF
THE FRONT PASSENGER'S
111
WEIGHT SENSOR UNIT ('04-05

MODELS) )
(see DTC 81-61: NO SIGNAL
FROM FRONT PASSENGER'S
No signal from the ODS
81-61 WEIGHT SENSOR UNIT (WITH
unit
SIDE AIRBAG) ('04-05
MODELS) )
(see DTC 81-62: NON-
Non-stipulated response STIPULATED RESPONSE DATA
81-62
data (WITH SIDE AIRBAG) ('04-05
MODELS) )
(see DTC 81-4X (81-40 TO 81-49,
Model ID code or variation 81-4A TO 81-4F), 81-5X (81-50 TO
81-63
code inconsistent 81-59, 81-5A TO 81-5F), 81-63, 81-
ECU serial ID code THE FRONT PASSENGER'S
81-64 WEIGHT SENSOR UNIT ('04-05
inconsistent
MODELS) )
(see DTC 81-71, 81-78: FRONT
81-71
PASSENGER'S WEIGHT
ODS unit does not calibrate
SENSOR UNIT DOES NOT
81-78
CALIBRATE ('04-05 MODELS) )
(see DTC 81-79: FRONT
81-79
sensors drift check failure SENSORS DRIFT CHECK
X
FAILURE ('04-05 MODELS) )
(see DTC 82-1X (82-10 TO 82-19,
No signal from the inner 82-1A TO 82-1F): NO SIGNAL
82-1x side front passenger's FROM THE INNER SIDE FRONT
weight sensor PASSENGER'S WEIGHT
SENSOR ('04-06 MODELS) )
(see DTC 83-2X (83-20 TO 83-29,
No signal from the outer 83-2A TO 83-2F): NO SIGNAL
83-2x side front passenger's FROM THE OUTER SIDE
weight sensor FRONT PASSENGER'S WEIGHT
SENSOR ('04-06 MODELS) )
(see DTC 85-4X (85-40 TO 85-49,
85-4x 85-4A TO 85-4F), 85-5X (85-50 TO
Faulty ODS unit 85-59, 85-5A TO 85-5F), 85-63, 85-
85-5x 64: INTERNAL FAILURE OF
THE OPDS/ODS UNIT )
No signal from the ODS
85-61 (see DTC 85-61: NO SIGNAL
unit
FROM THE OPDS UNIT ('04-05
Non-stipulated response MODELS) )
85-62
data
Model ID code or variation
85-63 (see DTC 85-4x (85-40 to 85-49, 85-
code inconsistent
4A to 85-4F), 85-5x (85-50 to 85-59,
85-64 85-5A to 85-5F), 85-63, 85-64:
ECU serial ID code INTERNAL FAILURE OF THE
111
inconsistent OPDS/ODS UNIT )

85-71 (see DTC 85-71, 85-78: OPDS/ODS
ODS unit not initialized
85-78 UNIT NOT INITIALIZED )
(see DTC 85-79: OPDS SENSOR
85-79 ODS drift check failure
DRIFT CHECK FAILURE )
Faulty seat-back OPDS
86-1x (see DTC 86-1X (86-10 TO 86-19,
sensor
86-1A TO 86-1F): FAULTY OPDS
Faulty seat support OPDS SEAT-BACK SENSOR )
86-2x
sensor
(see DTC 87-31: INTERNAL
Internal failure of the ODS
87-31 FAILURE OF THE OPDS/ODS
unit
UNIT )
(see DTC 87-32: SIDE AIRBAG
The side airbag cutoff
87-32 CUTOFF INDICATOR STAYS ON
indicator stays on
('03-05 MODELS) )
(see DTC 91-1X (91-10 TO 91-19,
Internal failure of the SRS
91-1x 91-1A TO 91-1F): INTERNAL
unit
FAILURE OF THE SRS UNIT )
(see DTC 91-2X (91-20 TO 91-29,
Short in SRS indicator
91-2x 91-2A TO 91-2F): SHORT IN SRS
circuit
INDICATOR )
(see DTC 92-1X (92-10 TO 92-19,
92-1A TO 92-1F): PASSENGER'S
Open in passenger's airbag
92-1x AIRBAG CUTOFF INDICATOR
cutoff indicator
MALFUNCTION ('04-06
MODELS) )
X
(see DTC 92-2X (92-20 TO 92-29,
Short to ground in 92-2A TO 92-2F): OPEN OR
92-2x passenger's airbag cutoff SHORT TO GROUND IN
indicator PASSENGER'S AIRBAG CUTOFF
INDICATOR ('04-06 MODELS) )
(see DTC A1-1X (A1-10 TO A1-19,
Faulty power supply (VA
A1-1x A1-1A TO A1-1F): FAULTY
line)
POWER SUPPLY (VA LINE) )
(see DTC A2-1X (A2-10 TO A2-19,
Faulty power supply (VB
A2-1x A2-1A TO A2-1F): FAULTY
line)
POWER SUPPLY (VB LINE) )
Driver's airbag and driver's
D1-11
X Front passenger's airbag and
D2-11 front passenger's seat belt
tensioner deployed
Driver's side airbag
D3-11
deployed
Front passenger's side
D4-11
airbag deployed
D7-11 Rear-end collisioned
(see DTC D1-11, D2-11, D3-11, D4-
Front passenger's airbag 11, D7-11, E2-11, E4-11, F1-11, F2-
111
E2-11 deployed 11, F3-11, F4-11: Airbags, Side

Front passenger's side Airbags, and/or Seat Belt
E4-11 Tensioners Deployed )
airbag deployed
Driver's airbag and driver's
F1-11
Front passenger's airbag and
F2-11 front passenger's seat belt
tensioner deployed
Driver's side airbag
F3-11
deployed
Front passenger's side
F4-11
airbag deployed
When an OPDS sensor or seat weight sensor failure occurs, the DTC is stored by the STS unit and the ODS
unit. The ODS unit DTC is a subcode of the STS unit DTC.
111
Fig. 40: ODS Unit DTC Index ('06-07 Models)


Symptom Troubleshooting (see
SRS indicator does not come
SYMPTOM
on
TROUBLESHOOTING )
Symptom Troubleshooting (see step 1
SRS indicator stays on, but
in SRS indicator stays on, but no
no DTCs are stored
DTCs are stored ('03-05 models) )
 Make sure nothing is on the front

111
passenger's seat.
 If the side airbag cutoff indicator
stays on after the ignition switch
is turned ON (II), initialize the
OPDS/ODS unit (see
INITIALIZING THE
OPDS/ODS UNIT ).
Side airbag cutoff indicator  If the side airbag cutoff
stays on after bulb check, indicator operates
and no DTCs are stored, or normally, the system is DTC 87-32 troubleshooting
side airbag cutoff indicator is OK.
flashing  If the side airbag cutoff
indicator stays on, or
flashes replace the OPDS
sensor/ seat-back (see
FRONT SEAT COVER
REPLACEMENT ). The
sensor is part of the seat-
back pad.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SRS COMPONENTS
Airbags
The SRS is a safety device which, when used with the seat belt, is designed to help protect the driver and
front passenger in a frontal impact exceeding a certain set limit. The system consists of the SRS unit,
including safing sensor and impact sensor (A), the cable reel (B), the driver's airbag (C), the front
passenger's airbag (D), side airbags (E), side curtain airbags (L), seat belt tensioners (I), front impact sensors
(J), side impact sensors (first) (F) and side impact sensors (second) (K).
Since the driver's and front passenger's airbags use the same sensors, both normally inflate at the same time.
However, it is possible for only one airbag to inflate. This can occur when the severity of a collision is at the
margin, or threshold, that the SRS unit determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the
seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be
minimal.
Front Passenger's Weight Sensors ('04-07 models)
The front passenger's weight sensor unit ('04-05 models) (M) is under the front passenger's seat along with
the weight sensors (N). The weight sensors detect the weight on the seat, and send the information to the
front passenger's weight sensor unit ('04-05 models) or the ODS unit ('06-07 model). If the total weight is
about 65 lbs (30 kg) or less, the front passenger's weight sensor unit or OPDS/ODS unit sends a signal to the
SRS unit to prevent the passenger's airbag from deploying. When the passenger's airbag is disabled, the
passenger airbag cutoff indicator on the center panel comes on to alert the driver that the front passenger's
airbag will not deploy in a front-end collision.
Driver's Seat Position Sensor ('04-07 models)
111
The driver's seat position sensor (O) is under the driver's seat on the left side. When the driver's seat is
moved to its full forward position, the deployment of the driver's airbag is moderated to decrease its force of
impact during a front-end collision.
OPDS/ODS
The side airbag system also includes an occupant position detection system (OPDS). This system consists of
sensors (G) and a OPDS/ODS unit (H) in the front passenger's seat-back. The OPDS/ODS unit sends
occupant height and position data to the SRS unit. If the OPDS/ODS unit determines that the front passenger
is of small stature (for example, a child) or the front passenger is leaning into the side airbag deployment
path, the SRS unit will automatically disable the passenger's side airbag. The SRS unit will also disable the
airbag when the OPDS detects certain objects on the seat. When the side airbag is disabled, the side airbag
cutoff indicator on the instrument panel alerts the driver that the passenger's side airbag will not deploy in a
side impact. When the object is removed, or the passenger sits upright, the side airbag cutoff indicator will
go off after a few seconds, alerting the driver that the passenger's side airbag will deploy in a side impact.
Fig. 41: Identifying SRS Components ('03-05 Models)

111
Fig. 42: Identifying SRS Components ('06-07 Models)

SIDE AIRBAG CUTOFF INDICATOR/OPDS/ODS OPERATION
The indicator comes on if the front passenger's seat is occupied by a small adult or child who is leaning into
the deployment path, or an object (grocery bag, briefcase, purse, etc.) is in the seat. This indicates the
passenger's side airbag is off and will not deploy; there is no problem with the side airbag. If the passenger
sits upright or moves to another seat, or you remove the object from the seat, the light should go off. There
will be some delay between the occupant's repositioning, and when the indicator will turn on or off.
PASSENGER AIRBAG CUTOFF INDICATOR
The indicator comes on if the weight of the front passenger is 65 lbs (30 kg) or less. This indicates the
passenger's front airbag is off and will not deploy. The front airbag is shut off to reduce the chance of
airbag-caused injuries.
SRS OPERATION
The main circuit in the SRS unit senses and judges the force of impact and, if necessary, ignites the inflator
charges. If battery voltage is too low or power is disconnected due to the impact, the voltage regulator and
the back-up power circuit, respectively, will keep voltage at a constant level.
For the SRS to operate
Seat Belt Tensioners
1. A front impact sensor must activate and send electric signals to the microprocessor.
2. The microprocessor must compute the signals and send them to the tensioners.
3. The charges must ignite and deploy the tensioners.
Driver's and Front Passenger's Airbag(s)
1. A front impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor.
111
2. The microprocessor must compute the signals, and send them to the airbag inflator(s).
3. The inflators that received signals must ignite and deploy the airbags.
Side Airbag(s)
1. Aside impact sensor must activate, and send electric signals to the microprocessor.
2. The microprocessor must compute the signals and send them to the side airbag inflator(s). However,
the microprocessor cuts off the signals to the front passenger's side airbag if the SRS unit determines
that the front passenger's head is in the deployment path of the side airbag.
3. The inflator that received the signal must ignite and deploy the side airbag.
Side Curtain Airbag(s)
1. Side impact sensors must activate, and send electrical signals to the microprocessor.
2. The microprocessor must compute the signals and send them to the side curtain airbag and side airbag
inflator(s).
3. The inflator that received the signals must ignite and deploy the side curtain airbag and side airbag at
the same time.
Fig. 43: SRS System Electrical Diagram

Self-diagnosis System
A self-diagnosis circuit is built into the SRS unit; when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the SRS
indicator comes on and goes off after about 6 seconds if the system is operating normally.
111
If the indicator does not come on, or does not go off after 6 seconds, or if it comes on while driving, it
indicates an abnormality in the system. The system must be inspected and repaired as soon as possible.
For better serviceability, the SRS unit memory stores a DTC that relates to the cause of the malfunction, and
the unit is connected to the data link connector (DLC). This information can be read with the HDS when it is
connected to the DLC (16P) (see GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION ).
NOTE: Before you disconnect the battery negative cable for troubleshooting, make
sure you have the anti-theft code for the audio and the navigation system.
Write down the audio presets.
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
WITHOUT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('03-05 MODELS)
111
Fig. 44: SRS System Circuit Diagram (Without Side Curtain Airbags - '03-05 Models - 1 Of 2)
111
Fig. 45: SRS System Circuit Diagram (Without Side Curtain Airbags - '03-05 Models - 2 Of 2)
WITH SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('03-05 MODELS)
111
Fig. 46: SRS System Circuit Diagram (With Side Curtain Airbags - '03-05 Models - 1 Of 2)
111
Fig. 47: SRS System Circuit Diagram (With Side Curtain Airbags - '03-05 Models - 2 Of 2)
('06-07 MODEL)
111
Fig. 48: SRS System Circuit Diagram ('06-07 Models - 1 Of 2)

111
Fig. 49: SRS System Circuit Diagram ('06-07 Models - 2 Of 2)

SRS UNIT INPUTS & OUTPUTS

CONNECTOR "A"
111
Fig. 50: Identifying Connector "A" Inputs & Outputs

CONNECTOR "B"
111
Fig. 51: Identifying Connector "B" Inputs & Outputs

CONNECTOR "C"
111
Fig. 52: Indentifying Connector "C" Inputs & Outputs

DTC TROUBLESHOOTING
DTC CODES
DTC CODES INDEX

DTC Description
DTC 11 1x (11-10 to 11-19,11-1A to 11-1F): Open in
Driver's Airbag First Inflator
DTC 11 2x (11-20 to 11-29,11-2A to 11-2F): Increased
Resistance in Driver's First Airbag Inflator
Driver's Airbag Second Inflator
DTC 11 5x (11-50 to 11-59,11-5A to 11-5F): Increased
Resistance in Driver's Airbag Second Inflator
DTC 11 3x (11-30 to 11-39,11-3A to 11-3F): Short to
Another Wire or Decreased Resistance in Driver's
Airbag First Inflator
DTC 11 6x (11-60 to 11-69,11-6A to 11-6F): Short to
Airbag Second Inflator
DTC 11 8x (11-80 to 11-89, 11-8A to 11-8F): Short to
Power in Driver's Airbag First Inflator
111
DTC 11 Ax (11-A0 to 11-A9, 11-AA to 11-AF): Short to

Power in Driver's Airbag Second Inflator
Ground in Driver's Airbag First Inflator
DTC 11 Bx (11-B0 to 11-B9, 11-BA to 11-BF): Short to
Ground in Driver's Airbag Second Inflator
DTC 12 1x (12-10 to 12-19, 12-1A to 12-1F): Open in Front
Passenger's Airbag First Inflator
DTC 12 2x (12-20 to 12-29, 12-2A to 12-2F): Increased
Resistance in Front Passenger's Airbag First
Inflator
Passenger's Airbag Second Inflator
Resistance in Front Passenger's Airbag Second
Inflator
Another Wire or Decreased Resistance in Front
Passenger's Airbag First Inflator
Passenger's Airbag Second Inflator
Power in Front Passenger's Airbag First Inflator
DTC 12 Ax (12-A0 to 12-A9, 12-AA to 12-AF): Short to
Power in Front Passenger's Airbag Second Inflator
Ground in Front Passenger's Airbag First Inflator
DTC 12 Bx (12-B0 to 12-B9, 12-BA to 12-BF): Short to
Ground in Front Passenger's Airbag Second Inflator
DTC 21 1x (21-10 to 21-19, 21-1A to 21-1F): Open in
Driver's Seat Belt Tensioner
Resistance in Driver's Seat Belt Tensioner
Seat Belt Tensioner
Power in Driver's Seat Belt Tensioner
Ground in Driver's Seat Belt Tensioner
Passenger's Seat Belt Tensioner
Resistance in Front Passenger's Seat Belt Tensioner
Passenger's Seat Belt Tensioner
111

Power in Front Passenger's Seat Belt Tensioner
Ground in Front Passenger's Seat Belt Tensioner
DTC 31 1x (31-10 to 31-19, 31-1A to 31-1F): Open in
Driver's Side Airbag Inflator
Resistance in Driver's Side Airbag Inflator
Side Airbag Inflator
Power in Driver's Side Airbag Inflator
Ground in Driver's Side Airbag Inflator
Passenger's Side Airbag Inflator
Resistance in Front Passenger's Side Airbag
Inflator
Passenger's Side Airbag Inflator
Power in Front Passenger's Side Airbag Inflator
Ground in Front Passenger's Side Airbag Inflator
DTC 33 1x (33-10 to 33-19, 33-1A to 33-1F): Open or
Increased Resistance in Left Side Curtain Airbag
Inflator
Another Wire or Decreased Resistance in Left Side
Curtain Airbag Inflator
Power in Left Side Curtain Airbag Inflator
Ground in Left Side Curtain Airbag Inflator
DTC 34 1x (34-10 to 34-19, 34-1A to 34-1F): Open or
Increased Resistance in Right Side Curtain Airbag
Inflator
Another Wire or Decreased Resistance in Right
Side Curtain Airbag Inflator
Power in Right Side Curtain Airbag Inflator
Ground in Right Side Curtain Airbag Inflator
DTC 41 1x (41-10 to 41-19, 41-1A to 41-1F): No signal
111
from the Left Front Impact Sensor

DTC 41 Cx (41-C0 to 41-C9, 41-CA to 41-CF): Faulty
Power Supply to the Left Front Impact Sensor
DTC 42 1x (42-10 to 42-19, 42-1A to 42-1F): No Signal
from the Right Front Impact Sensor
DTC 42 Cx (42-CO to 42-C9, 42-CA to 42-CF): Faulty
Power Supply to the Right Front Impact Sensor
DTC 41 2x (41-20 to 41-29, 41-2A to 41-2F), 41-3x (41-30
to 41-39, 41-3A to 41-3F): Internal Failure of the
Left Front Impact Sensor
DTC 41 9x (41-90 to 41-99, 41-9A to 41-9F), 41-Bx (41-B0
to 41-B9, 41-BA to 41-BF): Internal Failure of the
Left Front Impact Sensor
DTC 42 2x (42-20 to 42-29, 42-2A to 42-2F), 42-3x (42-30
to 42-39, 42-3A to 42-3F): Internal Failure of the
Right Front Impact Sensor
DTC 42 9x (42-90 to 42-99, 42-9A to 42-9F), 42-Bx (42-B0
to 42-B9, 42-BA to 42-BF): Internal Failure of the
Right Front Impact Sensor
from the Left Side Impact Sensor (first)
Power Supply to the Left Side Impact Sensor (first)
from the Right Side Impact Sensor (first)
Power Supply to the Right Side Impact Sensor
(first)
DTC 43 2x (43-20 to 43-29, 43-2A to 43-2F), 43-3x (43-30
to 43-39, 43-3A to 43-3F), 43-Bx (43-B0 to 43-B9,
43-BA to 43-BF): Internal Failure of the Left Side
Impact Sensor (first)
DTC 44 2x (44-20 to 44-29, 44-2A to 44-2F), 44-3x (44-30
to 44-39, 44-3A to 44-3F), 44-Bx (44-B0 to 44-B9,
44-BA to 44- BF): Internal Failure of the Right
Side Impact Sensor (first)
from the Left Side Impact Sensor (second)
from the Right Side Impact Sensor (second)
DTC 45 2x (45-20 to 45-29, 45-2A to 45-2F), 45-3x (45-30
to 45-39, 45-3A to 45-3F), 45-Bx (45-B0 to 45-B9,
45-BA to 45-BF): Internal Failure of the Left Side
Impact Sensor (second)
DTC 46 2x (46-20 to 46-29, 46-2A to 46-2F), 46-3x (46-30
to 46-39, 46-3A to 46-3F), 46-Bx (46-B0 to 46-B9,
46-BA to 46-BF): Internal Failure of the Right Side
Impact Sensor (second)
111
DTC 51 2x (51-20 to 51-29, 51-2A to 51-2F), 51-4x (51-40

to 51-49, 51-4A to 51-4F), 51-7x (51-70 to 51-79,
51-7A to 51-7F): Internal Failure of the SRS Unit
DTC 52 8x (52-80 to 52-89, 52-8A to 52-8F), 52-9x (52-90
to 52-99, 52-9A to 52-9F), 52-Ax (52-A0 to 52-A9,
52-AA to 52-AF): Internal Failure of the SRS Unit
DTC 52 Bx (52-B0 to 52-B9, 52-BA to 52-BF), 52-Cx (52-
C0 to 52-C9, 52-CA to 52-CF), 52-Dx (52-D0 to
52-D9, 52-DA to 52-DF): Internal Failure of the
SRS Unit
DTC 52 Ex (52-E0 to 52-E9, 52-EA to 52-EF), 52-Fx (52-
F0 to 52-F9, 52-FA to 52-FF), 53-1x (53-10 to 53-
19, 53-1A to 53-1F): Internal Failure of the SRS
Unit
DTC 53 2x (53-20 to 53-29, 53-2A to 53-2F), 53-3x (53-30
to 53-39, 53-3A to 53-3F), 53-4x (53-40 to 53-49,
DTC 54 1x (54-10 to 54-19, 54-1A to 54-1F), 54-2x (54-20
to 54-29, 54-2A to 54-2F), 54-3x (54-30 to 54-39,
DTC 54 4x (54-40 to 54-49, 54-4A to 54-4F), 54-5x (54-50
to 54-59, 54-5A to 54-5F), 54-6x (54-60 to 54-
69,54-6A to 54-6F): Internal Failure of the SRS
Unit
DTC 54 7x (54-70 to 54-79,54-7A to 54-7F), 55-1x (55-10
to 55-19,55-1A to 55-1F), 55-2X (55-20 to 55-
29,55-2A to 55-2F): Internal Failure of the SRS
Unit
DTC 55 3x (55-30 to 55-39, 55-3A to 55-3F), 55-4x (55-40
to 55-49, 55-4A to 55-4F), 55-7x (55-70 to 55-79,
DTC D1 11, D2-11, D3-11, D4-11, D7-11, E2-11, E4-11,
F1-11, F2-11, F3-11, F4-11: Airbags, Side Airbags,
and/or Seat Belt Tensioners Deployed
Driver's Seat Belt Buckle Switch (with power seat)
Driver's Seat Belt Buckle Switch (without power
seat)
DTC 61 2x (61-20 to 61-29,61-2A to 61-2F): Short in
Driver's Seat Belt Buckle Switch (with power seat)
DTC 61 2x (61-20 to 61-29, 61-2A to 61-2F): Short in
Driver's Seat Belt Buckle Switch (without power
seat)
Passenger's Seat Belt Buckle Switch (with power
seat)
DTC 62 1x (62-10 to 62-19,62-1A to 62-1F): Open in Front
Passenger's Seat Belt Buckle Switch (without
111
power seat)
DTC 62 2x (62-20 to 62-29,62-2A to 62-2F): Short in Front
Passenger's Seat Belt Buckle Switch (with power
seat)
DTC 62 2x (62-20 to 62-29, 62-2A to 62-2F): Short in Front
Passenger's Seat Belt Buckle Switch (without
power seat)
DTC 71 1x171-10 to 71-19, 71-1A to 71-1F): Open in
Driver's Seat Position Sensor
DTC 71 2x (71-20 to 71-29, 71-2A to 71-2F): Short in
Driver's Seat Position Sensor
DTC 71 22: Short to Power in Driver's Seat Position Sensor
DTC 81 61: No Signal from Front Passenger's Weight
Sensor Unit (with side airbag) ('04-05 models)
DTC 81 62: Non-stipulated Response Data (with side
airbag) ('04-05 models)
DTC 81 61: No Signal from Front Passenger's Weight
Sensor Unit (without side airbag) ('04-05 models)
DTC 81 62: Non-stipulated Response Data (without side
airbag) ('04-05 models)
DTC 81 4x (81-40 to 81-49, 81-4A to 81-4F), 81-5x (81-50
to 81-59, 81-5A to 81-5F), 81-63, 81-64: Internal
Failure of the Front Passenger's Weight Sensor
Unit ('04-05 models)
DTC 81 79: Front Passenger's Weight Sensors Drift Check
Failure ('04-05 models)
DTC 81 71, 81-78: Front passenger's weight sensor unit
does not calibrate ('04-05 models)
DTC 81 71, 81-78: ODS unit does not calibrate ('06 model)
from the Inner Side Front Passenger's Weight
Sensor ('04-06 models)
from the Outer Side Front Passenger's Weight
Sensor ('04-06 models)
DTC 85 4x (85-40 to 85-49, 85-4A to 85-4F), 85-5x (85-50
to 85-59, 85-5A to 85-5F), 85-63, 85-64: Internal
Failure of the OPDS/ODS Unit
DTC 85 79: OPDS Sensor Drift Check Failure
DTC 85 61: No Signal from the OPDS Unit ('04-05 models)
DTC 85 62: Non-stipulated Response Data ('04-05 models)
DTC 81 61, 85-61: No Signal from the ODS Unit ('06
model)
DTC 81 62, 85-62: Non-stipulated Response Data ('06
model)
DTC 85 71, 85-78: OPDS/ODS unit not initialized
DTC 86 1x (86-10 to 86-19, 86-1A to 86-1F): Faulty OPDS
111
Seat-back Sensor
DTC 86 2x (86-20 to 86-29, 86-2A to 86-2F): Faulty OPDS
Seat Support Sensor
DTC 87 31: Internal Failure of the OPDS/ODS Unit
DTC 87 32: Side Airbag Cutoff Indicator Stays ON ('03-05
models)
DTC 87 32: Side Airbag Cutoff Indicator Stays ON ('06
model)
DTC 91 1x (91-10 to 91-19, 91-1A to 91-1F): Internal
Failure of the SRS Unit
DTC 91 2x (91-20 to 91-29, 91-2A to 91-2F): Short in SRS
Indicator
DTC 92 1x (92-10 to 92-19, 92-1A to 92-1F): Passenger's
Airbag Cutoff Indicator Malfunction ('04-06
models)
DTC 92 2x (92-20 to 92-29, 92-2A to 92-2F): Open or Short
to Ground in Passenger's Airbag Cutoff Indicator
('04-06 models)
DTC A1 1x (A1-10 to A1-19, A1-1A to A1-1F): Faulty
Power Supply (VA Line)
DTC A2 1x (A2-10 to A2-19, A2-1A to A2-1F): Faulty
Power Supply (VB Line)
DTC 11-1X (11-10 TO 11-19,11-1A TO 11-1F): OPEN IN DRIVER'S AIRBAG FIRST INFLATOR
DTC 11-2X (11-20 TO 11-29,11-2A TO 11-2F): INCREASED RESISTANCE IN DRIVER'S FIRST

AIRBAG INFLATOR
DTC 11-4X (11-40 TO 11-49,11-4A TO 11-4F): OPEN IN DRIVER'S AIRBAG SECOND

INFLATOR
DTC 11-5X (11-50 TO 11-59,11-5A TO 11-5F): INCREASED RESISTANCE IN DRIVER'S AIRBAG

SECOND INFLATOR
 SRS inflator simulator 07SAZ-TB4011A

 SRS simulator lead F 07XAZ-SZ30100
1. Erase the DTC memory (see ERASING THE DTC MEMORY WITH HDS ).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check that the SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 11-1x, 11-2x, 11-4x, or 11-5x indicated?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failures
(see TROUBLESHOOTING INTERMITTENT FAILURES ). If another DTC is indicated,
111
go to the DTC TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX.

3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait for 3 minutes.
4. Disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (A) from the cable reel.
Fig. 53: Disconnecting Driver's Airbag 4P Connector From Cable Reel

5. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 ohms connectors) and simulator lead F to the cable reel.
6. Reconnect the battery negative cable.
7. Erase the DTC memory.
8. Read the DTC (see GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION ).
Is DTC 11-1x, 11-2x, 11-4x, or 11-5x indicated?
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Open or increased resistance in the driver's airbag first or second inflator; replace the
driver's airbag (see DRIVER'S AIRBAG REPLACEMENT ).
111
10. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 4P connector (A) from the cable reel.
Fig. 54: Disconnecting Dashboard Wire Harness 4P Connector From Cable Reel
11. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 ohms connectors) and the simulator lead to the dashboard wire
harness.
14. Read the DTC.

NO - Open or increased resistance in the cable reel; replace the cable reel (see CABLE REEL
REPLACEMENT ).
16. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (28P) from the SRS unit (see step 16 in DISCONNECTING
SYSTEM CONNECTORS ). Do not disconnect the simulator lead from dashboard wire harness 4P
connector.
111
17. Disconnect the SRS inflator simulator from SRS simulator lead F.
18. Check the resistance between the terminals of both SRS simulator leads. There should be 1 ohms or
less.
Fig. 55: Checking Resistance Between Terminals Of SRS Simulator Leads

Is the resistance as specified?
YES - Faulty SRS unit or poor contact at SRS unit connector A (28P) and the SRS unit. Check
the connection between the connector and the SRS unit. If the connection is OK, replace the
SRS unit (see SRS UNIT REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Open or increased resistance in the dashboard wire harness; replace the dashboard wire
harness.
DTC 11-3X (11-30 TO 11-39,11-3A TO 11-3F): SHORT TO ANOTHER WIRE OR DECREASED

RESISTANCE IN DRIVER'S AIRBAG FIRST INFLATOR
111
DTC 11-6X (11-60 TO 11-69,11-6A TO 11-6F): SHORT TO ANOTHER WIRE OR DECREASED

RESISTANCE IN DRIVER'S AIRBAG SECOND INFLATOR

 SRS short canceller 070AZ-SAA0100
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 11-3x or 11-6x indicated?
YES - Go to step 3.
111

Is DTC 11-3x or 11-6x indicated?
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Short in the driver's airbag first or second inflator; replace the driver's airbag (see
DRIVER'S AIRBAG REPLACEMENT ).
111
harness.
14. Read the DTC.

NO - Short in the cable reel; replace the cable reel (see CABLE REEL REPLACEMENT ).
SYSTEM CONNECTORS ). Do not disconnect the simulator lead from dashboard wire harness 4P
connector.
17. Disconnect the SRS inflator simulator from the SRS simulator lead. Do not disconnect the simulator
lead from dashboard wire harness 4P connector.
18. Connect SRS short cancellers (070AZ-SAA0100) to the No. 7 and No. 8 terminals and No. 1 and
111
No.2 terminals of the SRS unit connector A (28P) (see REOPENING THE SRS UNIT CIRCUIT
FOR DIAGNOSIS ).
19. Check resistance between the terminals of both SRS simulator leads. There should be an open circuit
or at least 1 M ohms.

NO - Short in the dashboard wire harness; replace the dashboard wire harness.
DTC 11-8X (11-80 TO 11-89, 11-8A TO 11-8F): SHORT TO POWER IN DRIVER'S AIRBAG FIRST
INFLATOR
111
DTC 11-AX (11-A0 TO 11-A9, 11-AA TO 11-AF): SHORT TO POWER IN DRIVER'S AIRBAG
SECOND INFLATOR

then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 11-8x or 11-Ax indicated?
YES - Go to step 3.
111

Is DTC 11-8x or 11-Ax indicated?
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Short to power in the driver's airbag first or second inflator; replace the driver's airbag
(see DRIVER'S AIRBAG REPLACEMENT ).
111
harness.
14. Read the DTC.

NO - Short to power in the cable reel; replace the cable reel (see CABLE REEL
REPLACEMENT ).
SYSTEM CONNECTORS ).
17. Disconnect the SRS inflator simulator from the SRS simulator lead.
111

20. Check for voltage between each terminal of both SRS simulator leads and body ground. There should
be 0.5 V or less.
Fig. 61: Checking Voltage Between Terminal Of SRS Simulator Leads And Body Ground
Is the voltage as specified?
NO - Short to power in the dashboard wire harness; replace the dashboard wire harness.
DTC 11-9X (11-90 TO 11-99, 11-9A TO 11-9F): SHORT TO GROUND IN DRIVER'S AIRBAG
FIRST INFLATOR
111
DTC 11-BX (11-B0 TO 11-B9, 11-BA TO 11-BF): SHORT TO GROUND IN DRIVER'S AIRBAG
SECOND INFLATOR

then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 11-9x or 11-Bx indicated?
YES - Go to step 3.
111

Is DTC 11-9x or 11-Bx indicated?
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Short to ground in the driver's airbag first or second inflator; replace the driver's airbag
(see DRIVER'S AIRBAG REPLACEMENT ).
111
harness.
14. Read the DTC.

NO - Short to ground in the cable reel; replace the cable reel (see CABLE REEL
REPLACEMENT ).
18. Check resistance between each terminal of both SRS simulator leads and body ground. There should
111
be an open circuit or at least 1 M ohms.
Fig. 64: Checking Resistance Between Terminal Of SRS Simulator Leads And Body Ground
NO - Short to ground in the dashboard wire harness; replace the dashboard wire harness.
DTC 12-1X (12-10 TO 12-19, 12-1A TO 12-1F): OPEN IN FRONT PASSENGER'S AIRBAG FIRST
INFLATOR
DTC 12-2X (12-20 TO 12-29, 12-2A TO 12-2F): INCREASED RESISTANCE IN FRONT

PASSENGER'S AIRBAG FIRST INFLATOR
111
DTC 12-4X (12-40 TO 12-49, 12-4A TO 12-4F): OPEN IN FRONT PASSENGER'S AIRBAG
SECOND INFLATOR

PASSENGER'S AIRBAG SECOND INFLATOR

then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 12-1x, 12-2x, 12-4x, or 12-5x indicated?
YES - Go to step 3.
4. Disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (A) from the dashboard wire harness.
111
5. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 ohms connectors) and simulator lead F to the dashboard wire
harness.
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Open or increased resistance in the front passenger's airbag first or second inflator;
replace the front passenger's airbag (see FRONT PASSENGER'S AIRBAG
REPLACEMENT ).
SYSTEM CONNECTORS ). Do not disconnect the simulator lead from the dashboard wire harness
4P connector.
12. Check resistance between the terminals of both SRS simulator leads. There should be 1 ohms or less.
111

YES - Faulty SRS unit or poor contact at SRS unit connector A (28P). Check the connection; if
the connection is OK, replace the SRS unit (see SRS UNIT REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Open or increased resistance in the dashboard wire harness; replace the dashboard wire
harness.
DTC 12-3X (12-30 TO 12-39, 12-3A TO 12-3F): SHORT TO ANOTHER WIRE OR DECREASED
RESISTANCE IN FRONT PASSENGER'S AIRBAG FIRST INFLATOR
RESISTANCE IN FRONT PASSENGER'S AIRBAG SECOND INFLATOR

111

then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
111
harness.
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Short in the front passenger's airbag first or second inflator; replace the front passenger's
airbag (see FRONT PASSENGER'S AIRBAG REPLACEMENT ).
12. Connect SRS short cancellers (070AZ-SAA0100) to the No. 9 and No. 10 terminals and the No. 3 and
No. 4 terminal of the SRS unit connector A (28P) (see REOPENING THE SRS UNIT CIRCUIT
FOR DIAGNOSIS ).
13. Check resistance between the terminals of both SRS simulator leads. There should be an open circuit
or at least 1 M ohms.
111

NO - Short in the dashboard wire harness; replace the dashboard wire harness.
DTC 12-8X (12-80 TO 12-89, 12-8A TO 12-8F): SHORT TO POWER IN FRONT PASSENGER'S
AIRBAG FIRST INFLATOR
DTC 12-AX (12-A0 TO 12-A9, 12-AA TO 12-AF): SHORT TO POWER IN FRONT PASSENGER'S
AIRBAG SECOND INFLATOR

111

then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 12-8x or 12-Ax indicated?
YES - Go to step 3.
harness.
111

YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Short to power in the front passenger's airbag first or second inflator; replace the front
passenger's airbag (see FRONT PASSENGER'S AIRBAG REPLACEMENT ).
lead from the dashboard wire harness 4P connector.
14. Check for voltage between each terminal of both SRS simulator leads and body ground. There should
be 0.5 V or less.
111
Fig. 70: Checking Voltage Between Terminal Of SRS Simulator Leads And Body Ground
NO - Short to power in the dashboard wire harness; replace the dashboard wire harness.
DTC 12-9X (12-90 TO 12-99, 12-9A TO 12-9F): SHORT TO GROUND IN FRONT PASSENGER'S
AIRBAG FIRST INFLATOR
DTC 12-BX (12-B0 TO 12-B9, 12-BA TO 12-BF): SHORT TO GROUND IN FRONT PASSENGER'S
AIRBAG SECOND INFLATOR

111

then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
harness.
111

YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Short to ground in the front passenger's airbag first or second inflator; replace the front
passenger's airbag (see FRONT PASSENGER'S AIRBAG REPLACEMENT ).
12. Check resistance between each terminal of both SRS simulator leads and body ground. There should
be an open circuit or at least 1 M ohms.
111
Fig. 72: Checking Resistance Between Terminal Of SRS Simulator Leads And Body Ground
DTC 21-1X (21-10 TO 21-19, 21-1A TO 21-1F): OPEN IN DRIVER'S SEAT BELT TENSIONER
DTC 21-2X (21-20 TO 21-29, 21-2A TO 21-2F): INCREASED RESISTANCE IN DRIVER'S SEAT
BELT TENSIONER

then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
4. Disconnect the driver's seat belt tensioner 4P connector (A) from the floor wire harness.
111
Fig. 73: Disconnecting Driver's Seat Belt Tensioner 4P Connector From Floor Wire Harness
5. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 ohms connectors) and simulator lead F to the floor wire
harness.
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Open or increased resistance in the driver's seat belt tensioner; replace the driver's seat
belt (see FRONT SEAT BELT REPLACEMENT ).
10. Disconnect the front passenger's seat belt tensioner connector (see step 6 in DISCONNECTING
11. Disconnect SRS unit connector B (28P) from the SRS unit (see step 16 in DISCONNECTING
12. Check resistance between the No. 1 and the No. 2 terminals of SRS unit connector B (28P). There
111
should be 2.0-3.0 ohms.
Fig. 74: Checking Resistance Between 1 And 2 Terminals Of SRS Unit Connector B
Is resistance as specified?
YES - Faulty SRS unit or poor contact at SRS unit connector B (28P) and the SRS unit. Check
the connection; if the connection is OK, replace the SRS unit (see SRS UNIT
REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Open or increased resistance in the floor wire harness; replace the floor wire harness.
RESISTANCE IN DRIVER'S SEAT BELT TENSIONER

111
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 21-3x indicated?
YES - Go to step 3.
harness.
111
Is DTC 21-3x indicated?
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Short in the driver's seat belt tensioner; replace the driver's seat belt (see FRONT SEAT
BELT REPLACEMENT ).
12. Disconnect the simulator lead from the floor wire harness.
should be an open circuit or at least 1 M ohms.
Fig. 76: Checking Resistance Between No. 1 And 2 Terminals Of SRS Unit Connector B
111
REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Short in the floor wire harness; replace the floor wire harness.
DTC 21-8X (21-80 TO 21-89, 21-8A TO 21-8F): SHORT TO POWER IN DRIVER'S SEAT BELT
TENSIONER

then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
111
harness.
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Short to power in the driver's seat belt tensioner; replace the driver's seat belt (see
FRONT SEAT BELT REPLACEMENT ).
111

15. Check for voltage between the No. 1 terminal of SRS unit connector B (28P) and body ground, and
between the No. 2 terminal and body ground. There should be 0.5 V or less.
Fig. 78: Checking Voltage Between No. 1 Terminal Of SRS Unit Connector B (28P) And Body
Ground
REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Short to power in the floor wire harness; replace the floor wire harness.
DTC 21-9X (21-90 TO 21-99, 21-9A TO 21-9F): SHORT TO GROUND IN DRIVER'S SEAT BELT
TENSIONER

111
then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
harness.
111
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Short to ground in the driver's seat belt tensioner; replace the driver's seat belt (see
FRONT SEAT BELT REPLACEMENT ).
13. Check resistance between the No. 1 terminals of SRS unit connector B (28P) and body ground, and
between the No. 2 terminal and body ground. There should be an open circuit or at least 1 M ohms.
Fig. 80: Checking Resistance Between No. 1 Terminals Of SRS Unit Connector B (28P) And
Body Ground
REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Short to ground in the floor wire harness; replace the floor wire harness.
111
DTC 22-1X (22-10 TO 22-19, 22-1A TO 22-1F): OPEN IN FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT BELT
TENSIONER

PASSENGER'S SEAT BELT TENSIONER

then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
4. Disconnect the front passenger's seat belt tensioner 4P connector (A) from the floor wire harness.
111
Fig. 81: Disconnecting Front Passenger's Seat Belt Tensioner 4P Connector From Floor Wire
Harness
harness.
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Open or increased resistance in the front passenger's seat belt tensioner; replace the front
passenger's seat belt (see FRONT SEAT BELT REPLACEMENT ).
10. Disconnect the driver's seat belt tensioner connector (see step 6 in DISCONNECTING SYSTEM
CONNECTORS ).
111
12. Check resistance between the No. 3 and the No. 4 terminal of SRS unit connector B (28P). There
should be 2.0-3.0 ohms.
Fig. 82: Checking Resistance Between No. 3 And 4 Terminal Of SRS Unit Connector B
Is resistance as specified?
REPLACEMENT ).
RESISTANCE IN FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT BELT TENSIONER

111
then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
Harness
harness.
111
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Short in the front passenger's seat belt tensioner; replace the front passenger's seat belt
(see FRONT SEAT BELT REPLACEMENT ).
CONNECTORS ).
should be an open circuit or at least 1 M ohms.
111
REPLACEMENT ).
SEAT BELT TENSIONER

then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
111
Harness
harness.
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Short to power in the front passenger's seat belt tensioner; replace the front passenger's
seat belt (see FRONT SEAT BELT REPLACEMENT ).
CONNECTORS ).
111
between the No. 4 terminal and body ground. There should be 0.5 V or less.
Ground
REPLACEMENT ).
SEAT BELT TENSIONER

111
then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
Harness
harness.
111
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Short to ground in the front passenger's seat belt tensioner; replace the front passenger's
seat belt (see FRONT SEAT BELT REPLACEMENT ).
CONNECTORS ).
11. Disconnect SRS unit connector B (28P) from the SRS unit (see step 16 in Disconnecting System
Connectors ).
13. Check resistance between the No. 3 terminal of SRS unit connector B (28P) and body ground, and
between the No. 4 terminal and body ground. There should be an open circuit or at least 1 M ohms.
Fig. 88: Checking Resistance Between No. 3 Terminal Of SRS Unit Connector B And Body
Ground
111
REPLACEMENT ).
DTC 31-1X (31-10 TO 31-19, 31-1A TO 31-1F): OPEN IN DRIVER'S SIDE AIRBAG INFLATOR
DTC 31-2X (31-20 TO 31-29, 31-2A TO 31-2F): INCREASED RESISTANCE IN DRIVER'S SIDE
AIRBAG INFLATOR

 SRS simulator lead E 07XAZ-S1A0200
then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
4. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (A) from the driver's side airbag.
111
Fig. 89: Disconnecting Floor Wire Harness 2P Connector From Driver's Side Airbag
5. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 ohms connector) and simulator lead E to the floor wire harness.
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Open or increased resistance in the driver's side airbag inflator; replace the driver's side
airbag (see SIDE AIRBAG REPLACEMENT ).
10. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 4P connectors (see step 6 in Disconnecting System Connectors ).
111
13. Check resistance between the terminals of the SRS simulator lead. There should be 1.0 ohms or less.
Fig. 90: Checking Resistance Between Terminals Of SRS Simulator Lead

REPLACEMENT ).
RESISTANCE IN DRIVER'S SIDE AIRBAG INFLATOR
111

then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
111
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Short to another wire in the driver's side airbag inflator; replace the driver's side airbag
(see SIDE AIRBAG REPLACEMENT ).
10. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 4P connectors (see step 6 in DISCONNECTING SYSTEM
CONNECTORS ).
13. Connect the SRS short canceller (070AZ-SAA0100) to the No. 21 and No. 22 terminals of SRS unit
connector B (28P) (see REOPENING THE SRS UNIT CIRCUIT FOR DIAGNOSIS ).
14. Check resistance between the terminals of SRS simulator lead E. There should be an open circuit or at
least 1 M ohms.
111
Fig. 92: Checking Resistance Between Terminals Of SRS Simulator Lead E

REPLACEMENT ).
DTC 31-8X (31-80 TO 31-89, 31-8A TO 31-8F): SHORT TO POWER IN DRIVER'S SIDE AIRBAG
INFLATOR
111

then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
111
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Short to power in the driver's side airbag inflator; replace the driver's side airbag (see
SIDE AIRBAG REPLACEMENT ).
CONNECTORS ).
15. Check for voltage between each terminal of SRS simulator lead E and body ground. There should be
0.5 V or less.
111
Fig. 94: Checking Voltage Between Terminal Of SRS Simulator Lead E And Body Ground
REPLACEMENT ).
DTC 31-9X (31-90 TO 31-99, 31-9A TO 31-9F): SHORT TO GROUND IN DRIVER'S SIDE
AIRBAG INFLATOR
111

then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
111
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Short to ground in the driver's side airbag inflator; replace the driver's side airbag (see
SIDE AIRBAG REPLACEMENT ).
CONNECTORS ).
13. Check resistance between each terminal of SRS simulator lead E and body ground. There should be
an open circuit or at least 1 M ohms.
111
Fig. 96: Checking Resistance Between Terminal Of SRS Simulator Lead E And Body Ground
REPLACEMENT ).
DTC 32-1X (32-10 TO 32-19, 32-1A TO 32-1F): OPEN IN FRONT PASSENGER'S SIDE AIRBAG
INFLATOR

PASSENGER'S SIDE AIRBAG INFLATOR
111

then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 32-1x or 32-x indicated?
YES - Go to step 3.
4. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (A) from the front passenger's side airbag.
111
Fig. 97: Disconnecting Floor Wire Harness 2P Connector From Front Passenger's Side Airbag
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Open or increased resistance in the front passenger's side airbag inflator; replace the front
passenger's side airbag (see SIDE AIRBAG REPLACEMENT ).
CONNECTORS ).
111

REPLACEMENT ).
RESISTANCE IN FRONT PASSENGER'S SIDE AIRBAG INFLATOR
111

then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
111
5. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 ohms, connector) and simulator lead E to the floor wire harness.
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Short to another wire in the front passenger's side airbag inflator; replace the front
passenger's side airbag (see SIDE AIRBAG REPLACEMENT ).
CONNECTORS ).
connector B (28P) (see REOPENING THE SRS UNIT CIRCUIT FOR DIAGNOSIS ).
14. Check resistance between the terminals of the SRS simulator lead. There should be an open circuit or
at least 1 Mohms.
111

REPLACEMENT ).
SIDE AIRBAG INFLATOR
111

then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
111
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Short to power in the front passenger's side airbag inflator; replace the front passenger's
side airbag (see SIDE AIRBAG REPLACEMENT ).
CONNECTORS ).
11. Disconnect SRS unit connector B (28P) from the SRS unit (see step 16 inDISCONNECTING
lead from the floor wire harness 2P connector.
15. Check for voltage between each terminal of the SRS simulator lead and body ground. There should be
0.5 V or less.
111
Fig. 102: Checking Voltage Between Terminal Of SRS Simulator Lead And Body Ground
REPLACEMENT ).
SIDE AIRBAG INFLATOR
111

then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
111
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Short to ground in the front passenger's side airbag inflator; replace the front passenger's
side airbag (see SIDE AIRBAG REPLACEMENT ).
CONNECTORS ).
lead from the floor wire harness 2P connector.
13. Check resistance between each terminal of the SRS simulator lead and body ground. There should be
an open circuit or at least 1 Mohms.
111
Fig. 104: Checking Resistance Between Terminal Of SRS Simulator Lead And Body Ground
REPLACEMENT ).
DTC 33-1X (33-10 TO 33-19, 33-1A TO 33-1F): OPEN OR INCREASED RESISTANCE IN LEFT
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG INFLATOR
111

then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
4. Disconnect the left side curtain airbag 2P connector from the side curtain airbag subharness (A).
111
Fig. 105: Disconnecting Left Side Curtain Airbag 2P Connector From Side Curtain Airbag
Subharness
5. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 ohms connector) and simulator lead E to the side curtain airbag
subharness.
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Open or increased resistance in the left side curtain airbag; replace the left side curtain
airbag (see SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG REPLACEMENT ).
10. Disconnect SRS unit connector C (16P) from the SRS unit (see step 16 in DISCONNECTING
SYSTEM CONNECTORS ). Do not disconnect the simulator lead from the side curtain airbag
subharness.
lead from the side curtain airbag subharness.
111

YES - Faulty SRS unit or poor contact at the SRS unit connector C (16P) and the SRS unit.
111
Check the connection; if the connection is OK, replace the SRS unit (see SRS UNIT
REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Open or increased resistance in the side curtain airbag subharness; replace the side curtain
airbag subharness.
RESISTANCE IN LEFT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG INFLATOR

then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
111
Subharness
subharness.
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Short to another wire in the left side curtain airbag inflator; replace the left side curtain
111
connector C (16P) (see REOPENING THE SRS UNIT CIRCUIT FOR DIAGNOSIS ).
at least 1 Mohms.
111

YES - Faulty SRS unit or poor contact at SRS unit connector C (16P) and the SRS unit. Check
111
REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Short to another wire in the side curtain airbag subharness; replace the side curtain airbag
subharness.
DTC 33-8X (33-80 TO 33-89, 33-8A TO 33-8F): SHORT TO POWER IN LEFT SIDE CURTAIN
AIRBAG INFLATOR

then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
111
Subharness
5. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (2 ohms connector) and simulator lead E to side curtain airbag
subharness.
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Short to power in the left side curtain airbag inflator; replace the left side curtain airbag
(see SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG REPLACEMENT ).
111
10. Disconnect the SRS unit connector C (16P) from the SRS unit (see step 16 in DISCONNECTING
0.5 V or less.
111
111
REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Short to power in the side curtain airbag subharness; replace the side curtain airbag
subharness.
DTC 33-9X (33-90 TO 33-99, 33-9A TO 33-9F): SHORT TO GROUND IN LEFT SIDE CURTAIN
AIRBAG INFLATOR

then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
111
Subharness
subharness.
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Short to ground in the left side curtain airbag inflator; replace the left side curtain airbag
111
111
111
REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Short to ground in the side curtain airbag subharness; replace the side curtain airbag
subharness.
DTC 34-1X (34-10 TO 34-19, 34-1A TO 34-1F): OPEN OR INCREASED RESISTANCE IN RIGHT
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG INFLATOR

then goes off.
Does the SRS Indicator stay on, and is DTC 34-1x indicated?
YES - Go to step 3.
4. Disconnect the right side curtain airbag 2P connector from the side curtain airbag subharness (A).
111
Fig. 113: Disconnecting Right Side Curtain Airbag 2P Connector From Side Curtain Airbag
Subharness
subharness.
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Open or increased resistance in the right side curtain airbag inflator, replace the right side
curtain airbag (see SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG REPLACEMENT ).
111

111
REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Open or increased resistance in the side curtain airbag subharness; replace the side curtain
airbag subharness.
RESISTANCE IN RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG INFLATOR

then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
111
Subharness
subharness.
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Short to another wire in the right side curtain airbag inflator; replace the right side curtain
111
connector C (16P) (see REOPENING THE SRS UNIT CIRCUIT FOR DIAGNOSIS ).
at least 1 Mohms.
111

YES - Faulty SRS unit or poor contact at SRS unit connector C(16P) and the SRS unit. Check
REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Short in the side curtain airbag subharness; replace the side curtain airbag subharness.
DTC 34-8X (34-80 TO 34-89, 34-8A TO 34-8F): SHORT TO POWER IN RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN
AIRBAG INFLATOR

then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
111
Subharness
subharness.
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Short to power in the right side curtain airbag inflator; replace the right side curtain airbag
111
0.5 V or less.
111
REPLACEMENT ).
subharness.
DTC 34-9X (34-90 TO 34-99, 34-9A TO 34-9F): SHORT TO GROUND IN RIGHT SIDE CURTAIN
AIRBAG INFLATOR

then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
111
Subharness
subharness.
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Short to ground in the right side curtain airbag inflator; replace the right side curtain
111

111
REPLACEMENT ).
subharness.
DTC 41-1X (41-10 TO 41-19, 41-1A TO 41-1F): NO SIGNAL FROM THE LEFT FRONT IMPACT
SENSOR

 SRS simulator lead H 07YAZ-S3AA100
then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Check the connections between SRS unit connector A (28P) and the
SRS unit, between the engine compartment wire harness 2P connector and the left front impact sensor
(see FRONT IMPACT SENSOR REPLACEMENT ), and at connector C403 (see ENGINE
COMPARTMENT WIRE HARNESS (LEFT BRANCH) ).
Are the connections OK?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Repair the poor connections and retest. If DTC 41-1x is still present, go to step 4.
4. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait for 3 minutes.
111
Fig. 121: Disconnecting Engine Compartment Wire Harness 2P Connector From Left Front
Impact Sensor
5. Disconnect the engine compartment wire harness 2P connector (A) from the left front impact sensor.
7. Check resistance between the No. 15 and No. 27 terminals of SRS unit connector A (28P). There
should be an open circuit or at least 1 Mohms.
111
Fig. 122: Checking Resistance Between No. 15 And 27 Terminals Of SRS Unit Connector A
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Short in the engine compartment wire harness or dashboard wire harness; replace the
faulty harness.
8. Check resistance between the No. 15 terminal of SRS unit connector A (28P) and body ground, and
between the No. 27 terminal and body ground. There should be an open circuit or at lest 1 Mohms.
111
Fig. 123: Checking Resistance Between No. 15 Terminal Of SRS Unit Connector A (28P) And
Body Ground
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Short to ground in the dashboard wire harness or engine compartment wire harness;
replace the faulty harness.
11. Check for voltage between the No. 15 terminal of SRS unit connector A (28P) and body ground, and
between the No. 27 terminal and body ground. There should be 1 V or less.
111
Fig. 124: Checking Voltage Between No. 15 Terminal Of SRS Unit Connector A (28P) And Body
Ground

NO - Short to power in the engine compartment wire harness or the dashboard wire harness;
13. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (jumper connector) and simulator lead H to the engine
compartment wire harness 2P connector (A).
111
Fig. 125: Connecting SRS Inflator Simulator And Simulator Lead H To Engine Compartment
Wire Harness 2P Connector
should be 0-1.0 ohms.
111
YES - Faulty left front impact sensor or SRS unit-replace the left front impact sensor (see
FRONT IMPACT SENSOR REPLACEMENT ). If the problem is still present, replace the
NO - Poor connection at C403, faulty engine compartment wire harness, or faulty dashboard
wire harness. Inspect C403. If it is OK, replace the faulty harness.
DTC 41-CX (41-C0 TO 41-C9, 41-CA TO 41-CF): FAULTY POWER SUPPLY TO THE LEFT
FRONT IMPACT SENSOR
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 41-Cx indicated?
YES - Go to step 3.
111
4. Disconnect the engine compartment wire harness 2P connector (A) from the left front impact sensor.
Fig. 127: Disconnecting Engine Compartment Wire Harness 2P Connector From Left Front
Impact Sensor
6. Check resistance between the No. 27 terminal of SRS unit connector A (28P) and body ground. There
111
Body Ground
YES - Go to step 7.
111
YES - Faulty left front impact sensor or SRS unit; replace the left front impact sensor (see
NO - Short in the dashboard wire harness or engine compartment wire harness; replace the
faulty harness.
DTC 42-1X (42-10 TO 42-19, 42-1A TO 42-1F): NO SIGNAL FROM THE RIGHT FRONT IMPACT
SENSOR

then goes off.
111
YES - Go to step 3.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Check the connections between SRS unit connector A (28P) and the
SRS unit, between the engine compartment wire harness 2P connector and the right front impact
sensor (see FRONT IMPACT SENSOR REPLACEMENT ), and at connector C403 (see ENGINE
COMPARTMENT WIRE HARNESS (LEFT BRANCH) ).
YES - Go to step 4.
5. Disconnect the engine compartment wire harness 2P connector (A) from the right front impact sensor.
Fig. 130: Disconnecting Engine Compartment Wire Harness 2P Connector From Right Front
Impact Sensor
111
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Short in the engine compartment wire harness or dashboard wire harness; replace the
faulty harness.
8. Check resistance between the No. 16 terminal of SRS unit connector A (28P) and body ground, and
between the No. 28 terminal and body ground. There should be an open circuit or at least 1 Mohms.
111
Body Ground
YES - Go to step 9.
11. Check for voltage between the No. 16 terminal of SRS unit connector A (28P) and body ground, and
111
Fig. 133: Checking Voltage Between No. 16 Terminal Of SRS Unit Connector A (28P) And Body
Ground

NO - Short to power in the engine compartment wire harness or dashboard wire harness;
13. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (jumper connector) and the simulator lead to the engine
compartment wire harness 2P connector (A).
111
Fig. 134: Connecting SRS Inflator Simulator And Simulator Lead To Engine Compartment
Wire Harness 2P Connector
111
YES - Faulty right front impact sensor or SRS unit; replace the right front impact sensor (see
NO - Poor connection at C403, faulty engine compartment wire harness, or faulty dashboard
wire harness. Inspect C403. If it is OK, replace the faulty harness.
DTC 42-CX (42-CO TO 42-C9, 42-CA TO 42-CF): FAULTY POWER SUPPLY TO THE RIGHT
FRONT IMPACT SENSOR
then goes off.
Does the SRS Indicator stay on, and is DTC 42-Cx indicated?
YES - Go to step 3.
111
4. Disconnect the engine compartment wire harness 2P connector (A) from the right front impact sensor.
Fig. 136: Disconnecting Engine Compartment Wire Harness 2P Connector From Right Front
Impact Sensor
111
Body Ground
YES - Go to step 7.
111
YES - Faulty right front impact sensor or SRS unit; replace the right front impact sensor (see
NO - Short in the dashboard wire harness or engine compartment wire harness; replace the
faulty harness.
DTC 41-2X (41-20 TO 41-29, 41-2A TO 41-2F), 41-3X (41-30 TO 41-39, 41-3A TO 41-3F):
INTERNAL FAILURE OF THE LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR
then goes off.
YES - Replace the left front impact sensor (see FRONT IMPACT SENSOR
REPLACEMENT ). If DTC returns, replace the SRS unit (see SRS UNIT
REPLACEMENT ).
111
DTC 41-9X (41-90 TO 41-99, 41-9A TO 41-9F), 41-BX (41-B0 TO 41-B9, 41-BA TO 41-BF):
INTERNAL FAILURE OF THE LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR
then goes off.
YES - Replace the left front impact sensor (see FRONT IMPACT SENSOR
REPLACEMENT ). If the DTC returns, replace the SRS unit (see SRS UNIT
REPLACEMENT ).
DTC 42-2X (42-20 TO 42-29, 42-2A TO 42-2F), 42-3X (42-30 TO 42-39, 42-3A TO 42-3F):
INTERNAL FAILURE OF THE RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR
then goes off.
YES - Replace the right front impact sensor (see FRONT IMPACT SENSOR
REPLACEMENT ). If DTC returns, replace the SRS unit (see SRS UNIT
REPLACEMENT ).
DTC 42-9X (42-90 TO 42-99, 42-9A TO 42-9F), 42-BX (42-B0 TO 42-B9, 42-BA TO 42-BF):
INTERNAL FAILURE OF THE RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR
then goes off.
YES - Replace the right front impact sensor (see FRONT IMPACT SENSOR
REPLACEMENT ).
111
DTC 43-1X (43-10 TO 43-19, 43-1A TO 43-1F): NO SIGNAL FROM THE LEFT SIDE IMPACT
SENSOR (FIRST)

then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
4. Check the connection between the floor wire harness 2P connector and the left side impact sensor
(first).
Is the connection OK?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Repair the poor connections and retest. If the DTC 43-1x is still present, go to step 5.
CONNECTORS ).
6. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (A) from the left side impact sensor (first).
111
Fig. 139: Disconnecting Floor Wire Harness 2P Connector From Left Side Impact Sensor (First)
8. Check resistance between the No. 19 and No. 20 terminals of SRS unit connector B (28P). There
111
YES - Go to step 9.
111
Fig. 141: Checking Resistance Between No. 19 Terminal Of SRS Unit Connector B (28P) And
Body Ground

111
Ground

14. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (jumper connector) and simulator lead H to the floor wire harness
2P connector (A).
111
Fig. 143: Connecting SRS Inflator Simulator And Simulator Lead H To Floor Wire Harness 2P
Connector
should be 1.0 ohms or less.
111
YES - Faulty left side impact sensor (first) or SRS unit; replace the left side impact sensor
(first) (see SIDE IMPACT SENSOR (FIRST) REPLACEMENT ). If the problem is still
present, replace the SRS unit (see SRS UNIT REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Open in the floor wire harness; replace the floor wire harness.
DTC 43-CX (43-C0 TO 43-C9, 43-CA TO 43-CF): FAULTY POWER SUPPLY TO THE LEFT SIDE
IMPACT SENSOR (FIRST)
then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
111

CONNECTORS ).
5. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (A) from the driver's side impact sensor (first).
Fig. 145: Disconnecting Floor Wire Harness 2P Connector From Driver's Side Impact Sensor
(First)
7. Check resistance between the No. 19 terminal of SRS unit connector B (28P) and body ground. There
111
Body Ground
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Short to ground in the floor wire harness, replace the floor wire harness.
111
YES - Faulty driver's side impact sensor (first) or SRS unit; replace the sensor (first) (see SIDE
IMPACT SENSOR (FIRST) REPLACEMENT ). If the problem is still present, replace the
DTC 44-1X (44-10 TO 44-19, 44-1A TO 44-1F): NO SIGNAL FROM THE RIGHT SIDE IMPACT
SENSOR (FIRST)

then goes off.
111
YES - Go to step 3.
4. Check the connection between the floor wire harness 2P connector and the right side impact sensor
(first).
YES - Go to step 5.
CONNECTORS ).
6. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (A) from the right side impact sensor (first).
Fig. 148: Disconnecting Floor Wire Harness 2P Connector From Right Side Impact Sensor
(First)
111
YES - Go to step 9.
111
Body Ground

111
Ground

14. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (jumper connector) and simulator lead H to the floor wire harness
2P connector (A).
111
Fig. 152: Connecting SRS Inflator Simulator And Simulator Lead H To Floor Wire Harness 2P
Connector
111
YES - Faulty right side impact sensor (first) or SRS unit; replace the right side impact sensor
(first) (see SIDE IMPACT SENSOR (FIRST) REPLACEMENT ). If the problem is still
DTC 44-CX (44-C0 TO 44-C9, 44-CA TO 44-CF): FAULTY POWER SUPPLY TO THE RIGHT
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR (FIRST)
then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
111

CONNECTORS ).
5. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector (A) from the right side impact sensor (first).
Fig. 154: Disconnecting Floor Wire Harness 2P Connector From Right Side Impact Sensor
111
Fig. 155: Checking Resistance Between 25 Terminal Of SRS Unit Connector B (28P) And Body
Ground
YES - Go to step 8.
should be an open circuit, or at least 1 Mohms.
111
YES - Faulty right side impact sensor (first) or SRS unit; replace the sensor (see SIDE
IMPACT SENSOR (FIRST) REPLACEMENT ). If the problem is still present, replace the
DTC 43-2X (43-20 TO 43-29, 43-2A TO 43-2F), 43-3X (43-30 TO 43-39, 43-3A TO 43-3F), 43-BX (43-
B0 TO 43-B9, 43-BA TO 43-BF): INTERNAL FAILURE OF THE LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
(FIRST)
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 43-2x, 43-3x, or 43-Bx indicated?
YES - Replace the left side impact sensor (first) (see SIDE IMPACT SENSOR (FIRST)
111
REPLACEMENT ).
B0 TO 44-B9, 44-BA TO 44- BF): INTERNAL FAILURE OF THE RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
(FIRST)
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC42-2x, 44-3x, or 44-Bx indicated?
YES - Replace the right side impact sensor (first) (see SIDE IMPACT SENSOR (FIRST)
REPLACEMENT ).
DTC 45-1X (45-10 TO 45-19, 45-1A TO 45-1F): NO SIGNAL FROM THE LEFT SIDE IMPACT
SENSOR (SECOND)

then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
4. Check the connection between the side curtain airbag subharness 2P connector and the left side impact
sensor (second).
YES - Go to step 5.
111
5. Disconnect the left side curtain airbag 2P connector and side curtain airbag subharness (see step 5 in
DISCONNECTING SYSTEM CONNECTORS ).
6. Disconnect the side curtain airbag subharness 2P connector (A) from the left side impact sensor
(second).
Fig. 157: Disconnecting Side Curtain Airbag Subharness 2P Connector From Left Side Impact
Sensor (Second)
8. Check resistance between the No. 9 and No. 10 terminals of SRS unit connector C (16P). There
111
Fig. 158: Checking Resistance Between No. 9 And 10 Terminals Of SRS Unit Connector C
YES - Go to step 9.
9. Check resistance between the No. 9 terminal of SRS unit connector C (16P) and body ground, and
111
Fig. 159: Checking Resistance Between No. 9 Terminal Of SRS Unit Connector C (16P) And
Body Ground

subharness.
111
12. Check for voltage between the No. 9 terminal of SRS unit connector C (16P) and body ground, and
Fig. 160: Checking Voltage Between No. 9 Terminal Of SRS Unit Connector C (16P) And Body
Ground

111
subharness.
14. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (jumper connector) and simulator lead H to the side curtain airbag
subharness 2P connector (A).
Fig. 161: Connecting SRS Inflator Simulator And Simulator Lead H To Side Curtain Airbag
Subharness 2P Connector
111
YES - Faulty left side impact sensor (second) or SRS unit; replace the left side impact sensor
(second) (see SIDE IMPACT SENSOR (SECOND) REPLACEMENT ). If the problem is
still present, replace the SRS unit (see SRS UNIT REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Open in the side curtain airbag subharness; replace the side curtain airbag subharness.
DTC 46-1X (46-10 TO 46-19, 46-1A TO 46-1F): NO SIGNAL FROM THE RIGHT SIDE IMPACT
111
SENSOR (SECOND)

then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
4. Check the connection between the side curtain airbag subharness 2P connector and the right side
impact sensor (second).
YES - Go to step 5.
5. Disconnect the right side curtain airbag 2P connector and side curtain airbag subharness (see step 5 in
6. Disconnect the side curtain airbag subharness 2P connector (A) from the right side impact sensor
(second).
111
Fig. 163: Disconnecting Side Curtain Airbag Subharness 2P Connector From Right Side Impact
Sensor (Second)
111
YES - Go to step 9.
9. Check resistance between the No. 15 terminal of SRS unit connector C (16P) and body ground, and
111
Fig. 165: Checking Resistance Between No. 15 Terminal Of SRS Unit Connector C (16P) And
Body Ground

subharness.
111
12. Check for voltage between the No. 15 terminal of SRS unit connector C (16P) and body ground, and
Fig. 166: Checking Voltage Between No. 15 Terminal Of SRS Unit Connector C (16P) And Body
Ground

111
subharness.
14. Connect the SRS inflator simulator (jumper connector) and simulator lead H to the side curtain airbag
subharness 2P connector (A).
Fig. 167: Connecting SRS Inflator Simulator And Simulator Lead H To Side Curtain Airbag
Subharness 2P Connector
111
YES - Faulty right side impact sensor (second) or SRS unit; replace the right side impact sensor
(second) (see SIDE IMPACT SENSOR (SECOND) REPLACEMENT ). If the problem is
still present, replace the SRS unit (see SRS UNIT REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Open in the side curtain airbag subharness; replace the side curtain airbag subharness.
111
B0 TO 45-B9, 45-BA TO 45-BF): INTERNAL FAILURE OF THE LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
(SECOND)
then goes off.
YES - Replace the left side impact sensor (second) (see SIDE IMPACT SENSOR (SECOND)
REPLACEMENT ).
B0 TO 46-B9, 46-BA TO 46-BF): INTERNAL FAILURE OF THE RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
(SECOND)
then goes off.
YES - Replace the right side impact sensor (second) (see SIDE IMPACT SENSOR
(SECOND) REPLACEMENT ). If the DTC returns, replace the SRS unit (see SRS UNIT
REPLACEMENT ).
DTC 51-2X (51-20 TO 51-29, 51-2A TO 51-2F), 51-4X (51-40 TO 51-49, 51-4A TO 51-4F), 51-7X (51-
70 TO 51-79, 51-7A TO 51-7F): INTERNAL FAILURE OF THE SRS UNIT
NOTE: Before troubleshooting any of these DTCs, check the battery/system voltage.
If the voltage is low, repair the charging system or replace the battery before
troubleshooting the SRS. If the battery/system voltage is now OK, ask the
customer if the battery ever went dead. A dead battery may trigger one of
these DTCs.
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 51-2x, 51-4x, or 51-7x indicated?
YES - Replace the SRS unit (see SRS UNIT REPLACEMENT ).

111

DTC 52-8X (52-80 TO 52-89, 52-8A TO 52-8F), 52-9X (52-90 TO 52-99, 52-9A TO 52-9F), 52-AX (52-
A0 TO 52-A9, 52-AA TO 52-AF): INTERNAL FAILURE OF THE SRS UNIT
these DTCs.
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 52-8x, 52-9x, or 52-Ax indicated?

DTC 52-BX (52-B0 TO 52-B9, 52-BA TO 52-BF), 52-CX (52-C0 TO 52-C9, 52-CA TO 52-CF), 52-DX
(52-D0 TO 52-D9, 52-DA TO 52-DF): INTERNAL FAILURE OF THE SRS UNIT
these DTCs.
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 52-Bx, 52-Cx, or 52-Dx indicated?

DTC 52-EX (52-E0 TO 52-E9, 52-EA TO 52-EF), 52-FX (52-F0 TO 52-F9, 52-FA TO 52-FF), 53-1X
(53-10 TO 53-19, 53-1A TO 53-1F): INTERNAL FAILURE OF THE SRS UNIT
111
these DTCs.
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 52-Ex, 52-Fx, or 53-1x indicated?

these DTCs.
then goes off.

these DTCs.
then goes off.
111

60 TO 54-69,54-6A TO 54-6F): INTERNAL FAILURE OF THE SRS UNIT
these DTCs.
then goes off.

DTC 54-7X (54-70 TO 54-79,54-7A TO 54-7F), 55-1X (55-10 TO 55-19,55-1A TO 55-1F), 55-2X (55-20
TO 55-29,55-2A TO 55-2F): INTERNAL FAILURE OF THE SRS UNIT
these DTCs.
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 54-7x, 55-1 x, or 55-2x indicated?

111
these DTCs.
then goes off.

DTC D1-11, D2-11, D3-11, D4-11, D7-11, E2-11, E4-11, F1-11, F2-11, F3-11, F4-11: AIRBAGS, SIDE
AIRBAGS, AND/OR SEAT BELT TENSIONERS DEPLOYED
The SRS unit must be replaced after any airbags and/or tensioners have deployed (see COMPONENT
REPLACEMENT/INSPECTION AFTER DEPLOYMENT ).
DTC 61-1X (61-10 TO 61-19,61-1A TO 61-1F): OPEN IN DRIVER'S SEAT BELT BUCKLE
SWITCH (WITH POWER SEAT)
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then buckle and unbuckle the driver's seat belt several times.
YES - Go to step 4.
(see TROUBLESHOOTING INTERMITTENT FAILURES ).
5. Disconnect the driver's seat wire harness 3P connector from the driver's seat belt buckle switch 3P
connector (A).
111
Fig. 169: Disconnecting Driver's Seat Wire Harness 3P Connector From Driver's Seat Belt
Buckle Switch 3P Connector
6. Buckle the driver's seat belt.
111
Check resistance between the No. 1 and No. 3 terminals of the driver's seat belt buckle switch 3P
connector. There should be 0-1 ohms.
Check resistance between the No. 2 and No. 3 terminals of the same connector. There should be an
open circuit or at least 1 Mohms.
Fig. 170: Checking Resistance Between No. 1 And 3 Terminals Of Driver's Seat Belt Buckle
111
Switch 3P Connector
Are the resistance as specified?
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Replace the driver's seat belt buckle assembly (see FRONT SEAT BELT
REPLACEMENT ), then clear the DTC.
7. Unbuckle the driver's seat belt.
111
Switch 3P Connector
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Replace the driver's seat belt buckle assembly, then clear the DTC.
111
8. Check resistance between the No. 3 terminal of the driver's seat wire harness 3P connector and body
ground. There should be 0-1 ohms.
Fig. 172: Checking Resistance Between No. 3 Terminal Of Driver's Seat Wire Harness 3P
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Open in the driver's seat wire harness or floor wire harness, or poor ground connection at
G601 (see FLOOR WIRE HARNESS (LEFT BRANCH) (4-DOOR) ). If G601 is OK,
10. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner 4P connectors from the floor wire harness (see step 6 in
12. Check resistance between the No. 17 terminal of SRS unit connector B (28P) and the No. 1 terminal
of the driver's seat wire harness 3P connector. There should be 0-1 ohms.
111
No. 1 Terminal Of Driver's Seat Wire Harness 3P Connector

NO - Open in the driver's seat wire harness or floor wire harness; replace the faulty harness.
of the driver's seat wire harness 3P connector. There should be 0-1 ohms.
111
No. 2 Terminal Of Driver's Seat Wire Harness 3P Connector

NO - Open in the driver's seat wire harness or floor wire harness, or poor connection at the floor
wire harness. Check the connections at the floor wire harness, connector F (14P), and connector
H (14P) at the under-dash fuse/relay box. If the connections are OK, replace the faulty harness
or part.
DTC 61-1X (61-10 TO 61-19,61-1A TO 61-1F): OPEN IN DRIVER'S SEAT BELT BUCKLE
SWITCH (WITHOUT POWER SEAT)
YES - Go to step 4.
111

5. Disconnect the floor wire harness 3P connector from the driver's seat belt buckle switch 3P connector
(A).
111
Fig. 175: Disconnecting Floor Wire Harness 3P Connector From Driver's Seat Belt Buckle
Switch 3P Connector
111
111
111
Switch 3P Connector
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Replace the driver's seat belt buckle assembly (see SEAT BELT BUCKLE ), then clear
the DTC.
111
Switch 3P Connector
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Replace the driver's seat belt buckle assembly (see SEAT BELT BUCKLE ), then clear
the DTC.
8. Check resistance between the No. 1 terminal of the floor wire harness 3P connector and body ground.
There should be 0-1 ohms.
111
Fig. 178: Checking Resistance Between No. 1 Terminal Of Floor Wire Harness 3P Connector
And Body Ground
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Open in the floor wire harness or poor ground connection at G601 (see FLOOR WIRE
HARNESS (LEFT BRANCH) (4-DOOR) ). If G601 is OK, replace the floor wire harness.
10. Disconnect both floor wire harness 4P connector from the seat belt tensioner (see step 6 on FRONT
SEAT BELT - 2-DOOR ).
of the floor wire harness 3P connector. There should be 0-1 ohms.
111
Fig. 179: Checking Resistance Between No. 17 Terminal Of SRS Unit Connector B And No. 3
Terminal Of Floor Wire Harness 3P Connector

of the floor wire harness 3P connector. There should be 0---1 ohms.
111
Fig. 180: Checking Resistance Between No. 11 Terminal Of SRS Unit Connector B And 2

NO - Open in the floor wire harness, or poor connection at the floor wire harness. Check the
connections at the floor wire harness, connector F (14P), and connector H (14P) at the under-
dash fuse/relay box. If the connections are OK, replace the faulty harness or part.
DTC 61-2X (61-20 TO 61-29,61-2A TO 61-2F): SHORT IN DRIVER'S SEAT BELT BUCKLE
SWITCH (WITH POWER SEAT)
YES - Go to step 4.
5. Disconnect the driver's seat harness 3P connector from the driver's seat belt buckle switch 3P
111
connector (A).
Fig. 181: Disconnecting Driver's Seat Harness 3P Connector From Driver's Seat Belt Buckle
Switch 3P Connector
111
Switch 3P Connector
111
YES - Go to step 7.
111
Switch 3P Connector
YES - Go to step 8.
8. Check resistance between body ground and driver's seat belt buckle switch 3P connector terminals
No. 1 and No. 2. There should be an open circuit or at least 1 Mohms.
111
Fig. 184: Checking Resistance Between Body Ground And Driver's Seat Belt Buckle Switch 3P
Connector Terminals No. 1 And 2
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Replace the driver's seat belt buckle assembly.
ground. There should be an open circuit or at least 1 Mohms.
111
YES - Check the connections at the floor wire harness connector F <14P), and connector H
(14P) at the under-dash fuse/relay box. If the connections are OK, go to step 13.
NO - Short to ground in the driver's seat wire harness, floor wire harness, or multiplex control
unit. Replace the faulty harness or part.
ground. There should be an open circuit or at least 1 Mohms
111

NO - Short to ground in the driver's seat wire harness or floor wire harness; replace the faulty
harness.
DTC 61-2X (61-20 TO 61-29, 61-2A TO 61-2F): SHORT IN DRIVER'S SEAT BELT BUCKLE
SWITCH (WITHOUT POWER SEAT)
YES - Go to step 4.
111
5. Disconnect the floor wire harness 3P connector from the driver's seat belt buckle switch 3P connector
(A).
111
Fig. 187: Disconnecting Floor Wire Harness 3P Connector From Driver's Seat Belt Buckle
Switch 3P Connector
111
111
Switch 3P Connector
YES - Go to step 7.
111
Switch 3P Connector
111
YES - Go to step 8.
8. Check resistance between body ground and driver's seat belt buckle switch 3P connector terminals
No. 2 and No. 3. There should an open circuit or at least 1 Mohms.
Fig. 190: Checking Resistance Between Body Ground And Driver's Seat Belt Buckle Switch 3P
Connector Terminals No. 2 And 3
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Replace the driver's seat belt buckle assembly.
111
There should be an open circuit or at least 1 Mohms.
And Body Ground
YES - Check the connections at the floor wire harness, connector F (14P), and connector H
(14P) at the under-dash fuse/relay box. If the connections are OK, go to step 13.
NO - Short to ground in the floor wire harness or the multiplex control unit. Replace the faulty
harness or part.
111
And Body Ground

DTC 62-1X (62-10 TO 62-19, 62-1A TO 62-1F): OPEN IN FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT BELT
BUCKLE SWITCH (WITH POWER SEAT)
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then buckle and unbuckle the front passenger's seat belt several
times.
111
YES - Go to step 4.
5. Disconnect the front passenger's seat belt buckle switch 3P connector (A) from the passenger's seat
wire harness.
111
Fig. 193: Disconnecting Front Passenger's Seat Belt Buckle Switch 3P Connector From
Passenger's Seat Wire Harness
6. Buckle the front passenger's seat belt.
Check resistance between the No. 1 and No. 3 terminals of the front passenger's seat belt buckle
111
switch 3P connector. There should be 0-1 ohms.
Fig. 194: Checking Resistance Between No. 1 And 3 Terminals Of Front Passenger's Seat Belt
111
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Replace the front passenger's seat belt buckle assembly, then clear the DTC.
7. Unbuckle the front passenger's seat belt.
111
YES - Go to step 8.
111
8. Check resistance between the No. 3 terminal of the passenger's seat wire harness 3P connector and
body ground. There should be 0-1 ohms.
Fig. 196: Checking Resistance Between No. 3 Terminal Of Passenger's Seat Wire Harness 3P
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Open in the passenger's seat wire harness or floor wire harness, or poor ground connection
at G602 (see FLOOR WIRE HARNESS (LEFT BRANCH) (4-DOOR) ). If G602 is OK,
of the passenger's seat wire harness 3P connector. There should be 0-1 ohms.
111
Terminal Of Passenger's Seat Wire Harness 3P Connector

NO - Open in the passenger's seat wire harness or floor wire harness; replace the faulty harness.
of the passenger's seat wire harness 3P connector. There should be 0-1 ohms.
111
Terminal Of Passenger's Seat Wire Harness 3P Connector

NO - Open in the passenger's seat wire harness or floor wire harness; replace the faulty harness.
DTC 62-1X (62-10 TO 62-19,62-1A TO 62-1F): OPEN IN FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT BELT
BUCKLE SWITCH (WITHOUT POWER SEAT)
times.
YES - Go to step 4.
5. Disconnect the front passenger's seat belt buckle switch 3P connector (A) from the floor wire harness.
111
Fig. 199: Disconnecting Front Passenger's Seat Belt Buckle Switch 3P Connector From Floor
Wire Harness
111
111
YES - Go to step 7.
111
YES - Go to step 8.
111
There should be 0-1 ohms.
And Body Ground
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Open in the floor wire harness or poor ground connection at G602 (see FLOOR WIRE
HARNESS (LEFT BRANCH) (4-DOOR) ). If G602 is OK, replace the floor wire harness.
of the floor wire harness 3P connector. There should be 0-1 ohms.
111

of the floor wire harness 3P connector. There should be 0---1 ohms.
111

DTC 62-2X (62-20 TO 62-29,62-2A TO 62-2F): SHORT IN FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT BELT
BUCKLE SWITCH (WITH POWER SEAT)
times.
YES - Go to step 4.
5. Disconnect the front passenger's seat belt buckle switch 3P connector (A) from the passenger's seat
wire harness.
111
Fig. 205: Disconnecting Front Passenger's Seat Belt Buckle Switch 3P Connector From
Passenger's Seat Wire Harness
111
111

YES - Go to step 7.
111
YES - Go to step 8.
8. Check continuity between body ground and front passenger's seat belt buckle switch 3P connector
111
Fig. 208: Checking Continuity Between Body Ground And Front Passenger's Seat Belt Buckle
Switch 3P Connector Terminals No. 1 And 2
YES - Replace the front passenger's seat belt buckle assembly.

NO - Go to step 9.
111
body ground. There should be an open circuit or at least 1 Mohms.

NO - Short to ground in the passenger's seat wire harness or floor wire harness; replace the
faulty harness.
body ground. There should be an open circuit or at least 1 Mohms.
111

NO - Short to ground in the passenger's seat wire harness or floor wire harness; replace the
faulty harness.
DTC 62-2X (62-20 TO 62-29, 62-2A TO 62-2F): SHORT IN FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT BELT
BUCKLE SWITCH (WITHOUT POWER SEAT)
times.
YES - Go to step 4.
111
5. Disconnect the front passenger's seat belt buckle switch 3P connector (A) from the floor wire harness.
Fig. 211: Disconnecting Front Passenger's Seat Belt Buckle Switch 3P Connector From Floor
Wire Harness
111
111
YES - Go to step 7.
111
YES - Go to step 8.
8. Check continuity between body ground and front passenger's seat belt buckle switch 3P connector
111
Fig. 214: Checking Continuity Between Body Ground And Front Passenger's Seat Belt Buckle
Switch 3P Connector Terminals No. 2 And 3
YES - Replace the front passenger's seat belt buckle assembly.

NO - Go to step 9.
111

And Body Ground

111
And Body Ground

DTC 71-1X171-10 TO 71-19, 71-1A TO 71-1F): OPEN IN DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION SENSOR
SRS inflator simulator 07SAZ-TB4011A
then goes off.
111
YES - Go to step 3.
3. Check the connection between the seat position sensor harness 2P connector and the driver's seat
position sensor.
YES - Go to step 6.
7. Disconnect the driver's seat wire harness 2P connector from the driver's seat position sensor (A).
111
Fig. 217: Disconnecting Driver's Seat Wire Harness 2P Connector From Driver's Seat Position
Sensor
8. Connect the No. 1 and No. 2 terminals of the driver's seat wire harness 2P connector with a jumper
wire.
111
CONNECTORS ).
YES - Faulty driver's seat position sensor or SRS unit; replace the driver's seat position sensor
(see DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION SENSOR REPLACEMENT ). If the problem is still
NO - Open in the floor wire harness or seat position sensor harness; replace the faulty harness.
DTC 71-2X (71-20 TO 71-29, 71-2A TO 71-2F): SHORT IN DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION SENSOR
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then
goes off.
111
YES - Go to step 3.
4. Disconnect the driver's seat wire harness 2P connector from the driver's seat position sensor (A).
111
Fig. 219: Disconnecting Driver's Seat Wire Harness 2P Connector From Driver's Seat Position
Sensor

111
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Faulty driver's seat position sensor; replace the driver's seat position sensor.
CONNECTORS ).

NO - Short in the floor wire harness or seat position sensor harness; replace the faulty harness.
111
Fig. 221: Checking Resistance Between No. 16 Terminal Of SRS Unit Connector B And Body
Ground
NO - Short in the floor wire harness or seat position sensor harness; replace the faulty harness.
DTC 71-22: SHORT TO POWER IN DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION SENSOR
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds and then
goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 71-22 indicated?
YES - Go to step 3.
111

4. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector from the driver's seat position sensor (A).
Fig. 222: Disconnecting Floor Wire Harness 2P Connector From Driver's Seat Position Sensor
111
CONNECTORS ).
6. Disconnect SRS unit connector B from the SRS unit (see step 16 in DISCONNECTING SYSTEM
CONNECTORS ).
7. Check the voltage between the No. 16 terminal of SRS unit connector B (28P) and body ground, and
Ground
NO - Short to power in the floor wire harness or seat position sensor harness; replace the faulty
harness.
111
DTC 81-61: NO SIGNAL FROM FRONT PASSENGER'S WEIGHT SENSOR UNIT (WITH SIDE
AIRBAG) ('04-05 MODELS)
DTC 81-62: NON-STIPULATED RESPONSE DATA (WITH SIDE AIRBAG) ('04-05 MODELS)
Is DTC 81-61 or 81-62 indicated?
YES - Go to step 5.
3. Check the connection between the floor wire harness 6P connector and the front passenger's weight
sensor unit.
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Repair the poor connection and retest. If DTC 81-61 or 81-62 or still present, go to step 6.
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Replace the fuse, then turn the ignition switch ON (II). If the fuse blows again, check for a
short in the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse circuit (dashboard wire harness or floor wire harness).
6. Disconnect the floor wire harness 6P connector C from the front passenger's weight sensor unit.
111
Fig. 224: Disconnecting Floor Wire Harness 6P Connector C From Front Passenger's Weight
Sensor Unit

8. Check for voltage between the No. 3 terminal of the front passenger's weight sensor unit 6P connector
C and body ground. There should be battery voltage.
111
Fig. 225: Checking Voltage Between No. 3 Terminal Of Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Unit
6P Connector C And Body Ground

NO - Go to step 9.
10. Disconnect dashboard wire harness 24P connector C501A from the floor wire harness (C501B).
111
Fig. 226: Disconnecting Dashboard Wire Harness 24P Connector C501A From Floor Wire
Harness

12. Check for voltage between the No. 9 terminal of dashboard wire harness 24P connector and body
111
Fig. 227: Checking Voltage Between No. 9 Terminal Of Dashboard Wire Harness 24P
YES - Open in the WHT wire of the floor wire harness; replace the floor wire harness.
NO - Open in the WHT wire of the dashboard wire harness; replace dashboard wire harness.
14. Check resistance between the No. 6 terminal of the front passenger's weight sensor unit 6P connector
C and body ground. There should be 0---1.0 ohms.
111
Fig. 228: Checking Resistance Between No. 6 Terminal Of Front Passenger's Weight Sensor
Unit 6P Connector C And Body Ground

NO - Open in the BLK wire of the floor wire harness; check for poor ground connection at
G602 (see FLOOR WIRE HARNESS (LEFT BRANCH) (4-DOOR) ). If the connection is
OK, replace the floor wire harness.
CONNECTORS ).
SYSTEM CONNECTORS ). Disconnect OPDS unit 8P connector D from the OPDS unit.
111
Body Ground

NO - Go to step 22.
of the front passenger's weight sensor unit 6P connector C. There should be 0-1.0 ohms.
111
No. 5 Terminal Of Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Unit 6P Connector C
YES - Faulty front passenger's weight sensor unit or SRS unit; replace the front passenger's
weight sensor unit (see FRONT PASSENGER'S WEIGHT SENSOR UNIT
REPLACEMENT ). If the problem is still present, replace the SRS unit (see SRS UNIT
REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Go to step 20.
111
Harness
of floor wire harness 24P connector. There should be 0-1.0 ohms.
111
No. 17 Terminal Of Floor Wire Harness 24P Connector
YES - Open in the GRN/ORN wire of the dashboard wire harness; replace the dashboard wire
harness.
22. Disconnect dashboard wire harness 24P connector C501A from floor wire harness (C501B).
111
Harness
111
Fig. 234: Checking Resistance Between 27 Terminal Of SRS Unit Connector B (28P) And Body
Ground
YES - Short to ground in the dashboard wire harness; replace the dashboard wire harness.
DTC 81-61: NO SIGNAL FROM FRONT PASSENGER'S WEIGHT SENSOR UNIT (WITHOUT
SIDE AIRBAG) ('04-05 MODELS)
DTC 81-62: NON-STIPULATED RESPONSE DATA (WITHOUT SIDE AIRBAG) ('04-05

MODELS)
111
YES - Go to step 3.
3. Check the connection between the floor wire 6P connector and the front passenger's weight sensor
unit.
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Repair the poor connection and retest. If DTC 81-61 or 81-62 is still present, go to step 6.
5. Check the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Go to step 6.
short in the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse circuit (dashboard wire harness or floor wire harness).
6. Disconnect the floor wire harness 6P connector C from the front passenger's weight sensor unit.
111
Fig. 235: Disconnecting Floor Wire Harness 6P Connector C From Front Passenger's Weight
Sensor Unit

8. Check for voltage between the No. 3 terminal of the front passenger's weight sensor unit 6P connector
C and body ground. There should be battery voltage.
111
Fig. 236: Checking Voltage Between No. 3 Terminal Of Front Passenger'S Weight Sensor Unit
6P Connector C And Body Ground

NO - Go to step 9.
111
Harness

111
YES - Open in the WHT wire of the floor wire harness; replace the floor wire harness.
NO - Open in the WHT wire of the dashboard wire harness; replace dashboard wire harness.
14. Check resistance between the No. 6 terminal of the front passenger's weight sensor unit 6P connector
C and body ground. There should be 0-1.0 ohms.
111
Fig. 239: Checking Resistance Between No. 6 Terminal Of Front Passenger's Weight Sensor
Unit 6P Connector C And Body Ground

NO - Open in the BLK wire of the floor wire harness or left floor wire harness; check for poor
ground connection at G601 (see FLOOR WIRE HARNESS (LEFT BRANCH) (4-DOOR) ).
If the connection is OK, replace the floor wire harness.
CONNECTORS ).
111
Body Ground

of the front passenger's weight sensor unit 6P connector C. There should be 0-1.0 ohms.
111
Terminal Of Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Unit 6P Connector C
YES - Faulty front passenger's weight sensor unit or SRS unit; replace the front passenger's
weight sensor unit (see FRONT PASSENGER'S WEIGHT SENSOR UNIT
REPLACEMENT ). If the problem is still present, replace the SRS unit (see SRS UNIT
REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Open in the GRN/ORN wire of the floor wire harness; replace the floor wire harness.
DTC 81-4X (81-40 TO 81-49, 81-4A TO 81-4F), 81-5X (81-50 TO 81-59, 81-5A TO 81-5F), 81-63, 81-
64: INTERNAL FAILURE OF THE FRONT PASSENGER'S WEIGHT SENSOR UNIT ('04-05
MODELS)
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 81-4x, 81-5x, 81-63, or 81-64 indicated?
YES - Replace the front passenger's weight sensor unit (see FRONT PASSENGER'S
WEIGHT SENSOR UNIT REPLACEMENT ). If the DTC returns, replace the SRS unit (see
SRS UNIT REPLACEMENT ).
111
DTC 81-79: FRONT PASSENGER'S WEIGHT SENSORS DRIFT CHECK FAILURE ('04-05
MODELS)
then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
4. Make sure nothing is on the front passenger's seat.
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator go off?

NO - Remove the seat assembly (see FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ) and
front passenger's weight sensors, then reinstall them. Calibrate the front passenger's weight
sensor unit (see CALIBRATING THE FRONT PASSENGER'S WEIGHT SENSOR UNIT
('04-05 MODELS) OR CALIBRATE THE ODS UNIT ('06-07 MODEL) ). Retry the
troubleshooting. If DTC 81-79 is indicated repeatedly, replace the front passenger's weight
sensors.
DTC 81-71, 81-78: FRONT PASSENGER'S WEIGHT SENSOR UNIT DOES NOT CALIBRATE
('04-05 MODELS)
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC 81-71, or 81-78 indicated?
YES - Calibrate the front passenger's weight sensor unit. If the DTC returns, replace the front
passenger's weight sensor unit (see FRONT PASSENGER'S WEIGHT SENSOR UNIT
REPLACEMENT ).
DTC 81-71, 81-78: ODS UNIT DOES NOT CALIBRATE ('06-07 MODEL)
111
then goes off.
YES - Calibrate the ODS unit. If the DTC returns, replace the ODS unit (see OPDS/ODS Unit
Replacement ).
DTC 82-1X (82-10 TO 82-19, 82-1A TO 82-1F): NO SIGNAL FROM THE INNER SIDE FRONT
PASSENGER'S WEIGHT SENSOR ('04-07 MODELS)
then goes off.
YES - Replace the inner side front passenger's weight sensor (see FRONT PASSENGER'S
WEIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT ).
DTC 83-2X (83-20 TO 83-29, 83-2A TO 83-2F): NO SIGNAL FROM THE OUTER SIDE FRONT
PASSENGER'S WEIGHT SENSOR ('04-07 MODELS)
then goes off.
YES - Replace the outer side front passenger's weight sensor (see FRONT PASSENGER'S
WEIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT ).
DTC 85-4X (85-40 TO 85-49, 85-4A TO 85-4F), 85-5X (85-50 TO 85-59, 85-5A TO 85-5F), 85-63, 85-
64: INTERNAL FAILURE OF THE OPDS/ODS UNIT
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on, and is DTC85-4x, 85-5x, 85-63, or 85-64 indicated?
111
YES - Go to step 3.
3. Initialize the OPDS/ODS unit (see INITIALIZING THE OPDS/ODS UNIT ).
then goes off.

NO - Replace the OPDS/ODS unit (see OPDS/ODS UNIT REPLACEMENT ), and retest. If
the problem is still present, replace the OPDS sensor/seat-back (see FRONT SEAT COVER
REPLACEMENT ).
DTC 85-79: OPDS SENSOR DRIFT CHECK FAILURE
then goes off.
YES - Turn the ignition switch OFF, and go to step 3.

then goes off.

NO - Go to step 5.
then goes off.

NO - Replace the OPDS/ODS unit (see OPDS/ODS Unit Replacement ), and retest. If the
problem is still present, replace the OPDS sensor/seat-back (see FRONT SEAT COVER
REPLACEMENT ).
DTC 85-61: NO SIGNAL FROM THE OPDS UNIT ('04-05 MODELS)

111
DTC 85-62: NON-STIPULATED RESPONSE DATA ('04-05 MODELS)
NOTE:  An incorrect OPDS unit can cause DTC 85-63.

 A new (uninitialized) OPDS unit installed with a faulty sensor can also
cause DTC 85-71.

YES - Go to step 4.
4. Check the connection between the OPDS unit harness 8P connector D and the OPDS unit.
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Repair the poor connection and retest. If DTC 85-61 or 85-62 is still present, go to step 5.
6. Check the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Go to step 7.
short in the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse circuit (dashboard wire harness, floor wire harness, or OPDS
unit harness).
7. Disconnect the OPDS unit 8P connector D from the OPDS unit.
111
Fig. 242: Disconnecting OPDS Unit 8P Connector D From OPDS Unit


9. Check for voltage between the No. 4 terminal of the OPDS unit 8P connector D and body ground.
There should battery voltage.
111
Fig. 243: Checking Voltage Between No. 4 Terminal Of OPDS Unit 8P Connector D And Body
Ground

NO - Go to step 10.
111
Harness

111
YES - Open in the WHT wire of the floor wire harness or OPDS unit harness; replace the faulty
harness.
NO - Open in the WHT wire of the dashboard wire harness; replace the dashboard wire harness.
15. Check resistance between the No. 8 terminal of the OPDS unit 8P connector D and body ground.
There should be 0-1.0 ohms.
111
Fig. 246: Checking Resistance Between No. 8 Terminal Of OPDS Unit 8P Connector D And
Body Ground

NO - Open in the OPDS unit harness or floor wire harness; check the connection at G602 (see
FLOOR WIRE HARNESS (LEFT BRANCH) (4-DOOR) ). If the connection is OK, replace
the faulty harness.
111
CONNECTORS ).
Body Ground

NO - Go to step 23.
of the OPDS unit 8P connector D. There should be 0-1.0 ohms.
111
Terminal Of OPDS Unit 8P Connector D
YES - Faulty OPDS unit or SRS unit; replace the OPDS unit (see OPDS/ODS Unit
Replacement ). If the problem is still present, replace the OPDS sensor/seat-back (see FRONT
SEAT COVER REPLACEMENT ). If problem is still present, replace the SRS unit (see SRS
UNIT REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Go to step 21.
21. Disconnect the floor wire harness 4P connector C801 from the OPDS unit harness.
111
Fig. 249: Disconnecting Floor Wire Harness 4P Connector C801 From OPDS Unit Harness
of floor wire harness 4P connector C801. There should be 0-1.0 ohms.
111
Terminal Of Floor Wire Harness 4P Connector C801
YES - Open in the OPDS unit harness; replace the OPDS unit harness.
NO - Open in the GRN/ORN wire of the dashboard wire harness or floor wire harness; replace
the faulty harness.
23. Disconnect floor wire harness 4P connector C801 from the OPDS unit harness.
111
Fig. 251: Disconnecting Floor Wire Harness 4P Connector C801 From OPDS Unit Harness
111
Body Ground
YES - Short to ground in the OPDS unit harness; replace the OPDS unit harness.
NO - Short to ground in the dashboard wire harness or floor wire harness; replace the faulty
harness.
DTC 81-61, 85-61: NO SIGNAL FROM THE ODS UNIT ('06-07 MODEL); DTC 81-62, 85-62: NON-
STIPULATED RESPONSE DATA ('06-07 MODEL)
NOTE:  An incorrect ODS unit can cause DTC 85-63.

 A new (uninitialized) ODS unit installed with a faulty sensor can also
cause DTC 85-71.

111
Is DTC 81-61, 85-61, 81-62, or 85-62 indicated?
YES - Go to step 4.
4. Check the connection between the ODS unit harness 18P connector D and the ODS unit.
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Repair the poor connection and retest. If DTC 81-61, 85-61, 81-61, or 85-62 is still
present, go to step 5.
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Go to step 7.
short in the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse circuit (dashboard wire harness, floor wire harness, or ODS unit
harness).
7. Disconnect the ODS unit 18P connector D from the ODS unit.
111
Fig. 253: Disconnecting ODS Unit 18P Connector D From ODS Unit

9. Check for voltage between the No. 1 terminal of the ODS unit 18P connector D and body ground.
There should battery voltage.
111
Fig. 254: Checking Voltage Between No. 1 Terminal Of ODS Unit 18P Connector D And Body
Ground

NO - Go to step 10.
11. Disconnect dashboard wire harness 24P connector C501 from the floor wire harness (A).
111
Fig. 255: Disconnecting Dashboard Wire Harness 24P Connector C501 From Floor Wire
Harness

111
YES - Open in the WHT wire of the floor wire harness or ODS unit harness; replace the faulty
harness.
NO - Open in the WHT wire of the dashboard wire harness; replace the dashboard wire harness.
15. Check resistance between the No. 12 terminal of the ODS unit 18P connector D and body ground.
There should be 0-1.0 ohms.
111
Fig. 257: Checking Resistance Between No. 12 Terminal Of ODS Unit 18P Connector D And
Body Ground

NO - Open in the ODS unit harness or floor wire harness; check the connection at G602 (see
FLOOR WIRE HARNESS (LEFT BRANCH) (4-DOOR) ). If the connection is OK, replace
the faulty harness.
111
CONNECTORS ).
Body Ground

NO - Go to step 23.
of the ODS unit 18P connector D. There should be 0-1.0 ohms.
111
No. 7 Terminal Of ODS Unit 18P Connector D
YES - Faulty ODS unit or SRS unit; replace the ODS unit (see OPDS/ODS Unit
Replacement ). If the problem is still present, replace the OPDS sensor/seat-back (see FRONT
SEAT COVER REPLACEMENT ). If problem is still present, replace the SRS unit (see SRS
UNIT REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Go to step 21.
21. Disconnect the floor wire harness 4P connector C801 from the ODS unit harness.
111
Fig. 260: Disconnecting Floor Wire Harness 4P Connector C801 From ODS Unit Harness
of floor wire harness 4P connector C801. There should be 0-1.0 ohms.
111
Fig. 261: Checking Resistance Between No. 27 Terminal Of SRS Unit Connector B (28P) And 4
Terminal Of Floor Wire Harness 4P Connector C801
YES - Open in the ODS unit harness; replace the ODS unit harness.
NO - Open in the GRN/ORN wire of the floor wire harness; replace the faulty harness.
23. Disconnect floor wire harness 4P connector C801 from the ODS unit harness.
111
Fig. 262: Disconnecting Floor Wire Harness 4P Connector C801 From ODS Unit Harness
111
Body Ground
YES - Short to ground in the ODS unit harness; replace the ODS unit harness.
NO - Short to ground in the floor wire harness; replace the faulty harness.
DTC 85-71, 85-78: OPDS/ODS UNIT NOT INITIALIZED
then goes off.
YES - Initialized OPDS/ODS unit (see INITIALIZING THE OPDS/ODS UNIT ).

111
DTC 86-1X (86-10 TO 86-19, 86-1A TO 86-1F): FAULTY OPDS SEAT-BACK SENSOR
DTC 86-2X (86-20 TO 86-29, 86-2A TO 86-2F): FAULTY OPDS SEAT SUPPORT SENSOR
then goes off.
Does the SRS indicator stay on?
YES - Go to step 3.
NOTE: Aftermarket devices (fluorescent lights, laptop computers, etc.) used

near the front passenger's seat-back can interfere with the seat-back
sensors and cause a false DTC 86-1x or 86-2x. If one of these devices
was used, erase the DTC, operate the device near the seat-back, and
recheck for DTCs. If DTC 86-1x or 86-2x is reset, erase it, and do not
use the device near the seat-back.
3. Check the connection at the OPDS sensor harness connector and the OPDS/ODS unit connector.
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Reconnect the OPDS sensor harness connector, and clear the DTC.
4. Replace the OPDS sensor/seat-back foam (see FRONT SEAT RECLINE MOTOR
REPLACEMENT ), and initialize the OPDS/ODS unit (see INITIALIZING THE OPDS/ODS
UNIT ).
5. Erase the DTC memory, then check for DTC 86-1x or 86-2x.
YES - Replace the OPDS/ODS unit (see OPDS/ODS UNIT REPLACEMENT ).

NO - The system is OK.
DTC 87-31: INTERNAL FAILURE OF THE OPDS/ODS UNIT
NOTE: Make sure the battery is sufficiently charged and in good condition.
then goes off.

111

go to the DTC TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX. for troubleshooting details.
DTC 87-32: SIDE AIRBAG CUTOFF INDICATOR STAYS ON ('04-05 MODELS)
then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failure
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Make sure nothing is on the front passenger's seat.
4. Disconnect the OPDS unit 8P connector D from the OPDS unit.
111
Fig. 264: Disconnecting OPDS Unit 8P Connector D From OPDS Unit


6. Check for voltage between the No. 3 terminal of the OPDS unit harness 8P connector D and body
111
Fig. 265: Checking Voltage Between No. 3 Terminal Of OPDS Unit Harness 8P Connector D
And Body Ground
YES - Faulty OPDS unit; replace the OPDS unit (see OPDS/ODS Unit Replacement ).
NO - Go to step 7.
Disconnect gauge control module connector (30P) (A) from the gauge control module.
111
Fig. 266: Disconnecting Gauge Control Module Connector (30P) From Gauge Control Module
9. Check resistance between the No. 3 terminal of the OPDS unit 8P connector D and body ground.
111
Fig. 267: Checking Resistance Between No. 3 Terminal Of OPDS Unit 8P Connector D And
Body Ground
YES - Replace the gauge control module.

NO - Short to ground in the OPDS unit harness floor wire harness or dashboard wire harness;
111
DTC 87-32: SIDE AIRBAG CUTOFF INDICATOR STAYS ON ('06-07 MODEL)
then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Go to Troubleshooting Intermittent Failure
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Make sure nothing is on the front passenger's seat.
4. Disconnect the ODS unit 18P connector D from the ODS unit.
111
Fig. 268: Disconnecting ODS Unit 18P Connector D From ODS Unit

6. Check for voltage between the No. 18 terminal of the ODS unit harness 18P connector D and body
111
Fig. 269: Checking Voltage Between No. 18 Terminal Of ODS Unit Harness 18P Connector D
And Body Ground
YES - Faulty ODS unit; replace the ODS unit (see OPDS/ODS Unit Replacement ).
NO - Go to step 7.
111
9. Check resistance between the No. 18 terminal of the ODS unit 18P connector D and body ground.
111
Fig. 271: Checking Resistance Between No. 18 Terminal Of ODS Unit 18P Connector D And
Body Ground
YES - Replace the gauge control module.

NO - Short to ground in the ODS unit harness floor wire harness or dashboard wire harness;
111
DTC 91-1X (91-10 TO 91-19, 91-1A TO 91-1F): INTERNAL FAILURE OF THE SRS UNIT
customer if the battery ever went dead. A dead battery may trigger a DTC.
then goes off.
YES - Replace the SRS Unit (see SRS UNIT REPLACEMENT ).

DTC 91-2X (91-20 TO 91-29, 91-2A TO 91-2F): SHORT IN SRS INDICATOR
then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
Disconnect the gauge control module connector 30P ('03-05 models) or 36P ('06-07 model) (A) from
the gauge control module.
111
Fig. 272: Disconnecting Gauge Control Module Connector 30P ('03-05 Models) Or 36P ('06-07
Model) From Gauge Control Module
111
Body Ground
YES - Go to step 7.
7. Reconnect the gauge control module connector (A).
111
Fig. 274: Reconnecting Gauge Control Module Connector


9. Install a jumper wire between the No. 5 terminal and the No. 14 ('03-05 models), or the No. 18 ('06-07
model) terminal of the gauge control module connector 30P ('03-05 models), 36P ('06-07 model). The
SRS indicator should go off.
111
Fig. 275: Installing Jumper Wire Between No. 5 And 14 Terminals ('03-05 Models)
111
Fig. 276: Installing Jumper Wire Between No. 5 And 18 Terminals ('06-07 Model)
YES - Faulty SRS unit or poor contact at SRS unit connector A (28P) and the SRS unit; check
the connection. If the connection is OK, replace the SRS unit (see SRS UNIT
REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Faulty SRS indicator circuit in the gauge control module or poor contact at gauge control
module connector 30P ('03-05 models), 36P ('06-07 model); check the connection. If the
connection is OK, replace the gauge control module.
DTC 92-1X (92-10 TO 92-19, 92-1A TO 92-1F): PASSENGER'S AIRBAG CUTOFF INDICATOR
MALFUNCTION ('04-06 MODELS)
then goes off.
YES - Internal failure of SRS unit. Replace the SRS unit (see SRS UNIT REPLACEMENT ).
111
DTC 92-2X (92-20 TO 92-29, 92-2A TO 92-2F): OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND IN

PASSENGER'S AIRBAG CUTOFF INDICATOR ('04-07 MODELS)
NOTE: This DTC can be set if the key is turned on when the passenger's airbag
cutoff indicator is unplugged.
then goes off.
YES - Go to step 3.
3. Check the connection between the dashboard wire harness 6P connector and the passenger's airbag
cutoff indicator.
5. Check for a DTC.
YES - Go to step 6.
6. Check the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Go to step 7.
short in the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse circuit (dashboard wire harness A).
7. Disconnect the passenger's airbag cutoff indicator 6P connector.
111
Fig. 277: Disconnecting Passenger's Airbag Cutoff Indicator 6P Connector


9. Check for voltage between the No. 1 terminal of the passenger's airbag cutoff indicator 6P connector
and body ground. There should be battery voltage.
111
Fig. 278: Checking Voltage Between No. 1 Terminal Of Passenger's Airbag Cutoff Indicator 6P

NO - Open in the dashboard wire harness; replace the dashboard wire harness.
12. Check resistance between the No. 2 terminal of the passenger's airbag cutoff indicator 6P connector
and the No. 20 terminal of dashboard wire harness 28P connector C801. There should be 0-1.0 ohms.
111
Fig. 279: Checking Resistance Between No. 2 Terminal Of Passenger's Airbag Cutoff Indicator
6P Connector And No. 20 Terminal Of Dashboard Wire Harness 28P Connector C801

111
Body Ground
YES - Check for faulty SRS unit or passenger's airbag cutoff indicator; replace the passenger's
airbag cutoff indicator. If the problem is still present, replace the SRS unit (see SRS UNIT
REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Short to ground in dashboard wire harness; replace dashboard wire harness.
DTC A1-1X (A1-10 TO A1-19, A1-1A TO A1-1F): FAULTY POWER SUPPLY (VA LINE)
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
111
short in the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse circuit (dashboard wire harness, floor wire harness, or
OPDS/ODS unit harness).
5. Connect a voltmeter between the No. 17 terminal of SRS unit connector A (28P) and body ground.
Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure voltage. There should be battery voltage.
Fig. 281: Measuring Voltage Between No. 17 Terminal Of SRS Unit Connector A (28P) And
Body Ground
REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Go to step 6.
111

7. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector S (2P).
Fig. 282: Disconnecting Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Connector S (2P)

8. Check resistance between the No. 1 terminal of under-dash fuse/relay box connector S (2P) and the
No. 17 terminal of SRS unit connector A (28P). There should be 0-1.0 ohms.
111
Fig. 283: Checking Resistance Between No. 1 Terminal Of Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box
Connector S (2P) And No. 17 Terminal Of SRS Unit Connector A
YES - Open in the under-dash fuse/relay box or poor contact between connector S (2P) and the
under-dash fuse/relay box; check the connection. If the connection is OK, replace the under-
dash fuse/relay box (see UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX (EXCEPT HYBRID & V6) ).
DTC A2-1X (A2-10 TO A2-19, A2-1A TO A2-1F): FAULTY POWER SUPPLY (VB LINE)
1. Check the No. 22 (10 A) fuse.
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
short to ground in the dashboard wire harness or in the under-dash fuse/relay box No. 22 (10 A)
fuse line; replace the dashboard wire harness. If the problem is still there, replace the under-
5. Connect a voltmeter between the No. 18 terminal of SRS unit connector A (28P) and body ground.
111
Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure voltage. There should be battery voltage.
Fig. 284: Measuring Voltage Between No. 18 Terminal Of SRS Unit Connector A (28P) And
Body Ground
REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Go to step 6.
7. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector S (2P).
111
Fig. 285: Disconnecting Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box Connector S (2P)

8. Check resistance between the No. 2 terminal of the under-dash fuse/relay box connector S (2P) and
the No. 18 terminal of SRS unit connector A (28P). There should be 0-1.0 ohms.
111
Fig. 286: Checking Resistance Between No. 2 Terminal Of Under-Dash Fuse/Relay Box
Connector S (2P) And No. 18 Terminal Of SRS Unit Connector A
YES - Open in the under-dash fuse/relay box or poor contact between connector S (2P) and the
under-dash fuse/relay box; check the connection. If the connection is OK, replace the under-
dash fuse/relay box (see UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX (EXCEPT HYBRID & V6) ).
SRS INDICATOR DOES NOT COME ON ('03-05 MODELS)
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and see if the other indicators come on (brake system, etc).
Do the other indicators come on?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO - Go to step 8.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then remove the gauge control module (see GAUGE CONTROL
Disconnect the gauge control module connector (30P) (A) from the gauge control module.
111
3. Check resistance between the No. 21 terminal of gauge control module connector (30P) and body
ground. There should be 0-1.0 ohms.
111
Fig. 288: Checking Resistance Between No. 21 Terminal Of Gauge Control Module Connector
(30P) And Body Ground
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Open in the BLK wire of the dashboard wire harness, junction connector or faulty body
ground terminal (G503) (see ). If the body ground terminal is OK, replace the dashboard wire
harness.
4. Check for voltage between the No. 14 terminal of the gauge control module connector (30P) and body
ground within the first 6 seconds after turning the ignition switch ON (II). There should be about 1.0
V for 6 seconds and then about 11V.
111
Fig. 289: Checking Voltage Between No. 14 Terminal Of Gauge Control Module Connector
YES - Faulty SRS indicator circuit in the gauge control module; replace the gauge control
module.
NO - Go to step 5.
8. Connect a voltmeter between the No. 14 terminal of gauge control module connector (30P) and body
ground. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure voltage. There should be 0.5 V or less.
111
Fig. 290: Measuring Voltage Between No. 14 Terminal Of Gauge Control Module Connector
YES - Faulty SRS unit; replace the SRS unit (see SRS UNIT REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Short to power in the PNK wire of the dashboard wire harness or junction connector;
replace the dashboard wire harness.
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Check the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse blown?

NO - Go to step 10.
10. Connect a voltmeter between the No. 5 terminal of the gauge control module connector (30P) and
body ground. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure the voltage. There should be battery
voltage.
111
YES - Faulty SRS indicator circuit in the gauge control module or poor contact at the gauge
control module connector (30P) and the gauge control module; if the connection is OK, replace
NO - Open in the under-dash fuse/relay box No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse circuit, or open in the YEL
wire of the dashboard wire harness A or junction connector. If the under-dash fuse/relay box is
OK, replace the dashboard wire harness.
11. Replace the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse, then check to see if the indicators comes on.
Do the indicators come on?

NO - Repair the short to ground in the under-dash fuse/relay box No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse circuit.
SRS INDICATOR DOES NOT COME ON ('06-07 MODEL)
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and see if the other indicators come on (brake system, etc).
Do the other indicators come on?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO - Go to step 9.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then remove the gauge control module (see GAUGE CONTROL
111
Disconnect the gauge control module connector (36P) (A) from the gauge control module.
3. Check resistance between the No. 25 terminal of gauge control module connector (36P) and body
ground. There should be 0-1.0 ohms.
111
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Open in the BLK wire of the dashboard wire harness, junction connector or faulty body
ground terminal (G503) (see ). If the body ground terminal is OK, replace the dashboard wire
harness.
4. Check for voltage between the No. 18 terminal of the gauge control module connector (36P) and body
ground within the first 6 seconds after turning the ignition switch ON (II). There should be about 1.0
V for 6 seconds and then about 11 V.
111
Fig. 294: Checking Voltage Between No. 18 Terminal Of Gauge Control Module Connector
YES - Faulty SRS indicator circuit in the gauge control module; replace the gauge control
module.
NO - Go to step 5.
8. Connect a voltmeter between the No. 18 terminal of gauge control module connector (36P) and body
ground. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure voltage. There should be 0.5 V or less.
111
YES - Faulty SRS unit; replace the SRS unit (see SRS UNIT REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Short to power in the PNK wire of the dashboard wire harness or junction connector;
replace the dashboard wire harness.
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Check the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse blown?

NO - Go to step 10.
10. Connect a voltmeter between the No. 5 terminal of the gauge control module connector (36P) and
body ground. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure the voltage. There should be battery
voltage.
111
YES - Faulty SRS indicator circuit in the gauge control module or poor contact at the gauge
control module connector (36P) and the gauge control module; if the connection is OK, replace
NO - Open in the under-dash fuse/relay box No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse circuit, or open in the YEL
wire of the dashboard wire harness A or junction connector. If the under-dash fuse/relay box is
OK, replace the dashboard wire harness.
11. Replace the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse, then check to see if the indicators comes on.
Do the indicators come on?

NO - Repair the short to ground in the under-dash fuse/relay box No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse circuit.
SRS INDICATOR STAYS ON, BUT NO DTCS ARE STORED ('03-05 MODELS)
NOTE:  If you cannot retrieve DTCs with the HDS using the SRS menu method,
retrieve flash codes with the HDS in SCS mode.
 A new SRS unit must sense the entire system is OK before completing
its initial self-test. The most common cause of an incomplete self-test is
the failure to replace all deployed parts after a collision, in particular
seat belt tensioners (see COMPONENT REPLACEMENT/INSPECTION
111
AFTER DEPLOYMENT ).
 A battery/system voltage above 15.2 V can cause the SRS indicator to
come on without storing any DTCs.

4. Check resistance between the No. 14 terminal of gauge control module connector (30P) and the No.
19 terminal of SRS unit connector A (28P). There should be 1 ohms or less.
111
(30P) And No. 19 Terminal Of SRS Unit Connector A (28P)
YES - Go to step 5.
6. Reconnect gauge control module connector (30P) to the gauge control module.
8. Install a jumper wire between the No. 5 terminal and the No. 14 terminal of the gauge control module
connector (30P). The SRS indicator should go off.
111
Fig. 299: Installing Jumper Wire Between No. 5 And 14 Terminals Of Gauge Control Module
Connector (30P)
REPLACEMENT ).
module connector (30P); check the connection. If the connection is OK, replace the gauge
control module.
SRS INDICATOR STAYS ON, BUT NO DTCS ARE STORED ('06-07 MODEL)
NOTE:  If you cannot retrieve DTCs with the HDS using the SRS menu method,
retrieve flash codes with the HDS in SCS mode.
 A new SRS unit must sense the entire system is OK before completing
its initial self-test. The most common cause of an incomplete self-test is
the failure to replace all deployed parts after a collision, in particular
seat belt tensioners (see COMPONENT REPLACEMENT/INSPECTION
AFTER DEPLOYMENT ).
 A battery/system voltage above 15.2 V can cause the SRS indicator to
come on without storing any DTCs.

111
4. Check resistance between the No. 18 terminal of gauge control module connector (36P) and the No.
19 terminal of SRS unit connector A (28P). There should be 1 ohms or less.
111
(36P) And No. 19 Terminal Of SRS Unit Connector A (28P)
YES - Go to step 5.
6. Reconnect gauge control module connector (36P) to the gauge control module.
8. Install a jumper wire between the No. 5 terminal and the No. 18 terminal of the gauge control module
connector (36P). The SRS indicator should go off.
111
Fig. 302: Installing Jumper Wire Between No. 5 And 18 Terminals Of Gauge Control Module
Connector (36P)
REPLACEMENT ).
module connector (36P); check the connection. If the connection is OK, replace the gauge
control module.
COMPONENT REPLACEMENT/INSPECTION AFTER DEPLOYMENT
NOTE:  Before doing any SRS repairs, use the HDS SRS menu method to check
for DTCs; read the DTC for the less obvious deployed parts (seat belt
tensioners, front impact sensors, side airbag sensors, etc.)
 Do not mix TRW and Denso impact sensors. Impact sensors and the
SRS unit must be of the same manufacturer.
After a collision where the seat belt tensioners deployed, replace these items:
 SRS unit
 Seat belt tensioners
111
 Front impact sensors
After a collision where the front airbag(s) deployed, replace these items:
 SRS unit
 Deployed airbag(s)
 Seat belt tensioners
 Front impact sensors
After a collision where the side airbag(s) deployed, replace these items:
 SRS unit
 Deployed side airbag(s)
 Seat belt tensioner(s) for the side(s) that deployed.
 Side impact sensor(s) (first) for the side(s) that deployed
 Side impact sensor(s) (second) for the side(s) that deployed (4-door)
After a collision where the side curtain airbag(s) deployed, replace these items:
 SRS unit
 Deployed side curtain airbag(s)
 Seat belt tensioner(s) for the side(s) that deployed
 Side impact sensor(s) (first) for the side(s) that deployed
 Side impact sensor(s) (second) for the side(s) that deployed (4-door)
 Roof trim
 A-pillar trim
 B-pillar trim
 C-pillar trim
 Front grab handle
 Sunvisor
 All related trim clips
After a moderate to severe side or rear collision, inspect for damage on the side curtain airbag or other
related components. According to the degree of damage, replace components as needed.
After a collision, where a side curtain airbag has deployed, replace all trim clips on that side, even if they
appear to be undamaged. Replace the clips on these parts:
 A-pillar trim
 B-pillar trim
 C-pillar trim
 Front grab handle
 Sunvisor
111
A-PILLAR
Fig. 303: Identifying A-Pillar

B-PILLAR (4-DOOR)
111
Fig. 304: Identifying B-Pillar (4-Door)

C-PILLAR (4-DOOR)
111
Fig. 305: Identifying C-Pillar (4-Door)

B-PILLAR (2-DOOR)
111
Fig. 306: Identifying B-Pillar (2-Door)

111
C-PILLAR (2-DOOR)
Fig. 307: Identifying C-Pillar (2-Door)

During the repair process, inspect these areas:
 Inspect all the SRS wire harnesses. Replace, don't repair, any damaged harnesses.
 Inspect the cable reel for heat damage. If there is any damage, replace the cable reel.
111
After the vehicle is completely repaired, turn the ignition switch ON (II). If the SRS indicator comes on for
about 6 seconds and then goes off, the SRS is OK. If the indicator does not function properly, use the HDS
SRS Menu Method to read the DTC. If you cannot retrieve a code, go to SYMPTOM
TROUBLESHOOTING .
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE HEADLINER/PILLAR TRIM OVERLAP
To prevent the side curtain airbag from accidentally deploying and damaged the pillar trim, the overlap
between the headliner and pillar trim must be less then 15 mm. To check the overlap, do this:
1. Install the headliner (A) and the pillar trim (B).
Fig. 308: Installing Headliner And Pillar Trim

2. Using masking tape on the headliner, mark the upper edge of each pillar trim.
111
Fig. 309: Marking Upper Edge Of Pillar Trim Using Masking Tape On Headliner
3. Remove the pillar trims, and measure the headliner overlap.

 '04-07 2-Door Models: If the overlap is less than 12 mm, remove the tape, and install the pillar
trims.
 '04-07 2-Door Models: If the overlap is more than 12 mm, go to step 4.
 If the overlap is less than 15 mm, remove the tape, and install the pillar trims.
 If the overlap is more than 15 mm, go to step 4.
111
Fig. 310: Measuring Headliner Overlap

4. Carefully trim the headliner with a utility knife, reducing the overlap to less than 12 mm ('04-07
Models, 2-door) or 15 mm.
111
Fig. 311: Trimming Headliner With Utility Knife

5. Remove the tape, and install the pillar trim.
DRIVER'S AIRBAG REPLACEMENT

REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work.
111

3. Remove the two Torx bolts (A) using a Torx T30 bit.
111
Fig. 313: Removing Torx Bolts

4. Disconnect the horn switch connector (1P), then remove the driver's airbag (B).
INSTALLATION
1. Connect the horn switch connector (1P) (A) to the driver's airbag.
111
Fig. 314: Connecting Horn Switch Connector (1P) To Driver's Airbag

2. Place the new driver's airbag (B) in the steering wheel, and secure it with new Torx bolts (C).
3. Connect the cable reel to the driver's airbag 4P connector (A), then install the access panel (B) on the
steering wheel.
111
Fig. 315: Connecting Cable Reel To Driver's Airbag 4P Connector

4. Connect the battery negative cable.

5. After installing the airbag, confirm proper system operation:
 Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and
then go off.
 Make sure the horn button works.
FRONT PASSENGER'S AIRBAG REPLACEMENT

REMOVAL
2. Remove the glove box (see GLOVE BOX REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).
3. Disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (A) from dashboard wire harness.
111
Fig. 316: Disconnecting Front Passenger's Airbag 4P Connector (A) From Dashboard Wire
Harness
4. Disconnect the passenger's A-pillar trim.

 Without side curtain airbag (see A-PILLAR - WITHOUT SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('03-
04 MODELS) ).
 With side curtain airbag (see A-PILLAR - WITH SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('04-07
MODELS) ).
5. Remove the three mounting nuts (A) from the bracket. Cover the lid and dashboard with a cloth, and
pry carefully with a flat-tip screwdriver to lift the front passenger's airbag (B) out of the dashboard.
NOTE: The airbag lid has pawls on each side which attach it to the dashboard.
111
Fig. 317: Removing Mounting Nuts From Bracket

111
INSTALLATION
1. Place the new front passenger's airbag (A) into the dashboard. Tighten the front passenger's airbag
mounting nuts (B).
Fig. 318: Tightening Front Passenger's Airbag Mounting Nuts

2. Connect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (A) to dashboard wire harness, then reinstall the
111
glove box and passenger's front pillar trim.
Fig. 319: Connecting Front Passenger's Airbag 4P Connector To Dashboard Wire Harness

4. After installing the airbag, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the
SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off.
SIDE AIRBAG REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Review the seat replacement procedure before performing repairs or service.
111
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect the side airbag harness 2P connectors (A).
Fig. 320: Disconnecting Side Airbag Harness 2P Connectors

111
3. Remove the seat assembly (see FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ) and seat-back
cover (see FRONT SEAT COVER REPLACEMENT ).
4. Remove the mounting nut (A) and the side airbag (B).
Fig. 321: Removing Mounting Nut And Side Airbag

INSTALLATION
NOTE:  If the side airbag lid is secured by a tape, remove the tape.
 Do not open the lid of the side airbag cover.
111
 Use new mounting nuts tightened to the specified torque.

 Make sure that the seat-back cover is installed properly. Improper
installation may prevent proper deployment.
 Be sure to install the harness wires so that they are not pinched or
interfering with other parts.
1. Place the new side airbag on the seat-back frame (A). Tighten the side airbag mounting nuts (B).
Fig. 322: Tightening Side Airbag Mounting Nuts

2. Install the seat-back cover in the reverse order of removal (see FRONT SEAT COVER
REPLACEMENT ).
111
3. Install the seat assembly (see FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ), then connect the
side airbag harness 2P connector.
4. Move the front seat and the seat-back through their full ranges of movement, making sure the harness
wires are not pinched or interfering with other parts.
6. Connect the HDS and clear the DTCs (see ERASING THE DTC MEMORY WITH HDS ).
7. After installing the side airbag, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG REPLACEMENT

REMOVAL
NOTE:  Review the interior trim replacement procedure before performing

repair or service.
 Removal of the side curtain airbag must be performed according to the
precautions/procedures described at the beginning of the SRS.
 The side curtain airbag system consists of the side curtain airbag
module, including the roof trim and front grab handle. When the side
curtain airbag has been deployed, these parts should be replaced.
3. Remove the antenna coil (see WINDOW ANTENNA COIL REPLACEMENT ).
4. Disconnect the side curtain airbag subharness from the side curtain airbag 2P connector (A).
111
Fig. 323: Disconnecting Side Curtain Airbag Subharness From Side Curtain Airbag 2P
Connector
5. Remove the mounting bolts (A) from the bracket.
111
Fig. 324: Removing Mounting Bolts From Bracket (4-Door)

111
Fig. 325: Removing Mounting Bolts From Bracket (2-Door)

6. Remove the side curtain airbag assembly.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:  Installation of the side curtain airbag must be performed according to

the precautions/procedures described at the beginning of the SRS.
 If the airbag is frayed, or has only other visible damage, replace it. Do
not attempt to repair an airbag.
 When you install the airbag, make sure it is not twisted, and not caught
between the inflator brackets by the bracket bolts.
 Make sure that the side curtain airbag inflator retainer is installed
properly, otherwise the airbag could accidentally deploy and cause
111
damage or injuries.
1. Place the new side curtain airbag assembly on the side of the roof. Tighten the side curtain airbag
mounting bolts (A).
Fig. 326: Tightening Side Curtain Airbag Mounting Bolts (4-Door)

111
Fig. 327: Tightening Side Curtain Airbag Mounting Bolts (2-Door)

2. Connect the side curtain airbag subharness to the side curtain airbag 2P connector (A).
111
Fig. 328: Connecting Side Curtain Airbag Subharness To Side Curtain Airbag 2P Connector

4. Connect the HDS and clear the DTCs (see ERASING THE DTC MEMORY WITH HDS ).
5. After installing the side curtain airbag, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON
(II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off.
6. Install all removed parts.
7. Confirm proper headliner/pillar trim overlap (see COMPONENT REPLACEMENT/INSPECTION
AFTER DEPLOYMENT ).
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Deployment tool 07HAZ-SG00500
111
Before scrapping any airbags, side airbags, side curtain airbags, or seat belt tensioners (including those in a
whole vehicle to be scrapped), the part(s) must be deployed. If the vehicle is still within the warranty period,
the Honda District Manager must give approval and/or special instruction before deploying the part(s). Only
after the part(s) have been deployed (as the result of vehicle collision, for example), can they be scrapped. If
the parts appear intact (not deployed), treat them with extreme caution. Follow this procedure.
DEPLOYING AIRBAGS IN THE VEHICLE
If an SRS equipped vehicle is to be entirely scrapped, its airbags, side airbags, side curtain airbags, and seat
belt tensioners should be deployed while still in the vehicle. These parts should not be considered as
salvageable parts and should never be installed in another vehicle.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the battery negative cable, and wait at least 3 minutes.
2. Confirm that each airbag, side airbag, side curtain airbag, or seat belt tensioner is securely mounted.
3. Confirm that the deployment tool is functioning properly by following the check procedure on the tool
label.
Driver's Airbag
111
Fig. 329: Disconnecting Driver's Airbag 4P Connector From Cable Reel (Driver's Airbag)
Front Passenger's Airbag
5. Remove the glove box, then disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (A) from dashboard
wire harness.
111
(Front Passenger's Airbag)
Side Airbag
6. Disconnect the side airbag 2P connector (A) from the floor wire harness.
111
Fig. 331: Disconnecting Side Airbag 2P Connector From Floor Wire Harness (Side Airbag)
111
Side curtain airbag
7. Disconnect the side curtain airbag 2P connector (A) from the side curtain airbag subharness.
Fig. 332: Disconnecting Side Curtain Airbag 2P Connector From Side Curtain Airbag
Subharness (Side Curtain Airbag)
Seat belt tensioner
8. Disconnect the seat belt tensioner 4P connector (A) from the floor wire harness. Pull the seat belt out
all the way and cut it.
111
Fig. 333: Disconnecting Seat Belt Tensioner 4P Connector From Floor Wire Harness (Seat Belt
Tensioner)
9. Cut off each connector, strip the ends of the wires, and connect the deployment tool alligator clips (A)
to the wires. Place the deployment tool at least 30 feet (10 meters) away from the vehicle.
NOTE: The driver's and front passenger's airbags have dual inflators. The like
color wires go to the individual inflators.
111
Fig. 334: Connecting Deployment Tool Alligator Clips To Wires (1 Of 2)

111
Fig. 335: Connecting Deployment Tool Alligator Clips To Wires (2 Of 2)

10. Connect a 12 volt battery to the tool.

 If the green light on the tool comes on, the igniter circuit is defective and cannot deploy the
component. Go to DISPOSAL OF DAMAGED COMPONENTS .
 If the red light on the tool comes on, the component is ready to be deployed.
11. Push the tool's deployment switch. The airbags and tensioners should deploy (deployment is both
highly audible and visible: a loud noise and rapid inflation of the bag, followed by slow deflation).
 If the components deploy and the green light on the tool comes on, continue with this
111
procedure.
 If a component does not deploy, yet the green light comes ON, its igniter is defective. Go to
DISPOSAL OF DAMAGED COMPONENTS .
 During deployment, the airbags can become hot enough to burn you. Wait 30 minutes after
deployment before touching the airbags.
12. Dispose of the complete airbag. No part of it can be reused. Place it in a sturdy plastic bag (A), and
seal it securely. Dispose of the deployed airbag according to your local regulations.
Fig. 336: Placing Airbag In Sturdy Plastic Bag And Seal Securely
111
DEPLOYING COMPONENTS OUT OF THE VEHICLE
If an intact airbag or tensioner has been removed from a scrapped vehicle, or has been found defective or
damaged during transit, storage, or service, it should be deployed as follows:
Fig. 337: Deploying Components Of Airbag Out Of Vehicle

1. Confirm that the deployment tool is functioning properly by following the check procedure on the tool
label.
2. Position the airbag face up, outdoors, on flat ground, at least 30 feet (10 meters) from any obstacles or
people.
3. Follow steps 9 through 12 in DEPLOYING AIRBAGS IN THE VEHICLE .
DISPOSAL OF DAMAGED COMPONENTS
1. If installed in a vehicle, follow the removal procedure for the driver's airbag (see DRIVER'S
AIRBAG REPLACEMENT ), front passenger's airbag (see FRONT PASSENGER'S AIRBAG
REPLACEMENT ), side airbag (see SIDE AIRBAG REPLACEMENT ), side curtain airbag (see
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG REPLACEMENT ), and seat belt tensioner (see FRONT SEAT BELT
111
REPLACEMENT ).
2. In all cases, make a short circuit by cutting, stripping, and twisting together the two inflator wires.
3. Package the component in exactly the same packaging that the new replacement part came in.
4. Mark the outside of the box "DAMAGED AIRBAG NOT DEPLOYED", "DAMAGED SIDE
AIRBAG NOT DEPLOYED", "DAMAGED SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG NOT DEPLOYED",
"DAMAGED SEAT BELT TENSIONER NOT DEPLOYED" so it does not get confused with your
parts stock.
5. Contact your Honda District Parts & Service Manager for how and where to return it for disposal.
DEPLOYMENT TOOL CHECK
1. Connect the yellow clips to both switch protector handles on the tool; connect the tool to a battery.
2. Push the operation switch: green means the tool is OK; red means the tool is faulty.
3. Disconnect the yellow clips from the battery.
CABLE REEL REPLACEMENT

REMOVAL
1. Make sure the wheels are aligned straight ahead.

3. Remove the driver's airbag (see DRIVER'S AIRBAG REPLACEMENT ).
4. Disconnect the connector (A) from the cable reel, then remove the steering wheel bolt (B).
111
Fig. 338: Removing Steering Wheel Bolt

5. Align the front wheels straight ahead, then remove the steering wheel with a steering wheel puller (see
step 5 on STEERING WHEEL REMOVAL ). Do not tap on the steering wheel or steering column
shaft when removing the steering wheel.
6. Remove the dashboard lower cover (A).
111
Fig. 339: Removing Dashboard Lower Cover

7. Remove the column cover screws (A), then remove the column covers (B, C).
111
Fig. 340: Removing Column Covers

111
8. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 4P connector (A) from the cable reel 4P connector (B), then
disconnect the dashboard wire harness 5P or 13P connector (C) from the cable reel (D).
Fig. 341: Disconnecting Dashboard Wire Harness 4P Connector From Cable Reel 4P Connector
9. Release the lock tab (A) under the cable reel connector with a 90° hook shaped tool (B). Slide the tool
below the cable reel connector just above the lock tab. Release the lower lock tab (C), and slide the
cable reel off the column.
111
Fig. 342: Releasing Lock Tab Under Cable Reel Connector With Hook Shaped Tool
111
INSTALLATION
1. Before installing the steering wheel, align the front wheels straight ahead.
3. Set the turn signal cancelling sleeve (A) so that the projections (B) are aligned vertically.
Fig. 343: Setting Turn Signal Cancelling Sleeve Aligning Projections Vertically
4. Carefully install the cable reel (A) on the steering column shaft. Then connect the 5P or 13P connector
(B) to the cable reel, and connect the 4P connector (C) to the dashboard wire harness 4P connector
(D).
111
Fig. 344: Installing Cable Reel On Steering Column Shaft

5. Install the steering column covers.

6. If necessary, center the cable reel. (New replacement cable reels come centered.) Do this by first
rotating the cable reel clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it counterclockwise (about 3 turns) until the
arrow mark on the cable reel label points straight up.
111
Fig. 345: Aligning Arrow Mark On Cable Reel Label Points Straight Up
7. Align the projections on the cable reel with the holes on the steering wheel (see step 2 on STEERING
WHEEL INSTALLATION ). Install the steering wheel with a new steering wheel bolt (A), then
reconnect the connector (B).
111
Fig. 346: Aligning Projections On Cable Reel With Holes On Steering Wheel
8. Install the driver's airbag (see DRIVER'S AIRBAG REPLACEMENT ).

10. After installing the cable reel, confirm proper system operation:
 Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and
then go off.
 After the SRS indicator has turned off, turn the steering wheel fully left and right to confirm the
indicator does not come on.
 Make sure the horn works.
SRS UNIT REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Make sure the SRS unit and the impact sensors are of the same
manufacturer.
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect both seat belt tensioner connectors (see step 6 in DISCONNECTING SYSTEM
CONNECTORS ).
111
3. Remove the center console and front panel (see CENTER CONSOLE
6. Remove the driver's and passenger's center lower cover (see DASHBOARD/STEERING HANGER
BEAM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).
7. Remove the heater vent ducts (see DASHBOARD/STEERING HANGER BEAM
8. Disconnect the connectors and remove the Torx bolts (A), then pull out the SRS unit.
Fig. 347: Removing Torx Bolts

INSTALLATION
1. Install the new SRS unit (A) with Torx bolts (B), then connect the connectors (C) to the SRS unit;
push them into position until they click.
NOTE: Be sure the SRS unit is sitting squarely against its bracket before
torquing the Torx bolts.
111
Fig. 348: Installing SRS Unit With Torx Bolts

2. Reconnect both seat belt tensioner connectors (see step 6 in DISCONNECTING SYSTEM
CONNECTORS ).
4. After installing the SRS unit, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR (FIRST) REPLACEMENT
NOTE:  Review the seat replacement procedure before doing repairs or service.
 Make sure the SRS unit and the impact sensors are of the same
manufacturer.
REMOVAL
111
2. Disconnect the appropriate side airbag 2P connector (see step 4 in DISCONNECTING SYSTEM
CONNECTORS ).
3. Remove the seat assembly (see FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).
4. Remove the front door sill trim and the center pillar lower trim panel.
5. Disconnect the floor wire harness 2P connector from the side impact sensor (first).
6. Remove the Torx bolts (A) using a Torx T30 bit, then remove the side impact sensor (first) (B).
Fig. 349: Removing Side Impact Sensor

INSTALLATION
1. Install the new side impact sensor (first) (A) with the Torx bolts (B), then connect the floor wire
harness 2P connector (C) to the side impact sensor.
111
Fig. 350: Installing Side Impact Sensor (First) With Torx Bolts

4. After installing the side impact sensor (first), confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition
switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off.
SIDE IMPACT SENSOR (SECOND) REPLACEMENT
manufacturer.
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect the appropriate side curtain airbag 2P connector (see step 5 in DISCONNECTING
3. Disconnect the side impact sensor (second) 2P connector (A) from the side curtain airbag subharness.
111
Fig. 351: Disconnecting Side Impact Sensor (Second) 2P Connector From Side Curtain Airbag
Subharness
4. Remove the Torx bolts (B) using a Torx T30 bit, then remove the side impact sensor (second) (C).
INSTALLATION
1. Install the new side impact sensor (second) (A) with the Torx bolts (B), then connect the side curtain
airbag subharness 2P connector (C) to the side impact sensor (second).
111
Fig. 352: Installing Side Impact Sensor (Second) With Torx Bolts

4. After installing the side impact sensor (second), confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition
switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off.
OPDS/ODS UNIT REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Review the seat replacement procedure (see FRONT SEAT

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ) before doing repairs or service.
REMOVAL
111
2. Disconnect the front passenger's side airbag harness 2P connector (see step 4 in DISCONNECTING
3. Remove the front passenger's seat assembly (see FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION )
and seat-back cover (see FRONT SEAT COVER REPLACEMENT ).
4. Remove the cover (A), then disconnect the OPDS unit 8P/ODS unit 18P connector D and sensor
connectors (B) from the OPDS/ODS unit (C).
Fig. 353: Disconnecting OPDS Unit 8P/ODS Unit 18P Connector D And Sensor Connectors
5. Remove the two screws (E) and the OPDS/ODS unit.
INSTALLATION
1. Place the new OPDS/ODS unit (A) on the seat-back frame. Tighten the two screws (B), and connect
the OPDS unit harness 8P/ODS unit harness 18P connector D and sensor connectors (C) to the
OPDS/ODS unit. Reinstall the cover (E).
111
Fig. 354: Placing OPDS/ODS Unit On Seat-Back Frame

2. Install the seat-back cover in the reverse order of removal.

3. Install the front passenger's seat assembly (see FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ),
then connect the side airbag harness 2P connector.
5. Set the seat-back in the normal position, and make sure there is nothing on the front passenger's seat.
7. Calibrate the OPDS/ODS unit ('06-07 model) (see CALIBRATING THE FRONT PASSENGER'S
WEIGHT SENSOR UNIT ('04-05 MODELS) OR CALIBRATE THE ODS UNIT ('06-07
MODEL) ).
8. After installing the OPDS/ODS unit, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON
FRONT IMPACT SENSOR REPLACEMENT
111
manufacturer.
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (see step 2 in DISCONNECTING SYSTEM
CONNECTORS ), the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (see step 3 in DISCONNECTING
SYSTEM CONNECTORS ), and both seat belt tensioner 2P connectors (see step 6
3. Remove the front bumper.
4. Remove the washer reservoir for the right side sensor or the intake air resonator for the left side sensor
(see WASHER RESERVOIR REPLACEMENT ).
5. Disconnect the engine compartment wire harness 2P connector (A), and remove the two Torx bolts
(B) using a Torx T30 bit, then remove the front impact sensor (C).
Fig. 355: Disconnecting Engine Compartment Wire Harness 2P Connector

INSTALLATION
1. Install the new front impact sensor with new Torx bolts (A), then connect the engine compartment
wire harness 2P connector (B) to the front impact sensor (C).
111
Fig. 356: Installing Front Impact Sensor With Torx Bolts

2. Reconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector (see DISCONNECTING SYSTEM CONNECTORS ),

the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (see DISCONNECTING SYSTEM CONNECTORS ),
and both seat belt tensioner 4P connectors (see DISCONNECTING SYSTEM CONNECTORS ).
4. After installing the front impact sensor, confirm proper system operation: Turn the ignition switch ON
FRONT PASSENGER'S WEIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT

NOTE: Removal of the front passenger's weight sensors must be performed

according to the precautions/procedures described at the beginning of SRS
(see PRECAUTIONS AND PROCEDURES ).
1. Remove the front passenger's seat assembly (see FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).
2. Remove the tamper-resistant Torx bolts attaching the seat to the weight sensors.
 2-door (see '04-07 MODELS 2-DOOR )
3. Remove the front passenger's weight sensors from the seat riser.
111

NOTE: Be sure to install the harness wires so they are not pinched or interfering
with other parts.
1. Place the new front passenger's weight sensors on the front passenger's seat riser.
2. Install the seat onto the weight sensors.

3. Reinstall the front passenger's seat assembly (see FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).
5. Calibrate the front passenger's weight sensor unit (see CALIBRATING THE FRONT
PASSENGER'S WEIGHT SENSOR UNIT ('04-05 MODELS) OR CALIBRATE THE ODS
UNIT ('06-07 MODEL) ) ('03-05 models) ODS unit ('06 model) (see CALIBRATING THE
FRONT PASSENGER'S WEIGHT SENSOR UNIT ('04-05 MODELS) OR CALIBRATE THE
ODS UNIT ('06-07 MODEL) ).
6. After installing the front passenger's weight sensors, confirm proper system operation: Turn the
ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off.
FRONT PASSENGER'S WEIGHT SENSOR UNIT REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Review the seat replacement procedure (see FRONT SEAT

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ) before performing repair or service.
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the audio and the navigation system, then write down the
audio presets.
2. Slide the seat all the way to the rear.
4. Disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (see step 3 in DISCONNECTING SYSTEM
CONNECTORS ).
5. Disconnect the connectors. Remove the mounting nuts (A) and the front passenger's weight sensor
unit (B) from the seat riser.
111
Fig. 357: Removing Mounting Nuts And Front Passenger's Weight Sensor Unit From Seat Riser
NOTE: Be sure to install the harness wires so they are not pinched or interfering
with other parts.
1. Place the new front passenger's weight sensor unit on the seat riser. Tighten the two mounting nuts
(A) and connect the connectors.
111
Fig. 358: Tightening Mounting Nuts And Connecting Connectors

2. Reconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P connector (see GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING

INFORMATION ).
4. Calibrate the front passenger's weight sensor unit (see CALIBRATING THE FRONT
PASSENGER'S WEIGHT SENSOR UNIT ('04-05 MODELS) OR CALIBRATE THE ODS
UNIT ('06-07 MODEL) ).
5. After installing the front passenger's weight sensor unit, confirm proper system operation: Turn the
ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator should come on for about 6 seconds and then go off.
6. Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's audio
presets, and set the clock.
DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION SENSOR REPLACEMENT

NOTE:  Removal of the driver's seat position sensor must be performed

111
according to the precautions/procedures described at the beginning of

SRS (see PRECAUTIONS AND PROCEDURES ).
 Before disconnecting the driver's seat position sensor 2P connector,
disconnect the driver's airbag 4P connector.
 Do not turn the ignition switch ON (II), and do not connect the battery
negative cable while removing the driver's seat position sensor.
audio presets.
3. Remove the driver's seat assembly (see FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).
4. Disconnect the floor wire harness or seat position sensor harness 2P connector (A) from the driver's
seat position sensor.
111
Fig. 359: Disconnecting Floor Wire Harness Or Seat Position Sensor Harness 2P Connector
5. Using a Torx T30 bit, remove the Torx bolt (B), then remove the driver's seat position sensor.
NOTE:  Be sure to install the harness wires so they are not pinched or
interfering with other parts.
111
 Do not turn the ignition switch ON (II), and do not connect the battery
negative cable while installing the driver's seat position sensor.
 After installing the driver's seat position sensor, make sure it is clean.
Keep it away from dust.
1. Install the new driver's seat position sensor with a Torx bolt (A), then connect the floor wire harness
or seat position sensor harness 2P connector to the driver's seat position sensor (B).
Fig. 360: Installing Driver's Seat Position Sensor With Torx Bolts
2. Install the driver's seat assembly (see FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).

111
4. Check the operation of the driver's seat position sensor with the HDS (see OPERATION CHECK
OF THE DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION SENSOR ).
5. Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio and navigation system, then enter the customer's audio presets,
and set the clock.
PASSENGER'S AIRBAG CUTOFF INDICATOR ILLUMINATION BULB

TEST
'04-07 MODELS

2. Push out the passenger's airbag cutoff indicator (A) from behind the upper panel.
111
Fig. 361: Removing Passenger's Airbag Cutoff Indicator (A) From Behind Upper Panel
3. Disconnect the 6P connector (B) from the passenger's airbag cutoff indicator.
4. Check for continuity between the No. 3 and No. 4 terminals of the indicator. If there is no continuity,
replace the bulb.
111
2003-07 RESTRAINTS Seat Belts - Accord
2003-07 RESTRAINTS
Seat Belts - Accord

2-DOOR
Fig. 1: Identifying Seat Belt Component Locations (2-Door)

4-DOOR
111
2 августа 2011 г. 16:17:18
Fig. 2: Identifying Seat Belt Component Locations (4-Door)

FRONT SEAT BELT REPLACEMENT

NOTE: Check the front seat belts for damage, and replace them if necessary. Be
careful not to damage them during removal and installation.
FRONT SEAT BELT - 2-DOOR
frequencies for the audio preset buttons.
2. Slide the front seat forward fully.
4. Remove the seat belts.
 '03 model driver's and passenger's seat belts and '04-07 models driver's seat belt: Remove the
lower anchor cap (A), and remove the lower anchor bolt (B).
 '04-07 models passenger's seat belt: Carefully insert the tip of a small screwdriver (C) through
the hole in the back of the front seat belt lower anchor cover (D) and into the hole in the front
111
seat belt lower anchor (E).
Unlock the lower anchor by pushing in on the screwdriver and then detach the front seat belt
anchor plate (F) and anchor cover from the lower anchor.
Fig. 3: Removing Front Seat Belt ('03 Model)

111
Fig. 4: Removing Front Seat Belt ('04-06 Models)


 Side trim panel (see TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION - REAR SIDE AREA ).
 Middle cross-member gusset (see MIDDLE CROSS-MEMBER GUSSET

REPLACEMENT ).
6. Remove the upper anchor cap (A), and remove the upper anchor bolt (B). Release the clip (C), then
release the front seat belt (D) from the seat belt guide (E).
111
Fig. 5: Removing Upper Anchor Cap

7. Disconnect the seat belt tensioner connector (A). Remove the retractor mounting bolt (B) and the
retractor bolt (C), then remove the front seat belt (D) and retractor (E).
111
Fig. 6: Disconnecting Seat Belt Tensioner Connector

8. If necessary, remove the front seat belt protector (F).

9. Install the belt in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Check that the retractor locking mechanism functions (see RETRACTOR ).
 Assemble the washers, collars, and bushings on the upper and lower anchor bolts as shown in
Fig. 7 & Fig. 8.
 If the seat belt tensioner has been deployed, replace the front seat belt protector with a new one.
 Apply medium strength liquid thread lock to the anchor bolts before reinstallation.
 Before installing the anchor bolts, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the front seat belt.
 Make sure the seat belt tensioner connector is plugged in properly.
 '04-07 models passenger's seat belt: Before attaching the front seat belt lower anchor, make sure
there are no twists or kinks in the belts. Triangle marks (A) on the anchor plate (B) and on the
lower anchor (C) must face the same side. Insert the hook on the anchor plate into the lower
anchor, and be sure that the lower anchor is locked securely.
111
 Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's
audio station presets.
Fig. 7: Identifying Upper Anchor Bolt Installation

111
Fig. 8: Identifying Lower Anchor Bolt Installation

111
Fig. 9: Identifying Front Seat Belt Lower Anchor Installation ('04-06 Models Passenger's)
FRONT SEAT BELT - 4-DOOR
111

2. Slide the front seat forward fully.
4. '03 model driver's and passenger's seat belts and '04-07 models driver's seat belt: Remove the lower
anchor cap (A), and remove the lower anchor bolt (B).
Fig. 10: Removing Lower Anchor Cap

5. '04-07 models passenger's seat belt: Carefully insert the tip of a small screwdriver (A) through the
hole in the back of the front seat belt lower anchor cover (B) and into the hole in the front seat belt
lower anchor (C).
Unlock the lower anchor by pushing in on the screwdriver. Remove the screwdriver, and then detach
the front seat belt anchor plate (D) and anchor cover from the lower anchor.
111
Fig. 11: Inserting Screwdriver Through Hole In Back Of Front Seat Belt Lower Anchor Cover
6. Remove the B-pillar lower trim, without side curtain airbags (see 4-DOOR-B-PILLAR -
DOOR-B-PILLAR - WITH SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('04-06 MODELS) ).
7. Remove the upper anchor cover (A), and remove the upper anchor bolt (B).
111
Fig. 12: Removing Upper Anchor Cover

8. Disconnect the seat belt tensioner connector (A). Remove the upper retractor mounting bolt (B) and
the lower retractor bolt (C), then remove the front seat belt (D) and retractor (E).
111
Fig. 13: Disconnecting Seat Belt Tensioner Connector

9. If necessary, remove the front seat belt protector (F).

10. Remove the B-pillar upper trim, without side curtain airbags (see 4-DOOR-B-PILLAR -
DOOR-B-PILLAR - WITH SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS ('04-06 MODELS) ).
11. Remove the shoulder anchor adjuster (A).
111
Fig. 14: Removing Shoulder Anchor Adjuster

12. Install the seat belt in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Assemble the washers, collars, and bushings on the upper and lower anchor bolts as shown in
Fig. 15 & Fig. 16.
 If the seat belt tensioner has been deployed, replace the front seat belt protector with a new one.
 Before installing the anchor bolts, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the front seat belt.
 Make sure the seat belt tensioner connector is plugged in properly.
 '04-06 models passenger's seat belt: Before attaching the front seat belt lower anchor, make sure
there are no twists or kinks in the belts. Triangle marks (A) on the anchor plate (B) and on the
lower anchor (C) must face the same side. Insert the hook on the anchor plate into the lower
anchor, and be sure that the lower anchor is locked securely.
 Enter the anti-theft code for the audio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's
111
Fig. 15: Installing Upper Anchor Bolt

111
Fig. 16: Installing Lower Anchor Bolt Installation

111
Fig. 17: Installing Front Seat Belt Lower Anchor ('04-06 Models Passenger's)
SEAT BELT BUCKLE
111

4. Passenger's manual seat: Remove the center cover.
 '03 model 2-door (see '03 MODEL 2-DOOR )
 '04-07 models 2-door (see '04-06 MODELS 2-DOOR )
 '03 model 4-door (see '03 MODEL 4-DOOR )
 '04-07 models 4-door passenger's (see '04-06 MODELS 4-DOOR PASSENGER'S )
5. Detach the seat belt switch connector (A) and harness clip (B).
NOTE: The passenger's manual seat is shown; the driver's manual height
adjustable seat is symmetrical.
Fig. 18: Detaching Seat Belt Switch Connector (Manual Seat/Manual Height Adjustable Seat)
111
Fig. 19: Detaching Seat Belt Switch Connector (2-Way Power Seat)
111
Fig. 20: Detaching Seat Belt Switch Connector (8-Way Power Seat)
6. Remove the center anchor bolt (A) and detach the harness clip (B), then remove the seat belt buckle
(C).
NOTE: The driver's manual height adjustable seat is shown; the passenger's
manual seat is symmetrical.
111
Fig. 21: Removing Center Anchor Bolt And Detaching Harness Clip (Manual Seat/Manual
Height Adjustable Seat)
111
Fig. 22: Removing Center Anchor Bolt And Detaching Harness Clip (2-Way Power Seat)
111
Fig. 23: Removing Center Anchor Bolt And Detaching Harness Clip (8-Way Power Seat)
7. Pull the seat belt switch harness (D) out through the space between the seat cushion and the seat
linkage (except manual seat), or through the hole in the seat track (manual seat).
8. Install the buckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Apply medium strength liquid thread lock to the center anchor bolt before reinstallation.
 Assemble the washers on the center anchor bolt as shown in Fig. 24.
 Move the seat all the way forward and backward and confirm that the seat buckle harness is
routed properly.
111
Fig. 24: Installing Center Anchor Bolt

PASSENGER'S SEAT BELT LOWER ANCHOR '04-07 MODELS
4. Remove the lower anchor bolt (A), then remove the lower anchor (B).
111
Fig. 25: Removing Lower Anchor Bolt And Lower Anchor

5. Install the buckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Apply medium strength liquid thread lock to the lower anchor bolt before reinstallation.
 Assemble the washers, collars, and bushing on the lower anchor bolt as shown in Fig. 26.
111
Fig. 26: Installing Lower Anchor Bolt

REAR SEAT BELT REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Check the rear seat belts for damage, and replace them if necessary. Be
careful not to damage them during removal and installation.
REAR SEAT BELT - 2-DOOR
1. Remove the rear seat cushion (see REAR SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).

2. Remove the lower anchor bolt (A).
111
Fig. 27: Removing Lower Anchor Bolt

3. Remove the side trim panel (see TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION - REAR SIDE AREA ).
4. Remove the upper anchor bolt (A).
111
Fig. 28: Removing Upper Anchor Bolt

5. Remove the retractor bolt (A), then remove the rear seat belt (B) and retractor (C).
111
Fig. 29: Removing Retractor Bolt And Rear Seat Belt

 Assemble the washers, collar, and bushing on the upper anchor bolt as shown in Fig. 30.
 Before installing the anchor bolts, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the rear seat belt.
Upper anchor bolt installation
111
Fig. 30: Installing Upper Anchor Bolt

REAR SEAT BELT - 4-DOOR
1. Remove the rear seat side bolster (see 4-DOOR ).

2. Remove the center anchor bolt (A).
111
Fig. 31: Removing Center Anchor Bolt

3. Remove the rear shelf (see 4-DOOR ).

4. Remove the retractor mounting bolt (A) and the retractor bolt (B), then remove the rear seat belt (C)
and retractor (D).
111
Fig. 32: Removing Rear Seat Belt And Retractor

 Apply medium strength liquid thread lock to the anchor bolt before reinstallation.
 Check that the retractor locking mechanism functions as described (see RETRACTOR ).
 Before installing the anchor bolt, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the rear seat belt.
CENTER BELT AND SEAT BELT BUCKLES
1. Remove the rear seat cushion, 2-door (see 2-DOOR ) or 4-door (see 4-DOOR ).
2. Remove the center anchor bolts (A), and remove the seat belt buckles (B).
111
Fig. 33: Removing Center Anchor Bolts And Seat Belt Buckles
3. Remove the rear shelf, 2-door (see 2-DOOR ) or 4-door (see 4-DOOR ).
4. Remove the retractor mounting self-tapping ET screw (A) and the retractor bolt (B), then remove the
center belt (C) and retractor (D).
111
Fig. 34: Removing Retractor Mounting Self-Tapping ET Screw And Retractor Bolt
5. Remove the protector (A).
111
Fig. 35: Removing Protector

6. Install the seat belt and buckles in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Assemble the washers on the center anchor bolt as shown in Fig. 36.
 Before installing the center anchor bolt, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the center belt.
111
Fig. 36: Installing Center Anchor Bolt

INSPECTION
RETRACTOR
1. Before installing the retractor, check that the seat belt can be pulled out freely.
2. Make sure that the seat belt does not lock when the retractor (A) is leaned slowly up to 15° from the
mounted position. The seat belt should lock when the retractor is leaned over 40°. Do not attempt to
disassemble the retractor. The front seat belt retractor with seat belt tensioner is shown below. The
front seat belt retractor without seat belt tensioner is similar.
111
Fig. 37: Identifying Seat Belt Retractor Locking Dimensions (Front - 2-Door)
111
Fig. 38: Identifying Seat Belt Retractor Locking Dimensions (Front - 4-Door)
111
Fig. 39: Identifying Seat Belt Retractor Locking Dimensions (Rear - 2-Door)
Fig. 40: Identifying Seat Belt Retractor Locking Dimensions (Rear - 4-Door)
111
Fig. 41: Identifying Seat Belt Retractor Locking Dimensions (Rear Center)
3. Replace the seat belt with a new assembly if there is any abnormality. Do not disassemble any part of
the seat belt for any reason.
IN-VEHICLE
1. Check that the seat belt is not twisted or caught on anything.

2. After installing the anchors, check for free movement on the anchor bolts. If necessary, remove the
anchor bolts and check that the washers and other parts are not damaged or improperly installed.
3. Check the seat belts for damage or discoloration. Clean with a shop towel if necessary. Use only soap
and water to clean.
NOTE: Dirt build-up in the loops of the upper anchors can cause the seat belts
to retract slowly. Wipe the inside of the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in isopropyl alcohol.
4. Check that the seat belt does not lock when pulled out slowly. The seat belt is designed to lock only
during a sudden stop or impact.
5. Make sure that the seat belt will retract automatically when released.
6. For each passenger's seat belt, check the seat belt retractor locking mechanism ALR (automatic
locking retractor). This function is for securing child seats.
1. Pull the seat belt all the way out to engage the ALR. The seat belt should retract with a
111
ratcheting sound, but not extend. This is normal.

2. To disengage the ALR, release the seat belt and allow it to fully retract, then pull the seat belt
out part-way. The seat belt should retract and extend normally.
7. Replace the seat belt with a new assembly if there is any abnormality. Do not disassemble any part of
the seat belt for any reason.
111
2003-07 STEERING Power Steering - Accord
2003-07 STEERING
Power Steering - Accord
SPECIAL TOOLS

111
2 августа 2011 г. 16:18:18
Fig. 2: Identifying Power Steering Components


Find the symptom in SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX , and do the related procedures in the
order listed until you find the cause.

Symptom Procedure(s) Also check for:
 Modified suspension
Troubleshoot the system (see
 Damaged suspension
Hard steering SYMPTOM
TROUBLESHOOTING ).  Tire sizes, tire varieties,
and air pressure
Assist (excessively light Check the rack guide adjustment (see Front wheel alignment (see
steering at high speed) RACK GUIDE ADJUSTMENT ). WHEEL ALIGNMENT ).
1. Check the rack guide adjustment

(see RACK GUIDE
ADJUSTMENT ).
2. Check the drive belt for slippage
(see DRIVE BELT
INSPECTION ).
Shock or vibration when the 3. Check the power steering pump
steering wheel is turned to fluid pressure with T/N 07406-
111
full lock 0010001 (see PUMP

PRESSURE TEST WITH T/N
07406-0010001 ) or T/N 07406-
001000A (see PUMP
07406-001000A ).
4. Overhaul the steering gearbox
(see STEERING GEARBOX
OVERHAUL ).
1. Check cylinder lines for
deformation.
2. Check upper and lower ball
joints for binding.
Steering wheel will not
return smoothly 3. Check wheel alignment (see
WHEEL ALIGNMENT ).
OVERHAUL ).
1. Check the rack guide adjustment
(see RACK GUIDE
ADJUSTMENT ).
2. Check the drive belt (see DRIVE
BELT INSPECTION ).
3. Check low or erratic engine idle
speed (see IDLE SPEED
INSPECTION ).
Uneven or rough steering 4. Check for air in the power
steering system due to air
entering inlet side of pump.
5. Check for low fluid level in the
power steering reservoir due to
possible leaks in system.
OVERHAUL ).
1. Check the drive belt (see DRIVE
BELT INSPECTION ).
2. Check the power steering pump
fluid pressure with T/N 07406-
Steering wheel kicks back 0010001 (see PUMP
during wide turns. PRESSURE TEST WITH T/N
07406-0010001 ) or T/N 07406-
001000A (see PUMP
07406-001000A ).
1. Check when the noise occurs:

111
 If the noise is heard 2-3

minutes after starting the
engine in cold weather,
this is normal.
 If the noise is heard when
the wheel is turned with
the vehicle stopped, this is
normal due to the fluid
pulsation.
Humming noise from the
2. Check for the high-pressure hose Pump pressure
power steering system
touching the subframe or body.
3. Check for automatic
transmission converter noise.
4. Check for air bubbles in the
power steering fluid, leak on
inlet side of pump.
5. Check for particle contamination
of fluid and restricted filter in the
reservoir.
1. Check for loose steering
components (tie-rod and ball
joints).
Tighten or replace as necessary.
2. Check the steering column shaft

for wobbling. If the steering
column wobbles, replace the
steering column assembly (see
STEERING COLUMN
REMOVAL AND
Power steering rack rattle or INSTALLATION ).
chattering 3. Check the rack guide adjustment
(see RACK GUIDE
ADJUSTMENT ).
4. Check the power steering pump
pulley.
 If the pulley is loose,
tighten it (see step 47 in
Pump Overhaul ).
 If the pump shaft is loose,
replace the pump (see
PUMP
REPLACEMENT ).
 Check the fluid level. If low, fill

the reservoir to the proper level
and check for leaks.
111
 Check the reservoir for leaks.

 Check for crushed inlet hose or
Hissing from the power loose hose clamp allowing air
into the suction side of the Air in the P/S fluid
steering system
system.
 Check the power steering pump
shaft oil seal for leaks.
Compare the pump noise at

normal operating temperature to
another like vehicle (pump noise
up to 2-3 minutes after starting
Noise from the power  P/S pump pressure
the engine in cold weather is
steering pump  Air in the P/S fluid
normal).
 Remove and inspect the pump
for wear and damage (see PUMP
OVERHAUL ).
Squeaking from the power Check the drive belt (see DRIVE
steering pump BELT INSPECTION ).
 Fluid leaks from the top of the
valve body unit: Overhaul the
valve body unit (see
STEERING GEARBOX
OVERHAUL ).
 Fluid leaks from the left boot:
Replace the valve oil seal on the
pinion shaft. Replace the
cylinder end seal on the gearbox
Fluid leaks from the steering side.
gearbox  Fluid leaks from the right boot:
Replace the right cylinder end
seal.
 Fluid leaks from pinion shaft
near the lower steering joint bolt:
Overhaul the valve body unit.
 Fluid leaks from the steering
damping valve covers on the
valve body unit: Replace the
valve housing.
 Fluid leaks from the cylinder line
connections (flare nuts): Tighten
the connection and retest.
Fluid leaks from the power  Fluid leaks from damaged
steering line cylinder lines: Replace the
cylinder line.
 Fluid leaks from the pump outlet
hose or return line fitting on the
valve body unit (flare nuts):
111
Tighten the fitting and retest. If it

still leaks, replace the hose, the
line, or valve body unit as
necessary.
 Fluid leaks from the front oil
seal: Replace the front oil seal.
 Fluid leaks from the power
Fluid leaks from the power steering pump housing: Replace
steering pump the leaking O-rings or seals (see
PUMP OVERHAUL ), and if
necessary replace the power
steering pump (see PUMP
REPLACEMENT ).
 Fluid leaks from around the
reservoir cap: Fluid level is too
high; drain the reservoir to the
proper level. Aerated fluid:
Fluid leaks from the power
check for an air leak on the inlet
steering reservoir
side of pump.
 Fluid leaks from reservoir:
Check the reservoir for cracks
and replace as necessary.
Check the fitting for loose bolts.

Fluid leaks from the power If the bolts are tight, replace the
steering pump outlet hose fitting O-ring.
(high-pressure)  Fluid leaks at the swagged joint:
Replace the outlet hose.
Fluid leaks from the power Check the hose for damage,
steering pump inlet hose deterioration, or improper assembly.
(low-pressure) Replace or repair as necessary.
HARD STEERING
1. Check the power assist (see Power Assist Check ).
Is the starting load more than 29 N (3.0 kgf, 6.6 lbf)?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO - Power assist is OK.
2. Measure steady-state fluid pressure from the pump at idle with T/N 07406-0010001 (see PUMP
PRESSURE TEST WITH T/N 07406-0010001 ) or T/N 07406-001000A (see PUMP PRESSURE
TEST WITH T/N 07406-001000A ).
Is the pressure 1,470 kPa (15 kgf/cm2 , 213 psi) or less?
111
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Go to step 7.
3. Measure the pump relief pressure at idle with T/N 07406-0010001 (see step 10 in Pump Pressure
Test with T/N 07406-0010001 ) or T/N 07406-001000A (see step 9 Pump Pressure Test with T/N
07406-001000A ).
Is the pressure 7,160-7,850 kPa (73-80 kgf/cm2 , 1,040- 1,140 psi) or less?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Faulty pump assembly.
4. With a spring scale, measure the power assist in both directions, to the left and to the right.
Are the two measurements within 2.9 N (0.3 kgf, 0.66 lbf) of each other?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Go to step 8.
5. Measure the fluid pressure with both pressure gauge valves open (if so equipped), while turning the
steering wheel fully to the left and fully to the right.
Is the pressure 7,160- 7,850 kPa (73- 80 kgf/cm2 , 1,040- 1,140 psi) or less?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Faulty gearbox.
6. Adjust the rack guide (see RACK GUIDE ADJUSTMENT ), and retest.
Is the steering OK?
YES - Repair is completed.

NO - Faulty gearbox.
7. Check the feed and return lines between the pump and the gearbox for clogging and deformation.
Are the lines clogged or deformed?
YES - Repair or replace the lines.

NO - Faulty valve body unit or pump.
8. Check the cylinder lines for deformation (see FLUID LEAKAGE INSPECTION ).
Are the lines deformed?
YES - Replace the lines.

NO - Go to step 9.
9. Check for a bent rack shaft or misadjusted rack guide (too tight).
Is the rack shaft bent or the rack guide adjusted too tight?
YES - Replace the rack shaft or readjust the rack guide.

111
NO - Faulty valve body unit.
STEERING WHEEL ROTATIONAL PLAY CHECK

1. Turn the front wheels to the straight ahead position.
2. Measure how far you can turn the steering wheel left and right without moving the front wheels.
 If the play is within the limit, the gearbox and linkages are OK.
 If the play exceeds the limit, adjust the rack guide (see RACK GUIDE ADJUSTMENT ). If
the play is still excessive after rack guide adjustment, inspect the steering linkage and gearbox
(see STEERING LINKAGE AND GEARBOX INSPECTION ).
Fig. 3: Measuring Steering Wheel Left And Right Without Moving Front Wheels
111
POWER ASSIST CHECK
NOTE: This test should be done with original equipment tires and wheels at the
correct tire pressure.
1. Check the power steering fluid level (see FLUID REPLACEMENT ).

2. Start the engine, let it idle, and turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times to warm up the
fluid.
3. Attach commercially available spring scale to the steering wheel. With the engine idling and the
vehicle on a clean, dry floor, pull the scale as shown and read it as soon as the tires begin to turn.
 If the scale reads no more than the specifications, the gearbox and pump are OK.
 If the scale reads more than specifications, troubleshoot the steering system (see SYMPTOM
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
111
Fig. 4: Attaching Commercially Available Spring Scale To Steering Wheel

STEERING LINKAGE AND GEARBOX INSPECTION
111
Fig. 5: Identifying Steering Linkage And Gearbox Inspection Components

PUMP PRESSURE TEST WITH T/N 07406-0010001

 P/S joint adapter (pump) 07VAK-P8A011A

 P/S joint adapter plate (pump) 07ZAK-S7CA100
 P/S joint adapter (hose) 07ZAK-S7CA200
 P/S pressure gauge 07406-0010001
Check the fluid pressure as follows to determine whether the trouble is in the pump or gearbox.
111

2. Disconnect the pump outlet hose (A) from the pump outlet with care so as not to spill the power
steering fluid on the frame and other parts. Install the P/S joint adapter (pump) on the pump outlet (B).
Fig. 6: Installing P/S Joint Adapter (Pump) On Pump Outlet

3. Connect the P/S joint adapter (hose) to the P/S pressure gauge, then connect the pump outlet hose to
the P/S joint adapter (hose).
4. Install the P/S pressure gauge to the P/S joint adapter (pump).
5. Fully open the shut-off valve (A).
111
Fig. 7: Opening Shut-Off Valve

6. Fully open the pressure control valve (B).

7. Start the engine and let it idle.
8. Turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times to warm the fluid to operating temperature at
158°F (70°C).
9. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while the engine is idling. If the pump is in good condition, the
pressure should be no more than 1,470 kPa (15 kgf/cm2 , 214 psi). If the pressure is too high, check
the outlet hose or valve body unit (see Symptom Troubleshooting ).
111
Raise the engine speed to 3,000 rpm, and measure the fluid pressure. If the pump is in good condition,
the pressure should be at least 1,470 kPa (15 kgf/cm2 , 214 psi). If the pressure is too high, repair or
replace the pump.
10. Lower the engine speed and let it idle. Close the shut-off valve, then close the pressure control valve
gradually until the pressure gauge needle is stable. Read the pressure.
NOTE: Do not keep the shut-off valve closed more than 5 seconds or the pump
could be damaged by over-heating.
11. Immediately open the shut-off valve fully. If the pump is in good condition, the gauge should read at
least 7,160-7,850 kPa (73-80 kgf/cm2 ,1,040-1,140 psi). A low reading means pump output is too low
for full assist. Repair or replace the pump.
PUMP PRESSURE TEST WITH T/N 07406-001000A

 P/S joint adapter (pump) 07VAK-P8A011A

 P/S joint adapter plate (pump) 07ZAK-S7CA100
 P/S joint adapter (hose) 07ZAK-S7CA200
 P/S pressure gauge 07406-001000A
Check the fluid pressure as follows to determine whether the trouble is in the pump or gearbox.

2. Disconnect the pump outlet hose (A) from the pump outlet with care so as not to spill the power
steering fluid on the frame and other parts. Install the P/S joint adapter (pump) on the pump outlet (B).
111
Fig. 8: Installing P/S Joint Adapter (Pump) On Pump Outlet

3. Connect the P/S joint adapter (hose) to the P/S pressure gauge, then connect the pump outlet hose to
the P/S joint adapter (hose).
4. Install the P/S pressure gauge to the P/S joint adapter (pump).
5. Open the pressure control valve (A) fully.
111
Fig. 9: Opening Pressure Control Valve

6. Start the engine and let it idle.

7. Turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times to warm the fluid to operating temperature at
158°F (70°C).
8. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while the engine is idling. If the pump is in good condition, the
pressure should be no more than 1,470 kPa (15 kgf/cm2 , 213 psi). If the pressure is too high, check
111
the outlet hose or valve body unit (see Symptom Troubleshooting).

9. Raise the engine speed to 3,000 rpm, and measure the fluid pressure. If the pump is in good condition,
the pressure should be at least 1,470 kPa (15 kgf/cm2 ,213 psi). If the pressure is too high, repair or
replace the pump.
10. Lower the engine speed and let it idle. Gradually close the pressure control valve and immediately
read the pressure.
NOTE: Do not keep the pressure control valve closed more than 5 seconds or
the pump could be damaged by over-heating.
11. Immediately open the pressure control valve fully. If the pump is in good condition, the gauge should
read at least 7,160-7,850 kPa (73-80 kgf/cm2 , 1,040-1,140 psi). A low reading means pump output is
too low for full assist. Repair or replace the pump.
FLUID LEAKAGE INSPECTION
Fig. 10: Inspecting Fluid Leakage

FLUID REPLACEMENT
Check the reservoir (A) at regular intervals, and add the recommended fluid as necessary. Always use
Honda Power Steering Fluid. Using any other type of power steering fluid or automatic transmission fluid
can cause increased wear and poor steering in cold weather.
111
Fig. 11: Checking Reservoir At Regular Intervals

1. Raise the reservoir, then disconnect the return hose (A) to drain the reservoir. Take care not to spill
the fluid on the body and parts. Wipe off any spilled fluid at once.
111
Fig. 12: Disconnecting Return Hose To Drain Reservoir

2. Connect a hose (B) of suitable diameter to the disconnected return hose, and put the hose end in a
suitable container.
3. Start the engine, let it run at idle, and turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times. When
fluid stops running out of the hose, shut off the engine. Discard the fluid.
4. Reinstall the return hose on the reservoir.
5. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line (C).
6. Start the engine and run it at fast idle, then turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times to
bleed air from the system.
7. Recheck the fluid level and add more if necessary. Do not fill the reservoir beyond the upper level
line.
8. If the fluid is contaminated, dark, or discolored, repeat procedure as necessary.
POWER STEERING HOSE, LINE, AND PRESSURE SWITCH

REPLACEMENT
Note these items during installation:
111
 Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the
clamp or adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown in Fig. 13.
 Check all clamps for deterioration or deformation; replace the clamps with new ones if necessary.
 Add the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks.
Fig. 13: Replacing Power Steering Hose, Line And Pressure Switch
PUMP REPLACEMENT
1. Place a suitable container under the vehicle.
2. Drain the power steering fluid from the reservoir.
3. Remove the drive belt (A) from the pump pulley (see DRIVE BELT INSPECTION ).
111
Fig. 14: Removing Drive Belt From Pump Pulley

4. Remove the pump mounting bolts (B).

5. Cover the auto-tensioner, alternator, and A/C compressor with several shop towels to protect them
from spilled power steering fluid. Disconnect the pump inlet hose (C) and pump outlet hose (D) from
the pump (E), and plug them. Take care not to spill the fluid on the body or parts. Wipe off any spilled
fluid at once. Do not turn the steering wheel with the pump removed.
6. Cover the opening of the pump with a piece of tape to prevent foreign material from entering the
111
pump.
7. Connect the pump inlet hose and pump outlet hose.
8. Loosely install the pump in the pump bracket with the mounting bolts, then tighten the pump fittings
securely.
9. Install the drive belt (A).
Note these items during belt installation:
 Make sure that the belt is properly positioned on the pulleys (B).
 Do not get power steering fluid or grease on the auto-tensioner, alternator, A/C compressor, and
drive belt or pulley faces. Clean off any fluid or grease before installation.
Fig. 15: Installing Drive Belt

10. Tighten the pump mounting bolts to the specified torque.

111
11. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line (see FLUID REPLACEMENT ).
PUMP OVERHAUL
Replace the pump as an assembly if the parts indicated with asterisk (*) are worn or damaged.
Fig. 16: Exploded View Of Pump Overhaul

 Attachment, 32 x 35 mm 07746-0010100
 Driver 07749-0010000
111
 Pulley holder 07ZAB-S5A0100
Disassembly
NOTE: Refer to the Fig. 16 as needed .
1. Drain the fluid from the pump (see FLUID REPLACEMENT ).

2. Remove the power steering pump (see PUMP REPLACEMENT ).
3. Hold the power steering pump (A) in a vise with soft jaws (B), hold the pulley (C) with the special
tool (D), and remove the pulley nut (E) and pulley. Be careful not to damage the pump housing with
the jaws of the vise.
Fig. 17: Holding Power Steering Pump In Vise With Soft Jaws
4. Remove the inlet joint and O-ring.

5. Remove the pressure control valve cap, O-ring, valve spring, and pressure control valve.
6. Remove the pump housing cap, O-ring, and pump preload spring.
7. Remove the pump cover and pump cover seals.
8. Pull out the roll pin.
9. Remove the outer case, cam ring, rotor, vanes, and side plate.
111
10. Remove the rubber seal and slipper seal from the outer case.
11. Remove the O-rings from the bottom of the housing.
12. Remove the snap ring, then remove the drive shaft by tapping the shaft end with the plastic hammer.
13. Remove the seal from the pump housing.
Inspection
14. Check the pressure control valve for wear, burrs, and other damage to the edges of the grooves in the
valve.
Fig. 18: Checking Pressure Control Valve For Wear, Burrs And Damage
15. Inspect the bore of the pressure control valve on the pump housing for scratches and wear.
16. Slip the pressure control valve back in the pump housing, and check that it moves in and out
smoothly. If OK, go to step 17; if not, replace the pump as an assembly. The pressure control valve is
not available separately.
111
Fig. 19: Slipping Pressure Control Valve Back In Pump Housing

17. Attach a hose (A) to the end of the pressure control valve (B) as shown in Fig. 20. Then submerge the
pressure control valve in a container of power steering fluid or solvent (C), and blow in the hose.
 If air bubbles leak through the valve at less than 98 kPa (1.0 kgf/cm2 ,14.2 psi), replace the
pump as an assembly. The pressure control valve is not available separately.
 If the pressure control valve is OK, set it aside for reassembly later.
111
Fig. 20: Attaching Hose To End Of Pressure Control Valve

18. Inspect the ball bearing by rotating the outer race slowly. If you feel any play (axial or radial) or
roughness, remove the faulty ball bearing (A), and install a new one (B).
111
Fig. 21: Removing Faulty Ball Bearing

19. Inspect each part shown with an asterisk in Fig. 16 ; if any of them are worn or damaged, replace the
pump as an assembly.
Reassembly
20. Install the new pump seal (A) (with its grooved side facing in) into the pump housing (B) by hand
first, then drive it in using the special tools until there is no step at the top of the pump seal, and the
111
seal is fully seated in the pump housing.
Fig. 22: Installing Pump Seal Into Pump Housing

21. Position the pump drive shaft (A) in the pump housing, then press it in with the appropriate size
socket wrench (B) as shown in Fig. 23. Do not apply more than 1,370 N (140 kgf, 308 lbf) of
pressure.
111
Fig. 23: Positioning Pump Drive Shaft In Pump Housing

22. Install the 40 mm snap ring (C) with its radiused edge facing out.
23. Coat the new 23.8 mm O-ring (A) with power steering fluid, then position it on the bottom (B) of the
pump housing.
111
Fig. 24: Coating O-Ring With Power Steering Fluid

24. Coat the new cover seals (A) and (B) with power steering fluid, then position them into the grooves
on the cover (C).
111
Fig. 25: Coating Cover Seals With Power Steering Fluid

25. Install the outer case (A) by aligning the slot (B) with the cover roll pin hole (C). Be sure that the slit
(D) on the outer case is positioned as shown in Fig. 26.
111
Fig. 26: Installing Outer Case Aligning Slot With Cover Roll Pin Hole
26. Apply the power steering fluid to the rubber seal (E) (black), and install it in the slot (F) of the outer
case.
27. Apply power steering fluid to the slipper seal (G) (white), and install it on top of the rubber seal you
just installed.
28. Install the cam ring (A) with the "." mark (B) facing up. Align the slot (C) with the slot (D) in the
outer case.
111
Fig. 27: Installing Cam Ring With Mark

29. Insert the roll pin (E) into the slots between the cam ring and outer case, then push roll pin into the set
hole (F).
30. Install the rotor (A) in the cam ring (B).
111
Fig. 28: Installing Rotor In Cam Ring

31. Set the 11 vanes (C) in the grooves in the rotor.
Make sure that the round ends (D) of the vanes are in contact with the sliding surface of the cam ring.
32. Place the side plate (A) on the cam ring, and aligning the roll pin set hole (B) in the side plate with the
roll pin end (C).
111
Fig. 29: Aligning Roll Pin Set Hole In Side Plate With Roll Pin End
33. Coat the new O-ring (D) with the power steering fluid, then position it into the groove on the side
plate.
34. Install the pump housing (A) over the cover assembly (B).
111
Fig. 30: Installing Pump Housing Over Cover Assembly

35. Align the bolt holes in the cover (A) with the threaded holes in the pump housing. Install the flange
bolts loosely first, then torque the flange bolts in a criss cross pattern in two or more steps.
111
Fig. 31: Aligning Bolt Holes In Cover With Threaded Holes In Pump Housing
36. Push in the cam ring (A) from the pump housing cap hole (B) with a flat blade screwdriver, to make
sure the cam ring is fully seated against the outer case.
111
Fig. 32: Pushing In Cam Ring From Pump Housing Cap Hole
37. Install the pump preload spring (A) in the pump housing.
111
Fig. 33: Installing Pump Preload Spring In Pump Housing

38. Coat the new 12.7 mm O-ring (B) with power steering fluid, and install it on the pump housing cap
(C).
39. Install the pump housing cap on the pump housing, and tighten it to specified torque.
40. Install the pressure control valve spring (A) in the pump housing.
111
Fig. 34: Installing Pressure Control Valve Spring In Pump Housing

41. Coat the pressure control valve (B) with power steering fluid, and install it on the pump housing.
42. Coat the new 16.7 mm O-ring (C) with power steering fluid, and install it on the pressure control
valve cap (D).
43. Install the pressure control valve cap on the pump housing, and tighten it to the specified torque.
44. Coat the new 13 mm O-ring (A) with power steering fluid, and install it on the inlet joint (B).
111
Fig. 35: Coating O-ring With Power Steering Fluid

45. Install the inlet joint on the pump housing.

46. Install the pulley (A), then loosely install the pulley nut (B). Hold the power steering pump in a vise
with soft jaws (C). Be careful not to damage the pump housing with the jaws of the vise.
111
Fig. 36: Holding Power Steering Pump In Vise With Soft Jaw
47. Hold the pulley with the special tool, and tighten the pulley nut to specified torque.
48. Check that the pump turns smoothly by turning the pulley. If it turns hard, loosen the four flange bolts
on the cover, then retightening them in the same manner as in the step 35. Turning the pump again by
hand.
STEERING WHEEL REMOVAL

customer's radio station presets.
2. Align the front wheels straight ahead, then remove the driver's airbag from the steering wheel (see
DRIVER'S AIRBAG REPLACEMENT ).
111
3. Disconnect the cruise control set/resume switch, audio remote switch and navigation guide switch
connectors (if equipped).
4. Loosen the steering wheel bolt (A).
Fig. 37: Loosening Steering Wheel Bolt

5. Install a commercially available steering wheel puller (A) on the steering wheel (B). Free the steering
wheel from the steering column shaft by turning the pressure bolt (C) of the puller.
Note these items when removing the steering wheel:
 Do not tap on the steering wheel or the steering column shaft when removing the steering
wheel.
 If you thread the puller bolts (D) into the wheel hub more than five threads, the bolts will hit the
cable reel and damage it. To prevent this, install a pair of jam nuts five threads up on each puller
bolt.
111
Fig. 38: Installing Commercially Steering Wheel Puller On Steering Wheel

6. Remove the steering wheel puller, then remove the steering wheel bolt and steering wheel from the
steering column.
111
Fig. 39: Removing Wheel Puller And Steering Wheel

STEERING WHEEL DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
111
Fig. 40: Identifying Steering Wheel Components (4-Door)

Fig. 41: Identifying Steering Wheel Components (2-Door)

STEERING WHEEL INSTALLATION

1. Before installing the steering wheel, make sure the front wheels are aligned straight ahead, then center
the cable reel (A). Do this by first rotating the cable reel clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it
111
counterclockwise about three full turns. The arrow mark (B) on the cable reel label point should point
straight up.
Fig. 42: Centering Cable Reel

2. Position the two tabs (A) of the turn signal cancelling sleeve (B) as shown in Fig. 43. Install the
steering wheel on to the steering column shaft, making sure the steering wheel hub (C) engages the
pins (D) of the cable reel and tabs of the turn signal canceling sleeve. Do not tap on the steering wheel
or steering column shaft when installing the steering wheel.
111
Fig. 43: Positioning Tabs Of Turn Signal Cancelling Sleeve

3. Install the steering wheel bolt (A) and tighten it to the specified torque. Connect the audio remote,
navigation guide and cruise control set/resume switch connectors (if equipped). Make sure the wire
harness is routed and fastened properly.
111
Fig. 44: Installing Steering Wheel Bolt

4. Install the driver's airbag, and confirm that the system is operating properly (see DRIVER'S
AIRBAG REPLACEMENT ).
5. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then enter the customer's radio
station presets. Reset the clock.
6. Check the cruise control, audio remote, navigation guide and turn signal canceling for proper
operation.
STEERING COLUMN REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

111
REMOVAL
customer's radio station presets.
3. Remove the driver's airbag assembly and the steering wheel (see STEERING WHEEL
REMOVAL ).
4. Remove the column covers.
5. Remove the steering joint cover A.
Fig. 45: Removing Steering Joint Cover

6. Release the tilt/telescopic lever, and adjust the steering column to full tilt up position, and to the full
telescopic in position.
7. Tighten the tilt/telescopic lever.
8. Hold the slider shaft (A) on the column with a piece of wire (B) between the joint yoke (C) of the
slider shaft and joint yoke (D) of the upper shaft to prevent the slider shaft from pulling out.
111
Fig. 46: Holding Slider Shaft On Column With Piece Of Wire Between Joint Yoke Of Slider
Shaft And Joint Yoke
9. Release the tilt/telescopic lever, and adjust the steering column to the full telescopic out position, then
tighten the tilt/telescopic lever.
10. Disconnect the wire harness connectors from the combination switch assembly (A).
111
Fig. 47: Disconnecting Wire Harness Connectors

11. Remove the combination switch assembly from the steering column shaft by removing the screws (B).
12. Disconnect the connectors from the ignition switch, and release the wire harness clips from the
steering column.
13. Remove the steering joint bolt (C), then disconnect the steering joint (D) from the pinion shaft.
14. Remove the steering column (E) by removing the attaching nuts and bolts. If the lower slide shaft (F)
is removed, slip it into the upper shaft (G) by aligning the paint or stamped marks (H).
INSTALLATION
1. Install the steering column in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Make sure the wires are not caught or pinched by any parts.
 Take care not to let the sliding capsules fall out of position during column installation.
2. Steering joint connection; center the steering rack within its stroke.
3. Position the steering column joint (A) so the bolt (B) opposite to the notch (C) is within the range
shown in Fig. 48.
111
Fig. 48: Positioning Steering Column Joint

4. With the rack in the straight ahead driving position, cut the wire (D) and slip the lower end of the
steering joint on to the pinion shaft (E).
5. Align the bolt hole (A) on the steering joint with the groove (B) around the pinion shaft, and loosely
install the joint bolt (C). Be sure that the joint bolt is securely in the groove in the pinion shaft. Pull on
the steering joint to make sure that the steering joint is fully seated. Tighten the steering joint bolt to
the specified torque.
111
Fig. 49: Aligning Bolt Hole On Steering Joint With Groove Around Pinion Shaft
6. Finish the installation, and note these items:

 Make sure the connectors are properly connected.
 Reinstall the steering wheel (see STEERING WHEEL INSTALLATION ).
 Reconnect the battery.
 Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the navigation system, then the customer's radio
station presets.
111
 Set the clock.

 Verify cruise control, audio remote, navigation guide and turn signal switch operation.
 Make sure the steering wheel is centered.
STEERING COLUMN/TILT/TELESCOPIC INSPECTION

 Check the steering column ball bearing (A) and the steering joint bearings (B) for play and proper
movement. If any bearing is noisy or has excessive play, replace the steering column as an assembly.
 Check the lower side shaft (C) for smooth movement in and out. If the lower slide shaft is removed,
slip it into the upper shaft by aligning the paint or stamped marks (D). If it sticks or binds, replace the
steering column as an assembly.
 Check the sliding capsules (E) for distortion or breakage. If there is distortion or breakage, replace the
steering column as an assembly.
 Check the tilt mechanism and telescopic mechanism for movement and damage.
Fig. 50: Inspecting Steering Column/Tilt/Telescopic

STEERING LOCK REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the steering column (see STEERING COLUMN REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ).
2. Center-punch each of the two shear bolts, and drill the heads of the bolts off with a 5 mm (3/16 in.)
drill bit. Be careful not to damage the switch body when removing the shear bolts.
111
Fig. 51: Center-Punch Each Shear Bolts

3. Remove the shear bolts from the switch body.

4. Install the switch body without the key inserted.
5. Loosely tighten the new shear bolts.
111
6. Insert the ignition key, and check for proper operation of the steering wheel lock and that the ignition
key turns freely.
7. Tighten the shear bolts (A) until the hex heads (B) twist off.
Fig. 52: Tightening Shear Bolts Until Hex Heads Twist Off
RACK GUIDE ADJUSTMENT

Locknut wrench, 40 mm 07916-SA50001
1. Set the wheels in the straight ahead position.

2. Loosen the rack guide screw locknut (A) with the special tool, then remove the rack guide screw (B).
111
Fig. 53: Loosening Rack Guide Screw Locknut With Special Tool
3. Remove the old sealant from the rack guide screw (A), and apply new sealant (Three Bond 1215 or
Loctite 5699) to the middle of the threads (B). Loosely install the rack guide screw on the steering
gearbox.
111
Fig. 54: Removing Old Sealant From Rack Guide Screw

4. Tighten the rack guide screw (A) to 25 N.m (2.5 kgf.m, 18 lbf.ft), then loosen it.
111
Fig. 55: Tightening Rack Guide Screw

5. Retighten the rack guide screw to 3.9 N.m (0.4 kgf.m, 3 lbf.ft), then back it off to the specified angle.
Specified return angle: 10°-20° max.
6. Hold the rack guide screw stationary with a wrench, and tighten the locknut by hand until it's fully
seated.
7. Install the special tool on the locknut (B), and hold the rack guide screw stationary with a wrench.
Tighten the locknut an additional 30° with the special tool.
8. Check for unusual steering effort through the complete turning range.
9. Check the steering wheel rotation play (see STEERING WHEEL ROTATIONAL PLAY
CHECK ), and the power assist (see STEERING WHEEL ROTATIONAL PLAY CHECK ).
STEERING GEARBOX REMOVAL

111
 Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202

 Subframe adaptor EQS02C000016 (Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment program 888-
424-6857)
Note these items during removal:
 Using solvent and a brush, wash any oil and dirt off the valve body unit, its lines, and the end of the
gearbox. Blow dry with compressed air.
 Make sure to remove the steering wheel before disconnecting the steering joint. Damage to the cable
reel can occur.
1. Drain the power steering fluid. (see step 1 in Fluid Replacement ).

4. Remove the steering wheel (see STEERING WHEEL REMOVAL ).
5. Remove the steering joint cover A.

111
6. Remove the steering joint bolt (A), and disconnect the steering joint by moving the steering joint (B)
toward the column. Hold the slider shaft (C) on the column with a piece of wire (D) between the joint
yoke (E) on the slider shaft to the joint yoke on the upper shaft (see STEERING COLUMN
Fig. 57: Removing Steering Joint Bolt

7. Remove the steering joint cover B. Be careful not to damage the mating surface on the joint cover B
and pinion shaft grommet. Replace the cover seal (A) if necessary.
111
Fig. 58: Replacing Cover Seal

8. Remove and discard the cotter pin (A) from the tie-rod ball joint nut (B), then loosen the nut.
111
Fig. 59: Removing Cotter Pin From Tie-Rod Ball Joint Nut
9. Separate the tie-rod ball joint and knuckle using the special tool (see BALL JOINT REMOVAL ).
10. Remove the P/S heat baffle plate (A).
111
Fig. 60: Removing P/S Heat Baffle Plate

11. Remove the feed line holder mounting bolt (A) on the front suspension subframe.
111
Fig. 61: Removing Feed Line Holder Mounting Bolt On Front Suspension Subframe
12. Remove the feed line holder mounting bolt (B) and return hose (C) from the gearbox mounting
bracket (D).
13. Place several shop towels under the line connections, and cover the gearbox mounting part to protect
it from the power steering fluid. Loosen the flare nut (A), and disconnect the feed line (B).
111
Fig. 62: Loosening Flare Nut And Disconnecting Feed Line

14. Loosen the flare nut (C), and disconnect the return line (D).
15. After disconnecting the lines, plug or seal them with a piece of tape or equivalent to prevent foreign
materials from entering.
NOTE: Do not loosen the cylinder line A and B between the valve body unit
and the cylinder.
16. Attach the special tool to the front suspension subframe (A) with hanging the hook of the special tool
over the front of the subframe, then tighten the special tool screw.
111
Fig. 63: Attaching Special Tool To Front Suspension Subframe With Hanging Hook
17. Raise the jack (B) and line up the slots in the arms with the bolt holes on the corner of the jack base,
then attach them with bolts securely.
18. Remove the front suspension subframe right middle mount bolts (A).
111
Fig. 64: Removing Front Suspension Subframe Right Middle Mount Bolts
19. Remove the front suspension subframe left middle mount (A).
111
Fig. 65: Removing Front Suspension Subframe Left Middle Mount

20. Remove the steering gearbox mounting bolts on the left gearbox mount, and remove the steering
stiffener plate (A).
111
Fig. 66: Removing Steering Stiffener Plate

21. Remove the front suspension subframe rear bracket (A) mounting bolt (B).
111
Fig. 67: Removing Front Suspension Subframe Rear Bracket Mounting Bolt
22. Loosen the two front suspension subframe rear bracket mounting bolts (C) on right and left, and
slowly lower the jack supporting subframe (D) with special tool until the subframe has dropped 30
mm (1 1/8 in.) total.
23. Remove the two flange bolts from the right side of the gearbox, then remove the gearbox mounting
bracket (A) and cushion (B).
111
Fig. 68: Removing Gearbox Mounting Bracket And Cushion

24. Move the steering gearbox toward the front, and remove the pinion shaft grommet (A) from the top of
the valve body unit.
111
Fig. 69: Removing Pinion Shaft Grommet

111
25. Apply vinyl tape (B) to the splines on the pinion shaft.
26. Apply vinyl tape or equivalent material (A) to the brake lines (B) to protect them from the pinion
shaft.
Fig. 70: Applying Vinyl Tape Or Equivalent Material To Brake Lines

27. Move the steering gearbox to the driver's side, and rotate it so the pinion shaft points toward the front
of the vehicle.
111
Fig. 71: Moving Steering Gearbox To Driver'S Side

28. Carefully move the steering gearbox as an assembly toward the driver's side of the vehicle until the
pinion shaft clears the wheelwell opening. Be careful not to damage the brake lines with the pinion
shaft.
29. Remove the steering gearbox through the wheelwell opening on the driver's side.
111
Fig. 72: Removing Steering Gearbox Through Wheelwell Opening On Driver's Side
30. After removing the steering gearbox, make sure that no power steering fluid gets on the gearbox
mount cushions, gearbox housing, surface of the subframe and stiffener. Wipe off any spilled fluid at
once.
STEERING GEARBOX OVERHAUL

Exploded View
111
Fig. 73: Exploded View Of Steering Gearbox

 Cylinder end seal remover attachment 07NAD-SR3020A

 Pilot collar 07GAF-PH70100
 Valve seal ring sizing tool 07NAG-SR3090A
 Ball joint boot clip guide 07974-SA50800
 Sleeve seal ring sizing tool 07974-SA5020A or 07974-SA50200
 Attachment, 32 x 35 mm 07746-0010100
111
 Driver 07749-0010000
 Piston seal ring guide 07HAG-SF10100
 Piston seal ring sizing tool 07HAG-SF1020A or 07HAG-SF10200
 Cylinder end seal slider 07ZAG-S5A0300
 Pincers Oetiker 1098 or equivalent, commercially available
NOTE: Refer to the Fig. 73 as needed .
Removal
1. Remove the steering gearbox (see STEERING GEARBOX REMOVAL ).
Disassembly
2. Remove the boot bands (A) and tie-rod clips (B). Pull the boot away from the ends of the steering
gearbox.
111
Fig. 74: Removing Boot Bands And Tie-Rod Clips

3. Unbend the lock washer (A).
111
Fig. 75: Unbending Lock Washer

4. Hold the flat surface sections (A) of the steering rack with a wrench (B), and unscrew both rack ends
(C) with a wrench (D). Be careful not to damage the rack surface with the wrench.
111
Fig. 76: Holding Flat Surface Sections Of Steering Rack With Wrench
5. Remove the lock washer (E) and stop rubber (F).

6. Loosen the locknut (A), then remove the rack guide screw (B).
111
Fig. 77: Loosening Locknut And Remove Rack Guide Screw

7. Remove the spring (C) and the rack guide (D) from the gearbox housing.
8. Remove the cylinder lines from the gearbox.
111
Fig. 78: Removing Cylinder Lines From Gearbox

9. Drain the fluid from the cylinder fittings by slowly moving the steering rack back and forth.
10. Remove the two flange bolts, then remove the valve body unit (A) from the gearbox (B). Remove the
O-ring (C), and discard it.
111
Fig. 79: Removing Valve Body Unit From Gearbox

11. Drill a 3 mm (0.12 in.) diameter hole about 2.5-3.0 mm (0.10-0.12 in.) in depth in the staked point (A)
on the cylinder. Do not allow metal shavings to enter the cylinder housing. After removing the
cylinder end (B), remove any burrs at the staked point.
111
Fig. 80: Removing Burrs At Staked Point

12. Hold the gearbox housing using a C-clamp (commercially available) (A) and the wooden blocks (B)
as shown in Fig. 81. Do not clamp the cylinder part of the housing or gearbox housing in the vise.
Then remove the cylinder end (C).
111
Fig. 81: Holding Gearbox Housing Using C-Clamp And Wooden Blocks
13. Install a commercially available bearing separator (A) in the gearbox housing as shown in Fig. 82.
111
Fig. 82: Installing Commercially Available Bearing Separator In Gearbox Housing

14. Place an appropriate size deep socket wrench (B) on the steering rack (C).
15. Set the steering gearbox in a press so the gearbox housing side points upward, then press the cylinder
111
end seal (D) and steering rack out of the gearbox. Hold the steering rack to keep it from falling when
pressed clear. Be careful not to damage the inner surface of the cylinder housing with the tool.
16. Install the special tool so it will fit through the rack guide hole of the gearbox housing. Insert a 24"
long, 3/8" drive extension (A), and install it on the special tool. Make sure the special tool is securely
positioned on the backup ring edges. Be careful not to damage the inner surface of the cylinder with
the special tool.
Fig. 83: Inserting Drive Extension On Special Tool

17. Place the steering gearbox in a press, then remove the cylinder end seal (A) and backup ring (B) from
the gearbox by pressing on the 24" long, 3/8" drive extension.
Note these items when pressing the cylinder end seal:
 Keep the tool straight to avoid damaging the cylinder wall. Check the tool angle, and correct it
if necessary, when removing the cylinder end seal.
 Use a press to remove the cylinder end seal. Do not try to remove the seal by striking the tool;
striking the tool could brake the backup ring, and the cylinder end seal would remain in the
gearbox.
111
Fig. 84: Removing Cylinder End Seal Using Press

18. Carefully pry the piston seal ring (A) and O-ring (B) off the rack piston. Be careful not to damage the
inside of the seal ring groove and piston edges when removing the seal ring.
111
Fig. 85: Prying Piston Seal Ring And O-Ring Off Rack Piston
19. Before removing the valve housing (A), apply vinyl tape (B) to the splines on the pinion shaft.
111
Fig. 86: Applying Vinyl Tape To Splines On Pinion Shaft

20. Separate the valve housing from the pinion shaft/valve using a press.
21. With your finger, check the inner wall of the valve housing where the seal ring slides. If there is a step
in the wall, the housing is worn. Replace it.
NOTE: There may be sliding marks from the seal ring on the wall of the valve
housing. Replace the valve housing only if the wall is stepped.
111
Fig. 87: Checking Inner Wall Of Valve Housing With Finger

22. Check for wear, burrs, and other damage to the edges of the grooves in the sleeve.
NOTE: The pinion shaft and sleeve are a precision matched set. If either the
pinion shaft or sleeve must be replaced, replace both parts as a set.
111
Fig. 88: Checking Wear, Burrs And Other Damage To Edges Of Grooves In Sleeve
23. Remove the snap ring (A) and sleeve (B) from the pinion shaft.
111
Fig. 89: Removing Snap Ring And Sleeve From Pinion Shaft
24. Using a cutter or an equivalent tool, cut and remove the four seal rings from the sleeve. Be careful not
to damage the edges of the sleeve grooves and outer surface when removing the seal rings.
111
Fig. 90: Removing Four Seal Rings From Sleeve

25. Using a cutter or an equivalent tool, cut the valve seal ring (A) and O-ring (B) at the cutting groove
position (C) in the pinion shaft. Remove the valve seal ring and O-ring. Be careful not to damage the
edges of the pinion shaft groove and outer surface when removing the valve seal ring and O-ring.
111
Fig. 91: Cutting Valve Seal Ring And O-Ring At Cutting Groove Position In Pinion Shaft
26. Remove the valve oil seal (A) and wave washer (B) from the pinion shaft.
Note these items during disassembly:
 Inspect the ball bearing (C) by rotating the outer race slowly. If there is any excessive play or
wear, replace the pinion shaft and sleeve as an assembly.
 The pinion shaft and sleeve are a precise fit; do not intermix old and new pinion shafts and
sleeves.
111
Fig. 92: Removing Valve Oil Seal And Wave Washer From Pinion Shaft
27. Press the valve oil seal (A) and roller bearing (B) out of the valve housing using a hydraulic press and
special tool.
111
Fig. 93: Pressing Valve Oil Seal And Roller Bearing Out Of Valve Housing
28. Clean the disassembled parts with solvent, and dry them with compressed air. Do not dip rubber parts
in the solvent.
Reassembly
29. Apply vinyl tape (A) to the stepped portion of the pinion shaft, and coat the surface of the vinyl tape
with power steering fluid.
111
Fig. 94: Applying Vinyl Tape To Stepped Portion Of Pinion Shaft

30. Install the wave washer (B).

31. Coat the inside surface of the new valve oil seal (C) with power steering fluid, and install the seal with
its grooved side facing opposite the bearing, then slide it over the pinion shaft, being careful not to
damage its sealing lip (D).
32. Apply vinyl tape (A) to the splines and stepped portion of the shaft, and coat the surface of the vinyl
tape with power steering fluid.
111
Fig. 95: Applying Vinyl Tape To Splines And Stepped Portion Of Shaft
33. Fit the new O-ring (B) in the groove of the pinion shaft. Then slide the new valve seal ring (C) over
the shaft and in the groove on the pinion shaft.
34. Remove the tape, and apply power steering fluid to the surface of the valve seal ring (A).
111
Fig. 96: Applying Power Steering Fluid To Surface Of Valve Seal Ring
35. Apply power steering fluid to the inside of the special tool. Set the larger diameter end of the special
tool over the valve seal ring, and move the special tool up and down several times to make the valve
seal ring fit in the pinion shaft groove.
36. Remove the special tool, turn it over, slide the smaller diameter end over the valve seal ring. Move it
up and down several times to make the valve seal ring fits snugly in the pinion shaft groove.
37. Apply power steering fluid to the surface of the special tool. Slip two new seal rings (A) over the
special tool from the smaller diameter end, and expand them. Install only two rings at a time from
each end of the pinion shaft sleeve (B).
Note these items when installing the seal ring:
 Do not over-expand the seal ring. Install the resin seal rings with care so as not to damage them.
After installation, make sure you contract the seal rings using the special tool (sizing tool).
 There are two types of sleeve seal rings: black and brown. Do not mix the different types of
rings as they are not compatible.
111
Fig. 97: Slipping Seal Rings Over Special Tool

38. Align the special tool with each groove in the sleeve, and slide a sleeve seal ring into each groove.
After installation, compress the seal rings with your fingers temporarily.
39. Apply power steering fluid to the seal rings on the sleeve, and to the entire inside surface of the
special tool, then slowly insert the sleeve into the special tool.
111
Fig. 98: Applying Power Steering Fluid To Seal Rings On Sleeve

40. Move the sleeve back and forth several times to make the seal rings snugly fit in the sleeve. Make sure
the seal rings are not twisted.
41. Apply power steering fluid to the surface of the pinion shaft (A). Slide the sleeve (B) onto the pinion
shaft by aligning the locating pin (C) on the inside of the sleeve with the cutout (D) in the shaft. Then
install the new snap ring (E) securely in the pinion shaft groove. Be careful not to damage the valve
seal ring when inserting the sleeve.
111
Fig. 99: Applying Power Steering Fluid To Surface Of Pinion Shaft

42. Apply power steering fluid to the seal ring lip of the new valve oil seal (A), then install the seal in the
valve housing (B) using a hydraulic press and special tools. Install the seal with its grooved side
facing the tool.
111
Fig. 100: Applying Power Steering Fluid To Seal Ring Lip Of Valve Oil Seal
43. Press the roller bearing (C) into the valve housing with a hydraulic press and special tool.
44. Apply vinyl tape (A) to the pinion shaft, then coat the vinyl tape with power steering fluid.
111
Fig. 101: Applying Vinyl Tape To Pinion Shaft, Then Coat Vinyl Tape With Power Steering
Fluid
45. Insert the pinion shaft into the valve housing (B). Be careful not to damage the valve seal rings (C)
and valve oil seal sealing lip (D).
46. Remove the vinyl tape from the pinion shaft, then remove any residue from the tape adhesive.
111
47. Press the pinion shaft/sleeve into the valve housing with a hydraulic press. Check that the pinion
shaft/sleeve turns smoothly by hand after installing it.
Fig. 102: Pressing Pinion Shaft/Sleeve Into Valve Housing With Hydraulic Press
111
48. Coat the special tool with power steering fluid, then slide it onto the rack, big end first.
49. Position the new O-ring (A) and new piston seal ring (B) on the special tool, then slide them down
toward the big end of the tool.
Note these items during reassembly:
 Do not over expand the resin seal rings. Install the resin seal rings with care so as not to damage
them. After installation, make sure you contract the seal ring using the special tool (sizing tool).
 Replace the piston's O-ring and seal ring as a set.
Fig. 103: Positioning O-ring And Piston Seal Ring On Special Tool
50. Pull the O-ring off into the piston groove, then pull the piston seal ring off into the piston groove on
top of the O-ring.
51. Coat the piston seal ring (A) and the inside of the special tool with power steering fluid, then carefully
slide the tool onto the rack and over the piston seal ring.
111
Fig. 104: Coating Piston Seal Ring And Inside Of Special Tool With Power Steering Fluid
52. Move the special tool back and forth several times to make sure the piston seal ring fits snugly in the
piston.
53. Coat the sliding surface of the special tool (A) and new cylinder end seal (B) with power steering
fluid. Place the seal on the special tool with its grooved side (C) facing opposite the special tool.
111
Fig. 105: Coating Sliding Surface Of Special Tool And Cylinder End Seal With Power Steering
Fluid
54. Coat the surface of the steering rack (A) with power steering fluid.
111
Fig. 106: Coating Surface Of Steering Rack With Power Steering Fluid
55. Install the cylinder end seal (B) onto the steering rack with its grooved side (C) toward the piston (D).
56. Separate the cylinder end seal from the special tool, then remove the special tool.
57. Install the new backup ring (A) on the steering rack, then place the backup ring and cylinder end seal
(B) against the piston (C).
111
Fig. 107: Installing Backup Ring On Steering Rack

58. Apply multipurpose grease to the steering rack teeth, then insert the steering rack into the gearbox
housing. Be careful not to damage the inner surface of the cylinder wall with the rack edges.
111
Fig. 108: Applying Multipurpose Grease To Steering Rack Teeth

59. Insert an appropriate size deep socket wrench (A) onto the steering rack as shown in Fig. 109.
111
Fig. 109: Inserting Appropriate Size Deep Socket Wrench Onto Steering Rack
60. Install the cylinder end seal (B) into the bottom of the cylinder by pressing on the tool with a press.
Do not push on the tool with excessive force as it may damage the cylinder end seal.
61. Remove the tool, and center the steering rack.
62. Coat the sliding surface of the special tool (A) and new cylinder end seal (B) with power steering
111
fluid. Place the seal on the special tool with its grooved side (C) facing opposite the special tool.
Fig. 110: Coating Sliding Surface Of Special Tool & Cylinder End Seal With Power Steering
Fluid
63. Coat the inside surface of the special tool and steering rack with power steering fluid, then install the
cylinder end seal (A) onto the steering rack with its grooved side toward the cylinder.
111
Fig. 111: Installing Cylinder End Seal Onto Steering Rack

64. Separate the cylinder end seal from the special tool, then remove the special tool.
65. Push in the cylinder end seal with your finger. Be careful not to damage the face of the seal with the
threads and burrs at the staked position of the cylinder housing.
66. Hold the gearbox housing using a C-clamp (commercially available) (A) and the wooden blocks (B).
Do not clamp the cylinder part of the housing and gearbox housing in the vise.
111
Fig. 112: Holding Gearbox Housing Using C-Clamp And Wooden Blocks
67. Coat the inside surface of the cylinder end (A) with power steering fluid, then install the cylinder end
by screwing it into the cylinder (B). Tighten the cylinder end to the specified torque.
111
Fig. 113: Coating Inside Surface Of Cylinder End With Power Steering Fluid
68. Stake the point of the cylinder show (opposite from where the stake was removed during
disassembly).
69. Coat the new O-ring (A) with multipurpose grease, and carefully fit it on the valve housing.
111
Fig. 114: Coating O-Ring With Multipurpose Grease

70. Apply multipurpose grease to the needle bearing (B) in the gearbox housing, then install the valve
body unit (C) by engaging the gears. Note the valve body unit installation position (direction of the
line connections).
71. Tighten the flange bolts (D) to the specified torque.
72. Install the cylinder lines.
Note these items during reassembly:
 Thoroughly clean the joints of the cylinder lines. The joints must be free of foreign material.
 Install the cylinder lines by tightening the flare nuts by hand first, then tighten the flare nuts to
the specified torque.
111
Fig. 115: Installing Cylinder Lines

73. Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding surface and circumference of the rack guide (A), and install
it onto the gearbox housing.
111
Fig. 116: Applying Multipurpose Grease To Sliding Surface And Circumference Of Rack Guide
74. Apply new sealant (Three Bond 1215 or Loctite 5699) to the middle of the threads on the rack guide
screw (B), then install the spring (C) and rack guide screw.
75. Tighten the rack guide screw, and loosely install the locknut (D).
76. Adjust the rack guide screw (see RACK GUIDE ADJUSTMENT ). After adjusting, check that the
rack moves smoothly by sliding it right and left.
77. Install a new stop rubber (A) and a new lock washer (B). Align the lock washer tabs (C) with the slots
(D) on the rack end (E) while holding the lock washer in place. Repeat this step for the other side of
the rack.
111
Fig. 117: Installing Stop Rubber & Lock Washer

78. Hold the flat surface sections of the steering rack with a wrench, and tighten both rack ends. Be
careful not to damage the rack surface with the wrench.
79. Bend the lock washer (A) back against the flat spots on the rack end joint housing.
111
Fig. 118: Bending Lock Washer Back Against Flat Spots On Rack End Joint Housing
80. Apply multipurpose grease to the circumference of the rack end joint housing (A).
111
Fig. 119: Applying Multipurpose Grease To Circumference Of Rack End Joint Housing
81. Apply a light coat of silicone grease to the boot grooves (B) on the rack ends.
82. Center the steering rack within its stroke.
83. Clean off any grease or contamination from the boot installation grooves (A) around the gearbox
housing. Install the boots (B) on the rack ends with the tie-rod clips (C), and fit the boot end in the
installation grooves in the housing properly.
111
Fig. 120: Cleaning Off Boot Installation Grooves Around Gearbox Housing
84. After installing the boots, wipe any grease off the threaded section (D) of the rack end.
85. Install the new boot bands by aligning the tabs (A) with the holes (B) of the band.
111
Fig. 121: Installing Boot Bands By Aligning Tabs With Holes Of Band
86. Close the ear portion (A) of the band (B) with commercially available pincers, Oetiker 1098 or
equivalent (C).
111
Fig. 122: Closing Ear Portion Of Band With Commercially Available Pincers
87. Slide the rack right and left to be certain that the boots are not deformed or twisted.
STEERING GEARBOX INSTALLATION

111
Subframe adaptor EOS02C000016
(Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment program 888-424-6857)
1. Before installing the steering gearbox, make sure that no power steering fluid is on the mating surface
of the gearbox and a front suspension subframe. To prevent the gearbox mounting bolts from
loosening after the installation, remove any power steering fluid from the mount cushions and bolt
holes.
2. Apply a mild soap and water solution to both sides of the mount cushion mating surfaces (A).
Fig. 123: Applying Mild Soap And Water Solution To Both Sides Of Mount Cushion Mating
Surfaces
3. Pass the cylinder of the steering gearbox (B) through the wheelwell opening on the driver's side.
4. Carefully move the steering gearbox toward the passenger's side until the pinion shaft clears the
wheelwell opening on the body.
5. Rotate the steering gearbox so the pinion shaft (A) points upward.
111
Fig. 124: Rotating Steering Gearbox So Pinion Shaft Points Upward

6. Continue moving the gearbox toward the passenger's side until the steering gearbox is in position.
Make sure the power steering return line and feed line are routed above the gearbox.
7. Remove the vinyl tape from the pinion shaft, and install the pinion shaft grommet (A). Align the slot
in the pinion shaft grommet with the lug portion (B) on the valve housing.
111
Fig. 125: Installing Pinion Shaft Grommet

8. Position the cutout (A) on the mounting cushion (B) as shown in Fig. 126, and install it on the
cylinder of the gearbox securely.
111
Fig. 126: Positioning Cutout On Mounting Cushion

9. Install the gearbox mounting bracket (C) over the mounting cushion, and loosely install the two flange
bolts.
10. Install the steering stiffener plate (A) and gearbox mounting bolts on the left side of the gearbox, then
tighten them to the specified torque.
111
Fig. 127: Installing Steering Stiffener Plate And Gearbox Mounting Bolts On Left Side Of
Gearbox
11. Tighten the flange bolts on the right side of the gearbox to specified torque alternately in two or more
steps.
12. Loosely connect the return line and feed line by hand.
13. Install the feed line holder (A) and return hose (B) on the gearbox mounting bracket (C)
111
Fig. 128: Installing Feed Line Holder And Return Hose On Gearbox Mounting Bracket
14. Install the feed line holder (D) on the front suspension subframe. Make sure that there is no
interference between the feed and return lines and any other parts.
15. Tighten the return line flare nut (A) to the specified torque.
111
Fig. 129: Tightening Return Line Flare Nut

16. Tighten the feed line flare nut (B) to the specified torque.
17. Raise the jack supporting front suspension subframe (A) with special tool until the subframe is in
position (see FRONT SUBFRAME ALIGNMENT ).
111
Fig. 130: Raising Jack Supporting Front Suspension Subframe With Special Tool Until
Subframe Is In Position
18. Install the front suspension subframe rear bracket (B) mounting bolt (C), then tighten new subframe
mounting bolt (D) to the specified torque.
19. Install the front suspension subframe left middle mount (A).
111
Fig. 131: Installing Front Suspension Subframe Left Middle Mount

20. Install the front suspension subframe right middle mount bolts (A).
111
Fig. 132: Installing Front Suspension Subframe Right Middle Mount Bolts
21. Install the P/S heat baffle plate (A).
111
Fig. 133: Installing P/S Heat Baffle Plate

22. Wipe off any grease from the ball joint tapered section and threads. Then reconnect the tie-rod end
(A) to the knuckle arms.
111
Fig. 134: Reconnecting Tie-Rod End To Knuckle Arms

23. Install the tie-rod end ball joint nut, and tighten it to the specified torque. Then install the new cotter
pin (B), and bend it as shown in Fig. 134 (C) or (D).
24. Install the new cover seal (A) all the way around in the steering joint cover B. Make sure there are no
wrinkles in the seal, then install the steering joint cover B.
111
Fig. 135: Installing Cover Seal All Way Around In Steering Joint Cover
25. Center the steering rack within its stroke.

26. Position the steering column joint (A) so the bolt (B) opposite to the notch (C) is within the range
shown in Fig. 136.
111
Fig. 136: Positioning Steering Column Joint So Bolt Opposite To Notch

27. With the rack in the straight ahead driving position, cut the wire (D) and slip the lower end of the
steering joint on to pinion shaft (E).
28. Align the bolt hole (A) on the steering joint with the groove (B) around the pinion shaft, and loosely
install the joint bolt (C). Make sure the joint bolt is securely in the groove in the pinion shaft. Pull on
the steering joint to make sure the steering joint is fully seated.
111
Fig. 137: Aligning Bolt Hole On Steering Joint With Groove Around Pinion Shaft
29. Tighten the steering joint bolt to the specified torque.

30. Install the steering joint cover A.
111
Fig. 138: Installing Steering Joint Cover

31. Install the front wheels, then set the wheels in the straight ahead position.
32. Center the cable reel by first rotating it clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it counterclockwise (about
three full turns) until the arrow mark on the label points straight up. Reinstall the steering wheel (see
STEERING WHEEL INSTALLATION ).
33. Fill the system with power steering fluid, and bleed air from the system (see FLUID
REPLACEMENT ).
34. After installation, do the following checks.
 Start the engine, allow it to idle, and turn the steering wheel from lock-to-lock several times to
warm up to the fluid. Check the gearbox for leaks (see FLUID LEAKAGE INSPECTION ).
 Do the front toe inspection (see WHEEL ALIGNMENT ).
 Check the steering wheel spoke angle. If steering spoke angles to the right and left are not equal
(steering wheel and rack are not centered), correct the engagement of the joint/pinion shaft
serrations, and repeat step 31. Then adjust the front toe by turning the tie-rod ends, if necessary.
TIE-ROD BALL JOINT BOOT REPLACEMENT
111
Front hub dis/assembly tool 07965-SA50500
1. Remove the boot from the tie-rod end, and wipe the old grease off the ball pin.
2. Pack the lower area of the ball pin (A) with fresh multipurpose grease.
Fig. 139: Packing Lower Area Of Ball Pin With Fresh Multipurpose Grease
3. Pack the interior of the new boot (B) and lip (C) with fresh multipurpose grease.
Note these items when installing new grease:
 Keep grease off the boot mounting area (D) and the tapered section (E) of the ball pin.
 Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials to enter the boot.
4. Install the new boot (A) using the special tool. The boot must not have a gap at the boot installation
sections (B). After installing the boot, check the ball pin tapered section for grease contamination, and
wipe it if necessary.
111
Fig. 140: Installing Boot Using Special Tool

GEARBOX MOUNT CUSHION REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the steering gearbox (see STEERING GEARBOX REMOVAL ).
2. Position the 34 mm socket wrench (A) on the flange part of the gearbox housing with a washer (B), 10
x 105 mm flange bolt (C) and the 10 mm nut (D) as shown in Fig. 141.
111
Fig. 141: Positioning Socket Wrench On Flange Part Of Gearbox Housing With Washer
3. Hold the flange bolt with a wrench, and tighten the nut with a wrench. Remove the gearbox mount
cushion (E).
4. Apply a mild soap and water solution to the new gearbox mount cushion surface (A), then place it on
the gearbox mounting cushion hole.
111
Fig. 142: Applying Mild Soap And Water Solution To Gearbox Mount Cushion Surface
5. Position the 34 mm socket wrench on the flange part of the gearbox housing with a washer, flange
bolt, and the nut as shown in Fig. 142.
6. Install the gearbox mount cushion by tightening the nut until the mount cushion edges (B) properly fit
on the gearbox flange surface.
111
2003-07 SUSPENSION Front Suspension - Accord
2003-07 SUSPENSION
Front Suspension - Accord
KNUCKLE/HUB/WHEEL BEARING REPLACEMENT
Fig. 1: Exploded View Of Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing


 Attachment, 78 x 90 mm 07GAD-SD40101
 Hub dis/assembly tool, 42 mm 07GAF-SD40100
 Ball joint thread protector, 12 mm 07AAF-SDAA100
 Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600
111
2 августа 2011 г. 16:19:30
 Driver 07749-0010000
 Support base 07965-SD90100
KNUCKLE/HUB REPLACEMENT
2. Remove the wheel nuts and front wheel.
Fig. 2: Removing Wheel Nuts And Front Wheel

3. Remove the brake hose mounting bracket (A).
111
Fig. 3: Removing Brake Hose Mounting Bracket

4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and remove the caliper assembly (C) from the
knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang
the caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose with force.
5. Remove the wheel sensor (A) from the knuckle. Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector.
111
Fig. 4: Removing Wheel Sensor From Knuckle

6. Raise the stake (A), and remove the spindle nut (B).
111
Fig. 5: Removing Spindle Nut

7. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws (A).
111
Fig. 6: Removing Brake Disc Retaining Screws

8. Remove the brake disc (B) from the hub.
NOTE: If the brake disc has dung to the hub. Screw two 8x1.25 mm bolts (C)
into the disc to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt two turns at a
time to prevent the brake disc from binding.
9. Check the front hub for damage and cracks.

10. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the tie-rod end ball joint, and loosen the nut (B).
NOTE: During installation, install the new cotter pin after tightening the nut,
and bend its end as shown below.
111
Fig. 7: Removing Cotter Pin From Tie-Rod End Ball Joint

11. Disconnect the tie-rod end ball joint from the knuckle using the ball joint remover (see BALL JOINT
REMOVAL ).
12. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the lower arm ball joint, and loosen the nut (B).
NOTE:  To avoid damaging the ball joint, install the ball join thread
protector on the threads of the ball joint.
ball joint remover.
 Do not force or hammer on the lower arm, or pry between the
lower arm and the knuckle. You could damage the ball joint.
 Insert the new cotter pin in to the ball joint pin hole from the front
to the rear of the vehicle, and bend its end as shown below.
111
Fig. 8: Removing Cotter Pin From Lower Arm Ball Joint

13. Disconnect the lower arm ball joint from the lower arm using the ball joint thread protector and ball
joint remover (see BALL JOINT REMOVAL ).
14. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the upper arm ball joint, and loosen the nut (B).
NOTE: During installation, insert the new cotter pin into the ball joint pin from
the front to the rear of the vehicle, and bend its end as shown below.
111
Fig. 9: Removing Cotter Pin From Upper Arm Ball Joint

15. Disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the knuckle using the ball joint remover (see BALL JOINT
REMOVAL ).
16. Remove the driveshaft outboard joint (A) from the knuckle (B) by tapping the driveshaft end (C) with
a plastic hammer while drawing the hub outward, then remove the knuckle.
NOTE:  Do not pull the driveshaft end outward. The inner driveshaft joint
may come apart.
 During installation, apply grease to the mating surface of the
wheel bearing and driveshaft outboard joint (seeDRIVESHAFT
INSTALLATION ).
111
Fig. 10: Removing Driveshaft Outboard Joint From Knuckle

17. Install the knuckle/hub in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when installing the knuckle.
 Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified torque values.
 Before connecting the lower arm ball joint to the lower arm, degrease the threaded section and
tapered portion of the ball joint pin, the lower arm connecting hole, and the threaded section and
mating surface of the castle nut.
 First install all the components and lightly tighten the bolts and nuts, then raise the suspension
to load it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening to the specified torque values. Do not
place the jack against the ball joint pin of the knuckle.
 Torque the castle nut to the lower torque specification, then tighten it only far enough to align
the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not align the castle nut by loosening it.
 Install a new cotter pin on the castle nut after torquing.
 Use a new spindle nut on reassembly.
 Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the
111
nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft.
 Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating surface of the front hub and the inside of the
brake disc.
 Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the
wheel.
 Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary (see WHEEL ALIGNMENT ).
WHEEL BEARING (MAGNETIC ENCODER) REPLACEMENT
1. Separate the hub (A) from the knuckle (B) using the special tool and a hydraulic press. Hold the
knuckle with the attachment (C) of the hydraulic press or equivalent tool. Be careful not to deform the
splash guard. Hold onto the hub to keep it from falling when pressed clear.
Fig. 11: Separating Hub From Knuckle Using Special Tool And Hydraulic Press
2. Press the wheel bearing inner race (A) off of the hub (B) using the special tool, commercially
available bearing separator (C), and a press.
111
Fig. 12: Pressing Wheel Bearing Inner Race Off Of Hub

3. Remove the snap ring (A) and the splash guard (B) from the knuckle (C).
111
Fig. 13: Removing Snap Ring And Splash Guard

4. Check the front knuckle ring (A) for damage or deformation, and replace it if necessary.
111
Fig. 14: Checking Front Knuckle Ring

5. Press the wheel bearing (A) out of the knuckle (B) using the attachment, the driver and a press.
111
Fig. 15: Pressing Wheel Bearing Out Of Knuckle Using Special Tools And Press
6. Wash the knuckle and hub thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly.
7. Press a new wheel bearing (A) into the knuckle (B) using the old bearing (C), a steel plate (D), the
attachment, the support base, and a press.
NOTE:  Install the wheel bearing with the wheel sensor magnetic encoder
(E) (brown color), toward the inside of the knuckle.
 Remove any oil, grease, dust, metal debris, and other foreign
material from the encoder surface.
 Keep any magnetic tools away from the encoder surface.
 Be careful not to damage the encoder surface when you insert the
wheel bearing.
111
Fig. 16: Pressing Wheel Bearing Into Knuckle

8. Install the new front knuckle ring (A) on the inside of the knuckle by aligning the cutout portion (B)
on the ring with the wheel sensor hole (C) in the knuckle. Be careful not to damage or deform the ring
when installing it.
111
Fig. 17: Installing Front Knuckle Ring

9. Install the snap ring (A) securely in the knuckle (B).
111
Fig. 18: Installing Snap Ring

10. Install the splash guard (C), and tighten the screws (D) to the specified torque value.
11. Install the hub (A) onto the knuckle (B) using the attachment, the driver support base, and a hydraulic
press. Be careful not to distort the splash guard (C).
111
Fig. 19: Pressing Wheel Bearing Onto Hub Using Special Tools
BALL JOINT BOOT REPLACEMENT

Ball joint boot clip guide 07GAG-SD40700
1. Remove the knuckle (see Knuckle/Hub Replacement).

111
2.
3. Pack the interior and lip (A) of a new boot with grease. Keep the grease off of the boot-to-knuckle
mating surface (B).
Fig. 20: Packing Interior And Lip Of New Boot With Grease
4. Wipe the grease off the tapered portion of the pin (C), and pack fresh grease into the base (D). Do not
let dirt, or other foreign materials get into the boot.
5. Install the boot on the ball joint, then squeeze it gently to force out any air.
6. Adjust the special tool with the adjusting bolt (A) until its base is just above the groove around the
bottom of the boot. Then slide the clip (B) over the tool and into position on the boot.
111
Fig. 21: Adjusting Special Tool With Adjusting Bolt

7. After installing a boot, wipe any grease off the exposed portion of the ball joint pin.
8. Install the knuckle (see Knuckle/Hub Replacement).
UPPER ARM REPLACEMENT

Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202
1. Remove the front damper (see REMOVAL ).

2. Remove the wheel sensor bracket (A) from the upper arm (B).
111
Fig. 22: Removing Wheel Sensor Bracket From Upper Arm

3. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the upper arm ball joint, and loosen the nut (B).
NOTE: During installation, insert the new cotter pin into the ball joint pin hole
from the front to the rear of vehicle, and bend its end as shown below.
111
Fig. 23: Removing Cotter Pin From Upper Arm Ball Joint
REMOVAL ).
5. Remove the upper arm mounting bolts (A), and remove the upper arm (B).
NOTE: During installation, install the new upper arm mounting bolts.
111
Fig. 24: Removing Upper Arm Mounting Bolts

6. Install the upper arm by inserting a rod (A) of appropriate size (O.D. 6 mm/L: 300 mm) into the
positioning holes (B), and place the upper arm (C) on the rod to position it before tightening the upper
arm mounting bolts.
111
Fig. 25: Installing Upper Arm By Inserting Rod Into Positioning Holes
7. Install the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Before connecting the ball joint to the knuckle, degrease the threaded section and tapered
portion of the ball joint pin, the knuckle connecting hole, the threaded section, and the mating
surface of the castle nut.
 Tighten all mounting hardware to specified torque values.
 Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface on the brake disc and the inside of the
wheel.
 Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary (see WHEEL ALIGNMENT ).
111
LOWER ARM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

 Ball joint thread protector, 12 mm 07AAF-SDAA100

2. Remove the front wheel.
3. Remove the damper fork (A) from the damper (B) and lower arm (C).
NOTE: During installation, insert the damper fork into the damper lower end so
the aligning tab (D) is aligned with the slot (E) in the damper fork.
Replace the damper fork mounting nut (F) and bolt (G) with a new one.
111
Fig. 26: Removing Damper Fork From Damper And Lower Arm
4. Remove the flange nut (A) while holding the joint pin (B) with a hex wrench (C), and disconnect the
stabilizer link (D) from the lower arm (E).
111
Fig. 27: Removing Flange Nut

5. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the lower arm ball joint castle nut (B), and remove the nut.
NOTE:  To avoid damaging the ball joint, install the ball joint thread
protector on the threads of the ball joint.
remover.
 Do not force or hammer on the lower arm, or pry between the
111
lower arm and knuckle. You could damage the ball joint.
 Insert the new cotter pin into the ball joint pin hole from the front
to the rear of vehicle, and bend its end as shown below.
Fig. 28: Removing Cotter Pin From Lower Arm Ball Joint Castle Nut
6. Disconnect the lower arm ball joint from the knuckle using the ball joint thread protector and the ball
joint remover (see BALL JOINT REMOVAL ).
7. Remove the flange bolts, and remove the lower arm (A).
NOTE: During installation, install the new flange bolts.
111
Fig. 29: Removing Flange Bolts And Lower Arm

8. Install the lower arm in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Before connecting the lower arm ball joint to the lower arm, degrease the threaded section and
tapered portion of the ball joint pin, the lower arm connecting hole, and the threaded section and
mating surface of the castle nut.
 Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the
wheel.
 Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary (see WHEEL ALIGNMENT ).
111
STABILIZER LINK REPLACEMENT

3. Remove the self-locking nut (A) and flange nut (B) while holding the respective joint pin (C) with a
hex wrench (D), and remove the stabilizer link (E).
Fig. 30: Removing Self-Locking Nut And Flange Nut Holding Joint Pin With Hex Wrench
4. Install the stabilizer link (A) on the stabilizer bar (B) and lower arm (C) with the joint pins set at the
center of their range of the movement.
NOTE: The left stabilizer link has a yellow paint mark (D), while the right
stabilizer link has a white paint mark.
111
Fig. 31: Installing Stabilizer Link On Stabilizer Bar

5. Install a new self-locking nut and flange nut, and lightly tighten them.
NOTE: Use a new self-locking nut on reassembly.
6. Place the floor jack under the lower arm, and raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight.
NOTE: Do not place the jack against the ball joint pin of the knuckle.
111
7. Tighten the new self-locking nut (A) and flange nut (B) to the specified torque values while holding
the respective joint pins (C) with a hex wrench (D).
Fig. 32: Tightening New Self-Locking Nut And Flange Nut

8. Reinstall all removed parts and test-drive the vehicle.

9. After 5 minutes of driving, tighten the self-locking nut again to the specified torque value.
STABILIZER BAR REPLACEMENT

3. Disconnect the stabilizer links from the stabilizer bar on the right and left (see STABILIZER LINK
REPLACEMENT ).
4. Remove the front suspension subframe (A) from the body (see SUBFRAME REPLACEMENT ).
111
Fig. 33: Removing Front Suspension Subframe From Body

5. Remove the flange bolts (B) and bushing holders (C), then remove the bushings (D) and the stabilizer
bar (E).
6. Install the stabilizer bar in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Note the right and left direction of the stabilizer bar.
 Align the ends of the paint marks (A) on the stabilizer bar with each end of the bushings (B).
 Note the (front to rear) direction of the bushing holders.
 Refer to STABILIZER LINK REPLACEMENT to connect the stabilizer bar to the links .
 Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces on the brake disc and the inside of the
wheel.
111
Fig. 34: Aligning Ends Of Paint Marks On Stabilizer Bar

DAMPER/SPRING REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

REMOVAL
111
2. Remove the front wheel.

3. Remove the damper fork (A) from the damper (B) and lower arm (C).
Fig. 35: Removing Damper Fork From Damper And Lower Arm
4. Remove the two 8 mm flange nuts (A) and three 10 mm flange nuts (B) from the top of the damper,
and remove the damper assembly (C).
111
Fig. 36: Removing Flange Nuts From Top Of Damper

INSTALLATION
1. Position the damper assembly (A) in the body with the aligning tab (B) facing inside, then loosely
install the flange nuts.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the body.
111
Fig. 37: Positioning Damper Assembly Aligning Tab Facing Inside

2. Install the damper fork (A) over the driveshaft and onto the lower arm. Install the front damper in the
damper fork so the aligning tab (B) is aligned with the slot (C) in the damper fork.
111
Fig. 38: Installing Damper Fork Over Driveshaft And Onto Lower Arm
3. Loosely install the damper pinch bolt (D) into the damper fork.
4. Install the new flange bolt (E) to the damper fork and lower arm, and lightly tighten the new damper
fork mounting nut (F).
5. Place the floor jack under the lower arm, and raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight.
6. Tighten the flange nuts on the top of the damper to the specified torque values.
7. Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified torque value.
8. Tighten the flange nut on the damper fork to the specified torque value.
9. Clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the inside of the wheel, then install the front wheel.
10. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary (see WHEEL ALIGNMENT ).
DAMPER/SPRING DIASSEMBLY, INSPECTION, AND REASSEMBLY

EXPLODED VIEW
111
Fig. 39: Exploded View Of Damper/Spring

NOTE: When compressing the damper spring, use a commercially available strut
spring compressor (Branick MST-580A or Model 7200, or equivalent).
According to the manufacturer's instructions.
DISASSEMBLY
spring compressor (branick MST-580A or Model 7200, or equivalent).
According to the maufacturer's instructions.
111
1. Compress the damper spring, then remove the self-locking nut (A) while holding the damper shaft
with a hex wrench (B). Do not compress the spring more than necessary to remove the nut.
Fig. 40: Removing Self-Locking Nut Holding Damper Shaft

2. Release the pressure from the strut spring compressor, then disassemble the damper as shown in the
Exploded View.
INSPECTION
111
1. Reassemble all the parts, except for the spring mounting cushion and spring.
2. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both
compression and extension. The damper should extend smoothly and constantly when compression is
released. If it does not, the gas is leaking and the damper should be replaced.
Fig. 41: Compressing Damper Assembly

111
3. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, and binding during these tests.
REASSEMBLY
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed.
1. Assemble the damper disassembled parts except for the washer and self-locking nut.
2. Install the damper assembly on commercially available strut spring compressor (A), and compress the
spring lightly.
Fig. 42: Installing Damper Assembly On Commercially Available Strut Spring Compressor
111
3. Align the bottom of the spring and the stepped part (B) of the lower spring seat.
4. Position the damper mounting base (A) so the stud bolt (B) in it is aligned with the aligning tab (C) in
the damper unit.
Fig. 43: Positioning Damper Mounting Base

5. Compress the damper spring. Do not compress the spring excessively.

6. Install the washer (A) and a new 10 mm self-locking nut (B). Hold the damper shaft with a hex wench
(C), and tighten the 10 mm self-locking nut to the specified torque value.
111
Fig. 44: Installing Washer And Self-Locking Nut

7. Remove the damper assembly from the strut spring compressor.
111
2003-07 SUSPENSION Rear Suspension - Accord
2003-07 SUSPENSION
Rear Suspension - Accord
KNUCKLE/HUB BEARING UNIT REPLACEMENT
Fig. 1: Exploded View Of Disc Brake

111
2 августа 2011 г. 16:24:50
Fig. 2: Exploded View Of Drum Brake

HUB BEARING UNIT REPLACEMENT-DISC BRAKE
SUPPORT POINTS ).
2. Remove the wheel nuts and rear wheel.
111
Fig. 3: Removing Wheel Nuts And Rear Wheel

3. Remove the brake hose mounting bracket (A).
111

4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and remove the caliper assembly (C) from the
knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire to hang
the caliper assembly from the undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose with force.
5. Remove the hubcap (A).
111
Fig. 5: Removing Hubcap

6. Raise the stake (B), and remove the spindle nut (C).
7. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws (A).
111
Fig. 6: Removing Brake Disc Retaining Screws

8. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (B) into the disc to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt two turns
at a time to prevent cocking the disc excessively.
9. Remove the brake disc (C).
10. Remove the hub bearing unit (A).
111
Fig. 7: Removing Hub Bearing Unit

11. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Use a new spindle nut on reassembly.
 Wash the spindle thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly.
 Before installing the brake disc, clean the matching surfaces of the hub bearing unit and brake
disc.
 Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the inside of the
wheel.
HUB REPLACEMENT-DRUM BRAKE
SUPPORT POINTS ).
111
2. Remove the wheel nuts and rear wheel.
Fig. 8: Removing Wheel Nuts And Rear Wheel

3. Remove the hub cap (A).
111
Fig. 9: Removing Hub Cap

4. Raise the stake (B), and remove the spindle nut (C).
5. Release the parking brake lever, and remove the brake drum (A). Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (B)
into the drum to push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt two turns at a time to prevent cocking the
drum excessively.
111
Fig. 10: Removing Brake Drum

6. Remove the hub bearing unit (A).
111
Fig. 11: Removing Hub Bearing Unit

7. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Wash the spindle thoroughly in high flash point solvent before reassembly.
 Use a new spindle nut during reassembly.
 Before installing the brake drum, clean the matching surfaces of the hub bearing unit and brake
drum.
 Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces of the brake drum and the inside of the
wheel.
KNUCKLE REPLACEMENT-DISC BRAKE
1. Remove the hub bearing unit.

2. Remove the splash guard (A).
111
Fig. 12: Removing Splash Guard

3. Remove the lock pin (A) from the upper arm ball joint, and loosen the nut (B).
NOTE: During installation, install the new lock pin as shown below after
tightening the nut.
111
Fig. 13: Removing Lock Pin From Upper Arm Ball Joint
REMOVAL ).
5. Remove the flange nut (A) while holding the joint pin (B) with a hex wrench (C), then disconnect the
stabilizer link (D) from the stabilizer link bracket (E).
NOTE: During installation, install the new flange nut.
111
Fig. 14: Removing Flange Nut Holding Joint Pin With Hex Wrench
6. Remove the damper lower mounting bolt (F), and disconnect the damper from the knuckle.
NOTE: During installation, install the new damper lower mounting bolt.
111

8. Remove the stabilizer link bracket (B) from the knuckle.

9. Remove the leading arm mounting bolt (A) from the knuckle.
NOTE: During installation, install the new leading arm mounting bolt.
111
Fig. 16: Removing Leading Arm Mounting Bolt From Knuckle

10. Remove the control arm mounting nut (A) and washer (B) from the knuckle.
NOTE: During installation, install the new control arm mounting nut.
111
Fig. 17: Removing Control Arm Mounting Nut And Washer From Knuckle
11. Remove the trailing arm mounting bolt (A) from the knuckle.
NOTE: During installation, install the new trailing arm mounting bolt.
111
Fig. 18: Removing Trailing Arm Mounting Bolt From Knuckle

12. Remove the lower arm mounting bolt (A), then remove the knuckle (B).
NOTE: During installation, install the new lower arm mounting bolt and nut.
111
Fig. 19: Removing Lower Arm Mounting Bolt

13. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
to load it with the vehicle's weight before fully tightening to the specified torque values.
 Install a new lock pin on the castle nut after torquing.
 Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface on the brake disc and the inside of the
wheel.
KNUCKLE REPLACEMENT-DRUM BRAKE
1. Remove the hub bearing unit.

111
NOTE: During installation, insert the new lock pin as shown below after
tightening the nut.
REMOVAL ).
NOTE: During installation, install the new flange nut.
111
Fig. 21: Removing Flange Nut

5. Remove the damper lower mounting bolt (F), and disconnect the damper from the knuckle.
NOTE: During installation, install the new damper lower mounting bolt.
6. Disconnect the brake line (A) from the wheel cylinder (B). Remove the flange bolts and rear brake
assembly (C) from the knuckle.
111
Fig. 22: Disconnecting Brake Line From Wheel Cylinder

111

8. Remove the stabilizer link bracket (B) from the knuckle.

9. Remove the leading arm mounting bolt (A) from the knuckle.
NOTE: During installation, install the new leading arm mounting nut.
111
Fig. 24: Removing Leading Arm Mounting Bolt From Knuckle

10. Remove the control arm mounting nut (A) and washer (B) from the knuckle.
111
Fig. 25: Removing Control Arm Mounting Nut And Washer From Knuckle
11. Remove the trailing arm mounting bolt (A) from the knuckle.
NOTE: During installation, install the new trailing arm mounting bolt.
111
Fig. 26: Removing Trailing Arm Mounting Bolt From Knuckle

12. Remove the lower arm mounting bolt (A), then remove the knuckle (B).
NOTE: During installation, install the new lower arm mounting bolt and new
nut.
111
Fig. 27: Removing Lower Arm Mounting Bolt

13. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface on the brake drum and the inside of the
wheel.
 Fill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX (upper) level line, and bleed the brake system (see
BRAKE SYSTEM BLEEDING ). Check for a leak at the brake line to wheel cylinder, and
retighten if necessary.
UPPER ARM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

111
SUPPORT POINTS ).
2. Remove the rear wheel.
NOTE: During installation, install the new lock pin as shown below after
tightening the nut.
REMOVAL ).
5. Remove the brake hose mounting bracket (A). Do not disconnect the brake line.
111

6. Remove the wheel sensor harness mounting bracket (B).

7. Remove the flange bolt (A), and remove the upper arm (B).
NOTE: During installation, install the new flange bolt.
111
Fig. 30: Removing Flange Bolt And Upper Arm

8. Install the upper arm in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Before connecting the ball joints to the knuckle, degrease the threaded section and tapered
portion of the ball joint pin, the knuckle connecting hole, the threaded section, and the mating
surface of the castle nut.
 Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surface on the brake disc or drum and inside of the
wheel.
LOWER ARM REPLACEMENT

111
SUPPORT POINTS , SAFETY STANDS ).
3. Remove the lower arm mounting nut (A) and mounting bolt (B) from the knuckle side.
NOTE: During installation, install the new lower arm mounting bolt and nut.
Fig. 31: Removing Lower Arm Mounting Nut

4. Remove the flange bolt (C), and remove the lower arm (D).
5. Install the lower arm in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
wheel.
111
CONTROL ARM REPLACEMENT

SUPPORT POINTS ).
3. Remove the control arm mounting nut (A) and washer (B) from the knuckle side.
Fig. 32: Removing Control Arm Mounting Nut And Washer

4. Mark the cam positions of the adjusting bolt (C) and adjusting cam (D), then remove the self-locking
nut (E), and adjusting cam, and adjusting bolt. Discard the self-locking nut and control arm mounting
nut.
NOTE: During installation, install the new self locking nut and the new
adjusting bolt.
5. Remove the control arm (F).

6. Install the control arm in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
111
 Align the cam positions of the adjusting bolt and adjusting cam with the marked positions when
tightening.
 Use a new self-locking nut and control arm mounting nut on reassembly.
wheel.
TRAILING ARM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

SUPPORT POINTS ).
3. Remove the parking brake cable bracket (A) from the trailing arm (B).
Fig. 33: Removing Parking Brake Cable Bracket From Trailing Arm
111
4. Remove the mounting bolts (C), and remove the trailing arm.
NOTE: During installation, install the new mounting bolts.
5. Install the trailing arm in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
wheel.
LEADING ARM REPLACEMENT

SUPPORT POINTS ).
3. Remove the mounting bolts, and remove the leading arm (A).
NOTE: During installation, install the new mounting bolts.
Fig. 34: Removing Leading Arm

111
4. Install the leading arm in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
wheel.
STABILIZER LINK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

SUPPORT POINTS ). Remove the rear wheels.
3. Remove the self-locking nut (A) and flange nut (B) while holding the respective joint pin (C) with a
hex wrench (D), and remove the stabilizer link (E).
Fig. 35: Removing Self-Locking Nut And Flange Nut

4. Install the stabilizer link (A) on the stabilizer bar (B) and stabilizer link bracket (C) with the joint pins
set at the center of their range of the movement.
111
NOTE: The left stabilizer link has a white paint mark (D), while the right
stabilizer link has a yellow paint mark.
Fig. 36: Installing Stabilizer Link On Stabilizer Bar

5. Install the new self-locking nut and flange nut, and lightly tighten them.
6. Place the floor jack under the knuckle, and raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight.
7. Tighten the self-locking nut (A) and flange nut (B) to the specified torque values while holding the
respective joint pins (C) with a hex wrench (D).
111
Fig. 37: Tightening Self-Locking Nut And Flange Nut

8. Reinstall all removed parts, and test-drive the vehicle.

9. After 5 minutes of driving, tighten the self-locking nut again to the specified torque value.
STABILIZER BAR REPLACEMENT

SUPPORT POINTS ). Remove the rear wheels.
3. Disconnect the stabilizer links from the stabilizer bar (A) on the right and left (see STABILIZER
LINK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).
111
Fig. 38: Disconnecting Stabilizer Links From Stabilizer Bar

4. Remove the flange bolts and bushing holders (B), then remove the bushing (C) and the stabilizer bar.
5. Install the stabilizer bar in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
 Note the right and left direction of the stabilizer bar.
 Align the ends of the paint marks (A) on the stabilizer bar with the bushing (B).
 Refer to STABILIZER LINK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION to connect the stabilizer to the

links .
111
Fig. 39: Aligning Ends Of Paint Marks On Stabilizer Bar

 Before installing the wheel, clean the mating surfaces on the brake disc or drum and inside of
wheel.
KNUCKLE BUSHING REPLACEMENT

Bushing driver 30-40 07NAD-SS00100 or 07NAD-SS00101
1. Position the knuckle (A) on the press with the machined surface (B) facing down.
111
Fig. 40: Positioning Knuckle On Press With Machined Surface Facing Down
2. Adjust the bushing driver so it matches the inner diameter of the bushing hole, then tighten the socket
bolts (C) securely.
3. Position the bushing driver on the bushing (D).
4. Remove the bushing by pressing on the special tool with a press as shown in Fig. 40.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the inside of the bushing hole while pressing
on the bushing.
5. Position the knuckle (A) on the press with the machined surface (B) facing up.
111
Fig. 41: Positioning Knuckle On Press With Machined Surface Facing Up

6. Adjust the special tool so it matches with the outer diameter of the bushing (C).
7. Position the special tool on the outer sleeve (D) of the bushing.
8. Press the bushing into the knuckle using the bushing driver as shown in Fig. 41.
DAMPER/SPRING REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

REMOVAL
SUPPORT POINTS ).
3. Remove the rear bulkhead cover (see TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION - REAR SHELF
AREA ).
4. Remove the seat side bolster (see 4-DOOR ).
5. Remove the two flange nuts (A).
111
Fig. 42: Removing Flange Nuts

111
Fig. 43: Removing Flange Nut Holding Joint Pin With Hex Wrench
7. Remove the flange bolt (F) from the knuckle.

8. Lower the rear suspension, and remove the damper (G) from the vehicle. Damper springs are
different, left and right. Mark the springs L and R before you continue.
INSTALLATION
1. Lower the rear suspension, and position the damper (A), in the body.
111
Fig. 44: Positioning Damper In Body

2. Loosely install the flange nuts (B) onto the top of the damper.
3. Loosely install the flange bolt (A) on the bottom of the damper. Connect the stabilizer link (B) on the
bracket (C), and loosely install the flange nut (D).
111
Fig. 45: Installing Flange Bolt On Bottom Of Damper

4. Raise the rear suspension with a floor jack load the vehicle weight, and tighten the flange bolt to the
specified torque value.
5. Tighten the flange nut while holding the joint pin (E) with a hex wrench (F).
6. Tighten the two flange nuts on top of the damper to the specified torque value.
7. Install the seat side bolster (see 4-DOOR ).
8. Install the rear bulkhead cover (see TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION - REAR SHELF
AREA ).
9. Clean the mating surface of the brake disc or drum and the inside of the wheel, then install the rear
wheel.
10. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if necessary (see WHEEL ALIGNMENT ).
EXPLODED VIEW
111
Fig. 46: Exploded View Of Damper/Spring

spring compressor (Branick MST-580A or Model 7200, or equivalent).
According to the manufacturer's instructions.
DISASSEMBLY
1. Compress the damper spring, then remove the self-locking nut (A) while holding the damper shaft
with a hex wrench (B). Do not compress the spring more than necessary to remove the self-locking
nut.
111
Fig. 47: Removing Self-Locking Nut Holding Damper Shaft With Hex Wrench
2. Release the pressure from the strut spring compressor, then disassemble the damper as shown in Fig.
46 .
111
INSPECTION
1. Reassemble all parts, except the spring.

2. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both
compression and extension. The damper should extend smoothly and constantly when compression is
released. If it does not, the gas is leaking and the damper should be replaced.
Fig. 48: Compressing Damper Assembly

111
3. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, and binding during these tests.
REASSEMBLY
1. Install all parts except the self-locking nut and washer onto the damper unit by referring to the
Exploded View. Align the bottom of the spring (A) and the stepped part of the lower spring seat (B),
and align the damper mounting base (C) as shown below.
111
Fig. 49: Aligning Damper Mounting Base

2. Install the damper assembly on commercially available strut spring compressor (D).
3. Compress the damper spring with the spring compressor.
4. Install the washer (A), and loosely install a new self-locking nut (B).
111
Fig. 50: Installing New Self-Locking Nut

5. Hold the damper shaft with a hex wrench (C), and tighten the self-locking nut to the specified torque
value.
111
2003-07 SUSPENSION Front & Rear Suspension - Accord
2003-07 SUSPENSION
Front & Rear Suspension - Accord
SPECIAL TOOLS


FRONT SUSPENSION
111
2 августа 2011 г. 16:26:57
Fig. 2: Identifying Front Suspension Components

REAR SUSPENSION-DISC BRAKE
111
Fig. 3: Identifying Rear Suspension-Disc Brake Components

REAR SUSPENSION-DRUM BRAKE
111
Fig. 4: Identifying Rear Suspension-Drum Brake Components

WHEEL ALIGNMENT
The suspension can be adjusted for front and rear toe.
PRE-ALIGNMENT CHECKS
111
For proper inspection and adjustment of the wheel alignment, do these checks:
1. Release the parking brake to avoid an incorrect measurement.

2. Make sure the suspension is not modified.
3. Check the tire size and tire pressure.
Tire size
DX ('03-05), and VP models: P195/65R15 89H M+S

LX (except '06-07 2 door U.S.A), and LX-P models: P205/65R15 92H M+S
DX ('06-07), LX ('06-07 2-doorU.S.A.), SE, EX, EXL models: P205/60R16 91V M+S
Tire pressure
DX, VP, LX ('06-07 2-door U.S.A), SE, EX, EXL, and EX-SE models:
Front: 220 kpa (2.2 kgf/cm2 , 32 psi)

Rear: 210 kpa (2.1 kgf/cm2 , 30 psi)
LX (except '06-07 2-door U.S.A), and LX-P models:
Front: 210 kpa (2.1 kgf/cm2 , 30 psi)

Rear: 200 kpa (2.0 kgf/cm2 , 29 psi)
4. Check the runout of the wheels and tires (see WHEEL RUNOUT INSPECTION ).
5. Check the suspension ball joints. (Hold a wheel with your hands, and move it up and down and right
and left to check for wobbling.)
111
Fig. 5: Checking Suspension Ball Joints

6. Bounce the vehicle up and down several times to stabilize the suspension.
CASTER INSPECTION
Use commercially available computerized four wheel alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment
(caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions.
1. Check the caster angle.
111
Caster angle:
DX ('03-05) and VP models: 3°10'+/-45'

DX ('06-07), LX, LX-P, SE, EX, EXL models: 3°15'+/-45'
2. If out of specification, check for bent or damaged suspension components.
CAMBER INSPECTION
1. Check the camber angle.
Camber angle:
Front:
DX ('03-05) and VP models: 0° 03 '+/-45'

DX ('06-07), LX, LX-P, SE, EX, EXL models: 0° 00'+/-45'
Maximum difference between the right and left side: 0° 45'
Rear:
DX ('03-05) and VP models: -0° 50 '+/-30'

DX ('06-07), LX, LX-P, SE, EX, EXL models: -1° 00'+/-30'
2. If out of specification, check for bent or damaged suspension components.
FRONT TOE INSPECTION/ADJUSTMENT
1. Center the steering wheel spokes, and install a commercially available steering wheel holder tool.
2. Check the toe with the wheels pointed straight ahead.
Front toe-in: 0+/-2 mm (0+/-0.08 in.)
If no adjustment is required, remove the alignment equipment.

 If adjustment is required, go to step 3.
3. Loosen the tie-rod locknuts (A) while holding the flat surface sections (B) of the tie-rod end with a
wrench, and turn both rack ends (C) until the front toe is within specifications.
111
Fig. 6: Loosening Tie-Rod Locknuts

4. After adjusting, tighten the tie-rod locknuts. Reposition the rack-rod boot if it is twisted or displaced.
REAR TOE INSPECTION/ADJUSTMENT
1. Release the parking brake to avoid an incorrect measurement.

2. Check the toe.
Rear toe-in: 2+/-2 mm (0.08+/-0.08 in.)
 If no adjustment is required, remove the alignment equipment.

 If adjustment is required, go to step 3.
3. Hold the adjusting bolt (A) on the rear control arm (B), and loosen the self-locking nut (C).
111
Fig. 7: Holding Adjusting On Rear Control Arm

4. Replace the self-locking nut with a new one, and lightly tighten it.
NOTE: Always use a new self-locking nut whenever it has been loosened.
5. Adjust the rear toe by turning the adjusting bolt until the toe is correct.
111
6. Tighten the self-locking nut while holding the adjusting bolt.
TURNING ANGLE INSPECTION
1. Turn the wheel right and left while applying the brake, and measure the turning angle of both wheels.
Turning angle:
Inward:
DX ('03-05) and VP models: 39° 00 '+/-2°

DX ('06-07), LX, LX-P, SE, EX, EXL, and EX-SE models: 38° 50 '+/-2°
Outward:
DX ('03-05) and VP models: 31° 50' (reference)

DX ('06-07), LX, LX-P, SE, EX, EXL, and EX-SE models: 31° 40' (reference)
111
Fig. 8: Measuring Turning Angle Of Both Wheels

2. If the turning angle is not within the specifications, check for bent or damaged suspension
components.
WHEEL BEARING END PLAY INSPECTION

1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations (see LIFT AND
SUPPORT POINTS ).
2. Remove the wheels.
3. Install suitable flat washers (A) and the wheel nuts. Tighten the nuts to the specified torque to hold the
brake disc or brake drum securely against the hub.
111
Fig. 9: Placing Dial Gauge On Hub Flange Or Hub Cap (Front)

111
Fig. 10: Placing Dial Gauge On Hub Flange Or Hub Cap (Rear-Drum Brake)
111
Fig. 11: Placing Dial Gauge On Hub Flange Or Hub Cap (Rear-Disc Brake)
4. Measure the bearing end play by moving the brake drum or brake disc inward and outward.
5. If the bearing end play measurement is more than the standard, replace the wheel bearing or hub
bearing unit.
Front/Rear:
Standard: 0-0.05 mm (0-0.002 in.)
6. If the bearing end play measurement is more than the standard, replace the wheel bearing or hub
bearing unit.
WHEEL RUNOUT INSPECTION
111
NOTE: When measuring the front wheel runout, turn the other side of the wheel
slowly by hand.
1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations (see LIFT AND
SUPPORT POINTS ).
2. Check for a bent or deformed wheel.
3. Set up the dial gauge as shown in Fig. 12 for steel wheel & Fig. 13 for aluminum wheel, and measure
the axial runout by turning the wheel.
Front and rear wheel axial runout:
Standard:
Steel wheel: 0-1.0 mm (0-0.04 in.)

Aluminum wheel: 0-0.7 mm (0-0.03 in.)
Steel wheel:
111
Fig. 12: Setting Up Dial Gauge And Measuring Axial Runout Turning Wheel (Steel Wheel)
Aluminum wheel
Fig. 13: Setting Up Dial Gauge And Measuring Axial Runout Turning Wheel (Aluminum
Wheel)
4. Reset the dial gauge to the position shown in Fig. 14 for steel wheel & Fig. 15 for aluminum wheel,
and measure the radial runout.
Front and rear wheel radial runout:
Standard:
111
Steel wheel: 0-1.0 mm (0-0.04 in.)

Aluminum wheel: 0-0.7 mm (0-0.03 in.)
Steel wheel:
Fig. 14: Resetting Dial Gauge And Measure Radial Runout (Steel Wheel)
Aluminum wheel:
111
Fig. 15: Resetting Dial Gauge And Measuring Radial Runout (Aluminum Wheel)
5. If the wheel runout is not within the specification, check the wheel bearing end play (see WHEEL
BEARING END PLAY INSPECTION ), and make sure the mating surfaces on the brake disc or
brake drum, and the inside of the wheel are clean.
6. If the bearing end play is within the specification but the wheel runout is more than the service limit,
replace the wheel.
WHEEL BOLT REPLACEMENT
NOTE:  Do not use a hammer or air or electric impact tools to remove and
install the wheel bolts.
 Be careful not to damage the threads of the wheel bolts.
111
1. Remove the front hub or rear hub bearing unit: front (see KNUCKLE/HUB/WHEEL BEARING
REPLACEMENT , rear disc brake (see HUB REPLACEMENT-DISC BRAKE ), rear drum brake
(see HUB REPLACEMENT-DRUM BRAKE ).
2. Separate the wheel bolt (A) from the hub (B) using a hydraulic press. Support the hub with hydraulic
press attachments (C) or equivalent tools.
NOTE:  Before installing the new wheel bolt, clean the mating surface on
the bolt and the hub.
 The illustration shows a front hub.
Fig. 16: Identifying Illustration Wheel Bolt
3. Insert the new wheel bolt into the hub while aligning the splined surfaces on the hub hole with the
wheel bolt.
NOTE:  Degrease all around the wheel bolt and the threaded section of the
nut.
 Make sure the wheel bolt is installed vertically in relation to the
hub disc surface.
4. Press the wheel bolt using a hydraulic press. Support the hub with hydraulic press attachments or
equivalent tools.
5. Install the front hub or rear hub bearing unit: front KNUCKLE/HUB/WHEEL BEARING
REPLACEMENT , rear disc brake (seeHUB REPLACEMENT-DISC BRAKE ), rear drum brake
(see HUB REPLACEMENT-DRUM BRAKE ).
NOTE: If you can not tighten the wheel nut to the specified torque value when
installing the wheel, replace the front hub or rear hub bearing unit as an
assembly.
BALL JOINT REMOVAL

111
NOTE: Always use a ball joint remover to disconnect a ball joint. Do not strike the
housing or any other part of the ball joint connection to disconnect it.
1. Install a hex nut (A) onto the threads of the ball joint end to prevent damage to the threaded end of the
ball joint pin.
Fig. 17: Installing Special Tool Onto Threads Of Ball Joint

111
2. Apply grease to the special tool on the areas shown (A) below. This will ease installation of the tool
and prevent damage to the pressure bolt (B) threads.
Fig. 18: Applying Grease To Special Tool

3. Loosen the pressure bolt (A), and install the special tools as shown below. Insert the jaws carefully,
making sure not to damage the ball joint boot. Adjust the jaw spacing by turning the adjusting bolt
(B).
NOTE: Fasten the safety chain (C) securely to a suspension arm or the
subframe (D). Do not fasten it to a brake line or wire harness.
111
Fig. 19: Loosening Pressure Bolt And Installing Special Tools

4. After adjusting the adjusting bolt, make sure the head (C) of the adjusting bolt is in the position shown
above to allow the jaw to pivot.
5. With a wrench, tighten the pressure bolt until the ball joint pin pops loose from the ball joint pin hole.
If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to loosen the ball joint pin.
NOTE: Do not use pneumatic or electric tools on the pressure bolt.
6. Remove the ball joint remover, then remove the nut from the end of the ball joint pin, and pull the ball
joint our of the ball joint pin hole. Inspect the ball joint boot, and replace it if damaged.
111
2003-04 WHEEL ALIGNMENT Specifications & Procedures - Accord
2003-04 WHEEL ALIGNMENT
Specifications & Procedures - Accord
JACKING & HOISTING
NOTE: Prior to performing wheel alignment, perform preliminary visual and

mechanical inspection of wheels, tires and suspension components. See
PRE-ALIGNMENT INSTRUCTIONS in WHEEL ALIGNMENT THEORY &
OPERATION article in STEERING in GENERAL INFORMATION.
FLOOR JACK
1. Set parking brake. Block wheels that are not going to be lifted. When lifting rear of vehicle, place
transmission in Reverse (M/T) or Park (A/T). See Fig. 1.
2. Place floor jack lift platform under lift bracket to raise vehicle. See Fig. 2. Front lift bracket is located
under vehicle, on cross/center beam. Rear lift bracket is located under center of vehicle, left of
muffler. Place safety stands onto reinforced support points of side body panels (between front and rear
wheels).
111
2 августа 2011 г. 16:27:30
Fig. 1: Identifying Reinforced Support Points (CR-V Shown; Accord Is Similar)

111
Fig. 2: Identifying Lift Brackets Under Vehicle

EMERGENCY JACKING
Place manufacturer-supplied jack onto reinforced support points of side body panels (between front and rear
wheels). See Fig. 1.
HOIST
WARNING: When removing heavy rear components such as suspension, fuel tank
or spare tire, vehicle center of gravity may change and cause vehicle
to tip forward.
111
1. When removing heavy rear components such as suspension, fuel tank or spare tire, place tall safety
stands under front of vehicle after hoisting.
2. Place lift blocks onto reinforced support points of side body panels (between front and rear wheels).
See Fig. 1. These are same points as used with manufacturer-supplied jack. Lift hoist a few inches and
rock vehicle to ensure vehicle is firmly supported. Completely lift vehicle and check for proper
vehicle support.
WHEEL ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES
NOTE: Manufacturer recommends using commercially available computerized 4-

wheel alignment equipment. Follow equipment manufacturer's instructions
to obtain current vehicle alignment settings. Use following procedures for
necessary adjustments. Ensure suspension has not been modified.
CAMBER INSPECTION
Compare camber settings with vehicle manufacturer recommendations. See WHEEL ALIGNMENT
SPECIFICATIONS. If camber is incorrect, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Replace
faulty components. Recheck camber.
CASTER INSPECTION
Compare caster settings with vehicle manufacturer recommendations. See WHEEL ALIGNMENT
SPECIFICATIONS. If caster is incorrect, check for bent or damaged suspension components. Replace
faulty components. Recheck caster.
TOE-IN ADJUSTMENT
Front
1. Check toe-in with wheels pointed straight ahead. See WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS.
If no adjustment is required, remove alignment equipment. If adjustment is required, go to next step.
2. Loosen tie-rod lock nuts, and turn both tie rods in the same direction until the front wheels are
pointing straight ahead. Turn both tie rods equally until the toe-in reading on turning radius gauge is
correct. See WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS. After adjusting, tighten the tie-rod lock
nuts. See TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS. Reposition the tie rod boot if it is twisted or displaced.
Recheck toe-in.
Rear
1. Ensure parking brake is released to avoid an incorrect measurement. Check toe-in. See WHEEL
ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS. If no adjustment is required, remove alignment equipment. If
adjustment is required, go to next step.
2. Hold adjusting bolt on rear control arm and loosen lock nut. Adjust rear toe-in by turning adjusting
bolt until toe-in is correct. See WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS. Install NEW lock nut,
and tighten it while holding adjusting bolt. See Fig. 3 and TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS. Recheck
toe-in.
111
Fig. 3: Adjusting Rear Toe-In

TURNING ANGLE INSPECTION
Turn wheel right and left while applying brake. Measure turning angle of both wheels. See WHEEL
ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS. If turning angle is not within specifications, check for bent or
damaged suspension components.
RIDE HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT

Before adjusting alignment, check riding height. Check riding height with vehicle on level floor and tires
properly inflated. Ensure passenger and luggage compartments are unloaded. Bounce vehicle several times,
and allow suspension to settle. Visually inspect vehicle from front to rear and from side to side for signs of
abnormal height.
Measure riding height. See Fig. 4. Riding height between left and right sides of vehicle should vary less than
111
1" (25.4 mm). If riding height is not within specification, check suspension components and repair or
replace them as necessary.
Fig. 4: Measuring Riding Height

Application Ft. Lbs. (N.m)
Radius Rod Flange Bolts 119 (162)
Radius Rod Lock Nut 40 (54)
Rear Control Arm Adjusting Bolt Lock Nuts
2003 40 (54)
2004 42 (57)
Tie Rod Lock Nut 33 (44)
Wheel Lug Nuts 80 (108)
111
WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS

WHEEL ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS
Application Preferred Range
Except DX
Camber (1)
Front 0 -.75 To .75
Rear -1 -1.5 To -.5
Caster (1) 3.25 2.5 To 4
Toe-In (2)
Front 0 (0) -.08 (-2) To .08
(2)
Rear .08 (2) 0 (0) To .16 (4)
Toe-In (1)
Front 0 -.16 To .16
Rear .16 0 To .32
Toe-Out On Turns (1)
Inner 38.83 N/A
Outer 31.67 N/A
Turning Angle (1)
Inward Wheel 38.83 36.83 To 40.83
Outward Wheel (Reference) 31.67 N/A
DX
Camber (1)
Front .5 -.25 To 1.25
Rear -.83 -1.33 To -.33
Caster 3.17 2.42 To 3.92
Toe-In (2)
Front 0 (0) -.08 (-2) To .08
(2)
Rear .08 (2) 0 (0) To .16 (4)
Toe-Out On Turns (1)
Inner 39 N/A
Outer 31.83 N/A
Turning Angle (1)
Inward Wheel 39 37 To 41
(1) Measurement in degrees.
(2) Measurement in inches (mm).
111
2003-06 TRANSMISSION Automatic Transmission - Accord (Except Hybrid & V6)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
NOTE: SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (IF automatic transmission

maintenance is required)
The Accord SRS includes a driver's airbag in the steering wheel hub, a
passenger's airbag in the dashboard above the glove box, seat belt
tensioners in the front seat belt retractors, side curtain airbags in the sides
of the roof, and side airbags in the front seat-backs. Information necessary
to safely service the SRS is included in this information. Servicing,
disassembling, or replacing these items require special precautions and
tools, and should be done only by an authorized Honda dealer.
 To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could lead to personal

injury or death in the event of a server frontal or side collision, all SRS
service work must be performed by an authorized Honda dealer.
 Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and
installation of the SRS, could lead to personal injury caused by
unintentional deployment of the airbags and/or side airbags.
 Do not bump or impact the SRS unit, front impact sensors, or side
impact sensors when the ignition switch is ON (II), or for at least 3
minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF; otherwise, the system
may fail in a collision, or the airbags may deploy.
 SRS electrical connectors are identified by yellow color coding. Related
components are located in the steering column, front console,
dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove
box, in the front seats, in the roof side, and around the floor. Do not use
electrical test equipment on these circuits.
SPECIAL TOOLS
111
2 августа 2011 г. 16:32:51
Fig. 1: View Of Special Service Tools And Description Chart

How to Check for DTCs with the Honda Diagnostic System
When the powertrain control module (PCM) senses an abnormality in the input or output systems, the D
indicator (A) in the gauge assembly (B) will usually blink.
111
Fig. 2: Locating Indicator In Gauge Assembly (Speedometer)

When the Honda diagnostic system (HDS) is connected to the data link connector (DLC) (A) (located under
the left end of the dash) and the SCS mode is selected, it will indicate the diagnostic trouble code (DTC)
when the ignition switch is turned ON (II) and the appropriate menu is selected.
111
Fig. 3: Connecting (HDS) To Data Link Connector

If the D indicator or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has been reported on, or if a driveability problem is
suspected, follow this procedure:
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC. (See the HDS user's manual for specific instructions.)
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), select A/T system, and observe the DTC in the DTCs MENU on the
HDS screen.
3. Record all fuel and emissions DTCs, A/T DTCs, and freeze data.
4. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the fuel and emissions system as indicated by the
DTC (except for DTC P0700, DTC P0700 means there is one or more A/T DTCs, and no problems
were detected in the fuel and emissions circuit of the PCM).
5. Clear the DTC and data.
6. Drive the vehicle for several minutes under the same conditions as those indicated by the freeze data,
and then recheck for a DTC. If the A/T DTC returns, go to DTC TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX. If
the DTC does not return, there was an intermittent problem within the circuit. Make sure all pins and
terminals in the circuit are tight.
Symptom Troubleshooting Versus DTC Troubleshooting
111
Some symptoms will not trigger diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) or cause the D indicator to blink. If the
malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) was reported ON or the D indicator has been blinking, check for DTCs. If
the vehicle has an abnormal symptom, and there are no DTCs stored, go to SYMPTOM
TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX. Check the list of probable cause(s) for the symptom, in the sequence
listed, until you find the problem.
How to Check for DTCs with the SCS Mode (retrieving the flash codes)
When the PCM senses an abnormality in the input or output system, the D indicator (A) in the gauge
assembly (B) will usually blink.
Fig. 4: Locating Indicator In Gauge Assembly (Speedometer)

When the D indicator has been reported on, connect the HDS to the DLC (A) (located under the left end of
the dash). Turn the ignition switch ON (II), select SCS mode, then the D indicator will indicate the DTC.
111

If the D indicator and the MIL come on at the same time, or if a driveability problem is suspected, follow
this procedure:
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC. (See the HDS user's manual for specific instructions.)
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), select SCS mode, then observe the D indicator in the gauge
assembly. Codes 1 through 9 are indicated by individual short blinks. Code 10 and above are indicated
by a series of long and short blinks. One long blink equals 10 short blinks. Add the long and short
blinks together to determine the code.
Example: DTC 1-1
111
Fig. 6: Indicator Blinking Pattern (Short And Long Blink)

3. Record all fuel and emissions DTCs and A/T DTCs.

4. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the fuel and emissions system as indicated by the
DTC (except DTC 70, DTC 70 means there is one or more A/T DTCs, and no problems were detected
in the fuel and emissions circuit of the PCM).
5. Clear the DTC and data.
6. Drive the vehicle for several minutes under the same conditions as those indicated by the freeze data,
and then recheck for DTC. If the A/T DTC returns, go to DTC TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX. If
the DTC does not return, there was an intermittent problem within the circuit. Make sure all pins and
terminals in the circuit are tight.
How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the PCM
Backprobe set 07SAZ-001000A (two required)
1. Pull back the carpet, and remove the passenger's center lower cover and rear vent duct (see step 5 on
DASHBOARD/STEERING HANGER BEAM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).
2. Inspect the circuit on the PCM, according to the DTC troubleshooting, with the special tools and a
digital multimeter.
3. Connect the backprobe adapters (A) to the stacking patch cords (B), and connect the cords to a
multimeter (C).
111
Fig. 7: Connecting Backprobe Adapters To Stacking Patch Cords And Multimeter

4. Using the wire insulation as a guide for the contoured tip of the backprobe adapter, gently slide the tip
into the connector from the wire side until it touches the end of the wire terminal.
5. If you cannot get to the wire side of the connector or the wire side is sealed, disconnect the connector
and use the tester probe to probe the connectors from the terminal side. Do not force the probe into the
connector.
Clear A/T DTCs, and PCM Reset Procedures
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC.

111

3. Clear the DTC(s) on the HDS screen.
OBD Status
The OBD Status shows the current system status of each DTC and all of the parameters. This function is
used to see if the technician's repair was successfully finished. The results of diagnostic tests for the DTC
are displayed as:
 PASSED: On Board Diagnosis is successfully finished.

 FAILED: On Board Diagnosis has finished but failed.
 NOT COMPLETED: The On Board Diagnosis was running but is out of the Enable conditions of the
DTC.
PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing
Honda Interface Module (HIM) EQS05A35570
Use this procedure when you have to substitute a known-good PCM in a troubleshooting procedure. Update
the PCM only if the PCM does not already have the latest software loaded.
NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating the PCM. If you turn the
ignition switch OFF before completion, the PCM can be damaged.
How to Update the PCM
NOTE:  To ensure the latest program is installed, update a PCM whenever the
PCM is substituted or replaced.
 You cannot update a PCM with the program it already has. It will only
accept a new program.
 Before you update the PCM, make sure the vehicle's battery is fully
charged.
 To prevent PCM damage, do not operate any electrical system; audio
system, brakes, air conditioning, power windows, moonroof, and door
locks, during the update.
 If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module (HIM) because the
HIM's red (# 3) light came on or was flashing during the update, leave
the ignition switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the HIM
from the data link connector (DLC). This will prevent PCM damage.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Do not start the engine.

2. Connect the HDS or the Honda interface module (HIM) to the DLC (A) located under the left end of
the dash.
111

3. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.

4. Do the TP POSITION CHECK in the ETCS TEST.
5. If the HDS does not have the update function, disconnect the HDS from the vehicle and connect the
Honda interface module (HIM).
6. If the software in the PCM is the latest, disconnect the HDS or the HIM from the DLC and go back to
the procedure that you were doing.
If the software in the PCM is not the latest, do the PCM update procedure as described on the HIM
label or in the PCM update system.
NOTE: If the PCM update system requires you to cool the PCM, follow what is
shown in the screen.
7. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see ECM/PCM IDLE LEARN PROCEDURE ).
8. Clean the CKP pattern with the HDS while the engine is stopped.
How to Substitute the PCM

111

4. Remove the PCM, and install a known-good PCM.
5. Rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM replacement procedure in the HDS; this will allow you to
start the engine.
6. After completing your test, reinstall the original PCM and rewrite the immobilizer code with the PCM
replacement procedure in the HDS again.
How to Remove and Install the PCM
1. Pull back the carpet, and remove the driver's and passenger's center lower covers and rear vent ducts
(see DASHBOARD/STEERING HANGER BEAM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ).
5. Disconnect PCM connectors.
6. Remove the two bolts, and remove the PCM.
7. Install the PCM in the reverse order of the removal.
How to End a Troubleshooting Session
This procedure must be done after any troubleshooting.

4. Clear the DTC(s) on the HDS screen.
6. Start the engine in the P or N position, and warm it up to normal operating temperature (the radiator
fan comes on).
7. To verify that the problem is repaired, test-drive the vehicle for several minutes at speeds over 30 mph
(50 km/h) or in freeze data range.
NOTE: Record all freeze data and review General Troubleshooting Information (see
GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION ) before you troubleshoot.
111
Fig. 9: DTC Troubleshooting Index (1 Of 3)

111

111


Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Check the multiplex integrated
control system - communication line
between the multiplex integrated
When you turn the ignition
Communication line between control unit and gauge control
switch ON (II), the D
multiplex integrated control unit module (see DTC B1007: MICU
indicator comes on and stays
and gauge control module LOST COMMUNICATION
on in all shift lever positions,
defective WITH THE COMBINATION
or it never comes on at all
SWITCH CONTROL UNIT
(HEADLIGHT SWITCH
MESSAGE) ).
Shift lever cannot be moved Check the interlock system - shift
A problem in the shift lock
from P while you are pressing lock system circuit (see SHIFT
system (interlock system)
on the brake pedal LOCK SYSTEM CIRCUIT
111
TROUBLESHOOTING ).
Ignition switch cannot be Check the interlock system - key
moved from ACC (I) to A problem in the key interlock interlock system circuit (see KEY
LOCK (0) (key is pushed in, system (interlock system) INTERLOCK SYSTEM CIRCUIT
shift lever in P) TROUBLESHOOTING ).

Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
 Check the ATF level, and

check the ATF cooler lines for
leakage and loose connections.
If necessary, clean the ATF
cooler lines.
 Check for a loose shift cable at
the shift lever and the
transmission control shaft.
 Improper alignment of ATF
1. Low ATF level pump and torque converter
2. Shift cable broken or out housing may cause ATF pump
of adjustment seizure. The symptoms are
mostly an rpm-related ticking
3. Connection between the noise or a high pitched squeak.
shift cable and
transmission or body is  Check the line pressure.
worn  Be careful not to damage the
4. ATF pump worn or torque converter housing
binding when replacing the main ball
Engine runs, but vehicle does bearing. You may also
5. Regulator valve stuck or damage the ATF pump when
not move in any gear
spring worn you torque down the main
6. ATF strainer clogged valve body. This will result in
7. Mainshaft worn or ATF pump seizure if not
damaged detected. Use the proper tools.
8. Final gears worn or  Install the main seal flush with
damaged the torque converter housing.
If you push it into the torque
9. Transmission-to-engine
converter housing until it tops
assembly error
out, it will block the fluid
10. Axle disengaged return passage and result in
damage.
 Check the ATF strainer for
debris. If the ATF strainer is
clogged with particles of steel
or aluminum, inspect the ATF
pump. If the ATF pump is
OK, find the damaged
components that caused the
debris. If no cause for
contamination is found,
111
replace the torque converter.

 Inspect the differential pinion
gears for wear. If the
differential pinion gears are
worn, replace the differential
assembly, replace the ATF
strainer, thoroughly clean the
transmission, and clean the
torque converter, cooler, and
lines.
 Check the 1st clutch pressure.
 Inspect the clutch piston,
clutch piston check valve, and
O-rings. Check the spring
retainer and retainer seal for
wear and damage. Inspect the
clutch end-plate-to-top-disc
clearance. If the clearance is
out of tolerance, inspect the
clutch discs and plates for
wear and damage. If the discs
1. 1st accumulator defective are worn or damaged, replace
Vehicle moves in 2 and R, but them as a set. Inspect the
not in D, D3, or 1 2. 1st gears worn or damaged clutch waved-plate height. If
3. 1st clutch defective the height is out of tolerance,
replace the waved-plate. If the
discs and plates are OK, adjust
the clearance with the clutch
end plate.
 Inspect the 1st clutch feed
pipe. If the 1st clutch feed
pipe is scored, replace the end
cover.
 Replace the secondary shaft if
the bushing for the 1st clutch
feed pipe is loose or damaged.
 Check the 2nd clutch pressure.
1. 2nd accumulator defective retainer and retainer seal for
Vehicle moves in D, D3, 1, 2. 2nd gears worn or wear and damage. Inspect the
and R, but not in 2 damaged clutch end-plate-to-top-disc
3. 2nd clutch defective
out of tolerance, inspect the
are worn or damaged, replace
them as a set. Inspect the
111
clutch waved-plate height. If

the height is out of tolerance,
end plate.
 Check the D indicator, and
check for loose connectors.
Inspect the shift solenoid
valve E for seizure, and O-
rings for wear and damage.
 Check for a missing shift fork
bolt on the shift fork shaft.
 Check the 4th clutch pressure.
retainer for wear and damage.
Inspect the clutch end-plate-
to-top-disc clearance. If the
1. Shift solenoid valve E clearance is out of tolerance,
defective inspect the clutch discs and
2. Shift fork shaft stuck plates for wear and damage. If
the discs are worn or
3. Shift valve E defective damaged, replace them as a
Vehicle moves in D, D3, 2,
and 1, but not in R 4. 4th/reverse accumulator set. Inspect the clutch waved-
defective plate height. If the height is
5. 4th clutch defective out of tolerance, replace the
6. Reverse gears worn or waved-plate. If the discs and
damaged plates are OK, adjust the
clearance with the clutch end
plate.
 Inspect the reverse selector
gear teeth chamfers, and
inspect the engagement teeth
chamfers of the countershaft
4th gear and reverse gear.
Replace the reverse gears and
the reverse selector if they are
worn or damaged. If the
transmission makes a clicking,
grinding, or whirring noise,
also replace the mainshaft 4th
gear, reverse idler gear, and
countershaft 4th gear.

111
cooler lines.
1. Low ATF level  Improper alignment of ATF
pump and torque converter
2. Shift cable broken or out housing may cause ATF pump
of adjustment seizure. The symptoms are
Poor acceleration; flares when
3. ATF pump worn or mostly an rpm-related ticking
starting off in D, D3, and R;
binding noise or a high pitched squeak.
stall speed high in 2 and 1,
and in D and D3 in 1st and 4. Regulator valve stuck or  Check the ATF strainer for
2nd spring worn debris. If the ATF strainer is
5. ATF strainer clogged clogged with particles of steel
6. Torque converter check or aluminum, inspect the ATF
valve defective pump. If the ATF pump is
components that caused the
debris. If no cause for
contamination is found,
replace the torque converter.
 Check the 2nd clutch pressure.
wear and damage. Inspect the
clutch end-plate-to-top-disc
Poor acceleration; flares when clearance. If the clearance is
starting off in D, D3, and R; out of tolerance, inspect the
2nd clutch defective clutch discs and plates for
stall speed high when starting
off in 2 wear and damage. If the discs
are worn or damaged, replace
end plate.
 Check the 4th clutch pressure
in the D and R positions.
Inspect the clutch end-plate-
111
to-top-disc clearance. If the

clearance is out of tolerance,
inspect the clutch discs and
plates for wear and damage. If
Poor acceleration; flares when 1. Shift cable broken or out damaged, replace them as a
starting off in D, D3, and R; of adjustment set. Inspect the clutch waved-
stall speed high in R 2. 4th clutch defective plate height. If the height is
out of tolerance, replace the
waved-plate. If the discs and
plates are OK, adjust the
plate.
1. Shift solenoid valve E
defective
2. Torque converter one-way  Check the D indicator, and
clutch defective check for loose connectors.
Poor acceleration; stall speed
Inspect the shift solenoid
low in 2 and 1, and in D and 3. Engine output low valve E for seizure, and O-ring
D3 in 1st and 2nd 4. Torque converter clutch for wear and damage.
piston defective  Replace the torque converter.
5. Lock-up shift valve
defective
1. Engine output low
Poor acceleration; stall speed 2. Torque converter clutch
piston defective Replace the torque converter.
low in R
defective

cooler lines.
1. Low ATF level housing may cause ATF pump
2. Shift solenoid valve E seizure. The symptoms are
Engine idle vibration defective mostly an rpm-related ticking
3. Drive plate defective or noise or a high pitched squeak
transmission misassembled  Inspect the ATF strainer for
4. Engine output low clogging with particles of steel
or aluminum. If the ATF
5. Torque converter clutch strainer is clogged, replace it,
piston defective and clean the torque converter,
6. ATF pump worn or cooler, and lines.
binding  Check the D indicator, and
7. Lock-up shift valve check for loose connectors.
defective Inspect the shift solenoid
111
8. Misadjusted engine and valve E for seizure, and O-

transmission mounts rings for wear and damage.
 Check for a
misinstalled/damaged drive
plate.
 Set idle rpm in gear to the
specified idle speed. If still no
good, adjust the engine and
transmission mounts.
 Replace the torque converter.

drain the ATF if it is over-
filled.
 Check the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th,
and 5th clutch pressures.
 Check the ATF strainer for
debris. If the ATF strainer is
clogged with particles of steel
or aluminum, inspect the ATF
pump. If the ATF pump is
1. Excessive ATF
2. Foreign material in components that caused the
separator plate orifice debris. If no cause for
3. Relief valve defective contamination is found,
4. 1st clutch defective replace the torque converter.
5. 2nd clutch defective  Inspect the clutch piston,
6. 3rd clutch defective O-rings. Check the spring
Vehicle moves in N 7. 4th clutch defective retainer and retainer seal (1st,
8. 5th clutch defective 2nd, and 3rd) for wear and
damage. Inspect the clutch
9. Clutch end plate-to-top
end-plate-to-top-disc
disc clearance incorrect
10. Needle bearing seized up, out of tolerance, inspect the
worn, or damaged clutch discs and plates for
11. Thrust washer seized up, wear and damage. If the discs
worn, or damaged are worn or damaged, replace
end plate.
cover.
111
 Inspect the 3rd clutch feed

pipe. If the 3rd clutch feed
pipe is scored, replace it and
O-ring under the feed pipe
guide.
the bushing for the 1st or 3rd
clutch feed pipe is loose or
damaged.
 Inspect the 5th clutch feed
pipe. If the 5th clutch feed
the O-ring under the feed pipe
guide.
 Replace the mainshaft if the
bushing for the 5th clutch feed
pipe is loose or damaged.

 Inspect the solenoid valve
filter/gasket and O-rings for
1. Shift solenoid valve E wear and damage, and inspect
defective the solenoid valves for
2. A/T clutch pressure control seizure.
solenoid valve A defective  Check the input shaft
3. A/T clutch pressure control (mainshaft) speed sensor and
solenoid valve B defective output shaft (countershaft)
speed sensor installation.
4. A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve C defective  Check for a loose shift cable at
Late shift after shifting from 5. Shift cable broken or out transmission control shaft.
N to D and D3, or excessive of adjustment
 Check the 1st clutch pressure.
shock when shifted into D and 6. Connection between the
D3 shift cable and  Inspect the clutch piston,
transmission or body is clutch piston check valve, and
worn O-rings. Check the spring
7. Input shaft (mainshaft) wear and damage. Inspect the
speed sensor defective clutch end-plate-to-top-disc
8. Output shaft (countershaft) clearance. If the clearance is
speed sensor defective out of tolerance, inspect the
9. ATF temperature sensor clutch discs and plates for
defective wear and damage. If the discs
10. Foreign material in are worn or damaged, replace
separator plate orifice them as a set. Inspect the
11. Servo control valve the height is out of tolerance,
defective replace the waved-plate. If the
12. 1st accumulator defective discs and plates are OK, adjust
111
13. 1st check ball stuck the clearance with the clutch
end plate.
14. Lock-upshift valve
defective  Inspect the 1st clutch feed
15. 1st clutch defective pipe is scored, replace the end
cover.
wear and damage, and inspect
1. Shift solenoid valve E the solenoid valves for
defective seizure.
2. A/T clutch pressure control  Check the input shaft
solenoid valve A defective (mainshaft) speed sensor and
3. Shift cable broken or out output shaft (countershaft)
of adjustment speed sensor installation.
4. Loose or poor connection  Check for a loose shift cable at
between the shift cable and the shift lever and the
transmission or body is transmission control shaft.
worn  Inspect the clutch piston,
5. Input shaft (mainshaft) clutch piston check valve, and
speed sensor defective O-rings. Check the spring
Late shift after shifting from retainer for wear and damage.
N to R, or excessive shock 6. Output shaft (countershaft) Inspect the clutch end-plate-
when shifted into R speed sensor defective to-top-disc clearance. If the
7. ATF temperature sensor clearance is out of tolerance,
defective inspect the clutch discs and
8. Shift fork shaft stuck plates for wear and damage. If
9. Foreign material in the discs are worn or
separator plate orifice damaged, replace them as a
set. Inspect the clutch waved-
10. Shift valve E defective plate height. If the height is
11. 4th/reverse accumulator out of tolerance, replace the
defective waved-plate. If the discs and
12. Lock-up shift valve plates are OK, adjust the
defective clearance with the clutch end
plate.
13. 4th clutch defective
 Check for a missing shift fork
bolt on the shift fork shaft.
 Check the 4th clutch pressure.
 Inspect the servo valve and O-
ring.
1. Input shaft (mainshaft) check for loose connectors.
111
speed sensor defective  Check the input shaft

The A/T does not shift 2. Output shaft (countershaft) (mainshaft) and output shaft
speed sensor defective (countershaft) speed sensor
installation.
solenoid valve B defective  Check the D indicator, and
2. A/T clutch pressure control check for loose connectors.
solenoid valve C defective  Inspect the solenoid valve
3. Input shaft (mainshaft) filter/gasket and O-rings for
Excessive shock or flares on speed sensor defective wear and damage, and inspect
all upshifts and downshifts the solenoid valves for
4. Output shaft (countershaft) seizure.
speed sensor defective
 Check the input shaft
5. ATF temperature sensor (mainshaft) speed sensor and
defective output shaft (countershaft)
6. Foreign material in speed sensor installation.
separator plate orifice

1. Shift solenoid valve E filter/gasket and O-rings for
defective wear and damage, and inspect
2. A/T clutch pressure control the solenoid valves for
solenoid valve A defective seizure.
3. A/T clutch pressure control  Check the 1st and 2nd clutch
solenoid valve B defective pressures.
4. A/T clutch pressure control  Inspect the clutch piston,
solenoid valve C defective clutch piston check valve, and
5. 2nd clutch transmission retainer and retainer seal for
fluid pressure switch wear and damage. Inspect the
Excessive shock or flares on defective clutch end-plate-to-top-disc
1-2 upshift or 2-1 downshift 6. Foreign material in clearance. If the clearance is
separator plate orifice out of tolerance, inspect the
7. 1st accumulator defective clutch discs and plates for
8. 2nd accumulator defective are worn or damaged, replace
9. 1st check ball stuck them as a set. Inspect the
10. 2nd check ball stuck clutch waved-plate height. If
11. Lock-up shift valve the height is out of tolerance,
defective replace the waved-plate. If the
12. 1st clutch defective the clearance with the clutch
13. 2nd clutch defective end plate.
cover.
111

filter/gasket for wear and
damage, and inspect the
solenoid valves for seizure.
 Check the 2nd and 3rd clutch
pressures.
1. A/T clutch pressure control clutch piston check valve, and
solenoid valve B defective O-rings. Check the spring
2. A/T clutch pressure control retainer and retainer seal for
solenoid valve C defective wear and damage. Inspect the
3. 3rd clutch transmission clutch end-plate-to-top-disc
fluid pressure switch clearance. If the clearance is
defective out of tolerance, inspect the
Excessive shock or flares on clutch discs and plates for
2-3 upshift or 3-2 downshift 4. Foreign material in wear and damage. If the discs
separator plate orifice are worn or damaged, replace
5. 2nd accumulator defective them as a set. Inspect the
6. 3rd accumulator defective clutch waved-plate height. If
7. 2nd check ball stuck the height is out of tolerance,
8. 2nd clutch defective discs and plates are OK, adjust
9. 3rd clutch defective the clearance with the clutch
end plate.
 Inspect the 3rd clutch feed
pipe. If the 3rd clutch feed
guide.
the bushing for the 3rd clutch
the solenoid valves for
seizure.
 Check the 3rd and 4th clutch
pressures.
111

retainer and retainer seal (3rd)
for wear and damage. Inspect
the clutch end-plate-to-top-
disc clearance. If the clearance
is out of tolerance, inspect the
1. A/T clutch pressure control wear and damage. If the discs
solenoid valve B defective are worn or damaged, replace
2. A/T clutch pressure control them as a set. Inspect the
solenoid valve C defective clutch waved-plate height. If
Excessive shock or flares on 3. Foreign material in the height is out of tolerance,
3-4 upshift or 4-3 downshift separator plate orifice replace the waved-plate. If the
4. 3rd accumulator defective discs and plates are OK, adjust
5. 4th accumulator defective end plate.
6. 3rd clutch defective  Inspect the 3rd clutch feed
7. 4th clutch defective pipe. If the 3rd clutch feed
guide.
the bushing for the 3rd clutch

the solenoid valves for
1. A/T clutch pressure control seizure.
solenoid valve B defective  Check the 4th and 5th clutch
2. A/T clutch pressure control pressures.
solenoid valve C defective  Inspect the clutch piston,
3. Foreign material in clutch piston check valve, and
Excessive shock or flares on O-rings. Check the spring
4-5 upshift or 5-4 downshift separator plate orifice
4. 4th accumulator defective Inspect the clutch end-plate-
5. 5th accumulator defective to-top-disc clearance. If the
6. 4th clutch defective clearance is out of tolerance,
inspect the clutch discs and
7. 5th clutch defective
plates for wear and damage. If
damaged, replace them as a
set. Inspect the clutch waved-
plate height. If the height is
out of tolerance, replace the
waved-plate. If the discs and
plates are OK, adjust the
111

plate.
 Inspect the 5th clutch feed
pipe. If the 5th clutch feed
guide.
 Replace the mainshaft if the
bushing for the 5th clutch feed
pipe is loose or damaged.
housing may cause ATF pump
seizure. The symptoms are
mostly an rpm-related ticking
noise or a high pitched squeak.
 Be careful not to damage the
torque converter housing
when replacing the main ball
bearing. You may also
damage the ATF pump when
you torque down the main
valve body. This will result in
1. ATF pump worn or ATF pump seizure if not
binding detected. Use the proper tools.
Noise from transmission in all 2. Mainshaft bearing,
shift lever positions  Install the main seal flush with
countershaft bearing, or the torque converter housing.
secondary shaft bearing If you push it into the torque
defective converter housing until it tops
out, it will block the fluid
return passage and result in
damage.
 Inspect the ATF strainer for
clogging with particles of steel
or aluminum. If the ATF
strainer is clogged, replace it,
and clean the torque converter,
cooler, and lines.
 Inspect the mainshaft,
countershaft and secondary
shaft for wear or damage.
Vehicle does not accelerate Torque converter one-way clutch
Replace the torque converter.
above 31 mph (50 km/h) defective
 Check for a
Vibration in all shift lever Drive plate defective or misinstalled/damaged drive
positions transmission misassembled plate.
 Set idle rpm in gear to the
specified idle speed. If still no
111
good, adjust the engine and

transmission mounts.
1. Transmission range switch
defective or out of  Check the D indicator, and
adjustment check for loose connectors.
Shift lever does not operate 2. Shift cable broken or out  Inspect the transmission range
smoothly of adjustment switch for operation.
3. Connection between the  Check for a loose shift cable at
shift cable and the shift lever and the
worn
 Check the park pawl spring
1. Shift cable broken or out installation and the park lever
of adjustment spring installation. If
2. Connection between the installation is incorrect, install
Transmission does not shift the spring correctly. Make
into P shift cable and
transmission or body is sure that the park lever stop is
worn not installed upside down.
Check the distance between
3. Park mechanism defective the park pawl shaft and park
lever roller pin. If the distance
is out of tolerance, adjust the
distance with the park lever
stop.
defective
solenoid valve A defective
Torque converter clutch does  Inspect the solenoid valve
3. Torque converter clutch
not disengage filter/gasket for wear and
piston defective
4. Lock-up shift valve solenoid valves for seizure.
defective
5. Lock-up control valve
defective

defective  Check the D indicator, and
2. A/T clutch pressure control check for loose connectors.
Torque converter clutch does solenoid valve A defective  Inspect the solenoid valve
not operate smoothly 3. Torque converter clutch filter/gasket for wear and
piston defective damage, and inspect the
4. Torque converter check
valve defective  Replace the torque converter.
111
defective
defective
defective
solenoid valve A defective  Check the D indicator, and
3. Input shaft (mainshaft)
speed sensor defective  Inspect the solenoid valve
filter/gasket for wear and
4. Output shaft (countershaft)
Torque converter clutch does speed sensor defective
not engage 5. Torque converter clutch
piston defective
 Check the input shaft
6. Torque converter check
(mainshaft) speed sensor and
valve defective
output shaft (countershaft)
7. Lock-up shift valve speed sensor installation.
defective
defective
1. Transmission range switch
defective or out of  Check the D indicator, and
adjustment check for loose connectors.
A/T gear position indicator 2. Shift cable broken or out  Inspect the transmission range
does not indicate shift lever of adjustment switch operation.
positions 3. Connection between the  Check for a loose shift cable at
shift cable and the shift lever and the
worn
Speedometer and odometer do Output shaft (countershaft) speed  Inspect the transmission range
not work sensor defective switch operation.
 Check the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor
installation.
The engine does not rev to
high rpm, and the
VTEC rocker arms defective Check the engine rocker arms.
transmission upshifts at low
rpm
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
General Operation
The automatic transmission is a combination of a 3-element torque converter and triple-shaft electronically
controlled unit which provides 5 speeds forward and 1 reverse. The entire unit is positioned in line with the
111
engine.
Torque Converter, Gears, and Clutches
The torque converter consists of a pump, turbine, and stator assembly in a single unit. The converter housing
(pump) is connected to the engine crankshaft and turns as the engine turns. Around the outside of the torque
converter is a ring gear which meshes with the starter pinion when the engine is being started. The entire
torque converter assembly serves as a flywheel while transmitting power to the transmission mainshaft, the
transmission has three parallel shafts; the mainshaft, the countershaft, and the secondary shaft. The
mainshaft is in line with the engine crankshaft, and includes the 4th and 5th clutches, and gears for 5th, 4th,
reverse, and idler. The mainshaft reverse gear is integral with the mainshaft 4th gear. The countershaft
includes the gears for 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, reverse, park, and the final drive. The final drive gear is integral
with the countershaft. The countershaft 4th gear and the countershaft reverse gear can be locked to the
countershaft providing 4th or reverse gear, depending on which way the selector is moved. The secondary
shaft includes the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd clutches, and gears for 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and idler. The idler shaft is located
between the mainshaft and secondary shaft, and the idler gear transmits power between the mainshaft and
the secondary shaft. The gears on the mainshaft and the secondary shaft are in constant mesh with those on
the countershaft. When certain combinations of gears in the transmission are engaged by the clutches, power
is transmitted through the mainshaft, then to the secondary shaft to the countershaft provide drive.
Electronic Control
The electronic control system consists of the powertrain control module (PCM), sensors, and solenoid
valves. Shifting and lock-up are electronically controlled for comfortable driving under all conditions. The
PCM is located below the dashboard, under the front lower panel behind the center console.
Hydraulic Control
The valve bodies include the main valve body, the regulator valve body, and the servo body. They are bolted
to the torque converter housing. The main valve body contains the manual valve, the shift valves A, B, C,
and E, the relief valve, the lock-up control valve, the cooler check valve, the servo control valve, and the
ATF pump gears. The regulator valve body contains the regulator valve, the torque converter check valve,
lock-up shift valve, and the 1st and 3rd accumulators. The servo body contains the servo valve, the shift
valve D, accumulators for 2nd, 4th, and 5th, and shift solenoid valves for A, B, C, D, and E. Fluid from the
regulator passes through the manual valve to the various control valves. The 1st, 3rd, 5th clutches receive
fluid from their respective feed pipes, and the 2nd and the 4th clutches receive fluid from the internal
hydraulic circuit.
Shift Control Mechanism
The PCM controls to shift gears shift solenoid valves A, B, C, D, and E, and the A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valves A, B, and C, while receiving input signals from various sensors and switches located
throughout the vehicle. The shift solenoid valves shift the positions of the shift valves to switch the port
leading hydraulic pressure to the clutch. The A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C
regulate their respective pressure, and pressurize to the clutches to engage it and its corresponding gear. The
pressures of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves also apply to the shift valves to switch the port.
Lock-up Mechanism
The lock-up mechanism operates in the D position (2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th), and in D3 position (2nd and 3rd).
The pressurized fluid is drained from the back of the torque converter through a fluid passage, causing the
torque converter clutch piston to be held against the torque converter cover. As this takes place, the
111
mainshaft rotates at the same speed as the engine crankshaft. Together with the hydraulic control, the PCM
optimizes the timing and volume of the lock-up mechanism. When the shift solenoid valve E is turned on by
the PCM, shift solenoid valve E pressure switches the lock-up shift valve on and off. The A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A and the lock-up control valve control the volume of the lock-up
conditions.
Gear Selection
The shift lever has seven positions; P: PARK, R: REVERSE, N: NEUTRAL, D: 1st through 5th gear ranges,
D3: 1st through 3rd gear ranges, 2: 2nd gear, and 1: 1st gear.
GEAR POSITION DESCRIPTIONS

Position Description
Front wheels locked; park pawl engaged with park gear on countershaft. All clutches
P: PARK
are released.
Reverse; reverse selector engaged with countershaft reverse gear and 4th clutch
R: REVERSE
engaged.
N: NEUTRAL All clutches are released.
General driving; starts off in 1st, shifts automatically to 2nd, 3rd, 4th, then 5th,
D: DRIVE (1st depending on vehicle speed and throttle position. Downshifts through 4th, 3rd, 2nd,
through 5th) and 1st on deceleration to stop. The lock-up mechanism operates in 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and
5th gear.
Used for rapid acceleration at highway speeds and general driving; up-hill and down-
D3: DRIVE
hill driving; starts off in 1st, shifts automatically to 2nd, then 3rd, depending on
(1st through
vehicle speed and throttle position. Downshifts through 2nd to 1st on deceleration to
3rd)
stop. The lock-up mechanism operates in 2nd and 3rd gear.
Used for engine braking or better traction starting off on loose or slippery surfaces;
2: SECOND
stays in 2nd gear; does not shift up or down.
1: FIRST Used for engine braking; stays in 1st gear; does not shift up.
Starting is possible only in the P and N positions because of a slide-type neutral-safety switch.
Automatic Transmission (A/T) Gear Position Indicator
The A/T gear position indicator in the instrument panel shows which shift lever position has been selected
without having to look down at the shift lever.
Clutches and Gears
The 5-speed automatic transmission uses hydraulically-actuated clutches to engage or disengage the
transmission gears. When hydraulic pressure is introduced into the clutch drum, the clutch piston moves.
This presses the friction discs and steel plates together, locking them so they don't slip. Power is then
transmitted through the engaged clutch pack to its hub-mounted gear. Likewise, when the hydraulic pressure
is bled from the clutch pack, the piston releases the friction discs and steel plates, and they are free to slide
past each other. This allows the gear to spin independently on its shaft, transmitting no power.
1st Clutch
The 1st clutch engages/disengages 1st gear, and is located at the middle of the secondary shaft. The 1st
clutch is joined back-to-back to the 3rd clutch. The 1st clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed
111
pipe within the secondary shaft.
2nd Clutch
The 2nd clutch engages/disengages 2nd gear, and is located at the end of the secondary shaft, opposite the
end cover. The 2nd clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by a circuit connected to the internal hydraulic
circuit.
3rd Clutch
The 3rd clutch engages/disengages 3rd gear, and is located at the middle of the secondary shaft. The 3rd
clutch is joined back-to-back to the 1st clutch. The 3rd clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed
pipe within the secondary shaft.
4th Clutch
The 4th clutch engages/disengages 4th gear, as well as reverse gear, and is located at the middle of the
mainshaft. The 4th clutch is joined back-to-back to the 5th clutch. The 4th clutch is supplied hydraulic
pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the mainshaft.
5th Clutch
The 5th clutch engages/disengages 5th gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The 5th clutch is
joined back-to-back to the 4th clutch. The 5th clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe
within the mainshaft.
Gear operation
Gears on the mainshaft:
 4th gear engages/disengages with the mainshaft by the 4th clutch.

 5th gear engages/disengages with the mainshaft by the 5th clutch.
 Reverse gear engages/disengages with the mainshaft by the 4th clutch.
 Idler gear is splined with the mainshaft, and rotates with the mainshaft.
Gears on the countershaft:
 Final drive gear is integral with the countershaft.

 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 5th, and park gears are splined with the countershaft, and rotate with the countershaft.
 4th gear and reverse gear rotate freely from the countershaft. The reverse selector engages 4th gear
and reverse gear with the reverse selector hub. The reverse selector hub is splined to the countershaft
so that the 4th gear and reverse gear engage with the countershaft.
Gears on the secondary shaft:
 1st gear engages/disengages with the secondary shaft by the 1st clutch.
 2nd gear engages/disengages with the secondary shaft by the 2nd clutch.
 3rd gear engages/disengages with the secondary shaft by the 3rd clutch.
 Idler gear is splined with the secondary shaft, and rotates with the secondary shaft.
111
The idler gear on the idler shaft transmits power between the mainshaft and the secondary shaft.
The reverse idler gear transmits power from the mainshaft reverse gear to the countershaft reverse gear, and
changes rotational direction of the countershaft to reverse.
Transmission Cutaway View
Fig. 12: Automatic Transmission Cross Sectional View

Power Flow
P Position
111
Hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted to the countershaft. The
countershaft is locked by the park pawl, interlocking the park gear.
N Position
Engine power transmitted from the torque converter drives the mainshaft idler gear, the idler shaft idler gear,
and the secondary shaft idler gear, but hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not
transmitted to the countershaft.
In this position, the position of the reverse selector differs according to whether the shift lever shifted from
the D or R position:
 When shifted from the D position, the reverse selector engages with the countershaft 4th gear and the
reverse selector hub, and the 4th gear engages with the countershaft.
 When shifted from the R position, the reverse selector engages with the countershaft reverse gear and
the reverse selector hub, and the reverse gear engages with the countershaft.
Fig. 13: Automatic Transmission Cross Sectional View - Power Flow

1st Gear
111
 Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch, then the 1st clutch engages the secondary shaft 1st gear
with the secondary shaft.
 The mainshaft idler gear drives the secondary shaft via the idler shaft idler gear and the secondary
shaft idler gear.
 The secondary shaft 1st gear drives the countershaft 1st gear and the countershaft.
 Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear.
Fig. 14: Automatic Transmission Cross Sectional View - Power Flow (1st Gear)
2nd Gear
 Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 2nd clutch, then the 2nd clutch engages the secondary shaft 2nd
gear with the secondary shaft.
 The mainshaft idler gear drives the secondary shaft via the idler shaft idler gear and the secondary
shaft idler gear.
 The secondary shaft 2nd gear drives the countershaft 2nd gear and the countershaft.
111
Fig. 15: Automatic Transmission Cross Sectional View - Power Flow (2nd Gear)
3rd Gear
 Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 3rd clutch, then the 3rd clutch engages the secondary shaft 3rd
gear with the secondary shaft.
 The mainshaft idler gear drives the secondary shaft via the idler shaft idler gear and secondary shaft
idler gear.
 The secondary shaft 3rd gear drives the countershaft 3rd gear and the countershaft.
111
Fig. 16: Automatic Transmission Cross Sectional View - Power Flow (3rd Gear)
4th Gear
 Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector with the countershaft
4th gear and reverse selector hub while the shift lever is in forward range (D, D3, 2, and 1 positions).
 Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 4th clutch, then the 4th clutch engages the mainshaft 4th gear
with the mainshaft.
 The mainshaft 4th gear drives the countershaft 4th gear and the countershaft.
111
Fig. 17: Automatic Transmission Cross Sectional View - Power Flow (4th Gear)
5th Gear
 Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 5th clutch, then the 5th clutch engages the mainshaft 5th gear with
the mainshaft.
 The mainshaft 5th gear drives the countershaft 5th gear and the countershaft.
111
Fig. 18: Automatic Transmission Cross Sectional View - Power Flow (5th Gear)
R Position
 Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector with the countershaft
reverse gear and reverse selector hub while the shift lever is in the R position.
 Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 4th clutch, then the 4th clutch engages the mainshaft reverse
gear with the mainshaft.
 The mainshaft reverse gear drives the countershaft reverse gear via the reverse idler gear.
 The rotation direction of the countershaft reverse gear is changed by the reverse idler gear.
 The countershaft reverse gear drives the countershaft via the reverse selector, which drives the reverse
selector hub.
111
Fig. 19: Automatic Transmission Cross Sectional View - Power Flow (R Position)
Electronic Control System
Functional Diagram
The electronic control system consists of the powertrain control module (PCM), sensors, and solenoid
valves. Shifting and lock-up are electronically controlled for comfortable driving under all conditions.
The PCM receives input signals from the sensors, switches, and other control units, processes data, and
outputs signals for the engine control system and A/T control system. The A/T control system includes shift
control, grade logic control, clutch pressure control, and lock-up control.
The PCM switches the shift solenoid valves and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves to control
shifting transmission gears and lock-up torque converter clutch.
111
Fig. 20: Automatic Transmission Electronic Control System Functional Diagram

Electronic Controls Location
111
Fig. 21: Locating Automatic Transmission Electronic Control System Components Position
Shift Control
The PCM instantly determines which gear should be selected by various signals sent from sensors and
switches, and it actuates the shift solenoid valves A, B, C, D, and E to control shifting.
Also, a grade logic control system has been adopted to control shifting in D and D3 positions. The PCM
compares actual driving conditions with memorized driving conditions, based on the input from the throttle
position sensor (2003-2005 models), the accelerator pedal position sensor (2006 model), the engine coolant
temperature sensor, the barometric pressure sensor, the brake pedal position switch signal, and the shift lever
position signal, to control shifting while the vehicle is ascending or descending a slope.
111
Fig. 22: Automatic Transmission Shift Control Functional Diagram

The PCM turns the shift solenoid valves A, B, C, D, and E ON and OFF to control transmission gear
shifting. The combination of driving signals to shift solenoid valves A, B, C, D, and E are shown in the
table.
GEAR POSITION AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE CONDITION SPECIFICATIONS

Shift solenoid valves
Position Gear position
A B C D E
Shifting from
OFF ON ON OFF OFF
N position
Stays in 1st ON ON ON OFF OFF
Shifting gears
D, D3 between 1st OFF ON ON OFF OFF
and 2nd
Stays in 2nd OFF ON OFF ON OFF or ON
Shifting gears
111
between 2nd
OFF ON ON ON OFF or ON
and 3rd
Stays in 3rd OFF OFF ON OFF OFF or ON
Shifting gears
between 3rd OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF or ON
and 4th
Stays in 4th ON OFF OFF OFF OFF or ON
D
Shifting gears
between 4th ON OFF OFF ON OFF or ON
and 5th
Stays in 5th ON OFF ON ON OFF or ON
2 2nd gear OFF ON OFF ON OFF
1 1st gear ON ON ON OFF OFF
Shifting from
P and N OFF ON OFF OFF ON
position
R
Stays in
ON ON OFF OFF ON
reverse
Reverse inhibit OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
P Park OFF ON OFF OFF ON
N Neutral OFF ON ON OFF OFF
Grade Logic Control: Ascending Control
When the PCM determines that the vehicle is climbing a hill in D and D3 positions, the system extends the
engagement area of 2nd, 3rd, and 4th gears to prevent the transmission from frequently shifting between 2nd
and 3rd gears, between 3rd and 4th gears, and between 4th and 5th gears, so the vehicle can run smooth and
have more power when needed.
Shift schedules stored in the PCM between 2nd and 3rd gears, between 3rd and 4th gears, and between 4th
and 5th gears, enable it to automatically select the most suitable gear according to the magnitude of a
gradient.
Fig. 23: Ascending Control - Vehicle Speed And Throttle Opening Graph
111
Grade Logic Control: Descending Control
When the PCM determines that the vehicle is going down a hill in D and D3 positions, the shift-up speed
from 4th to 5th gear, from 3rd to 4th gear, and from 2nd to 3rd gear (when the throttle is closed) becomes
faster than the set speed for flat road driving to widen the 4th gear, 3rd gear, and 2nd gear driving area. This,
in combination with engine braking from the deceleration lock-up, achieves smooth driving when the
vehicle is descending. There are three descending modes with different 4th gear driving areas, 3rd gear
driving areas, and 2nd gear driving areas according to the magnitude of a gradient stored in the PCM. When
the vehicle is in 5th gear or 4th gear, and you are decelerating when you are applying the brakes on a steep
hill, the transmission will downshift to lower gear. When you accelerate, the transmission will then return to
a higher gear.
Fig. 24: Descending Control - Vehicle Speed And Throttle Opening Graph
Clutch Pressure Control
The PCM actuates the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C to control the clutch
pressure. When shifting between lower and higher gears, the clutch pressure regulated by the A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C engages and disengages the clutch smoothly.
The PCM receives input signals from the various sensors and switches, performs data processing, and
outputs a current to the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C.
111
Fig. 25: Automatic Transmission Clutch Pressure Control Functional Diagram

Lock-up Control
The shift solenoid valve E controls the hydraulic pressure to switch the lock-up shift valve and lock-up ON
and OFF.
The PCM actuates the shift solenoid valve E and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to control
the torque converter clutch lock-up. When the shift solenoid valve E is turned ON, the lock-up condition
starts.
The A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A regulates and apply the hydraulic pressure to the lock-up
control valve to control the amount of the lock-up.
The lock-up mechanism operates in 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears in D position, and 2nd and 3rd gears in D3
position.
111
Fig. 26: Automatic Transmission Lock-Up Control Functional Diagram

PCM Electrical Connections - 2003-2004 Models
111
Fig. 27: Automatic Transmission PCM Electrical Connections Diagram (2003-2004 Models)
PCM Electrical Connections - 2005-2006 Models
111
Fig. 28: Automatic Transmission PCM Electrical Connections Diagram (2005-2006 Models)
PCM Inputs and Outputs
111
Fig. 29: View Of PCM Connector Terminals And PCM Connector A (31P) Terminals Voltage
Specifications
PCM CONNECTOR C (22P)
111
Fig. 30: PCM Connector C (22P) Terminals Voltage Specifications

111
Fig. 31: View Of PCM Connector Terminals And PCM Connector D (17P) And E (31P) Terminals
Voltage Specifications
Hydraulic Controls
Valve Bodies
The valve body includes the main valve body, the regulator valve body, and the servo body. The ATF pump
is driven by splines on the left end of the torque converter which is attached to the engine. Fluid flows
through the regulator valve to maintain specified pressure through the main valve body to the manual valve,
directing pressure to the shift valves and to each of the clutches via the solenoid valves. The shift solenoid
valves A, B, C, D, and E are bolted on the servo body. The A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A,
B, and C are mounted on the outside of the transmission housing.
111
Fig. 32: Removing Valve Bodies

Main Valve Body
The main valve body contains the manual valve, the shift valves A, B, C, and E, the relief valve, the lock-up
control valve, the cooler check valve, the servo control valve, and the ATF pump gears. The primary
function of the main valve body is to switch fluid pressure on and off and to control hydraulic pressure
going to the hydraulic control system.
111
Fig. 33: Identifying Main Valve Body Components

Regulator Valve Body
The regulator valve body contains the regulator valve, the torque converter check valve, lock-up shift valve,
and the 1st and 3rd accumulators.
Fig. 34: Identifying Regulator Valve Body Components

Regulator Valve
The regulator valve maintains a constant hydraulic pressure from the ATF pump to the hydraulic control
111
system, while also furnishing fluid to the lubrication system and torque converter. The fluid from the ATF
pump flows through B and C. Fluid entering from B flows through the valve orifice to the A cavity. This
pressure of the A cavity pushes the regulator valve to valve spring side, and this movement of the regulator
valve uncovers the fluid port to the torque converter and the relief valve. The fluid flows out to the torque
converter and the relief valve, and the regulator valve returns under spring force. According to the level of
the hydraulic pressure through B, the position of the regulator valve changes, and the amount of fluid from
C through torque converter also changes. This operation is continued, maintaining the line pressure.
Fig. 35: Regulator Valve Cross Sectional View

Increases in hydraulic pressure according to torque are performed by the regulator valve using stator torque
reaction. The stator shaft is splined with the stator in the torque converter, and its arm end contacts the
regulator spring cap. When the vehicle is accelerating or climbing (torque converter range), stator torque
reaction acts on the stator shaft, and the stator arm pushes the regulator spring cap in the direction of the
arrow in proportion to the reaction. The stator reaction spring compresses, and the regulator valve moves to
increase the line pressure which is regulated by the regulator valve. The line pressure reaches its maximum
when the stator torque reaction reaches its maximum.
111
Fig. 36: Identifying Stator Shaft Rotating Direction

Servo Body
The servo body contains the servo valve, the shift valve D, accumulators for 2nd, 4th, and 5th, and shift
solenoid valves for A, B, C, D, and E.
Fig. 37: Identifying Servo Body Components

Accumulator
111
The accumulators are located in the regulator valve body and the servo body. The regulator valve body
contains the 1st and 3rd accumulators, and the servo body contains the 2nd, 4th, and 5th accumulators.
Fig. 38: Locating Accumulators

Hydraulic Flow
Distribution of Hydraulic Pressure
As the engine turns, the ATF pump starts to operate. Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is drawn through
the ATF strainer (filter) and discharged into the hydraulic circuit. Then, ATF flowing from the ATF pump
becomes line pressure that's regulated by the regulator valve. Torque converter pressure from the regulator
valve enters the torque converter through the lock-up shift valve, and it is discharged from the torque
converter. The torque converter check valve prevents torque converter pressure from rising.
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves ON and OFF. The shift solenoid valve intercepts line pressure
from the ATF pump via the manual valve when the shift solenoid valve is OFF. When the shift solenoid
valve is turned ON, line pressure changes to shift solenoid valve pressure at the shift solenoid valve, then the
solenoid valve pressure flows to the shift valve. Applying shift solenoid pressure to the shift valves moves
the position of the shift valve, and switches the port of the hydraulic circuit. The PCM also controls A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C. The A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves
regulate hydraulic pressure, and apply the pressure to the clutches to engage smoothly. The clutches receive
optimum clutch pressure which is regulated by the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves for
comfortable driving and shifting under all conditions.
Hydraulic pressure at the port is as follows:
HYDRAULIC PORT PRESSURE SPECIFICATIONS
PORT DESCRIPTION OF PRESSURE PORT DESCRIPTION OF PRESSURE

111
No. No.
1 LINE SB SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
3 LINE SC SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
3' LINE SD SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D
4 LINE SE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE E
4' LINE 10 1ST CLUTCH
4" LINE 20 2ND CLUTCH
7 LINE 30 3RD CLUTCH
LINE or A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
1A 40 4TH CLUTCH
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A
1B LINE 50 5TH CLUTCH
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
3A LINE 55
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
3B LINE 55'
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
3C LINE 56
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
5A LINE 57
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C
5B LINE 90 TORQUE CONVERTER
5C LINE 91 TORQUE CONVERTER
5D LINE 92 TORQUE CONVERTER
5E 93 ATF COOLER
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B
5F 94 TORQUE CONVERTER
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A or B
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
5G 95 LUBRICATION
SOLENOID VALVE B
5H 96 TORQUE CONVERTER
SOLENOID VALVE C
5J 97 TORQUE CONVERTER
SOLENOID VALVE C
5K 99 SUCTION
SOLENOID VALVE C
5L X DRAIN
SOLENOID VALVE C
5N HX HIGH POSITION DRAIN
SOLENOID VALVE C
SA SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A AX AIR DRAIN
N Position
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves. The conditions of the shift solenoid valves and positions of the
shift valves are as follows:
 Shift solenoid valve A: OFF, and shift valve A stays on the right side
 Shift solenoid valve B: ON, and shift valve B moves to the left side
111
 Shift solenoid valve C: ON, and shift valve C moves to the left side
 Shift solenoid valve D: OFF, and shift valve D stays on the left side
 Shift solenoid valve E: OFF, and shift valve E stays on the left side
Line pressure (1) flows to the shift solenoid valves and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A.
Under this condition, hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches.
NOTE: When used, "left" or "right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
Fig. 39: Hydraulic Pressure Flow Diagram - N Position

D Position: 1st gear shifting from N position
Shift solenoid valves remain the same as in the N position when shifting to the D position from N. The
manual valve is moved to the D position, and switches the port of line pressure (4) leading to the A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve C. Hydraulic pressure to the 1st clutch from the A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve A is created as shift solenoid valve A is OFF, B and C stays ON. A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve A pressure (55) changes to 1st clutch pressure (10) at the shift valve B, and flows to the 1st
clutch. The 1st clutch is engaged gently when shifting to the D position from N.
111
Fig. 40: Hydraulic Pressure Flow Diagram - D Position (1st Gear Shifting From N Position)
D Position: Driving in 1st gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve A ON, and B and C stays ON, and D and E OFF. Shift solenoid valve A
pressure (SA) is applied to the right side of the shift valve A. Shift valve A is moved to the left side to
uncover the line pressure port leading to the 1st clutch, and to cover the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve pressure port.
Fluid flows to the 1st clutch by way of:
Line pressure (1) --> Shift valve D-Line pressure (1A) --> Shift valve A-Line pressure (1B) --> Manual
valve-Line pressure (5A) --> Shift valve C-Line pressure (5B) --> Shift valve B-1st clutch pressure (10) -->
1st clutch
The 1st clutch pressure (10) is applied to the 1st clutch, and the 1st clutch is engaged securely.
111
Fig. 41: Hydraulic Pressure Flow Diagram - D Position (Driving In 1st Gear)
D Position: Shifting between 1st gear and 2nd gear
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A OFF, and B
and C stays ON, and D and E OFF. Shift solenoid valve A pressure (SA) in the right side of the shift valve
A is released. Shift valve A is moved to the right side to uncover the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve pressure port leading to the 1st and 2nd clutches. The PCM controls the A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve to regulate hydraulic pressure. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A pressure (55)
changes to 1st clutch pressure (10) at shift valve B, and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
pressure (56) changes to 2nd clutch pressure (20) at shift valve A. The 1st and 2nd clutches are engaged
gently.
111
Fig. 42: Hydraulic Pressure Flow Diagram - D Position (Shifting Between 1st Gear And 2nd Gear)
D Position: Driving in 2nd gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valves C OFF, D ON, and A and E stays OFF, and B ON. Shift solenoid valve
C pressure (SC) in the right side of the shift valve C is released. Shift valve C is moved to the right side to
switch the ports. This movement covers the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve pressure ports to stop
at shift valves C and A, and uncover the line pressure port leading to the 2nd clutch.
Fluid flows to 2nd clutch by way of:
Line pressure (1) --> Manual valve-Line pressure (4) --> Shift valve C-Line pressure (5E) --> Shift valve B-
Line pressure (5F) --> Shift valve A-2nd clutch pressure (20) --> 2nd clutch
The 2nd clutch pressure (20) is applied to the 2nd clutch, and the 2nd clutch is engaged securely.
111
Fig. 43: Hydraulic Pressure Flow Diagram - D Position (Driving In 2nd Gear)
D Position: Shifting between 2nd gear and 3rd gear
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valves C ON, and A
and E stays OFF, and B and D ON. Shift solenoid valve C pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of the
shift valve C. Shift valve C is moved to the left side to uncover the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valve pressure ports leading to the 2nd and 3rd clutches. The PCM controls the A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valves to regulate hydraulic pressure. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B pressure (56)
changes to 2nd clutch pressure (20) at shift valve A, and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
pressure (57) changes to 3rd clutch pressure (30) at shift valve A. The 2nd and 3rd clutches are engaged
gently.
111
Fig. 44: Hydraulic Pressure Flow Diagram - D Position (Shifting Between 2nd Gear And 3rd Gear)
D Position: Driving in 3rd gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valves B and D OFF, and A and E stays OFF, and C ON. Shift solenoid valve
B pressure (SB) in the right side of shift valve B is released, and shift valve B is moved to the right side.
Shift solenoid valve D pressure (SD) in the left side of the shift valve D is released, and shift valve D is
moved to the left side. This valve movement switches the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
pressure port leading to the 3rd clutch.
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C pressure (57) changes to (5J) at shift solenoid valve D and to
(5K) at shift valve B, and becomes 3rd clutch pressure (30) at shift valve A. The 3rd clutch pressure (30) is
applied to the 3rd clutch, and the 3rd clutch is engaged securely.
111
Fig. 45: Hydraulic Pressure Flow Diagram - D Position (Driving In 3rd Gear)
D Position: Shifting between 3rd gear and 4th gear
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valves C OFF, and A,
B, D, and E stays OFF. Shift solenoid valve C pressure (SC) in the right side of shift valve C is released.
Shift valve C is moved to the right side to uncover the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C
pressure ports leading to the 3rd and 4th clutches. The PCM controls the A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valves to regulate hydraulic pressure. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C pressure (57)
changes to 3rd clutch pressure (30) at shift valve A, and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
pressure (56) changes to 4th clutch pressure (40) at shift valve B. The 3rd and 4th clutches are engaged
gently.
111
Fig. 46: Hydraulic Pressure Flow Diagram - D Position (Shifting Between 3rd Gear And 4th Gear)
D Position: Driving in 4th gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve A ON, and B, C, D, and E stays OFF. Shift solenoid valve A pressure
(SA) is applied to the right side of shift valve A. Shift valve A is moved to the left side to cover the A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and C pressure ports leading to the 2nd and 3rd clutches.
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B pressure (56) changes to (5G) at shift valve C, and becomes
4th clutch pressure (40) at shift valve B. The 4th clutch pressure (40) is held to high by the A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve B, and the 4th clutch is engaged securely.
111
Fig. 47: Hydraulic Pressure Flow Diagram - D Position (Driving In 4th Gear)
D Position: Shifting between 4th gear and 5th gear
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve D ON, and A
stays ON, and B, C, and E OFF. Shift solenoid valve D pressure (SD) is applied to the left side of the shift
valve D. Shift valve D is moved to the right side to uncover the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
pressure port leading to the 5th clutch. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B pressure (56) changes to
4th clutch pressure (40) at shift valve B. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C pressure (57) changes
to (5L) at shift valve D and to (5N) at shift valve B, and becomes 5th clutch pressure (50) at shift valve A.
The 4th and 5th clutches are engaged gently.
111
Fig. 48: Hydraulic Pressure Flow Diagram - D Position (Shifting Between 4th Gear And 5th Gear)
D Position: Driving in 5th gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C ON, and A and D stays ON, and B and E turned OFF. Shift solenoid
valve C pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of shift valve C. Shift valve C is moved to the left side to
switch the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B pressure port leading to the 4th clutch.
The 5th clutch pressure (50) is held to high by the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C, and the 5th
clutch is engaged securely.
111
Fig. 49: Hydraulic Pressure Flow Diagram - D Position (Driving In 5th Gear)
2 Position
 Shift solenoid valve A: OFF, and shift valve A stays on the in right side
 Shift solenoid valve C: OFF, and shift valve C stays on the in right side
 Shift solenoid valve D: ON, and shift valve D moves to the right side
 Shift solenoid valve E: OFF, and shift valve E stays on the in left side
Line pressure (1) changes to line pressure (4) at the manual valve, and flows to shift valve C. Line pressure
(4) flows to shift valve A via shift valve B, and becomes the 2nd clutch pressure (20). The 2nd clutch
pressure (20) is applied to the 2nd clutch, and the 2nd clutch is engaged.
111
Fig. 50: Hydraulic Pressure Flow Diagram - 2 Position

1 Position
 Shift solenoid valve A: ON, and shift valve A moves to the left side
 Shift solenoid valve C: ON, and shift valve C moves to the left side
 Shift solenoid valve D: OFF, and shift valve D stays on the in left side
 Shift solenoid valve E: OFF, and shift valve E stays on the in left side
Line pressure (1) becomes the 1st clutch pressure (10) at the shift valve B.
Fluid flows to 1st clutch by way of:
Line Pressure (1) --> Shift Valve D - Line Pressure (1A) --> Shift Valve A - Line Pressure (1B) --> Manual
Valve - Line
Pressure (5A) --> Shift Valve C - Line Pressure (5B) --> Shift Valve B - 1st Clutch Pressure (10) --> 1st
Clutch
111
The 1st clutch pressure (10) is applied to the 1st clutch, and the 1st clutch is engaged.
When used, "left" or "right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
Fig. 51: Hydraulic Pressure Flow Diagram - 1 Position

R Position: Shifting to R position from P or N position
When shifting in the R position, the PCM turns shift solenoid valves B and E ON, and A, C, and D OFF.
Shift solenoid valve B pressure (SB) is applied to the right side of shift valve B, and shift valve B is moved
to left side. Shift solenoid valve E pressure (SE) is applied to the left side of shift valve E, and shift valve E
is moved to the right side. Line pressure (1) changes to (3) at the manual valve, and flows to the servo valve
via shift valve E. The servo valve is moved to reverse range position. Movement of shift valves B and E,
and servo valve creates 4th clutch pressure line between the 4th clutch and the A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve A. The 4th clutch pressure (40) is applied to the 4th clutch, and the 4th clutch is engaged
gently.
111
Fig. 52: Hydraulic Pressure Flow Diagram - R Position (Shifting To R Position From P Or N Position)
R Position: Driving in reverse gear
After starting off in reverse gear, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A ON, and B and E stays ON, and C
and D OFF. Shift solenoid valve A pressure (SA) is applied to the right side of shift valve A to cover the
A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A pressure port, and to uncover the line pressure port leading to
the 4th clutch creating full line pressure. The 4th clutch is engaged securely with line pressure.
Reverse Inhibitor Control
While the vehicle is moving forward, the PCM keeps shift solenoid valve E remaining OFF. Shift valve E
covers the port of line pressure (3') leading to the servo valve reverse position. The servo valve cannot be
shifted to reverse position, and hydraulic pressure is not applied to the 4th clutch from servo valve for
reverse; as a result, power is not transmitted to the reverse direction.
111
Fig. 53: Hydraulic Pressure Flow Diagram - R Position (Driving In Reverse Gear)
P Position
Shift solenoid valves B and E are turned ON, and A, C, and D OFF by the PCM. Line pressure (1) flows to
the shift solenoid valves and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A. Line pressure (3) changes to
(3') at shift valve E, and flows to the servo valve. The servo valve is moved to reverse/park position.
Hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches.
111
Fig. 54: Hydraulic Pressure Flow Diagram - P Position

Lock-up System
The lock-up mechanism of the torque converter clutch operates in D position (2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th), and in
D3 position (2nd and 3rd). The pressurized fluid is drained from the back of the torque converter through a
fluid passage, causing the torque converter clutch piston to be held against the torque converter cover. As
this takes place, the mainshaft rotates at the same speed as the engine crankshaft. Together with the
hydraulic control, the PCM optimizes the timing and volume of the lock-up mechanism. When the shift
solenoid valve E is turned on by the PCM, shift solenoid valve E pressure switches the lock-up shift valve
lock-up on and off. A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and the lock-up control valve control the
amount of the lock-up conditions.
Torque Converter Clutch Lock-up ON (Engaging Torque Converter Clutch)
Fluid in the chamber between the torque converter cover and the torque converter clutch piston is drained
off, and fluid entering from the chamber between the pump and stator exerts pressure through the torque
converter clutch piston against the torque converter cover. The torque converter clutch piston engages with
the torque converter cover; the torque converter clutch lock-up is ON, and the mainshaft rotates at the same
speed as the engine.
111
Fig. 55: Torque Converter Lock-Up Mechanism And Power Flow Diagram (ON)
Torque Converter Clutch Lock-up OFF (Disengaging Torque Converter Clutch)
Fluid entered from the chamber between the torque converter cover and the torque converter clutch piston
passes through the torque converter and goes out through the chambers between the turbine and the stator,
and between the pump and the stator. As a result, the torque converter clutch piston moves away from the
torque converter, and the torque converter lock-up clutch is released; torque converter clutch lock-up is
OFF.
Fig. 56: Torque Converter Lock-Up Mechanism And Power Flow Diagram (OFF)
No Lock-up
Shift solenoid valve E is turned OFF by the PCM, and shift solenoid valve E pressure (SE) is not applied to
the lock-up shift valve. The lock-up shift valve stays to the right to uncover the torque converter pressure
ports leading to the left side of the torque converter and releasing pressure from the right side of the torque
converter. Torque converter pressure (92) changes to (94) at the lock-up shift valve, and enters into the left
111
side of the torque converter to disengage the torque converter clutch. This keeps the torque converter clutch
piston keeps away from the torque converter cover and the torque converter clutch lock-up is OFF.
Fig. 57: Torque Converter Clutch Lock-Up Diagram - No Lock-Up

Partial Lock-up
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, shift solenoid valve E is turned ON by the PCM,
and shift solenoid valve E pressure (SE) is applied to the right side of the lock-up shift valve. The lock-up
shift valve is moved to the left side to switch the torque converter pressure (91) port, which goes to the right
side of the torque converter, and the port of torque converter pressure (94) is released from the left side of
the torque converter. Torque converter pressure (91 (flows to the right side of the torque converter to engage
the torque converter clutch. The PCM also controls the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to
regulate A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A pressure (55) is applied to the lock-up shift valve and
lock-up control valve. The position of the lock-up control valve depends on A/T clutch pressure control
111
solenoid valve A pressure (55) and torque converter pressure released from the torque converter. The lock-
up control valve controls the amount of torque converter clutch lock-up until fluid between the clutch piston
and torque converter cover is fully released; the torque converter clutch is in partial lock-up condition.
Fig. 58: Torque Converter Clutch Lock-Up Diagram - Partial Lock-Up

Full Lock-up
When the vehicle speed increases, the PCM sends a signal to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
to increase A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A pressure (55), and the lock-up control valve is
moved to the left by the increased pressure. Then converter pressure (94) from the left side of the torque
converter is completely released at the lock-up control valve, and torque converter pressure (91) engages the
torque converter clutch securely; the torque converter clutch is in full lock-up.
111
Fig. 59: Torque Converter Clutch Lock-Up Diagram - Full Lock-Up

Circuit Diagram - PCM A/T Control System - 2003-2004 Models
111
Fig. 60: PCM A/T Control System Circuit Diagram (2003-2004 Models) (1 Of 2)
111
Fig. 61: PCM A/T Control System Circuit Diagram (2003-2004 Models) (2 Of 2)
Circuit Diagram - PCM A/T Control System - 2005 Model
111
Fig. 62: PCM A/T Control System Circuit Diagram (2005 Model) (1 Of 2)
111
Circuit Diagram - PCM A/T Control System - 2006 Model
111
111
DTC TROUBLESHOOTING
DTC INDEX
DTC Description
DTC P0705 Short in Transmission Range Switch Circuit
(Multiple Shift-position Input)
DTC P0706 Open in Transmission Range Switch Circuit
DTC P0711 Problem in ATF Temperature Sensor Circuit
DTC P0712 Short in ATF Temperature Sensor Circuit
DTC P0713 Open in ATF Temperature Sensor Circuit
Circuit
111

Circuit (No Signal Input)
DTC P0718 Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Intermittent
Failure
Sensor Circuit
Sensor Circuit (No Signal Input)
DTC P0723 Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor
Intermittent Failure
DTC P0731 Problem in 1st Clutch and 1st Clutch Hydraulic
Circuit
DTC P0732 Problem in 2nd Clutch and 2nd Clutch Hydraulic
Circuit
DTC P0733 Problem in 3rd Clutch and 3rd Clutch Hydraulic
Circuit
Circuit
Circuit.
DTC P0741 Torque Converter Clutch Hydraulic Circuit Stuck
OFF
DTC P0747 A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A
Stuck ON
DTC P0752 Shift Solenoid Valve A Stuck ON
DTC P0756 Shift Solenoid Valve B Stuck OFF
DTC P0757 Shift Solenoid Valve B Stuck ON
DTC P0761 Shift Solenoid Valve C Stuck OFF
DTC P0771 Shift Solenoid Valve E Stuck OFF
Stuck OFF
Stuck ON
DTC P0780 Shift Control System
Stuck OFF
Stuck ON
DTC P0812 Open in Transmission Range Switch ATP RVS
Switch Circuit
DTC P0842 Short in 2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure
DTC P0843 Open in 2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure
DTC P0847 Short in 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure
111

DTC P0848 Open in 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure
Valve A Circuit
Valve A
Valve B Circuit
Valve B
Valve C Circuit
Valve C
DTC P0973 Short in Shift Solenoid Valve A Circuit
DTC P0974 Open in Shift Solenoid Valve A Circuit
DTC P0976 Short in Shift Solenoid Valve B Circuit
DTC P0977 Open in Shift Solenoid Valve B Circuit
DTC P0979 Short in Shift Solenoid Valve C Circuit
DTC P0980 Open in Shift Solenoid Valve C Circuit
DTC P0982 Short in Shift Solenoid Valve D Circuit
DTC P0983 Open in Shift Solenoid Valve D Circuit
DTC P0985 Short in Shift Solenoid Valve E Circuit
DTC P0986 Open in Shift Solenoid Valve E Circuit
DTC P0705: Short in Transmission Range Switch Circuit (Multiple Shift-position Input)
NOTE:  Record all freeze data and review General Troubleshooting Information
(see GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION ) before you
troubleshoot.
 This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem and cannot be
caused by a mechanical problem in the transmission.

3. Move the shift lever through all positions. Stop for at least 1 second in each position, and monitor the
OBD status for P0705 in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu.
111
Does the result indicate FAILED?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for an intermittent short in the
wires between the transmission range switch and PCM. If the tester indicates NOT
COMPLETED, repeat this step and recheck.
4. Test the transmission range switch (see TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH TEST ).
Is the switch OK?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Replace the transmission range switch, then go to step 55.
6. Shift to all positions other than P.
7. Measure the voltage between PCM connector terminals D6 and A9.
Fig. 66: Measuring Voltage Between PCM Connector Terminals D6 And A9


NO - Go to step 8.
111

10. Disconnect PCM connector D (17P).
YES - Repair short in the wire between PCM connector terminal D6 and the transmission range
switch, then go to step 55.
111
NO - Go to step 12.
12. Disconnect PCM connector A (31P).
13. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminals A8 and body ground, and between A9 and
body ground.
Fig. 68: Checking Continuity Between PCM Connector Terminals A8, A9 And Body Ground
YES - Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good PCM
(see PCM UPDATING AND SUBSTITUTION FOR TESTING ), then recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away with a known-good PCM, replace the original PCM.
NO - Repair open in the wire between PCM connector terminals A8, A9, and ground (G101), or
repair poor ground (G101), then go to step 55.
14. Shift to all positions other than R.
15. Measure the voltage between PCM connector terminals D5 and A9.
111
Fig. 69: Measuring Voltage Between PCM Connector Terminals D5 And A9


NO - Go to step 16.
18. Disconnect PCM connector D (17P).
111
YES - Repair short in the wire between PCM connector terminal D5 and the transmission range
NO - Update the PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good PCM
20. Measure the voltage between PCM connector terminals C12 and A9.
111
Fig. 71: Measuring Voltage Between PCM Connector Terminals C12 And A9

NO - Go to step 21.
23. Disconnect PCM connector C (22P).
24. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal C12 and body ground.
111
Fig. 72: Checking Continuity Between PCM Connector Terminal C12 And Body Ground
YES - Repair short in the wire between PCM connector terminal C12 and the transmission
range switch, then go to step 55.
25. Shift to all positions other than N.
111

NO - Go to step 27.
111
111
31. Shift to all positions other than D.


NO - Go to step 33.
111
111
37. Shift to all positions other than D3.


NO - Go to step 39.
111
111
YES - Repair short in the wire between PCM connector terminal C9 and the transmission range
43. Shift to all positions other than 2 and 1.

NO - Go to step 45.
111
111
49. Shift to all positions other than D, D3, and 2.
symptom/ indication goes away with a known-good PCM, replace the original PCM.
NO - Go to step 51.
111
111
56. Move the shift lever through all positions. Stop for at least 1 second in each position, and monitor the
OBD status for P0705 in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu.
Does the result indicate PASSED?

NO - Return to step 1 and recheck.
DTC P0706: Open in Transmission Range Switch Circuit
troubleshoot.

2. Raise the front of the vehicle, make sure it is securely supported, and allow the front wheels to rotate
freely.
3. Start the engine, drive the vehicle in the D position until the vehicle speed reaches 35 mph (56 km/h),
then slow down and stop the wheels.
4. Monitor the OBD status for P0706 in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the transmission range switch and PCM. If the tester indicates NOT COMPLETED,
return to step 1 and recheck.
5. Test the transmission range switch (see TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH TEST ).
Is the switch OK?
YES - Inspect the end of the selector control shaft (see step 8 ), and go to step 6.
6. Install the transmission range switch correctly, and adjust the shift cable (see SHIFT CABLE
ADJUSTMENT ).
freely.
111

NO - The problem has been corrected. If the tester indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step
7 and recheck.
11. Shift the shift lever into the D position, and verify the ATP FWD and ATP D inputs with the HDS in
the A/T data list.
Is the ATP FWD and ATP D ON?

NO - Go to step 18.
12. Shift to the D3 position, and verify the ATP FWD and ATP D3 inputs with the HDS in the A/T date
list.
Is the ATP FWD and ATP D3 ON?

NO - Go to step 18.
13. Shift to the 2 position, and verify the ATP FWD and ATP 2-1 signals with the HDS in the A/T data
list.
Is the ATP FWD and ATP 2-1 ON?

NO - Go to step 18.
14. Clear the DTC with the HDS, and turn the ignition switch OFF.
freely.

terminals at the transmission range switch and PCM. If the tester indicates NOT COMPLETED,
19. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector.
20. Check for continuity between transmission range switch connector terminal No. 10 and body ground.
111
Fig. 83: Checking Continuity Between Transmission Range Switch Connector Terminal No. 10
And Body Ground

NO - Repair open in the wire between transmission range switch connector terminal No. 10 and
ground (G101), or repair poor ground (G101), then go to step 26.
22. Measure the voltage between transmission range switch connector terminals No. 5 and No. 10.
111
Fig. 84: Measuring Voltage Between Transmission Range Switch Connector Terminals 5 And
10
Is there voltage?

NO - Repair open in the wire between the transmission range switch and PCM connector
terminal C18, then go to step 26.
111
10
Is there voltage?

111
10
Is there voltage?

111
10
Is there voltage?
111

freely.

DTC P0711: Problem in ATF Temperature Sensor Circuit
troubleshoot.
1. Check the ATF temperature with the HDS.
Does the ATF temperature exceed the ambient-air temperature?
YES - Record the ATF temperature. Leave the engine off for more than 30 minutes, and go to
step 2.
NO - Record the ATF temperature. Test the stall speed RPM (see STALL SPEED TEST )
three times. Go to step 2 after stall speed testing.
Does the ATF temperature change?
YES - Leave the engine off for at least 30 more minutes, and go to step 3.
NO - Replace ATF temperature sensor (see ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR
TEST/REPLACEMENT ), then go to step 5.
3. Check the ECT SENSOR with the HDS.
Is the ECT SENSOR equal to the ambient-air temperature?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Leave the engine off until ECT sensor equals ambient-air temperature, then go to step 4.
Is the ATF temperature almost equal to ECT SENSOR?
YES - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the ATF temperature sensor and PCM.
111
NO - Replace ATF temperature sensor (see ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR

TEST/REPLACEMENT ), then go to step 5.
6. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D position through all five gears.

DTC P0712: Short in ATF Temperature Sensor Circuit
troubleshoot.
1. Check ATF temperature sensor voltage with the HDS in the A/T data list.
Is ATF temperature sensor voltage 0.07 V or less?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for intermittent short in the wires
between the ATF temperature sensor and PCM.
2. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector at the shift solenoid valve cover.
3. Check ATF temperature sensor voltage with the HDS.
Is ATF temperature sensor voltage 0.07 V or less?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Check for a short to ground in the shift solenoid harness wire in the transmission (see
ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR TEST/REPLACEMENT ). If the wire is OK, replace ATF
temperature sensor (see ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR TEST/REPLACEMENT ), then
go to step 8.
7. Check for continuity between shift solenoid harness connector terminal No. 6 and body ground.
111
Fig. 88: Checking Continuity Between Shift Solenoid Harness Connector Terminal 6 And Body
Ground
YES - Repair short to ground in the wire between PCM connector terminal C14 and the shift
solenoid harness connector, then go to step 8.
NO - Check for a short to ground in the shift solenoid harness wire in the transmission (see
ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR TEST/REPLACEMENT ). If the wire is OK, update the
PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good PCM (see PCM
UPDATING AND SUBSTITUTION FOR TESTING ), then recheck. If the
111

DTC P0713: Open in ATF Temperature Sensor Circuit
troubleshoot.
1. Check ATF temperature sensor voltage with the HDS in the A/T data list.
Does ATF temperature sensor voltage exceed 4.93 V?
YES - Go to step 2.
terminals at the ATF temperature sensor and PCM.
3. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector.
5. Measure the voltage between shift solenoid harness connector terminal No. 6 and body ground.
111
Fig. 89: Measuring Voltage Between Shift Solenoid Harness Connector Terminal 6 And Body
Ground
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Go to step 7.
6. Measure the voltage between shift solenoid harness connector terminals No. 6 and No. 7.
111
Fig. 90: Measuring Voltage Between Shift Solenoid Harness Connector Terminals 6 And 7
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Check the ATF temperature sensor and shift solenoid harness in the transmission
housing (see ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR TEST/REPLACEMENT ).
NO - Repair open in the wire between PCM connector terminal A23 and the shift solenoid
harness connector, then go to step 8.
7. Measure the voltage between PCM connector terminal C14 and body ground.
111
Fig. 91: Measuring Voltage Between PCM Connector Terminal C14 And Body Ground
Is there about 5 V?
111
YES - Repair open in the wire between PCM connector terminal C14 and the shift solenoid
NO - Check for loose or poor connections at PCM connector terminal C14. If the connection is
OK, update the PCM if it does not have the latest software, or substitute a known-good PCM

DTC P0716: Problem in Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Circuit
troubleshoot.

2. Check for proper input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor installation (see INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT) SPEED SENSOR REPLACEMENT ).
freely.
4. Start the engine, drive the vehicle in the D position, and hold the vehicle at speeds over 30 mph (48
km/h) for more than 10 seconds.
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections at
the PCM and input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connectors. If the tester indicates NOT
COMPLETED, return to step 4 and recheck.
8. Disconnect PCM connector A (31P) and input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector.
body ground.
111

NO - Repair open in the wires between PCM connector terminals A8,A9, and ground (G101),
or repair poor ground (G101), then go to step 31.
10. Connect PCM connector A (31P).
12. Measure the voltage between input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminal No. 1 and body
ground.
111
Fig. 93: Measuring Voltage Between Input Shaft Speed Sensor Connector Terminal 1 And Body
Ground
Is there about 5 V?

NO - Go to step 25.
111
15. Check for continuity between input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground.
Fig. 94: Checking Continuity Between Input Shaft Speed Sensor Connector Terminal 2 And
Body Ground
YES - Repair short to ground in the wire between PCM connector terminal C19 and input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor, then go to step 31.
111
NO -
2003-2004 models: Go to step 16.

ground.
Body Ground
YES - Connect PCM connector C (22P), and go to step 19.

NO - Repair open in the wire between the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and ground
111
(G101), then go to step 31.

18. Check for continuity between input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminal No. 3 and PCM
connector terminal A24.
PCM Connector Terminal A24
YES - Connect PCM connectors A (31P) and C (22P), and go to step 19.
NO - Repair open in the wire between input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and PCM connector
terminal A24, then go to step 31.
20. Measure the voltage between input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminals No. 2 and No.
3.
111
Fig. 97: Measuring Voltage Between Input Shaft Speed Sensor Connector Terminals 2 And 3
Is there about 5 V?

NO - Go to step 30.
21. Connect input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector.
111
Is the voltage 0 V or about 5 V?

NO - Replace the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (see INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR REPLACEMENT ), then go to step 31.
23. Shift to the P position. Start the engine, and let it idle.
24. With the engine idling, measure the voltage between PCM connector terminals C19 and A9.
111
Is there 1.5-3.5 V?
25. Measure the voltage between PCM connector terminals A21 and A9.
111
Fig. 100: Measuring Voltage Between PCM Connector Terminals A21 And A9
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Repair open in the wire between PCM connector terminal A21 and the input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor connector, then go to step 31.
NO - Go to step 26.
29. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal A21 and body ground.
111
Fig. 101: Checking Continuity Between PCM Connector Terminal A21 And Body Ground
YES - Repair short to ground in the wire between PCM connector terminal A21 and the input
shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector, then go to step 31.
NO - Check for loose or poor connections at PCM connector terminal A21. If the connection is
111
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Repair open in the wire between PCM connector terminal C19 and the input shaft

DTC P0717: Problem in Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Circuit (No Signal Input)
troubleshoot.
111


2. Check for proper input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor installation (see INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT) SPEED SENSOR REPLACEMENT ).
freely.
km/h) for more than 10 seconds. Slow down and stop the wheels.
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections at
the PCM and input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connectors. If the tester indicates NOT
8. Disconnect PCM connector A (31P) and input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector.
body ground.
111

NO - Repair open in the wires between PCM connector terminals A8, A9, and ground (G101),
ground.
111
Fig. 104: Measuring Voltage Between Input Shaft Speed Sensor Connector Terminal 1 And
Body Ground
Is there about 5 V?

NO - Go to step 25.
111
ground.
Body Ground
YES - Repair short to ground in the wire between PCM connector terminal C19 and input shaft
111
NO -
2003-2004 models: Go to step 16.

ground.
Body Ground
YES - Connect PCM connector C (22P), and go to step 19.

NO - Repair open in the wire between the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and ground
111
(G101), then go to step 31.

18. Check for continuity between input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminal No. 3 and PCM
connector terminal A24.
PCM Terminal A24
YES - Connect PCM connectors A (31P) and C (22P), and go to step 19.
NO - Repair open in the wire between input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and PCM connector
terminal A24, then go to step 31.
20. Measure the voltage between input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminals No. 2 and No.
3.
111
Fig. 108: Measuring Voltage Between Input Shaft Speed Sensor Connector Terminals 2 And 3
Is there about 5 V?

NO - Go to step 30.
21. Connect input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector.
111
Is there 0 V or about 5 V?

24. With the engine idling, measure the voltage between PCM connector terminals C19 and A9.
111
Is there 1.5-3.5 V?
111
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Repair open in the wire between PCM connector terminal A21 and the input shaft
NO - Go to step 26.
111
YES - Repair short to ground in the wire between PCM connector terminal A21 and the input
111
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Repair open in the wire between PCM connector terminal C19 and the input shaft

DTC P0718: Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Intermittent Failure
troubleshoot.
111


YES - Go to step 4.
terminals at the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and PCM. If the tester indicates NOT
5. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector, and inspect the connector and
connector terminals to be sure they are making good contact.
Are the connector terminals OK?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Repair the connector terminals, then go to step 6.
6. Connect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector.
7. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes, and monitor the OBD status for P0718 in the DTCs/Freeze
Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
YES - Go to step 8.
7 and recheck.
11. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector.
ground.
111
Body Ground
YES - Repair short to ground in the wire between PCM connector terminal C19 and the input
NO - Go to step 13.
13. Connect PCM connector C (22P).
111

ground.
Fig. 115: Measuring Voltage Between Input Shaft Speed Sensor Connector Terminal 2 And
Body Ground
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Replace the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (see INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT)
111

NO - Go to step 16.
18. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal C19 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
Fig. 116: Checking Continuity Between PCM Connector Terminal C19 And Input Shaft
Terminal 2
NO - Repair open in the wire between PCM connector terminal C19 and the input shaft

111
DTC P0721: Problem in Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Circuit
troubleshoot.
1. Record all freeze data, and clear the DTC with the HDS.
freely.
3. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the D position with engine speed 2,000 rpm or higher for more
than 10 seconds. Slow down and stop the wheels.
YES - Go to step 5.
terminals at the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and PCM. If the tester indicates NOT
7. Disconnect PCM connector A (31P) and output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector.
body ground.
111
YES - Go to step 9.
NO - Repair open in the wire between PCM connector terminals A8, A9, and ground (G101), or
repair poor ground (G101), then go to step 30.
11. Measure the voltage between output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector terminal No. 1 and
body ground.
111
Fig. 118: Measuring Voltage Between Output Shaft Speed Sensor Connector Terminal 1 And
Body Ground
Is there about 5 V?

NO - Go to step 24.
14. Check for continuity between output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector terminal No. 2 and
body ground.
111
Fig. 119: Checking Continuity Between Output Shaft Speed Sensor Connector Terminal 2 And
Body Ground
YES - Repair short to ground in the wire between PCM connector terminal A18 and output
shaft (countershaft) speed sensor, then go to step 30.
NO -
body ground.
111
Body Ground

NO - Repair open in the wire between the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and ground
(G101), repair poor ground (G101), then go to step 30.
PCM connector terminal A23.
111
PCM Terminal A23

NO - Repair open in the wire between the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and PCM
connector terminal A23, then go to step 30.
19. Measure the voltage between output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector terminals No. 2 and
No. 3.
111
Fig. 122: Measuring Voltage Between Output Shaft Speed Sensor Connector Terminals 2 And 3
Is there about 5 V?

NO - Go to step 29.
20. Connect output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector.
111

NO - Replace the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (see INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT) SPEED SENSOR REPLACEMENT ), then go to step 30.
23. Shift to the D position, and measure the voltage between PCM connector terminals A18 and A9.
111
Is there 1.5-3.5 V?
111
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Repair open in the wire between PCM connector terminal A20 and the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor, then go to step 30.
NO - Go to step 25.
111
YES - Repair short to ground in the wire between PCM connector terminal A20 and the output
111
Is there about 5 V?
111

DTC P0722: Problem in Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Circuit (No Signal Input)
troubleshoot.

freely.
than 10 seconds. Slowdown and stop the wheels.
YES - Go to step 5.
7. Disconnect PCM connector A (31P) and output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector.
body ground.
111
YES - Go to step 9.
body ground.
111
Body Ground
Is there about 5 V?

NO - Go to step 24.
body ground.
111
Body Ground
YES - Repair short to ground in the wire between PCM connector terminal A18 and output
NO -
body ground.
111
Body Ground

NO - Repair open in the wire between the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and ground
(G101), repair poor ground (G101), then go to step 30.
PCM connector terminal A23.
111
PCM Terminal A23

NO - Repair open in the wire between the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and PCM
connector terminal A23, then go to step 30.
19. Measure the voltage between output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector terminals No. 2 and
No. 3.
111
Fig. 133: Measuring Voltage Between Output Shaft Speed Sensor Connector Terminals 2 And 3
Is there about 5 V?

NO - Go to step 29.
20. Connect output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector.
111

23. Shift to the D position, and measure the voltage between PCM connector terminals A18 and A9.
111
Is there 1.5 - 3.5 V?
111
Is there about 5 V?
NO - Go to step 25.
111
111
Is there about 5 V?
111

DTC P0723: Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Intermittent Failure
troubleshoot.

2. Test-drive the vehicle for more than 10 minutes under the same conditions as those indicated by the
freeze data, and monitor the OBD status for P0723 in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a
pass/fail.
YES - Go to step 3.
4. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector, and inspect the connector and
connector terminals to be sure they are making good contact.
Are the connector terminals OK ?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Repair the connector terminals, then go to step 5.
5. Connect the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector.
6. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes, and monitor the OBD status for P0723 in the DTCs/Freeze
Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
YES - Go to step 7.
6 and recheck.
10. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector.
body ground.
111
Body Ground
NO - Go to step 12.
body ground.
111
Body Ground
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Replace the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (see Output Shaft (Countershaft)
Speed Sensor Replacement ), then go to step 18.
NO - Go to step 15.
17. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal A18 and output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor connector terminal No. 2.
111
Fig. 141: Checking Continuity Between PCM Connector Terminal A18 And Output Shaft
Terminal 2
NO - Repair open in the wire between PCM connector terminal A18 and the output shaft

DTC P0731: Problem in 1st Clutch and 1st Clutch Hydraulic Circuit
111
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the proper level, and check for fluid leaks.
3. Drain the ATF (see step 3 ) through a strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or excessive clutch
material.
Does the strainer contain metal debris or excessive clutch material?
YES - Replace the transmission.

NO - Replace the ATF (see step 4 ), then go to step 4.
4. Measure the line pressure (see PRESSURE TEST ).
Is the line pressure within service limit?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Repair the ATF pump and regulator valve, or replace the transmission.
5. Measure the 1st clutch pressure (see PRESSURE TEST ).
Is the 1st clutch pressure within service limits?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Shift valves B and C are stuck. Repair these valves and hydraulic circuit, or replace the
transmission.
6. Test stall speed in the 1 position (see STALL SPEED TEST ).
Does the stall speed test within service limits?
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Shift valves A and D are stuck. Repair these valves and hydraulic circuit, or replace the
transmission.
8. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes under the same conditions as those indicated by the freeze
data, or drive in 1st gear in the D position at 10 mph (16 km/h) for 20 seconds.
YES - Repair the 1st clutch, or replace the transmission.

NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. If the tester indicates NOT
DTC P0732: Problem in 2nd Clutch and 2nd Clutch Hydraulic Circuit
111
material.

Is the line pressure within service limit?
YES - Go to step 5.
5. Measure the 2nd clutch pressure (see PRESSURE TEST ).
Is the 2nd clutch pressure within service limits?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Shift valves A and B are stuck. Repair these valves and hydraulic circuit, or replace the
transmission.
6. Test stall speed in the 2 position (see STALL SPEED TEST ).
Does the stall speed test within service limits?
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Shift valve C is stuck. Repair the shift valve C and hydraulic circuit, or replace the
transmission.
data, or drive in 2nd gear in the D position at 10 mph (16 km/h) for 20 seconds.
YES - Repair the 2nd clutch, or replace the transmission.

DTC P0733: Problem in 3rd Clutch and 3rd Clutch Hydraulic Circuit
111
material.

Is the line pressure within service limits?
YES - Go to step 5.
5. Measure the 3rd clutch pressure (see PRESSURE TEST ).
Is the 3rd clutch pressure within service limits?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Shift valves A and D are stuck. Repair these valves and hydraulic circuit, or replace the
transmission.
data, or drive in 3rd gear in the D3 position at speeds over 10 mph (16 km/h) for 20 seconds.
YES - Repair the 3rd clutch, or replace the transmission.

DTC P0734: Problem in 4th Clutch and 4th Clutch Hydraulic Circuit
material.

111
YES - Go to step 5.
5. Measure the 4th clutch pressure (see PRESSURE TEST ).
Is the 4th clutch pressure within service limits?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Shift valve B, shift valve C, servo control valve, and servo valve are stuck. Repair these
valves and hydraulic circuit, or replace the transmission.
data, or drive in 4th gear in the D position at speeds over 10 mph (16 km/h) for 20 seconds.
YES - Repair the 4th clutch, or replace the transmission.

DTC P0735: Problem in 5th Clutch and 5th Clutch Hydraulic Circuit.
material.

YES - Go to step 5.
5. Measure the 5th clutch pressure (see PRESSURE TEST ).
Is the 5th clutch pressure within service limits?
YES - Go to step 6.
111
NO - Shift valves A, B, and/or D are stuck. Repair these valves and hydraulic circuit, or replace
the transmission.
data, or drive in 5th gear in the D position at speeds over 10 mph (16 km/h) for 20 seconds.
YES - Repair the 5th clutch, or replace the transmission.

DTC P0741: Torque Converter Clutch Hydraulic Circuit Stuck OFF
material.

5. Choose Shift Solenoid E in Miscellaneous Test Menu, and check that the shift solenoid valve E
operates with the HDS.
Is a clicking sound heard?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Replace shift solenoid valve E (see SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE REPLACEMENT ),
then go to step 10.
6. Run the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches 176 °F (80 °C).
7. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid A in Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test the A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve A with the HDS.
Is the system OK?
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Follow instructions indicated on the HDS by the test result. Go to step 10 if any part was
replaced.
8. Test-drive the vehicle at 55 mph (88 km/h) for 2 minutes while monitoring the vehicle speed with the
111
HDS.
YES - Faulty torque converter mechanism, torque converter clutch hydraulic circuit, lock-up
shift valve, or lock-up control valve, or replace the transmission.
data.

DTC P0747: A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Stuck ON
material.

5. Test-drive the vehicle in the D position through all five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for
more than 20 seconds, then slow down to a stop.
6. Retest-drive the vehicle in the D position through all five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for
YES - Go to step 8.
111
Is the system OK?
YES - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.

NO - Follow instructions indicated on the HDS by the test result, but the tester has not
determined the cause of the failure, go to step 10. If any part was replaced, go to step 11.
10. Inspect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A (see A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE A TEST ).
Does the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A work properly?
YES - Repair hydraulic system related with shift valve B and E, or replace the transmission,
then go to step 11.
NO - Replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A (see A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A REPLACEMENT ), then go to step 11.
more than 20 seconds. Slow down to a stop.

DTC P0752: Shift Solenoid Valve A Stuck ON
material.

111
YES - Go to step 8.
9. Choose Shift Solenoid A in Miscellaneous Test Menu, and check that the shift solenoid valve A

NO - Replace shift solenoid valve A (see SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE REPLACEMENT ),
then go to step 13.
YES - Repair shift valve A, or replace the transmission, then go to step 13.
more than 20 seconds, then slow down and to a stop.

DTC P0756: Shift Solenoid Valve B Stuck OFF
111
material.

YES - Go to step 8.
9. Choose Shift Solenoid B in Miscellaneous Test Menu, and check that the shift solenoid valve B

NO - Replace shift solenoid valve B (see SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE REPLACEMENT ),
then go to step 13.
YES - Repair shift valve B, or replace the transmission, then go to step 13.
111

DTC P0757: Shift Solenoid Valve B Stuck ON
material.

YES - Go to step 8.

then go to step 13.
111
YES - Repair shift valve B, or replace the transmission, then go to step 13.

DTC P0761: Shift Solenoid Valve C Stuck OFF
material.

YES - Go to step 8.
111
9. Choose Shift Solenoid C in Miscellaneous Test Menu, and check that the shift solenoid valve C

NO - Replace shift solenoid valve C (see SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE REPLACEMENT ),
then go to step 13.
YES - Repair shift valve C, or replace the transmission, then go to step 13.

DTC P0771: Shift Solenoid Valve E Stuck OFF
material.

111
YES - Go to step 8.

then go to step 13.
YES - Repair shift valve E, or replace the transmission, then go to step 13.

DTC P0776: A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Stuck OFF
111
material.

YES - Go to step 8.
9. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid B in Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test the A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve B with the HDS.
Is the system OK?
YES - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. If the tester indicates NOT
10. Inspect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B (see A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE B AND C TEST ).
Does the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B work properly?
YES - Repair hydraulic system related with shift valve B, or replace the transmission, then go
to step 11.
NO - Replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B (see A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B AND C REPLACEMENT ), then go to step 11.
111


DTC P0777: A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Stuck ON
material.

YES - Go to step 8.
9. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid B in Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test the A/T
Is the system OK?
10. Inspect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B (see A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
111
Does the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B work properly?
YES - Repair hydraulic system related with shift valve B, or replace the transmission, then go
to step 11.

DTC P0780: Shift Control System
1. Check for other DTCs indicated simultaneous with the code P0780.
NOTE: P0780 means there is one or more A/T DTCs about the shift control
system.
Are there other DTCs?
YES - Go to step 2.
2. Perform the troubleshooting flowchart for the indicated codes:
 P1730: (see DTC P1730: Problem in Shift Control System: )
DTC P0796: A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Stuck OFF
111
material.

YES - Go to step 8.
9. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid C in Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test the A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve C with the HDS.
Is the system OK?
10. Inspect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C (see A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
Does the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C work properly?
YES - Repair hydraulic system related with shift valve B and C, or replace the transmission,
then go to step 11.
NO - Replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C (see A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE
111

DTC P0797: A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Stuck ON
material.

YES - Go to step 8.
Is the system OK?
YES - Repair hydraulic system related with shift valves B and C, or replace the transmission,
111
then go to step 11.


DTC P0812: Open in Transmission Range Switch ATP RVS Switch Circuit
troubleshoot.

2. Shift to the R position, and verify the A/T R SWITCH signal with the HDS in the A/T data list.
Is the A/T R SWITCH ON?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Inspect the end of the selector control shaft (see step 8 ), adjust the shift cable (see SHIFT
CABLE ADJUSTMENT ), then recheck. If the problem still exists, go to step 4.
3. Check the REVERSE SWITCH signal with the HDS.
Is the REVERSE SWITCH ON?
YES - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the transmission range switch and PCM.
NO - Go to step 4.
body ground.
111
YES - Go to step 6.
and repair poor ground (G101), then go to step 12.
7. Shift to the R position.
111
Is there voltage?
YES - Go to step 9.
10. Disconnect the transmission range switch connector.
11. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No. 10 terminals at the transmission range switch. The
shift position must be R.
111
Fig. 144: Checking Continuity Between 1 And 10 Terminals At Transmission Range Switch
YES - Check for loose or poor connections at the transmission range switch connector terminal
No. 1. If the connection is OK, repair open in the wire between PCM connector terminal C12
and the transmission range switch, then go to step 12.
13. Start the engine, and shift the shift lever slowly into the P, R, then N position.

DTC P0842: Short in 2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid
111
troubleshoot.

2. Check the 2nd PRES SWITCH signal with the HDS in the A/T data list when not in 2nd gear.
Is the 2nd PRES SWITCH OFF?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Go to step 5.
3. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). Drive
the vehicle in 2nd gear in the 2 position for more than 5 seconds, then shift to the D position, and
drive in 4th gear for more than 5 seconds. Slow down to a stop.
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check the BLU/RED wire for an
intermittent short to ground between the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch and
PCM. If the tester indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step 3 and recheck.
6. Disconnect the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch connector.
8. Check the 2nd PRES SWITCH signal with the HDS in the A/T data list.
Is the 2nd PRES SWITCH OFF?
YES - Replace the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (see 2nd Clutch
Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement ), then go to step 13.
NO - Go to step 9.
111
YES - Repair short to ground in the wire between PCM connector terminal C13 and the 2nd
clutch transmission fluid pressure switch, then go to step 13.
111

DTC P0843: Open in 2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid
troubleshoot.

2. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). Shift
into the 2 position while pressing the brake pedal, and verify that the SHIFT MAP NUMBER
indicates 2nd with the HDS in the A/T data list.
3. Check the 2nd PRES SWITCH signal with the HDS in the A/T data list.
Is the 2nd PRES SWITCH ON?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Go to step 6.
4. Drive the vehicle in 2nd gear in the 2 position for more than 5 seconds, then shift to the D position,
and drive in 4th gear for more than 5 seconds. Slow down to a stop.
YES - Go to step 6.
terminals at the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch and PCM. If the tester indicates
NOT COMPLETED, return to step 4 and recheck.
7. Disconnect the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch connector.
9. Measure the voltage between the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch connector terminal and
body ground.
111
Fig. 146: Measuring Voltage Between 2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Terminal
And Body Ground
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Replace the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (see 2nd Clutch
Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement ), then go to step 11.
NO - Go to step 10.
111
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Repair open in the wire between PCM connector terminal C13 and the 2nd clutch
transmission fluid pressure switch, then go to step 11.
111

DTC P0847: Short in 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid
troubleshoot.

2. Check the 3rd PRES SWITCH signal with the HDS in the A/T data list when not in 3rd gear.
Is the 3rd PRES SWITCH ON?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Go to step 5.
the vehicle in 3rd gear in the D3 position for more than 5 seconds, then shift to the D position, and
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check the BLU/WHT wire for an
intermittent short to ground between the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch and PCM.
If the tester indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step 3 and recheck.
6. Disconnect the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch connector.
8. Check the 3rd PRES SWITCH signal with the HDS in the A/T data list.
Is the 3rd PRES SWITCH OFF?
YES - Replace the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (see 3rd Clutch Transmission
Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement ), then go to step 13.
NO - Go to step 9.
111

111
YES - Repair short to ground in the wire between PCM connector terminal C10 and the 3rd
clutch transmission fluid pressure switch, then go to step 13.
symptom/ indication goes away with a known-good PCM, replace the original PCM.

DTC P0848: Open in 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid
troubleshoot.

the vehicle in the 3rd gear in the D3 position, and verify that the SHIFT MAP NUMBER indicates 3rd
with the HDS in the A/T data list.
3. Check the 3rd PRES SWITCH signal with the HDS in the A/T data list.
Is the 3rd PRES SWITCH ON?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Go to step 6.
4. Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in the D3 position for more than 5 seconds, then shift to the D position,
and drive in 4th gear for more than 5 seconds. Slow down to a stop.
YES - Go to step 6.
terminals at the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch and PCM. If the tester indicates
111

7. Disconnect the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch connector.
9. Measure the voltage between the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch connector terminal and
body ground.
Fig. 149: Measuring Voltage Between 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Terminal
And Body Ground
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Replace the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (see 3rd Clutch Transmission
Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement ), then go to step 11.
NO - Go to step 10.
111
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Repair open in the wire between PCM connector terminal C10 and the 3rd clutch
transmission fluid pressure switch, then go to step 11.
111

DTC P0962: Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Circuit
troubleshoot.

2. Check that DTC P0962 recurs.
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Go to step 3.
3. Choose Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Control in Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test the A/T
4. Drive with the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A at 1.0 A in Clutch Pressure Control
Solenoid Control menu.
YES - Go to step 6.
terminals at the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and PCM. If the tester indicates
7. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector.
8. Measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A resistance at the solenoid connector.
111
Fig. 151: Measuring A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Resistance
Is there 3-10 ohms ?
YES - Go to step 9.
9. Check for continuity between A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector terminal No. 2
and body ground.
111
Fig. 152: Checking Continuity Between A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Connector
Terminal 2 And Body Ground

NO - Repair open in the wire between the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and
11. Measure the voltage between A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector terminals No. 1
and No. 2.
111
Fig. 153: Measuring Voltage Between A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Connector
Terminals 1 And 2
Is there about 11 V as the ignition switch is turned to the ON (II) position?
NO - Repair open or short in the wire between PCM connector terminal C1 and A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A, then go to step 12.

111

DTC P0963: Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A
troubleshoot.

YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Go to step 3.
4. Drive with the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A at 0.2 A in Clutch Pressure Control
YES - Go to step 6.
terminals at the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and PCM. If the tester indicates
8. Measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A resistance at the solenoid connector.
111
Fig. 154: Measuring A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Resistance
YES - Go to step 9.
9. Check for continuity between A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector terminal No. 2
and body ground.
111
Fig. 155: Checking Continuity Between A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Connector
Terminal 2 And Body Ground
NO - Repair open in the wire between the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and
111

DTC P0966: Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Circuit
troubleshoot.

YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Go to step 3.
4. Drive with the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B at 1.0 A in Clutch Pressure Control
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for poor connections and loose
terminals at the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and PCM. If the tester indicates
7. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B connector.
8. Measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B resistance at the solenoid connector.
111
Fig. 156: Measuring A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Resistance
YES - Go to step 9.
9. Check for continuity between A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B connector terminal No. 2
and body ground.
111
Fig. 157: Checking Continuity Between A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B
Connector Terminal 2 And Body Ground

NO - Repair open in the wire between the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and
11. Measure the voltage between A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B connector terminals No. 1
and No. 2.
111
Fig. 158: Measuring Voltage Between A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Connector
Terminals 1 And 2
pressure control solenoid valve B, then go to step 12.
111

DTC P0967: Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B
troubleshoot.

YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Go to step 3.
4. Drive with the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B at 0.2 A in Clutch Pressure Control
YES - Go to step 6.
terminals at the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and PCM. If the tester indicates
7. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B connector.
8. Measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B resistance at the solenoid connector.
111
Fig. 159: Measuring A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Resistance
YES - Go to step 9.
9. Check for continuity between A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B connector terminal No. 2
and body ground.
111
Fig. 160: Checking Continuity Between A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B
NO - Repair open in the wire between the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and
111

DTC P0970: Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Circuit
troubleshoot.

YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Go to step 3.
4. Drive with the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C at 1.0 A in Clutch Pressure Control
YES - Go to step 6.
terminals at the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C and PCM. If the tester indicates
7. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector.
8. Measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C resistance at the solenoid connector.
111
Fig. 161: Measuring A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Resistance
YES - Go to step 9.
9. Check for continuity between A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 2
and body ground.
111
Fig. 162: Checking Continuity Between A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C

NO - Repair open in the wire between the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C and
11. Measure the voltage between A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector terminals No. 1
and No. 2.
111
Fig. 163: Measuring Voltage Between A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Connector
Terminals 1 And 2
pressure control solenoid valve C, then go to step 12.

111

DTC P0971: Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C
troubleshoot.

YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Go to step 3.
4. Drive with the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C at 0.2 A in Clutch Pressure Control
YES - Go to step 6.
terminals at the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C and PCM. If the tester indicates
7. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector.
8. Measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C resistance at the solenoid connector.
111
Fig. 164: Measuring A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Resistance
YES - Go to step 9.
9. Check for continuity between A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C connector terminal No. 2
and body ground.
111
Fig. 165: Checking Continuity Between A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C
NO - Repair open in the wire between the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C and
111

DTC P0973: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve A Circuit
troubleshoot.

2. Start the engine, and shift to the D position.
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Go to step 4.
4. Choose Shift Solenoid A in Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test the shift solenoid valve A with the
HDS.
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check the BLU/BLK wire for an
intermittent short to ground between shift solenoid valve A and PCM. If the tester indicates
9. Disconnect PCM connectors A (31P) and C (22P).
10. Measure the resistance between PCM connector terminals C6 and A9.
111
Fig. 166: Measuring Resistance Between PCM Connector Terminals C6 And A9

Is there less than 12 ohms ?

11. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector at the transmission housing.
12. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminals C6 and A9.
111
Fig. 167: Checking Continuity Between PCM Connector Terminals C6 And A9

NO - Check shift solenoid valve A, and check for a short in the shift solenoid harness in the
transmission (see SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE TEST ). Replace shift solenoid valve A and/or
shift solenoid harness, then go to step 13.

DTC P0974: Open in Shift Solenoid Valve A Circuit
troubleshoot.
111

2. Start the engine in the P position.
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Go to step 4.
4. Choose Shift Solenoid A in Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test the shift solenoid valve A with the
HDS.
YES - Go to step 7.
terminals at the shift solenoid valve A and PCM. If the tester indicates NOT COMPLETED,
111

YES - Check for loose or poor connections at PCM connector terminal C6. If the connection is
NO - Go to step 11.
12. Measure the resistance between shift solenoid harness connector terminal No. 5 and body ground.
111
Fig. 169: Measuring Resistance Between Shift Solenoid Harness Connector Terminal 5 And
Body Ground
NO - Check shift solenoid valve A, and check for an open in the shift solenoid harness in the
transmission (see SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE TEST ). Replace shift solenoid valve A and/or
111
DTC P0976: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve B Circuit
troubleshoot.

YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Go to step 4.
4. Choose Shift Solenoid B in Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test the shift solenoid valve B with the
HDS.
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check the GRN/WHT wire for an
intermittent short to ground between the shift solenoid valve B and PCM. If the tester indicates
111


111

NO - Check shift solenoid valve B, and check for a short in the shift solenoid harness in the
transmission (see SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE TEST ). Replace shift solenoid valve B and/or

DTC P0977: Open in Shift Solenoid Valve B Circuit
troubleshoot.
111

2. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in 1st, 2nd and 3rd gears in the D3 position.
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Go to step 4.
4. Choose Shift Solenoid B in Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test the shift solenoid valve B with the
HDS.
YES - Go to step 7.
terminals at the shift solenoid valve B and PCM. If the tester indicates NOT COMPLETED,
111

NO - Go to step 11.
111
Body Ground
NO - Check shift solenoid valve B, and check for an open in the shift solenoid harness in the
transmission (see SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE TEST ). Replace shift solenoid valve B and/or
111
DTC P0979: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve C Circuit
troubleshoot.

YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Go to step 4.
4. Choose Shift Solenoid C in Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test the shift solenoid valve C with the
HDS.
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check the GRN wire for an intermittent
short to ground between the shift solenoid valve C and PCM. If the tester indicates NOT
111


111

NO - Check shift solenoid valve C, and check for a short in the shift solenoid harness in the
transmission (see SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE TEST ). Replace shift solenoid valve C and/or

DTC P0980: Open in Shift Solenoid Valve C Circuit
troubleshoot.
111

YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Go to step 4.
4. Choose Shift Solenoid C in Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test the shift solenoid valve C with the
HDS.
YES - Go to step 7.
terminals at the shift solenoid valve C and PCM. If the tester indicates NOT COMPLETED,
111

NO-Go to step 11.
111
Body Ground
NO - Check shift solenoid valve C, and check for an open in the shift solenoid harness in the
transmission (see SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE TEST ). Replace shift solenoid valve C and/or
111
DTC P0982: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve D Circuit
troubleshoot.

2. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in 1st and 2nd gears in the D position.
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Go to step 4.
4. Choose Shift Solenoid D in Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test the shift solenoid valve D with the
HDS.
YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check the GRN/RED wire for an
intermittent short to ground between the shift solenoid valve D and PCM. If the tester indicates
111


111

NO - Check shift solenoid valve D, and check for a short in the shift solenoid harness in the
transmission (see SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE TEST ). Replace shift solenoid valve D and/or
shift solenoid harness, then go step 13.

DTC P0983: Open in Shift Solenoid Valve D Circuit
troubleshoot.
111

YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Go to step 4.
4. Choose Shift Solenoid D in Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test the shift solenoid valve D with the
HDS.
YES - Go to step 6.
terminals at the shift solenoid valve D and PCM. If the tester indicates NOT COMPLETED,
111

NO - Go to step 10.
111
Body Ground
NO - Check shift solenoid valve D, and check for an open in the shift solenoid harness in the
transmission (see SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE TEST ). Replace shift solenoid valve D and/or
111
DTC P0985: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve E Circuit
troubleshoot.

YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Go to step 4.
4. Choose Shift Solenoid E in Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test the shift solenoid valve E with the
HDS.
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check the YEL wire for an intermittent
short to ground between the shift solenoid valve E and PCM. If the tester indicates NOT
111


111

NO - Check shift solenoid valve E, and check for a short in the shift solenoid harness in the
transmission (see SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE TEST ). Replace shift solenoid valve E and/or

DTC P0986: Open in Shift Solenoid Valve E Circuit
troubleshoot.
111

YES - Go to step 7.
NO - Go to step 4.
4. Choose Shift Solenoid E in Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test the shift solenoid valve E with the
HDS.
6. Monitor the OBD status for P0986 in the DTCs/Freeze Data in NT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
YES - Go to step 7.
terminals at the shift solenoid valve E and PCM. If the tester indicates NOT COMPLETED,
111

NO - Go to step 11.
12. Check for continuity between shift solenoid harness connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
111
Fig. 185: Checking Continuity Between Shift Solenoid Harness Connector Terminal 3 And Body
Ground
NO - Check shift solenoid valve E, and check for an open in the shift solenoid harness in the
transmission (see SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE TEST ). Replace shift solenoid valve E and/or
111
DTC P1730: Problem in Shift Control System:
 Shift Solenoid Valves A or D Stuck OFF

 Shift Solenoid Valve B Stuck ON
 Shift Valves A, B, or D Stuck
material.

YES - Go to step 8.
9. Choose Shift Solenoid A in Miscellaneous Test Menu, and check that the shift solenoid valve A

NO - Replace shift solenoid valve A (see SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE REPLACEMENT ),
then go to step 15.
111

then go to step 15.
11. Choose Shift Solenoid D in Miscellaneous Test Menu, and check that the shift solenoid valve D

NO - Replace shift solenoid valve D (see SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE REPLACEMENT ),
then go to step 15.
YES - Repair hydraulic system related with shift valves A, B, and D, or replace the
transmission, then go to step 15.

 Shift Solenoid Valve E Stuck ON

 Shift Valve E Stuck
 A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Stuck OFF
111
material.

YES - Go to step 8.

then go to step 12.
Is the system OK?
NO - Follow instructions indicated on the HDS by the test result, but if the tester has not
11. Inspect A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A (see A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE A TEST ).
Dose the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A work properly?
YES - Repair hydraulic system related with shift valve E, or replace the transmission, then go to
step 12.
111

 Shift Solenoid Valves B or C Stuck ON

 Shift Valves B or C Stuck
material.

YES - Go to step 8.
111

then go to step 14.

then go to step 14.
then go to step 14.

 Shift Solenoid Valve D Stuck ON

 Shift Valve D Stuck
 A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Stuck OFF
111
material.

NO - Replace the ATF (see step 4 ), and go to step 4.
YES - Go to step 8.
9. Choose Shift Solenoid D in Miscellaneous Test Menu, and check that the shift solenoid valve D

NO - Replace shift solenoid valve D (see SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE REPLACEMENT ),
then go to step 15.
Is the system OK?

NO - Follow instructions indicated on the HDS by the test result, but if the tester has not
YES - Repair hydraulic system related with shift valve D, or replace the transmission, then go
to step 15.
111
YES - Repair hydraulic system related with shift valve D, or replace the transmission, then go
to step 15.

 Shift Solenoid Valves B or C Stuck OFF

 Shift Valves B or C Stuck
material.

111
YES - Go to step 8.

then go to step 14.

then go to step 14.
then go to step 14.

ROAD TEST
111
2. Apply the parking brake, and block both rear wheels. Start the engine, then shift to the D position
while pressing the brake pedal. Press the accelerator pedal, and release it suddenly. The engine should
not stall.
3. Repeat step 2 in the D3, 2, 1, and R positions.
4. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A), and go to the A/T data list.
Fig. 186: Locating Data Link Connector

5. Test-drive the vehicle on a flat road in the D position. Check for abnormal noise and clutch slippage.
While driving, check that the shift points occur at the proper speeds by monitoring the throttle
position sensor (2003-2005 models) or accelerator pedal position sensor (2006 model) voltage with
the HDS and comparing your shift point speeds and voltage to those in the table. (The throttle position
sensor or accelerator pedal position sensor voltage represents the throttle opening.)
Upshift: D Position
GEAR POSITION AND VEHICLE SPEED SPECIFICATIONS - UPSHIFT (D POSITION)

Throttle position sensor or accelerator pedal position sensor voltage: 0.8 V
111
1st-->2nd 9-12 mph (15-19 km/h)

2nd-->3rd 17-21 mph (28-33 km/h)
3rd-->4th 27-32 mph (44-51 km/h)
4th-->5th 41-47 mph (66-75 km/h)
Lock-up ON 48-55 mph (78-88 km/h)
1st-->2nd 20-24 mph (32-38 km/h)
2nd-->3rd 37-42 mph (60-68 km/h)
3rd-->4th 57-62 mph (91-100 km/h)
4th-->5th 102-112 mph (164-181 km/h)
Lock-up ON 108-119 mph (174-191 km/h)
Fully-opened throttle
1st-->2nd 36-41 mph (58-66 km/h)
2nd-->3rd 65-73 mph (104-117 km/h)
3rd-->4th 99-110 mph (160-177 km/h)
4th-->5th ---
Lock-up ON ---
Downshift: D Position
GEAR POSITION AND VEHICLE SPEED SPECIFICATIONS - DOWNSHIFT (D

POSITION)
Lock-up OFF 47-53 mph (76-86 km/h)
5th-->4th 30-35 mph (49-57 km/h)
4th-->3rd 19-22 mph (30-35 km/h)
3rd-->1st 5-8 mph (8-13 km/h)
Fully-opened throttle
5th-->4th 121-133 mph (195-214 km/h)
4th-->3rd 88-98 mph (142-158 km/h)
3rd-->2nd 53-60 mph (85-96 km/h)
2nd-->1st 26-31 mph (42-50 km/h)
6. Accelerate to about 35 mph (57 km/h) so the transmission is in 4th or 5th, then shift from the D
position to the 2 position. The vehicle should immediately begin to slow down from engine braking.
7. Check for abnormal noise and clutch slippage in the following positions.
1 (1st Gear) Position
Accelerate from a stop at full throttle. Check that there is no abnormal noise or clutch slippage.
Upshifts should not occur with the shift lever in this position.
111
2 (2nd Gear) Position
Accelerate from a stop at full throttle. Check that there is no abnormal noise or clutch slippage.
Upshifts and downshifts should not occur with the shift lever in this position.
R (Reverse) Position
Accelerate from a stop at full throttle, and check for abnormal noise and clutch slippage.
8. Test in P (Park) Position.
Park the vehicle on a slope (about 16°), apply the brake, and shift into the P position. Release the
brake; the vehicle should not move.
NOTE: Always use the brake to hold the vehicle, when stopped on an incline in
gear. Depending on the grade of the incline, the vehicle could roll
backwards if the brake is released.
STALL SPEED TEST
1. Make sure the transmission fluid is filled to the proper level (see ATF LEVEL CHECK ).
2. Apply the parking brake, and block all four wheels.
3. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A), and go to the A/T data list.
111

4. Make sure the A/C switch is OFF.

5. After the engine has warmed up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on), shift to
the 2 position.
6. Firmly press the brake pedal and accelerator pedal for 6 to 8 seconds, and note the engine speed. Do
not move the shift lever while raising engine speed.
7. Allow 2 minutes for cooling, then repeat the test in the D, 1, and R positions.
NOTE:  Do not test stall speed for more than 10 seconds at a time.
 Stall speed tests should be used for diagnostic purposes only.
 Stall speed should be the same in D, 2, 1, and R positions.
 Do not test stall speed with the A/T pressure gauges installed.
Stall Speed rpm:
Specification: 2,400 rpm
Service Limit: 2,250-2,550 rpm

111
8. If the measurements are out of the service limit, problems and probable causes are listed in the table.
PROBLEMS AND PROBABLE CAUSES

Problem Probable causes
ATF pump output low

Stall speed rpm high in the D, 2, 1, and R  Clogged ATF strainer

positions  Regulator valve stuck
 Slipping clutch
Stall speed rpm high in the 1 position Slippage of 1st clutch

Stall speed rpm high in the 2 position Slippage of 2nd clutch
Stall speed rpm high in the R position Slippage 4th clutch
 Engine output low
Stall speed rpm low in the D, 2, 1, and R
positions  Engine throttle valve closed
 Torque converter one-way clutch slipping
PRESSURE TEST
 A/T clutch pressure gauge set 07406-0020400 or 07406-0020401

 A/T pressure hose adapter 07MAJ-PY40120
1. Make sure the transmission fluid is filled to the proper level (see ATF LEVEL CHECK ).
2. Lift the vehicle up on a lift or apply the parking brake, block rear wheels, and raise the front of the
vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported.
3. Allow the front wheels to rotate freely.
4. Connect the oil pressure gauges to the line pressure inspection hole (A) and 4th clutch pressure
inspection hole (B). Do not allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the holes while connecting
the gauges.
111
Fig. 188: Connecting Oil Pressure Gauges To Line Pressure And 4th Clutch Pressure Inspection
Hole
5. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing, and connect the oil pressure gauges to the 2nd
clutch pressure inspection hole (C). Then temporarily install the air cleaner housing and intake air
duct.
111
Fig. 189: Connecting Oil Pressure Gauges To 2nd Clutch Pressure Inspection Hole
6. Connect the oil pressure gauge to the 1st clutch pressure inspection hole (D), 3rd clutch pressure
inspection hole (E), and 5th clutch pressure inspection hole (F).
111
Fig. 190: Connecting Oil Pressure Gauge To 1st, 3rd And 5th Clutch Pressure Inspection Hole
7. Warm up the engine (the radiator fan comes on), then stop it and connect the HDS to the DLC.
8. Start the engine, and run it at 2,000 rpm in the P or N position.
9. Measure the line pressure at the line pressure inspection hole (A).
NOTE: Higher pressure may be indicated if measurements are made in shift

lever position other than N or P.
LINE "A" FLUID PRESSURE SPECIFICATIONS

Fluid Pressure
Pressure
Standard Service Limit
Line (A) 900-960 kPa (9.2-9.8 kgf/cm2 , 130-140 psi) 850 kPa (8.7 kgf/cm2 , 120 psi)
10. Shift to the 1 position, and measure the 1st clutch pressure at the 1st clutch pressure inspection hole
(D) while holding engine speed at 2,000 rpm.
11. Shift to the 2 position, and measure the 2nd clutch pressure at the 2nd clutch pressure inspection hole
(C) while holding engine speed at 2,000 rpm.
12. Shift to the P position, then press the brake pedal and hold it.
13. Shift to the D3 position, press the accelerator pedal to increase the engine speed to 2,500 rpm; the
transmission shifts into 2nd gear.
111
14. Release the accelerator pedal; the engine speed decreases to 1,000 rpm with the transmission in 2nd
gear.
15. Press the accelerator pedal very slowly so that the engine speed increases to 2,000 rpm on 5 seconds,
then hold the accelerator; the transmission shifts into 3rd gear. Measure the 3rd clutch pressure at the
3rd clutch pressure inspection hole (E) while holding the engine speed at 2,000 rpm.
16. Shift to the D position, and measure the 4th clutch pressure at the 4th clutch pressure inspection hole
(B) while holding the engine speed at 2,000 rpm, then in about 15 seconds, the transmission will shift
to 5th gear.
17. Measure the 5th clutch pressure at the 5th clutch pressure inspection hole (F) while holding the engine
speed at 2,000 rpm.
18. Bring the engine back to an idle, then apply the brake to stop the wheels from rotating.
19. Shift to the R position. Raise the engine rpm to 2,000 rpm, and measure the reverse clutch pressure at
the 4th clutch pressure inspection hole (B).
"CLUTCH" FLUID PRESSURE SPECIFICATIONS

Fluid Pressure
Pressure Standard Service Limit
1st clutch (D)
2nd clutch (C)
890-970 kPa (9.1-9.9 kgf/cm2 ,
3rd clutch (E) 840 kPa (8.6 kgf/cm2 , 120 psi)
130-140 psi)
4th clutch (B)
5th clutch (F)
20. If the measurements are out of service limit, problems and probable causes are listed in the table.
PROBLEMS AND PROBABLE CAUSES

Problem Probable causes
 Torque converter
 ATF pump
No or low line pressure
 Regulator valve
 Torque converter check valve
 1st clutch
No or low 1st clutch pressure
 O-rings
 2nd clutch
No or low 2nd clutch pressure
 O-rings
 3rd clutch
No or low 3rd clutch pressure
 O-rings
 4th clutch
No or low 4th clutch pressure
 O-rings
 5th clutch
No or low 5th clutch pressure
 O-rings
 Servo valve
111
 4th clutch
No or low 4th clutch pressure in the R position
 O-rings
21. Install the sealing bolts with the new sealing washers, and tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Do
not reuse old sealing washers.
Torque: 18 N.m (1.8 kgf.m,13 lbf.ft)
22. Install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct.
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE TEST

2. Choose Shift Solenoid A, B, C, D, and E in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS.

3. Check that the shift solenoid valve A, B, C, D, and E operate with the HDS. A clicking sound should
be heard.
111
4. Shift solenoid valves test has finished if the test results are OK.
If no sound is heard, remove the shift solenoid valves and test.

6. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). Then reinstall the drain
plug with a new sealing washer (B).
Fig. 192: Removing Automatic Transmission Fluid Drain Plug

7. Get the customer's radio anti-theft code (navigation code), and write down the radio station presets.
8. Disconnect the battery negative terminal, then disconnect the battery positive terminal.
9. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray.
10. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing.
11. Loosen the two bolts securing the battery base from under the vehicle, and remove the two bolts
securing the battery base in the engine compartment, then remove the battery base.
12. Remove the ground cable (A), transmission upper mount bracket (B), and bracket plate (C).
111
Fig. 193: Removing Ground Cable, Transmission Upper Mount Bracket And Bracket Plate
13. Place a transmission jack under the transmission, and remove the transmission lower mount nuts.
111
Fig. 194: Removing Transmission Lower Mount Nuts

14. Lift the transmission up to create clearance between the transmission and front subframe with the
jack.
15. Remove the ATF dipstick, and remove the bolts securing the ATF cooler inlet line brackets (A) and
ATF dipstick guide pipe (B) from the transmission hanger (C).
111
Fig. 195: Removing Bolts Securing ATF Cooler Inlet Line Brackets And ATF Dipstick Guide
16. Remove the harness clamp (D), then remove the ATF dipstick guide pipe.
111
Fig. 196: Disconnecting Shift Solenoid Harness Connector

18. Remove the shift solenoid valve cover (A), dowel pins (B), and gasket (C).
19. Remove the shift solenoid harness connector.
111
Fig. 197: Removing Shift Solenoid Harness Connector

20. Measure shift solenoid valves resistance between shift solenoid harness connector terminals below
and body ground:
 No. 1 (GRN): shift solenoid valve C
 No. 2 (ORN): shift solenoid valve B
 No. 3 (RED): shift solenoid valve E
 No. 5 (BLU): shift solenoid valve A
 No. 8 (YEL): shift solenoid valve D
111
Standard: 12-25 ohms
21. If the resistance is out of standard, disconnect the shift solenoid valve connector, and measure its
resistance at the solenoid valve terminal. Replace the shift solenoid valve if the resistance is out of
standard.
22. Connect the battery negative terminal to body ground, and connect the battery positive terminal to the
shift solenoid valve terminal individually. A clicking sound should be heard.
23. If no sound is heard, connect the battery positive terminal to the shift solenoid valve terminal, and
check for a clicking sound. Replace the shift solenoid valve if no clicking sound is heard.
24. Replace the shift solenoid harness if the test results are OK.
25. Install a new O-ring on the shift solenoid harness connector, and install the connector in the
transmission housing.
26. Install the shift solenoid valve cover, dowel pins and a new gasket.
27. Install the new O-ring on the ATF dipstick guide pipe, and install the ATF dipstick guide pipe, then
install the harness clamp on the ATF dipstick guide pipe.
28. Secure the ATF cooler line brackets on the transmission hanger with the bolts.
29. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then connect the connector securely.
30. Install the transmission lower mount nuts.
31. Install the transmission upper mount bracket, bracket plate, and ground cable, then remove the
transmission jack.
32. Refill the transmission with ATF (see step 4 ).
33. Install the battery base, then install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct.
34. Install the battery tray, battery, and battery cover, then secure the battery with its hold-down bracket.
Connect the battery terminals.
36. Enter the radio code (navigation code), reset the radio presets and set the clock.
CONTROL UNIT ).
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE REPLACEMENT
111

111
9. Place the transmission jack under the transmission, and remove the transmission lower mount nuts.
111

jack.
111
Fig. 201: Removing Bolts Securing ATF Cooler Inlet Line Brackets And Dipstick Guide Pipe
12. Remove the harness clamp (D), then remove the ATF dipstick guide pipe.
111
Fig. 202: Removing Shift Solenoid Valve Cover, Dowel Pins And Gasket
14. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve connectors, remove the solenoid mounting bolts, then hold the
solenoid valve body and remove the shift valves. Do not hold the connector to remove the shift
solenoid valve.
111
Fig. 203: Disconnecting Shift Solenoid Valve Connectors

15. Install the new O-rings (two O-rings per solenoid valve) (F) on the reused solenoid valve.
NOTE: A new solenoid valve comes with new O-rings. If you install a new
solenoid valve, use the O-rings provided on it.
16. Install the shift solenoid valves C, D, and E. While holding the shift solenoid valve body, be sure to
111
install the solenoid valves until their mounting brackets contact the servo body.
17. Install the shift solenoid valves A and B. While holding the shift solenoid valve body, be sure to
install the solenoid valves until their mounting brackets contact the bracket of the installed solenoid.
Install the solenoid mounting bolts (H) and tighten them.
NOTE: Do not install the solenoid valves A and B before installing the shift
solenoid valves D and E. If solenoid valves A and B are installed before
solenoid valves D and E, it may damage the hydraulic control system.
18. Connect the shift solenoid valve D connector (G) with the ATF temperature sensor.
19. Connect the solenoid valve A connector (BLU wire), solenoid valve B connector (ORN wire),
solenoid valve C connector (GRN wire), and solenoid valve E connector (RED wire).
transmission jack.
CONTROL UNIT ).
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A TEST
111

2. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid A in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS.
3. Test the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A with the HDS.
4. Follow instructions indicated on the HDS by the test result. If the HDS has not determined the cause
of the failure, remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and test.
5. Remove the intake air duct.
111
Fig. 205: Disconnecting A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Connector
7. Measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A resistance at the solenoid valve A connector.
Standard: 3-10 ohms
8. If the resistance is out of standard, replace A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A (see A/T
CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A REPLACEMENT ).
9. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the battery positive terminal to the No. 1 terminal of
the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector, and connect the battery negative terminal
to the No. 2 terminal. A clicking sound should be heard.
10. If no sound is heard, remove the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A.
11. Check the fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve for dust or dirt.
12. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector to the
battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery negative terminal. Make sure
the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve moves.
111
Fig. 206: View Of A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve

13. Disconnect one of the battery terminals and check for valve movement.
NOTE: You can see valve movement through the fluid passage in the mounting
surface of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A body.
111
14. If the valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate, replace the A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valve A.
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A REPLACEMENT

3. Remove the bolts securing the ATF cooler inlet line brackets (B) from the transmission hanger (C).
Fig. 207: Removing Bolts Securing ATF Cooler Inlet Line Brackets From Transmission Hanger
111
4. Remove the mounting bolts and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A.
5. Remove the ATF pipe (D), ATF joint pipes (E), O-rings (F), and gasket (G).
6. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passages of the transmission housing.
7. Install the new gasket on the transmission housing, and install the ATF pipe and ATF joint pipes.
8. Install the new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes.
9. Install the new A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A.
10. Secure the ATF cooler inlet line brackets with the bolts on the transmission hanger.
11. Check the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector for rust, dirt, or oil, and clean if
necessary, then connect the connector securely.
12. Install the intake air duct.
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B AND C TEST

2. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid B and C in Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS.
111
3. Test the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B and C with the HDS.
4. Follow instructions indicated on the HDS by the test result. If the HDS has not determined the cause
of the failure, remove A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B, C, and test.
5. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves B and C connectors.
Fig. 209: Disconnecting A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves Connectors
6. Measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B resistance between the solenoid valve B
terminals No. 1 and No. 2, and measure A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve C resistance
between the solenoid valve C terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
Standard: 3-10 ohms
111
7. If the resistance of either A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve is out of standard, replace A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valves B and C (see A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE B AND C REPLACEMENT ).
8. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the battery positive terminal to the No. 1 terminal of
the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves B and C connectors, and connect the battery negative
terminal to the No. 2 terminal. A clicking sound should be heard.
9. If no sound is heard, remove the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves B and C.
10. Check the fluid passage of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve for dust or dirt.
11. Connect the No. 1 terminal of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves B and C connectors to
the battery positive terminal, and connect the No. 2 terminal to the battery negative terminal. Make
sure the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves B and C move.
111
Fig. 210: View Of A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves

12. Disconnect one of the battery terminals, and check valve movement.
111
NOTE: You can see valve movement through the fluid passage in the mounting
surface of the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves B and C
body.
13. If either valve binds or moves sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate, replace the A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valves B and C.
A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B AND C REPLACEMENT
1. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves B and C connectors.
2. Remove the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves B and C.
111
Fig. 211: Removing A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves

3. Remove the ATF joint pipes (D), O-rings (E), and gasket (A).
4. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passages of the transmission housing.
5. Install the new gasket on the transmission housing, and install the ATF joint pipes.
6. Install new O-rings over the ATF joint pipes.
111
7. Install new A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves B and C.

8. Check A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves B and C connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, and clean
if necessary, then connect the connectors securely.
INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT) SPEED SENSOR REPLACEMENT

2. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector, and remove the input shaft (mainshaft)
speed sensor.
Fig. 212: Disconnecting Input Shaft Speed Sensor Connector And Removing Input Shaft Speed
Sensor
3. Install the new O-ring (A) on the new input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (B), then install the input
shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor in the transmission housing.
4. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, and clean if necessary, then connect the connector securely.
5. Install the intake air duct and air cleaner housing.
OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT) SPEED SENSOR REPLACEMENT

111
1. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector, and remove the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor.
Fig. 213: Disconnecting Output Shaft Speed Sensor Connector And Removing Output Shaft
Speed Sensor
2. Install the new O-ring (A) on the new output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (B), then install the
output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor in the transmission housing.
111
2ND CLUTCH TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SWITCH REPLACEMENT

2. Disconnect the connector from the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (A), and remove the
switch.
Fig. 214: Disconnecting Connector From 2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch
3. Make sure there is no water, oil, dust, or foreign particles inside the connector.
4. Install the new 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch with a new sealing washer (B), and
tighten the switch to the specified torque on the metal part, not the plastic part.
5. Connect the connector securely.
6. Install the intake air duct.
3RD CLUTCH TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE SWITCH REPLACEMENT
111
6. Disconnect the connector from the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (A), then remove the
switch.
Fig. 215: Disconnecting Connector From 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch
111
7. Make sure there is no water, oil, dust, or foreign particles inside the connector.
8. Install the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch with a new sealing washer (B), and tighten the
switch to the specified torque on the metal part, not the plastic part.
9. Connect the connector securely.
CONTROL UNIT ).
ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR TEST/REPLACEMENT

111
9. Place the transmission jack under the transmission, and remove the transmission lower mount nuts.
111

jack.
111
Fig. 219: Removing Bolts Securing ATF Cooler Inlet Line Brackets And ATF Dipstick Guide
Pipe
12. Remove the harness clamp (D),then remove the ATF dipstick guide pipe.
111
Fig. 220: Disconnecting Shift Solenoid Harness Connector

15. Remove the shift solenoid harness connector.
111
Fig. 221: Removing Shift Solenoid Harness Connector

16. Measure ATF temperature sensor resistance between shift solenoid harness connector terminals No. 6
and No. 7.
Standard: 50-25 kohms
17. If the resistance is out of standard, replace the ATF temperature sensor and solenoid harness; go to
step 18. The ATF temperature sensor is not available separately from the solenoid harness. If the
measurement is within the standard, install the removed parts; go to step 20.
18. Disconnect the connectors from the shift solenoid valves.
19. Connect the shift solenoid valve D connector with the ATF temperature sensor (F) on the shift
solenoid harness.
111
Fig. 222: Connecting Shift Solenoid Valve D Connector With ATF Temperature Sensor
20. Connect the solenoid valve A connector (BLU wire), solenoid valve B connector (ORN wire),
solenoid valve C connector (GRN wire), and solenoid valve E connector (RED wire).
21. Install the new O-ring (G) on the shift solenoid harness connector (H), and install the connector in the
transmission housing.
111
transmission jack.
CONTROL UNIT ).
ATF LEVEL CHECK
NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission.
2. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn the engine off.
NOTE: Check the fluid level within 60-90 seconds after turning the engine off.
3. Remove the ATF dipstick (yellow loop) (A) from the dipstick guide pipe, and wipe it with a clean
cloth.
111
Fig. 223: Removing ATF Dipstick From Dipstick Guide Pipe

4. Insert the dipstick aligning the cap (B) with the guide tab (C).
5. Remove the dipstick (A) and check the fluid level. It should be between upper mark (B) and lower
mark (C).
111
Fig. 224: Checking Transmission Fluid Level

6. If the level is below the lower mark, check for fluid leaks at the transmission, hose and line joints, and
cooler lines.
111
If a problem is found, fix it before filling the transmission.
If the level is above the upper mark, drain the ATF to proper level (see step 3 ).
7. If necessary fill the transmission through the dipstick guide pipe opening (A) to bring the fluid level
up to the upper mark. Always use Honda ATF-Z1 automatic transmission fluid (ATF). Using a non-
Honda ATF can affect shift quality.
Fig. 225: Locating Dipstick Guide Pipe

8. Insert the dipstick back into the dipstick guide pipe aligning the cap with the guide tab on the guide
pipe.
ATF REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission.
1. Bring the transmission up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
111
2. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn the engine off.
NOTE: If a cooler cleaner is going to be used, refer to ATF cooler cleaning (see
ATF COOLER CLEANING ).

4. Remove the dipstick, and refill transmission with the recommended fluid amount through the opening
of the dipstick guide pipe until the level reaches the upper mark on the dipstick. Always use Honda
ATF-Z1 automatic transmission fluid (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality.
Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity:
2.9 L (3.0 US qt) at change
6.5 L (6.9 US qt) at overhaul
111
Fig. 227: Locating Dipstick Guide Pipe

5. Insert the dipstick (A) into the dipstick guide pipe aligning the cap (B) with the guide tab (C).
111
Fig. 228: Inserting Dipstick Into Dipstick Guide Pipe

TRANSMISSION REMOVAL
 Engine hanger adapter VSB02C000015

 Engine support hanger, A and Reds AAR-T-12566
 Front subframe adapter VSB02C000016
111
These special tools are available through the Honda
Tool and Equipment Program 1-888-424-6857.

 Special tool Reds engine support hanger AAR-T-12566 must be used
with the side engine mount installed.
2. Set the wheels in the straight ahead position.
3. Lock the steering wheel.
4. Remove the steering joint cover (A).

111
5. Make a reference mark (B) across the steering joint and steering gearbox pinion shaft. Remove the
steering joint bolt (C), and disconnect the steering joint (D) by removing the steering joint toward the
steering column. Hold the slider shaft (E) on the column with a piece of wire (F) between the joint
yoke (G) on the slider shaft to the joint yoke on the upper shaft (see step 8 on STEERING
COLUMN REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ).
6. Remove and plug the return hose (A) from the power steering fluid reservoir (B). Wipe off any spilled
fluid at once.
Fig. 230: Removing Plug Return Hose From Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
7. Remove the power steering pump outlet line (C) from the power steering pump (D).
8. Remove the bolt securing the power steering hose clamp (E).
9. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is supported securely.
11. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF).
111

12. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B).
17. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A connector, and 2nd clutch transmission
fluid pressure switch connector (B), and remove the harness clamps (C) from the clamp brackets (D).
111
Fig. 232: Disconnecting A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Connector
18. Remove the transmission range switch connector (A) from its bracket (B), then disconnect it.
111
Fig. 233: Removing Transmission Range Switch Connector

19. Remove the AF sensor connector (C) from its bracket (D), then disconnect it.
20. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector (E) and output shaft (countershaft)
speed sensor connector (F), and remove the harness clamps (G) from the clamp brackets (H).
21. Disconnect the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch connector (A), and remove the harness
clamp (B) from the clamp bracket (C).
111
Fig. 234: Disconnecting 3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Connector
22. Disconnect connector C108, A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B connector, and solenoid
valve C connector, and remove the harness clamp (D) from the clamp bracket (E).
111
Fig. 235: Disconnecting Connector C108

23. Remove the ATF cooler hoses (A) from the ATF cooler lines (B). Turn the ends of the ATF cooler
hoses up to prevent ATF from flowing out, then plug the ATF cooler hoses and lines.
111
Fig. 236: Removing ATF Cooler Hoses From ATF Cooler Lines
24. Check for any signs of leakage at the hose joints.

25. Remove the ATF cooler hose (A) from the hose clamp (B).
111
Fig. 237: Removing ATF Cooler Hose From Hose Clamp

111
26. Disconnect the ATF cooler hose (C) from the ATF cooler line (D), then plug the hose end.
27. Remove the ground cable (A), transmission upper mount bracket plate (B), and transmission upper
mount bracket (C).
Fig. 238: Removing Ground Cable, Transmission Upper Mount Bracket Plate And Mount
Bracket
28. Attach the special tool adapter (VSB02C000015) to the threaded hole (A) in the cylinder head.
111
Fig. 239: Attaching Special Tool Adapter To Threaded Hole In Cylinder Head
29. Install the engine support hanger (AAR-T-12566) to the vehicle, and attach the hook (A) to the special
tool adapter (B). Tighten the wing nut (C) by hand, and lift and support the engine.
111
Fig. 240: Installing Engine Support Hanger

30. Remove the vacuum hose (A) from its clamp (B), then disconnect the hose from the vacuum line (C).
111
Fig. 241: Removing Vacuum Hose From Clamp And Disconnecting Hose
31. Remove the front mount stop (D) and clamp bracket (E), and remove the front mount bolt (F).
32. Remove the rear mount stop (A) and remove the rear mount bolt (B).
111
Fig. 242: Removing Rear Mount Stop And Rear Mount Bolt
33. Remove the exhaust pipe A and its mount.
111
Fig. 243: Removing Exhaust Pipe A And Mount

34. Disconnect the power steering pressure switch connector.
111
Fig. 244: Disconnecting Power Steering Pressure Switch Connector

35. Insert a 6 mm Allen wrench (A) in the top of the ball joint pin (B), and remove the nuts (C), then
separate the stabilizer link (D) from the lower arms (E).
111
Fig. 245: Removing Nuts

36. Remove the cotter pins (F), castle nuts (G), damper pinch bolt (H), self-locking nut (I), bolt (J), and
damper forks (K), then separate the ball joints from the lower arms (see BALL JOINT
REMOVAL ).
37. Remove the cotter pins (L) and nuts (M), and separate the tie-rod end ball joints from the knuckles
(see step 10 on KNUCKLE/HUB REPLACEMENT ).
38. Remove the engine stiffener (A), and remove the drive plate bolts (B) while rotating the crankshaft
111
pulley.
Fig. 246: Removing Engine Stiffener And Drive Plate Bolts

39. Remove the three bolts securing the shift cable holder (A), then remove the shift cable cover (B).
111
Fig. 247: Removing Bolts Securing Shift Cable Holder And Shift Cable Cover
40. Remove the spring clip (C) and control pin (D), then separate the shift cable (E) from the selector
control lever (F). Do not bend the shift cable excessively.
41. Remove the transmission lower mount nuts.
111

42. Remove both mid-mounts.
111
Fig. 249: Removing Mid-Mounts

43. Make the appropriate reference lines (A) at both ends of the subframe (B) that line up with the edge
(C)of the stiffeners (D).
111
Fig. 250: Marking Reference Lines At Both Subframe Ends

44. Attach the special tool to the subframe with hanging the belt of the special tool over the front of the
subframe, then secure the belt with its stop.
111
Fig. 251: Attaching Special Tool To Subframe

45. Raise the jack and line up the slots in the arms with the bolt holes on the corner of the jack base, then
attach them with bolts securely.
46. Remove the four bolts securing the stiffeners (A), and four bolts securing the subframe (B), and lower
the subframe.
111
Fig. 252: Removing Bolts Securing Stiffeners And Subframe

47. Remove the transmission lower mounts.
111
Fig. 253: Removing Transmission Lower Mounts

48. Remove the driveshaft boot cover (A) and bracket (B).
111
Fig. 254: Removing Driveshaft Boot Cover And Bracket

49. Pry the driveshafts (C), and remove them from the differential (see step 12 on DRIVESHAFT
DISASSEMBLY ).
50. Remove the rear mount bracket.
111
Fig. 255: Removing Rear Mount Bracket

51. Place a jack under the transmission.

52. Remove the upper transmission housing mounting bolts.
111
Fig. 256: Removing Upper Transmission Housing Mounting Bolts

53. Remove the front mount bracket.
111
Fig. 257: Removing Front Mount Bracket

54. Remove the front transmission housing mounting bolts.
111
Fig. 258: Removing Front Transmission Housing Mounting Bolts

55. Remove the rear transmission housing mounting bolts.
111
Fig. 259: Removing Rear Transmission Housing Mounting Bolts

56. Slide the transmission away from the engine to remove it from the vehicle.
57. Remove the torque converter.
111
Fig. 260: Removing Torque Converter

58. Inspect the drive plate, and replace it if it's damaged.

59. Check the transmission lower front mount (A) and lower rear mount (B). If the mount rubber (C) is
worn or damaged, replace the mount. It is no need to replace the lower rear mount if its submount
rubber (D) has ruptured or cracks, reuse it.
111
Fig. 261: Inspecting Transmission Lower Front Mount And Lower Rear Mount
DRIVE PLATE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove the transmission assembly (see TRANSMISSION REMOVAL ).

2. Remove the drive plate (A) and washer (B) from the engine crankshaft.
111
Fig. 262: Removing Drive Plate And Washer From Engine Crankshaft
3. Install the drive plate and washer on the engine crankshaft, and tighten the eight bolts in a crisscross
pattern in two or more steps.
4. Install the transmission assembly (see TRANSMISSION INSTALLATION ).
TRANSMISSION INSTALLATION
 Engine hanger adapter VSB02C000015
111
 Engine support hanger, A and Reds AAR-T-12566

 Front subframe adapter VSB02C000016
These special tools are available through the Honda
Tool and Equipment Program 1-888-424-6857.
NOTE: Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted surfaces.
1. Clean the ATF cooler (see ATF COOLER CLEANING ).

2. Install the torque converter assembly (A) on the mainshaft (B) with the new O-ring (C).
Fig. 263: Installing Torque Converter Assembly On Mainshaft

3. Install the 14 x 20 mm dowel pins (D) in the torque converter housing.

111
4. Place the transmission on the jack, and raise the transmission to the engine level.
5. Attach the transmission to the engine, then install the rear transmission housing mounting bolts.
Fig. 264: Installing Rear Transmission Housing Mounting Bolts

6. Install the front transmission housing mounting bolts.
111
Fig. 265: Installing Front Transmission Housing Mounting Bolts

7. Install the upper transmission housing mounting bolts.
111
Fig. 266: Installing Upper Transmission Housing Mounting Bolts

8. Remove the jack from the transmission.

9. Install the front mount bracket with the new bolts.
111
Fig. 267: Installing Front Mount Bracket

10. Install the rear mount bracket.
111
Fig. 268: Installing Rear Mount Bracket

11. Install the new set rings (A) on the right and left driveshafts (B).
111
Fig. 269: Installing Set Rings On Right And Left Driveshafts

12. Install the right and left driveshafts (see DRIVESHAFT INSTALLATION ). While installing the
driveshafts in the differential, be sure not to allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the
transmission.
NOTE:  Clean the areas where the driveshafts contact the transmission
(differential) with solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry with
compressed air.
 Turn the right and left steering knuckle fully outward, and slide the
driveshafts into the differential until you feel its set ring engages
the side gear.
111
13. Install the driveshaft boot cover bracket (C).

14. Install the driveshaft boot cover (D), but do not tighten the bolts.
15. Tighten the upper right bolt (E) on the cover first, then upper left bolt (F), and lastly the lower left bolt
(G).
16. Install the transmission lower mounts.
Fig. 270: Installing Transmission Lower Mounts

17. Support the front subframe (A) with the special tool and a jack, and lift it up to body.
111
Fig. 271: Supporting Front Subframe

18. Loosely install the new subframe mounting bolts (A), and stiffener mounting bolts (B) (C).
111
Fig. 272: Installing Subframe And Stiffener Mounting Bolts

19. Loosely install both of the new mid-mounts mounting bolts.
111
Fig. 273: Installing Mid-Mounts Mounting Bolts

20. Align the reference marks (A) with edge (B) of both rear stiffeners (C), and tighten the rear subframe
mounting bolts, then front bolts, and tighten the stiffener bolts to the specified torque.
111
Fig. 274: Aligning Reference Marks With Rear Stiffeners Edge

21. Tighten the mid-mount mounting bolts.

111
Fig. 275: Installing Transmission Lower Mount Nuts

23. Attach the shift cable end (A) to the selector control lever (B), then insert the control pin (C) into the
control lever hole through the shift cable end, and secure the control pin with the spring clip (D). Do
not bend the shift cable excessively.
111
Fig. 276: Attaching Shift Cable End To Selector Control Lever And Inserting Control Pin
24. Install the shift cable cover (E), then secure the shift cable holder (F) to the shift cable cover with the
three bolts.
25. Attach the torque converter to the drive plate with eight bolts (A). Rotate the crankshaft pulley as
necessary to tighten the bolts to 1/2 of the specified torque, then to the final torque, in a crisscross
pattern. After tightening the last bolt, check that the crankshaft rotates freely.
111
Fig. 277: Attaching Torque Converter To Drive Plate

26. Install the engine stiffener (B).

27. Connect the power steering pressure switch connector.
111
Fig. 278: Connecting Power Steering Pressure Switch Connector

28. Install the exhaust pipe A, its mount (B), and new gaskets (C) (D).
111
Fig. 279: Installing Exhaust Pipe A, Mount And Gaskets

29. Install the damper forks (A) with damper pinch bolts (B) and new self-locking nuts (C), then install
the ball joints on the lower arms (D) with the castle nuts (E) and new cotter pins (F) (see step 17 on
KNUCKLE/HUB REPLACEMENT ).
111
Fig. 280: Installing Damper Forks With Damper Pinch Bolts

30. Install the tie-rod end ball joint (G) to each knuckle with the nuts (H) and new cotter pins (I) (see step
17 on KNUCKLE/HUB REPLACEMENT ).
31. Install the stabilizer links (J) to the lower arms, and install the nuts (K). Insert a 6 mm Allen wrench
(L) in the ball joint pin (M), and tighten the nuts.
32. Install the new front mount bolt.
111
Fig. 281: Installing Front Mount Bolt

33. Install the front mount stop (A) and vacuum hose clamp bracket (B).
34. Connect the vacuum hose (C) to the vacuum line (D), then install the hose on its clamp (E) at the
mark (F).
35. Install the new rear mount bolt.
111
Fig. 282: Installing Rear Mount Bolt

36. Install the rear mount stop (B).

37. Remove the engine support hanger, and remove the special tool adapter from the engine.
111
Fig. 283: Removing Engine Support Hanger And Special Tool Adapter From Engine
38. Install the transmission upper mount bracket (A), transmission upper mount bracket plate (B), and
ground cable (C).
111
Fig. 284: Installing Transmission Upper Mount Bracket, Transmission Upper Mount Bracket
Plate And Ground Cable
39. Connect the ATF cooler hose (A) to the ATF cooler line (B), and secure it with the clip (see ATF
COOLER HOSE REPLACEMENT ).
111
Fig. 285: Connecting ATF Cooler Hose To ATF Cooler Line

111
40. Install the ATF cooler hose (C) on the clamp (D) at the mark (E).
41. Connect the ATF cooler hoses (A) to the ATF cooler lines (B), and secure the hoses with the clips
(see ATF COOLER HOSE REPLACEMENT ).
Fig. 286: Connecting ATF Cooler Hoses To ATF Cooler Lines

Courtesy of AMERIC

Honda Accord L4!03!07 Repair

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Honda Accord L4!03!07 Repair

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Honda Accord L4!03!07 Repair

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2003 Honda Accord LX

2003-07 DTC INDEX Accord 4-Cylinder

2003-07 DTC INDEX

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION DTCS (A00217103)

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) LIST

DTC P0757 Shift Solenoid Valve B Stuck ON

DTC P0986 Open in Shift Solenoid Valve E Circuit

CATALYTIC CONVERTER DTCS (A00217096)

CLIMATE CONTROL DTCS (A00217130)

ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL DTCS (A00217091)

EGR DTCS (A00217097)

EVAP DTCS (A00217099)

EXTERIOR LIGHTS DTCS (A00217149)

FUEL SUPPLY DTCS (A00217094)

GAUGES DTCS (A00217158)

IDLE CONTROL DTCS (A00217093)

IDLE CONTROL DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) LIST

KEYLESS/POWER DOOR LOCKS/SECURITY DTCS (A00217147)

MULTIPLEX INTERGRATED CONTROL DTCS (A00217145)

the Door Multiplex Control Unit

PCV DTCS (A00217098)

PGM-FI DTCS (A00217090)

DTC P0365 CMP Sensor B No Signal

POWER WINDOWS DTCS (A00217156)

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX DTCS (A00217138)

DTC B1060 Relay Control Module lost communication with

VTEC/VTC DTCS (A00217092)

WIPERS/WASHERS DTCS (A00217157)

2003-07 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT

COMPONENT LOCATION INDEX

Fig. 1: Locating Openers Components

HOOD OPENER CABLE REPLACEMENT

NOTE:  Put on gloves to protect your hands.

1. Remove these items:

 Front grille, 4-door (see 4-DOOR )

 Inner fender (see FRONT INNER FENDER REPLACEMENT )

Fig. 2: Removing Radiator Upper Brackets

TRUNK LID OPENER CABLE/FUEL FILL DOOR OPENER CABLE

NOTE:  Put on gloves to protect your hands.

1. Remove these items from the left side of the vehicle:

 Door sill trim (see TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION - DOOR AREA )

 Trunk rear trim panel (see TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION - TRUNK AREA )

Fig. 3: Detaching Clip & Releasing Opener Cable

Fig. 5: Identifying Align Marks On Cable With Cable Clips (1 Of 2)

Fig. 6: Identifying Align Marks On Cable With Cable Clips (2 Of 2)

before performing repairs or service.

NOTE:  Put on gloves to protect your hands.

1. Remove these items form the left side of the vehicle:

 Trunk rear trim panel (see 4-DOOR ('03-05 MODELS) )

2. Pull back the carpet as necessary.

Fig. 7: Removing Cushion Tape

Fig. 10: Installing Opener Cable

HOOD LATCH REPLACEMENT

1. Remove these items:

 Front grille, 4-door (see 4-DOOR )

2. Remove the cover (A) from the hood latch (B).

Fig. 11: Removing Cover From Hood Latch

3. If equipped, disconnect the hood latch switch connector (A).

Fig. 12: Disconnecting Hood Latch Switch Connector

Fig. 13: Removing Hood Latch From Body